--- a/.hgignore Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/.hgignore Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -24,14 +24,6 @@
^doc/dev-guide/doctools/
^doc/dev-guide/doctmp/
^doc/dev-guide/book.txt
-^src/gui/data/addmoresoftware.desktop$
-^src/gui/data/packagemanager-info.xml$
-^src/gui/data/packagemanager-preferences.schemas$
-^src/gui/data/packagemanager.desktop$
-^src/gui/help/.*/package-manager.xml$
-^src/gui/help/.*/package-manager.localizable.xml$
-^src/gui/help/.*/pkg_help.pot$
-^src/gui/help/package-manager-__LOCALE__.omf$
^src/pkg/Makefile.link
^src/pkg/pkgtmp/
^src/po/i18n_errs.txt$
@@ -44,17 +36,6 @@
^src/tests/ro_data/signing_certs/produced/.*/.*\.csr
^src/tests/ro_data/signing_certs/produced/.*\.old
^src/tests/ro_data/signing_certs/produced/.*\.tmp
-^src/um/data/updatemanager-preferences.schemas$
-^src/um/data/updatemanager.desktop$
-^src/um/data/updatemanager.png$
-^src/um/data/updatemanagernotifier.desktop$
-^src/util/distro-import/.*/entire.incorporation$
-^src/util/distro-import/SUNWfixes/
-^src/util/distro-import/cluster.import$
-^src/util/distro-import/ksh-wrapper$
-^src/util/distro-import/proto/
-^src/util/distro-import/redist_cluster$
-^src/util/distro-import/slim_cluster$
^src/util/misc/extract_hostid$
^src/zoneproxy/zoneproxy-adm/zoneproxy-adm$
^src/zoneproxy/zoneproxy-client/zoneproxy-client$
--- a/src/checkforupdates.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,377 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python2.6
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-"""This utility checks to see if there are any available updates for
-the relevant image. If so, it stashes information about the updates in
-the gui cache file, for retrieval by other desktop utilities. See also
-the update-refresh cron job."""
-
-import errno
-import getopt
-import gettext
-import locale
-import logging
-import os
-import sys
-import traceback
-import warnings
-
-import pkg.client.api as api
-import pkg.client.api_errors as apx
-import pkg.client.progress as progress
-import pkg.client.printengine as printengine
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-import pkg.gui.misc_non_gui as nongui_misc
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.nrlock as nrlock
-from cPickle import UnpicklingError
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-from pkg.client.pkgdefs import EXIT_OOPS
-
-logger = global_settings.logger
-
-PKG_CLIENT_NAME = "updatemanager"
-CACHE_VERSION = 3
-CACHE_NAME = ".last_refresh_cache"
-
-
-class CheckForUpdates:
- """Implements the main logic for this utility"""
-
- def __init__(self, image_directory, application_path, check_all,
- check_cache):
- global_settings.client_name = nongui_misc.get_um_name()
- self.api_lock = nrlock.NRLock()
- self.image_dir_arg = image_directory
- self.exact_match = True
- if self.image_dir_arg == None:
- self.image_dir_arg, self.exact_match = \
- api.get_default_image_root()
- if not self.exact_match:
- logger.debug("Unable to get image directory")
- sys.exit(enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED)
-
- self.application_path = application_path
- self.check_all = check_all
- self.check_cache_only = check_cache
- self.application_dir = \
- os.environ.get("PACKAGE_MANAGER_ROOT", "/")
- misc.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
-
- if global_settings.verbose:
- pe = printengine.LoggingPrintEngine(
- logger, logging.DEBUG)
- self.progress_tracker = \
- progress.CommandLineProgressTracker(print_engine=pe)
- else:
- self.progress_tracker = progress.NullProgressTracker()
- self.api_obj = None
- self.return_status = enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- self.pylintstub = None
-
- # Check Updates - by default check all
- self.api_obj = self.__get_api_obj()
- if self.api_obj == None:
- self.return_status = enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- return
-
- if self.check_all:
- self.__check_for_updates()
- elif self.check_cache_only:
- self.__check_for_updates_cache_only()
-
- def __get_api_obj(self):
- """Returns a singleton api instance."""
- if self.api_obj == None:
- api_obj = nongui_misc.get_api_object(self.image_dir_arg,
- self.progress_tracker)
- return api_obj
-
- def __check_for_updates_cache_only(self):
- """Reports on the cached status of available updates"""
- assert self.api_obj
- self.return_status = ret = self.__check_last_refresh()
- if ret == enumerations.UPDATES_AVAILABLE:
- logger.debug("From cache: Updates Available")
- elif ret == enumerations.NO_UPDATES_AVAILABLE:
- logger.debug("From cache: No Updates Available")
- else:
- logger.debug("From cache: Updates Undetermined")
- return ret
-
- def __check_for_updates(self):
- """Plans an update for the image."""
- assert self.api_obj
- ret = self.__check_for_updates_cache_only()
- if ret != enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED:
- # Definitive answer from cache.
- return
- logger.debug("Checking image for updates...")
- self.return_status = enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- try:
- #
- # Since this program is intended to primarily be a
- # helper for the gui components, and since the gui
- # components are currently unaware of child images,
- # we'll limit the available update check we're about
- # to do to just the parent image. If we didn't do
- # this we could end up in a situation where the parent
- # has no available updates, but a child image does,
- # and then the gui (which is unaware of children)
- # would show that no updates are available to the
- # parent.
- #
-
- # Unused variable; pylint: disable=W0612
- for pd in self.api_obj.gen_plan_update(
- refresh_catalogs=True, noexecute=True,
- force=True, li_ignore=[]):
- continue
- stuff_to_do = not self.api_obj.planned_nothingtodo()
- except apx.CatalogRefreshException, cre:
- res = nongui_misc.get_catalogrefresh_exception_msg(cre)
- logger.error(res[0])
- return
- except apx.ApiException, e:
- logger.error(str(e))
- return
-
- self.__dump_updates_available(stuff_to_do)
- if stuff_to_do:
- logger.debug("From image: Updates Available")
- self.return_status = enumerations.UPDATES_AVAILABLE
- else:
- logger.debug("From image: No Updates Available")
- self.return_status = enumerations.NO_UPDATES_AVAILABLE
-
- def __check_last_refresh(self):
- """Reads the cache if possible; if it isn't stale or corrupt
- or out of date, return whether updates are available.
- Otherwise return 'undetermined'."""
-
- cache_dir = nongui_misc.get_cache_dir(self.api_obj)
- if not cache_dir:
- return enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- try:
- info = nongui_misc.read_cache_file(os.path.join(
- cache_dir, CACHE_NAME + '.cpl'))
- if len(info) == 0:
- logger.debug("No cache")
- return enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- # Non-portable API used; pylint: disable=E0901
- utsname = os.uname()
- # pylint: disable=E1103
- if info.get("version") != CACHE_VERSION:
- logger.debug("Cache version mismatch: %s" %
- (info.get("version") + " " + CACHE_VERSION))
- return enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- if info.get("os_release") != utsname[2]:
- logger.debug("OS release mismatch: %s" %
- (info.get("os_release") + " " + utsname[2]))
- return enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- if info.get("os_version") != utsname[3]:
- logger.debug("OS version mismatch: %s" %
- (info.get("os_version") + " " + utsname[3]))
- return enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- old_publishers = info.get("publishers")
- count = 0
- for p in self.api_obj.get_publishers():
- if p.disabled:
- continue
- if old_publishers.get(p.prefix, -1) != \
- p.last_refreshed:
- return enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- count += 1
-
- if count != len(old_publishers):
- return enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
-
- n_updates = n_installs = n_removes = 0
- if info.get("updates_available"):
- n_updates = info.get("updates")
- n_installs = info.get("installs")
- n_removes = info.get("removes")
- # pylint: enable=E1103
- if self.check_cache_only:
- print "n_updates: %d" % n_updates
- print "n_installs: %d" % n_installs
- print "n_removes: %d" % n_removes
- if (n_updates + n_installs + n_removes) > 0:
- return enumerations.UPDATES_AVAILABLE
- else:
- return enumerations.NO_UPDATES_AVAILABLE
-
- except (UnpicklingError, IOError):
- return enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
-
- def __dump_updates_available(self, stuff_to_do):
- """Record update information to the cache file."""
- cache_dir = nongui_misc.get_cache_dir(self.api_obj)
- if not cache_dir:
- return
- publisher_list = {}
- for p in self.api_obj.get_publishers():
- if p.disabled:
- continue
- publisher_list[p.prefix] = p.last_refreshed
- n_installs = 0
- n_removes = 0
- n_updates = 0
- plan_desc = self.api_obj.describe()
- if plan_desc:
- plan = plan_desc.get_changes()
- for (orig, dest) in plan:
- if orig and dest:
- n_updates += 1
- elif not orig and dest:
- n_installs += 1
- elif orig and not dest:
- n_removes += 1
- dump_info = {}
- dump_info["version"] = CACHE_VERSION
- # Non-portable API used; pylint: disable=E0901
- dump_info["os_release"] = os.uname()[2]
- dump_info["os_version"] = os.uname()[3]
- dump_info["updates_available"] = stuff_to_do
- dump_info["publishers"] = publisher_list
- dump_info["updates"] = n_updates
- dump_info["installs"] = n_installs
- dump_info["removes"] = n_removes
-
- try:
- nongui_misc.dump_cache_file(os.path.join(
- cache_dir, CACHE_NAME + '.cpl'), dump_info)
- except IOError, e:
- logger.error("Failed to dump cache: %s" % e)
- return
-
-
-def main_func():
- """Main routine for this utility"""
- set_check_all = True
- set_check_cache = False
- image_dir = None
- try:
- # Unused variable pargs; pylint: disable=W0612
- opts, pargs = getopt.getopt(sys.argv[1:], "hdnacR:",
- ["help", "debug", "nice", "checkupdates-cache",
- "image-dir="])
- except getopt.GetoptError, oex:
- print >> sys.stderr, \
- ("Usage: illegal option -- %s, for help use -h or --help" %
- oex.opt )
- sys.exit(enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED)
- for opt, arg in opts:
- if opt in ("-h", "--help"):
- print >> sys.stderr, """\n\
-Use -h (--help) to print out help.
-Use -d (--debug) to run in debug mode.
-Use -n (--nice) to run at nice level 20.
-Use -c (--checkupdates-cache) to check for updates from cache only (output results to stdout).
-Use -R (--image-dir) to specify image directory (defaults to '/')"""
- sys.exit(0)
- elif opt in ( "-n", "--nice"):
- # Non-portable API used; pylint: disable=E0901
- os.nice(20)
- elif opt in ("-d", "--debug"):
- global_settings.verbose = True
- elif opt in ( "-c", "--checkupdates-cache"):
- set_check_cache = True
- set_check_all = False
- elif opt in ("-R", "--image-dir"):
- image_dir = arg
-
- if os.path.isabs(sys.argv[0]):
- app_path = sys.argv[0]
- else:
- cmd = os.path.join(os.getcwd(), sys.argv[0])
- app_path = os.path.realpath(cmd)
-
- checkforupdates = CheckForUpdates(image_dir, app_path,
- set_check_all, set_check_cache)
-
- return checkforupdates.return_status
-
-#
-# Establish a specific exit status which means: "python barfed an exception"
-# so that we can more easily detect these in testing of the CLI commands.
-#
-def handle_errors(func, *args, **kwargs):
- """Catch exceptions raised by the main program function and then print
- a message and/or exit with an appropriate return code.
- """
-
- traceback_str = misc.get_traceback_message()
-
- try:
- # Out of memory errors can be raised as EnvironmentErrors with
- # an errno of ENOMEM, so in order to handle those exceptions
- # with other errnos, we nest this try block and have the outer
- # one handle the other instances.
- try:
- __ret = func(*args, **kwargs)
- except (MemoryError, EnvironmentError), __e:
- if isinstance(__e, EnvironmentError) and \
- __e.errno != errno.ENOMEM:
- raise
- logger.error("\n" + misc.out_of_memory())
- __ret = EXIT_OOPS
- except SystemExit, __e:
- raise __e
- except (IOError, misc.PipeError, KeyboardInterrupt), __e:
- # Don't display any messages here to prevent possible further
- # broken pipe (EPIPE) errors.
- if isinstance(__e, IOError) and __e.errno != errno.EPIPE:
- logger.error(str(__e))
- __ret = EXIT_OOPS
- except apx.VersionException, __e:
- logger.error("The pmcheckforupdates command appears out of "
- "sync with the libraries provided\nby pkg:/package/pkg. "
- "The client version is %(client)s while the library\n"
- "API version is %(api)s." % \
- {'client': __e.received_version,
- 'api': __e.expected_version})
- __ret = EXIT_OOPS
- except:
- traceback.print_exc()
- logger.error(traceback_str)
- __ret = 99
- return __ret
-
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- misc.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
- gettext.install("pkg", "/usr/share/locale",
- codeset=locale.getpreferredencoding())
-
- # Make all warnings be errors.
- warnings.simplefilter('error')
-
- __retval = handle_errors(main_func)
- try:
- logging.shutdown()
- except IOError:
- # Ignore python's spurious pipe problems.
- pass
- sys.exit(__retval)
--- a/src/gui/data/addmoresoftware.desktop.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-[Desktop Entry]
-_Name=Add More Software
-_GenericName=Add More Software
-_Comment=Install, update and remove software packages
-Exec=/usr/lib/pm-launch /usr/bin/packagemanager
-Icon=packagemanager
-Terminal=false
-MultipleArgs=false
-StartupNotify=false
-Type=Application
-Encoding=UTF-8
-NoDisplay=true
-Categories=PackageManager;Applications;GTK;System;Settings;
-NotShowIn=KDE;
-X-KDE-SubstituteUID=true
Binary file src/gui/data/gnome-mime-application-vnd.pkg5.info.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/filter_all.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/filter_selected.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/progress_blank.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/progress_checkmark.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/selection.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/status_checkmark.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/status_installed.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/status_newupdate.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/16x16/status_notinstalled.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/24x24/pm-check.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/24x24/pm-install_update.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/24x24/pm-refresh.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/24x24/pm-remove.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/24x24/pm-update_all.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/48x48/packagemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/48x48/pm-install_update.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/48x48/pm-refresh.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/48x48/pm-remove.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/48x48/pm-update_all.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/16x16/filter_all.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/16x16/filter_selected.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/16x16/progress_checkmark.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/16x16/selection.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/16x16/status_checkmark.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/16x16/status_installed.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/16x16/status_newupdate.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/16x16/status_notinstalled.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/24x24/pm-install_update.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/24x24/pm-refresh.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/24x24/pm-remove.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/24x24/pm-update_all.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/48x48/packagemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/48x48/pm-install_update.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/48x48/pm-refresh.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/48x48/pm-remove.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrast/48x48/pm-update_all.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/filter_all.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/filter_selected.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/progress_checkmark.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/selection.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/status_checkmark.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/status_installed.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/status_newupdate.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/status_notinstalled.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/pm-install_update.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/pm-refresh.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/pm-remove.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/pm-update_all.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/packagemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/pm-install_update.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/pm-refresh.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/pm-remove.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/pm-update_all.png has changed
--- a/src/gui/data/l10n.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/env python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-# The following categories are shown in GUI.
-
-def N_(message): return message
-
-l10n_categories = [
- N_("AMP Stack"),
- N_("Accessories"),
- N_("Administration and Configuration"),
- N_("Application and Web Servers"),
- N_("Builds"),
- N_("C"),
- N_("C++"),
- N_("Communications"),
- N_("Configuration and Preferences"),
- N_("Core"),
- N_("Databases"),
- N_("Developer Tools"),
- N_("Display"),
- N_("Distribution Tools"),
- N_("Documentation"),
- N_("Editors"),
- N_("Enterprise Management"),
- N_("File Managers"),
- N_("File System"),
- N_("Fonts"),
- N_("GNOME and GTK+"),
- N_("GNU"),
- N_("Games"),
- N_("Graphics and Imaging"),
- N_("Hardware"),
- N_("High Performance Computing"),
- N_("Integrated Development Environments"),
- N_("Internationalization"),
- N_("Internet"),
- N_("Java"),
- N_("Libraries"),
- N_("Localizations"),
- N_("Media"),
- N_("Multimedia Libraries"),
- N_("Networking"),
- N_("Office"),
- N_("Office Tools"),
- N_("Other Languages"),
- N_("Other Peripherals"),
- N_("PHP"),
- N_("Packaging"),
- N_("Panels and Applets"),
- N_("Perl"),
- N_("Plug-ins and Run-times"),
- N_("Ports"),
- N_("Printing"),
- N_("Python"),
- N_("Releases"),
- N_("Ruby"),
- N_("Scripts"),
- N_("Security"),
- N_("Services"),
- N_("Sessions"),
- N_("Shells"),
- N_("Software Management"),
- N_("Sound and Video"),
- N_("Source Code Management"),
- N_("Storage"),
- N_("System"),
- N_("System Utilities"),
- N_("Text Tools"),
- N_("Theming"),
- N_("Trusted"),
- N_("Trusted Extensions"),
- N_("Universal Access"),
- N_("Virtualization"),
- N_("Window Managers"),
- N_("X11"),
- None
-]
--- a/src/gui/data/l10n.sh Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-# This script generates l10n.py from opensolaris.org.sections
-CATEGORY_FILE=../../util/opensolaris.org.sections
-OUTPUT_FILE=l10n.py
-LANG=C
-
-export LANG
-
-printf "%s\n" "#!/usr/bin/env python" > $OUTPUT_FILE
-head -24 $0 | tail -23 >> $OUTPUT_FILE
-
-echo "
-# The following categories are shown in GUI.
-
-def N_(message): return message
-
-l10n_categories = [" \
->> $OUTPUT_FILE
-
-cat $CATEGORY_FILE | grep "^category[ ]*=" |\
- sed -e "s|category[ ]*=[ ]*\(.*\)|\1|" | tr "," "\n" | sort | uniq |\
- awk '{printf (" N_(\"%s\"),\n", $0)}' \
->> $OUTPUT_FILE
-
-printf "%s\n" " None" >> $OUTPUT_FILE
-printf "]" >> $OUTPUT_FILE
--- a/src/gui/data/packagemanager-info.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
-
-<!--
- CDDL HEADER START
-
- The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
- Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
- You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-
- You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
- or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
- See the License for the specific language governing permissions
- and limitations under the License.
-
- When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
- file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
- If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
- fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
- information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-
- CDDL HEADER END
-
- Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
- Use is subject to license terms.
-
- DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE.
--->
-
-<mime-info xmlns='http://www.freedesktop.org/standards/shared-mime-info'>
-<mime-type type="application/vnd.pkg5.info">
-<comment>pkg(5) info file</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="de">pkg(5)-Infodatei</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="es">archivo de información pkg(5)</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="fr">le fichier info pkg(5)</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="it">file di informazioni su pkg(5)</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="ja">pkg(5) 情報ファイル</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="ko">pkg(5) 정보 파일</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="pt_BR">Arquivo de informação pkg(5)</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="ru">Файл info для pkg(5)</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="sv">pkg(5) info-fil</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="zh_CN">pkg(5) 信息文件</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="zh_HK">pkg(5) 資訊檔</comment>
-<comment xml:lang="zh_TW">pkg(5) 資訊檔</comment>
-<glob pattern="*.p5i"/>
-</mime-type>
-</mime-info>
--- a/src/gui/data/packagemanager-preferences.schemas.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,275 +0,0 @@
-<gconfschemafile>
- <schemalist>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/max_search_completion</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/max_search_completion</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>int</type>
- <default>20</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Maximum entries for Search Completion</short>
- <long>
- An integer which specifies the maximum number of entries to store for
- search completion.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_width</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_width</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>int</type>
- <default>800</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Initial application width</short>
- <long>
- An integer which specifies the initial width of the application
- main window, overridden if there is not enough screen available.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_height</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_height</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>int</type>
- <default>600</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Initial application height</short>
- <long>
- An integer which specifies the initial height of the application
- main window, overridden if there is not enough screen available.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_hposition</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_hposition</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>int</type>
- <default>200</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Initial application horizonatal divider position</short>
- <long>
- An integer which specifies the initial horizonatal divider position
- of the application, which separates the category panel from the
- list panel.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_vposition</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_vposition</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>int</type>
- <default>320</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Initial application vertical divider position</short>
- <long>
- An integer which specifies the initial vertical divider position
- of the application, which separates the details panel from the
- list panel.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/last_export_selections_path</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/last_export_selections_path</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>string</type>
- <default></default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Last Export Selections Path</short>
- <long>
- The path for the last set of selections exported from packagemanager.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/last_add_pubcert_path</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/last_add_pubcert_path</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>string</type>
- <default></default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Last Add Publisher Certificate Path</short>
- <long>
- The path for the last Publisher Certificate added to packagemanager.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_section</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_section</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>int</type>
- <default>2</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Initial section value</short>
- <long>
- An integer which identifies the initial toplevel section to be
- expanded when packagemanager starts.
- 0 = "All Categories", 2 = "Applications" (the default)
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_show_filter</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_show_filter</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>int</type>
- <default>0</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Initial show filter value</short>
- <long>
- An integer which identifies the initial show filter value to be
- displayed when packagemanager starts. 0 corresponds to All Packages.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/show_startpage</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/show_startpage</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>True</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Show Start Page on startup</short>
- <long>
- A boolean which determines if the Start Page should be shown on startup
- or the initial list view.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/details_expanded</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/details_expanded</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>True</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Expand Details in Install Remove</short>
- <long>
- A boolean which determines if the Details panel in the Install Remove
- progress dialog is expanded or not.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/api_search_error</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/api_search_error</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>string</type>
- <default>""</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Comma separated list of repositories which we show if there are API errors when searching them</short>
- <long>
- A string which determines if the repository is shown or not in the error dialog.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/startpage_url</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/startpage_url</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>string</type>
- <default>http://dlc.sun.com/osol/packagemanager/downloads/201003</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Start Page Update URL</short>
- <long>
- The location from which to fetch updates to the Package Manager Start Page.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/save_state</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/save_state</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>True</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Display selected publisher at startup</short>
- <long>
- A boolean which determines whether Package Manager should save
- its state on exit and use it on restart. The state is the
- selected publisher and the size and position of horizontal and
- vertical dividers.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/imageupdate_confirm</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/imageupdate_confirm</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>True</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Display confirmation dialog after Check for updates</short>
- <long>
- A boolean which determines whether Package Manager should show
- confirmation dialog when the updates are found after performing
- Updates operation (Checks if updates are available) or it should
- go straight to the update all operation.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/install_confirm</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/install_confirm</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>True</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Display install/update packages confirmation dialog</short>
- <long>
- A boolean which determines whether Package Manager should show
- confirmation dialog when the user selected some packages for
- installation or update.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/remove_confirm</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/remove_confirm</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>True</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Display remove packages confirmation dialog</short>
- <long>
- A boolean which determines whether Package Manager should show
- confirmation dialog when the user selected some packages for
- removal.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/start_insearch</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/start_insearch</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>True</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Start in search mode</short>
- <long>
- A boolean which determines whether Package Manager should start
- in search mode.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/packagemanager/preferences/lastsource</key>
- <applyto>/apps/packagemanager/preferences/lastsource</applyto>
- <owner>packagemanager</owner>
- <type>string</type>
- <default>""</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Last publisher used by package manager</short>
- <long>
- A string which stores the last publisher used by package
- manager.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- </schemalist>
-</gconfschemafile>
--- a/src/gui/data/packagemanager.desktop.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-[Desktop Entry]
-_Name=Package Manager
-_GenericName=Package Manager
-_Comment=Install, update and remove software packages
-Exec=/usr/lib/pm-launch /usr/bin/packagemanager
-Icon=packagemanager
-Terminal=false
-MultipleArgs=false
-StartupNotify=false
-Type=Application
-Encoding=UTF-8
-Categories=PackageManager;Applications;GTK;System;Settings;
-NotShowIn=KDE;
-X-KDE-SubstituteUID=true
-MimeType=application/vnd.pkg5.info;
--- a/src/gui/data/packagemanager.ui Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,7662 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0"?>
-<interface>
- <requires lib="gtk+" version="2.16"/>
- <!-- interface-naming-policy project-wide -->
- <object class="GtkWindow" id="mainwindow">
- <property name="width_request">750</property>
- <property name="height_request">500</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Package Manager</property>
- <property name="window_position">center</property>
- <property name="default_width">800</property>
- <property name="default_height">615</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuBar" id="menubar1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="file">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_File</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child type="submenu">
- <object class="GtkMenu" id="menu1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="file_add_publisher">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Add Publisher...</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="file_manage_publishers">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Manage Publishers...</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="file_be">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Manage _Boot Environments...</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorMenuItem" id="separatormenuitem4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="file_export_selections">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Export Selections...</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorMenuItem" id="separatormenuitem1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="file_quit">
- <property name="label">gtk-quit</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- <accelerator key="Q" signal="activate" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="edit">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Edit</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child type="submenu">
- <object class="GtkMenu" id="menu2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="edit_cut">
- <property name="label">gtk-cut</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- <accelerator key="X" signal="activate" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="edit_copy">
- <property name="label">gtk-copy</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- <accelerator key="C" signal="activate" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="edit_paste">
- <property name="label">gtk-paste</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- <accelerator key="V" signal="activate" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="edit_delete">
- <property name="label">gtk-delete</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- <accelerator key="Delete" signal="activate"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorMenuItem" id="menuitem2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="edit_select_all">
- <property name="label">gtk-select-all</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- <accelerator key="A" signal="activate" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="edit_select_updates">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Select _Updates</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="edit_deselect">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">D_eselect All</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <accelerator key="A" signal="activate" modifiers="GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_CONTROL_MASK"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorMenuItem" id="separatormenuitem2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="search">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Search</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">False</property>
- <accelerator key="F" signal="activate" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="gotolist">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Go to package _list</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <accelerator key="L" signal="activate" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="clear">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">C_lear Search</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorMenuItem" id="separatormenuitem3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="recent_searches">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Recent Searches</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="clear_recent_searches">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Clear Recent Searc_hes</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorMenuItem" id="separatormenuitem5">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="edit_preferences">
- <property name="label">gtk-preferences</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="view">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_View</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child type="submenu">
- <object class="GtkMenu" id="menu4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="log">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Logs</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="package">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Package</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child type="submenu">
- <object class="GtkMenu" id="package_menu">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="package_version_info">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Package Version Info</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="package_install_update">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Install/Update</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="package_remove">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Remove</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorMenuItem" id="menuitem3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="package_update_all">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Updates</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="file_reload">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Re_fresh</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkMenuItem" id="help">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label">Help</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child type="submenu">
- <object class="GtkMenu" id="menu3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="online_help">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Contents</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">False</property>
- <accelerator key="F1" signal="activate"/>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorMenuItem" id="help_separator">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImageMenuItem" id="help_about">
- <property name="label">gtk-about</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkToolbar" id="actiontoolbar">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkToolButton" id="update_all_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="is_important">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Updates</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="homogeneous">True</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkToolButton" id="reload_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="is_important">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Refresh</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="homogeneous">True</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorToolItem" id="separatortoolitem1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkToolButton" id="install_update_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="is_important">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Install/Update</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="homogeneous">True</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkToolButton" id="remove_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="is_important">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Remove</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="homogeneous">True</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorToolItem" id="toolbutton2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="draw">False</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkSeparatorToolItem" id="toolbutton3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="draw">False</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkToolItem" id="toolbutton1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="resize_mode">queue</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment9">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="resize_mode">queue</property>
- <property name="xalign">1</property>
- <property name="top_padding">12</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">4</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="searchentry_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="searchentry">
- <property name="width_request">187</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="secondary_icon_stock">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="secondary_icon_activatable">True</property>
- <property name="secondary_icon_sensitive">True</property>
- <property name="secondary_icon_tooltip_text">Clear search text and results</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="searchentry-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">Search</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="do_search">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="has_tooltip">True</property>
- <property name="relief">none</property>
- <property name="focus_on_click">False</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox23">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="search_image">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-find</property>
- <property name="icon-size">2</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="border_width">6</property>
- <property name="spacing">50</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="publisher_combobox_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">1</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.60000002384185791</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Pu_blisher:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="justify">right</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">repositorycombobox</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkComboBox" id="repositorycombobox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="view_combobox_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Vie_w:</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">filtercombobox</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkComboBox" id="filtercombobox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHPaned" id="main_hpaned">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow1">
- <property name="width_request">200</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="categoriestreeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="headers_visible">False</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="categoriestreeview-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">Categories</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="resize">False</property>
- <property name="shrink">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkNotebook" id="main_view_notebook">
- <property name="height_request">200</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="show_tabs">False</property>
- <property name="show_border">False</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVPaned" id="main_vpaned">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow2">
- <property name="height_request">45</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="applicationtreeview">
- <property name="height_request">270</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="has_tooltip">True</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- <property name="enable_search">False</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="applicationtreeview-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">Packages</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="resize">True</property>
- <property name="shrink">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox4">
- <property name="height_request">120</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkNotebook" id="details_notebook">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow7">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="generalinfotextview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="wrap_mode">word</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="general_info_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>General</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow9">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="installedfilestextview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label9">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Files</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow10">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="dependenciestextview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label10">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Dependencies</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow16">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="licensetextview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label23">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Notices</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkViewport" id="viewport1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="resize_mode">queue</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <property name="left_padding">5</property>
- <property name="right_padding">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox5">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="installable_versions_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">4</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox6">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="Name">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Name:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Installed Version:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Version to Install:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox7">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="versions_name_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">label</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="versions_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">label</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkComboBox" id="versions_combo">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment6">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="hbuttonbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="versions_install_button">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Install/Update</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="padding">4</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label11">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Versions</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="resize">False</property>
- <property name="shrink">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox8">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEventBox" id="startpage_eventbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="startpage_scrolled_window">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="resize">True</property>
- <property name="shrink">True</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="padding">3</property>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="statusbar_hbox">
- <property name="height_request">24</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">1</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="yscale">0</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAspectFrame" id="logalert_frame">
- <property name="width_request">24</property>
- <property name="height_request">30</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label_yalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">out</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="obey_child">False</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEventBox" id="logalert_eventbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="image10">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-dialog-warning</property>
- <property name="icon-size">1</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkStatusbar" id="statusbar">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="has_resize_grip">False</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAspectFrame" id="progress_frame">
- <property name="width_request">146</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label_yalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">out</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox32">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">3</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">1</property>
- <property name="left_padding">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkProgressBar" id="status_progressbar">
- <property name="width_request">160</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="progress_cancel">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="relief">none</property>
- <property name="focus_on_click">False</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.40000000596046448</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="progress_cancel-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name" translatable="yes">Cancel current operation</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="image9">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.40000000596046448</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="icon-size">1</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox18">
- <property name="width_request">20</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkStatusbar" id="statusbar1">
- <property name="width_request">20</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">5</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="createplandialog">
- <property name="width_request">450</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Install/Upgrade Check</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="deletable">False</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">20</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox9">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="um_title_vbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="um_title_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="icon_um">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-missing-image</property>
- <property name="icon-size">2</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox_um_labels">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label_um">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Update Manager</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label_um1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Check for and install all available Updates.</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment_um_sep">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHSeparator" id="hseparator1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="stages_box">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="stage1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="icon_stage1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-missing-image</property>
- <property name="icon-size">2</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label_stage1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Preparation</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="stage2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="icon_stage2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-missing-image</property>
- <property name="icon-size">2</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label_stage2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Download</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="stage3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="icon_stage3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-missing-image</property>
- <property name="icon-size">2</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label_stage3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Install</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="padding">5</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox11">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="icon_stages">
- <property name="stock">gtk-missing-image</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="padding">5</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label_stages">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Checking package dependencies...</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="padding">2</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkProgressBar" id="createplanprogress">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkExpander" id="details_expander">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow5">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="createplantextview">
- <property name="height_request">250</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="wrap_mode">word</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label13">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Details</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="release_notes">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label101">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Read the release notes.</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLinkButton" id="ua_release_notes_button">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Release notes</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="relief">none</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="helpcreateplan">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="cancelcreateplan">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="closecreateplan">
- <property name="label">gtk-close</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-11">helpcreateplan</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-2">cancelcreateplan</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">closecreateplan</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="progressdialog">
- <property name="width_request">400</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Processing</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="deletable">False</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox17">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox14">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="progressinfo">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label">Place holder</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkProgressBar" id="progressbar">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area17">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="progresscancel">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="0">progresscancel</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="beadmin">
- <property name="width_request">650</property>
- <property name="height_request">500</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Manage Boot Environments</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox18">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox10">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">8</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="betitlelabel">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Delete, rename and activate boot environments</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame101">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow11">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="betreeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- <property name="enable_search">False</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="betreeview-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">Bes</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox9">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="activebeimage">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xpad">2</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-missing-image</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="bedescriptionlabel5">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Currently active boot environment</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="padding">2</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area18">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="help_bebutton">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="cancelbebutton">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="can_default">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="okbebutton">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="can_default">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-11">help_bebutton</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-2">cancelbebutton</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">okbebutton</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="confirmationdialog">
- <property name="width_request">450</property>
- <property name="height_request">350</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Confirmation</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="deletable">False</property>
- <property name="transient_for">beadmin</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox21">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment31">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox19">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">15</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox10">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="confirm_image">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-dialog-info</property>
- <property name="icon-size">5</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="confirm_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Apply the following changes:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame102">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow14">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="confirmtext">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- <property name="cursor_visible">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area21">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="help_conf">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="cancel_conf">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="ok_conf">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-11">help_conf</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="0">cancel_conf</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="0">ok_conf</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="preferencesdialog">
- <property name="width_request">500</property>
- <property name="height_request">500</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Preferences</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox140">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment35">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <property name="left_padding">5</property>
- <property name="right_padding">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkNotebook" id="preferences_notebook">
- <property name="width_request">385</property>
- <property name="height_request">500</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="gen_alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">12</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">12</property>
- <property name="left_padding">12</property>
- <property name="right_padding">12</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox22">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="startup_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Startup</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="startup_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment7">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox23">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox30">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="startpage_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Show Start Page on _startup</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="exit_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Exit</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox101">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment101">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox101">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox301">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="exit_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Remember current state on _exit</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="padding">4</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="preferences_confirm_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Show Confirmation Dialog</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox8">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment41">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox401">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox901">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="confirm_updateall_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">On _Updates</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">5</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox201">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment201">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox201">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox5">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="confirm_install_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">On Package _Install/Update</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">6</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment301">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox301">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox6">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="confirm_remove_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">On Package _Remove</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">7</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="search_label">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Recent Searches</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="padding">5</property>
- <property name="position">8</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox100">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment5">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox51">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox11">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="recent_search_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Show _all publisher results</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">9</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="pref_tab_label2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_General</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="sigpol_alignment2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">10</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="sigpol_vbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="mods_svbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_sig_alignment2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="mods_sig_label2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>When installing packages from any publisher:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="mods_shbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_salignment1">
- <property name="width_request">10</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yscale">0</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="mods_svbox4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="gsig_ignored_radiobutton">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="tooltip_text" translatable="yes">Signatures are _ignored</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="active">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="gsig_ignored_rbalignment30">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="gsig_ignored_rblabel16">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Signatures are _ignored</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="gsig_optional_but_valid_radiobutton">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="tooltip_text" translatable="yes">Signatures are _optional, but must be valid if provided</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- <property name="group">gsig_ignored_radiobutton</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="gsig_optional_rbalignment23">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="gsig_optional_rblabel12">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Signatures are _optional, but must be valid if provided</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="gsig_valid_radiobutton">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="tooltip_text" translatable="yes">One or more _valid signatures are required</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- <property name="group">gsig_ignored_radiobutton</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="gsig_valid_rbalignment24">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="gsig_valid_rblabel14">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">One or more _valid signatures are required</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="gsig_name_radiobutton">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- <property name="group">gsig_ignored_radiobutton</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="gsig_name_rbalignment14">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="gsig_name_rblabel8">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Signatures are _required and certificate names must include:</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="gsig_cert_names_vbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="cert_names_hbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="modn_hbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="modn_alignment1">
- <property name="width_request">20</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="modn_alignment2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.15000000596046448</property>
- <property name="yscale">0</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="modn_vbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="gsig_name_entry">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="modn_label1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><i><b>Example:</b> oracle, opensolaris</i></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment20">
- <property name="width_request">50</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_walignment4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">35</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="mods_whbox4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="mods_wimage4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.10000000149011612</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-dialog-info</property>
- <property name="icon-size">3</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="padding">6</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox21">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="mods_wlabel4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><i><b>Note:</b> This global signature policy maybe overridden by stricter settings in an individual publisher signature policy</i></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label5">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Signature Policy</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="lang_tab_alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">12</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">12</property>
- <property name="left_padding">12</property>
- <property name="right_padding">12</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="lang_vbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="languages_all_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">1</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Language choices for any package:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="languages_all_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="lang_alignment1">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="lang_vbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="lang_hbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="lang_install_all_radiobutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Install _all languages</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="active">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="languages_all_hbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="lang_alignment3">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="lang_vbox4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="lang_hbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="lang_install_only_radiobutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Install _only these languages:</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="active">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- <property name="group">lang_install_all_radiobutton</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="lan_alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="lang_hbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="lang_alignment2">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">4</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="lang_vbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="lang_frame1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="languages_scrolledwindow">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="languages_treeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="cmpt_alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">8</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="components_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">1</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Other component choices:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="feature_devel_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="devel_alignment">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="devel_vbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="devel_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="feature_devel_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Install all _development files</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="active">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">5</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="feature_doc_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="doc_alignment">
- <property name="width_request">17</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="doc_vbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="doc_hbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="feature_doc_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Install all do_cumentation</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="active">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">6</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="pref_tab_label1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0.49000000953674316</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Optional Components</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area14">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="preferenceshelp">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="preferencescancel">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="preferencesclose">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-11">preferenceshelp</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-2">preferencescancel</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">preferencesclose</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="webinstalldialog">
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Install/Update</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">normal</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox16">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment202">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <property name="left_padding">5</property>
- <property name="right_padding">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox30">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox22">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment22">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="yscale">0</property>
- <property name="top_padding">2</property>
- <property name="left_padding">4</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment102">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="yscale">0</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="pkgimage">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="icon-size">10</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox29">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox37">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment12">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="top_padding">10</property>
- <property name="left_padding">8</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label15">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><big><b>Package Manager Web Installer</b></big></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment25">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment26">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="top_padding">6</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">3</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="webinstall_toplabel">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">The following will be added to your system:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="webinstall_frame">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="webinstall_scrolledwindow">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="webinstall_textview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment11">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.49000000953674316</property>
- <property name="top_padding">8</property>
- <property name="left_padding">7</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="proceed_new_repo_label">
- <property name="width_request">300</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="justify">center</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area16">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="help_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="cancel_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="proceed_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="close_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-close</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-11">help_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-2">cancel_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">proceed_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-4">close_button</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkWindow" id="api_search_error">
- <property name="width_request">450</property>
- <property name="height_request">300</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Search Publisher Errors</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="deletable">False</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox31">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="border_width">10</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox40">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="warningtriangle1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="yalign">1</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-dialog-warning</property>
- <property name="icon-size">5</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment38">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">7</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label7">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Search errors with the following publishers:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="padding">5</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame103">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow6">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="api_search_error_text">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="api_search_checkbox">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Do not notify me about these publishers again.</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="hbuttonbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="api_search_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-close</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="ua_completed_dialog">
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Updates Complete</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">15</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox102">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox102">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="ua_ok_image">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="icon-size">5</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="ua_info_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Updates completed successfully</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox202">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label102">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Read the release notes before restarting the system.</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLinkButton" id="release_notes_button">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Release notes</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="relief">none</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox202">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="ua_info_label1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">A new boot environment has been created and will be given the
-following name.</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTable" id="table1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="n_rows">2</property>
- <property name="n_columns">3</property>
- <property name="column_spacing">10</property>
- <property name="row_spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="ua_be_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Name:</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="x_options">GTK_FILL</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="be_error_label">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="left_attach">1</property>
- <property name="right_attach">2</property>
- <property name="top_attach">1</property>
- <property name="bottom_attach">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="ua_be_entry">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="left_attach">1</property>
- <property name="right_attach">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment103">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="ua_whats_this_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="relief">none</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label201">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><span foreground="blue"><u>What's this?</u></span></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="left_attach">2</property>
- <property name="right_attach">3</property>
- <property name="x_options"></property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="ua_help_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="ua_restart_later_button">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Restart Later</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.49000000953674316</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="ua_restart_now_button">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Restart _Now</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-11">ua_help_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-2">ua_restart_later_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">ua_restart_now_button</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="add_publisher">
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Add Publisher</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox141">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox103">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_pub_label">
- <property name="width_request">450</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Specify the publisher URI and optional alias</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox103">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox203">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="url_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_URI:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">add_publisher_url</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="alias_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Alias:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">add_publisher_alias</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox302">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="add_publisher_url">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox70">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="add_publisher_alias">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_error_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="ssl_box">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="add_registration_box">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment27">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="top_padding">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="registration_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">This is a secure publisher.</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment28">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="top_padding">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLinkButton" id="registration_button">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Registration Details</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="relief">none</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_pub_instr_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">This publisher requires an SSL key and an SSL certificate.
-Specify the location of these files.</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox203">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox402">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label31">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">SSL _Key: </property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">keyentry</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label32">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">SSL C_ertificate: </property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">certentry</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox52">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="keyentry">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="keyentry-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">keyentry</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox80">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="certentry">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="certentry-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">certentry</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_sslerror_label">
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">2</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox60">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="keybrowse">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Browse...</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="keybrowse-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name" translatable="yes">Browse for SSL Key</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="certbrowse">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">B_rowse...</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="certbrowse-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name" translatable="yes">Browse for SSL Certificate</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="padding">10</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area140">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="add_publisher_cancel_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="add_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-add</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="add_pub_help">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-2">add_publisher_cancel_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">add_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-11">add_pub_help</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="manage_publishers">
- <property name="width_request">520</property>
- <property name="height_request">422</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Manage Publishers</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox170">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox104">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox303">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="manage_publishers_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Add, modify and remove publishers</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="priorities_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Set publisher priorities using arrows.</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox104">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox403">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="manage_publishers_frame">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow19">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="publishers_treeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="enable_search">False</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="publishers_treeview-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">Publishers</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkExpander" id="manage_publishers_expand">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="expanded">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox204">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame104">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow21">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="manage_publishers_details">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- <property name="cursor_visible">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label_expand">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">D_etails</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox204">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">20</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVButtonBox" id="vbuttonbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <property name="layout_style">start</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="manage_add">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Add...</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="manage_modify">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Modify...</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="manage_remove">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Remove</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVButtonBox" id="vbuttonbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <property name="layout_style">start</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="manage_move_up">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox41">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="image20">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-go-up</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label202">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Up</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="manage_move_down">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox302">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="image101">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-go-down</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label103">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Down</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area170">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="manage_help">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="manage_cancel">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="manage_ok">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-11">manage_help</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-2">manage_cancel</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">manage_ok</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="publishers_apply">
- <property name="width_request">400</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Applying Changes</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox20">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox105">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="applying_changes_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Applying changes...</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkProgressBar" id="publishers_apply_progress">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkExpander" id="apply_expander">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame105">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow12">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="apply_textview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- <property name="cursor_visible">False</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label104">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Details</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">apply_expander</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="cancel_button_area">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="apply_cancel">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="0">apply_cancel</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkAboutDialog" id="aboutdialog">
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">About Glade</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="program_name">Package Manager</property>
- <property name="copyright" translatable="yes">Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates.
-All rights reserved.</property>
- <property name="authors">Ann Kanodia <[email protected]>
-Frank Ludolph <[email protected]>
-Jenya Gestrin <[email protected]>
-Joanmarie Diggs <[email protected]>
-John Hawk <[email protected]>
-John Rice <[email protected]>
-Michal Pryc <[email protected]>
-Padraig O'Briain <[email protected]></property>
- <property name="documenters">Alta Elstad <[email protected]>
-Jyothi Srinath <[email protected]></property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox9">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area9">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="modify_repository">
- <property name="width_request">600</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Modify Publisher</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox200">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mod_alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <property name="left_padding">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkNotebook" id="modify_pub_notebook">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mod_alignment2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">10</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="mod_vbox16">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment8">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox12">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label30">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Publisher</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox42">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment203">
- <property name="width_request">16</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox105">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox205">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="repository_name_text">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Name: </property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label25">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">A_lias:</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">repositorymodifyalias</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox304">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="repository_name_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="repositorymodifyalias">
- <property name="width_request">320</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="repositorymodifyalias-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">repositorymodifyurl</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="mod_alias_error_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"> </property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alias_alignment1">
- <property name="width_request">40</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="modify_registration_box">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment270">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="top_padding">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="repositorymodifyregistrationcommentlabel">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">This is a secure publisher.</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment280">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="top_padding">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLinkButton" id="repositorymodifyregistrationlinkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Re_gistration Details</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="relief">none</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="uri">http://glade.gnome.org</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment16">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox404">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label105">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Origins</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox303">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment104">
- <property name="width_request">10</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox61">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox205">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label203">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">O_rigin:</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">add_repo</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox71">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="add_repo">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="modrepoerror_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">e.g. http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow8">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="modify_pub_repos_treeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="headers_visible">False</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="modify_pub_repos_treeview-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">Repositories</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVButtonBox" id="vbuttonbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">20</property>
- <property name="layout_style">start</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="pub_add_repo">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Add</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="pub_remove_repo">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Remo_ve</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment15">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">20</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox17">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label40">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>_SSL Key and Certificate</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox17">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment21">
- <property name="width_request">16</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox28">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox24">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label34">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">SSL _Key:</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">modkeyentry</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label35">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">SSL Certi_ficate:</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">modcertentry</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox25">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">7</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="modkeyentry">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="modkeyentry-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">modkeyentry</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox106">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="modcertentry">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="modcertentry-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">modcertentry</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="modsslerror_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVButtonBox" id="vbuttonbox4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <property name="layout_style">start</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="modkeybrowse">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Browse...</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="modcertbrowse">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Bro_wse...</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="padding">5</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">5</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment17">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">15</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkExpander" id="repositorymodifymirrorsexpander">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox21">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment29">
- <property name="width_request">10</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox27">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox26">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label36">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">M_irror:</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">addmirror_entry</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox53">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="addmirror_entry">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- <child internal-child="accessible">
- <object class="AtkObject" id="addmirror_entry-atkobject">
- <property name="AtkObject::accessible-name">addmirror_entry</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="modmirrerror_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">e.g. http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame106">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow80">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="modify_repo_mirrors_treeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="headers_visible">False</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="padding">4</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVButtonBox" id="vbuttonbox5">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">20</property>
- <property name="layout_style">start</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="addmirror_button">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">A_dd</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="mirrorremove">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Remov_e</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="padding">5</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label33">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>_Mirrors</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">6</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="mod_label1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_General</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">10</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="mods_vbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="mods_vbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_pub_alignment11">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="mods_pub_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Certificates for publisher</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="mods_hbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_alignment2">
- <property name="width_request">10</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox16">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="mods_frame1">
- <property name="height_request">106</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="mods_scrolledwindow1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="pub_certificate_treeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="mods_hbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment18">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">1</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">3</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label6">
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">1</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Details</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment13">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox12">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">6</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="pub_certificate_add_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment14">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label8">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Add...</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="pub_certificate_remove_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment23">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label12">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Remove</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="pub_certificate_revoke_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment24">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label14">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Re_voke</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="pub_certificate_reinstate_button">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment30">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label16">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Re_instate...</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment10">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="mods_frame4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label_yalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="mods_scrolledwindow4">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="pub_certificate_details_textview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="mod_label2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Cer_tificates</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="sigpol_alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">10</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="sigpol_vbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="mods_svbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_sig_alignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">5</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="mods_pub_sig_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>When installing packages from this publisher:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="mods_shbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_salignment2">
- <property name="width_request">10</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yscale">0</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="mods_svbox2">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="sig_ignored_radiobutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Signatures are _ignored</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="tooltip_text" translatable="yes">Signatures are _ignored</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="active">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="sig_optional_but_valid_radiobutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Signatures are _optional, but must be valid if provided</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="tooltip_text" translatable="yes">Signatures are _optional, but must be valid if provided</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- <property name="group">sig_ignored_radiobutton</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="sig_valid_radiobutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">One or more _valid signatures are required</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="tooltip_text" translatable="yes">One or more _valid signatures are required</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- <property name="group">sig_ignored_radiobutton</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkRadioButton" id="sig_name_radiobutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Signatures are _required and certificate names must include:</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- <property name="group">sig_ignored_radiobutton</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="sig_cert_names_vbox">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="sensitive">False</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="cert_names_hbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="modn_hbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="modn_alignment5">
- <property name="width_request">20</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="modn_alignment6">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.15000000596046448</property>
- <property name="yscale">0</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="modn_vbox3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkEntry" id="sig_name_entry">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="invisible_char">●</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="modn_label3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><i><b>Example:</b> oracle, opensolaris</i></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment19">
- <property name="width_request">50</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="mods_walignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">35</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="mods_whbox1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="mods_wimage1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="yalign">0.10000000149011612</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-dialog-info</property>
- <property name="icon-size">3</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="padding">6</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox15">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="mods_wlabel1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><i><b>Note:</b> This signature policy may be overridden by stricter settings in the global signature policy</i></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="sig_linkalignment1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">1</property>
- <property name="xscale">0</property>
- <property name="yscale">0</property>
- <property name="top_padding">10</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">10</property>
- <property name="left_padding">5</property>
- <property name="right_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="sig_view_globpol_button">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">View Global _Policy...</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="tooltip_text" translatable="yes">Edit->Preferences: Signature Policy</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="sigpol_label1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Signature Policy</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area20">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="repositorymodifycancel">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="repositorymodifyok">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="modify_repo_help">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-2">repositorymodifycancel</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">repositorymodifyok</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-11">modify_repo_help</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="add_publisher_complete">
- <property name="width_request">400</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Adding Publisher Complete</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox201">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox107">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox206">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="add_image">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-ok</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="added_label_successfully">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Publisher added successfully</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox106">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox206">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_publisher_name_l">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Publisher Name:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_publisher_alias_l">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Publisher Alias:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_publisher_url_l">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">URI:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_publisher_desc_l">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Description:</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox305">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_publisher_name_c">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="single_line_mode">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_publisher_alias_c">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="single_line_mode">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_publisher_url_c">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="single_line_mode">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="add_publisher_desc_c">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="events">GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="xpad">4</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area200">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="add_publisher_c_close">
- <property name="label">gtk-close</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="0">add_publisher_c_close</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="confirmdialog">
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Confirmation</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="deletable">False</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox160">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox108">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox107">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="image21">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-dialog-info</property>
- <property name="icon-size">5</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="confirmdialog_confirm_label">
- <property name="width_request">350</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Review the packages to be installed or udpated</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkExpander" id="install_expander">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="install_frame">
- <property name="width_request">550</property>
- <property name="height_request">200</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow20">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="install_treeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="install_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Install Details</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">install_expander</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkExpander" id="update_expander">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="update_frame">
- <property name="width_request">550</property>
- <property name="height_request">200</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow22">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="update_treeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="update_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Update Details</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">update_expander</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkExpander" id="remove_expander">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="no_show_all">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">5</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame3">
- <property name="width_request">550</property>
- <property name="height_request">200</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow30">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTreeView" id="remove_treeview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="rules_hint">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="remove_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Remove Details</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="mnemonic_widget">remove_expander</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">3</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="confirm_donotshow">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Do not show this confirmation dialog again</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">4</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area160">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="confirm_cancel_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-cancel</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="confirm_ok_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="0">confirm_cancel_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="0">confirm_ok_button</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="version_info_dialog">
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="title" translatable="yes">Package Version Info</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="default_width">500</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="transient_for">mainwindow</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox161">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox108">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox109">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label106">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Name:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label37">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Installed:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="info_installable_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>Installable Version:</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox207">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="info_name">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">label</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="info_installed">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">label</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="info_installable">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="ypad">4</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">label</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment105">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="top_padding">8</property>
- <property name="bottom_padding">8</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkExpander" id="version_info_expander">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame108">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow23">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">never</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="infotextview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="wrap_mode">word</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label204">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Details</property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area161">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">edge</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="info_help_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="info_ok_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="0">info_help_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="0">info_ok_button</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="view_log_dialog">
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="modal">True</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="destroy_with_parent">True</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="deletable">False</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox162">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">2</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox110">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox109">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="spacing">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="image3">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-dialog-info</property>
- <property name="icon-size">5</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="view_log_confirm_label">
- <property name="width_request">350</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes"><b>View Package Manager Logs</b></property>
- <property name="use_markup">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="padding">4</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkNotebook" id="log_notebook">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow24">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="log_errors_textview">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label107">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Errors and Warnings</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow25">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="log_info_textview">
- <property name="width_request">500</property>
- <property name="height_request">400</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="left_margin">6</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="label205">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">Information</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- <property name="tab_fill">False</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- <child type="tab">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area162">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="log_help_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-help</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="log_clear_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-clear</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="log_close_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-close</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="-11">log_help_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-2">log_clear_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="-3">log_close_button</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
- <object class="GtkDialog" id="license_dialog">
- <property name="width_request">500</property>
- <property name="height_request">500</property>
- <property name="border_width">5</property>
- <property name="resizable">False</property>
- <property name="window_position">center-on-parent</property>
- <property name="type_hint">dialog</property>
- <property name="has_separator">False</property>
- <child internal-child="vbox">
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="dialog-vbox19">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">16</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment106">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkVBox" id="vbox20">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="orientation">vertical</property>
- <property name="spacing">16</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkHBox" id="hbox207">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkImage" id="image102">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="stock">gtk-dialog-info</property>
- <property name="icon-size">5</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkAlignment" id="alignment204">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="left_padding">10</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkLabel" id="instruction_label">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="label">You must accept the terms of this license before downloading this package.</property>
- <property name="justify">fill</property>
- <property name="wrap">True</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkFrame" id="frame109">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="label_xalign">0</property>
- <property name="shadow_type">in</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkScrolledWindow" id="scrolledwindow81">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="hscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <property name="vscrollbar_policy">automatic</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkTextView" id="textview1">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="editable">False</property>
- <property name="wrap_mode">word</property>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <child type="label_item">
- <placeholder/>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkCheckButton" id="license_accept_checkbutton">
- <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Accept</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">False</property>
- <property name="use_underline">True</property>
- <property name="xalign">0</property>
- <property name="yalign">0</property>
- <property name="draw_indicator">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">2</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child internal-child="action_area">
- <object class="GtkHButtonBox" id="dialog-action_area19">
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="layout_style">end</property>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="license_reject_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-no</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- <child>
- <object class="GtkButton" id="license_accept_button">
- <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
- <property name="visible">True</property>
- <property name="can_focus">True</property>
- <property name="receives_default">True</property>
- <property name="use_stock">True</property>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="fill">False</property>
- <property name="position">1</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- <packing>
- <property name="expand">False</property>
- <property name="pack_type">end</property>
- <property name="position">0</property>
- </packing>
- </child>
- </object>
- </child>
- <action-widgets>
- <action-widget response="0">license_reject_button</action-widget>
- <action-widget response="0">license_accept_button</action-widget>
- </action-widgets>
- </object>
-</interface>
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/dialog-information.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/dialog-warning.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/hc_dialog-information.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/hc_dialog-warning.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/hc_install.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/hc_opensolaris.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/hci_dialog-information.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/hci_dialog-warning.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/hci_install.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/hci_opensolaris.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/install.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png has changed
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/C/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,394 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Featured Packages</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Popular</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- See more...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Recent</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- See more...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Recommended</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- See more...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Using Source Juicer to contribute packages</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Using and sharing packages</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "opensolaris.png" align="right"/></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/ar/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>مميزات الحزم </h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>شعبية </popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- إنظر المزيد ....</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>الأخيرة</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- إنظر المزيد ....</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>توصيات</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- تنصيب </a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- إنظر المزيد ....</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">إستعمل المصدر للمساهمة بالحزم </a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">إستعمال ومشاركة الحزم </a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/ca/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Paquets destacats</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Populars</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Visualitzar-ne més...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Recents</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Visualitzar-ne més...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Recomanats</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- instal·lar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Visualitzar-ne més...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Utilitzant l'exprimidor de fonts per contribuir als paquets</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Utilitzant i compartint paquets</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/cs/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Nejlepší balíčky</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Populární</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Více</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Nejnovější</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Více</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Doporučené</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- instalovat</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Více</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Přispívat balíčky pomocí Source Juicer</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Použití a sdílení balíčků</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/de/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Enthaltene Pakete</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Beliebt</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Mehr...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Aktuell</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Mehr...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Empfohlen</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- Installieren</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Mehr...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Verwenden von Source Juicer zum Bereitstellen von Paketen</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Verwenden und Freigeben von Paketen</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/es/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Paquetes destacados</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Popular</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Ver más...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Reciente</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Ver más...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Recomendado</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Ver más...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Uso de Source Juicer para contribuir a los paquetes</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Utilizar y compartir paquetes</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/fr/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Packages compris</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Les plus demandés</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Plus...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Les plus récents</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Plus...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Recommandé</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Plus...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Utilisation de Source Juicer pour fournir des packages</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Utilisation et partage des packages</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/hu/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Kiemelt csomagok</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Népszerű</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Még több...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Aktuális</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Még több...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Ajánlott</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- telepítés</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Még több...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Source Juicer használata a csomagkészítéshez</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Csomagok használata és megosztása</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/id/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,394 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Paket Utama</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Populer</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Lihat selebihnya...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- <td><h5><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/popular.png" WIDTH=145/></h5></td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Terakhir</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Lihat selebihnya...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- <td><h5><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/recent.png" WIDTH=145/></h5></td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Direkomendasikan</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- install</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Lihat selebihnya...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- <td><h5><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/recommended.png" WIDTH=145/></h5></td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Pergunakan Source Juicer untuk berkontribusi paket</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Pergunakan dan berbagi paket</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/it/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Pacchetti installabili</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Più diffusi</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Ulteriori informazioni...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Recenti</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Ulteriori informazioni...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Consigliati</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- installazione</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Ulteriori informazioni...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Utilizzo di Source Juicer per contribuire all'aggiunta di pacchetti</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Utilizzo e condivisione di pacchetti</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/ja/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>パッケージ集</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>人気</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 詳細...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>最新</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 詳細...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>推奨</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- インストール</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- 詳細...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Source Juicer を使用してパッケージに貢献する方法</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">パッケージの共有法と使用法</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/ko/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>기능을 갖춘 패키지</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>자주 사용</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 자세히 보기...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>최근</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 자세히 보기...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>권장</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- 설치</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- 자세히 보기...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Source Juicer를 사용하여 패키지 기여</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">패키지 사용 및 공유</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/nl/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Voorname pakketten</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Populier</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Voor meer...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Recente</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Voor meer...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Aanbevolen</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- installeer</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Voor meer...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Maakt gebruik van Source Juicer om pakketten bij te dragen</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Gebruik maken en delen van pakketten</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/pt_BR/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Pacotes caracterizados</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Popular</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Veja mais...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Recente</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Veja mais...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Recomendado</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- Instalar</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Veja mais...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Usando a fonte Juicer para contribuir com pacotes</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Usando e compartilhando pacotes</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/ru/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Отборные пакеты</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Популярные</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Больше...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Недавние</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Больше...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Рекомендуемые</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- установить</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Больше...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Добавление пакетов с помощью Sourse Juicer</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Использование и совместное использование пакетов</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/sv/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>Paket som ingår</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>Populära</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Mer information ...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>Senaste</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- Mer information ...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>Rekommenderade</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- installation</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- Mer information ...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">Använda Source Juicer för att bidra med paket</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">Använda och dela paket</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/zh_CN/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>功能软件包</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>流行的</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 查看更多...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>最近的</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 查看更多...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>推荐的</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- 安装</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- 查看更多...</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">使用 Source Juicer 贡献软件包</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">使用和共享软件包</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/zh_HK/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>功能套裝軟體</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>熱門的</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 想看更多......</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>最近的</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 想看更多......</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>建議</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- 想看更多......</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">使用Source Juicer發行套裝軟體</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">使用與分享套裝軟體</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/data/startpagebase/zh_TW/startpage.html Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
-
-<style>
- <!--
- /* Css Styles taken from www.opensolaris.com */
- a img,
- :link img,
- :visited img {
- border: none;
- }
- a{
- text-decoration: none;
- }
- a:hover{
- text-decoration: underline;
- }
- body {
- font-size: 15px; /* 1em is now 15px */
- color: #747474; /* standard text is now dark grey */
- padding: 0;
- margin: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-family: arial, helvetica, sans-serif;
- }
- .body p{
- line-height: 12px;
- }
- .body p a{
- color: #2888c5;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- a { color: #2888c5; }
- a.small { font-size: 12px; }
- a:visited{ color: #587894;}
-
- h1{
- font-size: 20pt;
- font-weight: bold;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- color: #acb0c0;
- }
- h1 a,
- h1 a:hover{
- text-decoration: none;
- color: #4A4A4A;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h2{
- font-size: 14px;
- font-weight: bold;
- }
- h3{
- text-align: left;
- font-size: 12px;
- }
- h4{
- text-align: left;
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- h5{
- margin-top: 0;
- margin-right: 0;
- margin-bottom: 0;
- margin-left: 1;
- padding: 1;
- }
- h6{
- text-align: right;
- }
- popular-title{
- color: #77aade;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recent-title{
- color: #4169a8;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- recommended-title{
- color: #76a542;
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-weight: bold;
- font-size: 14px;
- }
- h9{
- font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
- font-size: 15px;
- }
- tr{
- margin-top: 0px;
- margin-left: 0px;
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- td{
- margin: 0;
- padding: 0;
- }
- -->
- </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<table border="0" height="98%" width="98%" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" style="text-align: left">
- <a href="stub"></a>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='2'><h1>功能套裝軟體</h1></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e9f1fa">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <popular-title>熱門的</popular-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.winehq.org">
- wine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Run MS Windows applications on OpenSolaris</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/wine.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.opera.com/">
- opera</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Safe and fast Internet browser</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/opera.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http:///www.joomla.org/">
- joomla</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd">
- <NOT-l10N>Content management system (CMS)</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #f5fafd; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/joomla.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 想看更多......</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d4dce4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #dbe4ec">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recent-title>最近的</recent-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.movabletype.org">
- movabletype</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Perl based weblog management</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/movabletype.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.washington.edu/alpine/">
- alpine</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>Univ. of Washington Pine mail user agent</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/alpine.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.libsdl.org/projects/SDL_ttf">
- SDL-ttf</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4">
- <NOT-l10N>Simple Directmedia Layer TrueType Fonts</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #ecf1f4; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/p5i/0/SDL-ttf.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/contrib/en/catalog.shtml">
- 想看更多......</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #d1d5e5;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td style="vertical-align: top" >
-
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="background-color: #e7f3e0">
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='4' style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4; border-bottom: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4">
- <recommended-title>建議</recommended-title>
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://netbeans.org">
- netbeans</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source IDE</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/netbeans.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://www.openoffice.org/">
- openoffice</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td>
- <NOT-l10N>An open-source multilingual office suite</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/openoffice.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px" width="125">
- <ul style="margin: 0"><li style="padding-left: 5">
- <h9><a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+webstack/WebHome">
- amp</a></h9>
- </ul>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef">
- <NOT-l10N>Apache, MySQL, PHP deployment kit</NOT-l10N>
- </td>
- <td style="background-color: #faf9ef; vertical-align: middle; margin: 0; text-align: right;">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/p5i/0/amp.p5i">
- 安裝</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="border:solid 1px #b5b7b4; border-left: 0px;
- border-bottom: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png" />
- </td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td COLSPAN='3' style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-right: 0px; border-top: 0px">
- <h9><a href="http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release/en/catalog.shtml">
- 想看更多......</a></h9>
- </td>
- <td style="text-align: right; border:solid 1px #c4ddb4;
- border-left: 0px; border-top: 0px; border-right: #b5b7b4"></td>
- </tr>
- </table>
-
- </td>
- </tr>
-
-
-
-
-
- <tr>
- <td>
- <table border="0" height="100%" width="100%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
- <td>
- >> <a href="http://jucr.opensolaris.org/">使用Source Juicer發行套裝軟體</a><br />
- >> <a href="http://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/documents">使用與分享套裝軟體</a><br />
- </td>
- <td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com"><IMG SRC = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png" /></a></td>
- </table>
- </td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>
--- a/src/gui/help/C/C.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1282 +0,0 @@
-# Copyright (C) 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc
-# This file is distributed under the same license as the pkg help package.
-#
-# Desktop Discuss <[email protected]>
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
-"Project-Id-Version: pkg help HEAD\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-10-10 23:30+0900\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2008-10-10 23:30+0900\n"
-"Last-Translator: [email protected]\n"
-"Language-Team: [email protected]\n"
-"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
-"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
-"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml:77 (None)
-msgid ""
-"@@image: 'figures/package_manager.png'; md5=47f19c63c45c2d5d14a07732879a8c6c"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml:302 (None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all.png'; md5=bfc40396ac45fc30b994d306307ead96"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:3 (title)
-msgid "Getting Started With OpenSolaris 2008.11 Package Manager"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:4 (firstname)
-msgid "IPS"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:5 (surname)
-msgid "Documentation Team"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:8 (pubsnumber)
-msgid "820-6570"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:9 (releaseinfo)
-msgid "v 0.1"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:10 (pubdate)
-msgid "Nov 2008"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:11 (publishername) package-manager.xml:20 (holder)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems, Inc."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:12 (street)
-msgid "4150 Network Circle"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:13 (city)
-msgid "Santa Clara"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:14 (state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:15 (postcode)
-msgid "95054"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:16 (country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:19 (year)
-msgid "2008"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:24 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Sun Microsystems, Inc. has intellectual property rights relating to "
-"technology embodied in the product that is described in this document. In "
-"particular, and without limitation, these intellectual property rights may "
-"include one or more U.S. patents or pending patent applications in the U.S. "
-"and in other countries."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:25 (para)
-msgid ""
-"U.S. Government Rights – Commercial software. Government users are subject "
-"to the Sun Microsystems, Inc. standard license agreement and applicable "
-"provisions of the FAR and its supplements."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:26 (para)
-msgid "This distribution may include materials developed by third parties."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:27 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from "
-"the University of California. UNIX is a registered trademark in the U.S. and "
-"other countries, exclusively licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:28 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, the Solaris logo, the Java Coffee Cup "
-"logo, docs.sun.com, Java, and Solaris are trademarks or registered "
-"trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and "
-"other countries. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are "
-"trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the U.S. "
-"and other countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an "
-"architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:29 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The OPEN LOOK and <trademark>Sun</trademark> Graphical User Interface was "
-"developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. for its users and licensees. Sun "
-"acknowledges the pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing "
-"the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer "
-"industry. Sun holds a non-exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox "
-"Graphical User Interface, which license also covers Sun's licensees who "
-"implement OPEN LOOK GUIs and otherwise comply with Sun's written license "
-"agreements."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:30 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Products covered by and information contained in this publication are "
-"controlled by U.S. Export Control laws and may be subject to the export or "
-"import laws in other countries. Nuclear, missile, chemical or biological "
-"weapons or nuclear maritime end uses or end users, whether direct or "
-"indirect, are strictly prohibited. Export or reexport to countries subject "
-"to U.S. embargo or to entities identified on U.S. export exclusion lists, "
-"including, but not limited to, the denied persons and specially designated "
-"nationals lists is strictly prohibited."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:31 (para)
-msgid ""
-"DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, "
-"REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF "
-"MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE "
-"DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE "
-"LEGALLY INVALID."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:33 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Sun Microsystems, Inc. détient les droits de propriété intellectuelle "
-"relatifs à la technologie incorporée dans le produit qui est décrit dans ce "
-"document. En particulier, et ce sans limitation, ces droits de propriété "
-"intellectuelle peuvent inclure un ou plusieurs brevets américains ou des "
-"applications de brevet en attente aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:34 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Cette distribution peut comprendre des composants développés par des tierces "
-"personnes."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:35 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Certaines composants de ce produit peuvent être dérivées du logiciel "
-"Berkeley BSD, licenciés par l'Université de Californie. UNIX est une marque "
-"déposée aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays; elle est licenciée "
-"exclusivement par X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:36 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun, le logo Solaris, le logo Java Coffee "
-"Cup, docs.sun.com, Java et Solaris sont des marques de fabrique ou des "
-"marques déposées de Sun Microsystems, Inc., ou ses filiales, aux Etats-Unis "
-"et dans d'autres pays. Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence "
-"et sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de SPARC "
-"International, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Les produits "
-"portant les marques SPARC sont basés sur une architecture développée par Sun "
-"Microsystems, Inc."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:37 (para)
-msgid ""
-"L'interface d'utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et Sun a été développée par "
-"Sun Microsystems, Inc. pour ses utilisateurs et licenciés. Sun reconnaît les "
-"efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le développement du "
-"concept des interfaces d'utilisation visuelle ou graphique pour l'industrie "
-"de l'informatique. Sun détient une licence non exclusive de Xerox sur "
-"l'interface d'utilisation graphique Xerox, cette licence couvrant également "
-"les licenciés de Sun qui mettent en place l'interface d'utilisation "
-"graphique OPEN LOOK et qui, en outre, se conforment aux licences écrites de "
-"Sun."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:38 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Les produits qui font l'objet de cette publication et les informations qu'il "
-"contient sont régis par la legislation américaine en matière de contrôle des "
-"exportations et peuvent être soumis au droit d'autres pays dans le domaine "
-"des exportations et importations. Les utilisations finales, ou utilisateurs "
-"finaux, pour des armes nucléaires, des missiles, des armes chimiques ou "
-"biologiques ou pour le nucléaire maritime, directement ou indirectement, "
-"sont strictement interdites. Les exportations ou réexportations vers des "
-"pays sous embargo des Etats-Unis, ou vers des entités figurant sur les "
-"listes d'exclusion d'exportation américaines, y compris, mais de manière non "
-"exclusive, la liste de personnes qui font objet d'un ordre de ne pas "
-"participer, d'une façon directe ou indirecte, aux exportations des produits "
-"ou des services qui sont régis par la legislation américaine en matière de "
-"contrôle des exportations et la liste de ressortissants spécifiquement "
-"designés, sont rigoureusement interdites."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:39 (para)
-msgid ""
-"LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE \"EN L'ETAT\" ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS, "
-"DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES, "
-"DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE "
-"GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L'APTITUDE A UNE "
-"UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L'ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:42 (title)
-msgid "Introduction"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:43 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris 2008.11</trademark> Package Manager "
-"Online Help!"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:44 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Use this help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate "
-"through this help by clicking on the topics displayed in the side bar."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:45 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The OpenSolaris 2008.11 <application>Package Manager</application> "
-"application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System "
-"(IPS) software. IPS is a network-centric packaging system that enables users "
-"to download and install packages, create and manage repositories, mirror "
-"repositories, and create and publish their own packages to a repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:46 (para)
-msgid ""
-"See the <ulink url=\"http://dlc.sun.com/osol/docs/content/2008.11/"
-"IMGPACKAGESYS/\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> "
-"for information on IPS."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:47 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <application>Package Manager</application> enables you to perform the "
-"following tasks:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:48 (para)
-msgid "Search, install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:50 (para)
-msgid "Add and modify repositories."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:52 (para)
-msgid "Create, remove and manage boot environments."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:55 (para)
-msgid ""
-"See the <xref linkend=\"glossary-1\"/> for definitions of the terms used in "
-"this document."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:58 (title)
-msgid "Package Manager Screencast"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:59 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Learn how to use the OpenSolaris 2008.11 Package Manager through a "
-"screencast. Click <ulink url=\"http://webcast-west.sun.com/"
-"interactive/09B01790/index.html\">here</ulink> to go the Package Manager "
-"screencast."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:61 (title)
-msgid "Starting Package Manager"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:62 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can start the <application>Package Manager</application> in the "
-"following ways:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:63 (emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop Menu"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:64 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</"
-"guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Package Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:67 (emphasis)
-msgid "Command line"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:68 (para)
-msgid "Run the following command :"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:69 (userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "$ gksu packagemanager &"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:74 (title)
-msgid "Package Manager Window"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:75 (para)
-msgid ""
-"When you start the <application>Package Manager</application>, the following "
-"window is displayed:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:76 (title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main Window"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:80 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The main window of the <application>Package Manager</application> consists "
-"of the following elements :"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:81 (emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:82 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side drop-"
-"down menu. The drop-down menu shows the list of categories available such as "
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Applications-Desktop</emphasis>, <emphasis role="
-"\"strong\">Applications Web based</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong"
-"\">Operating System</emphasis>."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:85 (emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:86 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <guilabel>Show</guilabel> drop-down menu enables you to filter the list "
-"of packages by the following options:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:87 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>– Shows the list of all "
-"packages available in the current repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:89 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of "
-"packages installed on your system."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:91 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates Available</emphasis> — Shows the list of "
-"packages that have newer versions available in the current repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:93 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Non-installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list "
-"of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently "
-"selected repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:95 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of "
-"packages that you have selected."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:100 (emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:101 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be "
-"performed by using the menus on the menubar."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:102 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <guilabel>Repositories</guilabel> drop-down menu is also located on the "
-"toolbar."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:105 (emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:106 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can access the menus on the menubar to perform all of the commands "
-"related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:110 (emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name and Description"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:111 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and "
-"their status are displayed here."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:114 (emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:115 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click a package to select it. Details of the selected package such as name, "
-"version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:118 (emphasis)
-msgid "Repository Drop-down Menu"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:119 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The list of available repositories is shown in the repository drop-down "
-"menu. Click a repository name to select it."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:120 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click the <guilabel>Reload</guilabel> button to reload the Package Manager "
-"and view the list of packages from the newly selected repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:127 (title)
-msgid "Working With the Package Manager"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:128 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The following sections document the tasks that can be performed with the "
-"<application>Package Manager</application>."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:130 (title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:131 (para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:132 (para)
-msgid ""
-"In the main window of the <application>Package Manager</application>, click "
-"the <guibutton>Reload</guibutton> button to view the latest list of packages "
-"available to you."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:134 (para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package to select it."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:136 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> in the toolbar to start the "
-"package installation process."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:137 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</"
-"guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the "
-"package installation process."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:139 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <application>Package Manager</application> checks for dependencies. "
-"Click <guilabel>Show Details</guilabel> to see more information about the "
-"package and its dependencies ."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:141 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Review the package installation information and the package dependencies "
-"details in the <guilabel>Install Confirmation</guilabel> dialog."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:142 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to proceed with the package installation."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:143 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation. No "
-"changes are made and you are returned to the main window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:145 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <guilabel>Downloading Packages</guilabel> dialog is displayed. Click "
-"<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> if you want to cancel the package "
-"installation. No changes are made and you are returned to the main window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:148 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The packages are installed. The updated list of packages are displayed in "
-"the main window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:150 (title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:151 (para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:152 (para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages that you want to remove."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:154 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the toolbar to start the "
-"process."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:155 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</"
-"guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:157 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in "
-"the <guilabel>Remove Confirmation</guilabel> dialog."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:159 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to confirm. After you click the "
-"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, you cannot undo the package removal."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:160 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. No changes are "
-"made and you are returned to the main window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:164 (title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:165 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Type the name of the package that you want to search for in the "
-"<guilabel>Search</guilabel> box. Enter the complete name, description, or a "
-"partial name to search for the package. For example, you might enter one of "
-"the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</"
-"filename> :"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:166 (para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:168 (para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:170 (para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:173 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> "
-"menu to cut, copy, paste, or clear text in the <guilabel>Search</guilabel> "
-"tab."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:175 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Use the icon on the right hand side of the <guilabel>Search</guilabel> tab "
-"to clear the search results."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:180 (title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:181 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Look for the green icon next to the installed package name. This icon "
-"indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently "
-"selected repository. Select the package and click the <guibutton>Install/"
-"Update</guibutton> button to install the latest version of the package."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:183 (title)
-msgid "Switch Between Configured Repositories"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:184 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Use the <guilabel>Repositories</guilabel> drop-down menu on the toolbar to "
-"view a list of configured repositories. Click a repository name to switch to "
-"a different repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:186 (title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:187 (para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2008.11 release is a boot environment."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:188 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A boot environment is an image that is bootable. The boot environment "
-"consists of a root file system and, optionally, other file systems, such as "
-"<filename>/usr</filename>, <filename>/var</filename>, or <filename>/export</"
-"filename>. These other file systems are mounted below the root file system. "
-"The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that "
-"contain system software are required to be zfs datasets."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:189 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can maintain multiple boot environments on your system. The primary "
-"reason to have more than one boot environment on your system is to create "
-"backups of your existing boot environments before you modify them. Then, you "
-"have the option of booting a backup boot environment when needed. Use the "
-"<command>beadm(1)</command> utility to create, and manage your boot "
-"environments."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:190 (para)
-msgid ""
-"For detailed instructions about the <command>beadm</command> utility, see "
-"the <literal>beadm</literal>(1M) man page."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:191 (para)
-msgid ""
-"See the <ulink url=\"http://dlc.sun.com/osol/docs/content/2008.11/"
-"snapupgrade/snap3.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot "
-"Environments</citetitle></ulink> document for more information on boot "
-"environments."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:192 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <application>Package Manager</application> creates a clone of the active "
-"boot environment when an image is updated."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:194 (title)
-msgid "Update the Current Image (Update All Packages)"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:195 (para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:196 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click the <guilabel>Update All</guilabel> button to start the process of "
-"updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages in your image."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:197 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Update "
-"All</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:198 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <guilabel>Update All</guilabel> button is enabled when updates are "
-"available to the installed packages."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:201 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <guilabel>Update All</guilabel> window is displayed. Click "
-"<guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and proceed "
-"with the Update All process."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:202 (para)
-msgid ""
-"During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is "
-"created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state "
-"that existed before the Update All process was started. If the Package "
-"Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be "
-"displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"ghmyd\"/> section on how to rectify the "
-"error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:203 (para) package-manager.xml:318
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:205 (para) package-manager.xml:209
-#: package-manager.xml:316
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:207 (para)
-msgid ""
-"If you chose to proceed, the Package Manager checks for dependencies and the "
-"<guilabel>Install/Update Confirmation</guilabel> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:208 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Review the packages to be installed and click <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to "
-"proceed."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:211 (para)
-msgid "The packages are downloaded and installed."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:213 (para) package-manager.xml:337
-msgid ""
-"Read the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/indiana/resources/"
-"relnotes/200811/x86/\">Release Notes</ulink> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:214 (para) package-manager.xml:338
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:218 (title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:219 (para) package-manager.xml:343
-msgid ""
-"A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be "
-"created for the Update All process to be completed. An error message is "
-"displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an "
-"error message such as :"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:220 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<literal>Not enough disk space: the selected action cannot be performed. You "
-"may choose to return to BE Management to manage your boot environments and "
-"free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:221 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process and "
-"return to the main window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:222 (para) package-manager.xml:346
-msgid ""
-"Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue "
-"with the Update All process:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:223 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>BE Management</guibutton> to go to the <guilabel>Boot "
-"Environment Management</guilabel> dialog."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:224 (para) package-manager.xml:348
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the process and return to the "
-"main window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:226 (para) package-manager.xml:350
-msgid ""
-"If you chose to rectify the error, go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"ghmya"
-"\"/> section. Follow instructions to delete old or unused boot environments "
-"and free up disk space."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:228 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click the <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> icon to restart the process of "
-"updating all packages."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:233 (title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:234 (para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments :"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:235 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Boot Environment "
-"Management</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <guilabel>Boot Environment "
-"Management</guilabel> dialog."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:237 (para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:238 (emphasis)
-msgid "Change the default boot environment."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:239 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Select the boot environment that you want to be active on system reboot. "
-"This is the default boot environment."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:242 (emphasis)
-msgid "Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:243 (para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:244 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your "
-"boot environments."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:250 (para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:251 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to reset the changes and show the initial "
-"state of the boot environments."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:252 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes and return to the "
-"main window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:254 (para)
-msgid ""
-"If you chose to proceed, the <guilabel>BE Management Confirmation</guilabel> "
-"dialog is displayed. Review the boot environment changes and click "
-"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:255 (para)
-msgid ""
-"After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes you "
-"made to the boot environments."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:257 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot "
-"environment</emphasis> setting is effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:259 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes and return to the "
-"<literal>BE Management</literal> dialog box."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:261 (para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the new default boot environment."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:265 (title)
-msgid "Edit Repositories"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:266 (para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add, remove, or configure repositories:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:267 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit "
-"Repositories</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <guilabel>Manage "
-"Repositories</guilabel> dialog."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:269 (para)
-msgid "In this dialog box, you can perform the following actions :"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:270 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Add a Repository</emphasis> – To add a new "
-"repository, type the name and the address (URL) of the repository. Click "
-"<guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:272 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove a Repository</emphasis> – To remove a "
-"repository, click a repository name from the list to select it. Click "
-"<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:273 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A repository that has been set as the preferred repository cannot be "
-"removed. To remove a preferred repository, set a nonpreferred repository as "
-"preferred, and then remove the repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:276 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Set a Preferred Repository</emphasis> – To set a "
-"repository as a preferred repository, click the radio button next to the "
-"repository that you would like to set as the preferred repository. Click "
-"<guibutton>Close</guibutton> if you are not making any other changes to the "
-"repository information."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:278 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify a Repository</emphasis> – Perform the "
-"following steps to modify a repository :"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:279 (para)
-msgid "Select the repository that you want to modify."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:281 (para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:282 (para)
-msgid "The <guilabel>Modify Repository</guilabel> dialog box is displayed."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:284 (para)
-msgid "Type a valid name and URL for the repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:285 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A repository name is considered valid if it does not exist in the current "
-"list of repositories."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:287 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and return to the "
-"<guilabel>Manage Repositories</guilabel> dialog box."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:288 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel your changes. You are returned "
-"to the <guilabel>Manage Repositories</guilabel> dialog box."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:297 (title)
-msgid "Update Manager"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:298 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <application>Update Manager</application> is a separate application that "
-"launches from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are "
-"available in the repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:300 (title)
-msgid "Working With Update Manager"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:301 (title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:305 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can use the <application>Update Manager</application> application to "
-"update the installed packages in your image."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:306 (para)
-msgid ""
-"For the OpenSolaris 2008.11 release, the <application>Update Manager</"
-"application> updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed "
-"packages in the image. This is equivalent to updating the image."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:308 (para)
-msgid ""
-"When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is "
-"displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop and the "
-"<guilabel>Update Manager</guilabel> window is displayed."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:309 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</"
-"guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</"
-"guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:311 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click the <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> button in the <guilabel>Update "
-"All</guilabel> window to begin the process of updating your image."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:312 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you "
-"want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:314 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The <guilabel>Update All</guilabel> window is displayed. Click "
-"<guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update "
-"all packages in the current image."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:315 (para)
-msgid ""
-"During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is "
-"created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state "
-"that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:317 (para)
-msgid ""
-"If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error "
-"message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"ghquj\"/> section on how "
-"to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:321 (para)
-msgid ""
-"If you chose to proceed, the <guilabel>Installing Updates</guilabel> windows "
-"are displayed. There are four stages to the package installation process:"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:322 (para)
-msgid "Evaluate."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:324 (para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:326 (para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:328 (para)
-msgid "Index."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:331 (para)
-msgid ""
-"You can choose to cancel the process only during the Evaluate and Download "
-"stages. Click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to cancel the "
-"installation process. No changes are made and you are returned to the main "
-"window of the Update Manager."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:332 (para)
-msgid ""
-"If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</"
-"guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An "
-"error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:335 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information on "
-"each of the installation processes."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:342 (title)
-msgid "Update All Errors (Update Manager)"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:344 (para)
-msgid ""
-"<literal>Not enough disk space: the Update All action cannot be performed. "
-"Click OK to launch BE Management to manage your existing BEs and free up "
-"disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:345 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>No</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process and return "
-"to the Update Manager main window."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:347 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the "
-"<literal>Boot Environment Management</literal> dialog."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:352 (para)
-msgid ""
-"Click the <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> button in the <literal>Update "
-"Manager</literal> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:358 (title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:359 (glossterm)
-msgid "authority"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:360 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a "
-"package to a repository."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:362 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A location that is configured to point to a repository and might contain "
-"additional information about the package, such as the publisher of the "
-"package. The repository, in turn, serves the packages from the (default) "
-"authority, for downloading purposes. The developer-quality packages managed "
-"by Sun and made available through http://pkg.opensolaris.com is an example "
-"of an authority."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:367 (glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:368 (para)
-msgid ""
-"For an OpenSolaris release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable "
-"OpenSolaris environment. The boot environment consists of a root file system "
-"and, optionally, other file systems, such as <filename>/usr</filename>, "
-"<filename>/var</filename>, or <filename>/export</filename>. These other file "
-"systems are mounted below the root file system. The root file system and all "
-"other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are "
-"required to be zfs datasets."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:369 (para)
-msgid ""
-"The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Exactly one "
-"active boot environment can be booted. An inactive boot environment is not "
-"currently booted, but can be in a state of waiting for activation on the "
-"next reboot."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:372 (glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:373 (para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:374 (para)
-msgid ""
-"For installation, a clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a "
-"file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:377 (glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:378 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, "
-"snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the "
-"ZFS namespace."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:381 (glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:382 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire operating "
-"system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:385 (glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:386 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a "
-"defined format."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:389 (glossterm)
-msgid "preferred repository"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:390 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A default repository that is the source for packages. If a user does not "
-"explicitly specify a repository when installing and updating packages, the "
-"preferred authority is chosen as the source for packages."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:391 (para)
-msgid ""
-"During the creation of an image, the initially specified authority is marked "
-"as the preferred authority. Any one of the authorities associated with an "
-"image can be set as the preferred authority by using the <command>set-"
-"authority</command> command with the <option>P</option> option."
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:394 (glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr ""
-
-#: package-manager.xml:395 (para)
-msgid ""
-"A location where packages are available for download. A repository can "
-"contain packages from many authorities. Conversely, many repositories can "
-"contain packages from a single authority. Also called the depot server."
-msgstr ""
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml:0 (None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr ""
Binary file src/gui/help/C/figures/pkgmgr-main.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/help/C/figures/startpage_new.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/help/C/figures/update_all_new.png has changed
Binary file src/gui/help/C/figures/webinstall.png has changed
--- a/src/gui/help/C/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,723 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-<para lang="fr"/>
-<para>Ce logiciel et la documentation qui l’accompagne sont protégés par les lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ils sont concédés sous licence et soumis à des restrictions d’utilisation et de divulgation. Sauf disposition de votre contrat de licence ou de la loi, vous ne pouvez pas copier, reproduire, traduire, diffuser, modifier, breveter, transmettre, distribuer, exposer, exécuter, publier ou afficher le logiciel, même partiellement, sous quelque forme et par quelque procédé que ce soit. Par ailleurs, il est interdit de procéder à toute ingénierie inverse du logiciel, de le désassembler ou de le décompiler, excepté à des fins d’interopérabilité avec des logiciels tiers ou tel que prescrit par la loi.</para>
-<para>Les informations fournies dans ce document sont susceptibles de modification sans préavis. Par ailleurs, Oracle Corporation ne garantit pas qu’elles soient exemptes d’erreurs et vous invite, le cas échéant, à lui en faire part par écrit.</para>
-<para>Si ce logiciel, ou la documentation qui l’accompagne, est concédé sous licence au Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, ou à toute entité qui délivre la licence de ce logiciel ou l’utilise pour le compte du Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, la notice suivante s’applique :</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS. Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>Ce logiciel ou matériel a été développé pour un usage général dans le cadre d’applications de gestion des informations. Ce logiciel ou matériel n’est pas conçu ni n’est destiné à être utilisé dans des applications à risque, notamment dans des applications pouvant causer des dommages corporels. Si vous utilisez ce logiciel ou matériel dans le cadre d’applications dangereuses, il est de votre responsabilité de prendre toutes les mesures de secours, de sauvegarde, de redondance et autres mesures nécessaires à son utilisation dans des conditions optimales de sécurité. Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés déclinent toute responsabilité quant aux dommages causés par l’utilisation de ce logiciel ou matériel pour ce type d’applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées d’Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses affiliés.Tout autre nom mentionné peut correspondre à des marques appartenant à d’autres propriétaires qu’Oracle.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, le logo AMD et le logo AMD Opteron sont des marques ou des marques déposées d’Advanced Micro Devices. Intel et Intel Xeon sont des marques ou des marques déposées d’Intel Corporation. Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques ou des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc. UNIX est une marque déposée concédé sous license par X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/ar/ar.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1504 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
- "Project-Id-Version: Package Manager\n"
- "POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-14 11:47+0900\n"
- "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-01-14 11:47+0900\n"
- "Last-Translator: Hosam Al Ali <[email protected]>\n"
- "Language-Team: Arabic <[email protected]>\n"
- "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
- "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
- "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:38(None) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:88(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:68(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:583(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:609(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:3(title)
-msgid "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "المساعدة المباشرة على النت لمدير الحزم لنظام OpenSolaris 2010.03"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:4(firstname)
-msgid "OpenSolaris"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:5(surname)
-msgid "Publications"
-msgstr "المنشورات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:8(pubsnumber)
-msgid "822-7173"
-msgstr "822-7173"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:10(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2009"
-msgstr "حزيران 2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:11(publishername)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:13(year)
-msgid "2009"
-msgstr "2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:33(title)
-msgid "About the Package Manager"
-msgstr "حول مدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:34(para)
-msgid "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-msgstr "مرحبابك الى <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 المساعدة المباشرة على النت لمدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:35(para)
-msgid "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-msgstr "إستخدم محتويات المساعدة للتعلم إستخدام مدير الحزم . إنتقل من خلال المساعدة وذلك بالضغط على المواضيع التي تحتاجها ضمن القائمة الجانبية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:36(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-msgstr "مدير الحزم لنظام OpenSolaris 2010.03 هو تطبيق ذو واجهة خاصة بالمستخدم لنظام صور الحزم (IPS). مدير الحزم يسمح بمجموعة من الخيارات تقدم من خلال موجه الأوامر Comman-Line (CLI) "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "مدير الحزم"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:41(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "مدير الحزم يسمح لك لتنفيذ المهام التالية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:42(para)
-msgid "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-msgstr "تنصيب, إزالة, البحث عم الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:44(para)
-msgid "Update your system"
-msgstr "ترقية نظامك "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:46(para)
-msgid "Add and manage publishers"
-msgstr "إضافة وإدارة الناشرون "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:48(para)
-msgid "Create, remove, and manage boot environments"
-msgstr "إنشاء, إزالة, إدارة بيئة الإقلاع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:51(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for a definition of the terms used in this document."
-msgstr "إنظر الى <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> للاطلاع على تعريف المصطلحات المستخدمة في ضمن هذه المستندات"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:53(title)
-msgid "About Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "حول صورة نظام التحزيم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:54(para)
-msgid "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-msgstr "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:55(para)
-msgid "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-msgstr "بعد التحقق من تنصيب نظام OpenSolaris 2010.03, سوف تجد مجموعة من التطبيقات تستعمل بشكل أساسي ومتوفرة, وهذه التطبيقات متوفرة على شكل حزم يمكن تحميلها من خلال مستودعات الحزم وتنصيبها من الشبكة. مستودعات الحزم هي المصدر الأساسي للحصول على التطبيقات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:56(para)
-msgid "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-msgstr "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:57(para)
-msgid "Once you have installed packages, IPS enables you to search, update, and manage packages on your system."
-msgstr "ما إن نصبت الحزم , IPS يمكنك من البحث , والترقية, ةو"
- "إدارة الحزم ضمن نظامك "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:58(para)
-msgid "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-msgstr "ب IPS , بإمكانك ترقية نظامك للنسخة الأحدث من OpenSolaris "
- "تنصيب والترقية البرمجيات أخر الإصدارات ضمن المستودعات , والحصول على الحزم من النسخ الأخرى من المستودعات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:59(emphasis)
-msgid "The Package Manager provides a subset of the tasks that can be performed from the command-line."
-msgstr "مدير حزم IPS يتيح مجموعة من المهام التي يمكن تنفيذها من خلال سطر الأوامر "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:61(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-msgstr "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:62(para)
-msgid "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-msgstr "لمزيد من المستندات حول IPS, إنظر الى url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>دليل نظام الحزم</citetitle></ulink>و<filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:63(para)
-msgid "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-msgstr "لمزيد من المعلومات حول IPS, إنظر الى <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:65(title)
-msgid "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-msgstr "البداية مع مدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:66(para)
-msgid "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-msgstr "عند بداية تشغيل مدير الحزم, صفحة البدأ تظهر كالمثال التالي "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:67(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Start Page"
-msgstr "صفحة البدأ لمدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:71(para)
-msgid "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-msgstr "صفحة البدأ تسمح بعرض كل الميزات للحزم المنصبة. وتحوي قائمة ببعض الحزم المشهورة والمحملة بالأخر ضمن مجتمع مستخدمي OpenSolaris. قائمة التوصية توجهك للتطبيقات التي تحمل من معظم مستخدمي OpenSolaris. إضغط على وصلة الحزم لتنصبها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:72(para)
-msgid "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "صفحة البدأ أيضا تسمح بوصلات لمعلومات حول مشروع OpenSolaris, سجل ضمن رسائل المعلومات وإتصل بمجتمع OpenSolaris "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:73(para)
-msgid "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "لإغلاق صفحة البدأ وإظهار قائمة الحزم من خلال المستودع المختار, "
- "نفذ الخطوات التالية ضمن الصفحة الرئيسية من مدير الحزم:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:74(para)
-msgid "Select a package category"
-msgstr "إختر فئة الحزمة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:76(para)
-msgid "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-msgstr "تغير <emphasis role=\"strong\">عرض</emphasis>القائمة المنسدلة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:78(para)
-msgid "Perform a search"
-msgstr "تنفيذ البحث "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:80(para)
-msgid "Change the publisher"
-msgstr "تغير المستودع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:83(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to return to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "إختر "
- "<menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice> للعودة الى صفحة البداية بأي وقت "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:84(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "إنظر <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> لإيقاف <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> صفحة البدأ عند بدأ تشغيل مدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:86(title)
-msgid "About The Package Manager Window"
-msgstr "حول نافذة مدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:87(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main View"
-msgstr "الصفحة الرئيسية لمدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:91(para)
-msgid "The main window of the Package Manager consists of the following elements :"
-msgstr "النافذة الرئيسية ضمن مدير الحزم تتألف من العناصر التالية :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:92(emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr "شريط القوائم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:93(para)
-msgid "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr "شريط القوائم يحوي قوائم أساسية وقوائم ثانوية مطلوبة لتنفيذ كل مهام مدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:97(emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr "شريط الأدوات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:98(para)
-msgid "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-msgstr "شريط الأدوات يحوي أيقونات لمجموعة من الأوامر التي يمكن وتنفيذها من القوائم ضمن شريط القوائم <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> الحقل أيضا موجود ضمن شريط الأدوات. بإمكانك تنفيذ المهام التالية من خلال شريط الأدوات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:99(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">ترقيات</emphasis> – إضغط <emphasis role=\"strong\">ترقيات</emphasis> للتحقق منها وتنصيب الترقيات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:101(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">تنصيب/ترقية</emphasis> – إختر الحزم وإضغط على <emphasis role=\"strong\">تنصيب/ترقية</emphasis> لتنصيب أو ترقية الحزمة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:103(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">تحديث</emphasis> – إضغط على <emphasis role=\"strong\">تحديث</emphasis> لإعادة تحميل قائمة الحزم"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:105(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">إزالة</emphasis> – إختر الحزمة وإضغط على <emphasis role=\"strong\">إزالة</emphasis> لإزالة الحزمة"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:107(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">البحث عن الحزم</emphasis> – إكتب إسم او وصف للحزمة ضمن <emphasis role=\"strong\">بحث</emphasis> حقل البحث عن الحزم. إنظر الى <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> القسم كمثال عن كيفية البحث عن حزمة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:112(emphasis)
-msgid "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-msgstr "القائمة المنسدلة لمستودعات الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:113(para)
-msgid "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-msgstr "قائمة المستودعات المتوفرة <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> القائمة المنسدلة . المستتخدمون بإمكانهم تنفيذ كل المهام التالية من خلال القائمة المنسدلة للمستودعات"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:114(emphasis)
-msgid "Select a publisher"
-msgstr "إختر المستودع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:116(emphasis)
-msgid "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-msgstr "إعرض قائمة الحزم المنصبة من كل المستودعات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:118(emphasis)
-msgid "Search for package across all publishers"
-msgstr "البحث عن حزمة من خلال المستودع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:120(emphasis)
-msgid "Add a publisher"
-msgstr "إضافة مستودع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:125(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr "قائمة بأصناف الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:126(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "بإمكانك تصفح الحزم المتوفرة ضمن تصنيفات ضمن اللوحة الموجودة ضمن الطرف اليساري . "
- "إضغط على التصنيف لرؤية التصنيفات الداخلية للحزم المتوفرة. هناك 6 تصنيفات أساسية تظهر ضمن برنامج مدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:127(emphasis)
-msgid "Applications"
-msgstr "التطبيقات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:129(emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop (GNOME)"
-msgstr "سطح المكتب (GNOME)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:131(emphasis)
-msgid "Development"
-msgstr "تطوير "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:133(emphasis)
-msgid "Drivers"
-msgstr "تعريفات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:135(emphasis)
-msgid "System"
-msgstr "نظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:137(emphasis)
-msgid "Web Services"
-msgstr "خدمة الويب "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:142(emphasis)
-msgid "Recent Searches"
-msgstr "البحث الأخير "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:143(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-msgstr "مدير الحزم يحفظ أخر عمليات بحث على الحزم. إضغط على البحث الأخير ضمن اللوحة اليسرى لعرض الحزم التي بحثت عنا سابقا "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:146(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr "قائمة بالحزم حسب الحالة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:147(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">العرض</emphasis> القائمة المنسدلة تسمح لعرض حالة الحزمة ضمن الخيارات التالية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:148(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">كل الحزم</emphasis> – عرض قائمة لكل الحزم المتوفرة ضمن المستودع الحالي "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:150(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">الحزم المنصبة</emphasis> – إعرض قائمة للحزم المنصبة ضمن المستودع الحالي ضمن النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:152(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">ترقيات</emphasis> — يظهر قائمة الحزم ذات الإصدار الجديد بالإضافة للمستودع الخاص بها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:154(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">الحزم الغير منصبة</emphasis> – يظهر قائمة بالحزم الغير منصبة, لكنها متوفرة ضمن هذا المستودع الحالي "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:156(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that you have selected."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">الحزم المختارة</emphasis> – أظهر قائمة بالحزم المختارة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:161(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-msgstr "إسم الحزمة, الحالة, و الوصف "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:162(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-msgstr "قائمة الحزم ضمن التصنيف المختار, وصف موجز, وحالته تظهر هنا "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:163(para)
-msgid "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-msgstr "إسم المستودع أيضا يظهر هنا ضمن الحالات التالية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:164(para)
-msgid "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-msgstr "عندما <emphasis role=\"strong\">المستودع</emphasis> تعير القائمة المنسدلة لكل المستودعات (المنصبة)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:166(para)
-msgid "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-msgstr "عندما نتائج البحث تظهر لكل من المستودعات (البحث) خيار"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:168(para)
-msgid "When a recent search result is displayed"
-msgstr "عندما نتائج البحث الأخير تظهر "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:173(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr "تفاصيل الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:174(para)
-msgid "Click a package name to select it. Details of the selected package, such as name, version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr "إضغط على إسم الحزمة لإختيارها . تفاصيل الحزم المختارة , كالإسم , الإصدار , الملفات المعتدمة عليها , والترخيص يظهر يظهر ضمن النافذة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:180(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Settings"
-msgstr "إعدادات برنامج مدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:181(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-msgstr "إستعمل <menuchoice><guimenu>تحرير</guimenu><guimenuitem>تفضيلات</guimenuitem></menuchoice> لتغير إعدادات مدير الحزم. القسم التالي يناقش التفضيلات التي بإمكان المستخدم تغيرها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:182(title)
-msgid "Start Page Preferences"
-msgstr "بدء صفحة التفضيلات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:183(para)
-msgid "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "صفحة البدأ تظهر ضمن النافذة الرئيسية من مدير الحزم عندما بدأ عمل التطبيق. صفحة البدأ تسمح وصلات الى <ulink url=\"http://"
- "opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> لنافذة حيث بإمكانك الحصول على المعلومات حول OpenSolaris , الاشتراك في النشرات الإخبارية والإنضمام لمجتمعات OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:184(para)
-msgid "You can choose to turn off this setting so this page is not displayed when Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "بإمكانك إختيار لأغلاق هذه الإعدادات لذلك هذه النافذة لن تظهر عند تشغيل مدير الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:185(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-msgstr "إختر <menuchoice><guimenu>تحرير</guimenu><guimenuitem>تفضيلات</guimenuitem></menuchoice> من القائمة الرئيسية وأزل الإختيار <emphasis role=\"strong\">عرض صفحة البدأ عند البداية</emphasis> لإيقاف صفحة البدأ من الظهور. هذا المربع يكون مختار بالحالة الإفتراضية."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:186(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "إختر <menuchoice><guimenu>عرض</guimenu><guimenuitem>صفحة البدأ</guimenuitem></menuchoice> من القائمة الرئيسية للذهاب لصفحة البدأ عند أي وقت "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:188(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "الخروج من التفضيلات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:189(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-msgstr "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:190(para)
-msgid "The following settings are saved:"
-msgstr "The following settings are saved:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:191(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:193(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:195(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:199(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:200(para)
-msgid "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-msgstr "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:203(title)
-msgid "Working With Packages"
-msgstr "العمل مع الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:204(title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr "تنصيب الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:205(para)
-msgid "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:206(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:208(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:209(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "بإمكانك إختيار <menuchoice><guimenu>حزم</"
- "guimenu><guimenuitem>تنصيب\\ترقية</guimenuitem></menuchoice> للبدأ بعملية التنصيب "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:211(para)
-msgid "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-msgstr "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:213(para)
-msgid "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-msgstr "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:216(title)
-msgid "Installation Error"
-msgstr "خطأ بالتنصيب "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:217(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-msgstr "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:220(title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr "إزالة الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:221(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "نفذ الخطوات التالية لإزالة حزمة :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:222(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:224(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:225(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr "بإمكانك إختيار <menuchoice><guimenu>حزمة</"
- "guimenu><guimenuitem>إزالة</guimenuitem></menuchoice> لإزالة الحزمة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:227(para)
-msgid "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:229(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:233(title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr "البحث عن الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:234(para)
-msgid "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-msgstr "بإمكانك البحث على الحزمة بعدة طرق "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:235(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:236(para)
-msgid "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-msgstr "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:237(para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr "SUNWgames"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:239(para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr "العاب"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:241(para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr "GNOME-games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:244(para)
-msgid "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "للبحث عن برنامج SunStudio compiler, يجب عليك كتابة أحد الشروط التالي :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:245(para)
-msgid "compiler"
-msgstr "compiler"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:247(para)
-msgid "tools"
-msgstr "أدوات "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:251(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:252(para)
-msgid "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:253(para)
-msgid "python"
-msgstr "Python"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:255(para)
-msgid "book"
-msgstr "book"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:258(para)
-msgid "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-msgstr "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:262(para)
-msgid "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:264(para)
-msgid "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-msgstr "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:265(emphasis)
-msgid "The AND operator"
-msgstr "The AND operator"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:266(para)
-msgid "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-msgstr "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:269(emphasis)
-msgid "Double Quotes"
-msgstr "Double Quotes"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:270(para)
-msgid "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-msgstr "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:273(emphasis)
-msgid "Wildcard *"
-msgstr "Wildcard *"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:274(para)
-msgid "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-msgstr "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:275(para)
-msgid "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-msgstr "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:279(emphasis)
-msgid "The OR operator"
-msgstr "The OR operator"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:280(para)
-msgid "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-msgstr "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:285(title)
-msgid "Cancel Package Search"
-msgstr "Cancel Package Search"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:286(para)
-msgid "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-msgstr "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:288(title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr "ترقية الحزمة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:289(para)
-msgid "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-msgstr "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:290(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:292(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-msgstr "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:295(para)
-msgid "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-msgstr "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:297(para)
-msgid "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-msgstr "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:299(title)
-msgid "Package Version Information"
-msgstr "Package Version Information"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:300(para)
-msgid "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-msgstr "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:301(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:303(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:305(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:309(title)
-msgid "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-msgstr "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:310(para)
-msgid "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:311(para)
-msgid "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-msgstr "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:315(title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr "مقدمة لبيئة الإقلاع"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:316(para)
-msgid "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-msgstr "بيئة الإقلاع هي عبارة عن صورة إقلاعية . عند بدء تنصيب نظام OpenSolaris , بيئة الإقلاع قد تم إنشاؤها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:317(para)
-msgid "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-msgstr "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:318(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-msgstr "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:319(para)
-msgid "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-msgstr "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:320(para)
-msgid "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-msgstr "عند إستعمال مدير الحزم أو أمر <command>pkg image-update</"
- "command> لترقية كل الحزم ضمن البيئة إقلاع نظام OpenSolaris , نسخة عن بيئة الإقلاع بشكل أتوماتيكي تنشأ . والحزمة ترقى ضمن النسخة طبعا ماعدى النسخة الأساسية , وبعد نجاح الترقية وإكتماله النسخة الجديدة تفعل . ثم, النسخة ستكون بيئة الإقلاع الجديدة عند إعادة تشغيل النظام. بيئة الإقلاع الأساسية هي أيضا ستكون متوفرة كإختيار ثانوي"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:321(para)
-msgid "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-msgstr "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:322(title)
-msgid "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-msgstr "ترقية كامل الحزم(ترقية النسخة بك) "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:323(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr "نفذ الخطة التالية لترقية كامل الحزم ضمن صورة النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:324(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:325(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:326(para)
-msgid "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-msgstr "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:329(para)
-msgid "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-msgstr "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:330(emphasis)
-msgid "Preparation"
-msgstr "خصائص "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:332(emphasis)
-msgid "Download"
-msgstr "تحميل "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:334(emphasis)
-msgid "Install"
-msgstr "تنصيب "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:337(para)
-msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-msgstr "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:339(para)
-msgid "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-msgstr "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:340(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:343(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:344(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:345(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:350(title) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:656(title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr "تحديث جميع الأخطاء"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:351(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-msgstr "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:352(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:353(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:659(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:354(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:660(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-msgstr "نفذ الخطوات التالية إذا كنت تريد لتصحيح الخطأ والاستمرار"
- "مع كل عملية تحديث :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:355(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:357(para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr "إختر بيئة الإقلاع التي تريد حذفها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:358(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "لا تستطيع حذف بيئة اللإقلاع الحالية الفعالة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:360(para)
-msgid "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-msgstr "انت لا تريد لإعادة تشغيل النظام إذا أنت حذفت بعض بيئات الإقلاع"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:365(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "إضغط <guibutton>موافق</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:367(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:369(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:373(title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr "إدارة بيئة الإقلاع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:374(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-msgstr "القيام بالخطوات التالية لإدارة بيئة الإقلاع :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:375(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:377(para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr "في مربع الحوار ، يمكنك القيام الإجراءات التالية :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:378(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:380(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:381(para)
-msgid "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "لاتسطيع حذف بيئة الإقلاع الفعالة حاليا"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:383(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-msgstr "إذا إخترت بيئة إقلاع لتغير إسمها لايمكنك حذذفها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:388(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:389(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "إذا إخترت بيئة إقلاع للحذف لايمكن تغير إسمها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:391(para)
-msgid "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "بيئة الإقلاع الفعالة الحالية لايمكن تغير إسمها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:398(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:400(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:401(para)
-msgid "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-msgstr "بعد الضغط على <guibutton>موافق</guibutton>, لايمكنك التراجع عن التغير المطبق على بيئة الإقلاع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:403(para)
-msgid "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr "التغير الحاصل على <emphasis role=\"strong\">بيئة الإقلاع الإفتراضية</emphasis>الإعدادات تفعل فقط وقت إعادة تشغيل النظام"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:405(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:407(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-msgstr "إعادة تشغيل النظام للإقلاع على بيئة الإقلاع الجديدة الفعالة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:408(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-msgstr "إعادة تشغيل النظام فقط إذا تغير تفعيل بيئة الإقلاع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:414(title)
-msgid "Add and Manage Publishers"
-msgstr "Add and Manage Publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:415(para)
-msgid "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-msgstr "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:416(para)
-msgid "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-msgstr "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:417(title)
-msgid "Add a Publisher"
-msgstr "Add a Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:418(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:419(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:420(para)
-msgid "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:422(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:424(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:426(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:428(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:431(para)
-msgid "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-msgstr "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:434(title)
-msgid "Remove a Publisher"
-msgstr "Remove a Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:435(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:436(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:459(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:473(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:492(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:511(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:528(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:438(para)
-msgid "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:440(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:442(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:446(title)
-msgid "Set Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Set Publisher Priority"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:447(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:448(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:450(para)
-msgid "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-msgstr "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:451(emphasis)
-msgid "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-msgstr "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:453(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:465(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:484(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:503(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:520(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:537(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:457(title)
-msgid "Modify Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Modify Publisher Alias"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:458(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:461(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:463(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:467(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:486(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:505(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:522(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:539(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:471(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Add Publisher Origins"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:472(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:475(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:477(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:496(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:515(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:532(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:478(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:479(para)
-msgid "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-msgstr "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:482(para)
-msgid "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:490(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Remove Publisher Origins"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:491(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:494(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:497(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:499(para)
-msgid "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:500(para)
-msgid "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-msgstr "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:509(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-msgstr "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:516(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:518(para)
-msgid "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:526(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:527(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:530(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-msgstr "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:533(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:535(para)
-msgid "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:544(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "العمل ب WebInstall"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:545(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:546(title)
-msgid "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-msgstr "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:547(para)
-msgid "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-msgstr "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:548(para)
-msgid "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-msgstr "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:549(para)
-msgid "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:551(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-msgstr "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:553(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:555(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:557(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:559(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:561(para)
-msgid "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-msgstr "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:563(para)
-msgid "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-msgstr "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:567(title)
-msgid "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:568(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:569(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-msgstr "مكان توضع <filename>.p5i</filename>الملف حيث هو موجود ضمن سطح المكتب , صفحة البدأ ضمن مدير الحزم , أو على الموقع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:571(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-msgstr "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:572(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-msgstr "إضغط على <filename>.p5i</filename> الملف على سطح المكتب ,التطبيقات المرتبطة , مدير الحزم ضمن حالة WebInsatll , سوف يعمل "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:574(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-msgstr "تشغيل مدير الحزم من مواجه الأوامر بمسار <filename>.p5i</filename> الملف , "
- "كمثال اكتب الأمر التالي ضمن موجه الاوامر "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(command)
-msgid "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:577(para)
-msgid "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-msgstr "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:578(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-msgstr "إذا <filename>.p5i</filename> موقع المخدم التي لا تملك mime المسجل إحفظ <filename>.p5i</filename>الملف على سطح المكتب ثم إضغط عليه لتفعيل التنصيب من خلال الويب "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:582(para)
-msgid "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-msgstr "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:586(para)
-msgid "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "التأكيد او إلغاء عملية WebInstall"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:587(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:589(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:590(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:592(para)
-msgid "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:594(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr "إضغط <guibutton>موافق</guibutton> للتنفيذ"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:596(para)
-msgid "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:597(para)
-msgid "The application will close when all packages are installed."
-msgstr "التطبيق سوف يغلق عندما ينتهي تنصيب كل الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:601(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-msgstr "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:602(para)
-msgid "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-msgstr "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:605(title)
-msgid "Working With the Update Manager"
-msgstr "العمل ضمن مدير الترقية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:606(title)
-msgid "About The Update Manager"
-msgstr "حول مدير الترقية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:607(para)
-msgid "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-msgstr "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:608(title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr "النافذة الرئيسية لمدير الترقية"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:612(para)
-msgid "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-msgstr "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:613(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-msgstr "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:616(title)
-msgid "Using the Update Manager"
-msgstr "إستعمال مدير الترقية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:617(para)
-msgid "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-msgstr "عندما الترقية تكون متوفرة لتنصيب الحزم, أيقونة التنبيه تظهر ضمن لوحة التنبيه ضمن سطح مكتب OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:618(para)
-msgid "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr "بإمكانك أيضا الضغط على <menuchoice><guimenu>نظام</"
- "guimenu><guisubmenu>إدارة </guisubmenu><guimenuitem>مدير الترقية</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice> تشغيل بشكل يدوي "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:619(para)
-msgid "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-msgstr "عندما تنبه من أجل ترقية التطبيقات الخطوات التالية تبدأ لعملية ترقية النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:620(para)
-msgid "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:622(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:623(para)
-msgid "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr "إختر الحزمة وإضغط على <guilabel>تفاصيل</guilabel> لوحة إذا أردت عرض مزيد من المعلومات حول الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:626(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:627(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-msgstr "إضغط <guibutton>تنفيذ</guibutton> لإنشاء بيئة إقلاع وترقية كل الحزم ضمن صورة النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:628(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "خلال عملية ترقية الكل , نسخة عن بيئةالإقلاع تنشأ. هذه النسخة تكون متوفرة للمستخدم للإقلاع بيئة الإقلاع الحالية قبل عملية ترقية الكل "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:629(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "إذا مدير الحزم لم يستطع إنشاء بيئة إقلاع جديدة, فأن رسالة خطأ تظهر, إنظر "
- "<xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> القسم حول كيف بإمكانك تصحيح الخطأ والمتابعة بترقية صورة النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:630(para)
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-msgstr "إسم بيئة الإقلاع الجديدة بشكل أتوماتيكي ينشأ. بإمكانك قبول الإسم المنشأ من قبل النظام او تسمح بإسم خاص بك لبيئة الإقلاع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:633(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "إضغط على <guibutton>إلغاء</guibutton> لإلغاء العملية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:637(para)
-msgid "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-msgstr "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:638(para)
-msgid "Prepare"
-msgstr "تحضير "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:640(para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr "تحميل ."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:642(para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr "تنصيب ."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:645(para)
-msgid "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-msgstr "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:646(para)
-msgid "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-msgstr "إضغط على <guilabel>تفاصيل</guilabel> اللوحة تظهر معلومات إضافية حول كل عملية من عمليات التنصيب "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:647(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "إذا خطأ حدث خلال واحد من مراحل الترقية , <guilabel>تفاصيل</ "
- "guilabel> اللوحة تتوسع وتفاصيل الخطأ تظهر .حالة الخطا تؤشر لتظهر فشل المرحلة "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:650(para)
-msgid "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr "إقرأ <xref linkend=\"ملاحظات_الإصدار\"/> قبل إعادة تشغل النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:651(para)
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr "يجب عليك إعادة تشغيل الكمبيوتر الخاص بك لتغيير النظام إلى حيز التنفيذ."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:657(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-msgstr "بيئة إقلاع جديدة تنسخ <emphasis role=\"strong\">يجب</emphasis> أن تنشأ من أجل ترقية كل العمليات من ان تنتهي ."
- "الخطأ التالي الرسالة تظهر إذا نسخة بيئة الإقلاع لم يستطع أن ينشأها "
- "منطقة قيود:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:658(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:661(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:663(para)
-msgid "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-msgstr "إذهب الى الخطوة 2 من ضمن <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> قسم."
- "إتبع الشروحات لحذف القديم أو يئة الإقلاع الغير مستعملة وللحصول على مساحة فارغة إضافية "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:665(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:669(title)
-msgid "2010.03 Release Notes"
-msgstr "2010.03 Release Notes"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:670(para)
-msgid "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-msgstr "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:674(title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr "قائمة بحزم صور النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:675(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "الناشر "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:676(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-msgstr "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:679(glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr "مستودع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:680(para)
-msgid "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-msgstr "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:683(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr "بيئة الإقلاع "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:684(para)
-msgid "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:685(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-msgstr "تفعيل بيئة الإقلاع هو واحد من الإقلاعات ."
- "عدة بيئات إقلاع بالإمكان وضعها ضمن نظام "
- "OpenSolaris ويكون بيئة الإقلاع الغير فعالة بإمكانها أن تكون بحالة الإنتظار من أجل التفعيل عند إعادة تشغيل النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:688(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "إستنساخ "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:689(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "نسخة دقيقة."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:690(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "الإستنساخ بالإمكان أن يكون نسخة طبق الأصل من نظام التشغيل , ملفات النظام, أو القسم . هذه النسخة 100%متوافقة "
- "مع النسة الأصلية"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:693(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "dataset"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:694(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "الإسم العام لكيانات ZFS : الإستنساخ , نظام الملفات , صورة النظام , الحجم , كل "
- "dataset التي تعرف بإسم فريد من خلال "
- "ZFS إسم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:697(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "صورة النظام "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:698(para)
-msgid "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr "مجموعة التطبيقات ضمن الحزمة تكون مضغوطة بشكل كامل أو جزئي نظام التشغيل. والحزم تكون ملائمة للتنصيب "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:699(para)
-msgid "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "الصورة هي عبارة عن مكان توضع الحزم ضمن النظام وكل الحزم المرافقة لها "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:702(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "الحزم "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:703(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "مجموعة الملفات , المجلدات , الإختصارات , التعاريف, الإعتمادية بتحديد الشكل العام"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:706(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "الأصل "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:707(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-msgstr "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:710(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "alias"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:711(para)
-msgid "An alternate name for a publisher."
-msgstr "An alternate name for a publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:714(glossterm)
-msgid "mirror"
-msgstr "mirror"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:715(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-msgstr "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "مترجم - الإئتمانات "
-
--- a/src/gui/help/ar/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/ca/ca.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1518 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
- "Project-Id-Version: Package Manager\n"
- "POT-Creation-Date: 2009-04-23 10:17+0900\n"
- "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-01-14 11:47+0900\n"
- "Last-Translator: OpenSolaris CTI <[email protected]>\n"
- "Language-Team: Catalan <[email protected]>\n"
- "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
- "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
- "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:38(None) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:88(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:68(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:583(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:609(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:3(title)
-msgid "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "Ajuda en línia del gestor de paquets d'OpenSolaris 2010.03"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:4(firstname)
-msgid "OpenSolaris"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:5(surname)
-msgid "Publications"
-msgstr "Publicacions"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:8(pubsnumber)
-msgid "822-7173"
-msgstr "822-7173"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:10(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2009"
-msgstr "Juny del 2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:11(publishername)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:13(year)
-msgid "2009"
-msgstr "2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:33(title)
-msgid "About the Package Manager"
-msgstr "Quant al Gestor de Paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:34(para)
-msgid "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-msgstr "Benvinguts a l'ajuda en línia del Gestor de paquets d'<trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03!"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:35(para)
-msgid "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-msgstr "Utilitzeu els continguts de l'ajuda per aprendre com utilitzar el gestor de paquets. Navegueu a través d'aquesta ajuda tot clicant als temes mostrats en la barra lateral."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:36(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-msgstr "L'aplicació del Gestor de Paquets d'OpenSolaris 2010.03 és una interfície gràfica d'usuari pel programari del sistema d'empaquetament d'imatges (IPS). El Gestor de Paquets proporciona un subconjunt de funcionalitats ofertes pels clients de línia de comandes (CLI) proporcionades amb IPS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Gestor de Paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:41(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "El Gestor de Paquets us permet realitzar les següents tasques:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:42(para)
-msgid "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-msgstr "Instal·lar, treure i cercar paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:44(para)
-msgid "Update your system"
-msgstr "Actualitzar el vostre sistema"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:46(para)
-msgid "Add and manage publishers"
-msgstr "Afegir i gestionar publicadors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:48(para)
-msgid "Create, remove, and manage boot environments"
-msgstr "Crear, eliminar, i gestionar entorns d'arranc"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:51(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for a definition of the terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Vegeu el <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> per a una definició dels temes utilitzats en aquest document."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:53(title)
-msgid "About Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Quant al Sistema Gestor de Paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:54(para)
-msgid "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-msgstr "El sistema d'empaquetament d'imatges (IPS) és un framework que proporciona tot el cicle de vida per al programari, incloent l'instal·lació, l'actualització i l'eliminació. El llançament d'OpenSolaris 2010.03 utilitza IPS com al seu sistema d'empaquetament."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:55(para)
-msgid "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-msgstr "Després d'una instal·lació inicial del sistema operatiu OpenSolaris 2010.03, trobareu que falten algunes de les aplicacions que normalment utilitzeu, no estan disponibles immediatament. Aquestes aplicacions estan disponibles com a paquets en repositoris per a la seva descàrrega i intal·lació a través de la xarxa. Un repositori és l'origen pels paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:56(para)
-msgid "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-msgstr "IPS proporciona un conjunt d'eines que poden utilitzar-se per a instal·lar paquets de d'un repositori, crear un publicador i els seus paquets IPS, fer una rèplica d'un repositori existent, i publicar paquets en un repositori."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:57(para)
-msgid "Once you have installed packages, IPS enables you to search, update, and manage packages on your system."
-msgstr "Una vegada hageu instal·lat els paquets, IPS us permet cercar, actualitzar, i "
- "gestionar els paquets al vostre sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:58(para)
-msgid "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-msgstr "Amb IPS , podeu actualitzar el vostre sistema a una nova construcció d'OpenSolaris, instal·lar i actualitzar el vostre programari a l'última versió disponible del repositori, i obtenir paquets des de la rèplica del repositori."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:59(emphasis)
-msgid "The Package Manager provides a subset of the tasks that can be performed from the command-line."
-msgstr "El Gestor de Paquets proporciona un conjunt de tasques que poden ser realitzades "
- "des de la línia de comandes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:61(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-msgstr "Per al llançament d'OpenSolaris 2010.03, si el sistema on el qual està instal·lat IPS està en xarxa, IPS pot recuperar automàticament els paquets proporcionats pel publicador d'OpenSolaris des del repositori de paquets localitzat a <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:62(para)
-msgid "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-msgstr "Per a més documentació d'IPS, vegeu la <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Guia del sistema d'empaquetament d'imatges</citetitle></ulink> i les <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">pàgines man</ulink> de <filename>pkg</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:63(para)
-msgid "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-msgstr "Per a més informació quant a IPS, visiteu la <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">pàgina del projecte</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:65(title)
-msgid "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-msgstr "Com començar amb el gestor de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:66(para)
-msgid "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-msgstr "Quant inicieu el gestor de paquets, es mostra una pàgina d'inici semblant a la mostrada a continuació:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:67(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Start Page"
-msgstr "Pàgina d'inici del gestor de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:71(para)
-msgid "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-msgstr "La pàgina d'inici proporciona un llistat dels paquets concrets que poden ser instal·lats. Això inclou un llistat d'alguns del paquets més populars i recentment descarregats pels usuaris de la comunitat d'OpenSolaris. El llistat de paquets recomanats apunta a les aplicacions que són freqüentment descarregades pels usuaris d'OpenSolaris. Cliqueu als enllaços dels paquets per a instal·lar-los."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:72(para)
-msgid "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "La pàgina d'inici també proporciona enllaços a més informació quant al projecte OpenSolaris, subscripció a butlletins i la unió a la comunitat d'OpenSolaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:73(para)
-msgid "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Per tancar la pàgina d'inici i visualitzar el llistat de paquets en el publicador seleccionat, realitzeu qualsevol de les següents accions en la finestra principal del gestor de paquets:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:74(para)
-msgid "Select a package category"
-msgstr "Seleccionar una categoria de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:76(para)
-msgid "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-msgstr "Canviar el menú desplegable <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visualitzar</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:78(para)
-msgid "Perform a search"
-msgstr "Realitzar una cerca"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:80(para)
-msgid "Change the publisher"
-msgstr "Canviar el publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:83(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to return to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu <menuchoice><guimenu>Visualitzar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pàgina d'inici</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per a tornar a la pàgina d'inici en qualsevol moment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:84(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Vegeu la <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> per a activar l'<emphasis role=\"strong\">aparença inicial</emphasis> de la pàgina d'inici quant el gestor de paquets es carrega."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:86(title)
-msgid "About The Package Manager Window"
-msgstr "Quant a la Finestra del gestor de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:87(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main View"
-msgstr "Finestra principal del gestor de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:91(para)
-msgid "The main window of the Package Manager consists of the following elements :"
-msgstr "La finestra principal del Gestor de paquets consisteix amb els següents elements :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:92(emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr "Barra de menús"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:93(para)
-msgid "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr "La barra de menús conté els menús i submenús necessaris per realitzar totes les comandes relacionades amb el Gestor de paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:97(emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr "Barra d'eines"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:98(para)
-msgid "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-msgstr "La barra d'eines conté les icones per al subconjunt de comandes que poden realitzar-se amb la utilització dels menús en la barra de menús. També hi ha situat un camp de <emphasis role=\"strong\">Cerca</emphasis> en la barra de menús. Podeu realitzar les següents accions des de la barra de menús :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:99(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Actualitzacions</emphasis> – Cliqueu a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Actualitzacions</emphasis> per a comprovar i actualitzar els últims paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:101(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Instal·lar/Actualitzar</emphasis> – Seleccioneu un paquet i cliqueu a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Instal·lar/Actualitzar</emphasis> per a instal·lar o actualitzar un paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:103(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refrescar</emphasis> – Cliqueu a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refrescar</emphasis> per a recarregar el llistat de paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:105(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Treure</emphasis> – Seleccioneu un paquet i cliqueu a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Treure</emphasis> per a treure un paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:107(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Cercar un paquet</emphasis> – Escriviu el nom o la descripció d'un paquet al camp de <emphasis role=\"strong\">Cerca</emphasis> per a cercar un paquet. Vegeu la <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> per a exemples de com cercar un paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:112(emphasis)
-msgid "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-msgstr "Menú desplegable del publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:113(para)
-msgid "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-msgstr "El llistat de publicadors disponibles es mostra en el menú desplegable del <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publicador</emphasis>. Els usuaris poden realitzar les següents tasques des del menú desplegable del publicador :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:114(emphasis)
-msgid "Select a publisher"
-msgstr "Seleccionar un publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:116(emphasis)
-msgid "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-msgstr "Visualitzar el llistat de paquets instal·lats des de tots els publicadors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:118(emphasis)
-msgid "Search for package across all publishers"
-msgstr "Cercar paquets a través de tots els publicadors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:120(emphasis)
-msgid "Add a publisher"
-msgstr "Afegir un publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:125(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr "Llistat dels paquets per categoria"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:126(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "En el cantó esquerra del panell, podeu navegar pels paquets disponibles per categoria. Cliqueu en una categoria per visualitzar els paquets disponibles per sub-categories. En el Gestor de paquets, hi han sis categories principals:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:127(emphasis)
-msgid "Applications"
-msgstr "Aplicacions"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:129(emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop (GNOME)"
-msgstr "Escriptori (GNOME)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:131(emphasis)
-msgid "Development"
-msgstr "Desenvolupament"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:133(emphasis)
-msgid "Drivers"
-msgstr "Controladors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:135(emphasis)
-msgid "System"
-msgstr "Sistema"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:137(emphasis)
-msgid "Web Services"
-msgstr "Serveis Web"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:142(emphasis)
-msgid "Recent Searches"
-msgstr "Cerques recents"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:143(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-msgstr "El Gestor de paquets desa les vostres cerques recents. Cliqueu a Cerques recents, en el cantó esquerra del panell, per a visualitzar els paquets que heu cercat recentment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:146(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr "Llistat de paquets per estat"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:147(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-msgstr "El menú desplegable de <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visualitzar</emphasis> us permet visualitzar l'estat del paquet amb les següents opcions :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:148(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Tots els paquets</emphasis> – Mostra el llistat de tots els paquets disponibles en l'actual publicador."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:150(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Paquets instal·lats</emphasis> – Mostra el llistat de tots els paquets instal·lats al vostre sistema del publicador actual."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:152(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Actualitzacions</emphasis> — Mostra el llistat de paquets que tenen noves versions dins del publicador actual."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:154(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Paquets no instal·lats</emphasis> – Mostra el llistat dels paquets que no estan instal·lats, però estan disponibles en l'actual publicador."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:156(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that you have selected."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Paquets seleccionats</emphasis> – Mostra un llistat dels "
- "paquets que heu seleccionat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:161(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-msgstr "Nom, estat i descripció del paquet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:162(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-msgstr "Aquí es mostra el llistat de paquets amb la categoria seleccionada, una descripció breu, i el seu estat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:163(para)
-msgid "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-msgstr "Aquí també es mostra el nom del publicador en les següents instàncies :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:164(para)
-msgid "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-msgstr "Quant el menú desplegable del <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubicador</emphasis> està establert a Tots els publicadors (Instal·lats)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:166(para)
-msgid "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-msgstr "Quant es mostren els resultats la cerca per a l'opció de cerca Tots els publicadors (Cerca)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:168(para)
-msgid "When a recent search result is displayed"
-msgstr "Quant es mostren els resultats recents de cerca"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:173(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr "Detalls del paquet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:174(para)
-msgid "Click a package name to select it. Details of the selected package, such as name, version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr "Cliqueu al nom del paquet per a seleccionar-lo. En aquesta finestra es mostren els detalls del paquet seleccionat com el nom, la versió, les dependències de fitxers, i la llicència."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:180(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Settings"
-msgstr "Preferències del Gestor de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:181(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-msgstr "Utilitzeu <menuchoice><guimenu>Edició</guimenu><guimenuitem>Referències</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per canviar les preferències del Gestor de paquets. Les següents seccions mostren les preferències poden ser canviades per l'usuari."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:182(title)
-msgid "Start Page Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferències de la pàgina d'inici"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:183(para)
-msgid "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "Quant s'inicia l'aplicació, es mostra una Pàgina d'inici en la finestra principal del Gestor de Paquets. La pàgina d'inici proporciona enllaços a la pàgina <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> on podeu obtenir més informació quant a OpenSolaris, subscriure's a butlletins i unir-se a la comunitat d'OpenSolaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:184(para)
-msgid "You can choose to turn off this setting so this page is not displayed when Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Podeu seleccionar apagar aquesta preferència, aleshores la pàgina no és mostrada quant s'inicia el Gestor de Paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:185(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu <menuchoice><guimenu>Edició</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferències</guimenuitem></menuchoice> des del menú principal i desmarqueu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Mostrar la pàgina d'inici a l'iniciar</emphasis> per a deshabilitar la Pàgina d'inici. Aquesta opció està marcada per defecte."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:186(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu <menuchoice><guimenu>Visualitzar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pàgina d'inici</guimenuitem></menuchoice> des del menú principal per anar a la pàgina s'inici en qualsevol moment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:188(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferències de sortida"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:189(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-msgstr "L'aplicació del Gestor de paquets pot recordar algunes de les seves preferències actuals s l'opció <emphasis role=\"strong\">Recordar l'estat actual al sortir</emphasis> en <menuchoice><guimenu>Edició</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferències</guimenuitem></menuchoice> està marcada."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:190(para)
-msgid "The following settings are saved:"
-msgstr "Les següents preferències estan desades:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:191(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Separadors verticals</emphasis> – La mida de les columnes en la finestra principal del Gestor de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:193(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Mida finestra</emphasis> – La mida de la finestra del Gestor de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:195(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publicador actual</emphasis> – El publicador que és seleccionat quant el gestor de paquets és tancat"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:199(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Diàleg de confirmació de preferències"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:200(para)
-msgid "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-msgstr "Quant un paquet és seleccionat per a instal·lar, actualitzar o eliminar, es mostra un diàleg de confirmació, el qual visualitza el llistat de paquets i les accions a ser realitzades. Sota: <emphasis role=\"strong\">Mostrar el diàleg de confirmació</emphasis>, desmarqueu <emphasis role=\"strong\">en Actalitzacions</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">en Instal·lar/Actualitzar paquets</emphasis>, i <emphasis role=\"strong\">en Eliminar paquets</emphasis> per desactivar aquestes preferències."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:203(title)
-msgid "Working With Packages"
-msgstr "Treballant amb paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:204(title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr "Instal·lar un paquet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:205(para)
-msgid "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr "El llistat dels paquets i els seues estats es mostra en la finestra principal del Gestor de paquets. Realitzeu els següents passos per a instal·lar un paquet:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:206(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Maqueu la casella que està al cantó del paquet per a selecciona'l. Clicant dos cops damunt del paquet també el selecciona."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:208(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Instal·lar/Actualitzar</guibutton> per a iniciar el procés d'intal·lació."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:209(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "També podeu seleccionar <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquet</guimenu><guimenuitem>Instal·lar/Actualitzar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per a iniciar el procés d'instal·lació de paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:211(para)
-msgid "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guilabel>Detalls</guilabel> per a visualitzar els detalls de l'instal·lació, o bé <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> per a cancel·lar l'instal·lació."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:213(para)
-msgid "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Després que es completi l'instal·lació, cliqueu a <guibutton>Tancar</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:216(title)
-msgid "Installation Error"
-msgstr "S'ha produït un error en l'instal·lació"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:217(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-msgstr "Si es produeix un error durant el procés d'instal·lació, es mostra un diàleg amb l'error amb la seva corresponent explicació. Cliqueu a <guibutton>Tancar</guibutton> per a tancar el diàleg de l'error."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:220(title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr "Eliminar un paquet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:221(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents pasos per a eliminar un paquet:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:222(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Maqueu la casella que està al cantó del paquet per a selecciona'l. Clicant dos cops damunt del paquet també el selecciona."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:224(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Treure</guibutton> per a iniciar el procés de desinstal·lació"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:225(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr "També podeu seleccionar <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquet</guimenu><guimenuitem>Eliminar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per a eliminar un paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:227(para)
-msgid "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "reviseu els paquets a ser trets i els detalls de les dependències dels paquets en el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Confirmació d'eliminació</emphasis>,"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:229(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Procedir</guibutton> per a iniciar l'eliminació dels paquets, o bé a <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> per a cancel·lar el procés."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:233(title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr "Cercar per a un paquet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:234(para)
-msgid "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-msgstr "Podeu cercar per a un paquet de les següents formes :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:235(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Cercar al publicador actual</emphasis> – Cerca un paquet en el publicador actualment seleccionat en el menú desplegable del <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publicador</emphasis>. Si desconeixeu l'estat del paquet pel qual esteu realitzant la cerca, establiu el menú desplegable de <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vista</emphasis> a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tots els paquets</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:236(para)
-msgid "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-msgstr "Introduïu la descripció, o el nom parcial en el camp de <emphasis role=\"strong\">Cercar</emphasis>. Per exemple, podeu escriure un dels següents termes de cerca per a cercar el paquet <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:237(para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr "SUNWgames"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:239(para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr "jocs"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:241(para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr "GNOME-games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:244(para)
-msgid "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Per a cercar compiladors de SunStudio, heu d'introduir un dels següents termes:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:245(para)
-msgid "compiler"
-msgstr "compilador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:247(para)
-msgid "tools"
-msgstr "eines"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:251(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Cercar a tots els publicadors</emphasis> – Seleccioneu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tiots els publicadors(Cerca)</emphasis> des del menú desplegable <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publicador</emphasis> per a cercar un paquet a través de tots els publicadors configurats. Si desconeixeu l'estat del paquet per al qual esteu realitzant la cerca, establiu el menú desplegable <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vista</emphasis> a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tots els paquets</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:252(para)
-msgid "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Escriviu la descripció del paquet en el camp <emphasis role=\"strong\">Cercar</emphasis>. Per exemple, el paquet <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> és un llibre sobre programació en Python. La descripció del paquet conté la cadena de text <emphasis>book</emphasis>. Per cercar aquest paquet, podeu escriure un dels següents termes:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:253(para)
-msgid "python"
-msgstr "python"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:255(para)
-msgid "book"
-msgstr "llibre"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:258(para)
-msgid "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-msgstr "Si heu cercat el terme <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> quant esteu cercant el paquet <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename>, els resultats no seran mostrats ja que el terme <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> no està present per si mateix com a paraula sencera als continguts del paquet. Tanmateix podreu trobar el paquet utilitzant el comodí <literal>*</literal>. En conseqüència, la cerca pel paquet <literal>diveinto*</literal> mostrarà el paquet <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:262(para)
-msgid "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Utilitzeu els submenús sota el menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Edició</guimenu></menuchoice> per retallar, copiar, o enganxar text al camp <emphasis role=\"strong\">Cercar</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:264(para)
-msgid "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-msgstr "Estan suportats els següents operadors per a la cerca d'un paquet:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:265(emphasis)
-msgid "The AND operator"
-msgstr "Operador AND"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:266(para)
-msgid "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-msgstr "Quant els termes de la cerca estan separats amb espais o l'operador AND, El Gestor de paquets cercarà els paquets que continguin <emphasis role=\"strong\">tots</emphasis> els termes de la cerca."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:269(emphasis)
-msgid "Double Quotes"
-msgstr "Dobles cometes"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:270(para)
-msgid "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-msgstr "Quant el terme de la cerca està situat dins de cometes, el Gestor de paquets cercarà els paquets que <emphasis role=\"strong\">coincideixin exactament amb el terme de la cerca</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:273(emphasis)
-msgid "Wildcard *"
-msgstr "Comodí *"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:274(para)
-msgid "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-msgstr "Incloent el comodí en el vostre terme de cerca us permetrà cercar noms parcials de paquets. Per exemple, quant introduïu <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> en el vostre terme de cerca, els paquets mostrats poden incloure el termes <emphasis>boot</emphasis> i <emphasis>book</emphasis> en el nom i/o descripció del paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:275(para)
-msgid "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-msgstr "La cerca amb comodí pot resultar més lenta que la cerca exacta, o la cerca basada amb la descripció del paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:279(emphasis)
-msgid "The OR operator"
-msgstr "Operador OR"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:280(para)
-msgid "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-msgstr "Quant cerqueu termes separats amb l'operador OR, el Gestor de paquets cerca paquets que continguin qualsevol dels termes de la cerca."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:285(title)
-msgid "Cancel Package Search"
-msgstr "Cancel·lar la cerca de paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:286(para)
-msgid "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-msgstr "Si voleu cancel·lar un cerca, Utilitzeu l'icona de Cancel·lar cerca de la part inferior de la finestra del Gestor de paquets. Aquesta icona és visible des de la barra d'estat únicament durant una operació de cerca."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:288(title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr "Actualitzar un paquet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:289(para)
-msgid "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-msgstr "Observeu l'icona d'actualitzacions que està al canto del nom del paquet. Aquesta icona indica que hi han actualitzacions disponibles pel paquet en el publicador seleccionat. Podeu utilitzar una de les següent visualitzacions per a mostrar el llistat dels paquets que tenen actualitzacions disponibles :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:290(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu l'opció <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Actualitzacions</guimenuitem></menuchoice> en el menú desplegable <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vista</emphasis> per a llistar tots els paquets que tenen actualitzacions disponibles en el publicador actualment seleccionat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:292(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu l'opció <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Actualitzacions/guimenuitem></menuchoice> en el menú desplegable <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vista</emphasis> i <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tots els publicadors (Instal·lats)</emphasis> en el menú desplegable <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publicador</emphasis> per a llistar totes els paquets que tenen actualitzacions disponibles en tots els publicadors."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:295(para)
-msgid "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-msgstr "Algun cop pot fallar l'actualització d'un paquet, degut a dependències incoherents del paquet que he seleccionat per a l'instal·lació o actualització. Potser heu d'actualitzar tots els paquets del sistema per obtenir les últimes actualitzacions."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:297(para)
-msgid "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu el paquet o els paquets que voleu actualitzar i cliqueu a <guibutton>Instal·lar/Actualitzar</guibutton> per a instal·lar l'última versió del paquet. Utilitzeu l'icona <emphasis role=\"strong\">Actualitzacions</emphasis> de la barra d'eines per a actualitzar tots els paquets del vostre sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:299(title)
-msgid "Package Version Information"
-msgstr "Informació de la versió del paquet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:300(para)
-msgid "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-msgstr "Seleccioneu un paquet en la finestra principal de Gestor de paquets i cliqueu amb el botó dret per a visualitzar l'informació del paquet. Hi han tres tipus de versions de paquet :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:301(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Versió instal·lable</emphasis> – La versió d'un paquet que està disponible per a l'instal·lació o actualització. Aquesta versió pot ser més antiga que l'última versió disponible degut a les dependències del paquet en el sistema. En conseqüència no podreu ser capaços d'instal·lar l'última versió del paquet a menys que utilitzeu l'icona <emphasis role=\"strong\">Actualitzacions</emphasis> de la barra d'eines."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:303(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Versió instal·lada</emphasis> – La versió del paquet instal·lada al sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:305(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Última versió</emphasis> – Aquesta és l'última versió del paquet per a l'instal·lació o actualització. L'última versió pot ser instal·lada si el vostre sistema està al dia."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:309(title)
-msgid "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-msgstr "Visualitzar els paquets instal·lats de tots els publicadors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:310(para)
-msgid "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tots els publicadors (Instal·lats)</emphasis> des del menú desplegable de filtració <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publicador</emphasis> per a visualitzar els paquets que teniu instal·lats de tots els publicadors."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:311(para)
-msgid "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-msgstr "No podeu cercar un paquet des de l'opció <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tots els publicadors (Instal·lats)</emphasis>. Canvieu a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tots els publicadors (Cerca)</emphasis> per a cercar un paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:315(title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Introducció als entorns d'arranc"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:316(para)
-msgid "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-msgstr "Un entorn d'arranc és una imatge que és arrancable. Després d'una instal·lació d'OpenSolaris, "
- "és creat un entorn d'arranc."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:317(para)
-msgid "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-msgstr "Podeu mantenir diversos entorns d'arranc al vostre sistema OpenSolaris 2010.03. Utilitzeu la comanda <command>beadm(1)</command> des de l'interfície de línia de comandes (CLI) per a crear, reanomenar, muntar o desmuntar, o destruir aquests entorns d'arranc."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:318(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-msgstr "El gestor de paquets us permet gestionar els entorns d'arranc creats durant el procés d'actualització de la vostra imatge. Per a més informació, vegeu la secció <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:319(para)
-msgid "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-msgstr "Els usuaris poden mantenir diversos entorns d'arranc en els seus sistemes, i cada entorn d'arranc pot tenir diferents versions de programari instal·lades."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:320(para)
-msgid "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-msgstr "Quant utilitzeu tant el Gestor de Paquets, com la comanda <command>pkg image-update</"
- "command> per a actualitzar tot el sistema al vostre entorn d'arranc actiu d'OpenSolaris, "
- ", es crea automàticament un clon de l'entorn d'arranc actualment actiu. Els "
- "paquet són actualitzats al clon més que al entorn "
- "d'arranc. Després de completar les actualitzacions, el nou clon és "
- "activat. Després, el clon es convertirà amb l'entorn d'arranc predeterminat "
- "quan el sistema reinicii. L'entorn d'arranc original també està disponible com "
- "una selecció alternativa."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:321(para)
-msgid "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-msgstr "Vegeu les pàgines man beadm(1) i el document <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Actualitzant i gestionant entorns d'arranc</citetitle></ulink> per aprendre més quant als entorns d'arranc i la comanda <command>beadm(1)</command>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:322(title)
-msgid "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-msgstr "Actualitzar tots el paquets (actualitzar la vostra imatge)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:323(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents pasos per a actualitzar tots els paquets a la vostra image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:324(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Actualitzacions</guibutton> per a iniciar el procés d'actualització de <emphasis role=\"strong\">tots</emphasis> els paquets instal·lats en la vostra imatge."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:325(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr "també podeu seleccionar <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquet</guimenu><guisubmenu>Actualitzacions</guisubmenu></menuchoice> per a iniciar el procés."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:326(para)
-msgid "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Si no hi han actualitzacions disponibles pels vostres paquets instal·lats, es mostra un missatge <emphasis role=\"strong\">No hi han actualitzacions disponibles</emphasis> després que cliqueu a <guibutton>Actualitzacions</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:329(para)
-msgid "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-msgstr "El procés d'actualització de tots els paquets instal·lats en el vostre sistema es completa en tres fases:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:330(emphasis)
-msgid "Preparation"
-msgstr "Preparació"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:332(emphasis)
-msgid "Download"
-msgstr "Descarregar"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:334(emphasis)
-msgid "Install"
-msgstr "Instal·lar"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:337(para)
-msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a la pestanya <emphasis>Details</emphasis> mostrada en cada una d'aquestes fases per a visualitzar més informació."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:339(para)
-msgid "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-msgstr "Després que el procés d'actualització es complet correctament, es mostra un diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Completat actualitzar tot</emphasis>. Es crea un nou entorn d'arranc el qual consisteix de tots els paquets actualitzats. El gestor de paquet assigna un nom predeterminat pel nou entorn d'arranc, podeu canviar el nom assignat per l'entorn d'arranc."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:340(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "Si el Gestor de paquets és incapaç de crear un nou entorn d'arranc, es mostra un missatge d'error. Vegeu la <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> per tal de rectificar l'error i continuar amb l'actualització de l'imatge."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:343(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Reiniciar ara</guibutton> per a reiniciar immediatament el vostre sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:344(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Reiniciar més tard</guibutton> per a reiniciar el sistema un temps després. <emphasis role=\"strong\">Heu de reiniciar el vostre sistema per a què els canvis tinguin efecte.</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:345(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "Durant el procés d'Actualitzar tot, es crea un clon de l'actual entorn d'arranc. Podeu arrancar el clon o retornar a l'entorn d'arranc anterior a l'inici del procés d'actualitzar tot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:350(title) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:656(title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr "Actualitzar Tots els Errors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:351(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-msgstr "Per a que es completi el procés d'actualització el gestor de paquets ha de crear un clon de l'actual entorn d'arranc. es mostra un missatge d'error si el procés d'actualització no pot crear un clon de l'entorn d'arranc. Podeu visualitzar un missatge d'error com el següent :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:352(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>No hi ha prou espai de disc, L'acció d'actualitzar tor no pot ser realitzada. seleccioneu Gestiona entorns d'arranc per a gestionar els vostres entorns d'arran i així alliberar espai en el disc.</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:353(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:659(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Tancar</guibutton> per a cancel·lar el procés d'actualitzar tot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:354(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:660(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents passos si voleu rectificar l'error i continuar "
- "amb el procés d'actualitzar tot:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:355(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Gestionar entorns d'arranc</guibutton> per a mostrar el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar l'entorn d'arranc</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:357(para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu l'entorn d'arranc que desitgeu eliminar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:358(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "No es pot eliminar l'entorn d'arranc, actualment actiu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:360(para)
-msgid "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-msgstr "No necessiteu reiniciar el vostre sistema si solament heu eliminat alguns del vostres "
- "entorns d'arranc."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:365(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Cliqueu <guibutton>D'acord</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:367(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Confirmació entorn d'arranc</emphasis>. reviseu els vostres canvis i cliqueu a Acceptar per a procedir."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:369(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Actualitzar tot</guibutton> per a reiniciar el procés d'actualització de tots els paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:373(title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Gestiona entorns d'arranc"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:374(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents passos per a gestionar els vostres entorns d'arranc:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:375(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <menuchoice><guimenu>Fitxer</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestionar entorns d'arranc</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per obrir el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar entorns d'arranc</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:377(para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr "En aquest diàleg, podeu realitzar les següents accions:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:378(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activar un entorn d'arranc</emphasis> – Seleccioneu l'entorn d'arranc que vulgueu que estigui actiu durant l'arranc del sistema. Aquest és l'entorn d'arranc predeterminat <emphasis role=\"strong\">després</emphasis> que reinicieu el vostre sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:380(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Eliminat els entorns d'arranc antics o sense utilitzar per alliberar espai en el disc</emphasis> – Seleccioneu l'entorn o entorns d'arranc que vulgueu eliminar del vostre sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:381(para)
-msgid "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "No podeu eliminar l'entorn d'arranc actualment actiu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:383(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-msgstr "Si heu seleccionat un entorn d'arranc per a ser reanomenat, aquest no es pot eliminar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:388(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Reanomenar un entorn d'arranc</emphasis> – Cliqueu dues vegades a l'entorn d'arranc que vulgueu reanomenar. Introduïu el nou nom de l'entorn d'arranc i cliqueu a <guibutton>Acceptar</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:389(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "Si heu seleccionat un entorn d'arranc per a ser eliminat, aquest no pot ser reanomenat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:391(para)
-msgid "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "L'entorn d'arranc actualment actiu no es pot reanomenar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:398(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Acceptar</guibutton> per a procedir, o bé a <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> per a cancel·lar tots els canvis."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:400(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">confirmació entorn d'arranc</emphasis>. Reviseu els vostres canvis i cliqueu a Acceptar per a procedir."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:401(para)
-msgid "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-msgstr "Després que cliqueu <guibutton>D'acord</guibutton>, no podreu desfer el canvis "
- "que feu als entorns d'arranc."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:403(para)
-msgid "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr "Els canvis que feu a les preferències de l'<emphasis role=\"strong\">entorn d'arranc "
- "predeterminat</emphasis> són efectives solament després de reiniciar el sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:405(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> per a cancel·lar els canvis."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:407(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-msgstr "Reinicieu el vostre sistema per a arrancar amb el nou entorn d'arranc activat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:408(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-msgstr "Reinicieu el vostre sistema únicament si heu canviat l'entorn d'arranc actiu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:414(title)
-msgid "Add and Manage Publishers"
-msgstr "Afegir i gestionar publicadors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:415(para)
-msgid "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-msgstr "El diàleg <menuchoice><guimenu>Fitxer</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestionar publicadors</guimenuitem></menuchoice> permet a l'usuari afegir i gestionar els publicadors configurats. Un publicador és una persona, in grup, o una corporació que dissenya, crea, i publica un paquet en un repositori. Cada publicador té el un repositori de paquets on es poden trobar les dades dels seus paquets. Les localitzacions que contenen les dades del paquet per als repositoris del publicador estan definides a través d'orígens i rèpliques. Els orígens s'utilitzen per a proporcionar les localitzacions que contenen el conjunt complet de dades de paquets per a un publicador, mentre que les rèpliques s'utilitzen per a proporcionar localitzacions que únicament contenen els fitxers dels paquets. Els orígens i les rèpliques es defineixen amb URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), com per exemple <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:416(para)
-msgid "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-msgstr "Llegiu les següents seccions per aprendre com afegir i gestionar publicadors al vostre sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:417(title)
-msgid "Add a Publisher"
-msgstr "Afegir un publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:418(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents passos per a afegir un publicador i la seva URI associada:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:419(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fitxer</guimenu><guimenuitem>Afegir publicadors</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:420(para)
-msgid "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "També podeu selecciona l'opció <guibutton>Afegir..</guibutton> des del menú desplegable <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publicador</emphasis> o seleccionar <menuchoice><guimenu>Fitxer</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestionar publicadors</guimenuitem></menuchoice> i després clicar a <emphasis>Afegir..</emphasis> en el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar publicadors</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:422(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Afegir publicador</emphasis>. Introduïu el nom del publicador i la seva URI associada. Si el publicador és un publicador segur, es mostren els camps de la <emphasis role=\"strong\">Clau SSL</emphasis> i el <emphasis role=\"strong\">Certificat SSL</emphasis>. Seguiu els passos de la secció <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> per afegir una clau i un certificat SSL."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:424(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Afegir</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:426(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Afegint publicador</emphasis>. Cliqueu a Cancel·lar per a cancel·lar el procés."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:428(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Completat afegint publicador</emphasis> si el publicador va ser afegit de forma correcta."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:431(para)
-msgid "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-msgstr "Es mostra un diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Error afegint publicador</emphasis> si el publicador no es va poder afegir. Cliqueu a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Detalls</emphasis> per a obtenir més informació quant a l'error."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:434(title)
-msgid "Remove a Publisher"
-msgstr "Treure un publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:435(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següent passos per a treure un publicador:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:436(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:459(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:473(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:492(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:511(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:528(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fitxer</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestionar publicadors</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:438(para)
-msgid "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Cliqueu al damunt d'un publicador per a selecciona'l. Cliqueu a <guibutton>treure</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:440(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Confirmació gestió publicadors</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:442(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Acceptar</guibutton> per a desar els canvies i treure el publicador, o bé a <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> per a retornar al diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar publicadors</emphasis> sense fer cap canvi."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:446(title)
-msgid "Set Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Establir la prioritat del publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:447(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següent passos per establir o canviar la prioritat d'un publicador:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:448(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fitxer</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestionar publicadors</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per obrir el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar publicadors</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:450(para)
-msgid "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-msgstr "Es mostra el llistat dels publicadors configurats. Cliqueu a les fletxes per a canviar la prioritat dels publicadors. El publicador amb la prioritat més alta és mostrat a la part superior del llistat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:451(emphasis)
-msgid "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-msgstr "La cerca de paquets es realitza mitjançant l'ordre de prioritat dels publicadors, Primer es cerca al publicador amb la prioritat més alta."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:453(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:465(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:484(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:503(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:520(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:537(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Acceptar</guibutton> per a desar els canvis, o bé a <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> per a retornar al diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar publicadors</emphasis> sense fer cap canvi."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:457(title)
-msgid "Modify Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Modificar l'àlies del publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:458(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-msgstr "realitzeu els següents passos per a modificar l'àlies d'un publicador:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:461(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu el publicador pel qual voleu modificar el seu àlies. Cliqueu a <guibutton>Modificar..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:463(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modificar publicador</emphasis>. Modifiqueu o introduïu un nou nom de l'àlies en el camp <emphasis role=\"strong\">Àlies</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:467(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:486(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:505(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:522(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:539(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Acceptar</guibutton> en el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar publicadors</emphasis> per sortir del diàleg. Tingueu en compte que al clicar a <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> en el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar publicadors</emphasis> no desfarà els canvis fets en el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modificar publicadors</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:471(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Afegir orígens publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:472(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents passos per a afegir o associar orígens a un publicador:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:475(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu el publicador pel qual voleu modificar el seu origen. La pestanya <emphasis role=\"strong\">Detalls</emphasis> en el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar publicadors</emphasis> mostra l'origen associat amb el publicador."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:477(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:496(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:515(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:532(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Modificar..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:478(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modificar publicador</emphasis>. Introduïu el nom del nou origen que voleu associar amb el publicador en el camp <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origen</emphasis>. Cliqueu a <guibutton>Ageir</guibutton>. En una taula es mostra el llistat d'orígens associats."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:479(para)
-msgid "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-msgstr "No podeu canviar la URI origen després que hagi estat afegit l'origen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:482(para)
-msgid "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(opcional) Si l'origen que heu afegit és un origen segur, afegiu la clau i el certificat SSL. <guibutton>Navegueu</guibutton> per a localitzar la clau i el certificat SSL al vostre sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:490(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Treure orígens del publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:491(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents passos per a treure un origen, o orígens associats am un publicador:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:494(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu el publicador pel qual voleu treure l'origen. La pestanya <emphasis role=\"strong\">Detalls</emphasis> en el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar publicadors</emphasis> mostra l'origen o es orígens associats a un publicador."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:497(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modificar publicar</emphasis>. els llistat dels orígens associats és mostrat en una taula."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:499(para)
-msgid "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu l'origen que voleu treure. Cliqueu a <guibutton>Treure</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:500(para)
-msgid "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-msgstr "Si únicament està associat un origen a un publicador, aquest no es pot treure."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:509(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Afegir rèpliques de publicadors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents passos per a afegir una rèplica pel publicador:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu el publicador pel qual voleu afegir una rèplica."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:516(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modificar publicador</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:518(para)
-msgid "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Introduïu la URI per la rèplica en el camp <emphasis>Rèplica</emphasis>. Cliqueu a <guibutton>Afegir</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:526(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Treure rèpliques de publicadors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:527(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Realitzeu els següents passos per a treure una rèplica associada amb un publicador:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:530(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu el publicador pel qual voleu treure la rèplica."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:533(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modificar publicador</emphasis>. El llistat de les rèpliques associades és mostrat en un taula."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:535(para)
-msgid "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu la replica que voleu treure. Cliqueu a <guibutton>Treure</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:544(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Treballant amb l'Instal·lador Web"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:545(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "El Gestor de paquets d'OpenSolaris 2010.03 proporciona suport als usuaris per afegir nous publicadors i opcionalment, instal·lar paquets des d'aquests publicadors mitjançant el procés WebInstall en un sol clic. Un fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> el qual conté els publicadors a ser afegits i opcionalment, els paquets que poden ser instal·lats des d'aquests publicadors, és necessari pel procés WebInstall. L'informació continguda en el fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> és llegida i utilitzada pel procés WebInstall."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:546(title)
-msgid "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-msgstr "Exportar seleccions de fitxers com un fitxer WebInstall"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:547(para)
-msgid "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-msgstr "Si voleu distribuir alguns dels paquets disponibles en el vostre sistema a altres per a una senzilla instal·lació i distribució, podeu exportar les referències als paquets, utilitzant el procés WebInstall. La característica <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Fitxer</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Exportar Seleccions</guimenuitem></menuchoice> us permet crear un fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> que conté les instruccions d'instal·lació pels paquets seleccionats. El fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> pot ser posteriorment distribuït. Vegeu la <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> per a com instal·lar paquets des de fitxers <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:548(para)
-msgid "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-msgstr "El següent procediment llista els passos per a crear un fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> i exportar els vostres fitxers."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:549(para)
-msgid "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Des del menú desplegable <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publicador</emphasis>, seleccioneu el publicador des del qual voleu incloure els paquets en el fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:551(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-msgstr "Marqueu la casella que està al cantó del paquet per a selecciona'l. Els paquets seleccionats són ressaltats."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:553(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Fitxer</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Exportar seleccions</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per a mostrar la finestra <emphasis role=\"strong\">Confirmació exportar seleccions</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:555(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Acceptar</guibutton> per a confirmar les seleccions i procedir, o bé a <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> per a cancel·lar les seleccions."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:557(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-msgstr "Es mostra la finestra <emphasis role=\"strong\">Exportar seleccions</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:559(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Es proporciona un nom predeterminat pel fitxer <filename>p5i</filename> amb l'extensió <filename>.p5i</filename>. Cliqueu a l'interior del camp <emphasis role=\"strong\">Nom</emphasis> per canviar el nom del fitxer <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:561(para)
-msgid "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-msgstr "Per defecte el fitxer és desat a la carpeta <filename>/tmp</filename>. cliqueu a la pestanya <emphasis role=\"strong\">navegar per altres carpetes</emphasis> per a seleccionar la vostra pròpia carpeta."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:563(para)
-msgid "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu l'opció <filename>Fitxers p5i</filename> en el menú desplegable situat en la part inferior del cantó dret de la finestra."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:567(title)
-msgid "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Com utilitzar WebInstall per a afegir publicadors i instal·lar paquets"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:568(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "El procés WebInstall us permet instal·lar paquets per mitjà del fitxer <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:569(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-msgstr "Localitzeu el fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> que pot estar present al vostre escriptori, "
- "la Pàgina d'inici del Gestor de Paquets, o bé en un lloc web."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:571(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-msgstr "Inicieu el Gestor de paquets en mode WebInstall d'una de les següents maneres:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:572(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-msgstr "Cliqueu al fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> del vostre escriptori, i "
- "l'aplicació associada, Gestor de Paquets amb mode Instal·lació Web, la llançarà."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:574(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-msgstr "Inicieu el Gestor de Paquets des de la línia de comandes juntament amb la ruta del fitxer "
- "<filename>.p5i</filename>. Per exemple, escriviu la següent comanda a "
- "l'intèrpret de comandes:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "ruta_al_fitxer_p5i/fitxer.p5i"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(command)
-msgid "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "$ pfexec packagemanager /<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:577(para)
-msgid "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-msgstr "Cliqueu en la localització de la URL que conté l'enllaç al fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename>. Si esteu utilitzant aquest mètode per iniciar WebInstall, el fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> <emphasis role=\"strong\">obligatòriament</emphasis> ha d'estar localitzat en un servidor web que tingui registrat el nou tipus MIME. Únicament aleshores, el servidor web pot gestionar automàticament el fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> i iniciar el Gestor de paquets en mode WebInstall."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:578(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-msgstr "Si el <filename>.p5i</filename> està localitzat a un servidor web que no "
- "té registrat el nou tipus mime, deseu el fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> "
- "al vostre escriptori i cliqueu-lo per a llançar l'instal·lació Web."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:582(para)
-msgid "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-msgstr "Veureu una finestra similar a la mostrada en la següent imatge. La finestra mostra el llistat dels publicadors que poden ser afegits, i els paquets que seran instal·lats. Reviseu l'informació."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:586(para)
-msgid "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Confirmeu o cancel·leu el procés d'Instal·lador Web"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:587(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Procedir</guibutton> per a afegir els nous publicadors i instal·lar els paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:589(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Afegir publicador</emphasis>. El nom i la URI del publicador ja han estat introduïts."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:590(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-msgstr "El diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Completat afegint publicador</emphasis> és mostrat si el publicador va ser afegit de forma correcta."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:592(para)
-msgid "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(Opcional) Si els publicadors a ser afegits són publicadors segurs, es necessita una clau i certificat SSL. Navegueu per a localitzar al vostre sistema la clau i el certificat SSL."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:594(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr "Cliqueu <guibutton>D'acord</guibutton> per a procedir."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:596(para)
-msgid "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Si els paquets estan sent instal·lats, es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Instal·lar/Actualitzar</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:597(para)
-msgid "The application will close when all packages are installed."
-msgstr "L'aplicació es tancarà quan tots els paquets estiguin instal·lats."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:601(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-msgstr "Utilitzant WebInstall amb un publicador deshabilitat"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:602(para)
-msgid "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-msgstr "Alguns cops el fitxer <filename>.p5i</filename> pot contenir paquets des d'un publicador deshabilitat. En aquest cas WebInstall obre un diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Habilitar publicador</emphasis> el qual permet a l'usuari habilitar el publicador abans de l'instal·lació dels paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:605(title)
-msgid "Working With the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Treballant amb el Gestor d'Actualitzacions"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:606(title)
-msgid "About The Update Manager"
-msgstr "Quant al Gestor d'Actualitzacions"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:607(para)
-msgid "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-msgstr "El Gestor d'actualitzacions és una aplicació separada que s'inicia des de l'escriptori quan hi han actualitzacions disponibles pels paquets en del publicador."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:608(title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr "Finestra principal del Gestor d'Actualitzacions"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:612(para)
-msgid "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-msgstr "Podeu utilitzar l'aplicació del Gestor d'actualitzacions per a instal·lar els paquets de la vostra imatge. El gestor d'actualitzacions utilitza el publicador que actualment està establert en el Gestor de paquets per a actualitzar a l'última imatge."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:613(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-msgstr "Pel llançament d'OpenSolaris 2010.03, el Gestor d'actualitzacions, actualitza <emphasis role=\"strong\">tots</emphasis> els paquets instal·lats en l'imatge. Aquesta acció és equivalent a l'execució de la comanda <command>pkg image-update</command> des de la línia de comandes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:616(title)
-msgid "Using the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Utilitzant el Gestor d'Actualitzacions"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:617(para)
-msgid "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-msgstr "Quan hi han actualitzacions disponibles per als paquets instal·lats, en el panell de notificacions d'OpenSolaris es mostra una icona de notificació."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:618(para)
-msgid "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr "També podeu clicar a <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</"
- "guimenu><guisubmenu>Administratició</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Gestor d'Actualitzacions</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice> per a llaçar manualment el Gestor d'Actualitzacions."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:619(para)
-msgid "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-msgstr "Quant se us notificada una actualització de programari, realitzeu els següents pasos per a començar el procés d'actualització del vostre sistema:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:620(para)
-msgid "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Cliqueu en l'icona de notificació de l'escriptori per a mostrar la finestra del <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestor d'actualitzacions</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:622(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Actualitzar tot</guibutton> en la finestra del <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestor de paquets</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:623(para)
-msgid "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr "Seleccioneu un paquet i cliqueu al panell <guilabel>Detalls</guilabel> si voleu "
- "visualitzar més informació quant al paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:626(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-msgstr "Es mostra el diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Actualitzar tot</emphasis>. Procediu amb el procés d'actualització de tots els paquets, o bé cancel·leu l'acció."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:627(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-msgstr "Cliqueu <guibutton>Procedir</guibutton> per a crear un nou entorn d'arranc i "
- "actualitzar tots els paquets de l'imatge actual."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:628(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "Durant el procés d'Actualitzar tot, un clon de l'actual entorn d'arranc "
- "és creat. Aquest clon permet a l'usuari arrancar amb l'estat d'entorn "
- "que existia abans que el procés d'Actualitzar tot fos iniciat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:629(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "Si el Gestor de Paquets no pot crear el nou entorn d'arranc, es mostrarà "
- "un missatge d'error. Vegeu la <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> de com "
- "rectificar un error i continuar amb l'actualització de la vostra imatge."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:630(para)
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-msgstr "Es genera automàticament el nom pel nou Entorn d'Arranc. Podeu "
- "acceptar el nom generat pel sistema, o proporcionar el vostre propi nom per a l'entorn d'arranc."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:633(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Cliqueu <guibutton>Cancel·lar</guibutton> per a cancel·lar el procés."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:637(para)
-msgid "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-msgstr "Si seleccioneu procedir, es mostra la finestra <emphasis role=\"strong\">Instal·lant actualitzacions</emphasis>. El procés d'instal·lació dels paquets consisteix de quatre etapes:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:638(para)
-msgid "Prepare"
-msgstr "Preparar"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:640(para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr "Descarregar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:642(para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr "Instal·lar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:645(para)
-msgid "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-msgstr "Podeu cancel·lar el procés únicament durant les etapes de <emphasis role=\"strong\">Preparació</emphsis> i de <emphasis role=\"strong\">Descàrrega</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:646(para)
-msgid "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-msgstr "Clique al panell de <guilabel>Detalls</guilabel> per a visualitzar més informació quant a cada procés de l'instal·lació."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:647(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "Si es produeix un error durant qualsevol etapa, s'expandirà el panell de <guilabel>Detalls</guilabel> i es mostraran els detalls de l'error. Al cantó de l'etapa que ha produït l'error es mostra un indicador d'error d'estat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:650(para)
-msgid "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr "Abans de reiniciar el vostre sistema, llegiu la <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:651(para)
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr "Heu de reiniciar el vostre sistema per a que els canvis tinguin efecte."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:657(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-msgstr "És <emphasis role=\"strong\">obligatori</emphasis> crear un nou entorn d'arranc clonat "
- "per a que es pugui completar el procés d'Actualitzar tot. El següent missatge "
- "d'error es mostrat si un clon de l'entorn d'arranc no pot crear-se "
- "degut a restriccions d'espai :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:658(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>No hi ha prou espai al disc, no pot realitzar-se l'acció d'Actualitzar tot. seleccioneu Gestionar els entorns d'arranc (BE) per a gestionar els entorns d'arranc i alliberar espai al disc</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:661(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Gestionar entorns d'arranc</guibutton> en el diàleg d'error per anar a diàleg <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestionar entons d'arranc</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:663(para)
-msgid "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-msgstr "Aneu al pas 2 de la <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/>. Seguiu les "
- "instruccions per a eliminar entorn d'arranc antics o sense utilitzar i allibereu espai al disc."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:665(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Cliqueu a <guibutton>Actualitzar tot</guibutton> en la finestra del <emphasis role=\"strong\">Gestor de paquets</emphasis> per a reiniciar el procés d'actualització de tots els paquets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:669(title)
-msgid "2010.03 Release Notes"
-msgstr "Notes de la versió 2010.03"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:670(para)
-msgid "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-msgstr "Les Notes de la versió 2010.03 estan disponibles a la següent localització: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:674(title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr "Glosari del Sistema d'empaquetament d'imatges"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:675(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "publicador"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:676(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-msgstr "Una persona, un grup, o una corporació que proporciona paquets. Els paquets per a un publicador es troben en repositoris, des del qual el sistema de paquets recupera les dades del paquet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:679(glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr "repositori"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:680(para)
-msgid "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-msgstr "Una localització on els clients poden publicar i recuperar el contingut del paquet com els fitxers continguts en un paquet, i les metadades del paquet les quals inclouen informació quant al paquet com el seu nom i la seva descripció."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:683(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr "entorn d'arranc"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:684(para)
-msgid "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "Per al llançament d'OpenSolaris 2010.03, un entorn d'arranc és una instància d'un entorn que pot arrancar OpenSolaris. El sistema de fitxers arrel i tots els altres sistemes de fitxers de l'entorn d'arranc que contenen el programari del sistema obligatori per tal de ser un conjunt de dades ZFS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:685(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-msgstr "L'entorn d'arranc actual és el que actualment està arrancat. Qualsevol "
- "Entorn d'arranc pot presentar un sistema OpenSolaris i un Entorn d'arranc inactiu "
- "pot tenir un estat esperant l'activació després de reiniciar el sistema."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:688(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "clon"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:689(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Una còpia exacta."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:690(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Un clon pot ser exactament la còpia d'un sistema operatiu, un sistema de fitxers, o un "
- "volum. Aquesta còpia té una compatibilitat del 100% amb l'original."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:693(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "registre"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:694(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Un nom genèric per a les següents entitats ZFS: clons, sistemes de fitxers, "
- "instantànies, o volums. Cada registre està identificat per un únic nom a l'espai de noms ZFS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:697(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "imatge"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:698(para)
-msgid "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr "Una col·lecció de programari dins d'un paquet que comprimeix un sistema operatiu sencer o parcial. El paquet és adequat per a l'instal·lació."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:699(para)
-msgid "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "Una imatge és una localització en el vostre sistema on els paquets, els seus fitxers, directoris, enllaços, i dependències associades poden ser instal·lats."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:702(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "paquet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:703(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Una col·lecció de fitxers, directoris, enllaços, controladors, i dependències en un format definit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:706(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "origen"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:707(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-msgstr "La localització d'un repositori de paquets especificada mitjançant una URI, que conté el conjunt complet de les dades del paquet.."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:710(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "àlies"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:711(para)
-msgid "An alternate name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Un nom alternatiu per a un publicador."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:714(glossterm)
-msgid "mirror"
-msgstr "rèplica"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:715(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-msgstr "La localització d'un repositori de paquets, especificada mitjançant una URI, que conté únicament els fitxers del paquet."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "crèdits-traductor"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/ca/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/cs/cs.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1486 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
- "Project-Id-Version: Package Manager\n"
- "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
- "POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-14 11:47+0900\n"
- "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-01-20 20:31+0100\n"
- "Last-Translator: Kristyna Kitzbergerova\n"
- "Language-Team: Czech language team <[email protected]>\n"
- "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
- "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
- "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
- "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:38(None) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:88(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:68(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:583(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:609(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:3(title)
-msgid "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "Online nápověda správce balíčků pro Opensolaris 2010.03 "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:4(firstname)
-msgid "OpenSolaris"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:5(surname)
-msgid "Publications"
-msgstr "Publikace"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:8(pubsnumber)
-msgid "822-7173"
-msgstr "822-7173"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:10(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2009"
-msgstr "Červen 2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:11(publishername)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:13(year)
-msgid "2009"
-msgstr "2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:33(title)
-msgid "About the Package Manager"
-msgstr "O Správci balíčků"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:34(para)
-msgid "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-msgstr "Vítejte v online nápovědě Správce balíčků pro <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03!"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:35(para)
-msgid "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-msgstr "Využijte obsahu nápovědy pro zjištění, jak Správce balíčků používat. Nápovědou se můžete pohybovat klikáním na kategorie zobrazené na postranní liště."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:36(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-msgstr "Správce balíčků pro OpenSolaris 2010.03 je grafické uživatelské rozhraní softwaru Image Packaging System (IPS). Správce balíčků poskytuje podmnožinu funkcionalit nabízených klienty pro příkazovou řádku (CLI) poskytovaných z IPS. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Správce balíčků"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:41(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Správce balíčků Vám umožňuje provádět následující:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:42(para)
-msgid "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-msgstr "Instalovat, odebírat či hledat balíčky."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:44(para)
-msgid "Update your system"
-msgstr "Aktualizovat Váš systém"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:46(para)
-msgid "Add and manage publishers"
-msgstr "Přidávat a spravovat vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:48(para)
-msgid "Create, remove, and manage boot environments"
-msgstr "Vytvářet, odstraňovat a spravovat bootovací prostředí"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:51(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for a definition of the terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Viz <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>definice pojmů použitých v tomto dokumentu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:53(title)
-msgid "About Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "O balíčkovacím systému IPS"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:54(para)
-msgid "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-msgstr "Balíčkovací systém IPS je framework, který poskytuje správu životního cyklu softwaru zahrnující instalaci, aktualizaci a odstranění. OpenSolaris 2010.03 používá IPS a jeho balíčkovací systém."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:55(para)
-msgid "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-msgstr "Po počáteční instalaci operačního systému OpenSolaris 2010.03 zjistíte, že některé běžně používané softwarové aplikace nejsou okamžitě k dispozici. Tyto softwarové aplikace jsou jako balíčky v repozitáři dostupné ke stažení a instalaci přes síť. Repozitář je zdroj balíčků. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:56(para)
-msgid "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-msgstr "IPS poskytuje sadu softwarových nástrojů, které mohou být použity pro instalaci balíčků z repozitáře, pro vytváření vlastních IPS balíčků a jejich publikaci do repozitáře."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:57(para)
-msgid "Once you have installed packages, IPS enables you to search, update, and manage packages on your system."
-msgstr "Jakmile máte nainstalován balíček, IPS vám umožní hledat, aktualizovat a spravovat balíčky na Vašem systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:58(para)
-msgid "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-msgstr "Pomocí IPS systému můžete aktualizovat Váš systém na novější verzi OpenSolarisu, instalovat a aktualizovat Váš software na nejnovější verze v repozitáři a získávat balíčky ze zrcadleného repozitáře."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:59(emphasis)
-msgid "The Package Manager provides a subset of the tasks that can be performed from the command-line."
-msgstr "Správce balíčků poskytuje sadu úkolů, které mohou být provedeny z příkazové řádky."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:61(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-msgstr "Pokud je systém, kde je IPS nainstalován, připojen k síti, IPS může automaticky stáhnout balíčky poskytované OpenSolaris vydavatelem z repozitáře umístěného na <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:62(para)
-msgid "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-msgstr "Pro další dokumentaci k IPS navštivte <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Průvodce správce balíčků</citetitle></ulink> a <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">manuálové stránky</ulink> <filename> pkg</filename>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:63(para)
-msgid "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-msgstr "Pro více informací o IPS navštivte <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">stránku projektu</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:65(title)
-msgid "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-msgstr "Začínáme se Správcem balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:66(para)
-msgid "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-msgstr "Po spuštění Správce balíčků je zobrazena počáteční stránka podobná ukázce níže."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:67(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Start Page"
-msgstr "Počáteční stránka Správce balíčků"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:71(para)
-msgid "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-msgstr "Počáteční stránka poskytuje seznam dostupných balíčků, které mohou být nainstalovány. Zahrnuje seznam některých nejvíce populárních a nových balíčků stahovaných uživatelskou komunitou OpenSolaris. Seznam doporučených balíčků směřuje k softwarovým aplikacím často stahovaným uživateli OpenSolarisu. Po kliknutí na balíček bude balíček nainstalován."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:72(para)
-msgid "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "Počáteční stránka také poskytuje odkazy na další informace o projektu OpenSolaris, můžete si nechat zasílat buletin a připojit se ke komunitě OpenSolaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:73(para)
-msgid "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Pro zavření počáteční stránky a zobrazení seznamu balíčků zvoleného vydavatele proveďte jakoukoli z následujících akcí v hlavním okně Správce balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:74(para)
-msgid "Select a package category"
-msgstr "Vyberte kategorii balíčku"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:76(para)
-msgid "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-msgstr "Změňte rozbalovací nabídku <emphasis role=\"strong\">Náhled</emphasis> "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:78(para)
-msgid "Perform a search"
-msgstr "Proveďte hledání"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:80(para)
-msgid "Change the publisher"
-msgstr "Změňte vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:83(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to return to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Vyberte <menuchoice><guimenu>Náhled</guimenu><guimenuitem>Úvodní stránka</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice> pro návrat na Úvodní stránku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:84(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Viz také <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> vypnutí <emphasis role=\"strong\"> úvodní stránky</emphasis> při spuštění Správce balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:86(title)
-msgid "About The Package Manager Window"
-msgstr "O okně Správce balíčků"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:87(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main View"
-msgstr "Hlavní zobrazení Správce balíčků"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:91(para)
-msgid "The main window of the Package Manager consists of the following elements :"
-msgstr "Hlavní okno Správce balíčků se zkládá z následujících částí:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:92(emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr "Hlavní nabídka"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:93(para)
-msgid "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr "Hlavní nabídka obsahuje menu a podmenu potřebná k provádění všech příkazů souvisejících se Správcem balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:97(emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr "Panel nástrojů"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:98(para)
-msgid "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-msgstr "Panel nástrojů obsahuje ikony pro podskupiny příkazů, které mohou být provedeny užitím hlavní nabídky. V panelu nástrojů se také nachází políčko <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hledat</emphasis>. Je možno provést následující akce:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:99(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktualizovat</emphasis> - Klikněte na <emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktualizovat</emphasis> pro zjištění a instalaci posledních aktualizací."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:101(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Instalovat/Aktualizovat</emphasis> - Zvolte balíček a klikněte na <emphasis role=\"strong\">Instalovat/Aktualizovat</emphasis> pro instalaci nebo aktualizaci balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:103(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Obnovit</emphasis> - Klikněte na <emphasis role=\"strong\">Obnovit</emphasis> k obnovení seznamu balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:105(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Odstranit</emphasis> - Zvolte balíček a klikněte na <emphasis role=\"strong\">Odstranit</emphasis> pro odebrání balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:107(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vyhledat balíček</emphasis> - Uveďte název balíčku nebo popis balíčku do políčka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hledat</emphasis> pro vyhledání balíčku. Viz sekce <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> ukázky, jak vyhledat balíček."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:112(emphasis)
-msgid "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-msgstr "Rozbalovací menu Vydavatel"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:113(para)
-msgid "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-msgstr "Seznam dostupných vydavatelů je zobrazen v rozbalovacím menu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vydavatel</emphasis>. Uživatelé mohou z rozbalovacího menu Vydavatel provádět následující úkony:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:114(emphasis)
-msgid "Select a publisher"
-msgstr "Zvolit vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:116(emphasis)
-msgid "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-msgstr "Zobrazit seznam balíčků nainstalovaných od všech vydavatelů"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:118(emphasis)
-msgid "Search for package across all publishers"
-msgstr "Vyhledávat balíček u všech vydavatelů"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:120(emphasis)
-msgid "Add a publisher"
-msgstr "Přidat vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:125(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr "Seznam balíčků podle kategorie"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:126(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Můžete procházet dostupné balíčky po kategoriích v levém postranním panelu. Klikněte na kategorii pro zobrazení podkategorií dostupných balíčků. Ve Správci balíčků je zobrazeno šest hlavních kategorií."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:127(emphasis)
-msgid "Applications"
-msgstr "Aplikace"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:129(emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop (GNOME)"
-msgstr "Desktop (GNOME)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:131(emphasis)
-msgid "Development"
-msgstr "Vývoj"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:133(emphasis)
-msgid "Drivers"
-msgstr "Ovladače"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:135(emphasis)
-msgid "System"
-msgstr "Systém"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:137(emphasis)
-msgid "Web Services"
-msgstr "Webové Služby"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:142(emphasis)
-msgid "Recent Searches"
-msgstr "Nedávná vyhledávání"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:143(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-msgstr "Správce balíčků ukládá vaše nedávná vyhledávání balíčků. Klikněte na Nedávná vyhledávání v levém postranním panelu pro zobrazení Vámi nedávno vyhledáváných balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:146(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr "Seznam balíčků podle stavu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:147(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-msgstr "Rozbalovací nabídka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Náhled</emphasis> umožňuje zobrazení stavu balíčků s následujícími možnostmi:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:148(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Všechny balíčky</emphasis> - Zobrazí seznam všech balíčků dostupných v rámci daného vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:150(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Nainstalované balíčky</emphasis> - Zobrazí seznam balíčků v rámci daného vydavatele nainstalovaných na vašem systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:152(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktualizace</emphasis> - Zobrazí seznam balíčků s dostupnými novějšími verzemi v rámci daného vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:154(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Nenainsatlované balíčky</emphasis> - Zobrazí seznam balíčků, které nejsou nainstalovány, ale jsou dostupné v rámci daného vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:156(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that you have selected."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vybrané balíčky</emphasis> – Zobrazí seznam balíčků, které jse vybrali."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:161(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-msgstr "Jméno, Stav a Popis balíčku"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:162(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-msgstr "Zde je zobrazen seznam balíčků ve zvolené kategorii, stručný popis a jejich stav. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:163(para)
-msgid "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-msgstr "V následujících případech je zobrazen i vydavatel:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:164(para)
-msgid "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-msgstr "Rozbalovací menu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vydavatel</emphasis> je nastaveno na Všichni vydavatelé (Nainstalováno)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:166(para)
-msgid "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-msgstr "Jsou zobrazeny výsledky vyhledávání pro Všechny vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:168(para)
-msgid "When a recent search result is displayed"
-msgstr "Je zobrazen výsledek nedávného vyhledávání"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:173(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr "Podrobnosti o balíčku"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:174(para)
-msgid "Click a package name to select it. Details of the selected package, such as name, version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr "Klikněte na jméno balíčku a zobrazí se informace o vybraném balíčku jako je jméno, verze, souborové závislosti a licence."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:180(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Settings"
-msgstr "Nastavení Správce balíčku"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:181(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-msgstr "Ke změně nastavení Správce balíčků, použijte <menuchoice><guimenu>Upravit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Nastavení</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Následující sekce se zabývají nastaveními, která může uživatel měnit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:182(title)
-msgid "Start Page Preferences"
-msgstr "Nastavení úvodní stránky"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:183(para)
-msgid "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "Úvodní stránka je zobrazena v hlavním okně Správce Balíčků při spuštění aplikace. Úvodní stránka poskytuje odkazy na <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink>, dále odkaz na přihlášení se do odebírání e-mailů s novinkami a připojení se k OpenSolaris komunitě."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:184(para)
-msgid "You can choose to turn off this setting so this page is not displayed when Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Můžete zvolit vypnout toto nastavení tak, že úvodní stránka nebude zobrazena při startu Správce balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:185(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-msgstr "V hlavní nabídce zvolte<menuchoice><guimenu>Upravit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Nastavení</guimenuitem></menuchoice> a odškrtněte <emphasis role=\"strong\">Zobrazit Úvodní stránku při spuštění</emphasis>. Tento dialog je standartně zaškrtnutý."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:186(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "V hlavní nabídce zvolte <menuchoice><guimenu>Zobrazit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Úvodní stránka</guimenuitem></menuchoice> kdykoli pro zobrazení Úvodní stránky."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:188(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Ukončit nastavení"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:189(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-msgstr "Aplikace Správce balíčků je schopna si zapamatovat některá její současná nastavení, pokud je zaškrtnuta možnost <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pamatovat si současný stav při ukončení</emphasis> v nabídce <menuchoice><guimenu>Upravit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Nastavení</guimenuitem></menuchoice>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:190(para)
-msgid "The following settings are saved:"
-msgstr "Následující nastavení jsou uložena:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:191(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-msgstr "</emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertikální oddělovače</emphasis> - Velikost sloupců v hlavním okně Správce balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:193(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Velikost okna</emphasis> - Velikost okna Správce balíčků"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:195(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Současný vydavatel</emphasis> - Vydavatel, který je momentálně zvolen, když je Správce balíčků ukončen. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:199(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Nastavení Potvrzovacího Dialogu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:200(para)
-msgid "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-msgstr "Pokud je balíček vybrán k instalaci, aktualizaci nebo odebrání, je zobrazen potvrzovací dialog zobrazující seznam balíčků a operací, které budou provedeny. V okně <emphasis role=\"strong\">Ukázat Potvrzovací Dialog</emphasis> odškrtněte<emphasis role=\"strong\">Při aktualizacích</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">Při Instalaci/Aktualizaci Balíčků</emphasis> a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Při Odebírání Balíčků</emphasis> pro vypnutí těchto nastavení."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:203(title)
-msgid "Working With Packages"
-msgstr "Pracujeme s balíčky"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:204(title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr "Instalace balíčku"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:205(para)
-msgid "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr "Seznam balíčků a jejich stavu je zobrazen v hlavním okně Správce balíčků. Pro instalaci balíčku proveďte následující kroky."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:206(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Označte políčko vedle balíčku k jeho vybrání. Dvojklikem také balíček vybere."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:208(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Instalovat/Aktualizovat</guibutton> pro start procesu instalace balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:209(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Instalaci můžete také začít vybráním <menuchoice><guimenu>Balíček</"
- "guimenu><guimenuitem>Instalovat/Aktualizovat</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:211(para)
-msgid "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guilabel>Podrobnosti</guilabel> pro zobrazení podrobností o instalaci nebo na <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> pro zrušení instalace balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:213(para)
-msgid "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Po dokončení instalace klikněte na tlačítko <guibutton>Zavřít</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:216(title)
-msgid "Installation Error"
-msgstr "Chyba při instalaci"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:217(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-msgstr "Pokud dojde při instalaci k chybě, je zobrazen chybový dialog s chybovou hláškou a důvodem selhání. Klikněte na <guibutton>Zavřít</guibutton> pro zavření chybového dialogu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:220(title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr "Odstranit balíček"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:221(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Pro odstranění balíčku proveďte následující kroky:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:222(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Zaškrtněte políčko vedle balíčku k vybrání balíčku. Dvojklikem také balíček vybere."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:224(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Odebrat</guibutton> pro započetí procesu deinstalace balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:225(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr "Pro odstranění balíčku můžete také zvolit <menuchoice><guimenu>Balíček</"
- "guimenu><guimenuitem>Odstranit</guimenuitem></menuchoice>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:227(para)
-msgid "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Shlédněte balíčky k odebrání a podrobnosti o závislostech balíčků v potvrzovacím dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Potvrzení odebrání</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:229(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Pokračovat</guibutton> pro započetí odebírání balíčků nebo <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> pro zrušení procesu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:233(title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr "Vyhledání balíčku"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:234(para)
-msgid "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-msgstr "Balíček můžete hledat následujícími způsoby:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:235(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Hledat v rámci daného vydavatele</emphasis> - Vyhledávat balíček v rámci nyní vybraného vydavatele v rozbalovacím menu </emphasis role=\"strong\">Vydavatel</emphasis>. Pokud neznáte stav vyhledávaného balíčku, nastavte v rozbalobacím menu</emphasis role=\"strong\">Náhled</emphasis> hodnotu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Všechny balíčky</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:236(para)
-msgid "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-msgstr "Vložte popis a část jména do pole <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hledat</emphasis>. Například pro vyhledání <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> můžete napsat následující:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:237(para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr "SUNWgames"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:239(para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr "games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:241(para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr "GNOME-games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:244(para)
-msgid "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Pro vyhledání SunStudio kompilátorů, můžete napsat následující výrazy:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:245(para)
-msgid "compiler"
-msgstr "compiler"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:247(para)
-msgid "tools"
-msgstr "tools"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:251(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Hledat u všech vydavatelů</emphasis> - Zvolte <emphasis role=\"strong\">Všichni vydavatelé (Vyhledávání)</emphasis> v rozbalovací nabídce <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vydavatel</emphasis> pro vyhledávání balíčku v rámci všech nastavených vydavatelů. Pokud neznáte stav vyhledávaného balíčku, nastavte v rozbalovací nabídce<emphasis role=\"strong\">Náhled</emphasis> hodnotu </emphasis role=\"strong\">Všechny balíčky</emphasis> "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:252(para)
-msgid "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Uveďte popis balíčku do políčka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vyhledávání</emphasis>. Například balíček <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> je kniha o programování v Pythonu. Popis palíčku obsahuje řetězec <emphasis>book</emphasis>. Pro vyhledávání tohoto balíčku můžete použít jeden z následujících výrazů:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:253(para)
-msgid "python"
-msgstr "python"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:255(para)
-msgid "book"
-msgstr "book"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:258(para)
-msgid "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-msgstr "Pokud by vyhledávaný výraz byl <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> při hledání balíčku <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename>, výsledky by nebyly zobrazeny, neboť výraz <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> není přítomen jako nezávislé celé slovo v obsahu balíčku. Nicméně balíček naleznete užitím náhrady <literal>*</literal>. Tedy hledání výrazu <literal>diveinto*</literal> zobrazí balíček <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:262(para)
-msgid "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Užijte podnabídky v menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Upravit</guimenu></menuchoice> pro vyjmutí, kopírování nebo vložení textu do políčka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vyhledávání</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:264(para)
-msgid "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-msgstr "Při vyhledávání balíčků jsou podporovány následující operátory:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:265(emphasis)
-msgid "The AND operator"
-msgstr "Operátor AND"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:266(para)
-msgid "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-msgstr "Pokud je vyhledávaný výraz rozdělen mezerami nebo operátorem AND, Správce balíčků bude vyhledávat balíčky obsahující <emphasis role=\"strong\">všechny</emphasis> vyhledávané výrazy. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:269(emphasis)
-msgid "Double Quotes"
-msgstr "Uvozovky"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:270(para)
-msgid "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-msgstr "Pokud je vyhledávaný výraz umístěn mezi uvozovkami, Správce balíčků bude vyhledávat balíčky, které <emphasis role=\"strong\">přesně odpovídají tomuto výrazu</emphasis>. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:273(emphasis)
-msgid "Wildcard *"
-msgstr "Náhrada *"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:274(para)
-msgid "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-msgstr "Zahrnutí nahrazujícího znaku do vyhledávaného výrazu umožňuje vyhledávání částečných názvů balíčků. Například při zadání <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> do vyhledávaného výrazu by mohly zobrazené balíčky obsahovat <emphasis>boot</emphasis> a <emphasis>book</emphasis> v názvu a popisu balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:275(para)
-msgid "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-msgstr "Vyhledávání s náhradou může být pomalejší než vyhledávání přesné shody nebo vyhledávání založené na popisu balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:279(emphasis)
-msgid "The OR operator"
-msgstr "Operátor OR"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:280(para)
-msgid "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-msgstr "Pokud je vyhledávaný výraz rozdělen operátorem OR, Správce balíčků bude vyhledávat balíčky obsahující libovolný z těchto výrazů."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:285(title)
-msgid "Cancel Package Search"
-msgstr "Zrušit Vyhledávání Balíčků"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:286(para)
-msgid "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-msgstr "Pokud chcete zrušit vyhledávání, použijte ikonu Zrušit Vyhledávání ve spodní části hlavního okna Správce balíčků. Tato ikona je na stavové řádce viditelná pouze při probíhající operaci vyhledávání."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:288(title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr "Aktualizovat Balíček"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:289(para)
-msgid "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-msgstr "Vedle názvu nainstalovaného balíčku naleznete ikonu Aktualizovat. Tato ikona značí, že jsou dostupné aktualizace pro balíčky v právě vybraném vydavateli. Můžete také zvolit jeden z následujících náhledů pro zobrazení seznamu balíčků a jejich dostupných aktualizací:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:290(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "Vyberte možnost <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Aktualizace</guimenuitem></menuchoice> z rozbalovací nabídky<emphasis role=\"strong\">Náhled</emphasis> pro zobrazení seznamu všech balíčků, které mají u nyní zvoleného vydavatele dostupné aktualizace."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:292(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-msgstr "Vyberte možnost <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Aktualizace</guimenuitem></menuchoice> v rozbalovací nabídce <emphasis role=\"strong\">Náhled</emphasis> a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Všichni vydavatelé (Nainstalované)</emphasis> v nabídce <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vydavatelé</emphasis> pro zobrazení seznamu balíčků, pro které jsou dostupné aktualizace ze všech vydavatelů."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:295(para)
-msgid "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-msgstr "Aktualizace balíčku může občas selhat kvůli vlastní závislosti balíčku, který jste si vybrali pro instalaci nebo aktualizaci. Možná budete muset aktualizovat všechny balíčky na Vašem systému, abyste získali nejnovější aktualizace."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:297(para)
-msgid "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-msgstr "Vyberte balíček nebo balíčky, které chcete aktualizovat a klikněte na <guibutton>Instalovat/Aktualizovat</guibutton> pro instalaci nejnovější verze balíčku. Použijte ikonu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktualizovat</emphasis>na panelu nástrojů pro aktualizaci všech balíčků na Vašem systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:299(title)
-msgid "Package Version Information"
-msgstr "Informace o verzi balíčku"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:300(para)
-msgid "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-msgstr "Vyberte balíček v hlavním okně Správce balíčků a pro zobrazení verze balíčku, klikněte pravým tlačítkem na vybraný balíček. Existují tři typy verzí balíčků:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:301(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Instalovatelná verze</emphasis> – Verze balíčku, která je dostupná pro instalaci nebo aktualizaci. Tato verze balíčku nemusí být nejnovější kvůli závislostem balíčku na systému. Tudíž nemusí být schopni nainstalovat nejnovější verzi balíčku, dokud neaktualizujete Váš systém pomocí ikony <emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktualizovat</emphasis>na panelu nástrojů."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:303(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Nainstalovaná verze</emphasis> – verze balíčku, která je nainstalovaná na systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:305(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Nejnovější verze</emphasis> - Toto je nejnovější verze balíčku dostupná pro instalaci nebo aktualizaci. Nejnovější verze může nainstalovaná, pokud je Váš systém aktuální."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:309(title)
-msgid "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-msgstr "Zobrazit nainstalované balíčky od všech vydavatelů"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:310(para)
-msgid "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "Z vysunovací nabídky <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vydavatel</emphasis> vyberte <emphasis role=\"strong\">Všichni vydavatelé (Nainstalované)</emphasis> pro zobrazení seznamu všech balíčků, které jste nainstalovali od všech vydavatelů."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:311(para)
-msgid "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-msgstr "Nemůžete vyhledávat balíčky z možnosti <emphasis role=\"strong\">Všichni Vydavatelé (Nainstalované)</emphasis>. Přepněte na <emphasis role=\"strong\">Všichni Vydavatelé(Hledat)</emphasis> pro vyhledání balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:315(title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Úvod do Bootovacích Prostředí"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:316(para)
-msgid "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-msgstr "Bootovací prostředí je obraz, který lze zavést. Toto prostředí je vytvořeno po počáteční instalaci OpenSolarisu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:317(para)
-msgid "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-msgstr "Můžete spravovat více bootovacích prostředí na Vašem systému OpenSolaris 2010.03. Použijte příkaz <command>beadm(1)</command> z příkazové řádky (CLI) pro vytvoření, přejmenování, připojení nebo odpojení a odstranění těchto bootovacích prostředí"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:318(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-msgstr "Správce balíčků umožňuje spravovat bootovací prostředí vytvořené během procesu aktualizace obrazu. Více informací, viz sekce <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:319(para)
-msgid "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-msgstr "Uživatelé mohou spravovat více bootovacích prostředí na jejich systému a každé bootovací prostředí může obsahovat různé verze nainstalovaného softwaru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:320(para)
-msgid "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-msgstr "Pokud použijete Správce balíčků nebo příkaz <command>pkg image-update</"
- "command> pro aktualizaci všech balíčků ve Vašem aktivním bootovacím prostředí, vytvoří se automaticky klon tohoto prostředí. Balíčky jsou poté aktualizovány v tomto klonu a po úspěšném dokončení aktualizace, je tento nový klon aktivován a stane se novým výchozím bootovacím prostředím na Vašem systému. Původní bootovací prostředí je také dostupné jako alternativní výběr."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:321(para)
-msgid "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-msgstr "Viz manuálové stránky beadm(1) a dokument <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Aktualizace a správa bootovacích prostředí</citetitle></ulink>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:322(title)
-msgid "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-msgstr "Aktualizovat všechny balíčky (Aktualizovat Váš obraz)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:323(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr "Proveďte následující kroky pro aktualizaci Vašeho obrazu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:324(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Aktualizovat</guibutton> pro start procesu aktualizace <emphasis role=\"strong\">všech</emphasis> balíčků nainstalovaných na Vašem obrazu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:325(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr "Můžete také vybrat <menuchoice><guimenu>Balíček</guimenu><guisubmenu>Aktualizovat</guisubmenu></menuchoice> pro start procesu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:326(para)
-msgid "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Pokud nejsou dostupné žádné aktualizace balíčků, zobrazí se zpráva <emphasis role=\"strong\">Nejsou dostupné žádné aktualizace</emphasis> po kliknutí na <guibutton>Aktualizovat</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:329(para)
-msgid "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-msgstr "Proces aktualizace všech balíčků nainstalovaných na Vašem systému je dokončen ve třech fázích:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:330(emphasis)
-msgid "Preparation"
-msgstr "Příprava"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:332(emphasis)
-msgid "Download"
-msgstr "Stahování"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:334(emphasis)
-msgid "Install"
-msgstr "Instalace"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:337(para)
-msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-msgstr "Klikněte na záložku <emphasis>Podrobnosti</emphasis> pro zobrazení podrobností pro každou z fází."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:339(para)
-msgid "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-msgstr "Po úspešném dokončení procesu aktualizace se zobrazí dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktualizace Obrazu Dokončena</emphasis>. Je vytvořeno nové bootovací prostředí tvořené aktualizovanými balíčky. Nové bootovací prostředí získá výchozí název od Správce balíčků, tento název bootovacího prostředí je možno změnit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:340(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "Pokud Správce balíčků nedokáže vytvořit nové bootovací prostředí, je zobrazena chybová hláška. Viz sekce <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> o způsobu napravení chyb a pokračování v aktualizaci obrazu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:343(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Restartovat Nyní</guibutton> pro okamžité restartování systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:344(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Restartovat později</guibutton> pro restartování systému později. <emphasis role=\"strong\">Je nutné systém restartovat, aby se změny projevily</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:345(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "Během procesu aktualizace obrazu je vytvořen klon aktivního bootovacího prostředí. Je možno se nabootovat do klonu pro navrácení stavu bootovacího prostředí existujícího před započetím procesu aktualizace obrazu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:350(title) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:656(title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr "Chyby při aktualizaci obrazu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:351(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-msgstr "Nový klon bootovacího prostředí musí být vytvořen Správcem balíčků pro dokončení procesu Aktualizací. Pokud nelze vytvořit klon bootovacího prostředí, je zobrazena chybová hláška. Chybová hláška může vypadat například takto:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:352(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Nedostatek místa na disku, aktualizace obrazu nemůže být provedena. Zvolte Správa BE pro správu bootovacích prostředí a uvolnění místa na disku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:353(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:659(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Zavřít</guibutton> pro zrušení procesu Aktualizace Všeho."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:354(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:660(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-msgstr "Proveďte následující kroky, pokud si přejete opravit chybu a pokračovat v aktualizaci obrazu:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:355(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Správa BE</guibutton> pro zobrazení dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa Bootovacích prostředí</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:357(para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Vyberte bootovací prostředí, které chcete smazat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:358(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "Nemůžete smazat právě aktivní bootovací prostředí."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:360(para)
-msgid "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-msgstr "Nemusíte restartovat systém, pokud pouze mažete některý z bootovacích prostředí."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:365(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:367(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "Objeví se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Potvrzení Bootovacího Prostředí</emphasis>. Zkontrolujte své změny a klikněte na tlačítko OK."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:369(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Aktualizovat Vše</guibutton> pro restart procesu aktualizace všech balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:373(title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Správa Bootovacích Prostředí"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:374(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-msgstr "Proveďte následující kroky pro správu bootovacích prostředí:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:375(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <menuchoice><guimenu>Soubor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Správa Bootovacích Prostředí</guimenuitem></menuchoice> a otevře se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa Bootovacích Prostředí</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:377(para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr "V tomto dialogu lze provést následující:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:378(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktivovat bootovací prostředí</emphasis> - Zvolte bootovací prostředí, které si přejete aktivovat po restartu systému. Toto je výchozí bootovací prostředí </emphasis role=\"strong\">po</emphasis> restartování systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:380(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Odstranit stará nebo nepoužívaná bootovací prostředí pro uvolnění diskového prostoru</emphasis> - Zvolte jedno nebo více bootovacích prostředí, která chcete smazat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:381(para)
-msgid "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "Nemůžete smazat právě aktivní bootovací prostředí."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:383(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-msgstr "Pokud jste vybrali bootovací prostředí, které má být přejmenováno, tak nemůže být smazáno."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:388(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Přejmenovat bootovací prostředí</emphasis> - Poklepejte na bootovací prostředí, které chcete přejmenovat. Uveďte nový název bootovacího prostředí a klikněte na <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:389(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "Pokud jste již vybrali toto prostředí pro smazání, nemůže být přejmenováno."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:391(para)
-msgid "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "Právě aktivní bootovací prostředí nemůže být přejmenováno."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:398(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pro pokračování nebo na <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> pro zrušení všech změn."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:400(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Potvrzení bootovacího prostředí</emphasis>. Zkontrolujte své změny a klikněte na OK pro pokračování."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:401(para)
-msgid "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-msgstr "Poté, co kliknete na <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, změny již nelze vrátit zpět."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:403(para)
-msgid "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr "Změny, které jste provedli v nastavení <emphasis role=\"strong\">výchozího bootovacího prostředí</emphasis> se projeví až po restartování systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:405(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> pro zrušení všech změn."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:407(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-msgstr "Restartujte Váš systém pro nabootování do nově aktivovaného prostředí."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:408(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-msgstr "Restartujte Váš systém pouze, pokud chcete změnit aktivní bootovací prostředí."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:414(title)
-msgid "Add and Manage Publishers"
-msgstr "Přidat a Spravovat vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:415(para)
-msgid "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-msgstr "Dialog <menuchoice><guimenu>Soubor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Správa vydavatelů</guimenuitem></menuchoice> umožní uživatelům přidat a spravovat nakonfigurované vydavatele. Vydavatel je osoba, skupina nebo společnost, která navrhuje, vytváří a publikuje balíčky do repozitáře. Každý vydavatel má svůj repozitář balíčků. Umístění repozitáře je definováno pomocí zdroje a mirroru. Zdroje repozitářů slouží k poskytnutí umístění, která obsahují kompletní sady balíčků vydavatele, zatímco mirror je použit pro poskytnutí umístění, která obsahují pouze soubory balíčků. Zdroj a mirror je definován pomocí URI (Universal Resource Identifiers) jako je <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:416(para)
-msgid "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-msgstr "Přečtěte si následující sekce, jak přidat a spravovat vydavatele na Vašem systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:417(title)
-msgid "Add a Publisher"
-msgstr "Přidat vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:418(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-msgstr "Proveďte následující kroky pro přidání vydavatele a jeho URI:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:419(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Zvolte <menuchoice><guimenu>Soubor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Přidat vydavatele</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:420(para)
-msgid "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Je také možno zvolit možnost <guibutton>Přidat...</guibutton> z rozbalovací nabídky <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vydavatel</emphasis> nebo zvolit <menuchoice><guimenu>Soubor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Správa vydavatelů</guimenuitem></menuchoice> a poté kliknout na <emphasis>Přidat...</emphasis> v dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa vydavatelů</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:422(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Přidat vydavatele</emphasis>. Uveďte název vydavatele a jeho URI. Pokud je vydavatel zabezpečeným vydavatelem, jsou zobrazena políčka <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Klíč</emphasis> a <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certifikát</emphasis>. Pro přidání SSL klíče a certifikátu postupujte podle kroků v sekci <xref linkend=\"modify-published\"/> SSL Klíč a Certifikát ."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:424(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Přidat</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:426(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Přidávání vydavatele</emphasis>. Klikněte na Zrušit pro zrušení procesu. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:428(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-msgstr "V případě úspěšného přidání vydavatele se zobrazí dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Přidání vydavatele dokončeno</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:431(para)
-msgid "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-msgstr "Pokud se přidání vydavatele nezdařilo zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Chyba při přidávání vydavatele</emphasis>. Klikněte na <emphasis role=\"strong\">Podrobnosti</emphasis> pro získání více informací o chybě."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:434(title)
-msgid "Remove a Publisher"
-msgstr "Odstranit vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:435(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Proveďte následující kroky pro odstranění vydavatele:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:436(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:459(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:473(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:492(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:511(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:528(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Zvolte <menuchoice><guimenu>Soubor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Správa vydavatelů</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:438(para)
-msgid "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klikněte na vydavatele ze seznamu pro jeho vybrání. Klikněte na <guibutton>Odebrat</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:440(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Je zobrazen dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Potvrzení správy vydavatelů</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:442(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pro uložení změn a odebrání vydavatele nebo na <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> pro navrácení se k dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa vydavatelů</emphasis> bez provedení jakýchkoli změn."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:446(title)
-msgid "Set Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Nastavit Prioritu Vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:447(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-msgstr "Pro nastavení nebo změnu priorit vydavatelů proveďte následující kroky:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:448(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Zvolte <menuchoice><guimenu>Soubor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Správa vydavatelů</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pro otevření dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa vydavatelů</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:450(para)
-msgid "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-msgstr "Je zobrazen seznam nastavených vydavatelů. Kliknutím na šipky změníte priority vydavatelů. Vydavatel s nejvyšší prioritou je zobrazen na začátku seznamu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:451(emphasis)
-msgid "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-msgstr "Balíčky jsou vyhledávány v rámci vydavatelů na základě priorit, vydavatel nejvyšší priority je prohledáván jako první."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:453(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:465(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:484(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:503(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:520(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:537(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pro uložení změn nebo na <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> pro navrácení se k dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa vydavatelů</emphasis> bez provedení jakýchkoli změn."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:457(title)
-msgid "Modify Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Upravit Alias Vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:458(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-msgstr "Pro upravení aliasu vydavatele proveďte následující kroky:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:461(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Zvolte vydavatele, jehož alias chcete upravit. Klikněte na <guibutton>Upravit..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:463(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Úpravit Vydavatele</emphasis>. Změňte název nebo uveďte nový název aliasu do políčka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:467(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:486(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:505(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:522(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:539(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>OK</guibutton> v dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa vydavatelů</emphasis> pro zavření dialogu. Upozorňujeme, že kliknutí na <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> v dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa vydavatelů</emphasis> nezruší změny provedené v dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Upravit Vydavatele</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:471(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Přidat Zdroj Vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:472(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Pro přidání jednoho nebo více zdrojů vydavatele proveďte následující kroky:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:475(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Zvolte vydavatele, jehož zdroj chcete upravit. Záložka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Podrobnosti</emphasis> v dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa vydavatelů</emphasis> zobrazí zdroj vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:477(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:496(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:515(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:532(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Změnit..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:478(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Upravit vydavatele</emphasis>. Uveďte jméno nového zdroje, který si přejete přiřadit vydavateli do políčka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Zdroj</emphasis>. Klikněte na <guibutton>Přidat</guibutton>. V tabulce je zobrazen seznam zdrojů."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:479(para)
-msgid "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-msgstr "Není již možno změnit URI zdroje poté, co byl již přidán."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:482(para)
-msgid "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(volitelné) Pokud je přidaný zdroj zabezpečený, přidejte SSL Klíč a SSL Certifikát. Klikněte na <guibutton>Procházet</guibutton> pro nalezení SSL Klíče a SSL Certifikátu na vašm systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:490(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Odebrat Zdroj Vydavatelů"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:491(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Pro odebrání jednoho nebo více zdrojů vydavatele proveďte následující kroky."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:494(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Zvolte vydavatele, jehož zdroj si přejete odebrat. Záložka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Podrobnosti</emphasis> v dialogu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa vydavatelů</emphasis> zobrazí jeden nebo více zdrojů daného vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:497(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Upravit Vydavatele</emphasis>. V tabulce je zobrazen seznam zdrojů daného vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:499(para)
-msgid "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Zvolte Zdroj, který si přejete odebrat. Klikněte na <guibutton>Odebrat</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:500(para)
-msgid "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-msgstr "Pokud má vydavatel přiřazen pouze jeden zdroj, nelze jej odebrat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:509(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Přidat Mirror Vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-msgstr "Proveďte následující kroky pro přidání mirroru vydavatele:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-msgstr "Vyberte vydavatele, pro kterého chcete přidat mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:516(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Upravit Vydavatele</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:518(para)
-msgid "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Zadejte URI pro mirror do pole <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis>. Klikněte na <guibutton>Přidat</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:526(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Odstranit Mirror Vydavatele"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:527(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Proveďte následující kroky pro odstranění mirroru vydavatele:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:530(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-msgstr "Vyberte vydavatele, pro kterého chcete mirror odstranit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:533(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Upravit Vydavatele</emphasis> se seznamem mirrorů pro daného vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:535(para)
-msgid "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Vyberte mirror, který chcete odstranit a klikněte na <guibutton>Odstranit</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:544(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Pracujeme s WebInstalací"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:545(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Správce Balíčků pro OpenSolaris 2010.03 poskytuje podporu, aby uživatelé mohli přidávat nové vydavatele a volitelně, aby mohli instalovat balíčky z těchto vydavatelů jednoduše pomocí jednoho kliknutí v procesu WebInstalace. Pro proces WebInstalace je vyžadován <filename>.p5i</filename> soubor, který obsahuje vydavatele pro přidání a volitelně balíčky, které mohou být nainstalovány z těchto vydavatelů. Obsah souboru <filename>.p5i</filename> je poté přečten a použit v procesu WebInstalace."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:546(title)
-msgid "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-msgstr "Export výběru balíčků jako soubory WebInstalace"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:547(para)
-msgid "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-msgstr "Pokud si přejete distribuovat některé balíčky dostupné na Vašem systému, můžete exportovat jejich obsah do balíčku pomocí procesu WebInstalace. Nabídka <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Soubor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Exportovat výběr</guimenuitem></menuchoice> Vám umožní vytvořit <filename>.p5i</filename> soubor s instrukcemi, jak nainstalovat vybrané balíčky. Viz <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> sekce Jak instalovat balíčky z <filename>.p5i</filename> souboru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:548(para)
-msgid "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-msgstr "V následujícím postupu je vytvořen seznam kroků pro vytvoření <filename>.p5i</filename> souboru a exportu Vašich souborů."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:549(para)
-msgid "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Z vysunovací nabídky <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vydavatel</emphasis> vyberte vydavatele, ze kterého chcete vybrat balíčky pro vytvoření <filename>.p5i</filename> souboru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:551(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-msgstr "Pro výběr balíčku zaškrtněte políčko vedle balíčku. Vybrané balíčky jsou zvýrazněny. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:553(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Soubor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Výběru</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pro zobrazení okna <emphasis role=\"strong\">Potvrzení Exportu Výběru</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:555(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pro potvrzení výběru a pokračování nebo stiskněte <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> pro zrušení výběru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:557(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se okno <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Výběru</emphasis> "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:559(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se výchozí jméno <filename>p5i</filename> souboru s příponou <filename>p5i</filename>. Klikněte na do pole <emphasis role=\"strong\">Jméno</emphasis> a změňte jméno <filename>p5i</filename> souboru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:561(para)
-msgid "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-msgstr "Soubor se uloží do výchozího adresáře <filename>/tmp</filename>. Klikněte na záložku <emphasis role=\"strong\">Procházet jiné adresáře</emphasis>pro výběr vlastního adresáře."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:563(para)
-msgid "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-msgstr "Z vysunovací nabídky umístěné v pravé dolní části okna vyberte možnost <filename>p5i Soubory</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:567(title)
-msgid "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Jak Použít WebInstalaci pro Přidání Vydavatele a Instalaci Balíčků"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:568(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Proces WebInstalace Vám umožní instalovat balíčky skrz <filename>p5i</filename> soubor."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:569(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-msgstr "Najděte soubor <filename>.p5i</filename>, který může být přítomný na Vaší pracovní ploše, na Úvodní stránce Správce balíčků nebo na webových stránkách."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:571(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-msgstr "Spusťte Správce Balíčku v módu WebInstalace následujícími způsoby:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:572(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-msgstr "Klikněte na soubor <filename>.p5i</filename> na Vaší pracovní ploše. Spustí se aplikace Správce Balíčků v módu WebInstall."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:574(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-msgstr "Spusťe Správce Balíčků z příkazové řádky společně s cestou k <filename>.p5i</filename> souboru. Například, napište následující příkaz:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "cesta_k_p5i_souboru/file.p5i"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(command)
-msgid "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:577(para)
-msgid "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-msgstr "Klikněte na URL, které obsahuje odkaz na <filename>.p5i</filename> soubor. Pokud používáte tento způsob spuštění procesu WebInstalace, <filename>.p5i</filename> soubor <emphasis role=\"strong\">musí</emphasis> být umístěn na webovém serveru, pro který je registrován nový mime typ. Pouze tehdy může webový server spravovat <filename>.p5i</filename> soubory automaticky a spouštět Správce Balíčků v módu WebInstalace."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:578(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-msgstr "Pokud je <filename>.p5i</filename> umístěn na webovém serveru, který nemá registrovaný nový mime typ, uložte <filename>.p5i</filename> soubor na Váš systém a klikněte na něj pro spuštění WebInstalace."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:582(para)
-msgid "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-msgstr "Objeví se okno podobné jako je na příkladu uvedeném níže. Okno zobrazí seznam vydavatelů, kteří budou přidáni a seznam balíčků, které budou nainstalovány. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:586(para)
-msgid "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Potvrzení nebo Zrušení procesu WebInstalace."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:587(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Pokračovat</guibutton> pro přidání nového vydavatele a instalaci balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:589(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Přidat Vydavatele</emphasis>. Jméno a URI vydavatele je již vloženo."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:590(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Přidávání vydavatele dokončeno</emphasis>, pokud byl vydavatel přidán úspěšně."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:592(para)
-msgid "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(Volitelné) Pokud se jedná o zabezpečeného vydavatele, je vyžadován SSL klíč a certifikát. Klikněte na Procházet pro nalezení SSL klíče a SSL Certifikátu na Vašem systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:594(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pro pokračování."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:596(para)
-msgid "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Pokud se budou instalovat balíčky, zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Instalovat/Aktualizovat</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:597(para)
-msgid "The application will close when all packages are installed."
-msgstr "Aplikace se zavře po dokončení instalace balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:601(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-msgstr "Použití WebInstalace se Zakázaným Vydavatelem"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:602(para)
-msgid "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-msgstr "Občas může <filename>.p5i</filename> soubor obsahovat balíčky ze zakázaného vydavatele. V tomto případě WebInstalace otevře dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Povolit Vydavatele</emphasis>, který umožní uživateli povolit vydavatele před instalací balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:605(title)
-msgid "Working With the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Pracujeme se Správcem Aktualizací"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:606(title)
-msgid "About The Update Manager"
-msgstr "O Správci Aktualizací"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:607(para)
-msgid "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-msgstr "Správce aktualizací je oddělená aplikace, kterou lze spustit z plochy, pokud jsou dostupné aktualizace balíčků pro vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:608(title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr "Hlavní okno Správce aktualizací"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:612(para)
-msgid "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-msgstr "Můžete použít aplikaci Správce Aktualizací pro aktualizaci nainstalovaných balíčků na Vašem obrazu. Správce Aktualizací používá vydavatele, který je právě nastavem ve Správci Balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:613(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-msgstr "Ve verzi OpenSolaris 2010.03 Správce Aktualizací aktualizuje <emphasis role=\"strong\">všechny</emphasis> nainstalované balíčky na obraze. Tato akce je rovnocenná s příkazem <command>pkg image-update</command> v příkazové řádce."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:616(title)
-msgid "Using the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Používáme Správce aktualizací"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:617(para)
-msgid "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-msgstr "Pokud jsou aktualizace dostupné pro nainstalované balíčky, zobrazí se upozorňující ikona v panelu na ploše OpenSolarisu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:618(para)
-msgid "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr "Pro ruční spuštění Správce aktualizací můžete kliknout na <menuchoice><guimenu>Systém</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administrace</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Správce aktualizací</guimenuitem></menuchoice>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:619(para)
-msgid "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-msgstr "Jste-li upozorněni o aktualizaci softwaru, proveďte následující kroky pro start procesu aktualizace systému:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:620(para)
-msgid "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Klikněte na ikonku upozornění na ploše pro zobrazení okna <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správce Aktualizací</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:622(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Aktualizovat Vše</guibutton> v okně <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správce Aktualizací</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:623(para)
-msgid "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr "Vyberte balíček a klikněte na panel <guilabel>Podrobnosti</guilabel> pokud si přejete zobrazit informace o balíčku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:626(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-msgstr "Zobrazí se dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktualizovat Vše</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:627(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Pokračovat</guibutton> pro vytvoření nového bootovacího prostředí a aktualizujte všechny balíčky na Vašem systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:628(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "V průběhu procesu aktualizace se vytvoří klon aktivního bootovacího prostředí, který Vám umožní nabootovat do stavu systému, který existoval před aktualizací celého systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:629(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "Pokud Správce balíčků nemůže vytvořit nové bootovací prostředí, zobrazí se chybová zpráva. Viz sekce <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> jak opravit chybu a pokračovat v aktualizaci obrazu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:630(para)
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-msgstr "Jméno nového bootovacího prostředí se vygeneruje automaticky. Můžete přijmout jméno vygenerované systémem nebo vložit vlastní jméno pro toto prostředí."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:633(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Klikněte na tlačítko <guibutton>Zrušit</guibutton> pro zrušení procesu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:637(para)
-msgid "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-msgstr "Zvolíte-li pokračovat, zobrazí se okno <emphasis role=\"strong\">Instalace aktualizací</emphasis>. Proces instalace balíčků se zkládá ze čtyř kroků:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:638(para)
-msgid "Prepare"
-msgstr "Příprava"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:640(para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr "Stahování."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:642(para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr "Instalace."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:645(para)
-msgid "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-msgstr "Proces můžete zrušit během fáze <emphasis role=\"strong\">Příprava</emphasis> a <emphasis role=\"strong\">Stahování</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:646(para)
-msgid "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-msgstr "Klikněte na panel <guilabel>Detaily</guilabel> pro zobrazení informací o instalačním procesu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:647(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "Pokud se v některé fázi vyskytne chyba, zobrazí se panel <guilabel>Podrobnosti</guilabel> s podrobnostmi o vzniklé chybě. Ukazatel stavu chyby se zobrazí vedle fáze, která selhala."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:650(para)
-msgid "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr "Přečtěte si <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> před restartováním systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:651(para)
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr "Aby se změny projevily, musíte restartovat Váš systém."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:657(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Musí</emphasis> být vytvořen nový klon bootovacího prostředí pro dokončení procesu aktualizace všech balíčků. Zobrazí se následující chyba, pokud klon bootovacího prostředí nemůže být vytvořen kvůli nedostatku místa na disku:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:658(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Nedostatek místa na disku, akce Aktualizovat Vše nemůže být provedena. Zvolte Správa BE pro správu Vašich bootovacích prostředí a uvolněte místo na disku</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:661(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Správa BE</guibutton> v chybovém dialogu a přejděte do okna <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správa Bootovacích Prostředí</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:663(para)
-msgid "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-msgstr "Přejděte na krok 2 v sekci <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/>. Následujte instrukce pro smazání starých nebo nepoužívaných bootovacích prostředí a uvolnění místa na disku."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:665(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Klikněte na <guibutton>Aktualizovat Vše</guibutton> v okně <emphasis role=\"strong\">Správce aktualizací</emphasis> pro restart procesu aktualizace balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:669(title)
-msgid "2010.03 Release Notes"
-msgstr "2010.03 Poznámky k vydání"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:670(para)
-msgid "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-msgstr "Poznámky k vydání 2010.03 jsou dostupné na následujícím umístění: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:674(title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr "Slovník balíčkovacího systému IPS"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:675(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "vydavatel"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:676(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-msgstr "Osoba, skupina nebo společnost, která poskytuje balíčky. Balíčky vydavatele lze nalézt v repozitáři, ze kterého si správce balíčků stahuje informace o nich."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:679(glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr "repozitář"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:680(para)
-msgid "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-msgstr "Umístění, kde klienti mohou publikovat a získávat obsah balíčků jako jsou soubory, metada, která zahrnují informace o balíčku (jméno a popis)."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:683(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr "bootovací prostředí"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:684(para)
-msgid "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "Pro verzi OpenSolaris 2010.03 je bootovací prostředí instancí bootovacího OpenSolaris prostředí. Kořenový souborový systém a další souborové systémy bootovacího prostředí mohou obsahovat systémový software potřebný pro ZFS datasety."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:685(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-msgstr "Aktivní bootovací prostředí je to, které bude zavedeno. Na systému OpenSolaris může být umístěno více bootovacích prostředí a neaktivní prostředí mohou být ve stavu čekající na aktivaci po restartu systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:688(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "klon"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:689(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Přesná kopie."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:690(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Klon nemůže být přesná kopie operačního systému, souborového systému nebo oddílu. Tato kopie má 100% kompabilitu s originálem."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:693(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "datová sada"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:694(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Obecný název pro následující objekty ZFS: klony, souborové systémy, snímky nebo svazky. Každá datová sada je identifikována jedinečným jménem v ZFS prostoru jmen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:697(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "obraz"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:698(para)
-msgid "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr "Sbírka softwaru v balíčku, která komprimuje celý nebo část operačního systému."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:699(para)
-msgid "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "Obraz je umístění na systému, kam jsou instalovány všechny balíčky a jejich přidružené soubory, adresáře, odkazy a závislosti."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:702(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "balíček"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:703(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Kolekce souborů, adresářů, odkazů, ovladačů a závislostí v definovaném formátu."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:706(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "zdroj"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:707(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-msgstr "Umístění repozitáře specifikovaného pomocí URI, který obsahuje kompletní sadu dat balíčků."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:710(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "alias"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:711(para)
-msgid "An alternate name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Alternativní název pro vydavatele."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:714(glossterm)
-msgid "mirror"
-msgstr "mirror"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:715(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-msgstr "Umístění repozitáře specifikovaného pomocí URI, který obsahuje soubory balíčků."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "překladatelské-kredity"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/cs/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/de/de.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager-Onlinehilfe"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "Juni 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "Diese Software und zugehörige Dokumentation werden im Rahmen eines Lizenzvertrages zur Verfügung gestellt, der Einschränkungen hinsichtlich Nutzung und Offenlegung enthält und durch Gesetze zum Schutz geistigen Eigentums geschützt ist. Sofern nicht ausdrücklich in Ihrem Lizenzvertrag vereinbart oder gesetzlich geregelt, darf diese Software weder ganz noch teilweise in irgendeiner Form oder durch irgendein Mittel zu irgendeinem Zweck kopiert, reproduziert, übersetzt, gesendet, verändert, lizenziert, übertragen, verteilt, ausgestellt, ausgeführt, veröffentlicht oder angezeigt werden. Reverse Engineering, Disassemblierung oder Dekompilierung der Software ist verboten, es sei denn, dies ist erforderlich, um die gesetzlich vorgesehene Interoperabilität mit anderer Software zu ermöglichen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "Die hier angegebenen Informationen können jederzeit und ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden. Wir übernehmen keine Gewähr für deren Richtigkeit. Sollten Sie Fehler oder Unstimmigkeiten finden, bitten wir Sie, uns diese schriftlich mitzuteilen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "Wird diese Software oder zugehörige Dokumentation an die Regierung der Vereinigten Staaten von Amerika bzw. einen Lizenznehmer im Auftrag der Regierung der Vereinigten Staaten von Amerika geliefert, gilt Folgendes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065, USA."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "Diese Software oder Hardware ist für die allgemeine Anwendung in verschiedenen Informationsmanagementanwendungen konzipiert. Sie ist nicht für den Einsatz in potenziell gefährlichen Anwendungen bzw. Anwendungen mit einem potenziellen Risiko von Personenschäden geeignet. Falls die Software oder Hardware für solche Zwecke verwendet wird, verpflichtet sich der Lizenznehmer, sämtliche erforderlichen Maßnahmen wie Fail Safe, Backups und Redundancy zu ergreifen, um den sicheren Einsatz dieser Software oder Hardware zu gewährleisten. Oracle Corporation und ihre verbundenen Unternehmen übernehmen keinerlei Haftung für Schäden, die beim Einsatz dieser Software oder Hardware in gefährlichen Anwendungen entstehen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle und Java sind eingetragene Marken von Oracle und/oder ihren verbundenen Unternehmen. Andere Namen und Bezeichnungen können Marken ihrer jeweiligen Inhaber sein."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD, Opteron, das AMD-Logo und das AMD-Opteron-Logo sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken von Advanced Micro Devices. Intel und Intel Xeon sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken der Intel Corporation. Alle SPARC-Marken werden in Lizenz verwendet und sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken der SPARC International, Inc. UNIX ist eine durch X/Open Company, Ltd lizenzierte, eingetragene Marke."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "Diese Software oder Hardware und die zugehörige Dokumentation können Zugriffsmöglichkeiten auf Inhalte, Produkte und Serviceleistungen von Dritten enthalten. Oracle Corporation und ihre verbundenen Unternehmen übernehmen keine Verantwortung für Inhalte, Produkte und Serviceleistungen von Dritten und lehnen ausdrücklich jegliche Art von Gewährleistung diesbezüglich ab. Oracle Corporation und ihre verbundenen Unternehmen übernehmen keine Verantwortung für Verluste, Kosten oder Schäden, die aufgrund des Zugriffs oder der Verwendung von Inhalten, Produkten und Serviceleistungen von Dritten entstehen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "Allgemeine Informationen zu Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "Der Package Manager ist eine grafische Benutzeroberfläche (GUI) für Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Im <xref linkend=\"glossary-\"/> finden Sie Definitionen der Begriffe, die in diesem Dokument verwendet werden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) ist ein Softwarebereitstellungssystem, das mit einem Paket-Repository in einem Netzwerk interagiert. IPS ist eine Grundstruktur mit Funktionen zum Verwalten des Softwarelebenszyklus einschließlich Softwareinstallation, Upgrade und Deinstallation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "Nach der Installation des Oracle Solaris-Betriebssystems werden Sie möglicherweise feststellen, dass manche Software, die Sie verwenden möchten, nicht verfügbar ist. Diese Software ist wahrscheinlich in einem IPS-Paket-Repository enthalten. Verwenden Sie den Package Manager oder den Befehl <literal>pkg</literal>(1M), um Pakete von einem Paket-Repository herunterzuladen und zu installieren."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "Mit IPS können Sie außerdem eine Kopie eines vorhandenen IPS-Paket-Repository erstellen, Ihr eigenes IPS-Paket-Repository erstellen und Ihre eigenen IPS-Pakete veröffentlichen. Weitere Informationen zu IPS finden Sie in der Informationsbibliothek zu Oracle Solaris 11. Rufen Sie <literal>download.oracle.com</literal> auf, wählen Sie links Documentation Index. Wählen Sie dann Systems Software, Oracle Solaris 11 und schließlich View Library. Lesen Sie dazu insbesondere <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "Der Package Manager bietet einen Teil der Funktion, die über die IPS-Befehlszeilenschnittstelle bereitgestellt wird."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Mit dem Package Manager können Sie die folgenden Aufgaben ausführen:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Suchen, Installieren, Aktualisieren oder Entfernen von IPS-Paketen: weitere Informationen unter <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "Aktualisieren des Systems (Updates für alle Pakete auf Ihrem System): weitere Informationen unter <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Hinzufügen, Ändern und Löschen von IPS-Paketherausgebern: weitere Informationen unter <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "Aufführen, Umbennenen, Löschen und Verwalten von Boot-Umgebungen: weitere Informationen unter <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "Erstellen einer WebInstall-Installationsdatei (<filename>.p5i</filename>): weitere Informationen unter <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "Diese Dokumentation bezieht sich auf die folgenden Funktionen im Fenster \"Package Manager\":"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "Der große Fensterbereich in der Mitte enthält den Paketlistenbereich. In diesem Fensterbereich werden manchmal auch Informationsmeldungen angezeigt. I. d. R. ist in diesem Fensterbereich jedoch eine Liste der Pakete enthalten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "In der Menüleiste im oberen Bereich des Fensters befinden sich die meisten Package Manager-Funktionalitäten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "In der Symbolleiste direkt unter der Menüleiste befinden sich links Schaltflächen zum Ausführen häufiger Operationen. Die Schaltflächen links von der Trennlinie haben globale Funktionen: Aktualisieren aller Pakete, für die Updates verfügbar sind, oder Aktualisieren der Paketliste und des Paketstatus. Die Schaltflächen rechts von der Trennlinie sind nur für ausgewählte Pakete vorgesehen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Das Suchfeld rechts in der Symbolleiste dient zur Steuerung des Inhalts des Paketlistenbereichs. Weitere Informationen dazu finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "Über das Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> unter den Schaltflächen können Sie den Inhalt des Paketlistenbereichs bestimmen und auch einen neuen Herausgeber hinzufügen. Weitere Informationen dazu finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> \"Nach Herausgeber\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "Über das Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> unter dem Suchfeld können Sie den Inhalt des Paketlistenbereichs bestimmen. Weitere Informationen dazu finden Sie unter \"Aufführen von Paketen\" und \"Nach Paketstatus\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "Im Kategoriebereich unter dem Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> können Sie den Inhalt des Paketlistenbereichs bestimmen. Weitere Informationen dazu finden Sie unter \"Aufführen von Paketen\" und \"Nach Kategorie\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "Unterhalb der Liste mit Softwarekategorien befindet sich die Liste der Suchvorgänge, die Sie in dieser Sitzung ausgeführt haben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "Unterhalb des Paketlistenbereichs befindet sich der Fensterbereich mit Paketinformationen. Weitere Informationen dazu finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "Verwalten von Paketen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "Sie können Pakete nach unterschiedlichen Kriterien aufführen. Sie können Pakete installieren, aktualisieren und entfernen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "Aufführen von Paketen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "Die Liste der Pakete im entsprechenden Package Manager-Listenbereich hängt von den der getroffenen Auswahl in den Dropdown-Menüs <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> und <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> sowie von der Auswahl im Kategoriebereich und im Suchfeld ab."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "Sie können die Paketliste neu sortieren, indem Sie auf die Spaltenüberschriften klicken."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "Sie können die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Aktualisieren</guibutton> oder die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Aktualisieren</guimenuitem></menuchoice> verwenden, um die Repository-Kataloge neu zu lesen und die Liste der Pakete sowie Paketstatus zu aktualisieren. Die Aktualisierung erfolgt auch immer beim Öffnen des Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "Nach Herausgeber"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "Über das Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> können Sie die Pakete in Abhängigkeit der jeweiligen Herausgeber aufführen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "Im oberen Bereich des Menüs sind die Namen der Herausgeber aufgeführt, die Sie über das Dialogfeld \"Herausgeber hinzufügen\" oder mithilfe des Befehls <literal>pkg</literal> hinzugefügt haben. Wenn Sie einen dieser Herausgeber auswählen, werden im Paketlistenbereich nur die Pakete aufgeführt, die vom ausgewählten Herausgeber verfügbar sind. Im Paketlistenbereich werden nur die Spalten \"Name\", \"Status\" und \"Zusammenfassung\" angezeigt, weil der Herausgeber bei allen Paketen der gleiche ist."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber</guimenuitem> – Zeigt im Paketlistenbereich alle Herausgeber an. Im Paketlistenbereich werden die Spalten \"Name\", \"Status\", \"Herausgeber\" und \"Zusammenfassung\" angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Beispiel: Wählen Sie zum Aufführen aller Mediengerätetreiber, für die Updates von allen Herausgebern verfügbar sind, im Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> die Option <guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber</guimenuitem>. Wählen Sie dann die Kategorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Treiber</guimenu><guimenuitem>Medien</guimenuitem></menuchoice> und im Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> die Option <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Alle installierten Pakete</guimenuitem> – Zeigt alle Pakete an, die von allen Herausgebern installiert sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "Beispiel: Wählen Sie zum Aufführen aller Schriftartenpakete vom Herausgeber <literal>solaris</literal> die Option <guimenuitem>Alle installierten Pakete</guimenuitem> des Menüs <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu>. Wählen Sie die Kategorie <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Schriftarten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, klicken Sie zum Sortieren der Liste nach Herausgeber auf die Spaltenüberschrift \"Herausgeber\" und scrollen Sie zu den <literal>solaris</literal>-Einträgen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber (Suche)</guimenuitem> – Zeigt im Paketlistenbereich eine Informationsmeldung anstelle einer Liste der Pakete an. In der Meldung werden alle Herausgeber aufgeführt, die Sie konfiguriert haben. In dieser Meldung wird außerdem beschrieben, wie Sie alle Pakete dieser Herausgeber anzeigen können. Unter <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> finden Sie weitere Informationen zum Suchen mithilfe der Option <guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber (Suche)</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Hinzufügen...</guimenuitem> – Öffnet das Fenster \"Herausgeber hinzufügen\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "Nach Paketstatus"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "Über das Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> können Sie die Pakete in Abhängigkeit des Paketstatus aufführen. Der Paketstatus zeigt an, ob ein Paket installiert oder nicht installiert ist oder ob ein Update für das Paket verfügbar ist. Die Symbole im Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> entsprechen den Symbolen, die in der Spalte \"Status\" des Paketlistenbereichs angezeigt werden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Alle Pakete</guimenuitem> – Zeigt alle von dem ausgewählten Herausgeber verfügbaren Pakete, die in der ausgewählten Kategorie enthalten sind oder mit der angegebenen Suchzeichenfolge übereinstimmen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Beispiel: Wählen Sie zum Aufführen aller Web Services-Pakete vom Herausgeber <literal>solaris</literal>, die installiert oder nicht installiert sind oder für die Updates verfügbar sind, im Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> die Option <literal>solaris</literal>. Wählen Sie die Kategorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> und anschließend die Option <guimenuitem>Alle Pakete</guimenuitem>, die sich im Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> befindet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Installierte Pakete</guimenuitem> – Zeigt alle installierten Pakete des ausgewählten Herausgebers an, die in der ausgewählten Kategorie enthalten sind oder mit der angegebenen Suchzeichenfolge übereinstimmen. Weitere Informationen dazu finden Sie unter <menuchoice><guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu><guimenuitem>Alle installierten Pakete</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Beispiel: Wählen Sie zum Aufführen nur der Webserverpakete, die vom Herausgeber <literal>solaris</literal> installiert wurden, im Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> die Option <literal>solaris</literal>. Wählen Sie die Kategorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> und dann die Option <guimenuitem>Installierte Pakete</guimenuitem>, die sich im Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> befindet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> – Zeigt alle Pakete vom ausgewählten Herausgeber an, die in der ausgewählten Kategorie enthalten sind oder mit der angegebenen Suchzeichenfolge übereinstimmen und für die Updates verfügbar sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Beispiel: Wählen Sie zum Aufführen aller Gerätetreiber, für die Updates von allen Herausgebern verfügbar sind, im Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> die Option <guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber</guimenuitem>. Wählen Sie die Kategorie <guimenu>Treiber</guimenu> und anschließend im Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> die Option <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Nicht installierte Pakete</guimenuitem> – Zeigt alle Pakete vom ausgewählten Herausgeber an, die in der ausgewählten Kategorie enthalten sind oder mit der angegebenen Suchzeichenfolge übereinstimmen und nicht installiert sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Beispiel: Wählen Sie zum Aufführen aller zurzeit nicht installierter Schriftartenpakete vom Herausgeber <literal>solaris</literal> im Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> die Option <literal>solaris</literal>. Wählen Sie dann die Kategorie <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Schriftarten</guimenuitem></menuchoice> und anschließend im Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> die Option <guimenuitem>Nicht installierte Pakete</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Ausgewählte Pakete</guimenuitem> – Führt alle Pakete auf, die zurzeit ausgewählt sind. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "Nach Kategorie"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "Links im Fenster \"Package Manager\" können Sie im Kategoriebereich die verfügbaren Pakete nach Softwaretyp durchsuchen. Klicken Sie auf einen Kategorienamen, um die Unterkategorien anzuzeigen. Pakete in der ausgewählten Kategorie oder Unterkategorie werden in Abhängigkeit vom ausgewählten Herausgeber, dem Status der Pakete und den angegebenen Suchkriterien im Paketlistenbereich aufgeführt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "Im Kategoriebereich können Sie neben den benannten Softwaretypen auch <guimenuitem>Alle Kategorien</guimenuitem> und <guimenuitem>Letzte Suchläufe</guimenuitem> auswählen. Unter <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> \"Repeat a Previous Search\" finden Sie weitere Informationen zu den <guimenuitem>Letzten Suchläufen</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "Suchen von Paketen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "Wenden Sie eine der zwei folgenden Methoden an, um Pakete zu suchen:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Fokussieren Sie den Paketlistenbereich (wählen Sie dazu z. B. <menuchoice><guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu><guimenuitem>Zur Paketliste wechseln</guimenuitem></menuchoice>) und geben Sie den Namen ein. Während der Tastatureingabe werden Übereinstimmungen unter den Paketen ermittelt, die zurzeit im Paketlistenbereich aufgeführt sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Verwenden Sie das Suchfeld in der Symbolleiste."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "Suchzeichenfolge eingeben"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "Geben Sie in das Suchfeld eine Zeichenfolge ein, und drücken Sie die Eingabetaste, oder klicken Sie auf das Lupensymbol rechts neben dem Suchfeld."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Menüauswahl <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> – Der Package Manager durchsucht die Informationen zu jedem Paket von einem bestimmten Herausgeber oder von allen Herausgebern auf eine Suchzeichenfolge und unter Berücksichtigung der ausgewählten Option im Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Die Suchergebnisse sind beim Auswählen der Option <guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber</guimenuitem> oder <guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber (Suche)</guimenuitem> gleich. Wenn Sie die Option <guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber (Suche)</guimenuitem> wählen, erfolgt der Suchvorgang jedoch schneller, weil dabei die Daten von allen Herausgebern, die mit der Option <guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber</guimenuitem> übernommen werden, nicht geladen werden. Mit <guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber (Suche)</guimenuitem> werden alle Herausgeber durchsucht, ohne dass Daten von allen Herausgebern im Paketlistenbereich geladen werden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "Menüauswahl <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> – Die Suchergebnisse werden im Paketlistenbereich in Abhängigkeit des Paketstatus angezeigt, den Sie im Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> ausgewählt haben. Sie können auch einen anderen Teil der Suchergebnisse im Paketlistenbereich anzeigen, indem Sie eine andere Option im Menü <guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu> auswählen, ohne den Suchvorgang neu auszuführen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "Der Package Manager durchsucht Paketinformationen einschließlich Name, Zusammenfassung, Beschreibung, Kategorie und Namen der Dateien, die im Paket enthalten sind. Wenn Sie keine Platzhalter verwenden, werden nur exakte Übereinstimmungen gefunden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "UND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "Wenn Suchbegriffe durch Leerzeichen oder <literal>UND</literal> getrennt sind, sucht der Package Manager nach Paketen, die <emphasis role=\"strong\">alle</emphasis> Suchbegriffe enthalten. Das ist die Standard-Sucheinstellung."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "Beispiel: Wenn die Suchzeichenfolge <literal>python book</literal> oder <literal>python UND book</literal> lautet, werden in den Suchergebnissen nur die Pakete angezeigt, die <emphasis>beide Begriffe</emphasis>; <literal>python</literal><emphasis> und </emphasis><literal>book</literal>, in den Paketinformationen enthalten. Das Paket <literal>diveintopython</literal> (ein Handbuch zur Python-Programmierung) würde beispielsweise in den Suchergebnissen angezeigt, das Paket <literal>python-26</literal> nicht."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "Doppelte Anführungszeichen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "Setzen Sie den Suchbegriff in doppelte Anführungszeichen, um genau nach diesem Suchbegriff zu suchen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "Beispiel: Der Suchbegriff <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in doppelten Anführungszeichen entspricht <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> jedoch nicht <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "Platzhalter"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "Sie können in der Suchzeichenfolge <literal>*</literal> als Platzhalter verwenden. Die Suche mit Platzhaltern kann länger dauern."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "Beispiel: <literal>802.11*</literal> entspricht <literal>802.11b/g</literal> und <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "Beachten Sie, dass <literal>802.11*</literal> nicht <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal> entspricht. Verwenden Sie zum Suchen von <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal> die Suchzeichenfolge <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "ODER"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "Wenn Suchbegriffe durch <literal>ODER</literal> getrennt sind, sucht der Package Manager nach Paketen, die <emphasis role=\"strong\">einen</emphasis> der Suchbegriffe enthalten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "Beispiel: <literal>python ODER book</literal> entspricht allen Paketen, die <literal>python</literal> oder <literal>book</literal> in den Paketinformationen enthalten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "Sie können diese Suchzeichenfolgenmodifizierer kombinieren. Verwenden Sie UND, ODER, doppelte Anführungszeichen und * in einer Suchzeichenfolge."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "Suchfeld löschen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "Verwenden Sie zum Löschen der Suchzeichenfolge und der Suchergebnisse das Suchfeld oder das Menü \"Bearbeiten\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie im Suchfeld auf das Symbol <literal>X</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im Menü <guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu> die Option <guimenuitem>Suche löschen</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "Suche abbrechen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "Während eines Suchvorgangs wird im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Package Manager\" auf der rechten Seite der Statusleiste eine Fortschrittsleiste angezeigt. Auf der rechten Seite der Fortschrittsleiste befindet sich ein <literal>X</literal>-Symbol. Klicken Sie auf das <literal>X</literal>-Symbol in der Fortschrittsleiste, um den Suchvorgang abzubrechen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "Vorherige Suchergebnisse erneut anzeigen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "Die Suchergebnisse eines Suchvorgangs, den Sie während der aktuellen Package Manager-Sitzung ausgeführt haben, werden im Kategoriebereich unter <guimenuitem>Letzte Suchläufe</guimenuitem> gespeichert."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im Kategoriebereich die Beschriftung <guimenuitem>Letzte Suchläufe</guimenuitem>, um im Paketlistenbereich eine Informationsmeldung anzuzeigen. Im Paketlistenbereich wird eine Liste der vorherigen Suchergebnisse angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf eine \"Ergebnisse\"-Verknüpfung, um diese Suchergebnisse erneut anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie den Pfeil links neben <guimenuitem>Letzte Suchläufe</guimenuitem>, um die Liste der vorherigen Suchergebnisse im Kategoriebereich zu erweitern oder auszublenden. Wählen Sie in der Liste der letzten Suchläufe ein Element aus, um diese Suchergebnisse erneut anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "Ein Suchlauf, bei dem keine entsprechenden Pakete gefunden wurden, wird nicht in der Liste der letzten Suchläufe gespeichert."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "Wenn Sie die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Aktualisieren</guibutton> oder die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Aktualisieren</guimenuitem></menuchoice> wählen, werden alle Suchergebnisse der letzten Suchläufe gelöscht."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "Anzeigen weiterer Informationen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "Weitere Informationen zu einem Paket finden Sie im Paketinformationsbereich oder im Dialogfeld \"Paket-Versionsinformationen\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "Paketinformationsbereich"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie zum Anzeigen weiterer Informationen zu einem Paket mit der linken Maustaste auf ein Paket, um das Paket in der Paketliste zu markieren. Im Paketinformationsbereich unterhalb des Paketlistenbereichs werden Informationen wie die neueste verfügbare Version des Herausgebers, die Größe des Pakets, die Dateien im Paket sowie die Abhängigkeiten und Lizenzbestimmungen angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "Wenn ein Paket nach der Installation umbenannt wurde, wird der neue Name des Pakets auf der Registerkarte \"Allgemein\" im Feld \"Umbenannt in\" angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Auf der Registerkarte \"Versionen\" wird eine Liste aller Versionen des Pakets angezeigt, die für Ihre Installation verfügbar sind. Wählen Sie aus der Liste eine Version aus, und klicken Sie rechts neben der Liste auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Installation/Update</guibutton>, um die gewünschte Version zu installieren. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "Der Paketinformationsbereich wird nicht angezeigt, wenn der Paketlistenbereich eine Informationsmeldung enthält."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "Dialogfeld \"Paket-Versionsinformationen\""
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf ein Paket in der Paketliste, um das Menü <guimenu>Paket</guimenu> anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie entweder im Popup-Menü oder in der Menüleiste die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paket-Versionsinformationen</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um ein separates Fenster anzuzeigen, in dem die Version des installierten Pakets sowie die neueste Version, die Sie installieren oder auf die Sie ggf. aktualisieren können, angezeigt werden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "Auswählen von Paketen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Ausgewählte Pakete können installiert, aktualisiert oder entfernt werden. Verwenden Sie zum Auswählen eines Pakets den Paketlistenbereich oder das Menü <guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "Führen Sie im Paketlistenbereich eine der folgenden Aktionen aus, um ein Paket auszuwählen. Sie können auch mehrere Pakete auswählen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf das Kontrollkästchen links neben dem Paketnamen. Klicken Sie erneut auf das Kontrollkästchen, um die Auswahl des Pakets aufzuheben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie einmal auf den Paketnamen, um das Paket zu markieren. Doppelklicken Sie anschließend auf das ausgewählte Paket, um es auszuwählen. Doppelklicken Sie erneut auf das Paket, um die Auswahl dieses Pakets aufzuheben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie in der Spaltenüberschrift auf das Kontrollkästchensymbol, um alle Pakete auszuwählen, die im Paketlistenbereich derzeit aufgeführt sind. Klicken Sie erneut auf das Kontrollkästchensymbol, um die aktuelle Auswahl aller Pakete aufzuheben, die in diesem Paketlistenbereich aufgeführt sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "Das Menü <guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu> enthält folgende Optionen zum Auswählen von Paketen:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Alle auswählen</guimenuitem> – Wählt alle Pakete aus, die derzeit im Paketlistenbereich aufgeführt sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Updates auswählen</guimenuitem> – Wählt alle Pakete aus, die im aktuellen Paketlistenbereich aufgeführt sind und für die Updates verfügbar sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Auswahl für alle aufheben</guimenuitem> — Hebt die Auswahl für alle Pakete auf, die derzeit im Paketlistenbereich aufgeführt sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "Wenn Sie ein Paket auswählen, bleiben die zuvor ausgewählten Pakete stets ausgewählt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "Die Anzahl der derzeit im Paketlistenbereich aufgeführten Pakete und die Anzahl der Pakete, die ausgewählt sind, werden im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Package Manager\" links in der Statusleiste angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Option <menuchoice><guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu><guimenuitem>Alle Herausgeber</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, dann die Kategorie <guimenuitem>Alle Kategorien</guimenuitem> und schließlich die Option <menuchoice><guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu><guimenuitem>Ausgewählte Pakete</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um alle Pakete von allen Herausgebern im Paketlistenbereich aufzuführen. "
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "Ein Paket kann markiert aber nicht ausgewählt werden. Wenn ein Paket markiert ist, werden Informationen zu diesem Paket im Paketinformationsbereich unterhalb des Paketlistenbereichs angezeigt. Wenn ein Paket ausgewählt ist, wird ein Häkchen im Kontrollkästchen links neben dem Paketnamen angezeigt. Wenn Sie ein Paket installieren, aktualisieren oder löschen möchten, muss das Kontrollkästchen für dieses Paket ein Häkchen enthalten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "Installieren und Aktualisieren der Paketen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "Überprüfen Sie vor dem Installieren oder Aktualisieren die Einstellungen unter 'Optionale Komponenten'. Wählen Sie die Option <menuchoice><guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu><guimenuitem>Einstellungen</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Wählen Sie im Fenster \"Einstellungen\" die Registerkarte \"Optionale Komponenten\". Die Optionen \"Alle Sprachen installieren\", \"Alle Entwicklungsdateien installieren\" und \"Alle Dokumentationen installieren\" sind standardmäßig ausgewählt. Sie können Speicherplatz sparen, wenn Sie z. B. einen Teil der Sprachen auswählen oder die Auswahl der Entwicklungsdateien aufheben. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche \"OK\", um die Änderungen zu speichern. Diese Einstellungen gelten für alle installierten Pakete und alle künftigen Paketinstallationen und -Updates."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie die folgenden Schritte aus, um ein Paket zu installieren oder zu aktualisieren:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie das Paket aus. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "Wenden Sie eine der folgenden Methoden an, um das Paket zu installieren oder zu aktualisieren:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie in der Symbolleiste die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Installation/Update</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie in der Menüleiste die Option <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Installation/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Namen des Pakets, um das Popup-Menü <guimenu>Paket</guimenu> anzuzeigen. Wählen Sie dann die Option <guimenuitem>Installation/Update</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im Paketinformationsbereich unterhalb des Paketlistenbereichs auf der Registerkarte \"Versionen\" in der Liste \"Zu installierende Version\" eine Version aus, und klicken Sie rechts neben der Liste auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Installation/Update</guibutton>. Die in der Liste \"Zu installierende Version\" aufgeführten Versionen sind im Repository verfügbar und sind möglicherweise nicht installierbar. Eine bestimmte Version ist u. U. nicht mit anderen bereits installierten Paketen kompatibel. Wenn die ausgewählte Version nicht auf Ihrem System installiert werden kann, zeigt der Package Manager eine Warnung an und installiert nicht das Paket."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Wenn das Paket bereits installiert ist und kein Update für dieses Paket verfügbar ist (siehe dazu Spalte \"Status\" oder Option <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paket-Versionsinformationen</guimenuitem></menuchoice>), ist die Option <guibutton>Installation/Update</guibutton> ausgegraut und daher nicht auswählbar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "Das Fenster \"Installation/Update - Bestätigung\" wird angezeigt. Die noch nicht installierten Pakete werden im Bereich \"Installationsdetails\" aufgeführt. Bereits installierte Pakete werden im Bereich \"Updatedetails\" übersichtlich aufgeführt. Wählen Sie die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Fortfahren</guibutton>, um die aufgeführten Pakete zu installieren oder zu aktualisieren."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "In manchen Fällen wird ein Dialogfeld zur Lizenz angezeigt, die Sie akzeptieren müssen, um das Paket zu installieren."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "Wenn während der Paketinstallation ein Fehler auftritt, wird ein Fehlerdialogfeld angezeigt. Der Grund für das Fehlschlagen der Installation bzw. des Updates wird in Meldungen beschrieben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "Entfernen von Paketen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Entfernen eines Pakets folgende Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "Wenden Sie eine der folgenden Methoden an, um das Paket zu entfernen:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie in der Symbolleiste die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Entfernen</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie in der Menüleiste die Option <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Entfernen</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Namen des Pakets, um das Popup-Menü <guimenu>Paket</guimenu> anzuzeigen. Wählen Sie dann die Option <guimenuitem>Entfernen</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Wenn das Paket nicht installiert ist, ist die Option \"Entfernen\" ausgegraut und nicht auswählbar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "Das Fenster \"Bestätigung für Entfernen\" wird angezeigt. Die zu entfernenden Pakete werden im Fensterbereich \"Entfernungsdetails\" für Sie zum Überprüfen aufgeführt. Wählen Sie die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Fortfahren</guibutton>, um die aufgeführten Pakete zu entfernen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "Wenn ein Paket nicht entfernt werden kann, weil andere Pakete von diesem abhängig sind, können Sie die Option <guibutton>Entfernen fortsetzen</guibutton>, um zu versuchen, die übrigen Pakete zu entfernen, die Sie ursprünglich zum Entfernen ausgewählt hatten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "Aktualisieren des Systems"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "Wenn bestimmte Schlüsselpakete (z. B. manche Treiber und andere Kernel-Komponenten) aktualisiert werden, werden auf dem System folgende Aktionen ausgeführt:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "Erstellt einen Klon der aktuellen Boot-Umgebung (BU)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "Aktualisiert die Pakete im Klon. Pakete in der aktuellen BU werden nicht aktualisiert."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Legt die neue BU als Standard-Boot-Option für den nächsten Systemneustart fest. Die aktuelle BU bleibt als alternative Boot-Option bestehen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "Aktualisieren aller Pakete"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Wenn Sie in der Symbolleiste die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> auswählen oder die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> wählen, aktualisiert der Package Manager alle installierten Pakete, für die Updates verfügbar sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "Alle Pakete, für die Updates von ihren aktuellen Herausgebern verfügbar sind, werden aktualisiert. Wenn für ein Paket Updates von einem anderen Herausgeber in Ihrer Herausgeberliste verfügbar sind, wird das Paket nur dann aktualisiert, wenn der jeweilige aktuelle Herausgeber nicht als Sticky-Herausgeber konfiguriert ist."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "Das Fenster \"Updates\" wird angezeigt, und der Updateprozess wird gestartet:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "Alle Kataloge auf dem System werden aktualisiert."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "Auf dem System werden die installierten Pakete ausgewertet, um zu ermitteln, für welche Pakete Updates verfügbar sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "Wenn für keine Pakete Updates verfügbar sind, wird die Meldung 'Keine Updates verfügbar' angezeigt, und der Vorgang wird beendet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "Wenn Paketupdates verfügbar sind, werden die zu aktualisierenden Pakete für Sie zum Überprüfen aufgeführt. An dieser Stelle können Sie noch auf <guibutton>Abbrechen</guibutton> klicken, um das Update abzubrechen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Fortfahren</guibutton>, um das Update fortzusetzen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "Auf dem System kann je nach Paketen, die aktualisiert werden, eine neue Boot-Umgebung (BU) erstellt werden (siehe dazu <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> oben)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Wenn auf dem System festgestellt wird, dass eine neue BU erforderlich ist, diese aber nicht erstellt werden konnte, wird eine Fehlermeldung angezeigt. Wenn die Urasche dafür nicht genug Speicherplatz ist, führen Sie die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf <guibutton>Schließen</guibutton>, um den Updatevorgang abzubrechen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen unter <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/>, um eine nicht mehr erforderliche BU zu entfernen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie erneut <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>, um den Updatevorgang neu zu starten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "Alle Paketupdates werden auf das System heruntergeladen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "Die Paketupdates werden auf dem System installiert. Wenn eine Klon-BU erstellt wurde, werden die Updates im Klon installiert. Wenn kein Klon erstellt wurde, werden die Updates in der aktuellen BU installiert."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "Wenn während des Updatevorgangs ein Fehler auftritt, wird der Bereich \"Details\" erweitert, um die Fehlerdetails anzuzeigen. Neben der fehlgeschlagenen Phase wird ein Fehlerstatusindikator angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Wenn auf dem System eine neue BU für das Update erstellt wurde, können Sie den Standard-BU-Namen bearbeiten. Wenn der gewünschte BU-Name eingegeben ist, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Erneut starten</guibutton>, um das System sofort neu zu starten. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Später erneut starten</guibutton>, um das System später neu zu booten. Sie müssen einen Neustart ausführen, um die neue BU zu booten. Die neue BU ist die Standard-Boot-Option. Die aktuelle BU bleibt als alternative Boot-Option verfügbar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "Verwenden von Update Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "Sie können den Update Manager über eine Systembenachrichtigung oder über die Desktop-Menüleiste öffnen. Der Update Manager führt den gleichen Prozess durch (siehe Beschreibung oben unter <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "Sofware-Updatebenachrichtigung"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "Das System überprüft regelmäßig, ob Updates für die installierten Pakete verfügbar sind. Wenn das System verfügbare Updates erkennt, werden das Benachrichtigungssymbol \"Updates verfügbar\" sowie eine Popup-Meldung im Benachrichtigungsbereich angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf das Benachrichtigungssymbol, um den Update Manager zu öffnen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "Menü \"Desktop System\""
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie in der Desktop-Menüleiste die Option <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um den Update-Manager zu öffnen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "Verwalten von Herausgebern"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "Sie können IPS-Paketherausgeber hinzufügen, ändern und entfernen. Sie können die Priorität für einen Herausgeber, den aktivierten Status und Sticky-Einstellungen sowie den Herausgeber-Alias ändern. Außerdem können Sie einen Herausgeberursprung sowie einen Herausgeberspiegel hinzufügen oder entfernen. Sie haben auch die Möglichkeit, Schlüssel, Zertifikate und die Signaturrichtlinie zu verwalten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "Beachten Sie, dass Systemherausgeber eine Ausnahme bilden. Systemherausgeber können nur im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" angezeigt werden. Sie können nicht entfernt oder geändert werden. Die Priorität für Systemherausgeber kann auch nicht geändert werden (siehe dazu <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>). Im Bereich \"Details\" wird angezeigt, ob der ausgewählte Herausgeber ein Systemherausgeber ist."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "Hinzufügen von Herausgebern"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Verwenden Sie zum Hinzufügen eines IPS-Paketherausgebers das Fenster \"Herausgeber hinzufügen\". Führen Sie zum Öffnen des Fensters \"Herausgeber hinzufügen\" eine der folgenden Aktionen aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> die Option <guimenuitem>Hinzufügen</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Herausgeber hinzufügen</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Herausgeber verwalten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Wählen Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Hinzufügen</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber hinzufügen\" die folgenden Schritte aus, um einen IPS-Paketherausgeber hinzuzufügen:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "Geben Sie in das URI-Feld die URI des Herausgebers ein. Die URI ist eine Netzwerkadresse wie z. B. <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> oder <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "In das Feld \"Alias\" können Sie einen alternativen Namen für diesen Herausgeber eingeben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Hinzufügen</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "Das Dialogfeld \"Herausgeber wird hinzugefügt\" wird angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf <guibutton>Abbrechen</guibutton>, um den Prozess abzubrechen. Klicken Sie auf \"Details\", um Verbose-Informationen anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "Wenn der neue Herausgeber erfolgreich hinzugefügt werden konnte, wird das Dialogfeld \"Hinzufügen des Herausgebers abgeschlossen\" mit dem Namen, Alias und der URI des neuen Herausgebers angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "Wenn der neue Herausgeber nicht hinzugefügt wird, wird das Dialogfeld \"Herausgeberfehler\" mit Fehlerinformationen angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "Der neue Herausgeber wird als letzter Herausgeber im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" aufgeführt. Er ist aktiviert und als Sticky-Herausgeber festgelegt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "Unter <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> finden Sie Informationen dazu, wie Sie die Priorität für einen neuen Herausgeber, den aktivierten Status und Sticky-Einstellungen, den Herausgeber-Alias ändern können und wie Sie einen Herausgeberursprung hinzufügen können, einen SSL-Schlüssel und ein SSL-Zertifikat festlegen können, einen Herausgeberspiegel hinzufügen können und Herausgeberzertifikate sowie Signaturrichtlinie verwalten können."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "Ändern von Herausgebern"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie zum Ändern der Attribute eines Herausgebers die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Herausgeber verwalten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Die aktuell konfigurierten Herausgeber werden im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" aufgeführt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" können Sie die Priorität für einen Herausgeber ändern, einen Herausgeber aktivieren oder deaktivieren, einen Herausgeber als Sticky-Herausgeber festlegen oder diese Einstellung zurücksetzen und einen Herausgeber entfernen. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> und <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Ändern</guibutton>, um das Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" zu öffnen. Im Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" können Sie den Herausgeber-Alias ändern, einen Herausgeberursprung und Herausgeberspiegel hinzufügen oder entfernen, einen SSL-Schlüssel oder ein SSL-Zertifikat festlegen und Herausgeberzertifikate und Signaturrichtlinie verwalten. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> und <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "Ändern der Priorität und der Stickiness"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Herausgeber verwalten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um das Fenster Herausgeber verwalten' anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Herausgeberpriorität"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "Herausgeber werden im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" entsprechend ihrer Priorität aufgeführt. Der oberste Herausgeber in der Liste ist der Herausgeber mit der höchsten Priorität. Der unterste Herausgeber in der Liste ist der Herausgeber mit der niedrigsten Priorität."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "Der oberste Herausgeber in der Liste wird auch als bevorzugter Herausgeber bezeichnet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "Der bevorzugte Herausgeber kann nicht deaktiviert oder entfernt werden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "Wenn Sie Pakete suchen und keinen Herausgeber angeben, werden zuerst die Kataloge der Herausgeber mit höherer Priorität durchsucht."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "Wenn Sie ein Paket aktualisieren, das von keinem Sticky-Herausgeber installiert wurde, werden zuerst die Kataloge von Herausgebern mit höherer Priorität nach Updates durchsucht."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Ändern der Priorität eines Herausgebers die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" auf eine Herausgeberzeile in der Liste, um diese Zeile zu markieren."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflächen <guibutton>Nach oben</guibutton> und <guibutton>Nach unten</guibutton> rechts neben der Herausgeberliste, um die Priorität des ausgewählten Herausgebers zu erhöhen oder zu verringern. Die Anzeige des ausgewählten Herausgebers wird nach oben und nach unten verschoben, um die neue Priorität anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "Wenn der ausgewählte Herausgeber ein Systemherausgeber ist, sind die Schaltflächen <guibutton>Nach oben</guibutton> und <guibutton>Nach unten</guibutton> deaktiviert. Sie können die Priorität eines Systemherausgebers nicht ändern. Aus diesem Grund können Sie die Priorität eines Herausgebers, der sich auf der nächst höheren Prioritätstufe über dem Systemherausgeber befindet, nicht verringern. Sie können auch die Priorität eines Herausgebers auf einer Prioritätsstufe unterhalb des Systemherausgebers nicht erhöhen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Herausgeber verwalten\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "Aktiviert und Sticky"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "Wenn Sie einen Herausgeber hinzufügen, werden das Sticky-Attribut sowie das Attribut zum Aktivieren standardmäßig festgelegt. Der bevorzugte Herausgeber (siehe <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> oben) kann nicht deaktiviert werden. Ein Systemherausgeber kann nicht deaktiviert werden, und die Sticky-Einstellung bei einem Systemherausgeber kann nicht geändert werden. Alle anderen aktivierten und Sticky-Einstellungen können geändert werden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "Wenn das Sticky-Attribut für einen Herausgeber festgelegt ist, kann ein Paket, das von diesem Herausgeber installiert wurde, nicht durch einen anderen Herausgeber aktualisiert werden. Wenn das Sticky-Attribut nicht für einen Herausgeber festgelegt ist, handelt es sich um keinen Sticky-Herausgeber. Wenn es kein Sticky-Herausgeber ist, kann ein Paket, das von diesem Herausgeber stammt, durch einen anderen Herausgeber aktualisiert werden. Ein anderer Herausgeber könnte u. U. eine neuere Version des Pakets haben als der ursprüngliche Herausgeber dieses Pakets. Wenn Sie auf diese neuere Version aktualisieren möchten, darf der ursprüngliche Herausgeber kein Sticky-Herausgeber sein. Wenn ein Herausgeber mit niedrigerer Priorität kein Sticky-Herausgeber ist, werden zuerst die Herausgeber mit höherer Priorität auf Updates für Pakete durchsucht, die von diesem Herausgeber (nicht sticky) installiert wurden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "Ein deaktivierter Herausgeber wird nicht auf Updates oder Pakete zum Installieren durchsucht. Kataloge eines deaktivierten Herausgebers werden nicht aktualisiert. Der deaktivierte Herausgeber wird nicht im Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Ändern der Einstellungen \"Aktiviert\" und \"Sticky\" die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Herausgeber verwalten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um das Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" zu öffnen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Kontrollkästchen \"Aktiviert\" oder \"Sticky\", um diese Einstellungen auszuwählen bzw. die Auswahl aufzuheben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "Ändern des Alias, der Ursprünge und Spiegel"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie den Herausgeber aus, den Sie ändern möchten. Im Bereich \"Details\" unter der Herausgeberliste im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" werden die aktuellen Ursprünge des ausgewählten Herausgebers angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie rechts neben der Herausgeberliste auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Ändern</guibutton>, um das Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" zu öffnen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Wenn der ausgewählte Herausgeber ein Systemherausgeber ist, ist die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Ändern</guibutton> deaktiviert. Im Bereich \"Details\" wird angezeigt, dass der ausgewählte Herausgeber ein Systemherausgeber ist. Eine Meldung wird angezeigt, die Sie informiert, dass dieser Herausgeber nicht geändert oder entfernt werden kann."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Registerkarte \"Allgemein\", um den Herausgeber-Alias zu ändern und Ursprünge sowie Spiegel hinzuzufügen und zu entfernen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Herausgeber-Alias"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Der Herausgeber-Alias ist ein anderer Name des Herausgebers. Der Aliasname wird im Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> und im Paketlistenbereich verwendet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Ändern des Alias dieses Herausgebers die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "Geben Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" auf der Registerkarte \"Allgemein\" einen neuen Namen in das Feld \"Alias\" ein."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Herausgeber ändern\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" wird der Herausgeber-Alias geändert. Klicken Sie im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Herausgeber verwalten\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Herausgeberursprünge"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "Ein Ursprung ist der Speicherort eines IPS-Paket-Repository oder -Archivs, in dem beide Paket-Metadatentypen (Paketmanifeste und -kataloge) und der Paketinhalt (Paketdateien) enthalten sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "Ein Ursprungswert ist die URI eines IPS-Paket-Repository."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Ändern, Hinzufügen oder Entfernen eines Ursprungs für diesen Herausgeber die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" die Registerkarte \"Allgemein\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "Fügen Sie einen Ursprung hinzu."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "Geben Sie in das Feld \"Ursprung\" die URI des neuen Ursprungs ein, den Sie mit diesem Herausgeber verbinden möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Hinzufügen</guibutton>. Die neue URI wird der Liste unterhalb des Felds \"Ursprung\" hinzugefügt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "Entfernen Sie einen Ursprung."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie in der Liste unter dem Feld \"Ursprung\" die URI aus, die Sie löschen möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Entfernen</guibutton>. Die ausgewählte URI wird aus der Liste entfernt. Wenn für diesen Herausgeber nur ein Ursprung definiert ist, können Sie diesen Ursprung nicht entfernen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "Ändern Sie einen Ursprung."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "Fügen Sie diesen neuen Ursprung hinzu."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "Löschen Sie den Ursprung, den Sie ändern möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Die Ursprungsänderungen werden im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" im Bereich \"Details\" angezeigt. Klicken Sie im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Herausgeber verwalten\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Herausgeberspiegel"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "Ein Spiegel ist ein Speicherort eines IPS-Paket-Repository, das nur den Paketinhalt (Paketdateien) enthält. Ein Spiegel enthält keine Paketmetadaten (Paketmanifeste und Kataloge). Spiegel stellen eine Teil der Daten bereit, die an einem Ursprung zur Verfügung gestellt werden. Spiegel können nur zum Herunterladen von Paketdateien verwendet werden. Paketmetadaten werden vom Ursprung heruntergeladen. IPS-Clients greifen auf den Ursprung zu, um den Katalog eines Herausgeber zu holen, sogar wenn die Clients den Paketinhalt von einem Spiegel herunterladen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Hinzufügen, Entfernen oder Ändern eines Spiegels für diesen Herausgeber die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Beschriftung \"Spiegel\", um das Feld \"Spiegel\" und die Liste der Spiegel anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "Fügen Sie einen Spiegel hinzu."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "Geben Sie in das Feld \"Spiegel\" die URI des neuen Spiegels ein, den Sie mit diesem Herausgeber verbinden möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Hinzufügen</guibutton>. Die neue URI wird der Liste unterhalb des Felds \"Spiegel\" hinzugefügt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "Entfernen Sie einen Spiegel."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie in der Liste unter dem Feld \"Spiegel\" die URI aus, die Sie löschen möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Entfernen</guibutton>. Die ausgewählte URI wird aus der Liste entfernt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "Ändern Sie einen Spiegel."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "Löschen Sie den Spiegel, den Sie ändern möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "Fügen Sie einen neuen Spiegel hinzu."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "Verwalten der Herausgebersicherheit"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "Zertifikate dienen zur Gewährleistung, dass Pakete vor ihrer Installation entsprechend der Signaturrichtlinie des Abbilds oder Herausgebers (je nachdem, welche mehr einschränkt) signiert sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie den Herausgeber, dessen Sicherheitseinstellung Sie ändern möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie rechts neben der Herausgeberliste auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Ändern</guibutton>, um das Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" zu öffnen. Der Herausgeber, der im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" ausgewählt wurde, wird im Titel des Fensters \"Herausgeber ändern\" aufgeführt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Registerkarte \"Allgemein\", um den SSL-Schlüssel und das SSL-Zertifikat hinzuzufügen, wenn ein Herausgeber über einen sicheren Ursprung verfügt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Registerkarte \"Zertifikate\", um die Zertifikate dieses Herausgebers zu verwalten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Registerkarte \"Signaturrichtlinie\", um die Signaturrichtlinie dieses Herausgebers zu verwalten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "Hinzufügen der SSL-Schlüssel und -Zertifikate"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "Wenn der Herausgeber einen sicheren Ursprung hat, fügen Sie den SSL-Schlüssel und das SSL-Zertifikat für diesen Herausgeber hinzu."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" auf die Registerkarte \"Allgemein\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Beschriftung \"SSL-Schlüssel und -Zertifikat\", um die Felder \"SSL-Schlüssel\" und \"SSL-Zertifikat\" anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie rechts neben dem Feld \"SSL-Schlüssel\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Durchsuchen</guibutton>, um die SSL-Schlüsseldatei auszuwählen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie rechts neben dem Feld \"SSL-Zertifikat\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Durchsuchen</guibutton>, um die SSL-Zertifikatsdatei auszuwählen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "Verwalten von Zertifikaten"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" auf die Registerkarte \"Zertifikate\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "Verwenden Sie die Schaltfläche unter der Liste der Zertifikate, um ein Zertifikat hinzuzufügen oder um ein in der Liste ausgewähltes Zertifikat zu entfernen, zu widerrufen oder wiederherzustellen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "Beachten Sie, dass alle Aktionen, die Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" ausführen, erst dann auf die Zertifikate des ausgewählten Herausgebers angewendet werden, wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton> klicken, die sich im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Herausgeber ändern\" befindet. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Abbrechen</guibutton> klicken, werden keine Änderungen angewendet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Hinzufügen</guibutton>: Fügen Sie ein neues Herausgeberzertifikat für den Herausgeber hinzu, der im Titel des Fensters \"Herausgeber ändern\" aufgeführt ist. Suchen Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeberzertifikat hinzufügen\" die Zertifikatsdatei (<tt>.pem</tt>), um diese auszuwählen. Klicken Sie im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Herausgeberzertifikat hinzufügen\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Das neu hinzugefügte Zertifikat wird in der Zertifikatsliste der Registerkarte \"Zertifikate\" des Fensters \"Herausgeber ändern\" ausgewählt. Im Detailsbereich wird angezeigt, dass dieses Zertifikat zum Hinzufügen markiert ist. Dieses Zertifikat wird hinzugefügt, sobald Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton> klicken."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie in der Liste der Zertifikate für diesen Herausgeber das Zertifikat aus, das Sie ändern möchten oder dessen Details Sie überprüfen möchten. Details zum ausgewählten Zertifikat werden unterhalb der Liste der Zertifikate und der Schaltflächenreihe angezeigt. Beachten Sie, dass ein abgelaufenes Zertifikat weiterhin \"Genehmigt\" und verwendet werden kann, um signierte Pakete zu überprüfen, die vor dem Ablauf des Zertifikats veröffentlicht (ggf. auch installiert) wurden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Überschriften der Liste mit Zertifikaten, um die Liste wiederherzustellen. Die Größe der Spalten \"Organisation\" und \"Name\" kann geändert werden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Entfernen</guibutton>: Entfernen Sie das Zertifikat, das zurzeit in der Zertifikatsliste ausgewählt ist."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Widerrufen</guibutton>: Wenn das aktuell in der Zertifikatsliste ausgewählte Zertifikat genehmigt ist, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Widerrufen</guibutton>, um das Zertifikat als widerrufen einzustufen. In der Zertifikatsliste ändert sich der Status dieses Zertifikats in \"Widerrufen\". Diese Änderung wird auf das Zertifikat angewendet, sobald Sie im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Herausgeber ändern\" auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton> klicken."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Wiederherstellen</guibutton>: Wenn das aktuell in der Zertifikatsliste ausgewählte Zertifikat widerrufen ist, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Wiederherstellen</guibutton>, um dieses Zertifikat als genehmigt einzustufen. Im Detailsbereich wird angezeigt, dass dieses Zertifikat zum Wiederherstellen markiert ist. Dieses Zertifikat wird wiederhergestellt, sobald Sie im Fenster 'Herausgeber ändern' auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton> klicken."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "Verwalten der Signaturrichtlinie"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie im Fenster \"Herausgeber ändern\" auf die Registerkarte \"Signaturrichtlinie\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "Verwenden Sie die Schaltflächen auf der Registerkarte \"Signaturrichtlinie\", um die Signaturrichtlinie festzulegen, die beim Installieren von Paketen verwendet werden soll, die vom Herausgeber stammen, der im Titel des Fensters \"Herausgeber ändern\" aufgeführt ist."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "Öffnen Sie zum Festlegen der globalen Signaturrichtlinie die Registerkarte \"Signaturrichtlinie\" des Fensters \"Einstellungen\" (siehe <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "Signaturen werden ignoriert: Signaturen werden für alle Pakete ignoriert."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "Signaturen sind optional, müssen jedoch bei Angabe gültig sein: Überprüfen Sie, ob alle Pakete mit Signaturen eine gültige Signatur haben. Installierte Pakete müssen jedoch nicht signiert sein."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "Eine oder mehrere gültige Signaturen erforderlich: Alle neu installierten Pakete müssen mindestens eine gültige Signatur haben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "Signaturen sind erforderlich und der Zertifikatsname muss beim Überprüfen der Signaturen eines Pakets den Namen bzw. die Namen enthalten, die im Textfeld angegeben wurden. Wenn mehr als ein Name angegeben wurden, müssen diese durch ein Komma getrennt sein."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "Entfernen der Herausgeber"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um einen Herausgeber zu entfernen:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Herausgeber aus, die Sie entfernen möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie rechts neben der Herausgeberliste auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Entfernen</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Wenn der ausgewählte Herausgeber ein Systemherausgeber ist, ist die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Entfernen</guibutton> deaktiviert. Im Bereich \"Details\" wird angezeigt, dass der ausgewählte Herausgeber ein Systemherausgeber ist. Eine Meldung wird angezeigt, die Sie informiert, dass dieser Herausgeber nicht geändert oder entfernt werden kann."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Verwalten der Boot-Umgebungen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "Eine Boot-Umgebung (BU) ist ein bootfähiges Abbild. Sie können mehrere BUs auf Ihrem Oracle Solaris-System verwalten. Eine BU ist die Standard-BU beim Systemstart oder Neustart. Die anderen BUs sind als alternative Boot-Optionen verfügbar. Die BU, die Sie starten, ist die aktive BU."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "Sie können den Befehl <literal>beadm</literal>(1) verwenden, um BUs zu erstellen, umzubenennen, einzuhängen, auszuhängen, zu aktivieren oder zu entfernen. Ausführliche Informationen zu BUs finden Sie unter <citetitle>Erstellen und Verwalten von Boot-Umgebungen nach der Installation</citetitle>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "Der Package Manager stellt einen Teil der Funktionen bereit, die der Befehl <literal>beadm</literal>(1) umfasst. Verwenden Sie die Package Manager-Option <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Boot-Umgebungen verwalten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um das Fenster \"Boot-Umgebungen verwalten\" zu öffnen. Im Fenster 'Boot-Umgebungen verwalten' werden die BUs auf diesem System aufgeführt. In diesem Fenster können Sie diese BUs, wie nachstehend beschrieben, aktivieren, umbenennen und löschen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "Erstellen einer BU"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Eine neue BU wird automatisch erstellt, wenn Sie eine der folgenden Aktionen ausführen:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "Installieren Sie das Betriebssystem Oracle Solaris."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "Installieren oder aktualisieren Sie Schlüsselsystempakete wie manche Treiber und andere Kernel-Komponenten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "Verwenden Sie den Befehl <literal>beadm create</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Eine neue BU wird häufig erstellt, wenn Sie den Befehl <literal>pkg update</literal> ausführen oder auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> klicken, um alle Pakete zu aktualisieren, für die Updates verfügbar sind."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "Aktivieren einer BU"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Boot-Umgebungen verwalten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um das Fenster \"Boot-Umgebungen verwalten\" zu öffnen. Im Fenster wird jede BU aufgeführt. Die BU, die Sie aktuell booten, ist durch ein Häkchen links neben dem BU-Namen gekennzeichnet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Festlegen einer anderen BU als aktive Standard-BU beim nächsten Neustart die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Aktiv bei Neustart</guibutton> für die BU, die beim nächsten Neustart die aktive Standard-BU sein soll."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im Fenster \"Boot-Umgebungen verwalten\" die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "Umbenennen einer BU"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Boot-Umgebungen verwalten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um das Fenster \"Boot-Umgebungen verwalten\" zu öffnen. Im Fenster wird jede BU aufgeführt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "Sie können die derzeit aktive BU nicht umbenennen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "Sie können eine BU, die Sie zum Löschen markiert haben, nicht umbenennen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Umbenennen einer BU die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "Doppelklicken Sie auf den Namen der BU, die Sie umbenennen möchten. Das Namensfeld kann nun bearbeitet werden."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "Geben Sie den neuen Namen ein."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "Entfernen einer BU"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Datei</guimenu><guimenuitem>Boot-Umgebungen verwalten</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um das Fenster \"Boot-Umgebungen verwalten\" zu öffnen. Im Fenster wird jede BU aufgeführt. Die Spalte rechts außen heißt \"Löschen\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "In der mittleren Spalte des Fensters \"Boot-Umgebungen verwalten\" wird die Größe der BU angezeigt. Sie können eine BU entfernen, um mehr Speicherplatz auf Ihrem Speichergerät zu schaffen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "Sie können die derzeit aktive BU nicht löschen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "Sie können eine BU, die Sie umbenannt haben, nicht löschen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Löschen einer BU die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Markieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen <guibutton>Löschen</guibutton> für die BU, die gelöscht werden soll."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Arbeiten mit WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Der Package Manager unterstützt die Installation von Paketen mithilfe eines einfachen WebInstall-Verfahrens. Beim WebInstall-Verfahren wird die Datei <filename>.p5i</filename> verwendet. Eine <filename>.p5i</filename>-Datei enthält Informationen zum Hinzufügen von Herausgebern und Paketen, die von diesen Herausgebern installiert werden können. Die in der Datei <filename>.p5i</filename> enthaltenen Informationen werden beim WebInstall-Verfahren gelesen und verwendet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "Exportieren von Dateien mithilfe von WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "Wenn Sie möchten, dass andere Benutzer Pakete installieren können, die Sie auf Ihrem System installiert haben, können Sie die Installationsanweisungen für diese Paketdateien unter Anwendung des WebInstall-Verfahrens exportieren. Dabei wird eine Datei namens <filename>.p5i</filename> erstellt, die die Installationsanweisungen für die zu installierenden Pakete und Herausgeber enthält."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Führen Sie zum Exportieren der Installationsanweisungen für die ausgewählten Pakete und die jeweiligen Herausgeber in eine <filename>.p5i</filename>-Datei die folgenden Schritte aus:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> den Herausgeber, von dem Pakete in die Datei <filename>.p5i</filename> aufgenommen werden sollen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im Paketlistenbereich das Paket aus, für das Sie Installationsanweisungen bereitstellen möchten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Datei</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Auswahl exportieren</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um das Fenster \"Bestätigung des Exports der Auswahl\" anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, um die Auswahl zu bestätigen. Das Fenster \"Auswahl exportieren\" wird angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "Für die Datei <filename>p5i</filename> wird ein Standardname mit der Erweiterung <filename>.p5i</filename> vorgegeben. Sie können diesen Dateinamen ändern. Ändern Sie jedoch nicht die Erweiterung."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "Für die Datei <filename>p5i</filename> wird ein Standardspeicherort vorgegeben. Sie können diesen ändern. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Durchsuchen</guibutton>, um im Dropdown-Menü im unteren rechten Bereich des Fensters \"Auswahl exportieren\" die Option <filename>p5i-Dateien</filename> auszuwählen und so nur die <filename>.p5i</filename>-Dateien in der Dateiliste anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Speichern</guibutton>, um den Dateinamen und Speicherort zu speichern."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Verwenden von WebInstall zum Hinzufügen von Herausgebern und Installationspaketen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Mit dem WebInstall-Prozess können Sie Pakete mithilfe einer <filename>p5i</filename>-Datei installieren."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "Suchen Sie die <filename>.p5i</filename>-Datei. Diese Datei befindet sich u. U. auf Ihrem Desktop oder auf einer Website."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "Wenden Sie eine der folgenden Methoden an, um den Package Manager im WebInstall-Modus zu starten:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf Ihrem Desktop auf <filename>.p5i</filename>. Die zugehörige Anwendung (Package Manager-Webinstallationsprogramm) wird gestartet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "Starten Sie den Package Manager über die Befehlszeile, und geben Sie den Pfad zur <filename>.p5i</filename>-Datei an. Geben Sie beispielsweise folgenden Befehl ein:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "Rufen Sie eine URL auf, die eine Verknüpfung zu einer <filename>.p5i</filename>-Datei enthält. Die <filename>.p5i</filename>-Datei muss sich auf einem Webserver befinden, auf dem der MIME-Typ registriert ist."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "Wenn sich die <filename>.p5i</filename>-Datei auf einem Webserver befindet, auf dem dieser MIME-Typ nicht registriert ist, speichern Sie die <filename>.p5i</filename>-Datei auf Ihrem Desktop, und klicken Sie auf sie, um WebInstall zu starten."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "Das Fenster \"Installation/Update\" wird angezeigt. Die Beschriftung des Fensters lautet \"Package Manager-Webinstallationsprogramm/Ihrem System wird Folgendes hinzugefügt:\". Anschließend werden die Herausgeber und Pakete aufgeführt. Klicken Sie auf <guibutton>Fortfahren</guibutton>, um die Installation fortzusetzen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "Wenn der Paketherausgeber noch nicht auf Ihrem System konfiguriert ist, wird das Fenster \"Herausgeber hinzufügen\" angezeigt. Der Name und die URI des Herausgebers sind bereits eingegeben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "Wenn es sich bei den hinzuzufügenden Herausgebern um sichere Herausgeber handelt, sind ein SSL-Schlüssel sowie ein SSL-Zertifikat erforderlich. Durchsuchen Sie das System nach dem SSL-Schlüssel und SSL-Zertifikat."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "Das Dialogfeld \"Hinzufügen des Herausgebers abgeschlossen\" wird angezeigt, wenn der Herausgeber erfolgreich hinzugefügt wurde. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, um die Installation fortzusetzen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "Wenn die Datei <filename>.p5i</filename> Pakete von einem deaktivierten Herausgeber enthält, öffnet WebInstall das Dialogfeld \"Herausgeber aktivieren\". Aktivieren Sie in diesem Dialogfeld den Herausgeber, um die Pakete installieren zu können."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "Die Anzeige im Fenster \"Installation/Update\" stimmt nun mit der Anzeige überein, die zu sehen ist, wenn Sie das Fenster <guibutton>Installation/Update</guibutton> über den Package Manager öffnen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "Fehlerbehebung"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "Fehler-, Warn- und Informationsmeldungen werden in einem Protokoll gespeichert, das Sie jederzeit einsehen können."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "Anzeigen von Meldungsprotokollen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Ansicht</guimenu><guimenuitem>Protokolle</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um das Fenster \"Protokolle\" zu öffnen. Im Fenster \"Protokolle\" werden Fehler, Warn- und Informationsmeldungen aus Package Manager und Update Manager angezeigt."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie im unteren Bereich des Fensters \"Protokolle\" die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Löschen</guibutton>, um alle Meldungen zu löschen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "Wenn ein Fehler oder eine Warnung protokolliert wird, wird ein gelbes Dreieck links in der Statusleiste angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf das gelbe Dreieck, um das Fenster \"Protokolle\" anzuzeigen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "Festlegen von Einstellungen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu><guimenuitem>Einstellungen</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, um einige Package Manager-Benutzerschnittstelleneinstellungen zu ändern."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "Das Fenster \"Einstellungen\" enthält drei Registerkarten:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "Auf Registerkarte \"Allgemein\" können Sie Einstellungen zum Beenden und Einstellungen des Bestätigungs-Dialogfelds festlegen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "Auf Registerkarte \"Optionale Komponenten\" können Sie die Einstellungen zum Definieren der optionalen Paketkomponenten festlegen, die installiert werden sollen, wenn Sie ein Paket installieren oder aktualisieren."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "Auf Registerkarte \"Signaturrichtlinie\" können Sie die Signaturrichtlinie für dieses Abbild festlegen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Beenden der Einstellungen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu><guimenuitem>Einstellungen</guimenuitem></menuchoice> und öffnen Sie die Registerkarte \"Allgemein\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Wenn das Kontrollkästchen \"Aktuellen Status beim Beenden beibehalten\" markier ist, speichert der Package Manager die folgenden Einstellungen und stellt sie beim nächsten Starten des Package Manager wieder her:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertikale und horizontale Trennlinien</emphasis> – Breiten und Höhen der Bereiche im Fenster"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Fenstergröße</emphasis> – Gesamtgröße des Fensters \"Package Manager\""
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Herausgeberoption</emphasis> – Der Herausgeber oder eine andere Option, die im Dropdown-Menü <guimenu>Herausgeber</guimenu> ausgewählt wird, wenn der Package Manager geschlossen wird."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Kategorien</emphasis> – Die ausgewählte Kategorie und die erweiterten und reduzierten Kategorien jedes Herausgebers"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Einstellungen des Bestätigungs-Dialogfelds"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "Wenn ein Paket installiert, aktualisiert oder entfernt wird, wird ein Bestätigungs-Dialogfeld angezeigt, in dem die Liste der Pakete und die auszuführende Aktion angezeigt werden. Wenn diese Bestätigungs-Dialogfelder nicht angezeigt werden sollen, deaktivieren Sie im Fenster \"Einstellungen\" diese Optionen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "Diese Einstellung kann für dieses Dialogfeld auch zurückgesetzt werden, indem Sie in einem bestimmten Bestätigungs-Dialogfeld das Kontrollkästchen \"Dieses Bestätigungs-Dialogfeld nicht mehr anzeigen\" markieren."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "Signaturrichtlinieneinstellungen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Verwenden Sie die Schaltfläche auf der Registerkarte \"Signaturrichtlinie\", um Signaturen zu ignorieren oder anzufordern, wenn Pakete in diesem Abbild installiert werden. Wählen Sie zum Festlegen der Signaturrichtlinie für bestimmte Herausgeber im Fenster \"Herausgeber verwalten\" den Herausgeber, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche <guibutton>Ändern</guibutton>, und verwenden Sie die Registerkarte \"Signaturrichtlinie\" des Fensters \"Herausgeber ändern\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "Die Auswahl für Abbildsignaturrichtlinien stimmt mit der Auswahl für Herausgebersignaturrichtlinien mit einem Unterschied überein: Die Einstellungen gelten für alle im Abbild installierten Pakete und nicht nur für die von einem bestimmten Herausgeber installierten Pakete. Weitere Informationen dazu finden Sie unter <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "Einstellungen der optionalen Komponenten - Sprachauswahl"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "Wählen Sie die Menüoption <menuchoice><guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu><guimenuitem>Einstellungen</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, und wählen Sie dann die Registerkarte \"Optionale Komponenten\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "Die Option \"Alle Sprachen installieren\" ist standardmäßig in der Sprachauswahl aller Pakete ausgewählt. Sie können bei der Installation Speicherplatz sparen, wenn Sie einen Teil der Sprachen zum Installieren auswählen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "Wenn \"Nur diese Sprachen installieren\" ausgewählt ist, können Sie auf das Kontrollkästchensymbol in der Überschrift der äußeren linken Spalte klicken, um alle Sprachen auszuwählen. Klicken Sie erneut auf die Spaltenüberschrift, um die Auswahl aller Sprachen aufzuheben. Klicken Sie auf die Überschriften \"Sprache\" und \"Gebiet\", um die Liste zu sortieren."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche \"OK\", um die Änderungen zu speichern. Diese Änderungen gelten für die derzeit installierten Pakete sowie für künftige Paketinstallationen und -updates. Das Abbild wird entsprechend aktualisiert, um die optionalen Paketkomponenten entsprechend den neuen Einstellungen zu installieren bzw. zu entfernen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "Wenn Sie das Abbild zuvor aktualisiert haben, um nur einen Teil der Sprachen zu installieren, ist die Option \"Nur diese Sprachen installieren\" standardmäßig in diesem Fenster ausgewählt. Die Sprachenliste ist ausgegraut, wenn Sie die Option \"Alle Sprachen installieren\" auswählen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "Sonstige Einstellungen der optionalen Komponenten"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "Unter \"Sonstige Komponentenauswahloptionen\" sind standardmäßig die Optionen \"Alle Entwicklungsdateien installieren\" und \"Alle Dokumentationen installieren\" ausgewählt. Sie können in Ihrer Installation Speicherplatz sparen, indem Sie die Auswahl der Entwicklungsdateien und der Dokumentationen aufheben."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "Glossar"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "Aliasname"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Ein anderer Name für einen Herausgeber."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "Boot-Umgebung (BU)"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "Eine Instanz einer bootfähigen Oracle Solaris-Umgebung. Das Root-Dateisystem und alle anderen Dateisysteme der Boot-Umgebung, die Systemsoftware enthalten, müssen ZFS-Datensätze sein."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "Die derzeit gebootete Boot-Umgebung wird als aktive Boot-Umgebung bezeichnet. Ein System kann mehrere Boot-Umgebungen haben. Sie können die BU auswählen, die beim Neustart gebootet werden soll."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "Klon"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Eine genaue Kopie."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Ein Klon kann eine genaue Kopie eines Betriebssystems, eines Dateisystems oder eines Datenträgers sein. Diese Kopie ist zu 100 % mit dem Original kompatibel."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "Datensatz"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Ein generischer Name für die folgenden ZFS-Elemente: Klone, Dateisysteme, Schnappschüsse oder Datenträger. Jeder Datensatz wird durch einen eindeutigen Namen im ZFS Namespace gekennzeichnet."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "Abbild"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "Eine Sammlung von Betriebssystemsoftware in einem Paket, das gebootet und installiert werden kann."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "Ein Speicherort auf Ihrem System, an dem Pakete und die dazugehörigen Dateien, Verzeichnisse, Verknüpfungen und Abhängigkeiten installiert werden können."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "Quelle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "Ein Paketserver, auf dem ein Herausgeber Pakete veröffentlicht."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "Paket"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Eine Sammlung von Dateien, Verzeichnissen, Verknüpfungen, Treibern und Abhängigkeiten in einem definierten Format."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "Herausgeber"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "Eine Person, Gruppe oder ein Unternehmen, das ein Paket auf einem Paketserver entwirft, erstellt und veröffentlicht. Der Paketserver dient wiederum als Server für Pakete vom (Standard-) Herausgeber (zum Herunterladen)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "Systemherausgeber"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "Systemherausgeber sind bestimmte Herausgeber, die insbesondere in verknüpften Abbildern und nicht globalen Zonen verwendet werden, um zu gewährleisten, dass bestimmte Pakete der globalen Zone entsprechen. Die globale Zone schränkt Pakete in nicht globalen Zonen ein, indem eben diese Systemherausgeber in der nicht globalen Zone konfiguriert werden. Diese Herausgeber sind besonders, weil die nicht globalen Zonen keine Änderungen an diesen vornehmen können (z. B. Entfernen, Deaktivieren, Bearbeiten oder Ändern ihrer Priorität)."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "translator-credits"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/de/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/es/es.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Ayuda en pantalla de Solaris 11 Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "Junio de 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "EE. UU."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "Este software y la documentación relacionada están sujetos a un contrato de licencia que incluye restricciones de uso y revelación, y se encuentran protegidos por la legislación sobre la propiedad intelectual. A menos que figure explícitamente en el contrato de licencia o esté permitido por la ley, no se podrá utilizar, copiar, reproducir, traducir, emitir, modificar, conceder licencias, transmitir, distribuir, exhibir, representar, publicar ni mostrar ninguna parte, de ninguna forma, por ningún medio. Queda prohibida la ingeniería inversa, desensamblaje o descompilación de este software, excepto en la medida en que sean necesarios para conseguir interoperabilidad según lo especificado por la legislación aplicable."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "La información contenida en este documento puede someterse a modificaciones sin previo aviso y no se garantiza que se encuentre exenta de errores. Si detecta algún error, le agradeceremos que nos lo comunique por escrito."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "Si este software o la documentación relacionada se entrega al Gobierno de EE.UU. o a cualquier entidad que adquiera licencias en nombre del Gobierno de EE.UU. se aplicará la siguiente disposición:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "Este software o hardware se ha desarrollado para uso general en diversas aplicaciones de gestión de la información. No se ha diseñado ni está destinado para utilizarse en aplicaciones de riesgo inherente, incluidas las aplicaciones que pueden causar daños personales. Si utiliza este software o hardware en aplicaciones de riesgo, usted será responsable de tomar todas las medidas apropiadas de prevención de fallos, copia de seguridad, redundancia o de cualquier otro tipo para garantizar la seguridad en el uso de este software o hardware. Oracle Corporation y sus subsidiarias declinan toda responsabilidad derivada de los daños causados por el uso de este software o hardware en aplicaciones de riesgo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle y Java son marcas comerciales registradas de Oracle y/o sus subsidiarias. Todos los demás nombres pueden ser marcas comerciales de sus respectivos propietarios."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD, Opteron, el logotipo de AMD y el logotipo de AMD Opteron son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Advanced Micro Devices. Intel e Intel Xeon son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation. Todas las marcas comerciales de SPARC se utilizan con licencia y son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de SPARC International, Inc. UNIX es una marca comercial registrada con acuerdo de licencia de X/Open Company, Ltd."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "Este software o hardware y la documentación pueden ofrecer acceso a contenidos, productos o servicios de terceros o información sobre los mismos. Ni Oracle Corporation ni sus subsidiarias serán responsables de ofrecer cualquier tipo de garantía sobre el contenido, los productos o los servicios de terceros y renuncian explícitamente a ello. Oracle Corporation y sus subsidiarias no se harán responsables de las pérdidas, los costos o los daños en los que se incurra como consecuencia del acceso o el uso de contenidos, productos o servicios de terceros."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "Acerca de Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "Package Manager es una interfaz gráfica de usuario (GUI) para Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Consulte el <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> para conocer las definiciones de los términos que se emplean en este documento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) es un sistema de entrega de software que interacciona con un repositorio de paquetes en una red. IPS es un marco que proporciona capacidades de gestión del ciclo de vida del software, lo que incluye la instalación, la actualización y la supresión del software."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "Después de instalar el sistema operativo Oracle Solaris, verá que algunos de los software que desea utilizar no están disponibles. Es probable que los software estén disponibles en un repositorio de paquetes IPS. Puede utilizar Package Manager o el comando <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) para descargar e instalar paquetes de un repositorio de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "IPS también le permite crear una copia de un repositorio de paquetes IPS existente, crear su propio repositorio de paquetes IPS y publicar sus propios paquetes IPS. Si desea obtener más información sobre IPS, consulte Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Vaya a <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, seleccione Documentation Index (índice de documentación) a la izquierda, Systems Software (software de sistemas), Oracle Solaris 11 y View Library (ver biblioteca). En especial, consulte <citetitle>Agregar y actualizar paquetes de software Oracle Solaris 11</citetitle>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "Package Manager proporciona un subconjunto de las funciones que ofrece la interfaz de la línea de comandos IPS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Package Manager permite efectuar las siguientes tareas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Encontrar, instalar, actualizar y eliminar paquetes IPS. Consulte <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "Actualizar el sistema (actualizar todos los paquetes del sistema). Consulte <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Agregar, modificar y suprimir editores de paquetes IPS. Consulte <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "Mostrar, renombrar, suprimir y gestionar entornos de inicio. Consulte <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "Crear un archivo de instalación WebInstall (<filename>.p5i</filename>). Consulte <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "Esta documentación hace referencia a las siguientes funciones de la ventana de Package Manager:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "El panel de gran tamaño en el centro de la ventana es el panel de la lista de paquetes. A veces, este panel muestra mensajes informativos, pero, en general, contiene una lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "La barra de menú en la parte superior de la ventana proporciona la mayoría de las funciones de Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "La barra de herramientas justo debajo de la barra de menú tiene botones a la izquierda que proporcionan algunas de las operaciones más utilizadas. Los botones que se encuentran a la izquierda del separador tienen funciones globales: actualizar todos los paquetes que tengan actualizaciones disponibles o refrescar la lista de paquetes y estados de paquetes. Los botones que se encuentran a la derecha del separador sólo funcionan en los paquetes seleccionados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "El campo Buscar que se encuentra a la derecha de la barra de herramientas ayuda a controlar el contenido del panel de la lista de paquetes. Consulte <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "El menú desplegable <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> debajo de los botones ayuda a controlar el contenido del panel de la lista de paquetes y también permite agregar un nuevo editor. Consulte <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> \"Por editor\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "El menú desplegable <guimenu>Ver</guimenu> debajo del campo Buscar ayuda a controlar el contenido del panel de la lista de paquetes. Consulte la lista de paquetes \"Por estado de paquete\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "El panel de la categoría debajo del menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> ayuda a controlar el contenido del panel de la lista de paquetes. Consulte la lista de paquetes \"Por categoría\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "Debajo de la lista de categorías de software hay una lista de búsquedas que usted ha realizado en esta sesión."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "Debajo del panel de la lista de paquetes se encuentra el panel de detalles de paquetes. Consulte <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "Gestión de paquetes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "Puede mostrar paquetes según distintos criterios. Puede instalar, actualizar y eliminar paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "Mostrar paquetes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "La lista de paquetes en el panel de la lista de Package Manager se modifica según las selecciones realizadas en el menú desplegable <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, el menú desplegable <guimenu>Ver</guimenu>, el panel de categorías y el campo Buscar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "Puede reordenar la lista de paquetes haciendo clic en los encabezados de las columnas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "Puede utilizar el botón <guibutton>Refrescar</guibutton> o la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Refrescar</guimenu><guimenuitem>paquete</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para releer los catálogos de repositorio y actualizar la lista de paquetes y estados de paquetes. También se intenta realizar un refrescamiento cuando abre Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "Por editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "El menú desplegable <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> le permite mostrar paquetes según el editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "La parte superior del menú muestra el nombre de cada editor agregado mediante el cuadro de diálogo Agregar editor o mediante el comando <literal>pkg</literal>. Cuando selecciona uno de estos editores, el panel de la lista de paquetes muestra solamente los paquetes que están disponibles de ese editor seleccionado. El panel de la lista de paquetes muestra solamente las columnas Nombre, Estado y Resumen porque el editor es el mismo para todos los paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Todos los editores</guimenuitem>: muestra los paquetes de todos los editores en el panel de la lista de paquetes. El panel de la lista de paquetes muestra las columnas Nombre, Estado, Editor y Resumen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: Para mostrar todos los controladores de dispositivos de medios que tienen actualizaciones disponibles de todos los editores, seleccione <guimenuitem>Todos los editores</guimenuitem> del menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>; luego, seleccione la categoría <menuchoice><guimenu>Medios</guimenu><guimenuitem>de controladores</guimenuitem></menuchoice> y <guimenuitem>Actualizaciones</guimenuitem> del menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Todos los paquetes instalados</guimenuitem>: muestra todos los paquetes que están instalados de todos los editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: Para mostrar todos los paquetes de tipos de letra que están actualmente instalados del editor <literal>solaris</literal>, seleccione <guimenuitem>Todos los paquetes instalados</guimenuitem> del menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>; luego, seleccione la categoría <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tipos de letra</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, haga clic en el encabezado de la columna Editor para ordenar la lista por Editor y desplácese hacia abajo hasta las entradas <literal>solaris</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Todos los editores (buscar)</guimenuitem>: muestra un mensaje informativo en el panel de la lista de paquetes, en lugar de una lista de paquetes. El mensaje muestra todos los editores que ha configurado y le recuerda cómo ver todos los paquetes de esos editores. Consulte <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> para obtener información sobre cómo realizar búsquedas con <guimenuitem>Todos los editores (buscar)</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Agregar...</guimenuitem>: abre la ventana Agregar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "Por estado de paquete"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "El menú desplegable <guimenu>Ver</guimenu> le permite mostrar paquetes según el estado del paquete. El paquete puede tener el estado Instalado, No instalado o Actualizaciones disponibles. Los iconos mostrados en el menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu> coinciden con los iconos mostrados en la columna Estado del panel de la lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Todos los paquetes</guimenuitem>: muestra todos los paquetes disponibles del editor seleccionado en la categoría seleccionada o que coinciden con la cadena de búsqueda especificada."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: Si desea mostrar todos los paquetes de servicios web del editor <literal>solaris</literal> que están instalados, que no están instalados o que tienen actualizaciones disponibles, seleccione <literal>solaris</literal> del menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, luego seleccione la categoría <menuchoice><guimenu>Servicios web</guimenu></menuchoice> y, luego, <guimenuitem>Todos los paquetes</guimenuitem> del menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Paquetes instalados</guimenuitem>: muestra todos los paquetes instalados del editor seleccionado en la categoría seleccionada o que coinciden con la cadena de búsqueda especificada. También consulte la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Editor</guimenu>,<guimenuitem>Todos los paquetes instalados</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: Si desea mostrar sólo los paquetes de servidor web que están instalados del editor <literal>solaris</literal>, seleccione <literal>solaris</literal> del menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, luego seleccione la categoría <menuchoice><guimenu>Servicios web</guimenu></menuchoice> y, luego, <guimenuitem>Paquetes instalados</guimenuitem> del menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Actualizaciones</guimenuitem>: muestra todos los paquetes del editor seleccionado en la categoría seleccionada o que coinciden con la cadena de búsqueda especificada que tienen actualizaciones disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: Para mostrar todos los controladores de dispositivos que tienen actualizaciones disponibles de todos los editores, seleccione <guimenuitem>Todos los editores</guimenuitem> del menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, luego seleccione la categoría <guimenu>Controladores</guimenu> y, luego, seleccione <guimenuitem>Actualizaciones</guimenuitem> del menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Paquetes no instalados</guimenuitem>: muestra todos los paquetes del editor seleccionado en la categoría seleccionada o que coinciden con la cadena de búsqueda especificada que no están instalados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: Si desea mostrar todos los paquetes de tipos de letra que actualmente no están instalados del editor <literal>solaris</literal>, seleccione <literal>solaris</literal> del menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, luego seleccione la categoría <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tipos de letra</guimenuitem></menuchoice> y, luego, seleccione <guimenuitem>Paquetes no instalados</guimenuitem> del menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Paquetes seleccionados</guimenuitem>: muestra todos los paquetes que están actualmente seleccionados. Consulte <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "Por categoría"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "Puede buscar los paquetes disponibles por tipo de software en el panel de la categoría que se encuentra en el margen izquierdo de la ventana de Package Manager. Haga clic en el nombre de la categoría para mostrar las subcategorías. Los paquetes de la categoría o la subcategoría seleccionada se muestran en el panel de la lista de paquetes según el estado del editor y el paquete seleccionados y los criterios de búsqueda especificados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "Además de los tipos de software designados, el panel de categorías también le permite seleccionar <guimenuitem>Todas las categorías</guimenuitem> y <guimenuitem>Búsquedas recientes</guimenuitem>. Consulte <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> \"Repetir la búsqueda anterior\" para obtener información sobre <guimenuitem>Búsquedas recientes</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "Búsqueda de paquetes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "Utilice uno de los siguientes dos métodos para buscar paquetes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Concéntrese en el panel de la lista de paquetes (por ejemplo, seleccione <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Ir a lista de paquetes</guimenuitem></menuchoice> y comience a escribir. A medida que escribe, se identifican las coincidencias entre los paquetes actualmente mostrados en el panel de la lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Utilice el campo Buscar que se encuentra en la barra de herramientas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "Introducir una cadena de búsqueda"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "Introduzca una cadena en el campo Buscar y luego presione la tecla INTRO o haga clic en el icono de lupa que se encuentra a la derecha del campo Buscar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Selección de menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>: Package Manager busca la cadena de búsqueda en la información de cada paquete de un editor en particular o de todos los editores, según la selección realizada en el menú <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Los resultados de búsqueda son los mismos independientemente de que seleccione <guimenuitem>Todos los editores</guimenuitem> o <guimenuitem>Todos los editores (buscar)</guimenuitem>. La diferencia es que la opción <guimenuitem>Todos los editores (buscar)</guimenuitem> es más rápida, ya que evita el retraso que implica la carga de datos de todos los editores cuando selecciona <guimenuitem>Todos los editores</guimenuitem>. Con <guimenuitem>Todos los editores (buscar)</guimenuitem>, la búsqueda se realiza en todos los editores sin cargar datos de todos los editores en el panel de la lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "Selección de menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu>: los resultados de búsqueda se muestran en el panel de la lista de paquetes según el estado del paquete seleccionado en el menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu>. Puede mostrar distintos subconjuntos de los mismos resultados de búsqueda en el panel de la lista de paquetes cambiando la selección de menú <guimenu>Ver</guimenu> sin necesidad de rehacer la búsqueda."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "Package Manager busca información del paquete, como nombre, resumen, descripción, categoría y nombres de archivos que contiene el paquete. Si no utiliza comodines, sólo se encuentran coincidencias exactas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "AND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "Cuando los términos de búsqueda estén separados por espacios o por <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager buscará los paquetes que contengan <emphasis role=\"strong\">todos</emphasis> los términos de búsqueda. Éste es el comportamiento de búsqueda predeterminado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: Si la cadena de búsqueda es <literal>python book</literal> o <literal>python AND book</literal>, los resultados de búsqueda incluirán solamente paquetes que contengan <emphasis>tanto</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>como</emphasis><literal>book</literal> en su información de paquete. Por ejemplo, el paquete <literal>diveintopython</literal>, un libro sobre programación de Python, aparecería en los resultados de búsqueda, pero el paquete <literal>python-26</literal> no."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "Comillas dobles"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "Encierre el término de búsqueda entre comillas dobles para que ese término de búsqueda coincida de manera exacta."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> entre comillas dobles coincide con <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal>, pero no con <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "Comodín"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "Puede utilizar el comodín <literal>*</literal> en su cadena de búsqueda. La búsqueda con comodines puede resultar más lenta."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: <literal>802.11*</literal> coincide con <literal>802.11b/g</literal> y <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "Tenga en cuenta que <literal>802.11*</literal> no coincide con <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. Para que la búsqueda coincida con <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, utilice la cadena de búsqueda <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "Cuando los términos de búsqueda estén separados por <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager buscará los paquetes que contengan <emphasis role=\"strong\">cualquiera</emphasis> de los términos de búsqueda."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "Ejemplo: <literal>python OR book</literal> coincide con todos los paquetes que contengan <literal>python</literal> en su información de paquete y todos los paquetes que contengan <literal>book</literal> en su información de paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "Usted puede combinar estos modificadores de cadenas de búsqueda. Puede utilizar AND, OR, comillas dobles y * en una sola cadena de búsqueda."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "Borrar el campo Buscar"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "Para borrar la cadena de búsqueda y la lista de resultados de búsqueda, utilice el campo Buscar o el menú Editar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "En el campo Buscar, haga clic en el icono <literal>X</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "En el menú <guimenu>Editar</guimenu>, seleccione la opción <guimenuitem>Borrar búsqueda</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "Cancelar la búsqueda"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "Durante una operación de búsqueda, aparece una barra de ocupación en el extremo derecho de la barra de estado ubicada en la parte inferior de la ventana de Package Manager. En el extremo derecho de la barra de ocupación hay un icono <literal>X</literal>. Haga clic en el icono <literal>X</literal> de la barra de ocupación para cancelar la búsqueda en curso."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "Volver a visualizar los resultados de la búsqueda anterior"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "Los resultados de las búsquedas que ya ha realizado durante la sesión actual de Package Manager se guardan en <guimenuitem>Búsquedas recientes</guimenuitem>, en el panel de categorías."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "Seleccione la etiqueta <guimenuitem>Búsquedas recientes</guimenuitem> en el panel de categorías para mostrar un mensaje informativo en el panel de la lista de paquetes. El panel de la lista de paquetes muestra la lista de resultados de la búsqueda anterior. Haga clic en el enlace \"resultados\" para volver a visualizar esos resultados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "Seleccione la flecha hacia la izquierda de la etiqueta <guimenuitem>Búsquedas recientes</guimenuitem> para ampliar u ocultar la lista de resultados de la búsqueda anterior en el panel de categorías. Seleccione un elemento de la lista de búsquedas recientes para volver a visualizar esos resultados de búsqueda."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "Una búsqueda que no coincide con ningún paquete no aparece en la lista de búsquedas recientes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "Si selecciona el botón <guibutton>Refrescar</guibutton> o la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquete</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refrescar</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, se suprimirán todos los resultados de búsquedas recientes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "Mostrar más información"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "Obtenga más información sobre un paquete en el panel de detalles del paquete o en el cuadro de diálogo Información de versión del paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "Panel de detalles del paquete"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "Si desea mostrar más información sobre un paquete, haga clic con el botón izquierdo del mouse para resaltar el paquete en la lista de paquetes. El panel de detalles del paquete debajo del panel de la lista de paquetes muestra información, como la última versión disponible de este editor, el tamaño del paquete, los archivos del paquete, las dependencias y las cláusulas de la licencia."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "Si a un paquete se le cambia el nombre después de que se instaló, el campo Renombrado como en la ficha General muestra el nuevo nombre del paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "La ficha Versiones muestra una lista de versiones de este paquete que están disponibles para que usted instale. Seleccione una versión de la lista y haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Instalar/Actualizar</guibutton> que aparece a la derecha de la lista para instalar esa versión. Consulte <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "El panel de detalles del paquete no se muestra si el panel de la lista de paquetes contiene un mensaje informativo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "Cuadro de diálogo Información de versión del paquete"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Haga clic con el botón derecho del mouse en un paquete de la lista de paquetes para mostrar el menú <guimenu>Paquete</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquete</guimenu><guimenuitem>Información de versión del paquete</guimenuitem></menuchoice> desde el menú emergente o desde la barra de menú para visualizar una ventana separada que muestra la versión del paquete instalado y la última versión que puede instalar o a la que puede actualizar si corresponde."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "Selección de paquetes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Los paquetes seleccionados se pueden instalar, actualizar o eliminar. Para seleccionar un paquete, utilice el panel de la lista de paquetes o el menú <guimenu>Editar</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "En el panel de de la lista de paquetes, realice una de las siguientes acciones para seleccionar un paquete. Puede seleccionar varios paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el cuadro que se encuentra a la izquierda del nombre del paquete. Vuelva a hacer clic en el cuadro para anular la selección del paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el nombre del paquete una vez para resaltar el paquete. Luego, haga doble clic en el paquete resaltado para seleccionar el paquete. Vuelva a hacer doble clic para anular la selección del paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el icono de la casilla de selección que aparece en el encabezado de la columna para seleccionar todos los paquetes actualmente mostrados en el panel de la lista de paquetes. Vuelva a hacer clic en el icono de la casilla de selección para anular la selección de todos los paquetes actualmente mostrados en el panel de la lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "El menú <guimenu>Editar</guimenu> tiene las siguientes opciones para seleccionar paquetes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Seleccionar todo</guimenuitem>: selecciona todos los paquetes actualmente mostrados en el panel de la lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Seleccionar actualizaciones</guimenuitem>: selecciona todos los paquetes actualmente mostrados en el panel de la lista de paquetes que tienen actualizaciones disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Anular la selección de todo</guimenuitem>: anula la selección de todos los paquetes actualmente mostrados en el panel de la lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "Siempre que selecciona un paquete, los paquetes que estaban seleccionados anteriormente, siguen estándolo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "La cantidad de paquetes actualmente mostrados en el panel de la lista de paquetes y la cantidad de paquetes seleccionados se muestran en el margen izquierdo de la barra de estado que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la ventana de Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Editor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Todos los editores</guimenuitem></menuchoice> y, luego, la categoría <guimenuitem>Todas las categorías</guimenuitem> y la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Ver</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paquetes seleccionados</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para mostrar todos los paquetes seleccionados de todos los editores en el panel de la lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "Un paquete se puede resaltar pero no se puede seleccionar. Cuando se resalta un paquete, la información detallada sobre se paquete se muestra en el panel de detalles del paquete debajo del panel de la lista de paquetes. Cuando se selecciona un paquete, aparece una marca de verificación en el cuadro ubicado a la izquierda del nombre del paquete. Si desea instalar, actualizar o suprimir un paquete, asegúrese de que aparezca una marca de verificación en el cuadro de selección de ese paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "Instalación y actualización de paquetes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "Antes de realizar instalaciones o actualizaciones, verifique la configuración preferida de los Componentes opcionales. Seleccione la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferencias</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. En la ventana Preferencias, seleccione la ficha Componentes opcionales. De manera predeterminada, las opciones Instalar todos los idiomas, Instalar todos los archivos de desarrollo e Instalar toda la documentación están seleccionadas. Puede ahorrar espacio en la instalación mediante la selección de un subconjunto de idiomas para instalar o anular la instalación de archivos de desarrollo, por ejemplo. Haga clic en el botón Aceptar para guardar los cambios. Esta configuración se aplica a todos los paquetes instalados y a futuras instalaciones y actualizaciones de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "Para instalar o actualizar un paquete, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Seleccione el paquete. Consulte <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "Utilice uno de los siguientes métodos para instalar o actualizar el paquete:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Seleccione el botón <guibutton>Instalar/Actualizar</guibutton> ubicado en la barra de herramientas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquete</guimenu><guimenuitem>Instalar/Actualizar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> de la barra de menú."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Haga clic con el botón derecho del mouse en el nombre de un paquete para mostrar el menú emergente <guimenu>Paquete</guimenu>. Luego, seleccione la opción <guimenuitem>Instalar/Actualizar</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "En la ficha Versiones, en el panel de detalles del paquete debajo del panel de la lista de paquetes, seleccione una versión de la lista Versión para instalar y haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Instalar/Actualizar</guibutton> que se encuentra a la derecha de la lista. Los paquetes de la lista Versión para instalar están disponibles en el repositorio y es posible que no sean instalables. Es posible que una versión en particular no sea compatible con otros paquetes que haya instalado. Si la versión seleccionada no es instalable en su sistema, Package Manager se lo advertirá y no instalará el paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Si el paquete ya está instalado y no tiene una actualización disponible (consulte la columna Estado o la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquete</guimenu><guimenuitem>Información de versión del paquete</guimenuitem></menuchoice>), la opción <guibutton>Instalar/Actualizar</guibutton> aparecerá en color gris y no se podrá seleccionar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "Aparece la ventana Confirmación de instalación/actualización. Los paquetes que todavía no se han instalado se muestran en el panel Detalles de instalación y los paquetes que están instalados se muestran en el panel Detalles de actualización para su revisión. Seleccione el botón <guibutton>Continuar</guibutton> para instalar o actualizar los paquetes mostrados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "En algunos casos, se muestra un cuadro de diálogo de licencia, donde se debe aceptar la licencia para instalar el paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "Si se produce un error durante la instalación del paquete, aparece un cuadro de diálogo de error. Los mensajes explican el motivo del error en la instalación o en la actualización."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "Eliminación de paquetes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Para eliminar un paquete, realice los pasos siguientes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "Utilice uno de los siguientes métodos para eliminar el paquete:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Seleccione el botón <guibutton>Eliminar</guibutton> ubicado en la barra de herramientas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquete</guimenu><guimenuitem>Eliminar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> de la barra de menú."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Haga clic con el botón derecho del mouse en el nombre de un paquete para mostrar el menú emergente <guimenu>Paquete</guimenu>. Luego, seleccione la opción <guimenuitem>Eliminar</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Si el paquete no está instalado, la opción Eliminar aparecerá en color gris y no se podrá seleccionar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "Aparece la ventana Confirmación de eliminación. Los paquetes que se eliminarán se muestran en el panel Detalles de supresión para su revisión. Seleccione el botón <guibutton>Continuar</guibutton> para eliminar los paquetes mostrados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "Si un paquete no se puede eliminar porque otros paquetes dependen de él, puede seleccionar la opción <guibutton>Eliminar continuación</guibutton> para intentar eliminar cualquier paquete restante que usted haya seleccionado originalmente para eliminar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "Actualización del sistema"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "Cuando determinados paquetes clave, como algunos controladores y otros componentes de núcleo, se actualizan, el sistema realiza las siguientes acciones:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "Crea una clonación del entorno de inicio actual."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "Actualiza los paquetes de la clonación, pero no actualiza ningún paquete del entorno de inicio actual."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Configura el nuevo entorno de inicio para que sea la opción de inicio predeterminada la próxima vez que se reinicia el sistema. El entorno de inicio actual sigue siendo una opción de inicio alternativa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "Actualización de todos los paquetes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Cuando selecciona el botón <guibutton>Actualizaciones</guibutton> en la barra de herramientas o la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Paquete</guimenu><guimenuitem>Actualizaciones</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, Package Manager actualiza todos los paquetes instalados que tienen actualizaciones disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "Todos los paquetes que tienen actualizaciones disponibles de su editor actual están actualizados. Si un paquete tiene una actualización disponible de un editor diferente de su lista de editores, el paquete se actualiza sólo si su editor actual está configurado como no permanente. Si su editor actual está configurado como permanente, ese paquete no está actualizado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "Aparece la ventana Actualizaciones y comienza el proceso de actualización:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "El sistema refresca todos los catálogos."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "El sistema evalúa todos los paquetes instalados para determinar qué paquetes tienen actualizaciones disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "Si ningún paquete tiene actualizaciones disponibles, aparecerá el mensaje \"No hay actualizaciones disponibles\" y se procesarán detenciones."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "Si hay actualizaciones de paquete disponibles, se muestran los paquetes para actualizar a fin de que los revise. Ésta es la última oportunidad para hacer clic en el botón <guibutton>Cancelar</guibutton> a fin de abandonar la actualización."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Continuar</guibutton> para continuar con la actualización."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "El sistema puede crear un nuevo entorno de inicio, como se describió en <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> arriba, según los paquetes que se están instalando."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Si el sistema determina que se necesita un nuevo entorno de inicio pero éste no se pudo crear, aparecerá un mensaje de error. Si el problema es que no hay suficiente espacio en disco, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Cerrar</guibutton> para cancelar el proceso de actualización."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> para eliminar un entorno de inicio que ya no se necesita."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "Vuelva a seleccionar <guibutton>Actualizaciones</guibutton> para reiniciar el proceso de actualización."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "El sistema descarga todas las actualizaciones de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "El sistema instala todas las actualizaciones de paquetes. Si se creó un entorno de inicio clonado, las actualizaciones se instalan en la clonación. Si no se creó una clonación, las actualizaciones se instalan en el entorno de inicio actual."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "Si se produce un error en cualquier momento durante el proceso de actualización, el panel Detalles se amplía y se muestran los detalles del error. Se muestra un indicador de estado del error junto a la fase en que ha ocurrido."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Si el sistema creó un nuevo entorno de inicio para la actualización, puede editar el nombre del entorno de inicio predeterminado. Una vez que esté conforme con el nombre del entorno de inicio, haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Reiniciar ahora</guibutton> para reiniciar el sistema de inmediato. Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Reiniciar más tarde</guibutton> para reiniciar el sistema en otro momento. Debe reiniciar el sistema para que se inicie en el nuevo entorno de inicio. El nuevo entorno de inicio será su opción de inicio predeterminada. Su entorno de inicio actual estará disponible como una opción de inicio alternativa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "Uso del Administrador de actualizaciones"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "Puede abrir el Administrador de actualizaciones desde una notificación del sistema o desde la barra de menú del escritorio. El Administrador de actualizaciones ejecuta el mismo proceso que el descrito anteriormente en <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "Notificación de actualizaciones de software"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "El sistema comprueba de manera periódica si hay actualizaciones disponibles para cualquiera de sus paquetes instalados. Si el sistema detecta que hay actualizaciones disponibles, aparecen una ventana emergente y un icono de notificación de Actualizaciones disponibles en la bandeja de notificaciones del sistema. Haga clic en el icono de notificación para abrir el Administrador de actualizaciones."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "Menú de Desktop System"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "Seleccione <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administración</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Administrador de actualizaciones</guimenuitem></menuchoice> desde la barra de menú en el escritorio para abrir el Administrador de actualizaciones."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "Gestión de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "Puede agregar, modificar y eliminar editores de paquetes IPS. Puede cambiar la prioridad de un editor, cambiar las configuraciones activadas y permanentes, cambiar el alias de editor, agregar o eliminar un origen de editor y agregar o eliminar un reflejo de editor. Puede gestionar claves, certificados y políticas de firmas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "Tenga en cuenta que los editores del sistema son una excepción. Los editores del sistema sólo se pueden ver en la ventana Administrar editores. Los editores del sistema no se pueden eliminar ni modificar, ni se puede cambiar su prioridad. Consulte <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. El panel Detalles indica si el editor seleccionado es un editor del sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "Agregación de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Para agregar un editor de paquetes IPS, utilice la ventana Agregar editor. Para abrir la ventana Agregar editor, realice una de las siguientes acciones:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción <guimenuitem>Agregar</guimenuitem> del menú desplegable <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Agregar editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administrar editores</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. En la ventana Administrar editores, seleccione el botón <guibutton>Agregar</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "En la ventana Agregar editor, realice los siguientes pasos para agregar un editor de paquetes IPS:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "En el campo URI, introduzca el URI del editor. El URI es una ubicación de red, como <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> o <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "En el campo Alias, puede introducir un nombre alternativo para este editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Agregar</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Agregando editor. Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Cancelar</guibutton> para anular el proceso. Haga clic en Detalles para ver información detallada."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "Si el nuevo editor se ha agregado correctamente, aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Agregar editor completado y mostrará el nombre, el alias y el URI del nuevo editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "Si el nuevo editor no se ha agregado, aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Error de editor con información sobre el problema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "El nuevo editor es el último editor de la lista que aparece en la ventana Administrar editores, y está activado y es permanente."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "Consulte <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> para obtener información sobre cambiar la prioridad del nuevo editor, cambiar las configuraciones activadas y permanentes, cambiar el alias de editor, agregar el origen de editor, configurar una clave y un certificado SSL, agregar un reflejo de editor y gestionar certificados y políticas de firmas de editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "Modificación de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Para modificar los atributos de un editor, seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administrar editores</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Los editores actualmente configurados se muestran en la ventana Administrar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "En la ventana Administrar editores puede cambiar la prioridad de un editor, activar o desactivar un editor, configurar al editor para que sea permanente o no permanente y eliminar un editor. Consulte <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> y <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> para abrir la ventana Modificar editor. En la ventana Modificar editor puede cambiar el alias de editor, agregar o eliminar el origen de editor, agregar o eliminar un reflejo de editor, configurar una clave y un certificado SSL y gestionar certificados y políticas de firmas de editor. Consulte <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> y <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "Cambio de prioridad y permanencia"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administrar editores</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para mostrar la ventana Administrar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Prioridad de editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "Los editores se muestran en orden de prioridad en la ventana Administrar editores. El editor con la prioridad más alta se muestra al principio de la lista. El editor con la prioridad más baja se muestra al final de la lista."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "El editor que se muestra al principio de la lista también se conoce como \"editor preferido\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "El editor preferido no se puede desactivar ni eliminar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "Cuando se buscan paquetes y no se especifica un editor, primero se busca en los catálogos de los editores con la prioridad más alta."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "Cuando se actualiza un paquete instalado de un editor no permanente, primero se buscan actualizaciones para los catálogos de editores con la prioridad más alta."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para cambiar la prioridad de un editor, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Haga clic para resaltar la fila de un editor en la lista de la ventana Administrar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "Haga clic en los botones <guibutton>Arriba</guibutton> y <guibutton>Abajo</guibutton> que se encuentran a la derecha de la lista de editores para aumentar o reducir la prioridad del editor seleccionado. El editor seleccionado de la lista se puede mover hacia arriba o hacia abajo para mostrar su nueva prioridad."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "Si el editor seleccionado es un editor del sistema, los botones <guibutton>Arriba</guibutton> y <guibutton>Abajo</guibutton> están desactivados. No puede cambiar la prioridad de un editor del sistema. Debido a que no puede cambiar la prioridad de un editor del sistema, no puede reducir la prioridad del editor que tiene la segunda prioridad más alta por encima de un editor del sistema, y no puede aumentar la prioridad de un editor que tiene la segunda prioridad más baja por debajo de un editor del sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la ventana Administrar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "Activados y permanentes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "Cuando agrega un editor, los atributos activados y permanentes están configurados de manera predeterminada. El editor preferido (consulte <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> arriba) no se puede desactivar. Un editor del sistema no se puede desactivar, y la configuración permanente de un editor del sistema no se puede cambiar. Todas las demás configuraciones activadas y permanentes se pueden cambiar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "Si el atributo permanente está configurado para un editor, un paquete que se instaló de ese editor no se puede actualizar de un editor diferente. Si el atributo permanente no está configurado para un editor, ese editor no es permanente. Si un editor no es permanente, un paquete que originalmente provino de ese editor se puede actualizar de otro editor. Un editor diferente puede tener una versión más reciente de un paquete que el editor original del paquete. Si desea actualizar a esa versión más reciente, el editor original no debe ser permanente. Además, si un editor con una prioridad más baja no es permanente, primero se buscarán actualizaciones de paquetes para los editores con la prioridad más alta que tengan paquetes instalados de ese editor no permanente."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "No se buscan actualizaciones ni paquetes para instalar con relación a un editor desactivado. Los catálogos de un editor desactivado no se refrescan. Un editor desactivado no se muestra en el menú desplegable <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para cambiar las configuraciones activadas y permanentes de un editor, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administrar editores</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir la ventana Administrar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el cuadro Activado o en el cuadro Permanente para activar/desactivar su configuración."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "Cambio de alias, orígenes y reflejos"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "Seleccione el editor que desea modificar. El panel Detalles debajo de la lista de editores en la ventana Administrar editores muestra los orígenes actuales del editor seleccionado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> que se encuentra a la derecha de la lista de editores para abrir la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Si el editor seleccionado es un editor del sistema, el botón <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> está desactivado. El panel Detalles indica que el editor seleccionado es un editor del sistema y muestra un mensaje que establece que este editor no se puede modificar ni eliminar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "Seleccione la ficha General para modificar el alias de editor, agregar y eliminar orígenes y agregar y eliminar reflejos."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Alias de editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "El alias de editor es otro nombre para el editor. El nombre de alias se utiliza en el menú desplegable <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> y en el panel de la lista de paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para cambiar el alias de este editor, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "En la ficha General de la ventana Modificar editor, introduzca un nombre nuevo en el campo Alias."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "El alias de editor ha cambiado en la ventana Administrar editores. Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la ventana Administrar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Orígenes de editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "Un origen es la ubicación de un contenedor o repositorio de paquetes IPS que contiene metadatos de paquete (manifiestos y catálogos de paquete) y contenido de paquete (archivos de paquete)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "Un valor de origen es el URI de un repositorio de paquetes IPS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para cambiar, agregar o eliminar un origen de este editor, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Seleccione la ficha General de la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "Agregue un origen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "En el campo Origen, introduzca el URI del nuevo origen que desea asociar con este editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Agregar</guibutton>. El nuevo URI se agrega a la lista debajo del campo Origen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "Elimine un origen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "En la lista debajo del campo Origen, seleccione el URI que desea suprimir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Eliminar</guibutton>. El URI seleccionado se elimina de la lista. Si se define un solo origen para este editor, no puede eliminarlo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "Cambie un origen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "Agregue el origen nuevo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "Suprima el origen que desea cambiar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Los cambios de origen se ven reflejados en el panel Detalles de la ventana Administrar editores. Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la ventana Administrar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Reflejos de editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "Un reflejo es una ubicación de un repositorio de paquetes IPS que sólo tiene contenido de paquete (archivos de paquete). Un reflejo no contiene metadatos de paquete (manifiestos y catálogos de paquete). Los reflejos proporcionan un subconjunto de datos que proporcionan los orígenes. Los reflejos se pueden utilizar sólo para descargar archivos de paquete. Los metadatos de paquete se descargan del origen. Los clientes de IPS acceden al origen para obtener el catálogo de un editor, incluso cuando los clientes descargan contenido de paquete de un reflejo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para agregar, eliminar o cambiar un reflejo de este editor, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "Haga clic en la etiqueta Reflejos para visualizar el campo Reflejo y la lista de reflejos."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "Agregue un reflejo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "En el campo Reflejo, introduzca el URI del nuevo reflejo que desea asociar con este editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Agregar</guibutton>. El nuevo URI se agrega a la lista debajo del campo Reflejo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "Elimine un reflejo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "En la lista debajo del campo Reflejo, seleccione el URI que desea suprimir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Eliminar</guibutton>. El URI seleccionado se elimina de la lista."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "Cambie un reflejo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "Suprima el reflejo que desea cambiar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "Agregue un nuevo reflejo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "Gestión de seguridad del editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "Los certificados se utilizan para verificar que los paquetes se hayan firmado correctamente antes de ser instalados, según la política de firmas de la imagen o del editor, el que sea más restrictivo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "Seleccione el editor cuya seguridad desea modificar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> que se encuentra a la derecha de la lista de editores para abrir la ventana Modificar editor. El editor que fue seleccionado en la ventana Administrar editores se muestra en el título de la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "Seleccione la ficha General para agregar la clave y el certificado SSL si un editor tiene un origen seguro."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "Seleccione la ficha Certificados para gestionar los certificados de este editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "Seleccione la ficha Política de firmas para gestionar la política de firmas de este editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "Agregación de claves y certificados SSL"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "Si un editor tiene un origen seguro, agregue la clave y el certificado SSL para el editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Haga clic en la ficha General de la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "Haga clic en la etiqueta Certificado y clave SSL para visualizar el campo Clave SSL y el campo Certificado SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Buscar</guibutton> que se encuentra a la derecha del campo Clave SSL para seleccionar el archivo Clave SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Buscar</guibutton> que se encuentra a la derecha del campo Certificado SSL para seleccionar el archivo de certificado SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "Gestión de certificados"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Haga clic en la ficha Certificados de la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "Utilice los botones debajo de la lista de certificados para agregar un certificado o eliminar, revocar o restablecer el certificado que actualmente está seleccionado en la lista."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "Tenga en cuenta que las acciones realizadas en la ventana Modificar editor se aplican a los certificados del editor seleccionado después de hacer clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la ventana Modificar editor. Si hace clic en el botón <guibutton>Cancelar</guibutton>, no se aplica ningún cambio."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Agregar</guibutton>. Agregue un certificado de editor nuevo para el editor mostrado en el título de la ventana Modificar editor. En la ventana Agregar certificado de editor, busque el archivo de certificado (<tt>.pem</tt>) para seleccionarlo. Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la ventana Agregar certificado de editor. El certificado recién agregado se selecciona en la lista de certificados que aparece en la ficha Certificados de la ventana Modificar editor. El panel de detalles indica que este certificado está \"marcado para ser agregado\". Este certificado se agregará después de hacer clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que aparece en la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "En la lista de certificados para este editor, seleccione el certificado que desea modificar o cuyos detalles desea revisar. Los detalles sobre el certificado seleccionado se muestran debajo de la lista de certificados y de la fila de botones. Tenga en cuenta que incluso un certificado caducado puede estar aprobado y se puede utilizar para validar paquetes firmados que fueron publicados (y no necesariamente instalados) antes de que caduque el certificado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "Haga clic en los encabezados de la lista de certificados para recurrir a la lista. El tamaño de las columnas Organización y Nombre se puede ajustar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Eliminar</guibutton>. Elimine el certificado que está actualmente seleccionado en la lista de certificados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Revocar</guibutton>. Si el certificado actualmente seleccionado en la lista de certificados está Aprobado, haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Revocar</guibutton> para tratar a este certificado como si estuviera revocado. En la lista de certificados, el Estado de este certificado cambiará a Revocado. Este cambio se aplicará al certificado después de hacer clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que aparece en la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Restablecer</guibutton>. Si el certificado actualmente seleccionado en la lista de certificados está Revocado, haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Restablecer</guibutton> para tratar a este certificado como si estuviera aprobado. El panel de detalles indica que este certificado está \"marcado para ser restablecido\". Este certificado se restablecerá después de hacer clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> que aparece en la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "Gestión de la política de firmas"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Haga clic en la ficha Política de firmas de la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "Utilice los botones de la ficha Política de firmas para configurar la política de firmas a fin de utilizarla al instalar los paquetes del editor mostrado en el título de la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "Si desea configurar la política de firmas global, utilice la ficha Política de firmas de la ventana Preferencias (consulte <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "Las firmas se ignoran: ignore las firmas para todos los paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "Las firmas son opcionales, pero deben ser válidas si se las proporciona: Verifique que todos los paquetes con firmas estén firmados de manera válida, pero no solicite que se firmen todos los paquetes instalados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "Se necesitan una o varias firmas válidas: solicite que todos los paquetes recién instalados tengan al menos una firma válida."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "Las firmas se necesitan y el nombre del certificado debe incluir el nombre o los nombres especificados en el campo de texto al validar las firmas de un paquete. Si se especifica más de un nombre, los nombres deben estar separados por comas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "Eliminación de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Para suprimir un editor, realice los pasos siguientes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "Seleccione el editor que desea eliminar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Eliminar</guibutton> que se encuentra a la derecha de la lista de editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Si el editor seleccionado es un editor del sistema, el botón <guibutton>Eliminar</guibutton> está desactivado. El panel Detalles indica que el editor seleccionado es un editor del sistema y muestra un mensaje que establece que este editor no se puede modificar ni eliminar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Gestión de entornos de inicio"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "Un entorno de inicio es una imagen de inicio. Puede mantener varios entornos de inicio en su sistema Oracle Solaris. Un entorno de inicio es el entorno de inicio predeterminado al iniciar o reiniciar. Otros entornos de inicio están disponibles como selecciones de inicio alternativas. El entorno de inicio iniciado es el entorno de inicio activo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "Puede utilizar el comando <literal>beadm</literal>(1) para crear, renombrar, montar, desmontar, activar o destruir entornos de inicio. Para obtener más información sobre entornos de inicio, consulte <citetitle>Creación y gestión de entornos de inicio después de la instalación</citetitle>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "Package Manager proporciona un subconjunto de la funcionalidad que proporciona el comando <literal>beadm</literal>(1). Utilice la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administrar entornos de inicio</guimenuitem></menuchoice> de Package Manager para abrir la ventana Administrar entornos de inicio. La ventana Administrar entornos de inicio muestra los entornos de inicio de este sistema y le permite activar, renombrar y suprimir entornos de inicio como se describe a continuación."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "Creación de un entorno de inicio"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Se crea un nuevo entorno de inicio de manera automática cuando realiza una de las siguientes acciones:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "Instala el sistema operativo Oracle Solaris."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "Instala o actualiza paquetes de sistema clave, como algunos controladores y otros componentes de núcleo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "Utiliza el comando <literal>beadm create</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "A menudo, se crea un nuevo entorno de inicio cuando ejecuta el comando <literal>pkg update</literal> o utiliza el botón <guibutton>Actualizaciones</guibutton> para actualizar todos los paquetes que tienen actualizaciones disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "Activación de un entorno de inicio"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administrar entornos de inicio</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir la ventana Administrar entornos de inicio. Cada entorno de inicio se muestra en la ventana. El entorno de inicio que se ha iniciado actualmente muestra una marca de verificación a la izquierda del nombre del entorno de inicio."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para especificar un entorno de inicio diferente a fin de que sea el entorno de inicio activo predeterminado después del siguiente reinicio, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "Seleccione el botón <guibutton>Activar al reiniciar</guibutton> para el entorno de inicio que desea que se active de manera predeterminada después de próximo reinicio."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "Seleccione el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> de la ventana Administrar entornos de inicio."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "Cambio de nombre de un entorno de inicio"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administrar entornos de inicio</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir la ventana Administrar entornos de inicio. Cada entorno de inicio se muestra en la ventana."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "No puede renombrar el entorno de inicio activo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "No puede renombrar un entorno de inicio marcado para suprimir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para renombrar un entorno de inicio, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "Haga doble clic en el nombre del entorno de inicio que desea renombrar. El campo de nombre se convertirá en editable."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "Introduzca el nombre nuevo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "Eliminación de un entorno de inicio"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Archivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administrar entornos de inicio</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir la ventana Administrar entornos de inicio. Cada entorno de inicio se muestra en la ventana. La columna que aparece en el extremo derecho de la ventana es la columna Suprimir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "La columna que aparece en el medio de la ventana Administrar entornos de inicio muestra el tamaño del entorno de inicio. Es posible que desee eliminar un entorno de inicio para liberar un poco de espacio en su dispositivo de almacenamiento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "No puede suprimir el entorno de inicio activo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "No puede suprimir un entorno de inicio que ha renombrado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para suprimir un entorno de inicio, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Seleccione el cuadro <guibutton>Suprimir</guibutton> para el entorno de inicio que desea suprimir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Trabajo con WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Package Manager admite la instalación de paquetes con un solo clic mediante el proceso WebInstall. El proceso WebInstall utiliza un archivo <filename>.p5i</filename>. Un archivo <filename>.p5i</filename> contiene información para agregar editores y paquetes que se pueden instalar de estos editores. El proceso WebInstall lee y utiliza la información del archivo <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "Exportación de archivos con WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "Si desea que otros usuarios puedan instalar paquetes que usted ha instalado en su sistema, puede exportar las instrucciones de instalación para esos archivos de paquete mediante el proceso WebInstall. Se crea un archivo <filename>.p5i</filename> que contiene instrucciones de instalación para instalar esos paquetes y editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para exportar las instrucciones de instalación para los paquetes seleccionados y sus editores a un archivo <filename>.p5i</filename>, realice los siguientes pasos:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "En el menú desplegable <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, seleccione el editor del que desea incluir los paquetes en el archivo <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "En el panel de la lista de paquetes, seleccione el paquete cuyas instrucciones de instalación desea distribuir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "Haga clic en <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Archivo</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Exportar selecciones</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para mostrar la ventana Confirmación de Exportar selecciones."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> para confirmar las selecciones. Aparece la ventana Exportar selecciones."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "Se proporciona un nombre predeterminado para el archivo <filename>p5i</filename> con la extensión <filename>.p5i</filename>. Puede cambiar este nombre de archivo, pero no puede cambiar la extensión."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "Se proporciona una ubicación predeterminada para el archivo <filename>p5i</filename>. Puede cambiar la ubicación. Si utiliza el botón <guibutton>Buscar</guibutton>, puede seleccionar la opción <filename>Archivos p5i</filename> del menú desplegable que aparece en el margen inferior derecho de la ventana Exportar selecciones para que en la lista de archivos se muestren solamente los archivos <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Guardar</guibutton> para guardar el nombre y la ubicación del archivo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Uso de WebInstall para agregar editores e instalar paquetes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "El proceso WebInstall le permite instalar paquetes mediante archivos <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "Ubique el archivo <filename>.p5i</filename>. El archivo puede estar en su escritorio o en un sitio web."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "Utilice uno de los siguientes métodos para iniciar Package Manager en modo WebInstall:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "Haga clic en un archivo <filename>.p5i</filename> de su escritorio. Se iniciará la aplicación asociada (Instalador Web de Package Manager)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "Inicie Package Manager desde la línea de comandos con una ruta al archivo <filename>.p5i</filename>. Por ejemplo, introduzca el siguiente comando:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "Vaya a una ubicación URL que contenga un enlace al archivo <filename>.p5i</filename>. El archivo <filename>.p5i</filename> debe estar ubicado en un servidor web que tenga registrado este tipo MIME."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "Si el archivo <filename>.p5i</filename> está ubicado en un servidor web que no tiene registrado este tipo MIME, guarde el archivo <filename>.p5i</filename> en su escritorio y luego haga clic en él para iniciar WebInstall."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "Aparece la ventana Instalar/Actualizar. La etiqueta que se encuentra en la parte superior de la ventana es: \"Instalador Web de Package Manager/Se agregará al sistema lo siguiente:\" Luego, se muestran los editores y los paquetes. Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Continuar</guibutton> para continuar con la instalación."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "Si el editor del paquete todavía no está configurado en el sistema, aparece la ventana Agregar editor. El nombre y el URI del editor ya se introdujeron."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "Si los editores que se van a agregar son editores seguros, se necesita una clave y un certificado SSL. Búsquelos en el sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "Si el nuevo editor se ha agregado correctamente, aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Agregar editor completado. Haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Aceptar</guibutton> para continuar con la instalación."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "Si un archivo <filename>.p5i</filename> contiene paquetes de un editor desactivado, WebInstall abre el cuadro de diálogo Activar editor. Utilice este cuadro de diálogo para activar al editor y usted pueda instalar los paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "Ahora, la ventana Instalar/Actualizar se verá igual que cuando selecciona <guibutton>Instalar/Actualizar</guibutton> desde Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "Resolución de problemas"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "Los mensajes informativos, de error y de advertencia se guardan en un registro para que pueda revisarlos en cualquier momento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "Visualización de registros de mensajes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Ver</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir la ventana Logs. La ventana Logs muestra mensajes informativos, de error y de advertencia de Package Manager y el Administrador de actualizaciones."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "Seleccione el botón <guibutton>Borrar</guibutton> que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la ventana Logs para suprimir todos los mensajes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "Si se registra un error o una advertencia, aparece un triángulo amarillo en el margen izquierdo de la barra de estado. Haga clic en el triángulo amarillo para mostrar la ventana Logs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "Configuración de preferencias"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "Utilice la opción de menú <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferencias</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para cambiar algunas de las configuraciones de la interfaz de usuario de Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "La ventana Preferencias tiene tres fichas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "La ficha General le permite establecer las preferencias de salida y las preferencias del cuadro de diálogo de confirmación."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "La ficha Componentes opcionales le permite establecer las preferencias de instalación de componentes de paquete opcionales al instalar o actualizar un paquete."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "La ficha Política de firmas le permite establecer una política de firmas para esta imagen."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Salir de las preferencias"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferencias</guimenuitem></menuchoice> y seleccione la ficha General."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Si el cuadro \"Recordar estado actual al salir\" está marcado, Package Manager guarda la siguiente configuración y la restaura la próxima vez que inicia Package Manager:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Separadores verticales y horizontales</emphasis>: medidas de anchura y altura de los paneles de la ventana"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Tamaño de ventana</emphasis>: el tamaño general de la ventana de Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Opción de editor</emphasis>: el editor u otra opción seleccionada en el menú desplegable <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> cuando Package Manager está cerrado"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categorías</emphasis>: la categoría seleccionada y las categorías ampliadas y plegadas para cada editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferencias del cuadro de diálogo de confirmación"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "Cuando un paquete se instala, se actualiza o se elimina, aparece un cuadro de diálogo de confirmación que muestra la lista de paquetes y la acción que se debe realizar. Si no desea ver estos cuadros de diálogo de confirmación, desmarque las opciones en la ventana Preferencias."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "Si hace clic en la casilla de selección \"No volver a mostrar este cuadro de diálogo de confirmación\" en un cuadro de diálogo de confirmación en particular, también anulará esta preferencia para ese cuadro de diálogo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferencias de política de firmas"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Utilice los botones de la ficha Política de firmas para ignorar o requerir firmas al instalar paquetes en esta imagen. Para establecer la política de firmas para editores específicos, seleccione el editor en la ventana Administrar editores, haga clic en el botón <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> y utilice la ficha Política de firmas de la ventana Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "Las opciones de política de firmas de imagen son las mismas que para la política de firmas de editor, salvo que las configuraciones se aplican a todos los paquetes instalados en la imagen y no solamente a paquetes instalados de un editor en particular. Consulte <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "Opciones de idioma de preferencias de componentes opcionales"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "Seleccione la opción <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferencias</guimenuitem></menuchoice> y seleccione la ficha Componentes opcionales."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "De manera predeterminada, la opción Instalar todos los idiomas debajo de Opciones de idioma para cualquier paquete está seleccionada. Puede ahorrar espacio en la instalación seleccionando un subconjunto de idiomas para instalar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "Cuando la opción Instalar sólo estos idiomas está seleccionada, puede hacer clic en el icono de la casilla de selección del encabezado de la columna que aparece en el extremo izquierdo de la lista de idiomas para seleccionar todos los idiomas. Vuelva a hacer clic en el encabezado de la columna para anular la selección de todos los idiomas. Haga clic en los encabezados de las columnas Idioma y Territorio para ordenar la lista."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "Haga clic en el botón Aceptar para guardar los cambios. Esta configuración se aplica a los paquetes instalados actualmente y a futuras instalaciones y actualizaciones de paquetes. La imagen se actualiza según sea necesario para instalar o eliminar componentes de paquete opcionales de acuerdo con las configuraciones nuevas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "Si anteriormente actualizó la imagen para incluir sólo un subconjunto de idiomas, la selección predeterminada de esta ventana es Instalar sólo estos idiomas, y esa lista de idiomas aparecerá en color gris si selecciona la opción Instalar todos los idiomas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "Otras preferencias de componentes opcionales"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "De manera predeterminada, las opciones Instalar todos los archivos de desarrollo e Instalar toda la documentación están seleccionadas debajo de Otras opciones de componentes. Puede ahorrar espacio en la instalación anulando la selección de archivos de desarrollo o documentación."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "Glosario"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "alias"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Otro nombre para un editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "entorno de inicio"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "Una instancia de un entorno de inicio de Oracle Solaris. Se requiere que el sistema de archivos raíz y todos los demás sistemas de archivos del entorno de inicio que contienen software de sistema sean conjuntos de datos ZFS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "El entorno de inicio activo es el que se inicia actualmente. Un sistema puede tener varios entornos de inicio. Puede seleccionar el entorno que desee para que se inicie cuando reinicia el sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "clónico"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Copia exacta."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Un clónico puede ser una copia exacta de un sistema operativo, un sistema de archivos o un volumen. Esta copia es 100% compatible con el original."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "conjunto de datos"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Nombre genérico de las entidades de ZFS siguientes: clónicos, sistemas de archivos, instantáneas o volúmenes. Cada conjunto de datos se identifica mediante un nombre exclusivo en el espacio de nombres de ZFS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "imagen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "Una colección de software del sistema operativo en un paquete que se puede iniciar e instalar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "Una ubicación en su sistema en la que pueden instalarse paquetes y sus archivos, directorios, dependencias y enlaces asociados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "origen"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "Un servidor de paquetes en el que un editor publica paquetes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "paquete"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Serie de archivos, directorios, vínculos, controladores y dependencias que tienen un formato definido."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "Una persona, un grupo o una corporación que designa, crea y publica un paquete en un servidor de paquetes. El servidor de paquetes, a su vez, pone a disposición los paquetes del editor (predeterminado) para su descarga."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "editor del sistema"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "Los editores del sistema son editores especiales utilizados en imágenes enlazadas y zonas no globales en particular para garantizar que determinados paquetes están sincronizados con la zona global. La zona global limita los paquetes que se encuentran dentro de las zonas no globales mediante la configuración de estos editores del sistema especiales en la zona no global. Son especiales porque las zonas no globales no pueden realizarles determinados cambios, como eliminar, inhabilitar, modificar o cambiar su prioridad."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "créditos del traductor"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/es/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/fr/fr.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "Aide en ligne du Gestionnaire de packages <trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "Juin 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "Ce logiciel et la documentation qui l'accompagne sont protégés par les lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ils sont concédés sous licence et soumis à des restrictions d'utilisation et de divulgation. Sauf disposition de votre contrat de licence ou de la loi, vous ne pouvez pas copier, reproduire, traduire, diffuser, modifier, breveter, transmettre, distribuer, exposer, exécuter, publier ou afficher le logiciel, même partiellement, sous quelque forme et par quelque procédé que ce soit. Par ailleurs, il est interdit de procéder à toute ingénierie inverse du logiciel, de le désassembler ou de le décompiler, excepté à des fins d'interopérabilité avec des logiciels tiers ou tel que prescrit par la loi."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "Les informations fournies dans ce document sont susceptibles de modification sans préavis. Par ailleurs, Oracle Corporation ne garantit pas qu'elles soient exemptes d'erreurs et vous invite, le cas échéant, à lui en faire part par écrit."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "Si ce logiciel, ou la documentation qui l'accompagne, est concédé sous licence au Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, ou à toute entité qui délivre la licence de ce logiciel ou l'utilise pour le compte du Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, la notice suivante s'applique :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "Ce logiciel ou matériel a été développé pour un usage général dans le cadre d'applications de gestion des informations. Ce logiciel ou matériel n'est pas conçu ni n'est destiné à être utilisé dans des applications à risque, notamment dans des applications pouvant causer des dommages corporels. Si vous utilisez ce logiciel ou matériel dans le cadre d'applications dangereuses, il est de votre responsabilité de prendre toutes les mesures de secours, de sauvegarde, de redondance et autres mesures nécessaires à son utilisation dans des conditions optimales de sécurité. Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés déclinent toute responsabilité quant aux dommages causés par l'utilisation de ce logiciel ou matériel pour ce type d'applications."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses affiliés. Tout autre nom mentionné peut correspondre à des marques appartenant à d'autres propriétaires qu'Oracle."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD, Opteron, le logo AMD et le logo AMD Opteron sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Advanced Micro Devices. Intel et Intel Xeon sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation. Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques ou des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc. UNIX est une marque déposée concédée sous licence par X/Open Company, Ltd."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "Ce logiciel ou matériel et la documentation qui l'accompagne peuvent fournir des informations ou des liens donnant accès à des contenus, des produits et des services émanant de tiers. Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés déclinent toute responsabilité ou garantie expresse quant aux contenus, produits ou services émanant de tiers. En aucun cas, Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés ne sauraient être tenus pour responsables des pertes subies, des coûts occasionnés ou des dommages causés par l'accès à des contenus, produits ou services tiers, ou à leur utilisation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "A propos du Gestionnaire de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "Le Gestionnaire de packages constitue l'interface graphique du logiciel Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Vous trouverez dans le <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> les définitions des termes utilisés dans ce document."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "IPS (Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System) est un système de diffusion de logiciels qui interagit avec un référentiel de packages placé sur un réseau. IPS est une structure de gestion du cycle de vie des logiciels proposant des fonctionnalités telles que l'installation, la mise à niveau et la suppression de logiciels."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "Après l'installation initiale du système d'exploitation Oracle Solaris, il est possible que certaines applications logicielles que vous souhaitez utiliser ne soient pas disponibles. Ces logiciels sont probablement disponibles dans un référentiel de packages IPS. Vous pouvez utiliser le Gestionnaire de packages ou la commande <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) pour télécharger et installer des packages à partir d'un référentiel de packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "IPS vous permet également d'effectuer une copie d'un référentiel de packages IPS existant, de créer votre propre référentiel de packages et de publier vos propres packages IPS. Pour plus d'informations sur IPS, reportez-vous à la bibliothèque d'informations Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Rendez-vous sur <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, sélectionnez Documentation Index (Index de la documentation) sur la gauche, sélectionnez Systems Software (Logiciels système), sélectionnez Oracle Solaris 11 et sélectionnez View Library (Afficher la bibliothèque). Consultez en particulier la section <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle> (Ajout et mise à jour de packages logiciels Oracle Solaris 11)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Gestionnaire de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "Le Gestionnaire de packages fournit un sous-ensemble des fonctionnalités offertes par l'interface de ligne de commande d'IPS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Le Gestionnaire de packages vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Trouver, installer, mettre à jour et supprimer des packages IPS. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"manage-pkg\"\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "Mettre à jour le système (mettre à jour tous les packages installés sur le système). Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"update_all\"\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Ajouter, modifier et supprimer des éditeurs de packages IPS. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"manage-publisher\"\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "Répertorier, renommer, supprimer et gérer des environnements d'initialisation. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"manage-be\"\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "Créer un fichier d'installation WebInstall (<filename>.p5i</filename>). Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"webinstall\"\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "Cette documentation fait référence aux fonctions suivantes de la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de packages :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "Le grand panneau au centre de la fenêtre est le panneau de liste des packages. Il arrive que des messages d'information s'affichent dans ce panneau, mais il contient généralement la liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "La barre de menus en haut de la fenêtre fournit la plupart des fonctionnalités du Gestionnaire de packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "La barre d'outils située juste au-dessous de la barre de menus contient sur la gauche des boutons permettant d'effectuer certaines opérations fréquentes. Les boutons placés sur la gauche du séparateur correspondent à des fonctionnalités globales : mise à jour de tous les packages pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles ou actualisation de la liste des packages et de leur statut. Les boutons placés sur la droite du séparateur ne s'appliquent qu'aux packages sélectionnés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Le champ Rechercher placé à droite dans la barre d'outils facilite le contrôle du contenu du panneau de liste des packages. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"search-pkg\"\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "Le menu déroulant <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu> facilite le contrôle du contenu du panneau de liste des packages et vous permet d'ajouter des éditeurs. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"list-pkg\"\"/> “Par éditeur”."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "Le menu déroulant <guimenu>Vue</guimenu> placé sous le champ Rechercher facilite le contrôle du contenu du panneau de liste des packages. Reportez-vous à la section relative à l'affichage de la liste de packages “Par statut de package”."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "Le panneau des catégories sous le menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu> facilite le contrôle du contenu du panneau de liste des packages. Reportez-vous à la section relative à l'affichage de la liste de packages “Par catégorie”."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "Une liste des recherches que vous avez effectuées au cours de la session actuelle s'affiche au-dessous de la liste des catégories de logiciels."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "Le panneau placé au-dessous du panneau de liste des packages contient les détails des packages. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"package-version\"\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "Gestion des packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez lister les packages selon différents critères. Vous pouvez installer, mettre à jour et supprimer des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "Affichage de la liste de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "La liste de packages affichée dans le panneau du Gestionnaire de packages varie en fonction des sélections effectuées dans le menu déroulant <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>, dans le menu déroulant <guimenu>Vue</guimenu>, dans le panneau des catégories et dans le champ Rechercher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez réorganiser la liste de packages en cliquant sur les titres des colonnes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez utiliser le bouton <guibutton>Actualiser</guibutton> ou l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Actualiser</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour recharger des catalogues de référentiels et mettre à jour la liste des packages et leur statut. En outre, une actualisation est tentée à chaque ouverture du Gestionnaire de packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "Par éditeur"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "Le menu déroulant <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu> vous permet de répertorier les packages par éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "La liste de tous les éditeurs ajoutés par le biais de la boîte de dialogue Ajouter un éditeur ou à l'aide de la commande <literal>pkg</literal> s'affiche dans la partie supérieure du menu. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'un de ces éditeurs, le panneau de liste des packages répertorie uniquement les packages disponibles à partir de l'éditeur sélectionné. Le panneau de liste des packages contient uniquement les colonnes Nom, Statut et Récapitulatif car l'éditeur est le même pour tous les packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs</guimenuitem> : affiche les packages de tous les éditeurs dans le panneau de liste des packages. Le panneau contient les colonnes Nom, Statut, Editeur et Récapitulatif."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemple : pour afficher la liste de tous les pilotes de périphérique média pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles dans l'ensemble des éditeurs, sélectionnez <guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs</guimenuitem> dans le menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>, sélectionnez la catégorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Pilotes</guimenu><guimenuitem>Média</guimenuitem></menuchoice> et sélectionnez <guimenuitem>Mises à jour</guimenuitem> dans le menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tous les packages installés</guimenuitem> : affiche les packages installés issus de tous les éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "Exemple : pour afficher la liste de tous les packages de polices actuellement installés provenant de l'éditeur <literal>solaris</literal>, sélectionnez <guimenuitem>Tous les packages installés</guimenuitem> dans le menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>, sélectionnez la catégorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Système</guimenu><guimenuitem>Polices</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, cliquez sur le titre de colonne Editeur pour trier la liste par éditeur et faites défiler vers le bas jusqu'aux entrées <literal>solaris</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs (rechercher)</guimenuitem> : affiche un message d'information au lieu de la liste de packages dans le panneau de liste des packages. Le message répertorie tous les éditeurs configurés et vous indique pour mémoire comment visualiser tous les packages de ces éditeurs. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"search-pkg\"\"/> pour plus d'informations sur la recherche à l'aide de <guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs (rechercher)</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Ajouter...</guimenuitem> : ouvre la fenêtre Ajouter un éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "Par statut de package"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "Le menu déroulant <guimenu>Vue</guimenu> vous permet d'afficher la liste des packages par statut de package. Les packages peuvent avoir le statut installé, non installé ou mise à jour disponible. Les icônes affichées dans le menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu> sont identiques aux icônes affichées dans la colonne Statut du panneau de liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tous les packages</guimenuitem> : affiche tous les packages disponibles issus de l'éditeur sélectionné et appartenant à la catégorie sélectionnée ou correspondant à la chaîne de recherche spécifiée."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemple : pour afficher la liste de tous les packages de services Web provenant de l'éditeur <literal>solaris</literal> installés, non installés ou pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles, sélectionnez <literal>solaris</literal> dans le menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>, sélectionnez la catégorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Services Web</guimenu></menuchoice> et sélectionnez <guimenuitem>Tous les packages</guimenuitem> dans le menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Packages installés</guimenuitem> : affiche tous les packages installés provenant de l'éditeur sélectionné et appartenant à la catégorie sélectionnée ou correspondant à la chaîne de recherche spécifiée. Voir aussi l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Editeur</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tous les packages installés</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemple : pour afficher uniquement la liste des packages de services Web installés provenant de l'éditeur <literal>solaris</literal>, sélectionnez <literal>solaris</literal> dans le menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>, sélectionnez la catégorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Services Web</guimenu></menuchoice> et sélectionnez <guimenuitem>Tous les packages</guimenuitem> dans le menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Mises à jour</guimenuitem> : affiche tous les packages provenant de l'éditeur sélectionné et appartenant à la catégorie sélectionnée ou correspondant à la chaîne de recherche spécifiée pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemple : pour afficher la liste de tous les pilotes de périphérique pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles dans l'ensemble des éditeurs, sélectionnez <guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs</guimenuitem> dans le menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>, sélectionnez la catégorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Pilotes</guimenu> et sélectionnez <guimenuitem>Mises à jour</guimenuitem> dans le menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Packages non installés</guimenuitem> : affiche tous les packages provenant de l'éditeur sélectionné et appartenant à la catégorie sélectionnée ou correspondant à la chaîne de recherche spécifiée qui ne sont pas installés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemple : pour afficher la liste de tous les packages de polices de l'éditeur <literal>solaris</literal> actuellement non installés, sélectionnez <literal>solaris</literal> dans le menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>, sélectionnez la catégorie <menuchoice><guimenu>Système</guimenu><guimenuitem>Polices</guimenuitem></menuchoice> et sélectionnez <guimenuitem>Packages non installés</guimenuitem> dans le menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Packages sélectionnés</guimenuitem> : affiche la liste de tous les packages actuellement sélectionnés. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"select-pkg\"\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "Par catégorie"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez parcourir les packages disponibles par type de logiciel dans le panneau des catégories affiché sur la gauche dans la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de packages. Cliquez sur le nom d'une catégorie pour en afficher les sous-catégories. Les packages appartenant à la catégorie ou à la sous-catégorie sélectionnée sont répertoriés dans le panneau de liste des packages en fonction de l'éditeur sélectionné, du statut du package ainsi que des critères de recherche spécifiés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "Outre les types de logiciels nommés, vous pouvez aussi afficher <guimenuitem>Toutes les catégories</guimenuitem> et les <guimenuitem>Recherches récentes</guimenuitem> dans le panneau des catégories. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"\"search-pkg\"\"/> “Répétition d'une recherche antérieure” pour plus d'informations sur l'option <guimenuitem>Recherches récentes</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "Recherche de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "Procédez de l'une des deux manières suivantes pour rechercher des packages :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Placez le curseur dans le panneau de liste des packages (sélectionnez par exemple <menuchoice><guimenu>Edition</guimenu><guimenuitem>Accéder à la liste de packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice>) et commencez la saisie. A mesure que vous saisissez des caractères, les packages correspondants sont identifiés parmi les packages actuellement répertoriés dans le panneau de liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Utilisez le champ Rechercher accessible dans la barre d'outils."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "Entrez une chaîne de recherche"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "Entrez une chaîne dans le champ Rechercher, puis appuyez sur la touche Entrée ou cliquez sur l'icône en forme de loupe à droite du champ Rechercher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Sélection du menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu> : le Gestionnaire de packages recherche la chaîne spécifiée dans les informations relatives à chaque package d'un éditeur donné ou de tous les éditeurs, en fonction de l'option sélectionnée dans le menu <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Les résultats de la recherche sont identiques, que vous sélectionniez <guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs</guimenuitem> ou <guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs (rechercher)</guimenuitem>. Toutefois, la recherche à l'aide de <guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs (rechercher)</guimenuitem> est plus rapide, car elle évite le délai supplémentaire dû au chargement des données de tous les éditeurs qui s'effectue en cas de sélection de <guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs</guimenuitem>. Avec <guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs (rechercher)</guimenuitem>, la recherche est effectuée parmi tous les éditeurs sans que les données de tous les éditeurs ne soient chargées dans le panneau de liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "Sélection du menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu> : les résultats de la recherche s'affichent dans le panneau de liste des packages en fonction du statut de package sélectionné dans le menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu>. En modifiant la sélection du menu <guimenu>Vue</guimenu>, vous pouvez afficher différents sous-ensembles des mêmes résultats de recherche dans le panneau de liste des packages sans relancer la recherche."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "Le Gestionnaire de packages effectue la recherche dans les informations relatives aux packages, notamment dans le nom, le récapitulatif, la description, la catégorie et les noms des fichiers contenus dans les packages. Seules les correspondances exactes sont retenues si vous n'utilisez pas de caractères génériques."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "AND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "Lorsque les termes de recherche sont séparés par des espaces ou par <literal>AND</literal>, le Gestionnaire de packages va rechercher les packages contenant <emphasis role=\"\"strong\"\">tous</emphasis> les termes de recherche. Il s'agit du comportement par défaut de la recherche."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "Exemple : si la chaîne de recherche est <literal>python book</literal> ou <literal>python AND book</literal>, les résultats de la recherche n'incluent que les packages dont les informations contiennent <emphasis>à la fois</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>et</emphasis> <literal>book</literal>. Par exemple, le package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, un livre traitant de programmation Python, figurerait parmi les résultats de la recherche, mais pas le package <literal>python-26</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "Guillemets doubles"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "Placez le terme recherché entre guillemets doubles pour rechercher uniquement les correspondances exactes de ce terme."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "Exemple : <literal>\"\"ethernet driver\"\"</literal> entre guillemets doubles renvoie comme résultat de recherche <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> mais ignore <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "Caractère générique"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez utiliser le caractère générique <literal>*</literal> dans votre chaîne de recherche. L'utilisation de caractères génériques peut ralentir la recherche."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "Exemple : <literal>802.11*</literal> renvoie comme résultats de recherche <literal>802.11b/g</literal> et <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "Notez que <literal>802.11*</literal> ne renvoie pas <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal> comme résultat de la recherche. Pour rechercher <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, utilisez la chaîne de recherche <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "Lorsque les termes de recherche sont séparés par <literal>OR</literal>, le Gestionnaire de packages recherche les packages contenant <emphasis role=\"\"strong\"\">au moins un</emphasis> des termes de recherche."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "Exemple : <literal>python OR book</literal> renvoie comme résultats tous les packages dont les informations contiennent <literal>python</literal> et tous les packages dont les informations contiennent <literal>book</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez combiner ces modificateurs de chaîne de recherche. Vous pouvez utiliser AND, OR, des guillemets doubles et * dans la même chaîne de recherche."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "Effacement du champ Rechercher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "Pour effacer la chaîne de recherche et la liste des résultats de la recherche, utilisez le champ Rechercher ou le menu Edition."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "Dans le champ Rechercher, cliquez sur l'icône <literal>X</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Dans le menu <guimenu>Edition</guimenu>, sélectionnez l'option <guimenuitem>Annuler la recherche</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "Annulation de la recherche"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "Lors d'une opération de recherche, un indicateur d'état s'affiche en bas à droite dans la barre d'état de la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de packages. Une icône <literal>X</literal> figure à l'extrémité droite de l'indicateur d'état. Cliquez sur l'icône <literal>X</literal> dans l'indicateur d'état pour annuler la recherche en cours."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "Affichage des résultats d'une recherche antérieure"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "Les résultats des recherches effectuées au cours de la session actuelle du Gestionnaire de packages sont enregistrés sous <guimenuitem>Recherches récentes</guimenuitem> dans le panneau des catégories."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez le libellé <guimenuitem>Recherches récentes</guimenuitem> dans le panneau des catégories pour afficher un message d'information dans le panneau de liste des packages. Le panneau de liste des packages contient la liste des résultats des recherches antérieures. Cliquez sur un lien \"résultats\" pour afficher les résultats concernés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez la flèche en regard du libellé <guimenuitem>Recherches récentes</guimenuitem> pour développer ou masquer la liste des résultats des recherches antérieures dans le panneau des catégories. Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste des recherches récentes pour réafficher les résultats de recherche concernés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "Les recherches n'ayant livré aucun résultat n'apparaissent pas dans la liste des recherches récentes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "Lorsque vous sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Actualiser</guibutton> ou l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Actualiser</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, tous les résultats des recherches récentes sont supprimés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "Affichage d'informations supplémentaires"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "Le panneau Détails du package et la boîte de dialogue Infos sur la version du package fournissent des informations supplémentaires sur les packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "Panneau Détails du package"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "Pour afficher des informations supplémentaires sur un package, cliquez sur un package avec le bouton gauche de la souris pour mettre le package en surbrillance dans la liste. Le panneau Détails du package figurant sous le panneau de liste des packages fournit des informations telles que la dernière version disponible auprès de cet éditeur, la taille du package, les fichiers inclus dans le package, les dépendances et les conditions de licence."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "Si un package a été renommé depuis son installation, le champ Renommé en de l'onglet Généralités indique le nouveau nom du package."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "L'onglet Versions contient la liste des versions du package disponibles pour l'installation. Sélectionnez une version dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Installer/Mettre à jour</guibutton> à droite de la liste pour installer la version concernée. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "Le panneau Détails du package ne s'affiche pas lorsque le panneau de liste des packages contient un message d'information."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "Boîte de dialogue Infos sur la version du package"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un package de la liste de packages pour ouvrir le menu contextuel <guimenu>Package</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Infos sur la version du package</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dans le menu contextuel ou dans la barre de menus pour afficher une fenêtre distincte indiquant la version du package installée et, le cas échéant, la dernière version pouvant être installée ou vers laquelle vous pouvez mettre à niveau."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "Sélection de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Les packages sélectionnés peuvent être installés, mis à jour ou supprimés. Pour sélectionner un package, utilisez le panneau de liste des packages ou le menu <guimenu>Edition</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "Dans le panneau de liste des packages, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour sélectionner un package. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur la case en regard du nom d'un package. Cliquez à nouveau sur cette case pour désélectionner le package."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Cliquez une fois sur le nom d'un package pour mettre ce package en surbrillance. Double-cliquez ensuite sur le package en surbrillance pour le sélectionner. Double-cliquez à nouveau sur le package pour le désélectionner."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur l'icône de case à cocher dans le titre de la colonne pour sélectionner tous les packages actuellement répertoriés dans le panneau de liste des packages. Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône de case à cocher pour désélectionner tous les packages actuellement répertoriés dans le panneau de liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "Le menu <guimenu>Edition</guimenu> propose les options de sélection de packages suivantes :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tout sélectionner</guimenuitem> : sélectionne tous les packages actuellement répertoriés dans le panneau de liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Sélectionner les mises à jour</guimenuitem> : sélectionne tous les packages actuellement répertoriés dans le panneau de liste des packages pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Désélectionner tout</guimenuitem> : désélectionne tous les packages actuellement répertoriés dans le panneau de liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "Lorsque vous sélectionnez un package, les packages sélectionnés auparavant restent sélectionnés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "Le nombre de packages actuellement répertoriés dans le panneau de liste des packages et le nombre de packages sélectionnés parmi ceux-ci s'affichent sur la gauche de la barre d'état en bas de la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Editeur</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tous les éditeurs</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, la catégorie <guimenuitem>Toutes les catégories</guimenuitem> et l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Vue</guimenu><guimenuitem>Packages sélectionnés</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour afficher la liste de tous les packages sélectionnés provenant de tous les éditeurs dans le panneau de liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "Un package peut être mis en surbrillance sans être sélectionné. Lorsqu'un package est mis en surbrillance, des informations détaillées à son propos s'affichent dans le panneau Détails du package sous le panneau de liste des packages. Lorsqu'un package est sélectionné, la case placée en regard de son nom est cochée. Si vous voulez installer, mettre à jour ou supprimer un package, assurez-vous que la case à cocher en regard du nom du package concerné est cochée."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "Installation et mise à jour de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "Avant de procéder à une installation ou une mise à jour, contrôlez le paramétrage des préférences des Composants facultatifs. Sélectionnez l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Edition</guimenu><guimenuitem>Préférences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Dans la fenêtre Préférences, sélectionnez l'onglet Composants facultatifs. Par défaut, les options Installer toutes les langues, Installer tous les fichiers de développement et Installer toute la documentation sont sélectionnées. Vous pouvez réduire l'espace nécessaire pour l'installation en choisissant par exemple de n'installer qu'un sous-ensemble de langues ou en désélectionnant les fichiers de développement. Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour enregistrer les modifications. Ces paramètres s'appliquent à tous les packages installés ainsi qu'aux installations et mises à jour de packages effectuées par la suite."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "Pour installer ou mettre à jour un package, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez le package. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "Procédez de l'une des manières suivantes pour installer ou mettre à jour le package :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Installer/Mettre à jour</guibutton> dans la barre d'outils."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Installer/Mettre à jour</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dans la barre de menus."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le nom d'un package pour afficher le menu contextuel <guimenu>Package</guimenu>. Sélectionnez ensuite l'option <guimenuitem>Installer/Mettre à jour</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "Dans l'onglet Versions du panneau Détails du package affiché sous le panneau de liste des packages, sélectionnez une version dans la liste Version à installer et cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Installer/Mettre à jour</guibutton> à droite de la liste. Les packages de la liste Version à installer sont disponibles dans le référentiel, mais il n'est pas toujours possible de les installer. Une version donnée peut être incompatible avec d'autres packages installés. Si la version que vous sélectionnez ne peut pas être installée sur votre système, le Gestionnaire de packages vous en avertit et n'installe pas le package."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Si le package est déjà installé et qu'aucune mise à jour n'est disponible (voir la colonne Statut ou l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Infos sur la version du package</guimenuitem></menuchoice>), l'option <guibutton>Installer/Mettre à jour</guibutton> est grisée et inaccessible."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "La fenêtre Confirmation d'installation/de mise à jour s'affiche. Les packages qui ne sont pas encore installés sont listés dans le panneau Détails d'installation et les packages installés sont listés dans le panneau Détails de mise à jour, où vous pouvez les contrôler. Sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Continuer</guibutton> pour installer ou mettre à jour les packages répertoriés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "Dans certains cas, une boîte de dialogue de licence s'affiche et vous devez accepter la licence avant d'installer le package."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "Lorsqu'une erreur survient au cours de l'installation d'un package, une boîte de dialogue d'erreur s'affiche. Le message indique les raisons de l'échec de l'installation ou de la mise à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "Suppression de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Pour supprimer un package, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "Procédez de l'une des manières suivantes pour supprimer le package :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Supprimer</guibutton> dans la barre d'outils."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Supprimer</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dans la barre de menus."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le nom d'un package pour afficher le menu contextuel <guimenu>Package</guimenu>. Sélectionnez ensuite l'option <guimenuitem>Supprimer</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Si le package n'est pas installé, l'option Supprimer est grisée et inaccessible."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "La fenêtre Confirmation de la suppression s'affiche. Les packages à supprimer s'affichent pour vérification dans le panneau Détails de suppression. Sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Continuer</guibutton> pour supprimer les packages répertoriés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "Si un package ne peut pas être supprimé car d'autres packages en dépendent, vous pouvez choisir de <guibutton>Poursuivre la suppression</guibutton> pour tenter de supprimer les packages qui subsistent alors que vous aviez sélectionné leur suppression."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "Mise à jour du système"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "Lorsque des packages essentiels tels que certains pilotes ou d'autres composants du noyau sont mis à jour, le système effectue les opérations suivantes :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "Création d'un clone de l'environnement d'initialisation (BE) actuel."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "Mise à jour des packages dans le clone, mais pas de mise à jour des packages dans le BE actuel."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Définition du nouvel environnement d'initialisation comme environnement par défaut lors de la prochaine initialisation du système. Le BE actuel figure toujours parmi les choix d'initialisation possibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "Mise à jour de tous les packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Lorsque vous sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Mises à jour</guibutton> dans la barre d'outils ou l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Mises à jour</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, le Gestionnaire de packages met à jour tous les packages installés pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "Tous les packages pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles auprès de leur éditeur actuel sont mis à jour. Si des mises à jour sont disponibles pour un package auprès d'un éditeur de votre liste d'éditeurs autre que l'éditeur actuel du package, le package concerné est uniquement mis à jour si son éditeur actuel est défini comme non permanent. Si l'éditeur actuel est défini comme résident, le package n'est pas mis à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "La fenêtre Mises à jour s'affiche et le processus de mise à jour débute :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "Le système actualise tous les catalogues."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "Le système analyse tous les packages installés pour identifier ceux pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "Si des mises à jour ne sont disponibles pour aucun package, le message \"Aucune mise à jour disponible\" s'affiche et le traitement s'arrête."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "Si des mises à jour sont disponibles, les packages qui seront mis à jour sont répertoriés et vous pouvez les contrôler. Vous avez une dernière fois la possibilité de cliquer sur le bouton <guibutton>Annuler</guibutton> pour abandonner la mise à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Continuer</guibutton> pour poursuivre la mise à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "Selon les packages mis à jour, le système peut créer un nouvel environnement d'initialisation (BE), comme décrit à la section <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> ci-dessus."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Si le système a déterminé qu'un nouvel environnement d'initialisation est requis mais qu'il n'a pas été en mesure de le créer, un message d'erreur s'affiche. S'il s'agit d'un problème d'espace disque insuffisant, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Fermer</guibutton> pour annuler le processus Mises à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "Suivez les instructions de la section <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> pour supprimer un environnement d'initialisation dont vous n'avez plus besoin."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez à nouveau le bouton <guibutton>Mises à jour</guibutton> pour redémarrer le processus Mises à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "Le système télécharge toutes les mises à jour de packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "Le système installe les mises à jour de packages. Si un clone de l'environnement d'initialisation a été créé, les mises à jour sont installées dans le clone. Si aucun clone n'a été créé, les mises à jour sont installées dans le BE actuel."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "Si une erreur se produit au cours du processus de mise à jour, le panneau Détails est développé et fournit des informations détaillées sur l'erreur. Un indicateur de l'état de l'erreur s'affiche à côté de l'étape ayant échoué."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Si le système a créé un nouvel environnement d'initialisation (BE) pour la mise à jour, vous pouvez modifier le nom par défaut du BE. Après avoir entré le nom de BE souhaité, cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Redémarrer maintenant</guibutton> pour redémarrer votre système immédiatement. Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Redémarrer ultérieurement</guibutton> pour redémarrer votre système plus tard. Vous devez redémarrer pour amorcer le nouvel environnement d'initialisation. Le nouveau BE sera votre choix d'initialisation par défaut. Votre BE actuel sera disponible en tant que choix d'initialisation de rechange."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "Utilisation du Gestionnaire de mises à jour"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez ouvrir le Gestionnaire de mises à jour à partir d'une notification du système ou à partir de la barre de menus du bureau. Le Gestionnaire de mises à jour exécute le même processus que celui décrit ci-dessus dans la section <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "Notification de mises à jour logicielles"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "Le système contrôle périodiquement si des mises à jour sont disponibles pour l'un des packages installés. Si le système détecte que des mises à jour sont disponibles, une icône de notification et une fenêtre contextuelle Mises à jour disponibles s'affichent dans la zone de notification du système. Cliquez sur l'icône de notification pour ouvrir le Gestionnaire de mises à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "Menu Système du bureau"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez <menuchoice><guimenu>Système</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Gestionnaire de mises à jour</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dans la barre de menus sur le bureau pour ouvrir le Gestionnaire de mises à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "Gestion des éditeurs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier et supprimer des éditeurs de packages IPS. Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre de priorité d'un éditeur, ses paramètres Activé et Résident et son alias, ainsi qu'ajouter ou supprimer une origine d'éditeur et un miroir d'éditeur. Vous pouvez gérer les clés, les certificats et la stratégie de signature."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "Notez que les éditeurs système constituent une exception. Les éditeurs système peuvent uniquement être visualisés dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs. Les éditeurs système ne peuvent être ni supprimés, ni modifiés, et vous ne pouvez pas modifier leur ordre de priorité. Reportez-vous au <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. Le panneau Détails indique si l'éditeur sélectionné est un éditeur système."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "Ajout d'éditeurs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Pour ajouter un éditeur de packages IPS, utilisez la fenêtre Ajouter un éditeur. Pour ouvrir la fenêtre Ajouter un éditeur, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option <guimenuitem>Ajouter</guimenuitem> dans le menu déroulant <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Ajouter un éditeur</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Organiser les éditeurs</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs, sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Ajouter</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "Dans la fenêtre Ajouter un éditeur, suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter un éditeur de packages IPS :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "Dans le champ URI, entrez l'URI de l'éditeur. L'URI est un emplacement sur le réseau tel que <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> ou <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "Dans le champ Alias, vous pouvez entrer un autre nom pour cet éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Ajouter</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "La boîte de dialogue Ajout d'un éditeur s'affiche. Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Annuler</guibutton> pour annuler le processus. Cliquez sur Détails pour afficher des informations détaillées."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "Si l'ajout du nouvel éditeur réussit, la boîte de dialogue Ajout de l'éditeur terminé s'affiche et indique le nom du nouvel éditeur, son alias et son URI."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "Si le nouvel éditeur n'est pas ajouté, la boîte de dialogue Erreur au niveau de l'éditeur contenant des informations sur le problème survenu s'affiche."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "Le nouvel éditeur est le dernier éditeur répertorié dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs ; il est activé et résident."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> pour savoir comment modifier l'ordre de priorité du nouvel éditeur, ses paramètres Activé et Résident et son alias, et comment ajouter une origine et un miroir pour l'éditeur, définir une clé et un certificat SSL et gérer les certificats et la stratégie de signature de l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "Modification d'éditeurs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Pour modifier les attributs d'un éditeur, sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Organiser les éditeurs</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Les éditeurs actuellement configurés sont répertoriés dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs, vous pouvez modifier l'ordre de priorité d'un éditeur, activer ou désactiver un éditeur, définir un éditeur comme résident ou non permanent et supprimer un éditeur. Reportez-vous aux sections <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> et <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Modifier</guibutton> pour ouvrir la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur. Dans la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur, vous pouvez modifier l'alias de l'éditeur, ajouter ou supprimer une origine ou un miroir pour l'éditeur, définir une clé et un certificat SSL et gérer les certificats et la stratégie de signature de l'éditeur. Reportez-vous aux sections <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> et <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "Modification de l'ordre de priorité et de l'attribut Résident/Non permanent"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Organiser les éditeurs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour afficher la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Ordre de priorité des éditeurs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "Les éditeurs sont répertoriés par ordre de priorité dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs. L'éditeur s'affichant en haut de la liste est l'éditeur doté du niveau de priorité le plus élevé. L'éditeur s'affichant en bas de la liste est l'éditeur doté du niveau de priorité le plus bas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "L'éditeur s'affichant en haut de la liste est également qualifié d'éditeur préféré."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "L'éditeur préféré ne peut être ni désactivé, ni supprimé."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "Lorsque vous effectuez une recherche de packages sans spécifier d'éditeur, la recherche débute dans les catalogues des éditeurs possédant les niveaux de priorité les plus élevés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "Lorsque vous mettez à jour un package installé à partir d'un éditeur non permanent, la recherche des mises à jour débute dans les catalogues des éditeurs possédant les niveaux de priorité les plus élevés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour modifier l'ordre de priorité d'un éditeur, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Cliquez pour mettre en surbrillance la ligne d'un éditeur dans la liste de la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur les boutons <guibutton>Haut</guibutton> et <guibutton>Bas</guibutton> accessibles à droite de la liste d'éditeurs pour augmenter ou réduire l'ordre de priorité de l'éditeur sélectionné. L'entrée de l'éditeur sélectionné se déplace vers le haut ou vers le bas dans la liste pour refléter son nouvel ordre de priorité."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "Si l'éditeur sélectionné est un éditeur système, ses boutons <guibutton>Haut</guibutton> et <guibutton>Bas</guibutton> sont désactivés. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier l'ordre de priorité d'un éditeur système. Par conséquent, vous ne pouvez pas diminuer l'ordre de priorité d'un éditeur de niveau de priorité immédiatement supérieur à celui d'un éditeur système, et vous ne pouvez pas augmenter l'ordre de priorité d'un éditeur de niveau de priorité immédiatement inférieur à celui d'un éditeur système."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> en bas de la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "Activé et Résident"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "Lorsque vous ajoutez un éditeur, les attributs Activé et Résident sont configurés par défaut. L'éditeur préféré (voir la section <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> ci-dessus) ne peut pas être désactivé. Un éditeur système ne peut pas être désactivé, et son paramètre Résident ne peut pas être modifié. Les paramètres Activé et Résident de tous les autres éditeurs peuvent être modifiés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "Si le paramètre Résident est activé pour un éditeur, un package installé à partir de cet éditeur ne peut pas être mis à jour à partir d'un autre éditeur. Si l'attribut Résident n'est pas activé pour un éditeur, cet éditeur est non permanent. Lorsqu'un éditeur est non permanent, un package provenant initialement de cet éditeur peut être mis à jour à partir d'un autre éditeur. Il est possible qu'un autre éditeur propose une version plus récente d'un package que l'éditeur d'origine du package. Si vous voulez mettre à jour vers cette version plus récente du package, vous pouvez uniquement le faire si l'éditeur d'origine du package est non permanent. En outre, si vous installez des packages à partir d'un éditeur non permanent de niveau de priorité peu élevé, les mises à jour de ces packages sont tout d'abord recherchées dans les catalogues des éditeurs de niveau de priorité supérieur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "Les éditeurs désactivés ne sont pas pris en compte lors de la recherche de mises à jour ou de packages à installer. Les catalogues des éditeurs désactivés ne sont pas actualisés. Les éditeurs désactivés n'apparaissent pas dans le menu déroulant <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour modifier les paramètres Activé et Résident d'un éditeur, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Organiser les éditeurs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour ouvrir la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur une case Activé ou Résident pour inverser son paramétrage."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "Modification d'alias, d'origines et de miroirs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'éditeur que vous souhaitez modifier. Le panneau Détails figurant au-dessous de la liste des éditeurs dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs indique les origines actuelles de l'éditeur sélectionné."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Modifier</guibutton> à droite de la liste d'éditeurs pour ouvrir la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Si l'éditeur sélectionné est un éditeur système, le bouton <guibutton>Modifier</guibutton> est désactivé. Le panneau Détails signale que l'éditeur sélectionné est un éditeur système et un message indique que cet éditeur ne peut être ni modifié, ni supprimé."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'onglet Généralités pour modifier l'alias de l'éditeur et ajouter ou supprimer des origines ou des miroirs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Alias d'un éditeur"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "L'alias d'un éditeur est un autre nom utilisé pour cet éditeur. L'alias est utilisé dans le menu déroulant <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu> et dans le panneau de liste des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour modifier l'alias de cet éditeur, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "Dans l'onglet Généralités de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur, entrez un nouveau nom dans le champ Alias."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> en bas de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "L'alias de l'éditeur est modifié dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs. Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> en bas de la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Origines d'un éditeur"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "Une origine correspond à l'emplacement d'un référentiel ou d'une archive de packages IPS contenant à la fois les métadonnées des packages (fichiers manifestes des packages et catalogues) et le contenu des packages (fichiers des packages)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "Une valeur d'origine est l'URI d'un référentiel de packages IPS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour modifier, ajouter ou supprimer une origine pour cet éditeur, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'onglet Généralités de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "Ajout d'une origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "Dans le champ Origine, entrez l'URI de la nouvelle origine que vous souhaitez associer à cet éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Ajouter</guibutton>. Le nouvel URI est ajouté à la liste figurant sous le champ Origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "Suppression d'une origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "Dans la liste figurant sous le champ Origine, sélectionnez l'URI que vous souhaitez supprimer."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Supprimer</guibutton>. L'URI sélectionné est supprimé de la liste. Si une seule origine a été définie pour un éditeur, cette origine ne peut pas être supprimée."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "Modification d'une origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "Ajoutez la nouvelle origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "Supprimez l'origine que vous souhaitez modifier."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Le changement d'origine est répercuté dans le panneau Détails de la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs. Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> en bas de la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Miroirs d'éditeurs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "Un miroir est un emplacement de référentiel de packages IPS contenant uniquement le contenu des packages (fichiers des packages). Un miroir ne contient pas les métadonnées des packages (fichiers manifestes des packages et catalogues). Les miroirs fournissent un sous-ensemble des données fournies par les origines. Les miroirs peuvent être utilisés pour télécharger les fichiers de packages. Les métadonnées des packages sont téléchargées à partir de l'origine. Même si les clients IPS téléchargent le contenu de packages à partir d'un miroir, ils accèdent à l'origine pour obtenir le catalogue d'un éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour ajouter, supprimer ou modifier un miroir pour cet éditeur, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le libellé Miroirs pour afficher le champ Miroir et la liste de miroirs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "Ajout d'un miroir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "Dans le champ Miroir, entrez l'URI du nouveau miroir que vous souhaitez associer à cet éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Ajouter</guibutton>. Le nouvel URI est ajouté à la liste figurant sous le champ Miroir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "Suppression d'un miroir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "Dans la liste figurant sous le champ Miroir, sélectionnez l'URI que vous souhaitez supprimer"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Supprimer</guibutton>. L'URI sélectionné est supprimé de la liste."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "Modification d'un miroir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "Supprimez le miroir que vous souhaitez modifier."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "Ajoutez un nouveau miroir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "Gestion de la sécurité des éditeurs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "Les certificats permettent de vérifier que les packages ont été correctement signés avant d'être installés, conformément à la stratégie de signature la plus restrictive entre la stratégie de signature de l'image et celle de l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'éditeur dont vous souhaitez modifier la sécurité."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Modifier</guibutton> à droite de la liste d'éditeurs pour ouvrir la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur. L'éditeur sélectionné dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs s'affiche dans le titre de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'onglet Généralités pour ajouter la clé SSL et le certificat SSL si l'éditeur a une origine sécurisée."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'onglet Certificats pour gérer les certificats de cet éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'onglet Stratégie de signature pour gérer la stratégie de signature de cet éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "Ajout de clés et de certificats SSL"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "Si un éditeur a une origine sécurisée, ajoutez la clé SSL et le certificat SSL pour cet éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur l'onglet Généralités de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le libellé Clé et certificat SSL pour afficher les champs Clé SSL et Certificat SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Parcourir</guibutton> à droite du champ Clé SSL pour sélectionner le fichier de clé SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Parcourir</guibutton> à droite du champ Certificat SSL pour sélectionner le fichier de certificat SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "Gestion des certificats"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur l'onglet Certificats de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "Utilisez les boutons placés sous la liste de certificats pour ajouter un certificat ou pour supprimer, révoquer ou réactiver le certificat actuellement sélectionné dans la liste."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "Notez que les actions effectuées dans la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur ne sont appliquées aux certificats de l'éditeur sélectionné qu'une fois que vous avez cliqué sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> au bas de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur. Si vous cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Annuler</guibutton>, les modifications sont annulées."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Ajouter</guibutton>. Permet d'ajouter un nouveau certificat d'éditeur pour l'éditeur figurant dans le titre de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur. Dans la fenêtre Ajout de certificat d'éditeur, recherchez le fichier du certificat (<tt>.pem</tt>). Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> au bas de la fenêtre Ajout de certificat d'éditeur. Le certificat que vous venez d'ajouter est sélectionné dans la liste de certificats de l'onglet Certificats de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur. Le panneau Détails indique que ce certificat est \"marqué comme étant à ajouter\". Ce certificat sera ajouté une fois que vous aurez cliqué sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> dans la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "Dans la liste de certificats de cet éditeur, sélectionnez le certificat que vous souhaitez modifier ou dont vous voulez contrôler les détails. Les détails concernant le certificat sélectionné s'affichent sous la liste de certificats et la rangée de boutons correspondante. Notez qu'un certificat ayant expiré peut toujours être Approuvé et utilisé pour valider des packages signés qui ont été publiés (mais pas nécessairement installés) avant l'expiration du certificat."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur les titres de la liste de certificats pour modifier l'ordre de tri de la liste. Les colonnes Organisation et Nom peuvent être redimensionnées."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Supprimer</guibutton>. Permet de supprimer le certificat sélectionné dans la liste de certificats."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Révoquer</guibutton>. Si le certificat actuellement sélectionné dans la liste de certificats est Approuvé, cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Révoquer</guibutton> pour traiter ce certificat comme ayant été révoqué. Dans la liste de certificats, l'état de ce certificat passe à Révoqué. Cette modification sera appliquée au certificat une fois que vous aurez cliqué sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> dans la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Réactiver</guibutton>. Si le certificat actuellement sélectionné dans la liste de certificats est Révoqué, cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Réactiver</guibutton> pour traiter ce certificat comme ayant été approuvé. Le panneau Détails indique que ce certificat est \"marqué comme étant à réactiver\". Ce certificat sera réactivé une fois que vous aurez cliqué sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> dans la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "Gestion de la stratégie de signature"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur l'onglet Stratégie de signature de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "Utilisez les boutons de l'onglet Stratégie de signature pour définir la stratégie de signature à utiliser lorsque vous installez des packages de l'éditeur affiché dans le titre de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "Pour définir la stratégie de signature globale, utilisez l'onglet Stratégie de signature de la fenêtre Préférences (reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "Les signatures sont ignorées : les signatures sont ignorées pour tous les packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "Les signatures sont facultatives, mais celles fournies doivent être correctes : vérifie que tous les packages pourvus de signatures ont été correctement signés, mais n'exige pas que tous les packages installés soient signés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "Une ou plusieurs signatures correctes sont requises : exige que tous les packages nouvellement installés présentent au moins une signature correcte."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "Les signatures sont obligatoires et le nom du certificat doit contenir le ou les nom(s) spécifié(s) dans le champ de texte lors de la validation des signatures d'un package. Lorsque plusieurs noms sont spécifiés, ceux-ci doivent être séparés par des virgules."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "Suppression d'éditeurs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Pour supprimer un éditeur, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'éditeur que vous souhaitez supprimer."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Supprimer</guibutton> à droite de la liste d'éditeurs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Si l'éditeur sélectionné est un éditeur système, le bouton <guibutton>Supprimer</guibutton> est désactivé. Le panneau Détails signale que l'éditeur sélectionné est un éditeur système et un message indique que cet éditeur ne peut être ni modifié, ni supprimé."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Gestion des environnements d'initialisation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "Un environnement d'initialisation (BE) est une image amorçable. Vous pouvez gérer plusieurs environnements d'initialisation sur votre système Oracle Solaris. L'un des environnements d'initialisation est l'environnement par défaut au démarrage ou au redémarrage. D'autres environnements d'initialisation peuvent être sélectionnés au moment de l'initialisation. L'environnement actuellement amorcé est l'environnement d'initialisation actif."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez utiliser la commande <literal>beadm</literal>(1) pour créer, monter, démonter, activer ou détruire des environnements d'initialisation. Pour plus d'informations sur les environnements d'initialisation, reportez-vous à la section <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle> (Création et gestion des environnements d'initialisation après l'installation)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "Le Gestionnaire de packages fournit un sous-ensemble des fonctionnalités offertes par la commande <literal>beadm</literal>(1). Utilisez l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gérer les environnements d'initialisation</guimenuitem></menuchoice> du Gestionnaire de packages pour ouvrir la fenêtre Gestion des environnements d'initialisation. La fenêtre Gestion des environnements d'initialisation répertorie les environnements d'initialisation gérés sur le système et vous permet d'activer, de renommer et de supprimer ces environnements d'initialisation comme décrit ci-dessous."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "Création d'un environnement d'initialisation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Un nouvel environnement d'initialisation est automatiquement créé lorsque vous effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "Installation du SE Oracle Solaris."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "Installation ou mise à jour de packages système essentiels tels que certains pilotes ou d'autres composants du noyau."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "Utilisation de la commande <literal>beadm create</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Un nouvel environnement d'initialisation est fréquemment créé lorsque vous exécutez la commande <literal>pkg update</literal> ou lorsque vous utilisez le bouton <guibutton>Mises à jour</guibutton> pour mettre à jour tous les packages pour lesquels des mises à jour sont disponibles."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "Activation d'un environnement d'initialisation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gérer les environnements d'initialisation</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour ouvrir la fenêtre Gestion des environnements d'initialisation. Tous les environnements d'initialisation sont répertoriés dans la fenêtre. Une coche s'affiche en regard de l'environnement d'initialisation actuellement amorcé."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour amorcer un environnement d'initialisation différent de l'environnement d'initialisation actif par défaut après le prochain redémarrage, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Actif à la réinitialisation</guibutton> pour l'environnement d'initialisation que vous souhaitez utiliser comme environnement d'initialisation actif par défaut après le prochain redémarrage."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> dans la fenêtre Gestion des environnements d'initialisation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "Modification du nom d'un environnement d'initialisation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gérer les environnements d'initialisation</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour ouvrir la fenêtre Gestion des environnements d'initialisation. Tous les environnements d'initialisation sont répertoriés dans la fenêtre."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "Vous ne pouvez pas renommer l'environnement d'initialisation actif."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "Vous ne pouvez pas renommer un environnement d'initialisation marqué comme étant à supprimer."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour renommer un environnement d'initialisation, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "Double-cliquez sur le nom de l'environnement d'initialisation que vous souhaitez renommer. Le champ Nom devient modifiable."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "Entrez le nouveau nom."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "Suppression d'un environnement d'initialisation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Fichier</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gérer les environnements d'initialisation</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour ouvrir la fenêtre Gestion des environnements d'initialisation. Tous les environnements d'initialisation sont répertoriés dans la fenêtre. La colonne affichée complètement à droite dans la fenêtre est la colonne Supprimer."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "La colonne du milieu dans la fenêtre Gestion des environnements d'initialisation indique la taille des environnements d'initialisation. Pour libérer de l'espace sur votre périphérique de stockage, vous souhaiterez éventuellement supprimer un environnement d'initialisation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer l'environnement d'initialisation actuellement actif."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer un environnement d'initialisation que vous avez renommé."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour supprimer un environnement d'initialisation, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez la case <guibutton>Supprimer</guibutton> correspondant à l'environnement d'initialisation que vous souhaitez supprimer."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Utilisation de WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Le Gestionnaire de packages permet d'installer des packages à l'aide de WebInstall, un processus simple à clic unique. Le processus WebInstall utilise un fichier <filename>.p5i</filename>. Un fichier <filename>.p5i</filename> contient les informations nécessaires pour pouvoir ajouter des éditeurs et les packages à installer à partir de ces éditeurs. Le processus WebInstall lit et utilise les informations contenues dans le fichier <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "Exportation de fichiers à l'aide de WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "Si vous souhaitez que d'autres utilisateurs puissent installer des packages que vous avez installés sur votre système, vous pouvez exporter les instructions d'installation de ces fichiers de packages à l'aide du processus WebInstall. Un fichier <filename>.p5i</filename> contenant les instructions d'installation des packages et éditeurs à installer est créé."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Pour exporter les instructions d'installation des packages sélectionnés et des éditeurs correspondants dans un fichier <filename>.p5i</filename>, suivez la procédure ci-dessous :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Dans le menu déroulant <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu>, sélectionnez l'éditeur dont vous souhaitez inclure les packages dans le fichier <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "Dans le panneau de liste des packages, sélectionnez le package dont vous souhaitez diffuser les instructions d'installation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Fichier</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Exporter les sélections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour afficher la fenêtre Confirmation des sélections d'exportation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pour confirmer les sélections. La fenêtre Exporter les sélections s'affiche."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "Un nom par défaut portant l'extension <filename>.p5i</filename> est donné au fichier <filename>p5i</filename>. Vous pouvez modifier le nom du fichier, mais vous ne devez pas en modifier l'extension."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "Un emplacement par défaut est proposé pour le fichier <filename>.p5i</filename>. Vous pouvez modifier cet emplacement. A l'aide du bouton <guibutton>Parcourir</guibutton>, vous pouvez sélectionner l'option <filename>Fichiers p5i</filename> dans le menu déroulant accessible en bas à droite dans la fenêtre Exporter les sélections pour n'afficher que les fichiers <filename>.p5i</filename> dans la liste de fichiers."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Enregistrer</guibutton> pour enregistrer le nom et l'emplacement du fichier."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Utilisation de WebInstall pour l'ajout d'éditeurs et l'installation de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Le processus WebInstall vous permet d'installer des packages à partir d'un fichier <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "Recherchez le fichier <filename>.p5i</filename>. Ce fichier peut se trouver sur votre bureau ou sur un site Web."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "Procédez de l'une des manières suivantes pour démarrer le Gestionnaire de packages en mode WebInstall :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur un fichier <filename>.p5i</filename> sur le bureau. L'application associée (Programme d'installation Web du gestionnaire de package) démarre."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "Démarrez le Gestionnaire de packages à partir de la ligne de commande en spécifiant le chemin d'accès au fichier <filename>.p5i</filename>. Par exemple, entrez la commande suivante :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "Accédez à un URL contenant un lien vers le fichier <filename>.p5i</filename>. Le fichier <filename>.p5i</filename> doit résider sur un serveur Web dans lequel ce type MIME est enregistré."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "Si le fichier <filename>.p5i</filename> réside sur un serveur Web où ce type MIME n'est pas enregistré, enregistrez le fichier <filename>.p5i</filename> sur le bureau, puis cliquez dessus pour lancer WebInstall."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "La fenêtre Installer/Mettre à jour s'affiche. Le libellé suivant s'affiche tout en haut de la fenêtre : “Programme d'installation Web du gestionnaire de package/Les éléments suivants vont être ajoutés à votre système :”. La liste des éditeurs et des packages s'affiche au-dessous. Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Continuer</guibutton> pour poursuivre l'installation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "Si l'éditeur du package n'est pas encore configuré sur votre système, la fenêtre Ajouter un éditeur s'affiche. Le nom et l'URI de l'éditeur sont déjà indiqués."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "Si les éditeurs à ajouter sont sécurisés, une clé et un certificat SSL sont nécessaires. Spécifiez leur emplacement sur le système."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "La boîte de dialogue Ajout de l'éditeur terminé s'affiche si l'éditeur a été correctement ajouté. Cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pour poursuivre l'installation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "Si un fichier <filename>.p5i</filename> contient des packages issus d'un éditeur désactivé, WebInstall ouvre une boîte de dialogue Activer l'éditeur. Activez l'éditeur dans cette boîte de dialogue pour pouvoir installer les packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "La fenêtre Installer/Mettre à jour a maintenant le même aspect que lorsque vous sélectionnez <guibutton>Installer/Mettre à jour</guibutton> à partir du Gestionnaire de packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "Dépannage"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "Les messages d'erreur, d'avertissement et d'information sont enregistrés dans un journal où vous pouvez les consulter à tout moment."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "Affichage des journaux de messages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Vue</guimenu><guimenuitem>Journaux</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour ouvrir la fenêtre Journaux. La fenêtre Journaux affiche les messages d'erreur, d'avertissement et d'information du Gestionnaire de packages et du Gestionnaire de mises à jour."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez le bouton <guibutton>Effacer</guibutton> en bas de la fenêtre Journaux pour supprimer tous les messages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "Si une erreur ou un avertissement est enregistré, un triangle jaune s'affiche à gauche dans la barre d'état. Cliquez sur le triangle jaune pour afficher la fenêtre Journaux."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "Définition de préférences"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "Utilisez l'option de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Edition</guimenu><guimenuitem>Préférences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pour modifier certains paramètres de l'interface utilisateur du Gestionnaire de packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "La fenêtre Préférences comporte trois onglets :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "Dans l'onglet Généralités, vous pouvez définir vos préférences concernant la sortie du programme et les boîtes de dialogue de confirmation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "Dans l'onglet Composants facultatifs, vous pouvez indiquer vos préférences concernant les composants facultatifs à installer lors de l'installation ou de la mise à jour d'un package."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "L'onglet Stratégie de signature vous permet de définir la stratégie de signature pour cette image."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Quitter les préférences"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Edition</guimenu><guimenuitem>Préférences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> et sélectionnez l'onglet Généralités."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Si la case “Mémoriser l'état actuel en quittant” est cochée, le Gestionnaire de packages enregistre les paramètres suivants et les restaure au redémarrage suivant du Gestionnaire de packages :"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Séparateurs verticaux et horizontaux</emphasis> : largeur et hauteur des différents panneaux de la fenêtre"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Taille de la fenêtre</emphasis> : taille totale de la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Option d'éditeur</emphasis> : éditeur ou option sélectionné(e) dans le menu déroulant <guimenu>Editeur</guimenu> au moment de la fermeture du Gestionnaire de packages"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Catégories</emphasis> : catégorie sélectionnée et catégories développées et réduites pour chaque éditeur"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Préférences de la boîte de dialogue de confirmation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "Lorsqu'un package est installé, mis à jour ou supprimé, une boîte de dialogue de confirmation contenant la liste des packages et indiquant l'action à exécuter s'affiche. Si vous ne souhaitez pas voir ces boîtes de dialogue de confirmation, désélectionnez ces options dans la fenêtre Préférences."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "Vous pouvez aussi désactiver cette préférence en cochant la case “Ne plus afficher cette boîte de confirmation” dans une boîte de dialogue de confirmation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "Préférences de stratégie de signature"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Utilisez les boutons de l'onglet Stratégie de signature pour ignorer ou exiger des signatures lors de l'installation dans cette image. Pour définir la stratégie de signature applicable à un éditeur donné, sélectionnez l'éditeur concerné dans la fenêtre Organiser les éditeurs, cliquez sur le bouton <guibutton>Modifier</guibutton> et utilisez l'onglet Stratégie de signature de la fenêtre Modifier l'éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "Les choix disponibles pour la stratégie de signature des images sont les mêmes que pour la stratégie de signature des éditeurs, à la différence près que les paramètres s'appliquent à tous les packages installés dans l'image, et pas seulement aux packages installés à partir d'un éditeur donné. Reportez-vous à la section <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "Choix de langues pour les préférences de composants facultatifs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "Sélectionnez l'option <menuchoice><guimenu>Edition</guimenu><guimenuitem>Préférences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> et sélectionnez l'onglet Composants facultatifs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "Par défaut, Installer toutes les langues est sélectionné sous Choix de langues pour tous les packages. Vous pouvez réduire l'espace nécessaire pour l'installation en sélectionnant un sous-ensemble de langues à installer."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "Lorsque Installer ces langues seulement est sélectionné, vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône de case à cocher dans le titre de la colonne la plus à gauche pour sélectionner toutes les langues. Cliquez à nouveau sur le titre de la colonne pour désélectionner toutes les langues. Cliquez sur les titres des colonnes Langue et Territoire pour trier la liste."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour enregistrer les modifications. Ces paramètres s'appliquent aux packages actuellement installés ainsi qu'aux installations et mises à jour de packages effectuées par la suite. L'image est mise à jour et des composants facultatifs sont installés ou supprimés, en fonction des nouveaux paramètres."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "Si vous avez précédemment mis à jour l'image de manière à n'inclure qu'un sous-ensemble de langues, Installer ces langues seulement est la sélection par défaut dans cette fenêtre, et la liste de langues concernée est grisée lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Installer toutes les langues."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "Préférences d'autres composants facultatifs"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "Par défaut, Installer tous les fichiers de développement et Installer toute la documentation sont sélectionnés sous Choix d'autres composants. Vous pouvez réduire l'espace nécessaire pour l'installation en désélectionnant les fichiers de développement ou la documentation."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "Glossaire"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "Alias"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Autre nom donné à un éditeur."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "environnement d'initialisation (BE)"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "Instance d'un environnement Oracle Solaris d'amorçage. Le système de fichiers racine et tous les autres systèmes de fichiers de l'environnement d'initialisation contenant le logiciel système doivent être des jeux de données ZFS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "L'environnement d'initialisation actif est l'environnement actuellement amorcé. Un système peut gérer plusieurs environnements d'initialisation et vous pouvez sélectionner celui que vous souhaitez amorcer lors du prochain redémarrage."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "Clone"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Désigne une copie exacte."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Un clone peut être une copie exacte d'un système d'exploitation, d'un système de fichiers ou d'un volume.Cette copie est 100 % compatible avec l'original."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "Jeux de données"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Nom générique des entités ZFS suivantes : clones, systèmes de fichiers, instantanés ou volumes. Chaque jeu de données est identifié par un nom unique dans l'espace de noms ZFS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "Image"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "Ensemble de logiciels de système d'exploitation compris dans un package pouvant être initialisé et installé."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "Emplacement sur le système dans lequel les packages et les fichiers, répertoires, liens et dépendances qui leur sont associés peuvent être installés."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "Origine"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "Serveur de packages vers lequel un éditeur publie des packages."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "Package"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Collection de fichiers, de répertoires, de liens, de pilotes et de dépendances dans un format défini."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "Editeur"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "Personne, groupe ou organisation qui conçoit, crée et publie un package vers un serveur de packages. Le serveur de packages met ensuite à disposition les packages de l'éditeur (par défaut) pour téléchargement."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "éditeur système"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "Les éditeurs système sont des éditeurs spéciaux utilisés en particulier dans les images liées et les zones non globales pour garantir la synchronisation de certains packages avec la zone globale. La zone globale impose des contraintes aux packages des zones non globales en configurant ces éditeurs système spéciaux dans la zone non globale. Ces éditeurs sont spéciaux car les zones non globales ne peuvent leur apporter certaines modifications telles que les supprimer, les désactiver, les modifier ou modifier leur ordre de priorité."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "translator-credits"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/fr/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/hu/hu.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1484 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
- "Project-Id-Version: Package Manager\n"
- "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
- "POT-Creation-Date: 2009-12-21 11:15+0900\n"
- "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-12-21 11:15+0900\n"
- "Last-Translator: Zsolt Suri <[email protected]>\n"
- "Language-Team: Magyar Csapat <[email protected]>\n"
- "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
- "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
- "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:38(None) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:88(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:68(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:583(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:609(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:3(title)
-msgid "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Csomagkezelő Sugó"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:4(firstname)
-msgid "OpenSolaris"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:5(surname)
-msgid "Publications"
-msgstr "Publikációk"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:8(pubsnumber)
-msgid "822-7173"
-msgstr "822-7173"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:10(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2009"
-msgstr "June 2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:11(publishername)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:13(year)
-msgid "2009"
-msgstr "2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:33(title)
-msgid "About the Package Manager"
-msgstr "A Csomagkezelőről"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:34(para)
-msgid "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-msgstr "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:35(para)
-msgid "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-msgstr "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:36(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-msgstr "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Csomagkezelő"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:41(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "A Csomagkezelő lehetővé teszi a következő feladatok ellátását:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:42(para)
-msgid "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-msgstr "Csomagok telepítése, eltávolítása és keresése"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:44(para)
-msgid "Update your system"
-msgstr "Rendszer frissítse"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:46(para)
-msgid "Add and manage publishers"
-msgstr "Add and manage publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:48(para)
-msgid "Create, remove, and manage boot environments"
-msgstr "Boot environment-ek hozzáadása, eltávolítása és kezelése"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:51(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for a definition of the terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Tekintse meg a <xref linkend=\"szójegyzéket\"/> a dokumentumban használt fogalmak magyarázata céljából."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:53(title)
-msgid "About Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Az Image Packaging System-ről"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:54(para)
-msgid "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-msgstr "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:55(para)
-msgid "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-msgstr "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:56(para)
-msgid "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-msgstr "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:57(para)
-msgid "Once you have installed packages, IPS enables you to search, update, and manage packages on your system."
-msgstr "Miután már telepített csomagokat, az IPS lehetővé teszi csomagok keresését, frissítését és kezelését a rendszerén."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:58(para)
-msgid "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-msgstr "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:59(emphasis)
-msgid "The Package Manager provides a subset of the tasks that can be performed from the command-line."
-msgstr "A Csomagkezelő a parancssorban végrehajtható műveletek egy részéhez nyújt elérést. "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:61(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-msgstr "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:62(para)
-msgid "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-msgstr "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:63(para)
-msgid "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-msgstr "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:65(title)
-msgid "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-msgstr "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:66(para)
-msgid "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-msgstr "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:67(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Start Page"
-msgstr "Csomagkezelő Kezdő Oldal"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:71(para)
-msgid "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-msgstr "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:72(para)
-msgid "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:73(para)
-msgid "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:74(para)
-msgid "Select a package category"
-msgstr "Válasszon egy csomag kategóriát"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:76(para)
-msgid "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-msgstr "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:78(para)
-msgid "Perform a search"
-msgstr "Keresés indítása"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:80(para)
-msgid "Change the publisher"
-msgstr "Change the publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:83(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to return to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Válassza a <menuchoice><guimenu>Nézet</guimenu><guimenuitem>Kezdő Oldal</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice> a Kezdő Oldalhoz való visszatéréshez."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:84(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:86(title)
-msgid "About The Package Manager Window"
-msgstr "About The Package Manager Window"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:87(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main View"
-msgstr "Package Manager Main View"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:91(para)
-msgid "The main window of the Package Manager consists of the following elements :"
-msgstr "A Csomagkezelő fő ablaka a következő részekből áll:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:92(emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr "Menüsor"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:93(para)
-msgid "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:97(emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr "Eszköztár"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:98(para)
-msgid "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-msgstr "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:99(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:101(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:103(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:105(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:107(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:112(emphasis)
-msgid "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-msgstr "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:113(para)
-msgid "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-msgstr "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:114(emphasis)
-msgid "Select a publisher"
-msgstr "Select a publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:116(emphasis)
-msgid "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-msgstr "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:118(emphasis)
-msgid "Search for package across all publishers"
-msgstr "Search for package across all publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:120(emphasis)
-msgid "Add a publisher"
-msgstr "Add a publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:125(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr "Csomagok kategóriák szerinti listázása"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:126(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:127(emphasis)
-msgid "Applications"
-msgstr "Alkalmazások"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:129(emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop (GNOME)"
-msgstr "Asztali környezet (GNOME)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:131(emphasis)
-msgid "Development"
-msgstr "Fejlesztés"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:133(emphasis)
-msgid "Drivers"
-msgstr "Meghajtóprogramok"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:135(emphasis)
-msgid "System"
-msgstr "Rendszer"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:137(emphasis)
-msgid "Web Services"
-msgstr "Web Szolgáltatások"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:142(emphasis)
-msgid "Recent Searches"
-msgstr "Recent Searches"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:143(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-msgstr "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:146(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr "Csomagok állapot szerinti listázása"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:147(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:148(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:150(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:152(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:154(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:156(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that you have selected."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Kiválasztott Csomagok</emphasis> – Megjeleníti a kiválasztott csomagok listáját."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:161(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-msgstr "Csomag név, állapot és leírás"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:162(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-msgstr "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:163(para)
-msgid "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-msgstr "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:164(para)
-msgid "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-msgstr "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:166(para)
-msgid "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-msgstr "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:168(para)
-msgid "When a recent search result is displayed"
-msgstr "When a recent search result is displayed"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:173(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr "Csomag Részletek"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:174(para)
-msgid "Click a package name to select it. Details of the selected package, such as name, version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr "Kattintson a csomag nevére a kijelöléshez. A kiválasztott csomag részletei mint a neve, verziója, fájl függőségei és a licenc megjelenítésre kerülnek ebben az ablakban."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:180(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Settings"
-msgstr "Csomagkezelő Beállításai"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:181(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-msgstr "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:182(title)
-msgid "Start Page Preferences"
-msgstr "A Kezdő Oldal előnyei"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:183(para)
-msgid "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "A Kezdő Oldal a Csomagkezelő fő ablakában jelenik meg a program indítását követően. A Kezdő Oldal hivatkozást nyújt az <ulink url=\"http://"
- "opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> oldalra, ahol további információkat találhat az OpenSolaris-ról, feliratkozhat a hírlevelekre és csatlakozhat az OpenSolaris közösséghez."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:184(para)
-msgid "You can choose to turn off this setting so this page is not displayed when Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Akár ki is kapcsolhatja ezt a beállítást így nem kerül megjelenítésre az oldal a Csomagkezelő indításakor."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:185(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-msgstr "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:186(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:188(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Exit Preferences"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:189(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-msgstr "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:190(para)
-msgid "The following settings are saved:"
-msgstr "The following settings are saved:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:191(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:193(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:195(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:199(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:200(para)
-msgid "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-msgstr "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:203(title)
-msgid "Working With Packages"
-msgstr "Csomagok használata"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:204(title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr "Csomag telepítése"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:205(para)
-msgid "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:206(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:208(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:209(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:211(para)
-msgid "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-msgstr "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:213(para)
-msgid "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-msgstr "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:216(title)
-msgid "Installation Error"
-msgstr "Telepítési Hiba"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:217(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-msgstr "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:220(title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr "Csomag eltávolítása"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:221(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Egy csomag eltávolításához a következő lépéseket hajtsa végre:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:222(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:224(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:225(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:227(para)
-msgid "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:229(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:233(title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr "Csomag keresése"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:234(para)
-msgid "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-msgstr "A következőképpen kereshet csomagokat:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:235(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:236(para)
-msgid "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-msgstr "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:237(para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr "SUNWgames"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:239(para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr "játékok"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:241(para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr "GNOME-games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:244(para)
-msgid "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "SunStudio fordítók kereséséhez megadhatná a következő szavakat:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:245(para)
-msgid "compiler"
-msgstr "compiler"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:247(para)
-msgid "tools"
-msgstr "tools"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:251(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:252(para)
-msgid "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:253(para)
-msgid "python"
-msgstr "python"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:255(para)
-msgid "book"
-msgstr "book"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:258(para)
-msgid "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-msgstr "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:262(para)
-msgid "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:264(para)
-msgid "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-msgstr "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:265(emphasis)
-msgid "The AND operator"
-msgstr "The AND operator"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:266(para)
-msgid "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-msgstr "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:269(emphasis)
-msgid "Double Quotes"
-msgstr "Double Quotes"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:270(para)
-msgid "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-msgstr "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:273(emphasis)
-msgid "Wildcard *"
-msgstr "Wildcard *"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:274(para)
-msgid "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-msgstr "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:275(para)
-msgid "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-msgstr "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:279(emphasis)
-msgid "The OR operator"
-msgstr "A VAGY operátor"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:280(para)
-msgid "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-msgstr "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:285(title)
-msgid "Cancel Package Search"
-msgstr "Csomag keresés megszakítása"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:286(para)
-msgid "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-msgstr "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:288(title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr "Csomag frissítése"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:289(para)
-msgid "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-msgstr "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:290(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:292(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-msgstr "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:295(para)
-msgid "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-msgstr "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:297(para)
-msgid "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-msgstr "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:299(title)
-msgid "Package Version Information"
-msgstr "Package Version Information"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:300(para)
-msgid "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-msgstr "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:301(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:303(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:305(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:309(title)
-msgid "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-msgstr "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:310(para)
-msgid "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:311(para)
-msgid "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-msgstr "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:315(title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Bevezetés a Boot Environment-ekbe"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:316(para)
-msgid "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-msgstr "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:317(para)
-msgid "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-msgstr "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:318(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-msgstr "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:319(para)
-msgid "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-msgstr "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:320(para)
-msgid "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-msgstr "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:321(para)
-msgid "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-msgstr "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:322(title)
-msgid "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-msgstr "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:323(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:324(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:325(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:326(para)
-msgid "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-msgstr "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:329(para)
-msgid "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-msgstr "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:330(emphasis)
-msgid "Preparation"
-msgstr "Előkészítés"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:332(emphasis)
-msgid "Download"
-msgstr "Letöltés"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:334(emphasis)
-msgid "Install"
-msgstr "Telepítés"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:337(para)
-msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-msgstr "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:339(para)
-msgid "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-msgstr "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:340(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:343(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:344(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:345(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:350(title) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:656(title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr "Update All Errors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:351(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-msgstr "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:352(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:353(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:659(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:354(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:660(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:355(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:357(para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Válassza ki a törölni kívánt boot environment-eket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:358(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "A jelenlegi aktív boot environment nem törölhető."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:360(para)
-msgid "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-msgstr "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:365(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Kattintson az <guibutton>OK</guibutton> gombra."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:367(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:369(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:373(title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Boot Environment-ek kezelése"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:374(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:375(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:377(para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:378(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:380(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:381(para)
-msgid "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:383(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-msgstr "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:388(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:389(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:391(para)
-msgid "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:398(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:400(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:401(para)
-msgid "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-msgstr "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:403(para)
-msgid "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:405(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:407(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-msgstr "Indítsa újra a rendszert az újonnan aktivált boot environment betöltéséhez."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:408(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-msgstr "Indítsa újra a rendszert csak akkor, ha megváltoztatta az aktív boot environment-et."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:414(title)
-msgid "Add and Manage Publishers"
-msgstr "Add and Manage Publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:415(para)
-msgid "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-msgstr "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:416(para)
-msgid "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-msgstr "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:417(title)
-msgid "Add a Publisher"
-msgstr "Add a Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:418(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:419(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:420(para)
-msgid "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:422(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:424(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:426(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:428(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:431(para)
-msgid "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-msgstr "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:434(title)
-msgid "Remove a Publisher"
-msgstr "Remove a Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:435(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:436(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:459(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:473(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:492(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:511(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:528(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:438(para)
-msgid "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:440(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:442(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:446(title)
-msgid "Set Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Set Publisher Priority"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:447(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:448(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:450(para)
-msgid "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-msgstr "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:451(emphasis)
-msgid "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-msgstr "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:453(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:465(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:484(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:503(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:520(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:537(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:457(title)
-msgid "Modify Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Modify Publisher Alias"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:458(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:461(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:463(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:467(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:486(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:505(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:522(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:539(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:471(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Add Publisher Origins"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:472(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:475(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:477(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:496(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:515(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:532(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:478(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:479(para)
-msgid "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-msgstr "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:482(para)
-msgid "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:490(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Remove Publisher Origins"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:491(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:494(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:497(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:499(para)
-msgid "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:500(para)
-msgid "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-msgstr "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:509(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-msgstr "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:516(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:518(para)
-msgid "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:526(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:527(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:530(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-msgstr "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:533(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:535(para)
-msgid "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:544(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "WebTelepítő használata"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:545(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:546(title)
-msgid "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-msgstr "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:547(para)
-msgid "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-msgstr "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:548(para)
-msgid "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-msgstr "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:549(para)
-msgid "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:551(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-msgstr "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:553(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:555(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:557(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:559(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:561(para)
-msgid "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-msgstr "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:563(para)
-msgid "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-msgstr "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:567(title)
-msgid "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:568(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:569(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-msgstr "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:571(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-msgstr "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:572(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-msgstr "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:574(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-msgstr "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(command)
-msgid "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:577(para)
-msgid "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-msgstr "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:578(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-msgstr "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:582(para)
-msgid "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-msgstr "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:586(para)
-msgid "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "A WebInstall folyamat megerősítése vagy elvetése."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:587(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:589(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:590(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:592(para)
-msgid "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:594(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr "Kattintson az <guibutton>OK</guibutton> gombra a végrehajtáshoz."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:596(para)
-msgid "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:597(para)
-msgid "The application will close when all packages are installed."
-msgstr "Az alkalmazás bezáródik miután az összes csomag telepítése befejeződött."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:601(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-msgstr "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:602(para)
-msgid "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-msgstr "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:605(title)
-msgid "Working With the Update Manager"
-msgstr "A Frissítéskezelő használata"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:606(title)
-msgid "About The Update Manager"
-msgstr "A Frissítéskezelőről"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:607(para)
-msgid "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-msgstr "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:608(title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr "Frissítéskezelő fő ablaka"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:612(para)
-msgid "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-msgstr "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:613(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-msgstr "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:616(title)
-msgid "Using the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Frissítés Kezelő használata"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:617(para)
-msgid "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-msgstr "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:618(para)
-msgid "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:619(para)
-msgid "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-msgstr "Amikor szoftver frissítésről értesül, hajtsa végre a következő lépéseket a rendszer frissítésének elkezdéséhez:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:620(para)
-msgid "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:622(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:623(para)
-msgid "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:626(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:627(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:628(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:629(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:630(para)
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-msgstr "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:633(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:637(para)
-msgid "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-msgstr "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:638(para)
-msgid "Prepare"
-msgstr "Előkészítés"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:640(para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr "Letöltés."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:642(para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr "Telepítés."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:645(para)
-msgid "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-msgstr "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:646(para)
-msgid "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-msgstr "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:647(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:650(para)
-msgid "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr "Olvasd el a <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> mielőtt újraindítanád a rendszert."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:651(para)
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr "Újra kell indítania a rendszert a változások érvényesítéséhez."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:657(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-msgstr "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:658(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:661(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:663(para)
-msgid "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-msgstr "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:665(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:669(title)
-msgid "2010.03 Release Notes"
-msgstr "2010.03 Kiadási Megjegyzések"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:670(para)
-msgid "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-msgstr "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:674(title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr "Image Packaging System Szójegyzet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:675(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "Kiadó"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:676(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-msgstr "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:679(glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr "telepítési forrás"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:680(para)
-msgid "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-msgstr "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:683(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr "boot environment"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:684(para)
-msgid "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:685(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-msgstr "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:688(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "klón"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:689(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Egy pontos másolat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:690(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Egy klón pontos másolata lehet egy operációs rendszernek, egy fájlrendszernek vagy egy kötetnek. Ezen másolat 100 százalékosan kompatibilis az eredetivel."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:693(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "adathalmaz"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:694(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Általános neve a következő ZFS egységeknek:"
- "klón, fájl rendszer, pillanatkép vagy kötet. Minden egyes adathalmazt egyedi névvel azonosítunk a ZFS névtérben."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:697(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "image"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:698(para)
-msgid "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:699(para)
-msgid "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:702(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "csomag"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:703(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:706(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "eredeti"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:707(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-msgstr "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:710(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "alias"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:711(para)
-msgid "An alternate name for a publisher."
-msgstr "An alternate name for a publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:714(glossterm)
-msgid "mirror"
-msgstr "tükör"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:715(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-msgstr "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "translator-credits"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/hu/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/id/id.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1480 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
- "Project-Id-Version: Package Manager\n"
- "POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-14 11:47+0900\n"
- "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-01-14 11:47+0900\n"
- "Last-Translator: Indonesian l10n team <[email protected]>\n"
- "Language-Team: Indonesian <[email protected]>\n"
- "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
- "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
- "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:38(None) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:88(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:68(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:583(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-msgstr "@ @ image: 'angka / webinstall.png'; md5 = 79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:609(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-msgstr "@ @ image: 'angka / update_all_new.png'; md5 = 3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:3(title)
-msgid "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Pengelola Paket Bantuan Online"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:4(firstname)
-msgid "OpenSolaris"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:5(surname)
-msgid "Publications"
-msgstr "Publikasi"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:8(pubsnumber)
-msgid "822-7173"
-msgstr "822-7173"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:10(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2009"
-msgstr "Juni 2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:11(publishername)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:13(year)
-msgid "2009"
-msgstr "2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:33(title)
-msgid "About the Package Manager"
-msgstr "Tentang Pengelola Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:34(para)
-msgid "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-msgstr "Selamat datang di, OpenSolaris </trademark> 2010.03 bantuan online paket pengelola!"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:35(para)
-msgid "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-msgstr "Gunakan isi bantuan untuk mempelajari cara menggunakan Package Manager. Menavigasi melalui bantuan ini dengan mengklik topik-topik yang ditampilkan di sidebar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:36(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-msgstr "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Pengelola Paket Aplikasi ini merupakan antarmuka pengguna grafis untuk Image Packaging System (IPS) perangkat lunak. Pengelola Paket menyediakan subset dari fungsi yang ditawarkan oleh baris perintah (CLI) klien disediakan dengan IPS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Paket Pengelola"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:41(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Pengelola Paket memungkinkan anda untuk melakukan hal - hal sebagai berikut :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:42(para)
-msgid "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-msgstr "Install, Menghapus, dan pencarian paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:44(para)
-msgid "Update your system"
-msgstr "Memperbarui sistem anda"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:46(para)
-msgid "Add and manage publishers"
-msgstr "Tambah dan mengelola penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:48(para)
-msgid "Create, remove, and manage boot environments"
-msgstr "Membuat, menghapus dan mengatur 'Boot Environment'"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:51(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for a definition of the terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Untuk keterangan istilah yang digunakan dalam dokumen ini, lihat <xref linked=\"glosary\">."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:53(title)
-msgid "About Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Tentang Image Packaging System"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:54(para)
-msgid "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-msgstr "Image Packaging System (IPS) adalah suatu kerangka kerja yang menyediakan perangkat lunak manajemen siklus hidup termasuk instalasi, upgrade, dan penghapusan. OpenSolaris rilis 2.010.03 yang menggunakan IPS sebagai packaging sistem."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:55(para)
-msgid "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-msgstr "Setelah instalasi awal dari sistem operasi OpenSolaris 2010.03, Anda akan menemukan bahwa beberapa aplikasi perangkat lunak yang Anda gunakan secara teratur tidak segera tersedia untuk Anda. Aplikasi perangkat lunak ini tersedia sebagai paket di repositori untuk men-download dan menginstal melalui jaringan. Sebuah repositori adalah sumber paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:56(para)
-msgid "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-msgstr "IPS menyediakan satu set perangkat lunak yang dapat digunakan untuk menginstal paket-paket dari repositori, membuat dan mempublikasikan paket IPS mereka sendiri, mirror repositori yang sudah ada, dan mempublikasikan paket yang ada ke repositori."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:57(para)
-msgid "Once you have installed packages, IPS enables you to search, update, and manage packages on your system."
-msgstr "Setelah Anda menginstal paket, IPS memungkinkan Anda untuk mencari, memperbarui, dan mengelola paket pada sistem anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:58(para)
-msgid "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-msgstr "Dengan IPS, Anda dapat meng-upgrade sistem anda untuk membangun yang lebih baru dari OpenSolaris, menginstal dan memutakhirkan perangkat lunak Anda ke versi terbaru yang tersedia dalam repositori, dan mengambil paket dari mirror repositori."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:59(emphasis)
-msgid "The Package Manager provides a subset of the tasks that can be performed from the command-line."
-msgstr "Pengelola Paket menyediakan subset dari tugas-tugas yang dapat dilakukan dari baris perintah."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:61(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-msgstr "Untuk OpenSolaris rilis 2010.03, jika sistem yang terinstal adalah IPS pada jaringan, IPS dapat secara otomatis mengambil paket yang disediakan oleh penerbit OpenSolaris dari repositori paket terletak di <ulink url = \"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:62(para)
-msgid "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-msgstr "Untuk informasi lebih IPS dokumentasi, lihat di <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:63(para)
-msgid "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-msgstr "Untuk informasi lebih lanjut tentang IPS, kunjungi <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">Halaman Proyek</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:65(title)
-msgid "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-msgstr "Persiapan dengan Pengelola Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:66(para)
-msgid "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-msgstr "Ketika Anda memulai Pengelola Paket, Halaman Awal serupa dengan contoh yang ditampilkan di bawah ini:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:67(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Start Page"
-msgstr "Halaman Awal Pengelola Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:71(para)
-msgid "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-msgstr "Halaman Awal menyediakan fitur daftar paket yang dapat diinstal. Ini mencakup daftar dari beberapa yang paling populer dan paket terbaru download oleh komunitas pengguna OpenSolaris. Fitur daftar yang menunjuk ke paket perangkat lunak aplikasi yang sering di-download oleh pengguna OpenSolaris. Klik link paket untuk menginstal paket-paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:72(para)
-msgid "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "Halaman Awal juga menyediakan link untuk informasi lebih lanjut tentang proyek OpenSolaris, berlangganan newsletter dan bergabung dengan komunitas OpenSolaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:73(para)
-msgid "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Untuk menutup Halaman Awal dan melihat daftar paket-paket yang dipilih penerbit, melakukan salah satu tindakan berikut dalam jendela utama Pengelola Paket:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:74(para)
-msgid "Select a package category"
-msgstr "Pilih kategori paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:76(para)
-msgid "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-msgstr "Mengubah <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:78(para)
-msgid "Perform a search"
-msgstr "Melakukan pencarian"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:80(para)
-msgid "Change the publisher"
-msgstr "Mengubah penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:83(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to return to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Memilih <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Halaman Awal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> untuk kembali ke Halaman Awal kapan saja."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:84(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Lihat <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> untuk menonaktifkan tampilan awal <emphasis role=\"strong\"> </emphasis> dari halaman awal saat Package Manager dimulai."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:86(title)
-msgid "About The Package Manager Window"
-msgstr "Tentang jendela Pengelola paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:87(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main View"
-msgstr "Tinjauan Utama Pengelola Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:91(para)
-msgid "The main window of the Package Manager consists of the following elements :"
-msgstr "Jendela utama Pengelola Paket terdiri dari unsur-unsur berikut:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:92(emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr "Menubar"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:93(para)
-msgid "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr "The menu berisi menu dan sub-menu yang diperlukan untuk menjalankan semua perintah yang berkaitan dengan Pengelola paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:97(emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr "Toolbar"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:98(para)
-msgid "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-msgstr "Toolbar berisi ikon untuk subset dari perintah-perintah yang dapat dilakukan dengan menggunakan menu di menubar. Sebuah <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Search </emphasis> field juga terletak pada toolbar. Anda dapat melakukan tindakan berikut ini dari toolbar:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:99(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\"> Pembaruan </emphasis> - Klik <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Pembaruan </emphasis> untuk memeriksa dan menginstal update terbaru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:101(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Pilih paket dan klik <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> untuk menginstall atau perbarui paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:103(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Klik <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> untuk mengisi daftar paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:105(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\"> Hapus </emphasis> - Pilih sebuah paket dan klik <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Hapus </emphasis> untuk menghapus sebuah paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:107(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">pencarian Paket </emphasis> - Ketik nama atau deskripsi suatu paket dalam <emphasis role=\"strong\"> mencari </ penekanan> laman untuk mencari sebuah paket . Lihat bagian untuk <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> contoh tentang bagaimana untuk mencari sebuah paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:112(emphasis)
-msgid "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-msgstr "Menu Drop-Down Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:113(para)
-msgid "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-msgstr "Daftar penerbit yang tersedia ditampilkan dalam <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Penerbit </emphasis> drop-down. Pengguna dapat melakukan tugas-tugas berikut dari penerbit menu drop-down:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:114(emphasis)
-msgid "Select a publisher"
-msgstr "Pilih Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:116(emphasis)
-msgid "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-msgstr "Melihat daftar paket yang diinstal dari semua penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:118(emphasis)
-msgid "Search for package across all publishers"
-msgstr "Pencarian untuk paket di semua penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:120(emphasis)
-msgid "Add a publisher"
-msgstr "Menambahkan penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:125(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr "Daftar paket berdasarkan kategori"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:126(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Anda dapat menelusuri paket yang tersedia menurut kategori di sisi kiri panel. Klik pada kategori untuk melihat sub-kategori dari paket yang tersedia. Ada enam kategori utama yang ditampilkan dalam Pengelola Paket:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:127(emphasis)
-msgid "Applications"
-msgstr "Aplikasi"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:129(emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop (GNOME)"
-msgstr "Desktop (GNOME)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:131(emphasis)
-msgid "Development"
-msgstr "Pengembangan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:133(emphasis)
-msgid "Drivers"
-msgstr "Driver"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:135(emphasis)
-msgid "System"
-msgstr "Sistem"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:137(emphasis)
-msgid "Web Services"
-msgstr "Web Servis"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:142(emphasis)
-msgid "Recent Searches"
-msgstr "Pencarian Terakhir"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:143(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-msgstr "Pengelola Paket ini akan menyimpan pencarian paket terakhir Anda. Pencarian Terakhir Klik di sisi kiri panel untuk melihat paket-paket yang anda cari baru-baru ini."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:146(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr "Daftar paket berdasarkan status"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:147(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Lihat</emphasis> drop-down menu memungkinkan Anda untuk melihat status paket dengan pilihan berikut:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:148(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Semua Paket</emphasis> – Menampilkan daftar semua paket yang tersedia dalam penerbit saat ini."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:150(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Paket Terinstal</emphasis> – Menampilkan daftar paket-paket yang diinstal di dalam penerbit saat ini pada sistem Anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:152(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Pembaruan</emphasis> — Menampilkan daftar paket yang memiliki versi yang lebih baru yang tersedia dalam penerbit saat ini."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:154(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Paket Tidak Terinstal</emphasis> – Menampilkan daftar paket yang tidak diinstal, tetapi tersedia di penerbit yang sedang dipilih."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:156(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that you have selected."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Paket Dipilih</emphasis> – Menampilkan daftar paket yang Anda pilih."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:161(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-msgstr "Nama Paket, Status, dan Deskripsi"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:162(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-msgstr "Daftar paket dalam kategori yang dipilih, penjelasan singkat, dan status akan ditampilkan di sini."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:163(para)
-msgid "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-msgstr "Nama Penerbit juga ditampilkan di sini dalam contoh berikut:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:164(para)
-msgid "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-msgstr "Ketika <emphasis role=\"strong\">Penerbit</emphasis> drop-down menu diset ke Semua Penerbit (Terinstal)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:166(para)
-msgid "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-msgstr "Bila hasil pencarian ditampilkan untuk opsi Semua Penerbit (Pencarian)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:168(para)
-msgid "When a recent search result is displayed"
-msgstr "Ketika baru-baru ini hasil pencarian ditampilkan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:173(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr "Keterangan lengkap paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:174(para)
-msgid "Click a package name to select it. Details of the selected package, such as name, version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr "Klik pada sebuah paket untuk memilihnya. Keterangan lengkap dari paket yang telah dipilih seperti nama, versi, file yang harus didapatkan terlebih dahulu dan lisensi ditampilkan pada layar ini."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:180(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Settings"
-msgstr "Pengaturan Pengelola Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:181(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-msgstr "Gunakan <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferensi</guimenuitem></menuchoice> untuk mengubah pengaturan Pengelola Paket. Bagian berikut membahas preferensi yang dapat diubah oleh pengguna."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:182(title)
-msgid "Start Page Preferences"
-msgstr "Memulai Pengelolaan Halaman"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:183(para)
-msgid "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "Sebuah Halaman Awal ditampilkan dalam jendela utama Pengelola Paket pada saat aplikasi diaktifkan. Halaman Awal menyediakan link ke halaman<ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> di mana Anda bisa mendapatkan informasi lebih lanjut mengenai OpenSolaris, berlangganan newsletter dan bergabung dengan komunitas OpenSolaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:184(para)
-msgid "You can choose to turn off this setting so this page is not displayed when Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Anda bisa memilih untuk menonaktifkan pengaturan ini sehingga halaman ini tidak akan tampil ketika memulai aplikasi Package Manager."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:185(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-msgstr "Pilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferensi</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pada menu utama dan hilangkan tanda centang <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tampilkan Halaman Awal pada Startup</emphasis> untuk menonaktifkan Halaman Awal. Dialog ini dicek secara default."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:186(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Pilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Lihat</guimenu><guimenuitem>Halaman Awal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dari menu utama untuk pergi ke Halaman Awal kapan saja."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:188(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Keluar Preferensi"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:189(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-msgstr "Pengelola Paket dapat mengingat beberapa pengaturan saat ini jika pilihan<emphasis role=\"strong\">Ingat kondisi ini ketika keluar</emphasis> pada <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferensi</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dicentang."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:190(para)
-msgid "The following settings are saved:"
-msgstr "Pengaturan berikut telah disimpan:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:191(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Pemisah Vertikal</emphasis> – Ukuran kolom pada jendela utama Pengelola Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:193(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Ukuran Jendela</emphasis> – Ukuran dari jendela Pengelola Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:195(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Penerbit saat ini</emphasis> – Penerbit yang dipilih ketika Pengelola Paket ditutup."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:199(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferensi Dialog Konfirmasi"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:200(para)
-msgid "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-msgstr "Ketika sebuah paket yang dipilih untuk instalasi, pembaruan, atau penghapusan, sebuah dialog konfirmasi akan ditampilkan yang menampilkan daftar paket dan tindakan yang akan dilakukan. Di bawah <emphasis role=\"strong\">Lihat Dialog Konfirmasi</emphasis> Hilangkan tanda centang <emphasis role=\"strong\">pada Pembaruan</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">pada Paket Install/Pembaruan</emphasis>, dan <emphasis role=\"strong\">pada Hapus Paket</emphasis> untuk menonaktifkan pengaturan ini."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:203(title)
-msgid "Working With Packages"
-msgstr "Bekerja dengan paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:204(title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr "Menginstall sebuah paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:205(para)
-msgid "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr "Daftar paket dan status akan ditampilkan dalam jendela utama Pengelola Paket. Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk menginstal sebuah paket:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:206(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Centang kotak di sebelah paket untuk memilihnya. Klik ganda paket juga bisa dilakukan memilih paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:208(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Instal/Pembaruan</guibutton> untuk memulai proses instalasi."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:209(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Anda juga dapat memilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Instal/Pembaruan</guimenuitem></menuchoice> untuk memulai proses instalasi."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:211(para)
-msgid "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-msgstr "Klik <guilabel>Rincian</guilabel> untuk melihat rincian instalasi atau <guibutton>Batal</guibutton> untuk membatalkan instalasi paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:213(para)
-msgid "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Setelah instalasi selesai, Klik <guibutton>Tutup</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:216(title)
-msgid "Installation Error"
-msgstr "Terjadi Kesalahan Instalasi"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:217(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-msgstr "Jika kesalahan terjadi saat instalasi paket, ada dialog kesalahan yang menampilkan alasan kegagalan. Klik<guibutton>Tutup</guibutton> untup menutup dialog kesalahan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:220(title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr "Hapus sebuah Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:221(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah berikut untuk membuang sebuah paket:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:222(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Centang kotak di sebelah paket untuk memilihnya. Klik ganda paket juga bisa dilakukan memilih paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:224(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Hapus</guibutton> untuk memulai proses uninstall."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:225(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr "Anda juga dapat memilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guimenuitem>Hapus</guimenuitem></menuchoice> untuk menghapus paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:227(para)
-msgid "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Tinjau ulang paket-paket yang akan dihapus dan detail dependensi paket pada dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hapus Confirmation</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:229(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Lanjut</guibutton> untuk memulai menghapus paket atau <guibutton>Batal</guibutton> untuk membatalkan proses."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:233(title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr "Pencarian untuk sebuah paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:234(para)
-msgid "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-msgstr "Anda bisa mencari paket dengan cara berikut ini:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:235(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Cari penerbit saat ini</emphasis> – Mencari paket penerbit saat ini dipilih pada drop-down menu <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Penerbit</emphasis>. Jika Anda tidak mengetahui status dari paket yang Anda cari, atur <emphasis role=\"strong\">Lihat</emphasis> drop-down menu ke <emphasis role=\"strong\">Semua Paket</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:236(para)
-msgid "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-msgstr "Masukkan deskripsi, atau nama parsial pada field <emphasis role=\"strong\">Cari</emphasis>. Sebagai contoh, anda mungkin menuliskan pada pencarian untuk mencari <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:237(para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr "SUNWgames"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:239(para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr "permainan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:241(para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr "GNOME-games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:244(para)
-msgid "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Untuk mencari SunStudio kompiler, Anda mungkin menuliskan sebagai berikut:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:245(para)
-msgid "compiler"
-msgstr "kompiler"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:247(para)
-msgid "tools"
-msgstr "tools"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:251(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Mencari semua penerbit</emphasis> – Pilih <emphasis role=\"strong\">Semua Penerbit(Cari)</emphasis> dari <emphasis role=\"strong\">Penerbit</emphasis> drop-down menu ke pencarian paket untuk semua konfigurasi penerbit. Jika Anda tidak mengetahui status dari paket yang Anda cari, atur <emphasis role=\"strong\">Lihat</emphasis> drop-down menu ke <emphasis role=\"strong\">semua Paket</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:252(para)
-msgid "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Tuliskan deskripsi paket pada field<emphasis role=\"strong\">Cari</emphasis> . Sebagai contoh, paket <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> adalah buku pada Pemrograman Python. Deskripsi paket mengandung string <emphasis>buku</emphasis>. Untuk mencari paket ini, anda bisa menuliskan sebagai berikut:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:253(para)
-msgid "python"
-msgstr "phyton"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:255(para)
-msgid "book"
-msgstr "buku"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:258(para)
-msgid "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-msgstr "Jika Anda mencari <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> ketika sedang mencari paket <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename>, hasilnya tidak akan ditampilkan sebagai <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> tidak ditampilkan secara independen, kata lengkap dengan konten paket. Bagaimanapun, anda akan menemukan paket menggunakan wildcard<literal>*</literal> . Pencarian <literal>diveinto*</literal> akan menampilkan paket <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:262(para)
-msgid "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Gunakan submenu di bawah menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Ubah</guimenu></menuchoice> untuk cut, copy, atau paste teks pada field <emphasis role=\"strong\">Cari</emphasis> ."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:264(para)
-msgid "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-msgstr "Operator berikut didukung untuk pencarian sebuah paket:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:265(emphasis)
-msgid "The AND operator"
-msgstr "Operator AND"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:266(para)
-msgid "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-msgstr "Ketika pencarian dipisahkan dengan spasi atau operator AND, the Paket Manager akan mencari paket yang berisi <emphasis role=\"strong\">semua</emphasis> pencarian."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:269(emphasis)
-msgid "Double Quotes"
-msgstr "Tanda Petik Ganda"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:270(para)
-msgid "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-msgstr "Ketika pencarian dilakukan dengan menggunakan tanda kutip ganda, Pengelola Paket akan mencari paket-paket yang <emphasis role=\"strong\">persis cocok dengan pencarian</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:273(emphasis)
-msgid "Wildcard *"
-msgstr "Wildcard *"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:274(para)
-msgid "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-msgstr "Termasuk wildcard pada istilah pencarian Anda memungkinkan Anda untuk mencari nama-nama paket yang parsial. Sebagai contoh, ketika Anda memasukkan <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> pada pencarian Anda, paket yang ditampilkan dapat termasuk <emphasis>boot</emphasis> dan <emphasis>book</emphasis> pada nama paket dan deskripsi."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:275(para)
-msgid "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-msgstr "Wildcard mencari lebih lambat daripada pencocokan yang sama persis atau pencarian berdasarkan deskripsi paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:279(emphasis)
-msgid "The OR operator"
-msgstr "Operator OR"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:280(para)
-msgid "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-msgstr "Ketika istilah pencarian dipisahkan oleh operator OR, Pengelola Paket mencari paket yang mengandung salah satu dari pencarian."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:285(title)
-msgid "Cancel Package Search"
-msgstr "Batalkan Pencarian Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:286(para)
-msgid "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-msgstr "Jika Anda ingin membatalkan pencarian, gunakan ikon Batalkan Pencarian di bagian bawah jendela utama Pengelola Paket. Ikon ini terlihat pada status bar hanya selama operasi pencarian."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:288(title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr "Perbarui sebuah Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:289(para)
-msgid "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-msgstr "Lihat ikon Pembaruan untuk nama paket yang terinstal. Ikon ini menunjukkan bahwa pembaruan tersedia untuk paket di penerbit yang sedang dipilih. Anda juga dapat memilih untuk menampilkan daftar paket yang memiliki update yang tersedia:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:290(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "Pilih opsi<menuchoice><guimenuitem>Perbarui</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pada drop-down menu<emphasis role=\"strong\">Lihat</emphasis> untuk menampilkan daftar semua paket yang memiliki update yang tersedia di penerbit yang sedang dipilih."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:292(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-msgstr "Pilih opsi<menuchoice><guimenuitem>Perbarui</guimenuitem></menuchoice> pada drop-down menu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Lihat</emphasis> dan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Semua Penerbit (Terinstall)</emphasis> pada drop-down menu <emphasis role=\"strong\">Penerbit</emphasis> untuk menampilkan daftar semua paket yang memiliki update yang tersedia dari semua penerbit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:295(para)
-msgid "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-msgstr "Memperbarui sebuah paket mungkin mengakibatkan kegagalan, karena tergantung pada dependensi paket yang telah Anda pilih untuk instalasi atau pembaruan. Anda mungkin perlu memperbarui semua paket pada sistem anda untuk mendapatkan pembaruan terbaru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:297(para)
-msgid "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-msgstr "Pilih paket yang ingin Anda perbarui dan klik <guibutton>Install/Perbarui</guibutton> untuk menginstall versi terakhir dari paket. Gunakan ikon <emphasis role=\"strong\">Perbarui</emphasis> pada toolbar untuk memperbarui semua paket pada sistem Anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:299(title)
-msgid "Package Version Information"
-msgstr "Informasi Versi Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:300(para)
-msgid "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-msgstr "Pilih sebuah paket di jendela utama Pengelola Paket dan klik kanan mouse anda untuk melihat versi paket informasi. Ada tiga jenis paket versi:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:301(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Versi Installable</emphasis> – Versi dari paket yang tersedia untuk instalasi atau pembaruan. Versi ini mungkin lebih lama dari versi terbaru karena dependensi paket pada sistem. Maka Anda mungkin tidak dapat menginstal versi terbaru dari paket kecuali jika Anda memperbarui sistem anda dengan menggunakan ikon <emphasis role=\"strong\">Perbarui</emphasis> pada toolbar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:303(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Versi Terinstall</emphasis> – Versi dari paket yang terintall pada sistem."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:305(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Versi Terakhir</emphasis> – Ini adalah versi terakhir dari paket yang tersedia untuk instalasi atau pembaruan. Versi Terakhir dapat diinstall jika sistem Anda up-to-date."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:309(title)
-msgid "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-msgstr "Perlihatkan Semua Paket Dari Semua Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:310(para)
-msgid "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "Pilih <emphasis role=\"strong\">Semua Penerbit (Terinstall)</emphasis> dari filter drop-down menu<emphasis role=\"strong\">Penerbit</emphasis> untuk melihat daftar semua paket yang telah Anda install dari semua penerbit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:311(para)
-msgid "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-msgstr "Anda tidak dapat mencari paket dari opsi<emphasis role=\"strong\">Semua Penerbit (Terinstall)</emphasis>. Beralih ke <emphasis role=\"strong\">Semua Penerbit (Cari)</emphasis> untuk mencari paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:315(title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Pengenalan Boot Environment"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:316(para)
-msgid "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-msgstr "Boot environment adalah image yang bootable. Setelah awal instalasi OpenSolaris, sebuah boot environment dibuat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:317(para)
-msgid "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-msgstr "Anda dapat mengelola beberapa Boot Environment pada sistem OpenSolaris 2010.03. Gunakan perintah <command>beadm(1)</command> pada command-line interface (CLI) untuk membuat, memberi nama baru, mount atau unmount, atau menghapus boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:318(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-msgstr "Pengelola Paket memungkinkan Anda untuk mengelola boot environments dibuat selama proses pembaruan image Anda. Untuk keterangan lebih lanjut, lihat bagian <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:319(para)
-msgid "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-msgstr "Pengguna dapat mengatur beberapa boot environment pada sistem mereka, dan masing-masing boot environment bisa memiliki versi software terinstall yang berbeda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:320(para)
-msgid "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-msgstr "Bila Anda menggunakan baik Pengelola Paket atau perintah <command>pkg image-update</command> untuk memperbarui semua paket pada boot environment OpenSolaris Anda yang aktif, sebuah klon dari boot environment tersebut dibuat secara otomatis. Paket-paket yang akan diperbarui di klon bukan di boot environment yang asli. Setelah berhasil menyelesaikan pembaruan, kloning baru diaktifkan. Kemudian, klon akan menjadi boot environment default yang baru pada sistem reboot. Boot environment yang asli juga tersedia sebagai pilihan alternatif."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:321(para)
-msgid "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-msgstr "Lihat halaman beadm(1) man dan <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Memperbarui dan Mengelola Boot Environment</citetitle></ulink> untuk mempelajari tentang boot environment dan perintah <command>beadm(1)</command>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:322(title)
-msgid "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-msgstr "Perbarui Semua Paket (Perbarui Image Anda)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:323(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk memperbarui semua paket pada image Anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:324(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Perbarui</guibutton> untuk memulai proses pembaruan\<emphasis role=\"strong\">semua</emphasis> paket-paket yang terinstal pada image Anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:325(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr "Anda juga dapat memilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guisubmenu>Perbarui</guisubmenu></menuchoice> untuk memulai proses."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:326(para)
-msgid "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Jika tidak ada pembaruan yang tersedia untuk paket-paket yang terinstall, sebuah pesan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tidak ada Pembaruan yang tersedia</emphasis> ditampilkan setelah Anda klik <guibutton>Perbarui</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:329(para)
-msgid "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-msgstr "Proses memperbarui semua paket yang terinstal di sistem anda selesai dalam tiga fase:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:330(emphasis)
-msgid "Preparation"
-msgstr "Persiapan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:332(emphasis)
-msgid "Download"
-msgstr "Unduh"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:334(emphasis)
-msgid "Install"
-msgstr "Instal"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:337(para)
-msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-msgstr "Klik pada tab <emphasis>Rincian</emphasis> ditampilkan di setiap fase untuk melihat informasi lebih lanjut."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:339(para)
-msgid "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-msgstr "Setelah proses update berhasil dilakukan, Dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Semua Update Selesai</emphasis> ditampilkan. Sebuah boot environment dibuat yang berisi semua update dari paket yang diperbarui. Boot environment yang baru diberi nama default oleh Pengelola Paket, Anda dapat merubah nama boot environment yang diberikan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:340(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "Jika Pengelola Paket tidak dapat menciptakan boot environment baru, pesan kesalahan ditampilkan. <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> Lihat bagian yang menjelaskan tentang bagaimana memperbaiki kesalahan dan melanjutkan dengan memperbarui image Anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:343(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton> Start ulang sekarang </ guibutton> untuk reboot sistem anda segera."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:344(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton> Start ulang kemudian</guibutton> untuk start ulang sistem Anda di lain waktu. <emphasis role=\"strong\">Anda harus me-reboot sistem anda agar perubahan diterapkan.</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:345(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "Selama Perbarui Semua proses, klon dari boot environment aktif dibuat. Anda dapat boot ke clone untuk kembali ke keadaan boot environment yang sudah ada sebelum Update Semua proses ini dimulai."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:350(title) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:656(title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr "Perbarui Semua Kesalahan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:351(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-msgstr "Sebuah klon boot environment yang baru harus diciptakan oleh Paengelola Paket untuk menyelesaikan proses Pembaruan. Pesan kesalahan ditampilkan jika klon boot environment tidak dapat diciptakan. Anda mungkin akan melihat pesan kesalahan seperti berikut:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:352(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal> Tidak cukup ruang disk, Perbarui Semua tidak dapat dilakukan. Pilih Pengelola BE untuk mengelola boot environment anda dan membebaskan ruang disk. </ Literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:353(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:659(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton> Tutup </ guibutton> untuk membatalkan Perbarui Semua proses."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:354(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:660(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut jika Anda ingin memperbaiki kesalahan dan melanjutkan dengan Perbarui Semua proses:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:355(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klik Pengelola <guibutton> BE </ guibutton> untuk menampilkan <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Pengelola Boot Environment </ penekanan> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:357(para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Pilih boot environment yang ingin Anda hapus."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:358(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "Anda tidak dapat menghapus boot environment yang sedang aktif."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:360(para)
-msgid "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-msgstr "Anda tidak perlu reboot sistem jika Anda hanya menghapus sebagian dari boot environments Anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:365(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton> OK </ guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:367(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Konfirmasi Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan. Tinjau perubahan Anda dan klik OK untuk melanjutkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:369(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton> Perbarui Semua </ guibutton> untuk memulai kembali proses pembaruan semua paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:373(title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Pengelola Boot Environment"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:374(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk mengelola boot environment Anda:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:375(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klik <menuchoice><guimenu>Berkas</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pengelola Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> untuk membuka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:377(para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr "Dalam dialog ini, Anda dapat melakukan tindakan berikut:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:378(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktifkan boot environment</emphasis> – Pilih boot environment yang Anda ingin menjadi aktif pada sistem reboot. Ini adalah boot environment default <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> Anda harus reboot sistem anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:380(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Hapus boot environment yang lama atau tidak terpakai untuk membebaskan ruang disk</emphasis> – Pilih boot environnment yang ingin Anda hapus."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:381(para)
-msgid "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "Anda tidak dapat menghapus boot environment yang sedang aktif."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:383(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-msgstr "Jika Anda telah memilih boot environment untuk berganti nama, maka tidak dapat dihapus."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:388(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Beri nama boot environment</emphasis> – Double-klik pada nama boot environment yang Anda inginkan untuk diganti namanya.Masukkan nama yang baru dari boot environment dan klik <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:389(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "Jika Anda telah memilih boot environment untuk dihapus, maka tidak dapat diganti nama."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:391(para)
-msgid "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "Boot environment yang sedang aktif tidak bisa diganti nama."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:398(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>OK</guibutton> untuk melanjutkan atau<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> untuk membatalkan semua perubahan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:400(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Konfirmasi Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan. Tinjau perubahan Anda dan klik OK untuk melanjutkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:401(para)
-msgid "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-msgstr "Setelah Anda mengklik <guibutton>OK</ guibutton>, Anda tidak dapat membatalkan perubahan apapun yang Anda lakukan terhadap boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:403(para)
-msgid "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr "Perubahan yang Anda lakukan terhadap <emphasis role=\"strong\">boot environment default </emphasis> Pengaturan efektif hanya setelah sistem reboot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:405(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Batal</guibutton>untuk membatalkan perubahan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:407(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-msgstr "Reboot sistem anda untuk mengaktifkan environment boot yang baru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:408(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-msgstr "Reboot sistem anda hanya jika Anda mengubah boot environment aktif."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:414(title)
-msgid "Add and Manage Publishers"
-msgstr "Tambah dan Kelola Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:415(para)
-msgid "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>Berkas</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pengelola Penerbit</guimenuitem></menuchoice> Dialog memungkinkan pengguna untuk menambahkan dan mengelola konfigurasi penerbit. Sebuah penerbit adalah orang, kelompok, atau perusahaan yang mendesain, menciptakan, dan menerbitkan sebuah paket ke sebuah repositori. Setiap penerbit memiliki repositori paket dimana paket data dapat ditemukan. Lokasi paket yang berisi data untuk repositori penerbit didefinisikan melalui penggunaan asal dan mirror. Asal yang digunakan untuk menyediakan lokasi yang berisi set lengkap paket data untuk penerbit, sedangkan mirror digunakan untuk menyediakan lokasi yang hanya berisi file paket. Asal dan mirror didefinisikan menggunakan URI (Universal Resource Identifier), seperti <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:416(para)
-msgid "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-msgstr "Bacalah bagian berikut untuk mempelajari bagaimana menambahkan dan mengelola penerbit di sistem anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:417(title)
-msgid "Add a Publisher"
-msgstr "Tambahkan sebuah Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:418(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk menambahkan penerbit dan yang terkait URI:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:419(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Pilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Berkas</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tambah Penerbit</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:420(para)
-msgid "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Anda juga bisa memilih <guibutton>Tambah..</guibutton> dari <emphasis role=\"strong\">Penerbit</emphasis> drop-down menu atau pilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Berkas</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pengelola Penerbit</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dan kemudian klik<emphasis>Tambah..</emphasis> pada <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:422(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Tambah Penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan. Masukkan nama penerbit dan URI terkait. Jika penerbit adalah penerbit yang secure,<emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> dan <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Sertifikat</emphasis> ditampilkan. Ikuti langkah-langkah pada <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> bagian untuk menambahkan kunci SSL dan sertifikat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:424(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Tambah</guibutton>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:426(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Penambahan Penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan. Klik Batal untuk membatalkan proses."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:428(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Penambahan Penerbit Selesai</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan jika penerbit berhasil ditambahkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:431(para)
-msgid "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Kesalahan Penambahan Penerbit</emphasis> is ditampilkan jika penerbit tidak bisa ditambahkan. Klik <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> untuk mendapatkan informasi lebih lanjut tentang kesalahan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:434(title)
-msgid "Remove a Publisher"
-msgstr "Hapus sebuah Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:435(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk menghapus penerbit:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:436(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:459(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:473(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:492(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:511(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:528(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Pilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Berkas</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pengelola Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:438(para)
-msgid "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klik pada penerbit yang ada di list untuk memilihnya. Klik<guibutton>Hapus</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:440(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Konfirmasi Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:442(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>OK</guibutton> untuk menyimpan perubahan dan menghapus penerbit atau <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> untuk kembali ke <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog tanpa membuat perubahan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:446(title)
-msgid "Set Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Mengatur Prioritas Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:447(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk mengatur atau mengubah prioritas penerbit:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:448(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Pilih <menuchoice><guimenu>Berkas</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pengelola Penerbit</guimenuitem></menuchoice> untuk membuka <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:450(para)
-msgid "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-msgstr "Daftar konfigurasi penerbit ditampilkan. Klik tanda panah untuk mengubah prioritas penerbit. Penerbit dengan prioritas tertinggi akan ditampilkan di bagian atas daftar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:451(emphasis)
-msgid "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-msgstr "Paket yang dicari dalam penerbit dalam urutan prioritas, penerbit dengan prioritas tertinggi dicari pertama."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:453(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:465(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:484(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:503(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:520(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:537(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>OK</guibutton> untuk menyimpan perubahan atau <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> untuk kembali ke <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog tanpa membuat perubahan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:457(title)
-msgid "Modify Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Rubah Nama Lain Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:458(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk memodifikasi alias penerbit:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:461(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Pilih alias penerbit yang ingin Anda ubah. Klik <guibutton>Modifikasi..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:463(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Modifikasi Penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan. Modifikasi atau masukkan nama baru dari alias pada <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:467(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:486(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:505(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:522(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:539(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pada <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog untuk keluar dialog. Catatan bahwa mengklik <guibutton>Batal</guibutton> pada <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog tidak akan membatalkan perubahan yang dibuat pada <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:471(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Menambah Asal Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:472(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk menambahkan asal yang berhubungan dengan penerbit:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:475(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Pilih penerbit asal yang akan Anda ubah.<emphasis role=\"strong\">Detail</emphasis> tab di <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog menampilkan asal yang berhubungan dengan penerbit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:477(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:496(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:515(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:532(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Modifikasi..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:478(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Modifikasi Penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan. Masukkan nama asal baru Anda ingin asosiasikan dengan penerbit pada <emphasis role=\"strong\">Asal</emphasis> field. Klik <guibutton>Tambah</guibutton>. Daftar asal terkait ditampilkan dalam tabel."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:479(para)
-msgid "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-msgstr "Anda tidak dapat mengubah URI asal setelah asal telah ditambahkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:482(para)
-msgid "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(opsional) Jika Anda telah menambahkan asal adalah asal yang aman, tambahkan SSL Key dan sertifikat SSL. <guibutton>Jelajah</guibutton> untuk menetapkan kunci SSL dan sertifikat SSL pada sistem anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:490(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Hapus Origin Penerbit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:491(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk menghapus asal yang berhubungan dengan penerbit:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:494(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Pilih asal penerbit yang ingin Anda hapus.<emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab di <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Penerbit</emphasis> dialog menampilkan asal yang berhubungan dengan penerbit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:497(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Modifikasi Penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan. Daftar asal terkait ditampilkan dalam tabel."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:499(para)
-msgid "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Pilih asal yang ingin Anda hapus. Klik <guibutton>Hapus</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:500(para)
-msgid "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-msgstr "Jika hanya satu asal berhubungan dengan penerbit, tidak dapat dihapus."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:509(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Tambah Mirror Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk menambahkan mirror untuk penerbit:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-msgstr "Pilih penerbit yang ingin Anda tambahkan mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:516(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Modifikasi Penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:518(para)
-msgid "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Masukkan URI untuk mirror pada <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Klik <guibutton>Tambah</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:526(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Hapus Mirror Penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:527(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk menghapus mirror yang terkait dengan penerbit:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:530(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-msgstr "Pilih penerbit yang ingin Anda hapus mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:533(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Modifikasi Penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan.Daftar mirror yang terkait ditampilkan dalam tabel."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:535(para)
-msgid "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Pilih mirror yang ingin Anda hapus. Klik <guibutton>Hapus</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:544(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Bekerja Dengan WebInstall"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:545(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Pengelola Paket OpenSolaris 2010.03 menyediakan dukungan bagi pengguna untuk menambahkan penerbit baru dan secara opsional, instal paket-paket dari penerbit ini menggunakan satu-klik sederhana melalaui WebInstall. Berkas<filename>.p5i</filename> yang berisi penerbit untuk ditambahkan dan secara opsional, paket-paket yang dapat diinstal dari penerbit ini, diperlukan untuk proses WebInstall. Informasi yang terkandung dalam berkas<filename>.p5i</filename> dibaca dan digunakan oleh proses WebInstall."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:546(title)
-msgid "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-msgstr "Seleksi Paket Ekspor sebagai Berkas WebInstall"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:547(para)
-msgid "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-msgstr "Jika Anda ingin mendistribusikan beberapa paket yang tersedia di sistem anda kepada orang lain untuk kemudahan instalasi dan distribusi, Anda dapat mengekspor paket referensi, menggunakan proses WebInstall.<menuchoice><guisubmenu>Berkas</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Seleksi Ekspor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> fitur memungkinkan Anda untuk membuat sebuah berkas <filename>.p5i</filename> berisi petunjuk instalasi untuk paket-paket yang dipilih. Berkas<filename>.p5i</filename> yang kemudian dapat didistribusikan untuk digunakan. Lihat <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> bagian tentang cara menginstal paket-paket dari sebuah <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:548(para)
-msgid "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-msgstr "Prosedur berikut daftar langkah-langkah untuk membuat berkas<filename>.p5i</filename> and ekspor berkas Anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:549(para)
-msgid "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Dari <emphasis role=\"strong\">Penerbit</emphasis> drop-down menu, pilih penerbit yang ingin Anda sertakan di dalam paket-paket berkas <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:551(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-msgstr "Centang kotak di sebelah paket untuk memilihnya. Paket-paket yang dipilih akan disorot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:553(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Klik <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Berkas</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Seleksi Ekspor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> untuk menampilkan jendela <emphasis role=\"strong\">Konfirmasi Seleksi Ekspor</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:555(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>OK</guibutton> untuk mengkonfirmasi pilihan dan melanjutkan atau <guibutton>Batal</guibutton> untuk membatalkan pilihan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:557(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-msgstr "Jendela <emphasis role=\"strong\">Seleksi Ekspor</emphasis> window ditampilkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:559(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Nama default untuk berkas<filename>p5i</filename> dengan ekstensi <filename>.p5i</filename> disediakan. Klik di dalam field<emphasis role=\"strong\">Nama</emphasis> untuk mengubah nama berkas <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:561(para)
-msgid "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-msgstr "Berkas tersebut disimpan dalam folder<filename>/tmp</filename> secara default. Klik <emphasis role=\"strong\">Jelajah folder lain</emphasis> tab untuk memilih folder Anda sendiri."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:563(para)
-msgid "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-msgstr "Pilih <filename>berkas p5i</filename> pilihan dalam menu drop-down yang terletak di sisi kanan bawah jendela."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:567(title)
-msgid "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Cara Menggunakan WebInstall untuk Menambahkan Penerbit dan Install Paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:568(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Proses WebInstall memungkinkan Anda untuk menginstal paket melalui berkas <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:569(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-msgstr "Tempatkan berkas <filename>.p5i</filename> yang dapat ditemukan pada desktop, halaman Start di Pengelola Paket, atau pada sebuah situs web."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:571(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-msgstr "Buat halaman Pengelola Paket dalam modus WebInstall melalui salah satu dari cara berikut:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:572(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-msgstr "Klik berkas <filename>.p5i</filename> pada desktop Anda, dan aplikasi yang terkait, Pengelola Paket dalam modus WebInstall, akan diluncurkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:574(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-msgstr "Buat halaman Pengelola Paket dari command-line dengan path ke berkas<filename>.p5i</filename>.Sebagai contoh, ketik perintah berikut di command-line:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(command)
-msgid "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:577(para)
-msgid "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-msgstr "Klik pada lokasi URL yang berisi link ke berkas<filename>.p5i</filename>. Jika Anda menggunakan metode ini untuk memulai WebInstall, berkas <filename>.p5i</filename> <emphasis role=\"strong\">harus</emphasis> ditempatkan di web server yang telah terdaftar tipe mime baru. Kemudian hanya, server web dapat mengatur <filename>.p5i</filename> secara otomatis dan mulai Pengelola Paket pada modus WebInstall."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:578(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-msgstr "Jika <filename>.p5i</filename> terletak di server web yang tidak memiliki tipe mime baru terdaftar, simpan berrkas<filename>.p5i</filename> pada desktop Anda dan kemudian klik untuk memulai Web Instal."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:582(para)
-msgid "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-msgstr "Anda akan melihat sebuah jendela yang mirip dengan contoh yang ditunjukkan di bawah jendela. Jendela menampilkan daftar penerbit yang akan ditambahkan dan paket-paket yang akan diinstal. Tinjau ulang informasi tersebut."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:586(para)
-msgid "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Konfirmasi atau membatalkan proses WebInstall."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:587(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Lanjut</guibutton> untuk menambahkan penerbit baru dan menginstal paket-paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:589(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-msgstr "Dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Tambah penerbit</emphasis> dialog ditampilkan. Nama dan URI dari penerbit sudah dimasukkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:590(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-msgstr "Dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Penambahan Penerbit Selesai</emphasis> ditampilkan jika penerbit berhasil ditambahkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:592(para)
-msgid "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(Opsional) Jika penerbit yang akan ditambahkan adalah penerbit yang secure, sebuah kunci dan sertifikat SSL diperlukan. Jelajah untuk mencari kunci SSL dan sertifikat SSL pada sistem anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:594(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>OK</guibutton> untuk melanjutkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:596(para)
-msgid "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Jika paket sedang diinstal, dialog<emphasis role=\"strong\"> Install / Perbarui </emphasis> akan ditampilkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:597(para)
-msgid "The application will close when all packages are installed."
-msgstr "Aplikasi ini akan dinutup ketika semua paket diinstal."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:601(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-msgstr "Menggunakan WebInstall dengan Penerbit yang Tidak Aktif"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:602(para)
-msgid "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-msgstr "Terkadang berkas <filename>.p5i</filename> mungkin berisi paket-paket dari penerbit yang tidak aktif. Dalam kasus seperti membuka sebuah WebInstall dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktifkan Penerbit</emphasis> yang memungkinkan pengguna untuk mengaktifkan penerbit sebelum menginstal paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:605(title)
-msgid "Working With the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Bekerja Dengan Pengelola Pembaruan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:606(title)
-msgid "About The Update Manager"
-msgstr "Tentang Pengelola Pembaruan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:607(para)
-msgid "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-msgstr "Pengelola Pembaruan adalah aplikasi terpisah yang dijalankan dari desktop ketika update paket-paket yang terinstal tersedia di penerbit."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:608(title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr "Jendela Utama Pengelola Pembaruan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:612(para)
-msgid "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-msgstr "Anda dapat menggunakan aplikasi Pengelola Pembaruan untuk memperbarui paket-paket yang terinstal di image Anda. Pengelola Pembaruan yang menggunakan penerbit saat ini diatur di Pengelola Paket untuk menginstal image terbaru."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:613(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-msgstr "Pada rilis OpenSolaris 2010.03, Pengelola Pembaruan memperbarui <emphasis role=\"strong\">semua</emphasis> paket yang terinstal dalam image. Tindakan ini sama seperti menjalankan perintah<command>pkg image-update</command> dari command-line."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:616(title)
-msgid "Using the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Menggunakan Pengelola Pembaruan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:617(para)
-msgid "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-msgstr "Ketika pembaruan yang tersedia untuk paket-paket yang terinstal, ikon pemberitahuan ditampilkan dalam panel notifikasi desktop OpenSolaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:618(para)
-msgid "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr "Anda juga bisa klik <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistem</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administrasi</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Pengelola Pembaruan</guimenuitem></menuchoice> untuk meluncurkan secara manual Pengelola Pembaruan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:619(para)
-msgid "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-msgstr "Ketika Anda akan diberitahu tentang pembaruan perangkat lunak, lakukan langkah-langkah berikut untuk memulai proses pembaruan sistem anda:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:620(para)
-msgid "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Klik ikon notifikasi pada desktop untuk menampilkan jendela <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Pembaruan</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:622(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Perbarui Semua</guibutton> pada jendela<emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Pembaruan</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:623(para)
-msgid "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr "Pilih paket dan klik panel<guilabel>Rincian</guilabel> jika Anda ingin melihat informasi lebih lanjut tentang paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:626(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-msgstr "Dialog <emphasis role=\"strong\">Perbarui Semua</emphasis> ditampilkan. Lanjutkan dengan proses Perbarui Semua atau batalkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:627(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Lanjutkan</guibutton> untuk menciptakan boot environment yang baru dan memperbarui semua paket dalam image ini."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:628(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "Selama proses Perbarui Semua, klon dari boot environment aktif dibuat. Klon ini memungkinkan pengguna untuk boot ke kondisi boot environment yang sudah ada sebelum proses Perbarui Semua dimulai."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:629(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "Jika Pengelola Pembaruan tidak dapat menciptakan boot environment baru, pesan kesalahan akan ditampilkan. Lihat <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> bagian tentang bagaimana untuk memperbaiki kesalahan dan melanjutkan dengan memperbarui image Anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:630(para)
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-msgstr "Nama untuk boot environment baru secara otomatis dihasilkan. Anda dapat menerima nama yang dihasilkan oleh sistem, atau memberikan nama Anda sendiri untuk boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:633(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Batal</guibutton> untuk membatalkan proses."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:637(para)
-msgid "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-msgstr "Jika Anda memilih untuk melanjutkan, jendela <emphasis role=\"strong\">Instalasai Pembaruan</emphasis> ditampilkan. Proses instalasi paket terdiri dari empat tahapan:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:638(para)
-msgid "Prepare"
-msgstr "Persiapan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:640(para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr "Mengunduh"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:642(para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr "Install"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:645(para)
-msgid "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-msgstr "Anda dapat memilih untuk membatalkan proses hanya selama di tahap<emphasis role=\"strong\">Persiapan</emphasis> dan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Mengunduh</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:646(para)
-msgid "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-msgstr "Klik panel <guilabel>Rincian</guilabel> untuk melihat informasi lebih lanjut tentang masing-masing proses instalasi."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:647(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "Jika kesalahan terjadi pada salah satu tahap, panel<guilabel>Rincian</guilabel> diperluas dan rincian kesalahan ditampilkan. Indikator status kesalahan ditampilkan di sebelah tahapan yang gagal."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:650(para)
-msgid "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr "Baca <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> sebelum reboot sistem anda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:651(para)
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr "Anda harus me-reboot sistem anda agar perubahan diterapkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:657(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-msgstr "Klon boot environment yang baru <emphasis role=\"strong\">harus</emphasis> dibuat untuk menyelesaikan proses Pembaruan Semua. Pesan kesalahan berikut ditampilkan jika klon boot environment tidak dapat diciptakan karena batasan ruang:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:658(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Tidak cukup ruang disk, Semua Pembaruan tidak dapat dilakukan. Pilih Pengelola BE untuk mengelola boot environment Anda dan bebaskan ruang disk</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:661(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Pengelola BE</guibutton> pada dialog Error dan menuju dialog<emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Boot Environments</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:663(para)
-msgid "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-msgstr "Pergi ke langkah 2 pada bagian <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/>. Ikuti petunjuk untuk menghapus boot environment yang lama atau tidak digunakan dan bebaskan ruang disk."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:665(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Klik <guibutton>Perbarui Semua</guibutton> pada jendela<emphasis role=\"strong\">Pengelola Pembaruan</emphasis> untuk start ulang proses pembaruan semua paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:669(title)
-msgid "2010.03 Release Notes"
-msgstr "Catatan Rilis 2010.03"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:670(para)
-msgid "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-msgstr "Catatan Rilis 2010.03 tersedia di lokasi berikut: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:674(title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:675(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:676(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-msgstr "Seseorang, kelompok, atau korporasi yang menyediakan paket. Paket untuk penerbit ditemukan di repositori, dari mana sistem paket mengambil data paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:679(glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr "repositori"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:680(para)
-msgid "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-msgstr "Sebuah lokasi di mana klien dapat mempublikasikan dan mengambil isi paket seperti berkas yang terkandung dalam paket, dan paket metadata yang meliputi informasi tentang paket seperti nama dan deskripsi."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:683(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr "boot environment"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:684(para)
-msgid "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "Untuk OpenSolaris rilis 2010.03, boot environment adalah sebuah instans dari sebuah bootable OpenSolaris environment. Sistem berkas root dan semua sistem berkas lain dari boot environment yang berisi perangkat lunak sistem yang diperlukan untuk ZFS dataset."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:685(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-msgstr "Boot Environment yang aktif adalah yang sedang digunakan untuk boot saat ini. Banyak boot environment dapat digunakan pada sebuah sistem OpenSolaris dan boot environment yang tidak aktif dalam keadaan menunggu aktivasi sistem setelah reboot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:688(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "klon"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:689(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Salinan"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:690(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Sebuah klon dapat berupa salinan dari sistem operasi, sistem file, atau volume. salinan ini memiliki 100% kompatibilitas dengan yang asli."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:693(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "dataset"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:694(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Sebuah nama yang umum untuk entitas ZFS berikut: klon, sistem berkas, snapshot, atau volume. Setiap Dataset diidentifikasi dengan nama yang unik dalam namespace ZFS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:697(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "image"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:698(para)
-msgid "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr "Kumpulan perangkat lunak dalam paket yang terdiri dari seluruh atau sebagian sistem operasi. Paket ini cocok untuk instalasi."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:699(para)
-msgid "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "Sebuah image adalah sebuah lokasi di sistem anda di mana paket-paket dan berkas terkait, direktori, link, dan dependensi dapat diinstal."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:702(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:703(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Kumpulan berkas, direktori, link, driver, dan dependensi dalam format yang ditetapkan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:706(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "asal"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:707(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-msgstr "Lokasi paket repositori ditentukan oleh URI, yang berisi satu set lengkap paket data."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:710(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "alias"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:711(para)
-msgid "An alternate name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Nama alternatif bagi penerbit"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:714(glossterm)
-msgid "mirror"
-msgstr "mirror"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:715(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-msgstr "Lokasi dari sebuah paket repositori, ditentukan oleh URI, yang hanya mengandung berkas paket."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "translator-credits"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/id/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/it/it.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager - Guida in linea"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "Giugno 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "Il software e la relativa documentazione vengono distribuiti sulla base di specifiche condizioni di licenza che prevedono restrizioni relative all'uso e alla divulgazione e sono inoltre protetti dalle leggi vigenti sulla proprietà intellettuale. Ad eccezione di quanto espressamente consentito dal contratto di licenza o dalle disposizioni di legge, nessuna parte può essere utilizzata, copiata, riprodotta, tradotta, diffusa, modificata, concessa in licenza, trasmessa, distribuita, presentata, eseguita, pubblicata o visualizzata in alcuna forma o con alcun mezzo. La decodificazione, il disassemblaggio o la decompilazione del software sono vietati, salvo che per garantire l'interoperabilità nei casi espressamente previsti dalla legge."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "Le informazioni contenute nella presente documentazione potranno essere soggette a modifiche senza preavviso. Non si garantisce che la presente documentazione sia priva di errori. Qualora l'utente riscontrasse dei problemi, è pregato di segnalarli per iscritto a Oracle."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "Qualora il software o la relativa documentazione vengano forniti al Governo degli Stati Uniti o a chiunque li abbia in licenza per conto del Governo degli Stati Uniti, sarà applicabile la clausola riportata di seguito:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "Il presente software o hardware è stato sviluppato per un uso generico in varie applicazioni di gestione delle informazioni. Non è stato sviluppato né concepito per l'uso in campi intrinsecamente pericolosi, incluse le applicazioni che implicano un rischio di lesioni personali. Qualora il software o l'hardware venga utilizzato per impieghi pericolosi, è responsabilità dell'utente adottare tutte le necessarie misure di emergenza, backup e di altro tipo per garantirne la massima sicurezza di utilizzo. Oracle Corporation e le sue consociate declinano ogni responsabilità per eventuali danni causati dall'uso del software o dell'hardware per impieghi pericolosi."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle e Java sono marchi registrati di Oracle e/o delle relative consociate. Altri nomi possono essere marchi dei rispettivi proprietari."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD, Opteron, il logo AMD e il logo AMD Opteron sono marchi o marchi registrati di Advanced Micro Devices. Intel e Intel Xeon sono marchi o marchi registrati di Intel Corporation. Tutti i marchi SPARC sono utilizzati in base alla relativa licenza e sono marchi o marchi registrati di SPARC International, Inc. UNIX è un marchio registrato concesso in licenza attraverso X/Open Company, Ltd."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "Il software o l'hardware e la documentazione possono includere informazioni su contenuti, prodotti e servizi di terze parti o collegamenti agli stessi. Oracle Corporation e le sue consociate declinano ogni responsabilità ed escludono espressamente qualsiasi tipo di garanzia relativa a contenuti, prodotti e servizi di terze parti. Oracle Corporation e le sue consociate non potranno quindi essere ritenute responsabili per qualsiasi perdita, costo o danno causato dall'accesso a contenuti, prodotti o servizi di terze parti o dall'utilizzo degli stessi."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "Informazioni su Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "Package Manager è un'interfaccia utente grafica (GUI, graphical user interface) per Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Per le definizioni dei termini utilizzati nel presente documento consultare <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) è un sistema di distribuzione del software in grado di interagire con un repository di pacchetti su una rete. IPS è una struttura che offre funzionalità di gestione del ciclo di vita del software, comprese le operazioni di installazione, aggiornamento e rimozione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "Dopo aver installato il sistema operativo Oracle Solaris, alcune delle applicazioni software che si desidera utilizzare potrebbero non essere disponibili. Tali applicazioni potrebbero essere disponibili in un repository di pacchetto IPS. È possibile utilizzare Package Manager o il comando <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) per scaricare e installare pacchetti da un repository di pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "IPS consente inoltre di creare una copia di un repository di pacchetti IPS esistente, creare il proprio repository di pacchetti IPS e pubblicare i propri pacchetti IPS. Per ulteriori informazioni su IPS, vedere l'apposita libreria informativa di Oracle Solaris 11. Visitare <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, selezionare la sezione relativa all'indice della documentazione, visualizzare la sezione relativa al software dei sistemi, quindi scegliere Oracle Solaris 11 e il comando di visualizzazione della libreria. Vedere in particolare la sezione relativa all'<citetitle>aggiunta e all'aggiornamento dei pacchetti software Oracle Solaris 11</citetitle>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "Package Manager fornisce un sottoinsieme di funzionalità offerte dall'interfaccia della riga di comando IPS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Package Manager consente inoltre di eseguire le seguenti attività:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Individuare, installare, aggiornare e rimuovere i pacchetti IPS. Vedere <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "Aggiornare il sistema (aggiornare tutti i pacchetti nel sistema). Vedere <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Aggiungere, modificare ed eliminare i publisher dei pacchetti IPS. Vedere <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "Elencare, rinominare, eliminare e gestire gli ambienti di boot. Vedere <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "Creare un file di installazione WebInstall (<filename>.p5i</filename>). Vedere <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "La presente documentazione fa riferimento alle seguenti funzioni della finestra Package Manager:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "Il riquadro di grandi dimensioni al centro della finestra corrisponde al riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti. Talvolta in questo riquadro vengono visualizzati messaggi informativi, ma solitamente contiene un elenco di pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "La barra dei menu nella parte superiore della finestra fornisce la maggior parte delle funzionalità Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "La barra degli strumenti immediatamente sotto la barra dei menu è caratterizzata a sinistra da pulsanti che forniscono accesso ad alcune operazioni di uso comune. I pulsanti a sinistra del separatore presentano funzionalità globali: aggiornamento di tutti i pacchetti con aggiornamenti disponibili o refresh dell'elenco dei pacchetti e dello stato del pacchetto. I pulsanti a destra del separatore possono essere utilizzati solo su pacchetti selezionati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Il campo Cerca a destra della barra degli strumenti consente di controllare il contenuto del riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti. Vedere <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "Il menu a discesa <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> sotto i pulsanti consente di controllare il contenuto del riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti e di creare un nuovo publisher. Vedere <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> \"Per Publisher\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "Il menu a discesa <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu> sotto il campo Cerca consente di controllare il contenuto del riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti. Vedere Elenco di pacchetti \"Per stato del pacchetto\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "Il riquadro delle categorie sotto il menu <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> consente di controllare il contenuto del riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti. Vedere Elenco di pacchetti \"Per categoria\"."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "Sotto l'elenco delle categorie del software è disponibile un elenco di ricerche eseguite in questa sessione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "Sotto il riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti è disponibile il riquadro dei dettagli del pacchetto. Vedere <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "Gestione dei pacchetti"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "È possibile elencare i pacchetti secondo diversi criteri. È possibile installare, aggiornare e rimuovere i pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "Elenco di pacchetti"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "L'elenco dei pacchetti nel riquadro dell'elenco di Package Manager è interessato dalle selezioni eseguite nei menu a discesa <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> e <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu>, nel riquadro delle categorie e nel campo Cerca."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "È possibile riordinare l'elenco dei pacchetti facendo clic sulle intestazioni colonna."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "È possibile utilizzare il pulsante <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> o l'opzione di menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per leggere nuovamente i cataloghi del repository e aggiornare l'elenco di pacchetti e relativo stato. Inoltre a ogni apertura di Package Manager, viene eseguito un tentativo di refresh."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "Per publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "Il menu a discesa <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> consente di elencare i pacchetti in base al publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "Nella parte superiore del menu vengono elencati i nomi di ciascun publisher aggiunto utilizzando la finestra di dialogo Aggiungi publisher o il comando <literal>pkg</literal>. Quando si seleziona uno di questi publisher, il riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti mostra solo i pacchetti disponibili dal publisher selezionato. Nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti vengono visualizzate solo le colonne Nome, Stato e Riepilogo, poiché il publisher è lo stesso per tutti i pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher</guimenuitem> - Mostra i pacchetti di tutti i publisher nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti. In tale riquadro vengono visualizzate le colonne Nome, Stato, Publisher e Riepilogo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Esempio: per elencare tutti i driver del dispositivo del supporto con aggiornamenti disponibili da tutti i publisher, selezionare <guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher</guimenuitem> dal menu <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>, scegliere la categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Driver</guimenu><guimenuitem>Supporti</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e selezionare <guimenuitem>Aggiornamenti</guimenuitem> dal menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tutti i pacchetti installati</guimenuitem> - Mostra tutti i pacchetti installati da tutti i publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "Esempio: per elencare tutti i pacchetti dei caratteri attualmente installati dal publisher <literal>solaris</literal>, selezionare <guimenuitem>Tutti i pacchetti installati</guimenuitem> dal menu <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>, scegliere la categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guimenuitem>Caratteri</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, fare clic sull'intestazione colonna Publisher per ordinare l'elenco a seconda del Publisher e scorrere verso il basso fino alle voci <literal>solaris</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher (Cerca)</guimenuitem> - Mostra un messaggio informativo nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti invece di un elenco di pacchetti. Nel messaggio vengono elencati tutti i publisher configurati e viene indicato come visualizzare tutti i pacchetti di quei publisher. Vedere <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> per informazioni sulla ricerca con <guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher (Cerca)</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Aggiungi...</guimenuitem> - Consente di aprire la finestra Aggiungi publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "Per stato del pacchetto"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "Il menu a discesa <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu> consente di elencare i pacchetti in base allo stato del pacchetto. Lo stato può essere installato, non installato o con disponibilità di aggiornamenti. Le icone visualizzate nel menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu> corrispondono a quelle presenti nella colonna Stato del riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Tutti i pacchetti</guimenuitem> - Mostra tutti i pacchetti disponibili dal publisher selezionato nella categoria selezionata o che corrispondono alla stringa di ricerca specifica."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Esempio: per elencare tutti i pacchetti di servizi Web dal publisher <literal>solaris</literal> installati, non installati o con aggiornamenti disponibili, selezionare <literal>solaris</literal> dal menu <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>, scegliere la categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Servizi Web</guimenu></menuchoice> e selezionare <guimenuitem>Tutti i pacchetti</guimenuitem> dal menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Pacchetti installati</guimenuitem> - Mostra tutti i pacchetti installati dal publisher selezionato nella categoria selezionata o corrispondenti alla stringa di ricerca specificata. Vedere inoltre l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tutti i pacchetti installati</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Esempio: per elencare solo i pacchetti server Web installati dal publisher <literal>solaris</literal>, selezionare <literal>solaris</literal> dal menu <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>, scegliere la categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Servizi Web</guimenu></menuchoice> e selezionare <guimenuitem>Pacchetti installati</guimenuitem> dal menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Aggiornamenti</guimenuitem> - Mostra tutti i pacchetti del publisher selezionato nella categoria selezionata o corrispondenti alla stringa di ricerca specificata con aggiornamenti disponibili."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Esempio: per elencare tutti i driver di dispositivo con aggiornamenti disponibili da tutti i publisher, selezionare <guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher</guimenuitem> dal menu <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>, scegliere la categoria <guimenu>Driver</guimenu> e selezionare <guimenuitem>Aggiornamenti</guimenuitem> dal menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Pacchetti non installati</guimenuitem> - Mostra tutti i pacchetti dal publisher selezionato nella categoria selezionata o corrispondenti alla stringa di ricerca specificata non installati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Esempio: per elencare tutti i pacchetti dei caratteri attualmente non installati dal publisher <literal>solaris</literal>, selezionare <literal>solaris</literal> dal menu <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>, scegliere la categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guimenuitem>Caratteri</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, quindi selezionare <guimenuitem>Pacchetti non installati</guimenuitem> dal menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Pacchetti selezionati</guimenuitem> - Consente di elencare tutti i pacchetti attualmente selezionati. Vedere <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "Per categoria"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "È possibile esplorare i pacchetti disponibili per tipo di software nel riquadro della categoria a sinistra della finestra Package Manager. Fare clic sul nome di una categoria per visualizzare le sottocategorie. I pacchetti nella categoria o sottocategoria selezionata sono elencati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti a seconda del publisher e dello stato del pacchetto selezionato e in base ai criteri di ricerca specificati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "In aggiunta ai tipi di software denominati, il riquadro delle categorie consente inoltre di selezionare <guimenuitem>Tutte le categorie</guimenuitem> e <guimenuitem>Ricerche recenti</guimenuitem>. Vedere <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> sulla ripetizione di una ricerca precedente per informazioni sulle <guimenuitem>Ricerche recenti</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "Ricerca di pacchetti"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "Utilizzare uno dei due metodi seguenti per cercare i pacchetti:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Andare al riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti (ad esempio, selezionare <menuchoice><guimenu>Modifica</guimenu><guimenuitem>Vai all'elenco pacchetti</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e iniziare la digitazione. Durante la digitazione, le corrispondenze vengono identificate tra i pacchetti attualmente elencati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Utilizzare il campo Cerca nella barra degli strumenti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "Immettere una stringa di ricerca"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "Immettere una stringa nel campo Cerca e premere il tasto Invio o fare clic sull'icona della lente di ingrandimento a destra del campo Cerca."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Selezione menu <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> - Package Manager consente di cercare la stringa di ricerca nelle informazioni relative a ciascun pacchetto da un publisher particolare o da tutti i publisher, secondo quanto selezionato nel menu <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "I risultati della ricerca sono gli stessi, sia che si selezioni <guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher</guimenuitem> o <guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher (Cerca)</guimenuitem>. La differenza risiede nella maggiore rapidità dell'opzione <guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher (Cerca)</guimenuitem> poiché non rende necessario il caricamento dei dati da tutti i publisher come invece avviene con la selezione di <guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher</guimenuitem>. Con <guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher (Cerca)</guimenuitem>, la ricerca viene eseguita su tutti i publisher senza caricare i dati da tutti i publisher nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "Selezione menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu> - I risultati della ricerca vengono visualizzati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti a seconda dello stato del pacchetto selezionato nel menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu>. È possibile visualizzare diversi sottoinsiemi degli stessi risultati della ricerca nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti modificando la selezione menu <guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu>, senza eseguire nuovamente la ricerca."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "Package Manager consente di cercare le informazioni sul pacchetto, compresi nome, riepilogo, descrizione, categoria e i nomi dei file contenuti nel pacchetto. Se non si utilizzano caratteri jolly vengono trovate solo corrispondenze esatte."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "AND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "Quando i termini di ricerca sono separati da spazi o da <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager cerca i pacchetti contenenti <emphasis role=\"strong\">tutti</emphasis> i termini di ricerca. Si tratta dell'impostazione di ricerca di default."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "Esempio: se la stringa di ricerca è <literal>manuale python</literal> o <literal>manuale AND python</literal>, i risultati della ricerca includono solo i pacchetti contenenti <emphasis>entrambi</emphasis> i termini <literal>python</literal><emphasis>e</emphasis><literal>manuale</literal> nelle informazioni del pacchetto. Ad esempio, il pacchetto <literal>diveintopython</literal>, un manuale sul linguaggio di programmazione Python, verrà visualizzato nei risultati della ricerca, a differenza del pacchetto <literal>python-26</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "Virgolette doppie"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "Racchiudere il termine di ricerca tra virgolette doppie per trovare l'esatta corrispondenza con il termine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "Esempio: <literal>\"driver ethernet\"</literal> tra virgolette doppie corrisponde a <literal>Driver Ethernet veloce</literal> ma non a <literal>Driver per scheda Ethernet</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "Carattere jolly"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "È possibile utilizzare il carattere jolly <literal>*</literal> nella stringa di ricerca. L'utilizzo dei caratteri jolly può rallentare la ricerca."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "Esempio: <literal>802.11*</literal> corrisponde a <literal>802.11b/g</literal> e a <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "Tenere presente che <literal>802.11*</literal> non corrisponde a <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. Per ottenere <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, utilizzare la stringa di ricerca <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "Quando i termini di ricerca sono separati da <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager cerca i pacchetti contenenti <emphasis role=\"strong\">qualsiasi</emphasis> termine di ricerca."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "Esempio: <literal>manuale OR python</literal> corrisponde a tutti i pacchetti che contengono <literal>python</literal> e <literal>manuale</literal> nelle relative informazioni di pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "È possibile unire questi modificatori della stringa di ricerca. In un'unica stringa è possibile utilizzare AND, OR, virgolette doppie e *."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "Cancellare il campo Cerca"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "Per cancellare la stringa di ricerca e l'elenco dei risultati, utilizzare il campo Cerca o il menu Modifica."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "Nel campo Cerca, fare clic sull'icona <literal>X</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Nel menu <guimenu>Modifica</guimenu>, selezionare l'opzione <guimenuitem>Cancella ricerca</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "Cancellare la ricerca"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "Nel corso di un'operazione di ricerca, viene visualizzato l'avanzamento nell'estremità destra della barra di stato nella parte inferiore della finestra Package Manager. Nell'estremità destra della barra di avanzamento si trova un'icona <literal>X</literal>. Fare clic sull'icona <literal>X</literal> nella barra di avanzamento per cancellare la ricerca in corso."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "Visualizzare nuovamente i risultati della ricerca precedente"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "I risultati delle ricerche già eseguite durante la sessione corrente di Package Manager sono salvate in <guimenuitem>Ricerche recenti</guimenuitem> nel riquadro delle categorie."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'etichetta <guimenuitem>Ricerche recenti</guimenuitem> nel riquadro delle categorie per visualizzare un messaggio informativo nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti. In tale riquadro viene visualizzato l'elenco dei risultati della ricerca precedente. Fare clic su un collegamento \"risultati\" per visualizzare nuovamente tali risultati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "Selezionare la freccia a sinistra dell'etichetta <guimenuitem>Ricerche recenti</guimenuitem> per espandere o nascondere l'elenco dei risultati della ricerca precedente nel riquadro delle categorie. Selezionare una voce nell'elenco delle ricerche recenti per visualizzare nuovamente tali risultati della ricerca."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "Un ricerca che non ha prodotto risultati nei pacchetti non viene visualizzata nell'elenco delle ricerche recenti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "Selezionando il pulsante <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> o l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> è possibile eliminare tutti i risultati delle ricerche recenti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "Visualizzazione di maggiori informazioni"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "È possibile visualizzare maggiori informazioni su un pacchetto nel riquadro dei dettagli del pacchetto o nella finestra di dialogo Informazioni sulla versione del pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "Riquadro dei dettagli del pacchetto"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "Per visualizzare maggiori informazioni su un pacchetto, fare clic con il pulsante sinistro del mouse per evidenziare il pacchetto nell'elenco relativo. Nel riquadro dei dettagli del pacchetto sotto il riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti vengono visualizzate informazioni come l'ultima versione disponibile da questo publisher, le dimensioni del pacchetto, i file presenti nel pacchetto, le dipendenze e le condizioni di licenza."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "Se un pacchetto è stato rinominato dopo l'installazione, nel campo Rinominato in della scheda Generale viene visualizzato il nuovo nome del pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Nella scheda Versioni viene visualizzato un elenco delle versioni del pacchetto disponibili per l'installazione. Selezionare una versione dall'elenco e fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Installa/Aggiorna</guibutton> a destra dell'elenco per installare tale versione. Vedere <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "Il riquadro dei dettagli del pacchetto non viene visualizzato se il riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti contiene un messaggio informativo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "Finestra di dialogo Informazioni sulla versione del pacchetto"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse su un pacchetto nell'elenco dei pacchetti per visualizzare il menu <guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu><guimenuitem>Informazioni sulla versione del pacchetto</guimenuitem></menuchoice> sia dal menu popup sia dalla barra dei menu per visualizzare una finestra separata in cui viene visualizzata la versione del pacchetto installato e l'ultima versione che è possibile installare o a cui è possibile eseguire l'aggiornamento, se applicabile."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "Selezione di pacchetti"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "È possibile installare, aggiornare o rimuovere i pacchetti selezionati. Per selezionare un pacchetto, utilizzare il riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti o il menu <guimenu>Modifica</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "Nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti eseguire una delle seguenti azioni per selezionare un pacchetto. È possibile selezionare più pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Fare clic sulla casella a sinistra del nome del pacchetto. Fare nuovamente clic sulla casella per deselezionare il pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Fare clic una volta sul nome del pacchetto per evidenziare il pacchetto. Fare quindi doppio clic sul pacchetto evidenziato per selezionare il pacchetto. Fare nuovamente doppio clic per deselezionarlo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Fare clic sull'icona della casella di controllo nell'intestazione colonna per selezionare tutti i pacchetti attualmente elencati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti. Fare nuovamente clic sull'icona della casella di controllo per deselezionare tutti i pacchetti attualmente elencati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "Il menu <guimenu>Modifica</guimenu> comprende le seguenti opzioni per la selezione dei pacchetti:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Seleziona tutto</guimenuitem> - Consente di selezionare tutti i pacchetti attualmente elencati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Seleziona aggiornamenti</guimenuitem> - Consente di selezionare tutti i pacchetti, di cui sono disponibili aggiornamenti, attualmente installati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Deseleziona tutto</guimenuitem> - Consente di deselezionare tutti i pacchetti attualmente installati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "In ogni caso, quando si seleziona un pacchetto, non viene persa la selezione dei pacchetti precedentemente selezionati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "Il numero di pacchetti attualmente elencati nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti e il numero dei pacchetti selezionati vengono visualizzati nel lato sinistro della barra di stato nella parte inferiore della finestra Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tutti i publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, la categoria <guimenuitem>Tutte le categorie</guimenuitem> e l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pacchetti selezionati</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per elencare tutti i pacchetti selezionati da tutti i publisher nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "È possibile evidenziare ma non selezionare un pacchetto. Quando un pacchetto viene evidenziato, vengono visualizzate informazioni dettagliate su tale pacchetto nel riquadro dei dettagli del pacchetto sotto il riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti. Quando viene selezionato un pacchetto, viene visualizzato un segno di spunta nella casella a sinistra del nome del pacchetto. Se si desidera installare, aggiornare o eliminare un pacchetto, assicurarsi che sia presente un segno di spunta nella casella di selezione di tale pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "Installazione e aggiornamento di pacchetti"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "Prima di procedere all'installazione o all'aggiornamento, verificare le impostazioni di preferenza dei componenti facoltativi. Selezionare l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Modifica</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferenze</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Nella finestra Preferenze, selezionare la scheda relativa ai componenti facoltativi. Le opzioni di installazione di tutte le lingue, di tutti i file di sviluppo e di tutta la documentazione sono selezionate di default. È possibile risparmiare spazio per l'installazione selezionando un sottoinsieme di lingue per, ad esempio, installare o deselezionare i file di sviluppo. Fare clic sul pulsante OK per salvare le modifiche. Tali impostazioni vengono applicate a tutti i pacchetti installati, nonché agli aggiornamenti e alle installazioni di pacchetti futuri."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "Eseguire i seguenti passaggi per installare o aggiornare un pacchetto:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Selezionare il pacchetto. Vedere <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "Utilizzare uno dei metodi seguenti per installare o aggiornare il pacchetto:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Selezionare il pulsante <guibutton>Installa/Aggiorna</guibutton> nella barra degli strumenti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu><guimenuitem>Installa/Aggiorna</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dalla barra dei menu."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse sul nome di un pacchetto per visualizzare il menu popup <guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu>. Selezionare quindi l'opzione <guimenuitem>Installa/Aggiorna</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "Nella scheda Versioni del riquadro dei dettagli del pacchetto sotto il riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti, selezionare una versione dall'elenco Versione da installare e fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Installa/Aggiorna</guibutton> a destra dell'elenco. I pacchetti nell'elenco Versione da installare sono disponibili nel repository; potrebbe non essere possibile installarli. Una versione particolare potrebbe non essere compatibile con altri pacchetti installati. Se la versione selezionata non è installabile sul sistema, Package Manager genera un avviso e non installa il pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Se il pacchetto è già installato e non sono disponibili aggiornamenti (vedere la colonna Stato o l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu><guimenuitem>Informazioni sulla versione del pacchetto</guimenuitem></menuchoice>), l'opzione <guibutton>Installa/Aggiorna</guibutton> è visualizzata in grigio e non è selezionabile."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "Viene visualizzata la finestra Conferma installazione/aggiornamento. I pacchetti non ancora installati sono elencati nel riquadro Dettagli installazione, mentre quelli installati nel riquadro Aggiorna dettagli per la revisione. Selezionare il pulsante <guibutton>Continua</guibutton> per installare o aggiornare i pacchetti elencati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "In alcuni casi viene visualizzata un finestra di dialogo relativa alla licenza ed è necessario accettare tale licenza per installare il pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "Se viene rilevato un errore durante l'installazione del pacchetto, viene visualizzata una finestra di dialogo relativa all'errore. I messaggi contengono informazioni sul fallimento dell'installazione o dell'aggiornamento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "Rimozione di pacchetti"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Per rimuovere un pacchetto, attenersi alla seguente procedura."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "Utilizzare uno dei metodi seguenti per rimuovere il pacchetto:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Selezionare il pulsante <guibutton>Rimuovi</guibutton> nella barra degli strumenti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu><guimenuitem>Rimuovi</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dalla barra dei menu."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse sul nome di un pacchetto per visualizzare il menu popup <guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu>. Selezionare quindi l'opzione <guimenuitem>Rimuovi</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Se il pacchetto non è installato, l'opzione Rimuovi viene visualizzata in grigio e non è selezionabile."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "Viene visualizzata la finestra Conferma rimozione. I pacchetti da rimuovere sono elencati nel riquadro Rimuovi dettagli per la revisione. Selezionare il pulsante <guibutton>Continua</guibutton> per rimuovere i pacchetti elencati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "Se non è possibile rimuovere un pacchetto poiché altri pacchetti ne sono dipendenti, è possibile selezionare l'opzione <guibutton>Rimuovi continua</guibutton> per tentare di rimuovere qualsiasi pacchetto rimanente originariamente selezionato per la rimozione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "Aggiornamento del sistema"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "Quando vengono aggiornati determinati pacchetti chiave come alcuni driver e altri componenti kernel, il sistema esegue le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "Crea un clone dell'ambiente di boot corrente."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "Aggiorna i pacchetti nel clone e non aggiorna tutti i pacchetti nell'ambiente di boot corrente."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Imposta il nuovo ambiente di boot come scelta di boot di default al successivo reboot del sistema. L'ambiente di boot corrente resta impostato come scelta alternativa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "Aggiornamento di tutti i pacchetti"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Quando si seleziona il pulsante <guibutton>Aggiornamenti</guibutton> nella barra degli strumenti o l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacchetto</guimenu><guimenuitem>Aggiornamenti</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, Package Manager consente di aggiornare tutti i pacchetti installati con aggiornamenti disponibili."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "Tutti i pacchetti con aggiornamenti disponibili dal publisher corrente sono aggiornati. Se un pacchetto presenta un aggiornamento disponibile da un publisher diverso nell'elenco dei publisher, tale pacchetto viene aggiornato solo se il relativo publisher corrente è configurato come non-sticky. Se il relativo publisher corrente viene configurato come sticky, il pacchetto non viene quindi aggiornato."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "Viene visualizzata la finestra Aggiornamenti e viene avviato il processo di aggiornamento:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "Su tutti i cataloghi viene eseguito il refrewsh dal sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "Il sistema valuta tutti i pacchetti installati per determinare per quali pacchetti sono disponibili aggiornamenti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "Se non vi sono aggiornamenti disponibili per alcun pacchetto, viene visualizzato il messaggio \"Nessun aggiornamento disponibile\" e l'elaborazione viene interrotta."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "Se sono disponibili aggiornamenti, i pacchetti da aggiornare vengono elencati per la revisione. È ora possibile fare clic per l'ultima volta sul pulsante <guibutton>Annulla</guibutton> per interrompere l'aggiornamento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Continua</guibutton> per continuare l'aggiornamento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "Il sistema potrebbe creare un nuovo ambiente di boot, come descritto in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> sopra, a seconda di quale pacchetto viene aggiornato."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Se viene ritenuto necessario tramite il sistema un nuovo ambiente di boot, ma non è possibile crearlo, viene visualizzato un messaggio di errore. Se il problema è la quantità insufficiente di spazio su disco eseguire le seguenti azioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "Fare clic su <guibutton>Chiudi</guibutton> per annullare il processo relativo agli aggiornamenti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "Seguire le istruzioni in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> per rimuovere un ambiente di boot non più necessario."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "Selezionare nuovamente <guibutton>Aggiornamenti</guibutton> per riavviare il processo relativo agli aggiornamenti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "Il sistema scarica tutti gli aggiornamenti dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "Il sistema consente di installare gli aggiornamenti dei pacchetti. Se è stato creato un ambiente di boot clonato, gli aggiornamenti vengono installati nel clone. Se, al contrario, non è stato creato alcun clone, gli aggiornamenti sono installati nell'ambiente di boot corrente."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "Se viene rilevato un errore in qualunque momento del processo di aggiornamento, il riquadro Dettagli viene espanso e i dettagli dell'errore visualizzati. Un indicatore di stato dell'errore viene visualizzato accanto alla fase non riuscita."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Se dal sistema è stato creato un nuovo ambiente di boot per l'aggiornamento, è possibile modificare il nome di default dell'ambiente di boot. Una volta modificato il nome, fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Riavvia ora</guibutton> per eseguire immediatamente il reboot del sistema. Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Riavvia in seguito</guibutton> per riavviare il sistema in un secondo momento. È necessario eseguire un riavvio per eseguire il boot in un nuovo ambiente di boot. Il nuovo ambiente di boot sarà quello di default. L'ambiente di boot corrente resterà disponibile come scelta alternativa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "Utilizzo di Update Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "È possibile aprire Update Manager da una notifica di sistema o dalla barra dei menu del desktop. Update Manager consente di eseguire lo stesso processo descritto sopra in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "Notifiche di aggiornamenti software"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "Il sistema verifica periodicamente se sono disponibili aggiornamenti per qualsiasi pacchetto installato. Se il sistema rileva la presenza di aggiornamenti, vengono visualizzati un popup e un'icona di notifica Aggiornamenti disponibili nella barra di notifica del sistema. Fare clic sull'icona di notifica per aprire Update Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "Menu Desktop System"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "Selezionare <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guisubmenu>Amministrazione</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dalla barra dei menu sul desktop per aprire Update Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "Gestione dei publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "È possibile aggiungere, modificare e rimuovere i publisher dei pacchetti IPS. È possibile modificare la priorità di un publisher, le impostazioni attivato e sticky e l'alias del publisher, nonché aggiungere o rimuovere un'origine e un mirror di un publisher. È possibile gestire chiavi, certificati e criteri firma."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "Tenere presente che i publisher di sistema sono eccezioni. È possibile visualizzare i publisher di sistema solo nella finestra Gestisci publisher. Non è possibile rimuovere o modificare i publisher di sistema, nonché modificarne la priorità. Vedere <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. Nel riquadro Dettagli viene indicato se il publisher selezionato è un publisher di sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "Aggiunta di publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Per aggiungere un publisher di pacchetto IPS, utilizzare la finestra Aggiungi publisher. Per aprire tale finestra eseguire una delle seguenti azioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione <guimenuitem>Aggiungi</guimenuitem> dal menu a discesa <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Aggiungi publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestisci publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Nella finestra Gestisci publisher, selezionare il pulsante <guibutton>Aggiungi</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "Nella finestra Aggiungi publisher, eseguire i passaggi seguenti per aggiungere un publisher di pacchetto IPS:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "Nel campo URI, immettere l'URI del publisher. L'URI corrisponde a un percorso di rete come <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> o <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "Nel campo Alias, è possibile immettere un nome alternativo per questo publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Aggiungi</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Aggiunta publisher. Fare clic su <guibutton>Annulla</guibutton> per annullare il processo. Fare clic su Dettagli per visualizzare informazioni dettagliate."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "Se il nuovo publisher viene aggiunto con successo, viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Aggiunta publisher completata e vengono mostrati nome, alias e URI del nuovo publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "Se non viene aggiunto il nuovo publisher, viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Errore del publisher con informazioni relative al problema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "Il nuovo publisher corrisponde all'ultimo publisher elencato nella finestra Gestisci publisher ed è attivato e sticky."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "Vedere <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> per informazioni sulla modifica della proprietà del nuovo publisher, delle impostazioni attivato e sticky e dell'alias del publisher, dell'aggiunta di un'origine del publisher, dell'impostazione di un certificato SSL, di una chiave SSL e di un mirror del publisher e della gestione di criteri firma e certificati del publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "Modifica dei publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Per modificare gli attributi di un publisher, selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestisci publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. I publisher attualmente configurati sono elencati nella finestra Gestisci publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Nella finestra Gestisci publisher è possibile modificare la priorità di un publisher, attivare o disattivare un publisher, impostare il publisher come sticky o non-sticky e rimuovere un publisher. Vedere <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> e <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Modifica</guibutton> per aprire la finestra Modifica publisher. Nella finestra Modifica publisher è possibile modificare l'alias del publisher, aggiungere o rimuovere un'origine e un mirror del publisher, impostare un certificato e una chiave SSL e gestire criteri firma e certificati del publisher. Vedere <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> e <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "Modifica della priorità e della persistenza"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestisci publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per visualizzare la finestra Gestisci publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Priorità del publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "I publisher sono elencati in ordine di priorità nella finestra Gestisci publisher. Il publisher nella parte superiore dell'elenco è il publisher con la priorità superiore. Il publisher nella parte inferiore dell'elenco è il publisher con priorità inferiore."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "Il publisher in cima all'elenco è noto inoltre come publisher preferito."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "Non è possibile disabilitare o rimuovere il publisher preferito."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "Quando si cercano pacchetti e non si specifica un publisher, la ricerca viene eseguita prima sui cataloghi con priorità superiore."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "Quando si esegue l'aggiornamento a un pacchetto installato da un publisher non-sticky, la ricerca di aggiornamenti viene eseguita prima sui cataloghi con priorità superiore."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per modificare la priorità di un publisher, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Fare clic per evidenziare una riga di un publisher nell'elenco della finestra Gestisci publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "Fare clic sui pulsanti <guibutton>Su</guibutton> e <guibutton>Giù</guibutton> a destra dell'elenco del publisher per aumentare o diminuire la priorità del publisher selezionato. L'elenco del publisher selezionato si muove verso l'alto o verso il basso nell'elenco per mostrare la nuova priorità."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "Se il publisher selezionato è un publisher di sistema, i pulsanti <guibutton>Su</guibutton> e <guibutton>Giù</guibutton> sono disattivati. Poiché non è possibile modificare la priorità di un publisher di sistema, non è possibile diminuire la priorità del publisher con la priorità maggiore più vicina sopra al publisher di sistema; inoltre, non è possibile aumentare la priorità di un publisher con la priorità minore più vicina sotto al publisher di sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella parte inferiore della finestra Gestisci publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "Attivato e sticky"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "Quando si aggiunge un publisher, gli attributi attivato e sticky vengono impostati di default. Non è possibile disattivare il publisher preferito (vedere <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> sopra). Non è consentito disattivare un publisher di sistema, né modificare l'impostazione sticky di un publisher di sistema. Tutte le altre impostazioni sticky e attivato possono essere modificate."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "Se viene impostato l'attributo sticky per un publisher, non è quindi possibile che un pacchetto installato da tale publisher venga aggiornato da un publisher diverso. Se non viene impostato l'attributo sticky per un publisher, tale publisher è non-sticky. In questo caso, un pacchetto originariamente derivato da tale publisher può essere aggiornato da un altro publisher. Un publisher diverso potrebbe presentare una versione più recente di un pacchetto rispetto al publisher originale del pacchetto. Se si desidera eseguire l'aggiornamento alla versione più recente, è necessario che il publisher originale sia non-sticky. Inoltre, se un publisher con priorità inferiore è non-sticky, la ricerca di aggiornamenti per i pacchetti installati da tale publisher non-sticky inizierà dai publisher con priorità maggiore."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "La ricerca di aggiornamenti o pacchetti da installare non avviene in un publisher disattivato. Inoltre, non viene eseguito il refresh dei cataloghi di un publisher disattivato. Un publisher disattivato non viene visualizzato nel menu a discesa <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per modificare le impostazioni Attivato e Sticky di un publisher, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestisci publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per aprire la finestra Gestisci publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "Fare clic sulla casella Attivato o Sticky per attivare o disattivare le relative impostazioni."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "Modifica di alias, origini e mirror"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "Selezionare il publisher che si desidera modificare. Il riquadro Dettagli sotto l'elenco dei publisher nella finestra Gestisci publisher consente di visualizzare le origini correnti del publisher selezionato."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Modifica</guibutton> a destra dell'elenco dei publisher per aprire la finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Se il publisher selezionato è un publisher di sistema, il pulsante <guibutton>Modifica</guibutton> è disattivato. Il riquadro Dettagli indica che il publisher selezionato è un publisher di sistema e viene visualizzato un messaggio che informa che non è possibile modificare o rimuovere tale publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "Selezionare la scheda Generale per modificare l'alias del publisher, aggiungere e rimuovere le origini e aggiungere e rimuovere i mirror."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Alias publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "L'alias del publisher corrisponde a un altro nome per il publisher. Il nome dell'alias viene utilizzato nel menu a discesa <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> e nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per modificare l'alias di questo publisher, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "Nella scheda Generale della finestra Modifica publisher, immettere un nuovo nome nel campo Alias."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Fare clic su <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella parte inferiore della finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "L'alias del publisher è stato modificato nella finestra Gestisci publisher. Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella parte inferiore della finestra Gestisci publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Origini dei publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "Un'origine corrisponde alla posizione di un archivio o repository di pacchetto IPS che contiene entrambi i metadati di pacchetto (cataloghi e manifesti di pacchetto) e i contenuti di pacchetto (file di pacchetto)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "Un valore di origine corrisponde all'URI di un repository di pacchetto IPS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per modificare, aggiungere o rimuovere un'origine per questo publisher, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Selezionare la scheda Generale della finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "Aggiungere un'origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "Nel campo Origine, immettere l'URI della nuova origine che si desidera associare a questo publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Aggiungi</guibutton>. Il nuovo URI viene aggiunto all'elenco sotto il campo Origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "Rimuovere un'origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "Nell'elenco sotto il campo Origine, selezionare l'URI che si desidera eliminare."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Rimuovi</guibutton>. L'URI selezionato viene rimosso dall'elenco. Se viene definita una sola origine per questo publisher, non è possibile rimuovere tale origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "Modificare un'origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "Aggiungere la nuova origine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "Eliminare l'origine che si desidera modificare."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Le modifiche all'origine vengono visualizzate nel riquadro Dettagli della finestra Gestisci publisher. Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella parte inferiore della finestra Gestisci publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Mirror dei publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "Un mirror corrisponde alla posizione di un repository di pacchetto IPS contenente solo il contenuto del pacchetto (file di pacchetto). Un mirror non contiene metadati di pacchetti (cataloghi e manifesti di pacchetto). I mirror forniscono un sottoinsieme dei dati forniti dalle origini e possono inoltre essere utilizzati solo per scaricare i file di pacchetto. Il metadato del pacchetto viene scaricato dall'origine. I client IPS eseguono l'accesso all'origine per ottenere un catalogo del publisher, anche quando i client scaricano il contenuto del pacchetto da un mirror."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per aggiungere, rimuovere o modificare un mirror per questo publisher, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "Fare clic sull'etichetta relativa ai mirror per visualizzare il campo Mirror e l'elenco dei mirror."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "Aggiungere un mirror."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "Nel campo Mirror, immettere l'URI del nuovo mirror che si desidera associare a questo publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Aggiungi</guibutton>. Il nuovo URI viene aggiunto all'elenco sotto il campo Mirror."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "Rimuovere un mirror."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "Nell'elenco sotto il campo Mirror, selezionare l'URI che si desidera eliminare."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Rimuovi</guibutton>. L'URI selezionato viene rimosso dall'elenco."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "Modificare un mirror."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "Eliminare il mirror che si desidera modificare."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "Aggiungere un nuovo mirror."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "Gestione della sicurezza del publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "I certificati vengono utilizzati per verificare che i pacchetti siano stati correttamente firmati prima dell'installazione, a seconda dei criteri firma dell'immagine o del publisher (in base all'opzione che presenta la restrizione maggiore)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "Selezionare il publisher del quale si desidera modificare la sicurezza."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Modifica</guibutton> a destra dell'elenco dei publisher per aprire la finestra Modifica publisher. Il publisher selezionato nella finestra Gestisci publisher viene elencato nel titolo della finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "Selezionare la scheda Generale per aggiungere il certificato e la chiave SSL se un publisher ha un'origine sicura."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "Selezionare la scheda Certificati per gestire i certificati per questo publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "Selezionare la scheda Criteri firma per gestire i criteri firma di questo publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "Aggiunta di certificati e chiavi SSL"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "Se un publisher ha un'origine sicura, aggiungere il certificato e la chiave SSL del publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Fare clic sulla scheda Generale della finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "Fare clic sull'etichetta Chiave e certificato SSL per visualizzare i campi Chiave SSL e Certificato SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Sfoglia</guibutton> a destra del campo Chiave SSL per selezionare il file relativo alla chiave SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Sfoglia</guibutton> a destra del campo Certificato SSL per selezionare il file relativo al certificato SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "Gestione dei certificati"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Fare clic sulla scheda Certificati della finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "Utilizzare i pulsanti sotto l'elenco dei certificati per aggiungere un certificato o rimuovere, revocare o ripristinare il certificato attualmente selezionato nell'elenco."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "Tenere presente che qualsiasi azione eseguita nella finestra Modifica publisher viene applicata ai certificati del publisher selezionato solo dopo aver fatto clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella parte inferiore della finestra Modifica publisher. Se si fa clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Annulla</guibutton> non verrà applicata alcuna modifica."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Aggiungi</guibutton>. Aggiungere un nuovo certificato del publisher al publisher elencato nel titolo della finestra Modifica publisher. Nella finestra Aggiungi certificato publisher, individuare e selezionare il file di certificato (<tt>.pem</tt>). Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella parte inferiore della finestra Aggiungi certificato publisher. Il certificato appena aggiunto viene selezionato nell'elenco dei certificati della scheda Certificati nella finestra Modifica publisher. Il riquadro dei dettagli indica che questo certificato è contrassegnato per l'aggiunta. Il certificato verrà aggiunto dopo aver fatto clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "Nell'elenco dei certificati per questo publisher, selezionare il certificato che si desidera modificare o i cui dettagli è necessario verificare. I dettagli relativi al certificato selezionato vengono visualizzati sotto l'elenco dei certificati e la riga dei pulsanti. Tenere presente che è comunque possibile approvare un certificato scaduto e utilizzarlo per convalidare i pacchetti firmati pubblicati (non necessariamente installati) prima della scadenza del certificato."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "Fare clic sulle intestazioni dell'elenco di certificati per riordinare l'elenco. È possibile ridimensionare le colonne Organizzazione e Nome."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Rimuovi</guibutton>. Rimuovere il certificato attualmente selezionato nell'elenco dei certificati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Revoca</guibutton>. Se il certificato attualmente selezionato nell'elenco dei certificati è Approvato, fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Revoca</guibutton> per applicare l'attributo revocato a questo certificato. Nell'elenco dei certificati, lo Stato di questo certificato viene modificato in Revocato. Questa modifica viene applicata al certificato dopo aver fatto clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Ripristina</guibutton>. Se il certificato attualmente selezionato nell'elenco dei certificati è Revocato, fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Ripristina</guibutton> per applicare l'attributo approvato a questo certificato. Nel riquadro dei dettagli il certificato è contrassegnato per il ripristino. Questo certificato verrà ripristinato dopo aver fatto clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "Gestione dei criteri firma"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Fare clic sulla scheda Criteri firma della finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "Utilizzare i pulsanti della scheda Criteri firma per impostare i criteri firma da utilizzare durante l'installazione dei pacchetti dal publisher elencato nel titolo della finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "Per impostare i criteri firma globali, utilizzare la scheda Criteri firma della finestra Preferenze (vedere <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "Le firme vengono ignorate: ignorare le firme per tutti i pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "Le firme sono opzionali, ma devono essere valide se fornite: verificare che tutti i pacchetti con firme siano correttamente firmati; non è necessario che tutti i pacchetti installati siano firmati."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "Sono necessarie una o più firme valide: richiedere che tutti i pacchetti appena installati possiedano almeno una firma valida."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "Sono necessarie le firme e il nome del certificato deve includere il nome o i nomi specificati nel campo del testo quando vengono convalidate le firme di un pacchetto. Se vengono specificati più nomi devono essere separati da virgole."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "Rimozione dei publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Per rimuovere un publisher, attenersi alla seguente procedura:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "Selezionare il publisher che si desidera rimuovere."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Rimuovi</guibutton> a destra dell'elenco dei publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Se il publisher selezionato è un publisher di sistema, viene disattivato il pulsante <guibutton>Rimuovi</guibutton>. Il riquadro Dettagli indica che il publisher selezionato è un publisher di sistema e viene visualizzato un messaggio che informa circa l'impossibilità di modificare o rimuovere questo publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Gestione degli ambienti di boot"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "Un ambiente di boot è un'immagine bootable. Nel sistema Oracle Solaris possono essere presenti più ambienti di boot. Un ambiente di boot è l'ambiente di boot di default all'avvio o al reboot. Sono disponibili più ambienti di boot come selezioni di boot alternative. L'ambiente di boot in uso è quello attivo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "È possibile utilizzare il comando <literal>beadm</literal>(1) per creare, rinominare, attivare, disattivare o distruggere gli ambienti di boot. Per informazioni complete sugli ambienti di boot, vedere <citetitle>Creazione e gestione degli ambienti di boot dopo l'installazione</citetitle>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "Package Manager fornisce un sottoinsieme delle funzionalità offerte dal comando <literal>beadm</literal>(1). Utilizzare l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestione ambienti di boot</guimenuitem></menuchoice> di Package Manager per aprire la finestra Gestione ambienti di boot. Nella finestra Gestione ambienti di boot vengono elencati gli ambienti di boot nel sistema ed è possibile attivare, rinominare ed eliminare tali ambienti come descritto di seguito."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "Creazione di un ambiente di boot"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Un nuovo ambiente di boot viene creato automaticamente quando si esegue una delle azioni seguenti:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "Installare il sistema operativo Oracle Solaris."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "Installare o aggiornare pacchetti di sistema chiave particolari come alcuni driver e altri componenti kernel."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "Utilizzare il comando <literal>beadm create</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Spesso viene creato un nuovo ambiente di boot all'esecuzione del comando <literal>pkg update</literal> o si utilizza il pulsante <guibutton>Aggiornamenti</guibutton> per aggiornare tutti i pacchetti con aggiornamenti disponibili."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "Attivazione di un ambiente di boot"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestione ambienti di boot</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per aprire la finestra Gestione ambienti di boot. Ogni ambiente di boot viene elencato nella finestra. Nell'ambiente di boot in uso viene visualizzato un segno di spunta a sinistra del nome dell'ambiente di boot."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per specificare un ambiente di boot diverso come ambiente di boot attivo di default dopo il successivo reboot, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "Selezionare il pulsante <guibutton>Attivo al reboot</guibutton> per l'ambiente di boot che si desidera impostare come ambiente di boot attivo di default dopo il successivo reboot."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "Selezionare il pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> nella finestra Gestione ambienti di boot."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "Ridenominazione di un ambiente di boot"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestione ambienti di boot</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per aprire la finestra Gestione ambienti di boot. Nella finestra vengono elencati tutti gli ambienti di boot."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "Non è possibile rinominare l'ambiente di boot attivo corrente."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "Non è possibile rinominare un ambiente di boot che è stato contrassegnato per l'eliminazione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per rinominare un ambiente di boot, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "Fare doppio clic sul nome dell'ambiente di boot che si desidera rinominare. È ora possibile modificare il campo del nome."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "Immettere il nuovo nome."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "Rimozione di un ambiente di boot"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gestione ambienti di boot</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per aprire la finestra Gestione ambienti di boot. Nella finestra vengono elencati tutti gli ambienti di boot. La colonna più a destra nella finestra corrisponde alla colonna Elimina."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "Nella colonna centrale della finestra Gestione ambienti di boot viene visualizzata la dimensione dell'ambiente di boot. È possibile, se si desidera, rimuovere un ambiente di boot per liberare spazio nell'unità di memorizzazione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "Non è possibile eliminare l'ambiente di boot attualmente attivo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "Non è possibile eliminare un ambiente di boot che è stato rinominato."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per eliminare un ambiente di boot, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Selezionare la casella <guibutton>Elimina</guibutton> dell'ambiente di boot che si desidera eliminare."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Utilizzo di WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Package Manager supporta l'installazione di pacchetti tramite un semplice processo WebInstall. Il processo WebInstall utilizza un file <filename>.p5i</filename>. Un file <filename>.p5i</filename> contiene informazioni per aggiungere publisher e pacchetti che possono essere installati da questi publisher. L'informazione nel file <filename>.p5i</filename> viene letta e utilizzata dal processo WebInstall."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "Esportazione di file tramite WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "Se si desidera consentire ad altri utenti di installare pacchetti già installati sul proprio sistema, è possibile esportare le istruzioni di installazione per quei file di pacchetto tramite il processo WebInstall. Viene creato un file <filename>.p5i</filename> contenente le istruzioni di installazione per i pacchetti e i publisher da installare."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Per esportare le istruzioni di installazione dei pacchetti selezionati e dei relativi publisher in un file <filename>.p5i</filename>, eseguire le seguenti operazioni:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Nel menu a discesa <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu>, selezionare il publisher dal quale si desidera includere i pacchetti nel file <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "Nel riquadro dell'elenco dei pacchetti, selezionare il pacchetto del quale si desidera distribuire le istruzioni di installazione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "Fare clic su <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Esporta selezioni</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per visualizzare la finestra Conferma esportazione selezioni."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> per confermare le selezioni. Viene visualizzata la finestra Esporta selezioni."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "Viene fornito un nome di default per il file <filename>p5i</filename> con l'estensione <filename>.p5i</filename>. È possibile modificare questo nome file, ma non cambiare l'estensione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "Viene fornita una posizione di default per il file <filename>p5i</filename>. È possibile modificare la posizione. Se si utilizza il pulsante <guibutton>Sfoglia</guibutton>, è possibile selezionare l'opzione <filename>File p5i</filename> dal menu a discesa nella parte inferiore destra della finestra Esporta selezioni per visualizzare solo i file <filename>.p5i</filename> nell'elenco dei file."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Salva</guibutton> per salvare la posizione e il nome del file."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Utilizzo di WebInstall per aggiungere publisher e installare pacchetti"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Il processo WebInstall consente di installare pacchetti mediante un file <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "Individuare il file <filename>.p5i</filename>. Questo file potrebbe trovarsi sul desktop o su un sito Web."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "Utilizzare uno dei metodi seguenti per avviare Package Manager in modalità WebInstall:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "Fare clic su un file <filename>.p5i</filename> sul desktop. Viene avviata l'applicazione associata (Programma di installazione Web Package Manager)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "Avviare Package Manager dalla riga di comando con un percorso in un file <filename>.p5i</filename>. Ad esempio, immettere il seguente comando:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "Individuare una posizione URL contenente un collegamento a un file <filename>.p5i</filename>. È necessario posizionare il file <filename>.p5i</filename> in un server Web con questo tipo di MIME registrato."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "Se il file <filename>.p5i</filename> è posizionato in un server Web che non contiene questo tipo di MIME registrato, salvare il file <filename>.p5i</filename> sul desktop, quindi fare clic su di esso per avviare WebInstall."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "Viene visualizzata la finestra Installa/Aggiorna. L'etichetta nella parte superiore della finestra è la seguente: \"Programma di installazione Web Package Manager/Al sistema verrà aggiunto quanto segue:\". Vengono quindi elencati i publisher e i pacchetti. Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Continua</guibutton> per proseguire l'installazione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "Se il publisher del pacchetto non è ancora configurato nel sistema, viene visualizzata la finestra Aggiungi publisher. Il nome e l'URI del publisher sono già inseriti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "Se i publisher da aggiungere sono sicuri, sono necessari un certificato e una chiave SSL. Individuare il certificato e la chiave SSL nel sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "Nella finestra di dialogo Aggiunta publisher completata viene indicato se l'aggiunta del publisher è avvenuta con successo. Fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>OK</guibutton> per proseguire l'installazione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "Se un file <filename>.p5i</filename> contiene pacchetti da un publisher disattivato, WebInstall consente di visualizzare una finestra di dialogo Abilita publisher. Utilizzare questa finestra di dialogo per attivare il publisher ed essere quindi in grado di installare i pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "La finestra Installa/Aggiorna corrisponde ora esattamente all'opzione di selezione <guibutton>Installa/Aggiorna</guibutton> da Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "Risoluzione dei problemi"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "Messaggi informativi, di errore e di avviso vengono salvati in un log così da poter essere disponibili in ogni momento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "Visualizzazione dei log messaggi"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Visualizza</guimenu><guimenuitem>Log</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per aprire la finestra Log. Nella finestra Log vengono visualizzati messaggi informativi, di avviso e di errore da Package Manager e Update Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "Selezionare il pulsante <guibutton>Cancella</guibutton> nella parte inferiore della finestra Log per eliminare tutti i messaggi."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "Se viene registrato un errore o un avviso, viene visualizzato un triangolo giallo a sinistra della barra di stato. Fare clic su di esso per visualizzare la finestra Log."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "Impostazione preferenze"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "Utilizzare l'opzione menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Modifica</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferenze</guimenuitem></menuchoice> per modificare alcune delle impostazioni dell'interfaccia utente di Package Manager."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "La finestra Preferenze è composta da tre schede:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "La scheda Generale consente di impostare le preferenze di uscita e della finestra di conferma."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "La scheda Componenti opzionali consente di impostare le preferenze sui componenti dei pacchetti opzionali da installare quando si installa o aggiorna un pacchetto."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "La scheda Criteri firma consente di impostare i criteri firma per questa immagine."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Uscita dalle preferenze"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Modifica</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferenze</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e selezionare la scheda Generale."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Se viene selezionata la casella \"Ricorda stato attuale all'uscita\", Package Manager consente di salvare le impostazioni seguenti e di ripristinarle al successivo avvio di Package Manager:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Separatori verticali e orizzontali</emphasis> — larghezze e altezze dei riquadri nella finestra"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Dimensione della finestra</emphasis> — dimensione totale della finestra Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Opzione publisher</emphasis> — il publisher o altre opzioni selezionate nel menu a discesa <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> quando viene chiuso Package Manager"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categorie</emphasis> — la categoria selezionata e le categorie espanse o compresse per ciascun publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferenze della finestra di conferma"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "Quando viene installato, aggiornato o rimosso un pacchetto, viene visualizzata una finestra di conferma che mostra l'elenco dei pacchetti e delle azioni da eseguire. Se non si desidera visualizzare tali finestre di conferma, deselezionare queste selezioni nella finestra Preferenze."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "È inoltre possibile annullare l'impostazione di questa preferenza per una particolare finestra di conferma facendo clic sulla casella di controllo \"Non mostrare più questa finestra di conferma\" nella finestra."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferenze dei criteri firma"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Utilizzare i pulsanti della scheda Criteri firma per ignorare o richiedere firme durante l'installazione dei pacchetti in questa immagine. Per impostare criteri firma per i publisher specificati, selezionare il publisher nella finestra Gestisci publisher, fare clic sul pulsante <guibutton>Modifica</guibutton> e utilizzare la scheda Criteri firma della finestra Modifica publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "Le scelte effettuate per i criteri firma dell'immagine corrispondono a quelle dei criteri firma del publisher, tranne per l'applicazione delle impostazioni a tutti i pacchetti installati nell'immagine, non solo ai pacchetti installati da un publisher particolare. Vedere <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "Lingua scelta per le preferenze dei componenti opzionali"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "Selezionare l'opzione <menuchoice><guimenu>Modifica</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferenze</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e scegliere la scheda Componenti opzionali."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "Viene selezionata di default l'opzione Installa tutte le lingue nella selezione relativa alla lingua scelta per ciascun pacchetto. È possibile risparmiare spazio di installazione selezionando un sottoinsieme di lingue da installare."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "Quando è selezionata l'opzione Installa solo queste lingue, è possibile fare clic sull'icona della casella di controllo nell'intestazione della colonna più a sinistra dell'elenco delle lingue per selezionare tutte le lingue. Fare nuovamente clic sull'intestazione della colonna per deselezionare tutte le lingue. Fare clic sulle intestazioni delle colonne Lingua e Area per ordinare l'elenco."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "Fare clic sul pulsante OK per salvare le modifiche. Queste impostazioni hanno effetto sui pacchetti attualmente installati, nonché sugli aggiornamenti e le installazioni di futuri pacchetti. L'immagine viene aggiornata per poter installare o rimuovere componenti di pacchetti opzionali basati sulle nuove impostazioni."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "Se l'immagine è stata aggiornata in precedenza per consentire di includere solo un sottoinsieme di lingue, l'opzione Installa solo queste lingue viene impostata di default in questa finestra; l'elenco delle lingue viene visualizzato in grigio se si seleziona l'opzione Installa tutte le lingue."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "Altre preferenze dei componenti opzionali"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "In Altre scelte di componenti vengono selezionate di default le opzioni Installa tutti i file di sviluppo e Installa tutta la documentazione. È possibile risparmiare spazio di installazione deselezionando i file di sviluppo o la documentazione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "Glossario"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "alias"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Un altro nome per indicare un publisher."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "ambiente di boot"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "Un'istanza di un ambiente Oracle Solaris bootable. Il file system root e tutti gli altri file system dell'ambiente di boot contenenti software di sistema devono corrispondere a set di dati ZFS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "L'ambiente di boot attivo è quello in cui è attualmente eseguito il boot. Un sistema può presentare più ambienti di boot. È possibile selezionare quello desiderato quando viene eseguito il reboot."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "clone"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Una copia esatta."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Può trattarsi di una copia esatta di un sistema operativo, di un file system o di un volume. Questa copia è compatibile al 100% con l'originale."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "set di dati"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Un nome generico per le seguenti entità ZFS: copie, file system, istantanee o volumi. Ciascun set di dati è identificato da un nome univoco nello spazio di nomi ZFS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "immagine"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "Una raccolta di software di sistemi operativi in un pacchetto in cui è possibile eseguire il boot e l'installazione."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "Una posizione nel sistema in cui è possibile installare i pacchetti e i relativi file, directory, collegamenti e dipendenze."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "origine"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "Un server di pacchetti in cui un publisher pubblica i pacchetti."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "pacchetto"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Raccolta di file, directory, link, driver e dipendenze in un formato definito."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "publisher"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "Persona, gruppo o azienda che progetta, crea e pubblica un pacchetto in un server di pacchetti. Il server di pacchetti, a sua volta, gestisce i pacchetti dal publisher (default) per consentire lo scaricamento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "publisher di sistema"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "I publisher di sistema sono publisher speciali utilizzati in immagini collegate e in zone non globali in particolare, per garantire la sincronizzazione di determinati pacchetti con la zona globale. La zona globale limita i pacchetti all'interno delle zone non globali configurando questi publisher di sistema speciali nella zona non globale. Vengono definiti speciali poiché non è possibile eseguire determinate modifiche su di essi nelle zone non globali, comprese rimozione, disattivazione o modifica della priorità."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "Traduzione"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/it/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/ja/ja.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 パッケージマネージャーオンラインヘルプ"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "2011 年 6 月"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "このソフトウェアおよび関連ドキュメントの使用と開示は、ライセンス契約の制約条件に従うものとし、知的財産に関する法律により保護されています。ライセンス契約で明示的に許諾されている場合もしくは法律によって認められている場合を除き、形式、手段に関係なく、いかなる部分も使用、複写、複製、翻訳、放送、修正、ライセンス供与、送信、配布、発表、実行、公開または表示することはできません。このソフトウェアのリバース・エンジニアリング、逆アセンブル、逆コンパイルは互換性のために法律によって規定されている場合を除き、禁止されています。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "ここに記載された情報は予告なしに変更される場合があります。また、誤りが無いことの保証はいたしかねます。誤りを見つけた場合は、オラクル社までご連絡ください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "このソフトウェアまたは関連ドキュメントを、米国政府機関もしくは米国政府機関に代わってこのソフトウェアまたは関連ドキュメントをライセンスされた者に提供する場合は、次の通知が適用されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "このソフトウェアもしくはハードウェアは様々な情報管理アプリケーションでの一般的な使用のために開発されたものです。このソフトウェアもしくはハードウェアは、危険が伴うアプリケーション （人的傷害を発生させる可能性があるアプリケーションを含む） への用途を目的として開発されていません。このソフトウェアもしくはハードウェアを危険が伴うアプリケーションで使用する際、安全に使用するために、適切な安全装置、バックアップ、冗長性 （redundancy）、その他の対策を講じることは使用者の責任となります。このソフトウェアもしくはハードウェアを危険が伴うアプリケーションで使用したことに起因して損害が発生しても、オラクル社およびその関連会社は一切の責任を負いかねます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle と Java は Oracle Corporation およびその関連企業の登録商標です。その他の名称は、それぞれの所有者の商標または登録商標です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD、Opteron、AMDロゴ、AMD Opteronロゴは、Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.の商標または登録商標です。Intel、Intel Xeonは、Intel Corporationの商標または登録商標です。すべてのSPARCの商標はライセンスをもとに使用し、SPARC International, Inc.の商標または登録商標です。UNIXはX/Open Company, Ltd.からライセンスされている登録商標です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "このソフトウェアまたはハードウェア、そしてドキュメントは、第三者のコンテンツ、製品、サービスへのアクセス、あるいはそれらに関する情報を提供することがあります。オラクル社およびその関連会社は、第三者のコンテンツ、製品、サービスに関して一切の責任を負わず、いかなる保証もいたしません。オラクル社およびその関連会社は、第三者のコンテンツ、製品、サービスへのアクセスまたは使用によって損失、費用、あるいは損害が発生しても一切の責任を負いかねます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーについて"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーは、Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) のグラフィカルユーザーインタフェース (GUI) です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "このマニュアルで使用されている用語の定義については、<xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) は、ネットワーク上のパッケージリポジトリと対話するソフトウェア配布システムです。IPS は、ソフトウェアのインストール、アップグレード、削除といったソフトウェアのライフサイクル管理機能を提供するフレームワークです。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris オペレーティングシステムのインストールのあと、使用したいソフトウェアのいくつかが使用可能ではない場合があります。このソフトウェアは、IPS パッケージリポジトリに用意されている可能性があります。パッケージマネージャーまたは <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) コマンドを使用して、パッケージリポジトリからパッケージをダウンロードしてインストールすることができます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "IPS では、既存の IPS パッケージリポジトリのコピーを作成すること、ユーザー独自の IPS パッケージリポジトリを作成すること、およびユーザー独自の IPS パッケージを発行することもできます。IPS の詳細については、Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library を参照してください。<literal>download.oracle.com</literal> にアクセスして、左側の「Documentation Index」を選択し、「Systems Software」、「Oracle Solaris 11」、「View Library」の順に選択します。特に、『<citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>』を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャー"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーでは、IPS コマンド行インタフェースで提供されている機能の一部を実行できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーを使用すると、次のタスクを実行できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "IPS パッケージの検索、インストール、更新、および削除。<xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "システムの更新 (システム上にあるすべてのパッケージの更新)。<xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "IPS パッケージ発行元の追加、変更、および削除。<xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "ブート環境の一覧表示、名前の変更、削除、および管理。<xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "WebInstall インストールファイル (<filename>.p5i</filename>) の作成。<xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "このマニュアルでは、パッケージマネージャーウィンドウの次の機能について説明します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "ウィンドウ中央の大きいペインはパッケージリストペインです。このペインには、情報メッセージが表示されることもありますが、通常はパッケージのリストが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "ウィンドウ上部のメニューバーには、パッケージマネージャーの機能のほとんどが用意されています。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "メニューバーのすぐ下にあるツールバーの左側には、頻繁に使用されるいくつかの操作のボタンがあります。セパレータの左側にあるボタンはグローバルな機能を持ち、使用可能な更新が存在するすべてのパッケージを更新したり、パッケージとパッケージのステータスのリストをリフレッシュしたりできます。セパレータの右側にあるボタンは、選択されているパッケージのみを操作します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "ツールバーの右側の「検索」フィールドを利用すると、パッケージリストペインの内容を制御できます。<xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "ボタンの下にある<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニューを使用すると、パッケージリストペインの内容を制御できるほか、新しい発行元を追加することもできます。<xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/>の「発行元別」を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "「検索」フィールドの下にある<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニューを使用すると、パッケージリストペインの内容を制御できます。「パッケージの一覧表示」の「パッケージステータス別」を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューの下にあるカテゴリペインを使用すると、パッケージリストペインの内容を制御できます。「パッケージの一覧表示」の「カテゴリ別」を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "ソフトウェアカテゴリのリストの下に、このセッションで実行した検索のリストがあります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "パッケージリストペインの下に、パッケージの詳細ペインがあります。<xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "パッケージの管理"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "さまざまな条件に従ってパッケージを一覧表示できます。パッケージのインストール、更新、および削除を行うことができます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "パッケージの一覧表示"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーのリストペインに表示されるパッケージのリストは、<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニュー、<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニュー、カテゴリペイン、および「検索」フィールドで選択した内容に影響されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "列見出しをクリックしてパッケージリストの順序を変更できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「リフレッシュ」</guibutton>ボタンまたは<menuchoice><guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「リフレッシュ」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを使用すると、リポジトリカタログを再度読み込み、パッケージとパッケージのステータスのリストを更新できます。パッケージマネージャーを開いたときにも毎回リフレッシュが試みられます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "発行元別"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu> ドロップダウンメニューを使用すると、発行元に基づいてパッケージを一覧表示できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "メニューの上部には、「発行元を追加」ダイアログまたは <literal>pkg</literal> コマンドを使用して追加した各発行元の名前が表示されます。これらの発行元の 1 つを選択すると、その発行元から利用できるパッケージだけがパッケージリストペインに表示されます。発行元はどのパッケージについても同じなので、パッケージリストペインには「名前」、「ステータス」、および「サマリー」列だけが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元」</guimenuitem> - すべての発行元のパッケージをパッケージリストペインに表示します。パッケージリストペインには「名前」、「ステータス」、「発行元」、および「サマリー」列が表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "例: すべての発行元のメディアデバイスドライバで、使用可能な更新が存在するものをすべて表示するには、<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューから<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元」</guimenuitem>を選択し、<menuchoice><guimenu>「ドライバ」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「メディア」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>カテゴリを選択し、<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューから<guimenuitem>「更新」</guimenuitem>を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「すべてのインストール済みパッケージ」</guimenuitem> — すべての発行元からインストールしたすべてのパッケージを表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "例: <literal>solaris</literal> 発行元のフォントパッケージで、現在インストールされているものをすべて表示するには、<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューから<guimenuitem>「すべてのインストール済みパッケージ」</guimenuitem>を選択し、<menuchoice><guimenu>「システム」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「フォント」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>カテゴリを選択し、「発行元」列見出しをクリックしてリストを発行元別にソートし、<literal>solaris</literal> エントリまで下へスクロールします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元 (検索)」</guimenuitem> - パッケージリストペインにパッケージのリストではなく情報メッセージを表示します。メッセージには、構成済みの発行元の一覧と、それらの発行元からのすべてのパッケージを表示する方法が示されます。<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元 (検索)」</guimenuitem>を使用した検索の詳細については、<xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「追加...」</guimenuitem> — 「発行元を追加」ウィンドウを開きます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "パッケージステータス別"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニューを使用すると、パッケージステータスに基づいてパッケージを一覧表示できます。パッケージステータスは、インストール済み、未インストール、更新利用可能のいずれかです。<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューに表示されるアイコンは、パッケージリストペインの「ステータス」列に表示されるアイコンと一致します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「すべてのパッケージ」</guimenuitem> — 選択した発行元の選択したカテゴリ内のパッケージまたは指定した検索文字列と一致するパッケージをすべて表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "例: <literal>solaris</literal> 発行元の Web サービスパッケージで、インストール済みのもの、インストールされていないもの、または使用可能な更新が存在するものをすべて表示するには、<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューから <literal>solaris</literal> を選択し、<menuchoice><guimenu>「Web サービス」</guimenu></menuchoice>カテゴリを選択し、<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューから<guimenuitem>「すべてのパッケージ」</guimenuitem>を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「インストール済みパッケージ」</guimenuitem> — 選択した発行元の選択したカテゴリ内のパッケージまたは指定した検索文字列と一致するパッケージで、インストール済みのものをすべて表示します。<menuchoice><guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「すべてのインストール済みパッケージ」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションも参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "例: <literal>solaris</literal> 発行元の Web サービスパッケージで、インストール済みのものだけを一覧表示するには、<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューから <literal>solaris</literal> を選択して、<menuchoice><guimenu>「Web サービス」</guimenu></menuchoice>カテゴリを選択し、<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューから<guimenuitem>「インストール済みパッケージ」</guimenuitem>を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「更新」</guimenuitem> — 選択した発行元の選択したカテゴリ内のパッケージまたは指定した検索文字列と一致するパッケージで、使用可能な更新が存在するものをすべて表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "例: すべての発行元のデバイスドライバで、使用可能な更新が存在するものをすべて表示するには、<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューから<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元」</guimenuitem>を選択し、<guimenu>「ドライバ」</guimenu>カテゴリを選択し、<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューから<guimenuitem>「更新」</guimenuitem>を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「インストールされていないパッケージ」</guimenuitem> — 選択した発行元の選択したカテゴリ内のパッケージまたは指定した検索文字列と一致するパッケージで、インストールされていないものをすべて表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "例: <literal>solaris</literal> 発行元のフォントパッケージで、現在インストールされていないものをすべて表示するには、<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューから <literal>solaris</literal> を選択し、<menuchoice><guimenu>「システム」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「フォント」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>カテゴリを選択し、<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューから<guimenuitem>「インストールされていないパッケージ」</guimenuitem>を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「選択したパッケージ」</guimenuitem> — 現在選択されているすべてのパッケージを表示します。<xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "カテゴリ別"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーウィンドウの左側のカテゴリペインでは、使用可能なパッケージをソフトウェアのタイプ別に参照できます。サブカテゴリを表示するにはカテゴリ名をクリックします。選択した発行元とパッケージステータス、および指定した検索条件に基づいて、選択したカテゴリまたはサブカテゴリのパッケージがパッケージリストペインに一覧表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "指定したタイプのソフトウェアに加え、カテゴリペインでは<guimenuitem>「すべてのカテゴリ」</guimenuitem>および<guimenuitem>「最近の検索」</guimenuitem>を選択することもできます。<guimenuitem>「最近の検索」</guimenuitem>の詳細については、<xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>の「以前の検索の繰り返し」を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "パッケージの検索"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "パッケージを検索するには、次の 2 つの方法のいずれかを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "パッケージリストペインにフォーカスを移動します (たとえば、<menuchoice><guimenu>「編集」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「パッケージリストへ移動」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>を選択し、入力を開始します。入力するにつれて、パッケージリストペインに現在表示されているパッケージの中で一致するものが特定されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "ツールバーの「検索」フィールドを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "検索文字列を入力します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "「検索」フィールドに文字列を入力したあと、Enter キーを押すか、「検索」フィールドの右にある虫めがねアイコンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューの選択 — パッケージマネージャーは、ユーザーが<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>メニューで選択した内容に基づいて、特定の発行元またはすべての発行元の各パッケージに関する情報内で検索文字列を検索します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元」</guimenuitem>または<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元 (検索)」</guimenuitem>のどちらを選択しても検索結果は同じです。相違点は、<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元」</guimenuitem>を選択するとすべての発行元のデータを読み込むため遅延が発生しますが、<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元 (検索)」</guimenuitem>を使用するとそれを回避して高速に検索できることです。<guimenuitem>「すべての発行元 (検索)」</guimenuitem>では、すべての発行元のデータをパッケージリストペインに読み込むことなく、すべての発行元に対して検索が実行されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューの選択 - <guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューで選択したパッケージステータスに基づいて、検索結果がパッケージリストペインに表示されます。<guimenu>「表示」</guimenu>メニューの選択を変更することにより、検索を再度実行することなく、同じ検索結果のさまざまな部分集合をパッケージリストペインに表示できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーは、名前、サマリー、説明、カテゴリ、パッケージ内に含まれるファイルの名前などのパッケージ情報を検索します。ワイルドカードを使用しない場合は、完全に一致するものだけが検索されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "AND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "検索語がスペースあるいは <literal>AND</literal> で区切られていると、パッケージマネージャーは<emphasis role=\"strong\">すべて</emphasis>の検索語を含むパッケージを検索します。これはデフォルトの検索動作です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "例: 検索文字列が <literal>python book</literal> または <literal>python AND book</literal> の場合は、パッケージ情報に <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>と</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> の<emphasis>両方</emphasis>を含むパッケージだけが検索結果に含まれます。たとえば、Python プログラミングに関する本 <literal>diveintopython</literal> は検索結果に含まれますが、パッケージ <literal>python-26</literal> は含まれません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "二重引用符"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "検索語と完全に一致するものを検索するには、検索語を二重引用符で囲みます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "例: 二重引用符で囲まれた <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> は、<literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> に一致しますが、<literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal> には一致しません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "ワイルドカード"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "検索文字列で <literal>*</literal> ワイルドカードを使用できます。ワイルドカードを使用すると遅くなる場合があります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "例: <literal>802.11*</literal> は <literal>802.11b/g</literal> と <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal> に一致します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>802.11*</literal> は <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal> には一致しません。<literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal> に一致するようにするには、検索文字列 <literal>*802.11*</literal> を使用してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "検索語が <literal>OR</literal> で区切られていると、パッケージマネージャーは検索語の<emphasis role=\"strong\">いずれか</emphasis>を含むパッケージを検索します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "例: <literal>python OR book</literal> は、パッケージ情報に <literal>python</literal> を含むすべてのパッケージと、パッケージ情報に <literal>book</literal> を含むすべてのパッケージに一致します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "これらの検索文字列修飾子は組み合わせることができます。AND、OR、二重引用符、および * をすべて 1 つの検索文字列で使用することができます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "検索フィールドの消去"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "検索文字列と検索結果リストの両方を消去するには、「検索」フィールドまたは「編集」メニューを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "「検索」フィールドで <literal>X</literal> アイコンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "<guimenu>「編集」</guimenu>メニューで<guimenuitem>「検索を消去」</guimenuitem>オプションを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "検索の取り消し"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "検索の実行中は、パッケージマネージャーウィンドウ下部のステータスバーの右端にビジーバーが表示されます。ビジーバーの右端に <literal>X</literal> アイコンがあります。実行中の検索を取り消すには、ビジーバーの <literal>X</literal> アイコンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "以前の検索結果の再表示"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "現在のパッケージマネージャーセッションですでに実行した検索の結果は、カテゴリペインの<guimenuitem>「最近の検索」</guimenuitem>に保存されています。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "カテゴリペインで<guimenuitem>「最近の検索」</guimenuitem>ラベルをクリックすると、パッケージリストペインに情報メッセージが表示されます。パッケージリストペインには以前の検索結果が表示されます。それらの結果を再表示するには、「結果」リンクをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「最近の検索」</guimenuitem>ラベルの左にある矢印をクリックすると、カテゴリペインで以前の検索結果のリストを展開したり非表示にしたりできます。最近の検索のリストで項目を選択すると、それらの検索結果が再表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "どのパッケージにも一致しなかった検索は最近の検索のリストに表示されません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「リフレッシュ」</guibutton>ボタンまたは<menuchoice><guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「リフレッシュ」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択すると、最近の検索結果がすべて削除されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "詳細情報の表示"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "パッケージに関する詳細情報をパッケージの詳細ペインまたは「パッケージのバージョン情報」ダイアログで確認します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "パッケージの詳細ペイン"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "パッケージに関する詳細情報を表示するには、パッケージリストでそのパッケージをマウスの左ボタンでクリックして強調表示します。パッケージリストペインの下にあるパッケージの詳細ペインに、この発行元から利用できる最新のバージョン、パッケージのサイズ、パッケージ内のファイル、依存関係、ライセンス契約条件といった情報が表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "パッケージのインストール後に名前が変更されている場合は、パッケージの新しい名前が「一般」タブの「変更後の名前」フィールドに表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "「バージョン」タブには、インストールに使用できるこのパッケージのバージョンのリストが表示されます。リストからバージョンを選択し、リストの右にある<guibutton>「インストール/更新」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックすると、そのバージョンをインストールできます。<xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "パッケージリストペインに情報メッセージが表示されている場合、パッケージの詳細ペインは表示されません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "パッケージのバージョン情報ダイアログ"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "パッケージリストでパッケージをマウスの右ボタンでクリックすると、<guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu>メニューがポップアップ表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "ポップアップメニューまたはメニューバーから<menuchoice><guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「パッケージのバージョン情報」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択すると、別のウィンドウが開き、インストールされているパッケージのバージョンと、該当する場合はインストールまたはアップグレードできる最新のバージョンが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "パッケージの選択"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "選択したパッケージをインストール、更新、または削除することができます。パッケージを選択するには、パッケージリストペインまたは<guimenu>「編集」</guimenu>メニューを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "パッケージリストペインで、次のいずれかの操作を実行してパッケージを選択します。複数のパッケージを選択することができます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "パッケージ名の左にあるボックスをクリックします。パッケージの選択を解除するには、ボックスを再度クリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "パッケージ名を 1 回クリックしてパッケージを強調表示します。次に、強調表示したパッケージをダブルクリックしてそのパッケージを選択します。パッケージの選択を解除するには、再度ダブルクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "列見出し内のチェックボックスアイコンをクリックして、パッケージリストペインに現在表示されているすべてのパッケージを選択します。パッケージリストペインに現在表示されているすべてのパッケージの選択を解除するには、チェックボックスアイコンを再度クリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "<guimenu>「編集」</guimenu>メニューには、パッケージを選択するための次のオプションがあります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「すべてを選択」</guimenuitem> - パッケージリストペインに現在表示されているすべてのパッケージを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「更新を選択」</guimenuitem> - パッケージリストペインに現在表示されているパッケージで、使用可能な更新が存在するものをすべて選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>「すべてを選択解除」</guimenuitem> - パッケージリストペインに現在表示されているすべてのパッケージの選択を解除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "どの場合でも、パッケージを 1 つ選択したとき、それまでに選択されていたパッケージは選択されたままになります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "パッケージリストペインに現在表示されているパッケージの数および選択されているパッケージの数が、パッケージマネージャーウィンドウ下部のステータスバーの左側に表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「すべての発行元」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプション、<guimenuitem>「すべてのカテゴリ」</guimenuitem>カテゴリ、および<menuchoice><guimenu>「表示」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「選択したパッケージ」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションを選択すると、すべての発行元のパッケージで、選択されているものがすべてパッケージリストペインに表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "パッケージは強調表示されていても、選択されていない場合があります。パッケージが強調表示されている場合、パッケージリストペインの下にあるパッケージの詳細ペインに、そのパッケージに関する詳細情報が表示されます。パッケージが選択されている場合、パッケージ名の左にあるボックスにチェックマークが表示されます。パッケージのインストール、更新、または削除を行う場合は、そのパッケージの選択ボックスにチェックマークが表示されていることを確認してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "パッケージのインストールと更新"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "インストールまたは更新の前に、「オプションのコンポーネント」設定を確認します。<menuchoice><guimenu>「編集」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「設定」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションを選択します。「設定」ウィンドウで「オプションのコンポーネント」タブを選択します。デフォルトでは、「すべての言語のインストール」、「すべての開発ファイルのインストール」、および「すべてのドキュメントのインストール」が選択されています。たとえば、一部の言語を選択してインストールしたり、開発ファイルの選択を解除したりすることで、インストールの領域を節約できます。「了解」ボタンをクリックして変更を保存します。これらの設定は、すべてのインストール済みパッケージおよび今後のパッケージのインストールと更新に適用されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "パッケージをインストールまたは更新するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "パッケージを選択します。<xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "パッケージをインストールまたは更新するには、次の方法のいずれかを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "ツールバーの<guibutton>「インストール/更新」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "メニューバーから<menuchoice><guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「インストール/更新」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "パッケージ名をマウスの右ボタンでクリックして<guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu>メニューをポップアップ表示します。次に、<guimenuitem>「インストール/更新」</guimenuitem>オプションを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "パッケージリストペインの下にあるパッケージの詳細ペインの「バージョン」タブで、「インストールするバージョン」リストからバージョンを選択し、リストの右にある<guibutton>「インストール/更新」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。「インストールするバージョン」リストのパッケージはリポジトリで使用可能なものですが、インストール可能でない場合もあります。特定のバージョンに、インストール済みのほかのパッケージとの互換性がないこともあります。選択したバージョンがシステムにインストール可能でない場合、パッケージマネージャーで警告が表示され、そのパッケージはインストールされません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "パッケージがすでにインストールされている場合で、使用可能な更新が存在しないときは (「ステータス」列または<menuchoice><guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「パッケージのバージョン情報」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションを参照)、<guibutton>「インストール/更新」</guibutton>オプションはグレー表示され、選択不可になります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "「インストール/更新の確認」ウィンドウが表示されます。まだインストールされていないパッケージは「インストールの詳細」ペインに一覧表示され、インストール済みのパッケージは「更新の詳細」ペインに一覧表示されます。<guibutton>「続行」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックして、一覧表示されたパッケージをインストールまたは更新します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "ライセンスダイアログが表示された場合、パッケージをインストールするにはライセンスに同意する必要があります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "パッケージのインストール中にエラーが発生すると、エラーダイアログが表示されます。インストールまたは更新の失敗理由がエラーメッセージで示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "パッケージの削除"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "パッケージを削除するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "パッケージを削除するには、次の方法のいずれかを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "ツールバーの<guibutton>「削除」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "メニューバーから<menuchoice><guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「削除」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "パッケージ名をマウスの右ボタンでクリックして<guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu>メニューをポップアップ表示します。次に、<guimenuitem>「削除」</guimenuitem>オプションを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "パッケージがインストールされていない場合、「削除」オプションはグレー表示され、選択不可になります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "「削除の確認」ウィンドウが表示されます。削除されるパッケージが確認のために「削除の詳細」ペインに一覧表示されます。<guibutton>「続行」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックして、一覧表示されたパッケージを削除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "あるパッケージにほかのパッケージが依存しているためそのパッケージを削除できない場合、<guibutton>「削除の続行」</guibutton>オプションを選択すると、削除対象として最初に選択した残りのパッケージの削除を試みることができます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "システムの更新"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "一部のドライバやカーネルコンポーネントなど、特定の主要パッケージが更新されると、システムでは次の処理が実行されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "現在のブート環境 (BE) のクローンを作成します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "現在の BE 内のパッケージは更新せずに、クローン内のパッケージを更新します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "システムの次回リブート時にこの新しい BE がデフォルトでブートされるように設定します。現在の BE は代替ブート環境として残ります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "すべてのパッケージの更新"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "ツールバーの<guibutton>「更新」</guibutton>ボタンまたは<menuchoice><guimenu>「パッケージ」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「更新」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択すると、使用可能な更新が存在するインストール済みパッケージがすべて更新されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "それぞれの現在の発行元から更新が提供されているすべてのパッケージが更新されます。パッケージの更新が発行元リスト内の別の発行元から提供されている場合、そのパッケージが更新されるのは、その現在の発行元が非固定的と構成されている場合だけです。その現在の発行元が固定的と構成されている場合、そのパッケージは更新されません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "「更新」ウィンドウが表示され、更新処理が開始します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "すべてのカタログがリフレッシュされます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "すべてのインストール済みパッケージが評価され、使用可能な更新が存在するパッケージが判定されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "どのパッケージにも使用可能な更新が存在しない場合、「有効な更新はありません」というメッセージが表示され、処理は停止します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "使用可能なパッケージ更新が存在する場合、更新されるパッケージが確認のために一覧表示されます。更新を中止するには<guibutton>「取消し」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。これ以降は中止できません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "更新を続行するには<guibutton>「続行」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "前述の<xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>で説明されているとおり、更新されるパッケージによっては、新しいブート環境 (BE) が作成されることがあります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "新しい BE が必要な場合にそれを作成できなかったときは、エラーメッセージが表示されます。問題がディスク容量不足であれば、次の手順を実行してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「閉じる」</guibutton>をクリックして更新処理を取り消します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "<xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/>の手順に従って、不要になった BE を削除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "もう一度<guibutton>「更新」</guibutton>をクリックして更新処理を再度開始します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "すべてのパッケージ更新がダウンロードされます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "パッケージ更新がインストールされます。BE のクローンが作成されている場合、更新はクローンにインストールされます。クローンが作成されていない場合、更新は現在の BE にインストールされます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "更新処理中にいずれかの時点でエラーが発生した場合は、「詳細」パネルが展開され、エラーの詳細が表示されます。失敗した段階の横に、エラーステータスインジケータが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "更新用の新しい BE が作成されている場合は、デフォルトの BE 名を編集することができます。希望の BE 名に変更したあと、システムをただちにリブートする場合は<guibutton>「今すぐ再起動」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。システムをあとで再起動する場合は<guibutton>「あとで再起動」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。新しい BE からブートするには再起動が必要です。新しい BE がデフォルトのブート環境になります。現在の BE は代替ブート環境として使用可能です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "更新マネージャーの使用"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "更新マネージャーはシステム通知またはデスクトップメニューバーから開くことができます。更新マネージャーは、前述の<xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>で説明されているものと同じ処理を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "ソフトウェア更新の通知"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "システムは、インストール済みパッケージのいずれかに使用可能な更新が存在するかどうかを定期的に確認します。使用可能な更新が存在することが検出されると、システム通知トレーに「更新が使用可能です」通知アイコンとポップアップが表示されます。この通知アイコンをクリックして更新マネージャーを開きます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "デスクトップのシステムメニュー"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "デスクトップのメニューバーから<menuchoice><guimenu>「システム」</guimenu><guisubmenu>「システム管理」</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>「更新マネージャー」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>を選択して更新マネージャーを開きます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "発行元の管理"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "IPS パッケージ発行元の追加、変更、および削除を行うことができます。発行元の優先度の変更、有効設定と固定的設定の変更、発行元の別名の変更、発行元の起点の追加または削除、および発行元のミラーの追加または削除を行うことができます。キー、証明書、および署名ポリシーを管理できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "システム発行元は例外です。システム発行元は「発行元の管理」ウィンドウにのみ表示されます。システム発行元は削除したり変更したりできず、優先度を変更することもできません。<xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>を参照してください。選択した発行元がシステム発行元かどうかは、詳細ペインに表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "発行元の追加"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "IPS パッケージ発行元を追加するには、「発行元を追加」ウィンドウを使用します。「発行元を追加」ウィンドウを開くには、次のいずれかの操作を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニューから<guimenuitem>「追加」</guimenuitem>オプションを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「発行元を追加」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「発行元の管理」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択します。「発行元の管理」ウィンドウで、<guibutton>「追加」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "「発行元を追加」ウィンドウで次の手順を実行して、ISP パッケージ発行元を追加します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "「URI」フィールドに発行元の URI を入力します。URI は、<literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> や <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal> といったネットワークの場所です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "「別名」フィールドには、この発行元の代替名を入力できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "「<guibutton>追加</guibutton>」ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "「発行元を追加」ダイアログが表示されます。処理を取り消すには、<guibutton>「取消し」</guibutton>をクリックします。詳細情報を表示するには、「詳細」をクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "新しい発行元が正常に追加されると、「発行元を追加しました」ダイアログが表示され、新しい発行元の名前、別名、および URI が表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "新しい発行元が追加されなかった場合、「発行元エラー」ダイアログが表示され、問題に関する情報が表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "新しい発行元は、「発行元の管理」ウィンドウで発行元リストの最後に表示され、有効および固定的になります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "新しい発行元の優先度の変更、有効設定と固定的設定の変更、発行元の別名の変更、発行元の起点の追加、SSL キーと証明書の設定、発行元のミラーの追加、および発行元証明書と署名ポリシーの管理については、<xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "発行元の変更"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "発行元の属性を変更するには、<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「発行元の管理」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択します。現在構成されている発行元が「発行元の管理」ウィンドウに一覧表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "「発行元の管理」ウィンドウでは、発行元の優先度の変更、発行元の有効化または無効化、発行元を固定的または非固定的に設定すること、および発行元の削除を行うことができます。<xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/>および<xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「変更」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックして「発行元の変更」ウィンドウを開きます。「発行元の変更」ウィンドウでは、発行元の別名の変更、発行元の起点の追加または削除、発行元のミラーの追加または削除、SSL キーと証明書の設定、および発行元証明書と署名ポリシーの管理を行うことができます。<xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/>および<xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "優先度と固定性の変更"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「発行元の管理」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択して「発行元の管理」ウィンドウを表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "発行元の優先度"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "発行元は優先度の順に「発行元の管理」ウィンドウに表示されます。リストの最上部の発行元は優先度のもっとも高い発行元です。リストの最下部の発行元は優先度のもっとも低い発行元です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "リストの最上部の発行元は優先発行元とも呼ばれます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "優先発行元を無効にしたり削除したりすることはできません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "発行元を指定せずにパッケージを検索する場合、優先度の高い発行元のカタログから順に検索されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "非固定的発行元のインストール済みパッケージを更新する場合、優先度の高い発行元のカタログから順に更新が検索されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "発行元の優先度を変更するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "「発行元の管理」ウィンドウのリストで発行元の行をクリックして強調表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "発行元リストの右にある<guibutton>「上へ」</guibutton>ボタンと<guibutton>「下へ」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックして、選択した発行元の優先度を高くしたり低くしたりします。選択した発行元がリスト内で上下に移動して新しい優先度を示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "選択した発行元がシステム発行元の場合、<guibutton>「上へ」</guibutton>ボタンと<guibutton>「下へ」</guibutton>ボタンは使用不可になります。システム発行元の優先度を変更することはできません。システム発行元の優先度は変更できないため、システム発行元より 1 つだけ優先度の高い発行元の優先度を低くすることや、システム発行元より 1 つだけ優先度の低い発行元の優先度を高くすることはできません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "「発行元の管理」ウィンドウ下部の<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "有効と固定的"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "発行元を追加すると、有効属性と固定的属性がデフォルトで設定されます。優先発行元 (前述の<xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/>を参照) を無効にすることはできません。システム発行元を無効にすることはできず、システム発行元の固定的設定を変更することはできません。ほかの有効設定と固定的設定はすべて変更可能です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "発行元に固定的属性が設定されている場合、その発行元からインストールされたパッケージは、別の発行元から更新することはできません。発行元に固定的属性が設定されていない場合、その発行元は非固定的です。非固定的発行元の場合、その発行元から最初にインストールされたパッケージは、別の発行元から更新することができます。パッケージの元の発行元よりも新しいバージョンのパッケージが別の発行元に存在することもあります。そのより新しいパッケージに更新するには、元の発行元が非固定的でなければなりません。また、優先度の低い非固定的発行元の場合、その発行元からインストールされたパッケージの更新は、より優先度の高い発行元から順に検索されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "インストールするパッケージまたは更新を検索するとき、無効になっている発行元は検索対象になりません。無効になっている発行元のカタログはリフレッシュされません。無効になっている発行元は<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニューに表示されません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "発行元の「有効」設定または「固定的」設定を変更するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「発行元の管理」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択して「発行元の管理」ウィンドウを開きます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "「有効」ボックスまたは「固定的」ボックスをクリックして、それぞれの設定を切り替えます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "別名、起点、およびミラーの変更"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "変更する発行元を選択します。「発行元の管理」ウィンドウの発行元リストの下にある「詳細」ペインに、選択した発行元の現在の起点が表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "発行元リストの右にある<guibutton>「変更」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックして「発行元の変更」ウィンドウを開きます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "選択した発行元がシステム発行元の場合、<guibutton>「変更」</guibutton>ボタンは使用不可になります。「詳細」ペインには、選択した発行元がシステム発行元であることが示され、この発行元の変更や削除を行うことはできないというメッセージが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "発行元の別名の変更、起点の追加または削除、およびミラーの追加または削除を行うには、「一般」タブを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "発行元の別名"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "発行元の別名は、発行元の別の名前です。別名は<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニューとパッケージリストペインで使用されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "この発行元の別名を変更するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの「一般」タブで、「別名」フィールドに新しい名前を入力します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "「発行元の変更」ウィンドウ下部の<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "「発行元の管理」ウィンドウで発行元の別名が変更されます。「発行元の管理」ウィンドウ下部の<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "発行元の起点"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "起点は、パッケージのメタデータ (パッケージのマニフェストとカタログ) とパッケージの内容 (パッケージファイル) の両方を含む IPS パッケージリポジトリまたはアーカイブの場所です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "起点の値は、IPS パッケージリポジトリの URI です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "この発行元の起点を変更、追加、または削除するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの「一般」タブを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "起点を追加します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "この発行元に関連付ける新しい起点の URI を「起点」フィールドに入力します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「追加」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。「起点」フィールドの下のリストに、新しい URI が追加されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "起点を削除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "「起点」フィールドの下のリストで、削除する URI を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「削除」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。選択した URI がリストから削除されます。この発行元に起点が 1 つだけ定義されている場合、その起点を削除することはできません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "起点を変更します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "新しい起点を追加します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "変更する起点を削除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "起点の変更が「発行元の管理」ウィンドウの「詳細」ペインに反映されます。「発行元の管理」ウィンドウ下部の<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "発行元のミラー"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "ミラーは、パッケージの内容 (パッケージファイル) だけを含む IPS パッケージリポジトリの場所です。ミラーにパッケージのメタデータ (パッケージのマニフェストとカタログ) は含まれません。ミラーでは、起点で提供されているデータの一部が提供されます。ミラーはパッケージファイルのダウンロードにのみ使用できます。パッケージのメタデータは起点からダウンロードされます。IPS クライアントは、パッケージの内容をミラーからダウンロードする場合でも、発行元のカタログを取得するために起点にアクセスします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "この発行元のミラーを追加、削除、または変更するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "「ミラー」ラベルをクリックして、「ミラー」フィールドとミラーのリストを表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "ミラーを追加します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "この発行元に関連付ける新しいミラーの URI を「ミラー」フィールドに入力します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「追加」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。「ミラー」フィールドの下のリストに、新しい URI が追加されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "ミラーを削除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "「ミラー」フィールドの下のリストで、削除する URI を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「削除」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。選択した URI がリストから削除されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "ミラーを変更します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "変更するミラーを削除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "新しいミラーを追加します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "発行元のセキュリティーの管理"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "パッケージのインストールの前に、パッケージが適切に署名されているかどうかが証明書を使用して確認されます。この確認は、イメージまたは発行元の署名ポリシーのどちらか制限の厳しい方に基づきます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "セキュリティーを変更する発行元を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "発行元リストの右にある<guibutton>「変更」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックして「発行元の変更」ウィンドウを開きます。「発行元の変更」ウィンドウのタイトルには、「発行元の管理」ウィンドウで選択されていた発行元が表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "発行元にセキュリティー保護された起点がある場合は、「一般」タブを選択して SSL キーと SSL 証明書を追加します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "この発行元の証明書を管理するには、「証明書」タブを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "この発行元の署名ポリシーを管理するには、「署名ポリシー」タブを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "SSL キーと証明書の追加"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "発行元にセキュリティー保護された起点がある場合は、発行元の SSL キーと SSL 証明書を追加します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの「一般」タブをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "「SSL キーと証明書」ラベルをクリックして、「SSL キー」フィールドと「SSL 証明書」フィールドを表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "「SSL キー」フィールドの右にある<guibutton>「参照」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックし、SSL キーファイルを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "「SSL 証明書」フィールドの右にある<guibutton>「参照」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックし、SSL 証明書ファイルを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "証明書の管理"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの「証明書」タブをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "証明書リストの下にあるボタンを使用して、証明書の追加、またはリストで現在選択されている証明書の削除、失効、回復を行います。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "「発行元の変更」ウィンドウで行う操作はすべて、「発行元の変更」ウィンドウ下部の<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックしたあとにはじめて、選択した発行元の証明書に適用されます。<guibutton>「取消し」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックした場合、変更は適用されません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「追加」</guibutton>。「発行元の変更」ウィンドウのタイトルに表示された発行元の新しい発行元証明書を追加します。「発行元証明書の追加」ウィンドウで、証明書 (<tt>.pem</tt>) ファイルを参照して選択します。「発行元証明書の追加」ウィンドウ下部の<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの「証明書」タブの証明書リストでは、新しく追加された証明書が選択されます。詳細ペインには、この証明書が「追加対象として指定されている」ことが示されます。この証明書は、「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックしたあとで追加されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "この発行元の証明書リストで、変更する証明書または詳細を確認する証明書を選択します。証明書リストと一連のボタンの下に、選択した証明書の詳細が表示されます。有効期限が切れた証明書が、まだ「承認済み」のままで、証明書の有効期限が切れる前に発行された (インストールされている必要はない) 署名付きパッケージの検証に使用されている場合があります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "証明書リストを再ソートするには、リストの見出しをクリックします。「組織」列と「名前」列のサイズは変更可能です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「削除」</guibutton>。証明書リストで現在選択されている証明書を削除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「失効」</guibutton>。証明書リストで現在選択されている証明書が「承認済み」の場合、<guibutton>「失効」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックすると、この証明書は失効した証明書として扱われます。証明書リストでは、この証明書の「ステータス」が「失効済み」に変わります。この変更は、「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックしたあとで証明書に適用されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「回復」</guibutton>。証明書リストで現在選択されている証明書が「失効済み」の場合、<guibutton>「回復」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックすると、この証明書は承認された証明書として扱われます。詳細ペインには、この証明書が「回復対象として指定されている」ことが示されます。この証明書は、「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックしたあとで回復されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "署名ポリシーの管理"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの「署名ポリシー」タブをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "「署名ポリシー」タブのボタンを使用して、「発行元の変更」ウィンドウのタイトルに表示された発行元からパッケージをインストールするときに使用する署名ポリシーを設定します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "グローバルな署名ポリシーを設定するには、「設定」ウィンドウの「署名ポリシー」タブを使用します (<xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>を参照)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "「署名を無視する」: すべてのパッケージの署名を無視します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "「署名は任意であるが、指定する場合は有効である必要がある」: すべての署名付きパッケージが有効であることを確認しますが、インストールされるすべてのパッケージが署名されている必要はありません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "「1 つ以上の有効な署名が必要」: 新しくインストールされるすべてのパッケージに少なくとも 1 つ有効な署名があることを要求します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "署名は必須であり、パッケージの署名の検証時にテキストフィールドで指定した名前が証明書名に含まれている必要があります。複数の名前を指定する場合は、名前をコンマで区切る必要があります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "発行元の削除"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "発行元を削除するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "削除する発行元を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "発行元リストの右にある<guibutton>「削除」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "選択した発行元がシステム発行元の場合、<guibutton>「削除」</guibutton>ボタンは使用不可になります。「詳細」ペインには、選択した発行元がシステム発行元であることが示され、この発行元の変更や削除を行うことはできないというメッセージが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "ブート環境の管理"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "ブート環境 (BE) はブート可能なイメージです。Oracle Solaris システムに複数の BE を維持することができます。1 つの BE は、起動時またはリブート時のデフォルトの BE です。ほかの BE は代替ブート環境として使用可能です。ブートした BE がアクティブ BE です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "<literal>beadm</literal>(1) コマンドを使用して、BE の作成、名前の変更、マウント、マウント解除、アクティブ化、または破棄を行うことができます。BE の詳細については、『<citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>』を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーでは、<literal>beadm</literal>(1) コマンドで提供されている機能の一部を実行できます。パッケージマネージャーの<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「ブート環境の管理」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションを使用して、「ブート環境の管理」ウィンドウを開きます。「ブート環境の管理」ウィンドウでは、このシステムの BE が一覧表示され、これらの BE のアクティブ化、名前の変更、および削除を後述の方法で行うことができます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "BE の作成"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "次のいずれかの操作を実行すると、新しい BE が自動的に作成されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris OS をインストールします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "一部のドライバやカーネルコンポーネントなど、特定の主要システムパッケージをインストールまたは更新します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "<literal>beadm create</literal> コマンドを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "<literal>pkg update</literal> コマンドを実行するか<guibutton>「更新」</guibutton>ボタンを使用して使用可能な更新が存在するすべてのパッケージを更新すると、多くの場合は新しい BE が作成されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "BE のアクティブ化"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「ブート環境の管理」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択して、「ブート環境の管理」ウィンドウを開きます。ウィンドウに BE が一覧表示されます。現在ブートされている BE には、BE 名の左にチェックマークが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "次回リブート時にアクティブ化するデフォルトの BE として別の BE を指定するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "次回リブート時にアクティブ化するデフォルトの BE として指定する BE の<guibutton>「リブート時にアクティブ化」</guibutton>ボタンを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "「ブート環境の管理」ウィンドウの<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "BE の名前の変更"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「ブート環境の管理」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択して、「ブート環境の管理」ウィンドウを開きます。ウィンドウに BE が一覧表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "現在アクティブになっている BE の名前を変更することはできません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "削除対象として指定されている BE の名前を変更することはできません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "BE の名前を変更するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "名前を変更する BE の名前をダブルクリックします。名前フィールドが編集可能になります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "新しい名前を入力します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "BE の削除"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「ファイル」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「ブート環境の管理」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択して、「ブート環境の管理」ウィンドウを開きます。ウィンドウに BE が一覧表示されます。ウィンドウの右端の列が「削除」列です。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "「ブート環境の管理」ウィンドウの中央の列には、BE のサイズが表示されます。BE を削除してストレージデバイスの領域を解放することができます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "現在アクティブになっている BE を削除することはできません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "名前を変更した BE を削除することはできません。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "BE を削除するには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "削除する BE の<guibutton>「削除」</guibutton>ボックスを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "WebInstall の操作"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーでは、簡単なワンクリックの WebInstall 処理を使用したパッケージのインストールがサポートされています。WebInstall 処理は <filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルを使用します。<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルには、発行元を追加するための情報と、これらの発行元からインストール可能なパッケージを追加するための情報が含まれています。<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルに含まれている情報は WebInstall 処理によって読み込まれ、使用されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "WebInstall によるファイルのエクスポート"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "自分のシステムにインストールしたパッケージをほかのユーザーもインストールできるようにする場合は、これらのパッケージファイルのインストール方法を WebInstall 処理でエクスポートできます。これらのパッケージのインストール方法とインストールする発行元を含む <filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルが作成されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "選択したパッケージのインストール方法と発行元を <filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルにエクスポートするには、次の手順を実行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニューから、<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルに含めるパッケージを取得する発行元を選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "パッケージリストペインで、インストール方法を配布するパッケージを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guisubmenu>「ファイル」</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>「選択項目をエクスポート」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>をクリックして「エクスポート選択項目の確認」ウィンドウを表示します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックして選択項目を確定します。「選択項目をエクスポート」ウィンドウが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "<filename>p5i</filename> ファイルのデフォルト名が拡張子 <filename>.p5i</filename> を付けて提示されます。このファイル名は変更できますが、拡張子は変更しないでください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "<filename>p5i</filename> ファイルのデフォルトの場所が提示されます。この場所は変更できます。<guibutton>「参照」</guibutton>ボタンを使用する場合は、「選択項目をエクスポート」ウィンドウの右下にあるドロップダウンメニューから<filename>「p5i ファイル」</filename>オプションを選択すると、ファイルリストに <filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルだけを表示できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "<guibutton>「保存」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックしてファイルの名前と場所を保存します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "WebInstall による発行元の追加とパッケージのインストール"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "WebInstall 処理を使用すると、<filename>p5i</filename> ファイルからパッケージをインストールすることができます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルを見つけます。このファイルは、デスクトップまたは Web サイト上に存在する場合があります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "次のいずれかの方法で、パッケージマネージャーを WebInstall モードで起動します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "デスクトップ上の <filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルをクリックします。関連付けられたアプリケーション (パッケージマネージャー Web インストーラ) が起動します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルのパスを指定して、コマンド行からパッケージマネージャーを起動します。たとえば、次のコマンドを入力します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルへのリンクを含んでいる URL に移動します。<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルは、この MIME タイプが登録されている Web サーバー上に存在する必要があります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename> が、この MIME タイプが登録されていない Web サーバー上に存在する場合は、<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルをデスクトップに保存してから、それをクリックして WebInstall を起動します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "「インストール/更新」ウィンドウが表示されます。ウィンドウ上部のラベルは「パッケージマネージャー Web インストーラ/次のものがシステムに追加されます:」となります。次に、発行元とパッケージが一覧表示されます。<guibutton>「続行」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックしてインストールを続行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "パッケージ発行元がまだシステムに構成されていない場合は、「発行元を追加」ウィンドウが表示されます。発行元の名前と URI はすでに入力されています。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "追加した発行元がセキュリティー保護された発行元ならば、SSL キーと証明書が必要です。システム上にある SSL キーと SSL 証明書を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "発行元が正常に追加されると、「発行元を追加しました」ダイアログが表示されます。<guibutton>「了解」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックしてインストールを続行します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename> ファイルが無効な発行元からのパッケージを含んでいる場合、WebInstall は「発行元の有効化」ダイアログを開きます。このダイアログを使用して、パッケージをインストールできるように発行元を有効にします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "この時点で「インストール/更新」ウィンドウの表示は、パッケージマネージャー内から<guibutton>「インストール/更新」</guibutton>を選択したときと同じになります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "トラブルシューティング"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "エラー、警告、および情報メッセージは、いつでも確認できるようにログに保存されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "メッセージログの表示"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「表示」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「ログ」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを選択して「ログ」ウィンドウを開きます。「ログ」ウィンドウには、パッケージマネージャーと更新マネージャーからのエラー、警告、および情報メッセージが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "すべてのメッセージを削除するには、「ログ」ウィンドウ下部の<guibutton>「消去」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックします。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "エラーまたは警告がログに記録されると、ステータスバーの左側に黄色の三角形が表示されます。黄色の三角形をクリックすると「ログ」ウィンドウが表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "パッケージマネージャーのユーザーインタフェースの設定を変更するには、<menuchoice><guimenu>「編集」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「設定」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>メニューオプションを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "「設定」ウィンドウには次の 3 つのタブがあります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "「一般」タブでは、終了設定と確認ダイアログ設定を指定できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "「オプションのコンポーネント」タブでは、パッケージのインストール時または更新時にインストールするオプションのパッケージコンポーネントの設定を指定できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "「署名ポリシー」タブでは、このイメージの署名ポリシーを設定できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "設定を閉じる"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「編集」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「設定」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションを選択し、「一般」タブを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "「終了時に現在の状態を記憶する」ボックスにチェックマークが付いている場合、パッケージマネージャーは次の設定を保存し、次回起動時にそれらを復元します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">垂直セパレータと水平セパレータ</emphasis> - ウィンドウ内のペインの幅と高さ"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">ウィンドウサイズ</emphasis> - パッケージマネージャーウィンドウ全体のサイズ"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">発行元のオプション</emphasis> — パッケージマネージャーの終了時に<guimenu>「発行元」</guimenu>ドロップダウンメニューで選択されている発行元やほかのオプション"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">カテゴリ</emphasis> — 各発行元の選択されているカテゴリおよび展開されたカテゴリと折りたたまれたカテゴリ"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "「確認」ダイアログ設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "パッケージをインストール、更新、または削除するとき、確認ダイアログが表示されてパッケージの一覧と実行するアクションを示します。これらの確認ダイアログを表示しないようにするには、「設定」ウィンドウでこれらのチェックボックスの選択を解除します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "特定の確認ダイアログで「今後、この確認ダイアログを表示しない」チェックボックスをクリックすることによっても、そのダイアログに関するこの設定を解除できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "署名ポリシーの設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "「署名ポリシー」タブのボタンを使用して、このイメージにパッケージをインストールするときに署名を無視するか要求するかを指定します。特定の発行元の署名ポリシーを設定するには、「発行元の管理」ウィンドウで発行元を選択し、<guibutton>「変更」</guibutton>ボタンをクリックし、「発行元の変更」ウィンドウの「署名ポリシー」タブを使用します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "イメージの署名ポリシーの選択肢は発行元の署名ポリシーの選択肢と同じですが、特定の発行元からインストールされたパッケージだけではなく、イメージにインストールされているすべてのパッケージに設定が適用される点が異なります。<xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>を参照してください。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "オプションコンポーネント設定の言語選択"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>「編集」</guimenu><guimenuitem>「設定」</guimenuitem></menuchoice>オプションを選択し、「オプションのコンポーネント」タブを選択します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "デフォルトでは、「パッケージの言語選択」には「すべての言語のインストール」が選択されます。一部の言語を選択してインストールすることで、インストールの領域を節約できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "「次の言語のみのインストール」が選択されている場合は、言語リストの左端の列見出しにあるチェックボックスアイコンをクリックすると、すべての言語を選択できます。この列見出しを再度クリックすると、すべての言語の選択を解除できます。「言語」列見出しと「地域」列見出しをクリックすると、リストをソートできます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "「了解」ボタンをクリックして変更を保存します。これらの設定は、現在インストールされているパッケージおよび今後のパッケージのインストールと更新に適用されます。新しい設定に基づいて、オプションのパッケージコンポーネントのインストールや削除が必要に応じて実行され、イメージが更新されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "以前にイメージを更新して一部の言語だけを含めてある場合、このウィンドウではデフォルトで「次の言語のみのインストール」が選択され、「すべての言語のインストール」オプションを選択するとその言語リストはグレー表示されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "ほかのオプションコンポーネント設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "デフォルトでは、「その他のコンポーネント選択」には「すべての開発ファイルのインストール」と「すべてのドキュメントのインストール」が選択されます。開発ファイルやドキュメントの選択を解除することで、インストールの領域を節約できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "用語集"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "別名"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "発行元の別の名前。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "ブート環境 (BE)"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "ブート可能な Oracle Solaris 環境のインスタンス。ブート環境の、システムソフトウェアを含むルートファイルシステムとその他のすべてのファイルシステムは、ZFS データセットである必要があります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "アクティブブート環境とは、現在ブートされているブート環境のことです。システムには多数のブート環境を維持することができます。リブート時にどれをブートするかを選択できます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "クローン"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "正確なコピー。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "クローンはオペレーティングシステム、ファイルシステム、またはボリュームの正確なコピーを指すことがあります。このコピーは、元の内容と完全に互換性があります。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "データセット"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "クローン、ファイルシステム、スナップショット、またはボリュームという ZFS エンティティーの総称名。各データセットは、ZFS 名前空間内の一意の名前で識別されます。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "イメージ"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "ブートとインストールが可能なパッケージ内のオペレーティングシステムソフトウェアのコレクション。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "パッケージとそれに関連付けられたファイル、ディレクトリ、リンク、および依存関係をインストールできるシステム上の場所。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "起点"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "発行元がパッケージを発行するパッケージサーバー。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "パッケージ"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "定義された形式での、ファイル、ディレクトリ、リンク、ドライバ、および依存関係のコレクション。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "発行元"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "パッケージを設計、作成しパッケージサーバーに発行する個人、グループ、または企業。パッケージサーバーは、(デフォルトの) 発行元からのパッケージをダウンロード用に提供します。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "システム発行元"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "システム発行元は、特定のパッケージを大域ゾーンと同期された状態に保つために、特にリンクされたイメージと非大域ゾーンで使用される特殊な発行元です。大域ゾーンは、これらの特殊なシステム発行元を非大域ゾーンに構成することで、非大域ゾーン内のパッケージを制約します。システム発行元が特殊である理由は、非大域ゾーンはそれらに対して削除、無効化、変更、優先度の変更といった特定の変更を行うことができないことにあります。"
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/ja/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/ko/ko.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 패키지 관리자 온라인 도움말"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "2011년 6월"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "본 소프트웨어와 관련 문서는 사용 제한 및 기밀 유지 규정을 포함하는 라이센스 계약서에 의거해 제공되며, 지적 재산법에 의해 보호됩니다. 라이센스 계약서 상에 명시적으로 허용되어 있는 경우나 법규에 의해 허용된 경우를 제외하고, 어떠한 부분도 복사, 재생, 번역, 방송, 수정, 라이센스, 전송, 배포, 진열, 실행, 발행, 또는 전시될 수 없습니다. 본 소프트웨어를 리버스 엔지니어링, 디스어셈블리 또는 디컴파일하는 것은 상호 운용에 대한 법규에 의해 명시된 경우를 제외하고는 금지되어 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "이 안의 내용은 사전 공지 없이 변경될 수 있으며 오류가 존재하지 않음을 보증하지 않습니다. 만일 오류를 발견하면 서면으로 통지해 주기 바랍니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "만일 본 소프트웨어나 관련 문서를 미국 정부나 또는 미국 정부를 대신하여 라이센스한 개인이나 법인에게 배송하는 경우, 다음 공지 사항이 적용됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "본 소프트웨어 혹은 하드웨어는 다양한 정보 관리 애플리케이션의 일반적인 사용을 목적으로 개발되었습니다. 본 소프트웨어 혹은 하드웨어는 개인적인 상해를 초래할 수 있는 애플리케이션을 포함한 본질적으로 위험한 애플리케이션에서 사용할 목적으로 개발되거나 그 용도로 사용될 수 없습니다. 만일 본 소프트웨어 혹은 하드웨어를 위험한 애플리케이션에서 사용할 경우, 라이센스 사용자는 해당 애플리케이션의 안전한 사용을 위해 모든 적절한 비상-안전, 백업, 대비 및 기타 조치를 반드시 취해야 합니다. Oracle Corporation과 그 자회사는 본 소프트웨어 혹은 하드웨어를 위험한 애플리케이션에서의 사용으로 인해 발생하는 어떠한 손해에 대해서도 책임지지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle과 Java는 Oracle Corporation 및/또는 그 자회사의 등록 상표입니다. 기타의 명칭들은 각 해당 명칭을 소유한 회사의 상표일 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD, Opteron, AMD 로고, 및AMD Opteron 로고는 Advanced Micro Devices의 상표 내지는 등록 상표입니다. Intel 및 Intel Xeon Intel Corporation의 등록 상표입니다. SPARC 상표 일체는 라이센스에 의거하여 사용되며SPARC International, Inc.의 상표 내지는 등록 상표입니다. UNIX는 X/Open Company, Ltd.를 통해 라이센스된 등록상표입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "본 소프트웨어 혹은 하드웨어와 관련문서(설명서)는 제 3자로부터 제공되는 컨텐츠, 제품 및 서비스에 접속할 수 있거나 정보를 제공합니다. Oracle Corporation과 그 자회사는 제 3자의 컨텐츠, 제품 및 서비스와 관련하여 어떠한 책임도 지지 않으며 명시적으로 모든 보증에 대해서도 책임을 지지 않습니다. Oracle Corporation과 그 자회사는 제 3자의 컨텐츠, 제품 및 서비스에 접속하거나 사용으로 인해 초래되는 어떠한 손실, 비용 또는 손해에 대해 어떠한 책임도 지지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "패키지 관리자 정보"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "패키지 관리자는 Oracle Solaris IPS(이미지 패키징 시스템)용 GUI(그래픽 사용자 인터페이스)입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "이 문서에서 사용되는 용어의 정의는 <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>를 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 이미지 패키징 시스템"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris IPS(이미지 패키징 시스템)는 네트워크의 패키지 저장소와 상호 작용하는 소프트웨어 전달 시스템입니다. IPS는 소프트웨어 설치, 업그레이드 및 제거를 비롯하여 소프트웨어 수명 주기 관리 기능을 제공하는 프레임워크입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 운영 체제를 설치한 후 사용하려는 일부 소프트웨어를 사용하지 못할 수 있습니다. 대개는 IPS 패키지 저장소에서 이 소프트웨어를 사용할 수 있습니다. 패키지 관리자 또는 <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) 명령을 사용하여 패키지 저장소에서 패키지를 다운로드하여 설치할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "IPS를 통해 기존 IPS 패키지 저장소의 복사본을 만들고, 고유의 IPS 패키지 저장소를 만들고, 고유의 IPS 패키지를 게시할 수도 있습니다. IPS에 대한 자세한 내용은 Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library를 참조하십시오. <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>으로 이동하여 왼쪽에 있는 Documentation Index를 선택하고 Systems Software, Oracle Solaris 11, View Library를 차례로 선택하십시오. 특히 <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>를 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "패키지 관리자"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "패키지 관리자는 IPS 명령줄 인터페이스에서 제공하는 기능 중 일부를 제공합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "패키지 관리자를 사용하면 다음 작업을 수행할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "IPS 패키지 검색, 설치, 업데이트 및 제거. <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/> 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "시스템 업데이트(시스템의 모든 패키지를 업데이트). <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> 참조하"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "IPS 패키지 게시자 추가, 수정 및 삭제. <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/> 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "부트 환경 나열, 이름 변경, 삭제 및 관리. <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "WebInstall 설치 파일(<filename>.p5i</filename>) 만들기. <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "이 설명서에서는 패키지 관리자 창의 다음 기능을 다룹니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "창 가운데에 있는 큰 창은 패키지 목록 창입니다. 이 창에 정보 메시지가 표시되는 경우도 있지만 일반적으로는 패키지 목록이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "창 위쪽의 메뉴 표시줄은 패키지 관리자의 거의 모든 기능을 제공합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "메뉴 표시줄 아래에 있는 도구 모음의 왼쪽에는 자주 사용되는 몇 가지 작업을 제공하는 버튼이 있습니다. 구분선 왼쪽의 버튼은 전역 기능(업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 모든 패키지 업데이트 또는 패키지 목록 및 패키지 상태 새로 고침)을 수행합니다. 구분선 오른쪽의 버튼은 선택된 패키지에 대해서만 작동합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "도구 모음 오른쪽의 검색 필드는 패키지 목록 창의 컨텐츠를 제어하는 데 유용합니다. <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "버튼 아래의 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴는 패키지 목록 창의 컨텐츠를 제어하는 데 유용하며 새 게시자를 추가하는 데도 사용할 수 있습니다. <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> \"게시자별\" 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "검색 필드 아래의 <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴는 패키지 목록 창의 컨텐츠를 제어하는 데 유용합니다. \"패키지 상태별\" 패키지 나열 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "<guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴 아래의 범주 창은 패키지 목록 창의 컨텐츠를 제어하는 데 유용합니다. \"범주별\" 패키지 나열 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "소프트웨어 범주 목록 아래에는 이 세션에서 수행한 검색 목록이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "패키지 목록 창 아래에는 패키지 세부 정보 창이 표시됩니다. <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/> 참조"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "패키지 관리"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "다양한 조건에 따라 패키지를 나열할 수 있으며, 패키지를 설치, 업데이트 및 제거할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "패키지 나열"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "패키지 관리자 목록 창의 패키지 목록은 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴, <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴, 범주 창 및 검색 필드에서 선택한 내용에 따라 달라집니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "열 제목을 눌러 패키지 목록의 순서를 재지정할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "<guibutton>새로 고침</guibutton> 버튼 또는 <menuchoice><guimenu>패키지</guimenu><guimenuitem>새로 고침</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 사용하여 저장소 카탈로그를 다시 읽고 패키지 목록 및 패키지 상태를 업데이트할 수 있습니다. 또한 새로 고침은 패키지 관리자를 열 때마다 시도됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "게시자별"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "<guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴를 통해 게시자에 따라 패키지를 나열할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "메뉴 위쪽에는 게시자 추가 대화 상자를 사용하거나 <literal>pkg</literal> 명령을 사용하여 추가한 각 게시자의 이름이 나열됩니다. 해당 게시자 중 하나를 선택하면 선택한 해당 게시자로부터 사용 가능한 패키지만 패키지 목록 창에 표시됩니다. 이 경우 모든 패키지에 대한 게시자가 동일하므로 패키지 목록 창에는 이름, 상태 및 요약 열만 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>모든 게시자</guimenuitem> — 패키지 목록 창에 모든 게시자의 패키지를 표시합니다. 패키지 목록 창에는 이름, 상태, 게시자 및 요약 열이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "예: 모든 게시자로부터 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 매체 장치 드라이버를 모두 나열하려면 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>모든 게시자</guimenuitem>를 선택하고 <menuchoice><guimenu>드라이버</guimenu><guimenuitem>매체</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 범주를 선택한 다음 <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>업데이트</guimenuitem>를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>설치된 모든 패키지</guimenuitem> — 모든 게시자로부터 설치된 패키지를 모두 표시합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "예: 현재 <literal>solaris</literal> 게시자로부터 설치된 글꼴 패키지를 모두 나열하려면 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>설치된 모든 패키지</guimenuitem>를 선택하고 <menuchoice><guimenu>시스템</guimenu><guimenuitem>글꼴</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 범주를 선택한 다음 게시자 열 제목을 눌러 목록을 게시자별로 정렬하고 <literal>solaris</literal> 항목이 표시될 때까지 아래로 스크롤합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>모든 게시자(검색)</guimenuitem> — 패키지 목록 창에 패키지 목록 대신 정보 메시지를 표시합니다. 메시지에는 구성한 모든 게시자가 나열되며 해당 게시자의 모든 패키지를 확인할 수 있는 방법이 표시됩니다. <guimenuitem>모든 게시자(검색)</guimenuitem>를 사용하는 검색에 대한 자세한 내용은 <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>을 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>추가...</guimenuitem> — 게시자 추가 창을 엽니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "패키지 상태별"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenu>보기</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴를 통해 패키지 상태에 따라 패키지를 나열할 수 있습니다. 패키지 상태는 설치됨, 설치되지 않음, 업데이트를 사용할 수 있음일 수 있습니다. <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴에 표시되는 아이콘은 패키지 목록 창의 상태 열에 표시되는 아이콘과 동일합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>모든 패키지</guimenuitem> — 선택된 범주 내 선택된 게시자로부터 사용 가능한 모든 패키지 또는 지정된 검색 문자열과 일치하는 모든 패키지를 표시합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "예: <literal>solaris</literal> 게시자로부터 설치된 웹 서비스 패키지, 설치되지 않은 웹 서비스 패키지, 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 웹 서비스 패키지를 모두 나열하려면 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <literal>solaris</literal>를 선택하고 <menuchoice><guimenu>웹 서비스</guimenu></menuchoice> 범주를 선택한 다음 <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>모든 패키지</guimenuitem>를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>설치된 패키지</guimenuitem> — 선택된 범주 내 선택된 게시자로부터 설치된 모든 패키지 또는 지정된 검색 문자열과 일치하는 설치된 모든 패키지를 표시합니다. <menuchoice><guimenu>게시자</guimenu><guimenuitem>설치된 모든 패키지</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "예: <literal>solaris</literal> 게시자로부터 설치된 웹 서버 패키지만 나열하려면 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <literal>solaris</literal>를 선택하고 <menuchoice><guimenu>웹 서비스</guimenu></menuchoice> 범주를 선택한 다음 <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>설치된 패키지</guimenuitem>를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>업데이트</guimenuitem> — 선택된 범주 내 선택된 게시자로부터 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 모든 패키지 또는 지정된 검색 문자열과 일치하는 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 모든 패키지를 표시합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "예: 모든 게시자로부터 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 장치 드라이버를 모두 나열하려면 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>모든 게시자</guimenuitem>를 선택하고 <guimenu>드라이버</guimenu> 범주를 선택한 다음 <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>업데이트</guimenuitem>를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>설치되지 않은 패키지</guimenuitem> — 선택된 범주 내 선택된 게시자로부터 설치되지 않은 모든 패키지 또는 지정된 검색 문자열과 일치하는 설치되지 않은 모든 패키지를 표시합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "예: 현재 <literal>solaris</literal> 게시자로부터 설치되지 않은 글꼴 패키지를 모두 나열하려면 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <literal>solaris</literal>를 선택하고 <menuchoice><guimenu>시스템</guimenu><guimenuitem>글꼴</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 범주를 선택한 다음 <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>설치되지 않은 패키지</guimenuitem>를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>선택된 패키지</guimenuitem> — 현재 선택된 모든 패키지를 나열합니다. <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>을 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "범주별"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "패키지 관리자 창 왼쪽에 있는 범주 창에서 소프트웨어 유형별로 사용 가능한 패키지를 찾아볼 수 있습니다. 하위 범주를 표시하려면 범주 이름을 누릅니다. 선택된 게시자 및 패키지 상태와 지정된 검색 조건에 따라 선택된 범주 또는 하위 범주의 패키지가 패키지 목록 창에 나열됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "범주 창에서는 소프트웨어 유형을 지정할 수도 있지만 <guimenuitem>모든 범주</guimenuitem> 및 <guimenuitem>최근 검색</guimenuitem>을 선택할 수도 있습니다. <guimenuitem>최근 검색</guimenuitem>에 대한 자세한 내용은 <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> \"이전 검색 반복\"을 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "패키지 검색"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "다음 두 가지 방법 중 하나로 패키지를 검색할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "패키지 목록 창에서 포커스를 설정합니다. 예를 들어, <menuchoice><guimenu>편집</guimenu><guimenuitem>패키지 목록으로 이동</guimenuitem></menuchoice>을 선택하고 입력을 시작합니다. 입력하는 내용에 따라 현재 패키지 목록 창에 나열된 패키지 중에서 일치 항목이 식별됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "도구 모음의 검색 필드를 사용합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "검색 문자열 입력"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "검색 필드에 문자열을 입력한 다음 Enter 키를 누르거나 검색 필드 오른쪽에 있는 돋보기 아이콘을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "<guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴 선택 — <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 메뉴에서 선택한 내용에 따라 패키지 관리자가 특정 게시자 또는 모든 게시자의 각 패키지에 대한 정보에서 검색 문자열을 검색합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>모든 게시자</guimenuitem>를 선택하든 <guimenuitem>모든 게시자(검색)</guimenuitem>를 선택하든 검색 결과는 동일합니다. <guimenuitem>모든 게시자(검색)</guimenuitem>를 사용하는 것이 더 빠르다는 것만 다릅니다. <guimenuitem>모든 게시자</guimenuitem>를 선택할 때는 모든 게시자의 데이터가 로드되어 지연이 발생하기 때문입니다. <guimenuitem>모든 게시자(검색)</guimenuitem>를 사용하면 패키지 목록 창에 나열되는 모든 게시자의 데이터를 로드하지 않고 모든 게시자에 대해 검색이 수행됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "<guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴 선택 — <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴에서 선택된 패키지 상태에 따라 검색 결과가 패키지 목록 창에 표시됩니다. 검색을 다시 실행하지 않고 <guimenu>보기</guimenu> 메뉴 선택을 변경하여 패키지 목록 창에 동일한 검색 결과의 다른 일부분을 표시할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "패키지 관리자는 이름, 요약, 설명, 범주, 패키지 내에 포함된 파일 이름 등의 패키지 정보를 검색합니다. 와일드카드를 사용하지 않을 경우 정확한 일치 항목만 검색됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "AND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "검색 용어를 공백이나 <literal>AND</literal>로 구분하면 패키지 관리자는 검색 용어를 <emphasis role=\"strong\">모두</emphasis> 포함하는 패키지를 검색합니다. 이 동작이 기본 검색 동작입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "예: 검색 문자열이 <literal>python book</literal> 또는 <literal>python AND book</literal>이면 검색 결과에는 패키지 정보에 <literal>python</literal><emphasis>과</emphasis> <literal>book</literal>이 <emphasis>모두</emphasis> 들어 있는 패키지만 포함됩니다. 예를 들어, Python 프로그래밍에 대한 북인 <literal>diveintopython</literal> 패키지는 검색 결과에 나타나지만 <literal>python-26</literal>은 나타나지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "큰따옴표"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "해당 검색 용어와 정확히 일치하도록 검색 용어를 큰따옴표로 묶습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "예: 큰따옴표로 묶인 <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal>의 경우 <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal>와는 일치하지만 <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>와는 일치하지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "와일드카드"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "검색 문자열에 <literal>*</literal> 와일드카드를 사용할 수 있습니다. 와일드카드를 사용할 경우 검색 속도가 느려질 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "예: <literal>802.11*</literal>는 <literal>802.11b/g</literal> 및 <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>와 일치합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>802.11*</literal>는 <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>와 일치하지 않습니다. <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>와 일치시키려면 검색 문자열로 <literal>*802.11*</literal>를 사용하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "검색 용어를 <literal>OR</literal>로 구분하면 패키지 관리자는 검색 용어 중 <emphasis role=\"strong\">임의</emphasis>의 하나를 포함하는 패키지를 검색합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "예: <literal>python OR book</literal>은 패키지 정보에 <literal>python</literal>이 들어 있는 모든 패키지와 패키지 정보에 <literal>book</literal>이 들어 있는 모든 패키지와 일치합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "이러한 검색 문자열 수정자를 함께 사용할 수 있습니다. 즉, 하나의 검색 문자열에서 AND와 OR, 큰따옴표, *를 모두 사용할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "검색 필드 지우기"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "검색 문자열과 검색 결과 목록을 모두 지우려면 검색 필드 또는 편집 메뉴를 사용합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "검색 필드에서 <literal>X</literal> 아이콘을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "<guimenu>편집</guimenu> 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>검색 지우기</guimenuitem> 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "검색 취소"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "검색 작업 중에는 패키지 관리자 창 아래쪽에 있는 상태 표시줄의 오른쪽 끝에 사용 중 표시줄이 표시됩니다. 사용 중 표시줄의 오른쪽 끝에는 <literal>X</literal> 아이콘이 표시됩니다. 진행 중인 검색을 취소하려면 사용 중 표시줄의 <literal>X</literal> 아이콘을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "이전 검색 결과 다시 표시"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "현재 패키지 관리자 세션 중 이미 수행한 검색의 결과가 범주 창의 <guimenuitem>최근 검색</guimenuitem>에 저장되어 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "패키지 목록 창에 정보 메시지를 표시하려면 범주 창에서 <guimenuitem>최근 검색</guimenuitem> 레이블을 선택합니다. 그러면 패키지 목록 창에 이전 검색 결과 목록이 표시됩니다. 해당 결과를 다시 표시하려면 \"결과\" 링크를 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "범주 창에서 이전 검색 결과 목록을 확장하거나 숨기려면 <guimenuitem>최근 검색</guimenuitem> 레이블 왼쪽에 있는 화살표를 선택합니다. 해당 검색 결과를 다시 표시하려면 최근 검색 목록에서 항목을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "일치하는 패키지가 없는 검색은 최근 검색 목록에 나타나지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "<guibutton>새로 고침</guibutton> 버튼 또는 <menuchoice><guimenu>패키지</guimenu><guimenuitem>새로 고침</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택하면 최근 검색 결과가 모두 삭제됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "추가 정보 표시"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "패키지 세부 정보 창 또는 패키지 버전 정보 대화 상자에서 패키지에 대한 추가 정보를 확인합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "패키지 세부 정보 창"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "패키지에 대한 추가 정보를 표시하려면 패키지 목록의 패키지를 마우스 왼쪽 버튼으로 눌러 강조 표시합니다. 패키지 목록 창 아래의 패키지 세부 정보 창에 해당 게시자로부터 사용 가능한 최신 버전, 패키지 크기, 패키지 파일, 종속성, 라이센스 조건 등의 정보가 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "패키지가 설치된 후 패키지의 이름이 바뀐 경우 일반 탭의 다음으로 이름 변경 필드에 패키지의 새 이름이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "버전 탭에는 설치할 수 있는 패키지 버전 목록이 표시됩니다. 버전을 설치하려면 목록에서 해당 버전을 선택하고 목록 오른쪽에 있는 <guibutton>설치/업데이트</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>를 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "패키지 목록 창에 정보 메시지가 표시되는 경우 패키지 세부 정보 창이 표시되지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "패키지 버전 정보 대화 상자"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "<guimenu>패키지</guimenu> 메뉴를 팝업하려면 패키지 목록의 패키지를 마우스 오른쪽 버튼으로 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "설치된 패키지의 버전과 설치 또는 업그레이드할 수 있는 최신 버전(해당하는 경우)을 보여 주는 별도의 창을 표시하려면 팝업 메뉴 또는 메뉴 표시줄에서 <menuchoice><guimenu>패키지</guimenu><guimenuitem>패키지 버전 정보</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "패키지 선택"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "선택된 패키지를 설치, 업데이트 또는 제거할 수 있습니다. 패키지를 선택하려면 패키지 목록 창 또는<guimenu>편집</guimenu> 메뉴를 사용합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "패키지를 선택하려면 패키지 목록 창에서 다음 작업 중 하나를 수행합니다. 패키지를 여러 개 선택할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "패키지 이름 왼쪽에 있는 상자를 누릅니다. 상자를 다시 누르면 패키지의 선택이 해제됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "패키지 이름을 한 번 눌러 패키지를 강조 표시합니다. 그런 다음 강조 표시된 패키지를 두 번 눌러 패키지를 선택합니다. 패키지를 다시 두 번 누르면 패키지의 선택이 해제됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "열 제목의 확인란 아이콘을 눌러 현재 패키지 목록 창에 나열된 모든 패키지를 선택합니다. 확인란 아이콘을 다시 누르면 현재 패키지 목록 창에 나열된 모든 패키지의 선택이 해제됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "<guimenu>편집</guimenu> 메뉴에는 다음과 같은 패키지 선택 옵션이 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>모두 선택</guimenuitem> — 현재 패키지 목록 창에 나열된 모든 패키지를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>업데이트 선택</guimenuitem> — 현재 패키지 목록 창에 나열된 패키지 중 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 모든 패키지를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>모두 선택 해제</guimenuitem> — 현재 패키지 목록 창에 나열된 모든 패키지의 선택을 해제합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "패키지를 선택할 때는 항상 이전에 선택한 패키지가 선택된 상태로 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "현재 패키지 목록 창에 나열된 패키지 수와 선택된 패키지 수가 패키지 관리자 창 아래쪽에 있는 상태 표시줄 왼쪽에 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "패키지 목록 창의 모든 게시자로부터 선택된 패키지를 모두 나열하려면 <menuchoice><guimenu>게시자</guimenu><guimenuitem>모든 게시자</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 선택하고 <guimenuitem>모든 범주</guimenuitem> 범주, <menuchoice><guimenu>보기</guimenu><guimenuitem>선택된 패키지</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "패키지가 강조 표시될 수 있지만 선택되지 않습니다. 패키지가 강조 표시되면 해당 패키지에 대한 세부 정보가 패키지 목록 창 아래의 패키지 세부 정보 창에 표시됩니다. 패키지가 선택되면 패키지 이름 왼쪽의 상자에 확인 표시가 나타납니다. 패키지를 설치, 업데이트 또는 삭제하려면 해당 패키지에 대한 선택 상자에 확인 표시가 나타나는지 확인합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "패키지 설치 및 업데이트"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "설치 또는 업데이트 전에 선택적 구성 요소 기본 설정을 확인합니다. <menuchoice><guimenu>편집</guimenu><guimenuitem>기본 설정</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 선택합니다. 기본 설정 창에서 선택적 구성 요소 탭을 선택합니다. 기본적으로 모든 언어 설치, 모든 개발 파일 설치 및 모든 설명서 설치가 선택되어 있습니다. 설치할 언어 중 일부만 선택하거나 개발 파일의 선택을 해제하는 등으로 설치 공간을 절약할 수 있습니다. 변경 사항을 저장하려면 확인 버튼을 누릅니다. 이러한 설정은 설치된 모든 패키지와 후속 패키지 설치 및 업데이트에 적용됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "패키지를 설치 또는 업데이트하려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "패키지를 선택합니다. <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>을 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "다음 방법 중 하나로 패키지를 설치 또는 업데이트합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "도구 모음에서 <guibutton>설치/업데이트</guibutton> 버튼을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "메뉴 표시줄에서 <menuchoice><guimenu>패키지</guimenu><guimenuitem>설치/업데이트</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "패키지 이름을 마우스 오른쪽 버튼으로 눌러 팝업 <guimenu>패키지</guimenu> 메뉴를 표시합니다. 그런 다음 <guimenuitem>설치/업데이트</guimenuitem> 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "패키지 목록 창 아래쪽 패키지 세부 정보 창에 있는 버전 탭의 설치할 버전 목록에서 버전을 선택하고 목록 오른쪽에 있는 <guibutton>설치/업데이트</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. 저장소에서 설치할 버전 목록의 패키지를 사용할 수 있지만 설치하지 못할 수 있습니다. 특정 버전은 설치된 다른 패키지와 호환되지 않을 수 있습니다. 선택한 버전을 시스템에 설치할 수 없을 경우 패키지 관리자가 경고 메시지를 표시하고 패키지를 설치하지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "패키지가 이미 설치되어 있으며 사용할 수 있는 업데이트가 없을 경우(상태 열 또는 <menuchoice><guimenu>패키지</guimenu><guimenuitem>패키지 버전 정보</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션 참조) <guibutton>설치/업데이트</guibutton> 옵션이 비활성화되어 해당 옵션을 선택할 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "설치/업데이트 확인 창이 표시됩니다. 검토를 위해 아직 설치되지 않은 패키지는 설치 세부 정보 창에 나열되며 설치된 패키지는 업데이트 세부 정보 창에 나열됩니다. <guibutton>진행</guibutton> 버튼을 선택하여 나열된 패키지를 선택 또는 업데이트합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "라이센스 대화 상자가 표시되는 경우 패키지를 설치하려면 라이센스에 동의해야 합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "패키지를 설치하는 중 오류가 발생하면 오류 대화 상자가 표시됩니다. 메시지에는 설치 또는 업데이트 실패 원인이 설명됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "패키지 제거"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "다음 단계를 수행하여 패키지를 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "다음 방법 중 하나로 패키지를 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "도구 모음에서 <guibutton>제거</guibutton> 버튼을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "메뉴 표시줄에서 <menuchoice><guimenu>패키지</guimenu><guimenuitem>제거</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "패키지 이름을 마우스 오른쪽 버튼으로 눌러 팝업 <guimenu>패키지</guimenu> 메뉴를 표시합니다. 그런 다음 <guimenuitem>제거</guimenuitem> 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "패키지가 설치되지 않은 경우 제거 옵션이 비활성화되어 해당 옵션을 선택할 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "제거 확인 창이 표시됩니다. 검토를 위해 제거할 패키지가 제거 세부 정보 창에 나열됩니다. <guibutton>진행</guibutton> 버튼을 선택하여 나열된 패키지를 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "다른 패키지가 종속되어 있어 패키지를 제거할 수 없을 경우 <guibutton>제거 계속</guibutton> 옵션을 선택하여 원래 제거 대상으로 선택한 나머지 패키지를 모두 제거할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "시스템 업데이트"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "중요한 특정 패키지(예: 일부 드라이버 및 기타 커널 구성 요소)가 업데이트되면 시스템에서 다음 작업을 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "현재 BE(부트 환경)의 복제본을 만듭니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "복제본의 패키지는 업데이트하고 현재 BE의 패키지는 업데이트하지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "다음 번에 시스템이 재부트될 때 새 BE가 기본 부트 옵션으로 지정되도록 설정합니다. 현재 BE는 대체 부트 옵션으로 유지됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "모든 패키지 업데이트"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "도구 모음의 <guibutton>업데이트</guibutton> 버튼 또는 <menuchoice><guimenu>패키지</guimenu><guimenuitem>업데이트</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택하면 패키지 관리자가 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 설치된 모든 패키지를 업데이트합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "현재 게시자로부터 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 모든 패키지가 업데이트됩니다. 게시자 목록의 다른 게시자로부터 패키지의 업데이트를 사용할 수 있으면, 현재 게시자가 비고정으로 구성된 경우에만 해당 패키지가 업데이트되고, 현재 게시자가 고정으로 구성된 경우 해당 패키지가 업데이트되지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "업데이트 창이 표시되고 업데이트 프로세스가 시작됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "시스템이 모든 카탈로그를 새로 고칩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "시스템이 설치된 모든 패키지를 평가하여 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 패키지를 확인합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 패키지가 없을 경우 \"사용 가능한 업데이트 없음\" 메시지가 표시되고 처리가 중지됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "패키지 업데이트를 사용할 수 있을 경우 검토를 위해 업데이트할 패키지가 나열됩니다. 후속 단계부터는 더 이상 <guibutton>취소</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 업데이트를 중단할 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "<guibutton>진행</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 업데이트를 계속합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "위의 <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>에 설명된 대로 업데이트 중인 패키지에 따라 시스템이 새 BE(부트 환경)를 만들 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "새 BE가 필요한 것으로 확인되었지만 새 BE를 만들 수 없을 경우 오류 메시지가 표시됩니다. 디스크 공간 부족 문제일 경우 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "<guibutton>닫기</guibutton>를 눌러 업데이트 프로세스를 취소합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "<xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/>의 지침에 따라 더 이상 필요하지 않은 BE를 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "<guibutton>업데이트</guibutton>를 다시 선택하여 업데이트 프로세스를 다시 시작합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "시스템이 모든 패키지 업데이트를 다운로드합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "시스템이 패키지 업데이트를 설치합니다. 복제된 BE가 만들어진 경우 업데이트가 복제본에 설치되며, 복제본이 만들어지지 않은 경우 업데이트가 현재 BE에 설치됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "업데이트 프로세스 중 오류가 발생하면 세부 정보 패널이 확장되고 오류 세부 정보가 표시됩니다. 실패한 단계 옆에 오류 상태 표시기가 나타납니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "시스템이 업데이트를 위해 새 BE를 만든 경우 기본 BE 이름을 편집할 수 있습니다. 기본 BE 이름을 그대로 사용하려면 <guibutton>지금 재시작</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 시스템을 즉시 재부트합니다. 시스템을 나중에 다시 시작하려면 <guibutton>다음에 재시작</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. 새 BE로 부트하려면 다시 시작해야 합니다. 새 BE가 기본 부트 옵션으로 설정되고, 현재 BE가 대체 부트 옵션으로 제공됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "업데이트 관리자 사용"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "시스템 알림 또는 데스크탑 메뉴 표시줄에서 업데이트 관리자를 열 수 있습니다. 업데이트 관리자는 위의 <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>에 설명된 것과 동일한 프로세스를 실행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "소프트웨어 업데이트 알림"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "시스템은 설치된 패키지에 대한 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는지 여부를 주기적으로 확인합니다. 시스템이 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 것으로 감지하면 업데이트를 사용할 수 있음 알림 아이콘과 팝업이 시스템 알림 트레이에 표시됩니다. 알림 아이콘을 누르면 업데이트 관리자가 열립니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "데스크탑 시스템 메뉴"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "업데이트 관리자를 열려면 데스크탑 메뉴 표시줄에서<menuchoice><guimenu>시스템</guimenu><guisubmenu>관리</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>업데이트 관리자</guimenuitem></menuchoice>를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "게시자 관리"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "IPS 패키지 게시자를 추가, 수정 및 제거할 수 있습니다. 게시자의 우선 순위를 변경하고, 사용 및 고정 설정을 변경하고, 게시자 별칭을 변경하고, 게시자 원본을 추가 또는 제거하고, 게시자 미러를 추가 또는 제거할 수 있습니다. 키, 인증서 및 서명 정책을 관리할 수도 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "시스템 게시자는 예외입니다. 시스템 게시자는 게시자 관리 창에서만 확인할 수 있습니다. 시스템 게시자는 제거 또는 수정할 수 없으며 시스템 게시자의 우선 순위는 변경할 수 없습니다. <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>를 참조하십시오. 세부 정보 창에 선택된 게시자가 시스템 게시자인지 여부가 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "게시자 추가"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "IPS 패키지 게시자를 추가하려면 게시자 추가 창을 사용합니다. 게시자 추가 창을 열려면 다음 작업 중 하나를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "<guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴에서 <guimenuitem>추가</guimenuitem> 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>게시자 추가</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>게시자 관리</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택합니다. 게시자 관리 창에서 <guibutton>추가</guibutton> 버튼을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "게시자 추가 창에서 다음 단계를 수행하여 IPS 패키지 게시자를 추가합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "URI 필드에 게시자 URI를 입력합니다. URI는 네트워크 위치(예: <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> 또는 <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>)입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "별칭 필드에 이 게시자에 대한 대체 이름을 입력할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "<guibutton>추가</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "게시자 추가 대화 상자가 표시됩니다. 프로세스를 취소하려면 <guibutton>취소</guibutton>를 누르고, 자세한 정보를 표시하려면 세부 정보를 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "새 게시자가 성공적으로 추가된 경우 새 게시자 이름, 별칭 및 URI를 나타내는 게시자 추가 완료 대화 상자가 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "새 게시자가 추가되지 않은 경우 문제에 대한 정보를 나타내는 게시자 오류 대화 상자가 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "새 게시자는 게시자 관리 창에 마지막 게시자로 나열되며 사용으로 설정되고 고정으로 지정됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "새 게시자의 우선 순위 변경, 사용 및 고정 설정 변경, 게시자 별칭 변경, 게시자 원본 추가, SSL 키 및 인증서 설정, 게시자 미러 추가, 게시자 인증서 및 서명 정책 추가에 대한 자세한 내용은 <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/>을 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "게시자 수정"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "게시자 속성을 수정하려면 <menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>게시자 관리</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택합니다. 현재 구성된 게시자가 게시자 관리 창에 나열됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "게시자 관리 창에서 게시자의 우선 순위를 변경하고, 게시자를 사용 또는 사용 안함으로 설정하고, 게시자를 고정 또는 비고정으로 설정하고, 게시자를 제거할 수 있습니다. <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> 및 <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>를 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "게시자 수정 창을 열려면 <guibutton>수정</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. 게시자 수정 창에서 게시자 별칭을 변경하고, 게시자 원본을 추가 또는 제거하고, 게시자 미러를 추가 또는 제거하고, SSL 키 및 인증서를 설정하고, 게시자 인증서 및 서명 정책을 관리할 수 있습니다. <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> 및 <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>을 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "우선 순위 및 고착성 변경"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "게시자 관리 창을 표시하려면 <menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>게시자 관리</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "게시자 우선 순위"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "게시자는 게시자 관리 창에 우선 순위대로 나열됩니다. 우선 순위가 가장 높은 게시자가 목록 위쪽에 표시되고, 우선 순위가 가장 낮은 게시지가 목록 아래쪽에 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "목록 위쪽에 있는 게시자를 기본 게시자라고 하기도 합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "기본 게시자는 사용 안함으로 설정하거나 제거할 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "패키지를 검색할 때 게시자를 지정하지 않을 경우 우선 순위가 더 높은 게시자의 카탈로그가 먼저 검색됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "비고정 게시자로부터 설치된 패키지를 업데이트하면 우선 순위가 더 높은 게시자의 카탈로그가 업데이트를 위해 먼저 검색됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "게시자의 우선 순위를 변경하려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "게시자 관리 창의 목록에서 게시자 행을 눌러 강조 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "게시자 목록 오른쪽에 있는 <guibutton>위쪽</guibutton> 및 <guibutton>아래쪽</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 선택된 게시자의 우선 순위를 높이거나 낮춥니다. 새 우선 순위에 따라 나열되는 선택된 게시자가 목록 위쪽/아래쪽으로 이동됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "선택된 게시자가 시스템 게시자일 경우 <guibutton>위쪽</guibutton> 및 <guibutton>아래쪽</guibutton> 버튼이 사용 안함으로 설정됩니다. 시스템 게시자의 우선 순위는 변경할 수 없습니다. 시스템 게시자의 우선 순위는 변경할 수 없으므로 시스템 게시자보다 우선 순위가 한 단계 높은 게시자의 우선 순위를 낮출 수 없으며 시스템 게시자보다 우선 순위가 한 단계 낮은 게시자의 우선 순위를 높일 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "게시자 관리 창 아래쪽에 있는 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "사용 및 고정"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "게시자를 추가하면 기본적으로 사용 및 고정 속성이 설정됩니다. 기본 게시자(<xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> 참조)는 사용 안함으로 설정할 수 없습니다. 시스템 게시자도 사용 안함으로 설정할 수 없으며, 시스템 게시자의 고정 설정도 변경할 수 없습니다. 기타 모든 사용 및 고정 설정은 변경할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "게시자에 대한 고정 속성을 설정하면 해당 게시자로부터 설치된 패키지를 다른 게시자로부터 업데이트할 수 없습니다. 게시자에 대한 고정 속성을 설정하지 않으면 해당 게시자가 비고정으로 설정됩니다. 게시자가 비고정일 경우 원래 해당 게시자로부터 온 패키지를 다른 게시자로부터 업데이트할 수 있습니다. 다른 게시자가 원래 패키지 게시자보다 최신 패키지 버전을 가지고 있는 경우가 있습니다. 이때 해당 최신 버전으로 업데이트하려면 원래 게시자를 비고정으로 설정해야 합니다. 또한 우선 순위가 더 낮은 게시자가 비고정일 경우 우선 순위가 더 높은 게시자가 비고정 게시자로부터 설치된 패키지의 업데이트를 위해 먼저 검색됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "사용 안함으로 설정된 게시자는 업데이트 또는 설치할 패키지를 위해 검색되지 않으며, 사용 안함으로 설정된 게시자의 카탈로그는 새로 고쳐지지 않습니다. 사용 안함으로 설정된 게시자는 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴에 표시되지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "게시자에 대한 사용 및 고정 설정을 변경하려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>게시자 관리</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택하여 게시자 관리 창을 엽니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "사용 상자 또는 고정 상자를 눌러 설정을 토글합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "별칭, 원본 및 미러 변경"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "수정할 게시자를 선택합니다. 게시자 관리 창에서 게시자 목록 아래의 세부 정보 창에 선택된 게시자에 대한 현재 원본이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "게시자 목록 오른쪽에 있는 <guibutton>수정</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 게시자 수정 창을 엽니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "선택된 게시자가 시스템 게시자일 경우 <guibutton>수정</guibutton> 버튼이 사용 안함으로 설정됩니다. 세부 정보 창에 선택된 게시자가 시스템 게시자인 것으로 나타나며 이 게시자를 수정 또는 제거할 수 없음을 알리는 메시지가 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "일반 탭을 선택하여 게시자 별칭을 수정하고, 원본을 추가 및 제거하고, 미러를 추가 및 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "게시자 별칭"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "게시자 별칭은 게시자의 다른 이름입니다. 별칭 이름은 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴와 패키지 목록 창에서 사용됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "이 게시자의 별칭을 변경하려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "게시자 수정 창의 일반 탭에서 별칭 필드에 새 이름을 입력합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "게시자 수정 창 아래쪽에 있는 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "게시자 별칭이 게시자 관리 창에서 변경되었습니다. 게시자 관리 창 아래쪽에 있는 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "게시자 원본"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "원본은 패키지 메타 데이터(패키지 매니페스트 및 카탈로그)와 패키지 내용(패키지 파일)을 모두 포함하는 IPS 패키지 저장소 또는 아카이브의 위치입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "원본 값은 IPS 패키지 저장소의 URI입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "이 게시자의 원본을 변경, 추가 또는 제거하려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "게시자 수정 창의 일반 탭을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "원본을 추가합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "원본 필드에 이 게시자와 연결할 새 원본의 URI를 입력합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "<guibutton>추가</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. 그러면 새 URI가 원본 필드 아래의 목록에 추가됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "원본을 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "원본 필드 아래의 목록에서 삭제할 URI를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "<guibutton>제거</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. 그러면 선택된 URI가 목록에서 제거됩니다. 이 게시자에 대한 원본이 하나만 정의된 경우 해당 원본을 제거할 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "원본을 변경합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "새 원본을 추가합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "변경할 원본을 삭제합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "원본 변경 사항이 게시자 관리 창의 세부 정보 창에 반영됩니다. 게시자 관리 창 아래쪽에 있는 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "게시자 미러"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "미러는 패키지 내용(패키지 파일)만 포함하는 IPS 패키지 저장소의 위치입니다. 미러에는 패키지 메타 데이터(패키지 매니페스트 및 카탈로그)가 포함되지 않습니다. 미러는 원본이 제공하는 데이터 중 일부만 제공합니다. 미러는 패키지 파일 다운로드에만 사용할 수 있습니다. 패키지 메타 데이터는 원본에서 다운로드됩니다. IPS 클라이언트는 클라이언트가 미러에서 패키지 내용을 다운로드하는 경우에도 원본에 액세스하여 게시자의 카탈로그를 가져옵니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "이 게시자에 대한 미러를 추가, 제거 또는 변경하려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "미러 레이블을 눌러 미러 필드 및 미러 목록을 표시합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "미러를 추가합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "미러 필드에 이 게시자와 연결할 새 미러의 URI를 입력합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "<guibutton>추가</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. 그러면 새 URI가 미러 필드 아래의 목록에 추가됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "미러를 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "미러 필드 아래의 목록에서 삭제할 URI를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>제거</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. 그러면 선택된 URI가 목록에서 제거됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "미러를 변경합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "변경할 미러를 삭제합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "새 미러를 추가합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "게시자 보안 관리"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "인증서는 이미지 또는 게시자의 서명 정책 중 더 제한적인 서명 정책에 따라 패키지 설치 전 패키지가 적절히 서명되었는지 확인하는 데 사용됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "보안을 수정할 게시자를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "게시자 목록 오른쪽에 있는 <guibutton>수정</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 게시자 수정 창을 엽니다. 그러면 게시자 관리 창에서 선택된 게시자가 게시자 수정 창 제목에 나열됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "게시자가 보안 원본을 가진 경우 일반 탭을 선택하여 SSL 키 및 SSL 인증서를 추가합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "인증서 탭을 선택하여 이 게시자에 대한 인증서를 관리합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "서명 정책 탭을 선택하여 이 게시자에 대한 서명 정책을 관리합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "SSL 키 및 인증서 추가"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "게시자가 보안 원본을 가진 경우 게시자에 대한 SSL 키 및 SSL 인증서를 추가합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "게시자 수정 창의 일반 탭을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "SSL 키 및 인증서 레이블을 눌러 SSL 키 필드 및 SSL 인증서 필드를 표시합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "SSL 키 필드 오른쪽에 있는 <guibutton>찾아보기</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 SSL 키 파일을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "SSL 인증서 필드 오른쪽에 있는 <guibutton>찾아보기</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 SSL 인증서 파일을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "인증서 관리"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "게시자 수정 창의 인증서 탭을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "인증서 목록 아래의 버튼을 사용하여 인증서를 추가하거나 현재 목록에서 선택된 인증서를 제거, 해지 또는 복구합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "게시자 수정 창에서 수행하는 작업은 게시자 수정 창 아래쪽에 있는 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누른 후에만 선택된 게시자의 인증서에 적용됩니다. <guibutton>취소</guibutton> 버튼을 누르면 변경 사항이 적용되지 않습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>추가</guibutton>. 게시자 수정 창 제목에 나열되는 게시자에 대한 새 게시자 인증서를 추가합니다. 게시자 인증서 추가 창에서 인증서(<tt>.pem</tt>) 파일을 찾아 선택합니다. 게시자 인증서 추가 창 아래쪽에 있는 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다. 그러면 새로 추가된 인증서가 게시자 수정 창의 인증서 탭에 있는 인증서 목록에서 선택됩니다. 세부 정보 창에 이 인증서가 \"추가 대상으로 표시\"된 것으로 나타납니다. 게시자 수정 창에서 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누르면 이 인증서가 추가됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "이 게시자에 대한 인증서 목록에서 수정할 인증서 또는 세부 정보를 확인할 인증서를 선택합니다. 선택된 인증서에 대한 세부 정보가 인증서 목록 및 버튼 행 아래에 표시됩니다. 만료된 인증서가 계속 승인됨 상태일 수 있으며 인증서 만료 전 게시되었던(설치되지 않아도 됨) 서명된 패키지를 검증하는 데 사용될 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "인증서 목록 제목을 눌러 목록을 다시 정렬합니다. 조직 및 이름 열의 크기를 조정할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>제거</guibutton>. 현재 인증서 목록에서 선택된 인증서를 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>해지</guibutton>. 현재 인증서 목록에서 선택된 인증서가 승인됨이면 <guibutton>해지</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 이 인증서를 해지됨 상태로 처리합니다. 인증서 목록에서 이 인증서의 상태가 해지됨으로 변경됩니다. 게시자 수정 창에서 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누르면 이 변경 사항이 인증서에 적용됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>복구</guibutton>. 현재 인증서 목록에서 선택된 인증서가 해지됨이면 <guibutton>복구</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 이 인증서를 승인됨 상태로 처리합니다. 세부 정보 창에 이 인증서가 \"복구 대상으로 표시\"된 것으로 나타납니다. 게시자 수정 창에서 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 누르면 이 인증서가 복구됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "서명 정책 관리"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "게시자 수정 창의 서명 정책 탭을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "서명 정책 탭의 버튼을 사용하여 게시자 수정 창 제목에 나열되는 게시자의 패키지를 설치할 때 사용할 서명 정책을 설정합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "전역 서명 정책을 설정하려면 기본 설정 창의 서명 정책 탭을 사용합니다(<xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/> 참조)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "서명이 무시됨: 모든 패키지에 대한 서명을 무시합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "서명이 선택 사항이지만 제공할 경우 유효해야 함: 서명이 있는 모든 패키지가 유효하게 서명되었는지 확인하되 설치된 모든 패키지를 서명할 필요는 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "하나 이상의 유효한 서명이 필요함: 새로 설치된 모든 패키지의 서명이 하나 이상 유효해야 합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "서명이 필요하며 패키지 서명을 검증할 때 텍스트 필드에 지정된 이름이 인증서 이름에 포함되어야 합니다. 지정된 이름이 두 개 이상일 경우 이름은 쉼표로 구분되어야 합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "게시자 제거"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "다음 단계를 수행하여 게시자를 제거합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "제거할 게시자를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "게시자 목록 오른쪽에 있는 <guibutton>제거</guibutton> 버튼을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "선택된 게시자가 시스템 게시자일 경우 <guibutton>제거</guibutton> 버튼이 사용 안함으로 설정됩니다. 세부 정보 창에 선택된 게시자가 시스템 게시자인 것으로 나타나며 이 게시자를 수정 또는 제거할 수 없음을 알리는 메시지가 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "부트 환경 관리"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "BE(부트)는 부트 가능 이미지입니다. Oracle Solaris 시스템에서 여러 개의 BE를 유지 관리할 수 있습니다. 하나의 BE가 시작 또는 재부트 시 기본 BE로 사용되며, 다른 BE는 대체 부트 옵션으로 제공됩니다. 부트한 BE가 활성 BE입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "<literal>beadm</literal>(1) 명령을 사용하여 BE를 만들거나, 마운트, 마운트 해제, 활성화 또는 삭제하거나 이름을 바꿀 수 있습니다. BE에 대한 자세한 내용은 <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>를 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "패키지 관리자는 <literal>beadm</literal>(1) 명령이 제공하는 기능 중 일부를 제공합니다. 패키지 관리자 <menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>부트 환경 관리</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 사용하여 부트 환경 관리 창을 열 수 있습니다. 부트 환경 관리 창에는 이 시스템의 BE가 나열되며 이 창에서 아래 설명된 대로 해당 BE를 활성화 및 삭제하고 이름을 바꿀 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "BE 만들기"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "다음 작업 중 하나를 수행하면 새 BE가 자동으로 만들어집니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris OS를 설치합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "중요한 특정 시스템 패키지(예: 일부 드라이버 및 기타 커널 구성 요소)를 설치 또는 업데이트합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "<literal>beadm create</literal> 명령을 사용합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "<literal>pkg update</literal> 명령을 실행하거나 <guibutton>업데이트</guibutton> 버튼을 사용하여 업데이트를 사용할 수 있는 모든 패키지를 업데이트하는 경우 새 BE가 만들어지기도 합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "BE 활성화"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>부트 환경 관리</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택하여 부트 환경 관리 창을 엽니다. 각 BE가 창에 나열됩니다. 현재 부트한 BE의 경우 BE 이름 왼쪽에 확인 표시가 나타납니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "다음 번 재부트 후 다른 BE가 기본 활성 BE로 사용되도록 지정하려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "다음 번 재부트 후 기본 활성 BE로 사용할 BE에 대해 <guibutton>재부트 시 활성</guibutton> 버튼을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "부트 환경 관리 창에서 <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "BE 이름 바꾸기"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>부트 환경 관리</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택하여 부트 환경 관리 창을 엽니다. 각 BE가 창에 나열됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "현재 활성 BE의 이름을 바꿀 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "삭제 대상으로 표시한 BE의 이름을 바꿀 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "BE의 이름을 바꾸려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "이름을 바꿀 BE의 이름을 두 번 누릅니다. 그러면 이름 필드가 편집 가능 필드로 바뀝니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "새 이름을 입력합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "BE 제거"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>파일</guimenu><guimenuitem>부트 환경 관리</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택하여 부트 환경 관리 창을 엽니다. 각 BE가 창에 나열됩니다. 창의 맨 오른쪽 열은 삭제 열입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "부트 환경 관리 창의 가운데 열에는 BE 크기가 표시됩니다. 저장소 장치의 공간을 확보하기 위해 BE를 제거할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "현재 활성 BE를 삭제할 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "이름을 바꾼 BE를 삭제할 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "BE를 삭제하려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "삭제할 BE에 대한 <guibutton>삭제</guibutton> 상자를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "WebInstall 작업"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "패키지 관리자는 한 번만 누르는 간단한 WebInstall 프로세스를 사용하여 패키지를 설치할 수 있도록 지원합니다. WebInstall 프로세스에는 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일이 사용됩니다. <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일에는 게시자를 추가하고 해당 게시자로부터 설치할 수 있는 패키지를 추가하는 데 필요한 정보가 포함되어 있습니다. WebInstall 프로세스가 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일의 정보를 읽고 사용합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "WebInstall을 사용하여 파일 내보내기"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "시스템에 설치한 패키지를 다른 사용자가 설치할 수 있도록 하려는 경우 WebInstall 프로세스를 사용하여 해당 패키지 파일에 대한 설치 지침을 내보낼 수 있습니다. 해당 패키지 및 게시자 설치를 위한 설치 지침으로 구성된 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일이 만들어집니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "선택한 패키지 및 패키지 게시자에 대한 설치 지침을 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일로 내보내려면 다음 단계를 수행합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "<guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴에서 패키지를 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일에 포함시킬 게시자를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "패키지 목록 창에서 설치 지침을 배포할 패키지를 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guisubmenu>파일</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>선택 항목 내보내기</guimenuitem></menuchoice>를 눌러 선택 항목 내보내기 확인 창을 표시합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "<guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 선택 항목을 확인합니다. 선택 항목 내보내기 창이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "확장자가 <filename>.p5i</filename>인 <filename>p5i</filename> 파일의 기본 이름이 제공됩니다. 이 이름은 변경할 수 있지만 확장자는 변경할 수 없습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "<filename>p5i</filename> 파일의 기본 위치가 제공됩니다. 위치를 변경할 수 있습니다. <guibutton>찾아보기</guibutton> 버튼을 사용할 경우 선택 항목 내보내기 창 오른쪽 아래에 있는 드롭다운 메뉴에서 <filename>p5i 파일</filename> 옵션을 선택하여 파일 목록에 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일만 표시할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "<guibutton>저장</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 파일 이름 및 위치를 저장합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "WebInstall을 사용하여 게시자 추가 및 패키지 설치"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "WebInstall 프로세스를 사용하면 <filename>p5i</filename> 파일을 통해 패키지를 설치할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename> 파일을 찾습니다. 이 파일은 사용자의 데스크탑 또는 웹 사이트에 있을 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "다음 방법 중 하나로 패키지 관리자를 WebInstall 모드로 시작합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "데스크탑에서 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일을 누릅니다. 그러면 연결된 응용 프로그램(패키지 관리자 웹 설치 프로그램)이 시작됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "명령줄에서 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일에 대한 경로와 함께 패키지 관리자를 시작합니다. 예를 들어, 다음 명령을 입력합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename> 파일에 대한 링크가 있는 URL 위치로 이동합니다. <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일은 이 MIME 유형을 등록한 웹 서버에 있어야 합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename>가 이 MIME 유형을 등록하지 않은 웹 서버에 있을 경우 <filename>.p5i</filename> 파일을 데스크탑에 저장한 다음 WebInstall을 눌러 시작합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "설치/업데이트 창이 표시됩니다. 창 위쪽에 \"패키지 관리자 웹 설치 프로그램/다음의 내용들이 여러분의 시스템에 추가됩니다.\"라는 레이블이 표시됩니다. 그런 다음 게시자 및 패키지가 나열됩니다. <guibutton>진행</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 설치를 계속합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "패키지 게시자가 시스템에 구성되지 않은 경우 게시자의 이름 및 URI가 이미 입력된 상태로 게시자 추가 창이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "추가할 게시자가 보안 게시자일 경우 SSL 키 및 인증서가 필요합니다. 찾아보기를 눌러 시스템에서 SSL 키 및 SSL 인증서를 찾습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "게시자가 성공적으로 추가된 경우 게시자 추가 완료 대화 상자가 표시됩니다. <guibutton>확인</guibutton> 버튼을 눌러 설치를 계속합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "<filename>.p5i</filename> 파일에 사용 안함으로 설정된 게시자의 패키지가 있을 경우 WebInstall이 게시자 사용 대화 상자를 엽니다. 이 대화 상자에서 패키지를 설치할 수 있도록 게시자를 사용으로 설정할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "패키지 관리자에서 <guibutton>설치/업데이트</guibutton>를 선택할 때와 동일하게 설치/업데이트 창이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "문제 해결"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "언제든지 검토할 수 있도록 오류, 경고 및 정보 메시지가 로그에 저장됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "메시지 로그 보기"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>보기</guimenu><guimenuitem>로그</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 선택하여 로그 창을 엽니다. 그러면 로그 창에 패키지 관리자 및 업데이트 관리자의 오류, 경고 및 정보 메시지가 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "로그 창 아래쪽에 있는 <guibutton>지우기</guibutton> 버튼을 선택하면 모든 메시지가 삭제됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "오류 또는 경고가 기록되면 상태 표시줄 왼쪽에 노란색 삼각형이 표시됩니다. 노란색 삼각형을 누르면 로그 창이 표시됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "기본 설정"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>편집</guimenu><guimenuitem>기본 설정</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 메뉴 옵션을 사용하여 패키지 관리자 사용자 인터페이스 설정 중 일부를 변경합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "기본 설정] 창의 세 가지 탭은 다음과 같습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "일반 탭에서는 종료 기본 설정 및 확인 대화 상자 기본 설정을 구성할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "선택적 구성 요소 탭에서는 패키지를 설치 또는 업데이트할 때 설치할 선택적 패키지 구성 요소에 대한 기본 설정을 구성할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "서명 정책 탭에서는 이 이미지에 대한 서명 정책을 설정할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "종료 기본 설정"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>편집</guimenu><guimenuitem>기본 설정</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 선택하고 일반 탭을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "\"종료 시 현재 상태 저장\" 상자가 선택된 경우 패키지 관리자가 다음 설정을 저장하여 다음 번에 패키지 관리자를 시작할 때 복원합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">세로 및 가로 구분선</emphasis> — 창에 있는 창의 너비 및 높이"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">창 크기</emphasis> — 패키지 관리자 창의 전체 크기"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">게시자 옵션</emphasis> — 패키지 관리자를 닫을 때 <guimenu>게시자</guimenu> 드롭다운 메뉴에서 선택된 게시자 또는 기타 옵션"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">범주</emphasis> — 각 게시자에 대해 선택된 범주 및 확장/축소된 범주"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "확인 대화 상자 기본 설정"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "패키지가 설치, 업데이트 또는 제거되면 패키지 목록 및 수행할 작업을 나타내는 확인 대화 상자가 표시됩니다. 이러한 확인 대화 상자를 표시하지 않으려면 기본 설정 창에서 해당 선택 항목의 선택을 취소합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "특정 확인 대화 상자에서 \"이 확인 대화 상자를 다시 표시하지 않음\" 확인란을 누르면 해당 대화 상자에 대해 이 기본 설정이 해제됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "서명 정책 기본 설정"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "서명 정책 탭의 버튼을 사용하여 이 이미지에 패키지를 설치할 때 서명을 무시하거나 요구합니다. 특정 게시자에 대한 서명 정책을 설정하려면 게시자 관리 창에서 게시자를 선택하고 <guibutton>수정</guibutton> 버튼을 누른 다음 게시자 수정 창의 서명 정책 탭을 사용합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "이미지 서명 정책에 대한 선택 항목은 설정이 특정 게시자로부터 설치된 패키지가 아닌 이미지에 설치된 모든 패키지에 적용된다는 점을 제외하고 게시자 서명 정책에 대한 선택 항목과 동일합니다. <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>을 참조하십시오."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "선택적 구성 요소 기본 설정 언어 선택"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "<menuchoice><guimenu>편집</guimenu><guimenuitem>기본 설정</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 옵션을 선택하고 선택적 구성 요소 탭을 선택합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "기본적으로 패키지에 대한 언어 선택 항목에서 모든 언어 설치가 선택되어 있습니다. 설치할 언어 중 일부만 선택하여 설치 공간을 절약할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "다음 언어만 설치가 선택된 경우 언어 목록의 열 제목 맨 왼쪽에 있는 확인란 아이콘을 눌러 모든 언어를 선택할 수 있습니다. 열 제목을 다시 누르면 모든 언어의 선택이 해제됩니다. 목록을 정렬하려면 언어 및 영역 열 제목을 누릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "확인 버튼을 눌러 변경 사항을 저장합니다. 그러면 현재 설치된 패키지와 후속 패키지 설치 및 업데이트에 해당 설정이 적용됩니다. 새 설정을 기반으로 선택적 패키지 구성 요소를 설치 또는 제거할 때 필요에 따라 이미지가 업데이트됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "언어 중 일부만 포함되도록 이전에 이미지를 업데이트한 경우 기본적으로 이 창에서 다음 언어만 설치가 선택되며 모든 언어 설치 옵션을 선택할 경우 해당 언어 목록이 비활성화됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "기타 선택적 구성 요소 기본 설정"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "기본적으로 기타 구성 요소 선택 항목에서 모든 개발 파일 설치 및 모든 설명서 설치가 선택되어 있습니다. 개발 파일 또는 설명서의 선택을 해제하여 설치 공간을 절약할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "용어"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "별칭"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "게시자의 다른 이름입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "BE(부트 환경)"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "부트 가능 Oracle Solaris 환경의 인스턴스입니다. 시스템 소프트웨어를 포함하는 부트 환경의 루트 파일 시스템 및 기타 모든 파일 시스템이 ZFS 데이터 집합이어야 합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "활성 부트 환경은 현재 부트된 부트 환경입니다. 시스템에는 여러 부트 환경이 있을 수 있으며, 재부트할 때 부트할 환경을 선택할 수 있습니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "복제본"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "정확히 일치하는 복사본입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "복제본은 운영 체제, 파일 시스템 또는 볼륨과 정확히 일치하는 복사본일 수 있습니다. 이 복사본은 원본과 100% 호환됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "데이터 세트"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "복제본, 파일 시스템, 스냅샷, 볼륨 등의 ZFS 엔티티에 대한 일반 이름입니다. 각 데이터 세트는 ZFS 이름 공간에서 고유 이름으로 식별됩니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "이미지"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "부트 및 설치 가능한 패키지의 운영 체제 소프트웨어 모음입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "패키지, 패키지와 연결된 파일, 디렉토리, 링크 및 종속성을 설치할 수 있는 시스템의 위치입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "원본"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "게시자가 패키지를 게시하는 패키지 서버입니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "패키지"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "파일, 디렉토리, 링크, 드라이버 및 종속성의 모음으로서 정의된 형식을 따릅니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "게시자"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "패키지를 설계하고 만들며 패키지 서버에 게시하는 개인, 그룹 또는 회사입니다. 패키지 서버는 (기본) 게시자의 패키지를 다운로드용으로 제공합니다."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "시스템 게시자"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "시스템 게시자는 특정 패키지가 전역 영역과 동기화된 상태로 유지되도록 하기 위해 링크된 이미지, 특히 비전역 영역에서 사용되는 특수한 게시자입니다. 전역 영역은 비전역 영역에서 특수한 시스템 게시자를 구성하여 비전역 영역에서 패키지를 제약합니다. 비전역 영역은 우선 순위 제거, 사용 안함으로 설정, 수정 또는 변경을 비롯하여 특정 변경 사항을 적용할 수 없으므로 시스템 게시자가 특수하게 사용됩니다."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/ko/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-C.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/C/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="C"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-ar.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ar/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="ar"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-ca.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ca/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="ca"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-cs.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/cs/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="cs"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-de.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- Die grafische Benutzeroberfläche für das Image Packaging System ermöglicht Ihnen die Durchführung vieler zentraler Packaging-Aufgaben auf benutzerfreundliche Art und Weise.
- </description>
- <type> Benutzerhandbuch</type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/de/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="de"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-es.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Gestor de paquetes</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- La interfaz gráfica para el sistema de empaquetado de imágenes permite realizar fácilmente varias tareas de empaquetado principales.
- </description>
- <type> guía del usuario </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/es/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="es"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-fr.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Gestionnaire de packages</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- L'interface graphique d'Image Packaging System vous permet d'effectuer un grand nombre de tâches de conditionnement de base de façon conviviale.
- </description>
- <type> guide de l'utilisateur </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/fr/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="fr"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-hu.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/hu/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="hu"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-id.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/id/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="id"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-it.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- L'interfaccia grafica per Image Packaging System consente di eseguire numerose attività di packaging in modo intuitivo.
- </description>
- <type> guida utente </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/it/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="it"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-ja.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>パッケージマネージャー</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- Image Packaging System のグラフィカルインタフェースによって、多くのコアパッケージングタスクをユーザーフレンドリーな方法で実行できます。
- </description>
- <type> ユーザーズガイド </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ja/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="ja"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-ko.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>패키지 관리자</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- Image Packaging System의 그래픽 인터페이스에서 사용자에게 친숙한 형태로 많은 핵심 패키징 작업을 수행할 수 있습니다.
- </description>
- <type> 사용자 설명서 </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ko/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="ko"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-pl.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/pl/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="pl"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-pt_BR.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- A interface gráfica do Image Packaging System permite que você execute muitas tarefas básicas de empacotamento de forma amigável.
- </description>
- <type> guia do usuário </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/pt_BR/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="pt_BR"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-ru.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ru/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="ru"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-sv.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>Package Manager</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011"/>
- <subject category="GNOME|System"/>
- <description>
- The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows
- you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly
- fashion.
- </description>
- <type>
- user's guide
- </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"/>
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/sv/package-manager.xml"/>
- <language code="sv"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510"/>
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates"/>
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-zh_CN.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>软件包管理器</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- 通过映像包管理系统的用户友好图形界面，您可以方便地执行许多核心包管理任务。
- </description>
- <type>用户指南</type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_CN/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="zh_CN"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-zh_HK.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>套裝軟體管理員</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- 「影像封裝系統」的圖形介面讓您能夠輕鬆地執行許多核心封裝作業。
- </description>
- <type> 使用者指南 </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_HK/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="zh_HK"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/package-manager-zh_TW.omf Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<omf>
- <resource>
- <creator>[email protected] (Alta Elstad)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Padraig O'Brian)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (Michal Pyrc)</creator>
- <creator>[email protected] (John Rice)</creator>
- <maintainer>[email protected] (John Rice)</maintainer>
- <title>套裝軟體管理員</title>
- <date>2011</date>
- <version identifier="Package Manager V0.5.11" date="2011" />
- <subject category="GNOME|System" />
- <description>
- 「影像封裝系統」的圖形介面讓您能夠輕鬆地執行許多核心封裝作業。
- </description>
- <type> 使用者指南 </type>
- <format mime="text/xml" dtd="-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" />
- <identifier url="file:///usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_TW/package-manager.xml" />
- <language code="zh_TW"/>
- <relation seriesid="09df903c-bf82-a380-3bd5-4b85420411c510" />
- <rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="Oracle and/or its affiliates" />
- </resource>
-</omf>
--- a/src/gui/help/pl/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/pl/pl.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1481 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
- "Project-Id-Version: Package Manager\n"
- "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
- "POT-Creation-Date: 2007-11-01 14:28+0800\n"
- "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-11-01 14:28+0800\n"
- "Last-Translator: Polish l10n group <[email protected]>\n"
- "Language-Team: Polish <[email protected]>\n"
- "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
- "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
- "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:38(None) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:88(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:68(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:583(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:609(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:3(title)
-msgid "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:4(firstname)
-msgid "OpenSolaris"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:5(surname)
-msgid "Publications"
-msgstr "Publikacje"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:8(pubsnumber)
-msgid "822-7173"
-msgstr "822-7173"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:10(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2009"
-msgstr "Czerwiec 2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:11(publishername)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:13(year)
-msgid "2009"
-msgstr "2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:33(title)
-msgid "About the Package Manager"
-msgstr "O Menadżerze Pakietów"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:34(para)
-msgid "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-msgstr "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:35(para)
-msgid "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-msgstr "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:36(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-msgstr "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Zarządzanie pakietami"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:41(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Menadżer Pakietów pozwala ci wykonywać następujące czynności:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:42(para)
-msgid "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-msgstr "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:44(para)
-msgid "Update your system"
-msgstr "Aktualizować twój system"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:46(para)
-msgid "Add and manage publishers"
-msgstr "Add and manage publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:48(para)
-msgid "Create, remove, and manage boot environments"
-msgstr "Tworzyć, usuwać i zarządzać środowiskami uruchomieniowymi"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:51(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for a definition of the terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Zobacz <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> aby poznać definicje pojęć użytych w tym dokumencie."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:53(title)
-msgid "About Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "O Image Packaging System"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:54(para)
-msgid "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-msgstr "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:55(para)
-msgid "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-msgstr "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:56(para)
-msgid "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-msgstr "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:57(para)
-msgid "Once you have installed packages, IPS enables you to search, update, and manage packages on your system."
-msgstr "Gdy już zainstalujesz pakiety, IPS pozwala na wyszukiwanie, aktualizowanie, i zarządzanie nimi w systemie."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:58(para)
-msgid "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-msgstr "z IPS możesz aktualizować swoj system do nowszego wydania OpenSolaris, instalować i aktualizować oprogramowanie do najnowszych dostępnych w repozytorium wersji i ściągać pakiety z zapasowych repozytoriów."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:59(emphasis)
-msgid "The Package Manager provides a subset of the tasks that can be performed from the command-line."
-msgstr "Menadżer Pakietów pozwala na wykonywanie części czynności dostępnych w wierszu poleceń."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:61(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-msgstr "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:62(para)
-msgid "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-msgstr "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:63(para)
-msgid "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-msgstr "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:65(title)
-msgid "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-msgstr "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:66(para)
-msgid "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-msgstr "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:67(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Start Page"
-msgstr "Package Manager Start Page"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:71(para)
-msgid "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-msgstr "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:72(para)
-msgid "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:73(para)
-msgid "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:74(para)
-msgid "Select a package category"
-msgstr "Wybierz kategorię pakietów"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:76(para)
-msgid "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-msgstr "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:78(para)
-msgid "Perform a search"
-msgstr "Wyszukaj"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:80(para)
-msgid "Change the publisher"
-msgstr "Change the publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:83(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to return to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Wybierz <menuchoice><guimenu>Widok</guimenu><guimenuitem>Strona Startowa</guimenuitem></menuchoice> aby w dowolnym czasie wrócić do Strony Startowej."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:84(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:86(title)
-msgid "About The Package Manager Window"
-msgstr "About The Package Manager Window"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:87(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main View"
-msgstr "Package Manager Main View"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:91(para)
-msgid "The main window of the Package Manager consists of the following elements :"
-msgstr "Okno główne Menadżera Pakietów składa się z następujących elementów :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:92(emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr "Pasek menu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:93(para)
-msgid "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:97(emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr "Pasek narzędzi"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:98(para)
-msgid "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-msgstr "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:99(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:101(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:103(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:105(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:107(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:112(emphasis)
-msgid "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-msgstr "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:113(para)
-msgid "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-msgstr "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:114(emphasis)
-msgid "Select a publisher"
-msgstr "Select a publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:116(emphasis)
-msgid "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-msgstr "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:118(emphasis)
-msgid "Search for package across all publishers"
-msgstr "Search for package across all publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:120(emphasis)
-msgid "Add a publisher"
-msgstr "Add a publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:125(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr "Lista pakietów wg kategorii"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:126(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:127(emphasis)
-msgid "Applications"
-msgstr "Applications"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:129(emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop (GNOME)"
-msgstr "Desktop (GNOME)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:131(emphasis)
-msgid "Development"
-msgstr "Development"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:133(emphasis)
-msgid "Drivers"
-msgstr "Drivers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:135(emphasis)
-msgid "System"
-msgstr "System"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:137(emphasis)
-msgid "Web Services"
-msgstr "Web Services"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:142(emphasis)
-msgid "Recent Searches"
-msgstr "Recent Searches"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:143(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-msgstr "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:146(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr "Lista pakietów wg statusu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:147(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:148(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:150(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:152(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:154(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:156(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that you have selected."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Wybrane pakiety</emphasis> - Wyświetla listę wybranych pakietów."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:161(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-msgstr "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:162(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-msgstr "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:163(para)
-msgid "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-msgstr "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:164(para)
-msgid "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-msgstr "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:166(para)
-msgid "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-msgstr "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:168(para)
-msgid "When a recent search result is displayed"
-msgstr "When a recent search result is displayed"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:173(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr "Szczegóły pakietu"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:174(para)
-msgid "Click a package name to select it. Details of the selected package, such as name, version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr "Wybierz nazwę pakietu by ją zaznaczyć. Szczegóły zaznaczonego pakietu, takie jak nazwa, wersja, zależności i licencje są wyświetlone w tym oknie."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:180(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Settings"
-msgstr "Package Manager Settings"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:181(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-msgstr "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:182(title)
-msgid "Start Page Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferencje Strony Startowej"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:183(para)
-msgid "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:184(para)
-msgid "You can choose to turn off this setting so this page is not displayed when Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Możesz wybrać wyłączenie tego ustawienia aby ta strona nie wyświetlała się przy uruchomieniu Menadżera Pakietów."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:185(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-msgstr "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:186(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:188(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Exit Preferences"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:189(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-msgstr "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:190(para)
-msgid "The following settings are saved:"
-msgstr "The following settings are saved:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:191(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:193(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:195(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:199(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:200(para)
-msgid "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-msgstr "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:203(title)
-msgid "Working With Packages"
-msgstr "Pracuje z Pakietami"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:204(title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr "Instaluj pakiet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:205(para)
-msgid "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:206(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:208(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:209(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:211(para)
-msgid "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-msgstr "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:213(para)
-msgid "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-msgstr "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:216(title)
-msgid "Installation Error"
-msgstr "Błąd Instalacji"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:217(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-msgstr "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:220(title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr "Usuń pakiet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:221(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Aby usunąć pakiet wykonaj następujące kroki:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:222(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:224(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:225(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:227(para)
-msgid "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:229(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:233(title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr "Szukaj paczki"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:234(para)
-msgid "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-msgstr "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:235(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:236(para)
-msgid "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-msgstr "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:237(para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr "SUNWgames"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:239(para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr "games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:241(para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr "GNOME-games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:244(para)
-msgid "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:245(para)
-msgid "compiler"
-msgstr "compiler"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:247(para)
-msgid "tools"
-msgstr "tools"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:251(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:252(para)
-msgid "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:253(para)
-msgid "python"
-msgstr "python"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:255(para)
-msgid "book"
-msgstr "book"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:258(para)
-msgid "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-msgstr "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:262(para)
-msgid "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:264(para)
-msgid "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-msgstr "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:265(emphasis)
-msgid "The AND operator"
-msgstr "The AND operator"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:266(para)
-msgid "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-msgstr "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:269(emphasis)
-msgid "Double Quotes"
-msgstr "Double Quotes"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:270(para)
-msgid "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-msgstr "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:273(emphasis)
-msgid "Wildcard *"
-msgstr "Wildcard *"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:274(para)
-msgid "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-msgstr "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:275(para)
-msgid "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-msgstr "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:279(emphasis)
-msgid "The OR operator"
-msgstr "The OR operator"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:280(para)
-msgid "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-msgstr "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:285(title)
-msgid "Cancel Package Search"
-msgstr "Cancel Package Search"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:286(para)
-msgid "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-msgstr "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:288(title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr "Zaktualizuj pakiet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:289(para)
-msgid "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-msgstr "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:290(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:292(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-msgstr "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:295(para)
-msgid "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-msgstr "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:297(para)
-msgid "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-msgstr "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:299(title)
-msgid "Package Version Information"
-msgstr "Package Version Information"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:300(para)
-msgid "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-msgstr "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:301(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:303(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:305(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:309(title)
-msgid "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-msgstr "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:310(para)
-msgid "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:311(para)
-msgid "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-msgstr "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:315(title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:316(para)
-msgid "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-msgstr "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:317(para)
-msgid "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-msgstr "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:318(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-msgstr "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:319(para)
-msgid "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-msgstr "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:320(para)
-msgid "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-msgstr "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:321(para)
-msgid "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-msgstr "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:322(title)
-msgid "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-msgstr "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:323(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:324(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:325(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:326(para)
-msgid "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-msgstr "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:329(para)
-msgid "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-msgstr "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:330(emphasis)
-msgid "Preparation"
-msgstr "Przygotowywanie"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:332(emphasis)
-msgid "Download"
-msgstr "Pobierz"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:334(emphasis)
-msgid "Install"
-msgstr "Instaluj"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:337(para)
-msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-msgstr "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:339(para)
-msgid "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-msgstr "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:340(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:343(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:344(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:345(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:350(title) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:656(title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr "Update All Errors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:351(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-msgstr "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:352(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:353(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:659(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:354(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:660(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:355(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:357(para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:358(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:360(para)
-msgid "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-msgstr "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:365(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:367(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:369(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:373(title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Manage Boot Environments"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:374(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:375(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:377(para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:378(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:380(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:381(para)
-msgid "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:383(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-msgstr "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:388(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:389(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:391(para)
-msgid "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:398(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:400(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:401(para)
-msgid "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-msgstr "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:403(para)
-msgid "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:405(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:407(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-msgstr "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:408(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-msgstr "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:414(title)
-msgid "Add and Manage Publishers"
-msgstr "Add and Manage Publishers"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:415(para)
-msgid "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-msgstr "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:416(para)
-msgid "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-msgstr "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:417(title)
-msgid "Add a Publisher"
-msgstr "Add a Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:418(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:419(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:420(para)
-msgid "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:422(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:424(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:426(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:428(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:431(para)
-msgid "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-msgstr "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:434(title)
-msgid "Remove a Publisher"
-msgstr "Remove a Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:435(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:436(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:459(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:473(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:492(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:511(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:528(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:438(para)
-msgid "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:440(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:442(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:446(title)
-msgid "Set Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Set Publisher Priority"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:447(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:448(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:450(para)
-msgid "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-msgstr "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:451(emphasis)
-msgid "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-msgstr "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:453(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:465(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:484(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:503(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:520(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:537(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:457(title)
-msgid "Modify Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Modify Publisher Alias"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:458(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:461(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:463(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:467(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:486(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:505(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:522(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:539(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:471(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Add Publisher Origins"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:472(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:475(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:477(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:496(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:515(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:532(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:478(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:479(para)
-msgid "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-msgstr "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:482(para)
-msgid "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:490(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Remove Publisher Origins"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:491(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:494(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:497(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:499(para)
-msgid "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:500(para)
-msgid "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-msgstr "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:509(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-msgstr "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:516(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:518(para)
-msgid "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:526(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:527(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:530(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-msgstr "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:533(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:535(para)
-msgid "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:544(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Working With WebInstall"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:545(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:546(title)
-msgid "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-msgstr "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:547(para)
-msgid "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-msgstr "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:548(para)
-msgid "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-msgstr "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:549(para)
-msgid "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:551(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-msgstr "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:553(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:555(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:557(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:559(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:561(para)
-msgid "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-msgstr "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:563(para)
-msgid "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-msgstr "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:567(title)
-msgid "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:568(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:569(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-msgstr "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:571(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-msgstr "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:572(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-msgstr "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:574(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-msgstr "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(command)
-msgid "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:577(para)
-msgid "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-msgstr "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:578(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-msgstr "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:582(para)
-msgid "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-msgstr "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:586(para)
-msgid "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:587(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:589(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:590(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:592(para)
-msgid "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:594(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:596(para)
-msgid "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:597(para)
-msgid "The application will close when all packages are installed."
-msgstr "Aplikacja zamknie się gdy wszystkie pakiety zostaną zainstalowane."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:601(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-msgstr "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:602(para)
-msgid "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-msgstr "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:605(title)
-msgid "Working With the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Praca z Menadżerem Aktualizacji"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:606(title)
-msgid "About The Update Manager"
-msgstr "O Menadżerze Aktualizacji"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:607(para)
-msgid "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-msgstr "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:608(title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr "Okno główne Menadżera Aktualizacji"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:612(para)
-msgid "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-msgstr "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:613(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-msgstr "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:616(title)
-msgid "Using the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Używanie Menadżera Pakietów"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:617(para)
-msgid "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-msgstr "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:618(para)
-msgid "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:619(para)
-msgid "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-msgstr "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:620(para)
-msgid "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:622(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:623(para)
-msgid "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:626(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-msgstr "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:627(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:628(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:629(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:630(para)
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-msgstr "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:633(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Kliknij <guibutton>Anuluj</guibutton> aby anulować proces."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:637(para)
-msgid "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-msgstr "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:638(para)
-msgid "Prepare"
-msgstr "Prepare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:640(para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr "Pobierz."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:642(para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr "Zainstaluj."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:645(para)
-msgid "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-msgstr "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:646(para)
-msgid "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-msgstr "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:647(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:650(para)
-msgid "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:651(para)
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:657(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-msgstr "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:658(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:661(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:663(para)
-msgid "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-msgstr "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:665(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:669(title)
-msgid "2010.03 Release Notes"
-msgstr "2010.03 Release Notes"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:670(para)
-msgid "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-msgstr "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:674(title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:675(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "publisher"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:676(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-msgstr "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:679(glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr "repozytorium"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:680(para)
-msgid "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-msgstr "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:683(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr "boot environment"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:684(para)
-msgid "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:685(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-msgstr "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:688(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "clone"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:689(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Dokładna kopia."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:690(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:693(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "dataset"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:694(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:697(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "image"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:698(para)
-msgid "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:699(para)
-msgid "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:702(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "pakiet"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:703(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Zbiór plików, katalogów, odnośników, sterowników i zależności w zdefiniowanej postaci."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:706(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "origin"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:707(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-msgstr "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:710(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "alias"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:711(para)
-msgid "An alternate name for a publisher."
-msgstr "An alternate name for a publisher."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:714(glossterm)
-msgid "mirror"
-msgstr "mirror"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:715(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-msgstr "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "translator-credits"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/pt_BR/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/pt_BR/pt_BR.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "Ajuda online do Gerenciador de pacotes do <trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "Junho de 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "Este programa de computador e sua documentação são fornecidos sob um contrato de licença que contém restrições sobre seu uso e divulgação, sendo também protegidos pela legislação de propriedade intelectual. Exceto em situações expressamente permitidas no contrato de licença ou por lei, não é permitido usar, reproduzir, traduzir, divulgar, modificar, licenciar, transmitir, distribuir, expor, executar, publicar ou exibir qualquer parte deste programa de computador e de sua documentação, de qualquer forma ou através de qualquer meio. Não é permitida a engenharia reversa, a desmontagem ou a descompilação deste programa de computador, exceto se exigido por lei para obter interoperabilidade."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "As informações contidas neste documento estão sujeitas a alteração sem aviso prévio. A Oracle Corporation não garante que tais informações estejam isentas de erros. Se você encontrar algum erro, por favor, nos envie uma descrição de tal problema por escrito."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "Se este programa de computador, ou sua documentação, for entregue / distribuído(a) ao Governo dos Estados Unidos ou a qualquer outra parte que licencie os Programas em nome daquele Governo, a seguinte nota será aplicável:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "Este programa de computador foi desenvolvido para uso em diversas aplicações de gerenciamento de informações. Ele não foi desenvolvido nem projetado para uso em aplicações inerentemente perigosas, incluindo aquelas que possam criar risco de lesões físicas. Se utilizar este programa em aplicações perigosas, você será responsável por tomar todas e quaisquer medidas apropriadas em termos de segurança, backup e redundância para garantir o uso seguro de tais programas de computador. A Oracle Corporation e suas afiliadas se isentam de qualquer responsabilidade por quaisquer danos causados pela utilização deste programa de computador em aplicações perigosas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle e Java são marcas comerciais registradas da Oracle Corporation e/ou de suas empresas afiliadas. Outros nomes podem ser marcas comerciais de seus respectivos proprietários."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD, Opteron, o logotipo da AMD e o logotipo do AMD Opteron são marcas comerciais ou marcas comerciais registradas da Advanced Micro Devices. Intel e Intel Xeon são marcadas comerciais ou marcas comerciais registradas da Intel Corporation. Todas as marcas comerciais SPARC são usadas sob licença e são marcas comerciais ou marcas comerciais registradas da SPARC International, Inc. UNIX é uma marca comercial registrada licenciada por meio do consórcio X/Open Company Ltd."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "Este programa e sua documentação podem oferecer acesso ou informações relativas a conteúdos, produtos e serviços de terceiros. A Oracle Corporation e suas empresas afiliadas não fornecem quaisquer garantias relacionadas a conteúdos, produtos e serviços de terceiros e estão isentas de quaisquer responsabilidades associadas a eles. A Oracle Corporation e suas empresas afiliadas não são responsáveis por quaisquer tipos de perdas, despesas ou danos incorridos em consequência do acesso ou da utilização de conteúdos, produtos ou serviços de terceiros."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "Sobre o Gerenciador de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "O Gerenciador de pacotes é uma interface gráfica de usuário (GUI) para o Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "Consulte o <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> para obter definições dos termos usados neste documento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "O Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) é um sistema de distribuição de software que interage com um repositório de pacotes em uma rede. O IPS é uma estrutura que oferece recursos de gerenciamento para o ciclo de vida do software, incluindo instalação, atualização e remoção de software."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "Após instalar o sistema operacional Oracle Solaris, talvez você perceba que algum dos softwares que deseja usar não está disponível. É provável que esse software esteja disponível em um repositório de pacotes IPS. Você pode usar o Gerenciador de pacotes ou o comando <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) para baixar e instalar pacotes de um repositório de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "O IPS também permite criar uma cópia de um repositório de pacotes IPS existente, criar seu próprio repositório de pacotes IPS e publicar seus próprios pacotes IPS. Para obter mais informações sobre o IPS, consulte a Biblioteca de Informações do Oracle Solaris 11. Vá para <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, selecione Documentation Index à esquerda, selecione Systems Software, selecione Oracle Solaris 11 e selecione View Library. Consulte <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Gerenciador de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "O Gerenciador de pacotes oferece um subconjunto da funcionalidade disponibilizada pela interface da linha de comando."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "O Gerenciador de pacotes permite a execução das seguintes tarefas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Localizar, instalar, atualizar e remover os pacotes IPS. Consulte <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "Atualizar o sistema. Consulte <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Adicionar, modificar e remover editores de pacotes IPS. Consulte <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "Listar, renomear, excluir e gerenciar ambientes de inicialização. Consulte <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "Criar um arquivo de instalação do WebInstall (<filename>.p5i</filename>). Consulte <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "Esta documentação refere-se aos seguintes recursos da janela do Gerenciador de pacotes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "O grande painel no centro da janela é o painel da lista de pacotes. Algumas vezes, ele mostra mensagens informativas, mas em geral contém uma lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "A barra de menus na parte superior da janela fornece a maior parte da funcionalidade do Gerenciador de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "A barra de ferramentas imediatamente abaixo da barra de menus tem botões à esquerda que fornecem algumas das operações mais utilizadas. Os botões à esquerda do separador têm funcionalidade global: Atualize todos os pacotes com as atualizações disponíveis ou sincronize a lista de pacotes e o status do pacote. Os botões à direita do separador funcionam somente em pacotes selecionados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "O campo de pesquisa à direita da barra de ferramentas ajuda a controlar o conteúdo do painel da lista de pacotes. Consulte <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "O menu drop-down <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> abaixo dos botões ajuda a controlar o conteúdo do painel da lista de pacotes e também permite adicionar um novo editor. Consulte <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “Por editor”."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "O menu drop-down <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu> abaixo do campo de pesquisa ajuda a controlar o conteúdo do painel da lista de pacotes. Consulte lista de pacotes “Por status do pacote”."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "O painel de categorias abaixo do menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> ajuda a controlar o conteúdo do painel da lista de pacotes. Consulte lista de pacotes “Por categoria”."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "Abaixo da lista de categorias do software aparece uma lista de pesquisas executadas nesta sessão."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "Abaixo do painel da lista de pacotes aparece o painel de detalhes do paxote. Consulte <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "Gerenciamento de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "Você pode listar pacotesde acordo com vários critérios. É possível instalar, atualizar e remover pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "Lista de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "A lista de pacotes no painel da lista Gerenciador de pacotes é afetado pelas seleções feitas no menu drop-down <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, no menu drop-down <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu>, no painel de categorias e no campo de pesquisa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "É possível reordenar a lista de pacotes clicando nos títulos das colunas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "Você pode usar o botão <guibutton>Sincronizar</guibutton> ou a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacote</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sincronizar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para reler catálogos do repositório e atualizar a lista de pacotes e o status do pacote. Também é possível tentar fazer uma sincronização sempre que você abre o Gerenciador de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "Por editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "O menu drop-down <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> permite listar pacotes por editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "A parte superior do menu exibe o nome de cada editor adicionado através da caixa de diálogo Adicionar editor ou através do comando <literal>pkg</literal>. Quando você seleciona um desses editores, o painel da lista de pacotes mostra somente os pacotes disponíveis do editor selecionado. O painel da lista de pacotes mostra somente as colunas Nome, Status e Resumo porque os editores são os mesmos para todos os pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Todos os editores</guimenuitem> — Mostra pacotes de todos os editores do painel da lista de pacotes. O painel da lista de pacotes mostra as colunas Nome, Status, Editor e Resumo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemplo: para listar todos os drivers de dispositivos de mídia com atualizações disponíveis em todos os editores, selecione <guimenuitem>Todos os editores</guimenuitem> no menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, selecione a categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Mídia</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e selecione <guimenuitem>Atualizações</guimenuitem> no menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Todos os pacotes instalados</guimenuitem> — Mostra todos os pacotes instalados de todos os editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "Exemplo: para listar todos os pacotes de fontes atualmente instaladas no editor <literal>solaris</literal>, selecione <guimenuitem>Todos os pacotes instalados</guimenuitem> no menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, selecione a categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fontes</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, clique no título da coluna Editor para ordenar a lista por Editor e role até as entradas <literal>solaris</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Todos os editores (pesquisa)</guimenuitem> — Mostra todas as mensagens informativas do painel da lista de pacotes. A mensagem exibe todos es editores configurados e lembra a você como exibir todos os pacotes desses editores. Consulte <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> para obter mais informações sobre pesquisa com <guimenuitem>Todos os editores (pesquisa)</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Adicionar...</guimenuitem> — Abre a janela Adicionar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "Por status do pacote"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "O menu drop-down <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu> permite listar pacotes de acordo com o status do pacote. O status do pacote pode ser instalado, não instalado ou uma variável de atualização pode estar disponível. Os ícones exibidos no menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu> correspondem aos ícones exibidos na coluna Status do painel da lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Todos os pacotes</guimenuitem> — Mostra todos os pacotes disponíveis do editor selecionadona categoria selecionada ou que correspondem à sequência de pesquisa espedificada."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemplo: Para listar todos os pacotes de serviços Web do editor <literal>solaris</literal> instalados, não instalados ou disponibilizar as atualizações, selecione <literal>solaris</literal> no menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, selecione a categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Serviços Web</guimenu></menuchoice> e selecione <guimenuitem>Todos os pacotes</guimenuitem> no menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Pacotes instalados</guimenuitem> — Mostra todos os pacotes instalados do editor selecionado na categoria selecionada ou que correspondem à sequência de pesquisa especificada. Consulte também a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Editor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Todos os pacotes instalados</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemplo: Para listar somente os pacotes do servidor Web instalados no editor <literal>solaris</literal>, selecione <literal>solaris</literal> no menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, selecione a categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Serviços Web</guimenu></menuchoice> e selecione <guimenuitem>Pacotes instalados</guimenuitem> no menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Atualizações</guimenuitem> — Mostra todos os pacotes do editor selecionado na categoria selecionada ou que correspondam à sequência de pesquisa especificada que tenham atualizações disponíveis."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemplo: Para listar todos os drivers de dispositivos com atualizações disponíveis de todos os editores, selecione <guimenuitem>Todos os editores</guimenuitem> no menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, selecione a categoria <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> e selecione <guimenuitem>Atualizações</guimenuitem> no menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Pacotes não instalados</guimenuitem> — Mostra todos os pacotes do editor selecionado na categoria selecionada ou que correspondam à sequência de pesquisa especificada que não estejam instalados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Exemplo: Para listar todos os pacotes de fontes atualmente não instalados no editor <literal>solaris</literal>, selecione <literal>solaris</literal> no menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, selecione a categoria <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fontes</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e depois <guimenuitem>Pacotes não instalados</guimenuitem> no menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Pacotes selecionados</guimenuitem> — Lista todos os pacotes atualmente selecionados. Consulte <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "Por categoria"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "Você pode verificar os pacotes disponíveis por tipo de software no painel de categorias no lado esquerdo da janela Gerenciador de pacotes. Clique em uma categoria para ver as subcategorias.Os pacotes da categoria ou subcategoria selecionada aparecem na lista de pacotes de acordo com o editor selecionado e o status do pacote, dentro dos critérios de pesquisa especificados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "Além dos tipos de software nomeados, o painel de categorias permite selecionar <guimenuitem>Todas as categorias</guimenuitem> e <guimenuitem>Pesquisas recentes</guimenuitem>. Consulte <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repetir pesquisa anterior” para obter informações sobre <guimenuitem>Pesquisas recentes</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "Pesquisa de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "Use um dos dois métodos a seguir para procurar pacotes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Na lista de pacotes, por exemplo, selecione <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Ir para lista de pacotes</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e comece a digitar. À medida que você digita, as correspondências são identificadas entre os pacotes listados atualmente no painel da lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Use o campo Pesquisar na barra de ferramentas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "Digite uma sequência de pesquisa"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "Digite uma sequência no campo Pesquisar e pressione a tecla Enter ou clique na lupa à direita do campo Pesquisar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Seleção do menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> — O Gerenciador de pacotes procura a sequência de pesquisa nas informações sobre cada pacote de um determinado editor ou de todos os editores, de acordo com o que foi selecionado no menu <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Os resultados da pesquisa são os mesmos, quer você selecione <guimenuitem>Todos os editores</guimenuitem> ou <guimenuitem>Todos os editores (pesquisa)</guimenuitem>. A diferença está no fato de que o uso de <guimenuitem>Todos os editores (pesquisa)</guimenuitem> é mais rápido porque você evita o atraso no carregamento dos dados de todos os editores envolvidos ao selecionar <guimenuitem>Todos os editores</guimenuitem>. Com <guimenuitem>Todos os editores (pesquisa)</guimenuitem>, a pesquisa é executada sem o carregamento dos dados de todos os editores no painel da lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "Seleção do menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu> — Os resultados da pesquisa são exibidos no painel da lista de pacotes de acordo com o status do pacote selecionado no menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu>. É possível exibir diferentes subconjuntos dos mesmos resultados da pesquisa no painel da lista de pacotes alterando a seleção do menu <guimenu>Exibir</guimenu> sem refazer a pesquisa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "O Gerenciador de pacotes procura informações do pacote, incluindo nome, resumo, descrição, categoria e nomes de arquivos contidos no pacote. Somente correspondências exatas são encontradas se você não usar caracteres curinga."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "E"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "Quando os termos de pesquisa estão separados por espaços ou pelo <literal>AND</literal>, o Gerenciador de pacotes procura pacotes que contenham <emphasis role=\"strong\">todos</emphasis> os termos de pesquisa. Esse é o comportamento padrão da pesquisa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "Exemplo: Se a sequência da pesquisa for <literal>livro de python</literal> ou <literal>python E livro</literal>, os resultados da pesquisa incluirão apenas os pacotes que contiverem <emphasis></emphasis><literal>python</literal> <emphasis>e</emphasis> <literal>livro</literal> nas informações do pacote. Por exemplo, o pacote <literal>diveintopython</literal>, um livro sobre programação Python, apareceria nos resultados da pesquisa, mas o pacote <literal>python-26</literal> não."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "Aspas duplas"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "Coloque o termo de pesquisa entre aspas duplas para localizar esse termo exato."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "Exemplo: <literal>\"driver ethernet\"</literal> entre aspas duplas corresponde a <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> mas não a <literal>Driver de Adaptador Ethernet</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "Curinga"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "Você pode usar o caractere curinga <literal>*</literal> na sequência de pesquisa. O uso de caracteres curinga pode tornar a pesquisa mais lenta."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "Exemplo: <literal>802.11*</literal> corresponde a <literal>802.11b/g</literal> e <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "Observe que <literal>802.11*</literal> não corresponde a <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. Para que coincida com <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use uma sequência de pesquisa <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OU"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "Quando os termos de pesquisa estão separados por <literal>OU</literal>, o Gerenciador de pacotes procura pacotes que contenham <emphasis role=\"strong\">qualquer~um</emphasis> dos termos de pesquisa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "Exemplo: <literal>python OU livro</literal> coincidem em todos os pacotes que contenham <literal>python</literal> nas informações do pacote e em todos os pacotes que contenham <literal>livro</literal> nas informações do pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "Você pode combinar esses modificadores de sequência de pesquisa . É possível usar E, OU, aspas duplas e *ao mesmo tempo em uma sequência de pesquisa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "Limpar campo Pesquisar"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "Para limpar a sequência de pesquisa e a lista de resultados da pesquisa, use o campo Pesquisar ou o menu Editar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "No campo Pesquisar, clique no ícone <literal>X</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "No menu <guimenu>Editar</guimenu>, selecione a opção <guimenuitem>Limpar pesquisa</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "Cancelar pesquisa"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "Durante uma operação de pesquisa, é exibida uma barra ocupada na extremidade direita da barra de status da janela do Gerenciador de pacotes. Na extremidade direita da barra ocupada aparece um ícone <literal>X</literal>. Clique no ícone <literal>X</literal> na barra ocupada para cancelar a pesquisa em andamento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "Reexibir resultados da pesquisa anterior"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "Resultados de pesquisas já executadas durante a sessão atual do Gerenciador de pacotes são salvos em <guimenuitem>Pesquisas recentes</guimenuitem> no painel de categorias."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "Selecione <guimenuitem>Pesquisas recentes</guimenuitem> no painel de categorias para exibir uma mensagem informativa no painel da lista de pacotes. O painel da lista de pacotes mostra a lista dos resultados de pesquisas anteriores. Clique no link \"resultados\" para reexibir esses resultados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "Selecione a seta à esquerda de <guimenuitem>Pesquisas recentes</guimenuitem> para expandir ou ocultar a lista de resultados de pesquisas anteriores do painel de categorias. Selecione um item na lista de pesquisas recentes para reexibir os resultados dessas pesquisas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "Uma pesquisa sem pacotes correspondentes não aparece na lista de pesquisas recentes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "Se você selecionar o botão <guibutton>Sincronizar</guibutton> ou a opção de menu<menuchoice><guimenu>Pacote</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sincronizar</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, todos os resultados de pesquisas recentes serão excluídos."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "Exibição de mais informações"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "Consulte mais informações sobre pacotes no painel de detalhes do pacote ou na caixa de diálogo Informação da versão do pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "Painel de detalhes do pacote"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "Para exibir mais informações sobre um pacote, clique no botão esquerdo do mouse para realçar o pacote na lista de pacotes. O painel de detalhes do pacote abaixo da lista de pacotes exibe informações como a versão mais recente disponível do editor, o tamanho do pacote, os arquivos do pacote, dependências e termos da licença."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "Se um pacote foi renomeado após a instalação, o campo Renomeado para na guia Geral exibirá o novo nome do pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "A guia Versões mostra uma lista das versões deste pacote disponíveis para instalação. Selecione uma versão na lista e clique no botão <guibutton>Instalar/Atualizar</guibutton> à direita da lista para instalar a versão. Consulte <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "O painel de detalhes do pacote não é exibido caso o pacote contenha uma mensagem informativa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "Caixa de diálogo Informações sobre a versão do pacote"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Clique com o botão direito do mouse em um pacote da lista de pacotes para exibir o menu instantâneo <guimenu>Pacote</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacote</guimenu><guimenuitem>Informação sobre a versão do pacote</guimenuitem></menuchoice> no menu pop-up ou na barra de menus para exibir uma janela separada mostrando a versão do pacote instalado e a versão mais recente que pode ser instalada ou atualizada, se aplicável."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "Seleção de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "Os pacotes selecionados podem ser instalados, atualizados ou removidos. Para selecionar um pacote, use o painel da lista de pacotes ou o menu <guimenu>Editar</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "No painel da lista de pacotes, execute um dos procedimentos a seguir para selecionar um pacote. É possível selecionar vários pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Clique na caixa à esquerda do nome do pacote. Clique na caixa novamente para cancelar a seleção do pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "Clique no nome do pacote uma vez para realçar o pacote. Em seguida, clique duas vezes no pacote realçado para selecionar o pacote. Clique duas vezes novamente para cancelar a seleção do pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Clique no ícone da caixa de seleção no título da coluna para selecionar todos os pacotes listados atualmente no painel da lista de pacotes. Clique no ícone da caixa de seleção novamente para cancelar a seleção de todos os pacotes listados atualmente no painel da lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "O menu <guimenu>Editar</guimenu> tem as seguintes opções para seleção de pacotes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Selecionar todos</guimenuitem> — Seleciona todos os pacotes listados atualmente no painel da lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Selecionar atualizações</guimenuitem> — Seleciona todos os pacotes listados atualmente no painel da lista de pacotes que contenham atualizações disponíveis."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>Cancelar seleção de todos</guimenuitem> — Cancela a seleção de todos os pacotes listados atualmente no painel da lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "Em todos os casos, quando um pacote é selecionado, os pacotes selecionados anteriormente permanecem selecionados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "O número de pacotes listados atualmente no painel da lista de pacotes e o número desses pacotes selecionados são mostrados do lado esquerdo da barra de status, na parte inferior da janela do Gerenciador de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Editor</guimenu><guimenuitem>Todos os editores</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, a categoria <guimenuitem>Todas as categorias</guimenuitem> e a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Exibir</guimenu><guimenuitem>Pacotes selecionados</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para listar todos os pacotes selecionados de todos os editores do painel da lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "Um pacote pode ser realçado mas não selecionado. Quando um pacote é realçado, são exibidas informações detalhadas sobre o pacote no painel de detalhes do pacote abaixo do painel da lista de pacotes. Quando um pacote é selecionado, é exibida uma marca de seleção na caixa à esquerda do nome do pacote. Se quiser instalar, atualizar ou excluir um pacote, verifique se aparece uma marca de seleção na caixa de seleção do pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "Instalação e atualização de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "Antes de instalar ou atualizar, verifique as configurações de preferências de Componentes opcionais. Selecione a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferências</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Na janela Preferências, selecione a guia Componentes opcionais. Por padrão, Instalar todos os idiomas, Instalar todos os arquivos de desenvolvimento e Instalar toda a documentação estão selecionados. É possível liberar espaço na instalação selecionando um subconjunto de idiomas para instalar ou cancelar a seleção de arquivos de desenvolvimento, por exemplo. Clique no botão OK para salvar as alterações. Essas configurações aplicam-se a todos os pacotes instalados e às futuras instalações e atualizações de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "Execute as seguintes etapas para instalar ou atualizar um pacote:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "Selecione o pacote. Consulte <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "Use um dos seguintes métodos para instalar ou atualizar o pacote:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Selecione o botão <guibutton>Instalar/Atualizar</guibutton> na barra de ferramentas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacote</guimenu><guimenuitem>Instalar/Atualizar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> na barra de menus."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Clique com o botão direito do mouse no nome do pacote para exibir o menu instantâneo <guimenu>Pacote</guimenu>. Em seguida, selecione a opção <guimenuitem>Instalar/Atualizar</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "Na guia Versões, no painel de detalhes do pacote abaixo do painel da lista de pacotes, selecione uma versão da lista Versão a ser instalada e clique no botão <guibutton>Atualizar/Instalar</guibutton> à direita da lista. Os pacotes da lista Versão a ser instalada estão disponíveis no repositório; talvez não seja possível instalá-los. Uma versão específica pode não ser compatível com outros pacotes instalados. Se a versão que você selecionou não puder ser instalada no sistema, o Gerenciador de pacotes avisará e não instalará o pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Se o pacote já estiver instalado e não houver uma atualização disponível (consulte a coluna Status ou a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacote</guimenu><guimenuitem> Informação sobre a versão do pacote</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), a opção <guibutton>Instalar/Atualizar</guibutton> ficará esmaecida e não poderá ser selecionada."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "A janela Instalar/Atualizar é exibida. Os pacotes ainda não instalados estão listados no painel Detalhes da instalação e os pacotes instalados estão listados no painel Detalhes da atualização para sua revisão. Selecione o botão <guibutton>Continuar</guibutton> para instalar ou atualizar os pacotes listados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "Em alguns casos, é exibida uma caixa de diálogo da licença e você deve aceitar a licença para instalar o pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "Se ocorrer um erro durante a instalação do pacote, será exibida uma caixa de diálogo de erro. As mensagens explicam por que a instalação ou atualização falhou."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "Remoção de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Realize as seguintes etapas para remover um pacote:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "Use um dos seguintes métodos para remover o pacote:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "Selecione o botão <guibutton>Remover</guibutton> na barra de ferramentas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacote</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remover</guimenuitem></menuchoice> na barra de menus."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "Clique com o botão direito do mouse no nome do pacote para exibir o menu instantâneo <guimenu>Pacote</guimenu>. Em seguida, selecione a opção <guimenuitem>Remover</guimenuitem>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "Se o pacote não estiver instalado, a opção Remover ficará esmaecida e não poderá ser selecionada."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "A janela Confirmação de remover é exibida. Os pacotes a serem removidos estão listados no painel Detalhes do remover para sua revisão. Selecione o botão <guibutton>Continuar</guibutton> para remover os pacotes listados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "Se não for possível remover um pacote porque outros pacotes dependem dele, você poderá selecionar a opção <guibutton>Continuar remoção</guibutton> para tentar remover os pacotes restantes originalmente selecionados para remoção."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "Atualização do sistema"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "Quando determinados pacotes-chave como drivers e outros componentes do kernel são atualizados, o sistema executa as seguintes ações:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "Cria um clone do ambiente de inicialização atual (BE)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "Atualiza os pacotes do clone e não atualiza pacotes do BE atual."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Define o novo BE como a opçlão de inicialização padrão na próxima vez em que o sistema for reinicializado. O BE atual permanece como uma opção de inicialização alternativa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "Atualização de todos os pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Quando você seleciona o botão <guibutton>Atualizações</guibutton> ou a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Pacote</guimenu><guimenuitem>Atualizações</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, o Gerenciador de pacotes atualiza todos os pacotes instalados que tenham atualizações disponíveis."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "Todos os pacotes com atualizações disponíveis do editor atual são atualizados. Se um pacote tiver uma atualização disponível de um editor diferente na lista de editores, ele será atualizado somente se o editor atual estiver configurado como não-sticky. Se o editor atual estiver configurado como sticky, esse pacote não será atualizado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "A janela Atualizações é exibida e o processo de atualização é iniciado:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "O sistema sincroniza todos os catálogos."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "O sistema avalia todos os pacotes instalados para determinar quais têm atualizações disponíveis."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "Se nenhum pacote tiver atualizações disponíveis, será exibida a mensagem “Não há atualizações disponíveis” e o processamento será interrompido."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "Se as atualizações de um pacote estiverem disponíveis, os pacotes a serem atualizados serão listados para sua avaliação. Esta é sua última chance de clicar no botão <guibutton>Cancelar</guibutton> para abortar a atualização."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Continuar</guibutton> para continuar a atualização."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "O sistema deve criar um novo ambiente de inicialização (BE), conforme descrito no <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> acima, dependendo dos pacotes que estiverem sendo atualizados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Se o sistema determinar que é necessário um novo BE mas não puder criá-lo, será exibida uma mensagem de erro. Se o problema for espaço insuficiente em disco, execute as seguintes etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "Clique em <guibutton>Fechar</guibutton> para cancelar o processo de atualização."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "Siga as instruções em <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> para remover um BE não mais necessário."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "Selecione <guibutton>Atualizações</guibutton> novamente para reiniciar o processo de atualização."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "O sistema baixa todas as atualizações do pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "O sistema instala as atualizações do pacote. Se tiver sido criado um BE clonado, as atualizações serão instaladas no clone. Se não tiver sido criado nenhum clone, as atualizações serão instaladas no BE atual."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "Se ocorrer um erro durante o processo de atualização, o painel <guilabel>Detalhes</guilabel> será expandido e os detalhes do erro serão exibidos. É mostrado um indicador do status do erro ao lado da fase que falhou."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "Se o sistema criou um novo BE para a atualização, você poderá editar o nome padrão do BE. Quando terminar, clique no botão <guibutton>Reiniciar agora</guibutton> para reinicializar o sistema imediatamente. Clique no botão <guibutton>Reiniciar mais tarde</guibutton> para reiniciar o sistema mais tarde. É necessário reiniciar para inicializar o novo BE. O novo BE será sua opção de inicialização padrão. O BE atual estará disponível como uma opção de inicialização alternativa."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "Utilização do Gerenciador de atualizações"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "Você pode abrir o Gerenciador de atualizações a partir de uma notificação do sistema ou da barra de menus da área de trabalho. O Gerenciador de atualizações executa o mesmo processo descrito acima em <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "Notificação de atualizações de software"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "O sistema verifica periodicamente se há atualizações disponíveis para qualquer um dos pacotes instalados. Se o sistema detectar atualizações disponíveis, serão exibidos um ícone e um pop-up de notificação de atualizações disponíveis na bandeja de notificação do sistema. Clique no ícone para abrir o Gerenciador de notificações."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "Menu do sistema da área de trabalho"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "Selecione <menuchoice><guimenu>Sistema</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administração</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Gerenciador de atualizações</guimenuitem></menuchoice> na barra de menus da área de trabalho para abrir o Gerenciador de atualizações."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "Gerenciamento de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "Você pode adicionar, modificar e remover editores de pacotes IPS. Pode alterar a prioridade de um editor, altrar as configurações ativadas e sticky, alterar o alias do editor, adicionar ou remover a origem de um editor, e adicionar ou remover o espelho de um editor. Pode gerenciar chaves, certificados e política de assinatura."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "Observe que os editores do sistema constituem exceção. Eles só podem ser exibidos na janela Gerenciar editores. Os editores do sistema não podem ser removidos nem modificados e você não pode alterar a prioridade. Consulte <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. O painel Detalhes indica se o editor selecionado é um editor do sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "Adição de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Para adicionar um editor de pacotes IPS, use a janela Adicionar editor. Para abrir essa janela, execute uma das seguintes ações:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção <guimenuitem>Adicionar</guimenuitem> no menu drop-down <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Adicionar editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Na janela Gerenciar editores, selecione o botão <guibutton>Adicionar</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "Na janela Adicionar editor, excute as seguintes etapas para adicionar um editor de pacotes IPS:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "No campo URI, digite o URI do editor. O URI é um local da rede como <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> ou <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "No campo Alias, você pode digitar um nome alternativo para o editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Adicionar</guibutton>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "É exibida a caixa de diálogo Adicionar editor. Clique em <guibutton>Cancelar</guibutton> para cancelar o processo. Clique em Detalhes para exibir informações verbosas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "Se o novo editor for adicionado com sucesso, será exibida a caixa de diálogo Adicionar editor completo, mostrando o nome, o alias e o URI do novo editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "Se o novo editor não for adicionado, será exibida a caixa de diálogo Erro de editor, com informações sobre o problema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "O novo editor é o último editor listado na janela Gerenciar editores e está ativado e sticky."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "Consulte <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> para obter informações sobre como alterar a prioridade do novo editor, como alterar as configurações ativadas e sticky, como alterar o alias do editor, como adicionar a origem de um editor, como configurar uma e certificado SSL, como adicionar o espelho de um editor e como gerenciar certificados e política de assinatura de um editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "Modificação de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Para modificar os atributos de um editor, selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gerenciar editores</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Os editores configurados no momento estão listados na janela Gerenciar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "Na janela Gerenciar editores, você pode alterar a prioridade do editor, ativar/desativar o editor,configurar o editor como sticky ou não-sticky, e remover o editor. Consulte <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> e <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> para abrir a janela Modificar editor. Na janela Modficar editor, é possível alterar o alias do editor, adicionar ou remover a origem de um editor, definir uma chave e um certificado SSL, e gerenciar certificados e política de assinatura de editores. Consulte <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> e <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "Alteração da prioridade e capacidade de adesão"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para exibir a janela Gerenciar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Prioridade do editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "Os editores estão listados em ordem de prioridade na janela Gerenciar editores. O editor do topo da lista é o editor de maior prioridade. O editor no fim da lista é o editor de menor prioridade."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "O editor do topo da lista também é conhecido como editor preferencial."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "O editor prefrencial não pode ser desativado nem removido."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "Quando você procura pacotes e não especifica um editor, os catálogos com editores de maior prioridade são procurados primeiro."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "Quando você atualiza pacotes instalados em um editor não-adesivo, as atualizações de catálogos com editores de maior prioridade são procuradas primeiro."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para alterar a prioridade de um editor, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Clique para realçar a linha de um editor da lista na janela Gerenciar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "Clique nos botões <guibutton>Para cima</guibutton> e <guibutton>Para baixo</guibutton> à direita da lista de editores para aumentar ou diminuir a prioridade do editor selecionado. A lista de editores se move para cima e para baixo para mostrar a nova prioridade."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "Se o editor selecionado for um editor do sistema, os botões <guibutton>Para cima</guibutton> e <guibutton>Para baixo</guibutton> ficarão desativados. Não é possível alterar a prioridade de um editor do sistema e, portanto, não é possível diminuir a prioridade do editor próximo da prioridade maior acima de um editor do sistema, e não é possível aumentar a prioridade de um editor próximo da prioridade menor abaixo de um editor do sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na parte inferior da janela Gerenciar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "Ativado e adesivo"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "Quando você adiciona um editor, os atributos ativados e de adesivo são definidos por padrão. O editor preferencial (consulte <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> acima) não pode ser desativado. Um editor do sistema não pode ser desativado e a configuração do adesivo de um editor do sistema não pode ser alterada. Todas as demais configurações ativadas e de adesivo podem ser alteradas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "Se o atributo do adesivo for configurado para um editor, um pacote instalado desse editor não poderá ser atualizado em um editor diferente. Se o atributo do adesivo não for configurado para um editor, esse editor será não-adesivo. Se um editor for não-adesivo, um pacote proveniente desse editor poderá ser atualizado em outro editor. Um editor diferente pode ter uma versão mais recente de um pacote que o editor original do pacote. Se você quiser atualizar para essa nova versão, o editor original precisará ser não-adesivo. Além disso, se um editor de prioridade menor for não-adesivo, as atualizações para pacotes instalados dos editores de prioridade maior serão localizadas antes no editor não-adesivo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "Os pacotes ou atualizações de um editor desativado não são procurados para instalação. Os catálogos de um editor desativado não são sincronizados. Um editor desativado não é mostrado no menu drop-down <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para alterar as configurações Desativado e Adesivo de um editor, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir a janela Gerenciar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "Clique na caixa Ativado ou na caixa Adesivo para alterar a configuração."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "Alteração de aliases, origens e espelhos"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "Selecione o editor que deseja modificar. O painel Detalhes abaixo na janela Gerenciar editores exibe as origens atuais do editor selecionado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> à direita da lista de editores para abrir a janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Se o editor selecionado for um editor do sistema, o botão <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> ficará desativado. O painel Detalhes indica que o editor selecionado é um editor do sistema e exibirá uma mensagem informando que esse editor não pode ser modificado nem removido."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "Selecione a guia Geral para modificar o alias do editor, adicionar e remover origens, e adicionar e remover espelhos."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Alias do editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "O alias do editor é um outro nome do editor. O alias é usado no menu drop-down <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> e no painel da lista de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para alterar o alias do editor, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "Na guia Geral da janela Modificar editor, digite um novo nome no campo Alias."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na parte inferior da janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "O alias do editor foi alterado na janela Gerenciar editores. Clique no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na parte inferior da janela Gerenciar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Origens do editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "Origem refere-se ao local do repositório de pacotes IPS ou arquivo que contém metadados de pacotes (mamifestos e catálogos de pacotes) e conteúdos de pacotes (arquivos de pacotes)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "Valor de origem é o URI de um repositório de pacotes IPS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para alterar, adicionar ou remover uma origem do editor, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Selecione a guia Geral da janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "Adicione uma origem."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "No campo Origem, digite o URI da nova origem que deseja associar ao editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Adicionar</guibutton>. O novo URI é adicionado à lista abaixo do campo Origem."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "Remova uma origem."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "Na lista abaixo do campo Origem, selecione o URI que deseja excluir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Remover</guibutton>. O URI selecionado é removido da lista. Se apenas uma origem for definida para o editor, não será possível removê-la."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "Altere uma origem."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "Adicione a nova origem."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "Exclua a origem que deseja alterar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "As alterações da origem se refletem no painel Detalhes da janela Gerenciar editores. Clique no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na parte inferior da janela Gerenciar editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Espelhos do editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "Espelho é um local do repositório de pacotes IPS que contém somente conteúdos de pacotes (arquivos de pacotes). O espelho não contém metadados de pacotes (manifestos e catálogos de pacotes). Espelhos fornecem um subconjunto dos dados das origens. Espelhos podem ser usados somente para download de arquivos de pacotes. Metadados de pacotes são baixados da origem. Clientes IPS acessam a origem para obter um catálogo do editor, mesmo que os clientes baixem o conteúdo do pacote de um espelho."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para adicionar, remover ou alterar um espelho do editor, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "Clique em Espelhos para exibir o campo Espelho e a lista de espelhos."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "Adicione um espelho."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "No campo Espelho, digite o URI do novo espelho que você deseja associar ao editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Adicionar</guibutton>. O novo URI é adicionado à lista abaixo do campo Espelho."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "Remova um espelho."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "Na lista abaixo do campo Espelho, selecione o URI que deseja excluir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Remover</guibutton>. O URI selecionado é removido da lista."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "Altere um espelho."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "Exclua o espelho que deseja alterar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "Adicione um novo espelho."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "Gerenciamento da segurança de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "Os certificados são usados para verificar se os pacotes foram assinados de maneira apropriada antes da instalação, de acordo com a política de assinatura da imagem ou do editor, o que for mais restritivo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "Selecione o editor cuja segurança deseja modificar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> à direita da lista de editores para abrir a janela Modificar editor. O editor selecionado na janela Gerenciar editores é exibido no título da janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "Selecione a guia Geral para adicionar a chave e o certificado SSL caso um editor tenha uma origem segura."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "Selecione a guia Certificados para gerenciar certificados do editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "Selecione a guia Política de assinatura para gerenciar a política de assinatura do editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "Adição de chaves e certificados SSL"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "Se um editor tiver uma origem segura, adicione a chave o certificado SSL do editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Clique na guia Geral da janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "Clique na chave e no certificado SSL para exibir o campo Chave SSL e o campo Certificado SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Procurar</guibutton> à direita do campo Chave SSL para selecionar o arquivo de chave SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Procurar</guibutton> à direita do campo Certificado SSL parra selecionar o arquivo do certificado SSL."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "Gerenciamento de certificados"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Clique na guia Certificados da janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "Use os botões abaixo da lista de certificados para adicionar um certificado ou para remover, revogar ou reinstalar o certificado atualmente selecionado na lista."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "Observe que as ações executadas na janela Modificar editor são aplicadas aos certificados do editor somente depois que você clica no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na parte inferior da janela Modificar editor. Se você clicar no botão <guibutton>Cancelar</guibutton>, as alterações não serão aplicadas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Adicionar</guibutton>. Adicione um novo certificado de editor para o editor listado no título da janela Modificar editor. Na janela Adicionar certificado de editor, navegue para selecionar o arquivo de certificado (<tt>.pem</tt>). Clique no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na parte inferior da janela Adicionar certificado de editor. O certificado recém-adicionado é selecionado na lista de certificados da guia Certificados da janela Modificar editor. O painel de detalhes indica que esse certificado está \"marcado para ser adicionado\". O certificado será adicionado depois que você clicar no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "Na lista de certificados do editor, selecione o certificado que você deseja modificar ou cujos detalhes deseja verificar. Detalhes sobre o certificado selecionado são mostrados abaixo da lista de certificados e linha de botões.Observe que um certificado expirado ainda pode ser aprovado e usado para validar pacotes assinados editados (não necessariamente instalados) antes que o certificado expire."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "Clique nos cabeçalhos da lista de certificados para reordenar a lista. As colunas Organização e Nome são redimensionáveis."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Remover</guibutton>. Remova o certificado selecionado atualmente na lista de certificados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Revogar</guibutton>. Se o certificado selecionado atualmente na lista de certificados for Aprovado, clique no botão <guibutton>Revogar</guibutton> para tratar desse certificado como revogado. Na lista de certificados, o Status do certificado muda para Revogado. Essa alteração é aplicada ao certificado depois que você clica no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>Restaurar</guibutton>. Se o certificado selecionado atualmente na lista de certificados for Revogado, clique no botão <guibutton>Restaurar</guibutton> para tratar o certificado como aprovado. O painel de detalhes indica que o certificado está \"marcado para ser restaurado\". O certificado será restaurado depois qu você clicar no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "Gerenciamento da política de assinatura"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Clique na guia Política de assinatura da janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "Use os botões da guia Política de assinatura para definir a política de assinatura a ser usada durante a instalação de pacotes do editor listado no título da janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "Para definir a política de assinatura global, use a guia Política de assinatura da janela Preferências (consulte <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "As assinaturas são ignoradas. Ignore as assinaturas de todos os pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "As assinaturas são opcionais, mas devem ser válidas se forem inseridas. Verifique se todos os pacotes com assinaturas estão assinados de maneira válida, mas não é necessário que todos os pacotes instalados sejam assinados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "Uma ou mais assinaturas são necessárias. Todos os pacotes recém-instalados devem ter pelo menos uma assinatura válida."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "São necessárias assinaturas e o nome do certificado deve incluir o(s) nome(s) especificado(s) no campo do texto durante a validação das assinaturas de um pacote. Se mais de um nome for especificado, os nomes deverão ser separados por vírgulas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "Remoção de editores"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Realize as seguintes etapas para remover um editor:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "Selecione o editor que deseja remover."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Remover</guibutton> à direita da lista de editores."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "Se o editor selecionado for um editor do sistema, o botão <guibutton>Remover</guibutton> ficará desativado. O painel Detalhes indica que o editor selecionado é um editor do sistema e exibe uma mensagem informando que esse editor não pode ser modificado nem removido."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Gerenciamento de ambientes de inicialização"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "Um ambiente de inicialização (BE) é uma imagem inicializável. É possível manter vários BEs no sistema Oracle Solaris. Um BE é o BE padrão na inicialização ou reinicialização. Há outros BEs disponíveis como seleções de inicialização alternativas. O BE que você inicializou é o BE ativo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "Você pode usar o comando <literal>beadm</literal>(1) para criar, renomear, montar, desmontar, ativar ou desativar BEs. Par obter informações detalhadas sobre BEs, consulte <citetitle>Criando e Gerenciando Ambientes Inicializáveis após a Instalação</citetitle>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "O Gerenciador de pacotes fornece um subconjunto da funcionalidade que o comando <literal>beadm</literal>(1) oferece. Use a opção Gerenciador de pacotes <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gerenciar ambientes de inicialização</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir a janela Gerenciar ambientes de inicialização. Essa janela lista os BEs do sistema e permite ativar, renomear e excluir esses BEs conforme descrito a seguir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "Criação de um BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "Um novo BE é criado automaticamente quando você executa uma das seguintes ações:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "Instalar o SO Oracle Solaris."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "Instalar ou atualizar pacotes-chave específicos do sistema, como alguns drivers e outros componentes do kernel."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "Use o comando <literal>beadm create</literal>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "Frequentemente é criado um novo BE quando você executa o comando <literal>pkg update</literal> ou usa o botão <guibutton>Atualizações</guibutton> para atualizar todos os pacotes com atualizações disponíveis."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "Ativação de um BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gerenciar Ambientes de Inicialização</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir a janela Gerenciar Ambientes de Inicialização. Todos os BEs estão listados na janela. O BE inicializado no momento mostra uma marca de seleção à esquerda do no me do BE."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para especificar um BE diferente como o BE padrão ativo, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "Selecione o botão <guibutton>Ativo ao reiniciar</guibutton> do BE que você deseja definir como BE padrão ativo depois da próxima reinicialização."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "Selecione o botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> na janela Gerenciar ambientes de inicialização."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "Renomeação de um BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gerenciar ambientes de inicialização</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir a janela Gerenciar ambientes de inicialização. Todos os BEs estão listados na janela."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "Não é possível renomear o BE ativo no momento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "Não é possível renomear um BE marcado para exclusão."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para renomear um BE, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "Clique duas vezes no nome do BE que você deseja renomear. O campo do nome torna-se editável."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "Digite o novo nome."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "Remoção de um BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Arquivo</guimenu><guimenuitem>Gerenciar ambientes de inicialização</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir a janela Gerenciar ambientes de inicialização. Todos os BEs estão listados na janela. A coluna da extrema direita na janela é a coluna Excluir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "A coluna do meio na janela Gerenciar ambientes de inicialização mostra o tamanho do BE. Convém remover um BE para liberar espaço no dispositivo de armazenamento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "Não é possível excluir o BE ativo no momento."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "Não é possível excluir um BE renomeado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para excluir um BE, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Selecione a caixa <guibutton>Excluir</guibutton> para o BE que você deseja excluir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Trabalhando com o WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "O Gerenciador de pacotes suporta os pacotes de instalação usando o processo de um único clique WebInstall. O processo WebInstall usa um arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename>. O arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename> contém informações para adicionar editores e pacotes que podem ser instalados nesses editores. As informações no arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename> são lidas e usadas pelo processo WebInstall."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "Exportação de arquivos com o WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "Se você quiser que outros usuários possam instalar pacotes que você instalou no sistema, poderá exportar as instruções de instalação para esses arquivos de pacotes usando o processo WebInstall. É criado um arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename> consistindo em instruções de instalação para que esses pacotes e editores sejam instalados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "Para exportar as instruções de instalação para os pacotes selecionados e seus editores para um arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename>, siga estas etapas:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "No menu drop-down <guimenu>Editor</guimenu>, selecione o editor do qual deseja incluir os pacotes no arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "No painel da lista de pacotes, selecione o pacote cujas instruções de instalação deseja distribuir."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "Clique em <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Arquivo</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Exportar seleções</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para exibir a janela Exportar confirmação de seleções."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> para confirmar as seleções. A janela Exportar seleções é exibida."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "É fornecido um nome padrão para o arquivo <filename>p5i</filename> com a extensão <filename>.p5i</filename>. Você pode alterar esse nome de arquivo, mas não altere a extensão."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "É fornecido um local padrão para o arquivo <filename>p5i</filename>. Você pode alterar o local. Se você usar o botão <guibutton>Procurar</guibutton>, poderá selecionar a opção <filename>Arquivos p5i</filename> no menu drop-down no lado inferior direito da janela Exportar seleções para exibir apenas arquivos <filename>.p5i</filename> na lista."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "Clique no botão <guibutton>Salvar</guibutton> para salvar o nome e local do arquivo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Uso do WebInstall para adicionar editores e instalar pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "O processo de WebInstall permite instalar pacotes através de um arquivo <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "Localize o arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename>. Esse arquivo pode estar em sua área de trabalho ou em um site."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "Use um dos seguintes métodos para iniciar o Gerenciador de pacotes no modo WebInstall:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "Clique em um arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename> na área de trabalho. O aplicativo associado (Instalador da Web do Gerenciador de pacotes) é iniciado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "Inicie o Gerenciador de pacotes a partir da linha de comando juntamente com um caminho para o arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename>. Por exemplo, digite o comando seguinte:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "Vá a um endereço URL que contenha um link para o arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename>. O arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename> deve estar localizado em um servidor Web com esse tipo de MIME registrado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "Se o arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename> estiver localizado em um servidor Web sem esse tipo de MIME registrado, salve o arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename> na área de trabalho e depois clique nele para iniciar o WebInstall."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "A janela Instalar/Atualizar é exibida. O rótulo bo topo da janela é: “Instalador da Web do Gerenciador de pacotes/O seguinte será adicionado ao seu sistema:” Em seguida, editores e pacotes serão listados. Clique no botão <guibutton>Prosseguir</guibutton> para continuar a instalação."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "Se o editor de pacotes ainda não estiver configurado no sistema, será exibida a janela Adicionar editor. O nome e o URI do editor já estão inseridos."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "Se os editores a serem adicionados forem editores seguros, serão necessários uma chave e um certificado SSL. Navegue para localizar a chave e o certificado SSL no sistema."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "A caixa de diálogo Adicionar um editor completo é exibida caso o editor seja adicionado com sucesso. Clique no botão <guibutton>OK</guibutton> para continuar a instalação."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "Se o arquivo <filename>.p5i</filename> contiver pacotes de um editor desativado, o WebInstall abrirá a caixa de diálogo Ativar editor. Use essa caixa de diálogo para ativar o editor e instalar os pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "A janela Instalar/Atualizar agora tem a mesma aparência de quando você selecionou <guibutton>Instalar/Atualizar</guibutton> no Gerenciador de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "Solução de problemas"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "Erro, aviso mensagens informativas são salvas em um log para que você possa avaliar tudo ao mesmo tempo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "Exibição de logs de mensagens"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Exibir</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para abrir a janela Logs. Essa janela exibe erro, aviso e mensagens informativas do Gerenciador de pacotes de Gerenciador de atualizações."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "Selecione o botão <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> na parte inferior da janela Logs para excluir todas as mensagens."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "Se houver um erro ou aviso, será exibido um triângulo amarelo do lado esquerdo da barra de status. Clique nesse triângulo para exibir a janela Logs."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "Configuração de preferências"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "Use a oção de menu <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferências</guimenuitem></menuchoice> para alterar algumas configurações da interface de usuário do Gerenciador de pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "A janela Preferências tem três guias:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "A guia Geral permite definir preferências de saída e de caixa de diálogo de confirmação."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "A guia Componentes opcionais permite definir preferências para instalação de componentes opcionais de pacotes quando você instala ou atualiza um pacote."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "A guia Política de assinatura permite definir a política de assinatura para esta imagem."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferências de saída"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferências</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e selcione a guia Geral."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Se a caixa “Lembrar o estado atual na saída” estiver marcada, o Gerenciador de pacotes salvará as seguintes configurações e as restaurará na próxima vez em que você iniciar o Gerenciador de pacotes:"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Separadores verticais e horizontais</emphasis> — Larguras e alturas dos painéis da janela"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Tamanho da janela</emphasis> — Tamanho geral da janela do Gerenciador de pacotes"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Opção de editor</emphasis> — O editor ou outra opção selecionada no menu drop-down <guimenu>Editor</guimenu> quando o Gerenciador de pacotes é fechado"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categorias</emphasis> — A categoria selecionada e as categorias expandidas e reduzidas de cada editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Confirmação das preferência de diálogo"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "Quando um pacote é instalado, atualizado ou removido, é exibida uma caixa de diálogo de confirmação que mostra a lista de pacotes e a ação a ser executada. Se você não quiser ver essas caixas de diálogo de confirmação, desmarque essas caixas de seleção na janela Preferências."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "Se você clicar novamente na caixa de seleção “Não mostrar este diálogo de confirmação novamente” em uma caixa de diálogo específica, também cancelará essa preferência para esse diálogo."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "Preferências de política de assinatura"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "Use os botões da guia Política de assinatura para ignorar ou exigir assinaturas ao instalar pacotes nesta imagem. Para definir a política de assinatura para editores específicos, selecione o editor na janela Gerenciar editores, clique no botão <guibutton>Modificar</guibutton> e use a guia Política de assinatura da janela Modificar editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "As opções para política de assinatura de imagem são as mesmas da política de assinatura de editor, exceto pelo fato de as configurações se aplicarem a todos os pacotes instalados na imagem, não só a pacotes instalados em um editor específico. Consulte <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "Configurações de preferências de idioma de componentes opcionais"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "Selecione a opção <menuchoice><guimenu>Editar</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferências</guimenuitem></menuchoice> e selecione a guia Componentes opcionais."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "Por padrão, Instalar todos os idiomas fica selecionada em opções de idioma. Você pode liberar espaço na instalação selecionando um subconjunto de idiomas para instalação."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "Quando Instalar apenas estes idiomas estiver selecionada, você poderá clicar no ícone da caixa de seleção no cabeçalho da coluna mais à esquerda da lista de idiomas para selecionar todos os idiomas. Clique no cabeçalho da coluna novamente para cancelar a seleção de todos os idiomas. Clique nos cabeçalhos das colunas novamente para cancelar a seleção de todos os idiomas. Clique nos cabeçalhos das colunas Idioma e Território para ordenar a lista"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "Clique no botão OK para salvar as alterações. Essas configurações aplicam-se aos pacotes instalados atualmente e às futuras instalações e atualizações de pacotes. A magem está atualizada conforme necessário para nstalar ou remover componentes opcionais de pacotes com base nas novas configurações."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "Se você atualizou anteriormente sua imagem para incluir apenas um subconjunto de idiomas, Instalar apenas estes idiomas será a seleção padrão da janela e a lista de idiomas estará esmaecida se você selecionar a opção Instalar todos os idiomas."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "Outras preferências de componentes opcionais"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "Por padrão, Instalar todos os arquivos de desenvolvimento e Instalar toda a documentação estão selecionadas em Configurações de outros componentes. Você pode liberar espaço na instalação cancelando a seleção dos arquivos de desenvolvimento ou documentação."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "Glossário"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "alias"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Outro nome para um editor."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "ambiente de inicialização (BE)"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "Uma instância de um ambiente inicializável do Oracle Solaris. É necessário que o sistema de arquivos raiz e todos os outros sistemas de arquivos do ambiente de inicialização que contêm software de sistema sejam conjuntos de dados ZFS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "O ambiente de inicialização ativo é o que está inicializado no momento. Um sistema pode ter muitos ambientes de inicialização. É possível selecionar o que deseja inicializar ao reinicializar."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "clone"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Uma cópia exata."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "Um clone pode ser uma cópia exata de um sistema operacional, um sistema de arquivos ou um volume. Essa cópia é 100% compatível com o original."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "conjunto de dados"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "Nome genérico das seguintes entidades do ZFS: clones, sistemas de arquivos, instantâneos ou volumes. Cada conjunto de dados é identificado por um único nome no espaço de nome do ZFS."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "imagem"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "Um conjunto de softwares do sistema operacional em um pacote que pode ser inicializado e instalado."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "Um local do sistema em que os pacotes e os arquivos, diretórios, links e dependências associados podem ser instalados."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "origem"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "Um servidor de pacotes no qual um editor edita pacotes."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "pacote"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "Um conjunto de arquivos, diretórios, links, drivers e dependências em um formato definido."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "editor"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "Pessoa, grupo ou corporação que projeta, cria e edita em um servidor de pacotes. O servidor de pacotes, por sua vez, atende os pacotes do editor (padrão) para fins de download."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "editor de sistema"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "Editores de sistema são editores especiais utilizados em imagens e regiões não-globais, em particular, com links para garantir que determinados pacotes permaneçam em sincronia com a região global. A região global comprime pacotes dentro de regiões não-globais por meio da configuração desses editores especiais na região não-global. São especiais porque as regiões não-globais não podem fazer determinadas alterações neles, incluindo remoção, desativação, modificação, nem alerar a prioridade deles."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "créditos do tradutor"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/ru/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/ru/ru.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1626 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
- "Project-Id-Version: system-config-printer HEAD\n"
- "POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-14 11:47+0900\n"
- "PO-Revision-Date: 2008-12-15 10:50+0900\n"
- "Last-Translator: [email protected]\n"
- "Language-Team: [email protected]\n"
- "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
- "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
- "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:38(None) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:88(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:68(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:583(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:609(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:3(title)
-msgid "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "Интерактивная справка по диспетчеру пакетов OpenSolaris 2010.03."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:4(firstname)
-msgid "OpenSolaris"
-msgstr "ОС OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:5(surname)
-msgid "Publications"
-msgstr "Публикации"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:8(pubsnumber)
-msgid "822-7173"
-msgstr "822-7173"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:10(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2009"
-msgstr "Июнь 2009 г."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:11(publishername)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:13(year)
-msgid "2009"
-msgstr "2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:33(title)
-msgid "About the Package Manager"
-msgstr "О диспетчере пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:34(para)
-msgid "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-msgstr "Добро пожаловать в интерактивную справку по диспетчеру пакетов <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:35(para)
-msgid "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-msgstr "Начните обучение использованию диспетчера пакетов с содержания справки. Для перехода по разделам справки выберите соответствующую тему на боковой панели."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:36(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-msgstr "Диспетчер пакетов OpenSolaris 2010.03 представляет собой графический пользовательский интерфейс для программного обеспечения системы управления пакетами (IPS). В диспетчере пакетов реализовано подмножество функциональных возможностей, предоставляемых клиентами с интерфейсом командной строки, поставляемых вместе с системой IPS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Диспетчер пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:41(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Диспетчер пакетов дает возможность решать следующие задачи:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:42(para)
-msgid "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-msgstr "Установка, удаление и поиск пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:44(para)
-msgid "Update your system"
-msgstr "Обновление системы"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:46(para)
-msgid "Add and manage publishers"
-msgstr "Добавление издателей и управление ими"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:48(para)
-msgid "Create, remove, and manage boot environments"
-msgstr "Создание и удаление загрузочных сред, а также управление ими"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:51(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for a definition of the terms used in this document."
-msgstr ""
- "В <xref linkend=\"glossary-\"/> приведены определения терминов, используемых "
- "в данном документе."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:53(title)
-msgid "About Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "О системе управления пакетами (IPS)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:54(para)
-msgid "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-msgstr "Система управления пакетами (Image Packaging System; IPS) представляет собой платформу для управления жизненным циклом программного обеспечения, в том числе установки, обновления и удаления. В версии ОС OpenSolaris 2010.03 в качестве системы управления пакетами используется IPS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:55(para)
-msgid "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-msgstr "После первоначальной установки операционной системы OpenSolaris 2010.03 нередко выясняется, что многие часто используемые приложения не являются немедленно доступными. Такое прикладное ПО распространяется в виде пакетов в хранилище, доступных для загрузки и установки по сети. Хранилище представляет собой источник пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:56(para)
-msgid "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-msgstr "В IPS входит ряд программных средств, которые можно использовать для установки пакетов из хранилища, создания и публикации собственных пакетов IPS, создания зеркала существующего хранилища, а также публикации существующих пакетов в хранилище."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:57(para)
-msgid "Once you have installed packages, IPS enables you to search, update, and manage packages on your system."
-msgstr ""
- "После установки пакетов система IPS позволяет выполнять в системе поиск, обновление пакетов и"
- "управление ими."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:58(para)
-msgid "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-msgstr ""
- "Система IPS обеспечивает возможность обновления операционной системы до более свежей версии OpenSolaris, "
- "устанавливать программное обеспечение и обновлять его до самых свежих версий, доступных в хранилище,"
- "а также получать пакеты из зеркальных хранилищ."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:59(emphasis)
-msgid "The Package Manager provides a subset of the tasks that can be performed from the command-line."
-msgstr ""
- "Диспетчер пакетов обеспечивает выполнение подмножества задач, которые могут выполняться"
- "из командной строки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:61(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-msgstr "Если система версии OpenSolaris 2010.03, на которой установлена система управления пакетами, находится в сети, то пакеты, предоставляемые издателем OpenSolaris, могут автоматически поступать в систему IPS из хранилища по адресу <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:62(para)
-msgid "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-msgstr "Для получения дополнительной информации о системе управления пакетами см. руководство <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> и <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">справочные страницы</ulink> <filename>pkg</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:63(para)
-msgid "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-msgstr "Для получения дополнительной информации о системе управления пакетами посетите <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">страницу проекта</ulink>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:65(title)
-msgid "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-msgstr "Начало работы с диспетчером пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:66(para)
-msgid "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-msgstr "При запуске диспетчера пакетов открывается начальная страница, показанная в приведенном ниже примере:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:67(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Start Page"
-msgstr "Начальная страница диспетчера пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:71(para)
-msgid "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-msgstr "На начальной странице выводится список ключевых пакетов, доступных для установки. Среди прочего можно ознакомиться со списком наиболее популярных и недавно добавленных пакетов, загружаемых сообществом пользователей ОС OpenSolaris. Список рекомендованных пакетов содержит ссылки на прикладное программное обеспечение, часто загружаемое пользователем OpenSolaris. Для установки пакетов щелкните соответствующие ссылки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:72(para)
-msgid "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "На начальной странице приводятся также ссылки на дополнительные сведения о проекте OpenSolaris; также предоставляется возможность подписаться на новостные рассылки и вступить в сообщество OpenSolaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:73(para)
-msgid "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Для закрытия начальной страницы и перехода к списку пакетов от выбранного издателя можно выполнить одно из следующих действий в главном окне диспетчера пакетов:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:74(para)
-msgid "Select a package category"
-msgstr "Выберите категорию пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:76(para)
-msgid "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-msgstr "Изменить раскрывающееся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Вид</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:78(para)
-msgid "Perform a search"
-msgstr "Выполните поиск"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:80(para)
-msgid "Change the publisher"
-msgstr "Изменить издателя."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:83(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to return to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr ""
- "На начальную страницу всегда можно вернуться путем выбора пункта меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Просмотр</guimenu><guimenuitem>Начальная страница</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:84(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "См. <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> для получения информации об отключении <emphasis role=\"strong\">первоначального отображения</emphasis> начальной страницы при запуске диспетчера пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:86(title)
-msgid "About The Package Manager Window"
-msgstr "Об окне диспетчера пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:87(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main View"
-msgstr "Главное представление диспетчера пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:91(para)
-msgid "The main window of the Package Manager consists of the following elements :"
-msgstr ""
- "Главное окно диспетчера пакетов состоит из "
- "следующих элементов:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:92(emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr "Строка меню"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:93(para)
-msgid "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr "В строке меню содержатся меню и подменю, требуемые для выполнения всех команд, связанных с диспетчером пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:97(emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr "Панель инструментов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:98(para)
-msgid "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-msgstr "На панели инструментов расположены значки для подмножества команд, выполняемых с помощью строки меню. Также на панели инструментов расположено поле <emphasis role=\"strong\">Поиск</emphasis>. Панель инструментов предоставляет возможность вызова следующих функций:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:99(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновления</emphasis> – нажмите кнопку <emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновления</emphasis> для проверки и установки последних обновлений."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:101(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Установка/обновление</emphasis> – для установки или обновления пакета выберите его и нажмите кнопку <emphasis role=\"strong\">Установка/обновление</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:103(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновление</emphasis> – для повторной загрузки списка пакетов нажмите кнопку <emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновить</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:105(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Удаление</emphasis> – для удаления пакета выберите его и нажмите кнопку <emphasis role=\"strong\">Удалить</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:107(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Поиск пакета</emphasis> – для поиска пакета введите имя или описание пакета в поле <emphasis role=\"strong\">Поиск</emphasis>. Примеры поиска пакета см. в разделе <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:112(emphasis)
-msgid "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-msgstr "Раскрывающееся меню \"Издатель\""
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:113(para)
-msgid "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-msgstr "В раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Издатель</emphasis> выводится список доступных издателей. Это меню позволяет выполнять следующие задачи:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:114(emphasis)
-msgid "Select a publisher"
-msgstr "выбор издателя;"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:116(emphasis)
-msgid "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-msgstr "просмотр списка установленных пакетов от всех издателей;"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:118(emphasis)
-msgid "Search for package across all publishers"
-msgstr "поиск пакета по всем издателям;"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:120(emphasis)
-msgid "Add a publisher"
-msgstr "добавление издателей;"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:125(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr "Список пакетов по категориям"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:126(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Доступные пакеты можно просматривать по категориям на боковой панели слева. Щелкните категорию для отображения доступных подкатегорий пакетов. В диспетчере пакетов предусмотрено шесть главных категорий."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:127(emphasis)
-msgid "Applications"
-msgstr "Приложения"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:129(emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop (GNOME)"
-msgstr "Рабочий стол (GNOME)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:131(emphasis)
-msgid "Development"
-msgstr "Разработка"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:133(emphasis)
-msgid "Drivers"
-msgstr "Драйверы"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:135(emphasis)
-msgid "System"
-msgstr "Система"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:137(emphasis)
-msgid "Web Services"
-msgstr "Веб-службы"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:142(emphasis)
-msgid "Recent Searches"
-msgstr "Недавние результаты поиска"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:143(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-msgstr "В диспетчере пакетов сохраняется несколько последних результатов поиска пакетов. Для просмотра списка пакетов, поиск которых выполнялся за последнее время, нажмите кнопку \"Недавние результаты поиска\" на левой боковой панели."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:146(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr "Список пакетов по статусу"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:147(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-msgstr "Раскрывающееся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Вид</emphasis> позволяет просматривать статус пакета в одном из следующих режимов:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:148(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Все пакеты</emphasis> – отображается список всех пакетов, доступных для текущего издателя."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:150(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Установленные пакеты</emphasis> – отображается список установленных в системе пакетов от текущего издателя."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:152(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновления</emphasis> – отображается список пакетов, для которых у текущего издателя доступны более новые версии."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:154(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Неустановленные пакеты</emphasis> – отображается список пакетов, которые не установлены, но доступны у текущего выбранного издателя."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:156(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that you have selected."
-msgstr ""
- "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Выбранные пакеты</emphasis> – отображается список "
- "выбранных пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:161(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-msgstr "Название пакета, его состояние и описание"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:162(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-msgstr "Выводится список пакетов из выбранной категории, их краткое описание и статус."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:163(para)
-msgid "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-msgstr "В некоторых случаях здесь также выводится название издателя:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:164(para)
-msgid "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-msgstr "если в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Издатель</emphasis> выбрано значение \"Все издатели (установленные)\";"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:166(para)
-msgid "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-msgstr "если выводятся результаты поиска по всем издателям в режиме \"Все издатели (поиск)\";"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:168(para)
-msgid "When a recent search result is displayed"
-msgstr "если выводится результат недавнего поиска."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:173(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr "Подробные сведения о пакете"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:174(para)
-msgid "Click a package name to select it. Details of the selected package, such as name, version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr ""
- "Для выбора пакета щелкните мышью его название. В данном окне отображаются подробные сведения об этом пакете, "
- "например название, версия, зависимости файлов и лицензия."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:180(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Settings"
-msgstr "Параметры настройки диспетчера пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:181(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-msgstr "Для изменения параметров настройки диспетчера пакетов используется меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Правка</guimenu><guimenuitem>Параметры</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. В следующих разделах рассматриваются параметры настройки, доступные пользователю для изменения."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:182(title)
-msgid "Start Page Preferences"
-msgstr "Параметры начальной страницы"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:183(para)
-msgid "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr ""
- "При запуске приложения в главном меню диспетчера пакетов выводится начальная страница. "
- "На начальной странице содержатся ссылки на страницу <ulink url=\"http://"
- "opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink>, где приведена дополнительная "
- "информация об ОС OpenSolaris, можно подписаться на списки рассылки или вступить "
- "в сообщество OpenSolaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:184(para)
-msgid "You can choose to turn off this setting so this page is not displayed when Package Manager starts."
-msgstr ""
- "Этот параметр настройки можно отключить; в результате эта страница не будет выводиться при запуске "
- "диспетчера пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:185(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-msgstr "Выберите в меню пункт <menuchoice><guimenu>Правка</guimenu><guimenuitem>Параметры</guimenuitem></menuchoice> и снимите флажок <emphasis role=\"strong\">Показывать начальную страницу при запуске</emphasis> для отключения начальной страницы. По умолчанию этот флажок установлен."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:186(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "На начальную страницу всегда можно перейти с помощью пункта меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Вид</guimenu><guimenuitem>Начальная страница</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:188(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Параметры настройки выхода"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:189(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-msgstr "В приложении диспетчера пакетов реализована возможность сохранения части текущих параметров настройки, если установлен флажок <emphasis role=\"strong\">Запомнить текущее состояние при выходе</emphasis> в меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Правка</guimenu><guimenuitem>Параметры</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:190(para)
-msgid "The following settings are saved:"
-msgstr "Сохраняются следующие параметры настройки:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:191(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Вертикальные разделители</emphasis> – размер столбцов в главном окне диспетчера пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:193(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Размер окна</emphasis> – размер окна диспетчера пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:195(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Текущий издатель</emphasis> – издатель, выбранный на момент закрытия диспетчера пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:199(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Параметры настройки диалогового окна подтверждения"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:200(para)
-msgid "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-msgstr "При выборе пакета для установки, обновления или удаления выводится диалоговое окно подтверждения, содержащее список пакетов и выполняемые действия. Для отключения этих параметров настройки снимите флажки <emphasis role=\"strong\">При обновлении</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">При установке/обновлении пакета</emphasis> и <emphasis role=\"strong\">При удалении пакета</emphasis> в разделе <emphasis role=\"strong\">Вывод диалогового окна подтверждения</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:203(title)
-msgid "Working With Packages"
-msgstr "Работа с пакетами"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:204(title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr "Установка пакета"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:205(para)
-msgid "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr "Список пакетов и их состояний выводится в главном окне диспетчера пакетов. Для установки пакета необходимо выполнить следующие действия:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:206(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Для выбора пакета или пакетов установите расположенный рядом с ним флажок. Пакет также можно выбрать двойным щелчком."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:208(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Для запуска процесса установки пакетов нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Установка/обновление</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:209(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr ""
- "Для начала процесса установки пакета можно также выбрать"
- " в меню пункты <menuchoice><guimenu>Пакет</"
- "guimenu><guimenuitem>Установка/обновление</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:211(para)
-msgid "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-msgstr "Для просмотра подробных данных об установке нажмите кнопку <guilabel>Подробности</guilabel>; для отмены установки пакетов нажмите кнопку <guilabel>Отмена</guilabel>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:213(para)
-msgid "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-msgstr "По завершении установки нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Закрыть</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:216(title)
-msgid "Installation Error"
-msgstr "Ошибка установки"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:217(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-msgstr "Если в процессе установки пакета происходит ошибка, открывается диалоговое окно, в котором выводится сообщение об ошибке вместе с причиной отказа. Для закрытия диалогового окна ошибки нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Закрыть</guibutton>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:220(title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr "Удаление пакета"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:221(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Для удаления пакета выполните следующие действия:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:222(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Для выбора пакета установите расположенный рядом с ним флажок. Пакет также можно выбрать двойным щелчком."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:224(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-msgstr "Для запуска процесса удаления пакета нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Удалить</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:225(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr ""
- "Для удаления пакета можно также выбрать в меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Пакет</"
- "guimenu><guimenuitem>Удалить</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:227(para)
-msgid "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Просмотрите пакеты, которые необходимо удалить, а также подробные сведения о зависимостях пакетов в диалоговом окне <emphasis role=\"strong\">Подтверждение удаления</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:229(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Продолжить</guibutton> для начала удаления пакетов или кнопку <guibutton>Отмена</guibutton> для отмены процесса удаления."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:233(title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr "Поиск пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:234(para)
-msgid "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-msgstr "Поиск пакета можно выполнять одним из следующих способов:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:235(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Поиск текущего издателя</emphasis> – поиск пакета от издателя, выбранного в настоящий момент в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Издатель</emphasis>. Если статус искомого пакета неизвестен, выберите в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Вид</emphasis> значение <emphasis role=\"strong\">Все пакеты</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:236(para)
-msgid "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-msgstr "Введите описание или частичное имя в поле <emphasis role=\"strong\">Поиск</literal>. Например, для поиска пакета <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> можно ввести "
- "один из следующих критериев поиска:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:237(para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr "SUNWgames"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:239(para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr "games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:241(para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr "GNOME-games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:244(para)
-msgid "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr ""
- "Для поиска компиляторов SunStudio можно ввести один из следующих критериев поиска:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:245(para)
-msgid "compiler"
-msgstr "compiler"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:247(para)
-msgid "tools"
-msgstr "tools"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:251(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Поиск по всем издателям</emphasis> – для поиска пакета по всем настроенным издателям выберите значение <emphasis role=\"strong\">Все издатели (поиск)</emphasis> в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Издатель</emphasis>. Если статус искомого пакета неизвестен, выберите в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Вид</emphasis> значение <emphasis role=\"strong\">Все пакеты</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:252(para)
-msgid "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Введите описание пакета в поле <emphasis role=\"strong\">Поиск</emphasis>. Например, пакет <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> представляет собой руководство по программированию на языке Python. В описании пакета содержится строка <emphasis>book</emphasis>. Для поиска этого пакета можно ввести один из следующих критериев поиска:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:253(para)
-msgid "python"
-msgstr "python"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:255(para)
-msgid "book"
-msgstr "book"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:258(para)
-msgid "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-msgstr "Если при поиске пакета <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> использовался критерий <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis>, пакет не выводится, поскольку критерий <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> отсутствует в содержимом пакета в качестве отдельно стоящего полного слова. Однако пакет можно найти с помощью подстановочного символа <literal>*</literal>. Следовательно, при поиске по критерию <literal>diveinto*</literal> пакет <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> будет выведен."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:262(para)
-msgid "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Подменю в меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Правка</guimenu></menuchoice> позволяют вырезать, копировать или вставлять текст в поле <emphasis role=\"strong\">Поиск</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:264(para)
-msgid "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-msgstr "При поиске пакетов поддерживаются следующие операторы:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:265(emphasis)
-msgid "The AND operator"
-msgstr "Оператор AND"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:266(para)
-msgid "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-msgstr "Если критерии поиска разделены пробелами или оператором AND, выполняется поиск пакетов, содержащих <emphasis role=\"strong\">все</emphasis> критерии поиска."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:269(emphasis)
-msgid "Double Quotes"
-msgstr "Кавычки"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:270(para)
-msgid "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-msgstr "Если критерий поиска заключен в кавычки, выполняется поиск пакетов, <emphasis role=\"strong\">точно соответствующих критерию поиска</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:273(emphasis)
-msgid "Wildcard *"
-msgstr "Подстановочный знак *"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:274(para)
-msgid "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-msgstr "Включение подстановочного знака в критерий поиска позволяет выполнять поиск частичных имен пакетов. Например, при вводе <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> в качестве критерия поиска в именах и описаниях найденных пакетов будут содержаться как <emphasis>boot</emphasis>, так и <emphasis>book</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:275(para)
-msgid "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-msgstr "Поиск с использованием подстановочных знаков может оказаться медленнее поиска по точному совпадению или поиск по описанию пакета."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:279(emphasis)
-msgid "The OR operator"
-msgstr "Оператор OR"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:280(para)
-msgid "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-msgstr "Если критерии поиска разделены оператором OR, выполняется поиск пакетов, содержащих любой из критериев."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:285(title)
-msgid "Cancel Package Search"
-msgstr "Отмена поиска пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:286(para)
-msgid "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-msgstr "Если поиск требуется отменить, воспользуйтесь значком \"Отмена поиска\" в нижней части главного окна диспетчера пакетов. Этот значок отображается в строке состояния только в ходе операции поиска."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:288(title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr "Обновление пакета"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:289(para)
-msgid "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-msgstr "Обратите внимание на значок \"Обновления\" рядом с именем установленного пакета. Этот значок означает, что для пакета доступны обновления от издателя, выбранного в текущий момент. Также для вывода списка пакетов с доступными обновлениями можно выбрать один из следующих режимов просмотра:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:290(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "Для получения списка всех пакетов, для которых доступны обновления от издателя, выбранного в текущий момент, выберите пункт <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Обновления</guimenuitem></menuchoice> в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Вид</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:292(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-msgstr "Для получения списка всех пакетов, для которых доступны обновления от всех издателей, выберите пункт <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Обновления</guimenuitem></menuchoice> в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> и пункт <emphasis role=\"strong\">Все издатели (установленные)</emphasis> в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Издатель</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:295(para)
-msgid "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-msgstr "Иногда при обновлении пакета возникают сбои вследствие неотъемлемых зависимостей пакета, выбранного для установки или обновления. Для получения последних обновлений может потребоваться обновление всех пакетов в системе."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:297(para)
-msgid "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-msgstr "Выберите пакет или пакеты, которые требуется обновить, и нажмите на кнопку <guibutton>Установить/обновить</guibutton> для установки последней версии пакета. Обновите все пакеты в системе с помощью значка <emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновления</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:299(title)
-msgid "Package Version Information"
-msgstr "Сведения о версии пакета"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:300(para)
-msgid "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-msgstr "Выберите пакет в главном окне диспетчера пакетов и щелкните его правой кнопкой мыши для просмотра сведений о версии пакета. Существует три типа версий пакетов:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:301(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Устанавливаемая версия</emphasis> – версия пакета, доступная для установки или обновления. Эта версия может быть не быть самой последней из-за зависимостей между пакетами в системе. Следовательно, установка последней версии пакета может оказаться невозможной без одновременного обновления всей системы с помощью значка <emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновления</emphasis> на панели инструментов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:303(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Установленная версия</emphasis> – версия пакета, установленная в системе."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:305(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Последняя версия</emphasis> – последняя версия пакета, доступная для установки или обновления. Установка последней версии возможна в полностью обновленной системе."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:309(title)
-msgid "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-msgstr "Просмотр установленных пакетов от всех издателей"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:310(para)
-msgid "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "Для просмотра списка всех установленных пакетов от всех издателей выберите пункт <emphasis role=\"strong\">Все издатели (установленные)</emphasis> в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Издатель</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:311(para)
-msgid "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-msgstr "Поиск пакетов в режиме просмотра <emphasis role=\"strong\">Все издатели (установленные)</emphasis> невозможен. Для поиска пакета перейдите в режим <emphasis role=\"strong\">Все издатели (поиск)</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:315(title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Введение в загрузочные среды"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:316(para)
-msgid "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-msgstr ""
- "Среда загрузки представляет собой загружаемый образ. Среда загрузки создается после первоначальной"
- "установки ОС Solaris."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:317(para)
-msgid "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-msgstr "В системе OpenSolaris 2010.03 можно организовать несколько сред загрузки. Для создания, переименования, монтирования и размонтирования, а также уничтожения этих сред загрузки используется команда <command>beadm(1)</command>, которая вводится в командной строке."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:318(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-msgstr "Диспетчер пакетов позволяет управлять средами загрузки, созданными в ходе обновления образа. Для получения дополнительной информации см. раздел <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:319(para)
-msgid "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-msgstr "На одном компьютере можно организовать несколько сред загрузки, и в каждой такой среде могут быть установлены разные версии программного обеспечения."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:320(para)
-msgid "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-msgstr ""
- "При обновлении всех пакетов в активной среде загрузки OpenSolaris с помощью либо "
- "диспетчера пакетов, либо команды <command>pkg image-update</command>, "
- "автоматически создается клон этой среды загрузки. "
- "При этом пакеты обновляются не в исходной среде загрузки, а в клоне. "
- "После успешного выполнения обновления созданный клон активируется. "
- "После перезагрузки системы клон становится новой средой загрузки по умолчанию. "
- "Исходная среда загрузки остается доступной в качестве "
- "альтернативы."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:321(para)
-msgid "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-msgstr "Для получения дополнительных сведений о средах загрузки и команде <command>beadm(820)</command> см. справочные страницы beadm(1) и документ <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Обновление сред загрузки и управление ими</citetitle></ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:322(title)
-msgid "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-msgstr "Обновление всех пакетов (обновление образа)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:323(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr "Для обновления всех пакетов в своей системе выполните следующие действия."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:324(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Обновления</guibutton> для запуска процесса обновления <emphasis role=\"strong\">всех</emphasis> пакетов, установленных в образе."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:325(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr "Для запуска обновления можно также выбрать в меню пункты <menuchoice><guimenu>Пакет</guimenu><guimenuitem>Обновления</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:326(para)
-msgid "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Если для установленных пакетов отсутствуют доступные обновления, после нажатия кнопки <guibutton>Обновления</guibutton> выводится сообщение <emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновления недоступны</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:329(para)
-msgid "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-msgstr "Процесс обновления всех пакетов, установленных в системе, осуществляется в три этапа:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:330(emphasis)
-msgid "Preparation"
-msgstr "Подготовка"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:332(emphasis)
-msgid "Download"
-msgstr "Загрузка"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:334(emphasis)
-msgid "Install"
-msgstr "Установка"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:337(para)
-msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-msgstr "С дополнительной информацией можно ознакомиться на закладке <emphasis>Сведения</emphasis>, выводимой на каждом этапе."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:339(para)
-msgid "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-msgstr "После успешного завершения процесса обновления выводится диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновление всех пакетов завершено</emphasis>. Создается новая загрузочная среда, состоящая из обновленных пакетов. Новой загрузочной среде присваивается имя по умолчанию, однако его можно изменить."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:340(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "Если диспетчер пакетов не может создать новую загрузочную среду, выводится сообщение об ошибке. См. раздел <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> об исправлении ошибки и продолжении обновления образа."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:343(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-msgstr "Для немедленной перезагрузки системы нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Перезагрузить сейчас</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:344(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-msgstr "Для отложенной перезагрузки системы нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Перезагрузить позже</guibutton>. <emphasis role=\"strong\">Изменения вступают в силу только после перезагрузки системы.</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:345(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "Во время выполнения команды \"Обновить все\" создается клон активной загрузочной среды. Такой клон позволяет пользователю вернуться к состоянию загрузочной среды, "
- "существовавшему до начала процесса \"Обновить все\"."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:350(title) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:656(title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr "Ошибки при выполнении команды \"Обновить все\""
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:351(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-msgstr "Для завершения процесса \"Обновить все\" необходимо воспользоваться средствами диспетчера пакетов для создания нового клона загрузочной среды. Если клон загрузочной среды создать невозможно, выводится сообщение об ошибке. Пример сообщения об ошибке:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:352(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Недостаточно дискового пространства, выполнение обновления невозможно. Выберите \"Управление загрузочными средами\" и примите меры к высвобождению дискового пространства путем управления загрузочными средами.</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:353(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:659(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Закрыть</guibutton> для отмены процесса \"Обновить все\"."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:354(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:660(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-msgstr ""
- "Для исправления ошибки и продолжения процесса \"Обновить все\""
- "выполните следующие действия:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:355(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Управление загрузочными средами</guibutton> для открытия диалогового окна <emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление загрузочными средами</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:357(para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Выберите загрузочные среды, которые необходимо удалить."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:358(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "Активную в настоящий момент среду загрузки удалить невозможно."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:360(para)
-msgid "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-msgstr ""
- "Если необходимо удалить только некоторые загрузочные среды, "
- "перезагружать систему нет необходимости."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:365(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:367(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <literal>Подтверждение загрузочной среды</literal>. Проверьте правильность "
- "изменений и нажмите кнопку \"OK\" для продолжения."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:369(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Щелкните значок <guibutton>Обновить все</guibutton> для повторного запуска процесса обновления всех пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:373(title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Управление загрузочными средами"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:374(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-msgstr "Для управления загрузочными средами выполните следующие действия:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:375(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Выберите пункт меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Файл</guimenu><guimenuitem>Управление средами загрузки</guimenuitem></menuchoice> для открытия диалогового окна <literal>Управление средами загрузки</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:377(para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr "В данном диалоговом окне можно выполнить следующие действия:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:378(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Активация загрузочной среды </emphasis>: выберите среду загрузки, которую требуется активировать после перезагрузки системы. Эта загрузочная среда будет "
- "использоваться по умолчанию <emphasis role=\"strong\">после</emphasis> перезагрузки системы."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:380(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Удаление устаревших или неиспользуемых загрузочных сред для освобождения дискового пространства</emphasis>: выберите загрузочные среды, которые требуется удалить."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:381(para)
-msgid "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "Активную в настоящий момент среду загрузки удалить невозможно."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:383(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-msgstr ""
- "Если среда загрузки выбрана для переименования, ее нельзя удалить."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:388(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Переименование загрузочной среды</emphasis>: дважды щелкните имя загрузочной среды, которое требуется изменить. Введите новое имя и нажмите кнопку <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:389(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-msgstr ""
- "Если среда загрузки выбрана для обновления, ее нельзя переименовать."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:391(para)
-msgid "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "Активная загрузочная среда не может быть переименована."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:398(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>OK</guibutton> для продолжения или кнопку <guibutton>Отмена</guibutton> для отмены всех изменений."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:400(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Подтверждение загрузочной среды</emphasis>. Проверьте сделанные изменения и нажмите кнопку \"OK\" для продолжения."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:401(para)
-msgid "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-msgstr ""
- "После нажатия кнопки <guibutton>OK</guibutton> невозможно отменить изменения, "
- "внесенные в загрузочные среды."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:403(para)
-msgid "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr ""
- "Изменения, внесенные в <emphasis role=\"strong\"> настройки загрузочной среды "
- "по умолчанию</emphasis>, вступают в силу только после перезагрузки системы."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:405(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Отмена</guibutton> для отмены изменений."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:407(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-msgstr "Для загрузки новой активной загрузочный среды по умолчанию перезагрузите систему."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:408(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-msgstr "Перезагружать систему следует только в случае изменения активной среды загрузки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:414(title)
-msgid "Add and Manage Publishers"
-msgstr "Добавление издателей и управление ими"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:415(para)
-msgid "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-msgstr "Диалоговое окно <menuchoice><guimenu>Файл</guimenu><guimenuitem>Управление издателями</guimenuitem></menuchoice> позволяет добавлять настроенных издателей и управлять ими. Издатель представляет собой лицо, группу лиц или организацию, которые разрабатывают и формируют пакет, размещаемый затем в хранилище. Каждому издателю соответствует хранилище, в котором располагаются его данные. Местоположения данных пакетов в хранилище издателя определяются посредством источников и зеркал. Источники используются для предоставления местоположений, содержащих полный набор данных пакетов для издателя, а зеркала используются для предоставления местоположений, содержащих исключительно файлы пакетов. Источники и зеркала определяются с помощью URI (универсальных идентификаторов ресурсов), например <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:416(para)
-msgid "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-msgstr "Ознакомьтесь со следующими разделами, в которых описывается добавление издателей в систему и управление ими."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:417(title)
-msgid "Add a Publisher"
-msgstr "Добавление издателя"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:418(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-msgstr "Для добавления издателя с соответствующим идентификатором URI необходимо выполнить следующие действия:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:419(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Выберите пункт меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Файл</guimenu><guimenuitem>Добавить издателей</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:420(para)
-msgid "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Также можно выбрать пункт <guibutton>Добавить..</guibutton> в раскрывающемся меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Издатель</emphasis> или выбрать пункт меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Файл</guimenu><guimenuitem>Управление издателями</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, а затем выбрать <emphasis>Добавить..</emphasis> в диалоговом окне <emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление издателями</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:422(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Добавление издателя</emphasis>. Введите имя издателя и связанный с ним идентификатор URI. Если издатель является защищенным, отображаются поля <emphasis role=\"strong\">Ключ SSL</emphasis> и <emphasis role=\"strong\">Сертификат SSL</emphasis>. Для добавления ключа и сертификата SSL воспользуйтесь последовательностью действий, приведенной в разделе <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:424(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Добавить</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:426(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Добавление издателя</emphasis>. Для отмены процесса нажмите кнопку \"Отмена\"."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:428(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-msgstr "В случае успешного добавления издателя выводится диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Добавление издателя завершено</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:431(para)
-msgid "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-msgstr "Если добавление издателя невозможно, выводится сообщение <emphasis role=\"strong\">Ошибка при добавлении издателя</emphasis>. Для получения дополнительных сведений об ошибке нажмите кнопку <emphasis role=\"strong\">Сведения</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:434(title)
-msgid "Remove a Publisher"
-msgstr "Удаление издателя"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:435(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Для удаления издателя выполните следующие действия:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:436(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:459(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:473(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:492(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:511(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:528(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Выберите пункт меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Файл</guimenu><guimenuitem>Управление издателями</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:438(para)
-msgid "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "В списке щелкните издателя, чтобы выбрать его. Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Удалить</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:440(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Подтверждение управления издателями</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:442(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>OK</guibutton> для сохранения изменений и удаления издателя, либо кнопку <guibutton>Отмена</guibutton> для возврата к диалоговому окну <emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление издателями</emphasis> без внесения изменений."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:446(title)
-msgid "Set Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Настройка приоритета издателя"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:447(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-msgstr "Выполните следующие действия для настройки или изменения приоритета издателя:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:448(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Выберите в меню <menuchoice><guimenu>Файл</guimenu><guimenuitem>Управление издателями</guimenuitem></menuchoice> для открытия диалогового окна <literal>Управление издателями</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:450(para)
-msgid "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-msgstr "Выводится список настроенных издателей. Для изменения приоритета издателей щелкните соответствующие стрелки требуемое количество раз. Издатель с наивысшим приоритетом выводится в начале списка."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:451(emphasis)
-msgid "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-msgstr "Поиск пакетов по издателям осуществляется в порядке приоритета, т.е. сначала выполняется поиск по издателю с наивысшим приоритетом."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:453(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:465(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:484(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:503(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:520(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:537(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>OK</guibutton> для сохранения изменений, либо кнопку <guibutton>Отмена</guibutton> для возврата к диалоговому окну <emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление издателями</emphasis> без внесения изменений."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:457(title)
-msgid "Modify Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Изменение псевдонима издателя"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:458(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-msgstr "Для изменения псевдонима издателя необходимо выполнить следующие действия:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:461(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Выберите издателя, псевдоним которого требуется изменить. Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Изменить..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:463(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Изменить издателя</emphasis>. Измените псевдоним или введите новый в поле <emphasis role=\"strong\">Псевдоним</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:467(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:486(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:505(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:522(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:539(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>OK</guibutton> в диалоговом окне <emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление издателями</emphasis> для закрытия диалогового окна. Отметим, что при нажатии кнопки <guibutton>Отмена</guibutton> в диалоговом окне<emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление издателями</emphasis> не отменяются изменения, внесенные в диалоговом окне <emphasis role=\"strong\">Изменение издателей</emphasis> dialog."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:471(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Добавление источников издателя"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:472(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Для добавления источникa или источников, связанных с издателем, можно выполнить следующую последовательность действий:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:475(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Выберите издателя, для которого требуется изменить источники. Источник, связанный с издателем, выводится на закладке <emphasis role=\"strong\">Сведения</emphasis> в диалоговом окне <emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление издателями</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:477(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:496(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:515(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:532(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Изменить..</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:478(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Изменение издателя</emphasis>. Введите имя нового источника, который требуется связать с издателем в поле <emphasis role=\"strong\">Источник</emphasis>. Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Добавить</guibutton>. В таблице выводится список связанных источников."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:479(para)
-msgid "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-msgstr "После добавления источника изменить его URI невозможно."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:482(para)
-msgid "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(Необязательно) Если добавленный источник является защищенным, добавьте ключ SSL и сертификат SSL. Для поиска ключа и сертификата SSL в системе нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Обзор</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:490(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Удаление источников издателя"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:491(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Для удаления источникa или источников, связанных с издателем, можно выполнить следующую последовательность действий:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:494(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Выберите издателя, источники которого требуется удалить. Источник или источники, связанные с издателем, выводятся на закладке <emphasis role=\"strong\">Сведения</emphasis> в диалоговом окне <emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление издателями</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:497(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Изменение издателя</emphasis>. В таблице выводится список связанных источников."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:499(para)
-msgid "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Выберите источник, который требуется удалить. Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Удалить</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:500(para)
-msgid "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-msgstr "Если с издателем связан только один источник, удалить его невозможно."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:509(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Добавление зеркал издателя"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-msgstr "Для добавления зеркала издателя необходимо выполнить следующую последовательность действий:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-msgstr "Выберите издателя, для которого требуется добавить зеркало."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:516(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Изменение издателя</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:518(para)
-msgid "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Введите URI зеркала в поле <emphasis>Зеркало</emphasis>. Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Добавить</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:526(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Удаление зеркал издателя"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:527(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Для удаления зеркала, связанного с издателем, можно выполнить следующую последовательность действий:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:530(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-msgstr "Выберите издателя, зеркало которого требуется удалить."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:533(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Изменение издателя</emphasis>. В таблице выводится список связанных зеркал."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:535(para)
-msgid "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Выберите зеркало, которое требуется удалить. Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Удалить</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:544(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Работа с веб-установкой"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:545(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Диспетчер пакетов OpenSolaris 2010.03 обеспечивает возможность добавления новых издателей, а также установки пакетов от этих издателей с помощью простого процесса веб-установки одним щелчком. Для веб-установки требуется файл <filename>.p5i</filename>, содержащий добавляемых издателей и, возможно, пакет или пакеты, которые можно получить у этих издателей и установить. Данные, содержащиеся в файле <filename>.p5i</filename>, считываются и используются процессом веб-установки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:546(title)
-msgid "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-msgstr "Экспорт набора пакетов в виде файлов веб-установки"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:547(para)
-msgid "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-msgstr "Если требуется распространять пакеты, установленные в системе, другим пользователям в целях упрощения установки и дальнейшего распространения, ссылки на пакеты можно экспортировать с помощью процесса веб-установки. Функция <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Файл</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Экспорт наборов</guimenuitem></menuchoice> позволяет создать файл <filename>.p5i</filename>, содержащий указания по установке для выбранных пакетов. Файл <filename>.p5i</filename> можно затем распространять для дальнейшего использования. Указания по установке пакетов из файла <filename>.p5i</filename> приведены в разделе <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:548(para)
-msgid "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-msgstr "В приведенной ниже последовательности действий указаны шаги, требуемые для создания файла <filename>.p5i</filename> и экспорта файлов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:549(para)
-msgid "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Выберите издателя, пакеты которого требуется включить в файл <filename>.p5i</filename>, из раскрывающегося меню <emphasis role=\"strong\">Издатель</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:551(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-msgstr "Выберите пакет или пакеты путем установки флажков рядом с ними. Выбранные пакеты отмечаются выделением."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:553(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Откройте окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Подтверждение экспорта наборов</emphasis> путем выбора пункта меню <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Файл</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Экспорт наборов</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:555(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-msgstr "Для подтверждения выбора и продолжения нажмите кнопку <guibutton>OK</guibutton>; для отмены выбора нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Отмена</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:557(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-msgstr "Откроется окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Экспорт наборов</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:559(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Для файла <filename>p5i</filename> подставляется имя по умолчанию с расширением <filename>.p5i</filename>. Щелкните внутри поля <emphasis role=\"strong\">Имя</emphasis> и измените имя файла <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:561(para)
-msgid "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-msgstr "По умолчанию файл сохраняется в папке <filename>/tmp</filename>. Для выбора собственной папки перейдите на вкладку <emphasis role=\"strong\">Обзор других папок</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:563(para)
-msgid "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-msgstr "Выберите пункт <filename>Файлы p5i</filename> в раскрывающемся меню в нижнем правом углу окна."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:567(title)
-msgid "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Использование веб-установки для добавления источников и установки пакетов"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:568(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Процесс веб-установки позволяет устанавливать пакеты с помощью файла <filename>p5i</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:569(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-msgstr ""
- "Найдите файл <filename>.p5i</filename>, который может располагаться на рабочем столе, на "
- "начальной странице диспетчера пакетов или на веб-сайте."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:571(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-msgstr "Запустите диспетчер пакетов в режиме веб-установки одним из следующих способов:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:572(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-msgstr ""
- "Щелкните файл <filename>.p5i</filename> на рабочем столе, после чего запустится "
- "связанное с ним приложение, т.е. диспетчер пакетов в режиме веб-установки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:574(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-msgstr ""
- "Запустите диспетчер пакетов из командной строки вместе с путем к файлу "
- "<filename>.p5i</filename>. Например, введите в командной строке следующую "
- "команду:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "путь_к_файлу_p5i/файл.p5i"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(command)
-msgid "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:577(para)
-msgid "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-msgstr "Щелкните адрес URL, содержащий ссылку на файл <filename>.p5i</filename>. Если для запуска веб-установки используется этот способ, файл <filename>.p5i</filename> <emphasis role=\"strong\">непременно</emphasis> должен располагаться на веб-сервере, на котором зарегистрирован новый тип MIME. Только в этом случае возможна автоматическая обработка файла <filename>.p5i</filename> на стороне сервера и запуск диспетчера пакетов в режиме веб-установки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:578(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-msgstr ""
- "Если файл <filename>.p5i</filename> расположен на веб-сервере, на котором не "
- "зарегистрирован новый тип MIME, файл <filename>.p5i</filename> следует сохранить "
- "на рабочем столе, а затем щелкнуть его для запуска веб-установки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:582(para)
-msgid "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-msgstr "Откроется окно, пример которого приведен ниже. В этом окне выводится список добавляемых издателей и устанавливаемых пакетов. Проверьте эти данные."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:586(para)
-msgid "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Подтверждение или отмена процесса веб-установки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:587(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Продолжить</guibutton> для добавления новых издателей и установки пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:589(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Добавление издателя</emphasis>. Имя издателя и его идентификатор URI уже введены."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:590(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-msgstr "В случае успешного добавления издателя открывается диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Добавление издателя завершено</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:592(para)
-msgid "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(Необязательно) Если добавляемые издатели являются защищенными, требуются ключ и сертификат SSL. Для поиска ключа и сертификата SSL в системе можно воспользоваться функцией обзора."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:594(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr "Для продолжения нажмите кнопку<guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:596(para)
-msgid "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Если выполняется установка пакетов, выводится диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Установка/обновление</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:597(para)
-msgid "The application will close when all packages are installed."
-msgstr "После установки всех пакетов приложение закрывается."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:601(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-msgstr "Использование веб-установки при отключенном издателе"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:602(para)
-msgid "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-msgstr "Иногда в файл <filename>.p5i</filename> могут быть включены пакеты от отключенного издателя. В таких случаях в ходе веб-установки открывается диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Включить издателя</emphasis>, позволяющее пользователю включить издателя перед установкой пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:605(title)
-msgid "Working With the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Работа с диспетчером обновлений"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:606(title)
-msgid "About The Update Manager"
-msgstr "О диспетчере обновлений"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:607(para)
-msgid "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-msgstr "Диспетчер обновлений является отдельным приложением, "
- "которое запускается с рабочего стола, когда в издателе доступны обновления для установленных пакетов."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:608(title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr "Главное окно диспетчера обновлений"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:612(para)
-msgid "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-msgstr "Диспетчер обновлений можно использовать для обновления пакетов, установленных в образе. Для установки последнего образа используется издатель, настроенный в диспетчере пакетов в текущий момент."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:613(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-msgstr "В выпуске ОС OpenSolaris 2010.03 диспетчер обновлений используется для обновления <emphasis role=\"strong\">всех</emphasis> пакетов, установленных в образе. Это действие "
- "эквивалентно запуску команды <command>pkg image-update</command> в командной строке."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:616(title)
-msgid "Using the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Использование диспетчера обновлений"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:617(para)
-msgid "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-msgstr ""
- "Когда для установленных пакетов появляются обновления, в панели уведомлений"
- "на рабочем столе OpenSolaris выводится значок уведомления."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:618(para)
-msgid "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr ""
- "Можно также выбрать в меню пункты <menuchoice><guimenu>Система</"
- "guimenu><guisubmenu>Администрирование</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Диспетчер обновлений</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice> для запуска диспетчера обновлений вручную."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:619(para)
-msgid "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-msgstr ""
- "В случае получения уведомления об обновлении программного обеспечения необходимо "
- "предпринять следующие действия для запуска процесса обновления системы:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:620(para)
-msgid "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Щелкните значок уведомления на рабочем столе для открытия окна <literal>Диспетчер обновлений</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:622(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Обновить все</guibutton> в окне <emphasis role=\"strong\">Диспетчер обновлений</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:623(para)
-msgid "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr ""
- "Выберите пакет и нажмите панель <guilabel>Подробные данные</guilabel> "
- "для получения дополнительной информации о пакете."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:626(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-msgstr "Откроется диалоговое окно <emphasis role=\"strong\">Обновить все</emphasis>. Можно либо продолжить процесс обновления всех пакетов, либо отменить это действие."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:627(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-msgstr ""
- "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Продолжить</guibutton> для создания новой среды загрузки и "
- "обновления всех пакетов в текущем образе."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:628(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr ""
- "Во время выполнения команды \"Обновить все\" создается клон активной "
- "загрузочной среды. Данный клон позволяет пользователю загрузится в состояние загрузочной среды, "
- "которая существовала до начала процесса \"Обновить все\"."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:629(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr ""
- "Если диспетчер пакетов не может создать новую загрузочную среду, выводится "
- "сообщение об ошибке. См. раздел <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> об "
- "исправлении ошибки и продолжении обновления образа."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:630(para)
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-msgstr ""
- "Название для новой загрузочной среды создается автоматически. Можно либо принять"
- "автоматически сгенерированное название, либо указать собственное название для "
- "среды загрузки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:633(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Отмена</guibutton> для отмены процесса."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:637(para)
-msgid "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-msgstr "В случае выбора продолжения работы открываются окна<emphasis role=\"strong\">Установка обновлений</emphasis>. В процессе установки пакетов можно выделить четыре этапа:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:638(para)
-msgid "Prepare"
-msgstr "Подготовка"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:640(para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr "Загрузка"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:642(para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr "Установка"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:645(para)
-msgid "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-msgstr "Отмена процесса возможна только на этапах <emphasis role=\"strong\">Подготовка</emphasis> и <emphasis role=\"strong\">Загрузка</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:646(para)
-msgid "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-msgstr ""
- "Щелкните панель <guilabel>Подробные сведения</guilabel> для просмотра дополнительной информации "
- "о каждом из процессов установки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:647(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr ""
- "В случае возникновения ошибки на любом из этапов открывается панель<guilabel>Подробные сведения</"
- "guilabel> и отображается подробная информация об ошибке. Индикатор "
- "статуса ошибки отображается рядом с неудачным этапом."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:650(para)
-msgid "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr ""
- "До перезагрузки системы прочитайте документ <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:651(para)
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr "Для вступления изменений в силу необходимо перезагрузить систему."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:657(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-msgstr ""
- "Для завершения процесса \"Обновить все\" <emphasis role=\"strong\">необходимо </emphasis> создать"
- "новый клон загрузочной среды. Если клон загрузочной среды "
- "создать невозможно из-за недостатка дискового пространства, отображается следующее "
- "сообщение об ошибке:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:658(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Недостаточно дискового пространства, выполнение обновления невозможно. Выберите \"Управление загрузочными средами\" и примите меры к высвобождению дискового пространства посредством управления загрузочными средами.</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:661(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Управление загрузочными средами</guibutton> в диалоговом окне с сообщением об ошибке и перейдите к диалоговому окну <emphasis role=\"strong\">Управление загрузочными средами</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:663(para)
-msgid "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-msgstr ""
- "Перейдите к этапу 2 в разделе <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> . Удалите "
- "устаревшие или неиспользуемые среды загрузки в соответствии с инструкциями для освобождения дискового"
- "пространства."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:665(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Перезапустите обновление всех пакетов кнопкой <guibutton>Обновить все</guibutton> в окне <emphasis role=\"strong\">Диспетчер обновлений</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:669(title)
-msgid "2010.03 Release Notes"
-msgstr "Заметки о выпуске 2010.03"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:670(para)
-msgid "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-msgstr "Заметки о выпуске 2010.03 расположены по следующему адресу: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:674(title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr "Глоссарий системы управления пакетами"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:675(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "издатель"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:676(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-msgstr "Лицо, группа лиц или организация, предоставляющие пакеты. Пакеты издателя располагаются в хранилище, из которого данные о пакетах поступают в систему управления пакетами."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:679(glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr "хранилище"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:680(para)
-msgid "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-msgstr "Местоположение, в котором клиенты могут публиковать и получать содержимое пакетов, например, файлы внутри пакета, а также метаданные пакета, включающие в себя сведения о пакете, такие как его имя и описание."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:683(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr "Загрузочная среда"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:684(para)
-msgid "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "В контексте выпуска OpenSolaris 2010.03 загрузочная среда представляет собой экземпляр загружаемой среды ОС OpenSolaris. Корневая файловая система и все остальные файловые системы загрузочной среды, содержащие системное программное обеспечение, должны являться наборами данных ZFS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:685(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-msgstr ""
- "Активной называется среда загрузки, загруженная в данный момент. В системе "
- "OpenSolaris может быть несколько сред загрузки, и неактивные среды "
- "загрузки могут находиться в состоянии ожидания активации после перезагрузки системы."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:688(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "клон"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:689(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "Точная копия."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:690(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr ""
- "Клон может быть точной копией операционной системы, "
- "файловой системы или тома. Такая копия имеет 100% совместимость с оригиналом."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:693(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "набор данных"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:694(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr ""
- "Общее название для следующих категорий ZFS: клоны, файловые системы, "
- "снимки или тома. Каждый набор данных определен уникальным названием в "
- "пространстве имен ZFS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:697(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "образ"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:698(para)
-msgid "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr ""
- "Набор программного обеспечения в пакете, который содержит всю "
- "операционную систему или ее часть. Такой пакет может быть использован для установки."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:699(para)
-msgid "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr ""
- "Образ представляет собой местоположение в системе, куда могут устанавливаться пакеты и связанные "
- "с ними файлы, каталоги, ссылки и зависимости."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:702(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "пакет"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:703(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr ""
- "Набор файлов, каталогов, ссылок, драйверов и зависимостей в "
- "определенном формате."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:706(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "источник"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:707(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-msgstr "Местоположение хранилища пакетов, соответствующее идентификатору URI и содержащее полный набор данных пакета."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:710(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "псевдоним"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:711(para)
-msgid "An alternate name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Альтернативное имя издателя."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:714(glossterm)
-msgid "mirror"
-msgstr "зеркало"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:715(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-msgstr "Местоположение хранилища пакетов, соответствующее идентификатору URI и содержащее только файлы пакета."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "переводчик - сведения об авторах"
-
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:1(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "Данное программное обеспечение и документация предоставляются по лицензионному соглашению, накладывающему ограничения на использование и раскрытие информации, и защищены законодательством об охране интеллектуальной собственности. Кроме случаев, специально оговоренных в Вашем лицензионном соглашении или предусмотренных законодательством, воспроизведение и передача этих Программ, полностью или частично, для каких бы то ни было целей, в какой бы то ни было форме и какими бы то ни было средствами запрещены. Запрещается вскрытие технологии, дизассемблирование и декомпиляция программ, кроме случаев, когда это требуется для обеспечения совместимости с другими программными продуктами независимых разработчиков или предусматривается законом"
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:2(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "Информация, содержащаяся в этой документации, может быть изменена без уведомления. Безошибочность этой документации не гарантируется. При обнаружении ошибок в документации просьба сообщить нам об этих ошибках в письменном виде."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:3(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "Если настоящие программное обеспечение и документация поставляются правительству США или любой организации, выдающей лицензии или использующей эти Программы от лица правительства США, применимо следующее уведомление:"
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:4(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065, USA"
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:5(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "Настоящее программное обеспечение или аппаратные средства предназначены для применения в различных приложениях управления информацией. Они не предназначены для использования в опасных по своему характеру средах, в том числе способных представлять угрозу для жизни и здоровья людей. Если программное обеспечение или аппаратные средства все же используются в опасных условиях, на вас возлагается ответственность за соблюдение всех необходимых мер по обеспечению отказоустойчивости, архивированию, резервированию и других мер безопасности. Корпорация Oracle и ее филиалы отказываются от какой бы то ни было ответственности за ущерб, вызываемый использованием данного программного обеспечения или аппаратных средств в опасных условиях."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:6(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle and Java являются зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорации Oracle и/или ее филиалов. Прочие названия могут являться товарными знаками соответствующих владельцев."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:7(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD, Opteron, AMD логотип, и AMD Opteron логотип являются зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорации Advanced Micro Devices. Intel и Intel Xeon являются зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорации Intel Corporation. Все товарные знаки корпорации SPARC лицензированы и являются зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорации SPARC International, Inc. UNIX является зарегистрированным товарным знаком, лицензированным корпорацией X/Open Company, Ltd."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:8(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "Настоящее программное обеспечение, аппаратные средства и документация могут содержать информацию о контенте, продуктах и услугах третьих сторон или предлагать возможности доступа к этим ресурсам. Корпорация Oracle и ее филиалы не несут ответственности в отношении стороннего контента, продуктов и услуг и прямо отказываются от предоставления соответствующих гарантий любого вида. Корпорация Oracle и ее филиалы не несут ответственности за ущерб, убытки или затраты, которые может повлечь доступ к стороннему контенту, продуктам и услугам или их использование."
-
--- a/src/gui/help/sv/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/sv/sv.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1633 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-msgid ""
-msgstr ""
- "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n"
- "POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-14 11:47+0900\n"
- "PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
- "Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
- "Language-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\n"
- "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
- "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
- "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:38(None) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:88(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/pkgmgr-main.png'; md5=e2194180dd5eca2d8e3912fee614e061"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:68(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/startpage_new.png'; md5=9f8516015a79fd2b5c456128482affe4"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:583(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/webinstall.png'; md5=79f40b964b51261cd0164f64991b576c"
-
-#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
-#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:609(None)
-msgid "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-msgstr "@@image: 'figures/update_all_new.png'; md5=3d505052632edfdb38212de7f7ffb22c"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:3(title)
-msgid "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris 2010.03 Pakethanteraren Onlinehjälp"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:4(firstname)
-msgid "OpenSolaris"
-msgstr "OpenSolaris"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:5(surname)
-msgid "Publications"
-msgstr "Publikationer"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:8(pubsnumber)
-msgid "822-7173"
-msgstr "822-7173"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:10(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2009"
-msgstr "Juni 2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:11(publishername)
-msgid "Sun Microsystems"
-msgstr "Sun Microsystems"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:13(year)
-msgid "2009"
-msgstr "2009"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:33(title)
-msgid "About the Package Manager"
-msgstr "Om Pakethanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:34(para)
-msgid "Welcome to the <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03 Package Manager online help!"
-msgstr "Välkommen till onlinehjälpen för pakethanteraren <trademark>OpenSolaris</trademark> 2010.03!"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:35(para)
-msgid "Use the help contents to learn how to use the Package Manager. Navigate through this help by clicking the topics displayed in the sidebar."
-msgstr "I den här hjälpen får du lära dig hur pakethanteraren fungerar. Du navigerar "
- "genom hjälpen genom att välja ämnen i sidopanelen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:36(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager application is a graphical user interface for the Image Packaging System (IPS) software. The Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the command-line (CLI) clients provided with IPS."
-msgstr "Pakethanterarprogrammet i OpenSolaris 2010.03 är ett grafiskt gränssnitt för programvaran Image Packaging System (IPS). I pakethanteraren finns en del av de funktioner som finns i kommandoradsklienterna i IPS."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "Pakethanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:41(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "Med Pakethanteraren kan du göra följande:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:42(para)
-msgid "Install, remove, and search for packages"
-msgstr "Installera, ta bort och söka efter paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:44(para)
-msgid "Update your system"
-msgstr "Uppdatera ditt system"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:46(para)
-msgid "Add and manage publishers"
-msgstr "Lägga till och hantera utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:48(para)
-msgid "Create, remove, and manage boot environments"
-msgstr "Skapa, ta bort och hantera startmiljöer"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:51(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for a definition of the terms used in this document."
-msgstr ""
- "Se <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> för förklaringar av de begrepp som används "
- " i det här dokumentet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:53(title)
-msgid "About Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Om Image Packaging System"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:54(para)
-msgid "Image Packaging System (IPS) is a framework which provides for software lifecycle management including installation, upgrade, and removal. The OpenSolaris 2010.03 release uses IPS as its packaging system."
-msgstr "Image Packaging System (IPS) är ett system för hantering av programvara, vilket inbegriper installation, uppgradering och borttagning. I OpenSolaris 2010.03 används IPS som paketsystem."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:55(para)
-msgid "After an initial installation of the OpenSolaris 2010.03 operating system, you will find that some of the software applications that you use on a regular basis are not immediately available to you. These software applications are available as packages in a repository for downloading and installing over the network. A repository is a source for packages."
-msgstr "Efter grundinstallationen av operativsystemet OpenSolaris 2010.03 kommer du att märka att många av de program som du ofta använder inte är direkt tillgängliga för dig. De här programmen finns tillgängliga som paket i en databas på Internet och kan hämtas därifrån och installeras via nätverket. En databas är en paketkälla."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:56(para)
-msgid "IPS provides a set of software tools that can be used to install packages from a repository, create and publish their own IPS packages, mirror an existing repository, and publish existing packages to a repository."
-msgstr "Med IPS får du programverktyg som kan användas till att installera paket från en databas, skapa och publicera egna IPS-paket, skapa speglingar av en befintlig databas och publicera befintliga paket i en databas."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:57(para)
-msgid "Once you have installed packages, IPS enables you to search, update, and manage packages on your system."
-msgstr ""
- "När du har installerat paketen, kan du med IPS söka, uppdatera och"
- "hantera paket i ditt system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:58(para)
-msgid "With IPS , you can upgrade your system to a newer build of OpenSolaris, install and update your software to the latest available versions in a repository, and retrieve packages from mirror repositories."
-msgstr ""
- "Med IPS, kan du uppdatera ditt system till en nyare version av OpenSolaris, "
- "installera och uppdatera dina program till senast tillgängliga version i en"
- "databas, och hämta paket från speglade databaser."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:59(emphasis)
-msgid "The Package Manager provides a subset of the tasks that can be performed from the command-line."
-msgstr ""
- "Pakethanteraren erbjuder att vissa uppgifter kan utföras från "
- "kommandoraden."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:61(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, if the system on which IPS is installed is on the network, IPS can automatically retrieve packages provided by the OpenSolaris publisher from the package repository located at <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-msgstr "Om systemet som IPS är installerat på är på nätverket kan IPS som finns i denna version av OpenSolaris 2010.03 automatiskt hämta paket som kommer från utgivaren OpenSolaris. Dessa hämtas då från paketdatabasen på <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:62(para)
-msgid "For more IPS documentation, see the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> and the <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man pages</ulink>."
-msgstr "Mer dokumentation om IPS finns på <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Image Packaging System Guide</citetitle></ulink> och <filename>pkg</filename><ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/sc/src/pkg/gate/src/man/\">man-sidorna</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:63(para)
-msgid "For more information about IPS, visit the <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-msgstr "Mer information om IPS finns på <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.org/os/project/pkg\">project page</ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:65(title)
-msgid "Getting Started With Package Manager"
-msgstr "Komma i gång med pakethanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:66(para)
-msgid "When you start the Package Manager, a Start Page similar to the example below is displayed:"
-msgstr "När du öppnar pakethanteraren visas en startsida som liknar den här:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:67(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Start Page"
-msgstr "Startsidan i pakethanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:71(para)
-msgid "The Start Page provides a list of featured packages that can be installed. It includes a list of some of the most popular and recent packages downloaded by the OpenSolaris community of users. The Recommended list of packages point to software applications that are frequently downloaded by the OpenSolaris user. Click the package links to install the packages."
-msgstr "På startsidan finns en lista med paket som kan installeras. Här finns även en lista över några av de populäraste paketen och över de paket som nyligen laddats ned av medlemmar i OpenSolaris användargrupp. I listan över rekommenderade paket visas paket som OpenSolaris-användare ofta laddar ned. Du installerar paketen genom att klicka på länkarna."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:72(para)
-msgid "The Start Page also provides links to more information about the OpenSolaris project, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr "På startsidan finns också länkar som leder till mer information om OpenSolaris-projektet och låter dig prenumerera på nyhetsbrev och gå med i OpenSolaris användargrupp."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:73(para)
-msgid "To close the Start Page and see the list of packages in the selected publisher, perform any of the following actions in the main window of the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "Gör något av följande i huvudfönstret i pakethanteraren om du vill stänga startsidan och i stället se en lista med paket från vald utgivare:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:74(para)
-msgid "Select a package category"
-msgstr "Välj en paketkategori"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:76(para)
-msgid "Change the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu"
-msgstr "Ändra den nedrullningsbara menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visa</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:78(para)
-msgid "Perform a search"
-msgstr "Utför en sökning"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:80(para)
-msgid "Change the publisher"
-msgstr "Ändra utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:83(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to return to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr ""
- "Välj <menuchoice><guimenu>Visa</guimenu><guimenuitem>Startsida</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice> för att gå tillbaks till startsidan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:84(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> to turn off the <emphasis role=\"strong\">initial display</emphasis> of the start page when the Package Manager starts."
-msgstr "Gå till <xref linkend=\"edit-prefs\"/> om du inte vill att <emphasis role=\"strong\">startsidan</emphasis> ska visas när du öppnar pakethanteraren."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:86(title)
-msgid "About The Package Manager Window"
-msgstr "Om pakethanterarfönstret"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:87(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Main View"
-msgstr "Huvudfönstret i pakethanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:91(para)
-msgid "The main window of the Package Manager consists of the following elements :"
-msgstr ""
- "Pakethanterarens huvudfönster består av följande:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:92(emphasis)
-msgid "Menubar"
-msgstr "Menyrad"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:93(para)
-msgid "The menubar contains the menus and sub-menus required to perform all of the commands related to the Package Manager."
-msgstr "I menyraden finns alla menyer och undermenyer som behövs för att kunna utföra alla pakethanterarkommandon."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:97(emphasis)
-msgid "Toolbar"
-msgstr "Verktygsfält"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:98(para)
-msgid "The toolbar contains the icons for a subset of the commands that can be performed by using the menus on the menubar. A <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field is also located on the toolbar. You can perform the following actions from the toolbar :"
-msgstr "På verktygsraden finns ikoner för några av de kommandon som även finns i menyerna i menyraden. Här finns även ett emphasis role=\"strong\">sök</emphasis>-fält. Du kan utföra följande från verktygsraden:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:99(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> to check for and install the latest updates."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdateringar</emphasis> – Klicka på <emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdateringar</emphasis> om du vill söka efter och installera uppdateringar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:101(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> to install or update a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installera/uppdatera</emphasis> – Markera ett paket och klicka på <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installera/uppdatera</emphasis> om du vill installera eller uppdatera det."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:103(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> – Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Refresh</emphasis> to reload the list of packages."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdatera</emphasis> – Klicka på <emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdatera</emphasis> om du vill uppdatera listan med paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:105(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> – Select a package and click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove</emphasis> to remove a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Ta bort</emphasis> – Markera ett paket och klicka på <emphasis role=\"strong\">Ta bort</emphasis> om du vill ta bort ett paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:107(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search for a Package</emphasis> – Type the name or description of a package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field to search for a package. See the <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> section for examples on how to search for a package."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Söka efter paket</emphasis> – Skriv in namnet eller ange en beskrivning på ett paket i fältet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Sök</emphasis> om du vill söka efter det. Exempel på hur du kan söka efter paket finns i avsnittet <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:112(emphasis)
-msgid "Publisher Drop-Down Menu"
-msgstr "Den nedrullningsbara menyn Utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:113(para)
-msgid "The list of available publishers is shown in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. Users can perform the following tasks from the publisher drop-down menu :"
-msgstr "Listan med tillgängliga utgivare finns i den nedrullningsbara menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare</emphasis>. Från denna lista kan du:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:114(emphasis)
-msgid "Select a publisher"
-msgstr "välja en utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:116(emphasis)
-msgid "View the list of packages installed from all publishers"
-msgstr "se en lista över alla paket som installerats från en utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:118(emphasis)
-msgid "Search for package across all publishers"
-msgstr "söka efter paket bland alla utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:120(emphasis)
-msgid "Add a publisher"
-msgstr "lägga till utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:125(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Category"
-msgstr "Lista över paket sorterade efter kategorier"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:126(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by category in the left hand side panel. Click on a category to see the sub-categories of packages available. There are six main categories that are displayed in the Package Manager:"
-msgstr "I panelen på vänstra sidan kan du bläddra bland tillgängliga paket utifrån kategorier. När du klickar på en kategori visas alla tillgängliga underkategorier. Det finns sex huvudkategorier:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:127(emphasis)
-msgid "Applications"
-msgstr "Program"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:129(emphasis)
-msgid "Desktop (GNOME)"
-msgstr "Skrivbord (GNOME)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:131(emphasis)
-msgid "Development"
-msgstr "Utveckling"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:133(emphasis)
-msgid "Drivers"
-msgstr "Drivrutiner"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:135(emphasis)
-msgid "System"
-msgstr "System"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:137(emphasis)
-msgid "Web Services"
-msgstr "Webbtjänster"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:142(emphasis)
-msgid "Recent Searches"
-msgstr "Senaste sökningar"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:143(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager saves your recent package searches. Click the Recent Searches in the left hand side panel to view the packages you searched for recently."
-msgstr "Dina senaste sökningar sparas i pakethanteraren. Om du vill se de paket du senast sökt efter klickar du på Senaste sökningar i den vänstra sidopanelen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:146(emphasis)
-msgid "List of Packages by Status"
-msgstr "Lista över paket sorterade efter status"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:147(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu enables you to view package status with the following options :"
-msgstr "I den nedrullningsbara menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visa</emphasis> kan du se paketstatus enligt följande alternativ:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:148(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of all packages available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla paket</emphasis> – Visar en lista över alla "
- "paket som finns tillgängliga hos den aktuella utgivaren."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:150(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages installed within the current publisher on your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installerade paket</emphasis> – Visar en lista över paket från aktuell utgivare som finns installerade på systemet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:152(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> — Shows the list of packages that have newer versions available within the current publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdateringar</emphasis> – Visar en lista över tillgängliga paket med nyare versionsnummer från aktuell utgivare."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:154(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Not Installed Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that are not installed, but are available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Ej installerade paket</emphasis> – Visar en lista över paket som inte har installerats, men som går att ladda ned från aktuell utgivare."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:156(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Selected Packages</emphasis> – Shows the list of packages that you have selected."
-msgstr ""
- "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Valda paket</emphasis> – Visar en lista över "
- "paket du har valt."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:161(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Name, Status, and Description"
-msgstr "Namn, status och beskrivning på paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:162(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the selected category, a brief description, and their status are displayed in here."
-msgstr "Listan över paket i den valda kategorin, en kort beskrivning samt deras status."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:163(para)
-msgid "The Publisher name is also displayed here in the following instances :"
-msgstr "I följande fall visas även namnet på utgivaren:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:164(para)
-msgid "When the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Pubisher</emphasis> drop-down menu is set to All Publishers (Installed)"
-msgstr "när menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare</emphasis> är inställd på Alla utgivare (installerade)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:166(para)
-msgid "When search results are displayed for the All Publishers (Search) option"
-msgstr "när sökresultat visas för alternativet Alla utgivare (sök)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:168(para)
-msgid "When a recent search result is displayed"
-msgstr "när ett resultat från en sökning som nyligen utförts (senaste sökningar) visas"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:173(emphasis)
-msgid "Package Details"
-msgstr "Paketinformation"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:174(para)
-msgid "Click a package name to select it. Details of the selected package, such as name, version, file dependencies, and license are displayed in this window."
-msgstr ""
- "Klicka på ett paketnamn för att välja det. I det fönstret visas information om "
- "paket, såsom namn, version, filberoenden och licens."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:180(title)
-msgid "Package Manager Settings"
-msgstr "Inställningar för pakethanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:181(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to change the Package Manager settings. The following sections discuss the preferences that can be changed by the user."
-msgstr "Klicka på <menuchoice><guimenu>Redigera</guimenu><guimenuitem>Inställningar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> om du vill ändra inställningarna för pakethanteraren. I följande avsnitt kan du läsa om vilka inställningar du som användare kan ändra."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:182(title)
-msgid "Start Page Preferences"
-msgstr "Inställningar för startsida"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:183(para)
-msgid "A Start Page is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager when the application is started. The Start Page provides links to <ulink url=\"http://opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> page where you can get more information about OpenSolaris, subscribe to newsletters and join the OpenSolaris community."
-msgstr ""
- "En startsida visas i huvudfönstret i Pakethanteraren när programmet"
- "startas. På startsidan finns länkar till <ulink url=\"http://"
- "opensolaris.com\">opensolaris.com</ulink> där du kan få mer information om "
- "OpenSolaris, prenumerera på newsletters och gå med i OpenSolaris community."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:184(para)
-msgid "You can choose to turn off this setting so this page is not displayed when Package Manager starts."
-msgstr ""
- "Du kan stänga av denna inställning så att sidan inte visas när "
- "Pakethanteraren startar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:185(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu and uncheck the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Start Page on Startup</emphasis> to disable the Start Page. This dialog is checked by default."
-msgstr "Detta gör du genom att välja <menuchoice><guimenu>Redigera</guimenu><guimenuitem>Inställningar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> från huvudmenyn och avmarkera alternativet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visa startsida vid start </emphasis>. Som standard är denna dialogruta markerad."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:186(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Start Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu to go to the Start Page at anytime."
-msgstr "Välj <menuchoice><guimenu>Visa</guimenu><guimenuitem>Startsida</"
- "guimenuitem></menuchoice> om du vill se startsidan."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:188(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "Inställningar för avslut"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:189(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager application can remember some of its current settings if the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remember current state on exit</emphasis> option in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is checked."
-msgstr "Vissa inställningar i pakethanteraren kan sparas om alternativet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Kom ihåg aktuell status vid avslut</emphasis> är markerat i <menuchoice><guimenu>Redigera</guimenu><guimenuitem>Inställningar</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:190(para)
-msgid "The following settings are saved:"
-msgstr "Följande inställningar sparas:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:191(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical separators</emphasis> – The size of the columns in the main window the Package Manager"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">lodräta linjer</emphasis> – storleken på kolumnerna i pakethanterarens huvudfönster"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:193(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> – The size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">fönsterstorlek</emphasis> – storleken på pakethanterarfönstret"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:195(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Current publisher</emphasis> – The publisher that is selected when the Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">aktuell utgivare</emphasis> – utgivaren som var markerad när pakethanteraren stängdes"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:199(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "Inställningar för bekräftelsedialogruta"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:200(para)
-msgid "When a package is selected for installation, update, or removal, a confirmation dialog is displayed that displays the list of packages and the action to be performed. Under the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Show Confirmation Dialog</emphasis> uncheck <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Updates</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Install/Update</emphasis>, and <emphasis role=\"strong\">On Package Remove</emphasis> to turn these settings off."
-msgstr "När du har markerat ett paket för att det ska installeras, uppdateras eller tas bort visas en bekräftelsedialogruta med en lista över paketen och vad som ska göras med dem. Om du vill inaktivera dessa inställningar avmarkerar du <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vid uppdateringar</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vid Installera/uppdatera paket</emphasis> och <emphasis role=\"strong\">Vid Borttagning av paket</emphasis> under <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visa bekräftelsedialogrutan</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:203(title)
-msgid "Working With Packages"
-msgstr "Arbeta med paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:204(title)
-msgid "Install a Package"
-msgstr "Installera paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:205(para)
-msgid "The list of packages and their status is displayed in the main window of the Package Manager. Perform the following steps to install a package:"
-msgstr "Listan med paket och paketens status visas i pakethanterarens huvudfönster. Så här installerar du paket:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:206(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Markera kryssrutan vid de paket du vill installera. Du kan även dubbelklicka på dem."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:208(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr "Paketinstallationen påbörjas när du klickar på <guibutton>Installera/uppdatera</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:209(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start the package installation process."
-msgstr ""
- "Du kan även välja <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</"
- "guimenu><guimenuitem>Installera/uppdatera</guimenuitem></menuchoice> "
- "för att påbörja paketinstallationen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:211(para)
-msgid "Click <guilabel>Details</guilabel> to view the installation details or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the package installation."
-msgstr "Vill du se mer information om installationen klickar du på <guilabel>Information</guilabel>. Klicka på <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton> om du vill avbryta paketinstallationen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:213(para)
-msgid "After the installation has completed, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Stäng</guibutton> när installationen är klar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:216(title)
-msgid "Installation Error"
-msgstr "Installationsfel"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:217(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog with the error message is displayed along with the reason for failure. Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the error dialog."
-msgstr "Om fel inträffar under installationen öppnas en dialogruta med ett felmeddelande samt information om orsaken till felet. Stäng den genom att klicka på <guibutton>Stäng</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:220(title)
-msgid "Remove a Package"
-msgstr "Ta bort paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:221(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "Så här tar du bort paket:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:222(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to a package to select it. Double-clicking the package also selects the package."
-msgstr "Markera kryssrutan vid de paket du vill ta bort. Du kan även dubbelklicka på dem."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:224(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to start the package uninstallation process."
-msgstr "Avinstallationen påbörjas när du klickar på <guibutton>Ta bort</guibutton> ."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:225(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to remove a package."
-msgstr ""
- "Du kan även välja <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</"
- "guimenu><guimenuitem>Ta bort</guimenuitem></menuchoice> för att ta bort ett paket."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:227(para)
-msgid "Review the packages to be removed and the package dependencies details in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove Confirmation</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "I dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Bekräfta borttagning</emphasis> kan du se vilka paket som kommer att tas bort samt information om deras beroenden."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:229(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to start removing the packages or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Fortsätt</guibutton> om du vill ta bort paketen eller på <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton> om du vill avbryta installationen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:233(title)
-msgid "Search for a Package"
-msgstr "Söka efter paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:234(para)
-msgid "You can search for a package in the following ways :"
-msgstr "Du kan söka efter ett paket på följande sätt:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:235(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search the current publisher</emphasis> – Search for a package in the publisher currently selected in the <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Sök hos aktuell utgivare</emphasis> – Sök efter ett paket hos den utgivare som är markerad i menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\"> Utgivare</emphasis> Om du inte vet vilken status paketet som du söker har, anger du <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla paket</emphasis> i menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visa</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:236(para)
-msgid "Enter a description, or a partial name in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, you might type one of the following search terms to search for <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename> :"
-msgstr "Ange en beskrivning, eller del av ett namn i fältet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Sök</emphasis> i verktygsfältet. Du kan till exempel skriva något av följande sökord om du vill söka efter <filename>SUNWgnome-games</filename>:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:237(para)
-msgid "SUNWgames"
-msgstr "SUNWgames"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:239(para)
-msgid "games"
-msgstr "games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:241(para)
-msgid "GNOME-games"
-msgstr "GNOME-games"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:244(para)
-msgid "To search for SunStudio compilers, you might type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr ""
- "För att söka efter SunStudio kompileringar, kan du behöva skriva en av följande termer:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:245(para)
-msgid "compiler"
-msgstr "compiler"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:247(para)
-msgid "tools"
-msgstr "tools"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:251(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Search all publishers</emphasis> – Choose <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers(Search)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to search for a package across all configured publishers. If you do not know the status of the package you are searching for, set the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Packages</emphasis>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Sök hos alla utgivare</emphasis> – Om du vill söka efter ett paket hos alla konfigurerade utgivare markerar du <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla utgivare (sök)</emphasis> i menyn<emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare</emphasis>. Om du inte vet vilken status paketet du söker har ställer du in <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla paket</emphasis> i menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visa</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:252(para)
-msgid "Type a description of the package in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field. For example, the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package is a book on Python programming. The description of the package contains the string <emphasis>book</emphasis>. To search for this package, you might then type one of the following terms:"
-msgstr "Ange en beskrivning i fältet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Sök</emphasis>. Paketet <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> är till exempel en bok om Python-programmering. Beskrivningen till paketet innehåller strängen <emphasis>book</emphasis>. Du kan alltså ange någon av följande söktermer om du vill söka efter det här paketet:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:253(para)
-msgid "python"
-msgstr "python"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:255(para)
-msgid "book"
-msgstr "book"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:258(para)
-msgid "If you searched for the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> when searching for the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package, the results will not be displayed as the term <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> is not present as an independent, complete word in the package contents. However you will find the package using the <literal>*</literal> wild card. Hence, searching for the term <literal>diveinto*</literal> will display the <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> package."
-msgstr "Om du skriver in <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> när du söker efter paketet <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename> kommer du inte att få några träffar eftersom <emphasis>diveinto</emphasis> inte finns som ett enskilt ord i paketinnehållet. Du hittar dock paketet om du använder dig av jokertecknet <literal>*</literal>. Om du alltså anger söktermen <literal>diveinto*</literal> får du träff på paketet <filename>SUNWdiveintopython</filename>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:262(para)
-msgid "Use the submenus under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu></menuchoice> menu to cut, copy, or paste text in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Search</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Du kan ta hjälp av undermenyerna under huvudmenyn <menuchoice><guimenu>Redigera</guimenu></menuchoice> och klippa ut, kopiera och klistra in text i fältet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Sök</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:264(para)
-msgid "The following operators are supported for a package search:"
-msgstr "Följande operatorer kan användas när du söker efter paket:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:265(emphasis)
-msgid "The AND operator"
-msgstr "OCH"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:266(para)
-msgid "When the search term is separated by spaces or the AND operator, the Package Manager will search for packages containing <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the search terms."
-msgstr "När söktermerna avskiljs med mellanslag eller operatorn OCH söker pakethanteraren efter <emphasis role=\"strong\">alla</emphasis> sökord."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:269(emphasis)
-msgid "Double Quotes"
-msgstr "Dubbla citationstecken"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:270(para)
-msgid "When a search term is placed within double quotes, the Package Manager will search for packages that <emphasis role=\"strong\">match the search term exactly</emphasis>."
-msgstr "När en söksträng omges av dubbla citationstecken söker pakethanteraren efter paket med <emphasis role=\"strong\">söksträngens exakta ordalydelse</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:273(emphasis)
-msgid "Wildcard *"
-msgstr "Jokertecken*"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:274(para)
-msgid "Including a wildcard in your search term enables you to search for partial package names. For example, when you enter <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> in your search term, the packages displayed could include <emphasis>boot</emphasis> and <emphasis>book</emphasis> in the package name and description."
-msgstr "Du kan söka på delar av paketnamn genom att använda jokertecken. Om du till exempel skriver <emphasis>boo*</emphasis> i sökrutan får du träffar som innehåller <emphasis>boot</emphasis> och<emphasis>book</emphasis> i paketnamnet och beskrivningen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:275(para)
-msgid "Wildcard searching can be slower than an exact match search or a search based on package description."
-msgstr "Det kan ta längre tid att söka med jokertecken jämfört med exakt matchning eller en sökning med ord som finns med i beskrivningen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:279(emphasis)
-msgid "The OR operator"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:280(para)
-msgid "When a search term is separated by the OR operator, the Package Manager searches for packages that contain any of the search terms."
-msgstr "När OR står mellan två söktermer söker pakethanteraren efter paket som innehåller någon av söktermerna (antingen den ena eller den andra)."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:285(title)
-msgid "Cancel Package Search"
-msgstr "Avbryt paketsökning"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:286(para)
-msgid "If you want to cancel a search, use the Cancel Search icon at the bottom of the main window of the Package Manager. This icon is visible on the status bar only during a search operation."
-msgstr "Om du vill avbryta en sökning klickar du på Avbryt sökning-ikonen längst ned i pakethanterarens huvudfönster. Denna ikon syns i statuslisten endast när sökning pågår."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:288(title)
-msgid "Update a Package"
-msgstr "Uppdatera paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:289(para)
-msgid "Look for the Updates icon next to the installed package name. This icon indicates that updates are available for the package in the currently selected publisher. You can also choose one of the following views to display a list of packages that have updates available :"
-msgstr "Titta på uppdateringsikonen bredvid det installerade paketet. Den visar om det finns uppdateringar för paketet hos den utgivare som är markerad för tillfället. Du kan även se en lista på paket som det finns uppdateringar till genom att göra något av följande:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:290(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available in the currently selected publisher."
-msgstr "Gå till menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visa</emphasis> och välj alternativet <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Uppdateringar</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Du ser nu en lista på paket som det finns uppdateringar till hos markerad utgivare."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:292(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">View</emphasis> drop-down menu and the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu to list all packages that have updates available from all publishers."
-msgstr "Gå till menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Visa</emphasis> och välj alternativet <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Uppdateringar</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Gå sedan till menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare</emphasis> och välj alternativet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla utgivare(installerade)</emphasis>. Du ser nu en lista på alla paket som det finns uppdateringar till hos någon av alla utgivare."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:295(para)
-msgid "Updating a package may fail sometimes, due to inherent dependencies of the package you have selected for installation or update. You may need to update all packages on your system to get the latest updates."
-msgstr "Ibland går det inte att uppdatera/installera ett paket på grund av att det har inbördes beroenden till andra paket i systemet. Då måste eventuellt alla paket i systemet uppdateras."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:297(para)
-msgid "Select the package or packages you want to update and click <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> to install the latest version of the package. Use the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar to update all packages on your system."
-msgstr "Du installerar den senaste versionen av paket genom att markera de paket du vill uppdatera och klicka på <guibutton>Installera/uppdatera</guibutton>. Om du vill uppdatera alla paket i systemet klickar du på ikonen <emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdateringar</emphasis> i verktygsfältet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:299(title)
-msgid "Package Version Information"
-msgstr "Uppgifter om paketversion"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:300(para)
-msgid "Select a package in the main window of the Package Manager and right-click your mouse to view the package version information. There are three types of package versions :"
-msgstr "Högerklicka på det paket som du vill se versionsuppgifter om i pakethanterarens huvudfönster. Det finns tre typer av paketversioner:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:301(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installable Version</emphasis> – The version of a package that is available for installation or an update. This version may be older than the latest available version of the package due to package dependencies on the system. Hence you may not be able to install the latest available version of the package unless you update your system using the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Updates</emphasis> icon on the toolbar."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installerbar version</emphasis> – Den version som kan installeras och uppdateras. Denna version kan vara äldre än den senast tillgängliga paketversionen på grund av beroenden i systemet. Eventuellt är det då inte möjligt att installera den senaste versionen av paketet såvida du inte uppdaterar hela systemet genom att klicka på ikonen <emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdateringar</emphasis> i verktygsfältet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:303(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installed Version</emphasis> – The version of the package installed on the system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Installerad version</emphasis> – Den version som är installerad i systemet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:305(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Latest Version</emphasis> – This is the latest version of the package available for installation or update. The latest version can be installed if your system is up-to-date."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Senaste version</emphasis> – Detta är den nyaste versionen som går att installera eller uppdatera till. Den senaste versionen kan installeras om hela systemet är uppdaterat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:309(title)
-msgid "View Installed Packages From All Publishers"
-msgstr "Visa installerade paket från alla utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:310(para)
-msgid "Choose the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu filter to view a list of all packages that you have installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "Genom att välja <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla utgivare (installerade)</emphasis> i menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare</emphasis> får du en lista med alla paket som installerats från alla utgivare."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:311(para)
-msgid "You cannot search for a package from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Installed)</emphasis> option. Switch to <emphasis role=\"strong\">All Publishers (Search)</emphasis> to search for a package."
-msgstr "Det går inte att söka efter paket med alternativet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla utgivare (installerade)</emphasis>. Vill du göra en sökning byter du till alternativet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla utgivare(sök)</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:315(title)
-msgid "Introduction to Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Introduktion till startmiljöer"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:316(para)
-msgid "A boot environment is an image that is bootable. Upon an initial OpenSolaris installation, a boot environment is created."
-msgstr ""
- "En startmiljö är en bild som är startbar. Vid en initial OpenSolaris-"
- "installation skapas en startmiljö."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:317(para)
-msgid "You can maintain multiple boot environments on your OpenSolaris 2010.03 system. Use the <command>beadm(1)</command> command from the command-line interface (CLI) to create, rename, mount or unmount, or destroy these boot environments."
-msgstr "Du kan ha flera startmiljöer i OpenSolaris 2010.03-systemet. Ange kommandot <command>beadm(1)</command> på kommandoraden om du vill skapa, byta namn på, montera, demontera eller helt ta bort startmiljöer."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:318(para)
-msgid "The Package Manager enables you to manage the boot environments created during the process of updating your image. For more information, see <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/> section."
-msgstr "Startmiljöerna du skapade i samband med att du uppdaterade din avbildning hanteras i pakethanteraren. Mer information finns i avsnittet <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:319(para)
-msgid "Users can maintain multiple boot environments on their systems, and each boot environment can have different software versions installed."
-msgstr "Användare kan ha flera olika startmiljöer på sina system, och startmiljöerna kan innehålla olika programversioner."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:320(para)
-msgid "When you use either the Package Manager or the <command>pkg image-update</command> command to update all the packages in your active OpenSolaris boot environment, a clone of that boot environment is automatically created. The packages are updated in the clone rather than in the original boot environment. After successfully completing the updates, the new clone is activated. Then, the clone will become the new default boot environment on system reboot. The original boot environment is also available as an alternate selection."
-msgstr ""
- "När du använder antingen Pakethanteraren eller <command>pkg image-update</"
- "command> kommando för att uppdatera alla paket i din aktiva OpenSolaris-start-"
- "miljö, har en klon av den startmiljön skapats automatiskt. "
- "Paketen är uppdaterade i klonen snarare än i den ursprungliga start-"
- "miljön. När uppdateringarna är klara aktiveras den nya klonen. "
- "Sedan blir klonen den nya standardstartmiljön när "
- "datorn startas om. Den ursprungliga startmiljön finns också som ett "
- "alternativt val."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:321(para)
-msgid "See the beadm(1) man pages and the <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink> document to learn more about boot environments and the <command>beadm(1)</command> command."
-msgstr "Mer information om startmiljöer och kommandot <command>beadm(1)</command> finns på man-sidorna för beadm(1) och i <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"><citetitle>Upgrading and Managing Boot Environments</citetitle></ulink>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:322(title)
-msgid "Update All Packages (Update Your Image)"
-msgstr "Uppdatera Alla paket (Uppdatera din bild)"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:323(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to update all the packages in your image."
-msgstr "Så här uppdaterar du alla paket i bilden:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:324(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> to start the process of updating <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> the packages installed in your image."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Uppdateringar</guibutton> om du vill uppdatera <emphasis role=\"strong\">alla</emphasis> paket i din avbildning."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:325(para)
-msgid "You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guisubmenu>Updates</guisubmenu></menuchoice> to start the process."
-msgstr "Du kan uppdatera alla paket genom att välja <menuchoice><guimenu>Paket</guimenu><guisubmenu>Uppdateringar</guisubmenu></"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:326(para)
-msgid "If no updates are available to your installed packages, a <emphasis role=\"strong\">No Updates Available</emphasis> message is displayed after you click <guibutton>Updates</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Om du klickar på <guibutton>Uppdateringar</guibutton> och det inte finns några uppdateringar till de paket du har visas meddelandet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Det finns inga tillgängliga uppdateringar</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:329(para)
-msgid "The process of updating all the packages installed on your system is completed in three phases:"
-msgstr "Uppdateringen av installerade paket sker i tre steg:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:330(emphasis)
-msgid "Preparation"
-msgstr "Förberedelse"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:332(emphasis)
-msgid "Download"
-msgstr "Nedladdning"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:334(emphasis)
-msgid "Install"
-msgstr "Installation"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:337(para)
-msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> tab displayed in each of the phases to view more information."
-msgstr "Vill du se mer information kan du klicka på <emphasis>Information</emphasis> under var och en av de tre stegen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:339(para)
-msgid "After the update process is completed successfully, an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed. A new boot environment is created which consists of the updated packages. The new boot environment is given a default name by the Package Manager, you can change the given boot environment name."
-msgstr "När uppdateringen är klar visas dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alla har uppdaterats</emphasis>. En ny startmiljö med de uppdaterade paketen skapas. Den nya startmiljön får ett standardnamn av pakethanteraren som du sedan kan ändra själv om du vill."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:340(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message is displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr "Om pakethanteraren inte kan skapa en ny startmiljö visas "
- "ett felmeddelande. Anvisningar för hur du rättar till felet och fortsätter uppdateringen finns i avsnittet <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:343(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> to reboot your system immediately."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Starta om nu</guibutton> om du vill starta om systemet direkt."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:344(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> to restart your system at a later time. <emphasis role=\"strong\">You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect.</emphasis>"
-msgstr "Vill du hellre starta om datorn senare klickar du på <guibutton>Starta om senare</guibutton>. <emphasis role=\"strong\">Systemet måste startas om för att ändringarna ska börja gälla.</emphasis>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:345(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. You can boot into the clone to return to the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr "När du klickar på Uppdatera alla skapas en klon av den aktiva "
- "startmiljön. Med hjälp av klonen kan du sedan starta datorn "
- "i den startmiljö som fanns innan du gjorde uppdateringen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:350(title) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:656(title)
-msgid "Update All Errors"
-msgstr "Fel i uppdatera alla"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:351(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone must be created by the Package Manager for the Updates process to be completed. An error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created. You might see an error message such as the following :"
-msgstr "En ny startmiljöklon måste skapas av pakethanteraren för att "
- "uppdateringen ska kunna göras. Om en startmiljöklon inte kan skapas visas ett felmeddelande som kan se ut som följer:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:352(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space.</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Det finns inte tillräckligt med utrymme på hårddisken. Det går inte att uppdatera alla. Gå till Hantera startmiljöer för att åtgärda problemet och frigöra mer utrymme.</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:353(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:659(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Update All process."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Stäng</guibutton> om du vill avbryta uppdateringen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:354(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:660(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps if you want to rectify the error and continue with the Update All process:"
-msgstr ""
- "Följ anvisningarna om du vill åtgärda problemet och gå vidare med "
- "processen Uppdatera alla:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:355(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environment</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Hantera startmiljö</guibutton>, varefter dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera startmiljö</emphasis> öppnas."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:357(para)
-msgid "Select the boot environments that you want to delete."
-msgstr "Välj vilka startmiljöer som ska tas bort."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:358(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "Du kan inte radera den startmiljö som är aktiv för tillfället."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:360(para)
-msgid "You do not need to reboot your system if you are only deleting some of your boot environments."
-msgstr ""
- "Du behöver inte starta om datorn om du endast tar bort startmiljöer."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:365(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klicka på<guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:367(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is shown. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "Dialogrutan <literal>Bekräftelse av startmiljöer</literal> visas. Kontrollera att ändringarna stämmer och klicka på OK."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:369(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Uppdatera alla</guibutton> om du vill börja om med uppdateringen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:373(title)
-msgid "Manage Boot Environments"
-msgstr "Hantera startmiljöer"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:374(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to manage your boot environments:"
-msgstr "Så här hanterar du dina startmiljöer:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:375(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Öppna dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera startmiljöer</emphasis> genom att klicka på <menuchoice><guimenu>Arkiv</guimenu><guimenuitem>Hantera startmiljöer</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:377(para)
-msgid "In this dialog, you can perform the following actions:"
-msgstr "I den här dialogrutan kan du göra följande:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:378(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Activate a boot environment</emphasis> – Select the boot environment you want to be active on system reboot. This is the default boot environment <emphasis role=\"strong\">after</emphasis> you have rebooted your system."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">aktivera en startmiljö</emphasis> – Markera"
- "den startmiljö som du vill ska vara aktiv vid systemstart. Denna kommer att vara standardstartmiljö <emphasis role=\"strong\">efter</emphasis> omstart."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:380(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Remove old or unused boot environments to free up disk space</emphasis> – Select the boot environnment or boot environments you want to delete."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">ta bort gamla eller oanvända startmiljöer för att frigöra diskutrymme</emphasis> – Markera de startmiljöer som du vill ta bort."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:381(para)
-msgid "You cannot the delete the currently active boot environment."
-msgstr "Du kan inte radera den för tillfället aktiva startmiljön."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:383(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be renamed, it cannot be deleted."
-msgstr ""
- "Om du har valt en startmiljö som ska byta namn, kan den inte raderas."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:388(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Rename a boot environment</emphasis> – Double-click the boot environment name you want torename. Enter the new name of the boot environment and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">byta namn på en startmiljö</emphasis> – Dubbelklicka på startmiljönamnet som du vill ändra. Ange det nya namnet "
- "på startmiljön och klicka på <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:389(para)
-msgid "If you have selected a boot environment to be deleted, it cannot be renamed."
-msgstr ""
- "Om du har valt ut en startmiljö som ska raderas, kan den inte få nytt namn."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:391(para)
-msgid "The currently active boot environment cannot be renamed."
-msgstr "Den startmiljö som är aktiv för tillfället kan inte byta namn."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:398(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel all changes."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>OK</guibutton> om du är nöjd med ändringarna annars på <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:400(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Boot Environment Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Review your changes and click OK to proceed."
-msgstr "Rutan <literal>Bekräftelse av startmiljö</literal> visas. Kontrollera att det är rätt ändringar och klicka på OK."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:401(para)
-msgid "After you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, you cannot undo any changes that you made to the boot environments."
-msgstr ""
- "När du har klickat på <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, kan du inte ånga några ändringar som "
- "du har gjort i startmiljöerna."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:403(para)
-msgid "The changes that you made to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot environment</emphasis> setting are effective only after system reboot."
-msgstr ""
- "Ändringarna som du gjorde på inställningarna <emphasis role=\"strong\">default boot "
- "environment</emphasis> börjar inte gälla förrän efter omstart av systemet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:405(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the changes."
-msgstr "Vill du inte att ändringarna ska genomföras klickar du på <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:407(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system to boot into the newly activated boot environment."
-msgstr "Starta om systemet för att starta i den nyaktiverade startmiljön."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:408(para)
-msgid "Reboot your system only if you changed the active boot environment."
-msgstr "Starta bara om systemet om du har ändrat den aktiva startmiljön."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:414(title)
-msgid "Add and Manage Publishers"
-msgstr "Lägga till och hantera utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:415(para)
-msgid "The <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog enables the user to add and manage the configured publishers. A publisher is a person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a repository. Every publisher has a package repository where its package data can be found. The locations that contain package data for a publisher's repository are defined through the use of origins and mirrors. Origins are used to provide locations that contain the complete set of package data for a publisher, while mirrors are used to provide locations that only contain package files. Origins and mirrors are defined using URIs (Universal Resource Identifiers), such as <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-msgstr "I dialogrutan <menuchoice><guimenu>Arkiv</guimenu><guimenuitem>Hantera utgivare</guimenuitem></menuchoice> kan du lägga till och hantera konfigurerade utgivare. En utgivare är en person, en grupp eller ett företag som skapar och ger ut paket i en databas. Alla utgivare har en paketdatabas där de lägger sina paket. Källan för paketdata i en viss paketdatabas anges med hjälp av ursprung och speglingar. Ursprung används för att ange var en utgivares fullständiga uppsättning paketdata finns medan speglingar anger platser där endast paketfiler finns. Ursprung och speglingar anges via URI (generell resursidentifierare) som till exempel <ulink url=\"http://pkg.opensolaris.org/release\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:416(para)
-msgid "Read the following sections to learn how to add and manage publishers on your system."
-msgstr "I följande avsnitt kan du läsa om hur du lägger till och hanterar utgivare i systemet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:417(title)
-msgid "Add a Publisher"
-msgstr "Lägga till utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:418(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a publisher and its associated URI:"
-msgstr "Så här lägger du till en utgivare och utgivarens URI:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:419(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Välj <menuchoice><guimenu>Arkiv</guimenu><guimenuitem>Lägg till utgivare</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:420(para)
-msgid "You can also choose the <guibutton>Add..</guibutton> option from the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and then click <emphasis>Add..</emphasis> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Det går även att välja alternativet <guibutton>Lägg till ...</guibutton> i menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare</emphasis> eller att välja <menuchoice><guimenu>Arkiv</guimenu><guimenuitem>Hantera utgivare</guimenuitem></menuchoice> och sedan klicka på <emphasis>Lägg till ...</emphasis> i dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera utgivare</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:422(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the publisher and the associated URI. If the publisher is a secure publisher, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Key</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL Certificate</emphasis> fields are displayed. Follow the steps in the <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> section to add an SSL key and certificate."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Lägg till utgivare</emphasis> visas. Ange utgivarens namn och URI. Om utgivaren är pålitlig visas fälten <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL-nyckel</emphasis> och <emphasis role=\"strong\">SSL-certifikat</emphasis>. I avsnittet <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> finns instruktioner om hur du lägger till SSL-nyckel och SSL-certifikat."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:424(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klicka på<guibutton>Lägg till</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:426(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Lägga till utgivare</emphasis> visas. Om du inte vill fortsätta klickar du på Avbryt."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:428(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher is added successfully."
-msgstr "När utgivare har lagts till visas dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare har lagts till</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:431(para)
-msgid "An <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Error</emphasis> is displayed if the publisher could not be added. Click <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> to get more information about the error."
-msgstr "Om det inte gick att lägga till en utgivare visas ett <emphasis role=\"strong\">felmeddelande för fel när utgivare skulle läggas till</emphasis>. Klicka på <emphasis role=\"strong\">Information</emphasis> om du vill veta mer om felet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:434(title)
-msgid "Remove a Publisher"
-msgstr "Ta bort en utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:435(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "Så här tar du bort utgivare:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:436(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:459(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:473(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:492(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:511(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:528(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-msgstr "Välj <menuchoice><guimenu>Arkiv</guimenu><guimenuitem>Hantera utgivare</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:438(para)
-msgid "Click on a publisher from the list to select it. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Markera den utgivare du vill ta bort genom att klicka på den. Klicka på <guibutton>Ta bort</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:440(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers Confirmation</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Bekräftelse i Hantera utgivare</emphasis> visas."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:442(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save the changes and remove the publisher or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "När du klickar på <guibutton>OK</guibutton> sparas ändringarna och utgivaren tas bort. Klickar du på <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton> kommer du tillbaka till dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera utgivare</emphasis> utan att några ändringar har gjorts."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:446(title)
-msgid "Set Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "Ställa in prioriteringsordning för utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:447(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to set or change the publisher priority:"
-msgstr "Så här ställer du in eller ändrar prioriteringsordningen för utgivarna:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:448(para)
-msgid "Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Öppna dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera utgivare</emphasis> genom att gå till <menuchoice><guimenu>Arkiv</guimenu><guimenuitem>Hantera utgivare</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:450(para)
-msgid "The list of configured publishers is displayed. Click the arrows to change the priority of the publishers. The publisher with the highest priority is displayed at the top of the list."
-msgstr "Listan med konfigurerade utgivare visas. Ändra prioriteringsordningen genom att klicka på pilarna. Utgivaren högst upp i listan har högst prioritet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:451(emphasis)
-msgid "Packages are searched within the publishers in the order of priority, the publisher with the highest priority is searched first."
-msgstr "Sökningar efter paket sker utifrån utgivarnas prioriteringsordning; utgivaren med högst prioritet genomsöks först."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:453(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:465(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:484(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:503(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:520(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:537(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog without making any changes."
-msgstr "Klickar du på <guibutton>OK</guibutton> sparas ändringarna. Klickar du på <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton> kommer du tillbaka till dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera utgivare</emphasis> utan att några ändringar har gjorts."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:457(title)
-msgid "Modify Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "Ändra aliasnamn på utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:458(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to modify the alias of a publisher:"
-msgstr "Så här ändrar du aliasnamn på utgivare:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:461(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose alias you want to modify. Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Markera den utgivare vars alias du vill ändra och klicka på <guibutton>Ändra...</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:463(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Modify or enter a new name of the alias in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Alias</emphasis> field."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Redigera utgivare</emphasis> öppnas. Ändra eller skriv in ett nytt aliasnamn i fältet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Aliasnamn</emphasis> field."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:467(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:486(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:505(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:522(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:539(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog to exit the dialog. Note that clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog will not undo the changes made in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publishers</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>OK</guibutton> i dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera utgivare</emphasis>. Dialogrutan stängs. Observera att ändringarna som gjorts i dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Redigera utgivare</emphasis> sparas även om du klickar på <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton> i dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera utgivare</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:471(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Lägg till ursprung för utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:472(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Så här lägger du till ursprung för utgivare:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:475(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to modify. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Markera den utgivare som du vill ändra ursprunget för. Om du vill se vilket ursprung som är angivet för utgivaren kan du klicka på fliken <emphasis role=\"strong\">Information</emphasis> i <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera utgivare</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:477(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:496(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:515(para) package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:532(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Modify..</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Redigera ...</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:478(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the new origin you want to associate with the publisher in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Origin</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Redigera utgivare</emphasis> öppnas. Ange det nya ursprunget för utgivaren i fältet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Ursprung</emphasis>. Klicka på <guibutton>Lägg till</guibutton>. I tabellen visas vilka ursprung som finns för utgivaren."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:479(para)
-msgid "You cannot change the origin URI after the origin has been added."
-msgstr "Du kan inte ändra URI för ett ursprung efter att det lagts till."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:482(para)
-msgid "(optional) If the origin you have added is a secure origin, add the SSL Key and SSL certificate. <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(inte obligatoriskt) Om ursprunget som du lagt till är pålitligt kan du lägga till SSL-nyckel och SSL-certifikat. Klicka på <guibutton>Bläddra</guibutton> och leta reda på SSL-nyckeln och SSL-certifikatet i ditt system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:490(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "Ta bort ursprung för utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:491(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove an origin or origins associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Så här tar du bort ursprung för utgivare:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:494(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose origin you want to remove. The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Details</emphasis> tab in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Publishers</emphasis> dialog displays the origin or origins associated with the publisher."
-msgstr "Markera den utgivare som du vill ta bort ursprunget för. Om du vill se vilken eller vilka ursprung som är angivna för utgivaren kan du klicka på fliken <emphasis role=\"strong\">Information</emphasis> i <emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera utgivare</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:497(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated origins is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Redigera utgivare</emphasis> öppnas. I tabellen visas vilka ursprung som finns för utgivaren."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:499(para)
-msgid "Select the origin you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Markera det ursprung du vill ta bort och klicka på <guibutton>Ta bort</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:500(para)
-msgid "If only one origin is associated with a publisher, it cannot be removed."
-msgstr "Om det bara finns ett ursprung för en utgivare kan det inte tas bort."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:509(title)
-msgid "Add Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Lägg till speglingar för utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to add a mirror for a publisher:"
-msgstr "Så här lägger du till spegling för en utgivare:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to add the mirror."
-msgstr "Markera den utgivare som du vill lägga till en spegling för."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:516(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Redigera utgivare</emphasis> visas."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:518(para)
-msgid "Enter the URI for the mirror in the <emphasis>Mirror</emphasis> field. Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Ange URI till speglingen i fältet <emphasis>Spegling</emphasis>. Klicka på <guibutton>Lägg till</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:526(title)
-msgid "Remove Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "Ta bort speglingar för utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:527(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a mirror associated with a publisher:"
-msgstr "Så här tar du bort en spegling för en utgivare:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:530(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher for which you want to remove the mirror."
-msgstr "Markera den utgivare som du vill ta bort en spegling för."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:533(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Modify Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The list of associated mirrors is displayed in the table."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Redigera utgivare</emphasis> öppnas. I tabellen visas vilka speglingar som finns för utgivaren."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:535(para)
-msgid "Select the mirror you want to remove. Click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>."
-msgstr "Markera den spegling du vill ta bort och klicka på <guibutton>Ta bort</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:544(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "Arbeta med WebInstall"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:545(para)
-msgid "The OpenSolaris 2010.03 Package Manager provides support for users to add new publishers and optionally, install packages from these publishers using a simple one-click WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file which contains the publishers to be added and optionally, the packages that can be installed from these publishers, is required for the WebInstall process. The information contained in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Med pakethanteraren i OpenSolaris 2010.03 kan användare lägga till "
- "nya utgivare och även installera paket från dessa utgivare"
- "med en enkel WebInstall-klickning. För att detta ska fungera behövs en<filename>.p5i</filename>-fil med de utgivare som ska läggas till och eventuellt också de paket som kan installeras från dessa utgivare. Uppgifterna i filen <filename>.p5i</filename> läses och används när WebInstall körs."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:546(title)
-msgid "Export Package Selections as WebInstall Files"
-msgstr "Exportera paket som WebInstall-filer"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:547(para)
-msgid "If you want to distribute some of the packages available on your system to others for easy installation and distribution, you can export the references to the packages, using the WebInstall process. The <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> feature enables you to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file containing the installation instructions for the selected packages. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file is can then be distributed for use. See the <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/> section on how to install packages from a <filename>.p5i</filename>."
-msgstr "Du kan dela med dig av de paket du har på ditt system så att andra kan installera dem genom att exportera referenser till paketen med WebInstall. Gå till <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Arkiv</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Exportera paket</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Här kan du skapa en <filename>.p5i</filename>-fil med installationsanvisningar för valda paket. <filename>.p5i</filename>-filen kan sedan distribueras och användas av andra. Mer information om hur du installerar paket från en <filename>.p5i</filename>-fil finns i avsnittet <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:548(para)
-msgid "The following procedure lists the steps to create a <filename>.p5i</filename> file and export your files."
-msgstr "Så här skapar du en <filename>.p5i</filename>-fil och exporterar dina filer."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:549(para)
-msgid "From the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher</emphasis> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Öppna menyn <emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare</emphasis> och markera den utgivare som gett ut paketen du vill ta med i <filename>.p5i</filename>-filen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:551(para)
-msgid "Check the box next to the package or packages to select it. The packages selected are highlighted."
-msgstr "Markera rutorna vid de paket som du vill ta med."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:553(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections Confirmation</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Öppna fönstret <emphasis role=\"strong\">Bekräfta export av paket</emphasis> genom att gå till <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Arkiv</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Exportera paket</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:555(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to confirm the selections and proceed or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the selections."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>OK</guibutton> om du vill fortsätta och <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton> om du vill avbryta."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:557(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Export Selections</emphasis> window is displayed."
-msgstr "Fönstret <emphasis role=\"strong\">Exportera paket</emphasis> öppnas."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:559(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. Click inside the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Name</emphasis> field to change the name of the <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "<filename>p5i</filename>-filen med filnamnstillägget <filename>.p5i</filename> får ett standardnamn. Klicka i fältet <emphasis role=\"strong\">Namn</emphasis> om du vill ändra namnet på <filename>p5i</filename>-filen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:561(para)
-msgid "The file is saved in the <filename>/tmp</filename> folder by default. Click the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Browse for other folders</emphasis> tab to select your own folder."
-msgstr "Som standard sparas filen i mappen <filename>/tmp</filename>. Om du vill spara i en annan mapp klickar du på fliken <emphasis role=\"strong\">Bläddra fram annan mapp</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:563(para)
-msgid "Choose the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option in the drop-down menu located at the bottom right hand side of the window."
-msgstr "Välj alternativet <filename>p5i Files</filename> i den nedrullningsbara menyn längst ned till höger i fönstret."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:567(title)
-msgid "How to Use WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "Så här lägger du till utgivare och installerar paket med WebInstall"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:568(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "Med WebInstall kan du installera paket via en <filename>p5i</filename>-fil."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:569(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file which may be present on your desktop, the Start page in the Package Manager, or on a website."
-msgstr ""
- "Leta upp <filename>.p5i</filename>-filen som kan finnas på ditt "
- "skrivbord, på startsidan i pakethanteraren eller på en webbsida."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:571(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager in WebInstall mode in one of the following ways:"
-msgstr "Öppna pakethanteraren i WebInstall-läge genom att göra följande:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:572(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop, and the associated application, Package Manager in WebInstall mode, will be launched."
-msgstr ""
- "Klicka på en <filename>.p5i</filename>-fil på ditt skrivbord, och "
- "motsvarande program, pakethanterare i WebInstall-läge, kommer att starta."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:574(para)
-msgid "Start the Package Manager from the command-line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, type the following command at the command-line:"
-msgstr ""
- "Starta pakethanteraren från kommandoraden jämte en sökväg till "
- "<filename>.p5i</filename>-filen. Skriv till exempel följande kommando på "
- "kommandoraden:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "sökväg_till_p5i-fil/fil.p5i"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:575(command)
-msgid "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "$ pfexec packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:577(para)
-msgid "Click on a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. If you are using this method to start WebInstall, the <filename>.p5i</filename> file <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be located on a web server that has registered the new mime type. Only then, the web server can manage the <filename>.p5i</filename> automatically and start Package Manager in WebInstall mode."
-msgstr "Klicka på en URL som innehåller en länk till filen <filename>p5i</filename>-filen. Om du använder den här metoden för att starta WebInstall <emphasis role=\"strong\">måste</emphasis> <filename>p5i</filename>-filen finnas på en webbserver som har registrerat den nya MIME-typen. Annars kan inte webbservern hantera <filename>p5i</filename>-filen automatiskt och pakethanteraren startas inte i WebInstall-läge."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:578(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that does not have the new mime type registered, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch Web Install."
-msgstr ""
- "Om <filename>.p5i</filename> lokaliseras på en webbserver som inte "
- "har den nya mimtypen registrerad, spara filen <filename>.p5i</filename> "
- "på ditt skrivbord, och klicka sedan på den för att starta Web Install."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:582(para)
-msgid "You will see a window similar to the example window shown below. The window shows a list of publishers that will be added and the packages that will be installed. Review the information."
-msgstr "Ett fönster liknande det nedan öppnas. I fönstret visas en lista med de utgivare som kommer att läggas till och med de paket som kommer att installeras. Kontrollera uppgifterna."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:586(para)
-msgid "Confirm or cancel the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "Bekräfta eller avbryt WebInstall-processen."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:587(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to add the new publishers and install the packages."
-msgstr "De nya utgivarna läggs till och paketen installeras när du klickar på guibutton>Fortsätt</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:589(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Add Publisher</emphasis> dialog is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher is already entered."
-msgstr "Rutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Lägg till utgivare</emphasis> öppnas. Uppgifterna om utgivarens namn och URI är redan ifyllda."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:590(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Adding Publisher Complete</emphasis> dialog is displayed if the publisher has been added successfully."
-msgstr "När utgivare har lagts till visas dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Utgivare har lagts till</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:592(para)
-msgid "(Optional) If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate is required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "(inte obligatoriskt) Om utgivarna som ska läggas till är pålitliga behövs SSL-nyckel och SSL-certifikat. Leta fram SSL-nyckeln och SSL-certifikatet i ditt system."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:594(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to proceed."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>OK</guibutton> för att gå vidare."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:596(para)
-msgid "If packages are being installed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Install/Update</emphasis> dialog is displayed."
-msgstr "När paket installeras visas dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installera/uppdatera</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:597(para)
-msgid "The application will close when all packages are installed."
-msgstr "Programmet stängs när alla paket har installerats."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:601(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall With a Disabled Publisher"
-msgstr "Använda WebInstall med en inaktiverad utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:602(para)
-msgid "Sometimes a <filename>.p5i</filename> file may contain packages from a disabled publisher. In such cases WebInstall opens up an <emphasis role=\"strong\">Enable Publisher</emphasis> dialog which allows the user to enable the publisher before installing packages."
-msgstr "Ibland innehåller <filename>.p5i</filename>-filen paket från en utgivare som har inaktiverats. I dessa fall öppnas dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Aktivera utgivare</emphasis> varifrån du kan aktivera utgivare innan paketen installeras."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:605(title)
-msgid "Working With the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Arbeta med Uppdateringshanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:606(title)
-msgid "About The Update Manager"
-msgstr "Om Uppdateringshanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:607(para)
-msgid "The Update Manager is a separate application that starts from the desktop when updates to the installed packages are available in the publisher."
-msgstr "Uppdateringshanteraren är ett separat program som startas från skrivbordet "
- "när det finns uppdateringar till installerade paket hos utgivaren."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:608(title)
-msgid "Update Manager Main Window"
-msgstr "Huvudfönstret i Uppdateringshanteraren"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:612(para)
-msgid "You can use the Update Manager application to update the installed packages in your image. The Update Manager uses the publisher that is currently set in the Package Manager to install the latest image."
-msgstr "Med uppdateringshanteraren kan du uppdatera de installerade paketen "
- "i din avbildning. Utgivaren som är inställd i pakethanteraren används för att installera den senaste avbildning."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:613(para)
-msgid "For the OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, the Update Manager updates <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> installed packages in the image. This action is equivalent to running the <command>pkg image-update</command> command from the command-line."
-msgstr "I 2010.03-versionen av OpenSolaris uppdateras<emphasis "
- "role=\"strong\">alla</emphasis> installerade paket i avbildningen. Denna åtgärd "
- "motsvarar kommandot <command>pkg image-update</command> "
- "från kommandoraden."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:616(title)
-msgid "Using the Update Manager"
-msgstr "Använda Uppdateringshanteraren "
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:617(para)
-msgid "When updates are available to the installed packages, a notification icon is displayed in the notification panel on the OpenSolaris desktop."
-msgstr ""
- "När uppdateringar är tillgängliga för de installerade paketen, visas en meddelandeikon "
- "i meddelandepanelen på OpenSolaris skrivbord."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:618(para)
-msgid "You can also click <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to manually launch the Update Manager."
-msgstr ""
- "Du kan även klicka på <menuchoice><guimenu>System</"
- "guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>"
- "Uppdateringshanteraren</guimenuitem></menuchoice> för att starta "
- "programmet manuellt."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:619(para)
-msgid "When you are notified of a software update, perform the following steps to begin the process of updating your system:"
-msgstr ""
- "När du har fått ett meddelande om en programuppdatering, utför följande steg för att "
- "påbörja uppdateringen av ditt system:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:620(para)
-msgid "Click the notification icon on the desktop to display the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Klicka på meddelandeikonen på skrivbordet. Fönstret med <emphasis role=\"strong\">uppdateringshanteraren</emphasis> öppnas."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:622(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window."
-msgstr "Klicka på <guibutton>Uppdatera alla</guibutton> i fönstret <emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdateringshanteraren</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:623(para)
-msgid "Select a package and click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel if you want to view more information about the package."
-msgstr ""
- "Välj ett paket och klicka på panelen <guilabel>Information</guilabel> om du vill "
- "veta mer om paketet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:626(para)
-msgid "The <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update All</emphasis> dialog is displayed. Proceed with the Update All process or cancel the action."
-msgstr "Dialogrutan <emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdatera alla</emphasis> öppnas. Fortsätt med uppdateringen eller avbryt."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:627(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> to create a new boot environment and update all packages in the current image."
-msgstr ""
- "Klicka på <guibutton>Fortsätt</guibutton> för att skapa en ny startmiljö och "
- "uppdatera alla paket i den aktuella bilden."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:628(para)
-msgid "During the Update All process, a clone of the active boot environment is created. This clone enables the user to boot into the boot environment state that existed before the Update All process was started."
-msgstr ""
- "Under processen Uppdatera alla skapas en klon av den aktiva "
- "startmiljön. Med hjälp av klonen kan användaren starta datorn "
- "i den startmiljö som fanns innan processen Uppdatera alla påbörjades."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:629(para)
-msgid "If the Package Manager is unable to create a new boot environment, an error message will be displayed. See the <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> section on how to rectify the error and continue with updating your image."
-msgstr ""
- "Om pakethanteraren inte kan skapa en ny startmiljö visas "
- "ett felmeddelande. Se avsnittet <xref linkend=\"gileh\"/> om hur "
- "man korrigerar felet och fortsätter med att uppdatera bilden."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:630(para)
-msgid "A name for the new boot environment is automatically generated. You can accept the name generated by the system, or provide your own name for the boot environment."
-msgstr ""
- "Ett namn för den nya startmiljön skapas automatiskt. Du kan "
- "acceptera namnet som systemet har skapat, eller själv ange ett namn för "
- "startmiljön."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:633(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process."
-msgstr "Om du vill avbryta processen klickar du på <guibutton>Avbryt</guibutton>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:637(para)
-msgid "If you chose to proceed, the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installing Updates</emphasis> windows are displayed. The package installation process consists of four stages:"
-msgstr "Om du klickar på Fortsätt visas fönstren <emphasis role=\"strong\">Installerar uppdateringar</emphasis>. Paketinstallationen består av fyra moment:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:638(para)
-msgid "Prepare"
-msgstr "Förberedelse"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:640(para)
-msgid "Download."
-msgstr "Nedladdning"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:642(para)
-msgid "Install."
-msgstr "Installation"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:645(para)
-msgid "You can choose to cancel the process only during the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Prepare</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"strong\">Download</emphasis> stages."
-msgstr "Du kan bara avbryta installationen under <emphasis role=\"strong\">förberedelsen</emphasis> eller <emphasis role=\"strong\">nedladdningen</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:646(para)
-msgid "Click the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel to view more information about each of the installation processes."
-msgstr ""
- "Klicka på panelen <guilabel>Detaljer</guilabel> för att se mer information om "
- "varje installation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:647(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during any of the stages, the <guilabel>Details</guilabel> panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr ""
- "Om det inträffar fel under dessa steg expanderas panelen <guilabel>Information"
- "</guilabel> och information om felet visas. Vid steget där felet inträffade "
- "visas en felindikator."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:650(para)
-msgid "Read the <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> before rebooting your system."
-msgstr ""
- "Läs <xref linkend=\"release_notes\"/> innan du startar om systemet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:651(para)
-msgid "You must reboot your system for the changes to take effect."
-msgstr "Du måste starta om datorn för att ändringarna ska träda i kraft."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:657(para)
-msgid "A new boot environment clone <emphasis role=\"strong\">must</emphasis> be created for the Update All process to be completed. The following error message is displayed if a boot environment clone cannot be created due to space restrictions :"
-msgstr ""
- "En ny startmiljöklon <emphasis role=\"strong\">måste</emphasis>skapas "
- "för att processen Uppdatera alla ska slutföras. Följande fel-"
- "meddelande visas om en startmiljöklon inte kan skapas på grund av "
- "begränsat utrymme:"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:658(para)
-msgid "<literal>Not enough disk space, the Update All action cannot be performed. Choose Manage BE to manage your boot environments and free up disk space</literal>."
-msgstr "<literal>Det finns inte tillräckligt med utrymme på hårddisken. Det går inte att uppdatera alla. Gå till Hantera startmiljöer för att åtgärda problemet och frigöra mer utrymme.</literal>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:661(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Manage BE</guibutton> in the error dialog to go to the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Manage Boot Environments</emphasis> dialog."
-msgstr "Öppna dialogrutan<emphasis role=\"strong\">Hantera startmiljöer</emphasis> genom att klicka på <guibutton>Hantera startmiljöer</guibutton> i felmeddelandet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:663(para)
-msgid "Go to step 2 in the <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/> section. Follow the instructions to delete old or unused boot environments and free up disk space."
-msgstr ""
- "Gå till steg 2 i avsnittet <xref linkend=\"gilfh\"/>. Följ "
- "instruktionerna för att radera gamla eller oanvända startmiljöer och frigöra disk-"
- "utrymme."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:665(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Update All</guibutton> in the <emphasis role=\"strong\">Update Manager</emphasis> window to restart the process of updating all packages."
-msgstr "Börja sedan om med uppdateringen av alla paket genom att klicka på <guibutton>Uppdatera alla</guibutton> i fönstret <emphasis role=\"strong\">Uppdateringshanteraren</emphasis>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:669(title)
-msgid "2010.03 Release Notes"
-msgstr "Viktigt-filer för 2010.03"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:670(para)
-msgid "The Release Notes for 2010.03 are available at the following location: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-msgstr "Viktigt-filerna för 2010.03 finns på: <ulink url=\"http://docs.sun.com/source/820-7679/index.html\"/>."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:674(title)
-msgid "Image Packaging System Glossary"
-msgstr "IPS-ordlista"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:675(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "utgivare"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:676(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that provides packages. Packages for a publisher are found in a repository, from which the package system retrieves package data."
-msgstr "En person, grupp eller ett företag som ger ut paket. En utgivares paket finns i en databas, varifrån paketsystemet hämtar paketdata."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:679(glossterm)
-msgid "repository"
-msgstr "databas"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:680(para)
-msgid "A location where clients can publish and retrieve package content such as files contained within the package, and package metadata which includes information about the package such as its name and description."
-msgstr "Ett ställe där klienter kan publicera och hämta paketinnehåll i form av filer som ligger förpackade i paket. Här hämtas även metadata för paketen, det vill säga sådana uppgifter som namn och beskrivningar."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:683(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment"
-msgstr "startmiljö"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:684(para)
-msgid "For an OpenSolaris 2010.03 release, a boot environment is an instance of a bootable OpenSolaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "I OpenSolaris version 2010.03 är en startmiljö en instans av en startbar "
- "OpenSolaris-miljö. Rotfilsystemet och alla andra av startmiljöns filsystem som innehåller systemprogram måste vara i ZFS-format."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:685(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Many boot environments can present on an OpenSolaris system and an inactive boot environment can be in a state of waiting for activation upon system reboot."
-msgstr ""
- "Den aktiva startmiljön är den som startas för tillfället. Många start-"
- "miljöer kan presenteras på ett OpenSolaris-system och en inaktiv start- "
- "miljö kan vara i ett vänteläge för aktivering vid systemomstart."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:688(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "klon"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:689(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "En exakt kopia."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:690(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr ""
- "En klon kan vara en exakt kopia av ett operativsystem, ett "
- "filsystem eller en volym. Denna kopia är till 100% kompatibelt "
- "med originalet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:693(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "datauppsättning"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:694(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr ""
- "Ett generiskt namn som täcker in följande ZFS-objekt: kloner, filsystem, "
- "ögonblicksbilder och volymuppsättningar. Varje datauppsättning identifieras av ett unikt namn i ZFS-namnområdet."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:697(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "image"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:698(para)
-msgid "A collection of software in a package that comprises an entire or partial operating system. The package is suitable for installation."
-msgstr ""
- "En samling program i ett paket som består av ett helt eller delar "
- "av ett operativsystem. Paketet lämpar sig för installation."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:699(para)
-msgid "An image is a location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr ""
- "En image är en plats i ditt system där paket och deras tillhörande filer, kataloger, länkar och beroenden kan installeras."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:702(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "paket"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:703(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr ""
- "En samling filer, kataloger, länkar, drivrutiner och beroenden i ett "
- "specifikt format."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:706(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "ursprung"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:707(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository specified by a URI, that contains a complete set of package data."
-msgstr "En plats i en databas som innehåller ett fullständig uppsättning paketdata. Identifieras med en URI."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:710(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "aliasnamn"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:711(para)
-msgid "An alternate name for a publisher."
-msgstr "Alternativt namn på en utgivare."
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:714(glossterm)
-msgid "mirror"
-msgstr "spegling"
-
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:715(para)
-msgid "Location of a package repository, specified by a URI, that contains only package files."
-msgstr "En plats i en paketdatabas som endast innehåller paketfiler. Identifieras med en URI."
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
-#: package-manager.xml.in.nolegal:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "översättning"
-
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:1(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "Programmet och dess tillhörande dokumentation upplåts enligt ett licensavtal som begränsar nyttjanderätt och offentliggörande, samt skyddas av upphovsrätt, patent, varumärkesrätt och annan immaterialrättslig lagstiftning. Med undantag för vad som uttryckligen tillåts i licensavtalet eller tillämpliga lagar, är det inte tillåtet att använda, kopiera, reproducera, översätta, utsända, modifiera, underlicensiera, överföra, distribuera, visa offentligt, uppföra, publicera eller visa någon del, i någon form, eller med några medel. Det är inte tillåtet att dekompilera, demontera eller baklängeskonstruera programmen, med undantag för nödvändiga anpassningar till programvaror från andra leverantörer, och i de fall där tillämplig lagstiftning uttryckligen tillåter det."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:2(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "Informationen i det här dokumentet kan ändras utan föregående meddelande och inga garantier ges att dokumentet/informationen är felfritt. Om du hittar felaktigheter i dokumentationen ber vi att du rapporterar dem skriftligen."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:3(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "Om programmet eller dess tillhörande dokumentation levereras till amerikansk myndighet (US Government) eller om någon upplåter eller använder programmen för amerikansk myndighets räkning gäller följande:"
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:4(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065, USA."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:5(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "Programmet eller maskinvaran är avsett för generell användning i en mängd olika informationshanteringsprogram. Det är inte utvecklat för eller avsett för användning som till sin natur är att anses som farlig, inklusive verksamheter som kan orsaka risk för personskada. Vid användning av programmet eller maskinvaran i farlig verksamhet är det licenstagarens eget ansvar att vidta alla säkerhetsåtgärder för användning av programmen för sådana syften. Oracle Corporation och dess dotterbolag frånsäger sig allt ansvar för skador som uppkommer vid användning av programmet eller maskinvaran i sådan farlig verksamhet."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:6(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle och Java är registrerade varumärken tillhörande Oracle och/eller dess dotterbolag. Övriga namn kan vara varumärken som tillhör respektive företag."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:7(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD, Opteron, AMD-logotypen samt AMD Opteron-logotypen är varumärken eller registrerade varumärken tillhörande Advanced Micro Devices. Intel och Intel Xeon är varumärken eller registrerade varumärken tillhörande Intel Corporation. Alla SPARC-varumärken används under licens och är varumärken eller registrerade varumärken tillhörande SPARC International, Inc. UNIX är ett registrerat varumärke licensierat via X/Open Company, Ltd."
-
-#: legalnotice.xml:8(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "Programmet eller maskinvaran och dess tillhörande dokumentation kan ge åtkomst till innehåll, produkter och tjänster från tredje part. Oracle Corporation och dess dotterbolag är inte ansvarigt för och frånsäger sig uttryckligen allt ansvar med avseende på innehåll, produkter och tjänster från tredje part. Oracle Corporation och dess dotterbolag ansvarar inte för förlust, kostnader eller skada av något slag som kan uppkomma från åtkomst eller användning av innehåll, produkter eller tjänster från tredje part."
-
--- a/src/gui/help/zh_CN/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/zh_CN/zh_CN.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 软件包管理器联机帮助"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "2011 年 6 月"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "本软件和相关文档是根据许可证协议提供的，该许可证协议中规定了关于使用和公开本软件和相关文档的各种限制，并受知识产权法的保护。除非在许可证协议中明确许可或适用法律明确授权，否则不得以任何形式、任何方式使用、拷贝、复制、翻译、广播、修改、授权、传播、分发、展示、执行、发布或显示本软件和相关文档的任何部分。除非法律要求实现互操作，否则严禁对本软件进行逆向工程设计、反汇编或反编译。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "此文档所含信息可能随时被修改，恕不另行通知，我们不保证该信息没有错误。如果贵方发现任何问题，请书面通知我们。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "如果将本软件或相关文档交付给美国政府，或者交付给以美国政府名义获得许可证的任何机构，必须符合以下规定："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations.As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007).Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "本软件或硬件是为了在各种信息管理应用领域内的一般使用而开发的。它不应被应用于任何存在危险或潜在危险的应用领域，也不是为此而开发的，其中包括可能会产生人身伤害的应用领域。如果在危险应用领域内使用本软件或硬件，贵方应负责采取所有适当的防范措施，包括备份、冗余和其它确保安全使用本软件或硬件的措施。对于因在危险应用领域内使用本软件或硬件所造成的一切损失或损害，Oracle Corporation 及其附属公司概不负责。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle 和 Java 是Oracle 和/或其附属公司的注册商标。其他名称可能是各自所有者的商标。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD、Opteron、AMD 徽标以及 AMD Opteron 徽标是Advanced Micro Devices 的商标或注册商标。Intel 和 Intel Xeon是Intel Corporation 的商标或注册商标。所有SPARC 商标均是 SPARC International, Inc 的商标或注册商标，并应按照许可证的规定使用。UNIX 是通过 X/Open Company, Ltd 授权的注册商标。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "本软件或硬件以及文档可能提供了访问第三方内容、产品和服务的方式或有关这些内容、产品和服务的信息。对于第三方内容、产品和服务，Oracle Corporation 及其附属公司明确表示不承担任何种类的担保，亦不对其承担任何责任。对于因访问或使用第三方内容、产品或服务所造成的任何损失、成本或损害，Oracle Corporation 及其附属公司概不负责。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "关于软件包管理器"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "软件包管理器是 Oracle Solaris 映像包管理系统 (Image Packaging System, IPS) 的一个图形用户界面 (graphical user interface, GUI)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "有关本文档中所使用术语的定义，请参见<xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 映像包管理系统"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 映像包管理系统 (Image Packaging System, IPS) 是一个软件交付系统，它与网络上的软件包系统信息库进行交互。IPS 是一个提供软件生命周期管理功能（包括软件安装、升级和删除）的框架。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "在安装 Oracle Solaris 操作系统后，您可能会发现您想使用的某个软件没有提供。该软件可能存在于某个 IPS 软件包系统信息库中。您可以使用软件包管理器或 <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) 命令从软件包系统信息库下载并安装软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "通过 IPS，您还可以创建现有 IPS 软件包系统信息库的副本，创建您自己的 IPS 软件包系统信息库，以及发布您自己的 IPS 软件包。有关 IPS 的更多信息，请参见 Oracle Solaris 11 信息库。转到 <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>，在左侧选择 \"Documentation Index\"（文档索引），选择 \"Systems Software\"（系统软件），选择 \"Oracle Solaris 11\"，然后选择 \"View Library\"（查看库）。请专门参见 <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>（添加并更新 Oracle Solaris 11 软件包）。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "软件包管理器"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "软件包管理器提供了 IPS 命令行界面所提供的一部分功能。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "通过软件包管理器，您可以执行以下任务："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "查找、安装、更新和删除 IPS 软件包。请参见<xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "更新您的系统（更新您系统上的所有软件包）。请参见<xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "添加、修改和删除 IPS 软件包发布者。请参见<xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "列出、重命名、删除和管理引导环境。请参见<xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "创建 WebInstall 安装文件 (<filename>.p5i</filename>)。请参见 <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "本文档介绍了软件包管理器窗口的下列功能："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "位于窗口中央的大窗格是软件包列表窗格。有时候该窗格显示提示性消息，但通常情况下该窗格包含一个软件包列表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "窗口顶部的菜单栏提供了大部分的软件包管理器功能"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "在紧挨菜单栏下方的工具栏中，左侧的按钮提供了一些常用的操作。分隔条左侧的按钮具有全局功能：更新具有可用更新的所有软件包或者刷新软件包列表和软件包状态。分隔条右侧的按钮只针对选定的软件包执行操作。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "工具栏右侧的“搜索”字段可帮助控制软件包列表窗格的内容。请参见<xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "按钮下方的<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>下拉式菜单可帮助控制软件包列表窗格的内容，还允许您添加新的发布者。请参见<xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/>“按发布者”。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "“搜索”字段下方的<guimenu>视图</guimenu>下拉式菜单可帮助控制软件包列表窗格的内容。请参见“按软件包状态”列出软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单下方的类别窗格可帮助控制软件包列表窗格的内容。请参见“按类别”列出软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "软件类别列表的下方是您在此次会话中已执行的搜索的列表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "软件包列表窗格下方是软件包详细信息窗格。请参见<xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "管理软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "您可以根据各种条件列出软件包。您可以安装、更新和删除软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "列出软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "您在<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>下拉式菜单、<guimenu>视图</guimenu>下拉式菜单、类别窗格和“搜索”字段中所做的选择会影响软件包管理器列表窗格中的软件列表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "您可以通过单击列标题对软件包列表进行重新排序。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "您可以使用<guibutton>刷新</guibutton>按钮或<menuchoice><guimenu>软件包</guimenu><guimenuitem>刷新</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项来重新读取系统信息库目录并更新软件包列表和软件包状态。在每次打开软件包管理器时也会尝试刷新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "按发布者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "通过<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>下拉式菜单，您可以按发布者列出软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "菜单顶部列出了您使用“添加发布者”对话框或使用 <literal>pkg</literal> 命令已添加的每个发布者的名称。当您选中其中一个发布者时，软件包列表窗格将仅显示来自该选定发布者的软件包。软件包列表窗格将仅显示“名称”、“状态”和“摘要”列，因为每个软件包的发布者都是相同的。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有发布者</guimenuitem> - 在软件包列表窗格中显示来自所有发布者的软件包。软件包列表窗格显示“名称”、“状态”、“发布者”和“摘要”列。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "示例：要列出来自所有发布者的有更新可用的所有媒体设备驱动程序，请从<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单中选择<guimenuitem>所有发布者</guimenuitem>，选择<menuchoice><guimenu>驱动程序</guimenu><guimenuitem>媒体</guimenuitem></menuchoice>类别，并从<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单中选择<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有已安装的软件包</guimenuitem> - 显示来自所有发布者的所有已安装的软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "示例：要列出来自 <literal>solaris</literal> 发布者的当前已安装的字体软件包，请从<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单中选择<guimenuitem>所有已安装的软件包</guimenuitem>，选择<menuchoice><guimenu>系统</guimenu><guimenuitem>字体</guimenuitem></menuchoice>类别，单击“发布者”列标题以按发布者对列表进行排序，然后滚动到 <literal>solaris</literal> 条目。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有发布者（搜索）</guimenuitem> - 在软件包列表窗格中显示一条提示性消息而不是软件包列表。该消息列出您已配置的所有发布者并提醒您如何查看来自那些发布者的所有软件包。有关使用<guimenuitem>所有发布者（搜索）</guimenuitem>进行搜索的信息，请参见<xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>添加...</guimenuitem> - 打开“添加发布者”窗口。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "按软件包状态"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "通过<guimenu>视图</guimenu>下拉式菜单，您可以按软件包状态列出软件包。软件包状态可以是已安装、未安装或有更新可用。<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单上显示的图标与软件包列表窗格的“状态”列中显示的图标相匹配。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有软件包</guimenuitem> - 显示来自选定发布者的属于选定类别或与指定搜索字符串匹配的所有可用软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "示例：要列出来自 <literal>solaris</literal> 发布者的所有 web 服务软件包（包括已安装的、未安装的和有可用更新的），请从<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单中选择 <literal>solaris</literal>，选择 <menuchoice><guimenu>Web 服务</guimenu></menuchoice>类别，并从<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单中选择<guimenuitem>所有软件包</guimenuitem>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>已安装的软件包</guimenuitem> - 显示来自选定发布者的属于选定类别或与指定搜索字符串匹配的所有已安装的软件包。另请参见<menuchoice><guimenu>发布者</guimenu><guimenuitem>所有已安装的软件包</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "示例：要仅列出来自 <literal>solaris</literal> 发布者的已安装的 web 服务器软件包，请从<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单中选择 <literal>solaris</literal>，选择 <menuchoice><guimenu>Web 服务</guimenu></menuchoice> 类别，并从<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单中选择<guimenuitem>已安装的软件包</guimenuitem>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem> - 显示来自选定发布者的属于选定类别或与指定搜索字符串匹配且有更新可用的所有软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "示例：要列出来自所有发布者的有更新可用的所有设备驱动程序，请从<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单中选择<guimenuitem>所有发布者</guimenuitem>，选择<guimenu>驱动程序</guimenu>类别，并从<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单中选择<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>未安装的软件包</guimenuitem> - 显示来自选定发布者的属于选定类别或与指定搜索字符串匹配的所有未安装的软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "示例：要列出来自 <literal>solaris</literal> 发布者的当前未安装的所有字体软件包，请从<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单中选择 <literal>solaris</literal>，选择<menuchoice><guimenu>系统</guimenu><guimenuitem>字体</guimenuitem></menuchoice>类别，并从<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单中选择<guimenuitem>未安装的软件包</guimenuitem>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>选定的软件包</guimenuitem> - 列出当前选定的所有软件包。请参见<xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "按类别"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "您可以在软件包管理器窗口左侧的类别窗格中按软件类型浏览可用的软件包。单击某个类别名称可显示子类别。选定的类别或子类别中的软件包将根据选定的发布者和软件包状态以及指定的搜索条件在软件包列表窗格中列出。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "除了指定类型的软件外，类别窗格还允许您选择<guimenuitem>所有类别</guimenuitem>和<guimenuitem>最近的搜索</guimenuitem>。有关<guimenuitem>最近的搜索</guimenuitem>的信息，请参见<xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>“重复以前的搜索”。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "搜索软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "可使用下列两种方法之一来搜索软件包："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "聚焦到软件包列表窗格上（例如，选择<menuchoice><guimenu>编辑</guimenu><guimenuitem>转到软件包列表</guimenuitem></menuchoice>并开始键入）。在键入时，将从软件包列表窗格中当前列出的软件包中识别出匹配项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "使用工具栏中的“搜索”字段。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "输入搜索字符串"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "在“搜索”字段中输入一个字符串，然后按 Enter 键或单击“搜索”字段右侧的放大镜图标。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单选定项 - 软件包管理器根据您在<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>菜单中所做的选择，在来自特定发布者或所有发布者的每个软件包的相关信息中搜索该搜索字符串。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "无论您选择<guimenuitem>所有发布者</guimenuitem>还是选择<guimenuitem>所有发布者（搜索）</guimenuitem>，搜索结果都是一样的。使用<guimenuitem>所有发布者（搜索）</guimenuitem>的不同之处是速度更快，因为这避免了选择<guimenuitem>所有发布者</guimenuitem>时因加载来自所有发布者的数据而发生的延迟。使用<guimenuitem>所有发布者（搜索）</guimenuitem>时，针对所有发布者执行搜索而不在软件包列表窗格中加载来自所有发布者的数据。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单选定项 - 根据在<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单上选定的软件包状态，在软件包列表窗格中显示搜索结果。通过更改<guimenu>视图</guimenu>菜单选定项，无需重新搜索，即可在软件包列表窗格中显示同一搜索结果的不同子集。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "软件包管理器搜索的软件包信息包括名称、摘要、描述、类别以及软件包中包含的文件的名称。如果您未使用通配符，则只查找完全匹配项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "AND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "当搜索词条由空格或 <literal>AND</literal> 运算符分隔时，软件包管理器将搜索包含<emphasis role=\"strong\">所有</emphasis>这些搜索词条的软件包。这是缺省搜索行为。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "示例：如果搜索字符串是 <literal>python book</literal> 或 <literal>python AND book</literal>，则搜索结果将仅包括其软件包信息中<emphasis>同时</emphasis>包含 <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>和</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> 的软件包。例如，软件包 <literal>diveintopython</literal> (a book about Python programming) 将出现在搜索结果中，但软件包 <literal>python-26</literal> 将不会出现。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "双引号"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "将搜索词条括在双引号中指示要与该搜索词条完全匹配。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "示例：括在双引号中的 <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> 将匹配 <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> 但不匹配 <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "通配符"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "您可以在搜索字符串中使用 <literal>*</literal> 通配符。使用通配符时搜索速度可能较慢。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "示例：<literal>802.11*</literal> 将匹配 <literal>802.11b/g</literal> 和 <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "请注意，<literal>802.11*</literal> 不匹配 <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>。要匹配 <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>，请使用搜索字符串 <literal>*802.11*</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "当搜索词条由 <literal>OR</literal> 运算符分隔时，软件包管理器将搜索包含这些搜索词条中<emphasis role=\"strong\">任一项</emphasis>的软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "示例：<literal>python OR book</literal> 将匹配其软件包信息中包含 <literal>python</literal> 的所有软件包和其软件包信息中包含 <literal>book</literal> 的所有软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "您可以组合使用这些搜索字符串修饰符。您可以在一个搜索字符串中同时使用 AND、OR、双引号和 *。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "清除“搜索”字段"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "要同时清除搜索字符串和搜索结果列表，请使用“搜索”字段或“编辑”菜单。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "在“搜索”字段中，单击 <literal>X</literal> 图标。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在<guimenu>编辑</guimenu>菜单上，选择<guimenuitem>清除搜索</guimenuitem>选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "取消搜索"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "在执行搜索操作期间，一个繁忙条会显示在软件包管理器窗口底部的状态栏的右端。在繁忙条的右端是一个 <literal>X</literal> 图标。单击繁忙条中的 <literal>X</literal> 图标可取消正在进行的搜索。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "重新显示以前的搜索结果"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "在当前软件包管理器会话中已执行的搜索的结果保存在类别窗格的<guimenuitem>最近的搜索</guimenuitem>中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "在类别窗格中选择<guimenuitem>最近的搜索</guimenuitem>标签会在软件包列表窗格中显示一条提示性消息。软件包列表窗格中显示之前的搜索结果列表。单击“结果”链接可重新显示那些结果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "选择<guimenuitem>最近的搜索</guimenuitem>标签左侧的箭头可在类别窗格中展开或隐藏以前的搜索结果列表。选择最近的搜索列表中的某个项目可重新显示那些搜索结果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "与任何软件包都不匹配的搜索不会出现在最近的搜索列表中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "选择<guibutton>刷新</guibutton>按钮或<menuchoice><guimenu>软件包</guimenu><guimenuitem>刷新</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项可删除所有最近的搜索结果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "显示更多信息"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "可在软件包详细信息窗格或“软件包版本信息”对话框中查看有关某个软件包的更多信息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "软件包详细信息窗格"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "要显示有关某个软件包的更多信息，请单击鼠标左键以在软件包列表中突出显示该软件包。软件包列表窗格下方的软件包详细信息窗格显示了来自该发布者的最新可用版本、软件包大小、软件包中的文件、依赖关系和许可条款等信息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "如果某个软件包自安装后已重命名，则“常规”选项卡上的“已重命名为”字段会显示该软件包的新名称。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "“版本”选项卡显示了供您安装的该软件包的所有版本列表。从列表中选择某个版本并单击列表右侧的<guibutton>安装/更新</guibutton>按钮可安装该版本。请参见<xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "如果软件包列表窗格包含一条提示性消息，则不会显示软件包详细信息窗格。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "“软件包版本信息”对话框"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "在软件包列表中的某个软件包上单击鼠标右键可弹出<guimenu>软件包</guimenu>菜单。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "从弹出菜单或菜单栏选择<menuchoice><guimenu>软件包</guimenu><guimenuitem>软件包版本信息</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项可显示一个单独的窗口，其中显示了已安装的软件包版本，以及您可以安装或更新到的最新版本（如果适用）。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "选择软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "可以安装、更新或删除所选择的软件包。要选择某个软件包，请使用软件包列表窗格或使用<guimenu>编辑</guimenu>菜单。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "在软件包列表窗格中，可执行下列操作之一来选择某个软件包。您可以选择多个软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "单击软件包名称左侧的框。再次单击该框可取消选择软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "单击一次软件包名称可突出显示软件包。然后双击突出显示的软件包可选择该软件包。再次双击可取消选择软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "单击列标题中的复选框图标可选择当前列出在软件包列表窗格中的所有软件包。再次单击该复选框图标可取消选择当前列出在软件包列表窗格中的所有软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "<guimenu>编辑</guimenu>菜单具有用于选择软件包的以下选项："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>全选</guimenuitem> - 选择当前列出在软件包列表窗格中的所有软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>选择更新</guimenuitem> - 选择当前列出在软件包列表窗格中有更新可用的所有软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>取消全选</guimenuitem> - 取消选择当前列出在软件包列表窗格中的所有软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "在任何情况下，当您选择某个软件包时，以前选定的软件包仍然处于选定状态。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "当前列出在软件包列表窗格中的所有软件包的数目和所选择的那些软件包的数目显示在软件包管理器窗口底部状态栏的左侧。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>发布者</guimenu><guimenuitem>所有发布者</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项、<guimenuitem>所有类别</guimenuitem>类别以及<menuchoice><guimenu>视图</guimenu><guimenuitem>选定的软件包</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项可在软件包列表窗格中列出来自所有发布者的所有选定的软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "可以突出显示某个软件包但不选择它。当突出显示某个软件包时，有关该软件包的详细信息将显示在软件包列表窗格下方的软件包详细信息窗格中。当选定某个软件包时，在该软件包名称左侧的框中会显示一个复选标记。如果您要安装、更新或删除某个软件包，请确保该软件包的选择框中显示有一个复选标记。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "安装和更新软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "在安装或更新之前，请检查“可选组件”首选项设置。选择<menuchoice><guimenu>编辑</guimenu><guimenuitem>首选项</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项。在“首选项”窗口中，选择“可选组件”选项卡。缺省情况下，“安装所有语言”、“安装所有开发文件”和“安装所有文档”处于选定状态。例如，您可以选择只安装某个语言子集或取消选择开发文件来节省安装空间。单击“确定”按钮保存所做的更改。这些设置将应用于所有已安装的软件包以及将来的软件包安装和更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "执行以下步骤来安装或更新软件包："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "选择软件包。请参见<xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "可使用下列方法之一来安装或更新软件包："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "在工具栏中选择<guibutton>安装/更新</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "从菜单栏中选择<menuchoice><guimenu>软件包</guimenu><guimenuitem>安装/更新</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在软件包名称上单击鼠标右键以显示<guimenu>软件包</guimenu>弹出式菜单，然后选择<guimenuitem>安装/更新</guimenuitem>选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "在软件包列表窗格下方的软件包详细信息窗格中，在“版本”选项卡上，从“要安装的版本”列表中选择一个版本并单击该列表右侧的<guibutton>安装/更新</guibutton>按钮。“要安装的版本”列表中的软件包是系统信息库可提供的；它们有可能不可安装。某个特定的版本有可能与您已安装的其他软件包不兼容。如果您选择的版本不可安装在您的系统上，则软件包管理器会向您发出警告，且不会安装该软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "如果软件包已安装且没有更新可用（请参见“状态”列或<menuchoice><guimenu>软件包</guimenu><guimenuitem>软件包版本信息</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项），则<guibutton>安装/更新</guibutton>选项处于灰显状态且不可选择。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "“安装/更新确认”窗口随即显示。尚未安装的软件包列出在“安装详细信息”窗格中且已安装的软件包列出在“更新详细信息”窗格中供您复查。选择<guibutton>继续</guibutton>按钮将安装或更新所列出的软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "在某些情况下会显示一个许可对话框，您必须接受该许可才能安装软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "如果在软件包安装期间发生错误，则会显示一个错误对话框，其中的消息会解释安装或更新为何失败。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "删除软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "执行以下步骤来删除软件包："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "可使用下列方法之一来删除软件包："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "在工具栏中选择<guibutton>删除</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "从菜单栏中选择<menuchoice><guimenu>软件包</guimenu><guimenuitem>删除</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在软件包名称上单击鼠标右键以显示<guimenu>软件包</guimenu>弹出式菜单，然后选择<guimenuitem>删除</guimenuitem>选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "如果软件包未安装，则“删除”选项处于灰显状态且不可选择。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "“删除确认”窗口随即显示。要删除的软件包列出在“删除详细信息”窗格中供您复查。选择<guibutton>继续</guibutton>按钮将删除列出的软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "如果某个软件包因其他软件包依赖于它而无法删除，您可以选择<guibutton>继续删除</guibutton>选项来尝试删除您最初选定的要删除的任何其余软件。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "更新系统"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "当更新某些关键的软件包（例如某些驱动程序和其他内核组件）时，系统将执行以下操作："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "创建当前引导环境 (boot environment, BE) 的克隆。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "更新克隆中的软件包，且不更新当前 BE 中的任何软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "将新的 BE 设置为下次重新引导系统时的缺省引导选项。当前 BE 保留为一个备用引导选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "更新所有软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "当您在工具栏中选择<guibutton>更新</guibutton>按钮或者选择<menuchoice><guimenu>软件包</guimenu><guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项时，软件包管理器将更新有更新可用的所有已安装的软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "凡是可从其当前发布者获得更新的软件包都将被更新。如果某个软件包的可用更新来自发布者列表中的其他发布者，则只有其当前发布者配置为非粘性时，该软件包才会更新。如果其当前发布者配置为粘性，则该软件包不会更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "“更新”窗口随即显示，更新过程启动："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "系统将刷新所有目录。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "系统对所有已安装的软件包进行评估以确定哪些软件包有更新可用。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "如果没有任何软件包有更新可用，则会显示消息“无更新可用”且处理停止。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "如果有软件包更新可用，则会列出要更新的软件包供您复查。这是您通过单击<guibutton>取消</guibutton>按钮中止更新的最后机会。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>继续</guibutton>按钮将继续更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "系统可能会创建一个新的引导环境 (boot environment, BE)，如前文中的<xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>所述，具体取决于要更新的是哪些软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "如果系统确定需要一个新 BE 但无法创建新 BE，则会显示一条错误消息。如果问题是磁盘空间不足，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>关闭</guibutton>以取消更新过程。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "按照<xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/>中的说明删除不再需要的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "再次选择<guibutton>更新</guibutton>以重新启动更新过程。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "系统下载所有软件包更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "系统安装软件包更新。如果创建了一个克隆的 BE，则更新将安装在该克隆 BE 中。如果没有创建克隆 BE，则更新将安装在当前的 BE 中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "如果在更新过程中的任何时候出现错误，“详细信息”面板将会展开，并且将显示错误的详细信息。错误状态指示符将显示在失败的阶段旁边。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "如果系统创建了一个用于更新的新 BE，则您可以编辑缺省的 BE 名称。在您对 BE 名称满意后，单击<guibutton>立即重新启动</guibutton>按钮可立即重新引导您的系统。单击<guibutton>稍后重新启动</guibutton>按钮可在稍后的某个时间重新启动您的系统。您必须重新启动才能引导到新 BE。新 BE 将成为您的缺省引导选项。您的当前 BE 可用作备用引导选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "使用更新管理器"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "您可以从某个系统通知或者从桌面菜单栏打开更新管理器。更新管理器执行与前文中的<xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>所述过程相同的过程。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "软件更新通知"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "系统会定期检查是否有更新可供任何已安装的软件包使用。如果系统检测到有更新可用，则会在系统通知栏中显示一个“有更新可用”通知图标和弹出窗口。单击通知图标可打开更新管理器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "桌面系统菜单"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "从桌面上的菜单栏选择<menuchoice><guimenu>系统</guimenu><guisubmenu>管理</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>更新管理器</guimenuitem></menuchoice>以打开更新管理器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "管理发布者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "您可以添加、修改和删除 IPS 软件包发布者。您可以更改发布者的优先级、更改“已启用”和“粘性”设置、更改发布者别名、添加或删除发布者源，以及添加或删除发布者镜像。您可以管理密钥、证书和签名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "请注意，系统发布者是个例外。在“管理发布者”窗口中，系统发布者仅可供查看。系统发布者无法删除或修改，您无法更改其优先级。请参见<xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>。“详细信息”窗格指示选定的发布者是否为系统发布者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "添加发布者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "要添加某个 IPS 软件包发布者，请使用“添加发布者”窗口。要打开“添加发布者”窗口，请执行下列操作之一："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "从<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>下拉式菜单中选择<guimenuitem>添加</guimenuitem>选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>添加发布者</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>管理发布者</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项。在“管理发布者”窗口中，选择<guibutton>添加</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "在“添加发布者”窗口中，执行以下步骤来添加某个 IPS 软件包发布者："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "在 URI 字段中，输入发布者的 URI。该 URI 是一个网络位置，例如 <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> 或 <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "在“别名”字段中，您可以为该发布者输入另一个名称。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>添加</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "“添加发布者”对话框随即显示。单击<guibutton>取消</guibutton>可取消该过程。单击“详细信息”可查看详细信息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "如果成功添加了新发布者，则会显示“添加发布者完成”对话框，其中会显示新发布者的名称、别名和 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "如果没有添加新发布者，则会显示“发布者错误”对话框，其中会显示问题的相关信息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "新发布者列在“管理发布者”窗口中的最后一位，并且设置为“已启用”和“粘性”。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "有关更改新发布者的优先级、更改“已启用”和“粘性”设置、更改发布者别名、添加发布者源、设置 SSL 密钥和证书、添加发布者镜像、以及管理发布者证书和签名策略方面的信息，请参见<xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "修改发布者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "要修改发布者的属性，请选择<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>管理发布者</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项。当前已配置的发布者列出在“管理发布者”窗口中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "在“管理发布者”窗口中，您可以更改发布者的优先级、启用或禁用发布者、将发布者设置为粘性或非粘性，以及删除发布者。请参见<xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/>和<xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>修改</guibutton>按钮以打开“修改发布者”窗口。在“修改发布者”窗口中，您可以更改发布者别名、添加或删除发布者源、添加或删除发布者镜像、设置 SSL 密钥和证书，以及管理发布者证书和签名策略。请参见<xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/>和<xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "更改优先级和粘性"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>管理发布者</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项以显示“管理发布者”窗口。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "发布者优先级"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "发布者按优先级顺序列出在“管理发布者”窗口中。列表顶部的发布者是优先级最高的发布者。列表底部的发布者是优先级最低的发布者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "位于列表顶部的发布者也称为首选发布者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "无法禁用或删除首选发布者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "当您搜索软件包并且未指定发布者时，将首先搜索较高优先级发布者的目录。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "更新从非粘性发布者安装的软件包时，将首先搜索较高优先级发布者的目录来查找更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要更改发布者的优先级，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "在“管理发布者”窗口的列表中单击，突出显示某个发布者行。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "单击发布者列表右侧的<guibutton>向上</guibutton>和<guibutton>向下</guibutton>按钮以提高或降低选定发布者的优先级。选定发布者条目将在列表中上移或下移以反映其新优先级。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "如果选定发布者是一个系统发布者，则<guibutton>向上</guibutton>和<guibutton>向下</guibutton>按钮处于禁用状态。您无法更改系统发布者的优先级。因为您无法更改系统发布者的优先级，所以您无法降低其优先级只比系统发布者高一个级别的发布者的优先级，也无法提高其优先级只比系统发布者低一个级别的发布者的优先级。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "单击“管理发布者”窗口底部的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "“已启用”和“粘性”"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "在您添加发布者时，会缺省设置“已启用”和“粘性”属性。首选发布者（请参见前文中的<xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/>）无法禁用。系统发布者无法禁用，且系统发布者的“粘性”设置无法更改。所有其他“已启用”和“粘性”设置可以更改。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "如果为某个发布者设置了“粘性”属性，则无法从其他发布者更新从该发布者安装的软件包。如果没有为某个发布者设置“粘性”属性，则该发布者是非粘性的。如果某个发布者是非粘性的，则可以从其他发布者更新最初来自该发布者的软件包。其他发布者可能有比软件包的原始发布者较新的软件包版本。如果您希望更新到该较新的版本，则原始发布者需要是非粘性的。另外，如果某个较低优先级的发布者是非粘性的，则在为从该非粘性发布者安装的软件包查找更新时，将首先搜索较高优先级的发布者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "查找更新或要安装的软件包时，不会搜索已禁用的发布者。已禁用的发布者的目录不会刷新。已禁用的发布者不会显示在<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>下拉式菜单中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要更改发布者的“已启用”和“粘性”设置，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>管理发布者</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项以打开“管理发布者”窗口。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "单击“已启用”框或“粘性”框以切换其设置。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "更改别名、源和镜像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "选择您要修改的发布者。“管理发布者”窗口中发布者列表下方的“详细信息”窗格显示选定发布者的当前源。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "单击发布者列表右侧的<guibutton>修改</guibutton>按钮以打开“修改发布者”窗口。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "如果选定发布者是一个系统发布者，则<guibutton>修改</guibutton>按钮处于禁用状态。“详细信息”窗格将指出选定的发布者是系统发布者并将显示一条消息来指明该发布者无法修改或删除。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "选择“常规”选项卡可修改发布者别名、添加和删除源，以及添加和删除镜像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "发布者别名"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "发布者别名是发布者的另一个名称。别名用于<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>下拉式菜单和软件包列表窗格。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要更改该发布者的别名，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "在“修改发布者”窗口的“常规”选项卡上，在“别名”字段中输入一个新名称。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "单击“修改发布者”窗口底部的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "“管理发布者”窗口中的发布者别名已更改。单击“管理发布者”窗口底部的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "发布者源"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "源是同时包含软件包元数据（软件包清单和目录）和软件包内容（软件包文件）的 IPS 软件包系统信息库或归档所在的位置。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "源的值是 IPS 软件包系统信息库的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要为该发布者更改、添加或删除源，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "选择“修改发布者”窗口的“常规”选项卡。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "添加源。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "在“源”字段中，输入您要与该发布者关联的新源的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>添加</guibutton>按钮。新 URI 将添加到“源”字段下方的列表中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "删除源。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "在“源”字段下方的列表中，选择您要删除的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>删除</guibutton>按钮。选定的 URI 将从列表中删除。如果仅为该发布者定义了一个源，则无法删除该源。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "更改源。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "添加新的源。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "删除您要更改的源。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "源的更改将反映在“管理发布者”窗口中的“详细信息”窗格中。单击“管理发布者”窗口底部的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "发布者镜像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "镜像是仅包含软件包内容（软件包文件）的 IPS 软件包系统信息库所在的位置。镜像不包含软件包元数据（软件包清单和目录）。镜像提供的数据是源所提供数据的一个子集。镜像仅可用于下载软件包文件。软件包元数据从源下载。IPS 客户机访问源来获取发布者的目录，即使该客户机从镜像下载软件包内容时也是如此。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要为该发布者添加、删除或更改镜像，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "单击“镜像”标签以显示“镜像”字段和镜像列表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "添加镜像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "在“镜像”字段中，输入您要与该发布者关联的新镜像的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>添加</guibutton>按钮。新 URI 将添加到“镜像”字段下方的列表中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "删除镜像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "在“镜像”字段下方的列表中，选择您要删除的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>删除</guibutton>按钮。选定的 URI 将从列表中删除。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "更改镜像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "删除您要更改的镜像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "添加一个新镜像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "管理发布者安全性"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "证书用于在安装软件包之前验证其是否已正确地签名，验证根据的是映像或发布者的签名策略（取两者中限制性更强者）。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "选择要修改其安全性的发布者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "单击发布者列表右侧的<guibutton>修改</guibutton>按钮以打开“修改发布者”窗口。在“管理发布者”窗口中选定的发布者将在“修改发布者”窗口的标题中列出。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "如果发布者具有安全的源，可选择“常规”选项卡来添加 SSL 密钥和 SSL 证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "选择“证书”选项卡可管理该发布者的证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "选择“签名策略”选项卡可管理该发布者的签名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "添加 SSL 密钥和证书"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "如果发布者具有安全的源，需要为该发布者添加 SSL 密钥和 SSL 证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "单击“修改发布者”窗口的“常规”选项卡。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "单击“SSL 密钥和证书”标签以显示“SSL 密钥”字段和“SSL 证书”字段。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "单击“SSL 密钥”字段右侧的<guibutton>浏览</guibutton>按钮来选择 SSL 密钥文件。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "单击“SSL 证书”字段右侧的<guibutton>浏览</guibutton>按钮来选择 SSL 证书文件。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "管理证书"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "单击“修改发布者”窗口的“证书”选项卡。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "使用证书列表下方的按钮来添加证书或者删除、吊销或恢复当前在列表中选定的证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "请注意，您在“修改发布者”窗口中采取的任何操作只有在您单击“修改发布者”窗口底部的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮后才会应用于选定发布者的证书。如果您单击<guibutton>取消</guibutton>按钮，则不会应用任何更改。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>添加</guibutton>。为“修改发布者”窗口标题中列出的发布者添加新的发布者证书。在“添加发布者证书”窗口中，浏览以选择证书 (<tt>.pem</tt>) 文件。单击“添加发布者证书”窗口底部的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮。新添加的证书在“修改发布者”窗口的“证书”选项卡中的证书列表中处于选定状态。详细信息窗格指示该证书被标为要添加的证书。在您单击“修改发布者”窗口中的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮后，将添加该证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "在该发布者的证书列表中，选择您要进行修改或要检查其详细信息的证书。有关选定证书的详细信息将显示在证书列表和按钮行的下方。请注意，已过期的证书可能仍然处于“已批准”状态且可用来验证在证书过期之前发布的（不需要是已安装的）已签名软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "单击证书列表的标题可以对列表进行重新排序。“组织”和“名称”列的大小可调整。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>删除</guibutton>。删除当前在证书列表中选定的证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>吊销</guibutton>。如果证书列表中当前选定的证书属于“已批准”，单击<guibutton>吊销</guibutton>按钮可将其设为已吊销。在证书列表中，该证书的“状态”更改为“已吊销”。在您单击“修改发布者”窗口中的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮后，该更改将应用于证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>恢复</guibutton>。如果证书列表中当前选定的证书属于“已吊销”，单击<guibutton>恢复</guibutton>按钮可将其设为已批准。详细信息窗格指示该证书被标为要恢复的证书。在您单击“修改发布者”窗口中的<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮后，将恢复该证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "管理签名策略"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "单击“修改发布者”窗口的“签名策略”选项卡。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "使用“签名策略”选项卡上的按钮来设置当安装来自“修改发布者”窗口标题中列出的发布者的软件包时要使用的签名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "要设置全局签名策略，请使用“首选项”窗口的“签名策略”选项卡。（请参见<xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>）。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "签名被忽略：对所有软件包都忽略签名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "签名是可选的，但如果提供则必须有效：验证具有签名的所有软件包的签名是否有效，但不要求所有已安装的软件包都具有签名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "需要一个或多个有效签名：要求所有新安装的软件包至少具有一个有效签名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "签名是必需的，并且验证软件包的签名时，证书名称必须包括文本字段中指定的一个或多个名称。如果指定多个名称，则名称之间必须以逗号分隔。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "删除发布者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "执行以下步骤来删除发布者："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "选择要删除的发布者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "单击发布者列表右侧的<guibutton>删除</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "如果选定发布者是一个系统发布者，则<guibutton>删除</guibutton>按钮处于禁用状态。“详细信息”窗格将指出选定的发布者是系统发布者并将显示一条消息来指明该发布者无法修改或删除。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "管理引导环境"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "引导环境 (boot environment, BE) 是可引导的映像。您可以在 Oracle Solaris 系统中维护多个 BE。其中一个 BE 是启动或重新引导时的缺省 BE。其他 BE 用作备用引导选项。所引导的 BE 将成为活动 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "您可以使用 <literal>beadm</literal>(1) 命令来创建、重命名、挂载、卸载、激活或销毁 BE。有关 BE 的完整信息，请参见<citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>（在安装后创建和管理引导环境）。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "软件包管理器提供了 <literal>beadm</literal>(1) 命令所提供的功能的一个子集。使用软件包管理器<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>管理引导环境</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项可打开“管理引导环境”窗口。“管理引导环境”窗口列出了该系统上的 BE，您可以在该窗口中激活、重命名和删除这些 BE，方法如下文中所述。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "创建 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "当您执行下列操作之一时会自动创建一个新的 BE："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "安装 Oracle Solaris 操作系统。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "安装或更新特定关键系统软件包，例如某些驱动程序和其他内核组件。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "使用 <literal>beadm create</literal> 命令。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "当您执行 <literal>pkg update</literal> 命令或使用<guibutton>更新</guibutton>按钮来更新有更新可用的所有软件包时通常会创建一个新 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "激活 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>管理引导环境</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项以打开“管理引导环境”窗口。每个 BE 都列在该窗口中。当前所引导的 BE 在其 BE 名称左侧显示有一个复选标记。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要指定另一个 BE 成为下次重新引导后的缺省活动 BE，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "对于要使其在下次引导后成为缺省活动 BE 的 BE，选择其对应的<guibutton>重新引导时处于活动状态</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "在“管理引导环境”窗口中选择<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "重命名 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>管理引导环境</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项以打开“管理引导环境”窗口。每个 BE 都列在该窗口中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "您无法重命名当前处于活动状态的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "无法重命名您标为待删除的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要重命名某个 BE，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "双击您要重命名的 BE 的名称。名称字段将变为可编辑的。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "输入新名称。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "删除 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>文件</guimenu><guimenuitem>管理引导环境</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项以打开“管理引导环境”窗口。每个 BE 都列在该窗口中。该窗口中最右侧的列是“删除”列。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "“管理引导环境”窗口中的中间列显示了 BE 的大小。您可能想要删除某个 BE 以释放存储设备上的一些空间。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "您无法删除当前处于活动状态的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "无法删除您已重命名的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要删除某个 BE，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "选择您要删除的 BE 所对应的<guibutton>删除</guibutton>框。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "软件包管理器支持使用简单的单击 WebInstall 进程来安装软件包。WebInstall 进程使用一个 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件。<filename>.p5i</filename> 文件包含添加发布者以及添加可从这些发布者安装的软件包所需的信息。<filename>.p5i</filename> 文件中的信息由 WebInstall 进程读取并使用。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall 导出文件"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "如果希望其他用户能够安装已在您的系统上安装的软件包，可以使用 WebInstall 进程导出那些软件包的安装说明。这会创建一个 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件，其中包含要安装的那些软件包和发布者的安装说明。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "要将您选定的软件包及其发布者的安装说明导出到一个 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件中，请执行以下步骤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "从<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>下拉式菜单中，选择您要将其软件包包括在 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件中的发布者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "在软件包列表窗格中，选择您要分发其安装说明的软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "单击<menuchoice><guisubmenu>文件</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>导出选定项</guimenuitem></menuchoice>，以显示“导出选定项确认”窗口。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮以确认选定项。“导出选定项”窗口随即显示。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "系统为 <filename>p5i</filename> 文件提供了一个扩展名为 <filename>.p5i</filename> 的缺省名称。您可以更改该文件名，但不要更改扩展名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "系统提供了 <filename>p5i</filename> 文件的缺省位置。您可以更改该位置。如果您使用<guibutton>浏览</guibutton>按钮，可以从“导出选定项”窗口右下角的下拉式菜单中选择 <filename>p5i 文件</filename>选项以仅在文件列表中显示 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "单击<guibutton>保存</guibutton>按钮以保存文件名和位置。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall 添加发布者和安装软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "WebInstall 进程允许您通过 <filename>p5i</filename> 文件安装软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "找到 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件。该文件可能位于您的桌面上，也可能位于某个 Web 站点上。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "使用下列方法之一在 WebInstall 模式下启动软件包管理器："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "单击桌面上的 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件。关联的应用程序（软件包管理器 Web 安装程序）随即启动。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "从命令行启动软件包管理器，并附上 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件的路径。例如，输入以下命令："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "转到指向 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件的链接所在的 URL 位置。<filename>.p5i</filename> 文件必须位于已注册了该 MIME 类型的一个 Web 服务器上。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "如果 <filename>.p5i</filename> 位于尚未注册该 MIME 类型的 Web 服务器上，请将 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件保存到桌面，然后单击该文件以启动 WebInstall。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "“安装/更新”窗口随即显示。该窗口顶部的标签为：“软件包管理器 Web 安装程序/以下项将添加到您的系统中：”，然后列出发布者和软件包。单击<guibutton>继续</guibutton>按钮继续安装。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "如果您的系统上尚未配置该软件包发布者，则会显示“添加发布者”窗口，其中已输入了该发布者的名称和 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "如果要添加的发布者是安全发布者，则需要提供 SSL 密钥和证书。请在系统中浏览以找到 SSL 密钥和 SSL 证书。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "如果成功添加了发布者，则会显示“添加发布者完成”对话框。单击<guibutton>确定</guibutton>按钮继续安装。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "如果 <filename>.p5i</filename> 文件包含来自被禁用的发布者的软件包，WebInstall 将打开一个“启用发布者”对话框。可使用该对话框启用该发布者以便您可以安装软件包。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "“安装/更新”窗口现在看起来与您从软件包管理器中选择<guibutton>安装/更新</guibutton>时相同。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "故障排除"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "错误、警告和提示性消息会保存到日志中以便您可以随时查看。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "查看消息日志"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>视图</guimenu><guimenuitem>日志</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项以打开“日志”窗口。“日志”窗口显示来自软件包管理器和更新管理器的错误、警告和提示性消息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "选择“日志”窗口底部的<guibutton>清除</guibutton>按钮可删除所有消息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "如果记录了错误或警告，则在状态栏的左侧会显示一个黄色三角形。单击该黄色三角形可显示“日志”窗口。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "设置首选项"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "使用<menuchoice><guimenu>编辑</guimenu><guimenuitem>首选项</guimenuitem></menuchoice>菜单选项可更改软件包管理器的某些用户界面设置。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "“首选项”窗口有三个选项卡："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "“常规”选项卡，用于设置退出首选项和确认对话框首选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "“可选组件”选项卡，用于设置有关在安装或更新软件包时要安装哪些可选软件包组件的首选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "“签名策略”选项卡，用于设置该映像的签名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "退出首选项"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>编辑</guimenu><guimenuitem>首选项</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项，然后选择“常规”选项卡。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "如果选中了“退出时记住当前状态”框，软件包管理器会保存以下设置并在您下次启动软件包管理器时恢复它们："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">垂直分隔条和水平分隔条</emphasis> - 窗口中窗格的宽度和高度"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">窗口大小</emphasis> – 软件包管理器窗口的总体大小"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">发布者选项</emphasis> - 当软件包管理器关闭时在<guimenu>发布者</guimenu>下拉式菜单中选定的发布者或其他选项"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">类别</emphasis> - 针对每个发布者的选定类别以及展开和折叠的类别"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "确认对话框首选项"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "当安装、更新或删除软件包时，会显示一个确认对话框，其中显示了软件包列表和要执行的操作。如果您不希望看到这些确认对话框，可以在“首选项”窗口中取消选中这些选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "在特定的确认对话框中单击“请不要再次显示此确认对话框”复选框也会为该对话框取消设置该首选项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "签名策略首选项"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "使用“签名策略”选项卡上的按钮可设置安装该映像中的软件包时忽略或要求签名。要为特定发布者设置签名策略，请在“管理发布者”窗口中选择发布者，单击<guibutton>修改</guibutton>按钮，然后使用“修改发布者”窗口的“签名策略”选项卡。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "为映像签名策略提供的选项与为发布者签名策略提供的选项是相同的，但是这些设置应用于映像中安装的所有软件包，而不是仅应用于从特定发布者安装的软件包。请参见<xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "可选组件首选项语言选项"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "选择<menuchoice><guimenu>编辑</guimenu><guimenuitem>首选项</guimenuitem></menuchoice>选项，然后选择“可选组件”选项卡。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "缺省情况下，任何软件包的“语言”选项下都选中了“安装所有语言”。您可以通过选择仅安装部分语言来节省安装空间。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "当选中“仅安装这些语言”时，您可以单击语言列表的最左侧列标题中的复选框图标来选择所有语言。再次单击该列标题可以取消选择所有语言。单击“语言”和“地区”列标题可对列表进行排序。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "单击“确定”按钮保存所做的更改。这些设置将应用于当前已安装的软件包以及将来的软件包安装和更新。映像将根据需要进行更新，以基于新设置安装或删除可选的软件包组件。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "如果您之前已将您的映像更新为只包括部分语言，则“仅安装这些语言”是该窗口中的缺省选定项；如果您选择了“安装所有语言”选项，则语言列表处于灰显状态。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "其他可选组件首选项"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "缺省情况下，在“其他”组件选项下选中了“安装所有开发文件”和“安装所有文档”。您可以通过取消选择开发文件或文档来节省安装空间。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "词汇表"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "别名"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "发布者的另一个名称。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "引导环境 (boot environment, BE)"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "可引导的 Oracle Solaris 环境的实例。引导环境的根文件系统和所有包含系统软件的其他文件系统必须是 ZFS 数据集。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "活动引导环境是当前所引导的那个引导环境。一个系统可以具有许多引导环境。在重新引导时您可以选择要引导到的引导环境。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "克隆"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "完全相同的副本。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "克隆可以是某个操作系统、文件系统或卷的完全相同的副本。此副本与其原版 100% 兼容。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "数据集"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "以下 ZFS 实体的通用名称：克隆、文件系统、快照或卷。每个数据集都由 ZFS 名称空间中的唯一名称标识。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "映像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "软件包中可以引导和安装的操作系统软件的集合。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "系统中的一个位置，可以在该位置安装软件包及其关联文件、目录、链接和相关项。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "源"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "发布者在其上发布软件包的软件包服务器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "软件包"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "某种已定义格式的文件、目录、链接、驱动程序和相关项的集合。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "发布者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "设计、创建软件包并将其发布到软件包服务器的人、组或公司。然后该软件包服务器能提供来自（缺省）发布者的软件包以供下载使用。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "系统发布者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "系统发布者是在链接映像中尤其是在非全局区域中使用的特殊发布者，用以确保特定的软件包与全局区域保持同步。全局区域通过在非全局区域中配置这些特殊的系统发布者来对非全局区域中的软件包进行限制。这类发布者之所以特殊，是因为非全局区域无法对其进行某些更改，包括删除、禁用、修改或者更改其优先级。"
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/zh_HK/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/zh_HK/zh_HK.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 套裝軟體管理員線上說明"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "2011 年 6 月"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "本軟體與相關說明文件是依據含有用途及保密限制事項的授權合約所提供，且受智慧財產法的保護。除了授權合約中或法律明文允許的部份外，不得以任何形式或方法使用、複製、重製、翻譯、廣播、修改、授權、傳送、散佈、展示、演出、出版或陳列本軟體的任何部份。除非依法需要取得互通性操作 (interoperability)，否則嚴禁對本軟體進行還原工程 (reverse engineering)、反向組譯 (disassembly) 或解編 (decompilation)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "本文件中的資訊如有變更恕不另行通知，且不保證沒有任何錯誤。如果您發現任何問題，請來函告知。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "如果本軟體或相關說明文件是提供給美國政府或代表美國政府授權使用本軟體者，適用下列條例："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations.As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007).Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "本軟體或硬體是針對各類資訊管理應用程式的一般使用所開發。不適用任何原本就具危險性的應用上，包含會造成人身傷害風險的應用。如果您將本軟體或硬體應用於危險用途，則應採取適當的防範措施，包括保全、備份、儲備和其他措施以確保使用安全。Oracle Corporation 和其關係機構聲明對將本軟體或硬體應用於危險用途所造成之損害概不負任何責任。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle 和 Java 是 Oracle 和 (或) 其關係公司的註冊商標。其他名稱為各商標持有人所擁有之商標。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD、Opteron、AMD 標誌與 AMD Opteron 標誌是 Advanced Micro Devices 的商標或註冊商標。Intel 和 Intel Xeon 是 Intel Corporation 的商標或註冊商標。所有 SPARC 商標的使用皆經過授權，且是 SPARC International, Inc. 的商標或註冊商標。UNIX 是經過 X/Open Company, Ltd. 授權使用的註冊商標。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "本軟體或硬體與說明文件可能提供第三方內容、產品和服務的存取途徑與資訊。Oracle Corporation 和其關係公司明文聲明對第三方網站所提供的內容、產品與服務不做保證，且不負任何責任。Oracle Corporation 和其關係機構對於您存取或使用第三方的內容、產品或服務所引起的任何損失、費用或損害亦不負任何責任。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "關於套裝軟體管理員"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員是 Oracle Solaris 影像封裝系統 (IPS) 的圖形化使用者介面 (GUI)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "如需本文件所用字詞的定義，請參閱 <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 影像封裝系統"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 影像封裝系統 (IPS) 是一套軟體提供系統，可和網路上的套裝軟體儲存庫互動。IPS 是提供軟體安裝、升級及移除等軟體生命週期管理功能的架構。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "安裝 Oracle Solaris 作業系統之後，您可能發現無法使用某些您想要的軟體。此軟體可能可從 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫取得。您可以使用套裝軟體管理員或 <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) 指令，從套裝軟體儲存庫下載並安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "IPS 也可以讓您建立現有 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫的副本、建立您自己的 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫以及發佈您自己的 IPS 套裝軟體。如需有關 IPS 的更多資訊，請參閱 Oracle Solaris 11 資訊庫。移至 <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>，選取左方的 [Documentation Index] (文件索引)，再依序選取 [Systems Software] (系統軟體)、[Oracle Solaris 11] 和 [View Library] (檢視文件庫)。請參閱「<citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員提供由 IPS 指令行介面所提供的功能子集。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員可讓您執行下列作業："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "尋找、安裝、更新及移除 IPS 套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "更新您的系統 (更新系統中的所有套裝軟體)。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "增加、修改及刪除 IPS 套裝軟體發佈者。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "列出、重新命名、刪除及管理啟動環境。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "建立 WebInstall 安裝檔案 (<filename>.p5i</filename>)。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "此文件說明下列的 [套裝軟體管理員] 視窗功能："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "視窗中央的大型窗格是套裝軟體清單窗格。此窗格有時顯示資訊訊息，但通常會顯示套裝軟體的清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "視窗頂端的功能表列會提供大部分的套裝軟體管理員功能。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "功能表列正下方的工具列左邊有按鈕，這些按鈕可提供一些常用的操作功能。分隔線左邊的按鈕提供的是全域功能：可更新有可用更新的所有套裝軟體，或重新整理套裝軟體清單與套裝軟體狀態。分隔線右邊的按鈕則只能在選取的套裝軟體中使用。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "工具列右邊的 [搜尋] 欄位可協助您控制套裝軟體清單窗格的內容。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "按鈕下方的 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表不但可協助您控制套裝軟體清單窗格的內容，也可讓您增加新的發佈者。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> -「依發佈者」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "[搜尋] 欄位下方的 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表可協助您控制套裝軟體清單窗格的內容。請參閱「列出套裝軟體」-「依套裝軟體狀態」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表下方的類別窗格可協助您控制套裝軟體清單窗格的內容。請參閱「列出套裝軟體」-「依類別」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "軟體類別清單下方是您已經在此階段作業中執行的搜尋清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "套裝軟體清單窗格下方是套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "管理套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "您可以依據各種條件列出套裝軟體，也可以安裝、更新及移除套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "列出套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員清單窗格中顯示的套裝軟體清單會依照您在 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表、[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表、類別窗格與 [搜尋] 欄位中所做的選擇而有所不同。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "您可以按一下資料欄標題來重新排序套裝軟體清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "您可以使用 [<guibutton>重新整理</guibutton>] 按鈕或 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>重新整理</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項來重新讀取儲存庫目錄，以及更新套裝軟體清單與套裝軟體狀態。只要開啟套裝軟體管理員，就會嘗試執行重新整理。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "依發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表可讓您依照發佈者列出套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "功能表頂端會列出您使用 [增加發佈者] 對話方塊或 <literal>pkg</literal> 指令新增的每個發佈者名稱。選取其中一個發佈者後，套裝軟體清單窗格就只會顯示該所選發佈者可使用的套裝軟體。套裝軟體清單窗格只會顯示 [名稱]、[狀態] 及 [摘要] 資料欄，因為每個套裝軟體的發佈者都相同。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem> — 在套裝軟體清單窗格中顯示所有發佈者的套裝軟體。套裝軟體清單窗格會顯示 [名稱]、[狀態]、[發佈者] 及 [摘要] 資料欄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出可從所有發佈者取得可用更新的所有媒體裝置驅動程式，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>]，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>驅動程式</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>媒體</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 顯示已從所有發佈者安裝的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出目前已從 <literal>solaris</literal> 發佈者安裝的字型套裝軟體，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>所有已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>系統</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>字型</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 類別，按一下 [發佈者] 資料欄標題以依照發佈者排序清單，然後向下捲動至 <literal>solaris</literal> 項目。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem> — 在套裝軟體清單窗格中顯示資訊訊息，而非顯示套裝軟體清單。訊息會列出您已經配置的所有發佈者，並提醒您如何檢視來自這些發佈者的所有套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> 瞭解有關使用 [<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem>] 進行搜尋的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>增加...</guimenuitem> — 開啟 [增加發佈者] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "依套裝軟體狀態"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表可讓您依照套裝軟體狀態列出套裝軟體。套裝軟體狀態可能是已安裝、未安裝或有更新可用。[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表中顯示的圖示與套裝軟體清單窗格 [狀態] 資料欄中顯示的圖示相符。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 顯示可從所選類別的所選發佈者取得的所有套裝軟體，或者是與指定搜尋字串相符的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出來自 <literal>solaris</literal> 發佈者且已安裝、未安裝或有可用更新的所有 Web 服務套裝軟體，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 <literal>solaris</literal>，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>Web 服務</guimenu>]</menuchoice> 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>所有套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 顯示在所選類別中，來自所選發佈者且您已安裝的所有套裝軟體，或者是與指定搜尋字串相符的所有已安裝套裝軟體。請參閱 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>所有已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若只要列出來自 <literal>solaris</literal> 發佈者且已安裝的 Web 伺服器套裝軟體，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 <literal>solaris</literal>，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>Web 服務</guimenu>]</menuchoice> 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem> — 顯示在所選類別中，來自所選發佈者且有更新可用的所有套裝軟體，或者是與指定搜尋字串相符且有更新可用的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出可從所有發佈者取得可用更新的所有裝置驅動程式，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>]，選取 [<guimenu>驅動程式</guimenu>] 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>尚未安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 顯示在所選類別中，來自所選發佈者且您尚未安裝的所有套裝軟體，或者是與指定搜尋字串相符且尚未安裝的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出來自 <literal>solaris</literal> 發佈者且目前尚未安裝的所有字型套裝軟體，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 <literal>solaris</literal>，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>系統</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>字型</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>尚未安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>選取的套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 列出目前選取的所有套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "依類別"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "您可以在 [套裝軟體管理員] 視窗左側的類別窗格中，依軟體類型瀏覽可用的套裝軟體。按一下類別名稱以顯示子類別。套裝軟體清單窗格中就會依照所選的發佈者、套裝軟體狀態及指定的搜尋條件，列出所選類別或子類別中的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "除了指定的軟體類型之外，類別窗格也可以讓您選取 [<guimenuitem>所有類別</guimenuitem>] 與 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>]。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> -「重複之前的搜尋」，瞭解有關 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>] 的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "搜尋套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "使用下列兩種方法的其中一種來搜尋套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "移至套裝軟體清單窗格 (例如，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>進入套裝軟體列表</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice>) 並開始輸入。系統就會依照您輸入的內容，識別出與套裝軟體清單窗格目前列出的套裝軟體相符的項目。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "使用工具列中的 [搜尋] 欄位。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "輸入搜尋字串"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "在 [搜尋] 欄位中輸入字串並按 Enter 鍵，或按一下 [搜尋] 欄位右側的放大鏡圖示。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選項 — 套裝軟體管理員會依照您在 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表中所做的選擇，從特定發佈者或所有發佈者的每個套裝軟體資訊中搜尋搜尋字串。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "無論您選取的是 [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>] 或 [<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem>]，搜尋結果會是相同的。差異在於使用 [<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem>] 時速度較快，因為可避免選取 [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>] 時載入所有發佈者資料所產生的延遲問題。選取 [<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem>] 時，會在所有的發佈者上執行搜尋，但不會載入套裝軟體清單窗格中所有發佈者的資料。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選項 — 系統會在套裝軟體清單窗格中，依據您在 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表中選取的套裝軟體狀態顯示搜尋結果。您也可以變更 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選項，在套裝軟體清單窗格中顯示相同搜尋結果的不同子集，而不需要重新搜尋。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員搜尋的套裝軟體資訊包括名稱、摘要、說明、類別與套裝軟體中包含的檔案名稱。如果未使用萬用字元，就只會找出完全相符的項目。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "AND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "當搜尋字詞以空格或 <literal>AND</literal> 運算子分隔時，套裝軟體管理員會搜尋含有<emphasis role=\"strong\">所有</emphasis>搜尋字詞的套裝軟體。這是預設的搜尋運作方式。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "範例：如果搜尋字串是 <literal>python book</literal> 或 <literal>python AND book</literal>，搜尋結果只會包含套裝軟體資訊中<emphasis>同時含有 </emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis> 和 </emphasis><literal>book</literal> 的套裝軟體。例如，搜尋結果會顯示套裝軟體 <literal>diveintopython</literal> (有關 Python 程式設計的書)，但是不會顯示套裝軟體 <literal>python-26</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "雙引號"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "以雙引號括住搜尋字詞，即可比對與搜尋字詞完全相符的字詞。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "範例：以雙引號括住的 <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> 會比對 <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal>，但不會比對 <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "萬用字元"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "您可以在搜尋字串中使用 <literal>*</literal> 萬用字元。使用萬用字元會讓搜尋速度變慢。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "範例：<literal>802.11*</literal> 會比對 <literal>802.11b/g</literal> 和 <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "請注意，<literal>802.11*</literal> 不會比對 <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>。若要比對 <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>，請使用搜尋字串 <literal>*802.11*</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "當搜尋字詞以 <literal>OR</literal> 運算子分隔時，套裝軟體管理員會搜尋含有<emphasis role=\"strong\">任一</emphasis>搜尋字詞的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "範例：<literal>python OR book</literal> 會比對套裝軟體資訊中包含 <literal>python</literal> 的所有套裝軟體，以及套裝軟體資訊中包含 <literal>book</literal> 的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "您可以結合這些搜尋字串修飾鍵，並在單一搜尋字串中使用 AND、OR、雙引號及 *。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "清除搜尋欄位"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "若要清除搜尋字串與搜尋結果清單，請使用 [搜尋] 欄位或 [編輯] 功能表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "在 [搜尋] 欄位中，按一下 <literal>X</literal> 圖示。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在 [<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] 功能表中，選取 [<guimenuitem>清除搜尋</guimenuitem>] 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "取消搜尋"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "執行搜尋時，[套裝軟體管理員] 視窗底部狀態列右邊會顯示一個忙碌中狀態列。忙碌中狀態列右邊有一個 <literal>X</literal> 圖示。按一下忙碌中狀態列的 <literal>X</literal> 圖示即可在進行搜尋時取消搜尋。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "重新顯示之前的搜尋結果"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "您在目前的套裝軟體管理員階段作業中已經執行的搜尋結果，會儲存在類別窗格的 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>] 中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "在類別窗格中選取 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>] 標籤，即可在套裝軟體清單窗格中顯示資訊訊息。套裝軟體清單窗格會顯示之前搜尋結果的清單。按一下「結果」連結即可重新顯示那些結果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "選取 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>] 標籤左邊的箭頭，即可在類別窗格中展開或隱藏之前搜尋結果的清單。在最近的搜尋清單中選取一個項目，即可重新顯示那些搜尋結果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "最近的搜尋清單中不會顯示與套裝軟體不相符的搜尋。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "選取 [<guibutton>重新整理</guibutton>] 按鈕或 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>重新整理</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項會刪除所有最近的搜尋結果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "顯示更多資訊"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格或 [套裝軟體版本資訊] 對話方塊中查看更多有關套裝軟體的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "若要顯示更多套裝軟體的資訊，請按一下滑鼠左鍵以反白顯示套裝軟體清單中的套裝軟體。套裝軟體清單窗格下方的套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格會顯示相關資訊，例如此發佈者可供使用的最新版本、套裝軟體大小、套裝軟體中的檔案、相依性以及授權條款。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "如果套裝軟體已經在安裝之後重新命名，[一般] 標籤中的 [重新命名] 欄位就會顯示套裝軟體的新名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "[版本] 標籤顯示可供您安裝的套裝軟體版本清單。從清單選取版本並按一下清單右邊的 [<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 按鈕，即可安裝該版本。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "如果套裝軟體清單窗格包含資訊訊息，就不會顯示套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "套裝軟體版本資訊對話方塊"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體清單中的套裝軟體上按一下滑鼠右鍵，就會出現 [<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] 快顯功能表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "從快顯功能表或功能表列選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>套裝軟體版本資訊</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，即可顯示個別視窗，其中會顯示已經安裝的套裝軟體版本，以及您可以安裝或升級的最新版本 (如果適用)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "選取套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "您可以安裝、更新或移除選取的套裝軟體。若要選取套裝軟體，請使用套裝軟體清單窗格或 [<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] 功能表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體清單窗格中，執行下列其中一項動作可選取套裝軟體。您可以選取多個套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "按一下套裝軟體名稱左邊的方塊。再按一下方塊即可取消選取套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "按一下套裝軟體名稱可將套裝軟體反白顯示。然後按兩下反白顯示的套裝軟體即可選取套裝軟體。再按兩下可取消選取套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "按一下資料欄標題中的核取方塊圖示可選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的所有套裝軟體。再按一次核取方塊圖示即可取消選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] 功能表包含下列可用來選取套裝軟體的選項："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>全選</guimenuitem> — 選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>選取更新</guimenuitem> — 選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出且已經有可用更新的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>取消全選</guimenuitem> — 取消選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "在所有情況下，當您選取套裝軟體時，之前選取的套裝軟體仍會在已選取狀態。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的套裝軟體數目以及選取的套裝軟體數目，都會顯示在 [套裝軟體管理員] 視窗底部的狀態列左邊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項、[<guimenuitem>所有類別</guimenuitem>] 類別，以及 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>選取的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項，即可在套裝軟體清單窗格中列出所有發佈者的所有選取的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "您可以將套裝軟體反白顯示而非選取。將套裝軟體反白顯示時，套裝軟體清單窗格下方的套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格會顯示與該套裝軟體有關的詳細資訊。選取套裝軟體時，套裝軟體名稱左邊的方塊中會顯示一個核取標記。如果您想要安裝、更新或刪除套裝軟體，請確定該套裝軟體的選取方塊中有顯示核取標記。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "安裝及更新套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "在安裝或更新之前，請先檢查 [選擇性元件] 喜好設定。選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>喜好設定</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項。在 [喜好設定] 視窗中，選取 [選擇性元件] 標籤。預設會選取安裝所有語言、安裝所有開發檔案，以及安裝所有文件。例如，您可以選取要安裝的語言子集或取消選取開發檔案，以節省安裝所需空間。按一下 [確定] 按鈕即可儲存您的變更。這些設定會套用到所有已安裝的套裝軟體以及未來的套裝軟體安裝與更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "執行下列步驟可以安裝或更新套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "選取套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "使用下列其中一個方法來安裝或更新套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "選取工具列中的 [<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "從功能表列選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>安裝/更新</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體名稱上按一下滑鼠右鍵，以顯示 [<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] 快顯功能表。然後選取 [<guimenuitem>安裝/更新</guimenuitem>] 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體清單窗格下方之套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格的 [版本] 標籤中，從 [要安裝的版本] 清單中選取一個版本，然後按一下清單右邊的 [<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 按鈕。儲存庫中有 [要安裝的版本] 清單中的套裝軟體，但這些套裝軟體可能是無法安裝的。特定的版本可能與已安裝的其他套裝軟體不相容。如果您選取的版本無法在您的系統上安裝，套裝軟體管理員會提出警告而且不會安裝此套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "如果已經安裝套裝軟體且沒有更新可用 (查看 [狀態] 資料欄或 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>套裝軟體版本資訊</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項)，[<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 選項會變成灰色且無法選取。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "會顯示 [安裝/更新確認] 視窗。尚未安裝的套裝軟體會列於 [安裝詳細資訊] 窗格中，已安裝的套裝軟體會列於 [更新詳細資訊] 窗格中供您檢視。選取 [<guibutton>繼續</guibutton>] 按鈕可安裝或更新所列的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "在某些情況下，會顯示授權對話方塊，您必須接受授權才能安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "如果安裝套裝軟體時發生錯誤，則會顯示錯誤對話方塊。訊息會說明安裝或更新失敗的原因。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "移除套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "執行下列步驟可以移除套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "使用下列其中一個方法來移除套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "在工具列選取 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "從功能表列選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>移除</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體名稱上按一下滑鼠右鍵，以顯示 [<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] 快顯功能表。然後選取 [<guimenuitem>移除</guimenuitem>] 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "如果您並未安裝該套裝軟體，[移除] 選項會變成灰色且無法選取。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "會顯示 [移除確認] 視窗。要移除的套裝軟體會列在 [移除詳細資訊] 窗格中供您檢視。選取 [<guibutton>繼續</guibutton>] 按鈕，移除列出的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "如果某套裝軟體因其他套裝軟體依賴它而無法移除，您可以選取 [<guibutton>繼續移除</guibutton>] 選項，嘗試移除原先選取要移除的所有其餘套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "更新您的系統"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "更新某些重要套裝軟體 (例如部分驅動程式和其他核心元件) 時，系統會執行下列動作："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "建立目前啟動環境 (BE) 的複製。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "更新複製中的套裝軟體，但不要更新目前 BE 中的任何套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "將新的 BE 設定為下次系統重新開機時的預設啟動選項。而目前的 BE 仍為替代的啟動選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "更新所有套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "在工具列選取 [<guibutton>更新</guibutton>] 按鈕，或選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項時，套裝軟體管理員會更新有可用更新的所有已安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "會更新可從目前發佈者取得可用更新的所有套裝軟體。如果發佈者清單中的其他發佈者也提供該套裝軟體的可用更新，只有當目前發佈者配置為非固定發佈者時，才能更新該套裝軟體。如果目前發佈者配置為固定發佈者，則不會更新該套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "會顯示 [更新] 視窗，並開始更新程序："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "系統會重新整理所有目錄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "系統會評估所有已安裝的套裝軟體，判斷哪些套裝軟體有可用的更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "如果套裝軟體沒有可用的更新，會顯示「沒有可用更新」訊息並停止處理。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "如果套裝軟體有可用更新，會列出要更新的套裝軟體供您檢視。這是您最後一次可按一下 [<guibutton>取消</guibutton>] 按鈕中斷更新的機會。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>繼續</guibutton>] 按鈕繼續更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "視已更新的套裝軟體而定，系統可能會建立新的啟動環境 (BE)，如以上 <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> 所述。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "如果系統判斷需要建立新的 BE，但卻無法建立新的 BE，則會顯示錯誤訊息。如果問題是磁碟空間不足，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>關閉</guibutton>]，取消更新程序。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "遵循 <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> 中的說明，移除不再需要的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "再次選取 [<guibutton>更新</guibutton>] 重新啟動更新程序。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "系統會下載所有套裝軟體更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "系統會安裝套裝軟體更新。如果已建立複製的 BE，更新會安裝在複製中。如果未建立複製，更新會安裝在目前的 BE 中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "如果在更新程序中的任何時間發生錯誤，即會展開 [詳細資訊] 面板，並顯示錯誤的詳細資訊。失敗的階段旁會顯示錯誤狀態指示器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "如果系統已建立一個用於更新的新 BE，您可以編輯預設的 BE 名稱。當您滿意 BE 名稱時，按一下 [<guibutton>立即重新啟動</guibutton>] 按鈕，立刻重新啟動系統。按一下 [<guibutton>稍後重新啟動</guibutton>] 按鈕，稍後再重新啟動系統。您必須重新啟動系統，以便在啟動後進入新 BE。新 BE 會是您預設的啟動選項。目前的 BE 可做為替代的啟動選項使用。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "使用更新管理員"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "您可以從系統通知或從桌面功能表列開啟更新管理員。更新管理員會執行上述 <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/> 中的相同程序。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "軟體更新通知"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "系統會定期檢查是否有適用於您已安裝的套裝軟體的可用更新。如果系統偵測到有可用更新，可用更新通知圖示和快顯功能表會顯示在系統通知匣中。按一下通知圖示即可開啟更新管理員。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "Desktop System 功能表"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "從桌面的功能表列上選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>系統</guimenu>] [<guisubmenu>管理</guisubmenu>] [<guimenuitem>更新管理員</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice>，以開啟更新管理員。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "管理發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "您可以增加、修改和移除 IPS 套裝軟體發佈者。您可以變更發佈者的優先權、變更已啟用和固定設定、變更發佈者別名、增加或移除發佈者原始，以及增加或移除發佈者鏡像。您可以管理金鑰、憑證和簽名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "請注意，系統發佈者為例外狀況。只能在「管理發佈者」視窗中檢視系統發佈者。您無法移除或修改系統發佈者，也不能變更其優先權。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>。[詳細資訊] 窗格會指出所選的發佈者是否為系統發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "增加發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "若要增加 IPS 套裝軟體發佈者，請使用 [增加發佈者] 視窗。若要開啟 [增加發佈者] 視窗，請執行下列其中一個動作："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>增加</guimenuitem>] 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>增加發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項。在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中，選取 [<guibutton>增加</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "在 [增加發佈者] 視窗中，執行下列步驟以增加 IPS 套裝軟體發佈者："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "在 URI 欄位中，輸入發佈者的 URI。URI 是一個網路位置，例如 <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> 或 <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "在 [別名] 欄位中，您可以輸入此發佈者的替代名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>增加</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "會顯示 [增加發佈者] 對話方塊。按一下 [<guibutton>取消</guibutton>] 可取消程序。按一下 [詳細資訊] 可檢視詳細資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "如果已成功增加新的發佈者，會顯示 [增加發佈者完成] 對話方塊，並顯示新的發佈者名稱、別名和 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "如果未增加新的發佈者，會顯示 [發佈者發生錯誤] 對話方塊，內含關於此問題的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "新的發佈者是列於 [管理發佈者] 視窗中的最新發佈者，而且已啟用和固定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "請參閱 <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> 以瞭解變更新發佈者的優先權、變更已啟用和固定設定、變更發佈者別名、增加發佈者原始、設定 SSL 金鑰和憑證、增加發佈者鏡像，以及管理發佈者憑證和簽名策略的相關資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "修改發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "若要修改發佈者屬性，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項。目前配置的發佈者會列於 [管理發佈者] 視窗中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中，您可以變更發佈者的優先權、啟用或停用發佈者、設定發佈者為固定或非固定以及移除發佈者。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> 和 <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕開啟 [修改發佈者] 視窗。在 [修改發佈者] 視窗中，您可以變更發佈者別名、增加或移除發佈者原始、增加或移除發佈者鏡像、設定 SSL 金鑰和憑證，以及管理發佈者憑證和簽名策略。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> 和 <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "變更優先權和固定性"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，以顯示 [管理發佈者] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "發佈者優先權"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "[管理發佈者] 視窗中會依照優先順序列出發佈者。清單最上方的發佈者為優先權最高的發佈者。清單最下方的發佈者為優先權最低的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "清單最上方的發佈者也稱為喜好的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "無法停用或移除喜好的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "當您搜尋套裝軟體而且未指定發佈者時，會先搜尋優先權較高的發佈者目錄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "當您更新非固定發佈者安裝的套裝軟體時，會先搜尋優先權較高的發佈者目錄以進行更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要變更發佈者優先權，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中，按一下以反白顯示清單中的發佈者列。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "按一下發佈者清單右方的 [<guibutton>向上</guibutton>] 和 [<guibutton>向下</guibutton>] 按鈕，提高或降低所選發佈者的優先權。所選發佈者在清單中的位置會往上或往下移動，以顯示其新的優先權。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "如果所選的發佈者是系統發佈者，則會停用 [<guibutton>向上</guibutton>] 和 [<guibutton>向下</guibutton>] 按鈕。您無法變更系統發佈者的優先權。因為無法變更系統發佈者的優先權，所以您不能降低位於系統發佈者上一個較高優先權的發佈者優先權，也不能提高位於系統發佈者下一個較低優先權的發佈者優先權。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "按一下 [管理發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "已啟用和固定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "當您增加發佈者，預設會設定已啟用和固定屬性。無法停用喜好的發佈者 (請參閱上述的 <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/>)。您無法停用系統發佈者，而且無法變更系統發佈者的固定設定。可變更所有其他已啟用和固定設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "如果已針對發佈者設定固定屬性，則無法從不同發佈者更新該發佈者所安裝的套裝軟體。如果未針對發佈者設定固定屬性，則該發佈者為非固定。如果發佈者為非固定，則可透過另一個發佈者更新原先由該發佈者安裝的套裝軟體。不同發佈者的套裝軟體版本可能會比原始發佈者的套裝軟體版本還要新。如果您要更新成較新的版本，原始發佈者需要為非固定。此外，如果較低優先權發佈者為非固定，會為該非固定發佈者安裝的套裝軟體先搜尋較高優先權發佈者以進行更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "不會搜尋停用的發佈者進行更新或安裝套裝軟體。不會重新整理停用的發佈者目錄。[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表不會顯示停用的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要變更發佈者的已啟用和固定設定，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，以開啟 [管理發佈者] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "按一下 [已啟用] 方塊或 [固定] 方塊以切換其設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "變更別名、原始和鏡像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "選取您要修改的發佈者。[詳細資訊] 窗格 (位於 [管理發佈者] 視窗的發佈者清單下方) 會顯示所選發佈者的目前原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下發佈者清單右方的 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕，以開啟 [修改發佈者] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "如果所選的發佈者是系統發佈者，則會停用 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕。[詳細資訊] 窗格會指出所選的發佈者為系統發佈者，並顯示無法修改或移除此發佈者的訊息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "選取 [一般] 標籤修改發佈者別名、增加和移除原始，以及增加和移除鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "發佈者別名"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "發佈者別名是發佈者的另一個名稱。別名名稱用於 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表和套裝軟體清單窗格。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要變更此發佈者的別名，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "在 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [一般] 標籤上，於 [別名] 欄位中輸入新名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "[管理發佈者] 視窗中的發佈者別名已變更。按一下 [管理發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "發佈者原始"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "原始是 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫的位置，或是包含套裝軟體中介資料 (套裝軟體清單和目錄) 以及套裝軟體內容 (套裝軟體檔案) 的歸檔。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "原始值是 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要變更、增加或移除此發佈者的原始，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "選取 [修改發佈者] 視窗中的 [一般] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "增加原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "在 [原始] 欄位中，輸入您要與此發佈者建立關聯的新原始 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>增加</guibutton>] 按鈕。新的 URI 會新增至 [原始] 欄位下方的清單中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "移除原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "在 [原始] 欄位下方的清單中，選取您要刪除的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。所選的 URI 會從清單中移除。如果此發佈者只定義一個原始，則您無法移除該原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "變更原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "新增原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "刪除您要變更的原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "原始的變更會反映在 [管理發佈者] 視窗的 [詳細資訊] 窗格中。按一下 [管理發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "發佈者鏡像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "鏡像是僅包含套裝軟體內容 (套裝軟體檔案) 的 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫位置。鏡像不包含套裝軟體中介資料 (套裝軟體清單和目錄)。鏡像提供原始所提供的資料子集。鏡像只能用來下載套裝軟體檔案。套裝軟體中介資料是從原始下載。即使用戶端從鏡像下載套裝軟體內容，IPS 用戶端仍會存取原始以取得發佈者目錄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要增加、移除或變更此發佈者的鏡像，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "按一下 [鏡像] 標籤以顯示 [鏡像] 欄位和鏡像清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "增加鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "在 [鏡像] 欄位中，輸入您要與此發佈者建立關聯的新鏡像 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>增加</guibutton>] 按鈕。新的 URI 會新增至 [鏡像] 欄位下方的清單中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "移除鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "在 [鏡像] 欄位下方的清單中，選取您要刪除的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。選取的 URI 便會從清單中移除。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "變更鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "刪除您要變更的鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "增加新鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "管理發佈者安全性"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "憑證可用來確認套裝軟體在安裝前已正確地簽名，判斷的方式取決於影像或發佈者的簽名策略 (以較嚴格的為準)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "選取想要修改其安全性的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下發佈者清單右方的 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕，以開啟 [修改發佈者] 視窗。在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中所選取的發佈者會列在 [修改發佈者] 視窗標題中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "選取 [一般] 標籤以增加 SSL 金鑰和 SSL 憑證 (如果發佈者有安全的原始)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "選取 [憑證] 標籤以管理此發佈者的憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "選取 [簽名策略] 標籤以管理此發佈者的簽名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "增加 SSL 金鑰和憑證"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "如果發佈者有安全的原始，請增加該發佈者的 SSL 金鑰和 SSL 憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗中的 [一般] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "按一下 [SSL 金鑰和憑證] 標籤，顯示 [SSL 金鑰] 欄位和 [SSL 憑證] 欄位。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "按一下 [SSL 金鑰] 欄位右方的 [<guibutton>瀏覽</guibutton>] 按鈕，選取 SSL 金鑰檔案。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "按一下 [SSL 憑證] 欄位右方的 [<guibutton>瀏覽</guibutton>] 按鈕，選取 SSL 憑證檔案。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "管理憑證"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗中的 [憑證] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "使用憑證清單下的按鈕來增加憑證，或者是移除、撤銷或復原目前清單中所選取的憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "請注意，您在 [修改發佈者] 視窗中所做的動作只有在您按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕後，才會套用至所選發佈者的憑證。如果按一下 [<guibutton>取消</guibutton>] 按鈕，則不會套用變更。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>增加</guibutton>。針對 [修改發佈者] 視窗標題中所列出的發佈者，增加一個新的發佈者憑證。在 [增加發佈者憑證] 視窗中，瀏覽並選取憑證 (<tt>.pem</tt>) 檔案。按一下 [增加發佈者憑證] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。新增加的憑證會在 [修改發佈者] 視窗 [憑證] 標籤的憑證清單中呈現選取狀態。詳細資訊窗格會指出此憑證 [標示為要新增]。此憑證將在您按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕後新增。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "在此發佈者的憑證清單中，選取您要修改或要檢查其詳細資訊的憑證。所選憑證的詳細資訊會顯示在憑證清單和按鈕列下方。請注意，過期的憑證仍可以是 [已核准] 狀態，可用來驗證憑證過期前所發佈 (不一定要安裝) 的含簽名套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "按一下憑證清單的標題來重新排序清單。您可以調整 [組織] 和 [名稱] 資料欄的大小。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>移除</guibutton>。移除目前在憑證清單中選取的憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>撤銷</guibutton>。如果目前在憑證清單中選取的憑證為 [已核准]，請按一下 [<guibutton>撤銷</guibutton>] 按鈕，將此憑證視為撤銷的憑證。在憑證清單中，此憑證的狀態會變更為 [已撤銷]。按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕後，便會將此變更套用至該憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>復原</guibutton>。如果目前在憑證清單中選取的憑證為 [已撤銷]，請按一下 [<guibutton>復原</guibutton>] 按鈕，將此憑證視為核准的憑證。詳細資訊窗格會指出此憑證 [標示為要復原]。按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕後，便會復原此憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "管理簽名策略"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗中的 [簽名策略] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "安裝 [修改發佈者] 視窗標題中列出之發佈者的套裝軟體時，請使用 [簽名策略] 標籤中的按鈕來設定要使用的簽名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "若要設定全域簽名策略，請使用 [喜好設定] 視窗中的 [簽名策略] 標籤 (請參閱 <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "忽略簽名：忽略所有套裝軟體的簽名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "簽名是選擇性的，但如果提供，必須有效：請確認含簽名的所有套裝軟體皆使用有效簽名，但並不要求所有已安裝的套裝軟體都必須含簽名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "需要一或多個有效簽名：要求所有新安裝的套裝軟體至少有一個有效簽名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "需要簽名，且憑證名稱必須包括驗證套裝軟體簽名時在文字欄位指定的名稱。如果指定多個名稱，名稱必須使用逗號分隔。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "移除發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "執行下列步驟可以移除發佈者："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "選取想要移除的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "按一下發佈者清單右方的 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "如果所選的發佈者是系統發佈者，則會停用 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。[詳細資訊] 窗格會指出所選的發佈者為系統發佈者，並顯示訊息無法修改或移除此發佈者的訊息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "管理啟動環境"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "啟動環境 (BE) 是可啟動的影像。您可以在 Oracle Solaris 系統上維護多個 BE。其中一個 BE 會是啟動或重新開機時使用的預設 BE。其他 BE 則為替代的啟動選項。您啟動的 BE 即為使用中 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "您可以使用 <literal>beadm</literal>(1) 指令來建立、重新命名、掛載、卸載、啟用或銷毀 BE。如需有關 BE 的完整資訊，請參閱「<citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員可提供您 <literal>beadm</literal>(1) 指令所提供的功能子集。使用套裝軟體管理員 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理啟動環境</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項，開啟 [管理啟動環境] 視窗。[管理啟動環境] 視窗會列出此系統上的 BE，讓您可以啟用、重新命名及刪除這些 BE (如下所述)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "建立 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "執行下列其中一個動作時，會自動建立新的 BE："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "安裝 Oracle Solaris 作業系統。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "安裝或更新特定的重要系統套裝軟體 (例如部分驅動程式和其他核心元件)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "使用 <literal>beadm create</literal> 指令。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "當您執行 <literal>pkg update</literal> 指令，或是使用 [<guibutton>更新</guibutton>] 按鈕更新有可用更新的所有套裝軟體時，通常會建立新的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "啟用 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理啟動環境</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，開啟 [管理啟動環境] 視窗。視窗中會列出每個 BE。目前啟動的 BE 會在 BE 名稱的左側顯示核取標記。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要指定另一個 BE 做為下次重新開機時的預設使用中 BE，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "在下次重新開機時要做為預設使用中 BE 的 BE，選取 [<guibutton>在重開機時啟動</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "在 [管理啟動環境] 視窗選取 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "重新命名 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理啟動環境</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，開啟 [管理啟動環境] 視窗。視窗中會列出每個 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "您無法重新命名目前使用中的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "您無法重新命名標示為要刪除的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要重新命名 BE，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "按兩下您要重新命名的 BE 名稱，即可編輯名稱欄位。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "輸入新名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "移除 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理啟動環境</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，開啟 [管理啟動環境] 視窗。視窗中會列出每個 BE。視窗中最右側的資料欄即為 [刪除] 資料欄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "[管理啟動環境] 視窗中間的資料欄顯示的是 BE 的大小。您可能想要移除 BE 以釋放一些儲存裝置的空間。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "您無法刪除目前使用中的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "您無法刪除已重新命名的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要刪除 BE，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "選取要刪除之 BE 的 [<guibutton>刪除</guibutton>] 方塊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員支援使用簡單的一鍵式 WebInstall 程序安裝套裝軟體。WebInstall 程序使用 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案。<filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案包含增加發佈者所需的資訊，以及增加可從這些發佈者安裝之套裝軟體的資訊。WebInstall 程序將會讀取並使用 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案中的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall 匯出檔案"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "如果想讓其他使用者可安裝您系統上所安裝的套裝軟體，您可以使用 WebInstall 程序匯出這些套裝軟體檔案的安裝說明。該程序會建立包含要安裝之套裝軟體安裝說明及發佈者的 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要將所選套裝軟體的安裝說明及其發佈者匯出至 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "在 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表中，選取想將哪個發佈者的套裝軟體併入 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體清單窗格，選取要分發安裝說明的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "按一下 <menuchoice>[<guisubmenu>檔案</guisubmenu>] [<guimenuitem>輸出選擇</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice>，顯示 [輸出選擇確認] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕以確認選項。會顯示 [輸出選擇] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "系統會提供副檔名為 <filename>.p5i</filename> 的 <filename>p5i</filename> 檔案預設名稱。您可以變更此檔案名稱，但不可變更副檔名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "系統會提供 <filename>p5i</filename> 檔案的預設位置。您可以變更該位置。如果使用 [<guibutton>瀏覽</guibutton>] 按鈕，您可以從 [輸出選擇] 視窗右下方的下拉式功能表選取 <filename>p5i Files</filename> 選項，僅在檔案清單中顯示 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>儲存</guibutton>] 按鈕來儲存檔案名稱和位置。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall 來增加發佈者及安裝套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "WebInstall 程序可讓您透過 <filename>p5i</filename> 檔案來安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "找出 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案。此檔案可能位於桌面或網站。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "使用下列其中一個方法來啟動「WebInstall 模式的套裝軟體管理員」："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "按一下您桌面上的 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案，啟動關聯的應用程式 (套裝軟體管理員 Web 安裝程式)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "從指令行啟動套裝軟體管理員，並附上 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案的路徑。例如，輸入下列指令："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "移至包含 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案連結的 URL 位置。<filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案必須位於已註冊此 MIME 類型的 Web 伺服器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "如果 <filename>.p5i</filename> 所在的 Web 伺服器並未註冊此 MIME 類型的話，請將 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案儲存到您的桌面，然後按一下檔案以啟動 WebInstall。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "會顯示 [安裝/更新] 視窗。視窗頂端的標籤為：[套裝軟體管理員 Web 安裝程式] / [以下所列將會增加入您的系統：]，發佈者和套裝軟體會列於其中。按一下 [<guibutton>繼續</guibutton>] 按鈕以繼續安裝。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "如果您的系統尚未配置套裝軟體發佈者，則會顯示 [增加發佈者] 視窗。視窗中已輸入發佈者的名稱和 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "如果要增加的發佈者是安全的發佈者，則必須提供 SSL 金鑰和憑證。請瀏覽至系統上 SSL 金鑰和 SSL 憑證所在的位置。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "[增加發佈者完成] 對話方塊顯示發佈者是否新增成功。按一下 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕以繼續安裝。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "如果 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案包含來自停用發佈者的套裝軟體，WebInstall 會開啟 [啟用發佈者] 對話方塊。請使用此對話方塊來啟用發佈者，便能安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "[安裝/更新] 視窗現在的外觀與您選取套裝軟體管理員的 [<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 時一樣。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "疑難排解"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "錯誤、警告及資訊訊息會儲存在記錄中，您可以隨時檢視。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "檢視訊息記錄"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>記錄</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項來開啟 [記錄] 視窗。[記錄] 視窗會顯示來自套裝軟體管理員和更新管理員的錯誤、警告及資訊訊息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "選取 [記錄] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>清除</guibutton>] 按鈕，刪除所有訊息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "如果已記錄錯誤或警告，便會在狀態列左側顯示黃色三角形。按一下黃色三角形即可顯示 [記錄] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "設定喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "使用 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>喜好設定</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，變更部分套裝軟體管理員使用者介面設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "[喜好設定] 視窗有三個標籤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "[一般] 標籤可讓您設定結束喜好設定和確認對話方塊喜好設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "[選擇性元件] 標籤可讓您在安裝或更新套裝軟體時，針對要安裝的選擇性套裝軟體元件設定喜好設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "[簽名策略] 標籤可讓您設定此影像的簽名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "結束喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>喜好設定</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項，並選取 [一般] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "如果核取 [結束時記住目前狀態] 方塊，則套裝軟體管理員會儲存下列設定，並於您下次啟動套裝軟體管理員時復原這些設定："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">垂直和水平分隔線</emphasis> — 視窗窗格的寬度和高度"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">視窗大小</emphasis> — 套裝軟體管理員視窗的整體大小"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">發佈者選項</emphasis> — 套裝軟體管理員關閉時，[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表中選取的發佈者或其他選項"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">類別</emphasis> — 每個發佈者的選取類別以及展開和收合的類別"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "確認對話方塊喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "安裝、更新或移除套裝軟體時，系統會顯示確認對話方塊，其中包含要執行的套裝軟體清單與動作。如果您不想看到這些確認對話方塊，請取消核取 [喜好設定] 視窗中的這些選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "在特定確認對話方塊按一下「不要再顯示此確認對話方塊」核取方塊，也會取消設定該對話方塊的此喜好設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "簽名策略喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "在此影像安裝套裝軟體時，使用 [簽名策略] 標籤中的按鈕來忽略或要求簽名。若要設定特定發佈者的簽名策略，請在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中選取發佈者，接著按一下 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕，然後使用 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [簽名策略] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "影像簽名策略的選項和發佈者簽名策略的選項相同，但影像簽名策略的設定會套用至影像中安裝的所有套裝軟體，而不是只套用至從特定發佈者安裝的套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "選擇性元件喜好設定語言選擇"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>喜好設定</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項，並選取 [選擇性元件] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "預設會安裝 [任何套裝軟體的語言選擇] 下選取的所有語言。您可以只選取要安裝的語言子集來節省安裝空間。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "只安裝這些選取的語言時，您可以按一下語言清單最左側資料欄標題中的核取方塊來選取所有語言。再按一下資料欄標題即可取消選取所有語言。按一下 [語言] 和 [地區] 資料欄標題即可排序清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "按一下 [確定] 按鈕以儲存您的變更。這些設定會套用至目前安裝的套裝軟體以及未來的套裝軟體安裝和更新。必要時會更新影像，根據新的設定安裝或移除選擇性套裝軟體元件。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "如果您先前已更新您的影像使其只包括語言的子集，則只會安裝此視窗中的這些預設語言選項，如果您選擇安裝所有語言選項，則該語言清單會變成灰色。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "其他選擇性元件喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "預設會安裝所有開發檔案並安裝 [其他元件選擇] 下選取的所有文件。您可以取消選取開發檔案或文件以節省安裝空間。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "詞彙"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "別名"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "發佈者的另一個名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "啟動環境 (BE)"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "可啟動之 Oracle Solaris 環境的實例。根檔案系統與所有其他包含了系統軟體的啟動環境檔案系統都必須是 ZFS 資料集。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "使用中的啟動環境是目前已啟動的啟動環境。系統可以有多個啟動環境。重新開機時，您可以選取要啟動的啟動環境。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "複製"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "完全一致的副本。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "複製可以是完全與作業系統、檔案系統或磁碟區相同的副本。此副本與原件 100% 相容。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "資料集"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "下列 ZFS 項目的通用名稱：複製、檔案系統、快照或磁碟區。每個資料集都使用 ZFS 名稱空間中的唯一名稱識別。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "影像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "套裝軟體中的作業系統軟體集合，可加以啟動和安裝。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "系統上的某個位置，可在其中安裝套裝軟體及其相關的檔案、目錄、連結及相依性。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "原始"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "發佈者發佈套裝軟體的目標套裝軟體伺服器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "使用定義格式的檔案、目錄、連結、驅動程式及相依性的集合。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "設計、建立並將套裝軟體發佈至套裝軟體伺服器的人員、群組或公司。套裝軟體伺服器相對地會提供 (預設) 發佈者的套裝軟體供人下載。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "系統發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "系統發佈者是專門用於連結影像和非全域區域的特殊發佈者，其目的在於確保特定套裝軟體與全域區域保持同步。全域區域會藉由在非全域區域配置這些特殊的系統發佈者，以限制非全域區域內的套裝軟體。他們的特殊點在於非全域區域無法對他們進行某些變更，包括移除、停用、修改或變更其優先權。"
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "Oralce Corporation"
-
--- a/src/gui/help/zh_TW/package-manager.xml.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,715 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
-"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
-<book id="pkgmgr"><title><trademark class="registered">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help</title>
-<bookinfo><authorgroup><author><firstname>Oracle</firstname>
-<surname>Corporation</surname>
-</author>
-</authorgroup>
-<releaseinfo>Oracle Solaris 11</releaseinfo>
-<pubdate>June 2011</pubdate>
-<publisher><publishername>Oracle Corporation</publishername>
-<address><street>500 Oracle Parkway</street>
-<city>Redwood City</city>
-<state>CA</state>
-<postcode>94065</postcode>
-<country>U.S.A.</country>
-</address>
-</publisher>
-<copyright><year>2008, 2011</year></copyright>
-<legalnotice><para>This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.</para>
-<para>The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.</para>
-<para>If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:</para>
-<para>U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.</para>
-<para>Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.</para>
-<para>AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</para>
-<para>This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.</para>
-</legalnotice>
-</bookinfo>
-<chapter id="about"><title>About Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS).</para>
-<para>See the <xref linkend="glossary"/> for definitions of terms used in this document.</para>
-<sect1 id="gikcw"><title>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System</title>
-<para>Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal.</para>
-<para>After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository.</para>
-<para>IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="pm-win"><title>Package Manager</title>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface.</para>
-<para>Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend="manage-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend="update_all"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend="manage-publisher"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend="manage-be"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend="webinstall"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend="list-pkg"/> “By Publisher.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend="package-version"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-pkg"><title>Managing Packages</title>
-<para>You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages.</para>
-<sect1 id="list-pkg"><title>Listing Packages</title>
-<para>The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field.</para>
-<para>You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings.</para>
-<para>You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkihe"><title>By Publisher</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkihp"><title>By Package Status</title>
-<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and
-select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option.</para>
-<para>Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed.</para>
-<para>Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkigv"><title>By Category</title>
-<para>You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria.</para>
-<para>In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="search-pkg"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="search-pkg"><title>Searching for Packages</title>
-<para>Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the Search field in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect2 id="gkjbd"><title>Enter a Search String</title>
-<para>Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards.</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>AND</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior.</para>
-<para>Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis> <literal>python</literal> <emphasis>and</emphasis> <literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Double quotation marks</term>
-<listitem><para>Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>"ethernet driver"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term>Wild card</term>
-<listitem><para>You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>.</para>
-<para>Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-<varlistentry><term><literal>OR</literal></term>
-<listitem><para>When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role="strong">any</emphasis> of the search terms.</para>
-<para>Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information.</para>
-</listitem>
-</varlistentry>
-</variablelist>
-<para>You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjao"><title>Clear the Search Field</title>
-<para>To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbe"><title>Cancel the Search</title>
-<para>During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkjbb"><title>Redisplay Previous Search Results</title>
-<para>Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane.</para>
-<para>Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a "results" link to redisplay those results.</para>
-<para>Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results.</para>
-<para>A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list.</para>
-<para>Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="package-version"><title>Showing More Information</title>
-<para>See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiti"><title>Package Details Pane</title>
-<para>To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms.</para>
-<para>If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package.</para>
-<para>The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend="install-pkg"/>.</para>
-<para>The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkitc"><title>Package Version Info Dialog</title>
-<para>Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="select-pkg"><title>Selecting Packages</title>
-<para>Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para>
-<para>In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected.</para>
-<para>The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window.</para>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="install-pkg"><title>Installing and Updating Packages</title>
-<para>Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates.</para>
-<para>Perform the following steps to install or update a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages.</para>
-<para>In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-pkg"><title>Removing Packages</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a package:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the package. See <xref linkend="select-pkg"/>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to remove the package:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages.</para>
-<para>If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="update_all"><title>Updating Your System</title>
-<para>When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE).</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect1 id="um_info"><title>Updating All Packages</title>
-<para>When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available.</para>
-<para>All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated.</para>
-<para>The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>The system refreshes all catalogs.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update.</para>
-<para>The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend="update_all"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated.</para>
-<para>If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="remove-be"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system downloads all package updates.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE.</para>
-<para>If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="using_um"><title>Using Update Manager</title>
-<para>You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend="um_info"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="gkiso"><title>Software Updates Notification</title>
-<para>The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="gkisz"><title>Desktop System Menu</title>
-<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager.</para>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-publisher"><title>Managing Publishers</title>
-<para>You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy.</para>
-<para>Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend="glossary"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher.</para>
-<sect1 id="add-publisher"><title>Adding Publishers</title>
-<para>To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<para>The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky.</para>
-<para>See <xref linkend="modify-publisher"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="modify-publisher"><title>Modifying Publishers</title>
-<para>To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<para>In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend="priority-stickiness"/> and <xref linkend="remove-publisher"/>.</para>
-<para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend="origin-mirror"/> and <xref linkend="pub-security"/>.</para>
-<sect2 id="priority-stickiness"><title>Changing Priority and Stickiness</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-<sect3 id="set-pub-order"><title>Publisher Priority</title>
-<para>Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjlab"><title>Enabled and Sticky</title>
-<para>When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend="set-pub-order"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed.</para>
-<para>If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher.</para>
-<para>A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu.</para>
-<para>To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="origin-mirror"><title>Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="modify-publisher-alias"><title>Publisher Alias</title>
-<para>The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane.</para>
-<para>To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkza"><title>Publisher Origins</title>
-<para>An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files).</para>
-<para>An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository.</para>
-<para>To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change an origin.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Add the new origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Delete the origin you want to change.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="gjkyr"><title>Publisher Mirrors</title>
-<para>A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror.</para>
-<para>To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Add a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Remove a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Change a mirror.</para>
-<orderedlist type="a"><listitem><para>Delete the mirror you want to change.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Add a new mirror.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-<sect2 id="security"><title>Managing Publisher Security</title>
-<para>Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher whose security you want to modify.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-<sect3 id="keys-certs"><title>Adding SSL Keys and Certificates</title>
-<para>If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file.</para> </listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="manage-certs"><title>Managing Certificates</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list.</para>
-<para>Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be added." This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired.</para>
-<para>Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para><guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is "marked to be reinstated." This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-<sect3 id="pub-sig-policy"><title>Managing Signature Policy</title>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title.</para>
-<para>To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend="img-sig-policy"/>).</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated.</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect3>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-publisher"><title>Removing Publishers</title>
-<para>Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the publisher that you want to remove.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list.</para>
-<para>If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="manage-be"><title>Managing Boot Environments</title>
-<para>A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE.</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>.</para>
-<para>Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below.</para>
-<sect1 id="create-be"><title>Creating a BE</title>
-<para>A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Install the Oracle Solaris OS.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<para>Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="activate-be"><title>Activating a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name.</para>
-<para>To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="rename-be"><title>Renaming a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion.</para>
-<para>To rename a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Enter the new name.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="remove-be"><title>Removing a BE</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column.</para>
-<para>The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete the currently active BE.</para>
-<para>You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed.</para>
-<para>To delete a BE, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="webinstall"><title>Working With WebInstall</title>
-<para>Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process.</para>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-export"><title>Exporting Files Using WebInstall</title>
-<para>If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created.</para>
-<para>To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="webinstall-add"><title>Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages</title>
-<para>The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file.</para>
-<orderedlist><listitem><para>Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:</para>
-<screen># <userinput>packagemanager/<replaceable>path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i</replaceable></userinput></screen>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type.</para>
-<para>If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered.</para>
-<para>If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system.</para>
-<para>The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation.</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages.</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager.</para>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="gkioy"><title>Troubleshooting</title>
-<para>Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time.</para>
-<sect1 id="gkiod"><title>Viewing Message Logs</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager.</para>
-<para>Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages.</para>
-<para>If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<chapter id="pkg-mgr-prefs"><title>Setting Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings.</para>
-<para>The Preferences window has three tabs:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image.</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-<sect1 id="gjktu"><title>Exit Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed</para>
-</listitem>
-<listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher</para>
-</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="gjkug"><title>Confirmation Dialog Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab.</para>
-<para>When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window.</para>
-<para>Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="img-sig-policy"><title>Signature Policy Preferences</title>
-<para>Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window.</para>
-<para>The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend="pub-sig-policy"/>.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="languages"><title>Optional Component Preferences Language Choices</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install.</para>
-<para>When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-<para>If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option.</para>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="dev-doc"><title>Other Optional Component Preferences</title>
-<para>Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab.</para>
-<para>By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation.</para>
-<para>Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings.</para>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
-<glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title>
-<glossentry><glossterm>alias</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>Another name for a publisher.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>boot environment (BE)</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets.</para>
-<para>The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>clone</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>An exact copy.</para>
-<para>A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>dataset</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>image</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed.</para>
-<para>A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>origin</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A package server to which a publisher publishes packages.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>package</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-<glossentry><glossterm>system publisher</glossterm>
-<glossdef><para>System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority.</para>
-</glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-</glossary>
-</book>
--- a/src/gui/help/zh_TW/zh_TW.po Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1666 +0,0 @@
-msgid ""
-msgstr "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\nPOT-Creation-Date: 2012-06-24 23:45-0700\nPO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\nLast-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\nLanguage-Team: LANGUAGE <[email protected]>\nMIME-Version: 1.0\nContent-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\nContent-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:3(title)
-msgid "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 Package Manager Online Help"
-msgstr "<trademark class=\"registered\">Oracle</trademark> Solaris 11 套裝軟體管理員線上說明"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:4(firstname)
-msgid "Oracle"
-msgstr "Oracle"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:5(surname)
-msgid "Corporation"
-msgstr "Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:8(releaseinfo)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris 11"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 11"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:9(pubdate)
-msgid "June 2011"
-msgstr "2011 年 6 月"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:10(publishername)
-msgid "Oracle Corporation"
-msgstr "Oracle Corporation"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:11(street)
-msgid "500 Oracle Parkway"
-msgstr "500 Oracle Parkway"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:12(city)
-msgid "Redwood City"
-msgstr "Redwood City"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:13(state)
-msgid "CA"
-msgstr "CA"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:14(postcode)
-msgid "94065"
-msgstr "94065"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:15(country)
-msgid "U.S.A."
-msgstr "U.S.A."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:18(year)
-msgid "2008, 2011"
-msgstr "2008, 2011"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:19(para)
-msgid "This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited."
-msgstr "本軟體與相關說明文件是依據含有用途及保密限制事項的授權合約所提供，且受智慧財產法的保護。除了授權合約中或法律明文允許的部份外，不得以任何形式或方法使用、複製、重製、翻譯、廣播、修改、授權、傳送、散佈、展示、演出、出版或陳列本軟體的任何部份。除非依法需要取得互通性操作 (interoperability)，否則嚴禁對本軟體進行還原工程 (reverse engineering)、反向組譯 (disassembly) 或解編 (decompilation)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:20(para)
-msgid "The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing."
-msgstr "本文件中的資訊如有變更恕不另行通知，且不保證沒有任何錯誤。如果您發現任何問題，請來函告知。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:21(para)
-msgid "If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:"
-msgstr "如果本軟體或相關說明文件是提供給美國政府或代表美國政府授權使用本軟體者，適用下列條例："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:22(para)
-msgid "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are “commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-msgstr "U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are \"commercial computer software\" or \"commercial technical data\" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations.As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007).Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065."
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:23(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications."
-msgstr "本軟體或硬體是針對各類資訊管理應用程式的一般使用所開發。不適用任何原本就具危險性的應用上，包含會造成人身傷害風險的應用。如果您將本軟體或硬體應用於危險用途，則應採取適當的防範措施，包括保全、備份、儲備和其他措施以確保使用安全。Oracle Corporation 和其關係機構聲明對將本軟體或硬體應用於危險用途所造成之損害概不負任何責任。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:24(para)
-msgid "Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners."
-msgstr "Oracle 和 Java 是 Oracle 和 (或) 其關係公司的註冊商標。其他名稱為各商標持有人所擁有之商標。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:25(para)
-msgid "AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd."
-msgstr "AMD、Opteron、AMD 標誌與 AMD Opteron 標誌是 Advanced Micro Devices 的商標或註冊商標。Intel 和 Intel Xeon 是 Intel Corporation 的商標或註冊商標。所有 SPARC 商標的使用皆經過授權，且是 SPARC International, Inc. 的商標或註冊商標。UNIX 是經過 X/Open Company, Ltd. 授權使用的註冊商標。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:26(para)
-msgid "This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services."
-msgstr "本軟體或硬體與說明文件可能提供第三方內容、產品和服務的存取途徑與資訊。Oracle Corporation 和其關係公司明文聲明對第三方網站所提供的內容、產品與服務不做保證，且不負任何責任。Oracle Corporation 和其關係機構對於您存取或使用第三方的內容、產品或服務所引起的任何損失、費用或損害亦不負任何責任。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:29(title)
-msgid "About Package Manager"
-msgstr "關於套裝軟體管理員"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:30(para)
-msgid "Package Manager is a graphical user interface (GUI) for the Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS)."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員是 Oracle Solaris 影像封裝系統 (IPS) 的圖形化使用者介面 (GUI)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:31(para)
-msgid "See the <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/> for definitions of terms used in this document."
-msgstr "如需本文件所用字詞的定義，請參閱 <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:32(title)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System"
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 影像封裝系統"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:33(para)
-msgid "Oracle Solaris Image Packaging System (IPS) is a software delivery system that interacts with a package repository on a network. IPS is a framework that provides software lifecycle management capabilities, including software installation, upgrade, and removal."
-msgstr "Oracle Solaris 影像封裝系統 (IPS) 是一套軟體提供系統，可和網路上的套裝軟體儲存庫互動。IPS 是提供軟體安裝、升級及移除等軟體生命週期管理功能的架構。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:34(para)
-msgid "After you install the Oracle Solaris operating system, you might find that some of the software you want to use is not available. This software probably is available in an IPS package repository. You can use Package Manager or the <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) command to download and install packages from a package repository."
-msgstr "安裝 Oracle Solaris 作業系統之後，您可能發現無法使用某些您想要的軟體。此軟體可能可從 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫取得。您可以使用套裝軟體管理員或 <literal>pkg</literal>(1M) 指令，從套裝軟體儲存庫下載並安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:35(para)
-msgid "IPS also enables you to create a copy of an existing IPS package repository, create your own IPS package repository, and publish your own IPS packages. For more information about IPS, see the Oracle Solaris 11 Information Library. Go to <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>, select Documentation Index on the left, select Systems Software, select Oracle Solaris 11, and select View Library. See especially <citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>."
-msgstr "IPS 也可以讓您建立現有 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫的副本、建立您自己的 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫以及發佈您自己的 IPS 套裝軟體。如需有關 IPS 的更多資訊，請參閱 Oracle Solaris 11 資訊庫。移至 <literal>download.oracle.com</literal>，選取左方的 [Documentation Index] (文件索引)，再依序選取 [Systems Software] (系統軟體)、[Oracle Solaris 11] 和 [View Library] (檢視文件庫)。請參閱「<citetitle>Adding and Updating Oracle Solaris 11 Software Packages</citetitle>」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:37(title)
-msgid "Package Manager"
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:38(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality offered by the IPS command-line interface."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員提供由 IPS 指令行介面所提供的功能子集。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:39(para)
-msgid "Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:"
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員可讓您執行下列作業："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:40(para)
-msgid "Find, install, update, and remove IPS packages. See <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "尋找、安裝、更新及移除 IPS 套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"manage-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:42(para)
-msgid "Update your system (update all the packages on your system). See <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>."
-msgstr "更新您的系統 (更新系統中的所有套裝軟體)。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:44(para)
-msgid "Add, modify, and delete IPS package publishers. See <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "增加、修改及刪除 IPS 套裝軟體發佈者。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"manage-publisher\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:46(para)
-msgid "List, rename, delete, and manage boot environments. See <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>."
-msgstr "列出、重新命名、刪除及管理啟動環境。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"manage-be\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:48(para)
-msgid "Create a WebInstall installation file (<filename>.p5i</filename>). See <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>."
-msgstr "建立 WebInstall 安裝檔案 (<filename>.p5i</filename>)。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"webinstall\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:51(para)
-msgid "This documentation refers to the following features of the Package Manager window:"
-msgstr "此文件說明下列的 [套裝軟體管理員] 視窗功能："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:52(para)
-msgid "The large pane in the center of the window is the package list pane. Sometimes this pane shows informational messages, but usually this pane contains a list of packages."
-msgstr "視窗中央的大型窗格是套裝軟體清單窗格。此窗格有時顯示資訊訊息，但通常會顯示套裝軟體的清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:54(para)
-msgid "The menu bar at the top of the window provides most Package Manager functionality."
-msgstr "視窗頂端的功能表列會提供大部分的套裝軟體管理員功能。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:56(para)
-msgid "The tool bar just below the menu bar has buttons on the left that provide some often-used operations. The buttons on the left of the separator have global functionality: Update all packages that have updates available or refresh the list of packages and package status. The buttons on the right of the separator only operate on selected packages."
-msgstr "功能表列正下方的工具列左邊有按鈕，這些按鈕可提供一些常用的操作功能。分隔線左邊的按鈕提供的是全域功能：可更新有可用更新的所有套裝軟體，或重新整理套裝軟體清單與套裝軟體狀態。分隔線右邊的按鈕則只能在選取的套裝軟體中使用。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:58(para)
-msgid "The Search field on the right of the tool bar helps control the content of the package list pane. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "工具列右邊的 [搜尋] 欄位可協助您控制套裝軟體清單窗格的內容。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:60(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu below the buttons helps control the content of the package list pane and also enables you to add a new publisher. See <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> “By Publisher.”"
-msgstr "按鈕下方的 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表不但可協助您控制套裝軟體清單窗格的內容，也可讓您增加新的發佈者。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"list-pkg\"/> -「依發佈者」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:62(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu below the Search field helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Package Status.”"
-msgstr "[搜尋] 欄位下方的 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表可協助您控制套裝軟體清單窗格的內容。請參閱「列出套裝軟體」-「依套裝軟體狀態」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:64(para)
-msgid "The category pane below the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu helps control the content of the package list pane. See Listing Packages “By Category.”"
-msgstr "[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表下方的類別窗格可協助您控制套裝軟體清單窗格的內容。請參閱「列出套裝軟體」-「依類別」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:66(para)
-msgid "Below the list of software categories is a list of searches that you have performed in this session."
-msgstr "軟體類別清單下方是您已經在此階段作業中執行的搜尋清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:68(para)
-msgid "Below the package list pane is the package details pane. See <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>."
-msgstr "套裝軟體清單窗格下方是套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"package-version\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:73(title)
-msgid "Managing Packages"
-msgstr "管理套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:74(para)
-msgid "You can list packages according to various criteria. You can install, update, and remove packages."
-msgstr "您可以依據各種條件列出套裝軟體，也可以安裝、更新及移除套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:75(title)
-msgid "Listing Packages"
-msgstr "列出套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:76(para)
-msgid "The list of packages in the Package Manager list pane is affected by the selections you make in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, the <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu, the categories pane, and the Search field."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員清單窗格中顯示的套裝軟體清單會依照您在 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表、[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表、類別窗格與 [搜尋] 欄位中所做的選擇而有所不同。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:77(para)
-msgid "You can reorder the package list by clicking the column headings."
-msgstr "您可以按一下資料欄標題來重新排序套裝軟體清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:78(para)
-msgid "You can use the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to reread repository catalogs and update the list of packages and package status. A refresh also is attempted whenever you open Package Manager."
-msgstr "您可以使用 [<guibutton>重新整理</guibutton>] 按鈕或 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>重新整理</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項來重新讀取儲存庫目錄，以及更新套裝軟體清單與套裝軟體狀態。只要開啟套裝軟體管理員，就會嘗試執行重新整理。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:79(title)
-msgid "By Publisher"
-msgstr "依發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:80(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to publisher."
-msgstr "[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表可讓您依照發佈者列出套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:81(para)
-msgid "The top of the menu lists the name of each publisher that you have added using the Add Publisher dialog or using the <literal>pkg</literal> command. When you select one of these publishers, the package list pane shows only packages that are available from that selected publisher. The package list pane shows only the Name, Status, and Summary columns because the publisher is the same for every package."
-msgstr "功能表頂端會列出您使用 [增加發佈者] 對話方塊或 <literal>pkg</literal> 指令新增的每個發佈者名稱。選取其中一個發佈者後，套裝軟體清單窗格就只會顯示該所選發佈者可使用的套裝軟體。套裝軟體清單窗格只會顯示 [名稱]、[狀態] 及 [摘要] 資料欄，因為每個套裝軟體的發佈者都相同。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:83(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> — Shows packages from all publishers in the package list pane. The package list pane shows columns Name, Status, Publisher, and Summary."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem> — 在套裝軟體清單窗格中顯示所有發佈者的套裝軟體。套裝軟體清單窗格會顯示 [名稱]、[狀態]、[發佈者] 及 [摘要] 資料欄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:84(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all media device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Drivers</guimenu><guimenuitem>Media</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出可從所有發佈者取得可用更新的所有媒體裝置驅動程式，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>]，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>驅動程式</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>媒體</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:86(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages that are installed from all publishers."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 顯示已從所有發佈者安裝的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:87(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, click on the Publisher column heading to sort the list by Publisher, and scroll down to the <literal>solaris</literal> entries."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出目前已從 <literal>solaris</literal> 發佈者安裝的字型套裝軟體，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>所有已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>系統</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>字型</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 類別，按一下 [發佈者] 資料欄標題以依照發佈者排序清單，然後向下捲動至 <literal>solaris</literal> 項目。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:89(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> — Shows an informational message in the package list pane instead of a list of packages. The message lists all publishers that you have configured and reminds you how to view all packages from those publishers. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> for information about searching with <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem> — 在套裝軟體清單窗格中顯示資訊訊息，而非顯示套裝軟體清單。訊息會列出您已經配置的所有發佈者，並提醒您如何檢視來自這些發佈者的所有套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> 瞭解有關使用 [<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem>] 進行搜尋的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:91(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Add...</guimenuitem> — Opens the Add Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>增加...</guimenuitem> — 開啟 [增加發佈者] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:95(title)
-msgid "By Package Status"
-msgstr "依套裝軟體狀態"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:96(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>View</guimenu> drop-down menu enables you to list packages according to package status. Package status can be installed, not installed, or an update is available. The icons displayed on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu match the icons displayed in the Status column of the package list pane."
-msgstr "[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表可讓您依照套裝軟體狀態列出套裝軟體。套裝軟體狀態可能是已安裝、未安裝或有更新可用。[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表中顯示的圖示與套裝軟體清單窗格 [狀態] 資料欄中顯示的圖示相符。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:97(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages available from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>所有套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 顯示可從所選類別的所選發佈者取得的所有套裝軟體，或者是與指定搜尋字串相符的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:98(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all web services packages from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher that are installed, not installed, or have updates available, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>All Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出來自 <literal>solaris</literal> 發佈者且已安裝、未安裝或有可用更新的所有 Web 服務套裝軟體，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 <literal>solaris</literal>，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>Web 服務</guimenu>]</menuchoice> 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>所有套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:101(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all installed packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string. See also the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Installed Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 顯示在所選類別中，來自所選發佈者且您已安裝的所有套裝軟體，或者是與指定搜尋字串相符的所有已安裝套裝軟體。請參閱 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>所有已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:102(para)
-msgid "Example: To list only the web server packages that are installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Web Services</guimenu></menuchoice> category, and select <guimenuitem>Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若只要列出來自 <literal>solaris</literal> 發佈者且已安裝的 Web 伺服器套裝軟體，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 <literal>solaris</literal>，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>Web 服務</guimenu>]</menuchoice> 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>已安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:104(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem> — 顯示在所選類別中，來自所選發佈者且有更新可用的所有套裝軟體，或者是與指定搜尋字串相符且有更新可用的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:105(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all device drivers that have updates available from all publishers, select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenu>Drivers</guimenu> category, and select <guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出可從所有發佈者取得可用更新的所有裝置驅動程式，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>]，選取 [<guimenu>驅動程式</guimenu>] 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:107(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> — Shows all packages from the selected publisher in the selected category or matching the specified search string that are not installed."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>尚未安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 顯示在所選類別中，來自所選發佈者且您尚未安裝的所有套裝軟體，或者是與指定搜尋字串相符且尚未安裝的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:108(para)
-msgid "Example: To list all the font packages that are currently not installed from the <literal>solaris</literal> publisher, select <literal>solaris</literal> from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fonts</guimenuitem></menuchoice> category, and then select <guimenuitem>Not Installed Packages</guimenuitem> from the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "範例：若要列出來自 <literal>solaris</literal> 發佈者且目前尚未安裝的所有字型套裝軟體，請從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選取 <literal>solaris</literal>，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>系統</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>字型</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 類別，然後從 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>尚未安裝的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:110(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem> — Lists all packages that are currently selected. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>選取的套裝軟體</guimenuitem> — 列出目前選取的所有套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:114(title)
-msgid "By Category"
-msgstr "依類別"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:115(para)
-msgid "You can browse the available packages by type of software in the category pane on the left side of the Package Manager window. Click a category name to show subcategories. Packages in the selected category or subcategory are listed in the package list pane according to the selected publisher and package status and the specified search criteria."
-msgstr "您可以在 [套裝軟體管理員] 視窗左側的類別窗格中，依軟體類型瀏覽可用的套裝軟體。按一下類別名稱以顯示子類別。套裝軟體清單窗格中就會依照所選的發佈者、套裝軟體狀態及指定的搜尋條件，列出所選類別或子類別中的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:116(para)
-msgid "In addition to named types of software, the categories pane also enables you to select <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> “Repeat a Previous Search” for information about <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem>."
-msgstr "除了指定的軟體類型之外，類別窗格也可以讓您選取 [<guimenuitem>所有類別</guimenuitem>] 與 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>]。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"search-pkg\"/> -「重複之前的搜尋」，瞭解有關 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>] 的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:119(title)
-msgid "Searching for Packages"
-msgstr "搜尋套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:120(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following two methods to search for packages:"
-msgstr "使用下列兩種方法的其中一種來搜尋套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:121(para)
-msgid "Focus on the package list pane (for example, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Go to package list</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and start typing. As you type, matches are identified among the packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "移至套裝軟體清單窗格 (例如，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>進入套裝軟體列表</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice>) 並開始輸入。系統就會依照您輸入的內容，識別出與套裝軟體清單窗格目前列出的套裝軟體相符的項目。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:123(para)
-msgid "Use the Search field in the tool bar."
-msgstr "使用工具列中的 [搜尋] 欄位。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:126(title)
-msgid "Enter a Search String"
-msgstr "輸入搜尋字串"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:127(para)
-msgid "Enter a string in the Search field and then press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Search field."
-msgstr "在 [搜尋] 欄位中輸入字串並按 Enter 鍵，或按一下 [搜尋] 欄位右側的放大鏡圖示。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:128(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> menu selection — Package Manager searches for the search string in the information about each package from a particular publisher or from all publishers, according to what you have selected on the <guimenu> Publisher</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表選項 — 套裝軟體管理員會依照您在 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 功能表中所做的選擇，從特定發佈者或所有發佈者的每個套裝軟體資訊中搜尋搜尋字串。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:129(para)
-msgid "Search results are the same whether you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>. The difference is that using <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem> is faster because you avoid the delay to load data from all publishers that you incur when you select <guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem>. With <guimenuitem>All Publishers (Search)</guimenuitem>, the search is performed on all publishers without loading data from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "無論您選取的是 [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>] 或 [<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem>]，搜尋結果會是相同的。差異在於使用 [<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem>] 時速度較快，因為可避免選取 [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>] 時載入所有發佈者資料所產生的延遲問題。選取 [<guimenuitem>全部的發佈者 (搜尋)</guimenuitem>] 時，會在所有的發佈者上執行搜尋，但不會載入套裝軟體清單窗格中所有發佈者的資料。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:131(para)
-msgid "<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection — Search results are displayed in the package list pane according to the package status selected on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. You can display different subsets of the same search results in the package list pane by changing the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu selection without redoing the search."
-msgstr "[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選項 — 系統會在套裝軟體清單窗格中，依據您在 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表中選取的套裝軟體狀態顯示搜尋結果。您也可以變更 [<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] 功能表選項，在套裝軟體清單窗格中顯示相同搜尋結果的不同子集，而不需要重新搜尋。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:134(para)
-msgid "Package Manager searches package information including name, summary, description, category, and names of files contained within the package. Only exact matches are found if you do not use wild cards."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員搜尋的套裝軟體資訊包括名稱、摘要、說明、類別與套裝軟體中包含的檔案名稱。如果未使用萬用字元，就只會找出完全相符的項目。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:135(literal)
-msgid "AND"
-msgstr "AND"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:136(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by spaces or by <literal>AND</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">all</emphasis> of the search terms. This is the default search behavior."
-msgstr "當搜尋字詞以空格或 <literal>AND</literal> 運算子分隔時，套裝軟體管理員會搜尋含有<emphasis role=\"strong\">所有</emphasis>搜尋字詞的套裝軟體。這是預設的搜尋運作方式。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:137(para)
-msgid "Example: If the search string is <literal>python book</literal> or <literal>python AND book</literal>, the search results include only packages that contain <emphasis>both</emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis>and</emphasis><literal>book</literal> in their package information. For example, the package <literal>diveintopython</literal>, a book about Python programming, would appear in the search results, but the package <literal>python-26</literal> would not."
-msgstr "範例：如果搜尋字串是 <literal>python book</literal> 或 <literal>python AND book</literal>，搜尋結果只會包含套裝軟體資訊中<emphasis>同時含有 </emphasis><literal>python</literal><emphasis> 和 </emphasis><literal>book</literal> 的套裝軟體。例如，搜尋結果會顯示套裝軟體 <literal>diveintopython</literal> (有關 Python 程式設計的書)，但是不會顯示套裝軟體 <literal>python-26</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:140(term)
-msgid "Double quotation marks"
-msgstr "雙引號"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:141(para)
-msgid "Enclose the search term in double quotation marks to match that search term exactly."
-msgstr "以雙引號括住搜尋字詞，即可比對與搜尋字詞完全相符的字詞。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:142(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> in double quotation marks matches <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal> but does not match <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>."
-msgstr "範例：以雙引號括住的 <literal>\"ethernet driver\"</literal> 會比對 <literal>Fast Ethernet Driver</literal>，但不會比對 <literal>Ethernet Adapter Driver</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:145(term)
-msgid "Wild card"
-msgstr "萬用字元"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:146(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>*</literal> wild card in your search string. Using wild cards can be slower."
-msgstr "您可以在搜尋字串中使用 <literal>*</literal> 萬用字元。使用萬用字元會讓搜尋速度變慢。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:147(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>802.11*</literal> matches <literal>802.11b/g</literal> and <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>."
-msgstr "範例：<literal>802.11*</literal> 會比對 <literal>802.11b/g</literal> 和 <literal>802.11a/b/g</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:148(para)
-msgid "Note that <literal>802.11*</literal> does not match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>. To match <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>, use search string <literal>*802.11*</literal>."
-msgstr "請注意，<literal>802.11*</literal> 不會比對 <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>。若要比對 <literal>IEEE802.11b/g</literal>，請使用搜尋字串 <literal>*802.11*</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:151(literal)
-msgid "OR"
-msgstr "OR"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:152(para)
-msgid "When search terms are separated by <literal>OR</literal>, Package Manager searches for packages that contain <emphasis role=\"strong\">any</emphasis> of the search terms."
-msgstr "當搜尋字詞以 <literal>OR</literal> 運算子分隔時，套裝軟體管理員會搜尋含有<emphasis role=\"strong\">任一</emphasis>搜尋字詞的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:153(para)
-msgid "Example: <literal>python OR book</literal> matches all packages that contain <literal>python</literal> in their package information and all packages that contain <literal>book</literal> in their package information."
-msgstr "範例：<literal>python OR book</literal> 會比對套裝軟體資訊中包含 <literal>python</literal> 的所有套裝軟體，以及套裝軟體資訊中包含 <literal>book</literal> 的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:157(para)
-msgid "You can combine these search string modifiers. You can use AND, OR, doublt quotation marks, and * all in one search string."
-msgstr "您可以結合這些搜尋字串修飾鍵，並在單一搜尋字串中使用 AND、OR、雙引號及 *。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:159(title)
-msgid "Clear the Search Field"
-msgstr "清除搜尋欄位"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:160(para)
-msgid "To clear both the search string and the list of search results, use the Search field or the Edit menu."
-msgstr "若要清除搜尋字串與搜尋結果清單，請使用 [搜尋] 欄位或 [編輯] 功能表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:161(para)
-msgid "In the Search field, click the <literal>X</literal> icon."
-msgstr "在 [搜尋] 欄位中，按一下 <literal>X</literal> 圖示。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:163(para)
-msgid "On the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, select the <guimenuitem>Clear Search</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在 [<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] 功能表中，選取 [<guimenuitem>清除搜尋</guimenuitem>] 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:167(title)
-msgid "Cancel the Search"
-msgstr "取消搜尋"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:168(para)
-msgid "During a search operation, a busy bar displays at the right end of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window. On the right end of the busy bar is an <literal>X</literal> icon. Click the <literal>X</literal> icon in the busy bar to cancel the search in progress."
-msgstr "執行搜尋時，[套裝軟體管理員] 視窗底部狀態列右邊會顯示一個忙碌中狀態列。忙碌中狀態列右邊有一個 <literal>X</literal> 圖示。按一下忙碌中狀態列的 <literal>X</literal> 圖示即可在進行搜尋時取消搜尋。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:170(title)
-msgid "Redisplay Previous Search Results"
-msgstr "重新顯示之前的搜尋結果"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:171(para)
-msgid "Results from searches that you have already performed during the current Package Manager session are saved in <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> in the categories pane."
-msgstr "您在目前的套裝軟體管理員階段作業中已經執行的搜尋結果，會儲存在類別窗格的 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>] 中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:172(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label in the categories pane to display an informational message in the package list pane. The package list pane shows the list of previous search results. Click a \"results\" link to redisplay those results."
-msgstr "在類別窗格中選取 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>] 標籤，即可在套裝軟體清單窗格中顯示資訊訊息。套裝軟體清單窗格會顯示之前搜尋結果的清單。按一下「結果」連結即可重新顯示那些結果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:173(para)
-msgid "Select the arrow to the left of the <guimenuitem>Recent Searches</guimenuitem> label to expand or hide the list of previous search results in the categories pane. Select an item in the list of recent searches to redisplay those search results."
-msgstr "選取 [<guimenuitem>最近的搜尋</guimenuitem>] 標籤左邊的箭頭，即可在類別窗格中展開或隱藏之前搜尋結果的清單。在最近的搜尋清單中選取一個項目，即可重新顯示那些搜尋結果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:174(para)
-msgid "A search that matched no packages does not appear in the recent searches list."
-msgstr "最近的搜尋清單中不會顯示與套裝軟體不相符的搜尋。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:175(para)
-msgid "Selecting the <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> button or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option deletes all recent searches results."
-msgstr "選取 [<guibutton>重新整理</guibutton>] 按鈕或 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>重新整理</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項會刪除所有最近的搜尋結果。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:178(title)
-msgid "Showing More Information"
-msgstr "顯示更多資訊"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:179(para)
-msgid "See more information about a package in the package details pane or on the Package Version Info dialog."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格或 [套裝軟體版本資訊] 對話方塊中查看更多有關套裝軟體的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:180(title)
-msgid "Package Details Pane"
-msgstr "套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:181(para)
-msgid "To show more information about a package, click your left mouse button to highlight the package in the package list. The package details pane below the package list pane shows information such as the latest version available from this publisher, the size of the package, the files in the package, dependencies, and license terms."
-msgstr "若要顯示更多套裝軟體的資訊，請按一下滑鼠左鍵以反白顯示套裝軟體清單中的套裝軟體。套裝軟體清單窗格下方的套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格會顯示相關資訊，例如此發佈者可供使用的最新版本、套裝軟體大小、套裝軟體中的檔案、相依性以及授權條款。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:182(para)
-msgid "If a package has been renamed since it was installed, the Renamed To field on the General tab shows the new name of the package."
-msgstr "如果套裝軟體已經在安裝之後重新命名，[一般] 標籤中的 [重新命名] 欄位就會顯示套裝軟體的新名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:183(para)
-msgid "The Versions tab shows a list of versions of this package that are available for you to install. Select a version from the list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list to install that version. See <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "[版本] 標籤顯示可供您安裝的套裝軟體版本清單。從清單選取版本並按一下清單右邊的 [<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 按鈕，即可安裝該版本。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"install-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:184(para)
-msgid "The package details pane is not displayed if the package list pane contains an informational message."
-msgstr "如果套裝軟體清單窗格包含資訊訊息，就不會顯示套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:186(title)
-msgid "Package Version Info Dialog"
-msgstr "套裝軟體版本資訊對話方塊"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:187(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on a package in the package list to pop up the <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體清單中的套裝軟體上按一下滑鼠右鍵，就會出現 [<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] 快顯功能表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:188(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option either from the pop-up menu or from the menu bar to display a separate window that shows the version of the package that is installed and the latest version that you can install or upgrade to if applicable."
-msgstr "從快顯功能表或功能表列選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>套裝軟體版本資訊</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，即可顯示個別視窗，其中會顯示已經安裝的套裝軟體版本，以及您可以安裝或升級的最新版本 (如果適用)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:191(title)
-msgid "Selecting Packages"
-msgstr "選取套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:192(para)
-msgid "Selected packages can be installed, updated, or removed. To select a package, use the package list pane or the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
-msgstr "您可以安裝、更新或移除選取的套裝軟體。若要選取套裝軟體，請使用套裝軟體清單窗格或 [<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] 功能表。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:193(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, do one of the following actions to select a package. You can select multiple packages."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體清單窗格中，執行下列其中一項動作可選取套裝軟體。您可以選取多個套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:194(para)
-msgid "Click the box to the left of the package name. Click the box again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "按一下套裝軟體名稱左邊的方塊。再按一下方塊即可取消選取套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:196(para)
-msgid "Click the package name one time to highlight the package. Then double-click the highlighted package to select the package. Double-click again to deselect the package."
-msgstr "按一下套裝軟體名稱可將套裝軟體反白顯示。然後按兩下反白顯示的套裝軟體即可選取套裝軟體。再按兩下可取消選取套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:198(para)
-msgid "Click the checkbox icon in the column heading to select all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane. Click the checkbox icon again to deselect all packages currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "按一下資料欄標題中的核取方塊圖示可選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的所有套裝軟體。再按一次核取方塊圖示即可取消選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:201(para)
-msgid "The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu has the following options for selecting packages:"
-msgstr "[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] 功能表包含下列可用來選取套裝軟體的選項："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:202(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>全選</guimenuitem> — 選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:204(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Select Updates</guimenuitem> — Selects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane that have updates available."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>選取更新</guimenuitem> — 選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出且已經有可用更新的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:206(para)
-msgid "<guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> — Deselects all packages that are currently listed in the package list pane."
-msgstr "<guimenuitem>取消全選</guimenuitem> — 取消選取套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的所有套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:209(para)
-msgid "In all cases when you select a package, packages that were previously selected are still selected."
-msgstr "在所有情況下，當您選取套裝軟體時，之前選取的套裝軟體仍會在已選取狀態。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:210(para)
-msgid "The number of packages currently listed in the package list pane and the number of those packages that are selected are shown on the left side of the status bar at the bottom of the Package Manager window."
-msgstr "套裝軟體清單窗格中目前列出的套裝軟體數目以及選取的套裝軟體數目，都會顯示在 [套裝軟體管理員] 視窗底部的狀態列左邊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:211(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Publisher</guimenu><guimenuitem>All Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option, the <guimenuitem>All Categories</guimenuitem> category, and the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Selected Packages</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to list all selected packages from all publishers in the package list pane."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>所有發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項、[<guimenuitem>所有類別</guimenuitem>] 類別，以及 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>選取的套裝軟體</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項，即可在套裝軟體清單窗格中列出所有發佈者的所有選取的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:212(para)
-msgid "A package can be highlighted but not selected. When a package is highlighted, detailed information about that package is displayed in the package details pane below the package list pane. When a package is selected, a check mark displays in the box to the left of the package name. If you want to install, update, or delete a package, make sure a check mark appears in the selection box for that package."
-msgstr "您可以將套裝軟體反白顯示而非選取。將套裝軟體反白顯示時，套裝軟體清單窗格下方的套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格會顯示與該套裝軟體有關的詳細資訊。選取套裝軟體時，套裝軟體名稱左邊的方塊中會顯示一個核取標記。如果您想要安裝、更新或刪除套裝軟體，請確定該套裝軟體的選取方塊中有顯示核取標記。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:214(title)
-msgid "Installing and Updating Packages"
-msgstr "安裝及更新套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:215(para)
-msgid "Before you install or update, check your Optional Components preference settings. Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option. In the Preferences window, select the Optional Components tab. By default, Install all languages, Install all development files, and Install all documentation are selected. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install or deselecting development files, for example. Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to all installed packages as well as future package installations and updates."
-msgstr "在安裝或更新之前，請先檢查 [選擇性元件] 喜好設定。選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>喜好設定</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項。在 [喜好設定] 視窗中，選取 [選擇性元件] 標籤。預設會選取安裝所有語言、安裝所有開發檔案，以及安裝所有文件。例如，您可以選取要安裝的語言子集或取消選取開發檔案，以節省安裝所需空間。按一下 [確定] 按鈕即可儲存您的變更。這些設定會套用到所有已安裝的套裝軟體以及未來的套裝軟體安裝與更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:216(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to install or update a package:"
-msgstr "執行下列步驟可以安裝或更新套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:217(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:239(para)
-msgid "Select the package. See <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>."
-msgstr "選取套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"select-pkg\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:219(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to install or update the package:"
-msgstr "使用下列其中一個方法來安裝或更新套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:220(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "選取工具列中的 [<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:222(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "從功能表列選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>安裝/更新</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:224(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Install/Update</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體名稱上按一下滑鼠右鍵，以顯示 [<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] 快顯功能表。然後選取 [<guimenuitem>安裝/更新</guimenuitem>] 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:226(para)
-msgid "On the Versions tab in the package details pane below the package list pane, select a version from the Version to Install list and click the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> button to the right of the list. The packages in the Version to Install list are available in the repository; they might not be installable. A particular version might not be compatible with other packages that you have installed. If the version that you select is not installable on your system, Package Manager warns you and does not install the package."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體清單窗格下方之套裝軟體詳細資訊窗格的 [版本] 標籤中，從 [要安裝的版本] 清單中選取一個版本，然後按一下清單右邊的 [<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 按鈕。儲存庫中有 [要安裝的版本] 清單中的套裝軟體，但這些套裝軟體可能是無法安裝的。特定的版本可能與已安裝的其他套裝軟體不相容。如果您選取的版本無法在您的系統上安裝，套裝軟體管理員會提出警告而且不會安裝此套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:229(para)
-msgid "If the package is already installed and does not have an update available (see the Status column or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Package Version Info</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option), the <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "如果已經安裝套裝軟體且沒有更新可用 (查看 [狀態] 資料欄或 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>套裝軟體版本資訊</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項)，[<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 選項會變成灰色且無法選取。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:231(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update Confirmation window is displayed. Packages that are not yet installed are listed in the Install Details pane, and packages that are installed are listed in the Update Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to install or update the listed packages."
-msgstr "會顯示 [安裝/更新確認] 視窗。尚未安裝的套裝軟體會列於 [安裝詳細資訊] 窗格中，已安裝的套裝軟體會列於 [更新詳細資訊] 窗格中供您檢視。選取 [<guibutton>繼續</guibutton>] 按鈕可安裝或更新所列的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:232(para)
-msgid "In some cases a license dialog is displayed and you must accept the license to install the package."
-msgstr "在某些情況下，會顯示授權對話方塊，您必須接受授權才能安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:233(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs during package installation, an error dialog is displayed. Messages explain why the install or update failed."
-msgstr "如果安裝套裝軟體時發生錯誤，則會顯示錯誤對話方塊。訊息會說明安裝或更新失敗的原因。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:237(title)
-msgid "Removing Packages"
-msgstr "移除套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:238(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a package:"
-msgstr "執行下列步驟可以移除套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:241(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to remove the package:"
-msgstr "使用下列其中一個方法來移除套裝軟體："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:242(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button in the tool bar."
-msgstr "在工具列選取 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:244(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option from the menu bar."
-msgstr "從功能表列選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>移除</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:246(para)
-msgid "Click your right mouse button on the name of a package to display the pop-up <guimenu>Package</guimenu> menu. Then select the <guimenuitem>Remove</guimenuitem> option."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體名稱上按一下滑鼠右鍵，以顯示 [<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] 快顯功能表。然後選取 [<guimenuitem>移除</guimenuitem>] 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:249(para)
-msgid "If the package is not installed, the Remove option is grayed out and not selectable."
-msgstr "如果您並未安裝該套裝軟體，[移除] 選項會變成灰色且無法選取。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:251(para)
-msgid "The Remove Confirmation window is displayed. Packages to be removed are listed in the Remove Details pane for you to review. Select the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to remove the listed packages."
-msgstr "會顯示 [移除確認] 視窗。要移除的套裝軟體會列在 [移除詳細資訊] 窗格中供您檢視。選取 [<guibutton>繼續</guibutton>] 按鈕，移除列出的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:252(para)
-msgid "If a package cannot be removed because other packages depend on it, you can select the <guibutton>Remove Continue</guibutton> option to attempt to remove any remaining packages that you originally selected for removal."
-msgstr "如果某套裝軟體因其他套裝軟體依賴它而無法移除，您可以選取 [<guibutton>繼續移除</guibutton>] 選項，嘗試移除原先選取要移除的所有其餘套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:257(title)
-msgid "Updating Your System"
-msgstr "更新您的系統"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:258(para)
-msgid "When certain key packages such as some drivers and other kernel components are updated, the system performs the following actions:"
-msgstr "更新某些重要套裝軟體 (例如部分驅動程式和其他核心元件) 時，系統會執行下列動作："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:259(para)
-msgid "Creates a clone of the current boot environment (BE)."
-msgstr "建立目前啟動環境 (BE) 的複製。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:261(para)
-msgid "Updates the packages in the clone, and does not update any packages in the current BE."
-msgstr "更新複製中的套裝軟體，但不要更新目前 BE 中的任何套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:263(para)
-msgid "Sets the new BE to be the default boot choice the next time the system is rebooted. The current BE remains as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "將新的 BE 設定為下次系統重新開機時的預設啟動選項。而目前的 BE 仍為替代的啟動選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:266(title)
-msgid "Updating All Packages"
-msgstr "更新所有套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:267(para)
-msgid "When you select the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button in the tool bar or the <menuchoice><guimenu>Package</guimenu><guimenuitem>Updates</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option, Package Manager updates all installed packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "在工具列選取 [<guibutton>更新</guibutton>] 按鈕，或選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>套裝軟體</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>更新</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項時，套裝軟體管理員會更新有可用更新的所有已安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:268(para)
-msgid "All packages that have updates available from their current publisher are updated. If a package has an update available from a different publisher in your publisher list, that package is updated only if its current publisher is configured as non-sticky. If its current publisher is configured as sticky, then that package is not updated."
-msgstr "會更新可從目前發佈者取得可用更新的所有套裝軟體。如果發佈者清單中的其他發佈者也提供該套裝軟體的可用更新，只有當目前發佈者配置為非固定發佈者時，才能更新該套裝軟體。如果目前發佈者配置為固定發佈者，則不會更新該套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:269(para)
-msgid "The Updates window displays, and the update process starts:"
-msgstr "會顯示 [更新] 視窗，並開始更新程序："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:270(para)
-msgid "The system refreshes all catalogs."
-msgstr "系統會重新整理所有目錄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:272(para)
-msgid "The system evaluates all installed packages to determine which packages have updates available."
-msgstr "系統會評估所有已安裝的套裝軟體，判斷哪些套裝軟體有可用的更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:273(para)
-msgid "If no packages have updates available, the message “No Updates Available” is displayed and processing stops."
-msgstr "如果套裝軟體沒有可用的更新，會顯示「沒有可用更新」訊息並停止處理。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:275(para)
-msgid "If package updates are available, the packages to be updated are listed for your review. This is your last chance to click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to abort the update."
-msgstr "如果套裝軟體有可用更新，會列出要更新的套裝軟體供您檢視。這是您最後一次可按一下 [<guibutton>取消</guibutton>] 按鈕中斷更新的機會。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:279(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the update."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>繼續</guibutton>] 按鈕繼續更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:280(para)
-msgid "The system might create a new boot environment (BE), as described in <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> above, depending on which packages are being updated."
-msgstr "視已更新的套裝軟體而定，系統可能會建立新的啟動環境 (BE)，如以上 <xref linkend=\"update_all\"/> 所述。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:281(para)
-msgid "If the system determined that a new BE is required but was not able to create a new BE, an error message is displayed. If the problem is not enough disk space, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "如果系統判斷需要建立新的 BE，但卻無法建立新的 BE，則會顯示錯誤訊息。如果問題是磁碟空間不足，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:282(para)
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to cancel the Updates process."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>關閉</guibutton>]，取消更新程序。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:284(para)
-msgid "Follow the instructions in <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> to remove a BE that is no longer needed."
-msgstr "遵循 <xref linkend=\"remove-be\"/> 中的說明，移除不再需要的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:286(para)
-msgid "Select <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> again to restart the Updates process."
-msgstr "再次選取 [<guibutton>更新</guibutton>] 重新啟動更新程序。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:290(para)
-msgid "The system downloads all package updates."
-msgstr "系統會下載所有套裝軟體更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:292(para)
-msgid "The system installs the package updates. If a cloned BE was created, the updates are installed in the clone. If no clone was created, the updates are installed in the current BE."
-msgstr "系統會安裝套裝軟體更新。如果已建立複製的 BE，更新會安裝在複製中。如果未建立複製，更新會安裝在目前的 BE 中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:293(para)
-msgid "If an error occurs at any time during the update process, the Details panel is expanded and the details of the error are displayed. An error status indicator is shown next to the failed stage."
-msgstr "如果在更新程序中的任何時間發生錯誤，即會展開 [詳細資訊] 面板，並顯示錯誤的詳細資訊。失敗的階段旁會顯示錯誤狀態指示器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:295(para)
-msgid "If the system created a new BE for the update, you can edit the default BE name. When you are satisfied with the BE name, click the <guibutton>Restart Now</guibutton> button to reboot your system immediately. Click the <guibutton>Restart Later</guibutton> button to restart your system at a later time. You must restart to boot into the new BE. The new BE will be your default boot choice. Your current BE will be available as an alternate boot choice."
-msgstr "如果系統已建立一個用於更新的新 BE，您可以編輯預設的 BE 名稱。當您滿意 BE 名稱時，按一下 [<guibutton>立即重新啟動</guibutton>] 按鈕，立刻重新啟動系統。按一下 [<guibutton>稍後重新啟動</guibutton>] 按鈕，稍後再重新啟動系統。您必須重新啟動系統，以便在啟動後進入新 BE。新 BE 會是您預設的啟動選項。目前的 BE 可做為替代的啟動選項使用。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:299(title)
-msgid "Using Update Manager"
-msgstr "使用更新管理員"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:300(para)
-msgid "You can open Update Manager from a system notification or from the desktop menu bar. Update Manager executes the same process as described above in <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/>."
-msgstr "您可以從系統通知或從桌面功能表列開啟更新管理員。更新管理員會執行上述 <xref linkend=\"um_info\"/> 中的相同程序。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:301(title)
-msgid "Software Updates Notification"
-msgstr "軟體更新通知"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:302(para)
-msgid "The system periodically checks whether updates are available for any of your installed packages. If the system detects that updates are available, an Updates Available notification icon and popup are displayed in the system notification tray. Click the notification icon to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "系統會定期檢查是否有適用於您已安裝的套裝軟體的可用更新。如果系統偵測到有可用更新，可用更新通知圖示和快顯功能表會顯示在系統通知匣中。按一下通知圖示即可開啟更新管理員。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:304(title)
-msgid "Desktop System Menu"
-msgstr "Desktop System 功能表"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:305(para)
-msgid "Select <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Administration</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Update Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu bar on the desktop to open Update Manager."
-msgstr "從桌面的功能表列上選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>系統</guimenu>] [<guisubmenu>管理</guisubmenu>] [<guimenuitem>更新管理員</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice>，以開啟更新管理員。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:309(title)
-msgid "Managing Publishers"
-msgstr "管理發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:310(para)
-msgid "You can add, modify, and remove IPS package publishers. You can change the priority of a publisher, change the enabled and sticky settings, change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, and add or remove a publisher mirror. You can manage keys, certificates, and signature policy."
-msgstr "您可以增加、修改和移除 IPS 套裝軟體發佈者。您可以變更發佈者的優先權、變更已啟用和固定設定、變更發佈者別名、增加或移除發佈者原始，以及增加或移除發佈者鏡像。您可以管理金鑰、憑證和簽名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:311(para)
-msgid "Note that system publishers are an exception. System publishers can only be viewed in the Manage Publishers window. System publishers cannot be removed or modified, and you cannot change their priority. See <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>. The Details pane indicates whether the selected publisher is a system publisher."
-msgstr "請注意，系統發佈者為例外狀況。只能在「管理發佈者」視窗中檢視系統發佈者。您無法移除或修改系統發佈者，也不能變更其優先權。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"glossary\"/>。[詳細資訊] 窗格會指出所選的發佈者是否為系統發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:312(title)
-msgid "Adding Publishers"
-msgstr "增加發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:313(para)
-msgid "To add an IPS package publisher, use the Add Publisher window. To open the Add Publisher window, do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "若要增加 IPS 套裝軟體發佈者，請使用 [增加發佈者] 視窗。若要開啟 [增加發佈者] 視窗，請執行下列其中一個動作："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:314(para)
-msgid "Select the <guimenuitem>Add</guimenuitem> option from the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "從 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表選取 [<guimenuitem>增加</guimenuitem>] 選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:316(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Publisher</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>增加發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:318(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. In the Manage Publishers window, select the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項。在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中，選取 [<guibutton>增加</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:321(para)
-msgid "In the Add Publisher window, perform the following steps to add an IPS package publisher:"
-msgstr "在 [增加發佈者] 視窗中，執行下列步驟以增加 IPS 套裝軟體發佈者："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:322(para)
-msgid "In the URI field, enter the URI of the publisher. The URI is a network location such as <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> or <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>."
-msgstr "在 URI 欄位中，輸入發佈者的 URI。URI 是一個網路位置，例如 <literal>http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/</literal> 或 <literal>http://localhost:5555</literal>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:324(para)
-msgid "In the Alias field, you can enter an alternate name for this publisher."
-msgstr "在 [別名] 欄位中，您可以輸入此發佈者的替代名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:326(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>增加</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:328(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher dialog is displayed. Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the process. Click Details to view verbose information."
-msgstr "會顯示 [增加發佈者] 對話方塊。按一下 [<guibutton>取消</guibutton>] 可取消程序。按一下 [詳細資訊] 可檢視詳細資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:329(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is added successfully, the Adding Publisher Complete dialog is displayed and shows the new publisher name, alias, and URI."
-msgstr "如果已成功增加新的發佈者，會顯示 [增加發佈者完成] 對話方塊，並顯示新的發佈者名稱、別名和 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:331(para)
-msgid "If the new publisher is not added, the Publisher Error dialog is displayed with information about the problem."
-msgstr "如果未增加新的發佈者，會顯示 [發佈者發生錯誤] 對話方塊，內含關於此問題的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:336(para)
-msgid "The new publisher is the last publisher listed in the Manage Publishers window and is enabled and sticky."
-msgstr "新的發佈者是列於 [管理發佈者] 視窗中的最新發佈者，而且已啟用和固定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:337(para)
-msgid "See <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> for information about changing the priority of the new publisher, changing the enabled and sticky settings, changing the publisher alias, adding a publisher origin, setting an SSL key and certificate, adding a publisher mirror, and managing publisher certificates and signature policy."
-msgstr "請參閱 <xref linkend=\"modify-publisher\"/> 以瞭解變更新發佈者的優先權、變更已啟用和固定設定、變更發佈者別名、增加發佈者原始、設定 SSL 金鑰和憑證、增加發佈者鏡像，以及管理發佈者憑證和簽名策略的相關資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:339(title)
-msgid "Modifying Publishers"
-msgstr "修改發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:340(para)
-msgid "To modify the attributes of a publisher, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option. Currently configured publishers are listed in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "若要修改發佈者屬性，選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項。目前配置的發佈者會列於 [管理發佈者] 視窗中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:341(para)
-msgid "In the Manage Publishers window you can change the priority of a publisher, enable or disable a publisher, set the publisher to be sticky or non-sticky, and remove a publisher. See <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> and <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>."
-msgstr "在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中，您可以變更發佈者的優先權、啟用或停用發佈者、設定發佈者為固定或非固定以及移除發佈者。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"priority-stickiness\"/> 和 <xref linkend=\"remove-publisher\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:342(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to open the Modify Publisher window. In the Modify Publisher window you can change the publisher alias, add or remove a publisher origin, add or remove a publisher mirror, set an SSL key and certificate, and manage publisher certificates and signature policy. See <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> and <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕開啟 [修改發佈者] 視窗。在 [修改發佈者] 視窗中，您可以變更發佈者別名、增加或移除發佈者原始、增加或移除發佈者鏡像、設定 SSL 金鑰和憑證，以及管理發佈者憑證和簽名策略。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"origin-mirror\"/> 和 <xref linkend=\"pub-security\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:343(title)
-msgid "Changing Priority and Stickiness"
-msgstr "變更優先權和固定性"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:344(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to display the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，以顯示 [管理發佈者] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:345(title)
-msgid "Publisher Priority"
-msgstr "發佈者優先權"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:346(para)
-msgid "Publishers are listed in priority order in the Manage Publishers window. The publisher at the top of the list is the highest priority publisher. The publisher at the bottom of the list is the lowest priority publisher."
-msgstr "[管理發佈者] 視窗中會依照優先順序列出發佈者。清單最上方的發佈者為優先權最高的發佈者。清單最下方的發佈者為優先權最低的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:347(para)
-msgid "The publisher at the top of the list is also known as the preferred publisher."
-msgstr "清單最上方的發佈者也稱為喜好的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:348(para)
-msgid "The preferred publisher cannot be disabled or removed."
-msgstr "無法停用或移除喜好的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:349(para)
-msgid "When you search for packages and do not specify a publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first."
-msgstr "當您搜尋套裝軟體而且未指定發佈者時，會先搜尋優先權較高的發佈者目錄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:350(para)
-msgid "When you update a package that was installed from a non-sticky publisher, the catalogs of higher priority publishers are searched first for updates."
-msgstr "當您更新非固定發佈者安裝的套裝軟體時，會先搜尋優先權較高的發佈者目錄以進行更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:352(para)
-msgid "To change the priority of a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要變更發佈者優先權，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:353(para)
-msgid "Click to highlight a publisher row in the list in the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中，按一下以反白顯示清單中的發佈者列。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:355(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons to the right of the publisher list to increase or reduce the priority of the selected publisher. The selected publisher listing moves up and down in the list to show its new priority."
-msgstr "按一下發佈者清單右方的 [<guibutton>向上</guibutton>] 和 [<guibutton>向下</guibutton>] 按鈕，提高或降低所選發佈者的優先權。所選發佈者在清單中的位置會往上或往下移動，以顯示其新的優先權。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:356(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, then the <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> buttons are disabled. You cannot change the priority of a system publisher. Because you cannot change the priority of a system publisher, you cannot lower the priority of the publisher that is the next higher priority above a system publisher, and you cannot raise the priority of a publisher that is the next lower priority below a system publisher."
-msgstr "如果所選的發佈者是系統發佈者，則會停用 [<guibutton>向上</guibutton>] 和 [<guibutton>向下</guibutton>] 按鈕。您無法變更系統發佈者的優先權。因為無法變更系統發佈者的優先權，所以您不能降低位於系統發佈者上一個較高優先權的發佈者優先權，也不能提高位於系統發佈者下一個較低優先權的發佈者優先權。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:357(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:370(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:448(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:473(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:491(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:504(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:518(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "按一下 [管理發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:361(title)
-msgid "Enabled and Sticky"
-msgstr "已啟用和固定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:362(para)
-msgid "When you add a publisher, the enabled and sticky attributes are set by default. The preferred publisher (see <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/> above) cannot be disabled. A system publisher cannot be disabled, and the sticky setting of a system publisher cannot be changed. All other enabled and sticky settings can be changed."
-msgstr "當您增加發佈者，預設會設定已啟用和固定屬性。無法停用喜好的發佈者 (請參閱上述的 <xref linkend=\"set-pub-order\"/>)。您無法停用系統發佈者，而且無法變更系統發佈者的固定設定。可變更所有其他已啟用和固定設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:363(para)
-msgid "If the sticky attribute is set for a publisher, then a package that was installed from that publisher cannot be updated from a different publisher. If the sticky attribute is not set for a publisher, then that publisher is non-sticky. If a publisher is non-sticky, then a package that originally came from that publisher can be updated from another publisher. A different publisher might have a newer version of a package than the original publisher of the package. If you want to update to that newer version, the original publisher needs to be non-sticky. Also, if a lower priority publisher is non-sticky, then higher-priority publishers will be searched first for updates for packages installed from that non-sticky publisher."
-msgstr "如果已針對發佈者設定固定屬性，則無法從不同發佈者更新該發佈者所安裝的套裝軟體。如果未針對發佈者設定固定屬性，則該發佈者為非固定。如果發佈者為非固定，則可透過另一個發佈者更新原先由該發佈者安裝的套裝軟體。不同發佈者的套裝軟體版本可能會比原始發佈者的套裝軟體版本還要新。如果您要更新成較新的版本，原始發佈者需要為非固定。此外，如果較低優先權發佈者為非固定，會為該非固定發佈者安裝的套裝軟體先搜尋較高優先權發佈者以進行更新。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:364(para)
-msgid "A publisher that is disabled is not searched for updates or for packages to install. Catalogs of a disabled publisher are not refreshed. A disabled publisher is not shown on the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu."
-msgstr "不會搜尋停用的發佈者進行更新或安裝套裝軟體。不會重新整理停用的發佈者目錄。[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表不會顯示停用的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:365(para)
-msgid "To change the Enabled and Sticky settings for a publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要變更發佈者的已啟用和固定設定，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:366(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:376(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:455(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:511(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Publishers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理發佈者</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，以開啟 [管理發佈者] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:368(para)
-msgid "Click an Enabled box or a Sticky box to toggle its setting."
-msgstr "按一下 [已啟用] 方塊或 [固定] 方塊以切換其設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:375(title)
-msgid "Changing Alias, Origins, and Mirrors"
-msgstr "變更別名、原始和鏡像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:378(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher you want to modify. The Details pane below the publisher list in the Manage Publishers window displays the current origins for the selected publisher."
-msgstr "選取您要修改的發佈者。[詳細資訊] 窗格 (位於 [管理發佈者] 視窗的發佈者清單下方) 會顯示所選發佈者的目前原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:380(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下發佈者清單右方的 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕，以開啟 [修改發佈者] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:381(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "如果所選的發佈者是系統發佈者，則會停用 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕。[詳細資訊] 窗格會指出所選的發佈者為系統發佈者，並顯示無法修改或移除此發佈者的訊息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:383(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to modify the publisher alias, add and remove origins, and add and remove mirrors."
-msgstr "選取 [一般] 標籤修改發佈者別名、增加和移除原始，以及增加和移除鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:385(title)
-msgid "Publisher Alias"
-msgstr "發佈者別名"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:386(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias is another name for the publisher. The alias name is used in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu and in the package list pane."
-msgstr "發佈者別名是發佈者的另一個名稱。別名名稱用於 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表和套裝軟體清單窗格。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:387(para)
-msgid "To change the alias of this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要變更此發佈者的別名，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:388(para)
-msgid "On the General tab of the Modify Publisher window, enter a new name in the Alias field."
-msgstr "在 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [一般] 標籤上，於 [別名] 欄位中輸入新名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:390(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:418(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:446(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:472(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:490(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:503(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:392(para)
-msgid "The publisher alias has changed in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "[管理發佈者] 視窗中的發佈者別名已變更。按一下 [管理發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:396(title)
-msgid "Publisher Origins"
-msgstr "發佈者原始"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:397(para)
-msgid "An origin is the location of an IPS package repository or archive that contains both package metadata (package manifests and catalogs) and package content (package files)."
-msgstr "原始是 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫的位置，或是包含套裝軟體中介資料 (套裝軟體清單和目錄) 以及套裝軟體內容 (套裝軟體檔案) 的歸檔。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:398(para)
-msgid "An origin value is the URI of an IPS package repository."
-msgstr "原始值是 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:399(para)
-msgid "To change, add, or remove an origin for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要變更、增加或移除此發佈者的原始，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:400(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:427(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "選取 [修改發佈者] 視窗中的 [一般] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:401(para)
-msgid "Add an origin."
-msgstr "增加原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:402(para)
-msgid "In the Origin field, enter the URI of the new origin you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "在 [原始] 欄位中，輸入您要與此發佈者建立關聯的新原始 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:403(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Origin field."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>增加</guibutton>] 按鈕。新的 URI 會新增至 [原始] 欄位下方的清單中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:406(para)
-msgid "Remove an origin."
-msgstr "移除原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:407(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Origin field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "在 [原始] 欄位下方的清單中，選取您要刪除的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:408(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list. If only one origin is defined for this publisher, you cannot remove that origin."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。所選的 URI 會從清單中移除。如果此發佈者只定義一個原始，則您無法移除該原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:411(para)
-msgid "Change an origin."
-msgstr "變更原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:412(para)
-msgid "Add the new origin."
-msgstr "新增原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:413(para)
-msgid "Delete the origin you want to change."
-msgstr "刪除您要變更的原始。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:420(para)
-msgid "The origin changes are reflected in the Details pane in the Manage Publishers window. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Manage Publishers window."
-msgstr "原始的變更會反映在 [管理發佈者] 視窗的 [詳細資訊] 窗格中。按一下 [管理發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:424(title)
-msgid "Publisher Mirrors"
-msgstr "發佈者鏡像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:425(para)
-msgid "A mirror is a location of an IPS package repository that contains only package content (package files). A mirror does not contain package metadata (package manifests and catalogs). Mirrors provide a subset of the data that origins provide. Mirrors can be used only for downloading package files. Package metadata is downloaded from the origin. IPS clients access the origin to obtain a publisher's catalog, even when the clients download package content from a mirror."
-msgstr "鏡像是僅包含套裝軟體內容 (套裝軟體檔案) 的 IPS 套裝軟體儲存庫位置。鏡像不包含套裝軟體中介資料 (套裝軟體清單和目錄)。鏡像提供原始所提供的資料子集。鏡像只能用來下載套裝軟體檔案。套裝軟體中介資料是從原始下載。即使用戶端從鏡像下載套裝軟體內容，IPS 用戶端仍會存取原始以取得發佈者目錄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:426(para)
-msgid "To add, remove, or change a mirror for this publisher, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要增加、移除或變更此發佈者的鏡像，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:428(para)
-msgid "Click the Mirrors label to display the Mirror field and the list of mirrors."
-msgstr "按一下 [鏡像] 標籤以顯示 [鏡像] 欄位和鏡像清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:429(para)
-msgid "Add a mirror."
-msgstr "增加鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:430(para)
-msgid "In the Mirror field, enter the URI of the new mirror you want to associate with this publisher."
-msgstr "在 [鏡像] 欄位中，輸入您要與此發佈者建立關聯的新鏡像 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:431(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. The new URI is added to the list below the Mirror field."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>增加</guibutton>] 按鈕。新的 URI 會新增至 [鏡像] 欄位下方的清單中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:434(para)
-msgid "Remove a mirror."
-msgstr "移除鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:435(para)
-msgid "In the list below the Mirror field, select the URI you want to delete."
-msgstr "在 [鏡像] 欄位下方的清單中，選取您要刪除的 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:436(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. The selected URI is removed from the list."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。選取的 URI 便會從清單中移除。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:439(para)
-msgid "Change a mirror."
-msgstr "變更鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:440(para)
-msgid "Delete the mirror you want to change."
-msgstr "刪除您要變更的鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:441(para)
-msgid "Add a new mirror."
-msgstr "增加新鏡像。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:453(title)
-msgid "Managing Publisher Security"
-msgstr "管理發佈者安全性"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:454(para)
-msgid "Certificates are used to verify that packages have been appropriately signed before being installed, depending on the signature policy of the image or the publisher, whichever is more restrictive."
-msgstr "憑證可用來確認套裝軟體在安裝前已正確地簽名，判斷的方式取決於影像或發佈者的簽名策略 (以較嚴格的為準)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:457(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher whose security you want to modify."
-msgstr "選取想要修改其安全性的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:459(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list to open the Modify Publisher window. The publisher that was selected in the Manage Publishers window is listed in the title of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下發佈者清單右方的 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕，以開啟 [修改發佈者] 視窗。在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中所選取的發佈者會列在 [修改發佈者] 視窗標題中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:460(para)
-msgid "Select the General tab to add the SSL key and SSL certificate if a publisher has a secure origin."
-msgstr "選取 [一般] 標籤以增加 SSL 金鑰和 SSL 憑證 (如果發佈者有安全的原始)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:461(para)
-msgid "Select the Certificates tab to manage certificates for this publisher."
-msgstr "選取 [憑證] 標籤以管理此發佈者的憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:462(para)
-msgid "Select the Signature Policy tab to manage signature policy for this publisher."
-msgstr "選取 [簽名策略] 標籤以管理此發佈者的簽名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:466(title)
-msgid "Adding SSL Keys and Certificates"
-msgstr "增加 SSL 金鑰和憑證"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:467(para)
-msgid "If a publisher has a secure origin, add the SSL key and SSL certificate for the publisher."
-msgstr "如果發佈者有安全的原始，請增加該發佈者的 SSL 金鑰和 SSL 憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:468(para)
-msgid "Click the General tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗中的 [一般] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:469(para)
-msgid "Click the SSL Key and Certificate label to display the SSL Key field and the SSL Certificate field."
-msgstr "按一下 [SSL 金鑰和憑證] 標籤，顯示 [SSL 金鑰] 欄位和 [SSL 憑證] 欄位。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:470(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Key field to select the SSL Key file."
-msgstr "按一下 [SSL 金鑰] 欄位右方的 [<guibutton>瀏覽</guibutton>] 按鈕，選取 SSL 金鑰檔案。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:471(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to the right of the SSL Certificate field to select the SSL Certificate file."
-msgstr "按一下 [SSL 憑證] 欄位右方的 [<guibutton>瀏覽</guibutton>] 按鈕，選取 SSL 憑證檔案。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:476(title)
-msgid "Managing Certificates"
-msgstr "管理憑證"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:477(para)
-msgid "Click the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗中的 [憑證] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:478(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons below the list of certificates to add a certificate or to remove, revoke, or reinstate the certificate that is currently selected in the list."
-msgstr "使用憑證清單下的按鈕來增加憑證，或者是移除、撤銷或復原目前清單中所選取的憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:479(para)
-msgid "Note that any actions you take in the Modify Publisher window are applied to the selected publisher's certificates only after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Modify Publisher window. If you click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, no changes are applied."
-msgstr "請注意，您在 [修改發佈者] 視窗中所做的動作只有在您按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕後，才會套用至所選發佈者的憑證。如果按一下 [<guibutton>取消</guibutton>] 按鈕，則不會套用變更。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:480(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Add a new publisher certificate for the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title. In the Add Publisher Certificate window, browse to select the certificate (<tt>.pem</tt>) file. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Add Publisher Certificate window. The newly added certificate is selected in the certificates list in the Certificates tab of the Modify Publisher window. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be added.\" This certificate will be added after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>增加</guibutton>。針對 [修改發佈者] 視窗標題中所列出的發佈者，增加一個新的發佈者憑證。在 [增加發佈者憑證] 視窗中，瀏覽並選取憑證 (<tt>.pem</tt>) 檔案。按一下 [增加發佈者憑證] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。新增加的憑證會在 [修改發佈者] 視窗 [憑證] 標籤的憑證清單中呈現選取狀態。詳細資訊窗格會指出此憑證 [標示為要新增]。此憑證將在您按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕後新增。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:483(para)
-msgid "In the list of certificates for this publisher, select the certificate you want to modify or whose details you want to check. Details about the selected certificate are shown below the list of certificates and row of buttons. Note that an expired certificate can still be Approved and used to validate signed packages that were published (not necessarily installed) before the certificate expired."
-msgstr "在此發佈者的憑證清單中，選取您要修改或要檢查其詳細資訊的憑證。所選憑證的詳細資訊會顯示在憑證清單和按鈕列下方。請注意，過期的憑證仍可以是 [已核准] 狀態，可用來驗證憑證過期前所發佈 (不一定要安裝) 的含簽名套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:484(para)
-msgid "Click the headings of the list of certificates to resort the list. The Organization and Name columns are resizable."
-msgstr "按一下憑證清單的標題來重新排序清單。您可以調整 [組織] 和 [名稱] 資料欄的大小。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:485(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>. Remove the certificate that is currently selected in the certificates list."
-msgstr "<guibutton>移除</guibutton>。移除目前在憑證清單中選取的憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:486(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Revoke</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Approved, click the <guibutton>Revoke</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as revoked. In the certificates list, the Status of this certificate changes to Revoked. This change is applied to the certificate after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>撤銷</guibutton>。如果目前在憑證清單中選取的憑證為 [已核准]，請按一下 [<guibutton>撤銷</guibutton>] 按鈕，將此憑證視為撤銷的憑證。在憑證清單中，此憑證的狀態會變更為 [已撤銷]。按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕後，便會將此變更套用至該憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:487(para)
-msgid "<guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton>. If the certificate currently selected in the certificates list is Revoked, click the <guibutton>Reinstate</guibutton> button to treat this certificate as approved. The details pane indicates that this certificate is \"marked to be reinstated.\" This certificate will be reinstated after you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button on the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "<guibutton>復原</guibutton>。如果目前在憑證清單中選取的憑證為 [已撤銷]，請按一下 [<guibutton>復原</guibutton>] 按鈕，將此憑證視為核准的憑證。詳細資訊窗格會指出此憑證 [標示為要復原]。按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕後，便會復原此憑證。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:494(title)
-msgid "Managing Signature Policy"
-msgstr "管理簽名策略"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:495(para)
-msgid "Click the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "按一下 [修改發佈者] 視窗中的 [簽名策略] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:496(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to set the signature policy to use when installing packages from the publisher listed in the Modify Publisher window title."
-msgstr "安裝 [修改發佈者] 視窗標題中列出之發佈者的套裝軟體時，請使用 [簽名策略] 標籤中的按鈕來設定要使用的簽名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:497(para)
-msgid "To set the global signature policy, use the Signature Policy tab of the Preferences window (see <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)."
-msgstr "若要設定全域簽名策略，請使用 [喜好設定] 視窗中的 [簽名策略] 標籤 (請參閱 <xref linkend=\"img-sig-policy\"/>)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:498(para)
-msgid "Signatures are ignored: Ignore signatures for all packages."
-msgstr "忽略簽名：忽略所有套裝軟體的簽名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:499(para)
-msgid "Signatures are optional, but must be valid if provided: Verify that all packages with signatures are validly signed, but do not require all installed packages to be signed."
-msgstr "簽名是選擇性的，但如果提供，必須有效：請確認含簽名的所有套裝軟體皆使用有效簽名，但並不要求所有已安裝的套裝軟體都必須含簽名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:500(para)
-msgid "One or more valid signatures are required: Require that all newly installed packages have at least one valid signature."
-msgstr "需要一或多個有效簽名：要求所有新安裝的套裝軟體至少有一個有效簽名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:501(para)
-msgid "Signatures are required and the certificate name must include the name or names specified in the text field when validating the signatures of a package. If more than one name is specified, the names must be comma-separated."
-msgstr "需要簽名，且憑證名稱必須包括驗證套裝軟體簽名時在文字欄位指定的名稱。如果指定多個名稱，名稱必須使用逗號分隔。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:509(title)
-msgid "Removing Publishers"
-msgstr "移除發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:510(para)
-msgid "Perform the following steps to remove a publisher:"
-msgstr "執行下列步驟可以移除發佈者："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:513(para)
-msgid "Select the publisher that you want to remove."
-msgstr "選取想要移除的發佈者。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:515(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to the right of the publisher list."
-msgstr "按一下發佈者清單右方的 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:516(para)
-msgid "If the selected publisher is a system publisher, the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button is disabled. The Details pane indicates that the selected publisher is a system publisher and displays a message that this publisher cannot be modified or removed."
-msgstr "如果所選的發佈者是系統發佈者，則會停用 [<guibutton>移除</guibutton>] 按鈕。[詳細資訊] 窗格會指出所選的發佈者為系統發佈者，並顯示訊息無法修改或移除此發佈者的訊息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:523(title)
-msgid "Managing Boot Environments"
-msgstr "管理啟動環境"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:524(para)
-msgid "A boot environment (BE) is a bootable image. You can maintain multiple BEs on your Oracle Solaris system. One BE is the default BE at startup or reboot. Other BEs are available as alternate boot selections. The BE you are booted into is the active BE."
-msgstr "啟動環境 (BE) 是可啟動的影像。您可以在 Oracle Solaris 系統上維護多個 BE。其中一個 BE 會是啟動或重新開機時使用的預設 BE。其他 BE 則為替代的啟動選項。您啟動的 BE 即為使用中 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:525(para)
-msgid "You can use the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command to create, rename, mount, unmount, activate, or destroy BEs. For complete information about BEs, see <citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>."
-msgstr "您可以使用 <literal>beadm</literal>(1) 指令來建立、重新命名、掛載、卸載、啟用或銷毀 BE。如需有關 BE 的完整資訊，請參閱「<citetitle>Creating and Managing Boot Environments After Installation</citetitle>」。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:526(para)
-msgid "Package Manager provides a subset of the functionality that the <literal>beadm</literal>(1) command provides. Use the Package Manager <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. The Manage Boot Environments window lists the BEs on this system and enables you to activate, rename, and delete those BEs as described below."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員可提供您 <literal>beadm</literal>(1) 指令所提供的功能子集。使用套裝軟體管理員 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理啟動環境</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項，開啟 [管理啟動環境] 視窗。[管理啟動環境] 視窗會列出此系統上的 BE，讓您可以啟用、重新命名及刪除這些 BE (如下所述)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:527(title)
-msgid "Creating a BE"
-msgstr "建立 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:528(para)
-msgid "A new BE is automatically created when you do one of the following actions:"
-msgstr "執行下列其中一個動作時，會自動建立新的 BE："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:529(para)
-msgid "Install the Oracle Solaris OS."
-msgstr "安裝 Oracle Solaris 作業系統。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:531(para)
-msgid "Install or update particular key system packages such as some drivers and other kernel components."
-msgstr "安裝或更新特定的重要系統套裝軟體 (例如部分驅動程式和其他核心元件)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:533(para)
-msgid "Use the <literal>beadm create</literal> command."
-msgstr "使用 <literal>beadm create</literal> 指令。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:536(para)
-msgid "Often a new BE is created when you execute the <literal>pkg update</literal> command or use the <guibutton>Updates</guibutton> button to update all packages that have updates available."
-msgstr "當您執行 <literal>pkg update</literal> 指令，或是使用 [<guibutton>更新</guibutton>] 按鈕更新有可用更新的所有套裝軟體時，通常會建立新的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:538(title)
-msgid "Activating a BE"
-msgstr "啟用 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:539(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The BE that you are currently booted into shows a check mark to the left of the BE name."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理啟動環境</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，開啟 [管理啟動環境] 視窗。視窗中會列出每個 BE。目前啟動的 BE 會在 BE 名稱的左側顯示核取標記。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:540(para)
-msgid "To specify a different BE to be the default active BE after the next reboot, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要指定另一個 BE 做為下次重新開機時的預設使用中 BE，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:541(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Active on Reboot</guibutton> button for the BE that you want to be the default active BE after the next reboot."
-msgstr "在下次重新開機時要做為預設使用中 BE 的 BE，選取 [<guibutton>在重開機時啟動</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:543(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:556(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:568(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button in the Manage Boot Environments window."
-msgstr "在 [管理啟動環境] 視窗選取 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:547(title)
-msgid "Renaming a BE"
-msgstr "重新命名 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:548(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理啟動環境</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，開啟 [管理啟動環境] 視窗。視窗中會列出每個 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:549(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename the currently active BE."
-msgstr "您無法重新命名目前使用中的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:550(para)
-msgid "You cannot rename a BE that you have marked for deletion."
-msgstr "您無法重新命名標示為要刪除的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:551(para)
-msgid "To rename a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要重新命名 BE，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:552(para)
-msgid "Double-click the name of the BE that you want to rename. The name field becomes editable."
-msgstr "按兩下您要重新命名的 BE 名稱，即可編輯名稱欄位。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:554(para)
-msgid "Enter the new name."
-msgstr "輸入新名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:560(title)
-msgid "Removing a BE"
-msgstr "移除 BE"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:561(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Boot Environments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Manage Boot Environments window. Each BE is listed in the window. The right-most column in the window is the Delete column."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檔案</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>管理啟動環境</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，開啟 [管理啟動環境] 視窗。視窗中會列出每個 BE。視窗中最右側的資料欄即為 [刪除] 資料欄。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:562(para)
-msgid "The middle column in the Manage Boot Environments window shows the size of the BE. You might want to remove a BE to free some space on your storage device."
-msgstr "[管理啟動環境] 視窗中間的資料欄顯示的是 BE 的大小。您可能想要移除 BE 以釋放一些儲存裝置的空間。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:563(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete the currently active BE."
-msgstr "您無法刪除目前使用中的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:564(para)
-msgid "You cannot delete a BE that you have renamed."
-msgstr "您無法刪除已重新命名的 BE。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:565(para)
-msgid "To delete a BE, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要刪除 BE，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:566(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> box for the BE that you want to delete."
-msgstr "選取要刪除之 BE 的 [<guibutton>刪除</guibutton>] 方塊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:573(title)
-msgid "Working With WebInstall"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:574(para)
-msgid "Package Manager supports installing packages using a simple one-click WebInstall process. The WebInstall process uses a <filename>.p5i</filename> file. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains information to add publishers and add packages that can be installed from these publishers. The information in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file is read and used by the WebInstall process."
-msgstr "套裝軟體管理員支援使用簡單的一鍵式 WebInstall 程序安裝套裝軟體。WebInstall 程序使用 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案。<filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案包含增加發佈者所需的資訊，以及增加可從這些發佈者安裝之套裝軟體的資訊。WebInstall 程序將會讀取並使用 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案中的資訊。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:575(title)
-msgid "Exporting Files Using WebInstall"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall 匯出檔案"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:576(para)
-msgid "If you want other users to be able to install packages that you have installed on your system, you can export the installation instructions for those package files using the WebInstall process. A <filename>.p5i</filename> file consisting of installation instructions for those packages and publishers to be installed is created."
-msgstr "如果想讓其他使用者可安裝您系統上所安裝的套裝軟體，您可以使用 WebInstall 程序匯出這些套裝軟體檔案的安裝說明。該程序會建立包含要安裝之套裝軟體安裝說明及發佈者的 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:577(para)
-msgid "To export the installation instructions for your selected packages and their publishers to a <filename>.p5i</filename> file, perform the following steps:"
-msgstr "若要將所選套裝軟體的安裝說明及其發佈者匯出至 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案，請執行下列步驟："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:578(para)
-msgid "From the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu, select the publisher from which you want to include the packages in the <filename>.p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "在 [<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表中，選取想將哪個發佈者的套裝軟體併入 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案中。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:580(para)
-msgid "In the package list pane, select the package whose installation instructions you want to distribute."
-msgstr "在套裝軟體清單窗格，選取要分發安裝說明的套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:582(para)
-msgid "Click <menuchoice><guisubmenu>File</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Selections</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the Export Selections Confirmation window."
-msgstr "按一下 <menuchoice>[<guisubmenu>檔案</guisubmenu>] [<guimenuitem>輸出選擇</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice>，顯示 [輸出選擇確認] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:584(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to confirm the selections. The Export Selections window is displayed."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕以確認選項。會顯示 [輸出選擇] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:586(para)
-msgid "A default name for the <filename>p5i</filename> file with the extension <filename>.p5i</filename> is provided. You can change this file name, but do not change the extension."
-msgstr "系統會提供副檔名為 <filename>.p5i</filename> 的 <filename>p5i</filename> 檔案預設名稱。您可以變更此檔案名稱，但不可變更副檔名。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:588(para)
-msgid "A default location for the <filename>p5i</filename> file is provided. You can change the location. If you use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button, you can select the <filename>p5i Files</filename> option from the drop-down menu at the bottom right hand side of the Export Selections window to display only <filename>.p5i</filename> files in the file list."
-msgstr "系統會提供 <filename>p5i</filename> 檔案的預設位置。您可以變更該位置。如果使用 [<guibutton>瀏覽</guibutton>] 按鈕，您可以從 [輸出選擇] 視窗右下方的下拉式功能表選取 <filename>p5i Files</filename> 選項，僅在檔案清單中顯示 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:590(para)
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the file name and location."
-msgstr "按一下 [<guibutton>儲存</guibutton>] 按鈕來儲存檔案名稱和位置。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:594(title)
-msgid "Using WebInstall to Add Publishers and Install Packages"
-msgstr "使用 WebInstall 來增加發佈者及安裝套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:595(para)
-msgid "The WebInstall process enables you to install packages through a <filename>p5i</filename> file."
-msgstr "WebInstall 程序可讓您透過 <filename>p5i</filename> 檔案來安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:596(para)
-msgid "Locate the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. This file might be on your desktop or on a web site."
-msgstr "找出 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案。此檔案可能位於桌面或網站。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:598(para)
-msgid "Use one of the following methods to start Package Manager in WebInstall mode:"
-msgstr "使用下列其中一個方法來啟動「WebInstall 模式的套裝軟體管理員」："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:599(para)
-msgid "Click on a <filename>.p5i</filename> file on your desktop. The associated application (Package Manager Web Installer) is launched."
-msgstr "按一下您桌面上的 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案，啟動關聯的應用程式 (套裝軟體管理員 Web 安裝程式)。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:601(para)
-msgid "Start Package Manager from the command line along with a path to the <filename>.p5i</filename> file. For example, enter the following command:"
-msgstr "從指令行啟動套裝軟體管理員，並附上 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案的路徑。例如，輸入下列指令："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(replaceable)
-msgid "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-msgstr "path_to_p5i_file/file.p5i"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(userinput)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "packagemanager/<placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:602(screen)
-#, no-wrap
-msgid "# <placeholder-1/>"
-msgstr "# <placeholder-1/>"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:604(para)
-msgid "Go to a URL location that contains a link to <filename>.p5i</filename> file. The <filename>.p5i</filename> file must be located on a web server that has registered this MIME type."
-msgstr "移至包含 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案連結的 URL 位置。<filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案必須位於已註冊此 MIME 類型的 Web 伺服器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:605(para)
-msgid "If the <filename>.p5i</filename> is located on a web server that has not registered this MIME type, save the <filename>.p5i</filename> file to your desktop and then click on it to launch WebInstall."
-msgstr "如果 <filename>.p5i</filename> 所在的 Web 伺服器並未註冊此 MIME 類型的話，請將 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案儲存到您的桌面，然後按一下檔案以啟動 WebInstall。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:609(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window is displayed. The label at the top of the window is: “Package Manager Web Installer/The following will be added to your system:” Then the publishers and packages are listed. Click the <guibutton>Proceed</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "會顯示 [安裝/更新] 視窗。視窗頂端的標籤為：[套裝軟體管理員 Web 安裝程式] / [以下所列將會增加入您的系統：]，發佈者和套裝軟體會列於其中。按一下 [<guibutton>繼續</guibutton>] 按鈕以繼續安裝。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:610(para)
-msgid "If the package publisher is not already configured on your system, the Add Publisher window is displayed. The name and URI of the publisher are already entered."
-msgstr "如果您的系統尚未配置套裝軟體發佈者，則會顯示 [增加發佈者] 視窗。視窗中已輸入發佈者的名稱和 URI。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:611(para)
-msgid "If the publishers to be added are secure publishers, an SSL key and certificate are required. Browse to locate the SSL Key and SSL Certificate on your system."
-msgstr "如果要增加的發佈者是安全的發佈者，則必須提供 SSL 金鑰和憑證。請瀏覽至系統上 SSL 金鑰和 SSL 憑證所在的位置。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:612(para)
-msgid "The Adding Publisher Complete dialog displays if the publisher is added successfully. Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to continue with the installation."
-msgstr "[增加發佈者完成] 對話方塊顯示發佈者是否新增成功。按一下 [<guibutton>確定</guibutton>] 按鈕以繼續安裝。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:614(para)
-msgid "If a <filename>.p5i</filename> file contains packages from a disabled publisher, WebInstall opens up an Enable Publisher dialog. Use this dialog to enable the publisher so that you can install the packages."
-msgstr "如果 <filename>.p5i</filename> 檔案包含來自停用發佈者的套裝軟體，WebInstall 會開啟 [啟用發佈者] 對話方塊。請使用此對話方塊來啟用發佈者，便能安裝套裝軟體。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:618(para)
-msgid "The Install/Update window now looks the same as when you select <guibutton>Install/Update</guibutton> from within Package Manager."
-msgstr "[安裝/更新] 視窗現在的外觀與您選取套裝軟體管理員的 [<guibutton>安裝/更新</guibutton>] 時一樣。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:623(title)
-msgid "Troubleshooting"
-msgstr "疑難排解"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:624(para)
-msgid "Error, warning, and informational messages are saved to a log so that you can review them at any time."
-msgstr "錯誤、警告及資訊訊息會儲存在記錄中，您可以隨時檢視。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:625(title)
-msgid "Viewing Message Logs"
-msgstr "檢視訊息記錄"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:626(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Logs</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to open the Logs window. The Logs window displays error, warning, and informational messages from Package Manager and Update Manager."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>檢視</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>記錄</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項來開啟 [記錄] 視窗。[記錄] 視窗會顯示來自套裝軟體管理員和更新管理員的錯誤、警告及資訊訊息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:627(para)
-msgid "Select the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button at the bottom of the Logs window to delete all the messages."
-msgstr "選取 [記錄] 視窗底部的 [<guibutton>清除</guibutton>] 按鈕，刪除所有訊息。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:628(para)
-msgid "If an error or warning is logged, a yellow triangle is displayed on the left side of the status bar. Click the yellow triangle to display the Logs window."
-msgstr "如果已記錄錯誤或警告，便會在狀態列左側顯示黃色三角形。按一下黃色三角形即可顯示 [記錄] 視窗。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:631(title)
-msgid "Setting Preferences"
-msgstr "設定喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:632(para)
-msgid "Use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option to change some of the Package Manager user interface settings."
-msgstr "使用 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>喜好設定</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 功能表選項，變更部分套裝軟體管理員使用者介面設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:633(para)
-msgid "The Preferences window has three tabs:"
-msgstr "[喜好設定] 視窗有三個標籤："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:634(para)
-msgid "The General tab enables you to set exit preferences and confirmation dialog preferences."
-msgstr "[一般] 標籤可讓您設定結束喜好設定和確認對話方塊喜好設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:635(para)
-msgid "The Optional Components tab enables you to set preferences for which optional package components to install when you install or update a package."
-msgstr "[選擇性元件] 標籤可讓您在安裝或更新套裝軟體時，針對要安裝的選擇性套裝軟體元件設定喜好設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:636(para)
-msgid "The Signature Policy tab enables you to set signature policy for this image."
-msgstr "[簽名策略] 標籤可讓您設定此影像的簽名策略。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:638(title)
-msgid "Exit Preferences"
-msgstr "結束喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:639(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:652(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the General tab."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>喜好設定</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項，並選取 [一般] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:640(para)
-msgid "If the “Remember current state on exit” box is checked, Package Manager saves the following settings and restores them the next time you start Package Manager:"
-msgstr "如果核取 [結束時記住目前狀態] 方塊，則套裝軟體管理員會儲存下列設定，並於您下次啟動套裝軟體管理員時復原這些設定："
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:641(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Vertical and horizontal separators</emphasis> — Widths and heights of the panes in the window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">垂直和水平分隔線</emphasis> — 視窗窗格的寬度和高度"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:643(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Window size</emphasis> — Overall size of the Package Manager window"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">視窗大小</emphasis> — 套裝軟體管理員視窗的整體大小"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:645(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Publisher option</emphasis> — The publisher or other option that is selected in the <guimenu>Publisher</guimenu> drop-down menu when Package Manager is closed"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">發佈者選項</emphasis> — 套裝軟體管理員關閉時，[<guimenu>發佈者</guimenu>] 下拉式功能表中選取的發佈者或其他選項"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:647(para)
-msgid "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Categories</emphasis> — The selected category and the expanded and collapsed categories for each publisher"
-msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">類別</emphasis> — 每個發佈者的選取類別以及展開和收合的類別"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:651(title)
-msgid "Confirmation Dialog Preferences"
-msgstr "確認對話方塊喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:653(para)
-msgid "When a package is installed, updated, or removed, a confirmation dialog is displayed that shows the list of packages and the action to be performed. If you do not want to see these confirmation dialogs, uncheck these selections in the Preferences window."
-msgstr "安裝、更新或移除套裝軟體時，系統會顯示確認對話方塊，其中包含要執行的套裝軟體清單與動作。如果您不想看到這些確認對話方塊，請取消核取 [喜好設定] 視窗中的這些選項。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:654(para)
-msgid "Clicking the “Do not show this confirmation dialog again” check box in a particular confirmation dialog also unsets this preference for that dialog."
-msgstr "在特定確認對話方塊按一下「不要再顯示此確認對話方塊」核取方塊，也會取消設定該對話方塊的此喜好設定。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:656(title)
-msgid "Signature Policy Preferences"
-msgstr "簽名策略喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:657(para)
-msgid "Use the buttons on the Signature Policy tab to ignore or require signatures when installing packages in this image. To set signature policy for specific publishers, select the publisher in the Manage Publishers window, click the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button, and use the Signature Policy tab of the Modify Publisher window."
-msgstr "在此影像安裝套裝軟體時，使用 [簽名策略] 標籤中的按鈕來忽略或要求簽名。若要設定特定發佈者的簽名策略，請在 [管理發佈者] 視窗中選取發佈者，接著按一下 [<guibutton>修改</guibutton>] 按鈕，然後使用 [修改發佈者] 視窗的 [簽名策略] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:658(para)
-msgid "The choices for image signature policy are the same as the choices for publisher signature policy except that the settings apply to all packages installed in the image, not just to packages installed from a particular publisher. See <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>."
-msgstr "影像簽名策略的選項和發佈者簽名策略的選項相同，但影像簽名策略的設定會套用至影像中安裝的所有套裝軟體，而不是只套用至從特定發佈者安裝的套裝軟體。請參閱 <xref linkend=\"pub-sig-policy\"/>。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:660(title)
-msgid "Optional Component Preferences Language Choices"
-msgstr "選擇性元件喜好設定語言選擇"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:661(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:668(para)
-msgid "Select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option and select the Optional Components tab."
-msgstr "選取 <menuchoice>[<guimenu>編輯</guimenu>] [<guimenuitem>喜好設定</guimenuitem>]</menuchoice> 選項，並選取 [選擇性元件] 標籤。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:662(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all languages is selected under Language choices for any package. You can save space in your installation by selecting a subset of languages to install."
-msgstr "預設會安裝 [任何套裝軟體的語言選擇] 下選取的所有語言。您可以只選取要安裝的語言子集來節省安裝空間。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:663(para)
-msgid "When Install only these languages is selected, you can click the checkbox icon in the left most column heading of the language list to select all languages. Click the column heading again to deselect all languages. Click the Language and Territory column headings to sort the list."
-msgstr "只安裝這些選取的語言時，您可以按一下語言清單最左側資料欄標題中的核取方塊來選取所有語言。再按一下資料欄標題即可取消選取所有語言。按一下 [語言] 和 [地區] 資料欄標題即可排序清單。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:664(para) gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:670(para)
-msgid "Click the OK button to save your changes. These settings apply to currently installed packages as well as future package installations and updates. The image is updated as necessary to install or remove optional package components based on the new settings."
-msgstr "按一下 [確定] 按鈕以儲存您的變更。這些設定會套用至目前安裝的套裝軟體以及未來的套裝軟體安裝和更新。必要時會更新影像，根據新的設定安裝或移除選擇性套裝軟體元件。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:665(para)
-msgid "If you have previously updated your image to include only a subset of languages, Install only these languages is the default selection in this window, and that language list is grayed out if you select the Install all languages option."
-msgstr "如果您先前已更新您的影像使其只包括語言的子集，則只會安裝此視窗中的這些預設語言選項，如果您選擇安裝所有語言選項，則該語言清單會變成灰色。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:667(title)
-msgid "Other Optional Component Preferences"
-msgstr "其他選擇性元件喜好設定"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:669(para)
-msgid "By default, Install all development files and Install all documentation are selected under Other component choices. You can save space in your installation by deselecting development files or documentation."
-msgstr "預設會安裝所有開發檔案並安裝 [其他元件選擇] 下選取的所有文件。您可以取消選取開發檔案或文件以節省安裝空間。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:673(title)
-msgid "Glossary"
-msgstr "詞彙"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:674(glossterm)
-msgid "alias"
-msgstr "別名"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:675(para)
-msgid "Another name for a publisher."
-msgstr "發佈者的另一個名稱。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:678(glossterm)
-msgid "boot environment (BE)"
-msgstr "啟動環境 (BE)"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:679(para)
-msgid "An instance of a bootable Oracle Solaris environment. The root file system and all other file systems of the boot environment that contain system software are required to be ZFS datasets."
-msgstr "可啟動之 Oracle Solaris 環境的實例。根檔案系統與所有其他包含了系統軟體的啟動環境檔案系統都必須是 ZFS 資料集。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:680(para)
-msgid "The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. A system can have many boot environments. You can select the one you want to boot into when you reboot."
-msgstr "使用中的啟動環境是目前已啟動的啟動環境。系統可以有多個啟動環境。重新開機時，您可以選取要啟動的啟動環境。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:683(glossterm)
-msgid "clone"
-msgstr "複製"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:684(para)
-msgid "An exact copy."
-msgstr "完全一致的副本。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:685(para)
-msgid "A clone could be an exact copy of an operating system, a file system, or a volume. This copy has 100% compatibility with the original."
-msgstr "複製可以是完全與作業系統、檔案系統或磁碟區相同的副本。此副本與原件 100% 相容。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:688(glossterm)
-msgid "dataset"
-msgstr "資料集"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:689(para)
-msgid "A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes. Each dataset is identified by a unique name in the ZFS namespace."
-msgstr "下列 ZFS 項目的通用名稱：複製、檔案系統、快照或磁碟區。每個資料集都使用 ZFS 名稱空間中的唯一名稱識別。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:692(glossterm)
-msgid "image"
-msgstr "影像"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:693(para)
-msgid "A collection of operating system software in a package that can be booted and installed."
-msgstr "套裝軟體中的作業系統軟體集合，可加以啟動和安裝。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:694(para)
-msgid "A location on your system where packages and their associated files, directories, links, and dependencies can be installed."
-msgstr "系統上的某個位置，可在其中安裝套裝軟體及其相關的檔案、目錄、連結及相依性。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:697(glossterm)
-msgid "origin"
-msgstr "原始"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:698(para)
-msgid "A package server to which a publisher publishes packages."
-msgstr "發佈者發佈套裝軟體的目標套裝軟體伺服器。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:701(glossterm)
-msgid "package"
-msgstr "套裝軟體"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:702(para)
-msgid "A collection of files, directories, links, drivers, and dependencies in a defined format."
-msgstr "使用定義格式的檔案、目錄、連結、驅動程式及相依性的集合。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:705(glossterm)
-msgid "publisher"
-msgstr "發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:706(para)
-msgid "A person, group, or corporation that designs, creates, and publishes a package to a package server. The package server in turn serves the packages from the (default) publisher, for downloading purposes."
-msgstr "設計、建立並將套裝軟體發佈至套裝軟體伺服器的人員、群組或公司。套裝軟體伺服器相對地會提供 (預設) 發佈者的套裝軟體供人下載。"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:709(glossterm)
-msgid "system publisher"
-msgstr "系統發佈者"
-
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:710(para)
-msgid "System publishers are special publishers used in linked images and non-global zones in particular, to ensure that certain packages stay in sync with the global zone. The global zone constrains packages within the non-global zones by configuring these special system publishers in the non-global zone. They are special because the non-global zones cannot make certain changes to them including removing, disabling, modifying, or changing their priority."
-msgstr "系統發佈者是專門用於連結影像和非全域區域的特殊發佈者，其目的在於確保特定套裝軟體與全域區域保持同步。全域區域會藉由在非全域區域配置這些特殊的系統發佈者，以限制非全域區域內的套裝軟體。他們的特殊點在於非全域區域無法對他們進行某些變更，包括移除、停用、修改或變更其優先權。"
-
-#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
-#: gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml:0(None)
-msgid "translator-credits"
-msgstr "Oralce Corporation"
-
--- a/src/launch.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python2.6
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-HTTP_PROXY_HOST = "/system/http_proxy/host"
-HTTP_PROXY_PORT = "/system/http_proxy/port"
-HTTP_PROXY_USE = "/system/http_proxy/use_http_proxy"
-HTTP_PROXY_USER = "/system/http_proxy/authentication_user"
-HTTP_PROXY_PASS = "/system/http_proxy/authentication_password"
-HTTP_PROXY_AUTH = "/system/http_proxy/use_authentication"
-HTTP_PROXY_VARIABLE = "http_proxy"
-HTTPS_PROXY_VARIABLE = "https_proxy"
-
-PM_OPEN_CMD = "pm-launch: OPEN:"
-
-import gconf
-import gnome
-import os
-import select
-import sys
-import pkg.pkgsubprocess as subprocess
-import pkg.portable as portable
-
-def get_http_proxy():
- host = client.get_string(HTTP_PROXY_HOST)
- port = client.get_int(HTTP_PROXY_PORT)
- pauth = client.get_bool(HTTP_PROXY_AUTH)
- if pauth:
- puser = client.get_string(HTTP_PROXY_USER)
- ppass = client.get_string(HTTP_PROXY_PASS)
- authstring = puser + ':' + ppass + "@"
- return "http://" + authstring + host + ":" + str(port) + "/"
- return "http://" + host + ":" + str(port) + "/"
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- client = gconf.client_get_default()
- use_http_proxy = client.get_bool(HTTP_PROXY_USE)
- if use_http_proxy:
- http_proxy = get_http_proxy()
- if os.getenv(HTTP_PROXY_VARIABLE) == None:
- os.putenv(HTTP_PROXY_VARIABLE, http_proxy)
- if os.getenv(HTTPS_PROXY_VARIABLE) == None:
- os.putenv(HTTPS_PROXY_VARIABLE, http_proxy)
-
- # If /usr/bin/packagemanager was checked for instead, that would make
- # testing (especially automated) impossible for web links.
- allow_links = False
- args = sys.argv[1:]
- if args[0].find("packagemanager") != -1 and not portable.is_admin():
- allow_links = True
- args.append("--allow-links")
- args = ["/usr/bin/gksu", " ".join(args)]
-
- proc = subprocess.Popen(args, stdout=subprocess.PIPE,
- close_fds=True)
-
- # Reap the defunct gksu now rather than wait for kernel to do it.
- proc.wait()
-
- if not allow_links:
- # Nothing to do for other programs.
- sys.exit()
-
- # XXX PackageManager should not run as a privileged process!
- # This rather convoluted solution allows packagemanager to open links
- # as the original user that launched the packagemanager instead of as
- # a privileged user. It does this by using select to poll the output
- # of the packagemanager, and open links as it requests them. Once
- # the packagemanager has exited, the pipe is broken and pm-launch will
- # exit as well.
- p = select.poll()
- p.register(proc.stdout,
- select.POLLIN|select.POLLERR|select.POLLHUP|select.POLLNVAL)
-
- # XXX This probably only works on Solaris.
- exit_now = False
- while not exit_now:
- events = p.poll()
- for fd, event in events:
- if fd != proc.stdout.fileno():
- continue
- if not (event & select.POLLIN):
- # Child likely exited.
- exit_now = True
- break
-
- # Use os.read() here (as opposed to proc.stdout.read())
- # to avoid blocking. Attempt to cycle until EOF or
- # newline is encountered.
- output = []
- data = ""
- while 1:
- data += os.read(proc.stdout.fileno(),
- 8192)
- if data == "" or data.endswith("\n"):
- output = data.splitlines()
- del data
- break
-
- opened = 0
- for line in output:
- l = line
- if l.startswith(PM_OPEN_CMD):
- uri = l.replace(PM_OPEN_CMD, "")
- try:
- gnome.url_show(uri)
- opened += 1
- except Exception, e:
- fail_msg = "OPEN: FAILURE: " \
- "%s: %s" % (uri, e)
- # For xsession-errors.
- print >> sys.stderr, fail_msg
- else:
- # Passthrough any other data.
- print line
- # Nothing more to do.
- sys.exit()
--- a/src/man/ja_JP/packagemanager.1 Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,288 +0,0 @@
-'\" te
-.\" Copyright (c) 2007, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-.TH packagemanager 1 "2012 年 5 月 27 日" "SunOS 5.11" "ユーザーコマンド"
-.SH 名前
-packagemanager \- Image Packaging System の GUI
-.SH 形式
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [\fIoptions\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [-h | --help]
- [-i | --info-install \fIfile\fR] [-U | --update-all]
- [-R | --image-dir \fIdir\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [\fIfile\fR]
-.fi
-
-.SH 機能説明
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpackagemanager\fR は、\fB pkg\fR(5) (Image Packaging System ソフトウェア) のグラフィカルユーザーインタフェースです。
-.sp
-.LP
-パッケージマネージャーを使用すると、次のタスクを実行できます。
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-パッケージの検索、インストール、および削除
-.RE
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-パブリッシャーの追加、削除、および変更
-.RE
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-ブート環境の作成、削除、および管理
-.RE
-.sp
-.LP
-\fIfile\fR オペランドが指定されていて、その接尾辞が \fB\&.p5i\fR である場合、\fBpackagemanager\fR は Web インストールモードで起動し、1 つ以上のパブリッシャーおよびパブリッシャーごとに数多くのパッケージが追加されます。
-.SH オプション
-.sp
-.LP
-サポートしているオプションは、次のとおりです。
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-h\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--help\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-使用方法に関するメッセージを表示します。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-i\fR \fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--info-install\fR \fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-\fB\&.p5i\fR ファイルを指定して、\fBpackagemanager\fR を Web インストールモードで実行します。\fIfile\fR の接尾辞は \fB\&.p5i\fR である必要があります。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-R\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--image-dir\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-自動的に検出されたイメージではなく、\fIdir\fR をルートとするイメージに対して処理を行います。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-U\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--update-all\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-利用可能な更新があるすべてのインストール済みパッケージを更新します。
-.LP
-注 -
-.sp
-.RS 2
-\fBpackage/pkg\fR、\fBpackage/pkg/package-manager \fR、または \fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR を更新する必要がある場合、\fBpackagemanager\fR は最初にこれらのパッケージを更新してから、残りの更新を実行するために再起動されます。
-.RE
-.RE
-
-.SH オペランド
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 8n
-.rt
-Web インストールファイル。このファイルの接尾辞は \fB\&.p5i\fR である必要があります。Web インストールについての詳細は、パッケージマネージャーのオンラインヘルプを参照してください。
-.RE
-
-.SH 使用例
-.LP
-\fB例 1 \fR現在のイメージで操作する
-.sp
-.LP
-現在のイメージで \fBpackagemanager\fR を起動します。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.LP
-\fB例 2 \fR指定されたイメージで操作する
-.sp
-.LP
-\fB/aux0/example_root\fR に格納されたイメージで \fBpackagemanager\fR を起動します。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager -R /aux0/example_root\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.LP
-\fB例 3 \fRWeb インストールモードで起動する
-.sp
-.LP
-Web インストールモードで \fBpackagemanager\fR を起動します。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager ~/test.p5i\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.SH 終了ステータス
-.sp
-.LP
-次の終了ステータスが返されます。
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB0\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-すべてが動作しました。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB1\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-エラーが発生した。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB2\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-無効なコマンド行オプションが指定された。
-.RE
-
-.SH ファイル
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpkg\fR(5) イメージはより大きなファイルシステム内に任意に配置できるため、トークン \fB$IMAGE_ROOT\fR を使用して相対パスが区別されます。標準のシステムインストールでは、\fB$IMAGE_ROOT\fR は / と同等です。
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_ROOT/var/pkg\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-完全または部分的なイメージのメタデータディレクトリ。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_ROOT/.org.opensolaris,pkg\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-ユーザーイメージのメタデータディレクトリ。
-.sp
-特定のイメージのメタデータ内にある特定のファイルおよびディレクトリには、修復時や復旧時に役立つ情報が含まれています。トークン \fB$IMAGE_META \fR は、メタデータが含まれる最上位ディレクトリを参照するために使用されます。通常、\fB $IMAGE_META\fR は前述の 2 つのパスのいずれかです。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_META/gui-cache\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-プログラムの起動やパブリッシャーの切り替えの速度を上げるために \fBpackagemanager\fR で保持されるキャッシュ済みメタデータの場所。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.LP
-\fB$IMAGE_META\fR ディレクトリ階層内のその他のパスは非公開であり、変更される可能性があります。
-.SH 属性
-.sp
-.LP
-次の属性については、\fBattributes\fR(5) を参照してください。
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.TS
-tab() box;
-cw(2.75i) |cw(2.75i)
-lw(2.75i) |lw(2.75i)
-.
-属性タイプ属性値
-_
-使用条件\fBpackage/pkg/package-manager\fR
-_
-インタフェースの安定性不確実
-.TE
-
-.SH 関連項目
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpm-updatemanager\fR(1), \fBpkg\fR(1), \fBpkg\fR(5)
-.sp
-.LP
-パッケージマネージャーのオンラインヘルプ
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBhttp://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/\fR
-.SH 注意事項
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpackagemanager\fR は、イメージのファイルおよびディレクトリで操作するために十分な権限で起動する必要があります。
--- a/src/man/ja_JP/pm-updatemanager.1 Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,176 +0,0 @@
-'\" te
-.\" Copyright (c) 2007, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-.TH pm-updatemanager 1 "2012 年 5 月 27 日" "SunOS 5.11" "ユーザーコマンド"
-.SH 名前
-pm-updatemanager \- パッケージを更新するためのアプリケーション
-.SH 形式
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/pm-updatemanager [\fIoptions\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/pm-updatemanager [-h | --help] [-d | --debug]
- [-R \fIdir\fR | --image-dir \fIdir\fR]
-.fi
-
-.SH 機能説明
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpm-updatemanager\fR は、システムにインストールされたパッケージで利用可能な更新の有無を確認し、インストールします。
-.LP
-注 -
-.sp
-.RS 2
-\fBpackage/pkg\fR、\fBpackage/pkg/package-manager\fR、または \fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR パッケージを更新する必要がある場合、\fBpm-updatemanager\fR は、最初にこれらのパッケージを更新してから、残りの更新の実行を再開します。
-.RE
-.SH オプション
-.sp
-.LP
-サポートしているオプションは、次のとおりです。
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-h\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--help\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-使用方法に関するメッセージを表示します。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-d\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--debug\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-デバッグモードで \fBpm-updatemanager\fR を実行します。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-R\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--image-dir\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-自動的に検出されたイメージではなく、\fIdir\fR をルートとするイメージに対して処理を行います。
-.RE
-
-.SH 使用例
-.LP
-\fB例 1 \fR現在のイメージの更新
-.sp
-.LP
-現在のイメージ上で \fBpm-updatemanager\fR を呼び出します。現在のイメージにインストールされたパッケージで利用可能なすべての更新の有無を確認し、インストールします。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fB/usr/lib/pm-launch pm-updatemanager\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.LP
-これは、デスクトップのメニューオプションで「システム」>「管理」>「Update Manager」を選択したときに呼び出されるコマンドと同じです。
-
-.LP
-\fB例 2 \fR指定されたイメージの更新
-.sp
-.LP
-\fB/aux0/example_root\fR に格納されている \fBpm-updatemanager\fR を呼び出します。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fB/usr/lib/pm-launch pm-updatemanager -R /aux0/example_root\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.SH 終了ステータス
-.sp
-.LP
-次の終了ステータスが返されます。
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB0\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-すべてが動作しました。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB1\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-エラーが発生した。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB2\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-無効なコマンド行オプションが指定された。
-.RE
-
-.SH 属性
-.sp
-.LP
-次の属性については、\fBattributes\fR(5) を参照してください。
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.TS
-tab() box;
-cw(2.75i) |cw(2.75i)
-lw(2.75i) |lw(2.75i)
-.
-属性タイプ属性値
-_
-使用条件\fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR
-_
-インタフェースの安定性不確実
-.TE
-
-.SH 関連項目
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpackagemanager\fR(1), \fBpkg\fR(1), \fBpkg\fR(5)
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBhttp://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/\fR
-.SH 注意事項
-.sp
-.LP
-所有権がないイメージに対して処理を行う場合、必要な権限を使用して \fBpm-updatemanager\fR を呼び出す必要があります。通常、このような状況では、\fB/usr/lib/pm-launch\fR を使用して \fBpm-updatemanager\fR を呼び出します。
--- a/src/man/packagemanager.1 Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,288 +0,0 @@
-'\" te
-.\" Copyright (c) 2007, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-.TH packagemanager 1 "21 May 2013" "SunOS 5.12" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-packagemanager \- GUI for the Image Packaging System
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [\fIoptions\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [-h | --help]
- [-i | --info-install \fIfile\fR] [-U | --update-all]
- [-R | --image-dir \fIdir\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [\fIfile\fR]
-.fi
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpackagemanager\fR is the graphical user interface for \fBpkg\fR(5), the Image Packaging System software.
-.sp
-.LP
-The Package Manager enables you to perform the following tasks:
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-Search, install, and remove packages.
-.RE
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-Add, remove, and modify publishers.
-.RE
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-Create, remove, and manage boot environments.
-.RE
-.sp
-.LP
-If the \fIfile\fR operand is specified and its suffix is \fB\&.p5i\fR, \fBpackagemanager\fR launches in Web Install mode, which adds one or more publishers and a number of packages for each publisher.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.sp
-.LP
-The following options are supported:
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-h\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--help\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Display a usage message.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-i\fR \fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--info-install\fR \fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Specify a \fB\&.p5i\fR file to run \fBpackagemanager\fR in Web Install mode. The \fIfile\fR must have the suffix \fB\&.p5i\fR.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-R\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--image-dir\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Operate on the image rooted at \fIdir\fR, rather than the image discovered automatically.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-U\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--update-all\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Update all installed packages that have updates available.
-.LP
-Note -
-.sp
-.RS 2
-If the \fBpackage/pkg\fR, \fBpackage/pkg/package-manager\fR, or \fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR packages need to be updated, \fBpackagemanager\fR first updates these packages and then restarts to carry out any remaining updates.
-.RE
-.RE
-
-.SH OPERANDS
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 8n
-.rt
-A Web Install file. This file must have the suffix \fB\&.p5i\fR. See the Package Manager online help for more information about Web Install.
-.RE
-
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.LP
-\fBExample 1 \fROperate on the Current Image
-.sp
-.LP
-Invoke \fBpackagemanager\fR on the current image.
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.LP
-\fBExample 2 \fROperate on a Specified Image
-.sp
-.LP
-Invoke \fBpackagemanager\fR in the image stored at \fB/aux0/example_root\fR.
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager -R /aux0/example_root\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.LP
-\fBExample 3 \fRInvoke in Web Install Mode
-.sp
-.LP
-Invoke \fBpackagemanager\fR in Web Install mode.
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager ~/test.p5i\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.SH EXIT STATUS
-.sp
-.LP
-The following exit values are returned:
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB0\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-Everything worked.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB1\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-An error occurred.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB2\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-Invalid command line options were specified.
-.RE
-
-.SH FILES
-.sp
-.LP
-Since \fBpkg\fR(5) images can be located arbitrarily within a larger file system, the token \fB$IMAGE_ROOT\fR is used to distinguish relative paths. For a typical system installation, \fB$IMAGE_ROOT\fR is equivalent to /.
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_ROOT/var/pkg\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Metadata directory for a full or partial image.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_ROOT/.org.opensolaris,pkg\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Metadata directory for a user image.
-.sp
-Within the metadata of a particular image, certain files and directories contain information useful during repair and recovery. The token \fB$IMAGE_META\fR is used to refer to the top-level directory that contains the metadata. \fB$IMAGE_META\fR is typically one of the two paths given above.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_META/gui-cache\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Location for cached metadata maintained by \fBpackagemanager\fR to speed up program startup and switching between publishers.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.LP
-Other paths within the \fB$IMAGE_META\fR directory hierarchy are Private, and are subject to change.
-.SH ATTRIBUTES
-.sp
-.LP
-See \fBattributes\fR(5) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.TS
-tab() box;
-cw(2.75i) |cw(2.75i)
-lw(2.75i) |lw(2.75i)
-.
-ATTRIBUTE TYPEATTRIBUTE VALUE
-_
-Availability\fBpackage/pkg/package-manager\fR
-_
-Interface StabilityUncommitted
-.TE
-
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpm-updatemanager\fR(1), \fBpkg\fR(1), \fBpkg\fR(5)
-.sp
-.LP
-Package Manager online help
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBhttps://java.net/projects/ips/pages/Home\fR
-.SH NOTES
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpackagemanager\fR needs to be invoked with sufficient privilege to operate on an image's files and directories.
--- a/src/man/pm-updatemanager.1 Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,176 +0,0 @@
-'\" te
-.\" Copyright (c) 2007, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-.TH pm-updatemanager 1 "21 May 2013" "SunOS 5.12" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-pm-updatemanager \- application to update packages
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/pm-updatemanager [\fIoptions\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/pm-updatemanager [-h | --help] [-d | --debug]
- [-R \fIdir\fR | --image-dir \fIdir\fR]
-.fi
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpm-updatemanager\fR checks for and installs available updates for the packages installed on the system.
-.LP
-Note -
-.sp
-.RS 2
-If the \fBpackage/pkg\fR, \fBpackage/pkg/package-manager\fR, or \fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR packages need to be updated, \fBpm-updatemanager\fR first updates these packages and then restarts to carry out any remaining updates.
-.RE
-.SH OPTIONS
-.sp
-.LP
-The following options are supported:
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-h\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--help\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Display a usage message.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-d\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--debug\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Run \fBpm-updatemanager\fR in debug mode.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-R\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--image-dir\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-Operate on the image rooted at \fIdir\fR, rather than on the image discovered automatically.
-.RE
-
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.LP
-\fBExample 1 \fRUpdate the Current Image
-.sp
-.LP
-Invoke \fBpm-updatemanager\fR on the current image. This checks for and installs all available updates for packages installed in the current image.
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fB/usr/lib/pm-launch pm-updatemanager\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.LP
-This is the same command that the desktop menu option System>Administration>Update Manager invokes.
-
-.LP
-\fBExample 2 \fRUpdate a Specified Image
-.sp
-.LP
-Invoke \fBpm-updatemanager\fR on the image stored at \fB/aux0/example_root\fR.
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fB/usr/lib/pm-launch pm-updatemanager -R /aux0/example_root\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.SH EXIT STATUS
-.sp
-.LP
-The following exit values are returned:
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB0\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-Everything worked.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB1\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-An error occurred.
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB2\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-Invalid command line options were specified.
-.RE
-
-.SH ATTRIBUTES
-.sp
-.LP
-See \fBattributes\fR(5) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.TS
-tab() box;
-cw(2.75i) |cw(2.75i)
-lw(2.75i) |lw(2.75i)
-.
-ATTRIBUTE TYPEATTRIBUTE VALUE
-_
-Availability\fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR
-_
-Interface StabilityUncommitted
-.TE
-
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpackagemanager\fR(1), \fBpkg\fR(1), \fBpkg\fR(5)
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBhttps://java.net/projects/ips/pages/Home\fR
-.SH NOTES
-.sp
-.LP
-When operating on an image you do not own, \fBpm-updatemanager\fR needs to be invoked with enough privilege. You will normally invoke \fBpm-updatemanager\fR using \fB/usr/lib/pm-launch\fR under these circumstances.
--- a/src/man/zh_CN/packagemanager.1 Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,288 +0,0 @@
-'\" te
-.\" Copyright (c) 2007, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-.TH packagemanager 1 "2012 年 5 月 27 日" "SunOS 5.11" "用户命令"
-.SH 名称
-packagemanager \- 映像包管理系统的 GUI
-.SH 用法概要
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [\fIoptions\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [-h | --help]
- [-i | --info-install \fIfile\fR] [-U | --update-all]
- [-R | --image-dir \fIdir\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/packagemanager [\fIfile\fR]
-.fi
-
-.SH 描述
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpackagemanager\fR 是映像包管理系统软件 \fB pkg\fR(5) 的图形用户界面。
-.sp
-.LP
-使用软件包管理器，您可以执行以下任务：
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-搜索、安装和删除软件包。
-.RE
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-添加、删除和修改发布者。
-.RE
-.RS +4
-.TP
-.ie t \(bu
-.el o
-创建、删除和管理引导环境。
-.RE
-.sp
-.LP
-如果指定了 \fIfile\fR 操作数且其后缀为 \fB\&.p5i\fR，\fBpackagemanager\fR 将在 Web 安装模式下启动，可添加一个或多个发布者并为每个发布者添加多个软件包。
-.SH 选项
-.sp
-.LP
-支持以下选项：
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-h\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--help\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-显示用法消息。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-i\fR \fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--info-install\fR \fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-指定 \fB\&.p5i\fR 文件以在 Web 安装模式下运行 \fBpackagemanager\fR。\fIfile\fR 必须具有后缀 \fB\&.p5i\fR。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-R\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--image-dir\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-对根目录为 \fIdir\fR 的映像（而不是自动搜索到的映像）执行操作。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-U\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--update-all\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-更新所有具有可用更新的已安装软件包。
-.LP
-注 -
-.sp
-.RS 2
-如果 \fBpackage/pkg\fR、\fBpackage/pkg/package-manager \fR 或 \fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR 软件包需要更新，则 \fBpackagemanager\fR 首先更新这些软件包，然后重新启动以完成其余所有更新。
-.RE
-.RE
-
-.SH 操作数
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fIfile\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 8n
-.rt
-Web 安装文件。该文件必须具有后缀 \fB\&.p5i\fR。有关 Web 安装的更多信息，请参见软件包管理器联机帮助。
-.RE
-
-.SH 示例
-.LP
-\fB示例 1 \fR对当前映像执行操作
-.sp
-.LP
-对当前映像调用 \fBpackagemanager\fR。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.LP
-\fB示例 2 \fR对指定映像执行操作
-.sp
-.LP
-对存储在 \fB/aux0/example_root \fR 中的映像调用 \fBpackagemanager\fR。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager -R /aux0/example_root\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.LP
-\fB示例 3 \fR在 Web 安装模式下调用
-.sp
-.LP
-在 Web 安装模式下调用 \fBpackagemanager\fR。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fBpackagemanager ~/test.p5i\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.SH 退出状态
-.sp
-.LP
-将返回以下退出值：
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB0\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-一切正常工作。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB1\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-出现错误。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB2\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-指定的命令行选项无效。
-.RE
-
-.SH 文件
-.sp
-.LP
-因为 \fBpkg\fR(5) 映像可位于任意一个较大的文件系统内，需要使用标记 \fB$IMAGE_ROOT\fR 来区分相对路径。对于典型系统安装，\fB$IMAGE_ROOT\fR 等效于 /。
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_ROOT/var/pkg\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-完整或部分映像的元数据目录。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_ROOT/.org.opensolaris,pkg\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-用户映像的元数据目录。
-.sp
-在特定映像的元数据中，某些文件和目录包含修复和恢复期间有用的信息。标记 \fB$IMAGE_META \fR 用于指示包含元数据的顶层目录。\fB $IMAGE_META\fR 通常是以上给出的两个路径之一。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB$IMAGE_META/gui-cache\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-缓存元数据的位置，\fBpackagemanager \fR 维护高速缓存元数据，以便加速程序启动及发布者之间的转换。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.LP
-\fB$IMAGE_META\fR 目录分层结构中的其他路径是专用的，但可以进行更改。
-.SH 属性
-.sp
-.LP
-有关下列属性的说明，请参见 \fBattributes\fR(5)：
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.TS
-tab() box;
-cw(2.75i) |cw(2.75i)
-lw(2.75i) |lw(2.75i)
-.
-属性类型属性值
-_
-可用性\fBpackage/pkg/package-manager\fR
-_
-接口稳定性Uncommitted（未确定）
-.TE
-
-.SH 另请参见
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpm-updatemanager\fR(1)、\fBpkg\fR(1)、\fBpkg\fR(5)
-.sp
-.LP
-软件包管理器联机帮助
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBhttp://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/\fR
-.SH 附注
-.sp
-.LP
-需要使用足够的特权调用 \fBpackagemanager\fR 以便对映像的文件和目录执行操作。
--- a/src/man/zh_CN/pm-updatemanager.1 Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,176 +0,0 @@
-'\" te
-.\" Copyright (c) 2007, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-.TH pm-updatemanager 1 "2012 年 5 月 27 日" "SunOS 5.11" "用户命令"
-.SH 名称
-pm-updatemanager \- 用于更新软件包的应用程序
-.SH 用法概要
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/pm-updatemanager [\fIoptions\fR]
-.fi
-
-.LP
-.nf
-/usr/bin/pm-updatemanager [-h | --help] [-d | --debug]
- [-R \fIdir\fR | --image-dir \fIdir\fR]
-.fi
-
-.SH 描述
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpm-updatemanager\fR 检查系统上安装的软件包是否存在可用更新并安装这些更新。
-.LP
-注 -
-.sp
-.RS 2
-如果 \fBpackage/pkg\fR、\fBpackage/pkg/package-manager \fR 或 \fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR 软件包需要更新，则 \fBpm-updatemanager\fR 首先更新这些软件包，然后重新启动以完成其余所有更新。
-.RE
-.SH 选项
-.sp
-.LP
-支持以下选项：
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-h\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--help\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-显示用法消息。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-d\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--debug\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-在调试模式下运行 \fBpm-updatemanager\fR。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB-R\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.br
-.na
-\fB\fB--image-dir\fR \fIdir\fR\fR
-.ad
-.sp .6
-.RS 4n
-对根目录为 \fIdir\fR 的映像（而不是自动搜索到的映像）执行操作。
-.RE
-
-.SH 示例
-.LP
-\fB示例 1 \fR更新当前映像
-.sp
-.LP
-对当前映像调用 \fBpm-updatemanager\fR。这会检查当前映像中安装的软件包的所有可用更新并安装这些更新。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fB/usr/lib/pm-launch pm-updatemanager\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.LP
-这是桌面菜单选项“系统”>“管理”> "Update Manager" 调用的同一命令。
-
-.LP
-\fB示例 2 \fR更新指定映像
-.sp
-.LP
-对存储在 \fB /aux0/example_root\fR 中的映像调用 \fBpm-updatemanager\fR。
-
-.sp
-.in +2
-.nf
-$ \fB/usr/lib/pm-launch pm-updatemanager -R /aux0/example_root\fR
-.fi
-.in -2
-.sp
-
-.SH 退出状态
-.sp
-.LP
-将返回以下退出值：
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB0\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-一切正常工作。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB1\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-出现错误。
-.RE
-
-.sp
-.ne 2
-.mk
-.na
-\fB\fB2\fR\fR
-.ad
-.RS 5n
-.rt
-指定的命令行选项无效。
-.RE
-
-.SH 属性
-.sp
-.LP
-有关下列属性的说明，请参见 \fBattributes\fR(5)：
-.sp
-
-.sp
-.TS
-tab() box;
-cw(2.75i) |cw(2.75i)
-lw(2.75i) |lw(2.75i)
-.
-属性类型属性值
-_
-可用性\fBpackage/pkg/update-manager\fR
-_
-接口稳定性Uncommitted（未确定）
-.TE
-
-.SH 另请参见
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBpackagemanager\fR(1)、\fBpkg\fR(1)、\fBpkg\fR(5)
-.sp
-.LP
-\fBhttp://hub.opensolaris.org/bin/view/Project+pkg/\fR
-.SH 附注
-.sp
-.LP
-对您不具有的映像执行操作时，需要具有足够的特权才能调用 \fBpm-updatemanager\fR。在这些情况下，通常使用 \fB/usr/lib/pm-launch\fR 调用 \fBpm-updatemanager \fR。
--- a/src/modules/client/api.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/modules/client/api.py Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@
changes.
'pkg_client_name' is a string containing the name of the client,
- such as "pkg" or "packagemanager".
+ such as "pkg".
'exact_match' is a boolean indicating whether the API should
attempt to find a usable image starting from the specified
@@ -5383,7 +5383,7 @@
"""Creates an image at the specified location.
'pkg_client_name' is a string containing the name of the client,
- such as "pkg" or "packagemanager".
+ such as "pkg".
'version_id' indicates the version of the api the client is
expecting to use.
--- a/src/modules/client/history.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/modules/client/history.py Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
#
#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+# Copyright (c) 2008, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
import copy
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@
# The directory where the history directory can be found (or
# created if it doesn't exist).
root_dir = None
- # The name of the client (e.g. pkg, packagemanager, etc.)
+ # The name of the client (e.g. pkg, etc.)
client_name = None
# The version of the client (e.g. 093ca22da67c).
client_version = None
--- a/src/modules/gui/__init__.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-__all__ = ['installupdate', 'enumerations', \
- 'repository', 'imageinfo', 'beadmin', 'cache', \
- 'uarenamebe']
--- a/src/modules/gui/beadmin.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,634 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import sys
-import os
-import pango
-import time
-import datetime
-import locale
-import pkg.pkgsubprocess as subprocess
-from threading import Thread
-
-try:
- import gobject
- gobject.threads_init()
- import gtk
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require("2.0")
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.client.bootenv as bootenv
-import pkg.misc
-
-#BE_LIST
-(
-BE_ID,
-BE_MARKED,
-BE_NAME,
-BE_ORIG_NAME,
-BE_DATE_TIME,
-BE_CURRENT_PIXBUF,
-BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT,
-BE_SIZE,
-BE_EDITABLE
-) = range(9)
-
-class Beadmin:
- def __init__(self, parent):
- self.parent = parent
-
- if not bootenv.BootEnv.libbe_exists():
- msg = _("The <b>libbe</b> library was not "
- "found on your system."
- "\nAll functions for managing Boot Environments are disabled")
- msgbox = gtk.MessageDialog(
- buttons = gtk.BUTTONS_CLOSE,
- flags = gtk.DIALOG_MODAL, type = gtk.MESSAGE_INFO,
- message_format = None)
- msgbox.set_markup(msg)
- msgbox.set_title(_("BE management"))
- msgbox.run()
- msgbox.destroy()
- return
-
- self.be_list = \
- gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # BE_ID
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # BE_MARKED
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # BE_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # BE_ORIG_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # BE_DATE_TIME
- gtk.gdk.Pixbuf, # BE_CURRENT_PIXBUF
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # BE_SIZE
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # BE_EDITABLE
- )
- self.progress_stop_thread = False
- self.initial_active = 0
- self.initial_default = 0
- gladefile = os.path.join(self.parent.application_dir,
- "usr/share/package-manager/packagemanager.ui")
- builder = gtk.Builder()
- builder.add_from_file(gladefile)
- self.w_beadmin_dialog = builder.get_object("beadmin")
- self.w_beadmin_dialog.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.w_be_treeview = builder.get_object("betreeview")
- self.w_help_button = builder.get_object("help_bebutton")
- self.w_cancel_button = builder.get_object("cancelbebutton")
- self.w_ok_button = builder.get_object("okbebutton")
- w_active_gtkimage = builder.get_object("activebeimage")
- self.w_progress_dialog = builder.get_object("progressdialog")
- self.w_progress_dialog.connect('delete-event', lambda stub1, stub2: True)
- self.w_progress_dialog.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.w_progressinfo_label = builder.get_object("progressinfo")
- progress_button = builder.get_object("progresscancel")
- self.w_progressbar = builder.get_object("progressbar")
- # Dialog reused in the repository.py
- self.w_beconfirmation_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("confirmationdialog")
- self.w_beconfirmation_dialog.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.w_beconfirmation_textview = \
- builder.get_object("confirmtext")
- self.w_okbe_button = builder.get_object("ok_conf")
- self.w_cancelbe_button = builder.get_object("cancel_conf")
- self.w_ok_button.set_sensitive(False)
- progress_button.hide()
- self.w_progressbar.set_pulse_step(0.1)
- self.list_filter = self.be_list.filter_new()
- self.w_be_treeview.set_model(self.list_filter)
- self.__init_tree_views()
- self.active_image = gui_misc.get_icon(
- self.parent.icon_theme, "status_checkmark")
- w_active_gtkimage.set_from_pixbuf(self.active_image)
-
- bebuffer = self.w_beconfirmation_textview.get_buffer()
- bebuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
-
- self.__setup_signals()
- sel = self.w_be_treeview.get_selection()
- self.w_cancel_button.grab_focus()
- sel.set_mode(gtk.SELECTION_SINGLE)
- self.w_beconfirmation_dialog.set_title(
- _("Boot Environment Confirmation"))
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_beadmin_dialog,
- self.parent.w_main_window)
- self.parent.child = self
- self.w_beadmin_dialog.show_all()
- self.w_progress_dialog.set_title(
- _("Loading Boot Environment Information"))
- self.w_progressinfo_label.set_text(
- _("Fetching BE entries..."))
- self.w_progress_dialog.show()
- Thread(target = self.__progress_pulse).start()
- Thread(target = self.__prepare_beadmin_list).start()
-
- def __setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_cancel_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_cancel_be_clicked),
- (self.w_ok_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_ok_be_clicked),
- (self.w_help_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_help_bebutton_clicked),
-
- (self.w_cancelbe_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_cancel_be_conf_clicked),
- (self.w_okbe_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_ok_be_conf_clicked),
- (self.w_beconfirmation_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_beconfirmationdialog_delete_event),
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def cleanup(self):
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- self.__on_beadmin_delete_event(None, None)
-
- def __progress_pulse(self):
- while not self.progress_stop_thread:
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progressbar.pulse)
- time.sleep(0.1)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progress_dialog.hide)
-
- def __prepare_beadmin_list(self):
- be_list = bootenv.BootEnv.get_be_list()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__create_view_with_be, be_list)
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- return
-
- def __init_tree_views(self):
- model = self.w_be_treeview.get_model()
-
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn()
- column.set_title("")
- render_pixbuf = gtk.CellRendererPixbuf()
- column.pack_start(render_pixbuf, expand = True)
- column.add_attribute(render_pixbuf, "pixbuf", BE_CURRENT_PIXBUF)
- self.w_be_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- name_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- name_renderer.connect('edited', self.__be_name_edited, model)
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Boot Environment"),
- name_renderer, text = BE_NAME)
- column.set_cell_data_func(name_renderer, self.__cell_data_function, None)
- column.set_expand(True)
- if bootenv.BootEnv.check_verify():
- column.add_attribute(name_renderer, "editable",
- BE_EDITABLE)
- self.w_be_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- datetime_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- datetime_renderer.set_property('xalign', 0.0)
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Created"), datetime_renderer,
- text = BE_DATE_TIME)
- column.set_cell_data_func(datetime_renderer,
- self.__cell_data_function, None)
- column.set_expand(True)
- self.w_be_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- size_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- size_renderer.set_property('xalign', 1.0)
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Size"), size_renderer,
- text = BE_SIZE)
- column.set_cell_data_func(size_renderer, self.__cell_data_function, None)
- column.set_expand(False)
- self.w_be_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- radio_renderer = gtk.CellRendererToggle()
- radio_renderer.connect('toggled', self.__active_pane_default, model)
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Active on Reboot"),
- radio_renderer, active = BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT)
- radio_renderer.set_property("activatable", True)
- radio_renderer.set_property("radio", True)
- column.set_cell_data_func(radio_renderer,
- self.__cell_data_default_function, None)
- column.set_expand(False)
- self.w_be_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- toggle_renderer = gtk.CellRendererToggle()
- toggle_renderer.connect('toggled', self.__active_pane_toggle, model)
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Delete"), toggle_renderer,
- active = BE_MARKED)
- toggle_renderer.set_property("activatable", True)
- column.set_cell_data_func(toggle_renderer,
- self.__cell_data_delete_function, None)
- column.set_expand(False)
- self.w_be_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- def __on_help_bebutton_clicked(self, widget):
- if self.parent != None:
- gui_misc.display_help("manage-be")
- else:
- gui_misc.display_help()
-
- def __on_ok_be_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_progress_dialog.set_title(_("Applying changes"))
- self.w_progressinfo_label.set_text(
- _("Applying changes, please wait ..."))
- if self.w_ok_button.get_property('sensitive') == 0:
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- self.__on_beadmin_delete_event(None, None)
- return
- Thread(target = self.__activate).start()
-
- def __on_cancel_be_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__on_beadmin_delete_event(None, None)
- return False
-
- def __on_beconfirmationdialog_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_cancel_be_conf_clicked(widget)
- return True
-
- def __on_cancel_be_conf_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_beconfirmation_dialog.hide()
-
- def __on_ok_be_conf_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_beconfirmation_dialog.hide()
- self.progress_stop_thread = False
- Thread(target = self.__on_progressdialog_progress).start()
- Thread(target = self.__delete_activate_be).start()
-
- def __on_beadmin_delete_event(self, widget, event, stub=None):
- self.parent.child = None
- self.w_beadmin_dialog.destroy()
- return True
-
- def __activate(self):
- active_text = _("Active on reboot\n")
- delete_text = _("Delete\n")
- rename_text = _("Rename\n")
- active = ""
- delete = ""
- rename = {}
- for row in self.be_list:
-
- if row[BE_MARKED]:
- delete += "\t" + row[BE_NAME] + "\n"
- if row[BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT] == True and row[BE_ID] != \
- self.initial_default:
- active += "\t" + row[BE_NAME] + "\n"
- if row[BE_NAME] != row[BE_ORIG_NAME]:
- rename[row[BE_ORIG_NAME]] = row[BE_NAME]
- textbuf = self.w_beconfirmation_textview.get_buffer()
- textbuf.set_text("")
- textiter = textbuf.get_end_iter()
- if len(active) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- active_text, "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- active)
- if len(delete) > 0:
- if len(active) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\n")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- delete_text, "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- delete)
- if len(rename) > 0:
- if len(delete) > 0 or len(active) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\n")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- rename_text, "bold")
- for orig in rename:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\t")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- orig)
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- _(" to "), "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- rename.get(orig) + "\n")
- self.w_okbe_button.grab_focus()
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_beconfirmation_dialog.show)
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
-
- def __on_progressdialog_progress(self):
- # This needs to be run in gobject.idle_add, otherwise we will get
- # Xlib: unexpected async reply (sequence 0x2db0)!
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progress_dialog.show)
- while not self.progress_stop_thread:
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progressbar.pulse)
- time.sleep(0.1)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progress_dialog.hide)
-
- def __delete_activate_be(self):
- not_deleted = []
- not_default = None
- not_renamed = {}
- # The while gtk.events_pending():
- # gtk.main_iteration(False)
- # Is not working if we are calling libbe, so it is required
- # To have sleep in few places in this function
- # Remove
- for row in self.be_list:
- if row[BE_MARKED]:
- time.sleep(0.1)
- result = self.__destroy_be(row[BE_NAME])
- if result != 0:
- not_deleted.append(row[BE_NAME])
- # Rename
- for row in self.be_list:
- if row[BE_NAME] != row[BE_ORIG_NAME]:
- time.sleep(0.1)
- result = self.__rename_be(row[BE_ORIG_NAME],
- row[BE_NAME])
- if result != 0:
- not_renamed[row[BE_ORIG_NAME]] = row[BE_NAME]
- # Set active
- for row in self.be_list:
- if row[BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT] == True and row[BE_ID] != \
- self.initial_default:
- time.sleep(0.1)
- result = self.__set_default_be(row[BE_NAME])
- if result != 0:
- not_default = row[BE_NAME]
- if len(not_deleted) == 0 and not_default == None \
- and len(not_renamed) == 0:
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- else:
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- msg = ""
- if not_default:
- msg += _("<b>Couldn't change Active "
- "Boot Environment to:</b>\n") + not_default
- if len(not_deleted) > 0:
- if not_default:
- msg += "\n\n"
- msg += _("<b>Couldn't delete Boot "
- "Environments:</b>\n")
- for row in not_deleted:
- msg += row + "\n"
- if len(not_renamed) > 0:
- if not_default or len(not_deleted):
- msg += "\n"
- msg += _("<b>Couldn't rename Boot "
- "Environments:</b>\n")
- for orig in not_renamed:
- msg += _("%(src)s <b>to</b> "
- "%(targ)s\n") % \
- {"src": orig,
- "targ": not_renamed.get(orig)}
- gobject.idle_add(self.__error_occurred, msg)
- return
- gobject.idle_add(self.__on_cancel_be_clicked, None)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __rename_cell(model, itr, new_name):
- model.set_value(itr, BE_NAME, new_name)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __rename_be(orig_name, new_name):
- return bootenv.BootEnv.rename_be(orig_name, new_name)
-
- def __error_occurred(self, error_msg, reset=True):
- gui_misc.error_occurred(self.w_beadmin_dialog,
- error_msg,
- _("BE error"),
- gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR,
- True)
- if reset:
- self.__on_reset_be()
-
- def __on_reset_be(self):
- self.be_list.clear()
- self.w_progress_dialog.show()
- self.progress_stop_thread = False
- Thread(target = self.__progress_pulse).start()
- Thread(target = self.__prepare_beadmin_list).start()
- self.w_ok_button.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __active_pane_toggle(self, cell, filtered_path, filtered_model):
- model = filtered_model.get_model()
- path = filtered_model.convert_path_to_child_path(filtered_path)
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- if itr:
- modified = model.get_value(itr, BE_MARKED)
- # Do not allow to set active if selected for removal
- model.set_value(itr, BE_MARKED, not modified)
- # Do not allow to rename if we are removing be.
- model.set_value(itr, BE_EDITABLE, modified)
- self.__enable_disable_ok()
-
- def __enable_disable_ok(self):
- for row in self.be_list:
- if row[BE_MARKED] == True:
- self.w_ok_button.set_sensitive(True)
- return
- if row[BE_ID] == self.initial_default:
- if row[BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT] == False:
- self.w_ok_button.set_sensitive(True)
- return
- if row[BE_NAME] != row[BE_ORIG_NAME]:
- self.w_ok_button.set_sensitive(True)
- return
- self.w_ok_button.set_sensitive(False)
- return
-
- def __be_name_edited(self, cell, filtered_path, new_name, filtered_model):
- model = filtered_model.get_model()
- path = filtered_model.convert_path_to_child_path(filtered_path)
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- if itr:
- if model.get_value(itr, BE_NAME) == new_name:
- return
- if self.__verify_be_name(new_name) != 0:
- return
- self.__rename_cell(model, itr, new_name)
- self.__enable_disable_ok()
- return
-
- #TBD: Notify user if name clash using same logic as Repo Add and warning text
- def __verify_be_name(self, new_name):
- try:
- bootenv.BootEnv.check_be_name(new_name)
- except api_errors.DuplicateBEName:
- pass
- except api_errors.ApiException:
- return -1
- for row in self.be_list:
- if new_name == row[BE_NAME]:
- return -1
- return 0
-
- def __active_pane_default(self, cell, filtered_path, filtered_model):
- model = filtered_model.get_model()
- path = filtered_model.convert_path_to_child_path(filtered_path)
- for row in model:
- row[BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT] = False
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- if itr:
- modified = model.get_value(itr, BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT)
- model.set_value(itr, BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT, not modified)
- self.__enable_disable_ok()
-
- def __create_view_with_be(self, be_list):
- dates = None
- i = 0
- j = 0
- if len(be_list) == 0:
- msg = _("The <b>libbe</b> library couldn't "
- "prepare list of Boot Environments."
- "\nAll functions for managing Boot Environments are disabled")
- self.__error_occurred(msg, False)
- return
-
- for bee in be_list:
- item = bootenv.BootEnv.split_be_entry(bee)
- if item and item[0]:
- (name, active, active_boot, be_size, be_date) = item
- converted_size = \
- self.__convert_size_of_be_to_string(be_size)
- active_img = None
- if not be_date and j == 0:
- dates = self.__get_dates_of_creation(be_list)
- if dates:
- try:
- date_time = repr(dates[i])[1:-3]
- date_tmp = time.strptime(date_time, \
- "%a %b %d %H:%M %Y")
- date_tmp2 = \
- datetime.datetime(*date_tmp[0:5])
- try:
- date_format = \
- unicode(
- _("%m/%d/%y %H:%M"),
- "utf-8").encode(
- locale.getpreferredencoding())
- except (UnicodeError, LookupError,
- locale.Error):
- date_format = "%F %H:%M"
- date_time = \
- date_tmp2.strftime(date_format)
- i += 1
- except (NameError, ValueError, TypeError):
- date_time = None
- else:
- date_tmp = time.localtime(be_date)
- try:
- date_format = \
- unicode(
- _("%m/%d/%y %H:%M"),
- "utf-8").encode(
- locale.getpreferredencoding())
- except (UnicodeError, LookupError, locale.Error):
- date_format = "%F %H:%M"
- date_time = \
- time.strftime(date_format, date_tmp)
- if active:
- active_img = self.active_image
- self.initial_active = j
- if active_boot:
- self.initial_default = j
- if date_time != None:
- try:
- date_time = unicode(date_time,
- locale.getpreferredencoding()).encode(
- "utf-8")
- except (UnicodeError, LookupError, locale.Error):
- pass
- self.be_list.insert(j, [j, False,
- name, name,
- date_time, active_img,
- active_boot, converted_size, active_img == None])
- j += 1
- self.w_be_treeview.set_cursor(self.initial_active, None,
- start_editing=True)
- self.w_be_treeview.scroll_to_cell(self.initial_active)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __destroy_be(be_name):
- return bootenv.BootEnv.destroy_be(be_name)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __set_default_be(be_name):
- return bootenv.BootEnv.set_default_be(be_name)
-
- def __cell_data_default_function(self, column, renderer, model, itr, data):
- if itr:
- if model.get_value(itr, BE_MARKED):
- self.__set_renderer_active(renderer, False)
- else:
- self.__set_renderer_active(renderer, True)
-
- def __cell_data_delete_function(self, column, renderer, model, itr, data):
- if itr:
- if model.get_value(itr, BE_ACTIVE_DEFAULT) or \
- (self.initial_active == model.get_value(itr, BE_ID)) or \
- (model.get_value(itr, BE_NAME) !=
- model.get_value(itr, BE_ORIG_NAME)):
- self.__set_renderer_active(renderer, False)
- else:
- self.__set_renderer_active(renderer, True)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __set_renderer_active(renderer, active):
- if active:
- renderer.set_property("sensitive", True)
- renderer.set_property("mode", gtk.CELL_RENDERER_MODE_ACTIVATABLE)
- else:
- renderer.set_property("sensitive", False)
- renderer.set_property("mode", gtk.CELL_RENDERER_MODE_INERT)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_dates_of_creation(be_list):
- #zfs list -H -o creation rpool/ROOT/opensolaris-1
- cmd = [ "/sbin/zfs", "list", "-H", "-o","creation" ]
- for bee in be_list:
- if bee.get("orig_be_name"):
- name = bee.get("orig_be_name")
- pool = bee.get("orig_be_pool")
- cmd += [pool+"/ROOT/"+name]
- if len(cmd) <= 5:
- return None
- list_of_dates = []
- try:
- proc = subprocess.Popen(cmd, stdout = subprocess.PIPE,
- stderr = subprocess.PIPE,)
- line_out = proc.stdout.readline()
- while line_out:
- list_of_dates.append(line_out)
- line_out = proc.stdout.readline()
- except OSError:
- return list_of_dates
- return list_of_dates
-
- @staticmethod
- def __convert_size_of_be_to_string(be_size):
- if not be_size:
- be_size = 0
- return pkg.misc.bytes_to_str(be_size)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __cell_data_function(column, renderer, model, itr, data):
- if itr:
- if model.get_value(itr, BE_CURRENT_PIXBUF):
- renderer.set_property("weight", pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- else:
- renderer.set_property("weight", pango.WEIGHT_NORMAL)
--- a/src/modules/gui/cache.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,174 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-import os
-import sys
-try:
- import gtk
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-from threading import Thread
-import pkg.gui.misc_non_gui as nongui_misc
-
-CACHE_VERSION = 11
-
-class CacheListStores:
- def __init__(self, api_o):
- self.api_o = api_o
-
- def __get_cache_dir(self):
- return nongui_misc.get_cache_dir(self.api_o)
-
- def get_index_timestamp(self):
- return self.api_o.last_modified
-
- def __dump_categories_expanded_dict(self, cat_exp_dict):
- #CED entry: {('opensolaris.org', (6,)): True}
- cache_dir = self.__get_cache_dir()
- if not cache_dir:
- return
- catexs = []
- for key, val in cat_exp_dict.iteritems():
- if not val:
- continue
- name, path = key
- path1 = -1
- if len(path) > 0:
- path1 = path[0]
- catex = {}
- catex["name"] = name
- catex["path1"] = path1
- catexs.append(catex)
-
- nongui_misc.dump_cache_file(
- os.path.join(cache_dir, "pm_cat_exp.cpl"),
- catexs)
-
- def __load_categories_expanded_dict(self, cat_exp_dict):
- cache_dir = self.__get_cache_dir()
- if not cache_dir:
- return
- catexs = nongui_misc.read_cache_file(
- os.path.join(cache_dir, "pm_cat_exp.cpl"))
- for catex in catexs:
- name = catex.get("name")
- path1 = catex.get("path1")
- if path1 != -1:
- cat_exp_dict[name, (path1,)] = True
-
- def dump_categories_expanded_dict(self, cat_exp_dict):
- Thread(target = self.__dump_categories_expanded_dict,
- args = (cat_exp_dict, )).start()
-
- def load_categories_expanded_dict(self, cat_exp_dict):
- Thread(target = self.__load_categories_expanded_dict,
- args = (cat_exp_dict, )).start()
-
- def __dump_categories_active_dict(self, cat_ac_dict):
- cache_dir = self.__get_cache_dir()
- if not cache_dir:
- return
- catacs = []
- for name, path in cat_ac_dict.iteritems():
- path1 = -1
- path2 = -1
- if len(path) == 1:
- path1 = path[0]
- elif len(path) > 1:
- path1 = path[0]
- path2 = path[1]
- catac = {}
- catac["name"] = name
- catac["path1"] = path1
- catac["path2"] = path2
- catacs.append(catac)
-
- nongui_misc.dump_cache_file(
- os.path.join(cache_dir, "pm_cat_ac.cpl"),
- catacs)
-
- def __load_categories_active_dict(self, cat_ac_dict):
- cache_dir = self.__get_cache_dir()
- if not cache_dir:
- return
- catacs = nongui_misc.read_cache_file(
- os.path.join(cache_dir, "pm_cat_ac.cpl"))
- for catac in catacs:
- name = catac.get("name")
- path1 = catac.get("path1")
- path2 = catac.get("path2")
- if path1 != -1 and path2 != -1:
- cat_ac_dict[name] = (path1, path2)
- elif path1 != -1:
- cat_ac_dict[name] = (path1,)
-
- def dump_categories_active_dict(self, cat_ac_dict):
- Thread(target = self.__dump_categories_active_dict,
- args = (cat_ac_dict, )).start()
-
- def load_categories_active_dict(self, cat_ac_dict):
- Thread(target = self.__load_categories_active_dict,
- args = (cat_ac_dict, )).start()
-
- def __dump_search_completion_info(self, completion_list):
- cache_dir = self.__get_cache_dir()
- if not cache_dir:
- return
- texts = []
- for text in completion_list:
- txt = {}
- txt["text"] = text[0]
- texts.append(txt)
- try:
- nongui_misc.dump_cache_file(
- os.path.join(cache_dir, ".__search__completion.cpl"), texts)
- except IOError:
- return
-
- def __load_search_completion_info(self, completion_list):
- cache_dir = self.__get_cache_dir()
- if not cache_dir:
- return
- texts = []
- try:
- texts = nongui_misc.read_cache_file(
- os.path.join(cache_dir, ".__search__completion.cpl"))
- except IOError:
- return gtk.ListStore(str)
-
- txt_count = 0
- for txt in texts:
- txt_val = txt.get("text")
- text = [ txt_val ]
- completion_list.insert(txt_count, text)
- txt_count += 1
-
- def dump_search_completion_info(self, completion_list):
- Thread(target = self.__dump_search_completion_info,
- args = (completion_list, )).start()
-
- def load_search_completion_info(self, completion_list):
- Thread(target = self.__load_search_completion_info,
- args = (completion_list, )).start()
--- a/src/modules/gui/detailspanel.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,310 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import sys
-try:
- import gobject
- import gtk
- import pango
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-import pkg.version as version
-import pkg.client.api as api
-
-class DetailsPanel:
- def __init__(self, parent, builder):
- self.parent = parent
- self.w_generalinfo_textview = \
- builder.get_object("generalinfotextview")
- self.w_generalinfo_textview.get_buffer().create_tag(
- "bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- self.w_installedfiles_textview = \
- builder.get_object("installedfilestextview")
- self.w_installedfiles_textview.get_buffer().create_tag(
- "bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- self.w_license_textview = \
- builder.get_object("licensetextview")
- self.w_dependencies_textview = \
- builder.get_object("dependenciestextview")
- self.w_versions_name_label = \
- builder.get_object("versions_name_label")
- self.w_versions_label = \
- builder.get_object("versions_label")
- self.w_versions_combobox = \
- builder.get_object("versions_combo")
- self.w_versions_install_button = \
- builder.get_object("versions_install_button")
- self.w_installable_versions_hbox = \
- builder.get_object("installable_versions_hbox")
-
- self.w_dependencies_textview.get_buffer().create_tag(
- "bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- self.showing_empty_details = False
- self.versions_list = None
- self.__init_versions_tree_view()
-
- self.w_versions_install_button.connect("clicked",
- self.__on_versions_install_button_clicked)
-
- def __init_versions_tree_view(self):
- cell = gtk.CellRendererText()
- self.w_versions_combobox.pack_start(cell, True)
- self.w_versions_combobox.add_attribute(cell, 'text',
- enumerations.VERSION_DISPLAY_NAME)
-
- def __on_versions_install_button_clicked(self, widget):
- active = self.w_versions_combobox.get_active()
- active_version = self.versions_list[active][enumerations.VERSION_NAME]
- self.parent.install_version(active_version)
-
- def setup_text_signals(self, has_selection_cb, focus_in_cb,
- focus_out_cb):
- self.w_generalinfo_textview.get_buffer().connect(
- "notify::has-selection", has_selection_cb)
- self.w_installedfiles_textview.get_buffer().connect(
- "notify::has-selection", has_selection_cb)
- self.w_dependencies_textview.get_buffer().connect(
- "notify::has-selection", has_selection_cb)
- self.w_license_textview.get_buffer().connect(
- "notify::has-selection", has_selection_cb)
- self.w_generalinfo_textview.connect(
- "focus-in-event", focus_in_cb)
- self.w_installedfiles_textview.connect(
- "focus-in-event", focus_in_cb)
- self.w_dependencies_textview.connect(
- "focus-in-event", focus_in_cb)
- self.w_license_textview.connect(
- "focus-in-event", focus_in_cb)
- self.w_generalinfo_textview.connect(
- "focus-out-event", focus_out_cb)
- self.w_installedfiles_textview.connect(
- "focus-out-event", focus_out_cb)
- self.w_dependencies_textview.connect(
- "focus-out-event", focus_out_cb)
- self.w_license_textview.connect(
- "focus-out-event", focus_out_cb)
-
- def set_fetching_info(self):
- if self.parent.selected_pkg_name == None:
- return
- self.showing_empty_details = False
- self.__show_fetching_package_info()
-
- def __show_fetching_package_info(self):
- instbuffer = self.w_installedfiles_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer = self.w_generalinfo_textview.get_buffer()
- fetching_text = _("Fetching information...")
- instbuffer.set_text(fetching_text)
- infobuffer.set_text(fetching_text)
-
- def clear_details(self, info_pkgstem, dependencies_pkgstem, license_pkgstem,
- versions_pkgstem, selected_pkgstem):
- if not info_pkgstem and info_pkgstem != selected_pkgstem:
- self.w_generalinfo_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
- self.w_installedfiles_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
- if not dependencies_pkgstem and dependencies_pkgstem != selected_pkgstem:
- self.w_dependencies_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
- if not license_pkgstem and license_pkgstem != selected_pkgstem:
- self.w_license_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
- if not versions_pkgstem and versions_pkgstem != selected_pkgstem:
- self.versions_list = None
- self.w_versions_name_label.set_text("")
- self.w_versions_label.set_text("")
- self.w_versions_install_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.__set_empty_versions_combo()
-
- def set_empty_details(self):
- self.showing_empty_details = True
- self.w_installedfiles_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
- self.w_dependencies_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
- self.w_generalinfo_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
- self.w_license_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
-
- self.versions_list = None
- self.w_versions_name_label.set_text("")
- self.w_versions_label.set_text("")
- self.w_versions_install_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.__set_empty_versions_combo()
-
- def __set_empty_versions_combo(self, is_visible=False):
- empty_versions_list = self.__get_new_versions_liststore()
- empty_versions_list.append([0, _("Installable versions... "), "", 0])
- self.w_versions_combobox.set_model(empty_versions_list)
- self.w_versions_combobox.set_active(0)
- self.w_installable_versions_hbox.set_property('visible', is_visible)
-
- def set_fetching_dependencies(self):
- if self.parent.selected_pkg_name == None:
- return
- self.showing_empty_details = False
- dep_buffer = self.w_dependencies_textview.get_buffer()
- fetching_txt = _("Fetching dependencies information...")
- dep_buffer.set_text(fetching_txt)
-
- def set_fetching_license(self):
- if self.parent.selected_pkg_name == None:
- return
- self.showing_empty_details = False
- licbuffer = self.w_license_textview.get_buffer()
- leg_txt = _("Fetching legal information...")
- licbuffer.set_text(leg_txt)
-
- def set_fetching_versions(self):
- if self.parent.selected_pkg_name == None:
- return
- self.showing_empty_details = False
- self.w_versions_name_label.set_text(self.parent.selected_pkg_name)
- fetching_text = _("Fetching information...")
- self.w_versions_label.set_text(fetching_text)
- self.w_versions_install_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.__set_empty_versions_combo(is_visible=True)
-
- def update_package_dependencies(self, info, dep_info, installed_dep_info,
- installed_icon, not_installed_icon):
- self.__set_dependencies_text(info, dep_info,
- installed_dep_info, installed_icon, not_installed_icon)
-
- def no_dependencies_available(self):
- depbuffer = self.w_dependencies_textview.get_buffer()
- network_str = \
- _("\nThis might be caused by network problem "
- "while accessing the repository.")
- depbuffer.set_text(_(
- "Dependencies info not available for this package...") +
- network_str)
-
- def update_package_info(self, pkg_name, local_info, remote_info,
- root, installed_icon, not_installed_icon, update_available_icon,
- is_all_publishers_installed, pubs_info, renamed_info=None,
- pkg_renamed = False):
- instbuffer = self.w_installedfiles_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer = self.w_generalinfo_textview.get_buffer()
-
- if not local_info and not remote_info:
- network_str = \
- _("\nThis might be caused by network problem "
- "while accessing the repository.")
- instbuffer.set_text( \
- _("Files Details not available for this package...") +
- network_str)
- infobuffer.set_text(
- _("Information not available for this package...") +
- network_str)
- return
-
- gui_misc.set_package_details(pkg_name, local_info,
- remote_info, self.w_generalinfo_textview,
- installed_icon, not_installed_icon,
- update_available_icon,
- is_all_publishers_installed, pubs_info, renamed_info, pkg_renamed)
- if not local_info:
- # Package is not installed
- local_info = remote_info
-
- if not remote_info:
- remote_info = local_info
-
- inst_str = ""
- if local_info.dirs:
- for x in local_info.dirs:
- inst_str += ''.join("%s%s\n" % (
- root, x))
- if local_info.files:
- for x in local_info.files:
- inst_str += ''.join("%s%s\n" % (
- root, x))
- if local_info.hardlinks:
- for x in local_info.hardlinks:
- inst_str += ''.join("%s%s\n" % (
- root, x))
- if local_info.links:
- for x in local_info.links:
- inst_str += ''.join("%s%s\n" % (
- root, x))
- self.__set_installedfiles_text(inst_str)
-
- def __set_installedfiles_text(self, text):
- instbuffer = self.w_installedfiles_textview.get_buffer()
- instbuffer.set_text("")
- itr = instbuffer.get_start_iter()
- instbuffer.insert(itr, text)
-
- def __set_dependencies_text(self, info, dep_info, installed_dep_info,
- installed_icon, not_installed_icon):
- gui_misc.set_dependencies_text(self.w_dependencies_textview,
- info, dep_info, installed_dep_info, installed_icon,
- not_installed_icon)
-
- def update_package_license(self, licenses):
- if self.showing_empty_details:
- return
- licbuffer = self.w_license_textview.get_buffer()
- licbuffer.set_text(gui_misc.setup_package_license(licenses))
-
- def update_package_versions(self, versions):
- if self.showing_empty_details:
- return
-
- self.versions_list = self.__get_new_versions_liststore()
- i = 0
- previous_display_version = None
- self.w_versions_label.set_text(_("Not Installed"))
- for (version_str, states) in versions:
- state = gui_misc.get_state_from_states(states)
-
- version_tuple = version.Version.split(version_str)
- version_fmt = gui_misc.get_version_fmt_string()
- display_version = version_fmt % \
- {"version": version_tuple[0][0],
- "build": version_tuple[0][1],
- "branch": version_tuple[0][2]}
- if api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED in states:
- self.w_versions_label.set_text(display_version)
- break
- if (previous_display_version and
- previous_display_version == display_version):
- continue
- previous_display_version = display_version
- self.versions_list.append([i, display_version,
- version_str, state])
- i += 1
- if i > 0:
- self.w_versions_install_button.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.versions_list.clear()
- self.versions_list.append([0, _("No versions available"), "", 0])
- self.w_versions_install_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_versions_combobox.set_model(self.versions_list)
- self.w_versions_combobox.set_active(0)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_new_versions_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.VERSION_ID
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.VERSION_DISPLAY_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.VERSION_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.VERSION_STATUS
- )
--- a/src/modules/gui/entrystyle.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-import sys
-try:
- import gtk
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-
-SEARCH_TXT_GREY_STYLE = "#757575" #Close to DimGrey
-SEARCH_TXT_BLACK_STYLE = "#000000"
-
-class EntryStyle:
- def __init__(self, entry):
- self.search_txt_fg_style = gtk.gdk.color_parse(SEARCH_TXT_BLACK_STYLE)
- self.entry = entry
- self.entry_embedded_icons_supported = True
- try:
- self.entry.set_property("secondary-icon-stock", None)
- except TypeError:
- self.entry_embedded_icons_supported = False
- self.search_text_style = -1
- self.set_search_text_mode(enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT)
-
- def set_theme_colour(self, page_fg):
- self.search_txt_fg_style = page_fg
- if self.get_text() != None:
- self.set_search_text_mode(enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_NORMAL)
- else:
- self.set_entry_to_prompt()
-
- def set_search_text_mode(self, style):
- if style == enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_NORMAL:
- self.entry.modify_text(gtk.STATE_NORMAL, self.search_txt_fg_style)
- if self.search_text_style == enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT or\
- self.entry.get_text() == _("Search (Ctrl-F)"):
- self.entry.set_text("")
- self.search_text_style = enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_NORMAL
-
- else:
- self.entry.modify_text(gtk.STATE_NORMAL,
- gtk.gdk.color_parse(SEARCH_TXT_GREY_STYLE))
- self.search_text_style = enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT
- self.entry.set_text(_("Search (Ctrl-F)"))
-
- def on_entry_changed(self, widget):
- if widget.get_text_length() > 0 and \
- self.search_text_style != enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT:
- if self.entry_embedded_icons_supported:
- self.entry.set_property("secondary-icon-stock",
- gtk.STOCK_CANCEL)
- self.entry.set_property(
- "secondary-icon-sensitive", True)
- return True
- else:
- if self.entry_embedded_icons_supported:
- self.entry.set_property("secondary-icon-stock",
- None)
- return False
-
- def set_entry_to_prompt(self):
- if self.search_text_style != enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT:
- self.set_search_text_mode(enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT)
-
- def get_text(self):
- if self.search_text_style == enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT or \
- self.entry.get_text_length() == 0:
- return None
-
- txt = self.entry.get_text()
- if len(txt.strip()) == 0:
- self.entry.set_text("")
- return None
- return txt
-
--- a/src/modules/gui/enumerations.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,186 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-"""
-This module consists of user readable enumerations for the data models
-used in the IPS GUI
-"""
-
-#Application List
-(
-MARK_COLUMN,
-STATUS_ICON_COLUMN,
-NAME_COLUMN,
-DESCRIPTION_COLUMN,
-STATUS_COLUMN,
-STEM_COLUMN,
-ACTUAL_NAME_COLUMN,
-IS_VISIBLE_COLUMN, # True indicates that the package is visible in ui
-CATEGORY_LIST_COLUMN, # list of categories to which package belongs
-PUBLISHER_COLUMN, # Publisher for this package
-PUBLISHER_PREFIX_COLUMN, # Publisher prefix for this package
-RENAMED_COLUMN, # True indicates this package has been
-) = range(12)
-
-#Categories
-(
-CATEGORY_ID,
-CATEGORY_NAME,
-CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME,
-CATEGORY_DESCRIPTION,
-SECTION_LIST_OBJECT, #List with the sections to which category belongs
-CATEGORY_IS_VISIBLE,
-) = range(6)
-
-#Sections
-(
-SECTION_ID,
-SECTION_NAME,
-SECTION_ENABLED,
-) = range(3)
-
-#Filter
-(
-FILTER_ID,
-FILTER_ICON,
-FILTER_NAME,
-) = range(3)
-
-#Filter
-(
-FILTER_ALL,
-FILTER_INSTALLED,
-FILTER_UPDATES,
-FILTER_NOT_INSTALLED,
-FILTER_SEPARATOR,
-FILTER_SELECTED,
-) = range(6)
-
-#Search
-(
-SEARCH_ID,
-SEARCH_ICON,
-SEARCH_NAME,
-) = range(3)
-
-#Repositories switch
-(
-REPOSITORY_ID,
-REPOSITORY_DISPLAY_NAME,
-REPOSITORY_PREFIX,
-REPOSITORY_ALIAS,
-) = range(4)
-
-(
-INSTALL_UPDATE,
-REMOVE,
-IMAGE_UPDATE,
-UPDATE_FACETS
-) = range(4)
-
-# Info Cache entries
-(
-INFO_GENERAL_LABELS,
-INFO_GENERAL_TEXT,
-INFO_INSTALLED_TEXT,
-INFO_DEPEND_INFO,
-INFO_DEPEND_DEPEND_INFO,
-INFO_DEPEND_DEPEND_INSTALLED_INFO
-) = range(6)
-
-# Install/Update/Remove confirmation
-(
-CONFIRM_NAME,
-CONFIRM_PUB,
-CONFIRM_DESC,
-CONFIRM_STATUS,
-CONFIRM_STEM
-) = range(5)
-
-#Repository action
-(
-ADD_PUBLISHER,
-MANAGE_PUBLISHERS
-) = range(2)
-
-# Publisher List in Manage Publishers Dialog
-(
-PUBLISHER_PRIORITY,
-PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED,
-PUBLISHER_NAME,
-PUBLISHER_ALIAS,
-PUBLISHER_ENABLED,
-PUBLISHER_STICKY,
-PUBLISHER_OBJECT,
-PUBLISHER_ENABLE_CHANGED,
-PUBLISHER_STICKY_CHANGED,
-PUBLISHER_REMOVED,
-) = range(10)
-
-# Publisher Priority
-(
-PUBLISHER_MOVE_BEFORE,
-PUBLISHER_MOVE_AFTER,
-) = range(2)
-
-# Return values from /usr/lib/pm-checkforupdates
-(
-UPDATES_AVAILABLE,
-NO_UPDATES_AVAILABLE,
-UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
-) = range(3)
-
-# Search Text Style
-(
-SEARCH_STYLE_NORMAL,
-SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT
-) = range(2)
-
-# Versions
-(
-VERSION_ID,
-VERSION_DISPLAY_NAME,
-VERSION_NAME,
-VERSION_STATUS
-) = range(4)
-
-# Locale List in Preferences Dialog - Language Tab
-(
-LOCALE_NAME, # <language> (territory)
-LOCALE_LANGUAGE, # Display <language> name
-LOCALE_TERRITORY, # Display <territory> name
-LOCALE, # <language>_<territory>(<codeset>)
-LOCALE_SELECTED, # selected
-) = range(5)
-
-# Publisher Certificate List in Modify Publisher Dialog - Certificates Tab
-(
-PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION, # O
-PUBCERT_NAME, # CN
-PUBCERT_STATUS, # Approved or Revoked
-PUBCERT_IPSHASH, # IPS Cert hash
-PUBCERT_PATH, # Path to Cert when added or reinstated
-PUBCERT_XCERT_OBJ, # X509 certificate object
-PUBCERT_NEW, # True if Cert just added, but not yet commited
-) = range(7)
--- a/src/modules/gui/exportconfirm.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,208 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-import sys
-import os
-import stat
-import tempfile
-import re
-try:
- import gtk
- import pango
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.fmri as fmri
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-
-class ExportConfirm:
- def __init__(self, builder, window_icon, gconf, parent):
- self.gconf = gconf
- self.parent = parent
- self.parent_window = None
- self.window_icon = window_icon
- self.w_exportconfirm_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("confirmationdialog")
- self.w_exportconfirm_dialog.set_icon(window_icon)
- self.w_confirmok_button = builder.get_object("ok_conf")
- self.w_confirmcancel_button = builder.get_object("cancel_conf")
- self.w_confirmhelp_button = builder.get_object("help_conf")
- self.w_confirm_textview = builder.get_object("confirmtext")
- self.w_confirm_label = builder.get_object("confirm_label")
- w_confirm_image = builder.get_object("confirm_image")
- w_confirm_image.set_from_stock(gtk.STOCK_DIALOG_INFO,
- gtk.ICON_SIZE_DND)
- self.__setup_export_selection_dialog()
- self.selected_pkgs = None
- self.chooser_dialog = None
-
- def set_window_icon(self, window_icon):
- self.window_icon = window_icon
- self.w_exportconfirm_dialog.set_icon(window_icon)
- if self.chooser_dialog:
- self.chooser_dialog.set_icon(window_icon)
-
- def __setup_export_selection_dialog(self):
- infobuffer = self.w_confirm_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- self.w_exportconfirm_dialog.set_title(_("Export Selections Confirmation"))
- self.w_confirm_label.set_markup(
- _("<b>Export the following to a Web Install .p5i file:</b>"))
- self.w_confirmhelp_button.set_property('visible', True)
-
- def setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_exportconfirm_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_confirmation_dialog_delete_event),
- (self.w_confirmhelp_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_confirm_help_button_clicked),
- (self.w_confirmok_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_confirm_proceed_button_clicked),
- (self.w_confirmcancel_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_confirm_cancel_button_clicked),
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def set_modal_and_transient(self, parent_window):
- self.parent_window = parent_window
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_exportconfirm_dialog,
- parent_window)
-
- def __on_confirmation_dialog_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_confirm_cancel_button_clicked(None)
- return True
-
- @staticmethod
- def __on_confirm_help_button_clicked(widget):
- gui_misc.display_help("webinstall-export")
-
- def __on_confirm_cancel_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_exportconfirm_dialog.hide()
-
- def __on_confirm_proceed_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_exportconfirm_dialog.hide()
- self.__export_selections()
-
- def activate(self, selected_pkgs):
- self.selected_pkgs = selected_pkgs
- if self.selected_pkgs == None or len(self.selected_pkgs) == 0:
- return
-
- infobuffer = self.w_confirm_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.set_text("")
- textiter = infobuffer.get_end_iter()
-
- for pub_name, pkgs in self.selected_pkgs.items():
- name = self.parent.get_publisher_name_from_prefix(pub_name)
- if name == pub_name:
- infobuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "%s\n" % pub_name, "bold")
- else:
- infobuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "%s" % name, "bold")
- infobuffer.insert(textiter, " (%s)\n" % pub_name)
- for pkg in pkgs.keys():
- infobuffer.insert(textiter,
- "\t%s\n" % fmri.extract_pkg_name(pkg))
- self.w_confirmok_button.grab_focus()
- self.w_exportconfirm_dialog.show()
-
- def __export_selections(self):
- filename = self.__get_export_p5i_filename(
- self.gconf.last_export_selection_path)
- if not filename:
- return
- self.gconf.last_export_selection_path = filename
- try:
- fobj = open(filename, 'w')
- api_o = self.parent.get_api_object()
- api_o.write_p5i(fobj, pkg_names=self.selected_pkgs,
- pubs=self.selected_pkgs.keys())
- except IOError, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- self.parent.error_occurred(err, _("Export Selections Error"))
- return
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- fobj.close()
- err = str(ex)
- self.parent.error_occurred(err, _("Export Selections Error"))
- return
- fobj.close()
- os.chmod(filename, stat.S_IRUSR | stat.S_IWUSR | stat.S_IRGRP |
- stat.S_IWGRP | stat.S_IROTH | stat.S_IWOTH )
-
- def __get_export_p5i_filename(self, last_export_selection_path):
- filename = None
- chooser = gtk.FileChooserDialog(_("Export Selections"),
- self.parent_window,
- gtk.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE,
- (gtk.STOCK_CANCEL, gtk.RESPONSE_CANCEL,
- gtk.STOCK_SAVE, gtk.RESPONSE_OK))
- chooser.set_icon(self.window_icon)
- self.chooser_dialog = chooser
-
- file_filter = gtk.FileFilter()
- file_filter.set_name(_("p5i Files"))
- file_filter.add_pattern("*.p5i")
- chooser.add_filter(file_filter)
- file_filter = gtk.FileFilter()
- file_filter.set_name(_("All Files"))
- file_filter.add_pattern("*")
- chooser.add_filter(file_filter)
-
- path = tempfile.gettempdir()
- name = _("my_packages")
- if last_export_selection_path and last_export_selection_path != "":
- path, name_plus_ext = os.path.split(last_export_selection_path)
- result = os.path.splitext(name_plus_ext)
- name = result[0]
-
- #Check name
- base_name = None
- m = re.match("(.*)(-\d+)$", name)
- if m == None and os.path.exists(path + os.sep + name + '.p5i'):
- base_name = name
- if m and len(m.groups()) == 2:
- base_name = m.group(1)
- name = name + '.p5i'
- if base_name:
- for i in range(1, 99):
- full_path = path + os.sep + base_name + '-' + \
- str(i) + '.p5i'
- if not os.path.exists(full_path):
- name = base_name + '-' + str(i) + '.p5i'
- break
- chooser.set_current_folder(path)
- chooser.set_current_name(name)
- chooser.set_do_overwrite_confirmation(True)
-
- response = chooser.run()
- if response == gtk.RESPONSE_OK:
- filename = chooser.get_filename()
- self.chooser_dialog = None
- chooser.destroy()
-
- return filename
--- a/src/modules/gui/globalexceptionhandler.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import sys
-import threading
-import traceback
-from cStringIO import StringIO
-
-try:
- import gobject
- import gtk
- import pango
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-
-class GlobalExceptionHandler:
- def __init__(self):
- self.parent = None
- sys.excepthook = self.global_exception_handler
- self.installThreadExcepthook()
-
- def set_parent(self, parent):
- self.parent = parent
-
- def global_exception_handler(self, exctyp, value, tb):
- if self.parent:
- if self.parent.child:
- self.parent.child.cleanup()
- trace = StringIO()
- traceback.print_exception (exctyp, value, tb, None, trace)
- if exctyp is MemoryError or (isinstance(value, EnvironmentError)
- and value.errno == errno.ENOMEM):
- gobject.idle_add(self.__display_memory_err)
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__display_unknown_err_ex, trace)
-
- def installThreadExcepthook(self):
- """
- Workaround for sys.excepthook python thread bug from:
- Bug: sys.excepthook doesn't work in threads
- http://bugs.python.org/issue1230540#msg91244
- """
- init_old = threading.Thread.__init__
- def init(self, *ite_args, **ite_kwargs):
- init_old(self, *ite_args, **ite_kwargs)
- run_old = self.run
- def run_with_except_hook(*rweh_args, **rweh_kwargs):
- try:
- run_old(*rweh_args, **rweh_kwargs)
- except (KeyboardInterrupt, SystemExit):
- raise
- except:
- if not sys:
- raise
- sys.excepthook(*sys.exc_info())
- self.run = run_with_except_hook
- threading.Thread.__init__ = init
-
- def __display_memory_err(self):
- try:
- dmsg = misc.out_of_memory()
- msg_stripped = dmsg.replace("\n", " ")
- gui_misc.error_occurred(None, msg_stripped, _("Package Manager"),
- gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR)
- except (MemoryError, EnvironmentError), e:
- if isinstance(e, EnvironmentError) and \
- e.errno != errno.ENOMEM:
- raise
- print dmsg
- except Exception:
- pass
- if self.parent:
- self.parent.unhandled_exception_shutdown()
- else:
- sys.exit()
-
- def __display_unknown_err_ex(self, trace):
- try:
- self.__display_unknown_err(trace)
- except MemoryError:
- print trace
- except Exception:
- pass
- if self.parent:
- self.parent.unhandled_exception_shutdown()
- else:
- sys.exit()
-
- def __display_unknown_err(self, trace):
- dmsg = _("An unknown error occurred")
- md = gtk.MessageDialog(type=gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR, message_format=dmsg)
- close_btn = md.add_button(gtk.STOCK_CLOSE, 100)
- md.set_default_response(100)
-
- dmsg = misc.get_traceback_message()
- # We remove all \n except the initial one.
- dmsg = "\n" + dmsg.replace("\n", " ").lstrip()
- md.format_secondary_text(dmsg)
- md.set_title(_('Unexpected Error'))
-
- textview = gtk.TextView()
- textview.show()
- textview.set_editable(False)
- textview.set_wrap_mode(gtk.WRAP_WORD)
-
- sw = gtk.ScrolledWindow()
- sw.set_policy(gtk.POLICY_AUTOMATIC, gtk.POLICY_AUTOMATIC)
- sw.add(textview)
- fr = gtk.Frame()
- fr.set_shadow_type(gtk.SHADOW_IN)
- fr.add(sw)
- ca = md.get_content_area()
- ca.pack_start(fr)
-
- textbuffer = textview.get_buffer()
- textbuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- textbuffer.create_tag("level1", left_margin=30, right_margin=10)
- textiter = textbuffer.get_end_iter()
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- _("Error details:\n"), "bold")
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, trace.getvalue(), "level1")
- publisher_str = ""
- if self.parent:
- publisher_str = \
- gui_misc.get_publishers_for_output(
- self.parent.get_api_object())
- if publisher_str != "":
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- _("\nList of configured publishers:"), "bold")
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(
- textiter, publisher_str + "\n", "level1")
-
- if publisher_str == "":
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- _("\nPlease include output from:\n"), "bold")
- textbuffer.insert(textiter, "$ pkg publisher\n")
-
- md.set_size_request(550, 400)
- md.set_resizable(True)
- close_btn.grab_focus()
- md.show_all()
- md.run()
- md.destroy()
--- a/src/modules/gui/imageinfo.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-import ConfigParser
-import re
-import sys
-import os
-from ConfigParser import ParsingError
-
-class ImageInfo(object):
- """An ImagineInfo object is a collection of information
- about the packages for the Imagine GUI"""
-
- def __init__(self):
- self.categories = {}
-
- def read(self, path):
- """This method reads specified by path file and returns lists of
- categories per package"""
- cpars = self.__get_config_parser(path)
- if cpars:
- for section in cpars.sections():
- self.categories[section] = cpars.get(section, "category")
- return self.categories
-
- def get_pixbuf_image_for_package(self, path, package_name):
- """Method that returns pixbuf field from the file specified by path for
- the given package_name"""
- cpars = self.__get_config_parser(path)
- if cpars:
- for section in cpars.sections():
- if re.match(package_name, section):
- pixbuf = cpars.get(section, "pixbuf")
- return pixbuf
- return None
-
- def add_package(self, path, name, category):
- """Add the package information to the file specified by the path. If the
- package name already exists, than returns False"""
- cpars = self.__get_config_parser(path)
- if cpars:
- for section in cpars.sections():
- if re.match(name, section):
- #This should behave differently, if the repo
- #exists should throw some error
- return False
- cpars.add_section(name)
- cpars.set(name, "category", category)
- file_op = open(path, "w")
- cpars.write(file_op)
- return True
- return False
-
- def remove_package(self, path, name):
- """If exists removes package specified by name from the
- filename specified by path"""
- cpars = self.__get_config_parser(path)
- if cpars:
- for section in cpars.sections():
- if re.match(name, section):
- cpars.remove_section(name)
- file_op = open(path, "w")
- cpars.write(file_op)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_config_parser(path):
- """Creates and returns ConfigParser.SafeConfigParser()"""
- cpars = ConfigParser.SafeConfigParser()
- if cpars:
- read_cp = cpars.read(path)
- if read_cp:
- if read_cp[0] != path:
- raise ParsingError
- return cpars
-
- @staticmethod
- def __mkdirs_files(path):
- if not os.path.isdir(os.path.dirname(path)):
- os.makedirs(os.path.dirname(path))
- if not os.path.isfile(path):
- file_op = open(path, "w")
- file_op.close()
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- print "Usage:"
- print "./imageinfo.py FILE..."
- sys.exit(0)
--- a/src/modules/gui/installupdate.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1654 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-DEFAULT_CONFIRMATION_WIDTH = 550 # Width & height of single confirmation
-DEFAULT_CONFIRMATION_HEIGHT = 200 # frame. The confirmation dialog may
- # consist of frames for packages to be
- # installed, removed or updated.
-DISPLAY_DELAY = 200 # Delay before updating GUI when
- # displaying download or phase info
-RESET_PACKAGE_DELAY = 2000 # Delay before label text is reset
- # Also used to reset window text during install
-DIALOG_DEFAULT_WIDTH = 450 # Default Width of Progress Dialog
-DIALOG_EXPANDED_DETAILS_HEIGHT = 462 # Height of Progress Dialog when Details expanded
-DIALOG_INSTALL_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT = 242 # Heights of progress dialog when Details
- # collapsed for install, remove and done stages
-DIALOG_REMOVE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT = 220
-DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT = 126
-
-DIALOG_UM_EXTRA_HEIGHT = 60 # Extra height needed when in UM mode
-DIALOG_RELEASE_NOTE_OFFSET = 34 # Additional space required if displaying
- # Release notes link below Details
-import errno
-import os
-import sys
-import time
-import pango
-import datetime
-import traceback
-from gettext import ngettext
-from threading import Thread
-from threading import Condition
-try:
- import gobject
- import gtk
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require("2.0")
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-
-import pkg.gui.progress as progress
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.client.api as api
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.gui.beadmin as beadm
-import pkg.gui.uarenamebe as uarenamebe
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-import pkg.gui.pmgconf as pmgconf
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-
-logger = global_settings.logger
-debug = False
-
-class InstallUpdate(progress.GuiProgressTracker):
- def __init__(self, list_of_packages, parent, image_directory,
- action = -1, parent_name = "", pkg_list = None, main_window = None,
- icon_confirm_dialog = None, title = None, web_install = False,
- confirmation_list = None, show_confirmation = False, api_lock = None,
- gconf = None, facets = None):
- if action == -1:
- return
- self.gconf = gconf
- progress.GuiProgressTracker.__init__(self, indent=True)
- if self.gconf == None:
- self.gconf = pmgconf.PMGConf()
- self.retry = False
- self.web_install = web_install
- self.web_updates_list = None
- self.web_install_all_installed = False
- self.parent = parent
- self.api_lock = api_lock
- self.facets = facets
- self.api_o = gui_misc.get_api_object(image_directory,
- self, main_window)
- if self.api_o == None:
- return
- self.parent_name = parent_name
- self.confirmation_list = confirmation_list
- if confirmation_list == None:
- self.confirmation_list = []
- self.show_confirmation = show_confirmation
- if main_window == None:
- self.top_level = True
- else:
- self.top_level = False
- self.ipkg_ipkgui_list = pkg_list
- self.icon_confirm_dialog = icon_confirm_dialog
- self.title = title
- self.w_main_window = main_window
- if self.icon_confirm_dialog == None and self.w_main_window != None:
- self.icon_confirm_dialog = self.w_main_window.get_icon()
-
- gladefile = os.path.join(self.parent.application_dir,
- "usr/share/package-manager/packagemanager.ui")
- builder = gtk.Builder()
- builder.add_from_file(gladefile)
- self.w_dialog = builder.get_object("createplandialog")
- self.original_title = None
- if self.w_main_window:
- self.original_title = self.w_main_window.get_title()
- if self.top_level:
- globals()["DIALOG_INSTALL_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT"] = \
- DIALOG_INSTALL_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT + DIALOG_UM_EXTRA_HEIGHT
- globals()["DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT"] = \
- DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT + DIALOG_UM_EXTRA_HEIGHT
- self.w_dialog.set_type_hint(gtk.gdk.WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_NORMAL)
- self.w_dialog.set_icon(self.icon_confirm_dialog)
- self.w_main_window = self.w_dialog
- self.original_title = _("Update Manager")
- w_icon_um = builder.get_object("icon_um")
- w_icon_um.set_from_pixbuf(self.icon_confirm_dialog)
- else:
- um_vbox = builder.get_object("um_title_vbox")
- um_vbox.set_property("visible", False)
-
- self.license_cv = Condition()
- self.list_of_packages = list_of_packages
- self.accept_license_done = False
- self.action = action
- self.canceling = False
- self.current_stage_name = None
- self.ip = None
- self.ips_update = False
- self.operations_done = False
- self.operations_done_ex = False
- self.prev_ind_phase = None
- self.reboot_needed = False
- self.uarenamebe_o = None
- self.label_text = None
- self.prev_pkg = None
- self.prev_prog = -1
- self.prog = 0
- self.progress_stop_timer_running = False
- self.pylint_stub = None
- self.reset_id = 0
- self.reset_window_id = 0
- self.display_download_id = 0
- self.update_progress_id = 0
- self.stages = {
- 1:[_("Preparing..."), _("Preparation")],
- 2:[_("Downloading..."), _("Download")],
- 3:[_("Installing..."), _("Install")],
- }
- self.current_stage_label_done = self.stages[1][1]
- self.stop_progress_bouncing = False
- self.stopped_bouncing_progress = True
- self.update_list = {}
-
- self.w_confirm_dialog = builder.get_object("confirmdialog")
- self.w_install_expander = \
- builder.get_object("install_expander")
- self.w_install_frame = \
- builder.get_object("install_frame")
- self.w_install_treeview = \
- builder.get_object("install_treeview")
- self.w_update_expander = \
- builder.get_object("update_expander")
- self.w_update_frame = \
- builder.get_object("update_frame")
- self.w_update_treeview = \
- builder.get_object("update_treeview")
- self.w_remove_expander = \
- builder.get_object("remove_expander")
- self.w_remove_frame = \
- builder.get_object("frame3")
- self.w_remove_treeview = \
- builder.get_object("remove_treeview")
- self.w_confirm_ok_button = \
- builder.get_object("confirm_ok_button")
- self.w_confirm_cancel_button = \
- builder.get_object("confirm_cancel_button")
- self.w_confirm_label = \
- builder.get_object("confirmdialog_confirm_label")
- self.w_confirm_donotshow = \
- builder.get_object("confirm_donotshow")
-
- self.w_confirm_dialog.set_icon(self.icon_confirm_dialog)
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_confirm_dialog,
- self.w_main_window)
-
- self.w_expander = builder.get_object("details_expander")
- self.w_cancel_button = builder.get_object("cancelcreateplan")
- self.w_help_button = builder.get_object("helpcreateplan")
- if self.top_level:
- self.w_help_button.set_property("visible", True)
- else:
- self.w_help_button.set_property("visible", False)
-
- self.w_close_button = builder.get_object("closecreateplan")
- self.w_release_notes = builder.get_object("release_notes")
- self.w_release_notes_link = \
- builder.get_object("ua_release_notes_button")
- self.w_progressbar = builder.get_object("createplanprogress")
- self.w_details_textview = builder.get_object("createplantextview")
-
- self.w_stage2 = builder.get_object("stage2")
- self.w_stages_box = builder.get_object("stages_box")
- self.w_stage1_label = builder.get_object("label_stage1")
- self.w_stage1_icon = builder.get_object("icon_stage1")
- self.w_stage2_label = builder.get_object("label_stage2")
- self.w_stage2_icon = builder.get_object("icon_stage2")
- self.w_stage3_label = builder.get_object("label_stage3")
- self.w_stage3_icon = builder.get_object("icon_stage3")
- self.w_stages_label = builder.get_object("label_stages")
- self.w_stages_icon = builder.get_object("icon_stages")
- self.current_stage_label = self.w_stage1_label
- self.current_stage_icon = self.w_stage1_icon
-
- self.w_stages_label.set_line_wrap(True)
- self.w_stages_label.set_size_request(DIALOG_DEFAULT_WIDTH - 20, -1)
-
- self.done_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(
- self.parent.icon_theme, "progress_checkmark")
- blank_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(
- self.parent.icon_theme, "progress_blank")
-
- checkmark_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(
- self.parent.icon_theme, "pm-check", 24)
-
- self.w_stages_icon.set_from_pixbuf(checkmark_icon)
-
- self.w_stage1_icon.set_from_pixbuf(blank_icon)
- self.w_stage2_icon.set_from_pixbuf(blank_icon)
- self.w_stage3_icon.set_from_pixbuf(blank_icon)
-
- proceed_txt = _("_Proceed")
- gui_misc.change_stockbutton_label(self.w_confirm_ok_button, proceed_txt)
-
- infobuffer = self.w_details_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- infobuffer.create_tag("level1", left_margin=30, right_margin=10)
- infobuffer.create_tag("level2", left_margin=50, right_margin=10)
-
- self.w_progressbar.set_pulse_step(0.02)
- self.w_release_notes.hide()
-
- self.w_license_dialog = builder.get_object("license_dialog")
- self.w_license_label = builder.get_object("instruction_label")
- self.w_license_text = builder.get_object("textview1")
- self.w_license_accept_checkbutton = \
- builder.get_object("license_accept_checkbutton")
- self.w_license_accept_button = \
- builder.get_object("license_accept_button")
- self.w_license_reject_button = \
- builder.get_object("license_reject_button")
- self.accept_text = gui_misc.get_stockbutton_label_label(
- self.w_license_accept_button)
- gui_misc.change_stockbutton_label(self.w_license_reject_button,
- _("_Reject"))
- self.current_license_no = 0
- self.packages_with_license = None
- self.packages_with_license_result = []
- self.n_licenses = 0
- self.dlg_expanded_details_h = DIALOG_EXPANDED_DETAILS_HEIGHT
- self.dlg_width = DIALOG_DEFAULT_WIDTH
- self.dlg_install_collapsed_h = DIALOG_INSTALL_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h = DIALOG_REMOVE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT
- self.dlg_done_collapsed_h = DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT
-
- self.__setup_signals()
- if not self.top_level:
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_dialog,
- self.w_main_window)
- self.w_license_dialog.set_icon(self.icon_confirm_dialog)
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_license_dialog,
- self.w_dialog)
- self.__start_action()
- self.__setup_createplan_dlg_sizes()
-
- def __setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_cancel_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_cancelcreateplan_clicked),
- (self.w_close_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_closecreateplan_clicked),
- (self.w_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_createplandialog_delete),
- (self.w_expander, "activate",
- self.__on_details_expander_activate),
- (self.w_help_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_help_button_clicked),
-
- (self.w_license_reject_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_license_reject_button_clicked),
- (self.w_license_accept_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_license_accept_button_clicked),
- (self.w_license_accept_checkbutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_license_accept_checkbutton_toggled),
- (self.w_license_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_license_dialog_delete),
-
- (self.w_confirm_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_confirmdialog_delete_event),
- (self.w_confirm_donotshow, "toggled",
- self.__on_confirm_donotshow_toggled),
- (self.w_confirm_cancel_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_confirm_cancel_button_clicked),
- (self.w_confirm_ok_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_confirm_ok_button_clicked),
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def __setup_createplan_dlg_sizes(self):
- # If window manager is absent, _NET_WORKAREA property would not be set,
- # therefore use gtk.gdk.screen_width and gtk.gdk.screen_height
- # to get the effective screen space available
- root_win = gtk.gdk.get_default_root_window()
- net_workarea_prop = gtk.gdk.atom_intern('_NET_WORKAREA')
- if net_workarea_prop:
- sw, sh = root_win.property_get(net_workarea_prop)[2][2:4]
- else:
- sw = gtk.gdk.screen_width()
- sh = gtk.gdk.screen_height()
-
- sw -= 28 # Default width of Panel accounts for bottom or side System Panel
- sh -= 28
- scale = gui_misc.get_scale(self.w_details_textview)
-
- if DIALOG_EXPANDED_DETAILS_HEIGHT * scale <= sh:
- self.dlg_expanded_details_h = \
- (int) (DIALOG_EXPANDED_DETAILS_HEIGHT * scale)
- self.dlg_install_collapsed_h = \
- (int) (DIALOG_INSTALL_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale)
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h = \
- (int) (DIALOG_REMOVE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale)
- self.dlg_done_collapsed_h = \
- (int) (DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale)
- else:
- self.dlg_expanded_details_h = sh
- if DIALOG_INSTALL_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale <= sh:
- self.dlg_install_collapsed_h = \
- (int) (DIALOG_INSTALL_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale)
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h = \
- (int) (DIALOG_REMOVE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale)
- self.dlg_done_collapsed_h = \
- (int) (DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale)
- else:
- self.dlg_install_collapsed_h = sh
- if DIALOG_REMOVE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale <= sh:
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h = (int) \
- (DIALOG_REMOVE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale)
- self.dlg_done_collapsed_h = (int) \
- (DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale)
- else:
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h = sh
- if DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * scale <= sh:
- self.dlg_done_collapsed_h = (int) \
- (DIALOG_DONE_COLLAPSED_HEIGHT * \
- scale)
- else:
- self.dlg_done_collapsed_h = sh
-
- if DIALOG_DEFAULT_WIDTH * scale <= sw:
- self.dlg_width = \
- (int) (DIALOG_DEFAULT_WIDTH * scale)
- else:
- self.dlg_width = sw
-
- if debug:
- print "CreatePlan Dialog Sizes: window", sw, sh, scale, " dlg ", \
- self.dlg_width, self.dlg_expanded_details_h, " coll ", \
- self.dlg_install_collapsed_h, \
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h, self.dlg_done_collapsed_h
-
- if self.gconf.details_expanded:
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width,
- self.dlg_expanded_details_h)
- else:
- if not (self.w_stage2.flags() & gtk.VISIBLE):
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width,
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h)
- else:
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width,
- self.dlg_install_collapsed_h)
-
- def __start_action(self):
- if self.action == enumerations.REMOVE:
- # For the remove, we are not showing the download stage
- self.stages[3] = [_("Removing..."), _("Remove")]
- self.w_stage3_label.set_text(self.stages[3][1])
- self.w_stage2.hide()
- self.w_dialog.set_title(_("Remove"))
-
- if self.show_confirmation and len(self.confirmation_list) > 0:
- self.w_confirm_dialog.set_title(_("Remove Confirmation"))
- pkgs_no = len(self.confirmation_list)
- remove_text = ngettext(
- "Review the package to be removed",
- "Review the packages to be removed", pkgs_no)
- self.w_confirm_label.set_markup("<b>"+remove_text+"</b>")
-
- self.w_install_expander.hide()
- self.w_update_expander.hide()
- if not self.retry:
- self.__init_confirmation_tree_view(
- self.w_remove_treeview)
- liststore = gtk.ListStore(str, str, str)
- for sel_pkg in self.confirmation_list:
- liststore.append(
- [sel_pkg[enumerations.CONFIRM_NAME],
- sel_pkg[enumerations.CONFIRM_PUB],
- sel_pkg[enumerations.CONFIRM_DESC]])
- liststore.set_default_sort_func(lambda *args: -1)
- liststore.set_sort_column_id(0, gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
- self.w_remove_treeview.set_model(liststore)
- self.w_remove_expander.set_expanded(True)
- self.w_confirm_ok_button.grab_focus()
- self.w_confirm_dialog.show()
- else:
- self.__proceed_with_stages()
- elif self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE:
- if not self.top_level:
- self.w_dialog.set_title(_("Updates"))
- self.__proceed_with_stages()
- elif self.action == enumerations.UPDATE_FACETS:
- if not self.top_level:
- self.w_dialog.set_title(
- _("Update Optional Components"))
- self.__proceed_with_stages()
- else:
- if self.title != None:
- self.w_dialog.set_title(self.title)
- else:
- self.w_dialog.set_title(_("Install/Update"))
-
- if self.show_confirmation and len(self.confirmation_list) > 0:
- self.w_remove_expander.hide()
- to_install = gtk.ListStore(str, str, str)
- to_update = gtk.ListStore(str, str, str)
- for cpk in self.confirmation_list:
- if cpk[enumerations.CONFIRM_STATUS] == \
- api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- to_update.append(
- [cpk[enumerations.CONFIRM_NAME],
- cpk[enumerations.CONFIRM_PUB],
- cpk[enumerations.CONFIRM_DESC]])
- else:
- to_install.append(
- [cpk[enumerations.CONFIRM_NAME],
- cpk[enumerations.CONFIRM_PUB],
- cpk[enumerations.CONFIRM_DESC]])
-
- operation_txt = _("Install/Update Confirmation")
- install_text = ngettext(
- "Review the package to be Installed/Updated",
- "Review the packages to be Installed/Updated",
- len(self.confirmation_list))
-
- if len(to_install) == 0:
- operation_txt = _("Updates Confirmation")
- install_text = ngettext(
- "Review the package to be Updated",
- "Review the packages to be Updated",
- len(to_update))
-
- if len(to_update) == 0:
- operation_txt = _("Install Confirmation")
- install_text = ngettext(
- "Review the package to be Installed",
- "Review the packages to be Installed",
- len(to_install))
-
- self.w_confirm_dialog.set_title(operation_txt)
- self.w_confirm_label.set_markup("<b>"+install_text+"</b>")
-
- if len(to_install) > 0:
- self.__init_confirmation_tree_view(
- self.w_install_treeview)
- to_install.set_default_sort_func(lambda *args: -1)
- to_install.set_sort_column_id(0,
- gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
- self.w_install_treeview.set_model(to_install)
- self.w_install_expander.set_expanded(True)
- else:
- self.w_install_expander.hide()
- if len(to_update) > 0:
- self.__init_confirmation_tree_view(
- self.w_update_treeview)
- to_update.set_default_sort_func(lambda *args: -1)
- to_update.set_sort_column_id(0,
- gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
- self.w_update_treeview.set_model(to_update)
- self.w_update_expander.set_expanded(True)
- else:
- self.w_update_expander.hide()
- self.w_confirm_ok_button.grab_focus()
- self.w_confirm_dialog.show()
- else:
- self.__proceed_with_stages()
-
- @staticmethod
- def __init_confirmation_tree_view(treeview):
- name_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- name_renderer.set_property("ellipsize", pango.ELLIPSIZE_END)
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_('Name'), name_renderer,
- text = enumerations.CONFIRM_NAME)
- column.set_resizable(True)
- column.set_min_width(150)
- column.set_sort_column_id(0)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- treeview.append_column(column)
- publisher_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_('Publisher'), publisher_renderer,
- text = enumerations.CONFIRM_PUB)
- column.set_resizable(True)
- column.set_sort_column_id(1)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- treeview.append_column(column)
- summary_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- summary_renderer.set_property("ellipsize", pango.ELLIPSIZE_END)
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_('Summary'), summary_renderer,
- text = enumerations.CONFIRM_DESC)
- column.set_resizable(True)
- column.set_sort_column_id(2)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- treeview.append_column(column)
-
- def __on_confirm_donotshow_toggled(self, widget):
- if self.action == enumerations.REMOVE:
- self.gconf.set_show_remove(not self.gconf.show_remove)
- elif self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE:
- self.gconf.set_show_image_update(not self.gconf.show_image_update)
- elif self.action == enumerations.INSTALL_UPDATE:
- self.gconf.set_show_install(not self.gconf.show_install)
-
- def __on_confirm_ok_button_clicked(self, widget):
- if self.action == enumerations.INSTALL_UPDATE or \
- self.action == enumerations.REMOVE:
- self.__on_confirm_cancel_button_clicked(None)
- if self.top_level:
- self.w_main_window = self.w_dialog
- self.__proceed_with_stages()
- else:
- self.w_expander.set_expanded(self.gconf.details_expanded)
- self.w_dialog.show()
- self.__on_confirm_cancel_button_clicked(None)
- self.__proceed_with_stages(continue_operation = True)
-
- def __on_confirmdialog_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_confirm_cancel_button_clicked(widget)
- return True
-
- def __on_confirm_cancel_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_confirm_dialog.hide()
- if widget: # User clicked cancel, widget != None
- if self.top_level:
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.install_terminated)
- else:
- self.w_dialog.hide()
-
- def __on_createplandialog_delete(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_cancelcreateplan_clicked(None)
- return True
-
- def __set_dialog_size(self, w, h):
- self.w_dialog.set_size_request(w, h)
- self.w_dialog.resize(w, h)
-
- def __on_details_expander_activate(self, widget):
- collapsed = self.w_expander.get_expanded()
- if collapsed:
- if not (self.w_stages_box.flags() & gtk.VISIBLE):
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width,
- self.dlg_done_collapsed_h)
- elif not (self.w_stage2.flags() & gtk.VISIBLE):
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width,
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h)
- else:
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width,
- self.dlg_install_collapsed_h)
- else:
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width,
- self.dlg_expanded_details_h)
-
- self.gconf.set_details_expanded(not self.gconf.details_expanded)
-
- def __on_cancelcreateplan_clicked(self, widget):
- '''Handler for signal send by cancel button, which user might press
- during evaluation stage - while the dialog is creating plan'''
- if self.api_o.can_be_canceled() and self.operations_done_ex == False:
- self.canceling = True
- Thread(target = self.api_o.cancel, args = ()).start()
- cancel_txt = _("Canceling...")
- txt = "<b>" + self.current_stage_label_done + " - " \
- + cancel_txt + "</b>"
- gobject.idle_add(self.current_stage_label.set_markup, txt)
- gobject.idle_add(self.current_stage_icon.set_from_stock,
- gtk.STOCK_CANCEL, gtk.ICON_SIZE_MENU)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_stages_label.set_markup, cancel_txt)
- self.w_cancel_button.set_sensitive(False)
- if self.top_level:
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.install_terminated)
- if self.operations_done or self.operations_done_ex:
- self.w_dialog.hide()
- if self.web_install:
- if self.operations_done_ex == False and \
- not self.web_install_all_installed:
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.update_package_list,
- None)
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.update_package_list,
- self.web_updates_list)
- return
- if self.top_level:
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.install_terminated)
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.update_package_list, None)
-
- def __on_closecreateplan_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_close_button.hide()
- self.w_dialog.hide()
- buf = self.w_details_textview.get_buffer()
- buf.set_text("")
- self.w_expander.set_expanded(False)
- self.__start_action()
- self.retry = False
- return
-
- def __on_help_button_clicked(self, widget):
- if self.top_level:
- gui_misc.display_help("using_um")
- elif self.action == enumerations.INSTALL_UPDATE:
- gui_misc.display_help("install-pkg")
- elif self.action == enumerations.REMOVE:
- gui_misc.display_help("remove-pkg")
- else:
- gui_misc.display_help("update-pkg")
-
- def __ipkg_ipkgui_uptodate(self):
- if self.ipkg_ipkgui_list == None:
- return True
- for pd in self.api_o.gen_plan_install(self.ipkg_ipkgui_list):
- continue
- upgrade_needed = not self.api_o.planned_nothingtodo(
- li_ignore_all=True)
- return not upgrade_needed
-
- def __proceed_with_stages(self, continue_operation = False):
- if continue_operation == False:
- self.__start_stage_one()
- self.w_expander.set_expanded(self.gconf.details_expanded)
- self.w_dialog.show()
- Thread(target = self.__proceed_with_stages_thread_ex,
- args = (continue_operation, )).start()
-
- def __proceed_with_stages_thread_ex(self, continue_operation = False):
- if self.api_lock:
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- self.__proceed_with_stages_thread_ex_with_lock(continue_operation)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __proceed_with_stages_thread_ex_with_lock(self, continue_operation = False):
- try:
- try:
- if self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE and \
- continue_operation == False:
- self.__start_substage(
- _("Ensuring %s is up to date...") %
- self.parent_name,
- bounce_progress=True)
- self.set_purpose(self.PURPOSE_PKG_UPDATE_CHK)
- solaris_image = True
- ips_uptodate = True
- notfound = self.__installed_fmris_from_args(
- [gui_misc.package_name["SUNWipkg"],
- gui_misc.package_name["SUNWcs"]])
- if notfound:
- solaris_image = False
- if solaris_image:
- ips_uptodate = \
- self.__ipkg_ipkgui_uptodate()
- self.set_purpose(self.PURPOSE_NORMAL)
- if not ips_uptodate:
- # Do the stuff with installing
- # pkg pkg-gui and restart in the
- # special mode
- self.ips_update = True
- self.__proceed_with_ipkg_thread()
- return
- self.update_details_text(_("%s "
- "is up to date.\n") % \
- self.parent_name, "level1")
- gobject.idle_add(
- self.__create_uarenamebe_o)
- self.api_o.reset()
- if continue_operation == False:
- self.__proceed_with_stages_thread()
- else:
- self.__continue_with_stages_thread()
- except (MemoryError, EnvironmentError), __e:
- if isinstance(__e, EnvironmentError) and \
- __e.errno != errno.ENOMEM:
- raise
- msg = misc.out_of_memory()
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except RuntimeError, ex:
- msg = str(ex)
- if msg == "cannot release un-aquired lock":
- logger.error(msg)
- else:
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.InventoryException, e:
- msg = _("Inventory exception:\n")
- if e.illegal:
- for i in e.illegal:
- msg += "\tpkg:\t" + i +"\n"
- else:
- msg = "%s" % e
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.CatalogRefreshException, e:
- res = gui_misc.get_catalogrefresh_exception_msg(e)
- self.__g_error_stage(res[0])
- return
- except api_errors.TransportError, ex:
- msg = _("Please check the network "
- "connection.\nIs the repository accessible?\n\n"
- "%s") % str(ex)
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.InvalidDepotResponseException, e:
- msg = _("\nUnable to contact a valid package depot. "
- "Please check your network settings and "
- "attempt to contact the server using a web "
- "browser.\n\n%s") % str(e)
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.IpkgOutOfDateException:
- msg = _("pkg(5) appears to be out of "
- "date and should be updated.\n"
- "Please update %s package") % (
- gui_misc.package_name["SUNWipkg"])
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.NonLeafPackageException, nlpe:
- msg = _("Cannot remove:\n\t%s\n"
- "Due to the following packages that "
- "depend on it:\n") % nlpe.fmri.get_name()
- for pkg_a in nlpe.dependents:
- msg += "\t" + pkg_a.get_name() + "\n"
-
- stem = nlpe.fmri.get_pkg_stem()
- self.list_of_packages.remove(stem)
- if self.confirmation_list:
- for item in self.confirmation_list:
- if item[enumerations.CONFIRM_STEM] == stem:
- self.confirmation_list.remove(item)
- break
- if len(self.list_of_packages) > 0:
- if self.w_close_button.get_use_stock():
- label = gui_misc.get_stockbutton_label_label(
- self.w_close_button)
- else:
- label = self.w_close_button.get_label()
- label = label.replace("_", "")
- msg += "\n"
- msg += _("Press %(button)s "
- "button to continue removal without"
- "\n\t%(package)s\n") % \
- {"button": label,
- "package": nlpe.fmri.get_name()}
- self.retry = True
- self.w_close_button.show()
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.ProblematicPermissionsIndexException, err:
- msg = str(err)
- msg += _("\nFailure to consistently execute pkg "
- "commands when running %s as a privileged user is "
- "often a source of this problem.") % self.parent_name
- msg += _("\nTo rebuild index, please execute the "
- "following command as a privileged user:")
- msg += _("\n\tpkg rebuild-index")
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.CorruptedIndexException:
- msg = _("There was an error during installation. The search "
- "index is corrupted. You might want try to fix this "
- "problem by executing the following command as a "
- "privileged user:\n"
- "\tpkg rebuild-index")
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.ImageUpdateOnLiveImageException:
- msg = _("This is a Live Image. The install "
- "operation can't be performed.")
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.RebootNeededOnLiveImageException:
- msg = _("The requested operation would affect files that cannot "
- "be modified in the Live Image.\n"
- "Please retry this operation on an alternate boot environment.")
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.PlanMissingException:
- msg = _("There was an error during installation.\n"
- "The Plan of the operation is missing and the operation "
- "can't be finished. You might want try to fix this "
- "problem by restarting %s\n") % self.parent_name
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.ImageplanStateException:
- msg = _("There was an error during installation.\n"
- "The State of the image is incorrect and the operation "
- "can't be finished. You might want try to fix this "
- "problem by restarting %s\n") % self.parent_name
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except api_errors.CanceledException:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_cancel)
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
- return
- except api_errors.BENamingNotSupported:
- msg = _("Specifying BE Name not supported.\n")
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- # We do want to prompt user to load BE admin if there is
- # not enough disk space. This error can either come as an
- # error within API exception, see bug #7642 or as a standalone
- # error, that is why we need to check for both situations.
- except EnvironmentError, uex:
- if uex.errno in (errno.EDQUOT, errno.ENOSPC):
- self.__handle_nospace_error()
- else:
- self.__handle_error()
- return
- except api_errors.HistoryStoreException, uex:
- if (isinstance(uex.error, EnvironmentError) and
- uex.error.errno in (errno.EDQUOT, errno.ENOSPC)):
- self.__handle_nospace_error()
- else:
- self.__handle_error()
- return
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- msg = str(ex)
- self.__g_error_stage(msg)
- return
- except Exception:
- self.__handle_error()
- return
-
- def __reset_window_title(self):
- if self.reset_window_id:
- gobject.source_remove(self.reset_window_id)
- self.reset_window_id = 0
- if self.w_main_window:
- self.w_main_window.set_title(self.original_title)
-
- def __do_cancel(self):
- self.__do_dialog_hide()
-
- def __do_dialog_hide(self):
- self.w_dialog.hide()
- self.__reset_window_title()
-
- def __create_uarenamebe_o(self):
- if self.uarenamebe_o == None:
- self.uarenamebe_o = \
- uarenamebe.RenameBeAfterUpdateAll(
- self.parent, self.icon_confirm_dialog,
- self.w_main_window)
-
- def __handle_nospace_error(self):
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prompt_to_load_beadm)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_dialog_hide)
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
-
- def __handle_error(self):
- traceback_lines = traceback.format_exc().splitlines()
- traceback_str = ""
- for line in traceback_lines:
- traceback_str += line + "\n"
- self.__g_exception_stage(traceback_str)
- sys.exc_clear()
-
- def __proceed_with_ipkg_thread(self):
- self.__start_substage(_("Updating %s") % self.parent_name,
- bounce_progress=True)
- self.__afterplan_information()
- self.prev_pkg = None
- self.__start_substage(_("Downloading..."), bounce_progress=False)
- self.api_o.prepare()
- self.__start_substage(_("Executing..."), bounce_progress=False)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_cancel_button.set_sensitive, False)
- try:
- self.api_o.execute_plan()
- except api_errors.WrapSuccessfulIndexingException:
- pass
- except api_errors.WrapIndexingException, wex:
- err = _("\n\nDespite the error while indexing, the "
- "image-update, install, or uninstall has completed "
- "successfuly.")
- err = err.replace("\n\n", "")
- err += "\n" + str(wex)
- logger.error(err)
-
- gobject.idle_add(self.__operations_done)
-
- def __proceed_with_stages_thread(self):
- self.__start_substage(None)
- self.label_text = _("Gathering package information, please wait...")
- self.update_label_text(self.label_text)
- self.update_details_text(
- _("Gathering package information") + "\n", "level1")
-
- stuff_todo = self.__plan_stage()
- if stuff_todo:
-
- if (self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE and
- self.show_confirmation):
- gobject.idle_add(self.__show_image_update_confirmation)
- else:
- self.__continue_with_stages_thread()
- else:
- if self.web_install:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__operations_done,
- _("All packages already installed."))
- return
-
- if self.action == enumerations.INSTALL_UPDATE:
- done_text = _("No updates necessary")
- elif self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE:
- done_text = _("No updates available")
- elif self.action == enumerations.UPDATE_FACETS:
- done_text = _("All features already installed")
- gobject.idle_add(self.__operations_done, done_text)
-
- def __show_image_update_confirmation(self):
- dic_to_update = {}
- dic_to_install = {}
- dic_to_remove = {}
- to_update = gtk.ListStore(str, str, str)
- to_install = gtk.ListStore(str, str, str)
- to_remove = gtk.ListStore(str, str, str)
-
-
- plan_desc = self.api_o.describe()
- if plan_desc == None:
- return
- plan = plan_desc.get_changes()
-
- for pkg_plan in plan:
- orig = pkg_plan[0]
- dest = pkg_plan[1]
- if orig and dest:
- dic_to_update[dest.pkg_stem] = [dest.publisher, None]
- elif not orig and dest:
- dic_to_install[dest.pkg_stem] = [dest.publisher, None]
- elif orig and not dest:
- dic_to_remove[orig.pkg_stem] = [orig.publisher, None]
-
- self.__update_summaries(dic_to_update, dic_to_install, dic_to_remove)
-
- self.__dic_to_liststore(dic_to_update, to_update)
- self.__dic_to_liststore(dic_to_install, to_install)
- self.__dic_to_liststore(dic_to_remove, to_remove)
-
- len_to_update = len(to_update)
- len_to_install = len(to_install)
- len_to_remove = len(to_remove)
-
- if len_to_update == 0 and len_to_install == 0 and len_to_remove == 0:
- # Never show an empty confirmation dialog just proceed
- self.__on_confirm_ok_button_clicked(None)
- return
-
- self.__resize_confirm_frames(len_to_update,
- len_to_install, len_to_remove)
-
- if len_to_update > 0:
- self.__init_confirmation_tree_view(
- self.w_update_treeview)
- to_update.set_default_sort_func(lambda *args: -1)
- to_update.set_sort_column_id(0, gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
- self.w_update_treeview.set_model(to_update)
- self.w_update_expander.set_expanded(True)
- else:
- self.w_update_expander.hide()
-
- if len_to_install > 0:
- self.__init_confirmation_tree_view(
- self.w_install_treeview)
- to_install.set_default_sort_func(lambda *args: -1)
- to_install.set_sort_column_id(0, gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
- self.w_install_treeview.set_model(to_install)
- self.w_install_expander.set_expanded(True)
- else:
- self.w_install_expander.hide()
-
- if len_to_remove > 0:
- self.__init_confirmation_tree_view(
- self.w_remove_treeview)
- to_remove.set_default_sort_func(lambda *args: -1)
- to_remove.set_sort_column_id(0, gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
- self.w_remove_treeview.set_model(to_remove)
- self.w_remove_expander.set_expanded(True)
- else:
- self.w_remove_expander.hide()
-
- no_pkgs = len(to_update) + len(to_install) + len(to_remove)
- operation_txt = _("Updates Confirmation")
- install_text = ngettext(
- "Review the package which will be affected by Updates",
- "Review the packages which will be affected by Updates", no_pkgs)
-
- self.w_confirm_dialog.set_title(operation_txt)
- self.w_confirm_label.set_markup("<b>"+install_text+"</b>")
-
- self.w_confirm_ok_button.grab_focus()
- self.__start_substage(None,
- bounce_progress=False)
- if not self.top_level:
- self.__reset_window_title()
- self.w_confirm_dialog.show()
-
-
- def __resize_confirm_frames(self, len_to_update, len_to_install, len_to_remove):
- calculated_height = DEFAULT_CONFIRMATION_HEIGHT
-
- if len_to_update > 0 and len_to_remove > 0 and len_to_install > 0:
- calculated_height = (calculated_height/4)*2
- elif (len_to_update > 0 and len_to_remove > 0) or (len_to_update > 0 and
- len_to_install > 0) or (len_to_remove > 0 and len_to_install > 0):
- calculated_height = (calculated_height/3)*2
-
- self.w_install_frame.set_size_request(DEFAULT_CONFIRMATION_WIDTH,
- calculated_height)
- self.w_update_frame.set_size_request(DEFAULT_CONFIRMATION_WIDTH,
- calculated_height)
- self.w_remove_frame.set_size_request(DEFAULT_CONFIRMATION_WIDTH,
- calculated_height)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __dic_to_liststore(dic, liststore):
- for entry in dic:
- liststore.append([entry, dic[entry][0], dic[entry][1]])
-
- def __handle_licenses(self):
- self.packages_with_license = \
- self.__get_packages_for_license_check()
- self.n_licenses = len(self.packages_with_license)
- if self.n_licenses > 0:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_ask_license)
- self.license_cv.acquire()
- while not self.accept_license_done:
- self.license_cv.wait()
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.license_cv)
- self.__do_accept_licenses()
- return
-
- def __continue_with_stages_thread(self):
- self.__afterplan_information()
- self.prev_pkg = None
- self.__handle_licenses()
-
- # The api.prepare() mostly is downloading the files so we are
- # Not showing this stage in the main stage dialog. If download
- # is necessary, then we are showing it in the details view
- if not self.action == enumerations.REMOVE:
- self.__start_stage_two()
- self.__start_substage(None,
- bounce_progress=False)
- try:
- self.api_o.prepare()
- except api_errors.PlanLicenseErrors:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_dialog_hide)
- if self.top_level:
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.install_terminated)
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
- return
- self.__start_stage_three()
- self.__start_substage(None,
- bounce_progress=False)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_cancel_button.set_sensitive, False)
- try:
- self.api_o.execute_plan()
- except api_errors.WrapSuccessfulIndexingException:
- pass
- except api_errors.WrapIndexingException, wex:
- err = _("\n\nDespite the error while indexing, the "
- "image-update, install, or uninstall has completed "
- "successfuly.")
- err = err.replace("\n\n", "")
- err += "\n" + str(wex)
- logger.error(err)
-
- gobject.idle_add(self.__operations_done)
-
- def __start_stage_one(self):
- self.__start_stage(self.stages.get(1), self.w_stage1_label,
- self.w_stage1_icon)
- self.update_details_text(self.stages.get(1)[0]+"\n", "bold")
-
- def __start_stage_two(self):
- # End previous stage
- self.__end_stage()
- self.__start_stage(self.stages.get(2), self.w_stage2_label,
- self.w_stage2_icon)
- self.update_details_text(self.stages.get(2)[0]+"\n", "bold")
-
- def __start_stage_three(self):
- self.__end_stage()
- self.__start_stage(self.stages.get(3), self.w_stage3_label,
- self.w_stage3_icon)
- self.update_details_text(self.stages.get(3)[0]+"\n", "bold")
-
- def __do_start_stage(self, stage_text, current_stage_label, current_stage_icon):
- self.current_stage_label = current_stage_label
- self.current_stage_icon = current_stage_icon
- self.current_stage_label_done = stage_text[1]
- if self.w_main_window:
- new_title = stage_text[0]
- self.w_main_window.set_title(new_title)
- self.current_stage_label.set_markup("<b>"+stage_text[0]+"</b>")
- self.current_stage_icon.set_from_stock(gtk.STOCK_GO_FORWARD,
- gtk.ICON_SIZE_MENU)
-
- def __start_stage(self, stage_text, current_stage_label, current_stage_icon):
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_start_stage, stage_text, current_stage_label,
- current_stage_icon)
-
- def __do_end_stage(self):
- self.current_stage_label.set_text(self.current_stage_label_done)
- self.current_stage_icon.set_from_pixbuf(self.done_icon)
- self.__reset_window_title()
-
- def __end_stage(self):
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_end_stage)
-
- def __g_error_stage(self, msg):
- if msg == None or len(msg) == 0:
- msg = _("No further information available")
- self.operations_done = True
- self.operations_done_ex = True
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
- self.update_details_text(_("\nError:\n"), "bold")
- self.update_details_text("%s" % msg, "level1")
- self.update_details_text("\n")
- txt = "<b>" + self.current_stage_label_done + _(" - Failed </b>")
- gobject.idle_add(self.__g_error_stage_setup, txt)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_dialog.queue_draw)
-
- def __g_error_stage_setup(self, txt):
- self.__reset_window_title()
- if self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE:
- info_url = misc.get_release_notes_url()
- if info_url and len(info_url) == 0:
- info_url = gui_misc.RELEASE_URL
- self.w_release_notes.show()
- self.w_release_notes_link.set_uri(info_url)
- self.dlg_expanded_details_h += DIALOG_RELEASE_NOTE_OFFSET * 2
- self.dlg_install_collapsed_h += DIALOG_RELEASE_NOTE_OFFSET
- self.dlg_remove_collapsed_h += DIALOG_RELEASE_NOTE_OFFSET
-
- self.current_stage_label.set_markup(txt)
- self.current_stage_icon.set_from_stock(gtk.STOCK_DIALOG_ERROR,
- gtk.ICON_SIZE_MENU)
- self.w_expander.set_expanded(True)
- self.w_cancel_button.set_sensitive(True)
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width, self.dlg_expanded_details_h)
-
- def __g_exception_stage(self, tracebk):
- self.__reset_window_title()
- self.operations_done = True
- self.operations_done_ex = True
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
- if self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE:
- info_url = misc.get_release_notes_url()
- if info_url and len(info_url) == 0:
- info_url = gui_misc.RELEASE_URL
- self.w_release_notes.show()
- self.w_release_notes_link.set_uri(info_url)
- txt = "<b>" + self.current_stage_label_done + _(" - Failed </b>")
- gobject.idle_add(self.current_stage_label.set_markup, txt)
- gobject.idle_add(self.current_stage_icon.set_from_stock,
- gtk.STOCK_DIALOG_ERROR, gtk.ICON_SIZE_MENU)
- msg_2 = misc.get_traceback_message()
- msg_2 = msg_2.replace("\n", " ").lstrip()
- msg_1 = _("An unknown error occurred in the %s stage.\n\n")\
- % self.current_stage_name + msg_2
- self.update_details_text(_("\nError:\n"), "bold")
- self.update_details_text("%s\n\n" % msg_1, "level1")
- if tracebk:
- msg = _("Exception traceback:\n")
- self.update_details_text("%s" % msg,
- "bold","level1")
- self.update_details_text("%s\n" % tracebk, "level2")
- else:
- msg = _("No further information available")
- self.update_details_text("%s\n" % msg, "level2")
- publisher_header = _("List of configured publishers:")
- self.update_details_text("%s" % publisher_header,
- "bold","level1")
- publisher_str = gui_misc.get_publishers_for_output(self.api_o)
- self.update_details_text("%s\n" % publisher_str,
- "level2")
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_expander.set_expanded, True)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_cancel_button.set_sensitive, True)
-
- def __start_substage(self, text, bounce_progress=True):
- if text:
- self.update_label_text(text)
- self.update_details_text(text + "\n", "level1")
- if bounce_progress:
- if self.stopped_bouncing_progress:
- self.start_bouncing_progress()
- else:
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
-
- def update_label_text(self, markup_text):
- gobject.idle_add(self.__stages_label_set_markup, markup_text)
-
- def __stages_label_set_markup(self, markup_text):
- if not self.canceling == True:
- self.w_stages_label.set_markup(markup_text)
-
- def start_bouncing_progress(self):
- self.stop_progress_bouncing = False
- self.stopped_bouncing_progress = False
- Thread(target =
- self.__g_progressdialog_progress_pulse).start()
-
- def __g_progressdialog_progress_pulse(self):
- while not self.stop_progress_bouncing:
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progressbar.pulse)
- time.sleep(0.1)
- self.stopped_bouncing_progress = True
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progressbar.set_fraction, 0.0)
-
- def is_progress_bouncing(self):
- return not self.stopped_bouncing_progress
-
- def stop_bouncing_progress(self):
- if self.is_progress_bouncing():
- self.stop_progress_bouncing = True
-
- def update_details_text(self, text, *tags):
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_details_text, text, *tags)
-
- def __update_details_text(self, text, *tags):
- buf = self.w_details_textview.get_buffer()
- textiter = buf.get_end_iter()
- if tags:
- buf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, text, *tags)
- else:
- buf.insert(textiter, text)
- insert_mark = buf.get_insert()
- self.w_details_textview.scroll_to_mark(insert_mark, 0.0)
-
- def __update_window_title(self, display_string):
- self.w_main_window.set_title(display_string)
-
- def display_download_info(self):
- self.update_progress(self.dl_bytes.items,
- self.dl_bytes.goalitems)
- if self.w_main_window:
- progtimes100 = int(self.prog * 100)
- if progtimes100 != self.prev_prog:
- self.prev_prog = progtimes100
- display_string = "%d%% - %s" % (progtimes100,
- self.stages[2][0])
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_window_title,
- display_string)
-
- if self.display_download_id == 0:
- self.display_download_id = gobject.timeout_add( \
- DISPLAY_DELAY, self.__display_download_text)
-
- def __display_download_text(self):
- self.display_download_id = 0
- size_a_str = misc.bytes_to_str(self.dl_bytes.items)
- size_b_str = misc.bytes_to_str(self.dl_bytes.goalitems)
- speed = self.dl_estimator.get_speed_estimate()
- speed_str = "" if speed is None else \
- _("(%s)") % self.dl_estimator.format_speed(speed)
-
- c = _("Downloaded %(current)s of %(total)s %(speed)s") % \
- {"current" : size_a_str,
- "total" : size_b_str,
- "speed" : speed_str}
- self.__stages_label_set_markup(c)
-
- def display_phase_info(self, phase_name, cur_n, goal_n):
- self.update_progress(cur_n, goal_n)
- if self.reset_window_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.reset_window_id)
- self.reset_window_id = 0
- if self.w_main_window:
- progtimes100 = int(self.prog * 100)
- if progtimes100 != self.prev_prog:
- self.prev_prog = progtimes100
- display_string = _("%(cur)d of %(goal)d - %(name)s") % \
- {"cur": cur_n, "goal": goal_n, \
- "name": phase_name}
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_window_title,
- display_string)
- self.reset_window_id = gobject.timeout_add(
- RESET_PACKAGE_DELAY,
- self.__do_reset_window_text, phase_name)
-
- def __do_reset_window_text(self, phase_name):
- self.reset_window_id = 0
- self.__update_window_title(phase_name)
-
- def reset_label_text_after_delay(self):
- if self.reset_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.reset_id)
- self.reset_id = gobject.timeout_add(RESET_PACKAGE_DELAY,
- self.__do_reset_label_text)
-
- def __do_reset_label_text(self):
- self.reset_id = 0
- if self.label_text:
- self.__stages_label_set_markup(self.label_text)
-
- def __update_progress(self):
- self.update_progress_id = 0
- self.w_progressbar.set_fraction(self.prog)
-
- def update_progress(self, current, total):
- self.prog = float(current)/total
- assert self.prog >= 0.0 and self.prog <= 1.0
- if self.update_progress_id == 0:
- self.update_progress_id = gobject.timeout_add(DISPLAY_DELAY,
- self.__update_progress)
-
- def __plan_stage(self):
- '''Function which plans the image'''
- if self.action == enumerations.INSTALL_UPDATE:
- for pd in self.api_o.gen_plan_install(
- self.list_of_packages, refresh_catalogs=False):
- continue
- elif self.action == enumerations.REMOVE:
- for pd in self.api_o.gen_plan_uninstall(
- self.list_of_packages, noexecute=False):
- continue
- elif self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE:
- # we are passing force, since we already checked if the
- # packages are up to date. Create BE if required
- for pd in self.api_o.gen_plan_update(
- refresh_catalogs=False, noexecute=False,
- force=True, be_name=None, new_be=None):
- continue
- self.pylint_stub = self.api_o.solaris_image()
- else:
- assert self.action == enumerations.UPDATE_FACETS
- for pd in self.api_o.gen_plan_change_varcets(
- variants=None, facets=self.facets,
- noexecute=False, be_name=None, new_be=None):
- continue
- return not self.api_o.planned_nothingtodo(li_ignore_all=True)
-
- def __operations_done(self, alternate_done_txt = None):
- self.__reset_window_title()
- self.label_text = None
- done_txt = _("Installation completed successfully")
- if self.action == enumerations.REMOVE:
- done_txt = _("Packages removed successfully")
- elif self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE:
- done_txt = _("Packages updated successfully")
- elif self.action == enumerations.UPDATE_FACETS:
- done_txt = _("Optional components updated successfully")
- if alternate_done_txt != None:
- done_txt = alternate_done_txt
- self.w_stages_box.hide()
- self.w_stages_icon.show()
- self.__stages_label_set_markup("<b>" + done_txt + "</b>")
- self.__update_details_text("\n"+ done_txt, "bold")
- self.w_cancel_button.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_cancel_button.set_label("gtk-close")
- self.w_cancel_button.grab_focus()
- self.w_progressbar.hide()
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
- self.operations_done = True
- if not self.gconf.details_expanded:
- self.__set_dialog_size(self.dlg_width, self.dlg_done_collapsed_h)
- if self.parent != None:
- if not self.web_install and not self.ips_update \
- and not self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE \
- and not self.action == enumerations.UPDATE_FACETS:
- self.parent.update_package_list(self.update_list)
- if self.web_install:
- if done_txt == \
- _("All packages already installed.") or \
- done_txt == \
- _("Installation completed successfully"):
- self.web_install_all_installed = True
- else:
- self.web_install_all_installed = False
- self.web_updates_list = self.update_list
- if self.ips_update:
- self.w_dialog.hide()
- self.parent.restart_after_ips_update()
- elif self.action == enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE or \
- self.action == enumerations.UPDATE_FACETS:
- if self.uarenamebe_o:
- be_rename_dialog = \
- self.uarenamebe_o.show_rename_dialog(
- self.update_list)
- if be_rename_dialog == True and not self.top_level:
- self.w_dialog.hide()
-
- def __prompt_to_load_beadm(self):
- msgbox = gtk.MessageDialog(parent = self.w_main_window,
- buttons = gtk.BUTTONS_OK_CANCEL, flags = gtk.DIALOG_MODAL,
- type = gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR,
- message_format = _(
- "Not enough disk space, the selected action cannot "
- "be performed.\n\n"
- "Click OK to manage your existing BEs and free up disk space or "
- "Cancel to cancel the action."))
- msgbox.set_title(_("Not Enough Disk Space"))
- result = msgbox.run()
- msgbox.destroy()
- if result == gtk.RESPONSE_OK:
- beadm.Beadmin(self.parent)
-
- def __afterplan_information(self):
- install_iter = None
- update_iter = None
- remove_iter = None
- plan_desc = self.api_o.describe()
- if plan_desc == None:
- return
- self.reboot_needed = plan_desc.reboot_needed
- plan = plan_desc.get_changes()
- self.update_details_text("\n")
- for pkg_plan in plan:
- origin_fmri = pkg_plan[0]
- destination_fmri = pkg_plan[1]
- if origin_fmri and destination_fmri:
- if not update_iter:
- update_iter = True
- txt = _("Packages To Be Updated:\n")
- self.update_details_text(txt, "bold")
- pkg_a = self.__get_pkgstr_from_pkginfo(destination_fmri)
- self.update_details_text(pkg_a+"\n", "level1")
- elif not origin_fmri and destination_fmri:
- if not install_iter:
- install_iter = True
- txt = _("Packages To Be Installed:\n")
- self.update_details_text(txt, "bold")
- pkg_a = self.__get_pkgstr_from_pkginfo(destination_fmri)
- self.update_details_text(pkg_a+"\n", "level1")
- elif origin_fmri and not destination_fmri:
- if not remove_iter:
- remove_iter = True
- txt = _("Packages To Be Removed:\n")
- self.update_details_text(txt, "bold")
- pkg_a = self.__get_pkgstr_from_pkginfo(origin_fmri)
- self.update_details_text(pkg_a+"\n", "level1")
-
- v = plan_desc.get_varcets()
- if v == None or len(v) == 0:
- self.update_details_text("\n")
- return
- txt = _("Optional components\n")
- self.update_details_text(txt, "bold")
- txt = _("Number of facets set: %s\n" % (len(v)))
- self.update_details_text(txt, "level1")
- for x in v:
- self.update_details_text("%s\n" % x, "level1")
- self.update_details_text("\n")
-
- def __get_pkgstr_from_pkginfo(self, pkginfo):
- dt_str = self.get_datetime(pkginfo.packaging_date)
- if not dt_str:
- dt_str = ""
- s_ver = pkginfo.version
- s_bran = pkginfo.branch
- pkg_name = pkginfo.pkg_stem
- pkg_publisher = pkginfo.publisher
- if not pkg_publisher in self.update_list:
- self.update_list[pkg_publisher] = []
- pub_list = self.update_list.get(pkg_publisher)
- if not pkg_name in pub_list:
- pub_list.append(pkg_name)
- l_ver = 0
- version_pref = ""
- while l_ver < len(s_ver) -1:
- version_pref += "%d%s" % (s_ver[l_ver],".")
- l_ver += 1
- version_pref += "%d%s" % (s_ver[l_ver],"-")
- l_ver = 0
- version_suf = ""
- if s_bran != None:
- while l_ver < len(s_bran) -1:
- version_suf += "%d%s" % (s_bran[l_ver],".")
- l_ver += 1
- version_suf += "%d" % s_bran[l_ver]
- pkg_version = version_pref + version_suf + dt_str
- return pkg_name + "@" + pkg_version
-
- def __update_summaries(self, to_update, to_install, to_remove):
- pkgs_table = to_update.keys() + to_install.keys()
- info = None
- try:
- info = self.api_o.info(pkgs_table, False,
- frozenset([api.PackageInfo.SUMMARY,
- api.PackageInfo.IDENTITY]))
- info_r = self.api_o.info(to_remove.keys(), True,
- frozenset([api.PackageInfo.SUMMARY,
- api.PackageInfo.IDENTITY]))
- for info_s in (info.get(0) + info_r.get(0)):
- stem = info_s.pkg_stem
- if stem in to_update:
- to_update[stem][1] = info_s.summary
- elif stem in to_install:
- to_install[stem][1] = info_s.summary
- elif stem in to_remove:
- to_remove[stem][1] = info_s.summary
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self.parent)
-
- @staticmethod
- def get_datetime(date_time):
- '''Support function for getting date from the API.'''
- date_tmp = None
- try:
- date_tmp = time.strptime(date_time, "%a %b %d %H:%M:%S %Y")
- except ValueError:
- return None
- if date_tmp:
- date_tmp2 = datetime.datetime(*date_tmp[0:5])
- return date_tmp2.strftime(":%m%d")
- return None
-
- def __installed_fmris_from_args(self, args_f):
- not_found = False
- try:
- res = self.api_o.info(args_f, True,
- frozenset([api.PackageInfo.STATE]))
- if not res or len(res[0]) != len(args_f):
- not_found = True
- except api_errors.ApiException:
- not_found = True
- return not_found
-
- def __do_ask_license(self):
- item = self.packages_with_license[self.current_license_no]
- pfmri = item[0]
- dest = item[2]
- pkg_name = pfmri.get_name()
- lic = dest.get_text()
- if dest.must_accept:
- gui_misc.change_stockbutton_label(self.w_license_accept_button,
- _("A_ccept"))
- self.w_license_label.set_text(
- _("You must accept the terms of the license before "
- "downloading this package."))
- self.w_license_accept_checkbutton.show()
- self.w_license_reject_button.show()
- self.w_license_accept_checkbutton.grab_focus()
- self.w_license_accept_checkbutton.set_active(False)
- self.w_license_accept_button.set_sensitive(False)
- else:
- if self.accept_text != None:
- gui_misc.change_stockbutton_label(
- self.w_license_accept_button,
- self.accept_text)
- self.w_license_label.set_text(
- _("You must view the terms of the license before "
- "downloading this package."))
- self.w_license_accept_checkbutton.hide()
- self.w_license_reject_button.hide()
- self.w_license_accept_button.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_license_accept_button.grab_focus()
- lic_buffer = self.w_license_text.get_buffer()
- lic_buffer.set_text(lic)
- title = _("%s License") % pkg_name
- self.w_license_dialog.set_title(title)
- self.w_license_dialog.show()
- return
-
- def __do_accept_licenses(self):
- for item, accepted_value in self.packages_with_license_result:
- pfmri = item[0]
- dest = item[2]
- lic = dest.license
- self.api_o.set_plan_license_status(pfmri, lic,
- displayed=True, accepted=accepted_value)
-
- def __get_packages_for_license_check(self):
- pkg_list = []
- plan = self.api_o.describe()
- for item in plan.get_licenses():
- dest = item[2]
- if dest.must_display or dest.must_accept:
- pkg_list.append(item)
- return pkg_list
-
- def __on_license_reject_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.packages_with_license_result.append(
- (self.packages_with_license[self.current_license_no],
- False))
- self.w_license_dialog.hide()
- self.license_cv.acquire()
- self.accept_license_done = True
- self.license_cv.notify()
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.license_cv)
-
- def __on_license_accept_button_clicked(self, widget):
- result = None
- item = self.packages_with_license[self.current_license_no]
- dest = item[2]
- if dest.must_accept:
- result = True
- self.packages_with_license_result.append(
- (item, result))
- self.w_license_dialog.hide()
- self.current_license_no += 1
- if self.current_license_no < self.n_licenses:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_ask_license)
- else:
- self.license_cv.acquire()
- self.accept_license_done = True
- self.license_cv.notify()
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.license_cv)
-
- def __on_license_dialog_delete(self, widget, event):
- if self.w_license_reject_button.get_property('visible'):
- self.__on_license_reject_button_clicked(None)
- else:
- self.__on_license_accept_button_clicked(None)
- return True
-
- def __on_license_accept_checkbutton_toggled(self, widget):
- ret = self.w_license_accept_checkbutton.get_active()
- self.w_license_accept_button.set_sensitive(ret)
--- a/src/modules/gui/misc.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,1127 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-SPECIAL_CATEGORIES = ["locale", "plugin"] # We should cut all, but last part of the
- # new name scheme as part of fix for #7037.
- # However we need to have an exception rule
- # where we will cut all but three last parts.
-
-RELEASE_URL = "http://www.opensolaris.org" # Fallback url for release notes if api
- # does not gave us one.
-
-PROP_SIGNATURE_POLICY = "signature-policy"
-PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES = "signature-required-names"
-SIG_POLICY_IGNORE = "ignore"
-SIG_POLICY_VERIFY = "verify"
-SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_SIGNATURES = "require-signatures"
-SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_NAMES = "require-names"
-
-import gettext
-import locale
-import os
-import sys
-import traceback
-import threading
-try:
- import gobject
- import gnome
- import gtk
- import pango
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.fmri as fmri
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.client.api as api
-import pkg.client.publisher as publisher
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import get_api_object as ngao
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import setup_logging as su_logging
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import shutdown_logging as sd_logging
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import get_version as g_version
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import get_os_version_and_build as g_os_version_and_build
-
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import get_log_path as ge_log_path
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import get_log_error_ext as ge_log_error_ext
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import get_log_info_ext as ge_log_info_ext
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import get_catalogrefresh_exception_msg as get_msg
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import get_um_name as get_um
-from pkg.gui.misc_non_gui import is_frameworkerror as is_frameworke
-
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-
-misc.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
-gettext.install("pkg", "/usr/share/locale")
-
-PUBCERT_COMMON_NAME = _(" Common Name (CN):")
-PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION = _(" Organization (O):")
-PUBCERT_ORGANIZATIONAL_UNIT = _(" Organizational Unit (OU):")
-
-PKG_CLIENT_NAME_PM = "packagemanager"
-PKG_CLIENT_NAME_WI = "packagemanager-webinstall"
-
-logger = global_settings.logger
-
-# Dictionary which converts old package names to current name.
-package_name = { 'SUNWcs' : 'SUNWcs',
- 'SUNWipkg' : 'package/pkg',
- 'SUNWipkg-gui' : 'package/pkg/package-manager',
- 'SUNWipkg-um' : 'package/pkg/update-manager',
- 'SUNWpython26-notify' : 'library/python-2/python-notify-26' }
-
-def set_signature_policy_names_for_textfield(widget, names):
- txt = ""
- if names != None and len(names) > 0:
- txt = names[0]
- for name in names[1:]:
- txt += ", " + name
- widget.set_text(txt)
-
-def fetch_signature_policy_names_from_textfield(text):
- names = []
- names = __split_ignore_comma_in_quotes(text)
- names = [x.strip(' ') for x in names]
- if len(names) == 1 and names[0] == '':
- del names[0]
- return names
-
-def setup_signature_policy_properties(ignore, verify, req_sigs, req_names, names, orig):
- set_props = {}
- if ignore != orig[SIG_POLICY_IGNORE] and ignore:
- set_props[PROP_SIGNATURE_POLICY] = SIG_POLICY_IGNORE
- elif verify != orig[SIG_POLICY_VERIFY] and verify:
- set_props[PROP_SIGNATURE_POLICY] = SIG_POLICY_VERIFY
- elif req_sigs != orig[SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_SIGNATURES] and req_sigs:
- set_props[PROP_SIGNATURE_POLICY] = SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_SIGNATURES
- elif req_names != orig[SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_NAMES] and req_names:
- set_props[PROP_SIGNATURE_POLICY] = SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_NAMES
-
- if names != orig[PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES]:
- set_props[PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES] = names
- return set_props
-
-def create_sig_policy_from_property(prop_sig_pol, prop_sig_req_names):
- names = []
- #Names with embedded commas, the default name separator, need to
- #be quoted to be treated as a single name
- if prop_sig_req_names:
- for name in prop_sig_req_names:
- if name.split(",", 1) == 2:
- names.append("\"%s\"" % name)
- else:
- names.append(name)
- sig_policy = {}
- sig_policy[SIG_POLICY_IGNORE] = False
- sig_policy[SIG_POLICY_VERIFY] = False
- sig_policy[SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_SIGNATURES] = False
- sig_policy[SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_NAMES] = False
- sig_policy[PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES] = []
-
- if prop_sig_pol == SIG_POLICY_IGNORE:
- sig_policy[SIG_POLICY_IGNORE] = True
- elif prop_sig_pol == SIG_POLICY_VERIFY:
- sig_policy[SIG_POLICY_VERIFY] = True
- elif prop_sig_pol == SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_SIGNATURES:
- sig_policy[SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_SIGNATURES] = True
- elif prop_sig_pol == SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_NAMES:
- sig_policy[SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_NAMES] = True
- sig_policy[PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES] = names
- return sig_policy
-
-def __split_ignore_comma_in_quotes(string):
- split_char = ","
- quote = "'"
- string_split = []
- current_word = ""
- inside_quote = False
- for letter in string:
- if letter == "'" or letter == "\"":
- quote = letter
- current_word += letter
- if inside_quote:
- inside_quote = False
- else:
- inside_quote = True
- elif letter == split_char and not inside_quote:
- if current_word != '':
- string_split.append(current_word)
- current_word = ""
- else:
- current_word += letter
- if current_word != "" and inside_quote:
- current_word += quote
- if current_word != '':
- string_split.append(current_word)
- return string_split
-
-def check_sig_required_names_policy(text, req_names, error_dialog_title):
- if not req_names:
- return True
- names = fetch_signature_policy_names_from_textfield(text)
- if len(names) == 0:
- error_occurred(None,
- _("One or more certificate names must be specified "
- "with this option."),
- error_dialog_title,
- gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- return False
- return True
-
-def get_version():
- return g_version()
-
-def get_os_version_and_build():
- return g_os_version_and_build()
-
-def get_publishers_for_output(api_o):
- publisher_str = ""
- fmt = "\n%s\t%s\t%s (%s)"
- try:
- pref_pub = api_o.get_highest_ranked_publisher()
- for pub in api_o.get_publishers():
- pstatus = " "
- if pub == pref_pub:
- # Preferred
- pstatus = "P"
- elif pub.disabled:
- # Disabled
- pstatus = "D"
- else:
- # Enabled, but not preferred
- pstatus = "E"
- r = pub.repository
- for uri in r.origins:
- # Origin
- publisher_str += fmt % \
- (pstatus, "O", pub.prefix, uri)
- for uri in r.mirrors:
- # Mirror
- publisher_str += fmt % \
- (pstatus, "M", pub.prefix, uri)
- except api_errors.ApiException:
- pass
- except Exception:
- pass
- return publisher_str
-
-def get_log_path(client_name):
- return ge_log_path(client_name)
-
-def get_log_error_ext():
- return ge_log_error_ext()
-
-def get_log_info_ext():
- return ge_log_info_ext()
-
-def get_pm_name():
- return PKG_CLIENT_NAME_PM
-
-def get_wi_name():
- return PKG_CLIENT_NAME_WI
-
-def get_um_name():
- return get_um()
-
-def is_frameworkerror(err):
- return is_frameworke(err)
-
-def notify_log_error(app):
- if global_settings.client_name == PKG_CLIENT_NAME_PM:
- gobject.idle_add(__notify_log_error, app,
- _("Errors logged: click to view"))
-
-def notify_log_warning(app):
- if global_settings.client_name == PKG_CLIENT_NAME_PM:
- gobject.idle_add(__notify_log_error, app,
- _("Warnings logged: click to view"))
-
-def __notify_log_error(app, msg):
- app.error_logged = True
- app.w_logalert_frame.show()
- app.w_logalert_frame.set_tooltip_text(msg)
-
-def setup_logging():
- return su_logging(global_settings.client_name)
-
-def shutdown_logging():
- sd_logging()
-
-def get_icon(icon_theme, name, size=16):
- try:
- return icon_theme.load_icon(name, size, 0)
- except gobject.GError:
- return None
-
-def init_for_help(application_dir="/"):
- props = { gnome.PARAM_APP_DATADIR : os.path.join(application_dir,
- 'usr/share/package-manager/help') }
- gnome.program_init('package-manager', '0.1', properties=props)
-
-def display_help(help_id=None):
- try:
- if help_id != None:
- gnome.help_display('package-manager', link_id=help_id)
- else:
- gnome.help_display('package-manager')
- except gobject.GError, ex:
- msg = str(ex)
- logger.error(msg)
-
-def add_pkgname_to_dic(dic, name, special_table):
- """Adds the original name of the package to the
- dictionary of names.
-
- 'dic' is the dictionary, which holds all the names
-
- 'name' is the original package name
-
- 'special_table' table with special names. Special name is when the full name
- is part of another name. Example package/name another/package/name. package/name
- is the special name in this situation."""
-
- table = name.split("/")
- if len(table) == 1:
- if table[0] in dic:
- return
- else:
- dic[table[0]] = {}
- table.reverse()
- i = 0
- j = len(table)
- for entry in table:
- dictionary = dic.get(entry)
- if dictionary == None:
- dic[entry] = {}
- i += 1
- dic = dic[entry]
- if i == 0 and j > 1:
- special_table.append(name)
-
-def __is_recursion_gr_then_one(dic):
- if not isinstance(dic, dict):
- return False
- keys = dic.keys()
- if len(keys) == 1:
- return __is_recursion_gr_then_one(dic.get(keys[0]))
- elif len(keys) > 1:
- return True
- else:
- return False
-
-def get_minimal_unique_name(dic, name, special_table):
- name_table = name.split("/")
- len_name_table = len(name_table)
- if len_name_table == 1 and name_table[0] in dic:
- # Special case. The name doesn't contain any "/"
- return name_table[0]
- elif len_name_table == 1:
- return name
- name_table.reverse()
- max_special_level = 0
- for special_name in special_table:
- if name.endswith(special_name):
- level = len(special_name.split("/"))
- if level > max_special_level:
- max_special_level = level
- for special_category in SPECIAL_CATEGORIES:
- found = False
- level = 1
- while level < len_name_table:
- if special_category == name_table[level - 1]:
- found = True
- break
- level += 1
- if found:
- if level > max_special_level:
- max_special_level = level
-
- if len_name_table < max_special_level:
- return name
-
- new_name = []
- i = 0
- for entry in name_table:
- dictionary = dic.get(entry)
- recursion = __is_recursion_gr_then_one(dictionary)
- if dictionary and recursion:
- new_name.append(entry)
- dic = dictionary
- i += 1
- elif dictionary != None:
- new_name.append(entry)
- dic = dictionary
- i += 1
- if i > max_special_level:
- break
- n = ""
- new_name.reverse()
- for part in new_name:
- n += part + "/"
- return n.strip("/")
-
-def release_lock(lock):
- if not lock:
- return
- try:
- lock.release()
- except RuntimeError, ex:
- msg = str(ex)
- logger.error(msg)
- except Exception:
- pass
-
-def get_api_object(img_dir, progtrack, parent_dialog):
- api_o = None
- message = None
- try:
- api_o = ngao(img_dir, progtrack)
- except api_errors.VersionException, ex:
- message = _("Version mismatch: expected version %(expected)d, "
- "got version %(found)d") % \
- {"expected": ex.expected_version,
- "found": ex.received_version}
- except api_errors.ImageNotFoundException, ex:
- message = _("%s is not an install image") % ex.user_dir
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, ex:
- message = str(ex)
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- message = _("An unknown error occurred") + "\n\n" + _("Error details:\n")
- message += str(ex)
- except Exception:
- traceback_lines = traceback.format_exc().splitlines()
- traceback_str = ""
- for line in traceback_lines:
- traceback_str += line + "\n"
- message = _("An unknown error occurred")
- if traceback_str != "":
- message += "\n\n" + _("Error details:\n") + traceback_str
- if api_o == None or message != None:
- if message == None:
- message = _("An unknown error occurred")
- raise Exception(message)
- return api_o
-
-def error_occurred(parent, error_msg, msg_title = None,
- msg_type=gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR, use_markup = False):
- msgbox = gtk.MessageDialog(parent =
- parent,
- buttons = gtk.BUTTONS_CLOSE,
- flags = gtk.DIALOG_MODAL,
- type = msg_type,
- message_format = None)
- if use_markup:
- msgbox.set_markup(error_msg)
- else:
- msgbox.set_property('text', error_msg)
- if msg_title != None:
- title = msg_title
- else:
- title = _("Error")
-
- msgbox.set_title(title)
- msgbox.run()
- msgbox.destroy()
-
-def get_version_fmt_string():
- build_str = _("Build")
- return "%(version)s (" + build_str + " %(build)s-%(branch)s)"
-
-def set_dependencies_text(textview, info, dep_info, installed_dep_info,
- installed_icon, not_installed_icon):
- names = []
- states = None
- installed_states = []
- if dep_info != None and len(dep_info.get(0)) >= 0:
- states = dep_info[0]
- if installed_dep_info != None and len(installed_dep_info.get(0)) >= 0:
- installed_states = installed_dep_info[0]
- version_fmt = get_version_fmt_string()
- for x in info.dependencies:
- if states != None and len(states) > 0:
- name = fmri.extract_pkg_name(x)
- found = False
- for state in states:
- if name == state.pkg_stem:
- version = version_fmt % \
- {"version": state.version,
- "build": state.build_release,
- "branch": state.branch}
- found = True
- break
- if not found:
- version = version_fmt % \
- {"version": '0',
- "build": '0',
- "branch": '0'}
- found = False
- for state in installed_states:
- if name == state.fmri.get_name():
- installed_version = version_fmt % \
- {"version": state.version,
- "build": state.build_release,
- "branch": state.branch}
- found = True
- break
- if not found:
- installed_version = (_("(not installed)"))
- names.append((name, version, installed_version,
- found))
- else:
- build_rel = "0"
- pkg_fmri = fmri.PkgFmri(x, build_release=build_rel)
- branch = pkg_fmri.version.branch
- version_stripped = pkg_fmri.get_version().split("-%s"
- % branch)[0]
- version = version_fmt % \
- {"version": version_stripped,
- "build": build_rel,
- "branch": branch}
- names.append((pkg_fmri.pkg_name, version,
- _("(not installed)"), False))
-
- depbuffer = textview.get_buffer()
- depbuffer.set_text("")
- if states == None:
- if len(names) == 0:
- itr = depbuffer.get_iter_at_line(0)
- depbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr,
- _("None"), "bold")
- else:
- for i in range(0, len(names)):
- itr = depbuffer.get_iter_at_line(i)
- dep_str = "%s\n" % (names[i])
- depbuffer.insert(itr, dep_str)
- return
- style = textview.get_style()
- font_size_in_pango_unit = style.font_desc.get_size()
- font_size_in_pixel = font_size_in_pango_unit / pango.SCALE
- tab_array = pango.TabArray(3, True)
- header = [_("Name"), _("Dependency"), _("Installed Version")]
- max_len = [0, 0]
- for i in range(2):
- depbuffer.set_text("")
- itr = depbuffer.get_iter_at_line(0)
- depbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr, header[i], "bold")
- max_len[i] = get_textview_width(textview)
-
- depbuffer.set_text("")
- for one_names in names:
- itr = depbuffer.get_iter_at_line(0)
- depbuffer.insert(itr, one_names[i])
- test_len = get_textview_width(textview)
-
- if test_len > max_len[i]:
- max_len[i] = test_len
- depbuffer.set_text("")
-
- tab_array.set_tab(1, pango.TAB_LEFT, max_len[0] + font_size_in_pixel)
- tab_array.set_tab(2, pango.TAB_LEFT,
- max_len[0] + max_len[1] + 2 * font_size_in_pixel)
-
- textview.set_tabs(tab_array)
-
- if len(names) == 0:
- depbuffer.set_text("")
- itr = depbuffer.get_iter_at_line(0)
- depbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr, _("No dependencies"), "bold")
- return
-
- itr = depbuffer.get_iter_at_line(0)
- header_text = "%s\t%s\t%s\n" % (header[0], header[1], header[2])
- depbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr, header_text, "bold")
- resized_installed_icon = None
- resized_not_installed_icon = None
- i += 0
- for (name, version, installed_version, is_installed) in names:
- if is_installed:
- if resized_installed_icon == None:
- resized_installed_icon = resize_icon(
- installed_icon,
- font_size_in_pixel)
- icon = resized_installed_icon
- else:
- if resized_not_installed_icon == None:
- resized_not_installed_icon = resize_icon(
- not_installed_icon,
- font_size_in_pixel)
- icon = resized_not_installed_icon
- itr = depbuffer.get_iter_at_line(i + 1)
- dep_str = "%s\t%s\t" % (name, version)
- depbuffer.insert(itr, dep_str)
- end_itr = depbuffer.get_end_iter()
- depbuffer.insert_pixbuf(end_itr, icon)
- depbuffer.insert(end_itr, " %s\n" % installed_version)
- i += 1
-
-def set_package_details(pkg_name, local_info, remote_info, textview,
- installed_icon, not_installed_icon, update_available_icon,
- is_all_publishers_installed=None, pubs_info=None, renamed_info=None,
- pkg_renamed = False):
- installed = True
- has_remote = True
-
- if not local_info:
- # Package is not installed
- local_info = remote_info
- installed = False
-
- if not remote_info:
- remote_info = local_info
- has_remote = False
- installed = True
-
- labs = {}
- labs["name"] = _("Name:")
- labs["summ"] = _("Summary:")
- labs["desc"] = _("Description:")
- labs["size"] = _("Size:")
- labs["cat"] = _("Category:")
- labs["ins"] = _("Installed:")
- labs["available"] = _("Version Available:")
- labs["renamed_to"] = _("Renamed To:")
- labs["lat"] = _("Latest Version:")
- labs["repository"] = _("Publisher:")
-
- summary = _("None")
- if local_info.summary:
- summary = local_info.summary
- description = ""
- if local_info.description:
- description = local_info.description
-
- obsolete_str = ""
- text = {}
- text["name"] = pkg_name
- text["summ"] = summary
- text["desc"] = description
- renamed_to = ""
- if renamed_info != None and \
- len(renamed_info.dependencies) > 0:
- renamed_pkgs = []
- for dep in renamed_info.dependencies:
- if dep.startswith('pkg:/'):
- dep_strs = dep.split('/', 1)
- dep = dep_strs[1]
- renamed_pkgs.append(dep)
- renamed_to += renamed_pkgs[0] + "\n"
- for dep in renamed_pkgs[1:]:
- renamed_to += "\t" + dep + "\n"
- text["renamed_to"] = renamed_to
- if installed:
- if api.PackageInfo.OBSOLETE in local_info.states:
- obsolete_str = _(" (Obsolete)")
- ver_text = _("%(version)s (Build %(build)s-%(branch)s)")
- text["ins"] = ver_text % \
- {"version": local_info.version,
- "build": local_info.build_release,
- "branch": local_info.branch}
- text["ins"] += obsolete_str
- labs["available"] = _("Latest Version:")
- if not same_pkg_versions(local_info, remote_info):
- text["available"] = ver_text % \
- {"version": remote_info.version,
- "build": remote_info.build_release,
- "branch": remote_info.branch}
- elif has_remote:
- text["available"] = _("Not available from this publisher")
- else:
- text["available"] = "No"
- else:
- if api.PackageInfo.OBSOLETE in remote_info.states:
- obsolete_str = _(" (Obsolete)")
- text["ins"] = _("No")
- text["ins"] += obsolete_str
- labs["available"] = _("Latest Version:")
- text["available"] = _(
- "%(version)s (Build %(build)s-%(branch)s)") % \
- {"version": remote_info.version,
- "build": remote_info.build_release,
- "branch": remote_info.branch}
- if local_info.size != 0:
- text["size"] = misc.bytes_to_str(local_info.size)
- else:
- text["size"] = "0"
- categories = _("None")
- if local_info.category_info_list:
- verbose = len(local_info.category_info_list) > 1
- categories = ""
- categories += local_info.category_info_list[0].__str__(verbose)
- if len(local_info.category_info_list) > 1:
- for ci in local_info.category_info_list[1:]:
- categories += ", " + ci.__str__(verbose)
-
- text["cat"] = categories
- pub_name = local_info.publisher
- if pubs_info != None:
- try:
- item = pubs_info[local_info.publisher]
- except KeyError:
- item = None
- if item:
- alias = item[1]
- if alias != None and len(alias) > 0:
- pub_name = "%s (%s)" % (
- alias, local_info.publisher)
- text["repository"] = pub_name
- # pubs_info: dict of publisher disabled status and aliases:
- # pub_info[pub_name][0] = True disabled or False enabled
- # pub_info[pub_name][1] = Alias
- if is_all_publishers_installed and pubs_info != None:
- if local_info.publisher in pubs_info:
- if pubs_info[local_info.publisher][0]:
- text["repository"] = pub_name + \
- _(" (disabled)")
- else:
- text["repository"] = pub_name + _(" (removed)")
- set_package_details_text(labs, text, textview, installed_icon,
- not_installed_icon, update_available_icon, pkg_renamed)
- return (labs, text)
-
-def get_scale(textview):
- scale = 1.0
- if not textview:
- return scale
- style = textview.get_style()
- font_size_in_pango_unit = style.font_desc.get_size()
- font_size_in_pixel = font_size_in_pango_unit / pango.SCALE
- s = gtk.settings_get_default()
- dpi = s.get_property("gtk-xft-dpi") / 1024
-
- # AppFontSize*DPI/72 = Cairo Units
- # DefaultFont=10, Default DPI=96: 10*96/72 = 13.3 Default FontInCairoUnits
- def_font_cunits = 13.3
- app_cunits = round(font_size_in_pixel*dpi/72.0, 1)
- if app_cunits >= def_font_cunits:
- scale = round(
- ((app_cunits - def_font_cunits)/def_font_cunits) + 1, 2)
- return scale
-
-def get_textview_width(textview):
- infobuffer = textview.get_buffer()
- bounds = infobuffer.get_bounds()
- start = textview.get_iter_location(bounds[0])
- end = textview.get_iter_location(bounds[1])
- return end[0] - start[0]
-
-def set_package_details_text(labs, text, textview, installed_icon,
- not_installed_icon, update_available_icon, pkg_renamed):
- style = textview.get_style()
- font_size_in_pango_unit = style.font_desc.get_size()
- font_size_in_pixel = font_size_in_pango_unit / pango.SCALE
- tab_array = pango.TabArray(2, True)
-
- infobuffer = textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.set_text("")
- max_test_len = 0
- for lab in labs:
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, 0, labs[lab])
- test_len = get_textview_width(textview)
- if test_len > max_test_len:
- max_test_len = test_len
- infobuffer.set_text("")
- tab_array.set_tab(1, pango.TAB_LEFT, max_test_len + font_size_in_pixel)
- textview.set_tabs(tab_array)
- infobuffer.set_text("")
- i = 0
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["name"], text["name"])
- i += 1
- if pkg_renamed:
- i = __add_renamed_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs, text)
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["summ"], text["summ"])
- i += 1
- installed = False
- if text["ins"].startswith(_("No")):
- icon = not_installed_icon
- else:
- icon = installed_icon
- installed = True
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["ins"],
- text["ins"], icon, font_size_in_pixel)
- i += 1
- if installed:
- if text["available"] != "No":
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i,
- labs["available"], text["available"],
- update_available_icon, font_size_in_pixel)
- i += 1
- if not pkg_renamed:
- i = __add_renamed_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i,
- labs, text)
- else:
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i,
- labs["available"], text["available"])
- i += 1
- if text["size"] != "0":
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["size"], text["size"])
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["cat"], text["cat"])
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["repository"],
- text["repository"])
- if len(text["desc"]) > 0:
- i += 1
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["desc"] + '\n')
- i += 1
- itr = infobuffer.get_iter_at_line(i)
- infobuffer.insert(itr, text["desc"])
-
-def set_pub_cert_details_text(labs, text, textview, added=False, reinstated=False):
- style = textview.get_style()
- font_size_in_pango_unit = style.font_desc.get_size()
- font_size_in_pixel = font_size_in_pango_unit / pango.SCALE
- tab_array = pango.TabArray(3, True)
-
- infobuffer = textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.set_text("")
-
- labs_issuer = {}
- labs_issuer["common_name_to"] = PUBCERT_COMMON_NAME
- labs_issuer["org_to"] = PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION
- labs_issuer["org_unit_to"] = PUBCERT_ORGANIZATIONAL_UNIT
- max_issuer_len = 0
- for lab in labs_issuer:
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, 0, labs_issuer[lab])
- test_len = get_textview_width(textview)
- if test_len > max_issuer_len:
- max_issuer_len = test_len
- infobuffer.set_text("")
-
- max_finger_len = 0
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, 0, labs["fingerprints"])
- max_finger_len = get_textview_width(textview)
- infobuffer.set_text("")
-
- tab_array.set_tab(0, pango.TAB_LEFT, max_finger_len + font_size_in_pixel)
- tab_array.set_tab(1, pango.TAB_LEFT, max_issuer_len + font_size_in_pixel)
- textview.set_tabs(tab_array)
- infobuffer.set_text("")
- i = 0
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["issued_to"] + '\n')
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["common_name_to"],
- text["common_name_to"])
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["org_to"], text["org_to"],
- bold_label=False)
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["org_unit_to"],
- text["org_unit_to"])
-
- i += 1
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["issued_by"] + '\n')
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["common_name_by"],
- text["common_name_by"])
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["org_by"], text["org_by"])
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["org_unit_by"],
- text["org_unit_by"])
-
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["validity"], "", bold_label=True)
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["issued_on"], text["issued_on"])
-
- i += 1
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i, labs["fingerprints"] + '\n')
-
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["sha1"], text["sha1"])
- i += 1
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["md5"], text["md5"])
- i += 1
- if not added and not reinstated:
- __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(infobuffer, i, labs["ips"], text["ips"],
- add_return=False)
- elif added and not reinstated:
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i,
- _("Note: \t Certificate is marked to be added"))
- elif not added and reinstated:
- __add_label_to_generalinfo(infobuffer, i,
- _("Note: \t Certificate is marked to be reinstated"))
-
-def __add_renamed_line_to_generalinfo(text_buffer, index, labs, text):
- if text["renamed_to"] != "":
- rename_list = text["renamed_to"].split("\n", 1)
- start = ""
- remainder = ""
- if rename_list != None:
- if len(rename_list) > 0:
- start = rename_list[0]
- if len(rename_list) > 1:
- remainder = rename_list[1]
- __add_line_to_generalinfo(text_buffer, index, labs["renamed_to"],
- start)
- index += 1
- if len(remainder) > 0:
- itr = text_buffer.get_iter_at_line(index)
- text_buffer.insert(itr, remainder)
- index += remainder.count("\n")
- return index
-
-def __add_label_to_generalinfo(text_buffer, index, label):
- itr = text_buffer.get_iter_at_line(index)
- text_buffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr, label, "bold")
-
-def __add_line_to_generalinfo(text_buffer, index, label, text,
- icon = None, font_size = 1):
- itr = text_buffer.get_iter_at_line(index)
- text_buffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr, label, "bold")
- end_itr = text_buffer.get_end_iter()
- if icon == None:
- text_buffer.insert(end_itr, "\t%s\n" % text)
- else:
- resized_icon = resize_icon(icon, font_size)
- text_buffer.insert(end_itr, "\t")
- text_buffer.get_end_iter()
- text_buffer.insert_pixbuf(end_itr, resized_icon)
- text_buffer.insert(end_itr, " %s\n" % text)
-
-def __add_line_to_pub_cert_info(text_buffer, index, label, text,
- bold_label = False, add_return = True):
- tab_str = "\t"
- itr = text_buffer.get_iter_at_line(index)
- if bold_label:
- text_buffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr, label, "bold")
- else:
- text_buffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr, label, "normal")
- end_itr = text_buffer.get_end_iter()
-
- return_str = ""
- if add_return:
- return_str = "\n"
-
- text_buffer.insert(end_itr, tab_str)
- text_buffer.get_end_iter()
- text_buffer.insert(end_itr, (" %s" + return_str) % text)
-
-def same_pkg_versions(info1, info2):
- if info1 == None or info2 == None:
- return False
-
- return info1.version == info2.version and \
- info1.build_release == info2.build_release and \
- info1.branch == info2.branch
-
-def resize_icon(icon, font_size):
- width = icon.get_width()
- height = icon.get_height()
- return icon.scale_simple(
- (font_size * width) / height,
- font_size,
- gtk.gdk.INTERP_BILINEAR)
-
-def get_pkg_info(app, api_o, pkg_stem, local):
- info = None
- try:
- info = api_o.info([pkg_stem], local,
- api.PackageInfo.ALL_OPTIONS -
- frozenset([api.PackageInfo.LICENSES]))
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- notify_log_error(app)
- return info
-
- pkgs_info = None
- package_info = None
- if info:
- pkgs_info = info[0]
- if pkgs_info:
- package_info = pkgs_info[0]
- if package_info:
- return package_info
- else:
- return None
-
-def restart_system():
- # "init 6" performs reboot in a clean and orderly manner informing
- # the svc.startd daemon of the change in runlevel which subsequently
- # achieves the appropriate milestone and ultimately executes
- # the rc0 kill scripts.
- command = "init 6"
- return os.system(command)
-
-def set_modal_and_transient(top_window, parent_window = None):
- if parent_window:
- top_window.set_transient_for(parent_window)
- top_window.set_modal(True)
-
-def get_catalogrefresh_exception_msg(cre):
- return get_msg(cre)
-
-def __get_stockbutton_label(button):
- # Gtk.Button->Gtk.Alignment->Gtk.HBox->[Gtk.Image, Gtk.Label]
- # Drill into Button widget to get Gtk.Label and set its text
- children = button.get_children()
- if len(children) == 0:
- return None
- align = children[0]
- if not align or not isinstance(align, gtk.Alignment):
- return None
- children = align.get_children()
- if len(children) == 0:
- return None
- hbox = children[0]
- if not hbox or not isinstance(hbox, gtk.HBox):
- return None
- children = hbox.get_children()
- if not (len(children) > 1):
- return None
- button_label = children[1]
- if not button_label or not isinstance(button_label, gtk.Label):
- return None
- return button_label
-
-def get_stockbutton_label_label(button):
- button_label = __get_stockbutton_label(button)
- if button_label != None:
- return button_label.get_label()
- else:
- return None
-
-def change_stockbutton_label(button, text):
- button_label = __get_stockbutton_label(button)
- if button_label != None:
- button_label.set_label(text)
-
-def set_icon_for_button_and_menuitem(icon_name, button=None, menuitem=None):
- icon_source = gtk.IconSource()
- icon_source.set_icon_name(icon_name)
- icon_set = gtk.IconSet()
- icon_set.add_source(icon_source)
- if button:
- image_widget = gtk.image_new_from_icon_set(icon_set,
- gtk.ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR)
- button.set_icon_widget(image_widget)
- if menuitem:
- image_widget = gtk.image_new_from_icon_set(icon_set,
- gtk.ICON_SIZE_MENU)
- menuitem.set_image(image_widget)
-
-def exit_if_no_threads():
- if threading.activeCount() == 1:
- if gtk.main_level() > 0:
- gtk.main_quit()
- sys.exit(0)
- return True
-
-def get_statusbar_label(statusbar):
- sb_frame = None
- sb_hbox = None
- sb_label = None
- children = statusbar.get_children()
- if len(children) > 0:
- sb_frame = children[0]
- if sb_frame and isinstance(sb_frame, gtk.Frame):
- children = sb_frame.get_children()
- if len(children) > 0:
- sb_hbox = children[0]
- if sb_hbox and isinstance(sb_hbox, gtk.HBox):
- children = sb_hbox.get_children()
- if len(children) == 0:
- return None
- sb_label = children[0]
- if sb_label and isinstance(sb_label, gtk.Label):
- return sb_label
- return None
-
-def get_origin_uri(repo):
- if repo == None:
- return None
- origin_uri = repo.origins[0]
- ret_uri = None
- if isinstance(origin_uri, str):
- if len(origin_uri) > 0:
- ret_uri = origin_uri.strip("/")
- elif isinstance(origin_uri, publisher.RepositoryURI):
- uri = origin_uri.uri
- if uri != None and len(uri) > 0:
- ret_uri = uri.strip("/")
- return ret_uri
-
-def get_pkg_stem(pkg_name, pkg_pub=None):
- pkg_str = "pkg:/"
- if pkg_pub == None:
- return_str = "%s%s" % (pkg_str, pkg_name)
- else:
- return_str = "%s/%s/%s" % (pkg_str, pkg_pub, pkg_name)
- return return_str
-
-def get_max_text_length(length_to_check, text, widget):
- if widget == None:
- return 0
- context = widget.get_pango_context()
- metrics = context.get_metrics(context.get_font_description())
- current_length = pango.PIXELS(
- metrics.get_approximate_char_width() * len(text))
- if current_length > length_to_check:
- return current_length
- else:
- return length_to_check
-
-def is_a_textview( widget):
- return widget.class_path().rpartition('.')[2] == "GtkTextView"
-
-def alias_clash(pubs, prefix, alias):
- clash = False
- if alias != None and len(alias) > 0:
- for pub in pubs:
- if pub.disabled:
- continue
- if pub.prefix == prefix:
- continue
- if alias == pub.prefix or alias == pub.alias:
- clash = True
- break
- return clash
-
-def setup_package_license(licenses):
- lic = ""
- lic_u = ""
- if licenses == None:
- lic_u = _("Not available")
- else:
- try:
- for licens in licenses:
- lic += licens.get_text()
- lic += "\n"
- except api_errors.ApiException:
- pass
- try:
- lic_u = unicode(lic, "utf-8")
- except UnicodeDecodeError:
- lic_u = _("License could not be shown "
- "due to conversion problem.")
- return lic_u
-
-def get_state_from_states(states):
- if api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED in states:
- pkg_state = api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED
- if api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE in states:
- pkg_state = api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE
- else:
- pkg_state = api.PackageInfo.KNOWN
-
- return pkg_state
--- a/src/modules/gui/misc_non_gui.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,232 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import os
-import socket
-import urlparse
-import urllib2
-import cPickle
-import logging
-import logging.handlers
-import platform
-import sys
-
-import pkg
-import pkg.portable as portable
-import pkg.client.api as api
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.client.transport.exception as transport
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-
-# The current version of the Client API the PM, UM and
-# WebInstall GUIs have been tested against and are known to work with.
-CLIENT_API_VERSION = 75
-LOG_DIR = "/var/tmp"
-LOG_ERROR_EXT = "_error.log"
-LOG_INFO_EXT = "_info.log"
-PKG_CLIENT_NAME_UM = "updatemanager"
-
-def get_log_error_ext():
- return LOG_ERROR_EXT
-
-def get_log_info_ext():
- return LOG_INFO_EXT
-
-class _LogFilter(logging.Filter):
- def __init__(self, max_level=logging.CRITICAL):
- logging.Filter.__init__(self)
- self.max_level = max_level
-
- def filter(self, record):
- return record.levelno <= self.max_level
-
-def get_version():
- return pkg.VERSION
-
-def get_os_version_and_build():
- os_ver = portable.util.get_os_release()
- os_name = portable.util.get_canonical_os_name()
- if os_name == 'sunos':
- os_ver += " (" + platform.uname()[3] + ")"
- return os_ver
-
-def get_log_path(client_name):
- if portable.is_admin():
- log_path = os.path.join(LOG_DIR, client_name)
- else:
- user_name = portable.get_username()
- log_path = os.path.join(LOG_DIR, client_name + "_" + user_name)
- return log_path
-
-def setup_logging(client_name):
- normal_setup = True
- err_str = ""
- log_path = get_log_path(client_name)
- infolog_path = log_path + LOG_INFO_EXT
- try:
- info_h = logging.handlers.RotatingFileHandler(infolog_path,
- maxBytes=1000000, backupCount=1)
- except IOError, e:
- err_str = _("WARNING: %s\nUnable to setup log:\n ") % client_name
- err_str += str(e)
- err_str += _("\n All info messages will be logged to stdout")
- normal_setup = False
-
- errlog_path = log_path + LOG_ERROR_EXT
- try:
- err_h = logging.handlers.RotatingFileHandler(errlog_path,
- maxBytes=1000000, backupCount=1)
- except IOError, e:
- if err_str == "":
- err_str = _("WARNING: %s\nUnable to setup log:\n ") % \
- client_name
- else:
- err_str += _("\n ")
- err_str += str(e)
- err_str += _("\n All errors and warnings will be logged to stderr")
- normal_setup = False
-
- if normal_setup:
- log_fmt = logging.Formatter(
- "<b>%(levelname)s:</b> " + client_name + \
- "\n%(asctime)s: %(filename)s: %(module)s: "
- "%(lineno)s:\n%(message)s")
- else:
- if client_name != PKG_CLIENT_NAME_UM and err_str != "":
- print err_str
- log_fmt = logging.Formatter(
- "%(levelname)s: " + client_name + \
- "\n%(asctime)s: %(filename)s: %(module)s: "
- "%(lineno)s:\n%(message)s")
- info_h = logging.StreamHandler(sys.stdout)
- err_h = logging.StreamHandler(sys.stderr)
-
- info_t = _LogFilter(logging.INFO)
- info_h.addFilter(info_t)
- info_h.setFormatter(log_fmt)
- info_h.setLevel(logging.INFO)
- global_settings.info_log_handler = info_h
-
- err_h.setFormatter(log_fmt)
- err_h.setLevel(logging.WARNING)
- global_settings.error_log_handler = err_h
-
- return normal_setup
-
-def shutdown_logging():
- try:
- global_settings.reset_logging()
- logging.shutdown()
- except IOError:
- pass
-
-def get_cache_dir(api_object):
- img = api_object.img
- cache_dir = os.path.join(img.imgdir, "gui_cache")
- try:
- __mkdir(cache_dir)
- except OSError:
- cache_dir = None
- return cache_dir
-
-def __mkdir(directory_path):
- if not os.path.isdir(directory_path):
- os.makedirs(directory_path)
-
-def get_api_object(img_dir, progtrack):
- api_o = None
- api_o = api.ImageInterface(img_dir,
- CLIENT_API_VERSION,
- progtrack, None, global_settings.client_name)
- return api_o
-
-def read_cache_file(file_path):
- data = []
- try:
- fh = open(file_path, 'r')
- data = cPickle.load(fh)
- fh.close()
- except IOError:
- pass
- except:
- pass
- return data
-
-def dump_cache_file(file_path, data):
- try:
- fh = open(file_path,"w")
- cPickle.dump(data, fh, True)
- fh.close()
- except IOError:
- pass
- except:
- pass
-
-def get_um_name():
- return PKG_CLIENT_NAME_UM
-
-def get_catalogrefresh_exception_msg(cre):
- framework_error = False
- if not isinstance(cre, api_errors.CatalogRefreshException):
- return ("", False)
- msg = _("Catalog refresh error:\n")
- if cre.succeeded < cre.total:
- msg += _(
- "Only %(suc)s out of %(tot)s catalogs successfully updated.\n") % \
- {"suc": cre.succeeded, "tot": cre.total}
-
- for pub, err in cre.failed:
- if isinstance(err, urllib2.HTTPError):
- msg += "%s: %s - %s" % \
- (err.filename, err.code, err.msg)
- elif isinstance(err, urllib2.URLError):
- if err.args[0][0] == 8:
- msg += "%s: %s" % \
- (urlparse.urlsplit(
- pub["origin"])[1].split(":")[0],
- err.args[0][1])
- else:
- if isinstance(err.args[0], socket.timeout):
- msg += "%s: %s" % \
- (pub["origin"], "timeout")
- else:
- msg += "%s: %s" % \
- (pub["origin"], err.args[0][1])
- else:
- framework_error = is_frameworkerror(err)
- msg += str(err)
-
- if cre.errmessage:
- msg += cre.errmessage
-
- return (msg, framework_error)
-
-def is_frameworkerror(err):
- if isinstance(err, transport.TransportFailures):
- for exp in err.exceptions:
- if isinstance(exp, transport.TransportFrameworkError) and \
- exp.code == 56:
- return True
- return False
-
--- a/src/modules/gui/parseqs.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-##################################################################################
-# PYTHON SOFTWARE FOUNDATION LICENSE VERSION 2
-# http://www.python.org/download/releases/2.6.1/license/
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Python Software Foundation;
-# All Rights Reserved
-#
-# Extraced from urlparse module in Python 2.6.1
-# http://www.python.org/ftp/python/2.6.1/Python-2.6.1.tgz
-# Python-2.6.1/Lib/urlparse.py
-#
-# Modifications:
-# Just extracted parse_qs() and parse_qsl() functions without any modifications
-# Only addition is the urllib import unquote statement
-#
-##################################################################################
-"""
-Parse (absolute and relative) URLs.
-
-See RFC 1808: "Relative Uniform Resource Locators", by R. Fielding,
-UC Irvine, June 1995.
-"""
-
-from urllib import unquote
-
-def parse_qs(qs, keep_blank_values=0, strict_parsing=0):
- """Parse a query given as a string argument.
-
- Arguments:
-
- qs: URL-encoded query string to be parsed
-
- keep_blank_values: flag indicating whether blank values in
- URL encoded queries should be treated as blank strings.
- A true value indicates that blanks should be retained as
- blank strings. The default false value indicates that
- blank values are to be ignored and treated as if they were
- not included.
-
- strict_parsing: flag indicating what to do with parsing errors.
- If false (the default), errors are silently ignored.
- If true, errors raise a ValueError exception.
- """
- dict = {}
- for name, value in parse_qsl(qs, keep_blank_values, strict_parsing):
- if name in dict:
- dict[name].append(value)
- else:
- dict[name] = [value]
- return dict
-
-def parse_qsl(qs, keep_blank_values=0, strict_parsing=0):
- """Parse a query given as a string argument.
-
- Arguments:
-
- qs: URL-encoded query string to be parsed
-
- keep_blank_values: flag indicating whether blank values in
- URL encoded queries should be treated as blank strings. A
- true value indicates that blanks should be retained as blank
- strings. The default false value indicates that blank values
- are to be ignored and treated as if they were not included.
-
- strict_parsing: flag indicating what to do with parsing errors. If
- false (the default), errors are silently ignored. If true,
- errors raise a ValueError exception.
-
- Returns a list, as G-d intended.
- """
- pairs = [s2 for s1 in qs.split('&') for s2 in s1.split(';')]
- r = []
- for name_value in pairs:
- if not name_value and not strict_parsing:
- continue
- nv = name_value.split('=', 1)
- if len(nv) != 2:
- if strict_parsing:
- raise ValueError, "bad query field: %r" % (name_value,)
- # Handle case of a control-name with no equal sign
- if keep_blank_values:
- nv.append('')
- else:
- continue
- if len(nv[1]) or keep_blank_values:
- name = unquote(nv[0].replace('+', ' '))
- value = unquote(nv[1].replace('+', ' '))
- r.append((name, value))
-
- return r
-
--- a/src/modules/gui/pmgconf.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,233 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2011 Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import sys
-try:
- import gconf
- from glib import GError
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-
-PACKAGEMANAGER_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences"
-MAX_SEARCH_COMPLETION_PREFERENCES = \
- "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/max_search_completion"
-INITIAL_APP_WIDTH_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_width"
-INITIAL_APP_HEIGHT_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_height"
-INITIAL_APP_HPOS_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_hposition"
-INITIAL_APP_VPOS_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_app_vposition"
-INITIAL_SHOW_FILTER_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_show_filter"
-INITIAL_SECTION_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/initial_section"
-LAST_EXPORT_SELECTION_PATH = \
- "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/last_export_selections_path"
-LAST_ADD_PUBCERT_PATH = \
- "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/last_add_pubcert_path"
-SHOW_STARTPAGE_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/show_startpage"
-SHOW_IMAGE_UPDATE_CONFIRMATION = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/imageupdate_confirm"
-SHOW_INSTALL_CONFIRMATION = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/install_confirm"
-SHOW_REMOVE_CONFIRMATION = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/remove_confirm"
-SAVE_STATE_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/save_state"
-START_INSEARCH_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/start_insearch"
-LASTSOURCE_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/lastsource"
-API_SEARCH_ERROR_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/api_search_error"
-DETAILS_EXPANDED_PREFERENCES = "/apps/packagemanager/preferences/details_expanded"
-
-class PMGConf:
- def __init__(self):
- self.client = gconf.client_get_default()
- try:
- self.max_search_completion = \
- self.client.get_int(MAX_SEARCH_COMPLETION_PREFERENCES)
- self.initial_show_filter = \
- self.client.get_int(INITIAL_SHOW_FILTER_PREFERENCES)
- self.initial_section = \
- self.client.get_int(INITIAL_SECTION_PREFERENCES)
- self.last_export_selection_path = \
- self.client.get_string(LAST_EXPORT_SELECTION_PATH)
- self.last_add_pubcert_path = \
- self.client.get_string(LAST_ADD_PUBCERT_PATH)
- self.show_startpage = \
- self.client.get_bool(SHOW_STARTPAGE_PREFERENCES)
- self.save_state = \
- self.client.get_bool(SAVE_STATE_PREFERENCES)
- self.show_image_update = \
- self.client.get_bool(SHOW_IMAGE_UPDATE_CONFIRMATION)
- self.show_install = \
- self.client.get_bool(SHOW_INSTALL_CONFIRMATION)
- self.show_remove = \
- self.client.get_bool(SHOW_REMOVE_CONFIRMATION)
- self.start_insearch = \
- self.client.get_bool(START_INSEARCH_PREFERENCES)
- self.lastsource = \
- self.client.get_string(LASTSOURCE_PREFERENCES)
- self.not_show_repos = \
- self.client.get_string(API_SEARCH_ERROR_PREFERENCES)
- self.initial_app_width = \
- self.client.get_int(INITIAL_APP_WIDTH_PREFERENCES)
- self.initial_app_height = \
- self.client.get_int(INITIAL_APP_HEIGHT_PREFERENCES)
- self.initial_app_hpos = \
- self.client.get_int(INITIAL_APP_HPOS_PREFERENCES)
- self.initial_app_vpos = \
- self.client.get_int(INITIAL_APP_VPOS_PREFERENCES)
- self.client.add_dir(PACKAGEMANAGER_PREFERENCES,
- gconf.CLIENT_PRELOAD_NONE)
- self.client.notify_add(SHOW_IMAGE_UPDATE_CONFIRMATION,
- self.__show_image_update_changed)
- self.client.notify_add(SHOW_INSTALL_CONFIRMATION,
- self.__show_install_changed)
- self.client.notify_add(SHOW_REMOVE_CONFIRMATION,
- self.__show_remove_changed)
- self.client.notify_add(SAVE_STATE_PREFERENCES,
- self.__save_state_changed)
- self.details_expanded = \
- self.client.get_bool(DETAILS_EXPANDED_PREFERENCES)
- except GError:
- # Default values - the same as in the
- # packagemanager-preferences.schemas
- self.max_search_completion = 20
- self.initial_show_filter = 0
- self.initial_section = 2
- self.last_export_selection_path = ""
- self.last_add_pubcert_path = ""
- self.show_startpage = True
- self.show_image_update = True
- self.show_install = True
- self.show_remove = True
- self.save_state = True
- self.start_insearch = True
- self.lastsource = ""
- self.not_show_repos = ""
- self.initial_app_width = 800
- self.initial_app_height = 600
- self.initial_app_hpos = 200
- self.initial_app_vpos = 320
- self.details_expanded = True
- self.show_startpage = False
- self.__fix_initial_values()
-
- def __fix_initial_values(self):
- if self.initial_app_width == -1:
- self.initial_app_width = 800
- if self.initial_app_height == -1:
- self.initial_app_height = 600
- if self.initial_app_hpos == -1:
- self.initial_app_hpos = 200
- if self.initial_app_vpos == -1:
- self.initial_app_vpos = 320
-
- if not self.not_show_repos:
- self.not_show_repos = ""
-
- def set_lastsource(self, value):
- try:
- self.lastsource = value
- self.client.set_string(LASTSOURCE_PREFERENCES, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def set_details_expanded(self, value):
- try:
- self.details_expanded = value
- self.client.set_bool(DETAILS_EXPANDED_PREFERENCES, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def set_start_insearch(self, value):
- try:
- self.start_insearch = value
- self.client.set_bool(START_INSEARCH_PREFERENCES, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def set_show_startpage(self, value):
- try:
- self.show_startpage = value
- self.client.set_bool(SHOW_STARTPAGE_PREFERENCES, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def set_save_state(self, value):
- try:
- self.save_state = value
- self.client.set_bool(SAVE_STATE_PREFERENCES, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def set_show_image_update(self, value):
- try:
- self.show_image_update = value
- self.client.set_bool(SHOW_IMAGE_UPDATE_CONFIRMATION, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def set_show_install(self, value):
- try:
- self.show_install = value
- self.client.set_bool(SHOW_INSTALL_CONFIRMATION, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def set_show_remove(self, value):
- try:
- self.show_remove = value
- self.client.set_bool(SHOW_REMOVE_CONFIRMATION, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def set_not_show_repos(self, value):
- try:
- self.client.set_string(API_SEARCH_ERROR_PREFERENCES, value)
- except GError:
- pass
-
- def save_values(self, pub, start_insearch, width, height, hpos, vpos):
- try:
- if self.last_export_selection_path:
- self.client.set_string(LAST_EXPORT_SELECTION_PATH,
- self.last_export_selection_path)
- if self.last_add_pubcert_path:
- self.client.set_string(LAST_ADD_PUBCERT_PATH,
- self.last_add_pubcert_path)
- self.client.set_string(LASTSOURCE_PREFERENCES, pub)
- self.client.set_bool(START_INSEARCH_PREFERENCES,
- start_insearch)
- self.client.set_int(INITIAL_APP_WIDTH_PREFERENCES, width)
- self.client.set_int(INITIAL_APP_HEIGHT_PREFERENCES, height)
- self.client.set_int(INITIAL_APP_HPOS_PREFERENCES, hpos)
- self.client.set_int(INITIAL_APP_VPOS_PREFERENCES, vpos)
- except GError:
- pass
-
-
- def __save_state_changed(self, client, connection_id, entry, arguments):
- self.save_state = entry.get_value().get_bool()
-
- def __show_image_update_changed(self, client, connection_id, entry, arguments):
- self.show_image_update = entry.get_value().get_bool()
-
- def __show_install_changed(self, client, connection_id, entry, arguments):
- self.show_install = entry.get_value().get_bool()
-
- def __show_remove_changed(self, client, connection_id, entry, arguments):
- self.show_remove = entry.get_value().get_bool()
--- a/src/modules/gui/pmlogging.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,196 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import sys
-import os
-import re
-try:
- import gobject
- import pango
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-
-REGEX_BOLD_MARKUP = re.compile(r'^<b>')
-REGEX_STRIP_MARKUP = re.compile(r'<.*?>')
-
-class PMLogging:
- def __init__(self, builder, window_icon, is_normal_logging_setup=True):
- self.is_normal_logging_setup = is_normal_logging_setup
- self.w_view_log_dialog = builder.get_object("view_log_dialog")
- self.w_view_log_dialog.set_icon(window_icon)
- self.w_view_log_dialog.set_title(_("Logs"))
- self.w_log_info_textview = builder.get_object("log_info_textview")
- self.w_log_errors_textview = builder.get_object("log_errors_textview")
-
- infobuffer = self.w_log_info_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- infobuffer = self.w_log_errors_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- self.w_log_close_button = builder.get_object("log_close_button")
- self.w_log_clear_button = builder.get_object("log_clear_button")
- self.w_log_help_button = builder.get_object("log_help_button")
-
- def set_window_icon(self, window_icon):
- self.w_view_log_dialog.set_icon(window_icon)
-
- def setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_log_close_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_log_close_button_clicked),
- (self.w_log_clear_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_log_clear_button_clicked),
- (self.w_log_help_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_log_help_button_clicked),
- (self.w_view_log_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_log_dialog_delete_event)
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def set_modal_and_transient(self, parent_window):
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_view_log_dialog,
- parent_window)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __on_log_help_button_clicked(widget):
- gui_misc.display_help("gkiod")
-
- def __on_log_dialog_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_log_close_button_clicked(None)
- return True
-
- def __on_log_close_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_view_log_dialog.hide()
-
- def __on_log_clear_button_clicked(self, widget):
- ext = gui_misc.get_log_error_ext()
- self.__clear_logs(ext)
- ext = gui_misc.get_log_info_ext()
- self.__clear_logs(ext)
- gui_misc.shutdown_logging()
- gui_misc.setup_logging()
- self.log_activate()
-
- def __clear_logs(self, ext):
- self.__clear_log(gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_pm_name()) + ext)
- self.__clear_log(gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_wi_name()) + ext)
- self.__clear_log(gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_um_name()) + ext)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __clear_log(path):
- try:
- os.unlink(path)
- except OSError:
- pass
-
- def log_activate(self):
- textbuffer_err = self.w_log_errors_textview.get_buffer()
- textbuffer_info = self.w_log_info_textview.get_buffer()
- if self.is_normal_logging_setup:
- textbuffer_err.set_text(_("Loading ..."))
- textbuffer_info.set_text(_("Loading ..."))
- else:
- textbuffer_err.set_text("")
- textbuffer_info.set_text("")
- textiter = textbuffer_err.get_end_iter()
- textbuffer_err.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- _("Unable to setup log:\n"), "bold")
- textbuffer_err.insert(textiter,
- _("All errors and warnings will be logged to stderr"))
- textiter = textbuffer_info.get_end_iter()
- textbuffer_info.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- _("Unable to setup log:\n"), "bold")
- textbuffer_info.insert(textiter,
- _("All info messages will be logged to stdout"))
-
- self.w_log_close_button.grab_focus()
- self.w_view_log_dialog.show()
-
- if self.is_normal_logging_setup:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__load_err_view_log)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__load_info_view_log)
-
- def __load_err_view_log(self):
- textbuffer = self.w_log_errors_textview.get_buffer()
- textbuffer.set_text("")
- textiter = textbuffer.get_end_iter()
- log_err_ext = gui_misc.get_log_error_ext()
- pm_err_log = gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_pm_name()) + log_err_ext
- wi_err_log = gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_wi_name()) + log_err_ext
- um_err_log = gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_um_name()) + log_err_ext
-
- self.__write_to_view_log(um_err_log,
- textbuffer, textiter, _("None: ") + gui_misc.get_um_name() + "\n")
- self.__write_to_view_log(wi_err_log,
- textbuffer, textiter, _("None: ") + gui_misc.get_wi_name() + "\n")
- self.__write_to_view_log(pm_err_log,
- textbuffer, textiter, _("None: ") + gui_misc.get_pm_name() + "\n")
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_log_errors_textview.scroll_to_iter, textiter,
- 0.0)
-
- def __load_info_view_log(self):
- textbuffer = self.w_log_info_textview.get_buffer()
- textbuffer.set_text("")
- textiter = textbuffer.get_end_iter()
- log_info_ext = gui_misc.get_log_info_ext()
- pm_info_log = gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_pm_name()) + log_info_ext
- wi_info_log = gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_wi_name()) + log_info_ext
- um_info_log = gui_misc.get_log_path(gui_misc.get_um_name()) + log_info_ext
-
- self.__write_to_view_log(um_info_log,
- textbuffer, textiter, _("None: ") + gui_misc.get_um_name() + "\n")
- self.__write_to_view_log(wi_info_log,
- textbuffer, textiter, _("None: ") + gui_misc.get_wi_name() + "\n")
- self.__write_to_view_log(pm_info_log,
- textbuffer, textiter, _("None: ") + gui_misc.get_pm_name() + "\n")
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_log_info_textview.scroll_to_iter, textiter, 0.0)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __write_to_view_log(path, textbuffer, textiter, nomessages):
- infile = None
- try:
- infile = open(path, "r")
- except IOError:
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, nomessages, "bold")
- return
- if infile == None:
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, nomessages, "bold")
- return
-
- lines = infile.readlines()
- if len(lines) == 0:
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, nomessages, "bold")
- return
- for line in lines:
- if re.match(REGEX_BOLD_MARKUP, line):
- line = re.sub(REGEX_STRIP_MARKUP, "", line)
- textbuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, line,
- "bold")
- else:
- textbuffer.insert(textiter, line)
- try:
- infile.close()
- except IOError:
- pass
--- a/src/modules/gui/preferences.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,823 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import g11nsvc as g11nsvc
-import re
-import sys
-try:
- import gobject
- gobject.threads_init()
- import gtk
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require("2.0")
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.client.api as api
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-
-PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_GENERAL_PAGE = 0
-PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_SIG_POL_PAGE = 1
-PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_LANGUAGES_PAGE = 2
-GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS = 5 # gtk.gdk._2BUTTON_PRESS causes pylint warning
-LOCALE_PREFIX = "facet.locale."
-LANG_STAR_SUFFIX = "_*"
-
-ALL_LOCALES = "facet.locale.*"
-ALL_DEVEL = "facet.devel"
-ALL_DOC = "facet.doc.*"
-
-LANG_MATCH = re.compile(r'facet\.locale\.([a-z]{2,3})$')
-LANG_STAR_MATCH = re.compile(r'facet\.locale\.([a-z]{2,3})_\*$')
-LOCALE_MATCH = re.compile(r'facet\.locale\.([a-z]{2,3}_[A-Z]{2,3}.*$)')
-
-SYSTEM_G11LOCALE_MATCH = re.compile(r'^([a-z]{2,3}_[A-Z]{2,3})\.*(.*)$')
-SYSTEM_FACETLOCALE_MATCH = re.compile(r'([a-z]{2,3}_[A-Z]{2,3})\(*(.*?)\)*$')
-
-debug = False
-
-class Preferences:
- def __init__(self, parent, builder, window_icon, gconf):
- self.gconf = gconf
- self.parent = parent
- self.w_preferencesdialog = \
- builder.get_object("preferencesdialog")
- self.w_preferencesdialog.set_icon(window_icon)
- w_startup_label = \
- builder.get_object("startup_label")
- w_startup_label.hide()
- w_startup_hbox = \
- builder.get_object("startup_hbox")
- w_startup_hbox.hide()
- self.w_startpage_checkbutton = \
- builder.get_object("startpage_checkbutton")
- self.w_exit_checkbutton = \
- builder.get_object("exit_checkbutton")
- self.w_confirm_updateall_checkbutton = \
- builder.get_object("confirm_updateall_checkbutton")
- self.w_confirm_install_checkbutton = \
- builder.get_object("confirm_install_checkbutton")
- self.w_confirm_remove_checkbutton = \
- builder.get_object("confirm_remove_checkbutton")
- self.w_help_button = builder.get_object("preferenceshelp")
- self.w_close_button = builder.get_object("preferencesclose")
- self.w_cancel_button = builder.get_object("preferencescancel")
- self.w_languages_all_radiobutton = \
- builder.get_object("lang_install_all_radiobutton")
- self.w_languages_only_radiobutton = \
- builder.get_object("lang_install_only_radiobutton")
- self.w_feature_devel_checkbutton = \
- builder.get_object("feature_devel_checkbutton")
- self.w_feature_doc_checkbutton = \
- builder.get_object("feature_doc_checkbutton")
-
- self.w_locales_treeview = \
- builder.get_object("languages_treeview")
- self.w_preferences_notebook = builder.get_object(
- "preferences_notebook")
- self.w_languages_treeview = builder.get_object(
- "languages_treeview")
-
- self.w_gsig_ignored_radiobutton = builder.get_object(
- "gsig_ignored_radiobutton")
- self.w_gsig_optional_radiobutton = builder.get_object(
- "gsig_optional_but_valid_radiobutton")
- self.w_gsig_valid_radiobutton = builder.get_object(
- "gsig_valid_radiobutton")
- self.w_gsig_name_radiobutton = builder.get_object(
- "gsig_name_radiobutton")
- self.w_gsig_name_entry = builder.get_object(
- "gsig_name_entry")
- self.w_gsig_cert_names_vbox = builder.get_object(
- "gsig_cert_names_vbox")
-
- self.orig_gsig_policy = None
-
- self.watch = gtk.gdk.Cursor(gtk.gdk.WATCH)
- self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict = {}
- self.orig_facets_dict = {}
- self.orig_facet_lang_dict = {}
- self.orig_facet_lang_star_dict = {}
- self.orig_facet_locale_dict = {}
- self.facet_g11_locales_dict = {}
- self.facetlocales_list = []
- self.facets_to_set = {}
- self.locales_setup = False
- self.locales_treeview_selection = []
- self.locales_list = self.__get_locales_liststore()
- self.__init_locales_tree_view(self.locales_list)
- self.__init_locales_list()
-
- def show_signature_policy(self):
- self.w_preferences_notebook.set_current_page(
- PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_SIG_POL_PAGE)
- self.w_preferencesdialog.show()
-
- def set_window_icon(self, window_icon):
- self.w_preferencesdialog.set_icon(window_icon)
-
- def setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_preferencesdialog, "show",
- self.__on_preferencesdialog_show),
- (self.w_preferencesdialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_preferencesdialog_delete_event),
- (self.w_help_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_preferenceshelp_clicked),
- (self.w_close_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_preferencesclose_clicked),
- (self.w_cancel_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_preferencescancel_clicked),
- (self.w_languages_all_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_languages_all_radiobutton_toggled),
- (self.w_preferences_notebook, "switch_page",
- self.__on_notebook_change),
- (self.w_languages_treeview, "button_press_event",
- self.__on_languages_treeview_button_and_key_events),
- (self.w_languages_treeview, "key_press_event",
- self.__on_languages_treeview_button_and_key_events),
-
- (self.w_gsig_ignored_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_gsig_radiobutton_toggled),
- (self.w_gsig_optional_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_gsig_radiobutton_toggled),
- (self.w_gsig_valid_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_gsig_radiobutton_toggled),
- (self.w_gsig_name_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_gsig_radiobutton_toggled),
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def __on_gsig_radiobutton_toggled(self, widget):
- self.w_gsig_cert_names_vbox.set_sensitive(
- self.w_gsig_name_radiobutton.get_active())
-
- def __update_img_sig_policy_prop(self, set_props):
- try:
- self.parent.get_api_object().img.set_properties(set_props)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- error_msg = str(e)
- msg_title = _("Preferences Error")
- msg_type = gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR
- gui_misc.error_occurred(None, error_msg, msg_title, msg_type)
- return False
- return True
-
- def __update_img_sig_policy(self):
- orig = self.orig_gsig_policy
- ignore = self.w_gsig_ignored_radiobutton.get_active()
- verify = self.w_gsig_optional_radiobutton.get_active()
- req_sigs = self.w_gsig_valid_radiobutton.get_active()
- req_names = self.w_gsig_name_radiobutton.get_active()
- names = gui_misc.fetch_signature_policy_names_from_textfield(
- self.w_gsig_name_entry.get_text())
- if req_names and len(names) == 0:
- return False
- set_props = gui_misc.setup_signature_policy_properties(ignore,
- verify, req_sigs, req_names, names, orig)
- if len(set_props) > 0:
- return self.__update_img_sig_policy_prop(set_props)
- return True
-
- def __prepare_img_signature_policy(self):
- if self.orig_gsig_policy:
- return
- sig_policy = self.__fetch_img_signature_policy()
- self.orig_gsig_policy = sig_policy
- self.w_gsig_ignored_radiobutton.set_active(
- sig_policy[gui_misc.SIG_POLICY_IGNORE])
- self.w_gsig_optional_radiobutton.set_active(
- sig_policy[gui_misc.SIG_POLICY_VERIFY])
- self.w_gsig_valid_radiobutton.set_active(
- sig_policy[gui_misc.SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_SIGNATURES])
- self.w_gsig_cert_names_vbox.set_sensitive(False)
-
- if sig_policy[gui_misc.SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_NAMES]:
- self.w_gsig_name_radiobutton.set_active(True)
- self.w_gsig_cert_names_vbox.set_sensitive(True)
-
- names = sig_policy[gui_misc.PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES]
- gui_misc.set_signature_policy_names_for_textfield(
- self.w_gsig_name_entry, names)
-
- def __fetch_img_signature_policy(self):
- prop_sig_pol = self.parent.get_api_object().img.get_property(
- gui_misc.PROP_SIGNATURE_POLICY)
- prop_sig_req_names = self.parent.get_api_object().img.get_property(
- gui_misc.PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES)
- return gui_misc.create_sig_policy_from_property(
- prop_sig_pol, prop_sig_req_names)
-
- def __on_notebook_change(self, widget, event, pagenum):
- if pagenum == PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_LANGUAGES_PAGE:
- self.w_preferencesdialog.window.set_cursor(
- self.watch )
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_locales)
- elif pagenum == PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_SIG_POL_PAGE:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_img_signature_policy)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_locales_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.LOCALE_NAME
- # - <language> (territory)
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE
- # - Display <language> name
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.LOCALE_TERRITORY
- # - Display <territory> name
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.LOCALE
- # - <language>_<territory>(code)
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED
- )
-
- def __select_column_clicked(self, data):
- sort_model = self.w_locales_treeview.get_model()
- model = sort_model.get_model()
- iter_next = sort_model.get_iter_first()
- none_selected = True
- all_selected = True
- list_of_paths = []
- while iter_next != None:
- sort_path = sort_model.get_path(iter_next)
- path = sort_model.convert_path_to_child_path(sort_path)
- list_of_paths.append(path)
- app_iter = sort_model.convert_iter_to_child_iter(None,
- iter_next)
- val = model.get_value(app_iter,
- enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED)
- if val:
- none_selected = False
- else:
- all_selected = False
- iter_next = sort_model.iter_next(iter_next)
-
- some_selected = not all_selected and not none_selected
- select_all = none_selected or some_selected
- for path in list_of_paths:
- app_iter = model.get_iter(path)
- val = model.get_value(app_iter,
- enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED)
- if select_all and not val:
- model.set_value(app_iter,
- enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED, True)
- elif not select_all and val:
- model.set_value(app_iter,
- enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED, False)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __sort_func(treemodel, iter1, iter2, column):
- col_val1 = treemodel.get_value(iter1, column)
- col_val2 = treemodel.get_value(iter2, column)
- ret = cmp(col_val1, col_val2)
- if ret != 0:
- return ret
- if column == enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE:
- ter1 = treemodel.get_value(iter1,
- enumerations.LOCALE_TERRITORY)
- ter2 = treemodel.get_value(iter2,
- enumerations.LOCALE_TERRITORY)
- ret = cmp(ter1, ter2)
- elif column == enumerations.LOCALE_TERRITORY:
- lang1 = treemodel.get_value(iter1,
- enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE)
- lang2 = treemodel.get_value(iter2,
- enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE)
- ret = cmp(lang1, lang2)
- return ret
-
- def __init_locales_tree_view(self, locales_list):
- locales_sort_model = gtk.TreeModelSort(locales_list)
- locales_sort_model.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE,
- gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
-
- locales_sort_model.set_sort_func(enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE,
- self.__sort_func,
- enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE)
- locales_sort_model.set_sort_func(enumerations.LOCALE_TERRITORY,
- self.__sort_func,
- enumerations.LOCALE_TERRITORY)
-
- # Selected column - Not sorted
- toggle_renderer = gtk.CellRendererToggle()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn("",
- toggle_renderer, active = enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED)
- column.set_expand(False)
- column.set_clickable(True)
- column.connect('clicked', self.__select_column_clicked)
- select_image = self.parent.get_theme_selection_coloumn_image()
- column.set_widget(select_image)
- self.w_locales_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- # Language column - sort using custom __sort_func()
- lang_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Language"),
- lang_renderer, text = enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE)
- column.set_expand(True)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- self.w_locales_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- # Territory column - sort using custom __sort_func()
- ter_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Territory"),
- ter_renderer, text = enumerations.LOCALE_TERRITORY)
- column.set_expand(True)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.LOCALE_TERRITORY)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- self.w_locales_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- self.w_locales_treeview.get_selection().set_mode(
- gtk.SELECTION_MULTIPLE)
- self.w_locales_treeview.get_selection().connect('changed',
- self.__on_languages_treeview_changed)
- self.w_locales_treeview.set_model(locales_sort_model)
-
- def __init_locales_list(self):
- sorted_model = self.w_locales_treeview.get_model()
- self.w_locales_treeview.set_model(None)
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- model.clear()
- model.insert(0, ["", _("Loading ..."), "", "", False])
- self.w_locales_treeview.set_model(sorted_model)
-
- def __prepare_locales(self):
- try:
- if self.locales_setup:
- return
- self.__prepare_locales_list()
- finally:
- self.w_preferencesdialog.window.set_cursor(None)
-
- def __api_get_facets(self):
- facets = {}
- try:
- # XXX facets should be accessible through pkg.client.api
- facets = self.parent.get_api_object().img.get_facets()
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- self.w_preferencesdialog.hide()
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO )
- return facets
-
- @staticmethod
- def __strip_g11system_codeset(g11locale):
- strippedlocale = ""
- m = re.match(SYSTEM_G11LOCALE_MATCH, g11locale)
- #Note: for now strip out system locale (code@locale variant)
- #ignore group(2)
- if m != None and len(m.groups()) == 2:
- strippedlocale = m.group(1)
- return strippedlocale
-
- @staticmethod
- def __facetlocale_to_g11locale(facetlocale):
- g11locale = ""
- m = re.match(SYSTEM_FACETLOCALE_MATCH, facetlocale)
- if m != None and len(m.groups()) == 2:
- g11locale = m.group(1)
- if m.group(2) != '':
- g11locale += "." + m.group(2)
- return g11locale
-
- def __prepare_locales_list(self):
- sorted_model = self.w_locales_treeview.get_model()
- self.w_locales_treeview.set_model(None)
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- # Reset api so we have up to date facet list
- if not self.parent.do_api_reset():
- #do_api_reset fails then it will inform the user
- return
-
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- self.orig_facets_dict.clear()
- self.orig_facets_dict = self.__api_get_facets()
- self.__setup_optional_components_tab(self.orig_facets_dict)
- self.__process_orig_facets(self.orig_facets_dict)
-
- # Count selected facet locales for each lang
- self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict.clear()
- for locale, selected in self.orig_facet_locale_dict.items():
- lang = locale.split("_")[0]
- if not self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict.has_key(lang):
- self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict[lang] = 0
- if selected:
- self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict[lang] += 1
-
- # Setup locales:
- # Try to fetch available locales from system/locale package
- # using __get_system_locales()
- if self.facet_g11_locales_dict == None or \
- len(self.facet_g11_locales_dict) == 0:
- facetlocales_list = self.__get_system_locales()
- if facetlocales_list == None:
- return
- for facetlocale in facetlocales_list:
- g11locale = self.__facetlocale_to_g11locale(
- facetlocale)
- self.facet_g11_locales_dict[facetlocale] = g11locale
- # Setup locales:
- # If not available fall back and get the locales installed on
- # the system using loc_pop.get_valid_locales() and strip any codeset
- if self.facet_g11_locales_dict == None or \
- len(self.facet_g11_locales_dict) == 0:
- # pylint: disable=E1101
- loc_pop = g11nsvc.G11NSvcLocalePopulate()
- g11locales_list = loc_pop.get_valid_locales()
- for g11locale in g11locales_list:
- strippedlocale = self.__strip_g11system_codeset(
- g11locale)
- facetlocale = strippedlocale
- self.facet_g11_locales_dict[facetlocale] = \
- strippedlocale
- # pylint: disable=E1101
- loc_ops = g11nsvc.G11NSvcLocaleOperations(
- self.facet_g11_locales_dict.values())
-
- # Process facet locales
- locale_list = []
- for facetlocale, g11locale in self.facet_g11_locales_dict.items():
- if g11locale == "C" or g11locale == "POSIX":
- continue
- locale_name = loc_ops.get_locale_desc(g11locale)
- if locale_name == None or locale_name == "" :
- continue
- locale_language = loc_ops.get_language_desc(g11locale)
- locale_territory = loc_ops.get_territory_desc(g11locale)
- locale = facetlocale
- is_latin = g11locale.endswith("latin")
- if is_latin:
- locale_territory += _(" [latin]")
- lang = locale.split("_")[0]
-
- sel_count = 0
- if self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict.has_key(lang):
- sel_count = self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict[lang]
-
- # Precedence order:
- # <lang>_<ter>: <lang>_* e.g. nl_BE: nl_*
- selected = False
- if sel_count == 0:
- if self.orig_facet_lang_star_dict.has_key(
- lang):
- selected = \
- self.orig_facet_lang_star_dict[lang]
- elif self.orig_facet_locale_dict.has_key(locale):
- selected = self.orig_facet_locale_dict[
- locale]
-
- # locale row contains:
- #
- # locale_name = <language> (territory)
- # locale_language = Display <language> name
- # locale_territory = Display <territory> name
- # facetlocale = <language>_<territory>(<codeset>)
- # selected = selected
- locale_row = [locale_name, locale_language,
- locale_territory, facetlocale, selected]
- locale_list.append(locale_row)
- # Sort and setup model
- model.clear()
- i = 0
- locale_list.sort(key=lambda locale_list: locale_list[
- enumerations.LOCALE_LANGUAGE])
- for locale_row in locale_list:
- model.insert(i, locale_row)
- i += 1
- self.w_locales_treeview.set_model(sorted_model)
-
- if debug:
- print "DEBUG loaded facets: ", \
- self.orig_facet_lang_dict, \
- self.orig_facet_lang_star_dict, \
- self.orig_facet_locale_dict
- self.locales_setup = True
-
- def __get_system_locales(self):
- try:
- api_o = self.parent.get_api_object()
- res = api_o.get_pkg_list(
- pkg_list = api.ImageInterface.LIST_INSTALLED,
- patterns = ['system/locale'],
- repos=[],
- raise_unmatched=False, return_fmris=True,
- variants=True )
-
- manifest = None
- for entry in res:
- manifest = api_o.get_manifest(entry[0],
- all_variants=True, repos=[] )
- break
- facets = None
- if manifest != None:
- facets = list(manifest.gen_facets())
- if debug and facets != None:
- print "DEBUG facets from system/locale:", facets
-
- facetlocales = []
- if facets == None:
- return facetlocales
-
- for facet_key in facets:
- if not facet_key.startswith(LOCALE_PREFIX):
- continue
- m = re.match(LOCALE_MATCH, facet_key)
- if m != None and len(m.groups()) == 1:
- locale = m.group(1)
- facetlocales.append(locale)
- return facetlocales
-
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- self.w_preferencesdialog.hide()
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO )
- return None
-
- def __setup_optional_components_tab(self, facets):
- install_all = self.__is_install_all(facets, ALL_LOCALES)
- self.w_languages_all_radiobutton.set_active(install_all)
- self.w_languages_only_radiobutton.set_active(not install_all)
- self.w_locales_treeview.set_sensitive(not install_all)
-
- install_devel = self.__is_install_all(facets, ALL_DEVEL)
- self.w_feature_devel_checkbutton.set_active(install_devel)
- install_doc = self.__is_install_all(facets, ALL_DOC)
- self.w_feature_doc_checkbutton.set_active(install_doc)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __is_install_all(facets, component_type):
- if facets != None and facets.has_key(component_type):
- return facets[component_type]
- # Default to True if key not present
- return True
-
- def __process_orig_facets(self, facets):
- if debug:
- print "DEBUG orig facets", facets
-
- self.orig_facet_lang_dict.clear()
- self.orig_facet_lang_star_dict.clear()
- self.orig_facet_locale_dict.clear()
-
- # Process facets
- for facet_key in facets.keys():
- val = facets[facet_key]
- if not facet_key.startswith(LOCALE_PREFIX):
- continue
- if facet_key == ALL_LOCALES:
- self.orig_facet_lang_dict[ALL_LOCALES] = val
- continue
- m = re.match(LANG_MATCH, facet_key)
- if m != None and len(m.groups()) == 1:
- lang = m.group(1)
- self.orig_facet_lang_dict[lang] = val
- continue
- m = re.match(LANG_STAR_MATCH, facet_key)
- if m != None and len(m.groups()) == 1:
- lang = m.group(1)
- self.orig_facet_lang_star_dict[lang] = val
- continue
- m = re.match(LOCALE_MATCH, facet_key)
- if m != None and len(m.groups()) == 1:
- locale = m.group(1)
- self.orig_facet_locale_dict[locale] = val
-
- def __dump_locales_list(self):
- self.facets_to_set = self.__api_get_facets()
- install_all = self.w_languages_all_radiobutton.get_active()
- self.facets_to_set[ALL_LOCALES] = install_all
-
- if install_all:
- return
-
- sorted_model = self.w_locales_treeview.get_model()
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
-
- lang_locale_dict = {}
- lang_locale_count_dict = {}
- for row in model:
- selected = row[enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED]
- locale = row[enumerations.LOCALE]
- lang = locale.split("_")[0]
-
- if not lang_locale_dict.has_key(lang):
- lang_locale_dict[lang] = {}
- lang_locale_dict[lang][locale] = selected
- if not lang_locale_count_dict.has_key(lang):
- lang_locale_count_dict[lang] = 0
- if selected:
- lang_locale_count_dict[lang] += 1
-
- for lang, locales in lang_locale_dict.items():
- sel_count = lang_locale_count_dict[lang]
- self.__process_locales_to_set(lang, locales, sel_count)
-
- if debug:
- print "DEBUG facets to set:", self.facets_to_set
-
- def __dump_optional_components(self):
- install_devel = self.w_feature_devel_checkbutton.get_active()
- install_doc = self.w_feature_doc_checkbutton.get_active()
-
- if install_devel == False:
- self.facets_to_set[ALL_DEVEL] = False
- elif self.facets_to_set.has_key(ALL_DEVEL):
- del self.facets_to_set[ALL_DEVEL]
-
- if install_doc == False:
- self.facets_to_set[ALL_DOC] = False
- elif self.facets_to_set.has_key(ALL_DOC):
- del self.facets_to_set[ALL_DOC]
-
- def __process_locales_to_set(self, lang, locales, sel_count):
- locales_count = len(locales)
- if locales_count == 0:
- return
-
- # All Selected
- if sel_count == locales_count:
- self.facets_to_set[LOCALE_PREFIX + lang + \
- LANG_STAR_SUFFIX] = True
- self.facets_to_set[LOCALE_PREFIX + lang] = True
- for item in locales.items():
- key = LOCALE_PREFIX + item[0]
- if self.facets_to_set.has_key(key):
- del self.facets_to_set[key]
- # None Selected
- elif sel_count == 0:
- has_orig_star_key = \
- self.orig_facet_lang_star_dict.has_key(lang)
- has_orig_lang_count_key = \
- self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict.has_key(lang)
- # Has the user made a change to get us to the None selected state?
- # If not then just ignore.
- if (has_orig_star_key and
- self.orig_facet_lang_star_dict[lang]) or \
- (has_orig_lang_count_key and
- self.orig_lang_locale_count_dict[lang] > 0):
- if self.facets_to_set.has_key(LOCALE_PREFIX +
- lang + LANG_STAR_SUFFIX):
- del self.facets_to_set[LOCALE_PREFIX +
- lang + LANG_STAR_SUFFIX]
- if self.facets_to_set.has_key(LOCALE_PREFIX +
- lang):
- del self.facets_to_set[LOCALE_PREFIX +
- lang]
-
- for item in locales.items():
- key = LOCALE_PREFIX + item[0]
- if self.facets_to_set.has_key(key):
- del self.facets_to_set[key]
- # Some Selected
- else:
- self.facets_to_set[LOCALE_PREFIX + lang] = True
- star_key = LOCALE_PREFIX + lang + LANG_STAR_SUFFIX
- if self.facets_to_set.has_key(star_key):
- del self.facets_to_set[star_key]
- for locale, val in locales.items():
- key = LOCALE_PREFIX + locale
- if val:
- self.facets_to_set[key] = val
- else:
- if self.facets_to_set.has_key(key):
- del self.facets_to_set[key]
-
- def __on_languages_treeview_button_and_key_events(self,
- treeview, event):
- if event.type == GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS:
- self.__enable_disable()
-
- def __on_languages_treeview_changed(self, treeselection):
- selection = treeselection.get_selected_rows()
- pathlist = selection[1]
- self.locales_treeview_selection = pathlist
- if pathlist != None and len(pathlist) == 1:
- self.__enable_disable()
-
- def __enable_disable(self):
- sorted_model = self.w_locales_treeview.get_model()
- if sorted_model == None:
- return
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- if len(self.locales_treeview_selection) == 0:
- return
-
- path = self.locales_treeview_selection[0]
- child_path = sorted_model.convert_path_to_child_path(path)
- itr = model.get_iter(child_path)
- selected = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED)
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED, not selected)
-
- for path in self.locales_treeview_selection[1:]:
- child_path = sorted_model.convert_path_to_child_path(path)
- itr = model.get_iter(child_path)
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.LOCALE_SELECTED,
- not selected)
-
- def set_modal_and_transient(self, parent_window):
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_preferencesdialog,
- parent_window)
-
- def __on_preferencesdialog_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_preferencesclose_clicked(None)
- return True
-
- def __on_preferencesdialog_show(self, widget):
- self.orig_gsig_policy = {}
- self.locales_setup = False
-
- pagenum = self.w_preferences_notebook.get_current_page()
- if pagenum == PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_LANGUAGES_PAGE:
- self.w_preferencesdialog.window.set_cursor(self.watch)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_locales)
- elif pagenum == PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_SIG_POL_PAGE:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_img_signature_policy)
- return True
-
- def __on_preferencescancel_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_preferencesdialog.hide()
-
- def __on_preferencesclose_clicked(self, widget):
- error_dialog_title = _("Preferences")
- text = self.w_gsig_name_entry.get_text()
- req_names = self.w_gsig_name_radiobutton.get_active()
- if not gui_misc.check_sig_required_names_policy(text,
- req_names, error_dialog_title):
- return
- if self.orig_gsig_policy and not self.__update_img_sig_policy():
- return
- self.__dump_locales_list()
- self.__dump_optional_components()
- self.w_preferencesdialog.hide()
- ignore_all_default = len(self.orig_facets_dict) == 0 and \
- len(self.facets_to_set) == 1 \
- and self.facets_to_set.has_key(ALL_LOCALES) and \
- self.facets_to_set[ALL_LOCALES] == True
- if not ignore_all_default and self.orig_facets_dict != {} and \
- self.orig_facets_dict != self.facets_to_set:
- self.parent.update_facets(self.facets_to_set)
- self.gconf.set_show_startpage(
- self.w_startpage_checkbutton.get_active())
- self.gconf.set_save_state(
- self.w_exit_checkbutton.get_active())
- self.gconf.set_show_image_update(
- self.w_confirm_updateall_checkbutton.get_active())
- self.gconf.set_show_install(
- self.w_confirm_install_checkbutton.get_active())
- self.gconf.set_show_remove(
- self.w_confirm_remove_checkbutton.get_active())
-
- def __on_preferenceshelp_clicked(self, widget):
- pagenum = self.w_preferences_notebook.get_current_page()
- if pagenum == PREFERENCES_NOTEBOOK_SIG_POL_PAGE:
- tag = "img-sig-policy"
- else:
- tag = "pkg-mgr-prefs"
- gui_misc.display_help(tag)
-
- def __on_languages_all_radiobutton_toggled(self, widget):
- self.w_locales_treeview.set_sensitive(
- not self.w_languages_all_radiobutton.get_active())
-
- def activate(self):
- self.w_startpage_checkbutton.set_active(
- self.gconf.show_startpage)
- self.w_exit_checkbutton.set_active(self.gconf.save_state)
- self.w_confirm_updateall_checkbutton.set_active(
- self.gconf.show_image_update)
- self.w_confirm_install_checkbutton.set_active(
- self.gconf.show_install)
- self.w_confirm_remove_checkbutton.set_active(
- self.gconf.show_remove)
- self.__setup_optional_components_tab(self.__api_get_facets())
- self.w_preferencesdialog.show()
-
--- a/src/modules/gui/progress.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,276 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-# Display linear, incremental progress if the # of elements is greater than
-# this, else bounce back and forth.
-MIN_ELEMENTS_BOUNCE = 5
-
-import pkg.client.progress as progress
-import pkg.client.pkgdefs as pkgdefs
-
-class GuiProgressTracker(progress.ProgressTracker):
-
- def __init__(self, indent = False):
- progress.ProgressTracker.__init__(self)
- self.dl_prev_pkg = None
- self.last_actionitem = None
- self.ind_started = False
- self.item_started = False
- self.indent = indent
-
- def _change_purpose(self, old_purpose, new_purpose):
- pass
-
- def _cache_cats_output(self, outspec):
- if outspec.first:
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
- self.update_details_text(_("Caching catalogs ..."), i)
- if outspec.last:
- self.update_details_text("\n")
- return
-
- def _load_cat_cache_output(self, outspec):
- if outspec.first:
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
- self.update_details_text(
- _("Loading catalog cache ..."), i)
- if outspec.last:
- self.update_details_text("\n")
- return
-
- def _refresh_output_progress(self, outspec):
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
-
- if "startpublisher" in outspec.changed:
- if self.refresh_full_refresh:
- msg = _("Retrieving catalog: %s") % \
- self.pub_refresh.curinfo
- else:
- msg = _("Refreshing catalog: %s") % \
- self.pub_refresh.curinfo
- self.update_details_text(msg, i)
- if "endpublisher" in outspec.changed:
- self.update_details_text("\n", i)
- return
-
- def _plan_output(self, outspec, planitem):
- '''Called by progress tracker each time some package was
- evaluated. The call is being done by calling progress tracker
- evaluate_progress() function'''
- if self.purpose == self.PURPOSE_PKG_UPDATE_CHK:
- if not outspec.first:
- return
- text = _("Up to date check: planning (%s)") % \
- planitem.name
- self.update_label_text(text)
- return
-
- text = _("Planning: %s") % planitem.name
- if outspec.first:
- self.update_label_text(text)
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
- self.update_details_text(text + _("... "), i)
- if outspec.last:
- self.update_details_text(_("Done\n"))
-
- if isinstance(planitem, progress.GoalTrackerItem):
- self.__generic_progress(text, planitem.items,
- planitem.goalitems)
- else:
- self.__generic_progress(text, 1, 1)
-
- if outspec.last:
- self.reset_label_text_after_delay()
-
- def _plan_output_all_done(self):
- text = _("Planning: Complete\n")
- self.update_label_text(text)
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
- self.update_details_text(text, i)
-
- def _mfst_fetch(self, outspec):
- if outspec.first:
- text = _("Fetching %d manifests") % \
- self.mfst_fetch.goalitems
- self.update_label_text(text)
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
-
- if "manifests" in outspec.changed:
- self.__generic_progress("Fetching manifests",
- self.mfst_fetch.items + 1,
- self.mfst_fetch.goalitems)
-
- if outspec.last:
- self.start_bouncing_progress()
- pass
-
- def _mfst_commit(self, outspec):
- text = _("Committing manifests")
- self.update_label_text(text)
- pass
-
- def _ver_output(self): pass
- def _ver_output_error(self, actname, errors): pass
- def _ver_output_warning(self, actname, warnings): pass
- def _ver_output_info(self, actname, info): pass
- def _ver_output_done(self): pass
-
- def _dl_output(self, outspec):
- self.display_download_info()
- if "startpkg" in outspec.changed:
- self.update_details_text(
- _("Package %(num)d of %(goal)d: %(info)s\n") % {
- "num": self.dl_pkgs.items + 1,
- "goal": self.dl_pkgs.goalitems,
- "info": self.dl_pkgs.curinfo},
- "level1")
-
- if outspec.last:
- self.update_details_text("\n")
-
- def _act_output(self, outspec, actionitem):
- if actionitem != self.last_actionitem:
- self.last_actionitem = actionitem
- self.update_label_text(actionitem.name)
- self.update_details_text("%s\n" % actionitem.name,
- "level1")
- if actionitem.goalitems > 0:
- self.display_phase_info(actionitem.name,
- actionitem.items,
- actionitem.goalitems)
- return
-
- def _act_output_all_done(self):
- return
-
- def _job_output(self, outspec, job):
- if outspec.first:
- self.update_label_text(job.name)
- self.update_details_text(
- "%s ... " % (job.name), "level1")
-
- if isinstance(job, progress.GoalTrackerItem):
- self.__generic_progress(job.name, job.items,
- job.goalitems)
- else:
- self.__generic_progress(job.name, 1, 1)
-
- if outspec.last:
- self.update_details_text(_("Done\n"))
- return
-
- def _li_recurse_start_output(self):
- pass
-
- def _li_recurse_end_output(self):
- # elide output for publisher check
- if self.linked_pkg_op == pkgdefs.PKG_OP_PUBCHECK:
- return
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
- self.update_details_text(
- _("Finished processing linked images.\n\n"), i)
-
- def __li_dump_output(self, output):
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
- if not output:
- return
- lines = output.splitlines()
- nlines = len(lines)
- for linenum, line in enumerate(lines):
- if linenum < nlines - 1:
- self.update_details_text("| " + line + "\n", i)
- else:
- if lines[linenum].strip() != "":
- self.update_details_text(
- "| " + line + "\n", i)
- self.update_details_text("`\n", i)
-
- def _li_recurse_output_output(self, lin, stdout, stderr):
- if not stdout and not stderr:
- return
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
- self.update_details_text(_("Linked image '%s' output:\n") % lin,
- i)
- self.__li_dump_output(stdout)
- self.__li_dump_output(stderr)
-
- def _li_recurse_status_output(self, done):
- if self.linked_pkg_op == pkgdefs.PKG_OP_PUBCHECK:
- return
-
- i = "level1" if self.indent else ""
-
- running = " ".join([str(s) for s in self.linked_running])
- msg = _("Linked images: %(num)s done; %(numworking)d working: "
- "%(running)s\n") % \
- {"num": progress.format_pair("%d", done, self.linked_total),
- "numworking": len(self.linked_running),
- "running": running}
- self.update_details_text(msg, i)
-
- def _li_recurse_progress_output(self, lin):
- self.__generic_progress("Linked Images", 1, 1)
- pass
-
- def __generic_progress(self, phase, cur_nitems, goal_nitems):
- # It doesn't look nice if the progressive is just for few
- # elements
- if goal_nitems > MIN_ELEMENTS_BOUNCE:
- if self.is_progress_bouncing():
- self.stop_bouncing_progress()
- self.display_phase_info(phase, cur_nitems-1,
- goal_nitems)
- else:
- if not self.is_progress_bouncing():
- self.start_bouncing_progress()
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def update_progress(self, current_progress, total_progress): pass
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def start_bouncing_progress(self): pass
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def is_progress_bouncing(self): pass
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def stop_bouncing_progress(self): pass
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def display_download_info(self): pass
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def display_phase_info(self, phase_name, cur_n, goal_n): pass
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def reset_label_text_after_delay(self): pass
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def update_label_text(self, text): pass
-
- @progress.pt_abstract
- def update_details_text(self, text, *tags): pass
-
--- a/src/modules/gui/repository.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,3018 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2011 Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-MODIFY_DIALOG_WIDTH_DEFAULT = 580
-MODIFY_DIALOG_SSL_WIDTH_DEFAULT = 490
-
-MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_GENERAL_PAGE = 0
-MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_CERTIFICATE_PAGE = 1
-MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_SIG_POLICY_PAGE = 2
-
-PUBCERT_APPROVED_STR = _("Approved")
-PUBCERT_REVOKED_STR = _("Revoked")
-PUBCERT_NOTSET_HASH = "HASH-NOTSET" #No L10N required
-PUBCERT_NOTAVAILABLE = _("Not available")
-
-import sys
-import os
-import pango
-import datetime
-import tempfile
-import M2Crypto as m2
-import errno
-from threading import Thread
-from gettext import ngettext
-
-try:
- import gobject
- gobject.threads_init()
- import gtk
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require("2.0")
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-
-import pkg.client.publisher as publisher
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.progress as progress
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-
-logger = global_settings.logger
-
-ERROR_FORMAT = "<span color = \"red\">%s</span>"
-
-class Repository(progress.GuiProgressTracker):
- def __init__(self, parent, image_directory, action = -1,
- webinstall_new = False, main_window = None, gconf = None):
- progress.GuiProgressTracker.__init__(self)
- self.parent = parent
- self.gconf = gconf
- self.action = action
- self.main_window = main_window
- self.api_o = gui_misc.get_api_object(image_directory,
- self, main_window)
- if self.api_o == None:
- return
- self.webinstall_new = webinstall_new
- self.progress_stop_thread = False
- self.repository_selection = None
- self.cancel_progress_thread = False
- self.cancel_function = None
- self.is_alias_valid = True
- self.is_url_valid = False
- self.new_pub = None
- self.priority_changes = []
- self.url_err = None
- self.name_error = None
- self.publisher_info = _("e.g. http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release")
- self.publishers_list = None
- self.repository_modify_publisher = None
- self.no_changes = 0
- self.pylintstub = None
- builder = gtk.Builder()
- builder.add_from_file(self.parent.gladefile)
- # Dialog reused in the beadmin.py
- self.w_confirmation_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("confirmationdialog")
- self.w_confirmation_label = \
- builder.get_object("confirm_label")
- self.w_confirmation_dialog.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.w_confirmation_textview = \
- builder.get_object("confirmtext")
- self.w_confirm_cancel_btn = builder.get_object("cancel_conf")
- self.w_confirm_ok_btn = builder.get_object("ok_conf")
- confirmbuffer = self.w_confirmation_textview.get_buffer()
- confirmbuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- self.w_confirmation_dialog.set_title(
- _("Manage Publishers Confirmation"))
- self.w_publishers_treeview = \
- builder.get_object("publishers_treeview")
- self.w_add_publisher_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher")
- self.w_add_publisher_dialog.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.w_add_error_label = \
- builder.get_object("add_error_label")
- self.w_add_sslerror_label = \
- builder.get_object("add_sslerror_label")
- self.w_publisher_add_button = \
- builder.get_object("add_button")
- self.w_publisher_add_cancel_button = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_cancel_button")
- self.w_ssl_box = \
- builder.get_object("ssl_box")
- self.w_add_publisher_alias = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_alias")
- self.w_add_pub_label = \
- builder.get_object("add_pub_label")
- self.w_add_pub_instr_label = \
- builder.get_object("add_pub_instr_label")
- self.w_add_publisher_url = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_url")
- self.w_cert_entry = \
- builder.get_object("certentry")
- self.w_key_entry = \
- builder.get_object("keyentry")
- self.w_certbrowse_button = \
- builder.get_object("certbrowse")
- self.w_keybrowse_button = \
- builder.get_object("keybrowse")
- self.w_add_pub_help_button = \
- builder.get_object("add_pub_help")
- self.w_publisher_add_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_add_publisher_comp_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_complete")
- self.w_add_image = \
- builder.get_object("add_image")
- self.w_add_publisher_comp_dialog.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.w_add_publisher_c_name = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_name_c")
- self.w_add_publisher_c_alias = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_alias_c")
- self.w_add_publisher_c_alias_l = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_alias_l")
- self.w_add_publisher_c_url = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_url_c")
- self.w_add_publisher_c_desc = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_desc_c")
- self.w_add_publisher_c_desc_l = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_desc_l")
- self.w_add_publisher_c_close = \
- builder.get_object("add_publisher_c_close")
- self.w_registration_box = \
- builder.get_object("add_registration_box")
- self.w_registration_link = \
- builder.get_object("registration_button")
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("modify_repository")
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.w_modkeybrowse = \
- builder.get_object("modkeybrowse")
- self.w_modcertbrowse = \
- builder.get_object("modcertbrowse")
- self.w_addmirror_entry = \
- builder.get_object("addmirror_entry")
- self.w_addorigin_entry = \
- builder.get_object("add_repo")
- self.w_addmirror_button = \
- builder.get_object("addmirror_button")
- self.w_rmmirror_button = \
- builder.get_object("mirrorremove")
- self.w_addorigin_button = \
- builder.get_object("pub_add_repo")
- self.w_rmorigin_button = \
- builder.get_object("pub_remove_repo")
- self.w_modify_pub_alias = \
- builder.get_object("repositorymodifyalias")
- self.w_repositorymodifyok_button = \
- builder.get_object("repositorymodifyok")
- self.w_repositorymodifycancel_button = \
- builder.get_object("repositorymodifycancel")
- self.w_repositorymodifyhelp_button = \
- builder.get_object("modify_repo_help")
- self.modify_repo_mirrors_treeview = \
- builder.get_object("modify_repo_mirrors_treeview")
- self.modify_repo_origins_treeview = \
- builder.get_object("modify_pub_repos_treeview")
- self.w_modmirrerror_label = \
- builder.get_object("modmirrerror_label")
- self.w_modoriginerror_label = \
- builder.get_object("modrepoerror_label")
- self.w_modsslerror_label = \
- builder.get_object("modsslerror_label")
- self.w_repositorymodify_name = \
- builder.get_object("repository_name_label")
- self.w_repositorymodify_registration_link = \
- builder.get_object(
- "repositorymodifyregistrationlinkbutton")
- self.w_repositorymirror_expander = \
- builder.get_object(
- "repositorymodifymirrorsexpander")
- self.w_repositorymodify_registration_box = \
- builder.get_object("modify_registration_box")
- self.w_repositorymodify_key_entry = \
- builder.get_object("modkeyentry")
- self.w_repositorymodify_cert_entry = \
- builder.get_object("modcertentry")
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("manage_publishers")
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.w_manage_publishers_details = \
- builder.get_object("manage_publishers_details")
- self.w_manage_publishers_details.set_wrap_mode(gtk.WRAP_WORD)
- manage_pub_details_buf = self.w_manage_publishers_details.get_buffer()
- manage_pub_details_buf.create_tag("level0", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- self.w_manage_add_btn = builder.get_object("manage_add")
- self.w_manage_ok_btn = builder.get_object("manage_ok")
- self.w_manage_remove_btn = builder.get_object("manage_remove")
- self.w_manage_modify_btn = \
- builder.get_object("manage_modify")
- self.w_manage_up_btn = \
- builder.get_object("manage_move_up")
- self.w_manage_down_btn = \
- builder.get_object("manage_move_down")
- self.w_manage_cancel_btn = \
- builder.get_object("manage_cancel")
- self.w_manage_help_btn = \
- builder.get_object("manage_help")
-
- self.publishers_apply = \
- builder.get_object("publishers_apply")
- self.publishers_apply.set_icon(self.parent.window_icon)
- self.publishers_apply_expander = \
- builder.get_object("apply_expander")
- self.publishers_apply_textview = \
- builder.get_object("apply_textview")
- applybuffer = self.publishers_apply_textview.get_buffer()
- applybuffer.create_tag("level1", left_margin=30, right_margin=10)
- self.publishers_apply_cancel = \
- builder.get_object("apply_cancel")
- self.publishers_apply_progress = \
- builder.get_object("publishers_apply_progress")
-
- self.w_modify_alias_error_label = builder.get_object(
- "mod_alias_error_label")
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview = \
- builder.get_object("pub_certificate_treeview")
- self.w_modify_pub_notebook = builder.get_object(
- "modify_pub_notebook")
- self.w_pub_cert_details_textview = builder.get_object(
- "pub_certificate_details_textview")
- manage_pub_cert_details_buf = \
- self.w_pub_cert_details_textview.get_buffer()
- manage_pub_cert_details_buf.create_tag("level0",
- weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- manage_pub_cert_details_buf.create_tag("bold",
- weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- manage_pub_cert_details_buf.create_tag("normal",
- weight=pango.WEIGHT_NORMAL)
- self.w_pub_cert_label = \
- builder.get_object("mods_pub_label")
- self.w_pub_cert_add_btn = builder.get_object(
- "pub_certificate_add_button")
- self.w_pub_cert_remove_btn = builder.get_object(
- "pub_certificate_remove_button")
- self.w_pub_cert_revoke_btn = builder.get_object(
- "pub_certificate_revoke_button")
- self.w_pub_cert_reinstate_btn = builder.get_object(
- "pub_certificate_reinstate_button")
-
-
- self.w_pub_sig_ignored_radiobutton = builder.get_object(
- "sig_ignored_radiobutton")
- self.w_pub_sig_optional_radiobutton = builder.get_object(
- "sig_optional_but_valid_radiobutton")
- self.w_pub_sig_valid_radiobutton = builder.get_object(
- "sig_valid_radiobutton")
- self.w_pub_sig_name_radiobutton = builder.get_object(
- "sig_name_radiobutton")
- self.w_pub_sig_name_entry = builder.get_object(
- "sig_name_entry")
- self.w_pub_sig_view_globpol_button = builder.get_object(
- "sig_view_globpol_button")
- self.w_pub_sig_cert_names_vbox = builder.get_object(
- "sig_cert_names_vbox")
-
- checkmark_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(
- self.parent.icon_theme, "pm-check", 24)
-
- self.w_add_image.set_from_pixbuf(checkmark_icon)
-
- self.__setup_signals()
-
- self.publishers_list = self.__get_publishers_liststore()
- self.__init_pubs_tree_view(self.publishers_list)
- self.__init_mirrors_tree_view(self.modify_repo_mirrors_treeview)
- self.__init_origins_tree_view(self.modify_repo_origins_treeview)
-
- self.pub_cert_list = self.__get_pub_cert_liststore()
- self.orig_pub_cert_added_dict = {} # Orig Pub Certs added to model:
- # - key/val: [ips-hash] = status
- self.all_pub_cert_added_dict = {} # New/ Orig Pub Certs added to model
- # - key/val: [sha-hash] = ips-hash
- self.removed_orig_pub_cert_dict = {}# Removed Orig Pub Certs from model
- # - key/val: [sha-hash] = ips-hash
- self.orig_sig_policy = {}
- self.pub_certs_setup = False
-
- if self.action == enumerations.ADD_PUBLISHER:
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_add_publisher_dialog,
- self.main_window)
- self.__on_manage_add_clicked(None)
- return
- elif self.action == enumerations.MANAGE_PUBLISHERS:
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_manage_publishers_dialog,
- self.main_window)
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_confirmation_dialog,
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog)
- self.__prepare_publisher_list()
- publisher_selection = self.w_publishers_treeview.get_selection()
- publisher_selection.set_mode(gtk.SELECTION_SINGLE)
- publisher_selection.connect("changed",
- self.__on_publisher_selection_changed, None)
- mirrors_selection = \
- self.modify_repo_mirrors_treeview.get_selection()
- mirrors_selection.set_mode(gtk.SELECTION_SINGLE)
- mirrors_selection.connect("changed",
- self.__on_mirror_selection_changed, None)
- origins_selection = \
- self.modify_repo_origins_treeview.get_selection()
- origins_selection.set_mode(gtk.SELECTION_SINGLE)
- origins_selection.connect("changed",
- self.__on_origin_selection_changed, None)
-
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_add_publisher_dialog,
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog)
- self.__init_pub_cert_tree_view(self.pub_cert_list)
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog.show_all()
- return
-
-
- def __setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_add_publisher_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_add_publisher_delete_event),
- (self.w_add_publisher_url, "changed",
- self.__on_publisherurl_changed),
- (self.w_add_publisher_url, "activate",
- self.__on_add_publisher_add_clicked),
- (self.w_add_publisher_alias, "changed",
- self.__on_publisheralias_changed),
- (self.w_add_publisher_alias, "activate",
- self.__on_add_publisher_add_clicked),
- (self.w_publisher_add_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_add_publisher_add_clicked),
- (self.w_key_entry, "changed", self.__on_keyentry_changed),
- (self.w_cert_entry, "changed", self.__on_certentry_changed),
- (self.w_publisher_add_cancel_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_add_publisher_cancel_clicked),
- (self.w_keybrowse_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_keybrowse_clicked),
- (self.w_certbrowse_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_certbrowse_clicked),
- (self.w_add_pub_help_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_add_pub_help_clicked),
-
- (self.w_add_publisher_comp_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_add_publisher_complete_delete_event),
- (self.w_add_publisher_c_close, "clicked",
- self.__on_add_publisher_c_close_clicked),
-
- (self.w_manage_publishers_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_manage_publishers_delete_event),
- (self.w_manage_add_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_manage_add_clicked),
- (self.w_manage_modify_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_manage_modify_clicked),
- (self.w_manage_remove_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_manage_remove_clicked),
- (self.w_manage_up_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_manage_move_up_clicked),
- (self.w_manage_down_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_manage_move_down_clicked),
- (self.w_manage_cancel_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_manage_cancel_clicked),
- (self.w_manage_ok_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_manage_ok_clicked),
- (self.w_manage_help_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_manage_help_clicked),
-
- (self.w_modify_repository_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_modifydialog_delete_event),
- (self.w_modify_pub_alias, "changed",
- self.__on_modify_pub_alias_changed),
- (self.w_modkeybrowse, "clicked",
- self.__on_modkeybrowse_clicked),
- (self.w_modcertbrowse, "clicked",
- self.__on_modcertbrowse_clicked),
- (self.w_addmirror_entry, "changed",
- self.__on_addmirror_entry_changed),
- (self.w_addorigin_entry, "changed",
- self.__on_addorigin_entry_changed),
- (self.w_addmirror_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_addmirror_button_clicked),
- (self.w_addorigin_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_addorigin_button_clicked),
- (self.w_rmmirror_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_rmmirror_button_clicked),
- (self.w_rmorigin_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_rmorigin_button_clicked),
- (self.w_repositorymodify_key_entry, "changed",
- self.__on_modcertkeyentry_changed),
- (self.w_repositorymodify_cert_entry, "changed",
- self.__on_modcertkeyentry_changed),
- (self.w_repositorymodifyok_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_repositorymodifyok_clicked),
- (self.w_repositorymodifycancel_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_repositorymodifycancel_clicked),
- (self.w_repositorymodifyhelp_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_modify_repo_help_clicked),
-
- (self.w_confirmation_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__delete_widget_handler_hide),
- (self.w_confirm_cancel_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_cancel_conf_clicked),
- (self.w_confirm_ok_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_ok_conf_clicked),
-
- (self.publishers_apply, "delete_event",
- self.__on_publishers_apply_delete_event),
- (self.publishers_apply_cancel, "clicked",
- self.__on_apply_cancel_clicked),
-
- (self.w_pub_cert_add_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_pub_cert_add_clicked),
- (self.w_pub_cert_remove_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_pub_cert_remove_clicked),
- (self.w_pub_cert_revoke_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_pub_cert_revoke_clicked),
- (self.w_pub_cert_reinstate_btn, "clicked",
- self.__on_pub_cert_reinstate_clicked),
- (self.w_modify_pub_notebook, "switch_page",
- self.__on_notebook_change),
-
- (self.w_pub_sig_ignored_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_pub_sig_radiobutton_toggled),
- (self.w_pub_sig_optional_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_pub_sig_radiobutton_toggled),
- (self.w_pub_sig_valid_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_pub_sig_radiobutton_toggled),
- (self.w_pub_sig_name_radiobutton, "toggled",
- self.__on_pub_sig_radiobutton_toggled),
- (self.w_pub_sig_view_globpol_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_pub_sig_view_globpol_clicked),
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def __on_pub_sig_radiobutton_toggled(self, widget):
- self.w_pub_sig_cert_names_vbox.set_sensitive(
- self.w_pub_sig_name_radiobutton.get_active())
-
- def __on_pub_sig_view_globpol_clicked(self, widget):
- #Preferences Dialog is modal so no need to hide the Modify Dialog
- self.parent.preferences.show_signature_policy()
-
- def __update_pub_sig_policy_prop(self, set_props):
- errors = []
- try:
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- if pub != None:
- pub.update_props(set_props=set_props)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append(("", e))
- return errors
-
- def __update_pub_sig_policy(self):
- errors = []
- orig = self.orig_sig_policy
- if not orig:
- return errors
- ignore = self.w_pub_sig_ignored_radiobutton.get_active()
- verify = self.w_pub_sig_optional_radiobutton.get_active()
- req_sigs = self.w_pub_sig_valid_radiobutton.get_active()
- req_names = self.w_pub_sig_name_radiobutton.get_active()
- names = gui_misc.fetch_signature_policy_names_from_textfield(
- self.w_pub_sig_name_entry.get_text())
- set_props = gui_misc.setup_signature_policy_properties(ignore,
- verify, req_sigs, req_names, names, orig)
- if len(set_props) > 0:
- errors = self.__update_pub_sig_policy_prop(set_props)
- return errors
-
- def __prepare_pub_signature_policy(self):
- if self.orig_sig_policy:
- return
-
- sig_policy = self.__fetch_pub_signature_policy()
- self.orig_sig_policy = sig_policy
- self.w_pub_sig_ignored_radiobutton.set_active(
- sig_policy[gui_misc.SIG_POLICY_IGNORE])
- self.w_pub_sig_optional_radiobutton.set_active(
- sig_policy[gui_misc.SIG_POLICY_VERIFY])
- self.w_pub_sig_valid_radiobutton.set_active(
- sig_policy[gui_misc.SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_SIGNATURES])
- self.w_pub_sig_cert_names_vbox.set_sensitive(False)
-
- if sig_policy[gui_misc.SIG_POLICY_REQUIRE_NAMES]:
- self.w_pub_sig_name_radiobutton.set_active(True)
- self.w_pub_sig_cert_names_vbox.set_sensitive(True)
-
- names = sig_policy[gui_misc.PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES]
- gui_misc.set_signature_policy_names_for_textfield(
- self.w_pub_sig_name_entry, names)
-
- def __fetch_pub_signature_policy(self):
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- prop_sig_pol = pub.signature_policy.name
- prop_sig_req_names = None
- if gui_misc.PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES in pub.properties:
- prop_sig_req_names = \
- pub.properties[gui_misc.PROP_SIGNATURE_REQUIRED_NAMES]
- return gui_misc.create_sig_policy_from_property(
- prop_sig_pol, prop_sig_req_names)
-
- def __on_notebook_change(self, widget, event, pagenum):
- if pagenum == MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_CERTIFICATE_PAGE:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_pub_certs)
- elif pagenum == MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_SIG_POLICY_PAGE:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_pub_signature_policy)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_pub_cert_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBCERT_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBCERT_IPSHASH
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBCERT_PATH
- gobject.TYPE_PYOBJECT, # enumerations.PUBCERT_XCERT_OBJ
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.PUBCERT_NEW
- )
-
- @staticmethod
- def __sort_func(treemodel, iter1, iter2, column):
- col_val1 = treemodel.get_value(iter1, column)
- col_val2 = treemodel.get_value(iter2, column)
- ret = cmp(col_val1, col_val2)
- if ret != 0:
- return ret
- if column == enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION:
- name1 = treemodel.get_value(iter1,
- enumerations.PUBCERT_NAME)
- name2 = treemodel.get_value(iter2,
- enumerations.PUBCERT_NAME)
- ret = cmp(name1, name2)
- elif column == enumerations.PUBCERT_NAME:
- org1 = treemodel.get_value(iter1,
- enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION)
- org2 = treemodel.get_value(iter2,
- enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION)
- ret = cmp(org1, org2)
- return ret
-
- def __init_pub_cert_tree_view(self, pub_cert_list):
- pub_cert_sort_model = gtk.TreeModelSort(pub_cert_list)
- pub_cert_sort_model.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION,
- gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
-
- pub_cert_sort_model.set_sort_func(enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION,
- self.__sort_func,
- enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION)
- pub_cert_sort_model.set_sort_func(enumerations.PUBCERT_NAME,
- self.__sort_func,
- enumerations.PUBCERT_NAME)
-
- # Organization column - sort using custom __sort_func()
- org_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Organization"),
- org_renderer, text = enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION)
- column.set_expand(False)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- column.set_resizable(True)
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- # Name column - sort using custom __sort_func()
- name_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Name"),
- name_renderer, text = enumerations.PUBCERT_NAME)
- column.set_expand(True)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.PUBCERT_NAME)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- column.set_resizable(True)
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- # Status column
- status_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Status"),
- status_renderer, text = enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS)
- column.set_expand(False)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS)
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.append_column(column)
-
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_selection().connect('changed',
- self.__on_pub_cert_treeview_changed)
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.set_model(pub_cert_sort_model)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_pub_display_name(pub):
- display_name = ""
- if not pub:
- return display_name
-
- name = pub.prefix
- alias = pub.alias
- use_name = False
- use_alias = False
- if len(name) > 0:
- use_name = True
- if alias and len(alias) > 0 and alias != name:
- use_alias = True
-
- if use_name and not use_alias:
- display_name = name
- elif use_name and use_alias:
- display_name = "%s (%s)" % (name, alias)
- return display_name
-
- def __prepare_pub_certs(self):
- if self.pub_certs_setup:
- return
-
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- if not pub:
- return
- sorted_model = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_model()
- selection = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_selection()
- selected_rows = selection.get_selected_rows()
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.set_model(None)
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- if not model:
- return
- model.clear()
-
- self.orig_pub_cert_added_dict.clear()
- self.all_pub_cert_added_dict.clear()
- self.removed_orig_pub_cert_dict.clear()
-
- pub_display_name = self.__get_pub_display_name(pub)
- if pub_display_name != "":
- self.w_pub_cert_label.set_markup(
- _("<b>Certificates for publisher %s</b>") % pub_display_name)
- else:
- self.w_pub_cert_label.set_markup(
- _("<b>Publisher certificates</b>"))
-
- for h in pub.approved_ca_certs:
- self.__add_cert_to_model(model,
- pub.get_cert_by_hash(h), h, PUBCERT_APPROVED_STR)
- for h in pub.revoked_ca_certs:
- self.__add_cert_to_model(model,
- pub.get_cert_by_hash(h), h, PUBCERT_REVOKED_STR)
-
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.set_model(sorted_model)
- if len(pub.revoked_ca_certs) == 0 and len(pub.approved_ca_certs) == 0:
- self.__set_empty_pub_cert()
- self.pub_certs_setup = True
- return
-
- sel_path = (0,)
- if len(selected_rows) > 1 and len(selected_rows[1]) > 0:
- sel_path = selected_rows[1][0]
- self.__set_pub_cert_selection(sorted_model, sel_path)
- self.pub_certs_setup = True
-
- def __add_cert_to_model(self, model, cert, ips_hash, status, path = "",
- scroll_to=False, new=False):
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- if not cert or not pub:
- return
- i = cert.get_subject()
- organization = PUBCERT_NOTAVAILABLE
- if len(i.get_entries_by_nid(i.nid["O"])) > 0:
- organization = i.get_entries_by_nid(
- i.nid["O"])[0].get_data().as_text()
- name = PUBCERT_NOTAVAILABLE
- if len(i.get_entries_by_nid(i.nid["CN"])) > 0:
- name = i.get_entries_by_nid(
- i.nid["CN"])[0].get_data().as_text()
- if self.all_pub_cert_added_dict.has_key(cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')):
- err = _("The publisher certificate:\n %s\n"
- "has already been added.") % \
- self.__get_cert_display_name(cert)
- gui_misc.error_occurred(None, err,
- _("Modify Publisher - %s") % self.__get_pub_display_name(pub),
- gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- return
-
- self.all_pub_cert_added_dict[cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')] = ips_hash
- itr = model.append(
- [organization, name, status, ips_hash, path, cert, new])
- if not new:
- self.orig_pub_cert_added_dict[ips_hash] = status
-
- if scroll_to:
- path = model.get_path(itr)
- sorted_model = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_model()
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- sorted_path = sorted_model.convert_child_path_to_path(path)
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.scroll_to_cell(sorted_path)
- selection = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_selection()
- selection.select_path(sorted_path)
-
- def __on_pub_cert_treeview_changed(self, treeselection):
- selection = treeselection.get_selected_rows()
- pathlist = selection[1]
- if not pathlist or len(pathlist) == 0:
- return
- sorted_model = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_model()
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- path = pathlist[0]
- child_path = sorted_model.convert_path_to_child_path(path)
- self.__enable_disable_pub_cert_buttons(model, child_path)
- self.__set_pub_cert_details(model, child_path)
-
- def __enable_disable_pub_cert_buttons(self, model, path):
- if not model or not path:
- return
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- status = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS)
- new = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_NEW)
-
- if status == PUBCERT_APPROVED_STR:
- self.w_pub_cert_revoke_btn.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_pub_cert_reinstate_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- else:
- self.w_pub_cert_revoke_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_pub_cert_reinstate_btn.set_sensitive(True)
- if new:
- self.w_pub_cert_revoke_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_pub_cert_reinstate_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_pub_cert_remove_btn.set_sensitive(True)
-
- def __set_pub_cert_details(self, model, path):
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- ips_hash = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_IPSHASH)
- cert = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_XCERT_OBJ)
- new = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_NEW)
- if not cert:
- return
- details_buffer = self.w_pub_cert_details_textview.get_buffer()
- details_buffer.set_text("")
- itr = details_buffer.get_end_iter()
-
- labs = {}
- labs["issued_to"] = _("Issued To:")
- labs["common_name_to"] = gui_misc.PUBCERT_COMMON_NAME
- labs["org_to"] = gui_misc.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION
- labs["org_unit_to"] = gui_misc.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATIONAL_UNIT
- labs["issued_by"] = _("Issued By:")
- labs["common_name_by"] = _(" Common Name (CN):")
- labs["org_by"] = gui_misc.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATION
- labs["org_unit_by"] = gui_misc.PUBCERT_ORGANIZATIONAL_UNIT
- labs["validity"] = _("Validity:")
- labs["issued_on"] = _(" Issued On:")
- labs["fingerprints"] = _("Fingerprints:")
- labs["sha1"] = _(" SHA1:")
- labs["md5"] = _(" MD5:")
- labs["ips"] = _(" IPS:")
-
- text = {}
- text["issued_to"] = ""
- text["common_name_to"] = ""
- text["org_to"] = ""
- text["org_unit_to"] = ""
- text["issued_by"] = ""
- text["common_name_by"] = ""
- text["org_by"] = ""
- text["org_unit_by"] = ""
- text["validity"] = ""
- text["issued_on"] = ""
- text["fingerprints"] = ""
- text["sha1"] = ""
- text["md5"] = ""
- text["ips"] = ""
-
- self._set_cert_issuer(text, cert.get_subject(), "to")
- self._set_cert_issuer(text, cert.get_issuer(), "by")
-
- eo = cert.get_not_after().get_datetime().date().isoformat()
- today = datetime.datetime.today().date().isoformat()
- validity_str = _("Validity:")
- #TBD: may have an issue here in some locales if Validity string
- #is very long then would only need one \t.
- if eo < today:
- validity_str += _("\t\t EXPIRED")
- labs["validity"] = validity_str
-
- io_str = cert.get_not_before().get_datetime().date().strftime("%x")
- eo_str = cert.get_not_after().get_datetime().date().strftime("%x")
- labs["issued_on"] += " " + io_str
- text["issued_on"] = _("Expires On: %s") % eo_str
-
- sha = cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')
- md5 = cert.get_fingerprint('md5')
- text["sha1"] = sha.lower()
- text["md5"] = md5.lower()
- text["ips"] = ips_hash.lower()
-
- added = False
- reinstated = False
- if new:
- if ips_hash == PUBCERT_NOTSET_HASH:
- added = True
- reinstated = False
- else:
- reinstated = True
- added = False
-
- gui_misc.set_pub_cert_details_text(labs, text,
- self.w_pub_cert_details_textview, added, reinstated)
-
- @staticmethod
- def _set_cert_issuer(text, issuer, itype):
- if len(issuer.get_entries_by_nid(issuer.nid["CN"])) > 0:
- text["common_name_" + itype] = issuer.get_entries_by_nid(
- issuer.nid["CN"])[0].get_data().as_text()
- if len(issuer.get_entries_by_nid(issuer.nid["O"])) > 0:
- text["org_" + itype] = issuer.get_entries_by_nid(
- issuer.nid["O"])[0].get_data().as_text()
- if len(issuer.get_entries_by_nid(issuer.nid["OU"])) > 0:
- text["org_unit_" + itype] = issuer.get_entries_by_nid(
- issuer.nid["OU"])[0].get_data().as_text()
- else:
- text["org_unit_" + itype] = PUBCERT_NOTAVAILABLE
-
- def __get_pub_cert_filename(self, title, path = None):
- if path == None or path == "":
- path = tempfile.gettempdir()
- filename = None
- chooser = gtk.FileChooserDialog(title,
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog,
- gtk.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN,
- (gtk.STOCK_CANCEL, gtk.RESPONSE_CANCEL,
- gtk.STOCK_OK, gtk.RESPONSE_OK))
-
- file_filter = gtk.FileFilter()
- file_filter.set_name(_("Certificate Files"))
- file_filter.add_pattern("*.pem")
- chooser.add_filter(file_filter)
- chooser.set_current_folder(path)
-
- response = chooser.run()
- if response == gtk.RESPONSE_OK:
- filename = chooser.get_filename()
- chooser.destroy()
-
- if filename != None:
- info = os.path.split(filename)
- self.gconf.last_add_pubcert_path = info[0]
- return filename
-
- def __on_pub_cert_add_clicked(self, widget):
- filename = self.__get_pub_cert_filename(
- _("Add Publisher Certificate"),
- self.gconf.last_add_pubcert_path)
- if filename == None:
- return
- try:
- cert = self.__get_new_cert(filename)
- sha = cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')
- ips_hash = PUBCERT_NOTSET_HASH
- status = PUBCERT_APPROVED_STR
- new = True
- #Restore orig cert if it was already added but just removed
- if self.removed_orig_pub_cert_dict.has_key(sha):
- ips_hash = self.removed_orig_pub_cert_dict[sha]
- status = self.orig_pub_cert_added_dict[ips_hash]
- filename = ""
- new = False
- del self.removed_orig_pub_cert_dict[sha]
- sorted_model = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_model()
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- self.__add_cert_to_model(model, cert, ips_hash, status,
- path=filename, scroll_to=True, new=new)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([("", e)])
- return
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_new_cert(filename):
- cert = None
- try:
- with open(filename, "rb") as fh:
- s = fh.read()
- except EnvironmentError, e:
- if e.errno == errno.ENOENT:
- raise api_errors.MissingFileArgumentException(
- filename)
- elif e.errno == errno.EACCES:
- raise api_errors.PermissionsException(
- filename)
- raise api_errors.ApiException(e)
- try:
- cert = m2.X509.load_cert_string(s)
- except m2.X509.X509Error, e:
- raise api_errors.BadFileFormat(_("The file:\n"
- " %s\nwas expected to be a PEM certificate but it "
- "could not be read.") % filename)
- return cert
-
- def __on_pub_cert_reinstate_clicked(self, widget):
- itr, sorted_model = self.__get_selected_pub_cert_itr_model()
- if not itr or not sorted_model:
- return
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- child_itr = sorted_model.convert_iter_to_child_iter(None, itr)
-
- ips_hash = model.get_value(child_itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_IPSHASH)
- orig_status = ""
- if self.orig_pub_cert_added_dict.has_key(ips_hash):
- orig_status = self.orig_pub_cert_added_dict[ips_hash]
- else:
- #Should not be able to reinstate new cert, only existing ones
- return
- #Originally approved so just reset as there is nothing to do
- if orig_status == PUBCERT_APPROVED_STR:
- model.set_value(child_itr,
- enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS,
- PUBCERT_APPROVED_STR)
- self.__set_pub_cert_details(model,
- model.get_path(child_itr))
- self.__enable_disable_pub_cert_buttons(model,
- model.get_path(child_itr))
- return
-
- filename = self.__get_pub_cert_filename(
- _("Reinstate Publisher Certificate"),
- self.gconf.last_add_pubcert_path)
- if filename == None:
- return
-
- #Check the old cert and new ones match according to the sha fingerprint
- cert = model.get_value(child_itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_XCERT_OBJ)
- new_cert = self.__get_new_cert(filename)
- if cert == None or new_cert == None:
- #Must have exisitng cert and new one to reinstate
- return
- orig_sha = cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')
- new_sha = new_cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')
- if orig_sha != new_sha:
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- if not pub:
- return
- gui_misc.error_occurred(None,
- _("To reinstate the publisher certificate:\n %s\n"
- "the original certificate file must be selected.") %
- self.__get_cert_display_name(cert),
- _("Modify Publisher - %s") % self.__get_pub_display_name(pub),
- gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- return
- #Update model of existing cert which is to be reinstated by
- #re-adding the cert as new
- model.set_value(child_itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS,
- PUBCERT_APPROVED_STR)
- model.set_value(child_itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_PATH, filename)
- model.set_value(child_itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_XCERT_OBJ, new_cert)
- model.set_value(child_itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_NEW, True)
- self.__set_pub_cert_details(model, model.get_path(child_itr))
- self.__enable_disable_pub_cert_buttons(model,
- model.get_path(child_itr))
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_cert_display_name(cert):
- cert_display_name = ""
- if cert == None:
- return cert_display_name
- issuer = cert.get_subject()
- cn = "-"
- org = "-"
- ou = "-"
- if len(issuer.get_entries_by_nid(issuer.nid["CN"])) > 0:
- cn = issuer.get_entries_by_nid(
- issuer.nid["CN"])[0].get_data().as_text()
- if len(issuer.get_entries_by_nid(issuer.nid["O"])) > 0:
- org = issuer.get_entries_by_nid(
- issuer.nid["O"])[0].get_data().as_text()
- if len(issuer.get_entries_by_nid(issuer.nid["OU"])) > 0:
- ou = issuer.get_entries_by_nid(
- issuer.nid["OU"])[0].get_data().as_text()
- else:
- ou = PUBCERT_NOTAVAILABLE
-
- if ou != PUBCERT_NOTAVAILABLE:
- cert_display_name = \
- "%s (CN) %s (O) %s (OU)" % (cn, org, ou) #No l10n required
- else:
- cert_display_name = "%s (CN) %s (O)" % (cn, org)#No l10n required
- return cert_display_name
-
- def __on_pub_cert_revoke_clicked(self, widget):
- selection = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_selection()
- if not selection:
- return
- selected_rows = selection.get_selected_rows()
- if not selected_rows or len(selected_rows) < 2:
- return
- pathlist = selected_rows[1]
- if not pathlist or len(pathlist) == 0:
- return
- path = pathlist[0]
- self.__revoked(None, path)
-
-
- def __revoked(self, cell, sorted_path):
- sorted_model = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_model()
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- path = sorted_model.convert_path_to_child_path(sorted_path)
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- if not itr:
- return
- status = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS)
- if status == PUBCERT_APPROVED_STR:
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS,
- PUBCERT_REVOKED_STR)
- self.__enable_disable_pub_cert_buttons(model, path)
- self.__set_pub_cert_details(model, path)
-
- def __on_pub_cert_remove_clicked(self, widget):
- itr, sorted_model = self.__get_selected_pub_cert_itr_model()
- if not itr or not sorted_model:
- return
- sel_path = sorted_model.get_path(itr)
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- child_itr = sorted_model.convert_iter_to_child_iter(None, itr)
-
- cert = model.get_value(child_itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_XCERT_OBJ)
- if self.all_pub_cert_added_dict.has_key(cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')):
- del self.all_pub_cert_added_dict[cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')]
-
- new = model.get_value(child_itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_NEW)
- if not new:
- sha = cert.get_fingerprint('sha1')
- ips_hash = model.get_value(child_itr,
- enumerations.PUBCERT_IPSHASH)
- self.removed_orig_pub_cert_dict[sha] = ips_hash
-
- model.remove(child_itr)
- self.__set_pub_cert_selection(sorted_model, sel_path)
-
- def __set_pub_cert_selection(self, sorted_model, sel_path):
- len_smodel = len(sorted_model)
- if len_smodel == 0:
- self.__set_empty_pub_cert()
- return
- if len_smodel <= sel_path[0]:
- sel_path = (len_smodel - 1,)
- if sel_path[0] < 0:
- sel_path = (0,)
-
- self.w_pub_cert_treeview.scroll_to_cell(sel_path)
- selection = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_selection()
- selection.select_path(sel_path)
-
- def __set_empty_pub_cert(self):
- details_buffer = self.w_pub_cert_details_textview.get_buffer()
- details_buffer.set_text("")
- self.w_pub_cert_remove_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_pub_cert_revoke_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_pub_cert_reinstate_btn.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __get_selected_pub_cert_itr_model(self):
- return self.__get_fitr_model_from_tree(self.w_pub_cert_treeview)
-
- def __update_pub_certs(self):
- errors = []
- sorted_model = self.w_pub_cert_treeview.get_model()
- if not sorted_model:
- return errors
- model = sorted_model.get_model()
- if not model:
- return errors
-
- updated_pub_cert_dict = {}
- add_pub_cert_dict = {}
- iter_next = sorted_model.get_iter_first()
- while iter_next != None:
- itr = sorted_model.convert_iter_to_child_iter(None, iter_next)
- ips_hash = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_IPSHASH)
- status = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_STATUS)
- path = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_PATH)
- new = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBCERT_NEW)
- #Both new and reinstated certs treated as new and to be added
- if new:
- add_pub_cert_dict[path] = True
- else:
- updated_pub_cert_dict[ips_hash] = status
- iter_next = sorted_model.iter_next(iter_next)
- for ips_hash, status in self.orig_pub_cert_added_dict.items():
- if not updated_pub_cert_dict.has_key(ips_hash):
- errors += self.__remove_pub_cert_for_publisher(ips_hash)
- elif status != updated_pub_cert_dict[ips_hash] and \
- updated_pub_cert_dict[ips_hash] == PUBCERT_REVOKED_STR:
- errors += self.__revoke_pub_cert_for_publisher(ips_hash)
- # Add and reinstate pub certs for publisher
- for path in add_pub_cert_dict.keys():
- errors += self.__add_pub_cert_to_publisher(path)
-
- return errors
-
- def __add_pub_cert_to_publisher(self, path):
- errors = []
- try:
- with open(path, "rb") as fh:
- s = fh.read()
- except EnvironmentError, e:
- if e.errno == errno.ENOENT:
- errors.append(("",
- api_errors.MissingFileArgumentException(path)))
- elif e.errno == errno.EACCES:
- errors.append(("", api_errors.PermissionsException(path)))
- else:
- errors.append(("", e))
- try:
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- if pub != None:
- pub.approve_ca_cert(s)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append(("", e))
- return errors
-
- def __revoke_pub_cert_for_publisher(self, ips_hash):
- errors = []
- try:
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- if pub != None:
- pub.revoke_ca_cert(ips_hash)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append(("", e))
- return errors
-
- def __remove_pub_cert_for_publisher(self, ips_hash):
- errors = []
- try:
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- if pub != None:
- pub.unset_ca_cert(ips_hash)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append(("", e))
- return errors
-
- def __init_pubs_tree_view(self, publishers_list):
- publishers_list_filter = publishers_list.filter_new()
- publishers_list_sort = gtk.TreeModelSort(publishers_list_filter)
- publishers_list_sort.set_sort_column_id(
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED, gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
- # Name column
- name_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Publisher"),
- name_renderer, text = enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME)
- column.set_expand(True)
- self.w_publishers_treeview.append_column(column)
- # Alias column
- alias_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- alias_renderer.set_property("ellipsize", pango.ELLIPSIZE_END)
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Alias"),
- alias_renderer, text = enumerations.PUBLISHER_ALIAS)
- column.set_expand(True)
- self.w_publishers_treeview.append_column(column)
- # Enabled column
- toggle_renderer = gtk.CellRendererToggle()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Enabled"),
- toggle_renderer, active = enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLED)
- toggle_renderer.set_property("activatable", True)
- column.set_expand(False)
- toggle_renderer.connect('toggled', self.__enable_disable)
- column.set_cell_data_func(toggle_renderer,
- self.__toggle_data_function, None)
- self.w_publishers_treeview.append_column(column)
- # Sticky column
- toggle_renderer = gtk.CellRendererToggle()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Sticky"),
- toggle_renderer, active = enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY)
- toggle_renderer.set_property("activatable", True)
- column.set_expand(False)
- toggle_renderer.connect('toggled', self.__sticky_unsticky)
- column.set_cell_data_func(toggle_renderer,
- self.__toggle_data_function, None)
- self.w_publishers_treeview.append_column(column)
- publishers_list_filter.set_visible_func(self.__publishers_filter)
- self.w_publishers_treeview.set_model(publishers_list_sort)
-
- def __prepare_publisher_list(self, restore_changes = False):
- sorted_model = self.w_publishers_treeview.get_model()
- selection = self.w_publishers_treeview.get_selection()
- selected_rows = selection.get_selected_rows()
- self.w_publishers_treeview.set_model(None)
- try:
- pubs = self.api_o.get_publishers(duplicate=True)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([("", e)])
- return
- if not sorted_model:
- return
- filtered_model = sorted_model.get_model()
- model = filtered_model.get_model()
-
- if restore_changes == False:
- self.no_changes = 0
- self.priority_changes = []
- model.clear()
-
- j = 0
- for pub in pubs:
- name = pub.prefix
- alias = pub.alias
- # BUG: alias should be either "None" or None.
- # in the list it's "None", but when adding pub it's None
- if not alias or len(alias) == 0 or alias == "None":
- alias = name
- publisher_row = [j, j, name, alias, not pub.disabled,
- pub.sticky, pub, False, False, False]
- model.insert(j, publisher_row)
- j += 1
- else:
- j = 0
- for publisher_row in model:
- pub = pubs[j]
- name = pub.prefix
- alias = pub.alias
- if not alias or len(alias) == 0 or alias == "None":
- alias = name
- publisher_row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_ALIAS] = alias
- publisher_row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT] = pub
- j += 1
- # We handle here the case where a publisher was added
- if self.new_pub:
- pub = self.new_pub
- name = pub.prefix
- alias = pub.alias
- if not alias or len(alias) == 0 or alias == "None":
- alias = name
- publisher_row = [j, j, name, alias, not pub.disabled,
- pub.sticky, pub, False, False, False]
- model.insert(j, publisher_row)
-
- self.w_publishers_treeview.set_model(sorted_model)
- if len(sorted_model) == 0:
- self.__set_empty_pub_list()
-
- if restore_changes:
- if self.new_pub:
- self.__select_last_publisher()
- self.new_pub = None
- else:
- # We do have gtk.SELECTION_SINGLE mode, so if exists, we are
- # interested only in the first selected path.
- if len(selected_rows) > 1 and len(selected_rows[1]) > 0:
- self.w_publishers_treeview.scroll_to_cell(
- selected_rows[1][0])
- selection.select_path(selected_rows[1][0])
-
- def __set_empty_pub_list(self):
- details_buffer = self.w_manage_publishers_details.get_buffer()
- details_buffer.set_text("")
- self.w_manage_modify_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_remove_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_up_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_down_btn.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __select_last_publisher(self):
- sorted_model = self.w_publishers_treeview.get_model()
- itr = sorted_model.get_iter_first()
- next_itr = sorted_model.iter_next(itr)
- while next_itr != None:
- itr = next_itr
- next_itr = sorted_model.iter_next(itr)
- path = sorted_model.get_path(itr)
- self.w_publishers_treeview.scroll_to_cell(path)
- self.w_publishers_treeview.get_selection().select_path(path)
-
- def __validate_url(self, url_widget, w_ssl_key = None, w_ssl_cert = None):
- self.__validate_url_generic(url_widget, self.w_add_error_label,
- self.w_publisher_add_button, self.is_alias_valid,
- w_ssl_label=self.w_add_sslerror_label,
- w_ssl_key=w_ssl_key, w_ssl_cert=w_ssl_cert)
-
- def __validate_url_generic(self, w_url_text, w_error_label, w_action_button,
- alias_valid = False, function = None, w_ssl_label = None,
- w_ssl_key = None, w_ssl_cert = None):
- ssl_key = None
- ssl_cert = None
- ssl_error = None
- ssl_valid = True
- url = w_url_text.get_text()
- self.is_url_valid, self.url_err = self.__is_url_valid(url)
- if not self.webinstall_new:
- self.__reset_error_label()
- if w_ssl_label:
- w_ssl_label.set_sensitive(False)
- w_ssl_label.show()
- valid_url = False
- valid_func = True
- if self.is_url_valid:
- if alias_valid:
- valid_url = True
- else:
- if self.name_error != None:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(w_error_label,
- self.name_error)
- else:
- if self.url_err != None:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(w_error_label,
- self.url_err)
- if w_ssl_key != None and w_ssl_cert != None:
- if w_ssl_key:
- ssl_key = w_ssl_key.get_text()
- if w_ssl_cert:
- ssl_cert = w_ssl_cert.get_text()
- ssl_valid, ssl_error = self.__validate_ssl_key_cert(url, ssl_key,
- ssl_cert, ignore_ssl_check_for_not_https=True)
- self.__update_repository_dialog_width(ssl_error)
- if ssl_error != None and w_ssl_label:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(w_ssl_label,
- ssl_error)
- elif w_ssl_label:
- w_ssl_label.hide()
- if function != None:
- valid_func = function()
- w_action_button.set_sensitive(valid_url and valid_func and ssl_valid)
-
- def __validate_alias_addpub(self, ok_btn, name_widget, url_widget, error_label,
- function = None):
- valid_btn = False
- valid_func = True
- name = name_widget.get_text()
- self.is_alias_valid = self.__is_alias_valid(name)
- self.__reset_error_label()
- if self.is_alias_valid:
- if (self.is_url_valid):
- valid_btn = True
- else:
- if self.url_err == None:
- self.__validate_url(url_widget,
- w_ssl_key=self.w_key_entry,
- w_ssl_cert=self.w_cert_entry)
- if self.url_err != None:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(error_label,
- self.url_err)
- else:
- if self.name_error != None:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(error_label,
- self.name_error)
- if function != None:
- valid_func = function()
- ok_btn.set_sensitive(valid_btn and valid_func)
-
- def __is_alias_valid(self, name):
- self.name_error = None
- if len(name) == 0:
- return True
- try:
- publisher.Publisher(prefix=name)
- except api_errors.BadPublisherPrefix, e:
- self.name_error = _("Alias contains invalid characters")
- return False
- try:
- self.api_o.get_publisher(prefix=name)
- self.name_error = _("Alias already in use")
- return False
- except api_errors.UnknownPublisher, e:
- return True
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([("", e)])
- return False
-
- def __get_selected_publisher_itr_model(self):
- itr, sorted_model = self.__get_fitr_model_from_tree(
- self.w_publishers_treeview)
- if itr == None or sorted_model == None:
- return (None, None)
- sorted_path = sorted_model.get_path(itr)
- filter_path = sorted_model.convert_path_to_child_path(sorted_path)
- filter_model = sorted_model.get_model()
- path = filter_model.convert_path_to_child_path(filter_path)
- model = filter_model.get_model()
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- return (itr, model)
-
- def __get_selected_mirror_itr_model(self):
- return self.__get_fitr_model_from_tree(\
- self.modify_repo_mirrors_treeview)
-
- def __get_selected_origin_itr_model(self):
- return self.__get_fitr_model_from_tree(\
- self.modify_repo_origins_treeview)
-
- def __modify_publisher_dialog(self, pub):
- self.orig_sig_policy = {}
- self.pub_certs_setup = False
-
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_modify_repository_dialog,
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog)
- try:
- self.repository_modify_publisher = self.api_o.get_publisher(
- prefix=pub.prefix, alias=pub.prefix, duplicate=True)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([("", e)])
- return
- updated_modify_repository = self.__update_modify_repository_dialog(True,
- True, True, True)
-
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog.set_size_request(
- MODIFY_DIALOG_WIDTH_DEFAULT, -1)
-
- if updated_modify_repository:
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog.set_title(
- _("Modify Publisher - %s") %
- self.__get_pub_display_name(pub))
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog.show_all()
-
- pagenum = self.w_modify_pub_notebook.get_current_page()
- if pagenum == MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_CERTIFICATE_PAGE:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_pub_certs)
- elif pagenum == MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_SIG_POLICY_PAGE:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_pub_signature_policy)
-
- def __update_repository_dialog_width(self, ssl_error):
- if ssl_error == None:
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog.set_size_request(
- MODIFY_DIALOG_WIDTH_DEFAULT, -1)
- return
-
- style = self.w_repositorymodify_name.get_style()
- font_size_in_pango_unit = style.font_desc.get_size()
- font_size_in_pixel = font_size_in_pango_unit / pango.SCALE
- ssl_error_len = len(unicode(ssl_error)) * font_size_in_pixel
- if ssl_error_len > MODIFY_DIALOG_SSL_WIDTH_DEFAULT:
- new_dialog_width = ssl_error_len * \
- (float(MODIFY_DIALOG_WIDTH_DEFAULT)/
- MODIFY_DIALOG_SSL_WIDTH_DEFAULT)
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog.set_size_request(
- int(new_dialog_width), -1)
- else:
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog.set_size_request(
- MODIFY_DIALOG_WIDTH_DEFAULT, -1)
-
- def __update_modify_repository_dialog(self, update_alias=False,
- update_mirrors=False, update_origins=False, update_ssl=False):
- if not self.repository_modify_publisher:
- return False
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- selected_repo = pub.repository
- prefix = ""
- ssl_cert = ""
- ssl_key = ""
-
- if pub.prefix and len(pub.prefix) > 0:
- prefix = pub.prefix
- self.w_repositorymodify_name.set_text(prefix)
-
- if update_alias:
- alias = ""
- if pub.alias and len(pub.alias) > 0 \
- and pub.alias != "None":
- alias = pub.alias
- self.w_modify_pub_alias.set_text(alias)
-
- if update_mirrors or update_ssl:
- if update_mirrors:
- insert_count = 0
- mirrors_list = self.__get_mirrors_origins_liststore()
- for mirror in selected_repo.mirrors:
- if mirror.ssl_cert:
- ssl_cert = mirror.ssl_cert
- if mirror.ssl_key:
- ssl_key = mirror.ssl_key
- if update_mirrors:
- mirror_uri = [mirror.uri]
- mirrors_list.insert(insert_count, mirror_uri)
- insert_count += 1
- if update_mirrors:
- self.modify_repo_mirrors_treeview.set_model(mirrors_list)
- if len(selected_repo.mirrors) > 0:
- self.w_repositorymirror_expander.set_expanded(
- True)
- else:
- self.w_repositorymirror_expander.set_expanded(
- False)
-
- if update_origins or update_ssl:
- if update_origins:
- insert_count = 0
- origins_list = self.__get_mirrors_origins_liststore()
- for origin in selected_repo.origins:
- if origin.ssl_cert:
- ssl_cert = origin.ssl_cert
- if origin.ssl_key:
- ssl_key = origin.ssl_key
- if update_origins:
- origin_uri = [origin.uri]
- origins_list.insert(insert_count, origin_uri)
- insert_count += 1
- if update_origins:
- self.modify_repo_origins_treeview.set_model(origins_list)
-
- reg_uri = self.__get_registration_uri(selected_repo)
- if reg_uri != None:
- self.w_repositorymodify_registration_link.set_uri(
- reg_uri)
- self.w_repositorymodify_registration_box.show()
- else:
- self.w_repositorymodify_registration_box.hide()
-
- if update_ssl:
- self.w_repositorymodify_cert_entry.set_text(ssl_cert)
- self.w_repositorymodify_key_entry.set_text(ssl_key)
- return True
-
- def __add_mirror(self, new_mirror):
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- repo = pub.repository
- try:
- repo.add_mirror(new_mirror)
- self.w_addmirror_entry.set_text("")
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([(pub, e)])
- self.__update_modify_repository_dialog(update_mirrors=True)
-
- def __rm_mirror(self):
- itr, model = self.__get_selected_mirror_itr_model()
- remove_mirror = None
- if itr and model:
- remove_mirror = model.get_value(itr, 0)
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- repo = pub.repository
- try:
- repo.remove_mirror(remove_mirror)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([(pub, e)])
- self.__update_modify_repository_dialog(update_mirrors=True)
-
- def __add_origin(self, new_origin):
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- repo = pub.repository
- try:
- repo.add_origin(new_origin)
- self.w_addorigin_entry.set_text("")
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([(pub, e)])
- self.__update_modify_repository_dialog(update_origins=True)
-
- def __rm_origin(self):
- itr, model = self.__get_selected_origin_itr_model()
- remove_origin = None
- if itr and model:
- remove_origin = model.get_value(itr, 0)
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- repo = pub.repository
- try:
- repo.remove_origin(remove_origin)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([(pub, e)])
- self.__update_modify_repository_dialog(update_origins=True)
-
- def __sticky_unsticky(self, cell, sorted_path):
- sorted_model = self.w_publishers_treeview.get_model()
- filtered_path = sorted_model.convert_path_to_child_path(sorted_path)
- filtered_model = sorted_model.get_model()
- path = filtered_model.convert_path_to_child_path(filtered_path)
- model = filtered_model.get_model()
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- if itr == None:
- return
- pub = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT)
- if pub.sys_pub:
- return
- is_sticky = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY)
- changed = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY_CHANGED)
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY, not is_sticky)
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY_CHANGED, not changed)
-
- def __enable_disable(self, cell, sorted_path):
- sorted_model = self.w_publishers_treeview.get_model()
- filtered_path = sorted_model.convert_path_to_child_path(sorted_path)
- filtered_model = sorted_model.get_model()
- path = filtered_model.convert_path_to_child_path(filtered_path)
- model = filtered_model.get_model()
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- if itr == None:
- self.w_manage_modify_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_remove_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_up_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_down_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- return
- pub = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT)
- if pub.sys_pub:
- return
- enabled = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLED)
- changed = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLE_CHANGED)
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLED, not enabled)
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLE_CHANGED, not changed)
- self.__enable_disable_updown_btn(itr, model)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __is_at_least_one_entry(treeview):
- model = treeview.get_model()
- if len(model) >= 1:
- return True
- return False
-
- def __enable_disable_remove_modify_btn(self, itr, model):
- if itr == None:
- self.w_manage_modify_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_remove_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_up_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_manage_down_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- return
- remove_val = False
- modify_val = False
- if self.__is_at_least_one_entry(self.w_publishers_treeview):
- remove_val = True
- modify_val = True
- pub = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT)
- if pub.sys_pub:
- remove_val = False
- modify_val = False
- self.w_manage_modify_btn.set_sensitive(modify_val)
- self.w_manage_remove_btn.set_sensitive(remove_val)
-
- def __enable_disable_updown_btn(self, itr, model):
- up_enabled = True
- down_enabled = True
- sorted_size = len(self.w_publishers_treeview.get_model())
-
- if itr:
- current_priority = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED)
- is_sys_pub = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT).sys_pub
- next_sys_pub = False
- prev_sys_pub = False
- path = model.get_path(itr)
- next_itr = model.iter_next(itr)
- if next_itr:
- next_pub = model.get_value(next_itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT)
- if next_pub.sys_pub:
- next_sys_pub = True
- if path[0] > 0:
- prev_path = (path[0] - 1,)
- prev_itr = model.get_iter(prev_path)
- prev_pub = model.get_value(prev_itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT)
- if prev_pub.sys_pub:
- prev_sys_pub = True
-
- if current_priority == sorted_size - 1:
- down_enabled = False
- elif current_priority == 0:
- up_enabled = False
-
- if sorted_size == 1:
- up_enabled = False
- down_enabled = False
- else:
- if next_sys_pub or is_sys_pub:
- down_enabled = False
- if prev_sys_pub or is_sys_pub:
- up_enabled = False
- self.w_manage_up_btn.set_sensitive(up_enabled)
- self.w_manage_down_btn.set_sensitive(down_enabled)
-
- def __do_add_repository(self, alias=None, url=None, ssl_key=None, ssl_cert=None,
- pub=None):
- self.publishers_apply.set_title(_("Adding Publisher"))
- if self.webinstall_new:
- self.__run_with_prog_in_thread(self.__add_repository,
- self.main_window, self.__stop, None, None, ssl_key,
- ssl_cert, self.repository_modify_publisher)
- else:
- self.__run_with_prog_in_thread(self.__add_repository,
- self.w_add_publisher_dialog, self.__stop, alias,
- url, ssl_key, ssl_cert, pub)
-
- def __stop(self):
- if self.cancel_progress_thread == False:
- self.__update_details_text(_("Canceling...\n"))
- self.cancel_progress_thread = True
- self.publishers_apply_cancel.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __add_repository(self, alias=None, origin_url=None, ssl_key=None,
- ssl_cert=None, pub=None):
- errors = []
- if pub == None:
- if self.__check_publisher_exists(self.api_o, alias,
- origin_url):
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- return
- pub, repo, new_pub = self.__setup_publisher_from_uri(
- alias, origin_url, ssl_key, ssl_cert)
- if pub == None:
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- return
- else:
- repo = pub.repository
- new_pub = True
- name = pub.prefix
- errors_ssl = self.__update_ssl_creds(pub, repo, ssl_cert, ssl_key)
- errors_update = []
- try:
- errors_update = self.__update_publisher(pub,
- new_publisher=new_pub)
- except api_errors.UnknownRepositoryPublishers, e:
- if len(e.known) > 0:
- pub, repo, new_pub = self.__get_or_create_pub_with_url(
- self.api_o, e.known[0], origin_url)
- if new_pub:
- errors_ssl = self.__update_ssl_creds(pub, repo,
- ssl_cert, ssl_key)
- pub.alias = name
- errors_update = self.__update_publisher(pub,
- new_publisher=new_pub,
- raise_unknownpubex=False)
- else:
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- return
- else:
- errors_update.append((pub, e))
- errors += errors_ssl
- errors += errors_update
- if self.cancel_progress_thread:
- try:
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Removing publisher %s\n") % name)
- self.api_o.remove_publisher(prefix=name,
- alias=name)
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Publisher %s succesfully removed\n") % name)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append((pub, e))
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- else:
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- if len(errors) > 0:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__show_errors, errors)
- elif not self.webinstall_new:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__afteradd_confirmation, pub)
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- gobject.idle_add(
- self.__g_on_add_publisher_delete_event,
- self.w_add_publisher_dialog, None)
- elif self.webinstall_new:
- gobject.idle_add(
- self.__g_on_add_publisher_delete_event,
- self.w_add_publisher_dialog, None)
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.reload_packages)
-
- def __update_publisher(self, pub, new_publisher=False, raise_unknownpubex=True):
- errors = []
- try:
- if new_publisher:
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Adding publisher %s\n") % pub.prefix)
- self.api_o.add_publisher(pub)
- self.no_changes += 1
- else:
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Updating publisher %s\n") % pub.prefix)
- self.api_o.update_publisher(pub)
- self.no_changes += 1
- if new_publisher:
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Publisher %s succesfully added\n") % pub.prefix)
- else:
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Publisher %s succesfully updated\n") % pub.prefix)
- except api_errors.UnknownRepositoryPublishers, e:
- if raise_unknownpubex:
- raise e
- else:
- errors.append((pub, e))
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append((pub, e))
- return errors
-
- def __afteradd_confirmation(self, pub):
- self.new_pub = pub
- repo = pub.repository
- origin = repo.origins[0]
- # Descriptions not available at the moment
- self.w_add_publisher_c_desc.hide()
- self.w_add_publisher_c_desc_l.hide()
- self.w_add_publisher_c_name.set_text(pub.prefix)
- if pub.alias and len(pub.alias) > 0:
- self.w_add_publisher_c_alias.set_text(pub.alias)
- else:
- self.w_add_publisher_c_alias.hide()
- self.w_add_publisher_c_alias_l.hide()
- self.w_add_publisher_c_url.set_text(origin.uri)
- self.w_add_publisher_comp_dialog.show()
-
- def __prepare_confirmation_dialog(self):
- disable = ""
- enable = ""
- sticky = ""
- unsticky = ""
- delete = ""
- priority_change = ""
- disable_no = 0
- enable_no = 0
- sticky_no = 0
- unsticky_no = 0
- delete_no = 0
- not_removed = []
- removed_priorities = []
- priority_changed = []
- for row in self.publishers_list:
- pub_name = row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME]
- if row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_REMOVED]:
- delete += "\t" + pub_name + "\n"
- delete_no += 1
- removed_priorities.append(
- row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY])
- else:
- if row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLE_CHANGED]:
- to_enable = row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLED]
- if not to_enable:
- disable += "\t" + pub_name + "\n"
- disable_no += 1
- else:
- enable += "\t" + pub_name + "\n"
- enable_no += 1
- if row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY_CHANGED]:
- to_sticky = row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY]
- if not to_sticky:
- unsticky += "\t" + pub_name + "\n"
- unsticky_no += 1
- else:
- sticky += "\t" + pub_name + "\n"
- sticky_no += 1
- not_removed.append(row)
-
- for pub in not_removed:
- if not self.__check_if_ignore(pub, removed_priorities):
- pub_name = pub[enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME]
- pri = pub[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED]
- priority_changed.append([pri, pub_name])
-
- if disable_no == 0 and enable_no == 0 and delete_no == 0 and \
- sticky_no == 0 and unsticky_no == 0 and \
- len(priority_changed) == 0:
- self.__on_manage_cancel_clicked(None)
- return
-
- priority_changed.sort()
- for pri, pub_name in priority_changed:
- priority_change += "\t" + str(pri+1) + \
- " - " + pub_name + "\n"
-
- textbuf = self.w_confirmation_textview.get_buffer()
- textbuf.set_text("")
- textiter = textbuf.get_end_iter()
-
- disable_text = ngettext("Disable Publisher:\n",
- "Disable Publishers:\n", disable_no)
- enable_text = ngettext("Enable Publisher:\n",
- "Enable Publishers:\n", enable_no)
- delete_text = ngettext("Remove Publisher:\n",
- "Remove Publishers:\n", delete_no)
- sticky_text = ngettext("Set sticky Publisher:\n",
- "Set sticky Publishers:\n", delete_no)
- unsticky_text = ngettext("Unset sticky Publisher:\n",
- "Unset sticky Publishers:\n", delete_no)
- priority_text = _("Change Priorities:\n")
-
- confirm_no = delete_no + enable_no + disable_no + sticky_no + \
- unsticky_no
- confirm_text = ngettext("Apply the following change:",
- "Apply the following changes:", confirm_no)
-
- self.w_confirmation_label.set_markup("<b>" + confirm_text + "</b>")
-
- if len(delete) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- delete_text, "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- delete)
- if len(disable) > 0:
- if len(delete) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\n")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- disable_text, "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- disable)
- if len(enable) > 0:
- if len(delete) > 0 or len(disable) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\n")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- enable_text, "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- enable)
- if len(sticky) > 0:
- if len(delete) > 0 or len(disable) > 0 or len(enable) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\n")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- sticky_text, "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- sticky)
- if len(unsticky) > 0:
- if len(delete) > 0 or len(disable) > 0 or \
- len(enable) > 0 or len(sticky) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\n")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- unsticky_text, "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- unsticky)
- if len(priority_change) > 0:
- if len(delete) > 0 or len(disable) or len(enable) > 0:
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\n")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- priority_text, "bold")
- textbuf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- priority_change)
-
- self.w_confirm_cancel_btn.grab_focus()
- self.w_confirmation_dialog.show_all()
-
- def __proceed_enable_disable(self, pub_names, to_enable):
- errors = []
-
- gobject.idle_add(self.publishers_apply_expander.set_expanded, True)
- for name in pub_names.keys():
- try:
- pub = self.api_o.get_publisher(name,
- duplicate = True)
- if pub.disabled == (not to_enable):
- continue
- pub.disabled = not to_enable
- self.no_changes += 1
- enable_text = _("Disabling")
- if to_enable:
- enable_text = _("Enabling")
-
- details_text = \
- _("%(enable)s publisher %(name)s\n")
- self.__g_update_details_text(details_text %
- {"enable" : enable_text, "name" : name})
- self.api_o.update_publisher(pub)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append(pub, e)
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- gobject.idle_add(self.publishers_apply_expander.set_expanded, False)
- if len(errors) > 0:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__show_errors, errors)
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.reload_packages, False)
-
- def __proceed_after_confirmation(self):
- errors = []
-
- image_lock_err = False
- for row in self.priority_changes:
- try:
- if row[1] == None or row[2] == None:
- continue
- pub1 = self.api_o.get_publisher(row[1],
- duplicate=True)
- pub2 = self.api_o.get_publisher(row[2],
- duplicate=True)
- if row[0] == enumerations.PUBLISHER_MOVE_BEFORE:
- self.api_o.update_publisher(pub1,
- search_before=pub2.prefix)
- else:
- self.api_o.update_publisher(pub1,
- search_after=pub2.prefix)
- self.no_changes += 1
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Changing priority for publisher %s\n")
- % row[1])
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, e:
- self.no_changes = 0
- if not image_lock_err:
- errors.append((row[1], e))
- image_lock_err = True
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append((row[1], e))
-
- for row in self.publishers_list:
- name = row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME]
- try:
- if row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_REMOVED]:
- self.no_changes += 1
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Removing publisher %s\n") % name)
- self.api_o.remove_publisher(prefix=name,
- alias=name)
- self.__g_update_details_text(
- _("Publisher %s succesfully removed\n")
- % name)
- elif row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLE_CHANGED] or \
- row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY_CHANGED]:
- self.__do_changes_for_row(row, name)
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, e:
- self.no_changes = 0
- if not image_lock_err:
- errors.append(
- (row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT], e))
- image_lock_err = True
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append((row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT], e))
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- if len(errors) > 0:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__show_errors, errors)
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__after_confirmation)
-
- def __do_changes_for_row(self, row, name):
- pub = self.api_o.get_publisher(name, duplicate = True)
- if row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLE_CHANGED]:
- to_enable = row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLED]
- pub.disabled = not to_enable
- if row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY_CHANGED]:
- sticky = row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY]
- pub.sticky = sticky
- self.no_changes += 1
- update_text = _("Updating")
- details_text = _("%(update)s publisher %(name)s\n")
- self.__g_update_details_text(details_text %
- {"update" : update_text, "name" : name})
- self.api_o.update_publisher(pub)
-
- def __after_confirmation(self):
- self.__on_manage_publishers_delete_event(
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog, None)
- return False
-
- def __proceed_modifyrepo_ok(self):
- errors = []
- alias = self.w_modify_pub_alias.get_text()
- ssl_key = self.w_repositorymodify_key_entry.get_text()
- ssl_cert = self.w_repositorymodify_cert_entry.get_text()
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- repo = pub.repository
- missing_ssl = False
- try:
- prefix = pub.prefix
- mirrors = repo.mirrors
- origins = repo.origins
- self.api_o.reset()
- self.repository_modify_publisher = self.api_o.get_publisher(
- prefix=prefix, alias=prefix, duplicate=True)
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- repo = pub.repository
- repo.mirrors = mirrors
- repo.origins = origins
- if pub.alias != alias:
- pub.alias = alias
- errors += self.__update_ssl_creds(pub, repo, ssl_cert, ssl_key)
- errors += self.__update_pub_certs()
- errors += self.__update_pub_sig_policy()
- errors += self.__update_publisher(pub, new_publisher=False)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append((pub, e))
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- if len(errors) > 0:
- missing_ssl = self.__is_missing_ssl_creds(pub, ssl_key, ssl_cert)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__show_errors, errors, missing_ssl)
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__g_delete_widget_handler_hide,
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog, None)
- if self.action == enumerations.MANAGE_PUBLISHERS:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__prepare_publisher_list, True)
- self.no_changes += 1
-
- @staticmethod
- def __is_missing_ssl_creds(pub, ssl_key, ssl_cert):
- repo = pub.repository
- if ssl_key and len(ssl_key) > 0 and ssl_cert and len(ssl_cert) > 0:
- return False
- for uri in repo.origins:
- print uri
- if uri.scheme in publisher.SSL_SCHEMES:
- return True
- for uri in repo.mirrors:
- if uri.scheme in publisher.SSL_SCHEMES:
- return True
- return False
-
- def __run_with_prog_in_thread(self, func, parent_window = None,
- cancel_func = None, *f_args):
- self.progress_stop_thread = False
- self.cancel_progress_thread = False
- if cancel_func == None:
- self.publishers_apply_cancel.set_sensitive(False)
- else:
- self.publishers_apply_cancel.set_sensitive(True)
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.publishers_apply, parent_window)
- self.publishers_apply_textview.get_buffer().set_text("")
- self.publishers_apply.show_all()
- self.cancel_function = cancel_func
- gobject.timeout_add(100, self.__progress_pulse)
- Thread(target = func, args = f_args).start()
-
- def __progress_pulse(self):
- if not self.progress_stop_thread:
- self.publishers_apply_progress.pulse()
- return True
- else:
- self.publishers_apply.hide()
- return False
-
- def __g_update_details_text(self, text, *tags):
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_details_text, text, *tags)
-
- def __update_details_text(self, text, *tags):
- buf = self.publishers_apply_textview.get_buffer()
- textiter = buf.get_end_iter()
- if tags:
- buf.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, text, *tags)
- else:
- buf.insert(textiter, text)
- self.publishers_apply_textview.scroll_to_iter(textiter, 0.0)
-
- # Signal handlers
- def __on_publisher_selection_changed(self, selection, widget):
- itr, model = self.__get_selected_publisher_itr_model()
- if itr and model:
- self.__enable_disable_updown_btn(itr, model)
- self.__enable_disable_remove_modify_btn(itr, model)
- self.__update_publisher_details(
- model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT),
- self.w_manage_publishers_details)
-
- def __on_mirror_selection_changed(self, selection, widget):
- model_itr = selection.get_selected()
- if model_itr[1]:
- self.w_rmmirror_button.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_rmmirror_button.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __on_origin_selection_changed(self, selection, widget):
- model_itr = selection.get_selected()
- if model_itr[1] and \
- self.__is_at_least_one_entry(self.modify_repo_origins_treeview):
- self.w_rmorigin_button.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_rmorigin_button.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __g_on_add_publisher_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_add_publisher_delete_event(widget, event)
- return False
-
- def __on_add_publisher_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.w_add_publisher_url.set_text("")
- self.w_add_publisher_alias.set_text("")
- self.__delete_widget_handler_hide(widget, event)
- return True
-
- def __on_add_publisher_complete_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- if self.no_changes > 0:
- self.parent.reload_packages()
- if self.action == enumerations.MANAGE_PUBLISHERS:
- self.__prepare_publisher_list(True)
- self.__delete_widget_handler_hide(widget, event)
- return True
-
- def __on_publisherurl_changed(self, widget):
- url = widget.get_text()
- if self.__is_ssl_scheme(url):
- self.w_ssl_box.show()
- else:
- self.w_ssl_box.hide()
- self.__validate_url(widget,
- w_ssl_key=self.w_key_entry, w_ssl_cert=self.w_cert_entry)
-
- def __on_certentry_changed(self, widget):
- self.__validate_url_generic(self.w_add_publisher_url,
- self.w_add_error_label, self.w_publisher_add_button,
- self.is_alias_valid, w_ssl_label=self.w_add_sslerror_label,
- w_ssl_key=self.w_key_entry, w_ssl_cert=widget)
-
- def __on_keyentry_changed(self, widget):
- self.__validate_url_generic(self.w_add_publisher_url,
- self.w_add_error_label, self.w_publisher_add_button,
- self.is_alias_valid, w_ssl_label=self.w_add_sslerror_label,
- w_ssl_key=widget, w_ssl_cert=self.w_cert_entry)
-
- def __on_modcertkeyentry_changed(self, widget):
- self.__on_addorigin_entry_changed(None)
- self.__on_addmirror_entry_changed(None)
- ssl_key = self.w_repositorymodify_key_entry.get_text()
- ssl_cert = self.w_repositorymodify_cert_entry.get_text()
- ssl_valid, ssl_error = self.__validate_ssl_key_cert(None,
- ssl_key, ssl_cert)
- self.__update_repository_dialog_width(ssl_error)
- self.w_repositorymodifyok_button.set_sensitive(True)
- if ssl_valid == False and (len(ssl_key) > 0 or len(ssl_cert) > 0):
- self.w_repositorymodifyok_button.set_sensitive(False)
- if ssl_error != None:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(
- self.w_modsslerror_label, ssl_error)
- else:
- self.w_modsslerror_label.set_text("")
- return
- self.w_modsslerror_label.set_text("")
-
- def __on_addmirror_entry_changed(self, widget):
- uri_list_model = self.modify_repo_mirrors_treeview.get_model()
- self.__validate_mirror_origin_url(self.w_addmirror_entry.get_text(),
- self.w_addmirror_button, self.w_modmirrerror_label, uri_list_model)
-
- def __on_addorigin_entry_changed(self, widget):
- uri_list_model = self.modify_repo_origins_treeview.get_model()
- self.__validate_mirror_origin_url(self.w_addorigin_entry.get_text(),
- self.w_addorigin_button, self.w_modoriginerror_label, uri_list_model)
-
- def __validate_mirror_origin_url(self, url, add_button, error_label,
- uri_list_model):
- url_error = None
- is_url_valid, url_error = self.__is_url_valid(url)
- add_button.set_sensitive(False)
- error_label.set_sensitive(False)
- error_label.set_markup(self.publisher_info)
- if len(url) <= 4:
- if is_url_valid == False and url_error != None:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(
- error_label, url_error)
- return
-
- for uri_row in uri_list_model:
- origin_url = uri_row[0].strip("/")
- if origin_url.strip("/") == url.strip("/"):
- url_error = _("URI already added")
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(
- error_label, url_error)
- return
-
- if is_url_valid == False:
- if url_error != None:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(error_label,
- url_error)
- return
- add_button.set_sensitive(True)
-
- def __is_ssl_specified(self):
- ssl_key = self.w_repositorymodify_key_entry.get_text()
- ssl_cert = self.w_repositorymodify_cert_entry.get_text()
- if len(ssl_key) > 0 or len(ssl_cert) > 0:
- return True
- return False
-
- def __on_publisheralias_changed(self, widget):
- error_label = self.w_add_error_label
- url_widget = self.w_add_publisher_url
- ok_btn = self.w_publisher_add_button
- self.__validate_alias_addpub(ok_btn, widget, url_widget, error_label)
-
- def __on_modify_pub_alias_changed(self, widget):
- error_label = self.w_modify_alias_error_label
- ok_btn = self.w_repositorymodifyok_button
- name = widget.get_text()
- self.is_alias_valid = self.__is_alias_valid(name)
- if not self.is_alias_valid and self.name_error != None:
- self.__show_error_label_with_format(error_label,
- self.name_error)
- ok_btn.set_sensitive(False)
- else:
- error_label.set_text("")
- ok_btn.set_sensitive(True)
-
- def __on_add_publisher_add_clicked(self, widget):
- if self.w_publisher_add_button.get_property('sensitive') == 0:
- return
- alias = self.w_add_publisher_alias.get_text()
- if len(alias) == 0:
- alias = None
- url = self.w_add_publisher_url.get_text()
- ssl_key = self.w_key_entry.get_text()
- ssl_cert = self.w_cert_entry.get_text()
- if not self.__is_ssl_scheme(url) or not \
- (ssl_key and ssl_cert and os.path.isfile(ssl_cert) and
- os.path.isfile(ssl_key)):
- ssl_key = None
- ssl_cert = None
- self.__do_add_repository(alias, url, ssl_key, ssl_cert)
-
- def __on_apply_cancel_clicked(self, widget):
- if self.cancel_function:
- self.cancel_function()
-
- def __on_add_publisher_cancel_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__on_add_publisher_delete_event(
- self.w_add_publisher_dialog, None)
-
- def __on_modkeybrowse_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__keybrowse(self.w_modify_repository_dialog,
- self.w_repositorymodify_key_entry,
- self.w_repositorymodify_cert_entry)
-
- def __on_modcertbrowse_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__certbrowse(self.w_modify_repository_dialog,
- self.w_repositorymodify_cert_entry)
-
- def __on_keybrowse_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__keybrowse(self.w_add_publisher_dialog,
- self.w_key_entry, self.w_cert_entry)
-
- def __on_certbrowse_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__certbrowse(self.w_add_publisher_dialog,
- self.w_cert_entry)
-
- def __on_add_publisher_c_close_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__on_add_publisher_complete_delete_event(
- self.w_add_publisher_comp_dialog, None)
-
- def __on_manage_publishers_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__delete_widget_handler_hide(widget, event)
- if self.no_changes > 0:
- self.parent.reload_packages()
- return True
-
- def __g_delete_widget_handler_hide(self, widget, event):
- self.__delete_widget_handler_hide(widget, event)
- return False
-
- def __on_manage_add_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_add_publisher_url.grab_focus()
- self.w_registration_box.hide()
- self.__reset_error_label()
- self.w_add_publisher_dialog.show_all()
-
- def __reset_error_label(self):
- self.w_add_error_label.set_markup(self.publisher_info)
- self.w_add_error_label.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_add_error_label.show()
-
- def __on_manage_modify_clicked(self, widget):
- itr, model = self.__get_selected_publisher_itr_model()
- if itr and model:
- pub = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT)
- self.__modify_publisher_dialog(pub)
-
- def __on_manage_remove_clicked(self, widget):
- itr, model = self.__get_selected_publisher_itr_model()
- tsel = self.w_publishers_treeview.get_selection()
- selection = tsel.get_selected()
- sel_itr = selection[1]
- sorted_model = selection[0]
- sorted_path = sorted_model.get_path(sel_itr)
- if itr and model:
- current_priority = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED)
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_REMOVED, True)
- for element in model:
- if element[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED] > \
- current_priority:
- element[
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED] -= 1
- tsel.select_path(sorted_path)
- if not tsel.path_is_selected(sorted_path):
- row = sorted_path[0]-1
- if row >= 0:
- tsel.select_path((row,))
- if len(sorted_model) == 0:
- self.__set_empty_pub_list()
-
- def __on_manage_move_up_clicked(self, widget):
- before_name = None
- itr, model = self.__get_selected_publisher_itr_model()
- current_priority = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED)
- current_name = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME)
- for element in model:
- if current_priority == \
- element[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED]:
- element[
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED] -= 1
- elif element[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED] \
- == current_priority - 1 :
- before_name = element[enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME]
- element[
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED] += 1
- self.priority_changes.append([enumerations.PUBLISHER_MOVE_BEFORE,
- current_name, before_name])
- self.__enable_disable_updown_btn(itr, model)
- self.__move_to_cursor()
-
- def __move_to_cursor(self):
- itr, model = self.__get_fitr_model_from_tree(self.w_publishers_treeview)
- if itr and model:
- path = model.get_path(itr)
- self.w_publishers_treeview.scroll_to_cell(path)
-
- def __on_manage_move_down_clicked(self, widget):
- after_name = None
- itr, model = self.__get_selected_publisher_itr_model()
- current_priority = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED)
- current_name = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME)
- for element in model:
- if current_priority == \
- element[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED]:
- element[
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED] += 1
- elif element[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED] \
- == current_priority + 1 :
- after_name = element[enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME]
- element[
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED] -= 1
- self.priority_changes.append([enumerations.PUBLISHER_MOVE_AFTER,
- current_name, after_name])
- self.__enable_disable_updown_btn(itr, model)
- self.__move_to_cursor()
-
- def __on_manage_cancel_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__on_manage_publishers_delete_event(
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog, None)
-
- def __on_manage_ok_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__prepare_confirmation_dialog()
-
- def __on_publishers_apply_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_apply_cancel_clicked(None)
- return True
-
- def __on_addmirror_button_clicked(self, widget):
- if self.w_addmirror_button.get_property('sensitive') == 0:
- return
- new_mirror = self.w_addmirror_entry.get_text()
- self.__add_mirror(new_mirror)
-
- def __on_addorigin_button_clicked(self, widget):
- if self.w_addorigin_button.get_property('sensitive') == 0:
- return
- new_origin = self.w_addorigin_entry.get_text()
- self.__add_origin(new_origin)
-
- def __on_rmmirror_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__rm_mirror()
-
- def __on_rmorigin_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__rm_origin()
-
- def __on_repositorymodifyok_clicked(self, widget):
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- if pub == None:
- return
- error_dialog_title = _("Modify Publisher - %s") % \
- self.__get_pub_display_name(pub)
- text = self.w_pub_sig_name_entry.get_text()
- req_names = self.w_pub_sig_name_radiobutton.get_active()
- if not gui_misc.check_sig_required_names_policy(text,
- req_names, error_dialog_title):
- return
-
- self.publishers_apply.set_title(_("Applying Changes"))
- self.__run_with_prog_in_thread(self.__proceed_modifyrepo_ok)
-
- def __on_modifydialog_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- if self.w_repositorymodifyok_button.get_sensitive():
- self.__on_repositorymodifyok_clicked(None)
- elif not self.is_alias_valid and self.name_error:
- pub = self.repository_modify_publisher
- gui_misc.error_occurred(None, self.name_error,
- _("Modify Publisher - %s") %
- self.__get_pub_display_name(pub),
- gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- return True
-
- def __on_repositorymodifycancel_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__delete_widget_handler_hide(
- self.w_modify_repository_dialog, None)
-
- def __on_cancel_conf_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__delete_widget_handler_hide(
- self.w_confirmation_dialog, None)
-
- def __on_ok_conf_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_confirmation_dialog.hide()
- self.publishers_apply.set_title(_("Applying Changes"))
- self.__run_with_prog_in_thread(self.__proceed_after_confirmation,
- self.w_manage_publishers_dialog)
-
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-# Static Methods
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
- @staticmethod
- def __check_if_ignore(pub, removed_list):
- """If we remove a publisher from our model, the priorities of
- subsequent publishers are decremented. We need to ignore the
- priority changes caused solely by publisher(s) removal.
- This function returns True if the priority change for a publisher
- is due to publisher(s) removal or False otherwise."""
- priority_sum = 0
- priority = pub[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY]
- priority_changed = pub[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED]
- for num in removed_list:
- if num < priority:
- priority_sum += 1
- return (priority == priority_changed + priority_sum)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __on_add_pub_help_clicked(widget):
- gui_misc.display_help("add-publisher")
-
- @staticmethod
- def __on_manage_help_clicked(widget):
- gui_misc.display_help("manage-publisher")
-
- def __on_modify_repo_help_clicked(self, widget):
- pagenum = self.w_modify_pub_notebook.get_current_page()
- if pagenum == MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_GENERAL_PAGE:
- tag = "modify-publisher"
- elif pagenum == MODIFY_NOTEBOOK_CERTIFICATE_PAGE:
- tag = "manage-certs"
- else:
- tag = "pub-sig-policy"
- gui_misc.display_help(tag)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __update_publisher_details(pub, details_view):
- if pub == None:
- return
- details_buffer = details_view.get_buffer()
- details_buffer.set_text("")
- uri_itr = details_buffer.get_start_iter()
- repo = pub.repository
- num = len(repo.origins)
- if pub.sys_pub:
- details_buffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(uri_itr,
- _("System Publisher"),
- "level0")
- sys_pub_str = _("Cannot be modified or removed.")
- details_buffer.insert(uri_itr, "\n%s\n" % sys_pub_str)
- origin_txt = ngettext("Origin:\n", "Origins:\n", num)
- details_buffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(uri_itr,
- origin_txt, "level0")
- uri_itr = details_buffer.get_end_iter()
- for origin in repo.origins:
- details_buffer.insert(uri_itr, "%s\n" % str(origin))
-
- def __show_errors(self, errors, missing_ssl = False):
- error_msg = ""
- crerr = ""
- msg_type = gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR
- framework_error = False
-
- msg_title = _("Publisher Error")
- for err in errors:
- if isinstance(err[1], api_errors.CatalogRefreshException):
- res = gui_misc.get_catalogrefresh_exception_msg(err[1])
- crerr = res[0]
- framework_error = res[1]
- logger.error(crerr)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self.parent)
- else:
- error_msg += str(err[1])
- error_msg += "\n\n"
- # If the only error is a CatalogRefreshException, which we
- # normally just log but do not display to the user, then
- # display it to the user.
- if error_msg == "":
- error_msg = crerr
- error_msg += "\n"
- if framework_error and missing_ssl:
- error_msg += _("Note: this may may be the result "
- "of specifying a https Origin, "
- "but no SSL key and certificate.\n")
- elif missing_ssl:
- error_msg += _("Note: this error may be the result of "
- "specifing a https URI, "
- "but no SSL key and certificate.\n")
- if error_msg != "":
- gui_misc.error_occurred(None, error_msg, msg_title, msg_type)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __keybrowse(w_parent, key_entry, cert_entry):
- chooser = gtk.FileChooserDialog(
- title=_("Specify SSL Key File"),
- parent = w_parent,
- action=gtk.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN,
- buttons=(gtk.STOCK_CANCEL, gtk.RESPONSE_CANCEL,
- gtk.STOCK_OPEN, gtk.RESPONSE_OK))
- chooser.set_default_response(gtk.RESPONSE_OK)
- chooser.set_transient_for(w_parent)
- chooser.set_modal(True)
- response = chooser.run()
- if response == gtk.RESPONSE_OK:
- key = chooser.get_filename()
- key_entry.set_text(key)
- cert = key.replace("key", "certificate")
- if key != cert and \
- cert_entry.get_text() == "":
- if os.path.isfile(cert):
- cert_entry.set_text(cert)
- chooser.destroy()
-
- @staticmethod
- def __certbrowse(w_parent, cert_entry):
- chooser = gtk.FileChooserDialog(
- title=_("Specify SSL Certificate File"),
- parent = w_parent,
- action=gtk.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN,
- buttons=(gtk.STOCK_CANCEL, gtk.RESPONSE_CANCEL,
- gtk.STOCK_OPEN, gtk.RESPONSE_OK))
- chooser.set_default_response(gtk.RESPONSE_OK)
- chooser.set_transient_for(w_parent)
- chooser.set_modal(True)
- response = chooser.run()
- if response == gtk.RESPONSE_OK:
- cert_entry.set_text(
- chooser.get_filename())
- chooser.destroy()
-
- @staticmethod
- def __delete_widget_handler_hide(widget, event):
- widget.hide()
- return True
-
- def __check_publisher_exists(self, api_o, name, origin_url):
- try:
- pub = api_o.get_publisher(prefix=name, alias=name,
- duplicate=True)
- raise URIExistingPublisher(origin_url, pub)
- except api_errors.UnknownPublisher:
- return False
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__show_errors, [(name, e)])
- return True
-
- def __setup_publisher_from_uri(self, alias, origin_url, ssl_key, ssl_cert):
- try:
- self.api_o.reset()
- repo = publisher.RepositoryURI(origin_url,
- ssl_key = ssl_key, ssl_cert = ssl_cert)
- pubs = self.api_o.get_publisherdata(repo=repo)
- if not pubs:
- raise NoPublishersForURI(origin_url)
- src_pub = sorted(pubs)[0]
- #For now only handling single Pub per Origin
- if len(pubs) > 1:
- if self.webinstall_new:
- client_name = _("Web Install")
- else:
- client_name = _("Package Manager")
- user_image_root = ""
- if self.parent.image_directory != "/":
- user_image_root = "-R " + \
- self.parent.image_directory + " "
- logger.warning(
- _("Origin URI: %(origin_url)s"
- "\nhas %(number_pubs)d publishers associated with it.\n"
- "%(client_name)s will attempt to add the first "
- "publisher, %(pub_name)s.\n"
- "To add the remaining publishers use the command:\n"
- "'pkg %(user_image_root)sset-publisher "
- "-p %(origin_url)s'") %
- {"origin_url": origin_url,
- "number_pubs": len(pubs),
- "client_name": client_name,
- "pub_name": src_pub.prefix,
- "user_image_root": user_image_root,
- })
- if not self.webinstall_new:
- gui_misc.notify_log_warning(self.parent)
- src_repo = src_pub.repository
- add_origins = []
- if not src_repo or not src_repo.origins:
- add_origins.append(origin_url)
- repo = src_pub.repository
- if not repo:
- repo = publisher.Repository()
- src_pub.repository = repo
- for url in add_origins:
- repo.add_origin(url)
- return (src_pub, repo, True)
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- if self.__is_ssl_scheme(origin_url) and \
- ((not ssl_key or len(ssl_key) == 0) or \
- (not ssl_cert or len(ssl_cert) == 0)) and \
- gui_misc.is_frameworkerror(e):
- ssl_missing = True
- else:
- ssl_missing = False
- gobject.idle_add(self.__show_errors, [(alias, e)], ssl_missing)
- return (None, None, False)
-
- def __get_or_create_pub_with_url(self, api_o, name, origin_url):
- new_pub = False
- repo = None
- pub = None
- try:
- pub = api_o.get_publisher(prefix=name, alias=name,
- duplicate=True)
- raise URIExistingPublisher(origin_url, pub)
- except api_errors.UnknownPublisher:
- repo = publisher.Repository()
- # We need to specify a name when creating a publisher
- # object. It does not matter if it is wrong as the
- # __update_publisher() call in __add_repository() will
- # fail and it is dealt with there.
- if name == None:
- name = "None"
- pub = publisher.Publisher(name, repository=repo)
- new_pub = True
- # This part is copied from "def publisher_set(img, args)"
- # from the client.py as the publisher API is not ready yet.
- if not repo.origins:
- repo.add_origin(origin_url)
- origin = repo.origins[0]
- else:
- origin = repo.origins[0]
- origin.uri = origin_url
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__show_errors, [(name, e)])
- return (pub, repo, new_pub)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __update_ssl_creds(pub, repo, ssl_cert, ssl_key):
- errors = []
- # Assume the user wanted to update the ssl_cert or ssl_key
- # information for *all* of the currently selected
- # repository's origins and mirrors.
- try:
- for uri in repo.origins:
- if uri.scheme not in publisher.SSL_SCHEMES:
- continue
- uri.ssl_cert = ssl_cert
- uri.ssl_key = ssl_key
- for uri in repo.mirrors:
- if uri.scheme not in publisher.SSL_SCHEMES:
- continue
- uri.ssl_cert = ssl_cert
- uri.ssl_key = ssl_key
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- errors.append((pub, e))
- return errors
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_fitr_model_from_tree(treeview):
- tsel = treeview.get_selection()
- selection = tsel.get_selected()
- itr = selection[1]
- if itr == None:
- return (None, None)
- model = selection[0]
- return (itr, model)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __show_error_label_with_format(w_label, error_string):
- error_str = ERROR_FORMAT % error_string
- w_label.set_markup(error_str)
- w_label.set_sensitive(True)
- w_label.show()
-
- def __is_url_valid(self, url):
- url_error = None
- if len(url) == 0:
- return False, url_error
- try:
- publisher.RepositoryURI(url)
- return True, url_error
- except api_errors.PublisherError:
- # Check whether the user has started typing a valid URL.
- # If he has we do not display an error message.
- valid_start = False
- for val in publisher.SUPPORTED_SCHEMES:
- check_str = "%s://" % val
- if check_str.startswith(url):
- valid_start = True
- break
- if valid_start:
- url_error = None
- else:
- url_error = _("URI is not valid")
- return False, url_error
- except api_errors.ApiException, e:
- self.__show_errors([("", e)])
- return False, url_error
-
- def __validate_ssl_key_cert(self, origin_url, ssl_key, ssl_cert,
- ignore_ssl_check_for_not_https = False):
- '''The SSL Cert and SSL Key may be valid and contain no error'''
- ssl_error = None
- ssl_valid = True
- if origin_url and not self.__is_ssl_scheme(origin_url):
- if ignore_ssl_check_for_not_https:
- return ssl_valid, ssl_error
- if (ssl_key != None and len(ssl_key) != 0) or \
- (ssl_cert != None and len(ssl_cert) != 0):
- ssl_error = _("SSL should not be specified")
- ssl_valid = False
- elif (ssl_key == None or len(ssl_key) == 0) or \
- (ssl_cert == None or len(ssl_cert) == 0):
- ssl_valid = True
- elif origin_url == None or self.__is_ssl_scheme(origin_url):
- if (ssl_key == None or len(ssl_key) == 0) or \
- (ssl_cert == None or len(ssl_cert) == 0):
- # Key and Cert need not be specified
- ssl_valid = True
- elif not os.path.isfile(ssl_key):
- ssl_error = _("SSL Key not found at specified location")
- ssl_valid = False
- elif not os.path.isfile(ssl_cert):
- ssl_error = \
- _("SSL Certificate not found at specified location")
- ssl_valid = False
- return ssl_valid, ssl_error
-
- @staticmethod
- def __is_ssl_scheme(uri):
- ret_val = False
- for val in publisher.SSL_SCHEMES:
- if uri.startswith(val):
- ret_val = True
- break
- return ret_val
-
- @staticmethod
- def __init_mirrors_tree_view(treeview):
- # URI column - 0
- uri_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Mirror URI"),
- uri_renderer, text = 0)
- column.set_expand(True)
- treeview.append_column(column)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __init_origins_tree_view(treeview):
- # URI column - 0
- uri_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Origin URI"),
- uri_renderer, text = 0)
- column.set_expand(True)
- treeview.append_column(column)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_publishers_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_PRIORITY_CHANGED
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_ALIAS
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLED
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY
- gobject.TYPE_PYOBJECT, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_ENABLE_CHANGED
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_STICKY_CHANGED
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_REMOVED
- )
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_mirrors_origins_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # name
- )
-
- @staticmethod
- def __publishers_filter(model, itr):
- return not model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_REMOVED)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __toggle_data_function(column, renderer, model, itr, data):
- if itr:
- # Do not allow to remove the publisher if it is a system
- # publisher
- val = True
- pub = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_OBJECT)
- if pub.sys_pub:
- val = False
- renderer.set_property("sensitive", val)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_registration_uri(repo):
- #TBD: Change Publisher API to return an RegistrationURI or a String
- # but not either.
- # Currently RegistrationURI is coming back with a trailing / this should
- # be removed.
- if repo == None:
- return None
- if repo.registration_uri == None:
- return None
- ret_uri = None
- if isinstance(repo.registration_uri, str):
- if len(repo.registration_uri) > 0:
- ret_uri = repo.registration_uri.strip("/")
- elif isinstance(repo.registration_uri, publisher.RepositoryURI):
- uri = repo.registration_uri.uri
- if uri != None and len(uri) > 0:
- ret_uri = uri.strip("/")
- return ret_uri
-
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-# Public Methods
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
- def webinstall_new_pub(self, parent, pub = None):
- if pub == None:
- return
- self.repository_modify_publisher = pub
- repo = pub.repository
- origin_uri = ""
- if repo != None and repo.origins != None and len(repo.origins) > 0:
- origin_uri = repo.origins[0].uri
- if origin_uri != None and self.__is_ssl_scheme(origin_uri):
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_add_publisher_dialog,
- parent)
- self.main_window = self.w_add_publisher_dialog
- self.__on_manage_add_clicked(None)
- self.w_add_publisher_url.set_text(origin_uri)
- self.w_add_publisher_alias.set_text(pub.alias)
- self.w_add_pub_label.hide()
- self.w_add_pub_instr_label.hide()
- self.w_add_publisher_url.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_add_publisher_alias.set_sensitive(False)
- reg_uri = self.__get_registration_uri(repo)
- if reg_uri == None or len(reg_uri) == 0:
- reg_uri = origin_uri
- self.w_registration_link.set_uri(reg_uri)
- self.w_registration_box.show()
- self.w_ssl_box.show()
- self.__validate_url(self.w_add_publisher_url,
- w_ssl_key=self.w_key_entry, w_ssl_cert=self.w_cert_entry)
- self.w_add_error_label.hide()
- else:
- self.main_window = parent
- self.w_ssl_box.hide()
- self.__do_add_repository()
-
- def webinstall_enable_disable_pubs(self, parent, pub_names, to_enable):
- if pub_names == None:
- return
- num = len(pub_names)
- if to_enable:
- msg = ngettext("Enabling Publisher", "Enabling Publishers", num)
- else:
- msg = ngettext("Disabling Publisher", "Disabling Publishers", num)
- self.publishers_apply.set_title(msg)
-
- self.__run_with_prog_in_thread(self.__proceed_enable_disable,
- parent, None, pub_names, to_enable)
-
- def update_label_text(self, markup_text):
- self.__g_update_details_text(markup_text)
-
- def update_details_text(self, text, *tags):
- self.__g_update_details_text(text, *tags)
-
- def update_progress(self, current_progress, total_progress):
- pass
-
- def start_bouncing_progress(self):
- pass
-
- def is_progress_bouncing(self):
- self.pylintstub = self
- return True
-
- def stop_bouncing_progress(self):
- pass
-
- def display_download_info(self):
- pass
-
- def display_phase_info(self, phase_name, cur_n, goal_n):
- pass
-
- def reset_label_text_after_delay(self):
- pass
-
-class URIExistingPublisher(api_errors.ApiException):
- def __init__(self, uri, pub):
- api_errors.ApiException.__init__(self)
- self.uri = uri
- self.pub = pub
-
- def __str__(self):
- return _("The URI '%(uri)s' points to a publisher "
- "'%(publisher)s' which already exists "
- "on the system.") % { "uri": self.uri,
- "publisher": self.pub }
-
-class NoPublishersForURI(api_errors.ApiException):
- def __init__(self, uri):
- api_errors.ApiException.__init__(self)
- self.uri = uri
-
- def __str__(self):
- return _("There are no publishers associated with the URI "
- "'%s'.") % self.uri
--- a/src/modules/gui/searcherror.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-import sys
-try:
- import pango
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-
-class SearchError:
- def __init__(self, builder, gconf, parent):
- self.gconf = gconf
- self.parent = parent
- self.api_search_error_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("api_search_error")
- self.api_search_error_textview = \
- builder.get_object("api_search_error_text")
- self.api_search_checkbox = \
- builder.get_object("api_search_checkbox")
- self.api_search_button = \
- builder.get_object("api_search_button")
- infobuffer = self.api_search_error_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- self.pylintstub = None
-
- def setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.api_search_checkbox, "toggled",
- self.__on_api_search_checkbox_toggled),
- (self.api_search_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_api_search_button_clicked),
- (self.api_search_error_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_api_search_error_delete_event)
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def set_modal_and_transient(self, parent_window):
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.api_search_error_dialog,
- parent_window)
-
- def __on_api_search_error_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_api_search_button_clicked(None)
-
- def __on_api_search_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.api_search_error_dialog.hide()
-
- def __on_api_search_checkbox_toggled(self, widget):
- active = self.api_search_checkbox.get_active()
-
- repos = self.parent.get_current_repos_with_search_errors()
- if len(repos) > 0:
- if active:
- for pub, err_type, err_str in repos:
- if pub not in self.gconf.not_show_repos:
- self.gconf.not_show_repos += pub + ","
- self.pylintstub = err_type
- self.pylintstub = err_str
- else:
- for pub, err_type, err_str in repos:
- self.gconf.not_show_repos = \
- self.gconf.not_show_repos.replace(
- pub + ",", "")
- self.gconf.set_not_show_repos(self.gconf.not_show_repos)
-
- def display_search_errors(self, show_all):
- repos = self.parent.get_current_repos_with_search_errors()
- infobuffer = self.api_search_error_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.set_text("")
- textiter = infobuffer.get_end_iter()
- for pub, err_type, err_str in repos:
-
- if show_all or (pub not in self.gconf.not_show_repos):
- infobuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "%(pub)s (%(err_type)s)\n" % {"pub": pub,
- "err_type": err_type}, "bold")
- infobuffer.insert(textiter, "%s\n" % (err_str))
-
- self.api_search_checkbox.set_active(False)
- self.api_search_error_dialog.show()
- self.api_search_button.grab_focus()
-
--- a/src/modules/gui/startpage.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,769 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import os
-import sys
-import urllib
-import urlparse
-import locale
-import re
-from gettext import ngettext
-
-try:
- import gtkhtml2
- import gtk
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.parseqs as parseqs
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-import pkg.gui.repository as repository
-
-logger = global_settings.logger
-
-(
-DISPLAY_LINK,
-CLICK_LINK,
-) = range(2)
-
-# Load Start Page from lang dir if available
-START_PAGE_CACHE_LANG_BASE = "var/pkg/gui_cache/startpagebase/%s/%s"
-START_PAGE_LANG_BASE = "usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/%s/%s"
-START_PAGE_HOME = "startpage.html" # Default page
-START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE = "/usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C"
-
-# StartPage Action support for url's on StartPage pages
-PM_ACTION = 'pm-action' # Action field for StartPage url's
-
-# Internal Example: <a href="pm?pm-action=internal&uri=top_picks.html">
-ACTION_INTERNAL = 'internal' # Internal Action value: pm-action=internal
-INTERNAL_URI = 'uri' # Internal field: uri to navigate to in StartPage
- # without protocol scheme specified
-INTERNAL_SEARCH = 'search' # Internal field: search support page action
-INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_RESULTS = "view_recent_search"
- # Internal field: view recent search results
-INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_PUB ="view_pub_packages" # Internal field: view publishers packages
-INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_ALL = "view_all_packages_filter" # Internal field: change to View
- # All Packages
-INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS_PAGE = "search_all_publishers_page"
- #Internal field: go to search all publishers page
-INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS = "search_all_publishers" #Internal field: search all publishers
-INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS_INSTALLED = "search_all_publishers_installed"
- #Internal field: search all publishers installed
-INTERNAL_SEARCH_HELP = "search_help" # Internal field: display search help
-
-INTERNAL_SEARCH_MNG_PUBS = "search_mng_pubs"
- # Internal field: display Manage Publishers dialog
-
-FONTSIZE_H3_DEFAULT = 16 # Default H3 font size when display web page
-FONTSIZE_BODY_DEFAULT = 10 # Default Body font size when display web page
-
-# External Example: <a href="pm?pm-action=external&uri=www.opensolaris.com">
-ACTION_EXTERNAL = 'external' # External Action value: pm-action=external
-EXTERNAL_URI = 'uri' # External field: uri to navigate to in external
- # default browser without protocol scheme specified
-EXTERNAL_PROTOCOL = 'protocol' # External field: optional protocol scheme,
- # defaults to http
-DEFAULT_PROTOCOL = 'http'
-
-# Theme: use High Contrast or Inverse images for HCI and HC themes, specified by prefix
-INFORMATION_TABLE_HEADER = (
- "<table border='0' cellpadding='3' style='table-layout:fixed' >"
- "<TR><TD><IMG SRC = '%(base)s/%(prefix)sdialog-information.png' "
- "style='border-style: none' "
- )
-HIGH_CONTRAST_PREFIX = "hc_"
-HIGH_CONTRAST_INV_PREFIX = "hci_"
-
-debug = False
-
-class StartPage:
- def __init__(self, parent, application_dir):
- self.application_dir = application_dir
- self.current_url = None
- self.document = None
- self.lang = None
- self.lang_root = None
- self.cached_internal_stream = ""
- self.opener = None
- self.parent = parent
- self.start_page_uri = ""
- self.view = None
- self.page_bg = "#ffff"
- self.page_fg = "#0000"
- self.image_prefix = ""
- s = gtk.settings_get_default()
- self.theme_name = s.get_property("gtk-theme-name")
- self.font_scale = 1.0
- self.h3_fontsize = FONTSIZE_H3_DEFAULT
- self.body_fontsize = FONTSIZE_BODY_DEFAULT
- self.show_start_page = False
-
- def setup_startpage(self, show_page = True):
- self.opener = urllib.FancyURLopener()
- self.document = gtkhtml2.Document()
- self.document.connect('request_url', self.__request_url)
- self.document.connect('link_clicked', self.__handle_link)
- self.document.clear()
-
- self.view = gtkhtml2.View()
- self.view.set_document(self.document)
- self.view.connect('request_object', self.__request_object)
- self.view.connect('on_url', self.__on_url)
- self.view.connect('style-set', self.__style_set)
- try:
- result = locale.getlocale(locale.LC_CTYPE)
- self.lang = result[0]
- except locale.Error:
- self.lang = "C"
- if self.lang == None or self.lang == "":
- self.lang = "C"
- self.lang_root = self.lang.split('_')[0]
- # Load Start Page to setup base URL to allow loading images in other pages
- self.load_startpage(show_page)
-
- # Theme: on Theme change setup bg and fg colours and prefix for loading pages
- def __style_set(self, widget, style, data=None):
- self.font_scale = gui_misc.get_scale(
- self.parent.detailspanel.w_generalinfo_textview)
- if self.font_scale < 1.0:
- self.font_scale = 1.0
-
- self.h3_fontsize = \
- int(round(FONTSIZE_H3_DEFAULT * self.font_scale))
- self.body_fontsize = \
- int(round(FONTSIZE_BODY_DEFAULT * self.font_scale))
-
- s = gtk.settings_get_default()
- self.theme_name = s.get_property("gtk-theme-name")
-
- style = self.parent.w_application_treeview.get_style().copy()
- self.page_bg = style.bg[gtk.STATE_NORMAL]
- self.page_fg = style.fg[gtk.STATE_NORMAL]
-
- self.image_prefix = ""
- if self.theme_name == "HighContrastInverse" or \
- self.theme_name == "HighContrastLargePrintInverse":
- self.image_prefix = HIGH_CONTRAST_INV_PREFIX
- elif self.theme_name == "HighContrast" or \
- self.theme_name == "HighContrastLargePrint":
- self.image_prefix = HIGH_CONTRAST_PREFIX
-
- self.handle_resize()
-
- def load_startpage(self, show = True):
- self.show_start_page = show
- if not show:
- return
- self.cached_internal_stream = ""
- if self.__load_startpage_locale(START_PAGE_CACHE_LANG_BASE):
- return
- if self.__load_startpage_locale(START_PAGE_LANG_BASE):
- return
- self.link_load_error(self.start_page_uri)
-
- # Stub handler required by GtkHtml widget
- def __request_object(self, *vargs):
- pass
-
- def __load_startpage_locale(self, start_page_lang_base):
- self.start_page_uri = os.path.join(self.application_dir,
- start_page_lang_base % (self.lang, START_PAGE_HOME))
- if self.__load_internal_uri(self.document, self.start_page_uri):
- return True
-
- if self.lang_root != None and self.lang_root != self.lang:
- self.start_page_uri = os.path.join(self.application_dir,
- start_page_lang_base % (self.lang_root, START_PAGE_HOME))
- if self.__load_internal_uri(self.document, self.start_page_uri):
- return True
-
- self.start_page_uri = os.path.join(self.application_dir,
- start_page_lang_base % ("C", START_PAGE_HOME))
- if self.__load_internal_uri(self.document, self.start_page_uri):
- return True
- return False
-
- # Stub handler required by GtkHtml widget or widget will assert
- def __stream_cancel(self, *vargs):
- pass
-
- def __load_internal_uri(self, document, link):
- self.parent.update_statusbar_message(_("Loading... %s") % link)
- try:
- f = self.__open_url(link)
- except (IOError, OSError):
- self.parent.update_statusbar_message(_("Stopped"))
- return False
- self.current_url = self.__resolve_uri(link)
-
- self.document.clear()
- headers = f.info()
- mime = headers.getheader('Content-type').split(';')[0]
- if mime:
- self.document.open_stream(mime)
- else:
- self.document.open_stream('text/plain')
-
- text = f.read()
- # Theme: use current Theme's bg and fg colours in internally loaded uri
- text = text.replace('<body>',
- "<body fgcolor='%s' bgcolor='%s'>" % (self.page_fg, self.page_bg))
-
- # Theme: setup Start Page for current Theme
- if link.endswith(START_PAGE_HOME):
- text = self.__process_startpage(text)
- self.document.write_stream(text)
- self.document.close_stream()
- self.parent.update_statusbar_message(_("Done"))
- return True
-
- # Theme: setup Start Page for the current Theme
- def __process_startpage(self, text):
- # Strip background and all style colors for High Contrast, Inverse and
- # Low Contrast Themes
- if self.theme_name.startswith("HighContrast") or \
- self.theme_name.startswith("LowContrast"):
- text = re.sub("background-color: #\w+; ", "", text)
- text = re.sub('style="background-color: #\w+"', "", text)
- text = re.sub("color: #\w+;", "", text)
- if self.font_scale > 1.0:
- text = re.sub("font-size: 20pt;",
- "font-size: %dpx;" % int(round(20 * self.font_scale)), text)
- text = re.sub("font-size: 15px;",
- "font-size: %dpx;" % int(round(15 * self.font_scale)), text)
- text = re.sub("font-size: 14px;",
- "font-size: %dpx;" % int(round(14 * self.font_scale)), text)
- text = re.sub('width="125"',
- 'width="%d"' % int(round(125 * self.font_scale)), text)
-
- # Use High Contrast and Inverse images for HC and HCI themes
- if self.image_prefix != "":
- text = re.sub("/\w*install.png",
- "/" + self.image_prefix + "install.png", text)
- # OpenSolaris icon renders poorly on Low Contrast and dark nimbus themes
- # replace with text link
- if self.theme_name.startswith("LowContrast") or \
- self.theme_name == "dark-nimbus":
- text = re.sub(
- '<td><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com">'
- '<IMG SRC = "opensolaris.png" align="right"/></a></td>',
- '<td align="right"><a href="http://www.opensolaris.com">'
- 'OpenSolaris... </a></td>', text)
- elif self.image_prefix != "":
- text = re.sub(
- "opensolaris.png",
- self.image_prefix + "opensolaris.png", text)
- return text
-
- def __request_url(self, document, url, stream):
- try:
- f = self.__open_url(url)
- except (IOError, OSError), err:
- logger.error(str(err))
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self.parent)
- return
- stream.set_cancel_func(self.__stream_cancel)
- stream.write(f.read())
-
- def __handle_link(self, document, link, handle_what = CLICK_LINK):
- query_dict = self.__urlparse_qs(link)
-
- action = None
- if query_dict.has_key(PM_ACTION):
- action = query_dict[PM_ACTION][0]
- elif handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return link
-
- search_action = None
- if action == ACTION_INTERNAL:
- if query_dict.has_key(INTERNAL_SEARCH):
- search_action = query_dict[INTERNAL_SEARCH][0]
-
- s1, e1 = self.parent.get_start_end_strings()
-
- # Browse a Publisher
- if search_action and search_action.find(INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_PUB) > -1:
- pub = re.findall(r'<b>(.*)<\/b>', search_action)[0]
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- pub_name = \
- self.parent.get_publisher_display_name_from_prefix(
- pub)
- return _("View packages in %(s1)s%(pub)s%(e1)s") % \
- {"s1": s1, "pub": \
- pub_name, "e1": e1}
- self.parent.browse_publisher(pub)
- return
-
- # Go to Search in All Publishers page
- if search_action and search_action == INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS_PAGE:
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return _("Go to Search %(s1)sAll Publishers%(e1)s page")\
- % {"s1": s1, "e1": e1}
- self.parent.pm_setup_search_all_page()
- return
-
- # Search in All Publishers
- if search_action and search_action == INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS:
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return _("Search within %(s1)sAll Publishers%(e1)s") % \
- {"s1": s1, "e1": e1}
- self.parent.handle_search_all_publishers()
- return
-
- # Change view to All Publishers (Installed)
- if search_action and search_action == INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS_INSTALLED:
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return _("View %(s1)sAll Installed Packages%(e1)s") % \
- {"s1": s1, "e1": e1}
- self.parent.handle_view_all_publishers_installed()
- return
- # Launch Search Help
- if search_action and search_action == INTERNAL_SEARCH_HELP:
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return _("Display %(s1)sSearch Help%(e1)s") % \
- {"s1": s1, "e1": e1}
- self.parent.update_statusbar_message(
- _("Loading %(s1)sSearch Help%(e1)s ...") %
- {"s1": s1, "e1": e1})
- gui_misc.display_help("search-pkg")
- return
-
- if search_action and search_action == INTERNAL_SEARCH_MNG_PUBS:
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return _("Display %(s1)sManage Publishers%(e1)s") % \
- {"s1": s1, "e1": e1}
- self.parent.update_statusbar_message(
- _("Loading %(s1)sManage Publishers%(e1)s ...") %
- {"s1": s1, "e1": e1})
-
- repository.Repository(self.parent,
- self.parent.image_directory,
- action=enumerations.MANAGE_PUBLISHERS,
- main_window = self.parent.w_main_window,
- gconf = self.parent.gconf)
- return
-
- # View Recent Search Results
- if search_action and \
- search_action.find(INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_RESULTS) > -1:
- recent_search = \
- re.findall(r'<span>(.*)<\/span>', search_action)[0]
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return _("View results for %s") % recent_search
- self.parent.goto_recent_search(recent_search)
- return
-
- # Change View to All Packages
- if search_action and search_action == INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_ALL:
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return _("Change View to %(s1)sAll Packages%(e1)s") % \
- {"s1": s1, "e1": e1}
- self.parent.set_view_all_packages()
- return
- # Internal Browse
- if action == ACTION_INTERNAL:
- if query_dict.has_key(INTERNAL_URI):
- int_uri = query_dict[INTERNAL_URI][0]
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return int_uri
- else:
- if handle_what == CLICK_LINK:
- self.link_load_error(
- _("No URI specified"))
- return
- if handle_what == CLICK_LINK and \
- not self.__load_internal_uri(document, int_uri):
- self.link_load_error(int_uri)
- return
- # External browse
- elif action == ACTION_EXTERNAL:
- if query_dict.has_key(EXTERNAL_URI):
- ext_uri = query_dict[EXTERNAL_URI][0]
- else:
- if handle_what == CLICK_LINK:
- self.link_load_error(
- _("No URI specified"))
- return
- if query_dict.has_key(EXTERNAL_PROTOCOL):
- protocol = query_dict[EXTERNAL_PROTOCOL][0]
- else:
- protocol = DEFAULT_PROTOCOL
-
- if handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return protocol + "://" + ext_uri
- self.parent.open_link(protocol + "://" + ext_uri)
- return
- elif handle_what == DISPLAY_LINK:
- return None
- elif action == None:
- if link and link.endswith(".p5i"):
- self.parent.invoke_webinstall(link)
- return
- self.parent.open_link(link)
- return
- # Handle empty and unsupported actions
- elif action == "":
- self.link_load_error(_("Empty Action not supported"))
- return
- elif action != None:
- self.link_load_error(
- _("Action not supported: %s") % action)
- return
-
- def __on_url(self, view, link):
- # Handle mouse over events on links and reset when not on link
- if link == None or link == "":
- self.parent.update_statusbar()
- else:
- display_link = self.__handle_link(None, link, DISPLAY_LINK)
- if display_link != None:
- self.parent.update_statusbar_message(display_link)
- else:
- self.parent.update_statusbar()
-
- def __open_url(self, url):
- uri = self.__resolve_uri(url)
- return self.opener.open(uri)
-
- def __resolve_uri(self, uri):
- if self.__is_relative_to_server(uri) and self.current_url != uri:
- return urlparse.urljoin(self.current_url, uri)
- return uri
-
- @staticmethod
- def __is_relative_to_server(url):
- parts = urlparse.urlparse(url)
- if parts[0] or parts[1]:
- return 0
- return 1
-
- def __load_internal_page(self, text =""):
- self.cached_internal_stream = text
- self.document.clear()
- self.view.show()
- self.document.open_stream('text/html')
- # Theme: use Theme's bg and fg colours in loaded internal page
-
- display = ("<html><head><meta http-equiv='Content-Type' "
- "content='text/html; charset=UTF-8'></head>"
- "<style>h3 {font-size:%(h3_fs)dpt}</style>"
- "<style>body {font-size:%(body_fs)dpt}</style><body "
- "fgcolor='%(fg)s' bgcolor='%(bg)s'>%(text)s</body></html>" %
- {"h3_fs": self.h3_fontsize, "body_fs": self.body_fontsize,
- "fg": self.page_fg, "bg": self.page_bg, "text": text})
-
- self.document.write_stream(display)
- self.document.close_stream()
-
- def load_blank(self):
- self.__load_internal_page()
-
- def handle_resize(self):
- if self.cached_internal_stream == "":
- if self.show_start_page:
- self.load_startpage()
- return
- # Theme: setup images for current Theme in self.cached_internal_stream
- # before reloading
- self.cached_internal_stream = re.sub(
- "/\w*dialog-information.png",
- "/" + self.image_prefix + "dialog-information.png",
- self.cached_internal_stream)
- self.cached_internal_stream = re.sub(
- "/\w*dialog-warning.png",
- "/" + self.image_prefix + "dialog-warning.png",
- self.cached_internal_stream)
-
- self.__load_internal_page(self.cached_internal_stream)
-
- def setup_search_all_no_pubs_page(self):
- tbl_header = INFORMATION_TABLE_HEADER % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE,
- "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_header += _("alt='[Information]' title='Information' ALIGN='bottom'>"
- "</TD><TD><h3><b>Search All Publishers</b></h3><TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD> There is nothing to search as there are no "
- "configured or enabled publishers.</TD></TR>"
- )
-
- tbl_body = _("<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD><b>Suggestions:</b><br></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD>"
- )
-
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>"
- "Add or enable publishers: <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&search="
- "%s'>Manage Publishers</a></li></TD></TR>") % INTERNAL_SEARCH_MNG_PUBS
- tbl_footer = "</table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
-
- def setup_search_all_page(self, publisher_list, publisher_all):
- if not publisher_list:
- self.setup_search_all_no_pubs_page()
- return
- tbl_header = INFORMATION_TABLE_HEADER % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE,
- "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_header += _("alt='[Information]' title='Information' ALIGN='bottom'>"
- "</TD><TD><h3><b>Search All Publishers</b></h3><TD></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD> Use the Search field to search for packages "
- "within the following Publishers:</TD></TR>"
- )
- tbl_body = "<TR><TD></TD><TD>"
- pub_browse_list = ""
- for (prefix, pub_alias) in publisher_list:
- if pub_alias != None and len(pub_alias) > 0:
- pub_name = "%s (%s)" % (pub_alias, prefix)
- else:
- pub_name = prefix
-
- tbl_body += "<li style='padding-left:7px'>%s</li>" % pub_name
- pub_browse_list += "<li style='padding-left:7px'><a href="
- pub_browse_list += "'pm?pm-action=internal&search=%s" % \
- INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_PUB
- if pub_alias != None and len(pub_alias) > 0:
- name = pub_alias
- else:
- name = pub_name
- pub_browse_list += " <b>%s</b>'>%s</a></li>" % \
- (prefix, name)
- tbl_body += "<TD></TD></TR>"
- tbl_body += _("<TR><TD></TD><TD></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD>Click on the Publishers below to view their list "
- "of packages:</TD></TR>"
- )
- tbl_body += "<TR><TD></TD><TD>"
- tbl_body += pub_browse_list
- tbl_body += "<TD></TD></TR>"
-
- pub_browse_all = "<li style='padding-left:7px'><a href="
- pub_browse_all += "'pm?pm-action=internal&search=%s" % \
- INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_PUB
- pub_browse_all += " <b>%s</b>'>%s</a></li>" % \
- (publisher_all, publisher_all)
- tbl_body += _("<TR><TD></TD><TD></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD>Click on the link below to view the full list "
- "of packages:</TD></TR>"
- )
- tbl_body += "<TR><TD></TD><TD>"
- tbl_body += pub_browse_all
- tbl_body += "<TD></TD></TR>"
- tbl_footer = "</table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
- def setup_search_installed_page(self, text):
- tbl_header = INFORMATION_TABLE_HEADER % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE,
- "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_header += _("alt='[Information]' title='Information' ALIGN='bottom'>"
- "</TD><TD><h3><b>Search in All Installed Packages</b></h3><TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD> Search is <b>not</b> supported in "
- "All Installed Packages.</TD></TR>"
- )
-
- tbl_body = _("<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD><b>Suggestions:</b><br></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD>"
- )
-
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>Return to view "
- "All Installed Packages <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&search="
- "%s'>(Installed)</a></li>") % INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS_INSTALLED
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>Search for <b>%(text)s"
- "</b> using All Publishers <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&search="
- "%(all_pubs)s'>(Search)</a></li>") % \
- {"text": text, "all_pubs": INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS}
-
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>"
- "See <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&search="
- "%s'>Search Help</a></li></TD></TR>") % INTERNAL_SEARCH_HELP
- tbl_footer = "</table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
- def setup_search_zero_results_page(self, name, text, is_all_publishers):
- tbl_header = INFORMATION_TABLE_HEADER % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE,
- "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_header += _("alt='[Information]' title='Information' ALIGN='bottom'>"
- "</TD><TD><h3><b>Search Results</b></h3><TD></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD>No packages found in <b>%(pub)s</b> "
- "matching <b>%(text)s</b></TD></TR>") % {"pub": name, "text": text}
-
- tbl_body = _("<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD><b>Suggestions:</b><br></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD>"
- "<li style='padding-left:7px'>Check your spelling</li>"
- "<li style='padding-left:7px'>Try new search terms</li>"
- )
- if not is_all_publishers:
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>Search for <b>"
- "%(text)s</b> within <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&search="
- "%(all_pubs)s'>All Publishers</a></li>") % \
- {"text": text, "all_pubs": INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS}
-
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>"
- "See <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&search="
- "%s'>Search Help</a></li></TD></TR>") % INTERNAL_SEARCH_HELP
- tbl_footer = "</table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
- def setup_recent_search_page(self, searches_list):
- tbl_header = INFORMATION_TABLE_HEADER % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE,
- "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_header += _("alt='[Information]' title='Information' ALIGN='bottom'>"
- "</TD><TD><h3><b>Recent Searches</b></h3><TD></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD> Access stored results from recent searches "
- "in this session.</TD></TR>"
- )
- tbl_body = "<TR><TD></TD><TD>"
- search_list = ""
- for search in searches_list:
- search_list += "<li style='padding-left:7px'>%s: <a href=" % \
- search
- search_list += "'pm?pm-action=internal&search=%s" % \
- INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_RESULTS
- search_list += " <span>%s</span>'>" % search
- search_list += _("results")
- search_list += "</a></li>"
-
- if len(searches_list) > 0:
- tbl_body += "<TR><TD></TD><TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD><TD>"
- tbl_body += ngettext(
- "Click on the search results link below to view the stored "
- "results:", "Click on one of the search results links below "
- "to view the stored results:",
- len(searches_list)
- )
- tbl_body += "</TD></TR><TR><TD></TD><TD>"
- tbl_body += search_list
- tbl_body += "<TD></TD></TR>"
- tbl_footer = "</table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
- def setup_zero_filtered_results_page(self, length_visible_list, filter_desc):
- tbl_header = INFORMATION_TABLE_HEADER % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE,
- "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_header += _("alt='[Information]' title='Information' ALIGN='bottom'>"
- "</TD><TD><h3><b>View Packages</b></h3><TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD>"
- "<TD>")
- tbl_header += ngettext(
- "There is one package in this category, "
- "however it is not visible in the selected View:\n"
- "<li style='padding-left:7px'><b>%s</b></li>",
- "There are a number of packages in this category, "
- "however they are not visible in the selected View:\n"
- "<li style='padding-left:7px'><b>%s</b></li>",
- length_visible_list) % filter_desc
- tbl_body = _("<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD><b>Suggestions:</b><br></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD>"
- )
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>"
- "<a href='pm?pm-action=internal&"
- "search=%s'>Change View to All Packages</a></li>") % \
- INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_ALL
- tbl_footer = "</TD></TR></table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
- def setup_search_zero_filtered_results_page(self, text, num, filter_desc):
- tbl_header = INFORMATION_TABLE_HEADER % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE,
- "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_header += _("alt='[Information]' title='Information' ALIGN='bottom'>"
- "</TD><TD><h3><b>Search Results</b></h3><TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD>"
- "<TD>")
- tbl_header += ngettext(
- "Found <b>%(num)s</b> package matching <b>%(text)s</b> "
- "in All Packages, however it is not listed in the "
- "<b>%(filter)s</b> View.",
- "Found <b>%(num)s</b> packages matching <b>%(text)s</b> "
- "in All Packages, however they are not listed in the "
- "<b>%(filter)s</b> View.", num) % {"num": num, "text": text,
- "filter": filter_desc}
-
- tbl_body = _("<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD><b>Suggestions:</b><br></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD>"
- )
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>"
- "<a href='pm?pm-action=internal&"
- "search=%s'>Change View to All Packages</a></li>") % \
- INTERNAL_SEARCH_VIEW_ALL
- tbl_footer = "</TD></TR></table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
- def setup_search_wildcard_page(self):
- tbl_header = _(
- "<table border='0' cellpadding='3' style='table-layout:fixed' >"
- "<TR><TD><IMG SRC = '%(base)s/%(prefix)sdialog-warning.png' "
- "style='border-style: "
- "none' alt='[Warning]' title='Warning' ALIGN='bottom'></TD>"
- "<TD><h3><b>Search Warning</b></h3><TD></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD>Search using only the wildcard character, "
- "<b>*</b>, is not supported in All Publishers</TD></TR>"
- ) % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE, "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_body = _("<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD></TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD><b>Suggestions:</b><br></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD>"
- "<li style='padding-left:7px'>Try new search terms</li>"
- )
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>"
- "Return to <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&search="
- "%s'>Search All Publishers</a></li>") \
- % INTERNAL_SEARCH_ALL_PUBS_PAGE
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>"
- "See <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&search="
- "%s'>Search Help</a></li></TD></TR>") % INTERNAL_SEARCH_HELP
- tbl_footer = "</table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
- def link_load_error(self, link):
- tbl_header = _(
- "<table border='0' cellpadding='3' style='table-layout:fixed' >"
- "<TR><TD><a href='stub'></a>"
- "<IMG SRC = '%(base)s/%(prefix)sdialog-warning.png' "
- "style='border-style: "
- "none' alt='[Warning]' title='Warning' ALIGN='bottom'>"
- "</TD><TD><h3><b>Warning</b></h3><TD></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD>Unable to load the following URI: </TD></TR>"
- ) % {"base": START_PAGE_IMAGES_BASE, "prefix": self.image_prefix}
- tbl_body = "<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD>"
- tbl_body +="<li style='padding-left:7px'>%s</li></TD></TR>" % (link)
- tbl_body += _("<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD></TD>"
- "</TR><TR><TD></TD><TD<TD><b>Suggestions:</b><br></TD></TR>"
- "<TR><TD></TD><TD<TD>"
- )
- tbl_body += _("<li style='padding-left:7px'>"
- "Return to <a href='pm?pm-action=internal&uri="
- "%s'>Start Page</a></li></TD></TR>") % START_PAGE_HOME
- tbl_footer = "</table>"
- self.__load_internal_page(tbl_header + tbl_body + tbl_footer)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __urlparse_qs(url, keep_blank_values=0, strict_parsing=0):
- scheme, netloc, url, params, querystring, fragment = urlparse.urlparse(
- url)
- if debug:
- print ("Query: scheme %s, netloc %s, url %s, params %s,"
- "querystring %s, fragment %s"
- % (scheme, netloc, url, params, querystring, fragment))
- return parseqs.parse_qs(querystring)
--- a/src/modules/gui/uarenamebe.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,341 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import os
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.client.bootenv as bootenv
-from threading import Thread
-import time
-
-try:
- import gobject
- import gtk
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require("2.0")
-except ImportError:
- import sys
- sys.exit(1)
-
-VALID_BE_NAME = 0
-INVALID_BE_NAME = -1
-DUPLICATE_BE_NAME = -2
-ACTIVATED_BE_NAME = -3 #If the be was not changed by the user
-ERROR_FORMAT = "<span color = \"red\">%s</span>"
-
-class RenameBeAfterUpdateAll:
- def __init__(self, parent, dialog_icon, parent_window):
- if not bootenv.BootEnv.libbe_exists():
- msg = _("The <b>libbe</b> library was not "
- "found on your system.")
- msgbox = gtk.MessageDialog(
- buttons = gtk.BUTTONS_CLOSE,
- flags = gtk.DIALOG_MODAL, type = gtk.MESSAGE_INFO,
- message_format = None)
- msgbox.set_markup(msg)
- msgbox.set_title(_("Rename BE"))
- msgbox.run()
- msgbox.destroy()
- return
-
- # Before performing update all (image-update) task, we are storing
- # the active on reboot be name. If the be name after update is different
- # it means that new BE was created and we can show BE rename dialog
- # otherwise we can show update completed dialog.
- # Also we need to store original BE name to work-around the bug: 6472202
- self.active_be_before_update_all = self.__get_activated_be_name()
-
- self.parent = parent
- self.stop_progress_bouncing = False
- self.stopped_bouncing_progress = True
- builder = gtk.Builder()
- gladefile = os.path.join(self.parent.application_dir,
- "usr/share/package-manager/packagemanager.ui")
- builder.add_from_file(gladefile)
-
- self.w_ua_completed_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("ua_completed_dialog")
- self.w_ua_be_entry = \
- builder.get_object("ua_be_entry")
- self.w_ua_release_notes_button = \
- builder.get_object("release_notes_button")
- self.w_be_error_label = \
- builder.get_object("be_error_label")
- self.w_ua_help_button = \
- builder.get_object("ua_help_button")
- self.w_ua_restart_later_button = \
- builder.get_object("ua_restart_later_button")
- self.w_ua_restart_now_button = \
- builder.get_object("ua_restart_now_button")
- self.w_ua_ok_image = \
- builder.get_object("ua_ok_image")
- self.w_ua_whats_this_button = \
- builder.get_object("ua_whats_this_button")
- self.w_ua_whats_this_button.set_tooltip_text(_(
- "A boot environment (BE) contains the operating\n"
- "system image and updated packages. The\n"
- "system will boot into the new BE on restart."))
-
- self.w_progress_dialog = builder.get_object("progressdialog")
- self.w_progressinfo_label = builder.get_object("progressinfo")
- self.w_progress_cancel = builder.get_object("progresscancel")
- self.w_progressbar = builder.get_object("progressbar")
- self.w_progress_dialog.connect('delete-event', lambda stub1, stub2: True)
- self.w_progress_cancel.set_sensitive(False)
-
- self.w_progress_dialog.set_title(_("Rename BE"))
- self.w_progressinfo_label.set_text(_("Renaming BE, please wait..."))
-
- self.w_progress_dialog.set_icon(dialog_icon)
- self.w_ua_completed_dialog.set_icon(dialog_icon)
-
- checkmark_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(
- self.parent.icon_theme, "pm-check", 24)
-
- self.w_ua_ok_image.set_from_pixbuf(checkmark_icon)
-
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_progress_dialog, parent_window)
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_ua_completed_dialog,
- parent_window)
-
- self.__setup_signals()
-
- def __setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_ua_help_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_ua_help_button_clicked),
- (self.w_ua_restart_later_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_ua_restart_later_button_clicked),
- (self.w_ua_restart_now_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_ua_restart_now_button_clicked),
- (self.w_ua_completed_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_ua_completed_dialog_delete_event),
- (self.w_ua_be_entry, "changed",
- self.__on_ua_be_entry_changed),
- (self.w_ua_whats_this_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_ua_whats_this_button_clicked),
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def show_rename_dialog(self, updated_packages_list):
- '''Returns False if no BE rename is needed'''
- orig_name = self.__get_activated_be_name()
- if orig_name == self.active_be_before_update_all:
- self.w_ua_completed_dialog.hide()
- self.parent.update_package_list(updated_packages_list)
- return False
- else:
- self.__set_release_notes_url()
- self.__setup_be_name()
- self.w_ua_completed_dialog.show_all()
- return True
-
- def __set_release_notes_url(self):
- info_url = misc.get_release_notes_url()
- if info_url and len(info_url) == 0:
- info_url = gui_misc.RELEASE_URL
- self.w_ua_release_notes_button.set_uri(info_url)
-
- def __on_ua_restart_later_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__proceed_after_update()
-
- def __on_ua_restart_now_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__proceed_after_update(True)
-
- def __on_ua_whats_this_button_clicked(self, widget):
- msgbox = gtk.MessageDialog(parent = self.w_ua_completed_dialog,
- buttons = gtk.BUTTONS_CLOSE,
- flags = gtk.DIALOG_MODAL,
- type = gtk.MESSAGE_INFO,
- message_format = None)
- msgbox.set_property('text',
- _(self.w_ua_whats_this_button.get_tooltip_text()))
- title = _("Update All")
-
- msgbox.set_title(title)
- msgbox.run()
- msgbox.destroy()
-
- def __on_ua_completed_dialog_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__proceed_after_update()
-
- def __proceed_after_update(self, reboot=False):
- orig_name = self.__get_activated_be_name()
- new_name = self.w_ua_be_entry.get_text()
- Thread(target = self.__set_be_name,
- args = (orig_name, new_name, reboot)).start()
- self.w_ua_completed_dialog.hide()
-
- def __set_be_name(self, orig_name, new_name, reboot):
- ret_code = self.__verify_be_name(new_name)
- be_rename_code = 0
- if ret_code != ACTIVATED_BE_NAME:
- self.__start_bouncing_progress()
- be_rename_code = self.__rename_be(orig_name, new_name)
- if be_rename_code != 0:
- # Workaround for bug: 6472202
- # If the rename didn't work for the first time, we should:
- # - Activate current BE - active_name
- # - Rename the BE orig_name to BE new_name
- # - Activate the BE new_name
- active_name = self.__get_active_be_name()
- workaround_code = self.__workaround_for_6472202(
- active_name, orig_name, new_name)
- if workaround_code != 0:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__g_be_rename_problem_dialog,
- new_name, orig_name)
- if reboot:
- ret = gui_misc.restart_system()
- if ret != 0:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__g_be_reboot_problem_dialog)
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.shutdown_after_image_update)
- self.__stop_bouncing_progress()
- gobject.idle_add(self.parent.shutdown_after_image_update, False)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __g_be_rename_problem_dialog(new_name, orig_name):
- msg_type = gtk.MESSAGE_INFO
- error_msg = _("Could not change the BE name to:\n\t"
- "%(targ)s\n\nThe following name will be used instead:"
- "\n\t%(instead)s") % \
- {"targ": new_name, "instead": orig_name}
- msg_title = _("BE Name")
- gui_misc.error_occurred(None, error_msg, msg_title, msg_type)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __g_be_reboot_problem_dialog():
- msg_type = gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR
- error_msg = _("Could not restart the system."
- "\nPlease restart the system manually.")
- msg_title = _("Restart Error")
- gui_misc.error_occurred(None, error_msg, msg_title, msg_type)
-
- def __on_ua_be_entry_changed(self, widget):
- if len(widget.get_text()) == 0:
- self.w_be_error_label.hide()
- self.__set_buttons_state(False)
- return
- ret_code = self.__verify_be_name(widget.get_text())
- if ret_code == ACTIVATED_BE_NAME:
- self.__set_buttons_state(True)
- self.w_be_error_label.hide()
- elif ret_code == DUPLICATE_BE_NAME:
- self.__set_buttons_state(False)
- error_string = _("This name already exists.")
- error = ERROR_FORMAT % error_string
- self.w_be_error_label.set_markup(error)
- self.w_be_error_label.show()
- elif ret_code == INVALID_BE_NAME:
- self.__set_buttons_state(False)
- error_string = _("BE name contains invalid character.")
- error = ERROR_FORMAT % error_string
- self.w_be_error_label.set_markup(error)
- self.w_be_error_label.show()
- else:
- self.__set_buttons_state(True)
- self.w_be_error_label.hide()
-
- def __set_buttons_state(self, sensitive=False):
- self.w_ua_restart_later_button.set_sensitive(sensitive)
- self.w_ua_restart_now_button.set_sensitive(sensitive)
-
- def __setup_be_name(self):
- proposed_name = self.__get_activated_be_name()
- self.w_ua_be_entry.set_text(proposed_name)
-
- def __verify_be_name(self, new_name):
- try:
- bootenv.BootEnv.check_be_name(new_name)
- except api_errors.DuplicateBEName:
- if new_name == self.__get_activated_be_name():
- return ACTIVATED_BE_NAME
- else:
- return DUPLICATE_BE_NAME
- except api_errors.ApiException:
- return INVALID_BE_NAME
- return VALID_BE_NAME
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_activated_be_name():
- try:
- name = bootenv.BootEnv.get_activated_be_name()
- except api_errors.ApiException:
- name = ""
- return name
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_active_be_name():
- try:
- name = bootenv.BootEnv.get_active_be_name()
- except api_errors.ApiException:
- name = ""
- return name
-
- def __start_bouncing_progress(self):
- self.stop_progress_bouncing = False
- self.stopped_bouncing_progress = False
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progress_dialog.show)
- Thread(target =
- self.__g_progressdialog_progress_pulse).start()
-
- def __stop_bouncing_progress(self):
- if self.__is_progress_bouncing():
- self.stop_progress_bouncing = True
-
- def __g_progressdialog_progress_pulse(self):
- while not self.stop_progress_bouncing:
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progressbar.pulse)
- time.sleep(0.1)
- self.stopped_bouncing_progress = True
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progress_dialog.hide)
-
- def __is_progress_bouncing(self):
- return not self.stopped_bouncing_progress
-
- @staticmethod
- def __rename_be(orig_name, new_name):
- # The rename operation is i/o intensive, so the gui
- # progress is not responsive. This will allow to show the
- # gui progress.
- time.sleep(0.2)
- return bootenv.BootEnv.rename_be(orig_name, new_name)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __workaround_for_6472202(active_name, orig_name, new_name):
- ret_code = 0
- ret_code = bootenv.BootEnv.set_default_be(active_name)
- if ret_code == 0:
- ret_code = bootenv.BootEnv.rename_be(orig_name, new_name)
- if ret_code == 0:
- ret_code = bootenv.BootEnv.set_default_be(new_name)
- else:
- bootenv.BootEnv.set_default_be(orig_name)
- return ret_code
-
- @staticmethod
- def __on_ua_help_button_clicked(widget):
- gui_misc.display_help("um_info")
--- a/src/modules/gui/versioninfo.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,254 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-import sys
-try:
- import gobject
- import pango
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-
-class VersionInfo:
- def __init__(self, builder, parent):
- self.parent = parent
- self.w_version_info_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("version_info_dialog")
- self.w_info_name_label = builder.get_object("info_name")
- self.w_info_installed_label = builder.get_object(
- "info_installed")
- self.w_info_installable_label = builder.get_object(
- "info_installable")
- self.w_info_installable_prefix_label = builder.get_object(
- "info_installable_label")
- self.w_info_ok_button = builder.get_object("info_ok_button")
- self.w_info_help_button = builder.get_object("info_help_button")
- self.w_info_expander = builder.get_object(
- "version_info_expander")
- self.w_info_textview = builder.get_object("infotextview")
- infobuffer = self.w_info_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
-
- def setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_info_ok_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_info_ok_button_clicked),
- (self.w_info_help_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_info_help_button_clicked),
- (self.w_version_info_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_version_info_dialog_delete_event)
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def set_modal_and_transient(self, parent_window):
- gui_misc.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_version_info_dialog,
- parent_window)
-
- def get_info(self, pkg_stem, name):
- api_o = self.parent.get_api_object()
- local_info = gui_misc.get_pkg_info(self.parent, api_o, pkg_stem, True)
- remote_info = gui_misc.get_pkg_info(self.parent, api_o, pkg_stem, False)
- if self.parent.check_exiting():
- return False
-
- plan_pkg = None
-
- installed_only = False
- if local_info:
- if gui_misc.same_pkg_versions(local_info, remote_info):
- installed_only = True
-
- if not installed_only:
- install_update_list = []
- stuff_to_do = False
- install_update_list.append(pkg_stem)
- for pd in api_o.gen_plan_install(install_update_list,
- refresh_catalogs=False):
- continue
- stuff_to_do = not api_o.planned_nothingtodo()
- if stuff_to_do:
- plan_desc = api_o.describe()
- if plan_desc == None:
- return
- plan = plan_desc.get_changes()
- plan_pkg = None
- for pkg_plan in plan:
- if name == pkg_plan[1].pkg_stem:
- plan_pkg = pkg_plan[1]
- break
- if plan_pkg == None:
- return True
- gobject.idle_add(self.__after_get_info, local_info, remote_info,
- plan_pkg, name)
- return False
-
- def __hide_pkg_version_details(self):
- self.w_info_expander.hide()
- self.w_version_info_dialog.set_size_request(-1, -1)
-
-
- def __after_get_info(self, local_info, remote_info, plan_pkg, name):
- if self.parent.check_exiting():
- return
- self.w_info_name_label.set_text(name)
- installable_fmt = \
- _("%(version)s (Build %(build)s-%(branch)s)")
- installed_label = ""
- installable_label = ""
- installable_prefix_label = _("<b>Installable Version:</b>")
-
- if local_info:
- # Installed
- installable_prefix_label = _("<b>Upgradeable Version:</b>")
- yes_text = _("Yes, %(version)s (Build %(build)s-%(branch)s)")
- installed_label = yes_text % \
- {"version": local_info.version,
- "build": local_info.build_release,
- "branch": local_info.branch}
- if gui_misc.same_pkg_versions(local_info, remote_info):
- # Installed and up to date
- installable_label = \
- _("Installed package is up-to-date")
- self.__hide_pkg_version_details()
- else:
- if plan_pkg == None:
- # Installed with later version but can't upgrade
- # Upgradeable Version: None
- installable_label = _("None")
- self.__setup_version_info_details(name,
- remote_info.version,
- remote_info.build_release,
- remote_info.branch, False)
- else:
- # Installed with later version and can upgrade to
- # Upgradeable Version: <version>
- # Upgradeable == Latest Version
- if gui_misc.same_pkg_versions(plan_pkg,
- remote_info):
- installable_label = installable_fmt % \
- {"version": plan_pkg.version,
- "build": plan_pkg.build_release,
- "branch": plan_pkg.branch}
- self.__hide_pkg_version_details()
- else:
- # Installed with later version and can upgrade
- # Upgradeable Version: <version>
- # but NOT to the Latest Version
- installable_label = installable_fmt % \
- {"version": plan_pkg.version,
- "build": plan_pkg.build_release,
- "branch": plan_pkg.branch}
-
- self.__setup_version_info_details(name,
- remote_info.version,
- remote_info.build_release,
- remote_info.branch, False)
- else:
- # Not Installed
- installed_label = _("No")
- if plan_pkg:
- # Not installed with later version available to install
- # Installable: <version>
- # Installable == Latest Version
- if gui_misc.same_pkg_versions(plan_pkg, remote_info):
- installable_label = installable_fmt % \
- {"version": plan_pkg.version,
- "build": plan_pkg.build_release,
- "branch": plan_pkg.branch}
- self.__hide_pkg_version_details()
- else:
- # Not installed with later version available
- # Installable: <version>
- # but NOT to the Latest Version
- installable_label = installable_fmt % \
- {"version": plan_pkg.version,
- "build": plan_pkg.build_release,
- "branch": plan_pkg.branch}
-
- self.__setup_version_info_details(name,
- remote_info.version,
- remote_info.build_release,
- remote_info.branch, True)
- else:
- # Not Installed with later version and can't install
- # Installable Version: None
- installable_label = _("None")
- self.__setup_version_info_details(name,
- remote_info.version,
- remote_info.build_release,
- remote_info.branch, True)
-
- self.w_info_installed_label.set_text(installed_label)
- self.w_info_installable_label.set_text(installable_label)
- self.w_info_installable_prefix_label.set_markup(installable_prefix_label)
- self.w_info_ok_button.grab_focus()
- self.w_version_info_dialog.show()
- self.parent.unset_busy_cursor()
-
- def __setup_version_info_details(self, name, version, build_release, branch,
- to_be_installed):
- installable_fmt = \
- _("%(version)s (Build %(build)s-%(branch)s)")
- if to_be_installed:
- expander_fmt = _(
- "The latest version of %s cannot be installed."
- )
- else:
- expander_fmt = _(
- "Cannot upgrade to the latest version of %s."
- )
- installable_exp = installable_fmt % \
- {"version": version,
- "build": build_release,
- "branch": branch}
- expander_text = installable_exp + "\n\n"
- expander_text += expander_fmt % name
-
- # Ensure we have enough room for the Details message
- # without requiring a scrollbar
- self.w_info_textview.set_size_request(484, 95)
- self.w_info_expander.set_expanded(True)
- self.w_info_expander.show()
-
- details_buff = self.w_info_textview.get_buffer()
- details_buff.set_text("")
- itr = details_buff.get_iter_at_line(0)
- details_buff.insert_with_tags_by_name(itr,
- _("Latest Version: "), "bold")
- details_buff.insert(itr, expander_text)
-
- def __on_info_ok_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_version_info_dialog.hide()
-
- @staticmethod
- def __on_info_help_button_clicked(widget):
- gui_misc.display_help("package-version")
-
- def __on_version_info_dialog_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- self.__on_info_ok_button_clicked(None)
- return True
-
-
--- a/src/modules/gui/webinstall.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,493 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-#
-
-# Location for themable icons
-ICON_LOCATION = "usr/share/package-manager/icons"
-
-import locale
-import os
-import sys
-import gettext
-try:
- import gobject
- import gtk
- import pango
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.progress as progress
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.gui.installupdate as installupdate
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-import pkg.gui.repository as repository
-import pkg.fmri as fmri
-import pkg.client.publisher as publisher
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-from gettext import ngettext
-logger = global_settings.logger
-
-debug = False
-
-class Webinstall:
- def __init__(self, image_dir):
- global_settings.client_name = gui_misc.get_wi_name()
- self.image_dir = image_dir
-
- try:
- self.application_dir = os.environ["PACKAGE_MANAGER_ROOT"]
- except KeyError:
- self.application_dir = "/"
- misc.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
- for module in (gettext, gtk.glade):
- module.bindtextdomain("pkg", os.path.join(
- self.application_dir,
- "usr/share/locale"))
- module.textdomain("pkg")
- gui_misc.init_for_help(self.application_dir)
- self.pub_pkg_list = None
- self.pr = progress.NullProgressTracker()
- self.pub_new_tasks = []
- self.pkg_install_tasks = []
- self.icon_theme = gtk.icon_theme_get_default()
- icon_location = os.path.join(self.application_dir, ICON_LOCATION)
- self.icon_theme.append_search_path(icon_location)
- self.param = None
- self.disabled_pubs = {}
- self.repo_gui = None
- self.first_run = True
-
- # Webinstall Dialog
- builder = gtk.Builder()
- self.gladefile = os.path.join(self.application_dir,
- "usr/share/package-manager/packagemanager.ui")
- builder.add_from_file(self.gladefile)
- self.w_webinstall_dialog = \
- builder.get_object("webinstalldialog")
-
- self.w_webinstall_proceed = \
- builder.get_object("proceed_button")
- self.w_webinstall_cancel = \
- builder.get_object("cancel_button")
- self.w_webinstall_help = \
- builder.get_object("help_button")
- self.w_webinstall_close = \
- builder.get_object("close_button")
- self.w_webinstall_proceed_label = \
- builder.get_object("proceed_new_repo_label")
- self.w_webinstall_toplabel = \
- builder.get_object("webinstall_toplabel")
- self.w_webinstall_frame = \
- builder.get_object("webinstall_frame")
- self.w_webinstall_image = \
- builder.get_object("pkgimage")
- self.window_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(self.icon_theme,
- 'packagemanager', 48)
- self.w_webinstall_image.set_from_pixbuf(self.window_icon)
- self.w_webinstall_info_label = \
- builder.get_object("label19")
-
- self.w_webinstall_textview = \
- builder.get_object("webinstall_textview")
- infobuffer = self.w_webinstall_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.create_tag("bold", weight=pango.WEIGHT_BOLD)
- infobuffer.create_tag("disabled", foreground="#757575") #Close to DimGrey
-
- self.__setup_signals()
-
- self.w_webinstall_dialog.set_icon(self.window_icon)
- self.api_o = gui_misc.get_api_object(self.image_dir, self.pr,
- self.w_webinstall_dialog)
- gui_misc.setup_logging()
-
- def __setup_signals(self):
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_webinstall_dialog, "destroy_event",
- self.__on_webinstall_dialog_close),
- (self.w_webinstall_dialog, "close",
- self.__on_webinstall_dialog_close),
- (self.w_webinstall_dialog, "delete_event",
- self.__on_webinstall_dialog_close),
- (self.w_webinstall_cancel, "clicked",
- self.__on_cancel_button_clicked),
- (self.w_webinstall_close, "clicked",
- self.__on_cancel_button_clicked),
- (self.w_webinstall_help, "clicked",
- self.__on_help_button_clicked),
- (self.w_webinstall_proceed, "clicked",
- self.__on_proceed_button_clicked),
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- def __output_new_pub_tasks(self, infobuffer, textiter, num_tasks):
- if num_tasks == 0:
- return
- msg = ngettext(
- "\n Add New Publisher\n", "\n Add New Publishers\n", num_tasks)
- infobuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, msg, "bold")
- self.__output_pub_tasks(infobuffer, textiter, self.pub_new_tasks)
-
- def __nothing_todo(self, infobuffer, textiter):
- self.w_webinstall_proceed.hide()
- self.w_webinstall_cancel.hide()
- self.w_webinstall_frame.hide()
- self.w_webinstall_toplabel.set_text(
- _("All specified publishers are already on the system."))
- self.w_webinstall_close.show()
- self.w_webinstall_close.grab_focus()
-
- def __output_pub_tasks(self, infobuffer, textiter, pub_tasks):
- for pub_info in pub_tasks:
- if pub_info == None:
- continue
- infobuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- _("\t%s ") % pub_info.prefix, "bold")
- repo = pub_info.repository
- if repo != None and repo.origins != None and \
- len(repo.origins) > 0:
- infobuffer.insert(textiter,
- _(" (%s)\n") % repo.origins[0].uri)
- else:
- infobuffer.insert(textiter,
- _(" (No origin specified in the p5i file)\n"))
- self.w_webinstall_proceed.hide()
- msg = _("Publishers can <b>only</b> be added"
- " if they have an origin specified.")
- self.w_webinstall_proceed_label.set_markup(msg)
-
- def __output_pkg_install_tasks(self, infobuffer, textiter, num_tasks):
- if num_tasks == 0:
- return
- msg = ngettext(
- "\n Install Package\n", "\n Install Packages\n", num_tasks)
- infobuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter, msg, "bold")
- for entry in self.pkg_install_tasks:
- pub_info = entry[0]
- packages = entry[1]
- if len(packages) > 0:
- if self.disabled_pubs and \
- pub_info.prefix in self.disabled_pubs:
- infobuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- _("\t%s (disabled)\n") % pub_info.prefix,
- "bold", "disabled")
- else:
- infobuffer.insert_with_tags_by_name(textiter,
- "\t%s\n" % pub_info.prefix, "bold")
- for pkg in packages:
- infobuffer.insert(textiter,
- "\t\t%s\n" % fmri.extract_pkg_name(pkg))
-
- def process_param(self, param=None):
- if param == None or self.api_o == None:
- self.w_webinstall_proceed.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_webinstall_cancel.grab_focus()
- return
- self.param = param
- self.pub_pkg_list = self.api_parse_publisher_info()
- self.__create_task_lists()
- infobuffer = self.w_webinstall_textview.get_buffer()
- infobuffer.set_text("")
-
- num_new_pub = len(self.pub_new_tasks)
- num_install_tasks = 0
- for entry in self.pkg_install_tasks:
- packages = entry[1]
- num_install_tasks += len(packages)
-
- self.__set_proceed_label(num_new_pub)
- textiter = infobuffer.get_end_iter()
- if num_new_pub == 0 and num_install_tasks == 0:
- self.__nothing_todo(infobuffer, textiter)
- self.w_webinstall_dialog.present()
- self.w_webinstall_dialog.resize(450, 100)
- return
- else:
- gui_misc.change_stockbutton_label(self.w_webinstall_proceed,
- _("_Proceed"))
- self.w_webinstall_dialog.show_all()
- self.w_webinstall_dialog.resize(450, 370)
-
- self.__output_new_pub_tasks(infobuffer, textiter, num_new_pub)
- self.__output_pkg_install_tasks(infobuffer, textiter, num_install_tasks)
-
- infobuffer.place_cursor(infobuffer.get_start_iter())
- self.w_webinstall_proceed.grab_focus()
-
- def __set_proceed_label(self, num_new_pub):
- if num_new_pub == 0:
- self.w_webinstall_proceed_label.hide()
- else:
- msg = ngettext(
- "Click Proceed <b>only</b> if you trust this new "
- "publisher ",
- "Click Proceed <b>only</b> if you trust these new "
- "publishers ",
- num_new_pub)
- self.w_webinstall_proceed_label.set_markup(msg)
-
- def __on_webinstall_dialog_close(self, widget, param=None):
- self.__exit_app()
-
- def __on_cancel_button_clicked(self, widget):
- self.__exit_app()
-
- @staticmethod
- def __on_help_button_clicked(widget):
- gui_misc.display_help("webinstall")
-
- def __exit_app(self, be_name = None):
- gui_misc.shutdown_logging()
- self.w_webinstall_dialog.destroy()
- gtk.main_quit()
- sys.exit(0)
- return
-
- def __create_task_lists(self):
- pub_new_reg_ssl_tasks = []
- self.pub_new_tasks = []
- self.pkg_install_tasks = []
- for entry in self.pub_pkg_list:
- pub_info = entry[0]
- packages = entry[1]
- if not pub_info:
- continue
-
- repo = pub_info.repository
-
- pub_registered = self.__is_publisher_registered(pub_info.prefix)
- if pub_registered and packages != None and len(packages) > 0 and \
- self.__check_publisher_disabled(pub_info.prefix):
- self.disabled_pubs[pub_info.prefix] = True
-
- if not pub_registered:
- if repo and repo.origins and \
- repo.origins[0] != None and \
- repo.origins[0].scheme in publisher.SSL_SCHEMES:
-
- #TBD: check for registration uri as well as scheme
- # repo.registration_uri.uri != None:
- pub_new_reg_ssl_tasks.append(pub_info)
- else:
- self.pub_new_tasks.append(pub_info)
- if packages != None and len(packages) > 0:
- self.pkg_install_tasks.append((pub_info, packages))
- self.pub_new_tasks = pub_new_reg_ssl_tasks + self.pub_new_tasks
- if len(self.pub_new_tasks) > 0 or len(self.disabled_pubs) > 0 and \
- self.repo_gui == None:
- self.repo_gui = repository.Repository(self, self.image_dir,
- webinstall_new=True, main_window = self.w_webinstall_dialog)
-
- def __check_publisher_disabled(self, name):
- try:
- if self.api_o == None:
- return
- try:
- pub = self.api_o.get_publisher(name)
- if pub != None and pub.disabled:
- return True
- except api_errors.UnknownPublisher:
- return False
- except api_errors.PublisherError, ex:
- gobject.idle_add(gui_misc.error_occurred,
- self.w_webinstall_dialog,
- str(ex),
- _("Publisher Error"))
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- gobject.idle_add(gui_misc.error_occurred,
- self.w_webinstall_dialog,
- str(ex), _("Web Installer Error"))
- return False
-
- def __disabled_pubs_info(self, disabled_pubs):
- if len(disabled_pubs) == 0:
- return
- num = len(disabled_pubs)
- msg = ngettext(
- "The following publisher is disabled:\n",
- "The following publishers are disabled:\n", num)
-
- for pub in disabled_pubs:
- msg += _("\t<b>%s</b>\n") % pub
-
- msg += ngettext(
- "\nClicking OK will enable the publisher before proceeding with "
- "install. On completion it will be disabled again.",
- "\nClicking OK will enable the publishers before proceeding with "
- "install.\nOn completion they will be disabled again.",
- num)
-
- msgbox = gtk.MessageDialog(
- parent = self.w_webinstall_dialog,
- buttons = gtk.BUTTONS_OK_CANCEL,
- flags = gtk.DIALOG_MODAL, type = gtk.MESSAGE_INFO,
- message_format = None)
- msgbox.set_markup(msg)
- title = ngettext("Disabled Publisher", "Disabled Publishers",
- len(disabled_pubs))
- msgbox.set_title(title)
- msgbox.set_default_response(gtk.RESPONSE_OK)
-
- response = msgbox.run()
- if response == gtk.RESPONSE_OK:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__proceed)
- msgbox.destroy()
- return
-
- def __is_publisher_registered(self, name):
- try:
- if self.api_o != None and self.api_o.has_publisher(name):
- return True
- except api_errors.PublisherError, ex:
- gobject.idle_add(gui_misc.error_occurred,
- self.w_webinstall_dialog,
- str(ex), _("Publisher Error"))
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- gobject.idle_add(gui_misc.error_occurred,
- self.w_webinstall_dialog,
- str(ex), _("Web Installer Error"))
- return False
-
- def __on_proceed_button_clicked(self, widget):
- if not self.first_run:
- try:
- self.api_o.reset()
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- gobject.idle_add(gui_misc.error_occurred,
- self.w_webinstall_dialog,
- str(ex), _("Web Installer Error"))
- return
- self.pub_pkg_list = self.api_parse_publisher_info()
- self.__create_task_lists()
- else:
- self.first_run = False
- if self.disabled_pubs and len(self.disabled_pubs) > 0:
- self.__disabled_pubs_info(self.disabled_pubs)
- else:
- self.__proceed()
-
- def __proceed(self):
- if len(self.disabled_pubs) > 0 and self.repo_gui:
- self.repo_gui.webinstall_enable_disable_pubs(
- self.w_webinstall_dialog, self.disabled_pubs, True)
- return
- if len(self.pub_new_tasks) > 0:
- self.__add_new_pub()
- return
- if len(self.pkg_install_tasks) > 0:
- self.__install_pkgs()
- return
-
- def __add_new_pub(self):
- if len(self.pub_new_tasks) == 0:
- return
- pub = self.pub_new_tasks[0]
- if debug:
- print("Add New Publisher:\n\tName: %s" % pub.prefix)
- repo = pub.repository
- if repo != None and repo.origins != None and \
- len(repo.origins) > 0:
- print("\tURL: %s" % repo.origins[0].uri)
-
- repo = pub.repository
- if repo and len(repo.origins) > 0 and self.repo_gui:
- self.repo_gui.webinstall_new_pub(self.w_webinstall_dialog, pub)
- else:
- msg = _("Failed to add %s.\n") % pub
- msg += _("No URI specified")
- gui_misc.error_occurred(
- self.w_webinstall_dialog,
- msg, _("Publisher Error"))
-
- # Publisher Callback
- # invoked at end of adding a publisher and enabling/disabling a set of publishers
- def reload_packages(self, added_pub=True):
- if len(self.pub_new_tasks) > 0:
- if added_pub:
- self.pub_new_tasks.pop(0)
- if len(self.pub_new_tasks) > 0:
- self.__add_new_pub()
- return
-
- if len(self.pkg_install_tasks) > 0:
- self.api_o = gui_misc.get_api_object(self.image_dir, self.pr,
- self.w_webinstall_dialog)
- self.__install_pkgs()
- else:
- self.__exit_app()
-
- def __install_pkgs(self):
- if len(self.pkg_install_tasks) == 0:
- return
- # Handle all packages from all pubs as single install action
- all_package_stems = []
- for pkg_installs in self.pkg_install_tasks:
- pub_info = pkg_installs[0]
- packages = pkg_installs[1]
- pub_pkg_stems = self.process_pkg_stems(pub_info, packages)
- for pkg in pub_pkg_stems:
- all_package_stems.append(pkg)
- if debug:
- print "Install Packages: %s" % all_package_stems
-
- installupdate.InstallUpdate(all_package_stems, self, self.image_dir,
- action = enumerations.INSTALL_UPDATE,
- parent_name = _("Package Manager"),
- main_window = self.w_webinstall_dialog,
- web_install = True)
-
- def process_pkg_stems(self, pub_info, packages):
- if not self.__is_publisher_registered(pub_info.prefix):
- return []
- pkg_stem = "pkg://" + pub_info.prefix + "/"
- packages_with_stem = []
- for pkg in packages:
- if pkg.startswith(pkg_stem):
- packages_with_stem.append(pkg)
- else:
- packages_with_stem.append(pkg_stem + pkg)
- return packages_with_stem
-
- # Install Callback - invoked at end of installing packages
- def update_package_list(self, update_list):
- if update_list == None:
- return
- self.pkg_install_tasks = []
- if len(self.disabled_pubs) > 0 and self.repo_gui:
- gobject.idle_add(self.repo_gui.webinstall_enable_disable_pubs,
- self.w_webinstall_dialog, self.disabled_pubs, False)
- return
- self.__exit_app()
-
- def api_parse_publisher_info(self):
- '''<path to mimetype file|origin_url>
- returns list of publisher and package list tuples'''
- try:
- return self.api_o.parse_p5i(location=self.param)
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- msg = str(ex)
- print _("Web Installer Error: %s") % (msg)
- sys.exit(1)
- return None
--- a/src/packagemanager.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,4998 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python2.6
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-NOTEBOOK_PACKAGE_LIST_PAGE = 0 # Main Package List page index
-NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE = 1 # Main View Start page index
-INFO_NOTEBOOK_DEPENDENCIES_PAGE = 2 # Dependencies Tab index
-INFO_NOTEBOOK_LICENSE_PAGE = 3 # License Tab index
-INFO_NOTEBOOK_VERSIONS_PAGE = 4 # Versions Tab index
-PM_LAUNCH_OPEN_CMD = "pm-launch: OPEN:" # Command to tell pm-launch to open link.
-PUBLISHER_ALL = 0 # Index for "All Publishers" string
-PUBLISHER_INSTALLED = 1 # Index for "All Installed Packages" string
-PUBLISHER_ALL_SEARCH = 2 # Index for "All Publishers (Search)" string
-PUBLISHER_ADD = 3 # Index for "Add..." string
-SHOW_INFO_DELAY = 100 # Delay before showing selected package information
-SHOW_DEPENDENCIES_DELAY = 100 # Delay before showing selected package dependencies
-SHOW_LICENSE_DELAY = 100 # Delay before showing license information
-SHOW_VERSIONS_DELAY = 100 # Delay before showing versions information
-RESIZE_DELAY = 600 # Delay before handling resize for startpage
-INC_RESULTS_DELAY = 800 # Delay before updating incremental search results
-SEARCH_STR_FORMAT = "<%s>"
-MIN_APP_WIDTH = 750 # Minimum application width
-MIN_APP_HEIGHT = 500 # Minimum application height
-SECTION_ID_OFFSET = 10000 # Offset to allow Sections to be identified
- # in category tree
-RECENT_SEARCH_ID_OFFSET = 10999 # Offset to allow Recent Search Sections
- # to be identified in category tree
-RECENT_SEARCH_ID = RECENT_SEARCH_ID_OFFSET + 1 # Recent Search Section ID
-CATEGORY_TOGGLE_ICON_WIDTH = 16 # Width of category toggle icon
-STATUS_COLUMN_INDEX = 2 # Index of Status Column in Application TreeView
-GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS = 5 # gtk.gdk._2BUTTON_PRESS causes pylint warning
-GDK_RIGHT_BUTTON = 3 # normally button 3 = right click
-
-VIEW_COMBOBOX_WIDTH_PADDING = 72 # Padding for View combobox, icon, spacing and dropdown
-VIEW_COMBOBOX_MIN_WIDTH = 143 # Min width for View combobox, 10pt default font
-VIEW_COMBOBOX_MAX_WIDTH = 312 # Max width for View combobox, 20pt default font
-PUBLISHER_VIEW_MIN_PADDING = 25 # Min space between Publisher and View comboboxes
-
-# Location for themable icons
-ICON_LOCATION = "usr/share/package-manager/icons"
-
-import getopt
-import pwd
-import os
-import sys
-import time
-import locale
-import itertools
-import socket
-import gettext
-import signal
-import re
-from xml.sax import saxutils
-from threading import Thread
-from gettext import ngettext
-
-try:
- import gobject
- import gnome
- gobject.threads_init()
- import gtk
- import gtk.glade
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require("2.0")
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.client.progress as progress
-import pkg.client.api_errors as api_errors
-import pkg.client.api as api
-import pkg.client.publisher as publisher
-import pkg.portable as portable
-import pkg.fmri as fmri
-import pkg.nrlock as nrlock
-import pkg.gui.beadmin as beadm
-import pkg.gui.cache as cache
-import pkg.gui.detailspanel as detailspanel
-import pkg.gui.entrystyle as entrystyle
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-import pkg.gui.exportconfirm as exportconfirm
-import pkg.gui.globalexceptionhandler as globalexceptionhandler
-import pkg.gui.imageinfo as imageinfo
-import pkg.gui.installupdate as installupdate
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.pmgconf as gconf
-import pkg.gui.pmlogging as logging
-import pkg.gui.preferences as preferences
-import pkg.gui.repository as repository
-import pkg.gui.searcherror as searcherror
-import pkg.gui.startpage as startpage
-import pkg.gui.webinstall as webinstall
-import pkg.gui.versioninfo as versioninfo
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-
-logger = global_settings.logger
-
-# Put _() in the global namespace
-import __builtin__
-__builtin__._ = gettext.gettext
-
-REGEX_STRIP_MARKUP = re.compile(r'<.*?>')
-REGEX_STRIP_RESULT = re.compile(r'\(\d+\) ?')
-
-class PackageManager:
- def __init__(self, title):
- self.allow_links = False
- self.program_title = title
- signal.signal(signal.SIGINT, self.__main_application_quit)
- self.is_admin = portable.is_admin()
- self.user_rights = True
- self.api_lock = nrlock.NRLock()
- self.__reset_home_dir()
- self.api_o = None
- self.cache_o = None
- self.child = None
- self.img_timestamp = None
- self.gconf = gconf.PMGConf()
- self.set_section = 0
- self.after_install_remove = False
- self.in_search_mode = False
- self.search_results_id = 0
- self.search_results = []
- self.in_recent_search = False
- self.recent_searches = {}
- self.recent_searches_cat_iter = None
- self.adding_recent_search = False
- self.recent_searches_list = []
- self.previous_search_text = None
-
- global_settings.client_name = gui_misc.get_pm_name()
-
- # This call only affects sockets created by Python. The
- # transport framework uses the defaults in global_settings,
- # which may be overridden in the environment. The default
- # socket module should only be used in rare cases by ancillary
- # code, making it safe to code the value here, at least for now.
- socket.setdefaulttimeout(30) # in secs
-
- try:
- self.application_dir = os.environ["PACKAGE_MANAGER_ROOT"]
- except KeyError:
- self.application_dir = "/"
- misc.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
- for module in (gettext, gtk.glade):
- module.bindtextdomain("pkg", os.path.join(
- self.application_dir,
- "usr/share/locale"))
- module.textdomain("pkg")
- gui_misc.init_for_help(self.application_dir)
- self.startpage = startpage.StartPage(self, self.application_dir)
- self.gdk_window = None
- self.cancelled = False # For background processes
- self.image_directory = None
- gtk.rc_parse('~/.gtkrc-1.2-gnome2') # Load gtk theme
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
- self.progress_thread_stopped = True
- self.update_all_proceed = False
- self.application_path = None
- self.default_publisher = None
- self.current_repos_with_search_errors = []
- self.exiting = False
- self.first_run = True
- self.info_pkgstem = None
- self.dependencies_pkgstem = None
- self.license_pkgstem = None
- self.versions_pkgstem = None
- self.selected_pkg_name = None
- self.selected_pkg_pub = None
- self.selected_pkgstem = None
- self.selected_model = None
- self.selected_path = None
- self.all_selected = 0
- self.selected_pkgs = {}
- self.package_names = {}
- self.special_package_names = []
- self.to_install_update = {}
- self.to_remove = {}
- self.in_startpage_startup = self.gconf.show_startpage
- self.visible_status_id = 0
- self.same_publisher_on_setup = False
- self.force_reload_packages = True
- self.icon_theme = None
- self.installed_icon = None
- self.not_installed_icon = None
- self.update_available_icon = None
- self.window_icon = None
- self.filter_options = []
- self.__setup_theme_icons()
- self.publisher_options = {
- PUBLISHER_ALL : _("All Publishers"),
- PUBLISHER_INSTALLED : _("All Installed Packages"),
- PUBLISHER_ALL_SEARCH : _("All Publishers (Search)"),
- PUBLISHER_ADD : _("Add...")
- }
- self.max_filter_length = 0
- self.pubs_info = {}
- self.pubs_display_name = {}
- self.last_visible_publisher = None
- self.publisher_changed = True
- self.search_start = 0
- self.search_time_sec = 0
- self.publisher_being_searched = None
- self.section_list = None
- self.filter_list = self.__get_new_filter_liststore()
- self.length_visible_list = 0
- self.application_list = None
- self.a11y_application_treeview = None
- self.application_treeview_range = None
- self.application_treeview_initialized = False
- self.application_select_column = None
- self.category_list = None
- self.repositories_list = None
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_index = 0
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_installed_index = 0
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index = 0
- self.repo_combobox_add_index = 0
- self.pr = progress.NullProgressTracker()
- self.pylintstub = None
- self.category_expanded_paths = {}
- self.category_active_paths = {}
- self.error_logged = False
-
- # Create Widgets and show gui
- self.builder = gtk.Builder()
- self.gladefile = os.path.join(self.application_dir,
- "usr/share/package-manager/packagemanager.ui")
- self.builder.add_from_file(self.gladefile)
-
- self.w_main_window = self.builder.get_object("mainwindow")
- self.w_main_window.set_icon(self.window_icon)
- self.w_main_hpaned = self.builder.get_object("main_hpaned")
- self.w_main_vpaned = self.builder.get_object("main_vpaned")
-
- self.w_publisher_combobox_hbox = \
- self.builder.get_object("publisher_combobox_hbox")
- self.w_view_combobox_hbox = self.builder.get_object("view_combobox_hbox")
-
- self.w_application_treeview = \
- self.builder.get_object("applicationtreeview")
- self.w_application_treeview.set_enable_search(True)
- self.w_application_treeview.set_search_equal_func(
- self.__applicationtreeview_compare_func)
-
- self.w_categories_treeview = self.builder.get_object("categoriestreeview")
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_search_equal_func(
- self.__categoriestreeview_compare_func)
-
- self.w_info_notebook = self.builder.get_object("details_notebook")
- self.w_startpage_scrolled_window = \
- self.builder.get_object("startpage_scrolled_window")
- self.w_startpage_eventbox = \
- self.builder.get_object("startpage_eventbox")
- self.w_startpage_eventbox.modify_bg(gtk.STATE_NORMAL,
- gtk.gdk.color_parse("white"))
-
- self.w_main_statusbar = self.builder.get_object("statusbar")
- #Allow markup in StatusBar
- self.w_main_statusbar_label = \
- gui_misc.get_statusbar_label(self.w_main_statusbar)
- if self.w_main_statusbar_label:
- self.w_main_statusbar_label.set_use_markup(True)
-
- self.w_statusbar_hbox = self.builder.get_object("statusbar_hbox")
- self.w_logalert_frame = self.builder.get_object("logalert_frame")
-
- self.w_progress_frame = self.builder.get_object("progress_frame")
- self.w_status_progressbar = self.builder.get_object("status_progressbar")
- self.w_status_progressbar.set_pulse_step(0.1)
- self.w_progress_frame.hide()
-
- self.w_main_view_notebook = \
- self.builder.get_object("main_view_notebook")
- self.w_searchentry = self.builder.get_object("searchentry")
- self.w_searchentry.set_tooltip_text(
- _("Type text to search for the package."))
- self.entrystyle = entrystyle.EntryStyle(self.w_searchentry)
- self.search_completion = gtk.ListStore(str)
- self.w_package_menu = self.builder.get_object("package_menu")
- self.w_reload_button = self.builder.get_object("reload_button")
- self.w_reload_button.set_tooltip_text(
- _("Refresh list of packages and package status"))
- self.w_installupdate_button = \
- self.builder.get_object("install_update_button")
- self.w_installupdate_button.set_tooltip_text(
- _("Select packages by marking the checkbox and click "
- "to Install/Update"))
- self.w_remove_button = self.builder.get_object("remove_button")
- self.w_remove_button.set_tooltip_text(
- _("Select packages by marking the checkbox and click "
- "to Remove selected"))
- self.w_updateall_button = self.builder.get_object("update_all_button")
- self.w_updateall_button.set_tooltip_text(
- _("Checks if updates are available"))
- self.w_repository_combobox = self.builder.get_object("repositorycombobox")
- self.w_filter_combobox = self.builder.get_object("filtercombobox")
- self.w_packageicon_image = self.builder.get_object("packageimage")
- self.w_reload_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("file_reload")
- gui_misc.set_icon_for_button_and_menuitem('pm-refresh',
- self.w_reload_button, self.w_reload_menuitem)
- self.w_version_info_menuitem = \
- self.builder.get_object("package_version_info")
- self.__set_image_for_menuitem(self.w_version_info_menuitem,
- gtk.STOCK_INFO)
- self.w_version_info_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_installupdate_menuitem = \
- self.builder.get_object("package_install_update")
- gui_misc.set_icon_for_button_and_menuitem('pm-install_update',
- self.w_installupdate_button, self.w_installupdate_menuitem)
- self.w_remove_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("package_remove")
- gui_misc.set_icon_for_button_and_menuitem('pm-remove',
- self.w_remove_button, self.w_remove_menuitem)
- self.w_updateall_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("package_update_all")
- gui_misc.set_icon_for_button_and_menuitem('pm-update_all',
- self.w_updateall_button, self.w_updateall_menuitem)
- self.w_quit_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("file_quit")
- self.w_be_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("file_be")
- self.w_export_selections_menuitem = self.builder.get_object(
- "file_export_selections")
- self.w_manage_publishers_menuitem = self.builder.get_object(
- "file_manage_publishers")
- self.w_add_publisher_menuitem = self.builder.get_object(
- "file_add_publisher")
- self.w_cut_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("edit_cut")
- self.w_copy_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("edit_copy")
- self.w_paste_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("edit_paste")
- self.w_delete_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("edit_delete")
- self.w_selectall_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("edit_select_all")
- help_stock_item = gtk.stock_lookup("gtk-help")
- if help_stock_item:
- help_menu_item = self.builder.get_object("help")
- help_menu_item.set_label(help_stock_item[1])
-
- self.w_selectupdates_menuitem = \
- self.builder.get_object("edit_select_updates")
- self.w_deselect_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("edit_deselect")
- self.w_clear_search_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("clear")
- self.__set_image_for_menuitem(self.w_clear_search_menuitem,
- gtk.STOCK_CLEAR)
- self.w_help_about_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("help_about")
- self.w_online_help_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("online_help")
- self.__set_image_for_menuitem(self.w_online_help_menuitem,
- gtk.STOCK_HELP)
- self.w_main_clipboard = gtk.clipboard_get(gtk.gdk.SELECTION_CLIPBOARD)
- self.saved_filter_combobox_active = self.gconf.initial_show_filter
- self.search_button = self.builder.get_object("do_search")
- self.search_button.set_tooltip_text(_("Search"))
- self.w_search_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("search")
- self.__set_image_for_menuitem(self.w_search_menuitem,
- gtk.STOCK_FIND)
- self.w_gotolist_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("gotolist")
- self.w_edit_preferences_menuitem = self.builder.get_object(
- "edit_preferences")
- self.w_log_menuitem = self.builder.get_object("log")
- self.w_logalert_eventbox = self.builder.get_object(
- "logalert_eventbox")
- self.progress_cancel = self.builder.get_object("progress_cancel")
- self.progress_cancel.set_tooltip_text(
- _("Cancel current operation"))
- self.is_all_publishers = False
- self.is_all_publishers_installed = False
- self.is_all_publishers_search = False
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active = -1
- self.saved_section_active = 0
- self.saved_application_list = None
- self.saved_application_list_filter = None
- self.saved_application_list_sort = None
- self.saved_category_list = None
- self.saved_section_list = None
- self.section_categories_list = {}
- self.statusbar_message_id = 0
- toolbar = self.builder.get_object("toolbutton2")
- toolbar.set_expand(True)
- self.detailspanel = detailspanel.DetailsPanel(self, self.builder)
- self.exportconfirm = exportconfirm.ExportConfirm(self.builder,
- self.window_icon, self.gconf, self)
- is_normal_logging_setup = gui_misc.setup_logging()
- self.logging = logging.PMLogging(self.builder, self.window_icon,
- is_normal_logging_setup)
- self.preferences = preferences.Preferences(self, self.builder,
- self.window_icon, self.gconf)
- self.searcherror = searcherror.SearchError(self.builder,
- self.gconf, self)
- self.versioninfo = versioninfo.VersionInfo(self.builder, self)
- self.__init_repository_tree_view()
- self.w_main_window.set_title(self.program_title)
-
- if self.gconf.show_startpage:
- self.__setup_startpage(self.gconf.show_startpage)
-
- self.__setup_signals()
-
- self.installupdate = None
- self.package_selection = None
- self.application_list_filter = None
- self.application_list_sort = None
- self.application_refilter_id = 0
- self.last_status_id = 0
- self.last_show_info_id = 0
- self.show_info_id = 0
- self.last_show_dependencies_id = 0
- self.show_dependencies_id = 0
- self.last_show_licenses_id = 0
- self.show_licenses_id = 0
- self.last_show_versions_id = 0
- self.show_versions_id = 0
- self.resize_id = 0
- self.last_resize = (0, 0)
- self.in_setup = True
- self.__set_initial_sizes()
- self.w_main_window.show_all()
- self.__setup_busy_cursor()
- if self.gconf.show_startpage:
- self.__setup_notebook_page_view()
- else:
- self.w_main_view_notebook.set_current_page(
- NOTEBOOK_PACKAGE_LIST_PAGE)
- self.logging.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_main_window)
- self.preferences.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_main_window)
- self.searcherror.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_main_window)
- self.versioninfo.set_modal_and_transient(self.w_main_window)
-
- self.__setup_text_signals()
-
- # Theme: prevent cell background being set for Inverse themes
- self.is_inverse_theme = False
- self.theme_name = None
- self.__setup_theme_properties()
-
- @staticmethod
- def __set_image_for_menuitem(widget, stock_id):
- image_widget = gtk.image_new_from_stock(stock_id,
- gtk.ICON_SIZE_MENU)
- widget.set_image(image_widget)
-
- def __setup_signals(self):
- ''' Setup signals required for widgets in Package Manager main
- view which are got from GtkBuilder'''
- signals_table = [
- (self.w_main_window, "delete_event",
- self.__on_mainwindow_delete_event),
- (self.w_main_window, "check_resize",
- self.__on_mainwindow_check_resize),
- (self.w_main_window, "key_press_event",
- self.__on_mainwindow_key_press_event),
- (self.w_main_window, "style_set",
- self.__on_mainwindow_style_set),
- (self.w_searchentry, "changed",
- self.__on_searchentry_changed),
- (self.w_searchentry, "focus_in_event",
- self.__on_searchentry_focus_in),
- (self.w_searchentry, "focus_out_event",
- self.__on_searchentry_focus_out),
- (self.w_searchentry, "activate",
- self.__do_search),
- (self.w_searchentry, "icon_press",
- self.__on_clear_search),
- (self.w_filter_combobox, "changed",
- self.__on_filtercombobox_changed),
- (self.w_repository_combobox, "changed",
- self.__on_repositorycombobox_changed),
- (self.w_export_selections_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_file_export_selections),
- (self.w_quit_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_file_quit_activate),
- (self.w_be_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_file_be_activate),
- (self.w_version_info_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_version_info),
- (self.w_installupdate_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_install_update),
- (self.w_manage_publishers_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_file_manage_publishers),
- (self.w_add_publisher_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_file_add_publisher),
- (self.w_remove_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_remove),
- (self.w_help_about_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_help_about),
- (self.w_online_help_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_help_help),
- (self.w_paste_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_edit_paste),
- (self.w_delete_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_delete),
- (self.w_copy_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_copy),
- (self.w_cut_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_cut),
- (self.w_search_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_edit_search_clicked),
- (self.w_gotolist_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_goto_list_clicked),
- (self.w_clear_search_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_clear_search),
- (self.search_button, "clicked",
- self.__do_search),
- (self.search_button, "button_press_event",
- self.__do_search),
- (self.progress_cancel, "clicked",
- self.__on_progress_cancel_clicked),
- (self.w_selectall_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_select_all),
- (self.w_selectupdates_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_select_updates),
- (self.w_deselect_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_deselect),
- (self.w_edit_preferences_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_preferences),
- (self.w_log_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_log_activate),
- (self.w_updateall_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_update_all),
- (self.w_updateall_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_update_all),
- (self.w_reload_menuitem, "activate",
- self.__on_reload),
- (self.w_reload_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_reload),
- (self.w_installupdate_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_install_update),
- (self.w_remove_button, "clicked",
- self.__on_remove),
- (self.w_info_notebook, "switch_page",
- self.__on_notebook_change),
- (self.w_logalert_eventbox, "button_press_event",
- self.__on_logalert_button_press_event),
- (self.w_application_treeview, "button_press_event",
- self.__on_applicationtreeview_button_and_key_events),
- (self.w_application_treeview, "key_press_event",
- self.__on_applicationtreeview_button_and_key_events),
- (self.w_application_treeview, "query_tooltip",
- self.__on_applicationtreeview_query_tooltip),
- ]
- for widget, signal_name, callback in signals_table:
- widget.connect(signal_name, callback)
-
- self.exportconfirm.setup_signals()
- self.logging.setup_signals()
- self.preferences.setup_signals()
- self.searcherror.setup_signals()
- self.versioninfo.setup_signals()
-
- def __setup_theme_properties(self):
- s = gtk.settings_get_default()
- self.theme_name = s.get_property("gtk-theme-name")
-
- # Theme: set correct Text fg colour for theme in the Search Entry Field
- style = self.w_application_treeview.get_style().copy()
- self.entrystyle.set_theme_colour(style.fg[gtk.STATE_NORMAL])
-
- if self.theme_name == "HighContrastInverse" or \
- self.theme_name == "HighContrastLargePrintInverse":
- self.is_inverse_theme = True
- else:
- self.is_inverse_theme = False
-
- def __setup_notebook_page_view(self):
- self.w_main_view_notebook.set_current_page(NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE)
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __set_initial_sizes(self):
- if self.gconf.initial_app_width >= MIN_APP_WIDTH and \
- self.gconf.initial_app_height >= MIN_APP_HEIGHT:
- self.w_main_window.resize(self.gconf.initial_app_width,
- self.gconf.initial_app_height)
- if self.gconf.initial_app_hpos > 0:
- self.w_main_hpaned.set_position(self.gconf.initial_app_hpos)
- if self.gconf.initial_app_vpos > 0:
- self.w_main_vpaned.set_position(self.gconf.initial_app_vpos)
-
- def __setup_busy_cursor(self):
- gdk_win = self.w_main_window.get_window()
- self.gdk_window = gtk.gdk.Window(gdk_win, gtk.gdk.screen_width(),
- gtk.gdk.screen_height(), gtk.gdk.WINDOW_CHILD, 0, gtk.gdk.INPUT_ONLY)
- gdk_cursor = gtk.gdk.Cursor(gtk.gdk.WATCH)
-
- self.gdk_window.set_cursor(gdk_cursor)
-
- def __on_file_export_selections(self, menuitem):
- self.exportconfirm.activate(self.selected_pkgs)
-
- def __on_mainwindow_style_set(self, widget, previous_style):
- if self.first_run:
- return
- self.last_resize = -1
- # Theme: setup Theme properties
- self.__setup_theme_properties()
-
- # Theme: setup icons for Theme
- self.__setup_theme_icons()
- self.__reset_view_icons()
-
- # Theme: setup Dialog Icons for Theme
- self.w_main_window.set_icon(self.window_icon)
- self.exportconfirm.set_window_icon(self.window_icon)
- self.logging.set_window_icon(self.window_icon)
- self.preferences.set_window_icon(self.window_icon)
-
- # Theme: setup Main list Selection icon for Theme
- if self.application_select_column:
- self.application_select_column.set_widget(
- self.get_theme_selection_coloumn_image())
-
- # Theme: setup Main list status icons
- self.__reset_application_list_status_icons(self.application_list)
- # Theme: saved application list is cached with old theme icons
- self.__reset_application_list_status_icons(self.saved_application_list)
-
- #Theme: refresh Details icons if package selected
- if self.selected_pkgstem != None:
- self.__process_package_selection()
-
- def get_theme_selection_coloumn_image(self):
- select_image = gtk.Image()
- select_image.set_from_pixbuf(gui_misc.get_icon(
- self.icon_theme, 'selection'))
- select_image.set_tooltip_text(_("Click to toggle selections"))
- select_image.show()
- return select_image
-
- def __setup_theme_icons(self):
- self.icon_theme = gtk.icon_theme_get_default()
- icon_location = os.path.join(self.application_dir, ICON_LOCATION)
- self.icon_theme.append_search_path(icon_location)
- self.installed_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(self.icon_theme,
- 'status_installed')
- self.not_installed_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(self.icon_theme,
- 'status_notinstalled')
- self.update_available_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(self.icon_theme,
- 'status_newupdate')
- self.window_icon = gui_misc.get_icon(self.icon_theme,
- 'packagemanager', 48)
- self.filter_options = [
- (enumerations.FILTER_ALL,
- gui_misc.get_icon(self.icon_theme, 'filter_all'),
- _('All Packages')),
- (enumerations.FILTER_INSTALLED, self.installed_icon,
- _('Installed Packages')),
- (enumerations.FILTER_UPDATES, self.update_available_icon,
- _('Updates')),
- (enumerations.FILTER_NOT_INSTALLED, self.not_installed_icon,
- _('Not Installed Packages')),
- (-1, None, ""),
- (enumerations.FILTER_SELECTED,
- gui_misc.get_icon(self.icon_theme, 'filter_selected'),
- _('Selected Packages'))
- ]
-
- def __reset_application_list_status_icons(self, app_list):
- if app_list == None or len(app_list) == 0:
- return
- app_itr = app_list.get_iter_first()
-
- while app_itr:
- status = app_list.get_value(app_itr, enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN)
- if status == api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED:
- app_list.set(app_itr, enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN,
- self.installed_icon)
- elif status == api.PackageInfo.KNOWN:
- app_list.set(app_itr, enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN,
- self.not_installed_icon)
- elif status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- app_list.set(app_itr, enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN,
- self.update_available_icon)
- app_itr = app_list.iter_next(app_itr)
-
- def __reset_view_icons(self):
- filter_itr = self.filter_list.get_iter_first()
- if filter_itr == None or \
- len(self.filter_list) != len(self.filter_options):
- return
- max_length = 0
- for filter_id, pixbuf, label in self.filter_options:
- self.filter_list.set(filter_itr, enumerations.FILTER_ICON, pixbuf)
- filter_itr = self.filter_list.iter_next(filter_itr)
- if filter_id == -1:
- continue
- max_length = gui_misc.get_max_text_length(
- max_length, label, self.w_filter_combobox)
- self.__setup_max_filter_length(max_length)
-
- def __setup_max_filter_length(self, max_length):
- if max_length < VIEW_COMBOBOX_MIN_WIDTH:
- self.max_filter_length = VIEW_COMBOBOX_MIN_WIDTH
- elif max_length > VIEW_COMBOBOX_MAX_WIDTH:
- self.max_filter_length = VIEW_COMBOBOX_MAX_WIDTH
- else:
- self.max_filter_length = max_length
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_size_request(
- self.max_filter_length + VIEW_COMBOBOX_WIDTH_PADDING, -1)
-
- def __set_search_text_mode(self, style):
- self.entrystyle.set_search_text_mode(style)
-
- def __search_completion_cb(self, entry):
- text = entry.get_text()
- if text:
- if text not in [row[0] for row in self.search_completion]:
- len_search_completion = len(self.search_completion)
- if len_search_completion > 0 and \
- len_search_completion >= \
- self.gconf.max_search_completion:
- itr = self.search_completion.get_iter_first()
- if itr:
- self.search_completion.remove(itr)
- self.search_completion.append([text])
- return
-
- def __setup_text_signals(self):
- self.detailspanel.setup_text_signals(
- self.__on_text_buffer_has_selection,
- self.__on_textview_focus_in,
- self.__on_textview_focus_out)
- self.w_searchentry.connect(
- "notify::cursor-position", self.__on_searchentry_selection)
- self.w_searchentry.connect(
- "notify::selection-bound", self.__on_searchentry_selection)
-
- def __on_textview_focus_in(self, widget, event):
- char_count = widget.get_buffer().get_char_count()
- if char_count > 0:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- bounds = widget.get_buffer().get_selection_bounds()
- if bounds:
- offset1 = bounds[0].get_offset()
- offset2 = bounds[1].get_offset()
- if abs(offset2 - offset1) == char_count:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_copy_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __on_textview_focus_out(self, widget, event):
- self.__enable_disable_select_all()
- self.__enable_disable_deselect()
- self.w_copy_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __on_text_buffer_has_selection(self, obj, pspec):
- if obj.get_selection_bounds():
- self.w_copy_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_copy_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __set_all_publishers_search_mode(self):
- if self.is_all_publishers_search:
- return
- self.__setup_before_all_publishers_search_mode()
-
- def __setup_startpage(self, show_startpage):
- self.startpage.setup_startpage(show_startpage)
- if show_startpage or self.gconf.start_insearch:
- self.w_main_view_notebook.set_current_page(
- NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE)
- if self.gconf.start_insearch:
- self.startpage.document.clear()
- else:
- self.w_main_view_notebook.set_current_page(
- NOTEBOOK_PACKAGE_LIST_PAGE)
- self.w_startpage_scrolled_window.add(self.startpage.view)
-
- def __process_api_search_error(self, error):
- self.current_repos_with_search_errors = []
-
- for pub, err in error.failed_servers:
- logger.error(_("Publisher: %(o)s failed to respond\n%(msg)s") % \
- {"o": pub, "msg": err})
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- for pub in error.invalid_servers:
- logger.error(_("Publisher: %s: invalid response\n"
- "A valid response was not returned.") % pub)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- for pub, err in error.unsupported_servers:
- self.current_repos_with_search_errors.append(
- (pub, _("unsupported search"), err))
-
- def __on_logalert_button_press_event(self, widget, event):
- if len(self.current_repos_with_search_errors) > 0:
- self.__handle_api_search_error(True)
- return
- if self.error_logged:
- self.__on_log_activate(None)
-
- def __handle_api_search_error(self, show_all=False):
- if self.exiting:
- return
- if len(self.current_repos_with_search_errors) == 0:
- if not self.error_logged:
- self.w_logalert_frame.hide()
- return
-
- repo_count = 0
- for item in self.current_repos_with_search_errors:
- if show_all or (item[0] not in self.gconf.not_show_repos):
- repo_count += 1
- if repo_count == 0:
- if not self.error_logged:
- self.w_logalert_frame.hide()
- return
-
- self.w_logalert_frame.set_tooltip_text(
- _("Search Errors: click to view"))
-
- self.w_logalert_frame.show()
- self.searcherror.display_search_errors(show_all)
-
- def __get_publisher_combobox_index(self, pub_name):
- index = -1
- model = self.w_repository_combobox.get_model()
- for entry in model:
- if entry[enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX] == pub_name:
- index = entry[enumerations.REPOSITORY_ID]
- break
- return index
-
- def __handle_browse_publisher(self, index):
- if index == -1:
- return
- self.w_repository_combobox.grab_focus()
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(index)
-
- def handle_search_all_publishers(self):
- term = self.previous_search_text
- self.__set_search_start()
- self.is_all_publishers_installed = False
- self.is_all_publishers = False
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index)
- self.__set_search_text_mode(enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_NORMAL)
- self.w_searchentry.set_text(term)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_search)
-
- def handle_view_all_publishers_installed(self):
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_active(enumerations.FILTER_ALL)
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
- self.update_statusbar()
-
- def get_start_end_strings(self):
- if self.w_main_statusbar_label:
- s1 = "<b>"
- e1 = "</b>"
- else:
- s1 = e1 = '"'
- return s1, e1
-
- def browse_publisher(self, pub):
- index = self.__get_publisher_combobox_index(pub)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__handle_browse_publisher, index)
-
- def goto_recent_search(self, recent_search):
- category_tree = self.w_categories_treeview.get_model()
- if category_tree == None:
- return
- rs_iter = category_tree.iter_children(
- self.recent_searches_cat_iter)
- rs_path = category_tree.get_path(self.recent_searches_cat_iter)
- if not self.w_categories_treeview.row_expanded(rs_path):
- self.w_categories_treeview.expand_row(rs_path, False)
- while rs_iter:
- rs_value = category_tree.get_value(rs_iter,
- enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME)
- if rs_value == recent_search:
- path = category_tree.get_path(rs_iter)
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_cursor(path)
- self.w_categories_treeview.scroll_to_cell(path)
- return
- rs_iter = category_tree.iter_next(rs_iter)
- return
-
- def set_view_all_packages(self):
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_active(enumerations.FILTER_ALL)
- self.w_filter_combobox.grab_focus()
-
- def invoke_webinstall(self, link):
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- try:
- gobject.spawn_async([self.application_path, "-i", link])
- except gobject.GError:
- self.startpage.link_load_error(link)
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- return
- gobject.timeout_add(1500, self.unset_busy_cursor)
-
- def open_link(self, link):
- self.set_busy_cursor()
-
- if not self.allow_links:
- # Links not allowed.
- self.startpage.link_load_error(link)
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- return
- elif not self.is_admin:
- # Not a privileged user? Show links directly.
- try:
- gnome.url_show(link)
- gobject.timeout_add(1000,
- self.unset_busy_cursor)
- except gobject.GError:
- self.startpage.link_load_error(link)
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- return
-
- # XXX PackageManager shouldn't run as a privileged user!
- # Opening links relies on the packagemanager having been
- # launched by the pm-launch process. The pm-launch process
- # monitors the output of its child process for special commands
- # such as the one used to below to launch links. This causes
- # the pm-launch program to open this link as the original user
- # that executed pm-launch instead of as the current, privileged
- # user the packagemanager is likely running as.
- try:
- # XXX There's no way to know if opening the link failed
- # using this method; the assumption is that the user
- # will be informed somehow by the launcher or browser.
- print "%s%s" % (PM_LAUNCH_OPEN_CMD, link)
- sys.stdout.flush()
- gobject.timeout_add(1000, self.unset_busy_cursor)
- except IOError, ex:
- # Any exception from the above likely means that the
- # link wasn't loaded. For example, an IOError or
- # some other exception might be raised if the launch
- # process was killed.
- self.startpage.link_load_error(link)
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
-
- # Log the error for post-mortem evaluation.
- logger.error(str(ex))
- except Exception, ex:
- self.startpage.link_load_error(link)
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- logger.error(str(ex))
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_new_application_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.MARK_COLUMN
- gtk.gdk.Pixbuf, # enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.NAME_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.DESCRIPTION_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.STEM_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.ACTUAL_NAME_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.IS_VISIBLE_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_PYOBJECT, # enumerations.CATEGORY_LIST_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.PUBLISHER_PREFIX_COLUMN
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN # enumerations.RENAMED_COLUMN
- )
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_new_category_liststore():
- return gtk.TreeStore(
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.CATEGORY_ID
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.CATEGORY_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.CATEGORY_DESCRIPTION
- gobject.TYPE_PYOBJECT, # enumerations.SECTION_LIST_OBJECT
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.CATEGORY_IS_VISIBLE
- )
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_new_section_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.SECTION_ID
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.SECTION_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_BOOLEAN, # enumerations.SECTION_ENABLED
- )
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_new_filter_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.FILTER_ID
- gtk.gdk.Pixbuf, # enumerations.FILTER_ICON
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.FILTER_NAME
- )
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_new_repositories_liststore():
- return gtk.ListStore(
- gobject.TYPE_INT, # enumerations.REPOSITORY_ID
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.REPOSITORY_DISPLAY_NAME
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX
- gobject.TYPE_STRING, # enumerations.REPOSITORY_ALIAS
- )
-
- def __init_application_tree_view(self, application_list,
- application_list_filter, application_list_sort,
- application_sort_column):
- ##APPLICATION MAIN TREEVIEW
- if application_list_filter == None:
- application_list_filter = application_list.filter_new()
- if application_list_sort == None:
- application_list_sort = \
- gtk.TreeModelSort(application_list_filter)
- application_list_sort.set_sort_column_id(
- application_sort_column, gtk.SORT_ASCENDING)
- application_list_sort.set_sort_func(
- enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN,
- self.__column_sort_func,
- enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN)
- application_list_sort.set_sort_func(
- enumerations.DESCRIPTION_COLUMN,
- self.__column_sort_func,
- enumerations.DESCRIPTION_COLUMN)
- toggle_renderer = gtk.CellRendererToggle()
-
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn("", toggle_renderer,
- active = enumerations.MARK_COLUMN)
- column.set_cell_data_func(toggle_renderer, self.cell_data_function, self)
- column.set_clickable(True)
- column.connect('clicked', self.__select_column_clicked)
- select_image = self.get_theme_selection_coloumn_image()
- column.set_widget(select_image)
- self.w_application_treeview.append_column(column)
- self.application_select_column = column
-
- name_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_("Name"), name_renderer,
- text = enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
- column.set_resizable(True)
- column.set_min_width(150)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- column.set_cell_data_func(name_renderer, self.cell_data_function, self)
- column.connect_after('clicked',
- self.__application_treeview_column_sorted, None)
- self.w_application_treeview.append_column(column)
- column = self.__create_icon_column(_("Status"), True,
- enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN, True)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- column.connect_after('clicked',
- self.__application_treeview_column_sorted, None)
- self.w_application_treeview.append_column(column)
- if self.is_all_publishers_search or self.is_all_publishers_installed or \
- self.is_all_publishers or self.in_recent_search:
- repository_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_('Publisher'),
- repository_renderer,
- markup = enumerations.PUBLISHER_COLUMN)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.PUBLISHER_COLUMN)
- column.set_resizable(True)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- column.set_cell_data_func(repository_renderer,
- self.cell_data_function, self)
- column.connect_after('clicked',
- self.__application_treeview_column_sorted, None)
- self.w_application_treeview.append_column(column)
- application_list_sort.set_sort_func(
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_COLUMN,
- self.__column_sort_func,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_COLUMN)
- description_renderer = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_('Summary'),
- description_renderer,
- text = enumerations.DESCRIPTION_COLUMN)
- column.set_sort_column_id(enumerations.DESCRIPTION_COLUMN)
- column.set_resizable(True)
- column.set_sort_indicator(True)
- column.set_cell_data_func(description_renderer,
- self.cell_data_function, self)
- column.connect_after('clicked',
- self.__application_treeview_column_sorted, None)
- self.w_application_treeview.append_column(column)
- #Added selection listener
- self.package_selection = self.w_application_treeview.get_selection()
- self.application_list = application_list
- self.application_list_filter = application_list_filter
- self.application_list_sort = application_list_sort
- toggle_renderer.connect('toggled', self.__active_pane_toggle,
- application_list_sort)
-
- def __init_tree_views(self, application_list, category_list,
- section_list, application_list_filter = None,
- application_list_sort = None,
- application_sort_column = enumerations.NAME_COLUMN):
- '''This function connects treeviews with their models and also applies
- filters'''
- if self.exiting:
- return
- if category_list == None:
- self.w_application_treeview.set_model(None)
- self.__remove_treeview_columns(self.w_application_treeview)
- elif application_list == None:
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_model(None)
- self.__remove_treeview_columns(self.w_categories_treeview)
- else:
- self.__disconnect_models()
- self.__remove_treeview_columns(self.w_application_treeview)
- self.__remove_treeview_columns(self.w_categories_treeview)
- # The logic for set section needs to be here as some sections
- # might be not enabled. In such situation we are setting the set
- # section to "All Categories" one.
- if section_list != None:
- row = section_list[self.set_section]
- if row[enumerations.SECTION_ENABLED] and \
- self.set_section >= 0 and \
- self.set_section < len(section_list):
- if row[enumerations.SECTION_ID] != self.set_section:
- self.set_section = 0
- else:
- self.set_section = 0
-
- if application_list != None:
- self.__init_application_tree_view(application_list,
- application_list_filter, application_list_sort,
- application_sort_column)
-
- if self.first_run:
- # When vadj changes we need to set image descriptions
- # on visible status icons. This catches moving the scroll bars
- # and scrolling up and down using keyboard.
- vadj = self.w_application_treeview.get_vadjustment()
- vadj.connect('value-changed',
- self.__application_treeview_vadjustment_changed, None)
-
- # When the size of the application_treeview changes
- # we need to set image descriptions on visible status icons.
- self.w_application_treeview.connect('size-allocate',
- self.__application_treeview_size_allocate, None)
-
- category_selection = self.w_categories_treeview.get_selection()
- if category_list != None:
- ##CATEGORIES TREEVIEW
- enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME_r = gtk.CellRendererText()
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn(_('Name'),
- enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME_r,
- markup = enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME)
- enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME_r.set_property("xalign", 0.0)
- self.w_categories_treeview.append_column(column)
- #Added selection listener
- category_selection.set_mode(gtk.SELECTION_SINGLE)
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_search_column(
- enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME)
-
- if section_list != None:
- self.section_list = section_list
- if category_list != None:
- self.category_list = category_list
-
- if application_list != None:
- self.w_application_treeview.set_model(
- self.application_list_sort)
- if application_list_filter == None:
- self.application_list_filter.set_visible_func(
- self.__application_filter)
-
- if self.first_run:
- category_selection.connect("changed",
- self.__on_category_selection_changed, None)
- self.w_categories_treeview.connect("row-activated",
- self.__on_category_row_activated, None)
- self.w_categories_treeview.connect("focus-in-event",
- self.__on_category_focus_in, None)
- self.w_categories_treeview.connect("button_press_event",
- self.__on_categoriestreeview_button_press_event, None)
- self.w_categories_treeview.connect("row-collapsed",
- self.__on_categoriestreeview_row_collapsed, None)
- self.w_categories_treeview.connect("row-expanded",
- self.__on_categoriestreeview_row_expanded, None)
- self.package_selection.set_mode(gtk.SELECTION_SINGLE)
- self.package_selection.connect("changed",
- self.__on_package_selection_changed, None)
- if category_list != None and section_list != None:
- self.__add_categories_to_tree(category_list, section_list)
- self.a11y_application_treeview = \
- self.w_application_treeview.get_accessible()
- obj = self.a11y_application_treeview.get_column_header(0)
- if obj != None:
- obj.set_name(_("all selection toggle"))
- self.process_package_list_end()
-
- def __setup_filter_combobox(self):
- render_pixbuf = gtk.CellRendererPixbuf()
- self.w_filter_combobox.pack_start(render_pixbuf, expand = True)
- self.w_filter_combobox.add_attribute(render_pixbuf, "pixbuf",
- enumerations.FILTER_ICON)
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_cell_data_func(render_pixbuf,
- self.filter_cell_data_function,
- (self, enumerations.FILTER_ICON))
-
- cell = gtk.CellRendererText()
- self.w_filter_combobox.pack_start(cell, True)
- self.w_filter_combobox.add_attribute(cell, 'text',
- enumerations.FILTER_NAME)
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_cell_data_func(cell,
- self.filter_cell_data_function,
- (self, enumerations.FILTER_NAME))
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_row_separator_func(
- self.combobox_filter_id_separator)
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_model(self.filter_list)
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_active(self.gconf.initial_show_filter)
-
- def __select_column_clicked(self, data):
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__toggle_select_all,
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.props.sensitive)
-
- def __application_treeview_column_sorted(self, widget, user_data):
- self.__set_visible_status(False)
-
- def __init_repository_tree_view(self):
- cell = gtk.CellRendererText()
- self.w_repository_combobox.pack_start(cell, True)
- self.w_repository_combobox.add_attribute(cell, 'text',
- enumerations.REPOSITORY_DISPLAY_NAME)
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_row_separator_func(
- self.combobox_id_separator)
-
- def __application_treeview_size_allocate(self, widget, allocation, user_data):
- # We ignore any changes in the size during initialization.
- if self.visible_status_id == 0:
- self.visible_status_id = gobject.idle_add(
- self.__set_visible_status)
-
- def __application_treeview_vadjustment_changed(self, widget, user_data):
- self.__set_visible_status()
-
- def __set_accessible_status(self, model, itr):
- status = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN)
- if status == api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED:
- desc = _("Installed")
- elif status == api.PackageInfo.KNOWN:
- desc = _("Not Installed")
- elif status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- desc = _("Updates Available")
- else:
- desc = None
- if desc != None:
- obj = self.a11y_application_treeview.ref_at(
- int(model.get_string_from_iter(itr)),
- STATUS_COLUMN_INDEX)
- obj.set_image_description(desc)
-
- def __set_visible_status(self, check_range = True):
- self.visible_status_id = 0
- if self.w_main_view_notebook.get_current_page() != \
- NOTEBOOK_PACKAGE_LIST_PAGE:
- return
- if self.__doing_search():
- return
-
- a11y_enabled = False
- if self.a11y_application_treeview.get_n_accessible_children() != 0:
- a11y_enabled = True
-
- if not a11y_enabled:
- return
-
- visible_range = self.w_application_treeview.get_visible_range()
- if visible_range == None:
- return
- a11y_start = visible_range[0][0]
- a11y_end = visible_range[1][0]
-
- # We use check_range only for accessibility purposes to
- # reduce the amount of processing to be done in that case.
- # Switching Publishers need to use default range
- if self.publisher_changed:
- check_range = False
- self.publisher_changed = False
- if self.in_search_mode:
- check_range = False
-
- if self.application_treeview_range != None:
- if check_range and a11y_enabled:
- old_start = self.application_treeview_range[0][0]
- old_end = self.application_treeview_range[1][0]
- # Old range is the same or smaller than new range
- # so do nothing
- if (a11y_start >= old_start and
- a11y_end <= old_end):
- a11y_end = a11y_start - 1
- else:
- if a11y_start < old_end:
- if a11y_end < old_end:
- if a11y_end >= old_start:
- a11y_end = old_start
- else:
- a11y_start = old_end
- self.application_treeview_range = visible_range
-
- sort_filt_model = \
- self.w_application_treeview.get_model() #gtk.TreeModelSort
-
- if a11y_enabled:
- sf_itr = sort_filt_model.get_iter_from_string(
- str(a11y_start))
- while a11y_start <= a11y_end:
- self.__set_accessible_status(sort_filt_model, sf_itr)
- a11y_start += 1
- sf_itr = sort_filt_model.iter_next(sf_itr)
-
- def __doing_search(self):
- return self.search_start > 0
-
- def __create_icon_column(self, name, expand_pixbuf, enum_value, set_data_func):
- column = gtk.TreeViewColumn()
- column.set_title(name)
- #Commented, since there was funny jumping of the icons
- #column.set_sizing(gtk.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE)
- render_pixbuf = gtk.CellRendererPixbuf()
- column.pack_start(render_pixbuf, expand = expand_pixbuf)
- column.add_attribute(render_pixbuf, "pixbuf", enum_value)
- column.set_fixed_width(32)
- if set_data_func:
- column.set_cell_data_func(render_pixbuf,
- self.cell_data_function, self)
- return column
-
- def __disconnect_models(self):
- if self.w_application_treeview:
- self.w_application_treeview.set_model(None)
- if self.w_categories_treeview:
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_model(None)
-
- def __disconnect_repository_model(self):
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_model(None)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __column_sort_func(treemodel, iter1, iter2, column):
- get_val = treemodel.get_value
- get_val = treemodel.get_value
- status1 = get_val(iter1, column)
- status2 = get_val(iter2, column)
- ret = cmp(status1, status2)
- if ret != 0:
- return ret
- name1 = get_val(iter1, enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
- name2 = get_val(iter2, enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
- return cmp(name1, name2)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __remove_treeview_columns(treeview):
- columns = treeview.get_columns()
- if columns:
- for column in columns:
- treeview.remove_column(column)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __init_sections(section_list):
- '''This function is for initializing the sections list'''
- enabled = True
- # Only enable the first section. Later other sections are enabled
- # in __add_category_to_section() if the section contains any categories
- # which in turn contain some packages.
- section_list.append([0, _('All Categories'), enabled ])
- enabled = False
- section_list.append([1, _('Meta Packages'), enabled ])
- section_list.append([2, _('Applications'), enabled ])
- section_list.append([3, _('Desktop (GNOME)'), enabled ])
- section_list.append([4, _('Development'), enabled ])
- section_list.append([5, _('Distributions'), enabled ])
- section_list.append([6, _('Drivers'), enabled ])
- section_list.append([7, _('System'), enabled ])
- section_list.append([8, _('Web Services'), enabled ])
-
- def __init_show_filter(self):
- max_length = 0
- for filter_id, pixbuf, label in self.filter_options:
- self.filter_list.append([filter_id, pixbuf, label, ])
- if filter_id == -1:
- continue
- max_length = gui_misc.get_max_text_length(
- max_length, label, self.w_filter_combobox)
- self.__setup_max_filter_length(max_length)
-
- if self.gconf.initial_show_filter >= enumerations.FILTER_ALL and \
- self.gconf.initial_show_filter < len(self.filter_list):
- row = self.filter_list[self.gconf.initial_show_filter]
- if row[enumerations.SECTION_ID] != \
- self.gconf.initial_show_filter:
- self.gconf.initial_show_filter = enumerations.FILTER_ALL
- else:
- self.gconf.initial_show_filter = enumerations.FILTER_ALL
-
- def __on_mainwindow_key_press_event(self, widget, event):
- if self.is_busy_cursor_set():
- if event.type == gtk.gdk.KEY_PRESS:
- keyname = gtk.gdk.keyval_name(event.keyval)
- if keyname == "Escape" and self.api_o.can_be_canceled():
- Thread(target = self.api_o.cancel,
- args = ()).start()
- return True
- else:
- return False
-
- def __on_mainwindow_delete_event(self, widget, event):
- ''' handler for delete event of the main window '''
- if self.__check_if_something_was_changed() == True:
- # XXX Change this to not quit and show dialog
- # XXX if some changes were applied:
- self.__main_application_quit()
- return True
- else:
- self.__main_application_quit()
-
- def __handle_resize(self, widget):
- if self.last_resize == widget.get_size():
- return
- last_resize = self.last_resize
- self.last_resize = widget.get_size()
-
- pub_rect = self.w_publisher_combobox_hbox.get_allocation()
- view_rect = self.w_view_combobox_hbox.get_allocation()
- min_width = pub_rect[2] + view_rect[2] + PUBLISHER_VIEW_MIN_PADDING
- main_win_width = self.w_main_window.get_size()[0]
- if main_win_width < min_width:
- self.w_main_window.set_size_request(min_width, -1)
- if self.w_main_view_notebook.get_current_page() == \
- NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE and not self.first_run:
- self.startpage.handle_resize()
- return
- elif last_resize == -1 and min_width < MIN_APP_WIDTH:
- self.w_main_window.set_size_request(MIN_APP_WIDTH, MIN_APP_HEIGHT)
-
- if self.w_main_view_notebook.get_current_page() == \
- NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE and not self.first_run:
- self.startpage.handle_resize()
-
- def __on_mainwindow_check_resize(self, widget):
- if not widget or not self.gdk_window:
- return
- if self.resize_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.resize_id)
- self.resize_id = 0
-
- self.resize_id = \
- gobject.timeout_add(RESIZE_DELAY,
- self.__handle_resize, widget)
-
- status_height = self.w_statusbar_hbox.get_allocation().height
- self.gdk_window.move_resize(0, 0, widget.get_size()[0],
- widget.get_size()[1]-status_height)
-
- def __on_file_quit_activate(self, widget):
- ''' handler for quit menu event '''
- self.__on_mainwindow_delete_event(None, None)
-
- def __on_file_manage_publishers(self, widget):
- ''' handler for manage publishers menu event '''
- repository.Repository(self, self.image_directory,
- action=enumerations.MANAGE_PUBLISHERS,
- main_window = self.w_main_window, gconf = self.gconf)
-
- def __on_file_add_publisher(self, widget):
- ''' handler for add publisher menu event '''
- repository.Repository(self, self.image_directory,
- action=enumerations.ADD_PUBLISHER,
- main_window = self.w_main_window, gconf = self.gconf)
-
- def __on_file_be_activate(self, widget):
- ''' handler for be menu event '''
- beadm.Beadmin(self)
-
- def __on_searchentry_changed(self, widget):
- ret = self.entrystyle.on_entry_changed(widget)
- self.w_clear_search_menuitem.set_sensitive(ret)
- self.__enable_disable_entry_selection(widget)
-
- def __update_statusbar_for_search(self):
- if self.is_all_publishers_search or self.is_all_publishers:
- self.update_statusbar_message(_("Search all publishers"))
- else:
- self.update_statusbar_message(_("Search current publisher"))
-
- def __remove_statusbar_message(self):
- if self.statusbar_message_id > 0:
- try:
- self.w_main_statusbar.remove_message(0,
- self.statusbar_message_id)
- except AttributeError:
- self.w_main_statusbar.remove(0,
- self.statusbar_message_id)
- self.statusbar_message_id = 0
-
- def update_statusbar_message(self, message):
- if self.exiting:
- return
- self.__remove_statusbar_message()
- self.statusbar_message_id = self.w_main_statusbar.push(0, message)
- if self.w_main_statusbar_label:
- self.w_main_statusbar_label.set_markup(message)
-
- def __setup_before_all_publishers_search_mode(self):
- self.is_all_publishers_installed = False
- self.is_all_publishers = False
- self.is_all_publishers_search = True
- if not self.first_run:
- self.w_logalert_frame.hide()
- if not self.w_searchentry.is_focus():
- self.__set_searchentry_to_prompt()
-
- self.__save_setup_before_search()
- first_run = self.first_run
- self.first_run = False
- self.__clear_before_search(False)
- show_search_all_page = not first_run or (first_run
- and not self.gconf.show_startpage) or (first_run
- and self.gconf.start_insearch)
- if show_search_all_page:
- gobject.idle_add(self.pm_setup_search_all_page)
- elif self.gconf.show_startpage:
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_main_view_notebook.set_current_page,
- NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE)
- self.__update_statusbar_for_search()
-
- def __set_searchentry_to_prompt(self):
- if not self.first_run:
- self.entrystyle.set_entry_to_prompt()
-
- def pm_setup_search_all_page(self):
- publisher_list = []
- model = self.w_repository_combobox.get_model()
- for pub in model:
- prefix = pub[enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX]
- if (prefix and prefix not in self.publisher_options.values()):
- pub_alias = pub[enumerations.REPOSITORY_ALIAS]
- publisher_list.append((prefix, pub_alias))
- self.startpage.setup_search_all_page(publisher_list,
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL])
- self.__setup_notebook_page_view()
-
- def __setup_search_installed_page(self, text):
- self.startpage.setup_search_installed_page(text)
- self.__setup_notebook_page_view()
- self.__set_focus_on_searchentry()
-
- def __setup_recent_search_page(self):
- self.startpage.setup_recent_search_page(self.recent_searches_list)
- self.__setup_notebook_page_view()
-
- def __setup_zero_filtered_results_page(self):
- active_filter = self.w_filter_combobox.get_active()
- filter_desc = self.__get_filter_combobox_description(active_filter)
- self.startpage.setup_zero_filtered_results_page(self.length_visible_list,
- filter_desc)
- self.__setup_notebook_page_view()
-
- def __setup_search_zero_filtered_results_page(self, text, num):
- active_filter = self.w_filter_combobox.get_active()
- filter_desc = self.__get_filter_combobox_description(active_filter)
- self.startpage.setup_search_zero_filtered_results_page(text,
- num, filter_desc)
- self.__setup_notebook_page_view()
- self.__set_focus_on_searchentry()
-
- def __get_filter_combobox_description(self, index):
- description = None
- model = self.w_filter_combobox.get_model()
- for entry in model:
- if entry[enumerations.FILTER_ID] == index:
- description = entry[enumerations.FILTER_NAME]
- break
- return description
-
- def __setup_search_zero_results_page(self, pub, text, search_all):
- name = self.get_publisher_name_from_prefix(pub)
- self.startpage.setup_search_zero_results_page(name, text,
- search_all)
- self.__setup_notebook_page_view()
- self.__set_focus_on_searchentry()
-
- def __set_focus_on_searchentry(self):
- self.w_searchentry.grab_focus()
- if self.w_searchentry.get_text() > 0:
- start, end = self.w_searchentry.get_selection_bounds()
- self.w_searchentry.select_region(end, end)
- self.pylintstub = start
-
- def __setup_search_wildcard_page(self):
- self.startpage.setup_search_wildcard_page()
- self.__setup_notebook_page_view()
- self.__set_focus_on_searchentry()
-
- def __clear_before_search(self, show_list=True, in_setup=True, unselect_cat=True):
- self.in_setup = in_setup
- application_list = self.__get_new_application_liststore()
- self.__set_empty_details_panel()
- self.__set_main_view_package_list(show_list)
- self.__init_tree_views(application_list, None, None)
- if unselect_cat:
- self.__unselect_category()
-
- def __restore_setup_for_browse(self):
- self.in_search_mode = False
- self.in_recent_search = False
- self.is_all_publishers_search = False
- self.w_logalert_frame.hide()
- if self.last_visible_publisher == \
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED]:
- self.is_all_publishers_installed = True
- else:
- self.is_all_publishers_installed = False
- if self.last_visible_publisher == \
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL]:
- self.is_all_publishers = True
- else:
- self.is_all_publishers = False
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- if (self.w_repository_combobox.get_active() !=
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active):
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active)
- self.set_section = self.saved_section_active
- # Reset MARK_COLUMN
- for pkg in self.saved_application_list:
- pub = pkg[enumerations.PUBLISHER_PREFIX_COLUMN]
- stem = pkg[enumerations.STEM_COLUMN]
- marked = False
- pkgs = None
- if self.selected_pkgs != None:
- pkgs = self.selected_pkgs.get(pub)
- if pkgs != None:
- if stem in pkgs:
- marked = True
- # When switching after Manage Publisher dialog
- # this assignment can cause bogus refilter
- if pkg[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN] != marked:
- pkg[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN] = marked
- if self.saved_category_list == self.category_list:
- self.__restore_category_state()
- self.__init_tree_views(self.saved_application_list,
- None, None,
- self.saved_application_list_filter,
- self.saved_application_list_sort)
- else:
- self.__init_tree_views(self.saved_application_list,
- self.saved_category_list, self.saved_section_list,
- self.saved_application_list_filter,
- self.saved_application_list_sort)
-
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
-
- def __save_application_list(self, app_list):
- self.saved_application_list = app_list
-
- def __save_setup_before_search(self, single_search=False):
- #Do not save search data models
- if self.in_search_mode:
- return
- self.__save_application_list(self.application_list)
- self.saved_application_list_sort = \
- self.application_list_sort
- self.saved_application_list_filter = \
- self.application_list_filter
- self.saved_category_list = self.category_list
- self.saved_section_list = self.section_list
-
- pub_index = self.w_repository_combobox.get_active()
- if pub_index != self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index and \
- pub_index != self.repo_combobox_add_index:
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active = pub_index
-
- def __do_search(self, widget=None, ev=None):
- self.in_recent_search = False
- self.__reset_search_start()
- txt = self.entrystyle.get_text()
- if txt == None:
- return
- self.previous_search_text = txt
- if self.is_all_publishers_installed:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__setup_search_installed_page, txt)
- return
- contains_asterix = txt.count("*") > 0
- contains_asterix_only = False
- is_search_all = self.is_all_publishers_search or \
- self.__get_selected_publisher() == \
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL]
- if contains_asterix:
- contains_asterix_only = len(txt.replace("*", " ").strip()) == 0
- if contains_asterix_only:
- self.w_searchentry.set_text("*")
- self.__set_focus_on_searchentry()
- if is_search_all:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__setup_search_wildcard_page)
- else:
- if self.in_search_mode:
- self.__unset_search(True)
- if self.w_categories_treeview.get_model() != None:
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_cursor(0)
- return
- if not self.is_all_publishers_search:
- self.__save_setup_before_search(single_search=True)
- self.__clear_before_search()
- self.__set_focus_on_searchentry()
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- self.in_search_mode = True
-
- self.w_logalert_frame.hide()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__set_main_view_package_list)
- Thread(target = self.__do_api_search,
- args = (is_search_all, )).start()
-
- def __get_selection_and_category_path(self):
- selection = self.w_categories_treeview.get_selection()
- if not selection:
- return None, (0,)
- model, itr = selection.get_selected()
- if not model or not itr:
- return None, (0,)
- return selection, model.get_path(itr)
-
- def __unselect_category(self):
- selection, path = self.__get_selection_and_category_path()
- if selection:
- self.__save_active_category(path)
- selection.unselect_all()
-
- def __process_after_cancel(self):
- if self.is_all_publishers_search:
- self.__setup_before_all_publishers_search_mode()
- else:
- self.__unset_search(True)
-
- def __process_after_search_failure(self):
- self.__reset_search_start()
- self.search_time_sec = 0
- self.application_list = []
- gobject.idle_add(self.update_statusbar)
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- self.in_setup = False
-
- def __handle_inc_search_results(self, sort_col):
- self.search_results_id = 0
- if debug:
- print "handle_inc_search_results: ", \
- time.time() - self.search_start, len(self.search_results)
- application_list = self.__get_min_list_from_search(self.search_results)
- self.in_setup = True
- self.__init_tree_views(application_list, None, None, None, None, sort_col)
-
- def __do_api_search(self, search_all = True):
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- self.__do_api_search_without_lock(search_all)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __do_api_search_without_lock(self, search_all = True):
- self.__set_search_start()
- gobject.idle_add(self.update_statusbar)
- self.search_time_sec = 0
- self.search_results = []
- self.__clear_inc_search_results_task()
- text = self.w_searchentry.get_text()
- pub_prefix = None
- # Here we call the search API to get the results
- searches = []
- servers = []
- pargs = []
- search_str = SEARCH_STR_FORMAT % text
- pargs.append(search_str)
- if search_all:
- self.publisher_being_searched = _("All Publishers")
- servers = None
- else:
- pub_prefix = self.__get_selected_publisher()
- try:
- if pub_prefix != None:
- pub = self.api_o.get_publisher(prefix=pub_prefix)
- else:
- pub = self.api_o.get_highest_ranked_publisher()
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- return
- origin_uri = gui_misc.get_origin_uri(pub.repository)
- servers.append({"origin": origin_uri})
- self.publisher_being_searched = \
- self.get_publisher_display_name_from_prefix(pub.prefix)
- if debug:
- print "Search: pargs %s servers: %s" % (pargs, servers)
-
- #TBD If we ever search just Installed pkgs should allow for a local search
- case_sensitive = False
- return_actions = True
-
- last_name = ""
- # Sorting results by Name gives best overall appearance and flow
- sort_col = enumerations.NAME_COLUMN
- # pylint: disable=C0321
- try:
- searches.append(self.api_o.remote_search(
- [api.Query(" ".join(pargs), case_sensitive, return_actions)],
- servers=servers))
- if debug:
- print "Search Args: %s : cs: %s : retact: %s" % \
- ("".join(pargs), case_sensitive, return_actions)
- for query_num, pub, (v, return_type, tmp) in \
- itertools.chain(*searches):
- if v < 1 or return_type != api.Query.RETURN_PACKAGES:
- self.__process_after_search_failure()
- return
-
- active_pub = None
- if pub is not None \
- and "prefix" in pub:
- active_pub = pub["prefix"]
- name = fmri.PkgFmri(str(tmp)).get_name()
- if last_name != name:
- if debug:
- print "Result Name: %s (%s)" \
- % (name, active_pub)
- a_res = name, active_pub
- self.search_results.append(a_res)
- if self.search_results_id == 0:
- self.search_results_id = (
- gobject.timeout_add(
- INC_RESULTS_DELAY,
- self.__handle_inc_search_results,
- sort_col))
- last_name = name
- self.pylintstub = query_num
- except api_errors.ProblematicSearchServers, ex:
- self.__process_api_search_error(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__handle_api_search_error)
- if len(self.search_results) == 0:
- if search_all:
- self.__process_after_search_with_zero_results(
- _("All Publishers"), text,
- search_all)
- else:
- self.__process_after_search_with_zero_results(
- pub_prefix, text, search_all)
- return
- except api_errors.CanceledException:
- self.__reset_search_start()
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__process_after_cancel)
- return
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- self.__process_after_search_failure()
- return
- except Exception, aex:
- err = str(aex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- self.__process_after_search_failure()
- return
- finally:
- self.__clear_inc_search_results_task()
- if debug:
- print "Number of search results:", len(self.search_results)
- if len(self.search_results) == 0:
- if debug:
- print "No search results"
- if search_all:
- self.__process_after_search_with_zero_results(
- _("All Publishers"), text, search_all)
- else:
- self.__process_after_search_with_zero_results(
- pub_prefix, text, search_all)
- return
- #Now fetch full result set with Status
- if self.exiting:
- return
- self.in_setup = True
- if debug_perf:
- print "Time for search:", time.time() - self.search_start
- application_list = self.__get_full_list_from_search(self.search_results)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__add_recent_search, text, pub_prefix,
- application_list, search_all)
- if self.search_start > 0:
- self.search_time_sec = int(time.time() - self.search_start)
- if debug:
- print "Search time: %d (sec)" % self.search_time_sec
- self.__reset_search_start()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__init_tree_views, application_list, None, None, \
- None, None, sort_col)
- if self.w_filter_combobox.get_active() == enumerations.FILTER_ALL:
- return
-
- gobject.idle_add(self.__check_zero_results_afterfilter, text,
- len(application_list))
-
- def __clear_inc_search_results_task(self):
- if self.search_results_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.search_results_id)
- self.search_results_id = 0
-
- def __check_zero_results_afterfilter(self, text, num):
- if self.length_visible_list != 0:
- return
- self.__setup_search_zero_filtered_results_page(text, num)
- self.update_statusbar()
-
- def __set_search_start(self):
- self.search_start = time.time()
-
- def __reset_search_start(self):
- self.search_start = 0
-
- def __process_after_search_with_zero_results(self, pub, text,
- search_all):
- if self.search_start > 0:
- self.search_time_sec = \
- int(time.time() - self.search_start)
- self.__reset_search_start()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__setup_search_zero_results_page, pub, text,
- search_all)
- self.in_setup = True
- application_list = self.__get_new_application_liststore()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__set_empty_details_panel)
- gobject.idle_add(self.__init_tree_views, application_list, None, None)
-
- def get_publisher_display_name_from_prefix(self, prefix):
- if self.pubs_display_name.has_key(prefix):
- return self.pubs_display_name[prefix]
- else:
- return prefix
-
- def get_publisher_name_from_prefix(self, prefix):
- if self.pubs_info.has_key(prefix):
- item = self.pubs_info[prefix]
- else:
- return prefix
- alias = item[1]
- if alias != None and len(alias) > 0:
- return alias
- else:
- return prefix
-
- def __get_min_list_from_search(self, search_result):
- application_list = self.__get_new_application_liststore()
- for name, pub in search_result:
- pub_name = self.get_publisher_name_from_prefix(pub)
- #Add to application_list
- application_list.append(
- [False, None, name, '...', api.PackageInfo.KNOWN,
- gui_misc.get_pkg_stem(name, pub), None, True, None,
- pub_name, pub, False])
- return application_list
-
- def __get_full_list_from_search(self, search_result):
- application_list = self.__get_new_application_liststore()
- self.__add_pkgs_to_list_from_search(search_result,
- application_list)
- return application_list
-
- def __add_pkgs_to_list_from_search(self, search_result,
- application_list):
- local_results = self.__get_info_for_search_results(search_result)
- remote_results = self.__get_info_for_search_results(search_result,
- local_results)
- self.__add_pkgs_to_lists_from_info(local_results,
- remote_results, application_list)
-
- def __get_info_for_search_results(self, search_result, local_results = None):
- pargs = []
- results = []
- local_info = local_results == None
- for name, pub in search_result:
- found = False
- if local_results:
- for result in local_results:
- if (name == result.pkg_stem and
- pub == result.publisher):
- found = True
- break
- if not found:
- pargs.append(gui_misc.get_pkg_stem(name, pub))
- else:
- pargs.append(gui_misc.get_pkg_stem(name, pub))
-
- try:
- try:
- if len(pargs) > 0:
- res = self.api_o.info(pargs,
- local_info, frozenset(
- [api.PackageInfo.IDENTITY,
- api.PackageInfo.STATE,
- api.PackageInfo.SUMMARY]))
- results = res.get(0)
- except api_errors.TransportError, tpex:
- err = str(tpex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.InvalidDepotResponseException, idex:
- err = str(idex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except Exception, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err)
- finally:
- return results
-
- def __application_refilter(self):
- ''' Disconnecting the model from the treeview improves
- performance when assistive technologies are enabled'''
- self.application_refilter_id = 0
- if self.in_setup:
- return
- model = self.w_application_treeview.get_model()
- self.w_application_treeview.set_model(None)
- app_id, order = self.application_list_sort.get_sort_column_id()
- self.application_list_sort.reset_default_sort_func()
- self.application_list_filter.refilter()
- if app_id != None:
- self.application_list_sort.set_sort_column_id(app_id, order)
- if model != None:
- self.w_application_treeview.set_model(model)
- self.application_treeview_initialized = True
- self.application_treeview_range = None
- if self.visible_status_id == 0:
- self.visible_status_id = gobject.idle_add(
- self.__set_visible_status)
- len_filtered_list = len(self.application_list_filter)
- if len_filtered_list > 0 and \
- self.length_visible_list != len_filtered_list:
- self.update_statusbar()
- self.__set_empty_details_panel()
- self.__enable_disable_selection_menus()
- self.__enable_disable_install_remove()
- self.__enable_disable_select_all()
- self.__enable_disable_deselect()
- if not self.in_search_mode and self.length_visible_list > 0 and \
- len_filtered_list == 0 and \
- self.w_filter_combobox.get_active() != \
- (enumerations.FILTER_SELECTED):
- self.__setup_zero_filtered_results_page()
- self.update_statusbar()
- return False
-
- def __on_edit_paste(self, widget):
- self.w_searchentry.paste_clipboard()
-
- def __on_delete(self, widget):
- bounds = self.w_searchentry.get_selection_bounds()
- self.w_searchentry.delete_text(bounds[0], bounds[1])
- return
-
- def __on_copy(self, widget):
- focus_widget = self.w_main_window.get_focus()
- if focus_widget == self.w_searchentry:
- self.w_searchentry.copy_clipboard()
- self.w_paste_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- elif gui_misc.is_a_textview(focus_widget):
- focus_widget.get_buffer().copy_clipboard(
- self.w_main_clipboard)
-
- def __on_cut(self, widget):
- self.w_searchentry.cut_clipboard()
- self.w_paste_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
-
- def __on_goto_list_clicked(self, widget):
- if self.w_main_view_notebook.get_current_page() == NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE:
- if self.startpage.view:
- self.startpage.view.grab_focus()
- else:
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
- self.w_application_treeview.grab_focus()
-
- def __on_edit_search_clicked(self, widget):
- self.w_searchentry.grab_focus()
-
- def __on_clear_search(self, widget, icon_pos=0, event=None):
- self.w_searchentry.set_text("")
- self.__clear_search_results()
-
- def __clear_search_results(self):
- # Only clear out search results
- if self.in_search_mode or self.is_all_publishers_search:
- self.__clear_before_search()
- self.update_statusbar_message(_("Search cleared"))
- if self.is_all_publishers_search:
- if self.w_main_view_notebook.get_current_page() \
- != NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE:
- gobject.idle_add(self.pm_setup_search_all_page)
- else:
- self.__unset_search(self.in_search_mode)
- return
-
- def __on_progress_cancel_clicked(self, widget):
- Thread(target = self.api_o.cancel, args = ()).start()
-
- def __on_startpage(self, widget):
- self.startpage.load_startpage()
- self.w_main_view_notebook.set_current_page(NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE)
-
- def __reset_info_tabs(self, pagenum = None, immediate = False):
- self.info_pkgstem = None
- self.dependencies_pkgstem = None
- self.license_pkgstem = None
- self.versions_pkgstem = None
- self.__process_package_selection(pagenum, immediate)
-
- def __process_package_selection(self, pagenum = None, immediate = False):
- if pagenum == None:
- pagenum = self.w_info_notebook.get_current_page()
- model, itr = self.package_selection.get_selected()
- if itr:
- self.selected_pkgstem = \
- model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STEM_COLUMN)
- self.selected_pkg_name = \
- model.get_value(itr, enumerations.ACTUAL_NAME_COLUMN)
- self.selected_pkg_pub = \
- model.get_value(itr, enumerations.PUBLISHER_PREFIX_COLUMN)
- self.__do_notebook_change(pagenum, model, model.get_path(itr),
- immediate)
- self.w_version_info_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.selected_model = None
- self.selected_path = None
- self.selected_pkgstem = None
- self.selected_pkg_name = None
- self.selected_pkg_pub = None
- self.w_version_info_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.__do_notebook_change(pagenum, None, None, immediate)
-
- def __on_package_selection_changed(self, selection, widget):
- '''This function is for handling package selection changes'''
- if self.in_setup:
- return
- self.__process_package_selection()
-
- def __on_notebook_change(self, widget, event, pagenum):
- self.__process_package_selection(pagenum, True)
-
- def __do_notebook_change(self, pagenum, model = None, path = None,
- immediate = False):
- self.detailspanel.clear_details(self.info_pkgstem,
- self.dependencies_pkgstem, self.license_pkgstem,
- self.versions_pkgstem, self.selected_pkgstem)
- if (pagenum == INFO_NOTEBOOK_DEPENDENCIES_PAGE):
- if self.selected_pkgstem == self.dependencies_pkgstem:
- return
- self.detailspanel.set_fetching_dependencies()
- if self.show_dependencies_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.show_dependencies_id)
- self.show_dependencies_id = 0
- if immediate:
- source_id = gobject.idle_add(self.__show_dependencies)
- else:
- source_id = gobject.timeout_add(SHOW_DEPENDENCIES_DELAY,
- self.__show_dependencies)
- self.last_show_dependencies_id = self.show_dependencies_id = \
- source_id
- elif (pagenum == INFO_NOTEBOOK_LICENSE_PAGE):
- if self.selected_pkgstem == self.license_pkgstem:
- return
- self.detailspanel.set_fetching_license()
- if self.show_licenses_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.show_licenses_id)
- self.show_licenses_id = 0
- if immediate:
- source_id = gobject.idle_add(self.__show_licenses)
- else:
- source_id = gobject.timeout_add(SHOW_LICENSE_DELAY,
- self.__show_licenses)
- self.last_show_licenses_id = self.show_licenses_id = source_id
- elif (pagenum == INFO_NOTEBOOK_VERSIONS_PAGE):
- if self.selected_pkgstem == self.versions_pkgstem:
- return
- gobject.idle_add(self.detailspanel.set_fetching_versions)
- if self.show_versions_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.show_versions_id)
- self.show_versions_id = 0
- if immediate:
- source_id = gobject.idle_add(self.__show_versions)
- else:
- source_id = gobject.timeout_add(SHOW_VERSIONS_DELAY,
- self.__show_versions)
- self.last_show_versions_id = self.show_versions_id = source_id
- else:
- if self.selected_pkgstem == self.info_pkgstem:
- return
- self.detailspanel.set_fetching_info()
- if self.show_info_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.show_info_id)
- self.show_info_id = 0
- if immediate:
- source_id = gobject.idle_add(self.__show_info,
- model, path)
- else:
- source_id = gobject.timeout_add(SHOW_INFO_DELAY,
- self.__show_info, model, path)
- self.last_show_info_id = self.show_info_id = source_id
-
- def __toggle_select_all(self, select_all=True):
- focus_widget = self.w_main_window.get_focus()
- if gui_misc.is_a_textview(focus_widget):
- focus_widget.emit('select-all', select_all)
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- return
- elif focus_widget == self.w_searchentry:
- if select_all:
- focus_widget.select_region(0, -1)
- else:
- focus_widget.select_region(0, 0)
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- return
-
- sort_filt_model = \
- self.w_application_treeview.get_model() #gtk.TreeModelSort
- filt_model = sort_filt_model.get_model() #gtk.TreeModelFilter
- model = filt_model.get_model() #gtk.ListStore
- iter_next = sort_filt_model.get_iter_first()
- list_of_paths = []
- while iter_next != None:
- sorted_path = sort_filt_model.get_path(iter_next)
- filtered_path = \
- sort_filt_model.convert_path_to_child_path(sorted_path)
- path = filt_model.convert_path_to_child_path(filtered_path)
- if select_all:
- list_of_paths.append(path)
- else:
- filtered_iter = \
- sort_filt_model.convert_iter_to_child_iter(None,
- iter_next)
- app_iter = filt_model.convert_iter_to_child_iter(
- filtered_iter)
- if model.get_value(app_iter, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN):
- list_of_paths.append(path)
- iter_next = sort_filt_model.iter_next(iter_next)
- for path in list_of_paths:
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- mark_value = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN)
- if select_all and not mark_value:
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN, True)
- pkg_stem = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.STEM_COLUMN)
- pkg_status = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN)
- pkg_publisher = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PREFIX_COLUMN)
- pkg_description = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.DESCRIPTION_COLUMN)
- pkg_name = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
- self.__add_pkg_stem_to_list(pkg_stem, pkg_name,
- pkg_status, pkg_publisher, pkg_description)
- elif not select_all and mark_value:
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN, False)
- pkg_stem = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.STEM_COLUMN)
- self.__remove_pkg_stem_from_list(pkg_stem)
-
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(not select_all)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(select_all)
- self.__enable_disable_selection_menus()
- self.update_statusbar()
- self.__enable_disable_install_remove()
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
-
- def __on_select_all(self, widget):
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__toggle_select_all, True)
- return
-
- def __on_select_updates(self, widget):
- sort_filt_model = \
- self.w_application_treeview.get_model() #gtk.TreeModelSort
- filt_model = sort_filt_model.get_model() #gtk.TreeModelFilter
- model = filt_model.get_model() #gtk.ListStore
- iter_next = sort_filt_model.get_iter_first()
- list_of_paths = []
- while iter_next != None:
- sorted_path = sort_filt_model.get_path(iter_next)
- filtered_iter = sort_filt_model.convert_iter_to_child_iter(None, \
- iter_next)
- app_iter = filt_model.convert_iter_to_child_iter(filtered_iter)
-
- filtered_path = \
- sort_filt_model.convert_path_to_child_path(sorted_path)
- path = filt_model.convert_path_to_child_path(filtered_path)
- if model.get_value(app_iter, \
- enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN) == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- list_of_paths.append(path)
- iter_next = sort_filt_model.iter_next(iter_next)
- for path in list_of_paths:
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- model.set_value(itr, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN, True)
- pkg_stem = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STEM_COLUMN)
- pkg_status = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN)
- pkg_publisher = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PREFIX_COLUMN)
- pkg_description = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.DESCRIPTION_COLUMN)
- pkg_name = model.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
- self.__add_pkg_stem_to_list(pkg_stem, pkg_name, pkg_status,
- pkg_publisher, pkg_description)
- self.__enable_disable_selection_menus()
- self.update_statusbar()
- self.__enable_disable_install_remove()
-
- def __on_deselect(self, widget):
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__toggle_select_all, False)
- return
-
- def __on_preferences(self, widget):
- self.preferences.activate()
-
- def __on_searchentry_focus_in(self, widget, event):
- self.__set_search_text_mode(enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_NORMAL)
- if self.w_main_clipboard.wait_is_text_available():
- self.w_paste_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- char_count = widget.get_text_length()
- if char_count > 0:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- bounds = widget.get_selection_bounds()
- if bounds:
- offset1 = bounds[0]
- offset2 = bounds[1]
- if abs(offset2 - offset1) == char_count:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_copy_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __on_searchentry_focus_out(self, widget, event):
- if self.w_searchentry.get_text_length() == 0:
- self.__set_search_text_mode(enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_PROMPT)
- self.w_paste_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.__enable_disable_select_all()
- self.__enable_disable_deselect()
- self.w_cut_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_copy_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_delete_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- return False
-
- def __on_searchentry_selection(self, widget, pspec):
- self.__enable_disable_entry_selection(widget)
-
- def __enable_disable_entry_selection(self, widget):
- char_count = widget.get_text_length()
- bounds = widget.get_selection_bounds()
- if bounds:
- #enable selection functions
- self.w_cut_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_copy_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_delete_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- if char_count == abs(bounds[1] - bounds[0]):
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- else:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_cut_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_copy_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_delete_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- if char_count == 0:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- else:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
-
- def __refilter_on_idle(self):
- if self.application_refilter_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.application_refilter_id)
- self.application_refilter_id = 0
- if self.application_refilter_id == 0:
- self.application_refilter_id = gobject.idle_add(
- self.__application_refilter)
-
- def __on_category_focus_in(self, widget, event, user):
- self.__on_category_row_activated(None, None, None, user)
-
- def __on_category_row_activated(self, view, path, col, user):
- '''This function is for handling category double click activations'''
- # Activated sub node in Recent Searches category
- if self.in_recent_search:
- return
- # User activated Recent Searches Top Level category
- model = self.w_categories_treeview.get_model()
- if model != None and self.recent_searches_cat_iter:
- rs_path = model.get_path(self.recent_searches_cat_iter)
- selection, curr_path = self.__get_selection_and_category_path()
- self.pylintstub = selection
- if curr_path == rs_path:
- self.__setup_recent_search_page()
- return
- if self.category_list == None:
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
- return
- if self.w_filter_combobox.get_model():
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_active(
- self.saved_filter_combobox_active)
- if self.in_search_mode or self.is_all_publishers_search:
- self.__unset_search(True)
- return
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- self.__refilter_on_idle()
-
- def __set_main_view_package_list(self, show_list=True):
- # Only switch from Start Page View to List view if we are not in startup
- if self.in_startpage_startup:
- return
- if show_list:
- self.w_main_view_notebook.set_current_page(
- NOTEBOOK_PACKAGE_LIST_PAGE)
- else:
- self.w_main_view_notebook.set_current_page(
- NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE)
-
- def __on_categoriestreeview_row_collapsed(self, treeview, itr, path, data):
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_cursor(path)
- self.__save_expanded_path(path, False)
- self.__save_active_category(path)
-
- def __on_categoriestreeview_row_expanded(self, treeview, itr, path, data):
- if self.in_setup and not self.first_run:
- return
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_cursor(path)
- self.__save_expanded_path(path, True)
- self.__save_active_category(path)
-
- def __on_categoriestreeview_button_press_event(self, treeview, event, data):
- if event.type != gtk.gdk.BUTTON_PRESS:
- return 1
- x = int(event.x)
- y = int(event.y)
- pthinfo = treeview.get_path_at_pos(x, y)
- if pthinfo is not None:
- path = pthinfo[0]
- cellx = pthinfo[2]
- #Clicking on row toggle icon just select the path
- if cellx <= CATEGORY_TOGGLE_ICON_WIDTH:
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_cursor(path)
- self.w_categories_treeview.scroll_to_cell(path)
- return
- #Collapse expand Top level Sections only
- tree_view = self.w_categories_treeview
- if path != 0 and len(path) == 1:
- if tree_view.row_expanded(path) and \
- self.w_main_view_notebook.get_current_page() == \
- NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE:
- self.__on_category_selection_changed(
- tree_view.get_selection(), None)
- elif tree_view.row_expanded(path):
- selection, sel_path = \
- self.__get_selection_and_category_path()
- if selection and sel_path == path:
- tree_view.collapse_row(path)
- else:
- tree_view.expand_row(path, False)
- self.__save_active_category(path)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __categoriestreeview_compare_func(model, column, key, itr):
- value = model.get_value(itr, column)
- if not value:
- return True
-
- try:
- value = re.sub(REGEX_STRIP_MARKUP, "", value)
- value = re.sub(REGEX_STRIP_RESULT, "", value)
- match = re.match(re.escape(key), re.escape(value), re.IGNORECASE)
- except (TypeError, re.error):
- return True
-
- return match is None
-
- def __in_recent_searches(self, path):
- if not path or len(path) == 0:
- return False
- model = self.w_categories_treeview.get_model()
- if model == None:
- return False
- rs_path = model.get_path(self.recent_searches_cat_iter)
- if rs_path and len(rs_path) > 0 and path[0] == rs_path[0]:
- return True
- return False
-
- def __save_expanded_path(self, path, expanded):
- if not path or len(path) == 0:
- return
- self.category_expanded_paths[(self.last_visible_publisher, path)] = \
- expanded
-
- def __save_active_category(self, path):
- if self.first_run or not path or len(path) == 0 or \
- self.__in_recent_searches(path):
- return
- self.category_active_paths[self.last_visible_publisher] = path
- self.saved_section_active = path[0]
-
- def __on_category_selection_changed(self, selection, widget):
- '''This function is for handling category selection changes'''
- if self.in_setup:
- return
- model, itr = selection.get_selected()
- if not itr:
- return
-
- path = model.get_path(itr)
- sel_category = model[path]
- if sel_category[enumerations.CATEGORY_ID] == RECENT_SEARCH_ID:
- if not self.adding_recent_search:
- self.__setup_recent_search_page()
- if not self.is_all_publishers_search:
- self.__save_setup_before_search(
- single_search=True)
- self.in_search_mode = True
- self.in_recent_search = True
- else:
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
- return
- elif sel_category[enumerations.CATEGORY_ID] > RECENT_SEARCH_ID:
- self.__restore_recent_search(sel_category)
- return
- self.__save_active_category(path)
- if self.in_search_mode or self.is_all_publishers_search:
- #Required for A11Y support because focus event not triggered
- #when A11Y enabled and user clicks on Category after Search
- self.__unset_search(True)
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
- return
- if self.saved_filter_combobox_active != None:
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_active(
- self.saved_filter_combobox_active)
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
-
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- self.__refilter_on_idle()
-
- def __on_applicationtreeview_query_tooltip(self, treeview, x, y,
- keyboard_mode, tooltip):
- treex, treey = treeview.convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords(x, y)
- info = treeview.get_path_at_pos(treex, treey)
- if not info:
- return False
- return self.__show_app_column_tooltip(treeview, _("Status"),
- info[0], info[1], tooltip)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __show_app_column_tooltip(treeview, col_title, path, col, tooltip):
- tip = ""
- if path and col:
- title = col.get_title()
- if title != col_title:
- return False
- row = list(treeview.get_model()[path])
- if row:
- status = row[enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN]
- if status == api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED:
- tip = _("Installed")
- elif status == api.PackageInfo.KNOWN:
- tip = _("Not installed")
- elif status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- tip = _("Updates Available")
-
- if tip != "":
- treeview.set_tooltip_cell(tooltip, path, col, None)
- tooltip.set_text(tip)
- return True
- else:
- return False
-
- def __on_applicationtreeview_button_and_key_events(self, treeview, event):
- if event.type == gtk.gdk.KEY_PRESS:
- keyname = gtk.gdk.keyval_name(event.keyval)
- if event.state == gtk.gdk.CONTROL_MASK and keyname == "F1":
- return True #Disable Tooltip popup using Ctrl-F1
-
- if not(event.state == gtk.gdk.SHIFT_MASK and keyname == "F10"):
- return
-
- selection = self.w_application_treeview.get_selection()
- if not selection:
- return
- model, itr = selection.get_selected()
- if not model or not itr:
- return
- curr_time = event.time
- path = model.get_path(itr)
- col = treeview.get_column(1) # NAME_COLUMN
- treeview.set_cursor(path, col, 0)
-
- #Calculate popup coordinates
- treecell_rect = treeview.get_cell_area(path, col)
- rx, ry = treeview.tree_to_widget_coords(treecell_rect[0],
- treecell_rect[1])
- winx, winy = treeview.get_bin_window().get_origin()
- winx += rx
- winy += ry
- popup_position = (winx, winy)
- self.w_package_menu.popup( None, None,
- self.__position_package_popup, gtk.gdk.KEY_PRESS,
- curr_time, popup_position)
- return True
-
- if event.type != gtk.gdk.BUTTON_PRESS and event.type != 5:
- return
- x = int(event.x)
- y = int(event.y)
- pthinfo = treeview.get_path_at_pos(x, y)
- if pthinfo == None:
- return
- path = pthinfo[0]
- col = pthinfo[1]
-
- #Double click
- if event.type == GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS:
- self.__active_pane_toggle(None, path, treeview.get_model())
- return
- if event.button == GDK_RIGHT_BUTTON: #Right Click
- curr_time = event.time
- treeview.grab_focus()
- treeview.set_cursor( path, col, 0)
- self.w_package_menu.popup( None, None, None, event.button,
- curr_time)
- return
-
- @staticmethod
- def __applicationtreeview_compare_func(model, column, key, itr):
- value = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
- if not value:
- return True
-
- value = value.lower()
- return not value.startswith(key.lower())
-
- @staticmethod
- def __position_package_popup(menu, position):
- #Positions popup relative to the top left corner of the currently
- #selected row's Name cell
- x, y = position
-
- #Offset x by 10 and y by 15 so underlying name is visible
- return (x+10, y+15, True)
-
- def __on_filtercombobox_changed(self, widget):
- '''On filter combobox changed'''
- if self.first_run or self.in_setup:
- return
- active = self.w_filter_combobox.get_active()
- if active != enumerations.FILTER_SELECTED:
- self.saved_filter_combobox_active = active
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- self.__refilter_on_idle()
-
- def __unset_search(self, same_repo):
- self.w_logalert_frame.hide()
- self.__update_tooltips()
- self.in_search_mode = False
- self.in_recent_search = False
- self.is_all_publishers_search = False
- if same_repo:
- self.__restore_setup_for_browse()
-
- def __on_repositorycombobox_changed(self, widget):
- '''On repository combobox changed'''
- if debug_perf:
- print "Start change publisher", time.time()
- if self.same_publisher_on_setup:
- if self.is_all_publishers_search:
- self.__clear_search_results()
- self.same_publisher_on_setup = False
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- if self.in_setup:
- self.in_setup = False
- return
- selected_publisher = self.__get_selected_publisher()
- index = self.w_repository_combobox.get_active()
- if self.is_all_publishers_search:
- if index == self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index:
- return
- if index == self.repo_combobox_add_index:
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index)
- self.__on_file_add_publisher(None)
- return
- same_repo = self.saved_repository_combobox_active == index
- self.__unset_search(same_repo)
- if same_repo:
- self.__set_searchentry_to_prompt()
- return
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(index)
- selected_publisher = self.__get_selected_publisher()
- if selected_publisher == self.last_visible_publisher:
- return
- if index == self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index:
- self.__set_all_publishers_search_mode()
- return
-
- if index == self.repo_combobox_add_index:
- index = self.__get_publisher_combobox_index(
- self.last_visible_publisher)
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(index)
- self.__on_file_add_publisher(None)
- return
- self.is_all_publishers = False
- if index == self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_installed_index:
- self.w_filter_combobox.set_active(enumerations.FILTER_ALL)
- self.is_all_publishers_installed = True
- else:
- self.is_all_publishers_installed = False
- if index == self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_index:
- self.is_all_publishers = True
-
- self.__do_set_publisher()
-
- def __do_set_publisher(self):
- self.cancelled = True
- self.in_setup = True
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- self.__set_empty_details_panel()
- if self.in_search_mode:
- self.__unset_search(False)
-
- pub = [self.__get_selected_publisher(), ]
- self.set_section = self.gconf.initial_section
- self.__set_searchentry_to_prompt()
- self.__disconnect_models()
- Thread(target = self.__setup_publisher, args = [pub]).start()
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
-
- def __get_selected_publisher(self):
- pub_iter = self.w_repository_combobox.get_active_iter()
- if pub_iter == None:
- return None
- return self.repositories_list.get_value(pub_iter, \
- enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX)
-
- def __setup_publisher(self, publishers):
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- self.__setup_publisher_without_lock(publishers)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __setup_publisher_without_lock(self, publishers):
- self.saved_filter_combobox_active = self.gconf.initial_show_filter
- application_list, category_list , section_list = \
- self.__get_application_categories_lists(publishers)
- self.__unset_saved()
- self.publisher_changed = True
- self.last_visible_publisher = self.__get_selected_publisher()
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active = \
- self.w_repository_combobox.get_active()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__init_tree_views, application_list,
- category_list, section_list)
-
- def __unset_saved(self):
- self.__save_application_list(None)
- self.saved_application_list_filter = None
- self.saved_application_list_sort = None
- self.saved_category_list = None
- self.saved_section_list = None
-
- def __refresh_for_publisher(self, pub):
- status_str = _("Refreshing package catalog information")
- gobject.idle_add(self.update_statusbar_message,
- status_str)
- if self.is_all_publishers_installed or self.is_all_publishers:
- self.__do_refresh()
- else:
- self.__do_refresh(pubs=[pub])
-
- def __do_refresh(self, pubs=None, immediate=False):
- success = False
- try:
- if debug_perf:
- print "Time before reset",time.time()
- if immediate:
- self.api_o.reset()
- if debug_perf:
- print "Time after reset", time.time()
- self.api_o.refresh(pubs=pubs, immediate=immediate)
- if debug_perf:
- print "after refresh", time.time()
- success = True
- except api_errors.CatalogRefreshException, cre:
- res = gui_misc.get_catalogrefresh_exception_msg(cre)
- logger.error(res[0])
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.TransportError, tpex:
- err = str(tpex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.InvalidDepotResponseException, idex:
- err = str(idex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.PermissionsException, ex:
- if self.first_run:
- self.user_rights = False
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- except Exception, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- return success
-
- def __get_application_categories_lists(self, publishers):
- application_list = self.__get_new_application_liststore()
- category_list = self.__get_new_category_liststore()
- section_list = self.__get_new_section_liststore()
- for pub in publishers:
- if debug_perf:
- a = time.time()
- self.__refresh_for_publisher(pub)
- if debug_perf:
- print "Time to refresh", time.time() - a
- a = time.time()
- self.__add_pkgs_to_lists_from_api(pub,
- application_list, category_list, section_list)
- if debug_perf:
- b = time.time()
- print "Time to add", b - a, b
- category_list.prepend(None, [0, _('All'), _('All'), None,
- None, True])
-
- return application_list, category_list, section_list
-
- def __add_install_update_pkgs_for_publishers(self, install_update,
- confirmation_list):
- for pub_name in self.selected_pkgs:
- pub_display_name = self.get_publisher_display_name_from_prefix(
- pub_name)
- pkgs = self.selected_pkgs.get(pub_name)
- if not pkgs:
- break
- for pkg_stem in pkgs:
- status = pkgs.get(pkg_stem)[0]
- if status == api.PackageInfo.KNOWN or \
- status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- install_update.append(pkg_stem)
- if self.gconf.show_install:
- desc = pkgs.get(pkg_stem)[1]
- pkg_name = pkgs.get(pkg_stem)[2]
- confirmation_list.append(
- [pkg_name, pub_display_name,
- desc, status, pkg_stem])
-
- def __on_log_activate(self, widget):
- if self.error_logged:
- self.error_logged = False
- self.w_logalert_frame.hide()
- self.logging.log_activate()
-
- def __on_version_info(self, widget):
- model, itr = self.package_selection.get_selected()
- if itr:
- pkg_stem = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STEM_COLUMN)
- name = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.ACTUAL_NAME_COLUMN)
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- Thread(target = self.__get_info, args = (pkg_stem, name)).start()
-
- def check_exiting(self):
- return self.exiting
-
- def __get_info(self, pkg_stem, name):
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- self.__get_info_without_lock(pkg_stem, name)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __get_info_without_lock(self, pkg_stem, name):
- if not self.do_api_reset():
- return
- try:
- if self.versioninfo.get_info(pkg_stem, name):
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- gobject.idle_add(gui_misc.notify_log_error, self)
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- return
-
- def do_api_reset(self):
- if self.api_o == None:
- return False
- try:
- self.api_o.reset()
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- return False
- return True
-
- def __on_install_update(self, widget):
- if not self.do_api_reset():
- return
- install_update = []
- install_confirmation_list = []
- if self.all_selected > 0:
- self.__add_install_update_pkgs_for_publishers(
- install_update, install_confirmation_list)
-
- if self.img_timestamp != self.cache_o.get_index_timestamp():
- self.img_timestamp = None
-
- self.installupdate = installupdate.InstallUpdate(install_update, self, \
- self.image_directory, action = enumerations.INSTALL_UPDATE,
- main_window = self.w_main_window,
- confirmation_list = install_confirmation_list,
- show_confirmation = self.gconf.show_install,
- api_lock = self.api_lock,
- gconf = self.gconf)
-
- def __on_update_all(self, widget):
- if not self.do_api_reset():
- return
- self.installupdate = installupdate.InstallUpdate([], self,
- self.image_directory, action = enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE,
- parent_name = self.program_title,
- pkg_list = [gui_misc.package_name["SUNWipkg"],
- gui_misc.package_name["SUNWipkg-gui"]],
- main_window = self.w_main_window,
- icon_confirm_dialog = self.window_icon,
- show_confirmation = self.gconf.show_image_update,
- api_lock = self.api_lock,
- gconf = self.gconf)
- return
-
- def __on_help_about(self, widget):
- aboutdialog = self.builder.get_object("aboutdialog")
- aboutdialog.set_icon(self.window_icon)
- aboutdialog.connect("response", lambda x = None, \
- y = None: aboutdialog.hide())
- aboutdialog.set_version(gui_misc.get_os_version_and_build())
- aboutdialog.run()
-
- @staticmethod
- def __on_help_help(widget):
- gui_misc.display_help()
-
- def __add_remove_pkgs_for_publishers(self, remove_list, confirmation_list):
- for pub_name in self.selected_pkgs:
- pub_display_name = self.get_publisher_display_name_from_prefix(
- pub_name)
- pkgs = self.selected_pkgs.get(pub_name)
- if not pkgs:
- break
- for pkg_stem in pkgs:
- status = pkgs.get(pkg_stem)[0]
- if status == api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED or \
- status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- remove_list.append(pkg_stem)
- if self.gconf.show_remove:
- desc = pkgs.get(pkg_stem)[1]
- pkg_name = pkgs.get(pkg_stem)[2]
- confirmation_list.append(
- [pkg_name, pub_display_name,
- desc, status, pkg_stem])
-
- def __on_remove(self, widget):
- if not self.do_api_reset():
- return
- remove_list = []
- remove_confirmation_list = []
- if self.all_selected > 0:
- self.__add_remove_pkgs_for_publishers(remove_list,
- remove_confirmation_list)
-
- if self.img_timestamp != self.cache_o.get_index_timestamp():
- self.img_timestamp = None
-
- self.installupdate = installupdate.InstallUpdate(remove_list, self,
- self.image_directory, action = enumerations.REMOVE,
- main_window = self.w_main_window,
- confirmation_list = remove_confirmation_list,
- show_confirmation = self.gconf.show_remove,
- api_lock = self.api_lock,
- gconf = self.gconf)
-
- def __on_reload(self, widget):
- self.force_reload_packages = True
- self.__do_reload(widget, True)
-
- def __do_reload(self, widget, immediate):
- self.w_repository_combobox.grab_focus()
- if self.force_reload_packages and (self.in_search_mode
- or self.is_all_publishers_search):
- self.__unset_search(False)
- if self.force_reload_packages:
- self.__set_empty_details_panel()
- self.in_setup = True
- self.last_visible_publisher = None
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- status_str = _("Refreshing package catalog information")
- self.update_statusbar_message(status_str)
- Thread(target = self.__catalog_refresh, args = (immediate,)).start()
-
- def __catalog_refresh(self, immediate):
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- self.__catalog_refresh_without_lock(immediate)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __catalog_refresh_without_lock(self, immediate):
- """Update image's catalogs."""
- success = self.__do_refresh(immediate=immediate)
- if not success:
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- gobject.idle_add(self.update_statusbar)
- return -1
- gobject.idle_add(self.__clear_recent_searches)
- self.__catalog_refresh_done()
- return 0
-
- def __catalog_refresh_done(self):
- if not self.exiting:
- gobject.idle_add(self.process_package_list_start)
-
- def __get_publisher_name_from_index(self, index):
- name = None
- if index != -1:
- itr = self.repositories_list.iter_nth_child(None,
- index)
- name = self.repositories_list.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX)
- return name
-
- def __shutdown_part1(self):
- self.cancelled = True
- self.exiting = True
- self.__progress_pulse_stop()
-
- self.w_main_window.hide()
- gui_misc.shutdown_logging()
-
- def __shutdown_part2(self):
- if self.api_o and self.api_o.can_be_canceled():
- Thread(target = self.api_o.cancel, args = ()).start()
- gui_misc.exit_if_no_threads()
- gobject.timeout_add(1000, gui_misc.exit_if_no_threads)
-
- def __main_application_quit(self, restart = False):
- '''quits the main gtk loop'''
- save_width, save_height = self.w_main_window.get_size()
- save_hpos = self.w_main_hpaned.get_position()
- save_vpos = self.w_main_vpaned.get_position()
-
- self.__shutdown_part1()
- pub = ""
- start_insearch = False
- width = height = hpos = vpos = -1
- if self.gconf.save_state:
- if self.is_all_publishers_search:
- start_insearch = True
- sel_pub = self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED]
- elif (self.is_all_publishers_installed or
- self.is_all_publishers):
- sel_pub = self.__get_publisher_name_from_index(
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active)
- else:
- sel_pub = self.__get_selected_publisher()
- if sel_pub != None:
- pub = sel_pub
- width = save_width
- height = save_height
- hpos = save_hpos
- vpos = save_vpos
- else:
- # Reset to start in search mode having loaded installed pkgs
- pub = self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED]
- start_insearch = True
- self.gconf.save_values(pub, start_insearch, width, height,
- hpos, vpos)
-
- if restart:
- gobject.spawn_async([self.application_path, "-R",
- self.image_directory, "-U"])
-
- if len(self.search_completion) > 0:
- self.cache_o.dump_search_completion_info(
- self.search_completion)
- if self.gconf.save_state:
- if len(self.category_active_paths) > 0:
- self.cache_o.dump_categories_active_dict(
- self.category_active_paths)
- if len(self.category_expanded_paths) > 0:
- self.cache_o.dump_categories_expanded_dict(
- self.category_expanded_paths)
- else:
- self.cache_o.dump_categories_active_dict({})
- self.cache_o.dump_categories_expanded_dict({})
-
- self.__shutdown_part2()
- return True
-
- def __check_if_something_was_changed(self):
- ''' Returns True if any of the check boxes for package was changed, false
- if not'''
- if self.application_list:
- for pkg in self.application_list:
- if pkg[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN] == True:
- return True
- return False
-
- def __setup_repositories_combobox(self, api_o):
- previous_publisher = None
- previous_saved_name = None
- if not self.first_run:
- previous_publisher = self.__get_selected_publisher()
- if self.saved_repository_combobox_active != -1:
- itr = self.repositories_list.iter_nth_child(None,
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active)
- previous_saved_name = \
- self.repositories_list.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX)
- self.__disconnect_repository_model()
- self.repositories_list = self.__get_new_repositories_liststore()
- highest_ranked_pub = api_o.get_highest_ranked_publisher()
- default_pub = None
- if highest_ranked_pub != None and \
- isinstance(highest_ranked_pub, publisher.Publisher):
- default_pub = highest_ranked_pub.prefix
- if self.default_publisher != default_pub:
- self.__clear_pkg_selections()
- self.default_publisher = default_pub
- selected_repos = []
- enabled_repos = []
- for repo in self.selected_pkgs:
- selected_repos.append(repo)
- i = 0
- active = 0
- self.pubs_info = {}
- self.pubs_display_name = {}
- pubs = api_o.get_publishers()
- for pub in pubs:
- self.pubs_info[pub.prefix] = (pub.disabled, pub.alias)
- if pub.disabled:
- continue
- alias = pub.alias
- prefix = pub.prefix
- if gui_misc.alias_clash(pubs, prefix, alias):
- display_name = "%s (%s)" % (alias, prefix)
- elif alias == None or len(alias) == 0:
- display_name = prefix
- else:
- display_name = alias
- self.pubs_display_name[pub.prefix] = display_name
- if cmp(prefix, self.default_publisher) == 0:
- active = i
- self.repositories_list.append([i, display_name, prefix, alias ])
- enabled_repos.append(prefix)
- i = i + 1
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_index = i
- self.repositories_list.append([self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_index,
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL],
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL], None, ])
- i = i + 1
- self.repositories_list.append([-1, "", None, None, ])
- i = i + 1
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_installed_index = i
- #Workaround to display Publisher All Search during startup
- #If stating in Search mode
- if self.first_run and self.gconf.start_insearch:
- self.repositories_list.append(
- [self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_installed_index,
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL_SEARCH],
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED],
- None, ])
- else:
- self.repositories_list.append(
- [self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_installed_index,
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED],
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED],
- None, ])
- i = i + 1
- self.repositories_list.append([-1, "", None, None, ])
- i = i + 1
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index = i
- self.repositories_list.append([self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index,
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL_SEARCH],
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL_SEARCH], None, ])
- i = i + 1
- self.repositories_list.append([-1, "", None, None, ])
- i = i + 1
- self.repo_combobox_add_index = i
- self.repositories_list.append([-1,
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ADD],
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ADD], None, ])
- pkgs_to_remove = []
- for repo_name in selected_repos:
- if repo_name not in enabled_repos:
- pkg_stems = self.selected_pkgs.get(repo_name)
- for pkg_stem in pkg_stems:
- pkgs_to_remove.append(pkg_stem)
- for pkg_stem in pkgs_to_remove:
- self.__remove_pkg_stem_from_list(pkg_stem)
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_model(self.repositories_list)
- selected_id = -1
- self.same_publisher_on_setup = False
- if self.gconf.lastsource == None or self.gconf.lastsource == "":
- # Start in search mode having loaded installed pkgs
- self.gconf.set_lastsource(
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED])
- self.gconf.set_start_insearch(True)
-
- if self.first_run:
- for repo in self.repositories_list:
- if (repo[enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX] == \
- self.gconf.lastsource and
- repo[enumerations.REPOSITORY_ID] != -1):
- selected_id = \
- repo[enumerations.REPOSITORY_ID]
- break
- else:
- for repo in self.repositories_list:
- if (repo[enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX] ==
- previous_publisher and
- repo[enumerations.REPOSITORY_ID] != -1):
- selected_id = \
- repo[enumerations.REPOSITORY_ID]
- if (previous_publisher != \
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_ALL] and
- not self.force_reload_packages):
- self.same_publisher_on_setup = True
- break
- if self.saved_repository_combobox_active != -1:
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active = -1
- for repo in self.repositories_list:
- if (repo[enumerations.REPOSITORY_PREFIX] ==
- previous_saved_name):
- self.saved_repository_combobox_active = \
- repo[enumerations.REPOSITORY_ID]
- break
- # Previous publisher no longer enabled
- if self.saved_repository_combobox_active == -1:
- selected_id = -1
- self.same_publisher_on_setup = False
- if selected_id != -1:
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(selected_id)
- elif self.default_publisher:
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(active)
- else:
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(0)
-
- def __active_pane_toggle(self, cell, path, model_sort):
- '''Toggle function for column enumerations.MARK_COLUMN'''
- applicationModel = model_sort.get_model()
- applicationPath = model_sort.convert_path_to_child_path(path)
- filterModel = applicationModel.get_model()
- child_path = applicationModel.convert_path_to_child_path(applicationPath)
- itr = filterModel.get_iter(child_path)
- if itr:
- modified = filterModel.get_value(itr, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN)
- filterModel.set_value(itr, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN,
- not modified)
- pkg_status = filterModel.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN)
- pkg_stem = filterModel.get_value(itr, enumerations.STEM_COLUMN)
- if modified:
- self.__remove_pkg_stem_from_list(pkg_stem)
- else:
- pkg_publisher = filterModel.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.PUBLISHER_PREFIX_COLUMN)
- pkg_description = filterModel.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.DESCRIPTION_COLUMN)
- pkg_name = filterModel.get_value(itr,
- enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
- self.__add_pkg_stem_to_list(pkg_stem, pkg_name,
- pkg_status, pkg_publisher, pkg_description)
- self.update_statusbar()
- self.__enable_disable_selection_menus()
- self.__enable_disable_install_remove()
-
- def __update_menu_items(self):
- if self.user_rights:
- self.w_reload_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_reload_button.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_updateall_button.set_sensitive(True)
- self.w_updateall_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_reload_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_reload_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_updateall_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_updateall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- if self.is_admin:
- self.w_be_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- else:
- self.w_be_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __add_pkg_stem_to_list(self, stem, name, status, pub, description="test"):
- if self.selected_pkgs.get(pub) == None:
- self.selected_pkgs[pub] = {}
- self.selected_pkgs.get(pub)[stem] = [status, description, name]
- if status == api.PackageInfo.KNOWN or \
- status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- if self.to_install_update.get(pub) == None:
- self.to_install_update[pub] = 1
- else:
- self.to_install_update[pub] += 1
- if status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE or \
- status == api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED:
- if self.to_remove.get(pub) == None:
- self.to_remove[pub] = 1
- else:
- self.to_remove[pub] += 1
- self.__update_tooltips()
-
- def __update_tooltips(self):
- to_remove = None
- to_install = None
- no_iter = 0
- for pub in self.to_remove:
- packages = self.to_remove.get(pub)
- if packages > 0:
- if no_iter == 0:
- to_remove = _("Selected for Removal:")
- to_remove += "\n %s: %d" % (pub, packages)
- no_iter += 1
- no_iter = 0
- for pub in self.to_install_update:
- packages = self.to_install_update.get(pub)
- if packages > 0:
- if no_iter == 0:
- to_install = _("Selected for Install/Update:")
- to_install += "\n %s: %d" % (pub, packages)
- no_iter += 1
- if not to_install:
- to_install = _("Select packages by marking the checkbox "
- "and click to Install/Update.")
- self.w_installupdate_button.set_tooltip_text(to_install)
- if not to_remove:
- to_remove = _("Select packages by marking the checkbox "
- "and click to Remove selected.")
- self.w_remove_button.set_tooltip_text(to_remove)
-
- def __remove_pkg_stem_from_list(self, stem):
- remove_pub = []
- for pub in self.selected_pkgs:
- pkgs = self.selected_pkgs.get(pub)
- status = None
- if stem in pkgs:
- status = pkgs.pop(stem)[0]
- if status == api.PackageInfo.KNOWN or \
- status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- if self.to_install_update.get(pub) == None:
- self.to_install_update[pub] = 0
- else:
- self.to_install_update[pub] -= 1
- if status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE or \
- status == api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED:
- if self.to_remove.get(pub) == None:
- self.to_remove[pub] = 0
- else:
- self.to_remove[pub] -= 1
- if len(pkgs) == 0:
- remove_pub.append(pub)
- for pub in remove_pub:
- self.selected_pkgs.pop(pub)
- self.__update_tooltips()
-
- def __clear_pkg_selections(self):
- # We clear the selections as the preferred repository was changed
- # and pkg stems are not valid.
- remove_pub = []
- for pub in self.selected_pkgs:
- stems = self.selected_pkgs.get(pub)
- for pkg_stem in stems:
- remove_pub.append(pkg_stem)
- for pkg_stem in remove_pub:
- self.__remove_pkg_stem_from_list(pkg_stem)
-
- def __set_empty_details_panel(self):
- if self.show_info_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.show_info_id)
- self.show_info_id = 0
- if self.show_dependencies_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.show_dependencies_id)
- self.show_dependencies_id = 0
- if self.show_licenses_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.show_licenses_id)
- self.show_licenses_id = 0
- if self.show_versions_id != 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.show_versions_id)
- self.show_versions_id = 0
- self.info_pkgstem = None
- self.dependencies_pkgstem = None
- self.license_pkgstem = None
- self.versions_pkgstem = None
- self.detailspanel.set_empty_details()
-
- def __update_package_versions(self, versions, versions_id, pkgstem):
- if (versions_id != self.last_show_versions_id):
- return
- self.versions_pkgstem = pkgstem
- self.detailspanel.update_package_versions(versions)
-
- def __show_versions(self):
- self.show_versions_id = 0
- if self.selected_pkg_name == None:
- return
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- Thread(target = self.__show_package_versions,
- args = (self.selected_pkg_name, self.selected_pkg_pub,
- self.selected_pkgstem, self.last_show_versions_id,)).start()
-
- def __show_package_versions(self, selected_pkg_name, selected_pkg_pub,
- selected_pkgstem, versions_id):
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- self.__show_package_versions_without_lock(selected_pkg_name,
- selected_pkg_pub, selected_pkgstem, versions_id)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __show_package_versions_without_lock(self, selected_pkg_name,
- selected_pkg_pub, selected_pkgstem, versions_id):
- if debug:
- a = time.time()
- # Get versions for package
- try:
- if selected_pkg_name == None:
- return
- try:
- versions_list = self.api_o.get_pkg_list(
- pkg_list = api.ImageInterface.LIST_ALL,
- pubs = [selected_pkg_pub],
- patterns = [selected_pkg_name])
- except api_errors.ApiException, apiex:
- err = str(apiex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- _('Unexpected Error'))
- return
- try:
- versions = []
- for entry in versions_list:
- states = entry[3]
- ver = entry[0][2]
- versions.append((ver, states))
- if debug:
- print "Time to get versions:", time.time() - a
- except api_errors.TransportError, tpex:
- err = str(tpex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.ApiException, apiex:
- err = str(apiex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- _('Unexpected Error'))
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_package_versions, versions,
- versions_id, selected_pkgstem)
- finally:
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
-
- def __update_package_license(self, licenses, license_id, pkgstem):
- if (license_id != self.last_show_licenses_id):
- return
- self.license_pkgstem = pkgstem
- self.detailspanel.update_package_license(licenses)
-
- def __show_licenses(self):
- self.show_licenses_id = 0
- if self.selected_pkgstem == None:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_package_license, None,
- self.last_show_licenses_id, self.selected_pkgstem)
- return
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- Thread(target = self.__show_package_licenses,
- args = (self.selected_pkgstem, self.last_show_licenses_id,)).start()
-
- def __show_package_licenses(self, selected_pkgstem, license_id):
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- self.__show_package_licenses_without_lock(selected_pkgstem, license_id)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __show_package_licenses_without_lock(self, selected_pkgstem, license_id):
- try:
- if selected_pkgstem == None:
- return
- info = None
- try:
- info = self.api_o.info([selected_pkgstem],
- True, frozenset([api.PackageInfo.LICENSES]))
- except api_errors.TransportError, tpex:
- err = str(tpex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.InvalidDepotResponseException, idex:
- err = str(idex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except Exception, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err)
- if self.detailspanel.showing_empty_details or (license_id !=
- self.last_show_licenses_id):
- return
- if not info or (info and len(info.get(0)) == 0):
- try:
- # Get license from remote
- info = self.api_o.info([selected_pkgstem],
- False, frozenset([api.PackageInfo.LICENSES]))
- except api_errors.TransportError, tpex:
- err = str(tpex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.InvalidDepotResponseException, idex:
- err = str(idex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except Exception, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err)
- if self.detailspanel.showing_empty_details or (license_id !=
- self.last_show_licenses_id):
- return
- pkgs_info = None
- package_info = None
- no_licenses = 0
- if info:
- pkgs_info = info[0]
- if pkgs_info:
- package_info = pkgs_info[0]
- if package_info:
- no_licenses = len(package_info.licenses)
- if no_licenses == 0:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_package_license, None,
- license_id, selected_pkgstem)
- return
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_package_license,
- package_info.licenses, license_id, selected_pkgstem)
- finally:
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
-
- def __update_package_dependencies(self, info, dep_info,
- installed_dep_info, dependencies_id, pkg_stem):
- if self.detailspanel.showing_empty_details or (dependencies_id !=
- self.last_show_dependencies_id):
- return
- self.dependencies_pkgstem = pkg_stem
- self.detailspanel.update_package_dependencies(info, dep_info,
- installed_dep_info, self.installed_icon, self.not_installed_icon)
-
- def __show_dependencies(self):
- self.show_dependencies_id = 0
- self.dependencies_pkgstem = None
- model, itr = self.package_selection.get_selected()
- if model == None or itr == None:
- return
-
- pkg_stem = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STEM_COLUMN)
- pkg_status = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN)
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- Thread(target = self.__show_package_dependencies,
- args = (pkg_stem, pkg_status, self.last_show_dependencies_id)).start()
-
- def __show_package_dependencies(self, pkg_stem, pkg_status, dependencies_id):
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- self.__show_package_dependencies_without_lock(pkg_stem, pkg_status,
- dependencies_id)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __show_package_dependencies_without_lock(self, pkg_stem, pkg_status,
- dependencies_id):
- if self.detailspanel.showing_empty_details or (dependencies_id !=
- self.last_show_dependencies_id):
- return
- local_info, remote_info = self.__fetch_info(dependencies_id,
- self.last_show_dependencies_id, pkg_stem, pkg_status)
- if not local_info and not remote_info:
- gobject.idle_add(self.detailspanel.no_dependencies_available)
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- return
-
- if local_info:
- info = local_info
- else:
- info = remote_info
- if info == None or info.dependencies == None:
- gobject.idle_add(self.detailspanel.no_dependencies_available)
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- return
-
- dep_info = None
- installed_dep_info = None
- try:
- try:
- dep_info = self.api_o.info(
- info.dependencies,
- False,
- frozenset([api.PackageInfo.STATE,
- api.PackageInfo.IDENTITY]))
- temp_info = []
- for depend in info.dependencies:
- name = fmri.extract_pkg_name(
- depend)
- temp_info.append(name)
- installed_dep_info = self.api_o.info(
- temp_info,
- True,
- frozenset([api.PackageInfo.STATE,
- api.PackageInfo.IDENTITY]))
- except api_errors.TransportError, tpex:
- err = str(tpex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.InvalidDepotResponseException, \
- idex:
- err = str(idex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except Exception, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err)
-
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_package_dependencies,
- info, dep_info, installed_dep_info, dependencies_id, pkg_stem)
- finally:
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
-
- return
-
- def __fetch_info(self, info_id, last_show_info_id, pkg_stem, pkg_status):
- local_info = None
- remote_info = None
- if not self.detailspanel.showing_empty_details and (info_id ==
- last_show_info_id) and (pkg_status ==
- api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED or pkg_status ==
- api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE):
- local_info = gui_misc.get_pkg_info(self, self.api_o, pkg_stem,
- True)
- if not self.detailspanel.showing_empty_details and (info_id ==
- last_show_info_id) and (pkg_status ==
- api.PackageInfo.KNOWN or pkg_status ==
- api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE):
- remote_info = gui_misc.get_pkg_info(self, self.api_o, pkg_stem,
- False)
- return (local_info, remote_info)
-
- def __update_package_info(self, pkg_name, pkg_stem, local_info, remote_info,
- info_id, renamed_info = None, pkg_renamed = False):
- if self.detailspanel.showing_empty_details or (info_id !=
- self.last_show_info_id):
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- return
- self.info_pkgstem = pkg_stem
- self.detailspanel.update_package_info(pkg_name, local_info,
- remote_info, self.api_o.root,
- self.installed_icon, self.not_installed_icon,
- self.update_available_icon,
- self.is_all_publishers_installed, self.pubs_info,
- renamed_info, pkg_renamed)
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
-
- def __show_info(self, model, path):
- self.show_info_id = 0
- self.info_pkgstem = None
-
- if not (model and path):
- return
-
- itr = model.get_iter(path)
- pkg_name = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.ACTUAL_NAME_COLUMN)
- pkg_stem = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STEM_COLUMN)
- pkg_status = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN)
- pkg_renamed = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.RENAMED_COLUMN)
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- Thread(target = self.__show_package_info,
- args = (pkg_name, pkg_stem, pkg_status, self.last_show_info_id,
- pkg_renamed)).start()
-
- def __show_package_info(self, pkg_name, pkg_stem, pkg_status, info_id,
- pkg_renamed):
- self.api_lock.acquire()
- gobject.idle_add(self.set_busy_cursor)
- self.__show_package_info_without_lock(pkg_name, pkg_stem, pkg_status,
- info_id, pkg_renamed)
- gui_misc.release_lock(self.api_lock)
-
- def __show_package_info_without_lock(self, pkg_name, pkg_stem, pkg_status,
- info_id, pkg_renamed):
- if self.detailspanel.showing_empty_details or \
- info_id != self.last_show_info_id:
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- return
- local_info, remote_info = self.__fetch_info(info_id,
- self.last_show_info_id, pkg_stem, pkg_status)
-
- renamed_info = None
- if pkg_renamed:
- if local_info != None and \
- len(local_info.dependencies) > 0:
- renamed_info = local_info
- elif remote_info != None and \
- len(remote_info.dependencies) > 0:
- renamed_info = remote_info
- else:
- if remote_info != None and \
- len(remote_info.dependencies) > 0:
- if api.PackageInfo.RENAMED in remote_info.states:
- renamed_info = remote_info
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_package_info, pkg_name, pkg_stem,
- local_info, remote_info, info_id, renamed_info, pkg_renamed)
-
- return
-
- def __get_active_section_and_category(self):
- selection = self.w_categories_treeview.get_selection()
- selected_section = 0
- selected_category = 0
-
- if not selection:
- return 0, 0
- category_model, category_itr = selection.get_selected()
- if not category_model or not category_itr:
- return 0, 0
-
- selected_category = category_model.get_value(category_itr,
- enumerations.CATEGORY_ID)
- cat_path = list(category_model.get_path(category_itr))
-
- # Top level Section has been selected
- if len(cat_path) == 1 and selected_category > RECENT_SEARCH_ID_OFFSET:
- selected_section = selected_category
- return selected_section, 0
- elif len(cat_path) == 1 and selected_category > SECTION_ID_OFFSET:
- selected_section = selected_category - SECTION_ID_OFFSET
- return selected_section, 0
- else:
- # Subcategory selected need to get categories parent Section
- parent_iter = category_model.iter_parent(category_itr)
- if not parent_iter:
- return selected_section, selected_category
- selected_section = category_model.get_value(
- parent_iter, enumerations.CATEGORY_ID) - SECTION_ID_OFFSET
- return selected_section, selected_category
-
- def __application_filter(self, model, itr):
- '''This function is used to filter content in the main
- application view'''
- selected_category = 0
- selected_section = 0
- category = False
-
- if self.in_setup or self.cancelled:
- return category
- filter_id = self.w_filter_combobox.get_active()
- if filter_id == enumerations.FILTER_SELECTED:
- return model.get_value(itr, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN)
-
- category_list = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.CATEGORY_LIST_COLUMN)
- selected_section, selected_category = \
- self.__get_active_section_and_category()
-
- in_recent_search = False
- if selected_section == 0 and selected_category == 0:
- #Clicked on All Categories
- category = True
- elif selected_category != 0:
- #Clicked on subcategory
- if category_list and selected_category in category_list:
- category = True
- elif category_list:
- #Clicked on Top Level section
- if selected_section < RECENT_SEARCH_ID_OFFSET:
- categories_in_section = \
- self.section_categories_list[selected_section]
- for cat_id in category_list:
- if cat_id in categories_in_section:
- category = True
- break
- else:
- in_recent_search = True
- if (model.get_value(itr, enumerations.IS_VISIBLE_COLUMN) == False):
- return False
- if self.in_search_mode or in_recent_search:
- return self.__is_package_filtered(model, itr, filter_id)
- return (category &
- self.__is_package_filtered(model, itr, filter_id))
-
- @staticmethod
- def __is_package_filtered(model, itr, filter_id):
- '''Function for filtercombobox'''
- if filter_id == enumerations.FILTER_ALL:
- return True
- status = model.get_value(itr, enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN)
- if filter_id == enumerations.FILTER_INSTALLED:
- return (status == api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED or status == \
- api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE)
- elif filter_id == enumerations.FILTER_UPDATES:
- return status == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE
- elif filter_id == enumerations.FILTER_NOT_INSTALLED:
- return status == api.PackageInfo.KNOWN
-
- def __enable_disable_selection_menus(self):
- if self.in_setup:
- return
- self.__enable_disable_select_updates()
- if not self.__doing_search():
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
-
- def __enable_disable_select_all(self):
- if self.in_setup:
- return
- if self.w_main_view_notebook.get_current_page() == NOTEBOOK_START_PAGE:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- return
-
- model = self.w_application_treeview.get_model()
- if model != None and len(model) > 0:
- for row in model:
- if not row[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN]:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- return
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- else:
- self.w_selectall_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
-
- def __enable_disable_install_remove(self):
- self.__enable_disable_export_selections()
- if not self.user_rights:
- self.w_installupdate_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_installupdate_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_remove_button.set_sensitive(False)
- self.w_remove_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- return
- self.__enable_if_selected_for_removal()
- self.__enable_if_selected_for_install_update()
-
- def __enable_if_selected_for_removal(self):
- sensitive = False
- selected = 0
- for pub in self.to_remove:
- selected = self.to_remove.get(pub)
- if selected > 0:
- break
- if selected > 0:
- sensitive = True
- self.w_remove_button.set_sensitive(sensitive)
- self.w_remove_menuitem.set_sensitive(sensitive)
- return sensitive
-
- def __enable_if_selected_for_install_update(self):
- sensitive = False
- selected = 0
- for pub in self.to_install_update:
- selected = self.to_install_update.get(pub)
- if selected > 0:
- break
- if selected > 0:
- sensitive = True
- self.w_installupdate_button.set_sensitive(sensitive)
- self.w_installupdate_menuitem.set_sensitive(sensitive)
- return sensitive
-
- def __enable_disable_select_updates(self):
- model = self.w_application_treeview.get_model()
- if model == None:
- return
- for row in model:
- if row[enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN] == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- if not row[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN]:
- self.w_selectupdates_menuitem. \
- set_sensitive(True)
- return
- self.w_selectupdates_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- return
-
- def __enable_disable_export_selections(self):
- if self.selected_pkgs == None or len(self.selected_pkgs) == 0:
- self.w_export_selections_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- else:
- self.w_export_selections_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- return
-
- def __enable_disable_deselect(self):
- if self.w_application_treeview.get_model():
- for row in self.w_application_treeview.get_model():
- if row[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN]:
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(True)
- return
- self.w_deselect_menuitem.set_sensitive(False)
- return
-
- def __add_pkgs_to_lists_from_api(self, pub, application_list,
- category_list, section_list):
- pubs = []
- pkgs_from_api = []
- status_str = _("Loading package list")
- gobject.idle_add(self.update_statusbar_message, status_str)
- try:
- if self.is_all_publishers_installed:
- pkgs_from_api = self.api_o.get_pkg_list(pubs = pubs,
- pkg_list = api.ImageInterface.LIST_INSTALLED)
- elif self.is_all_publishers:
- pkgs_from_api = self.api_o.get_pkg_list(pubs = pubs,
- pkg_list = api.ImageInterface.LIST_INSTALLED_NEWEST)
- else:
- pubs.append(pub)
- pkgs_from_api = self.api_o.get_pkg_list(pubs = pubs,
- pkg_list = api.ImageInterface.LIST_INSTALLED_NEWEST)
- except api_errors.InventoryException:
- # This can happen if the repository does not
- # contain any packages
- err = _("Selected publisher does not contain any packages.")
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err, None,
- gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- except api_errors.ApiException, apiex:
- err = str(apiex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err, _('Unexpected Error'))
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- try:
- self.__add_pkgs_to_lists(pkgs_from_api, pubs, application_list,
- category_list, section_list)
- except api_errors.TransportError, tpex:
- err = str(tpex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.CanceledException:
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
- except api_errors.ApiException, apiex:
- err = str(apiex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err, _('Unexpected Error'))
- gobject.idle_add(self.unset_busy_cursor)
-
- def __get_categories_for_pubs(self, pubs):
- sections = {}
- #ImageInfo for categories
- sectioninfo = imageinfo.ImageInfo()
- share_path = os.path.join(self.application_dir,
- "usr/share/lib/pkg")
- if len(pubs) == 0:
- section = sectioninfo.read(os.path.join(share_path,
- "opensolaris.org.sections"))
- sections["opensolaris.org"] = section
- return sections
-
- for pub in pubs:
- if debug_perf:
- a = time.time()
- section = sectioninfo.read(os.path.join(share_path,
- pub + ".sections"))
- if len(section) == 0:
- section = sectioninfo.read(os.path.join(share_path,
- "opensolaris.org.sections"))
- sections[pub] = section
- if debug_perf:
- print "Time for get_pkg_categories", time.time() - a
-
- return sections
-
- def __add_pkgs_to_lists_from_info(self, local_results, remote_results,
- application_list):
- status_str = _("Loading package list")
- gobject.idle_add(self.update_statusbar_message, status_str)
-
- pkg_add = self.__add_pkgs_to_lists_from_results(local_results,
- 0, application_list)
- self.__add_pkgs_to_lists_from_results(remote_results,
- pkg_add, application_list)
-
- def __get_icon_for_state(self, state):
- if state == api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE:
- status_icon = self.update_available_icon
- elif state == api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED:
- status_icon = self.installed_icon
- else:
- status_icon = self.not_installed_icon
- return status_icon
-
- def __add_pkgs_to_lists_from_results(self, results, pkg_add,
- application_list):
- for result in results:
- pkg_pub = result.publisher
- pkg_name = result.pkg_stem
- pkg_stem = "pkg://" + pkg_pub + "/" + pkg_name
- summ = result.summary
- pkg_renamed = (api.PackageInfo.RENAMED in result.states)
- pkg_state = gui_misc.get_state_from_states(result.states)
- status_icon = self.__get_icon_for_state(pkg_state)
- if not self.is_all_publishers_search and \
- not self.is_all_publishers_installed:
- pkg_name = gui_misc.get_minimal_unique_name(
- self.package_names, pkg_name,
- self.special_package_names)
- if len(pkg_name) == 0:
- pkg_name = result.pkg_stem
- marked = False
- pkgs = self.selected_pkgs.get(pkg_pub)
- if pkgs != None:
- if pkg_stem in pkgs:
- marked = True
- pub_name = self.get_publisher_name_from_prefix(pkg_pub)
- #Add to application_list
- next_app = \
- [
- marked, status_icon, pkg_name, summ, pkg_state,
- pkg_stem, result.pkg_stem, True, None, pub_name,
- pkg_pub, pkg_renamed
- ]
- application_list.insert(pkg_add, next_app)
- pkg_add += 1
- return pkg_add
-
- def __add_pkgs_to_lists(self, pkgs_from_api, pubs, application_list,
- category_list, section_list):
- if section_list != None:
- self.__init_sections(section_list)
- sections = self.__get_categories_for_pubs(pubs)
- pkg_add = 0
- if debug_perf:
- a = time.time()
- self.package_names = {}
- self.special_package_names = []
- pub_names = {}
- for entry in pkgs_from_api:
- (pkg_pub, pkg_name, ver), summ, cats, states, attrs = entry
- if debug:
- print entry, ver
- pkg_stem = "pkg://" + pkg_pub + "/" + pkg_name
- gui_misc.add_pkgname_to_dic(self.package_names,
- pkg_name, self.special_package_names)
- pkg_renamed = (api.PackageInfo.RENAMED in states)
- pkg_state = gui_misc.get_state_from_states(states)
- status_icon = self.__get_icon_for_state(pkg_state)
- marked = False
- pkgs = self.selected_pkgs.get(pkg_pub)
- if pkgs != None:
- if pkg_stem in pkgs:
- marked = True
- if not pub_names.has_key(pkg_pub):
- pub_names[pkg_pub] = \
- self.get_publisher_name_from_prefix(
- pkg_pub)
- pub_name = pub_names[pkg_pub]
- #Add to application_list
- next_app = \
- [
- marked, status_icon, pkg_name, summ, pkg_state,
- pkg_stem, pkg_name, True, None, pub_name,
- pkg_pub, pkg_renamed
- ]
- self.__add_package_to_list(next_app,
- application_list,
- pkg_add, pkg_name,
- cats, category_list, pkg_pub)
- pkg_add += 1
- for pkg in application_list:
- pkg_name = pkg[enumerations.NAME_COLUMN]
- name = gui_misc.get_minimal_unique_name(self.package_names,
- pkg_name, self.special_package_names)
- if pkg_name != name:
- pkg[enumerations.NAME_COLUMN] = name
-
- if debug_perf:
- print "Time to add packages:", time.time() - a
- if category_list != None:
- self.__add_categories_to_sections(sections,
- category_list, section_list)
- return
-
- def __add_categories_to_sections(self, sections, category_list, section_list):
- for pub in sections:
- for section in sections[pub]:
- self.__add_category_to_section(sections[pub][section],
- _(section), category_list, section_list)
- return
-
- def __add_package_to_list(self, app, application_list, pkg_add,
- pkg_name, cats, category_list, pub):
- row_iter = application_list.insert(pkg_add, app)
- if category_list == None:
- return
- for cat in cats:
- if len(cat[1]) > 1:
- self.__add_package_to_category(cat[1],
- row_iter, application_list,
- category_list, pkg_name)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __add_package_to_category(category_name, package,
- application_list, category_list, pkg_name):
- category_names = category_name.split('/', 2)
- if len(category_names) != 2:
- print _("Invalid category name [%(cat)s] for package %(pack)s") \
- % {"cat": category_name,
- "pack": pkg_name}
- return
- category_visible_name = category_names[1]
- if not package or category_visible_name == 'All':
- return
- if not category_visible_name:
- return
- category_id = None
- for category in category_list:
- if category[enumerations.CATEGORY_NAME] == category_name:
- category_id = category[enumerations.CATEGORY_ID]
- break
- if not category_id: # Category not exists
- category_id = len(category_list) + 1
- category_list.append(None, [category_id, category_name,
- category_visible_name, None, None, True])
- if application_list.get_value(package,
- enumerations.CATEGORY_LIST_COLUMN):
- a = application_list.get_value(package,
- enumerations.CATEGORY_LIST_COLUMN)
- a.append(category_id)
- else:
- category_list = []
- category_list.append(category_id)
- application_list.set(package,
- enumerations.CATEGORY_LIST_COLUMN, category_list)
-
- def __add_categories_to_tree(self, category_list, section_list):
- category_tree = self.__get_new_category_liststore()
- cat_iter = category_tree.append(None, [ 0, _("All Categories"),
- _("All Categories"), None, None, True])
-
- self.section_categories_list = {}
- #Build dic of section ids and categories they contain
- #section_category_list[<sec_id>] -> cat_ids[cat_id] -> category
- #Each category row contains a list of sections it belongs to stored in
- #category[enumerations.SECTION_LIST_OBJECT]
- for category in category_list:
- category_section_ids = \
- category[enumerations.SECTION_LIST_OBJECT]
- if category_section_ids == None:
- continue
- for sec_id in category_section_ids:
- if sec_id in self.section_categories_list:
- category_ids = \
- self.section_categories_list[sec_id]
- category_ids[category[enumerations.CATEGORY_ID]] \
- = category
- else:
- self.section_categories_list[sec_id] = \
- {category[enumerations.CATEGORY_ID]:\
- category}
-
- #Build up the Category Tree
- count = 1
- visible_default_section_path = None
- for section in section_list:
- sec_id = section[enumerations.SECTION_ID]
- #Map self.set_section section_list index to visible section index
- if sec_id <= 0 or not section[enumerations.SECTION_ENABLED]:
- continue
- if self.set_section == sec_id:
- visible_default_section_path = (count,)
- count += count
- section_name = "<b>" + section[enumerations.SECTION_NAME] + "</b>"
- cat_iter = category_tree.append(None,
- [ SECTION_ID_OFFSET + section[enumerations.SECTION_ID],
- section_name, section_name, None, None, True])
-
- if not sec_id in self.section_categories_list:
- continue
-
- category_ids = self.section_categories_list[sec_id]
- category_list = self.__get_new_category_liststore()
- for cat_id in category_ids.keys():
- if category_ids[cat_id][
- enumerations.CATEGORY_IS_VISIBLE]:
- category_list.append(None, category_ids[cat_id])
- # Sort the Categories into alphabetical order
- if len(category_list) > 0:
- rows = [tuple(r) + (i,) for i,
- r in enumerate(category_list)]
- rows.sort(self.__sort)
- r = []
- category_list.reorder(None, [r[-1] for r in rows])
- for category in category_list:
- category_tree.append(cat_iter, category)
-
- recent_search_name = "<span foreground='#757575'><b>" + \
- _("Recent Searches") + "</b></span>"
- self.recent_searches_cat_iter = category_tree.append(None,
- [RECENT_SEARCH_ID, recent_search_name, recent_search_name,
- None, None, True])
- if self.recent_searches and len(self.recent_searches) > 0:
- for recent_search in self.recent_searches_list:
- category_tree.append(self.recent_searches_cat_iter,
- self.recent_searches[recent_search])
-
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_model(category_tree)
-
- #Initial startup expand default Section if available
- if visible_default_section_path and self.first_run and \
- len(self.category_active_paths) == 0 and \
- len(self.category_expanded_paths) == 0:
- self.w_categories_treeview.expand_row(
- visible_default_section_path, False)
- return
- self.__restore_category_state()
-
- def __add_recent_search(self, text, pub_prefix, application_list,
- search_all):
- self.adding_recent_search = True
- category_tree = self.w_categories_treeview.get_model()
- if category_tree == None:
- return
- if search_all:
- pub_name = _("All Publishers")
- else:
- pub_name = self.get_publisher_display_name_from_prefix(
- pub_prefix)
- recent_search = "(%d) <b>%s</b> %s" % \
- (len(application_list), text, pub_name)
- if not (recent_search in self.recent_searches):
- cat_iter = category_tree.append(self.recent_searches_cat_iter,
- [RECENT_SEARCH_ID + 1, recent_search, recent_search,
- text, application_list, True])
- self.recent_searches[recent_search] = \
- [RECENT_SEARCH_ID + 1, recent_search, recent_search,
- text, application_list, True]
- self.recent_searches_list.append(recent_search)
- else:
- rs_iter = category_tree.iter_children(
- self.recent_searches_cat_iter)
- while rs_iter:
- rs_value = category_tree.get_value(rs_iter,
- enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME)
- if rs_value == recent_search:
- category_tree.remove(rs_iter)
- break
- rs_iter = category_tree.iter_next(rs_iter)
- cat_iter = category_tree.append(self.recent_searches_cat_iter,
- [RECENT_SEARCH_ID + 1, recent_search, recent_search,
- text, application_list, True])
- self.recent_searches_list.remove(recent_search)
- self.recent_searches_list.append(recent_search)
- path = category_tree.get_path(cat_iter)
- self.w_categories_treeview.expand_to_path(path)
- self.__unselect_category()
- self.w_categories_treeview.scroll_to_cell(path)
- self.adding_recent_search = False
-
- def __clear_recent_searches(self):
- self.after_install_remove = False
- category_tree = self.w_categories_treeview.get_model()
- if category_tree == None:
- return
- if self.recent_searches == None or len(self.recent_searches) == 0:
- return
- self.__set_searchentry_to_prompt()
- selection, sel_path = self.__get_selection_and_category_path()
- rs_iter = category_tree.iter_children(self.recent_searches_cat_iter)
- while rs_iter:
- category_tree.remove(rs_iter)
- if category_tree.iter_is_valid(rs_iter):
- rs_iter = category_tree.iter_next(rs_iter)
- else:
- break
- del(self.recent_searches_list[:])
- self.recent_searches.clear()
-
- rs_path = category_tree.get_path(self.recent_searches_cat_iter)
- if selection and sel_path and rs_path and len(sel_path) > 0 and \
- len(rs_path) > 0 and sel_path[0] == rs_path[0]:
- self.__restore_setup_for_browse()
-
- def __update_recent_search_states(self, application_list):
- pkg_stems = []
- pkg_stem_states = {}
- for row in application_list:
- pkg_stems.append(row[enumerations.STEM_COLUMN])
- #Check for changes in package installation status
- try:
- info = self.api_o.info(pkg_stems, True, frozenset(
- [api.PackageInfo.STATE, api.PackageInfo.IDENTITY]))
- for info_s in info.get(0):
- pkg_stem = info_s.fmri.get_pkg_stem()
- if api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED in info_s.states:
- pkg_stem_states[pkg_stem] = \
- api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED
- else:
- pkg_stem_states[pkg_stem] = \
- api.PackageInfo.KNOWN
- except api_errors.TransportError, tpex:
- err = str(tpex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.InvalidDepotResponseException, idex:
- err = str(idex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except api_errors.ImageLockedError, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- gui_misc.notify_log_error(self)
- except Exception, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err)
-
- #Create a new result list updated with current installation status
- tmp_app_list = self.__get_new_application_liststore()
-
- for row in application_list:
- pkg_stem = row[enumerations.STEM_COLUMN]
- pub = row[enumerations.PUBLISHER_COLUMN]
- marked = False
- pkgs = None
- if self.selected_pkgs != None:
- pkgs = self.selected_pkgs.get(pub)
- if pkgs != None:
- if pkg_stem in pkgs:
- marked = True
- if row[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN] != marked:
- row[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN] = marked
-
- if pkg_stem_states.has_key(pkg_stem):
- row[enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN] = \
- pkg_stem_states[pkg_stem]
- if pkg_stem_states[pkg_stem] == \
- api.PackageInfo.KNOWN:
- row[enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN] = \
- self.not_installed_icon
- else:
- row[enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN] = \
- self.installed_icon
- else:
- row[enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN] = \
- api.PackageInfo.KNOWN
- row[enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN] = \
- self.not_installed_icon
- tmp_app_list.append(row)
- return tmp_app_list
-
- def __restore_recent_search(self, sel_category):
- if not sel_category:
- return
- if not self.is_all_publishers_search:
- self.__save_setup_before_search(single_search=True)
-
- application_list = sel_category[enumerations.SECTION_LIST_OBJECT]
- text = sel_category[enumerations.CATEGORY_DESCRIPTION]
- if self.after_install_remove:
- application_list = self.__update_recent_search_states(
- application_list)
- # Theme: saved search application list is cached with old theme icons
- self.__reset_application_list_status_icons(application_list)
- self.__clear_before_search(show_list=True, in_setup=False,
- unselect_cat=False)
- self.in_search_mode = True
- self.in_recent_search = True
- self.__set_search_text_mode(enumerations.SEARCH_STYLE_NORMAL)
- self.w_searchentry.set_text(text)
- self.__set_main_view_package_list()
- self.__init_tree_views(application_list, None, None, None, None,
- enumerations.NAME_COLUMN)
-
- def __setup_category_state(self):
- self.cache_o.load_categories_active_dict(self.category_active_paths)
- self.cache_o.load_categories_expanded_dict(self.category_expanded_paths)
-
- def __restore_category_state(self):
- #Restore expanded Category state
- if self.w_categories_treeview == None:
- return
- model = self.w_categories_treeview.get_model()
- if model == None:
- return
- if len(self.category_expanded_paths) > 0:
- paths = self.category_expanded_paths.items()
- for key, val in paths:
- source, path = key
- if self.last_visible_publisher == source and val:
- self.w_categories_treeview.expand_row(path, False)
- #Restore selected category path
- if self.last_visible_publisher in self.category_active_paths and \
- self.category_active_paths[self.last_visible_publisher]:
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_cursor(
- self.category_active_paths[self.last_visible_publisher])
- else:
- self.w_categories_treeview.set_cursor(0)
- return
-
- @staticmethod
- def __add_category_to_section(categories_list, section_name, category_list,
- section_list):
- '''Adds the section to section list in category. If there is no such
- section, than it is not added. If there was already section than it
- is skipped. Sections must be case sensitive'''
- if not categories_list:
- return
- for section in section_list:
- if section[enumerations.SECTION_NAME] == section_name:
- section_id = section[enumerations.SECTION_ID]
- for category in category_list:
- localized_top_cat = _(category[
- enumerations.CATEGORY_NAME].split("/")[0])
- if localized_top_cat == \
- section[enumerations.SECTION_NAME]:
-
- vis = \
- enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME
- category[vis] = _(category[
- enumerations.CATEGORY_VISIBLE_NAME])
- section_lst = category[ \
- enumerations.SECTION_LIST_OBJECT]
- section[enumerations.SECTION_ENABLED] = \
- True
- if not section_lst:
- category[ \
- enumerations.SECTION_LIST_OBJECT] = \
- [section_id, ]
- else:
- if not section_name in \
- section_lst:
- section_lst.append(
- section_id)
- break
-
-
- def __progress_pulse_start(self):
- if self.progress_stop_thread == True:
- self.progress_stop_thread = False
- if self.progress_thread_stopped:
- self.progress_thread_stopped = False
- Thread(target = self.__progress_pulse).start()
-
- def __progress_pulse_stop(self):
- self.progress_stop_thread = True
-
- def __progress_pulse(self):
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progress_frame.show)
- while not self.progress_stop_thread:
- if self.api_o and self.api_o.can_be_canceled():
- gobject.idle_add(self.progress_cancel.set_sensitive, True)
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.progress_cancel.set_sensitive,
- False)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_status_progressbar.pulse)
- time.sleep(0.1)
- gobject.idle_add(self.w_progress_frame.hide)
- self.progress_thread_stopped = True
-
- def error_occurred(self, error_msg, msg_title=None, msg_type=gtk.MESSAGE_ERROR):
- if msg_title:
- title = msg_title
- else:
- title = self.program_title
- gui_misc.error_occurred(self.w_main_window, error_msg,
- title, msg_type, use_markup=True)
-
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-# Static Methods
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-
- @staticmethod
- def __sort(a, b):
- return cmp(a[2], b[2])
-
- @staticmethod
- def filter_cell_data_function(column, renderer, model, itr, data):
- '''Function which sets icon size'''
- pm, entry = data
- if entry == enumerations.FILTER_NAME:
- renderer.set_property("xalign", 0)
- renderer.set_property("width", pm.max_filter_length + 10)
- elif entry == enumerations.FILTER_ICON:
- renderer.set_property("xalign", 0)
- renderer.set_property("width", 24)
- return
-
- @staticmethod
- def cell_data_function(column, renderer, model, itr, data):
- '''Function which sets the background colour if package is
- selected'''
- if itr:
- # Theme: do not set background for Inverse Themes
- if data and data.is_inverse_theme:
- renderer.set_property("cell-background-set", False)
- elif model.get_value(itr, enumerations.MARK_COLUMN):
- renderer.set_property("cell-background", "#ffe5cc")
- renderer.set_property("cell-background-set", True)
- else:
- renderer.set_property("cell-background-set", False)
-
- @staticmethod
- def combobox_id_separator(model, itr):
- return model.get_value(itr, 0) == -1 and \
- model.get_value(itr, 1) == ""
-
- @staticmethod
- def combobox_filter_id_separator(model, itr):
- return model.get_value(itr, 0) == -1 and \
- model.get_value(itr, 2) == ""
-
- @staticmethod
- def get_datetime(version):
- dt = None
- try:
- dt = version.get_datetime()
- except AttributeError:
- dt = version.get_timestamp()
- return dt
-
- def __get_version(self, api_o, local, pkg):
- version = None
- try:
- info = api_o.info([pkg], local, frozenset(
- [api.PackageInfo.STATE, api.PackageInfo.IDENTITY]))
- found = info[api.ImageInterface.INFO_FOUND]
- version = found[0]
- except IndexError:
- pass
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- logger.error(err)
- gobject.idle_add(gui_misc.notify_log_error, self)
- except Exception, ex:
- pass
- return version
-
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-# Public Methods
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
- def init_show_filter(self):
- """ Sets up the Filter Combobox size."""
- self.__init_show_filter()
-
- def reload_packages(self):
- self.api_o = gui_misc.get_api_object(self.image_directory,
- self.pr, self.w_main_window)
- self.cache_o = self.__get_cache_obj(self.api_o)
- self.force_reload_packages = False
- self.__do_reload(None, False)
-
- def update_facets(self, facets_to_set):
- if facets_to_set == None or \
- len(facets_to_set.keys()) == 0:
- return
- gobject.idle_add(self.__update_facets, facets_to_set)
-
- def __update_facets(self, facets_to_set):
- installupdate.InstallUpdate([], self,
- self.image_directory,
- action = enumerations.UPDATE_FACETS,
- main_window = self.w_main_window,
- api_lock = self.api_lock,
- facets = facets_to_set)
-
- def is_busy_cursor_set(self):
- return self.gdk_window.is_visible()
-
- def set_busy_cursor(self):
- if self.gdk_window.get_state() & gtk.gdk.WINDOW_STATE_WITHDRAWN:
- self.gdk_window.show()
- self.w_main_window.get_accessible().emit('state-change',
- 'busy', True)
- if not self.exiting:
- self.__progress_pulse_start()
-
- def unset_busy_cursor(self):
- self.__progress_pulse_stop()
- if not (self.gdk_window.get_state() & gtk.gdk.WINDOW_STATE_WITHDRAWN):
- self.gdk_window.hide()
- self.w_main_window.get_accessible().emit('state-change',
- 'busy', False)
-
- def process_package_list_start(self):
- if self.first_run:
- self.__setup_filter_combobox()
- self.__setup_repositories_combobox(self.api_o)
- if self.first_run:
- self.__update_menu_items()
- self.w_repository_combobox.grab_focus()
-
- @staticmethod
- def __get_cache_obj(api_o):
- cache_o = cache.CacheListStores(api_o)
- return cache_o
-
- def __setup_search_completion(self):
- completion = gtk.EntryCompletion()
- self.cache_o.load_search_completion_info(self.search_completion)
- completion.set_model(self.search_completion)
- self.w_searchentry.set_completion(completion)
- completion.set_text_column(0)
- self.w_searchentry.connect('activate', self.__search_completion_cb)
-
- def process_package_list_end(self):
- self.in_startpage_startup = False
- if self.update_all_proceed:
- self.__on_update_all(None)
- self.update_all_proceed = False
- self.__enable_disable_install_remove()
- self.update_statusbar()
- self.in_setup = False
- self.cancelled = False
- active_filter = self.w_filter_combobox.get_active()
- ret = self.__get_selection_and_category_path()
- need_refilter = True
- if ret[0] and ret[1][0] == 0:
- need_refilter = False
- if need_refilter or active_filter != enumerations.FILTER_ALL:
- self.__application_refilter()
- else:
- self.__enable_disable_select_all()
- self.__enable_disable_deselect()
- if not self.__doing_search():
- self.unset_busy_cursor()
- if debug_perf:
- print "End process_package_list_end", time.time()
- if self.first_run:
- if self.gconf.start_insearch:
- self.w_repository_combobox.set_active(
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_search_index)
- self.repositories_list[ \
- self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_installed_index] = \
- ([self.repo_combobox_all_pubs_installed_index,
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED],
- self.publisher_options[PUBLISHER_INSTALLED],
- None, ])
-
- self.first_run = False
-
- def __count_selected_packages(self):
- self.all_selected = 0
- for pub_name in self.selected_pkgs:
- pkgs = self.selected_pkgs.get(pub_name)
- if not pkgs:
- break
- self.all_selected += len(pkgs)
-
- def update_statusbar(self):
- '''Function which updates statusbar'''
- self.__remove_statusbar_message()
- search_text = self.w_searchentry.get_text()
-
- self.__count_selected_packages()
- if self.application_list == None:
- return
- self.length_visible_list = len(self.application_list_filter)
- if not self.in_search_mode:
- selected_in_list = 0
- for pkg_row in self.application_list_filter:
- if pkg_row[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN]:
- selected_in_list = selected_in_list + 1
- status_str = _("Total: %(total)s Selected: %(selected)s") % \
- {"total": self.length_visible_list,
- "selected": selected_in_list}
- self.update_statusbar_message(status_str)
- return
-
- # In Search Mode
- if self.w_main_statusbar_label:
- search_text = saxutils.escape(search_text)
- s1, e1 = self.get_start_end_strings()
-
- if self.__doing_search():
- active_pub = self.publisher_being_searched
- status_str = ""
- if active_pub != None and active_pub != "":
- status_str = \
- _("Searching %(s1)s%(active_pub)s%(e1)s"
- " for %(s1)s%(search_text)s%(e1)s ...") % \
- {"s1": s1, "active_pub": active_pub, "e1": e1,
- "search_text": search_text}
- else:
- status_str = \
- _("Searching for %(s1)s%(search_text)s%(e1)s "
- "...") % \
- {"s1": s1, "search_text": search_text, "e1": e1}
- else:
- status_str = ngettext(
- "%(number)d package found matching %(s1)s"
- "%(search_text)s%(e1)s",
- "%(number)d packages found matching %(s1)s"
- "%(search_text)s%(e1)s", len(self.application_list)) % \
- {"number": len(self.application_list),
- "s1": s1, "search_text": search_text, "e1": e1, }
- self.update_statusbar_message(status_str)
-
- def __reset_row_status(self, row):
- pkg_stem = row[enumerations.STEM_COLUMN]
- self.__remove_pkg_stem_from_list(pkg_stem)
- package_info = self.__get_version(self.api_o,
- local = True, pkg = pkg_stem)
- package_installed = False
- if package_info:
- package_installed = \
- (api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED in package_info.states)
- if package_installed:
- package_info = self.__get_version(self.api_o,
- local = False, pkg = pkg_stem)
- if (package_info and
- api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED in package_info.states):
- row[enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN] = \
- api.PackageInfo.INSTALLED
- row[enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN] = \
- self.installed_icon
- else:
- row[enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN] = \
- api.PackageInfo.UPGRADABLE
- row[enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN] = \
- self.update_available_icon
- else:
- row[enumerations.STATUS_COLUMN] = \
- api.PackageInfo.KNOWN
- row[enumerations.STATUS_ICON_COLUMN] = \
- self.not_installed_icon
- row[enumerations.MARK_COLUMN] = False
-
- def __update_publisher_list(self, pub, full_list, package_list):
- for row in full_list:
- if row[enumerations.ACTUAL_NAME_COLUMN] in package_list:
- self.__reset_row_status(row)
-
- def update_package_list(self, update_list):
- ''' update_package_list is called with update_list set to None
- when InstallUpdate object can be discarded when installing or
- removing packages.
-
- update_package_list is called with update_list set to not None
- to indicate what packages have been updated so Package Manager
- can update its data.'''
- if update_list == None:
- self.installupdate = None
- if self.img_timestamp:
- return
- self.after_install_remove = True
- visible_publisher = self.__get_selected_publisher()
- default_publisher = self.default_publisher
- self.__do_refresh(immediate=True)
- if update_list == None and not self.img_timestamp:
- self.img_timestamp = self.cache_o.get_index_timestamp()
- self.__on_reload(None)
- return
- visible_list = update_list.get(visible_publisher)
- if self.is_all_publishers_search or self.is_all_publishers_installed \
- or self.is_all_publishers or self.in_recent_search:
- try:
- pubs = self.api_o.get_publishers()
- except api_errors.ApiException, ex:
- err = str(ex)
- gobject.idle_add(self.error_occurred, err,
- None, gtk.MESSAGE_INFO)
- return
- for pub in pubs:
- if pub.disabled:
- continue
- prefix = pub.prefix
- package_list = update_list.get(prefix)
- if package_list != None:
- self.__update_publisher_list(prefix,
- self.application_list,
- package_list)
- if self.last_visible_publisher == prefix:
- self.__update_publisher_list(prefix,
- self.saved_application_list,
- package_list)
- if self.is_all_publishers_installed or self.is_all_publishers:
- self.__do_set_publisher()
- elif visible_list:
- self.__update_publisher_list(visible_publisher,
- self.application_list, visible_list)
- if self.in_search_mode:
- self.__update_publisher_list(visible_publisher,
- self.saved_application_list,
- visible_list)
-
- for pub in update_list:
- if pub != visible_publisher:
- pkg_list = update_list.get(pub)
- for pkg in pkg_list:
- pkg_stem = None
- if pub != default_publisher:
- pkg_stem = gui_misc.get_pkg_stem(
- pkg, pub)
- else:
- pkg_stem = gui_misc.get_pkg_stem(
- pkg)
- if pkg_stem:
- self.__remove_pkg_stem_from_list(pkg_stem)
- if not self.img_timestamp:
- self.img_timestamp = self.cache_o.get_index_timestamp()
- self.__on_reload(None)
- return
- self.img_timestamp = self.cache_o.get_index_timestamp()
- if self.is_all_publishers_installed or self.is_all_publishers:
- return
- # We need to reset status descriptions if a11y is enabled
- self.__set_visible_status(False)
- self.__reset_info_tabs()
- self.__enable_disable_selection_menus()
- self.__enable_disable_install_remove()
- self.update_statusbar()
-
- def install_version(self, version):
- ''' Installed specified version of selected package'''
- if not self.do_api_reset():
- return
- to_install = "%s@%s" % (self.selected_pkgstem, version)
- install_update = [to_install]
-
- if self.img_timestamp != self.cache_o.get_index_timestamp():
- self.img_timestamp = None
-
- installupdate.InstallUpdate(install_update, self, \
- self.image_directory, action = enumerations.INSTALL_UPDATE,
- main_window = self.w_main_window, api_lock = self.api_lock)
-
- def get_current_repos_with_search_errors(self):
- return self.current_repos_with_search_errors
-
- def __reset_home_dir(self):
- # We reset the HOME directory in case the user called us
- # with gksu and had NFS mounted home directory in which
- # case dbus called from gconf cannot write to the directory.
- if self.is_admin:
- root_home_dir = self.__find_root_home_dir()
- os.putenv('HOME', root_home_dir)
-
- @staticmethod
- def __find_root_home_dir():
- return_str = '/var/tmp'
-
- try:
- lines = pwd.getpwnam('root')
- except KeyError:
- if debug:
- print "Error getting passwd database entry for root"
- return return_str
- try:
- return_str = lines[5]
- except IndexError:
- if debug:
- print "Error getting home directory for root"
- return return_str
-
- def restart_after_ips_update(self):
- self.__main_application_quit(restart = True)
-
- def shutdown_after_image_update(self, exit_pm = False):
- if exit_pm == True:
- self.__on_mainwindow_delete_event(None, None)
-
- def __get_api_object(self):
- self.api_o = gui_misc.get_api_object(self.image_directory,
- self.pr, self.w_main_window)
- self.cache_o = self.__get_cache_obj(self.api_o)
- self.img_timestamp = self.cache_o.get_index_timestamp()
- self.__setup_search_completion()
- self.__setup_category_state()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__got_api_object)
-
- def __got_api_object(self):
- self.process_package_list_start()
-
- def get_api_object(self):
- return self.api_o
-
- def start(self):
- if not self.gconf.show_startpage:
- self.__setup_startpage(self.gconf.show_startpage)
- self.set_busy_cursor()
- Thread(target = self.__get_api_object).start()
-
- def unhandled_exception_shutdown(self):
- self.__shutdown_part1()
- self.__shutdown_part2()
-
-###############################################################################
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-# Main
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-
-def main():
- gtk.main()
- return 0
-
-if __name__ == '__main__':
- program_title = _("Package Manager")
- gblexcepthandler = globalexceptionhandler.GlobalExceptionHandler()
- allow_links = False
- debug = False
- debug_perf = False
- update_all_proceed = False
- app_path = None
- image_dir = None
- info_install_arg = None
-
- try:
- opts, args = getopt.getopt(sys.argv[1:], "hR:Ui:", \
- ["help", "allow-links", "image-dir=", "update-all",
- "info-install="])
- except getopt.error, msg:
- print "%s, for help use --help" % msg
- sys.exit(2)
-
- if os.path.isabs(sys.argv[0]):
- app_path = sys.argv[0]
- else:
- cmd = os.path.join(os.getcwd(), sys.argv[0])
- app_path = os.path.realpath(cmd)
-
- for option, argument in opts:
- if option in ("-h", "--help"):
- print """\
-Use -R (--image-dir) to specify image directory.
-Use -U (--update-all) to proceed with Updates"""
- sys.exit(0)
- elif option == "--allow-links":
- allow_links = True
- elif option in ("-R", "--image-dir"):
- image_dir = argument
- elif option in ("-U", "--update-all"):
- update_all_proceed = True
- elif option in ("-i", "--info-install"):
- info_install_arg = argument
-
- provided_image_dir = True
- if image_dir == None:
- image_dir, provided_image_dir = api.get_default_image_root()
-
- if not provided_image_dir:
- print _("Unable to get the image directory")
- sys.exit(1)
-
- try:
- gtk.init_check()
- except RuntimeError, e:
- print _("Unable to initialize gtk")
- print str(e)
- sys.exit(1)
-
- # Setup webinstall
- if info_install_arg or (args and not update_all_proceed):
- webinstall = webinstall.Webinstall(image_dir)
- if args:
- info_install_arg = args[0]
- webinstall.process_param(info_install_arg)
- main()
- sys.exit(0)
-
- # Setup packagemanager
- packagemanager = PackageManager(program_title)
- gblexcepthandler.set_parent(packagemanager)
-
- while gtk.events_pending():
- gtk.main_iteration(False)
- packagemanager.application_path = app_path
- packagemanager.image_directory = image_dir
- packagemanager.allow_links = allow_links
- packagemanager.update_all_proceed = update_all_proceed
- packagemanager.init_show_filter()
-
- gobject.idle_add(packagemanager.start)
-
- main()
--- a/src/pkg/external_deps.txt Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/external_deps.txt Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -1,6 +1,5 @@
pkg:/archiver/gnu-tar
pkg:/crypto/ca-certificates
- pkg:/desktop/gksu
pkg:/developer/assembler
pkg:/developer/base-developer-utilities
pkg:/developer/build/make
@@ -9,8 +8,6 @@
pkg:/developer/gnome/gnome-doc-utils
pkg:/developer/python/pylint
pkg:/developer/versioning/mercurial
- pkg:/gnome/config/gconf
- pkg:/gnome/theme/hicolor-icon-theme
pkg:/library/python-2/cherrypy-26
pkg:/library/python-2/coverage-26
pkg:/library/python-2/jsonrpclib-26
@@ -20,12 +17,7 @@
pkg:/library/python-2/ply-26
pkg:/library/python-2/pybonjour-26
pkg:/library/python-2/pycurl-26
- pkg:/library/python-2/pygobject-26
- pkg:/library/python-2/pygtk2-26
pkg:/library/python-2/pyopenssl-26
- pkg:/library/python-2/python-gnome-26
- pkg:/library/python-2/python-gnome-extras-26
- pkg:/library/python-2/python-notify-26
pkg:/library/python-2/simplejson-26
pkg:/package/svr4
pkg:/runtime/python-26
@@ -34,10 +26,8 @@
pkg:/shell/ksh
pkg:/shell/ksh93
pkg:/system/core-os
- pkg:/system/font/xorg/xorg-core
pkg:/system/header
pkg:/system/library
- pkg:/system/library/dbus
pkg:/system/library/math
pkg:/system/library/security/crypto
pkg:/system/linker
--- a/src/pkg/manifests/SUNWipkg-gui.p5m Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/manifests/SUNWipkg-gui.p5m Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -20,10 +20,9 @@
#
#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+# Copyright (c) 2010, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
-set name=pkg.fmri value=pkg:/[email protected],5.11-0.133
-set name=pkg.renamed value=true
+set name=pkg.fmri value=pkg:/[email protected],5.12-5.12.0.0.0.37.0
+set name=pkg.obsolete value=true
set name=nopublish.after value=0
-depend type=require fmri=package/pkg/[email protected]
--- a/src/pkg/manifests/SUNWipkg-um.p5m Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/manifests/SUNWipkg-um.p5m Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -20,10 +20,9 @@
#
#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+# Copyright (c) 2010, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
-set name=pkg.fmri value=pkg:/[email protected],5.11-0.133
-set name=pkg.renamed value=true
+set name=pkg.fmri value=pkg:/[email protected],5.12-5.12.0.0.0.37.0
+set name=pkg.obsolete value=true
set name=nopublish.after value=0
-depend type=require fmri=package/pkg/[email protected]
--- a/src/pkg/manifests/consolidation:ips:ips-message-files.p5m Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/manifests/consolidation:ips:ips-message-files.p5m Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
#
# CDDL HEADER END
#
-# Copyright (c) 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+# Copyright (c) 2012, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
#
@@ -38,12 +38,6 @@
set name=variant.arch value=$(ARCH)
dir path=usr
dir path=usr/share
-dir path=usr/share/gnome
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/__LOCALE__
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/__LOCALE__/package-manager.xml
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/__LOCALE__/pkg_help.pot
dir path=usr/share/lib/pkg/web
dir path=usr/share/lib/pkg/web/__LOCALE__
file path=usr/share/lib/pkg/web/__LOCALE__/advanced_search.shtml
@@ -65,7 +59,4 @@
dir path=usr/share/locale/__LOCALE__
dir path=usr/share/locale/__LOCALE__/LC_MESSAGES
file path=usr/share/locale/__LOCALE__/LC_MESSAGES/pkg.pot
-dir path=usr/share/omf
-dir path=usr/share/omf/package-manager
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-__LOCALE__.omf
license cr_Oracle license=cr_Oracle
--- a/src/pkg/manifests/developer:opensolaris:pkg5.p5m Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/manifests/developer:opensolaris:pkg5.p5m Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -38,11 +38,6 @@
depend type=require fmri=pkg:/library/python-2/coverage-26
depend type=require fmri=pkg:/library/python-2/jsonrpclib-26
depend type=require fmri=pkg:/library/python-2/locale-services
-depend type=require fmri=pkg:/library/python-2/pygobject-26
-depend type=require fmri=pkg:/library/python-2/pygtk2-26
-depend type=require fmri=pkg:/library/python-2/python-gnome-26
-depend type=require fmri=pkg:/library/python-2/python-gnome-extras-26
-depend type=require fmri=pkg:/library/python-2/python-notify-26
depend type=require fmri=pkg:/package/svr4
depend type=require fmri=pkg:/runtime/python-26
depend type=require fmri=pkg:/runtime/python-27
--- a/src/pkg/manifests/group:feature:multi-user-desktop.p5m Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/manifests/group:feature:multi-user-desktop.p5m Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
#
#
-# Copyright (c) 2011, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+# Copyright (c) 2011, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
set name=pkg.fmri value=pkg:/group/feature/multi-user-desktop@$(PKGVERS)
@@ -140,8 +140,6 @@
depend type=group fmri=mail/thunderbird/plugin/thunderbird-lightning
depend type=group fmri=network/dhcp/dhcpmgr
depend type=group fmri=network/dhcp/dhcpmgr/locale
-depend type=group fmri=package/pkg/package-manager
-depend type=group fmri=package/pkg/update-manager
depend type=group fmri=print/cups/system-config-printer
depend type=group fmri=print/filter/ghostscript
depend type=group fmri=print/filter/ghostscript/fonts/gnu-gs-fonts-other
--- a/src/pkg/manifests/group:feature:trusted-desktop.p5m Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/manifests/group:feature:trusted-desktop.p5m Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
#
#
-# Copyright (c) 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+# Copyright (c) 2011, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
set name=pkg.fmri value=pkg:/group/feature/trusted-desktop@$(PKGVERS)
@@ -78,7 +78,6 @@
depend type=group fmri=pkg:/library/spell-checking/enchant
depend type=group fmri=pkg:/mail/thunderbird
depend type=group fmri=pkg:/mail/thunderbird/plugin/thunderbird-lightning
-depend type=group fmri=pkg:/package/pkg/package-manager
depend type=group fmri=pkg:/package/svr4
depend type=group fmri=pkg:/system/font/isas-misc
depend type=group fmri=pkg:/system/font/truetype/bh-luxi
--- a/src/pkg/manifests/package:pkg:package-manager.p5m Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/manifests/package:pkg:package-manager.p5m Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -18,287 +18,12 @@
#
# CDDL HEADER END
#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+
+#
+# Copyright (c) 2010, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
-set name=pkg.fmri value=pkg:/package/pkg/package-manager@$(PKGVERS)
-set name=pkg.summary value="GUI for Image Packaging System"
-set name=pkg.description \
- value="The graphical interface for the Image Packaging System allows you to perform many core packaging tasks in a user-friendly fashion."
-set name=info.classification \
- value=org.opensolaris.category.2008:System/Packaging
-set name=variant.arch value=$(ARCH)
-dir path=$(PYDIR)
-dir path=$(PYDIRVP)
-dir path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg
-dir path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/__init__.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/beadmin.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/cache.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/detailspanel.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/entrystyle.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/enumerations.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/exportconfirm.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/globalexceptionhandler.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/imageinfo.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/installupdate.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/misc.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/misc_non_gui.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/parseqs.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/pmgconf.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/pmlogging.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/preferences.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/progress.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/repository.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/searcherror.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/startpage.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/uarenamebe.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/versioninfo.py
-file path=$(PYDIRVP)/pkg/gui/webinstall.py
-dir path=etc
-dir path=etc/gconf
-dir path=etc/gconf/schemas
-file path=etc/gconf/schemas/packagemanager-preferences.schemas
-dir path=etc/security
-dir path=etc/security/exec_attr.d
-file path=etc/security/exec_attr.d/package:pkg:package-manager
-dir path=usr
-dir path=usr/bin
-file path=usr/bin/packagemanager
-dir path=usr/lib
-file path=usr/lib/pm-launch mode=0755
-dir path=usr/share
-dir path=usr/share/applications
-file path=usr/share/applications/addmoresoftware.desktop
-file path=usr/share/applications/packagemanager.desktop
-dir path=usr/share/gnome
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/C
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/C/figures
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/C/figures/pkgmgr-main.png
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/C/figures/startpage_new.png
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/C/figures/update_all_new.png
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/C/figures/webinstall.png
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/C/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ar
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ar/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ca
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ca/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/cs
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/cs/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/de
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/de/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/es
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/es/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/fr
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/fr/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/hu
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/hu/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/id
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/id/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/it
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/it/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ja
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ja/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ko
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ko/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/pl
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/pl/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/pt_BR
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/pt_BR/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ru
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/ru/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/sv
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/sv/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_CN
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_CN/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_HK
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_HK/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_TW
-file path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/zh_TW/package-manager.xml
-dir path=usr/share/icons
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrast
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrast/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrast/48x48/apps
-file path=usr/share/icons/HighContrast/48x48/apps/packagemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrastInverse
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/apps
-file path=usr/share/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/apps/packagemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/icons/hicolor
-dir path=usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48/apps
-file path=usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48/apps/packagemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48/mimetypes
-file path=usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48/mimetypes/gnome-mime-application-vnd.pkg5.info.png
-dir path=usr/share/man
-dir path=usr/share/man/ja_JP.UTF-8
-dir path=usr/share/man/ja_JP.UTF-8/man1
-file path=usr/share/man/ja_JP.UTF-8/man1/packagemanager.1
-dir path=usr/share/man/man1
-file path=usr/share/man/man1/packagemanager.1
-dir path=usr/share/man/zh_CN.UTF-8
-dir path=usr/share/man/zh_CN.UTF-8/man1
-file path=usr/share/man/zh_CN.UTF-8/man1/packagemanager.1
-dir path=usr/share/mime
-dir path=usr/share/mime/packages
-file path=usr/share/mime/packages/packagemanager-info.xml
-dir path=usr/share/omf
-dir path=usr/share/omf/package-manager
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-C.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-ar.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-ca.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-cs.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-de.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-es.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-fr.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-hu.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-id.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-it.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-ja.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-ko.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-pl.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-pt_BR.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-ru.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-sv.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-zh_CN.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-zh_HK.omf
-file path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-zh_TW.omf
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/dialog-information.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/dialog-warning.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/hc_dialog-information.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/hc_dialog-warning.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/hc_install.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/hc_opensolaris.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/hci_dialog-information.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/hci_dialog-warning.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/hci_install.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/hci_opensolaris.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/install.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/opensolaris.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/C/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ar
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ar/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ca
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ca/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/cs
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/cs/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/de
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/de/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/es
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/es/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/fr
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/fr/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/hu
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/hu/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/id
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/id/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/it
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/it/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ja
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ja/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ko
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ko/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/nl
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/nl/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/pt_BR
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/pt_BR/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ru
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/ru/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/sv
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/sv/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/zh_CN
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/zh_CN/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/zh_HK
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/zh_HK/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/zh_TW
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase/zh_TW/startpage.html
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions/filter_all.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions/filter_selected.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions/progress_checkmark.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions/selection.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions/status_checkmark.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions/status_installed.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions/status_newupdate.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/16x16/actions/status_notinstalled.png
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24/actions/pm-install_update.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24/actions/pm-refresh.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24/actions/pm-remove.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24/actions/pm-update_all.png
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48/actions/packagemanager.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48/actions/pm-install_update.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48/actions/pm-refresh.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48/actions/pm-remove.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48/actions/pm-update_all.png
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions/filter_all.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions/filter_selected.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions/progress_checkmark.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions/selection.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions/status_checkmark.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions/status_installed.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions/status_newupdate.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/16x16/actions/status_notinstalled.png
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/actions/pm-install_update.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/actions/pm-refresh.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/actions/pm-remove.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/actions/pm-update_all.png
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/actions/packagemanager.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/actions/pm-install_update.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/actions/pm-refresh.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/actions/pm-remove.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/actions/pm-update_all.png
-link path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/HighContrastLargePrintInverse \
- target=HighContrastInverse
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/filter_all.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/filter_selected.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/progress_blank.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/progress_checkmark.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/selection.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/status_checkmark.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/status_installed.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/status_newupdate.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/16x16/actions/status_notinstalled.png
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24/actions/pm-check.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24/actions/pm-install_update.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24/actions/pm-refresh.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24/actions/pm-remove.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24/actions/pm-update_all.png
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48/actions
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48/actions/packagemanager.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48/actions/pm-install_update.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48/actions/pm-refresh.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48/actions/pm-remove.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48/actions/pm-update_all.png
-file path=usr/share/package-manager/packagemanager.ui
-legacy pkg=SUNWipkg-gui version=0.1.1
-license cr_Oracle license=cr_Oracle
-depend type=require fmri=desktop/gksu
-depend type=require fmri=gnome/theme/hicolor-icon-theme
-depend type=require fmri=system/font/xorg/xorg-core
-depend type=require fmri=system/library/dbus
+set name=pkg.fmri \
+ value=pkg:/package/pkg/[email protected],5.11-5.12.0.0.0.37.0
+set name=pkg.obsolete value=true
+set name=nopublish.after value=0
--- a/src/pkg/manifests/package:pkg:update-manager.p5m Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/manifests/package:pkg:update-manager.p5m Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -21,93 +21,7 @@
# Copyright (c) 2010, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
-set name=pkg.fmri value=pkg:/package/pkg/update-manager@$(PKGVERS)
-set name=pkg.summary value="Update Manager for Image Packaging System"
-set name=pkg.description \
- value="The Update Manager is a simplified graphical interface to the Image Packaging System which simply updates all packages installed on your system. There is also a desktop widget which notifies you when updates are available."
-set name=info.classification \
- value=org.opensolaris.category.2008:System/Packaging
-set name=variant.arch value=$(ARCH)
-dir path=etc
-dir path=etc/gconf
-dir path=etc/gconf/schemas
-file path=etc/gconf/schemas/updatemanager-preferences.schemas
-dir path=etc/xdg
-dir path=etc/xdg/autostart
-file path=etc/xdg/autostart/updatemanagernotifier.desktop
-dir path=lib
-dir path=lib/svc
-dir path=lib/svc/manifest
-dir path=lib/svc/manifest/application
-dir path=lib/svc/manifest/application/pkg
-file path=lib/svc/manifest/application/pkg/pkg-update.xml
-dir path=lib/svc/method
-file path=lib/svc/method/svc-pkg-update
-dir path=usr
-dir path=usr/bin
-file path=usr/bin/pm-updatemanager
-dir path=usr/lib
-file path=usr/lib/pm-checkforupdates mode=0755
-dir path=usr/lib/update-manager
-file path=usr/lib/update-manager/update-refresh.sh mode=0755
-file path=usr/lib/updatemanagernotifier mode=0755
-dir path=usr/share
-dir path=usr/share/applications
-file path=usr/share/applications/updatemanager.desktop
-dir path=usr/share/icons
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrast
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrast/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrast/48x48/apps
-file path=usr/share/icons/HighContrast/48x48/apps/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrastInverse
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/apps
-file path=usr/share/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/apps/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/icons/hicolor
-dir path=usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48/apps
-file path=usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48/apps/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/man
-dir path=usr/share/man/ja_JP.UTF-8
-dir path=usr/share/man/ja_JP.UTF-8/man1
-file path=usr/share/man/ja_JP.UTF-8/man1/pm-updatemanager.1
-dir path=usr/share/man/man1
-file path=usr/share/man/man1/pm-updatemanager.1
-dir path=usr/share/man/zh_CN.UTF-8
-dir path=usr/share/man/zh_CN.UTF-8/man1
-file path=usr/share/man/zh_CN.UTF-8/man1/pm-updatemanager.1
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/24x24/actions/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/36x36
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/36x36/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/36x36/actions/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrast/48x48/actions/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/actions/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/36x36
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/36x36/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/36x36/actions/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/actions/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/24x24/actions/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/36x36
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/36x36/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/36x36/actions/updatemanager.png
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48
-dir path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48/actions
-file path=usr/share/update-manager/icons/hicolor/48x48/actions/updatemanager.png
-legacy pkg=SUNWipkg-um version=0.1.1
-license cr_Oracle license=cr_Oracle
-depend type=require fmri=gnome/config/gconf
+set name=pkg.fmri \
+ value=pkg:/package/pkg/[email protected],5.11-5.12.0.0.0.37.0
+set name=pkg.obsolete value=true
+set name=nopublish.after value=0
--- a/src/pkg/transforms/defaults Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/pkg/transforms/defaults Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
#
# CDDL HEADER END
#
-# Copyright (c) 2010, 2013 Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+# Copyright (c) 2010, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
# Set some specific permissions
@@ -33,11 +33,10 @@
<transform dir file path=etc/gconf/schemas -> set group sys>
<transform dir file path=etc/(security|xdg) -> set group sys>
<transform dir path=usr/share$ -> set group sys>
-<transform dir path=usr/share/(doc|gnome)$ -> set group other>
-<transform file dir path=usr/share/(applications|icons|locale) -> default group other>
+<transform dir path=usr/share/doc$ -> set group other>
+<transform file dir path=usr/share/locale -> default group other>
<transform dir path=usr/share/lib -> set group sys>
<transform file dir path=usr/share/mime -> default group root>
-<transform file path=usr/share/(package|update)-manager/icons -> default group other>
<transform dir path=lib/svc$ -> default group bin>
<transform dir file path=lib/svc/manifest -> default group sys>
<transform dir file path=lib/svc/method -> default group bin>
@@ -68,27 +67,17 @@
# Add actuators
<transform file path=(var|lib)/svc/manifest/.*\.xml -> add restart_fmri svc:/system/manifest-import:default>
-<transform file path=etc/gconf/schemas/.*\.(entries|schemas) -> add restart_fmri svc:/application/desktop-cache/gconf-cache:default>
-<transform file path=usr/share/applications/.*\.desktop -> add restart_fmri svc:/application/desktop-cache/desktop-mime-cache:default>
-<transform file path=usr/share/icons/.* -> add restart_fmri svc:/application/desktop-cache/icon-cache:default>
-<transform file path=usr/share/mime/packages/.*\.xml -> add restart_fmri svc:/application/desktop-cache/mime-types-cache:default>
# Add locale facets
<transform dir file \
path=usr/share/locale/([a-z]{2,3}(_[A-Z]{2,3})?)([.@][^/]+)?(/.+)?$ -> \
default facet.locale.%<1> true>
<transform dir file \
- path=usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager/([a-z]{2,3}(_[A-Z]{2,3})?)(/.*)?$ -> \
- default facet.locale.%<1> true>
-<transform dir file \
path=usr/share/man/([a-z]{2,3}(_[A-Z]{2,3})?)([.@][^/]+)?(/.+)?$ -> \
default facet.locale.%<1> true>
# locale dir, section dir, and manpages (add zh_SG to zh_CN)
<transform dir file link path=usr/share/man/zh_CN([/.@].+)?$ -> \
default facet.locale.zh_SG true>
-<transform file \
- path=usr/share/omf/package-manager/package-manager-([a-z]{2,3}(_[A-Z]{2,3})?)\.omf$ -> \
- default facet.locale.%<1> true>
# Add manpage facets
<transform dir file link hardlink path=usr.*/man(/.+){0,1}$ -> \
--- a/src/po/POTFILES.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/po/POTFILES.in Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -4,12 +4,6 @@
client.py
depot-config.py
depot.py
-gui/data/addmoresoftware.desktop.in
-gui/data/l10n.py
-gui/data/packagemanager-info.xml.in
-gui/data/packagemanager-preferences.schemas.in
-gui/data/packagemanager.desktop.in
-[type: gettext/glade]gui/data/packagemanager.ui
modules/actions/__init__.py
modules/actions/depend.py
modules/actions/directory.py
@@ -50,22 +44,6 @@
modules/flavor/script.py
modules/flavor/smf_manifest.py
modules/fmri.py
-modules/gui/beadmin.py
-modules/gui/detailspanel.py
-modules/gui/entrystyle.py
-modules/gui/exportconfirm.py
-modules/gui/globalexceptionhandler.py
-modules/gui/installupdate.py
-modules/gui/misc.py
-modules/gui/misc_non_gui.py
-modules/gui/pmlogging.py
-modules/gui/preferences.py
-modules/gui/progress.py
-modules/gui/repository.py
-modules/gui/startpage.py
-modules/gui/uarenamebe.py
-modules/gui/versioninfo.py
-modules/gui/webinstall.py
modules/indexer.py
modules/lint/base.py
modules/lint/config.py
@@ -90,18 +68,12 @@
modules/server/repository.py
modules/server/transaction.py
modules/smf.py
-packagemanager.py
pkgdep.py
pkgrepo.py
publish.py
pull.py
sign.py
sysrepo.py
-um/data/updatemanager-preferences.schemas.in
-um/data/updatemanager.desktop.in
-um/data/updatemanagernotifier.desktop.in
-updatemanager.py
-updatemanagernotifier.py
util/publish/pkgdiff.py
util/publish/pkgfmt.py
util/publish/pkglint.py
--- a/src/setup.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/setup.py Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -130,15 +130,6 @@
depot_conf_dir = 'etc/pkg/depot/conf.d'
depot_logs_dir = 'var/log/pkg/depot'
depot_cache_dir = 'var/cache/pkg/depot'
-autostart_dir = 'etc/xdg/autostart'
-desktop_dir = 'usr/share/applications'
-gconf_dir = 'etc/gconf/schemas'
-help_dir = 'usr/share/gnome/help/package-manager'
-omf_dir = 'usr/share/omf/package-manager'
-startpage_dir = 'usr/share/package-manager/data/startpagebase'
-um_lib_dir = 'usr/lib/update-manager'
-um_share_dir = 'usr/share/update-manager'
-pm_share_dir = 'usr/share/package-manager'
locale_dir = 'usr/share/locale'
mirror_logs_dir = 'var/log/pkg/mirror'
mirror_cache_dir = 'var/cache/pkg/mirror'
@@ -162,20 +153,12 @@
['publish.py', 'pkgsend'],
['pull.py', 'pkgrecv'],
['sign.py', 'pkgsign'],
- ['packagemanager.py', 'packagemanager'],
- ['updatemanager.py', 'pm-updatemanager'],
],
lib_dir: [
['depot.py', 'pkg.depotd'],
- ['checkforupdates.py', 'pm-checkforupdates'],
- ['updatemanagernotifier.py', 'updatemanagernotifier'],
- ['launch.py', 'pm-launch'],
['sysrepo.py', 'pkg.sysrepo'],
['depot-config.py', "pkg.depot-config"]
],
- um_lib_dir: [
- ['um/update-refresh.sh', 'update-refresh.sh'],
- ],
svc_method_dir: [
['svc/svc-pkg-depot', 'svc-pkg-depot'],
['svc/svc-pkg-mdns', 'svc-pkg-mdns'],
@@ -184,7 +167,6 @@
'svc-pkg-repositories-setup'],
['svc/svc-pkg-server', 'svc-pkg-server'],
['svc/svc-pkg-sysrepo', 'svc-pkg-sysrepo'],
- ['svc/svc-pkg-update', 'svc-pkg-update'],
],
svc_share_dir: [
['svc/pkg5_include.sh', 'pkg5_include.sh'],
@@ -237,7 +219,6 @@
}
man1_files = [
- 'man/packagemanager.1',
'man/pkg.1',
'man/pkgdepend.1',
'man/pkgdiff.1',
@@ -250,7 +231,6 @@
'man/pkgsurf.1',
'man/pkgrecv.1',
'man/pkgrepo.1',
- 'man/pm-updatemanager.1',
]
man1m_files = [
'man/pkg.depotd.1m',
@@ -262,7 +242,6 @@
]
man1_ja_files = [
- 'man/ja_JP/packagemanager.1',
'man/ja_JP/pkg.1',
'man/ja_JP/pkgdepend.1',
'man/ja_JP/pkgdiff.1',
@@ -274,7 +253,6 @@
'man/ja_JP/pkgsign.1',
'man/ja_JP/pkgrecv.1',
'man/ja_JP/pkgrepo.1',
- 'man/ja_JP/pm-updatemanager.1',
]
man1m_ja_files = [
'man/ja_JP/pkg.depotd.1m',
@@ -285,7 +263,6 @@
]
man1_zh_CN_files = [
- 'man/zh_CN/packagemanager.1',
'man/zh_CN/pkg.1',
'man/zh_CN/pkgdepend.1',
'man/zh_CN/pkgdiff.1',
@@ -297,7 +274,6 @@
'man/zh_CN/pkgsign.1',
'man/zh_CN/pkgrecv.1',
'man/zh_CN/pkgrepo.1',
- 'man/zh_CN/pm-updatemanager.1',
]
man1m_zh_CN_files = [
'man/zh_CN/pkg.depotd.1m',
@@ -316,7 +292,6 @@
'pkg.client.transport',
'pkg.file_layout',
'pkg.flavor',
- 'pkg.gui',
'pkg.lint',
'pkg.portable',
'pkg.publish',
@@ -335,7 +310,6 @@
'pkg.client.progress',
'pkg.misc',
'pkg.pipeutils',
- 'checkforupdates',
]
web_files = []
@@ -365,7 +339,6 @@
'svc/pkg-repositories-setup.xml',
'svc/pkg-server.xml',
'svc/pkg-system-repository.xml',
- 'svc/pkg-update.xml',
'svc/zoneproxy-client.xml',
'svc/zoneproxyd.xml'
]
@@ -404,66 +377,9 @@
["util/apache2/depot/repos.shtml"]))
execattrd_files = [
'util/misc/exec_attr.d/package:pkg',
- 'util/misc/exec_attr.d/package:pkg:package-manager'
]
authattrd_files = ['util/misc/auth_attr.d/package:pkg']
userattrd_files = ['util/misc/user_attr.d/package:pkg']
-autostart_files = [
- 'um/data/updatemanagernotifier.desktop',
-]
-desktop_files = [
- 'gui/data/addmoresoftware.desktop',
- 'gui/data/packagemanager.desktop',
- 'um/data/updatemanager.desktop',
-]
-gconf_files = [
- 'gui/data/packagemanager-preferences.schemas',
- 'um/data/updatemanager-preferences.schemas',
-]
-intl_files = [
- 'gui/data/addmoresoftware.desktop.in',
- 'gui/data/packagemanager-info.xml.in',
- 'gui/data/packagemanager-preferences.schemas.in',
- 'gui/data/packagemanager.desktop.in',
- 'um/data/updatemanager-preferences.schemas.in',
- 'um/data/updatemanager.desktop.in',
- 'um/data/updatemanagernotifier.desktop.in',
-]
-help_locales = \
- 'C ar ca cs de es fr hu id it ja ko pl pt_BR ru sv zh_CN zh_HK zh_TW'.split()
-help_files = {
- 'C': ['gui/help/C/package-manager.xml'],
- 'C/figures': [
- 'gui/help/C/figures/%s.png' % n
- for n in 'pkgmgr-main startpage_new update_all_new webinstall'.split()
- ]
-}
-help_files.update(
- (locale, ['gui/help/%s/package-manager.xml' % locale])
- for locale in help_locales[1:]
-)
-# add package-manager-__LOCALE__.omf for localizable file package
-omf_files = [
- 'gui/help/package-manager-%s.omf' % locale
- for locale in help_locales + [ "__LOCALE__" ]
-]
-startpage_locales = \
- 'C ar ca cs de es fr hu id it ja ko nl pt_BR ru sv zh_CN zh_HK zh_TW'.split()
-startpage_files = {
- 'C': [
- 'gui/data/startpagebase/C/%s.png' % n
- for n in [
- 'dialog-information', 'dialog-warning', 'hc_dialog-information',
- 'hc_dialog-warning', 'hc_install', 'hc_opensolaris',
- 'hci_dialog-information', 'hci_dialog-warning', 'hci_install',
- 'hci_opensolaris', 'install', 'opensolaris'
- ]
- ] + ['gui/data/startpagebase/C/startpage.html']
-}
-startpage_files.update(
- (locale, ['gui/data/startpagebase/%s/startpage.html' % locale])
- for locale in startpage_locales[1:]
-)
pkg_locales = \
'ar ca cs de es fr he hu id it ja ko nl pl pt_BR ru sk sv zh_CN zh_HK zh_TW'.split()
@@ -796,23 +712,6 @@
self.copy_file(infile, outfile)
self.outfiles.append(outfile)
- # Don't bother making this generic for the one symlink.
- src = "HighContrastInverse"
- dst = os.path.join(self.install_dir, pm_share_dir,
- "icons/HighContrastLargePrintInverse")
- try:
- targ = os.readlink(dst)
- except OSError, e:
- if e.errno in (errno.ENOENT, errno.EINVAL):
- targ = None
- else:
- raise
-
- if src != targ:
- log.info("linking %s -> %s" % (src, dst))
- rm_f(dst)
- os.symlink(src, dst)
-
def run_cmd(args, swdir, updenv=None, ignerr=False, savestderr=None):
if updenv:
# use temp environment modified with the given dict
@@ -1357,22 +1256,6 @@
# Anything that gets created here should get deleted in
# clean_func.run() below.
i18n_check()
- for f in intl_files:
- intltool_merge(f, f[:-3])
-
- for l in help_locales:
- path = "gui/help/%s/" % l
- xml2po_merge(path + "package-manager.xml.in",
- path + "package-manager.xml",
- path + "%s.mo" % l)
-
- # create xml for localization
- localizablexml("gui/help/C/package-manager.xml",
- "gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml")
-
- # generate pkg_help.pot for next translation
- xml2po_gen("gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml",
- "gui/help/C/pkg_help.pot")
for l in pkg_locales:
msgfmt("po/%s.po" % l, "po/%s.mo" % l)
@@ -1381,12 +1264,6 @@
intltool_update_maintain()
intltool_update_pot()
- # create __LOCALE__ -> C symlink for omf file
- # to make installation with data_files list work
- locomf="gui/help/package-manager-__LOCALE__.omf"
- if not os.path.exists(locomf):
- os.symlink("package-manager-C.omf", locomf)
-
def rm_f(filepath):
"""Remove a file without caring whether it exists."""
@@ -1406,22 +1283,11 @@
rm_f("po/.intltool-merge-cache")
- for f in intl_files:
- rm_f(f[:-3])
-
for l in pkg_locales:
rm_f("po/%s.mo" % l)
rm_f("po/pkg.pot")
- for l in help_locales:
- path = "gui/help/%s/" % l
- rm_f(path + "package-manager.xml")
- rm_f(path + "%s.mo" % l)
-
- rm_f("gui/help/C/pkg_help.pot")
-
- rm_f("gui/help/package-manager-__LOCALE__.omf")
rm_f("po/i18n_errs.txt")
class clobber_func(Command):
@@ -1459,7 +1325,6 @@
("port=", "z", "lowest port to start a depot on"),
("timing", "t", "timing file <file>"),
("verbosemode", 'v', "run tests in verbose mode"),
- ("enableguitests", 'u', "enable IPS GUI tests, disabled by default"),
("stoponerr", 'x', "stop when a baseline mismatch occurs"),
("debugoutput", 'd', "emit debugging output"),
("showonexpectedfail", 'f',
@@ -1613,32 +1478,11 @@
(depot_conf_dir, {}),
(depot_logs_dir, depot_log_stubs),
(depot_cache_dir, {}),
- (autostart_dir, autostart_files),
- (desktop_dir, desktop_files),
- (gconf_dir, gconf_files),
- (omf_dir, omf_files),
- ('usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48/mimetypes',
- ['gui/data/gnome-mime-application-vnd.pkg5.info.png']),
- ('usr/share/mime/packages', ['gui/data/packagemanager-info.xml']),
- (pm_share_dir, ['gui/data/packagemanager.ui']),
(mirror_cache_dir, {}),
(mirror_logs_dir, {}),
]
- data_files += [
- (os.path.join(startpage_dir, locale), files)
- for locale, files in startpage_files.iteritems()
- ]
- data_files += [
- (os.path.join(help_dir, locale), files)
- for locale, files in help_files.iteritems()
- ]
# install localizable .xml and its .pot file to put into localizable file package
data_files += [
- (os.path.join(help_dir, '__LOCALE__'),
- [('gui/help/C/package-manager.localizable.xml', 'package-manager.xml'),
- ('gui/help/C/pkg_help.pot', 'pkg_help.pot')])
- ]
- data_files += [
(os.path.join(locale_dir, locale, 'LC_MESSAGES'),
[('po/%s.mo' % locale, 'pkg.mo')])
for locale in pkg_locales
@@ -1648,48 +1492,6 @@
(os.path.join(locale_dir, '__LOCALE__', 'LC_MESSAGES'),
[('po/pkg.pot', 'pkg.pot')])
]
- for t in 'HighContrast', 'HighContrastInverse', '':
- for px in '24', '36', '48':
- data_files += [(
- '%s/icons/%s/%sx%s/actions' % (um_share_dir, t or 'hicolor', px, px),
- ['um/data/icons/%s/%sx%s/updatemanager.png' % (t, px, px)]
- )]
- data_files += [(
- '%s/icons/%s/16x16/actions' % (pm_share_dir, t or 'hicolor'),
- [
- 'gui/data/icons/%s/16x16/%s.png' % (t, n)
- for n in ('filter_all', 'filter_selected', 'progress_checkmark',
- 'selection', 'status_checkmark', 'status_installed',
- 'status_newupdate', 'status_notinstalled')
- ]
- )]
- data_files += [
- ('%s/icons/%s/%sx%s/actions' % (pm_share_dir, t or 'hicolor', px, px),
- [
- 'gui/data/icons/%s/%sx%s/%s.png' % (t, px, px, n)
- for n in ('pm-install_update', 'pm-refresh',
- 'pm-remove', 'pm-update_all')
- ])
- for px in (24, 48)
- ]
- data_files += [(
- '%s/icons/%s/48x48/actions' % (pm_share_dir, t or 'hicolor'),
- ['gui/data/icons/%s/48x48/packagemanager.png' % t]
- )]
- data_files += [
- ('usr/share/icons/%s/48x48/apps' % (t or 'hicolor'),
- [
- 'um/data/icons/%s/48x48/updatemanager.png' % t,
- 'gui/data/icons/%s/48x48/packagemanager.png' % t
- ]),
- ]
- # These two icons don't fit any patterns.
- data_files += [
- (os.path.join(pm_share_dir, 'icons/hicolor/16x16/actions'), [
- 'gui/data/icons/16x16/progress_blank.png']),
- (os.path.join(pm_share_dir, 'icons/hicolor/24x24/actions'), [
- 'gui/data/icons/24x24/pm-check.png']),
- ]
if osname == 'sunos' or osname == "linux":
# Unix platforms which the elf extension has been ported to
--- a/src/svc/pkg-update.xml Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0"?>
-<!--
- CDDL HEADER START
-
- The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
- Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
- You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-
- You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
- or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
- See the License for the specific language governing permissions
- and limitations under the License.
-
- When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
- file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
- If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
- fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
- information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-
- CDDL HEADER END
-
- Copyright (c) 2008, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-
- NOTE: This service manifest is not editable; its contents will
- be overwritten by package or patch operations, including
- operating system upgrade. Make customizations in a different
- file.
--->
-
-<!DOCTYPE service_bundle SYSTEM "/usr/share/lib/xml/dtd/service_bundle.dtd.1">
-
-<service_bundle type='manifest' name=':pkg-update'>
-
-<service
- name='application/pkg/update'
- type='service'
- version='1'>
-
- <create_default_instance enabled='true' />
-
- <single_instance/>
-
- <dependency
- name='fs'
- grouping='require_all'
- restart_on='none'
- type='service'>
- <service_fmri value='svc:/system/filesystem/local' />
- </dependency>
-
- <!--
- If we're homed on an autofs mount point, then we should
- delay until our path becomes available.
- -->
- <dependency
- name='autofs'
- grouping='optional_all'
- restart_on='none'
- type='service'>
- <service_fmri value='svc:/system/filesystem/autofs' />
- </dependency>
-
- <exec_method
- type='method'
- name='start'
- exec='lib/svc/method/svc-pkg-update start'
- timeout_seconds='60' />
-
- <exec_method
- type='method'
- name='stop'
- exec='lib/svc/method/svc-pkg-update stop'
- timeout_seconds='60' />
-
- <property_group name='startd' type='framework'>
- <propval name='duration' type='astring' value='transient' />
- </property_group>
-
- <!--
- Create a property group to allow the update service to
- record the time it last ran.
- See /usr/lib/update-manager/update-refresh.sh
- -->
- <property_group name='update' type='application'>
- </property_group>
-
- <stability value='Unstable' />
-
- <template>
- <common_name>
- <loctext xml:lang='C'>
-Update Manager update checker controller
- </loctext>
- </common_name>
- <description>
- <loctext xml:lang='C'>
-Adds or removes crontab entry to check for updates
- </loctext>
- </description>
- </template>
-</service>
-
-</service_bundle>
--- a/src/svc/svc-pkg-update Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/ksh
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2013 Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-# An SMF method script for
-# svc:/application/pkg/update:default
-# It's sole purpose is to add or remove a crontab entry
-
-. /lib/svc/share/smf_include.sh
-. /lib/svc/share/pkg5_include.sh
-
-REFRESH_PROG="/usr/lib/update-manager/update-refresh.sh"
-SCHEDULE='30 0,9,12,18,21 * * *'
-
-case $SMF_METHOD in
-"start")
- add_cronjob $SMF_FMRI "$SCHEDULE" $REFRESH_PROG
- check_failure $? "unable to schedule pkg refreshes" $SMF_FMRI \
- exit
- ;;
-"stop")
- remove_cronjob $SMF_FMRI $REFRESH_PROG
- check_failure $? "unable to unschedule pkg refreshes" $SMF_FMRI\
- exit
- ;;
-*)
- echo "Command line invocation of ${0} unsupported."
- echo "This script is intended for smf(5) invocation only"
- exit $SMF_EXIT_ERR_NOSMF
- ;;
-esac
-exit $SMF_EXIT_OK
--- a/src/tests/gui/__init__.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-# Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-
--- a/src/tests/gui/t_pm_addrepo.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-
-import testutils
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- testutils.setup_environment("../../../proto")
-import pkg5unittest
-import unittest
-
-try:
- import ldtp
- import ldtputils
- if not "getmin" in dir(ldtp):
- raise ImportError
-except ImportError:
- raise ImportError, "ldtp 2.X package not installed."
-
-class TestPkgGuiAddRepoBasics(pkg5unittest.ManyDepotTestCase):
-
- # pygtk requires unicode as the default encoding.
- default_utf8 = True
-
- foo1 = """
- open foo@1,5.11-0
- close """
-
- bar1 = """
- open bar@1,5.11-0
- close """
-
- def setUp(self):
- pkg5unittest.ManyDepotTestCase.setUp(self, ["test1", "test2"],
- start_depots=True)
-
- durl1 = self.dcs[1].get_depot_url()
- self.pkgsend_bulk(durl1, self.foo1)
-
- durl2 = self.dcs[2].get_depot_url()
- self.pkgsend_bulk(durl2, self.bar1)
-
- self.image_create(durl1, prefix="test1")
-
- def testAddRepository(self):
- repo_name = "test2"
- pm_str = "%s/usr/bin/packagemanager" % pkg5unittest.g_proto_area
- ldtp.launchapp(pm_str,["-R", self.get_img_path()])
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('Package Manager', state = ldtp.state.ENABLED)
-
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuFile;mnuAdd Publisher...')
-
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('dlgAdd Publisher')
-
- ldtp.settextvalue('dlgAdd Publisher', "txtURI", self.dcs[2].get_depot_url())
-
- ldtp.click('dlgAdd Publisher', 'btnAdd')
-
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('dlgAdding Publisher Complete')
-
- ldtp.click('dlgAdding Publisher Complete', 'btnClose')
-
- # Verify result
- self.pkg('publisher | grep %s' % repo_name, exit=0)
-
- # Quit Package Manager
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuFile;mnuQuit')
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- unittest.main()
--- a/src/tests/gui/t_pm_helpabout.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-
-import testutils
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- testutils.setup_environment("../../../proto")
-import pkg5unittest
-import unittest
-
-try:
- import ldtp
- import ldtputils
- if not "getmin" in dir(ldtp):
- raise ImportError
-except ImportError:
- raise ImportError, "ldtp 2.X package not installed."
-
-class TestPkgGuiHelp(pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase):
- # Only start/stop the depot once (instead of for every test)
- persistent_setup = True
-
- # pygtk requires unicode as the default encoding.
- default_utf8 = True
-
- foo10 = """
- open [email protected],5.11-0
- add set name="description" value="Some package1 description"
- close """
-
- def setUp(self, debug_features=None):
- pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase.setUp(self)
- self.pkgsend_bulk(self.rurl, self.foo10)
- self.image_create(self.rurl)
- self.pm_str = "%s/usr/bin/packagemanager" % pkg5unittest.g_proto_area
-
- def tearDown(self):
- pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase.tearDown(self)
-
- def testPmHelp(self):
- ldtp.launchapp(self.pm_str,["-R", self.get_img_path()])
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('Package Manager', state = ldtp.state.ENABLED)
-
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuHelp;mnuContents')
-
- # Verify result
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('*Online Help')
- self.assertEqual(ldtp.guiexist('*Online Help'), 1)
-
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('*Online Help', 'mnuCloseWindow')
-
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuHelp;mnuAbout')
-
- # Verify result
- self.assertEqual(ldtp.guiexist('About Package Manager'), 1)
-
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('dlgAboutPackageManager')
- ldtp.click('dlgAboutPackageManager', 'btnClose')
-
- # Quit Package Manager
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuFile;mnuQuit')
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- unittest.main()
--- a/src/tests/gui/t_pm_install.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-
-import testutils
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- testutils.setup_environment("../../../proto")
-import pkg5unittest
-import unittest
-
-try:
- import ldtp
- import ldtputils
- if not "getmin" in dir(ldtp):
- raise ImportError
-except ImportError:
- raise ImportError, "ldtp 2.X package not installed."
-
-class TestPkgGuiInstallBasics(pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase):
-
- # pygtk requires unicode as the default encoding.
- default_utf8 = True
-
- foo10 = """
- open [email protected],5.11-0
- add set name="description" value="Some package1 description"
- close """
-
- def setUp(self):
- pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase.setUp(self)
-
- def tearDown(self):
- pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase.tearDown(self)
-
- def testInstallSimplePackage(self):
- pkgname = 'package1'
- pm_str = "%s/usr/bin/packagemanager" % pkg5unittest.g_proto_area
-
- self.pkgsend_bulk(self.rurl, self.foo10)
- self.image_create(self.rurl)
-
- ldtp.launchapp(pm_str,["-R", self.get_img_path()])
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('Package Manager', state = ldtp.state.ENABLED)
- ldtp.selectindex('Package Manager', 'Publisher', 0)
- ldtp.selectrow('Package Manager', 'Packages', pkgname)
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuEdit;mnuSelect All')
- ldtp.click('Package Manager', 'btnInstall/Update')
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('dlgInstall Confirmation')
- ldtp.click('dlgInstall Confirmation', 'btnProceed')
-
- while (ldtp.objectexist('dlgInstall/Update', 'btnClose') == 0):
- ldtp.wait(0.1)
-
- ldtp.click('dlgInstall/Update', 'btnClose')
-
- ldtp.waittillguinotexist('dlgInstall/Update')
-
- # Verify result
- self.pkg('verify')
-
- # Quit packagemanager
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuFile;mnuQuit')
-
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- unittest.main()
--- a/src/tests/gui/t_pm_rmrepo.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-
-import testutils
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- testutils.setup_environment("../../../proto")
-import pkg5unittest
-import unittest
-
-try:
- import ldtp
- import ldtputils
- if not "getmin" in dir(ldtp):
- raise ImportError
-except ImportError:
- raise ImportError, "ldtp 2.X package not installed."
-
-class TestPkgGuiRmRepoBasics(pkg5unittest.ManyDepotTestCase):
-
- # pygtk requires unicode as the default encoding.
- default_utf8 = True
-
- foo1 = """
- open foo@1,5.11-0
- close """
-
- bar1 = """
- open bar@1,5.11-0
- close """
-
- def setUp(self):
- pkg5unittest.ManyDepotTestCase.setUp(self, ["test1", "test2"],
- start_depots=True)
-
- durl1 = self.dcs[1].get_depot_url()
- self.pkgsend_bulk(durl1, self.foo1)
-
- durl2 = self.dcs[2].get_depot_url()
- self.pkgsend_bulk(durl2, self.bar1)
-
- self.image_create(durl1, prefix="test1")
-
- self.pkg("set-publisher -O " + durl2 + " test2")
-
- def testRmRepository(self):
- repo_name = "test2"
- pm_str = "%s/usr/bin/packagemanager" % pkg5unittest.g_proto_area
- ldtp.launchapp(pm_str,["-R", self.get_img_path()])
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('Package Manager', state = ldtp.state.ENABLED)
-
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuFile;mnuManage Publishers...')
-
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('dlgManage Publishers')
-
- ldtp.selectrow('dlgManage Publishers', 'Publishers', repo_name)
-
- ldtp.click('dlgManage Publishers', 'btnRemove')
-
- ldtp.click('dlgManage Publishers', 'btnOK')
-
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('dlgManage Publishers Confirmation')
-
- ldtp.click('dlgManage Publishers Confirmation', 'btnOK')
-
- ldtp.waittillguinotexist('dlgManage Publishers')
-
- # Verify result
- self.pkg('publisher | grep %s' % repo_name, exit=1)
-
- # Quit Package Manager
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuFile;mnuQuit')
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- unittest.main()
--- a/src/tests/gui/t_pm_start.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-
-import testutils
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- testutils.setup_environment("../../../proto")
-import pkg5unittest
-import unittest
-
-try:
- import ldtp
- import ldtputils
- if not "getmin" in dir(ldtp):
- raise ImportError
-except ImportError:
- raise ImportError, "ldtp 2.X package not installed."
-
-class TestPkgGuiStartBasics(pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase):
-
- # pygtk requires unicode as the default encoding.
- default_utf8 = True
-
- foo10 = """
- open [email protected],5.11-0
- add set name="description" value="Some package description"
- close """
-
- def setUp(self):
- pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase.setUp(self)
-
- def tearDown(self):
- pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase.tearDown(self)
-
- def testStartPackagemanager(self):
- pm_str = "%s/usr/bin/packagemanager" % pkg5unittest.g_proto_area
-
- self.pkgsend_bulk(self.rurl, self.foo10)
- self.image_create(self.rurl)
-
- ldtp.launchapp(pm_str,["-R", self.get_img_path()])
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('Package Manager', state = ldtp.state.ENABLED)
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuFile;mnuQuit')
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- unittest.main()
--- a/src/tests/gui/t_pm_uninstall.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-
-import testutils
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- testutils.setup_environment("../../../proto")
-import pkg5unittest
-import unittest
-
-try:
- import ldtp
- import ldtputils
- if not "getmin" in dir(ldtp):
- raise ImportError
-except ImportError:
- raise ImportError, "ldtp 2.X package not installed."
-
-class TestPkgGuiUninstallBasics(pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase):
-
- # pygtk requires unicode as the default encoding.
- default_utf8 = True
-
- foo10 = """
- open [email protected],5.11-0
- add set name="description" value="Some package1 description"
- close """
-
- def setUp(self):
- pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase.setUp(self)
-
- def tearDown(self):
- pkg5unittest.SingleDepotTestCase.tearDown(self)
-
- def testUninstallSimplePackage(self):
- pkgname = 'package1'
- pm_str = "%s/usr/bin/packagemanager" % pkg5unittest.g_proto_area
-
- self.pkgsend_bulk(self.rurl, self.foo10)
- self.image_create(self.rurl)
- self.pkg("install %s" % pkgname)
-
- ldtp.launchapp(pm_str,["-R", self.get_img_path()])
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('Package Manager', state = ldtp.state.ENABLED)
- ldtp.selectrow('Package Manager', 'Categories', "All Categories")
- ldtp.selectrow('Package Manager', 'Packages', pkgname)
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuEdit;mnuSelect All')
- ldtp.click('Package Manager', 'btnRemove')
- ldtp.waittillguiexist('dlgRemoveConfirmation')
- ldtp.click('dlgRemoveConfirmation', 'btnProceed')
-
- while (ldtp.objectexist('dlgRemove', 'btnClose') == 0):
- ldtp.wait(0.1)
-
- ldtp.click('dlgRemove', 'btnClose')
-
- ldtp.waittillguinotexist('dlgRemove')
-
- # Verify result
- self.pkg('verify')
-
- # Quit packagemanager
- ldtp.selectmenuitem('Package Manager', 'mnuFile;mnuQuit')
-
-
-if __name__ == "__main__":
- unittest.main()
--- a/src/tests/gui/testutils.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-
-# Copyright (c) 2009, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-
-import os
-import sys
-
-# Set the path so that modules can be found
-path_to_parent = os.path.join(os.path.dirname(__file__), "..")
-sys.path.insert(0, path_to_parent)
-
-import pkg5testenv
-
-def setup_environment(proto):
- pkg5testenv.setup_environment(proto)
-
-try:
- if "DISPLAY" in os.environ:
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require('2.0')
- import gtk
-except ImportError:
- pass
-
-def check_for_gtk():
- return "gtk" in globals()
-
-def check_if_a11y_enabled():
- if not check_for_gtk():
- return False
- # To determine if A11Y is enabled we are starting small gtk application
- # and then we do check if the applications' window does contain
- # accessible widget. This allows us to be sure that A11Y is not
- # only enabled in the gconf key, but it's truly running.
- window = gtk.Window(gtk.WINDOW_TOPLEVEL)
- button = gtk.Button("Check Accessibility")
- window.add(button)
- a11y_enabled = False
- if window.get_accessible().get_n_accessible_children() != 0:
- a11y_enabled = True
- return a11y_enabled
-
-if not check_for_gtk():
- # If gtk isn't imported, this must be done to
- # ensure that locale is setup properly.
- # (This is necessary due to GNOME bug 132040).
- import locale
- locale.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
--- a/src/tests/gui_pylintrc Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,172 +0,0 @@
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-
-# Copyright 2010 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
-
-# This file is used to control pylint when checking the packagemanager
-# GUI python source
-#
-# To run:
-#
-# $ cd .../gate/src
-# $ pylint --rcfile=gui_pylintrc packagemanager.py > pylint-results.txt
-#
-# For more information on pylint, see: http://www.logilab.org/857
-# In particular:
-#
-# * Pylint tutorial - http://www.logilab.org/card/pylint_tutorial
-# * Pylint User Guide - http://www.logilab.org/card/pylint_manual
-# * Pylint Features - http://www.logilab.org/card/pylintfeatures
-#
-# The goal is to try to get a score of 10.00 for this Python code.
-# Currently this will require quite a bit of useful refactoring.
-# Until that is done, we fudge the results by making various
-# adjustments to the default pylint values. This will remove their
-# warnings from the output generated by pylint.
-#
-
-[MASTER]
-
-[MESSAGES CONTROL]
-
-# Disable the message(s) with the given id(s).
-#
-# C0111: Missing Docstring
-# W0511: Used when a warning note as FIXME or XXX is detected.
-# W0613: Unused argument
-# W0704: Except doesn't do anything
-# W0142: Used * or ** magic
-# R0921: Abstract class not referenced
-#
-# W0212: Access to a protected member (fix)
-# Some duplicated code is giving us a number of protected access warnings that we will get rid of when this code duplication is removed
-# W0612: Unused variable (fix)
-# Some of the access methods we use in return a number of elements of which we only need to use one
-
-disable=C0111,W0511,W0613,W0704,W0142,R0921
-
-
-[REPORTS]
-
-[BASIC]
-
-# Required attributes for module, separated by a comma
-required-attributes=
-
-# Regular expression which should only match functions or classes name which do
-# not require a docstring
-no-docstring-rgx=__.*__
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct module names
-module-rgx=(([a-z_][a-zA-Z0-9_-]*)|([A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]+))$
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct module level names
-const-rgx=(([a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z1-9_]*)|(__.*__))$
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct class names
-class-rgx=[A-Z_][a-zA-Z0-9]+$
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct function names
-function-rgx=[a-z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*$
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct method names
-method-rgx=[a-z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*$
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct instance attribute names
-attr-rgx=[a-z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*$
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct argument names
-argument-rgx=[a-z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*$
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct variable names
-variable-rgx=[a-z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*$
-
-# Regular expression which should only match correct list comprehension /
-# generator expression variable names
-inlinevar-rgx=[A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]*$
-
-# Good variable names which should always be accepted, separated by a comma
-good-names=N_
-#good-names=i,j,k,ex,Run,_,Q_
-
-[TYPECHECK]
-
-[VARIABLES]
-
-# In this case we define '_' (the function name for gettext) so that pylint
-# doesn't complain about things like _("this is i18n string")
-additional-builtins=_
-
-[CLASSES]
-
-[DESIGN]
-
-# Maximum number of arguments for function / method
-max-args=20
-
-# Maximum number of locals for function / method body
-max-locals=60
-
-# Maximum number of return / yield for function / method body
-max-returns=30
-
-# Maximum number of branch for function / method body
-max-branchs=50
-
-# Maximum number of statements in function / method body
-max-statements=350
-
-# Maximum number of parents for a class (see R0901).
-max-parents=7
-
-# Maximum number of attributes for a class (see R0902).
-# Require large number of instance attributes as we are loading up handles to widget elements and only want to do this in init
-# for performance reasons
-max-attributes=200
-
-# Minimum number of public methods for a class (see R0903).
-min-public-methods=0
-
-# Maximum number of public methods for a class (see R0904).
-# Increase from 56 to 100 as we are deriving off various classes and can't reduce the number further
-max-public-methods=100
-
-[IMPORTS]
-
-[FORMAT]
-
-# Maximum number of characters on a single line.
-#
-max-line-length=90
-
-# Maximum number of lines in a module
-# Increased from 1500 as the packagemanager is doing a lot of GUI initialisation that we can't logically put anywhere else.
-max-module-lines=5000
-
-# String used as indentation unit. This is usually " " (4 spaces) or
-# "\t" (1 tab).
-#
-indent-string=' '
-
-[MISCELLANEOUS]
-
-[SIMILARITIES]
-
--- a/src/tests/run.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/tests/run.py Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
#
#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+# Copyright (c) 2008, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
#
import simplejson as json
@@ -232,7 +232,6 @@
-q Quiet output
-s <regexp> Run tests starting at regexp
-t Generate timing info file
- -u Enable IPS GUI tests, disabled by default
-v Verbose output
-x Stop after the first baseline mismatch
-z <port> Lowest port the test suite should use
@@ -305,7 +304,6 @@
do_coverage = False
debug_output = False
show_on_expected_fail = False
- enable_gui_tests = False
archive_dir = None
port = 12001
quiet = False
@@ -328,8 +326,6 @@
bfile = arg
if opt == "-o":
onlyval.append(arg)
- if opt == "-u":
- enable_gui_tests = True
if opt == "-x":
bailonfail = True
if opt == "-t":
@@ -409,22 +405,6 @@
suites.append(api_suite)
if ostype == "posix":
suites.append(cli_suite)
- if enable_gui_tests:
- try:
- import gui.testutils
- except Exception, e:
- print "# %s" % e
- else:
- if not gui.testutils.check_for_gtk():
- print "# GTK not present or $DISPLAY not " \
- "set, GUI tests disabled."
- elif not gui.testutils.check_if_a11y_enabled():
- print "# Accessibility not enabled, GUI " \
- "tests disabled."
- else:
- gui_suite = find_tests("gui", onlyval,
- startattest, output, time_estimates)
- suites.append(gui_suite)
# This is primarily of interest to developers altering the test suite,
# so don't enable it for now. The testsuite suite tends to emit a bunch
Binary file src/um/data/icons/24x24/updatemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/um/data/icons/36x36/updatemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/um/data/icons/48x48/updatemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/um/data/icons/HighContrast/24x24/updatemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/um/data/icons/HighContrast/36x36/updatemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/um/data/icons/HighContrast/48x48/updatemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/um/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/24x24/updatemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/um/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/36x36/updatemanager.png has changed
Binary file src/um/data/icons/HighContrastInverse/48x48/updatemanager.png has changed
--- a/src/um/data/updatemanager-preferences.schemas.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-<gconfschemafile>
- <schemalist>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/updatemanager/preferences/start_delay</key>
- <applyto>/apps/updatemanager/preferences/start_delay</applyto>
- <owner>updatemanager</owner>
- <type>int</type>
- <default>120</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Start delay</short>
- <long>
- The time, in seconds, that the updatemanagernotifier should wait,
- after starting, before checking for updates.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/updatemanager/preferences/refresh_period</key>
- <applyto>/apps/updatemanager/preferences/refresh_period</applyto>
- <owner>updatemanager</owner>
- <type>string</type>
- <default>Daily</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>How often to check for updates</short>
- <long>
- How often to check for updates. The valid values are
- Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Never
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/updatemanager/preferences/show_notify_message</key>
- <applyto>/apps/updatemanager/preferences/show_notify_message</applyto>
- <owner>updatemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>True</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Whether to display text message when updates are available</short>
- <long>
- A text message describing the updates is displayed near the panel's
- Notification Area when updates become available if set to true.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/updatemanager/preferences/show_icon_on_startup</key>
- <applyto>/apps/updatemanager/preferences/show_icon_on_startup</applyto>
- <owner>updatemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>False</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Whether to always display the icon on startup</short>
- <long>
- The notify icon is displayed on startup if set to true.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- <schema>
- <key>/schemas/apps/updatemanager/preferences/terminate_after_icon_activate</key>
- <applyto>/apps/updatemanager/preferences/terminate_after_icon_activate</applyto>
- <owner>updatemanager</owner>
- <type>bool</type>
- <default>False</default>
- <locale name="C">
- <short>Whether to terminate updatemanagernotiifer after icon activation.</short>
- <long>
- The updatemanagernotifier program terminates after the user
- activates the icon in the notification area if set to true.
- </long>
- </locale>
- </schema>
- </schemalist>
-</gconfschemafile>
--- a/src/um/data/updatemanager.desktop.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-[Desktop Entry]
-_Name=Update Manager
-_GenericName=Update Manager
-_Comment=Install available updates
-Exec=/usr/lib/pm-launch /usr/bin/pm-updatemanager
-Icon=updatemanager
-Terminal=false
-MultipleArgs=false
-StartupNotify=true
-Type=Application
-Encoding=UTF-8
-Categories=UpdateManager;Applications;GTK;System;Settings;
-NotShowIn=KDE;
-X-KDE-SubstituteUID=true
--- a/src/um/data/updatemanagernotifier.desktop.in Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-[Desktop Entry]
-_Name=Update Manager Notifier
-_GenericName=Update Manager Notifier
-_Comment=Notify user when updates are available
-Exec=/usr/lib/updatemanagernotifier
-Terminal=false
-MultipleArgs=false
-StartupNotify=true
-Type=Application
-Encoding=UTF-8
-Categories=UpdateManagerNotifier;Applications;GTK;System;Settings;
-NotShowIn=KDE;
-X-KDE-SubstituteUID=true
--- a/src/um/update-refresh.sh Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/ksh
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-#
-# This script is run as part of a cron job.
-# The cron job is managed by svc:/application/pkg/update:default
-#
-# It can be disabled by disabling the pkg/update service:
-# $ /usr/sbin/svcadm disable svc:/application/pkg/update
-# or
-# By removing the pkg/update-manager package:
-# $ pkg uninstall package/pkg/update-manager
-#
-# The script is a wrapper which refreshes the IPS catalog, then
-# calls /usr/lib/pm-checkforupdates to check and cache whether updates
-# are available. The generated cache is checked by
-# /usr/lib/updatemanagernotifier, which in turn notifies the user
-# via a popup and notification panel icon.
-#
-
-fmri=svc:/application/pkg/update
-
-#
-# We want to limit the number of times we hit the servers, but our
-# calculations are all based on the canonical crontab entry. If the
-# user has modified that, then use the times as they specified.
-#
-cronentry=$(crontab -l | grep update-refresh.sh)
-if [[ $cronentry == "30 0,9,12,18,21 * * * "* ]]; then
- # When did we last run, and how many times have we tried since?
- lastrun=$(svcprop -p update/lastrun $fmri 2> /dev/null)
-
- # Easiest way to get seconds since the epoch.
- now=$(LC_ALL=C /usr/bin/date '+%s')
-
- # The canonical crontab entry runs this script five times a day,
- # seven days a week. We want it to complete roughly once a week.
- # But because we're not at 100% after even two weeks, we increase
- # the chance of success every fifth of a day until we're at 100%.
- rolls=$(((now - lastrun) / 17280))
- (( rolls > 34 )) && rolls=34
- chance=$((35 - rolls))
- roll=$((RANDOM % chance))
- (( roll > 0 )) && exit 0
-
- # Otherwise, we will run, so record the current time for later.
- cat <<-EOF | svccfg -s pkg/update
- setprop update/lastrun = integer: $now
- select default
- refresh
- EOF
-fi
-
-# Wait a random part of 30 minutes so servers do not get hit all at once
-let dither=1800*$RANDOM
-let dither=dither/32767
-sleep $dither
-
-image_dir=/
-pkg -R $image_dir refresh -q 2>/dev/null
-
-# Check and cache whether updates are available
-/usr/lib/pm-checkforupdates --nice
-exit 0
--- a/src/updatemanager.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,190 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python2.6
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import getopt
-import gettext
-import locale
-import os
-import sys
-
-try:
- import gobject
- gobject.threads_init()
- import gtk
- import gtk.glade
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require("2.0")
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-
-import pkg.client.api as api
-import pkg.client.progress as progress
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-import pkg.gui.installupdate as installupdate
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.pmgconf as pmgconf
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.nrlock as nrlock
-from pkg.client import global_settings
-
-logger = global_settings.logger
-
-# Put _() in the global namespace
-import __builtin__
-__builtin__._ = gettext.gettext
-
-PKG_CLIENT_NAME = "updatemanager"
-CACHE_VERSION = 3
-CACHE_NAME = ".last_refresh_cache"
-PKG_ICON_LOCATION = "usr/share/package-manager/icons"
-ICON_LOCATION = "usr/share/update-manager/icons"
-
-class Updatemanager:
- def __init__(self, image_directory, application_path):
- global_settings.client_name = gui_misc.get_um_name()
- self.api_lock = nrlock.NRLock()
- self.image_dir_arg = image_directory
- self.exact_match = True
- if self.image_dir_arg == None:
- self.image_dir_arg, self.exact_match = \
- api.get_default_image_root()
- if not self.exact_match:
- if debug:
- print >> sys.stderr, ("Unable to get the image directory")
- sys.exit(enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED)
- self.application_path = application_path
- self.gconf = pmgconf.PMGConf()
- try:
- self.application_dir = os.environ["PACKAGE_MANAGER_ROOT"]
- except KeyError:
- self.application_dir = "/"
- misc.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
- for module in (gettext, gtk.glade):
- module.bindtextdomain("pkg", os.path.join(
- self.application_dir,
- "usr/share/locale"))
- module.textdomain("pkg")
- gui_misc.init_for_help(self.application_dir)
-
- self.icon_theme = gtk.icon_theme_get_default()
- pkg_icon_location = os.path.join(self.application_dir, PKG_ICON_LOCATION)
- self.icon_theme.append_search_path(pkg_icon_location)
- icon_location = os.path.join(self.application_dir, ICON_LOCATION)
- self.icon_theme.append_search_path(icon_location)
- self.progress_tracker = progress.NullProgressTracker()
- self.api_obj = None
- self.installupdate = None
- self.return_status = enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED
- self.pylintstub = None
-
- gui_misc.setup_logging()
- gobject.idle_add(self.__do_image_update)
-
- def __do_image_update(self):
- self.installupdate = installupdate.InstallUpdate([], self,
- self.image_dir_arg, action = enumerations.IMAGE_UPDATE,
- parent_name = _("Update Manager"),
- pkg_list = [gui_misc.package_name["SUNWipkg"],
- gui_misc.package_name["SUNWipkg-gui"],
- gui_misc.package_name["SUNWipkg-um"]],
- main_window = None,
- icon_confirm_dialog = gui_misc.get_icon(self.icon_theme,
- "updatemanager", 36),
- show_confirmation = self.gconf.show_image_update,
- api_lock = self.api_lock, gconf = self.gconf)
-
- def __exit_app(self, restart = False):
- gui_misc.shutdown_logging()
- if restart:
- try:
- if self.image_dir_arg:
- gobject.spawn_async([self.application_path,
- "--image-dir", self.image_dir_arg])
- else:
- gobject.spawn_async([self.application_path])
- except gobject.GError, ex:
- if debug:
- print >> sys.stderr, "Exception occurred: %s" % ex
- logger.error(ex)
- gtk.main_quit()
- sys.exit(0)
- return True
-
- def restart_after_ips_update(self):
- self.__exit_app(restart = True)
-
- def update_package_list(self, update_list):
- self.pylintstub = update_list
- return
-
- def shutdown_after_image_update(self, exit_um = False):
- if exit_um == False:
- self.__exit_app()
-
- def install_terminated(self):
- self.__exit_app()
-
-###############################################################################
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-# Main
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-
-def main():
- gtk.main()
- return 0
-
-if __name__ == '__main__':
- misc.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
- gettext.install("pkg", "/usr/share/locale")
- debug = False
- image_dir = "/"
- try:
- opts, pargs = getopt.getopt(sys.argv[1:], "hdR:",
- ["help", "debug", "image-dir="])
- except getopt.GetoptError, oex:
- print >> sys.stderr, \
- ("Usage: illegal option -- %s, for help use -h or --help" %
- oex.opt )
- sys.exit(enumerations.UPDATES_UNDETERMINED)
- for opt, arg in opts:
- if opt in ("-h", "--help"):
- print >> sys.stderr, """\n\
-Use -h (--help) to print out help.
-Use -d (--debug) to run in debug mode.
-Use -R (--image-dir) to specify image directory (defaults to '/')"""
- sys.exit(0)
- elif opt in ("-d", "--debug"):
- debug = True
- elif opt in ("-R", "--image-dir"):
- image_dir = arg
-
- if os.path.isabs(sys.argv[0]):
- app_path = sys.argv[0]
- else:
- cmd = os.path.join(os.getcwd(), sys.argv[0])
- app_path = os.path.realpath(cmd)
-
- updatemanager = Updatemanager(image_dir, app_path)
-
- main()
--- a/src/updatemanagernotifier.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,491 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/python2.6
-#
-# CDDL HEADER START
-#
-# The contents of this file are subject to the terms of the
-# Common Development and Distribution License (the "License").
-# You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-#
-# You can obtain a copy of the license at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE
-# or http://www.opensolaris.org/os/licensing.
-# See the License for the specific language governing permissions
-# and limitations under the License.
-#
-# When distributing Covered Code, include this CDDL HEADER in each
-# file and include the License file at usr/src/OPENSOLARIS.LICENSE.
-# If applicable, add the following below this CDDL HEADER, with the
-# fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
-# information: Portions Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-#
-# CDDL HEADER END
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2008, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
-#
-
-import os
-import subprocess
-import errno
-import sys
-import time
-import socket
-import locale
-import gettext
-import getopt
-import random
-try:
- import gobject
- gobject.threads_init()
- import gconf
- import gtk
- import pygtk
- pygtk.require("2.0")
-except ImportError:
- sys.exit(1)
-import pkg.client.progress as progress
-import pkg.misc as misc
-import pkg.gui.misc as gui_misc
-import pkg.gui.enumerations as enumerations
-from gettext import ngettext
-try:
- import pynotify
-except ImportError:
- print "%s package must be installed" % (
- gui_misc.package_name["SUNWpython26-notify"])
- sys.exit(1)
-
-# Put _() in the global namespace
-import __builtin__
-__builtin__._ = gettext.gettext
-
-START_DELAY_DEFAULT = 120
-REFRESH_PERIOD_DEFAULT = "Never"
-SHOW_NOTIFY_ICON_DEFAULT = True
-IMAGE_DIRECTORY_DEFAULT = "/"
-LASTCHECK_DIR_NAME = os.path.join(os.path.expanduser("~"),'.updatemanager/notify')
-CHECKFOR_UPDATES = "/usr/lib/pm-checkforupdates"
-UPDATEMANAGER = "pm-updatemanager"
-
-ICON_LOCATION = "/usr/share/update-manager/icons"
-NOTIFY_ICON_NAME = "updatemanager"
-GKSU_PATH = "/usr/bin/gksu"
-
-UPDATEMANAGER_PREFERENCES = "/apps/updatemanager/preferences"
-START_DELAY_PREFERENCES = "/apps/updatemanager/preferences/start_delay"
-REFRESH_PERIOD_PREFERENCES = "/apps/updatemanager/preferences/refresh_period"
-SHOW_NOTIFY_MESSAGE_PREFERENCES = "/apps/updatemanager/preferences/show_notify_message"
-SHOW_ICON_ON_STARTUP_PREFERENCES = "/apps/updatemanager/preferences/show_icon_on_startup"
-TERMINATE_AFTER_ICON_ACTIVATE_PREFERENCES = \
- "/apps/updatemanager/preferences/terminate_after_icon_activate"
-
-DAILY = "Daily"
-WEEKLY = "Weekly"
-MONTHLY = "Monthly"
-NEVER = "Never"
-
-DAILY_SECS = 24*60*60
-WEEKLY_SECS = 7*24*60*60
-# We asssume that a month has 30 days
-MONTHLY_SECS = 30*24*60*60
-NEVER_SECS = 365*24*60*60
-
-class UpdateManagerNotifier:
- def __init__(self):
- os.nice(20)
- try:
- self.application_dir = os.environ["UPDATE_MANAGER_NOTIFIER_ROOT"]
- except KeyError:
- self.application_dir = "/"
- misc.setlocale(locale.LC_ALL, "")
- gettext.bindtextdomain("pkg", os.path.join(
- self.application_dir,
- "usr/share/locale"))
- gettext.textdomain("pkg")
- self.pr = None
- self.last_check_filename = None
- self.time_until_next_check = 0
- self.status_icon = None
- self.n_updates = 0
- self.n_installs = 0
- self.n_removes = 0
- self.notify = None
- self.host = None
- self.last_check_time = 0
- self.refresh_period = 0
- self.timeout_id = 0
- self.terminate_after_activate = False
-
- self.client = gconf.client_get_default()
- self.start_delay = self.get_start_delay()
- # Allow gtk.main loop to start as quickly as possible
- gobject.timeout_add(self.start_delay * 1000, self.check_and_start)
-
- def check_and_start(self):
- self.check_already_running()
- self.client.add_dir(UPDATEMANAGER_PREFERENCES,
- gconf.CLIENT_PRELOAD_NONE)
- self.client.notify_add(REFRESH_PERIOD_PREFERENCES,
- self.refresh_period_changed)
- self.client.notify_add(SHOW_ICON_ON_STARTUP_PREFERENCES,
- self.show_icon_changed)
- self.refresh_period = self.get_refresh_period()
- self.host = socket.gethostname()
-
- self.last_check_time = self.get_last_check_time()
- self.pr = progress.NullProgressTracker()
- if self.get_show_icon_on_startup():
- self.client.set_bool(SHOW_ICON_ON_STARTUP_PREFERENCES, False)
- self.schedule_check_for_updates()
- else:
- gobject.idle_add(self.do_next_check)
- return False
-
- def refresh_period_changed(self, client, connection_id, entry, arguments):
- old_delta = self.get_delta_for_refresh_period()
- if entry.get_value().type == gconf.VALUE_STRING:
- self.refresh_period = entry.get_value().get_string()
- new_delta = self.get_delta_for_refresh_period()
- if debug == True:
- print "old_delta %d" % old_delta
- print "new_delta %d" % new_delta
- if old_delta > new_delta:
- if self.timeout_id > 0:
- gobject.source_remove(self.timeout_id)
- self.timeout_id = 0
- self.do_next_check()
-
- def show_icon_changed(self, client, connection_id, entry, arguments):
- if entry.get_value().type == gconf.VALUE_BOOL:
- show_icon = entry.get_value().get_bool()
- if self.status_icon != None:
- self.status_icon.set_visible(show_icon)
-
- def get_start_delay(self):
- start_delay = self.client.get_int(START_DELAY_PREFERENCES)
- if start_delay == 0:
- start_delay = START_DELAY_DEFAULT
- if debug == True:
- start_delay = 1
- print "start_delay: %d" % start_delay
- return start_delay
-
- def get_refresh_period(self):
- refresh_period = self.client.get_string(REFRESH_PERIOD_PREFERENCES)
- if refresh_period == None:
- refresh_period = REFRESH_PERIOD_DEFAULT
- if debug == True:
- print "refresh_period: %s" % refresh_period
- return refresh_period
-
- def get_show_notify_message(self):
- show_notify_message = \
- self.client.get_bool(SHOW_NOTIFY_MESSAGE_PREFERENCES)
- if debug == True:
- print "show_notify_message: %d" % show_notify_message
- return show_notify_message
-
- def get_show_icon_on_startup(self):
- show_icon_on_startup = \
- self.client.get_bool(SHOW_ICON_ON_STARTUP_PREFERENCES)
- if debug == True:
- print "show_icon_on_startup: %d" % show_icon_on_startup
- return show_icon_on_startup
-
- def get_terminate_after_activate(self):
- terminate_after_activate = \
- self.client.get_bool(TERMINATE_AFTER_ICON_ACTIVATE_PREFERENCES)
- if debug == True:
- print "terminate_after_activate: %d" % terminate_after_activate
- return terminate_after_activate
-
- def get_last_check_time(self):
- if (self.last_check_filename == None):
- self.last_check_filename = \
- os.path.join(LASTCHECK_DIR_NAME,
- self.host + '-lastcheck')
- try:
- f = open(self.last_check_filename, "r")
-
- try:
- return float(f.read(64))
- finally:
- f.close()
-
- except IOError, strerror:
- if debug == True:
- print "Unable to get last check time error %s" % strerror
-
- return 0
-
- def set_last_check_time(self):
- try:
- os.makedirs(LASTCHECK_DIR_NAME)
- except os.error, eargs:
- if eargs[0] != errno.EEXIST: # File exists
- raise os.error, args
-
- try:
- f = open(self.last_check_filename, "w")
-
- try:
- f.write(str(self.last_check_time))
- finally:
- f.close()
-
- except IOError, strerror:
- print "I/O error: %s opening %s" \
- % (strerror, self.last_check_filename)
-
- def get_delta_for_refresh_period(self):
- if self.refresh_period == DAILY:
- delta = DAILY_SECS
- elif self.refresh_period == WEEKLY:
- delta = WEEKLY_SECS
- elif self.refresh_period == MONTHLY:
- delta = MONTHLY_SECS
- else:
- delta = NEVER_SECS
- return delta
-
- def is_check_required(self):
- delta = self.get_delta_for_refresh_period()
- if delta == NEVER_SECS:
- self.time_until_next_check = NEVER_SECS
- return False
- if self.last_check_time == 0:
- return True
- current_time = time.time()
- if debug == True:
- print "current time %f " % current_time
- print "last check time %f " % self.last_check_time
- self.time_until_next_check = self.last_check_time + delta - current_time
- if debug == True:
- print "time until next check %f " % self.time_until_next_check
- if self.time_until_next_check <= 0:
- return True
- else:
- return False
-
- def show_status_icon(self, value):
- if self.status_icon == None:
- self.status_icon = self.create_status_icon()
- self.client.set_bool(SHOW_ICON_ON_STARTUP_PREFERENCES, value)
- self.status_icon.set_visible(value)
- if not value:
- return
-
- toolfmt = _("<b>Updates are available: </b>\n"
- "%(updates)s %(installs)s %(removes)s")
- tooltip = self.__set_updates_str(toolfmt)
- self.status_icon.set_tooltip_markup(tooltip)
-
- def __set_updates_str(self, str_fmt):
- if self.n_updates == 0:
- updates_str = ""
- else:
- updates_fmt = ngettext("%d Update,", "%d Updates,",
- self.n_updates)
- updates_str = updates_fmt % self.n_updates
- if self.n_installs == 0:
- installs_str = ""
- else:
- installs_fmt = ngettext("%d Install,", "%d Installs,",
- self.n_installs)
- installs_str = installs_fmt % self.n_installs
- if self.n_removes == 0:
- removes_str = ""
- else:
- removes_fmt = ngettext("%d Remove", "%d Removes",
- self.n_removes)
- removes_str = removes_fmt % self.n_removes
- updates_str = str_fmt % \
- {"updates": updates_str,
- "installs": installs_str,
- "removes": removes_str}
- updates_str = updates_str.rstrip(', ')
- return updates_str
-
- def schedule_check_for_updates(self):
- self.last_check_time = time.time()
- # Add random delay so that servers will not be hit
- # all at once
- if debug:
- random_delay = 0
- else:
- random_delay = random.randint(0, 1800)
- gobject.timeout_add(random_delay * 1000, self.check_for_updates)
-
- def check_for_updates(self):
- proc = subprocess.Popen([CHECKFOR_UPDATES,
- '--nice', '--checkupdates-cache',
- '--image-dir', IMAGE_DIRECTORY_DEFAULT],
- stdout=subprocess.PIPE)
-
- output = proc.communicate()[0].strip()
- lines = output.splitlines()
- n_updates = 0
- n_installs = 0
- n_removes = 0
- for line in lines:
- if line.startswith("n_updates"):
- updates = line.split(":", 1)
- n_updates = int(updates[1])
- if line.startswith("n_installs"):
- installs = line.split(":", 1)
- n_installs = int(installs[1])
- if line.startswith("n_removes"):
- removes = line.split(":", 1)
- n_removes = int(removes[1])
- return_code = proc.wait()
- if debug:
- print "return from subprocess is %d" % return_code
- self.set_last_check_time()
- if return_code == enumerations.UPDATES_AVAILABLE:
- self.n_updates = n_updates
- self.n_installs = n_installs
- self.n_removes = n_removes
- self.show_status_icon(True)
- else:
- self.show_status_icon(False)
- self.schedule_next_check_for_checks()
- return False
-
- def create_status_icon(self):
- icon_theme = gtk.IconTheme()
- icon_theme.append_search_path(ICON_LOCATION)
- icon = gui_misc.get_icon(icon_theme, NOTIFY_ICON_NAME, 24)
- status_icon = gtk.status_icon_new_from_pixbuf(icon)
- status_icon.set_visible(False)
- status_icon.connect('activate', self.activate_status_icon)
- status_icon.connect('notify', self.notify_status_icon)
- return status_icon
-
- def notify_status_icon(self, status_icon, paramspec):
- if paramspec.name == "embedded" and self.status_icon.is_embedded():
- if self.get_show_notify_message():
- gobject.idle_add(self.show_notify_message)
-
- def activate_status_icon(self, status_icon):
- self.show_status_icon(False)
- gobject.spawn_async([GKSU_PATH, UPDATEMANAGER])
- if self.get_terminate_after_activate():
- gtk.main_quit()
- sys.exit(0)
- else:
- self.schedule_next_check_for_checks()
-
- def show_notify_message(self):
- if self.notify == None:
- if pynotify.init("UpdateManager"):
- notify_fmt = _("Updates available\n"
- "%(updates)s %(installs)s %(removes)s")
- notify_str = self.__set_updates_str(notify_fmt)
- notify_str += _("\nPlease click on icon to update.")
- self.notify = pynotify.Notification(\
- _("Update Manager"), notify_str)
-
- if self.notify != None:
- self.set_notify_position()
- self.notify.show()
-
- def set_notify_position(self):
- geometry = self.status_icon.get_geometry()
- rectangle = geometry[1]
- orientation = geometry[2]
- x = rectangle.x
- y = rectangle.y
-
- if orientation == gtk.ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and y > 200:
- x += 10
- y += 5
- elif orientation == gtk.ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and y <=200:
- x += 10
- y += 25
- elif orientation == gtk.ORIENTATION_VERTICAL and x >200:
- x -= 5
- y += 10
- else:
- x += 25
- y += 10
- self.notify.set_hint_int32("x", x)
- self.notify.set_hint_int32("y", y)
-
- def schedule_next_check_for_checks(self):
- """This schedules the next time to wake up to check if it's
- necessary to check for updates yet."""
- if self.time_until_next_check <= 0:
- next_check_time = self.get_delta_for_refresh_period()
- else:
- next_check_time = self.time_until_next_check
- if debug == True:
- print "scheduling next check: %s" % next_check_time
- self.timeout_id = gobject.timeout_add(int(next_check_time * 1000),
- self.do_next_check)
-
- def do_next_check(self):
- self.timeout_id = 0
- if debug == True:
- print "Called do_next_check"
- print "time for check: %f - %f \n" % (time.time(), \
- self.last_check_time)
- if self.is_check_required():
- self.schedule_check_for_updates()
- else:
- self.schedule_next_check_for_checks()
- return False
-
- @staticmethod
- def check_already_running():
- atom = gtk.gdk.atom_intern("UPDATEMANAGERNOTIFIER",
- only_if_exists = False)
- pid = os.getpid()
- atom_args = [pid, ]
- fail = True
-
- is_running = gtk.gdk.get_default_root_window().property_get(atom)
- if is_running != None:
- old_pid = is_running[2][0]
- try:
- os.kill(old_pid, 0)
- except os.error, eargs:
- if eargs[0] != errno.ESRCH: # No such process
- raise os.error, args
- # Old process no longer exists
- fail = False
- else:
- # Atom does not exist
- fail = False
-
- if fail == True:
- print _("Another instance of UpdateManagerNotify is running")
- sys.exit(1)
-
- gtk.gdk.get_default_root_window().property_change(atom,
- "INTEGER", 16, gtk.gdk.PROP_MODE_REPLACE, atom_args)
-
-###############################################################################
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-# Main
-#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------#
-
-def main():
- gtk.main()
- return 0
-
-if __name__ == '__main__':
- debug = False
- try:
- opts, args = getopt.getopt(sys.argv[1:], "hd", ["help", "debug"])
- except getopt.error, msg:
- print "%s, for help use --help" % msg
- sys.exit(2)
-
- for option, argument in opts:
- if option in ("-h", "--help"):
- print "Use -d (--debug) to run in debug mode."
- sys.exit(0)
- if option in ("-d", "--debug"):
- debug = True
-
- updatemanager_notifier = UpdateManagerNotifier()
-
- main()
--- a/src/util/log-scripts/an_catalog.py Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ b/src/util/log-scripts/an_catalog.py Wed Dec 04 22:32:35 2013 -0800
@@ -20,16 +20,16 @@
# CDDL HEADER END
#
-# Copyright 2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
-# Use is subject to license terms.
+#
+# Copyright (c) 2008, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
+#
"""\
an_catalog.py - analyze pre-processed Apache combined log of catalog entries
The catalog operation presents interactions similar to the web-ping interaction.
The only distinct aspect is that, since the agent for a catalog operation is
-usually pkg(1) or packagemanager(1), we can assess the distribution across
-versions of these clients.
+usually pkg(1), we can assess the distribution across versions of these clients.
Our list of measurements is:
--- a/src/util/misc/exec_attr.d/package:pkg:package-manager Fri Sep 27 11:21:00 2013 -0700
+++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-Software Installation:solaris:cmd:::/usr/lib/pm-launch:uid=0
-Software Installation:solaris:cmd:::/usr/bin/packagemanager:uid=0
